diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source')
128 files changed, 25016 insertions, 25325 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/ChangeLog b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/ChangeLog index ed801d969d8..6848fa6e738 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/ChangeLog +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/ChangeLog @@ -1,3 +1,837 @@ +r2571 2017-01-03 14:04:47 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-footnotes.dtx: new footnote text output mechanism + +r2570 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 kohm: + + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/expertpart.tex, + doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrhack.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/authorpart.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/preface.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: changed copyright and translation date + +r2569 2017-01-02 13:27:16 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/typearea-experts.tex: docu of options usegeometry and + areasetadvanced + +r2568 2016-12-31 13:08:29 +0100 kohm: + + * TODO, doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/common-lists.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: labels for and links to font elements + +r2567 2016-12-28 18:23:17 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: command renamed + +r2566 2016-12-28 18:22:56 +0100 kohm: + + * TODO, doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: Links für Font-Elemente + +r2565 2016-12-21 18:25:47 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-sections.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: chapter style commands + respect positive beforeskip values (indent of following paragraph) + +r2564 2016-12-21 11:43:41 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: fix: font changing of toname or toaddress + has to be restricted to + toname or toaddress + +r2563 2016-12-15 16:06:06 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx: missing * in \cc added to print ccseparator + only if name is not empty + +r2562 2016-12-07 10:15:31 +0100 kohm: + + * scrlayer.dtx: prepared for classes without \section or \subsection + +r2561 2016-12-05 19:06:33 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: option index improved + +r2560 2016-12-05 18:40:41 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-sections.dtx: new warning if + \begin{appendix}...\end{appendix} is used instead of + + \appendix + +r2559 2016-12-02 09:03:11 +0100 kohm: + + * scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx: missing \relax added to fix dynnumwidth + feature + +r2558 2016-12-01 12:28:35 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: some links + in and into chapter 22 + +r2557 2016-12-01 11:51:19 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some links in and into + chapter 21 + +r2556 2016-12-01 11:16:05 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: some links in and + into chapter 20 + +r2555 2016-12-01 11:01:34 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex: serveral links in + and into chapter 19 + +r2554 2016-12-01 10:49:52 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex: serveral links in and into chapter 17 + +r2553 2016-11-30 10:47:15 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: serveral links (not + only) in and into chapter 15 + +r2552 2016-11-28 10:48:11 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex: serveral links in + and into chapter 14 + +r2551 2016-11-28 09:26:33 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex: serveral links in chapter 13 + +r2550 2016-11-28 09:10:02 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: serveral links in and + into chapter 12 + +r2549 2016-11-28 08:17:57 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrjura.tex: serveral links in chapter 11 + +r2548 2016-11-27 12:48:39 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrextend.tex: serveral links (not only) into chapter 10 + +r2547 2016-11-27 12:38:29 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: serveral links (not + only) into chapter 5 + +r2546 2016-11-26 13:05:11 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: serveral links (not only) into chapter 4 + +r2545 2016-11-24 14:20:27 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex: serveral links (not only) into chapter 3 + +r2544 2016-11-23 18:33:55 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex: serveral links (not only) into chapter 3 + +r2543 2016-11-23 15:20:44 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/scrjura.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: serveral links (not + only) into chapter 3 + +r2542 2016-11-21 18:32:36 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbase.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/common-options.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/tocbasic.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: serveral links + +r2541 2016-11-21 12:05:13 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex: + \autopageref{desc:…} replaced by \DescPageRef{…} + +r2540 2016-11-21 11:55:10 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/finddesc.sh: links + into typearea chapter + +r2539 2016-11-20 17:53:02 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex: old \IfCommon... commands + eliminated + +r2538 2016-11-20 17:40:30 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/Makefile.guide, + doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: common-21.tex replaced + by common-pagestylemanipulation.tex without ommitting if already + printed in another chapter + +r2537 2016-11-20 12:47:03 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex: + common-21.tex replaced by common-headfootheight.tex without + ommitting if already printed in another chapter + +r2536 2016-11-20 12:13:59 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex: common-15.tex replaced by common-dictum.tex + without ommitting if already printed in another chapter + +r2535 2016-11-18 18:10:13 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: fixed title pages example reference + text + +r2534 2016-11-18 17:49:54 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: common-14.tex replaced by + common-titles.tex without ommitting if already printed in another + chapter + +r2533 2016-11-18 15:43:43 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: initial + reference fixed + +r2532 2016-11-18 15:26:15 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex: + common-13.tex replaced by common-marginpar.tex without ommitting if + already printed in another chapter + +r2531 2016-11-18 15:19:10 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex: double ref fixed + +r2530 2016-11-18 14:23:30 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/Makefile.guide, + doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex: common-12.tex replaced by + common-lists.tex without ommitting if already printed in another + chapter + +r2529 2016-11-18 14:17:38 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex: group + levels fixed + +r2528 2016-11-18 14:08:43 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex: label + references fixed + +r2527 2016-11-18 11:49:29 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex: typofix + +r2526 2016-11-18 11:48:27 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, + doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/common-options.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: common-9.tex replaced by common-footnotes.tex + without ommitting if already printed in another chapter + listings + improvement + +r2525 2016-11-17 20:14:11 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/english/, doc/english/scrextend.tex: + improved colours + +r2524 2016-11-17 18:53:21 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex: common-8.tex replaced by + common-interleafpage.tex without ommitting if already printed in + another chapter + +r2523 2016-11-17 17:25:53 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex: common-7.tex replaced by + common-oddorevenpage.tex without ommitting if already printed in + another chapter + +r2522 2016-11-17 16:49:53 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: common-6.tex replaced by + common-parmarkup.tex without ommitting if already printed in another + chapter + +r2521 2016-11-17 15:55:53 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex: typo fix: length + +r2520 2016-11-17 15:50:46 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, + doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: common-5.tex replaced by + common-textmarkup.tex without ommitting if already printed in + another chapter + +r2519 2016-11-16 18:51:28 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex: + common-4.tex replaced by common-fontsize.tex without ommitting if + already printed in another chapter + +r2518 2016-11-16 18:48:48 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt: common-4.tex replaced by common-fontsize.tex without + ommitting if already printed in another chapter + +r2517 2016-11-16 18:03:15 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt: common-3.tex replaced by common-typearea.tex without + ommitting if already printed in another chapter + +r2516 2016-11-16 18:00:45 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls: index stack errors are not longer warnings + +r2515 2016-11-16 17:54:48 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex: common-3.tex replaced by + common-typearea.tex without ommitting if already printed in another + chapter + +r2514 2016-11-16 17:48:43 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/common-options.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: + common-2.tex replaced by common-draftmode.tex without ommitting if + already printed in another chapter + +r2513 2016-11-16 17:47:54 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: index groups + fixed + +r2512 2016-11-15 18:43:41 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex: common-compatibility.tex + replaces common-1.tex without ommitting already shown information + +r2511 2016-11-15 17:22:04 +0100 kohm: + + * manifest.txt: common-0.tex replaced by common-options.tex + +r2510 2016-11-15 17:20:01 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/common-options.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex: early or late + options not omitted if already used + +r2509 2016-11-15 11:29:58 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/scrpage2.tex, doc/bin/, + doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: improved anchor generation and html index + +r2508 2016-11-14 21:06:12 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/scrjura.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/preface.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: several changes in scrguide.cls to improve + Declaration and label and index generation + +r2507 2016-11-04 09:03:12 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/: deprecated source of old German manual removed + +r2506 2016-11-02 12:23:58 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls: fix: index label generation delayed to get + correct page reference + +r2505 2016-11-02 12:09:24 +0100 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/tocbasic.tex, + doc/english/scrwfile.tex: fix: errornous usage of \AfterStartingTOC + replaced by \BeforeStartingTOC + +r2504 2016-10-27 18:27:25 +0200 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex: typofix [Jan] + +r2503 2016-10-21 10:54:46 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx: Summary: addmargin preserved \topsep + and \partopsep + +r2502 2016-10-03 13:50:19 +0200 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: docu fix of + toc=indexnumbered + +r2501 2016-09-28 07:55:32 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-fonts.dtx: Summary: deprecated font command message fixed + +r2500 2016-09-24 18:59:36 +0200 kohm: + + * scrlayer.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer.tex: fixed: foreground and + unrestricted and name of backandforeground + +r2499 2016-09-06 09:00:45 +0200 kohm: + + * tocbasic.dtx: Summary: missing \removefromtoclist added + +r2498 2016-09-01 21:44:10 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-floats.dtx: Summary: missing # added + +r2497 2016-09-01 21:21:37 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-floats.dtx: Summary: workaround for \newline (and + \protect\\) in caption text + +r2496 2016-09-01 13:51:09 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-floats.dtx: Summary: isodate in \caption workaround + +r2495 2016-08-09 18:02:12 +0200 kohm: + + * tocbasic.dtx: Summary: saves the type of an extension; new + \owneroftoc + +r2494 2016-08-04 09:23:47 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-typearea.dtx: Summary: preview detection info message + added + +r2493 2016-08-04 09:12:36 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-typearea.dtx: Summary: preview workaround added + +r2492 2016-08-02 10:21:34 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx: Summary: page break test at + addmargin* only if twoside is active + +r2491 2016-07-29 10:03:57 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-version.dtx, scrkernel-compatibility.dtx, + scrkernel-typearea.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/typearea.tex: change: from v3.22 the width + and the height value of option paper depend on the paper orientation + +r2490 2016-07-29 08:29:45 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-basics.dtx: Summary: added some \detokenize to obsolete + option warning message + +r2489 2016-07-29 08:20:45 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-typearea.dtx: Summary: missing obsolete option warning + added + +r2488 2016-07-12 09:56:12 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-sections.dtx: Summary: checksum + +r2487 2016-07-12 09:52:51 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-sections.dtx: Summary: experimental compatibility with + titleref and zref-titleref + +r2486 2016-07-12 08:43:01 +0200 kohm: + + * TODO: Summary: new nice to have + +r2485 2016-07-12 08:41:36 +0200 kohm: + + * scrkernel-sections.dtx: Summary: experimental sectioning commands + option `reference' + +r2484 2016-07-06 09:54:30 +0200 kohm: + + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Grammarfix + +r2483 2016-06-28 09:36:58 +0200 kohm: + + * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx: Summary: fix grouping of luatex tests + +r2482 2016-06-21 08:20:17 +0200 kohm: + + * INSTALLD.txt, INSTALL.txt: added installation info about hak files + +r2481 2016-06-17 09:37:56 +0200 kohm: + + * releaselist.txt: Summary: Release 3.21 + r2480 2016-06-14 09:45:01 +0200 kohm: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, @@ -187,8 +1021,7 @@ r2442 2016-05-04 10:19:38 +0200 kohm: r2441 2016-04-30 08:43:16 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-0.tex: support for more - packages + * doc/, doc/english/: support for more packages r2440 2016-04-29 17:59:32 +0200 kohm: @@ -197,8 +1030,8 @@ r2440 2016-04-29 17:59:32 +0200 kohm: r2439 2016-04-29 07:56:21 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-4.tex: Summary: fehlendes - »Klasse« ergänzt + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex: Summary: + fehlendes »Klasse« ergänzt r2438 2016-04-27 12:58:21 +0200 kohm: @@ -652,7 +1485,7 @@ r2341 2016-02-17 12:13:17 +0100 kohm: r2340 2016-02-17 10:29:18 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/.ignore: svn ignore list changed + * doc/: svn ignore list changed r2339 2016-02-17 10:27:13 +0100 kohm: @@ -1329,8 +2162,8 @@ r2190 2015-08-29 19:21:55 +0200 kohm: r2189 2015-08-29 12:11:08 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: fix: Doppelter - Schlusspunkt + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + fix: Doppelter Schlusspunkt r2188 2015-08-28 16:54:24 +0200 kohm: @@ -1379,11 +2212,12 @@ r2181 2015-08-24 11:30:25 +0200 kohm: r2180 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 kohm: * scrkernel-footnotes.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex: fix: scrextend - does not use footnote rule settings, so it should not provide - setting them fix: scrextend uses \providecommand instead of - \newcommand to define \multiplefootnotemark + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex: fix: scrextend does not use footnote rule + settings, so it should not provide setting them fix: scrextend uses + \providecommand instead of \newcommand to define + \multiplefootnotemark r2179 2015-08-22 08:36:48 +0200 kohm: @@ -1451,9 +2285,9 @@ r2168 2015-07-26 11:32:03 +0200 kohm: r2167 2015-07-26 11:18:40 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-8.tex: doc-fix: \cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle and - \cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex: doc-fix: + \cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle and \cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle r2166 2015-07-26 10:15:44 +0200 kohm: @@ -1561,9 +2395,10 @@ r2146 2015-06-20 08:38:46 +0200 kohm: r2145 2015-06-18 09:58:50 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-21.tex: added: notes about need of cooperation of - the classes for e.g. running heads at part level + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: added: + notes about need of cooperation of the classes for e.g. running + heads at part level r2144 2015-06-17 17:38:01 +0200 kohm: @@ -1778,8 +2613,8 @@ r2105 2015-05-19 09:35:29 +0200 kohm: r2104 2015-05-18 09:40:29 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-21.tex: fix: index + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: fix: index r2103 2015-05-18 08:58:57 +0200 kohm: @@ -1947,9 +2782,9 @@ r2067 2015-04-04 11:34:54 +0200 kohm: r2066 2015-04-04 11:18:50 +0200 kohm: - * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-5.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: new: docu of \addtokomafontrelaxlist @@ -1978,52 +2813,56 @@ r2061 2015-04-02 09:27:25 +0200 kohm: r2060 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 kohm: - * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, - doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-13.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-5.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, doc/english/common-14.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbase.tex, + doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-4.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-2.tex, - doc/english/common-12.tex, doc/english/common-9.tex, - doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-1.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/common-dictum.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrhack.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex, doc/english/common-20.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scrwfile.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: usage of new \seclabel and \exlabel r2059 2015-03-31 10:01:37 +0200 kohm: - * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-4.tex: documentation of fontsize issue + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex: documentation of + fontsize issue r2058 2015-03-31 09:04:03 +0200 kohm: @@ -2494,11 +3333,13 @@ r1968 2015-03-02 12:54:05 +0100 kohm: r1967 2015-03-02 10:47:44 +0100 kohm: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: several fixes of language - [Elke+Arndt], labels [myself] and one double defined table [myself] + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: several fixes of + language [Elke+Arndt], labels [myself] and one double defined table + [myself] r1966 2015-03-01 11:00:49 +0100 kohm: @@ -2568,7 +3409,7 @@ r1955 2015-02-23 17:55:49 +0100 kohm: * scrkernel-compatibility.dtx, TODO, scrkernel-sections.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, doc/english/, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: change: use \sectionformat … \subparagraphformat instead of \othersectionlevelsformat if version >= 3.17 @@ -2600,10 +3441,11 @@ r1950 2015-02-22 10:31:36 +0100 kohm: r1949 2015-02-21 09:30:38 +0100 kohm: * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-5.tex: change: resolved - element conflict of scrletter and KOMA-Script classes within - elements subject and title + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex: change: resolved element conflict + of scrletter and KOMA-Script classes within elements subject and + title r1948 2015-02-20 11:06:26 +0100 kohm: @@ -2752,21 +3594,23 @@ r1919 2015-02-02 11:25:23 +0100 kohm: r1918 2015-01-28 11:03:48 +0100 kohm: - * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-21.tex: some - translations and equilisations of the English guide + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: some translations and + equilisations of the English guide r1917 2015-01-28 08:32:30 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: fix: Fehler in den - neuen Erklärungen beseitigt [Elke] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + fix: Fehler in den neuen Erklärungen beseitigt [Elke] r1916 2015-01-27 10:06:12 +0100 kohm: - * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex: deutsche Erklärung einiger Neuheiten ab - Version 3.16 + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: deutsche Erklärung + einiger Neuheiten ab Version 3.16 r1915 2015-01-27 08:45:41 +0100 kohm: @@ -2984,10 +3828,11 @@ r1873 2014-12-11 10:16:02 +0100 kohm: r1872 2014-12-10 13:51:37 +0100 kohm: * scrkernel-listsof.dtx, scrkernel-sections.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: improved: handling - of part- and chaper-entries to table of contents if it is the first - entry added: option chapterentrywithdots or sectionentrywithdots + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: improved: handling of part- and + chaper-entries to table of contents if it is the first entry added: + option chapterentrywithdots or sectionentrywithdots r1871 2014-12-10 10:06:20 +0100 kohm: @@ -3421,7 +4266,7 @@ r1786 2014-09-11 08:43:46 +0200 kohm: r1785 2014-09-10 08:24:01 +0200 kohm: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex: Tippfehler [Moritz F.] + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex: Tippfehler [Moritz F.] r1784 2014-08-31 11:40:21 +0200 kohm: @@ -3525,14 +4370,14 @@ r1766 2014-06-25 16:38:45 +0200 kohm: * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrpage2.tex, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, + doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/english/common-8.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex: scrpage2 removed - from KOMA-Script manual + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/typearea.tex: scrpage2 removed from KOMA-Script manual r1765 2014-06-25 10:58:15 +0200 kohm: @@ -3643,7 +4488,8 @@ r1744 2014-03-18 16:05:05 +0100 kohm: r1743 2014-03-18 09:32:24 +0100 kohm: * doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, doc/english/, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/typearea.tex: fix: labels r1742 2014-03-17 10:06:24 +0100 kohm: @@ -3747,19 +4593,19 @@ r1724 2014-03-07 09:37:00 +0100 kohm: r1723 2014-03-07 09:34:35 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex: fix: problem with generated date r1722 2014-03-07 09:33:18 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex: fix: problem with generated date + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex: fix: problem with generated date r1721 2014-03-07 09:22:37 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex: fix: no more - multiply defined labels + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex: fix: + no more multiply defined labels r1720 2014-03-05 09:03:10 +0100 kohm: @@ -3906,8 +4752,8 @@ r1689 2014-02-13 08:29:19 +0100 kohm: r1688 2014-02-13 08:28:20 +0100 kohm: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex: Index-Eintrag für - Kopf- und Fuß-Höhe + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex: + Index-Eintrag für Kopf- und Fuß-Höhe r1687 2014-02-12 15:28:07 +0100 kohm: @@ -3985,8 +4831,8 @@ r1673 2014-01-31 13:17:07 +0100 mjk: r1672 2014-01-30 15:13:25 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex: Korrekturen von Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: Korrekturen von Elke r1671 2014-01-30 14:38:17 +0100 mjk: @@ -4066,15 +4912,15 @@ r1655 2014-01-28 08:46:12 +0100 mjk: r1654 2014-01-24 19:11:48 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex: Umbruch wieder korrigiert + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: Umbruch wieder korrigiert r1653 2014-01-24 18:39:13 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex: Korrekturen von - Torsten und Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: + Korrekturen von Torsten und Elke r1652 2014-01-24 14:08:15 +0100 mjk: @@ -4152,7 +4998,7 @@ r1638 2014-01-23 09:17:26 +0100 mjk: r1637 2014-01-22 16:16:02 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: Korrekturen von Elke + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: Korrekturen von Elke r1636 2014-01-22 09:26:50 +0100 mjk: @@ -4167,7 +5013,7 @@ r1635 2014-01-22 09:10:16 +0100 mjk: r1634 2014-01-21 10:30:39 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex: + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex: Korrekturen und Vorschläge von Elke r1633 2014-01-21 09:03:32 +0100 mjk: @@ -4185,14 +5031,14 @@ r1632 2014-01-20 17:18:42 +0100 mjk: r1631 2014-01-20 10:27:14 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex: diverse - Korrekturen von Elke + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex: + diverse Korrekturen von Elke r1630 2014-01-20 09:45:29 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex: Einige Verbesserungsvorschläge von + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex: Einige Verbesserungsvorschläge von Elke und ein paar Umbruchänderungen r1629 2014-01-17 11:58:39 +0100 mjk: @@ -4224,7 +5070,7 @@ r1625 2014-01-16 10:00:54 +0100 mjk: r1624 2014-01-15 10:31:27 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex: noch ein paar Tippfehler + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex: noch ein paar Tippfehler r1623 2014-01-15 09:03:50 +0100 mjk: @@ -4251,30 +5097,33 @@ r1619 2014-01-14 18:40:42 +0100 mjk: r1618 2014-01-14 18:37:24 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-9.tex: noch eine Korrektur - von Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex: noch eine + Korrektur von Elke r1617 2014-01-14 18:14:29 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex: noch ein paar - Verbesserungen von Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex: noch ein paar Verbesserungen von + Elke r1616 2014-01-14 17:52:03 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex: several + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex: several improvements of the manuals r1615 2014-01-14 17:35:21 +0100 mjk: @@ -4309,9 +5158,8 @@ r1610 2014-01-10 15:51:11 +0100 mjk: r1609 2014-01-10 15:03:54 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: diverse Korrekturen und Verbesserungen @@ -4328,8 +5176,9 @@ r1607 2014-01-09 15:42:40 +0100 mjk: r1606 2014-01-09 11:50:16 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: - diverse Korrekturen und Optimierungen für die nächste Auflage + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: diverse Korrekturen und + Optimierungen für die nächste Auflage r1605 2014-01-09 09:55:07 +0100 mjk: @@ -4372,9 +5221,9 @@ r1598 2014-01-03 21:21:57 +0100 mjk: r1597 2014-01-03 13:57:42 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex: diverse - Optimierungen + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: diverse Optimierungen r1596 2014-01-02 20:00:08 +0100 mjk: @@ -4384,14 +5233,14 @@ r1596 2014-01-02 20:00:08 +0100 mjk: r1595 2014-01-02 11:36:25 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex: wieder einige - Korrekturen und Anregunden von Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex: wieder + einige Korrekturen und Anregunden von Elke r1594 2014-01-01 15:56:30 +0100 mjk: * TODO, doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex: einige Erklärungen ergänzt und den Umbruch für die nächste Buchauflage optimiert @@ -4486,15 +5335,16 @@ r1575 2013-12-20 11:39:20 +0100 mjk: r1574 2013-12-20 11:08:54 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex: Umbruch scrextend + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: Umbruch scrextend r1573 2013-12-20 10:59:10 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex: Umbruch scrextend + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: Umbruch scrextend r1572 2013-12-20 10:45:17 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex: markup für \color + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex: markup für + \color r1571 2013-12-20 09:51:13 +0100 mjk: @@ -4507,7 +5357,8 @@ r1570 2013-12-20 09:48:29 +0100 mjk: r1569 2013-12-20 09:26:13 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: Umbruch korrigiert + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + Umbruch korrigiert r1568 2013-12-19 11:28:13 +0100 mjk: @@ -4548,13 +5399,15 @@ r1560 2013-12-19 08:13:30 +0100 mjk: r1559 2013-12-18 07:42:31 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: einige Korrekturen von Elke + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: einige Korrekturen von + Elke r1558 2013-12-17 14:46:13 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: einige - Verbesserungen für die nächste Buchauflage + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: einige Verbesserungen + für die nächste Buchauflage r1557 2013-12-17 12:05:35 +0100 mjk: @@ -4572,9 +5425,9 @@ r1555 2013-12-17 09:01:58 +0100 mjk: r1554 2013-12-17 08:45:48 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex: einige Formulierungen - verbessert und Teile der Einleitung als ergänzende Informationen - formatiert + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex: einige + Formulierungen verbessert und Teile der Einleitung als ergänzende + Informationen formatiert r1553 2013-12-16 18:08:48 +0100 mjk: @@ -4628,24 +5481,25 @@ r1544 2013-12-13 12:13:03 +0100 mjk: r1543 2013-12-13 12:11:01 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-13.tex, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbase.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/expertpart.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-4.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-2.tex, - doc/english/common-12.tex, doc/english/common-9.tex, - doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-1.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/scrhack.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/common-dictum.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/scrextend.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/scrhack.tex, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex, doc/english/common-20.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/preface.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: uniformation of serveral terms @@ -4665,29 +5519,31 @@ r1540 2013-12-12 19:57:43 +0100 mjk: r1539 2013-12-12 16:57:36 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex: Tippfehler [Elke] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex: Tippfehler [Elke] r1538 2013-12-12 12:01:33 +0100 mjk: * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-0.tex: noch ein paar Änderungen für das nächste - Buch + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex: noch ein paar Änderungen für + das nächste Buch r1537 2013-12-11 20:21:09 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex: diverse Änderungen für die nächste - Auflage + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex: diverse Änderungen für die + nächste Auflage r1536 2013-12-11 10:18:01 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex: einige - Anpassungen für die nächste Buchauflage + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/introduction.tex: einige Anpassungen für die nächste + Buchauflage r1535 2013-12-11 08:22:22 +0100 mjk: @@ -4697,11 +5553,13 @@ r1535 2013-12-11 08:22:22 +0100 mjk: r1534 2013-12-10 19:50:34 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex, doc/english/, + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: some tiny steps towards a new book @@ -4712,8 +5570,8 @@ r1533 2013-12-10 19:06:14 +0100 mjk: r1532 2013-12-10 11:28:56 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex: einige Dinge sind für - scrlayer etc. unerheblich + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex: einige Dinge + sind für scrlayer etc. unerheblich r1531 2013-12-10 10:57:42 +0100 mjk: @@ -4732,7 +5590,7 @@ r1529 2013-12-03 08:36:57 +0100 mjk: r1528 2013-11-25 09:39:27 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/english/common-20.tex: more fixes by Jens + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex: more fixes by Jens r1527 2013-11-24 11:40:41 +0100 mjk: @@ -4776,19 +5634,19 @@ r1520 2013-11-21 16:22:43 +0100 mjk: r1519 2013-11-21 16:13:48 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-14.tex: date of translated - file + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-titles.tex: date of + translated file r1518 2013-11-21 15:54:26 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-14.tex: fix: cover page margin macros [Falk] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: fix: cover page margin macros [Falk] r1517 2013-11-21 14:02:39 +0100 mjk: - * scrkernel-title.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/common-14.tex: new option - titlepage=firstiscover + * scrkernel-title.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: new option titlepage=firstiscover r1516 2013-11-19 09:06:20 +0100 mjk: @@ -4807,8 +5665,9 @@ r1514 2013-11-15 09:23:09 +0100 mjk: * scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer.tex: more fixes by several translators + doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: more fixes by several + translators r1513 2013-11-11 11:36:34 +0100 mjk: @@ -4826,9 +5685,9 @@ r1511 2013-11-11 11:21:33 +0100 mjk: r1510 2013-11-11 07:46:10 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer.tex: - minor fixes, e.g., references + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlayer.tex: minor fixes, e.g., references r1509 2013-11-11 07:34:23 +0100 mjk: @@ -4841,25 +5700,29 @@ r1508 2013-11-09 15:33:06 +0100 mjk: r1507 2013-11-07 18:44:10 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/scrlayer.tex: additional typo and grammer fixes by Elke + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: additional typo and + grammer fixes by Elke r1506 2013-11-07 17:41:36 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-8.tex: fix: \KOMAoption --> \KOMAoptions + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex: fix: + \KOMAoption --> \KOMAoptions r1505 2013-11-07 12:23:38 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/english/common-21.tex, doc/english/common-20.tex: peinliche Fehler + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: peinliche Fehler korrigiert r1504 2013-11-07 08:26:20 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/english/common-21.tex: some more suggestions by Jana + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: some more suggestions by + Jana r1503 2013-11-06 12:44:59 +0100 mjk: @@ -4949,8 +5812,9 @@ r1488 2013-11-04 11:44:34 +0100 mjk: r1487 2013-11-04 11:44:15 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex, - doc/english/common-21.tex, doc/english/common-20.tex: Korrekturen von - Fam. Schuster + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: Korrekturen von Fam. + Schuster r1486 2013-11-04 11:38:49 +0100 mjk: @@ -5035,8 +5899,9 @@ r1470 2013-10-29 10:15:06 +0100 mjk: r1469 2013-10-29 10:06:32 +0100 mjk: * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/common-21.tex: draft - translation of scrlayer.tex + doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: draft translation of + scrlayer.tex r1468 2013-10-28 18:05:25 +0100 mjk: @@ -5085,8 +5950,8 @@ r1461 2013-10-24 09:17:58 +0200 mjk: r1460 2013-10-23 18:57:19 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: ein paar Korrekturen - von Elke + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + ein paar Korrekturen von Elke r1459 2013-10-23 18:51:46 +0200 mjk: @@ -5095,21 +5960,22 @@ r1459 2013-10-23 18:51:46 +0200 mjk: r1458 2013-10-23 11:35:31 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/english/common-21.tex: a kind of translation + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: a kind of translation r1457 2013-10-23 11:34:02 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: Umbruch + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + Umbruch r1456 2013-10-23 11:16:09 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: fehlendes Beispiel - für \GenericMarkFormat + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + fehlendes Beispiel für \GenericMarkFormat r1455 2013-10-23 09:58:56 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: einige zustätzliche - Index-Einträge + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + einige zustätzliche Index-Einträge r1454 2013-10-23 09:21:29 +0200 mjk: @@ -5117,7 +5983,8 @@ r1454 2013-10-23 09:21:29 +0200 mjk: r1453 2013-10-23 09:19:07 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: string --> Text + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + string --> Text r1452 2013-10-22 18:42:26 +0200 mjk: @@ -5130,18 +5997,18 @@ r1451 2013-10-22 18:41:02 +0200 mjk: r1450 2013-10-22 18:40:01 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-21.tex: a kind of translation - of some parts + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: a + kind of translation of some parts r1449 2013-10-22 11:23:23 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-21.tex: only note about - untranslated state + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + only note about untranslated state r1448 2013-10-22 11:17:09 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex: \ProvidesFile --> - \KOMAProvidesFile + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: + \ProvidesFile --> \KOMAProvidesFile r1447 2013-10-22 10:39:40 +0200 mjk: @@ -5157,8 +6024,8 @@ r1445 2013-10-18 15:18:41 +0200 mjk: * scrlayer-scrpage.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile, - doc/english/common-20.tex: start of translation of scrlayer-scrpage - chapter + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex: start of translation of + scrlayer-scrpage chapter r1444 2013-10-18 12:21:16 +0200 mjk: @@ -5175,8 +6042,8 @@ r1442 2013-10-18 11:02:10 +0200 mjk: r1441 2013-10-18 10:56:55 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-20.tex: some more index - entries + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex: some more + index entries r1440 2013-10-18 09:03:54 +0200 mjk: @@ -5227,9 +6094,8 @@ r1431 2013-10-16 13:05:21 +0200 mjk: r1430 2013-10-16 13:01:50 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex: Berücksichtigung von scrlayer-scrpage bei - typearea + doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex: Berücksichtigung + von scrlayer-scrpage bei typearea r1429 2013-10-16 12:10:43 +0200 mjk: @@ -5260,9 +6126,12 @@ r1425 2013-10-16 11:19:06 +0200 mjk: r1424 2013-10-16 08:56:53 +0200 mjk: * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-21.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-20.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/common-21.tex, - doc/english/common-20.tex: Anleitung für scrlayer-scrpage + doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex, + doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex: Anleitung für + scrlayer-scrpage r1423 2013-10-15 10:17:36 +0200 mjk: @@ -5358,8 +6227,8 @@ r1405 2013-10-05 12:56:56 +0200 mjk: r1404 2013-10-05 12:31:12 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Kopier- bzw. Tippfehler [Elke] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex: Kopier- bzw. Tippfehler [Elke] r1403 2013-10-04 19:33:44 +0200 mjk: @@ -5597,24 +6466,23 @@ r1362 2013-08-11 14:05:03 +0200 mjk: r1361 2013-08-08 18:11:24 +0200 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-0.tex: Note about problems using lengths as option - value with \documentclass or \usepackage + * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/english/: Note about problems using lengths as option value with + \documentclass or \usepackage r1360 2013-08-05 18:42:32 +0200 mjk: * scrwfile.dtx, doc/, doc/guide.bib, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/preface.tex: improvements of the English guide (by Hendrik - M. and KOMA) + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/preface.tex: + improvements of the English guide (by Hendrik M. and KOMA) r1359 2013-07-31 13:06:37 +0200 mjk: * scrkernel-notepaper.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-5.tex: new font element - placeanddate + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex: new font element placeanddate r1358 2013-07-30 12:34:32 +0200 mjk: @@ -5643,11 +6511,10 @@ r1354 2013-07-24 12:16:00 +0200 mjk: r1353 2013-07-22 18:38:26 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: Kleinere Ergänzungen und - Korrekturen + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: Kleinere + Ergänzungen und Korrekturen r1352 2013-07-09 15:01:26 +0200 mjk: @@ -5701,11 +6568,11 @@ r1343 2013-06-04 14:27:25 +0200 mjk: r1342 2013-05-31 15:53:50 +0200 mjk: * TODO, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/scrextend.tex: user manual of \usefontofkomafont etc. - added + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex: user + manual of \usefontofkomafont etc. added r1341 2013-05-31 12:02:05 +0200 mjk: @@ -5737,11 +6604,11 @@ r1336 2013-05-29 14:14:03 +0200 mjk: r1335 2013-05-29 12:30:52 +0200 mjk: - * scrkernel-title.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: new - font elements "titlehead", "author", "date", "publishers", - "dedication" + * scrkernel-title.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex: new font elements "titlehead", + "author", "date", "publishers", "dedication" r1334 2013-05-23 18:16:45 +0200 mjk: @@ -5771,7 +6638,7 @@ r1329 2013-05-02 11:44:08 +0200 mjk: r1328 2013-05-02 10:32:23 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex: scrlayer und + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex: scrlayer und scrlayer-scrpage mit aufgenommen r1327 2013-04-28 11:04:44 +0200 mjk: @@ -6198,8 +7065,7 @@ r1240 2012-07-17 08:54:45 +0200 mjk: r1239 2012-07-07 13:32:45 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex: Fixed: ein »sind« - zuviel [Stephan Opfer] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/: Fixed: ein »sind« zuviel [Stephan Opfer] r1238 2012-07-05 10:29:01 +0200 mjk: @@ -6283,7 +7149,7 @@ r1221 2012-05-15 14:23:06 +0200 mjk: r1220 2012-05-15 14:17:51 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex: broken links fixed r1219 2012-05-15 14:06:09 +0200 mjk: @@ -6300,13 +7166,14 @@ r1218 2012-05-15 09:38:39 +0200 mjk: r1217 2012-05-15 09:25:59 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-5.tex, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/common-2.tex, doc/english/common-12.tex, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-8.tex, doc/english/common-3.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex: Several improvements by Krickette + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/common-lists.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex: Several improvements by Krickette Murabayashi r1216 2012-05-11 10:08:07 +0200 mjk: @@ -6336,8 +7203,8 @@ r1212 2012-04-16 09:45:21 +0200 mjk: r1211 2012-04-08 11:14:11 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-1.tex: translation - improvement + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex: + translation improvement r1210 2012-04-04 14:37:56 +0200 mjk: @@ -6345,13 +7212,12 @@ r1210 2012-04-04 14:37:56 +0200 mjk: r1209 2012-04-02 09:54:42 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-1.tex: improvement by - Krickette Murabayashi + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex: + improvement by Krickette Murabayashi r1208 2012-04-02 09:24:24 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-0.tex: improvement by - Krickette Murabayashi + * doc/, doc/english/: improvement by Krickette Murabayashi r1207 2012-04-02 09:12:03 +0200 mjk: @@ -6484,10 +7350,10 @@ r1180 2012-03-05 19:01:48 +0100 mjk: r1179 2012-03-05 19:00:21 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbase.tex, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/common-2.tex, doc/english/common-1.tex: one more step to - an english manual + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex: + one more step to an english manual r1178 2012-03-05 18:59:23 +0100 mjk: @@ -6538,30 +7404,29 @@ r1170 2012-02-26 16:57:34 +0100 mjk: r1169 2012-02-26 16:11:55 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-13.tex, - doc/english/scrbase.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-6.tex, doc/english/common-12.tex, - doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbase.tex, + doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/scrextend.tex, doc/english/common-lists.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex, doc/english/preface.tex: one more step to - an english manual + doc/english/preface.tex: one more step to an english manual r1168 2012-02-26 16:11:03 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: ein paar kleinere - Verbesserungen, die während der Ãœbersetzung aufgefallen sind + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: ein paar kleinere Verbesserungen, die + während der Ãœbersetzung aufgefallen sind r1167 2012-02-26 16:10:51 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex: ein paar kleinere - Verbesserungen, die während der Ãœbersetzung aufgefallen sind + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex: ein paar kleinere Verbesserungen, die + während der Ãœbersetzung aufgefallen sind r1166 2012-02-26 16:09:33 +0100 mjk: @@ -6577,14 +7442,14 @@ r1165 2012-02-17 10:10:38 +0100 mjk: r1164 2012-02-16 19:27:20 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex: some more translations and structural - changes + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex: some more translations and + structural changes r1163 2012-02-16 19:26:31 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex: some - more translations and structural changes + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex: + some more translations and structural changes r1162 2012-02-16 18:35:23 +0100 mjk: @@ -6609,8 +7474,8 @@ r1159 2012-02-16 15:21:35 +0100 mjk: r1158 2012-02-16 10:51:20 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-2.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: some more - translations and structural changes + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex: + some more translations and structural changes r1157 2012-02-16 09:49:58 +0100 mjk: @@ -6643,7 +7508,7 @@ r1153 2012-02-14 12:13:48 +0100 mjk: r1152 2012-02-14 09:56:23 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-13.tex, + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some more translations and structural changes @@ -6662,14 +7527,14 @@ r1150 2012-02-09 12:07:53 +0100 mjk: r1149 2012-02-09 10:35:02 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-12.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some more translations and structural changes r1148 2012-02-08 16:57:47 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex: some more translations and structural + doc/english/common-dictum.tex: some more translations and structural changes r1147 2012-02-08 15:27:28 +0100 mjk: @@ -6691,27 +7556,28 @@ r1145 2012-02-07 13:47:54 +0100 mjk: r1144 2012-02-07 10:14:03 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex: some more - translations and structural changes + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex: some more translations and + structural changes r1143 2012-02-06 16:47:49 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-8.tex: some more translations and structural - changes + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex: some more translations and + structural changes r1142 2012-02-06 10:04:42 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some more translations - and structural changes + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex: some more translations and + structural changes r1141 2012-02-05 16:44:18 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-6.tex: some more translations and structural - changes + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: some more translations and + structural changes r1140 2012-02-05 13:23:36 +0100 mjk: @@ -6726,11 +7592,11 @@ r1139 2012-02-05 11:40:19 +0100 mjk: r1138 2012-02-05 11:11:34 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-5.tex, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/common-3.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex: some more translations, structural - changes and typografical optimizations + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex: some + more translations, structural changes and typografical optimizations r1137 2012-02-03 16:25:43 +0100 mjk: @@ -6744,34 +7610,36 @@ r1136 2012-02-03 16:25:19 +0100 mjk: r1135 2012-02-02 17:14:01 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex: some more translations and structure changes + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: some more translations and + structure changes r1134 2012-02-01 16:48:19 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, - doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some more translations - and structure changes + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex: some more translations and structure + changes r1133 2012-02-01 13:03:02 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-2.tex: section heading - translated + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: section + heading translated r1132 2012-02-01 13:01:54 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-2.tex: date update + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: date update r1131 2012-02-01 13:00:44 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-2.tex: some more translations - and structure changes + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex: some more + translations and structure changes r1130 2012-02-01 12:58:18 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/guide.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/common-2.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex: some more translations and structure changes @@ -6782,9 +7650,10 @@ r1129 2012-01-31 15:19:29 +0100 mjk: r1128 2012-01-31 14:50:22 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbase.tex, - doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/common-1.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex: some additions - to the translation and some completely new translations + doc/english/typearea-experts.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex: + some additions to the translation and some completely new + translations r1127 2012-01-13 10:44:09 +0100 mjk: @@ -6836,53 +7705,53 @@ r1121 2012-01-10 09:37:54 +0100 mjk: doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, - doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/common-15.tex, - doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-13.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/common-14.tex, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-2.tex, - doc/english/common-12.tex, doc/english/common-9.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-1.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/common-15.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: Copyright -2012 r1120 2012-01-10 09:07:15 +0100 mjk: * manifest.txt, doc/, doc/guide.bib, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, - doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, - doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, - doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex: documentation update for KOMA-Script 3.10 + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex: documentation update + for KOMA-Script 3.10 r1119 2011-10-26 14:55:03 +0200 mjk: @@ -7044,11 +7913,11 @@ r1090 2011-06-16 09:26:10 +0200 mjk: r1089 2011-06-16 09:24:50 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex: some minor - steps to the next book release + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex: + some minor steps to the next book release r1088 2011-06-16 09:10:09 +0200 mjk: @@ -7310,35 +8179,34 @@ r1033 2011-01-20 11:37:25 +0100 mjk: scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, - doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, - doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, - doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-13.tex, doc/english/common-5.tex, - doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/common-14.tex, + doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, + doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-2.tex, - doc/english/common-12.tex, doc/english/common-9.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-1.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/common-15.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: Update of Copyright date @@ -7391,8 +8259,8 @@ r1024 2010-12-14 11:20:44 +0100 mjk: r1023 2010-12-14 10:51:53 +0100 mjk: * scrkernel-paragraphs.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, - doc/ngerman/common-6.tex: new option parskip=never to avoid vertical - stretching of paragraphs with \flushbottom + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex: new option parskip=never to avoid + vertical stretching of paragraphs with \flushbottom r1022 2010-12-14 10:38:13 +0100 mjk: @@ -7856,40 +8724,40 @@ r926 2010-02-09 10:38:52 +0100 mjk: tocbasic.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/koma-script.html, doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/linkalias.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, - doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/Makefile, - doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, + doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/common-13.tex, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/Makefile, - doc/english/common-14.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/common-4.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/common-6.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, - doc/english/common-2.tex, doc/english/common-12.tex, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/common-7.tex, doc/english/common-1.tex, - doc/english/common-8.tex, doc/english/common-3.tex, - doc/english/common-0.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, - obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: * it's 2010 * user - documentation of pseudo lengths "firstheadhpos" and "firstheadvpos" - added + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/Makefile, + doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/english/common-lists.tex, doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/common-titles.tex, doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, + obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: * it's 2010 * user documentation of pseudo + lengths "firstheadhpos" and "firstheadvpos" added r925 2010-02-05 09:20:36 +0100 mjk: @@ -7912,8 +8780,8 @@ r922 2010-01-26 10:13:44 +0100 mjk: r921 2010-01-18 12:26:40 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex: parskip table fixed - [reported by Aradan] + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex: parskip table + fixed [reported by Aradan] r920 2010-01-05 16:20:01 +0100 mjk: @@ -7931,7 +8799,7 @@ r918 2009-12-15 08:44:51 +0100 mjk: r917 2009-11-28 12:00:45 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-3.tex: + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex: r916 2009-11-28 11:57:23 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex, @@ -7940,25 +8808,26 @@ r916 2009-11-28 11:57:23 +0100 mjk: r915 2009-11-28 11:53:56 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-13.tex, - doc/english/common-5.tex, doc/english/common-14.tex, - doc/english/common-4.tex, doc/english/common-6.tex, - doc/english/common-2.tex, doc/english/common-12.tex, - doc/english/common-9.tex, doc/english/common-7.tex, - doc/english/common-1.tex, doc/english/common-8.tex, - doc/english/common-3.tex, doc/english/common-0.tex, - doc/english/common-15.tex: common.tex splitted + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/english/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/english/common-dictum.tex, + doc/english/common-footnotes.tex, doc/english/common-lists.tex, + doc/english/common-draftmode.tex, doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/english/common-titles.tex, + doc/english/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/english/common-typearea.tex: common.tex splitted r914 2009-11-28 11:53:21 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-13.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-5.tex, doc/ngerman/common-14.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-4.tex, doc/ngerman/common-6.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-2.tex, doc/ngerman/common-12.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-9.tex, doc/ngerman/common-7.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-1.tex, doc/ngerman/common-8.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-3.tex, doc/ngerman/common-0.tex, - doc/ngerman/common-15.tex: common.tex splitted + * doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex, doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-options.tex, doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex, doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex, doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex, + doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex: common.tex splitted r913 2009-11-28 11:35:29 +0100 mjk: @@ -8288,9 +9157,9 @@ r843 2009-03-19 11:01:11 +0100 mjk: doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, @@ -8298,11 +9167,11 @@ r843 2009-03-19 11:01:11 +0100 mjk: doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, - doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, - obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: switched from LPPL 1.3b to LPPL 1.3c + doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, + doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: + switched from LPPL 1.3b to LPPL 1.3c r842 2009-03-18 11:32:48 +0100 mjk: @@ -8535,22 +9404,15 @@ r796 2009-01-02 09:41:42 +0100 mjk: doc/ngerman/Makefile, doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, - doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, - doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, - doc/ngerman/preface.tex, doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/german/, - doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/htmlsetup, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile, - doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, + doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, + doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, + doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, + doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: prepared for 2009 @@ -8605,9 +9467,9 @@ r787 2008-12-09 11:06:16 +0100 mjk: r786 2008-12-08 11:48:52 +0100 mjk: - * scrpage.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/, doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex: Options - "headinclude", "headexclude", "footinclude" and "footexclude" are - deprecated at scrpage2 + * scrpage.dtx, doc/, doc/ngerman/: Options "headinclude", + "headexclude", "footinclude" and "footexclude" are deprecated at + scrpage2 r785 2008-12-08 11:47:02 +0100 mjk: @@ -8822,9 +9684,8 @@ r735 2008-10-07 12:17:42 +0200 mjk: r734 2008-10-07 12:11:13 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/guide.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: minor changes for - KOMA-Script 3 + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: minor changes for KOMA-Script 3 r733 2008-10-06 12:07:42 +0200 mjk: @@ -8857,9 +9718,9 @@ r729 2008-09-23 14:23:54 +0200 mjk: doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex, doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex, doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex, doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex, - doc/ngerman/scrpage2.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, - doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, - doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, + doc/ngerman/scrlttr2examples.dtx, doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex, + doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/htmlsetup, + doc/ngerman/typearea.tex, doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex, doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex, doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex, doc/ngerman/introduction.tex, doc/ngerman/preface.tex, @@ -8869,8 +9730,7 @@ r729 2008-09-23 14:23:54 +0200 mjk: r728 2008-09-19 11:04:34 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/guide.bib, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, - doc/plength.dtx, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, - doc/german/htmlsetup, doc/english/, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/plength.dtx, doc/english/, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: preparation to add the new german guide @@ -8898,8 +9758,7 @@ r723 2008-07-09 20:05:52 +0200 mjk: r722 2008-07-09 12:44:12 +0200 mjk: - * scrkernel-typearea.dtx, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/typearea.tex: - new value "semi" for option "twoside" + * scrkernel-typearea.dtx, doc/: new value "semi" for option "twoside" r721 2008-07-05 13:36:49 +0200 mjk: @@ -8954,7 +9813,7 @@ r711 2008-05-14 11:47:38 +0200 mjk: r710 2008-05-06 14:26:43 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Wort korrigiert + * doc/: Wort korrigiert r709 2008-05-06 09:28:23 +0200 mjk: @@ -8977,10 +9836,8 @@ r707 2008-05-02 16:43:26 +0200 mjk: r706 2008-04-30 09:52:59 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/german/scrpage2.tex, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/introduction.tex: diverse - Neuerungen inbesondere bezüglich der Optionen dokumentiert + * doc/: diverse Neuerungen inbesondere bezüglich der Optionen + dokumentiert r705 2008-04-30 09:52:22 +0200 mjk: @@ -9034,8 +9891,7 @@ r695 2008-04-10 11:43:54 +0200 mjk: r694 2008-04-10 11:43:09 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: missing % at - \GuideLanguageExtensions added + * doc/: missing % at \GuideLanguageExtensions added r693 2008-04-09 16:39:33 +0200 mjk: @@ -9060,8 +9916,7 @@ r689 2008-04-08 11:33:37 +0200 mjk: r688 2008-04-04 09:55:09 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/introduction.tex: Gernot in die - Danksagung aufgenommen + * doc/: Gernot in die Danksagung aufgenommen r687 2008-04-04 09:37:50 +0200 mjk: @@ -9090,16 +9945,10 @@ r680 2008-03-27 09:13:23 +0100 mjk: r679 2008-03-27 09:10:54 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/htmlsetup, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/japanlco.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile, + doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, + doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, + doc/english/japanlco.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: unknown change @@ -9110,8 +9959,8 @@ r678 2008-03-27 09:09:02 +0100 mjk: r677 2008-03-27 09:08:08 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: "version" ist die - einzige Option, die nicht per \KOMAoptions gesetzt werden kann + * doc/: "version" ist die einzige Option, die nicht per \KOMAoptions + gesetzt werden kann r676 2008-03-27 08:41:40 +0100 mjk: @@ -9568,8 +10417,8 @@ r584 2007-12-15 15:57:37 +0100 mjk: r583 2007-12-15 15:51:52 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Tabelle der - vordefinierten lco-Dateien um die Japanischen lco-Dateien ergänzt + * doc/: Tabelle der vordefinierten lco-Dateien um die Japanischen + lco-Dateien ergänzt r582 2007-12-15 15:42:28 +0100 mjk: @@ -9604,29 +10453,25 @@ r576 2007-12-07 10:46:47 +0100 mjk: r575 2007-12-07 10:04:44 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: - Änderung bezüglich der Nummerierung in "\frontmatter" dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: Änderung bezüglich der Nummerierung in "\frontmatter" + dokumentiert r574 2007-12-07 09:27:54 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: "location"-Werte - für Option "fromalign" dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: "location"-Werte für Option "fromalign" dokumentiert r573 2007-12-07 09:24:24 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: \ChangedAt entries - fixed + * doc/, doc/english/: \ChangedAt entries fixed r572 2007-12-07 09:23:01 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrpage2.tex: \ChangedAt-Einträge - korrigiert + * doc/: \ChangedAt-Einträge korrigiert r571 2007-12-07 08:27:39 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Optionen - "firsthead" und "firstfoot" dokumentiert (einschl. Auswirkungen auf - Pseudolänge "firstfootvpos") + * TODO, doc/: Optionen "firsthead" und "firstfoot" dokumentiert + (einschl. Auswirkungen auf Pseudolänge "firstfootvpos") r570 2007-12-04 12:05:53 +0100 mjk: @@ -9634,8 +10479,8 @@ r570 2007-12-04 12:05:53 +0100 mjk: r569 2007-12-04 12:04:15 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Pseudo-Längen - "lochpos", "locvpos", "locheight" dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: Pseudo-Längen "lochpos", "locvpos", "locheight" + dokumentiert r568 2007-12-04 11:46:01 +0100 mjk: @@ -9643,19 +10488,17 @@ r568 2007-12-04 11:46:01 +0100 mjk: r567 2007-12-04 11:44:02 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: name of lco file - != name of option + * TODO, doc/: name of lco file != name of option r566 2007-12-04 11:36:59 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: neue Werte für - Option "subject"; Tabelle der Pseudo-Längen sortiert + * TODO, doc/: neue Werte für Option "subject"; Tabelle der + Pseudo-Längen sortiert r565 2007-11-30 13:06:11 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: environment documentation - changed; font elements for address field + * TODO, doc/: environment documentation changed; font elements for + address field r564 2007-11-29 12:35:39 +0100 mjk: @@ -9665,10 +10508,9 @@ r564 2007-11-29 12:35:39 +0100 mjk: r563 2007-11-29 12:33:47 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Font - Elemente "partentry", "partentrypagenumber", "chapterentry", - "chapterentrypagenumber", "sectionentry", "sectionentrypagenumber" - dokumentiert + * doc/: Font Elemente "partentry", "partentrypagenumber", + "chapterentry", "chapterentrypagenumber", "sectionentry", + "sectionentrypagenumber" dokumentiert r562 2007-11-29 10:40:12 +0100 mjk: @@ -9686,14 +10528,12 @@ r560 2007-11-29 10:11:56 +0100 mjk: r559 2007-11-28 12:44:30 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Angabe von \datefinish - korrigiert, \Unit verwendet + * doc/: Angabe von \datefinish korrigiert, \Unit verwendet r558 2007-11-28 12:38:42 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: - Dokumentation der Font-Elemente "subject" und "subtitle", sowie der - neuen Anweisung \subtitle + * TODO, doc/: Dokumentation der Font-Elemente "subject" und + "subtitle", sowie der neuen Anweisung \subtitle r557 2007-11-28 12:35:00 +0100 mjk: @@ -9701,18 +10541,15 @@ r557 2007-11-28 12:35:00 +0100 mjk: r556 2007-11-28 10:06:03 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Erklärung zu Option - "foldmarks" verbessert + * doc/: Erklärung zu Option "foldmarks" verbessert r555 2007-11-27 12:36:05 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Pseudo-Länge - "fromrulewidth" dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: Pseudo-Länge "fromrulewidth" dokumentiert r554 2007-11-27 12:27:16 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Font element - "fromrule" dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: Font element "fromrule" dokumentiert r553 2007-11-27 10:00:28 +0100 mjk: @@ -9720,23 +10557,20 @@ r553 2007-11-27 10:00:28 +0100 mjk: r552 2007-11-27 09:50:51 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Die neuen - Möglichkeiten für die Konfigurierung der Faltmarken dokumentiert + * TODO, doc/: Die neuen Möglichkeiten für die Konfigurierung der + Faltmarken dokumentiert r551 2007-11-26 13:10:17 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Erklärung zur - Option "foldmarks" erweitert + * TODO, doc/: Erklärung zur Option "foldmarks" erweitert r550 2007-11-26 12:23:35 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Font-Element - "backaddress" dokumentiert. + * doc/: Font-Element "backaddress" dokumentiert. r549 2007-11-26 11:56:12 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: documentation of - new values for option "backaddress" + * TODO, doc/: documentation of new values for option "backaddress" r548 2007-11-26 11:53:02 +0100 mjk: @@ -9945,24 +10779,24 @@ r507 2007-09-27 09:42:11 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: index fixed + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: index fixed r506 2007-09-26 16:44:56 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: improved by GH + doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: improved by GH r505 2007-09-26 09:23:54 +0200 mjk: * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: improved by GH + doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex: improved by GH r503 2007-09-25 09:05:04 +0200 mjk: @@ -9987,16 +10821,14 @@ r499 2007-09-21 09:06:57 +0200 mjk: r498 2007-09-20 15:08:33 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: two more translators - added + * doc/, doc/english/: two more translators added r497 2007-09-18 12:04:55 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/german/, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, - doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + * doc/, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/english/, + doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, + doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: new command \translator at the guide @@ -10059,7 +10891,7 @@ r483 2007-09-17 10:12:16 +0200 mjk: r482 2007-09-17 10:06:30 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Kleinere Verbesserungen + * doc/: Kleinere Verbesserungen r481 2007-09-12 17:05:12 +0200 mjk: @@ -10072,8 +10904,8 @@ r480 2007-09-12 17:03:04 +0200 mjk: r479 2007-09-12 12:47:27 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Tabellenüberschrift - für Tabelle 6.18 (Datumsbefehle und Ausgabebeispiel) ergänzt [GH] + * doc/: Tabellenüberschrift für Tabelle 6.18 (Datumsbefehle und + Ausgabebeispiel) ergänzt [GH] r478 2007-09-12 12:44:45 +0200 mjk: @@ -10085,13 +10917,11 @@ r477 2007-09-06 11:05:54 +0200 mjk: r476 2007-09-06 11:01:22 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Fehlende schließende - Klammer ergänzt + * doc/: Fehlende schließende Klammer ergänzt r475 2007-09-06 10:55:26 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: toaddrindent etwas - genauer dokumentiert + * doc/: toaddrindent etwas genauer dokumentiert r474 2007-09-04 11:48:13 +0200 mjk: @@ -10100,8 +10930,8 @@ r474 2007-09-04 11:48:13 +0200 mjk: r473 2007-09-04 11:46:50 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Gesucht sind - linksbündige Fußnotenmarkierungen, nicht linksb+ndige Fußnoten + * doc/: Gesucht sind linksbündige Fußnotenmarkierungen, nicht + linksb+ndige Fußnoten r472 2007-09-04 11:31:06 +0200 mjk: @@ -10109,8 +10939,7 @@ r472 2007-09-04 11:31:06 +0200 mjk: r471 2007-09-04 11:26:21 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Vertippser korrigiert - [GH] + * doc/: Vertippser korrigiert [GH] r470 2007-09-02 11:16:22 +0200 mjk: @@ -10131,17 +10960,16 @@ r467 2007-08-22 11:58:23 +0200 mjk: r466 2007-08-22 11:33:32 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Adresse von Markus - korrigiert + * doc/: Adresse von Markus korrigiert r465 2007-08-20 10:36:52 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: one more fix + * doc/, doc/english/: one more fix r464 2007-08-19 12:38:46 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: \EndIndex{Cmd}{page - style} changed to \EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle} + * doc/, doc/english/: \EndIndex{Cmd}{page style} changed to + \EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle} r463 2007-08-19 12:35:00 +0200 mjk: @@ -10151,14 +10979,12 @@ r463 2007-08-19 12:35:00 +0200 mjk: r462 2007-08-19 12:31:40 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: \EndIndex{Page - style}{useheadings} fixed (must be - \EndIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings}) + * doc/, doc/english/: \EndIndex{Page style}{useheadings} fixed (must + be \EndIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings}) r461 2007-08-19 12:26:22 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Verbesserung von Gernot - Hassenpflug + * doc/: Verbesserung von Gernot Hassenpflug r460 2007-08-19 12:22:13 +0200 mjk: @@ -10166,7 +10992,7 @@ r460 2007-08-19 12:22:13 +0200 mjk: r459 2007-08-19 12:15:31 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: improved by GH + * doc/, doc/english/: improved by GH r458 2007-08-10 18:55:58 +0200 mjk: @@ -10192,12 +11018,12 @@ r454 2007-08-09 17:13:37 +0200 mjk: r453 2007-08-09 17:08:00 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: improved by GH + * doc/, doc/english/: improved by GH r452 2007-08-07 13:22:59 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex: german version extended to english version + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlfile.tex: german version + extended to english version r451 2007-08-07 13:14:42 +0200 mjk: @@ -10250,8 +11076,8 @@ r441 2007-07-24 11:37:42 +0200 mjk: r440 2007-07-24 10:53:54 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: mib GH and MK + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: mib GH and + MK r439 2007-07-23 11:12:39 +0200 mjk: @@ -10278,8 +11104,7 @@ r435 2007-07-23 09:02:33 +0200 mjk: r434 2007-07-22 10:58:23 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Typofix - [Gernot Hassenpflug] + * doc/: Typofix [Gernot Hassenpflug] r433 2007-07-22 10:57:05 +0200 mjk: @@ -10332,8 +11157,7 @@ r424 2007-07-10 10:29:58 +0200 mjk: r423 2007-07-10 10:15:02 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: einige - Fehler korrigiert [Gernot Hassenpflug] + * doc/: einige Fehler korrigiert [Gernot Hassenpflug] r422 2007-07-06 16:09:52 +0200 mjk: @@ -10373,8 +11197,8 @@ r415 2007-07-06 10:03:31 +0200 mjk: r414 2007-07-06 09:57:57 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: secnumdepth fixed + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: + secnumdepth fixed r413 2007-07-06 09:56:01 +0200 mjk: @@ -10383,14 +11207,12 @@ r413 2007-07-06 09:56:01 +0200 mjk: r412 2007-07-06 09:52:07 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Bei scrartcl - haben die Gliederungsebenen dieselben Nummern wie bei scrbook und - scrreprt. + * doc/: Bei scrartcl haben die Gliederungsebenen dieselben Nummern wie + bei scrbook und scrreprt. r411 2007-07-06 09:17:18 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: typo fix - [Gernot Hassenpflug] + * doc/: typo fix [Gernot Hassenpflug] r410 2007-07-05 18:56:09 +0200 mjk: @@ -10426,7 +11248,7 @@ r399 2007-06-21 13:20:21 +0200 mjk: r398 2007-06-21 11:07:34 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: tex-master changed + * doc/: tex-master changed r397 2007-06-21 11:06:08 +0200 mjk: @@ -10470,9 +11292,8 @@ r390 2007-06-14 09:56:35 +0200 mjk: r389 2007-06-06 09:32:40 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: "Es wird - auch kein zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor und nach der Umgebung - eingefügt." added at declaration of addmargin + * doc/: "Es wird auch kein zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor und + nach der Umgebung eingefügt." added at declaration of addmargin r388 2007-06-06 09:28:51 +0200 mjk: @@ -10481,13 +11302,11 @@ r388 2007-06-06 09:28:51 +0200 mjk: r387 2007-06-06 08:40:10 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: more hyphenations - [Stephan Hennig] + * doc/: more hyphenations [Stephan Hennig] r386 2007-06-05 09:03:45 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: one more - hyphenation [Stephan Hennig] + * doc/: one more hyphenation [Stephan Hennig] r385 2007-05-31 10:33:27 +0200 mjk: @@ -10505,8 +11324,7 @@ r383 2007-05-30 15:24:01 +0200 mjk: r382 2007-05-29 16:59:52 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: scrlettr --> - scrlttr2 + * doc/: scrlettr --> scrlttr2 r381 2007-05-29 16:57:50 +0200 mjk: @@ -10538,8 +11356,7 @@ r376 2007-05-25 12:19:59 +0200 mjk: r375 2007-05-22 17:39:37 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: fix: one - \KOMAoption --> \KOMAoptions + * doc/: fix: one \KOMAoption --> \KOMAoptions r374 2007-05-17 10:30:34 +0200 mjk: @@ -10638,8 +11455,7 @@ r353 2007-03-02 12:13:00 +0100 mjk: r352 2007-03-02 12:11:57 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: fix: - reference to sec:maincls.compatiblityOptions + * doc/: fix: reference to sec:maincls.compatiblityOptions r351 2007-03-02 11:50:10 +0100 mjk: @@ -10679,8 +11495,7 @@ r344 2007-01-24 17:49:13 +0100 mjk: r343 2007-01-12 09:57:36 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: fix: No - space before \and at \ChangedAt + * doc/: fix: No space before \and at \ChangedAt r341 2007-01-09 19:07:25 +0100 mjk: @@ -10699,27 +11514,19 @@ r341 2007-01-09 19:07:25 +0100 mjk: scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, - doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/german/, - doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/htmlsetup, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, + doc/Makefile.guide, doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, - obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: copyright end date - changed to 2007 + doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, + obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: copyright end date changed to 2007 r340 2007-01-09 11:41:16 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: documentation of - page break changes at toc + * TODO, doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex: + documentation of page break changes at toc r339 2007-01-09 11:39:44 +0100 mjk: @@ -10728,14 +11535,12 @@ r339 2007-01-09 11:39:44 +0100 mjk: r338 2007-01-08 10:44:47 +0100 mjk: - * TODO, doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: - Dokumentation von \part verbessern + * TODO, doc/: Dokumentation von \part verbessern r337 2007-01-08 10:05:37 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: - - documentation of font aliases - documentation of font element - minisec - 'sectioning' is an alias of 'disposition' only + * doc/: - documentation of font aliases - documentation of font + element minisec - 'sectioning' is an alias of 'disposition' only r336 2007-01-08 09:45:33 +0100 mjk: @@ -10761,8 +11566,7 @@ r332 2007-01-04 11:54:55 +0100 mjk: r331 2007-01-04 11:53:49 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: fix: - \refloatstyle --> \restylefloat + * doc/: fix: \refloatstyle --> \restylefloat r330 2007-01-03 12:46:55 +0100 mjk: @@ -10776,13 +11580,11 @@ r329 2007-01-02 11:06:17 +0100 mjk: r328 2006-12-12 10:30:56 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Neue - Optionen "version" und "chapteratlists" + * doc/: Neue Optionen "version" und "chapteratlists" r327 2006-12-12 10:30:21 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Dokumentation der Option - "version" erweitert + * doc/: Dokumentation der Option "version" erweitert r326 2006-12-07 11:50:19 +0100 mjk: @@ -10856,13 +11658,11 @@ r314 2006-11-30 19:57:36 +0100 mjk: r313 2006-11-29 16:38:15 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: two - \begin{Explain} moved + * doc/: two \begin{Explain} moved r312 2006-11-29 16:29:25 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/typearea.tex: one \begin{Explain} - moved + * doc/: one \begin{Explain} moved r311 2006-11-28 11:50:17 +0100 mjk: @@ -10910,8 +11710,8 @@ r304 2006-09-12 09:57:55 +0200 mjk: r303 2006-09-12 09:57:18 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/typearea.tex: fix: line number at \areaset example + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/typearea.tex: fix: line number at + \areaset example r302 2006-09-12 09:55:01 +0200 mjk: @@ -10927,8 +11727,7 @@ r300 2006-08-30 10:09:32 +0200 mjk: r299 2006-08-27 09:20:08 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/typearea.tex: Tippfehler korrigiert - [gemeldet von Stefan Meier] + * doc/: Tippfehler korrigiert [gemeldet von Stefan Meier] r298 2006-08-21 12:51:18 +0200 mjk: @@ -11119,7 +11918,7 @@ r246 2006-07-05 10:03:37 +0200 mjk: r243 2006-07-05 09:39:06 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/introduction.tex: missing brace added + * doc/: missing brace added r241 2006-07-05 09:08:45 +0200 mjk: @@ -11154,7 +11953,7 @@ r235 2006-07-01 09:20:48 +0200 mjk: r234 2006-07-01 09:06:22 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/introduction.tex: Dateinamen angepasst + * doc/: Dateinamen angepasst r233 2006-07-01 09:01:25 +0200 mjk: @@ -11168,7 +11967,7 @@ r232 2006-07-01 08:59:02 +0200 mjk: r231 2006-07-01 08:55:43 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/scrpage2.tex: references fixed + * doc/, doc/english/: references fixed r230 2006-07-01 08:53:43 +0200 mjk: @@ -11286,8 +12085,8 @@ r200 2006-05-27 08:22:36 +0200 mjk: r199 2006-05-10 14:13:39 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/english/, - doc/english/guide-english.tex: Licence note fixed + * doc/, doc/english/, doc/english/guide-english.tex: Licence note + fixed r198 2006-05-10 12:56:11 +0200 mjk: @@ -11295,8 +12094,7 @@ r198 2006-05-10 12:56:11 +0200 mjk: r197 2006-05-10 12:42:44 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/introduction.tex: usage of komabug - replaced by longer description + * doc/: usage of komabug replaced by longer description r196 2006-05-04 09:25:36 +0200 mjk: @@ -11313,8 +12111,7 @@ r194 2006-05-02 10:19:59 +0200 mjk: r193 2006-04-24 16:24:06 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Komma korrigiert - [Stephan Hennig] + * doc/: Komma korrigiert [Stephan Hennig] r192 2006-04-24 12:06:05 +0200 mjk: @@ -11471,21 +12268,15 @@ r159 2006-03-29 10:26:53 +0200 mjk: scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scraddr.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, - doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/german/, - doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/htmlsetup, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, + doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, - doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, - obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: fix of initial comment + doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, + doc/bin/genindex.pl, obsolete/scrlettr.ins, obsolete/scrlettr.dtx: fix + of initial comment r158 2006-03-29 10:12:51 +0200 mjk: @@ -11828,24 +12619,18 @@ r72 2006-03-08 10:59:49 +0100 mjk: scrkernel-sections.dtx, scrkernel-miscellaneous.dtx, scrkernel-fonts.dtx, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.gst, doc/scrguide.cls, - doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/german/, - doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, - doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/htmlsetup, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/english/, + doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, - doc/english/scrpage2.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, - doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, - doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, - doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, doc/bin/genindex.pl: scrksect.dtx scrbeta.dtx - scrmain.ins scrkfont.dtx scrkxflo.dtx scrkbase.dtx scrktitl.dtx - scrkpage.dtx scrkvers.dtx Makefile.baserules scrkfloa.dtx - scrkpar.dtx doc/plength.dtx doc/scrguide.gst doc/scrguide.cls - doc/bin/genindex.pl doc/bin/genchangelog.pl doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl + doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, + doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, + doc/english/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl, + doc/bin/genindex.pl: scrksect.dtx scrbeta.dtx scrmain.ins scrkfont.dtx + scrkxflo.dtx scrkbase.dtx scrktitl.dtx scrkpage.dtx scrkvers.dtx + Makefile.baserules scrkfloa.dtx scrkpar.dtx doc/plength.dtx + doc/scrguide.gst doc/scrguide.cls doc/bin/genindex.pl + doc/bin/genchangelog.pl doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl doc/german/introduction.tex doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex doc/german/scraddr.tex doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex doc/german/adrconvnote.tex doc/german/scrlfile.tex @@ -11877,7 +12662,7 @@ r70 2006-03-08 10:27:23 +0100 mjk: r68 2006-03-08 08:52:54 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: TeX Master fixed + * doc/: TeX Master fixed r64 2006-02-13 18:53:08 +0100 mjk: @@ -11890,8 +12675,8 @@ r60 2006-01-25 12:56:38 +0100 mjk: r59 2006-01-25 12:41:27 +0100 mjk: - * Makefile, doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/german/, doc/german/Makefile, - doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile: Get BASEDIR from parent + * Makefile, doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/english/, doc/english/Makefile: + Get BASEDIR from parent r50 2006-01-20 14:48:57 +0100 mjk: @@ -11903,8 +12688,7 @@ r48 2006-01-13 09:38:03 +0100 mjk: r47 2005-12-13 08:53:31 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: fix: - \makeatletter...\makeatother + * doc/: fix: \makeatletter...\makeatother r46 2005-12-13 08:52:03 +0100 mjk: @@ -11916,19 +12700,18 @@ r45 2005-11-27 15:32:22 +0100 mjk: * doc/, doc/Makefile, doc/english/, doc/english/scrlttr2.tex, doc/english/Makefile, doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/english/guide-english.tex, doc/english/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/scrpage2.tex, - doc/english/htmlsetup, doc/english/typearea.tex, - doc/english/scrlfile.tex, doc/english/introduction.tex, - doc/english/scraddr.tex: Initial import of the englisch guide + doc/english/adrconvnote.tex, doc/english/htmlsetup, + doc/english/typearea.tex, doc/english/scrlfile.tex, + doc/english/introduction.tex, doc/english/scraddr.tex: Initial import + of the englisch guide r44 2005-11-27 12:14:29 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrdatetime.tex: document support for - finnish + * doc/: document support for finnish r43 2005-11-27 11:46:56 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrpage2.tex: line break + * doc/: line break r42 2005-11-26 18:14:09 +0100 mjk: @@ -11940,13 +12723,11 @@ r41 2005-11-26 18:12:42 +0100 mjk: r40 2005-11-26 17:28:08 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Declaration - of \setindexpreamble fixed + * doc/: Declaration of \setindexpreamble fixed r39 2005-11-26 17:15:37 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: - Fließumgebung --> Gleitumgebung, Fließobjekt --> Gleitobjekt + * doc/: Fließumgebung --> Gleitumgebung, Fließobjekt --> Gleitobjekt r38 2005-11-26 15:45:37 +0100 mjk: @@ -11955,7 +12736,7 @@ r38 2005-11-26 15:45:37 +0100 mjk: r37 2005-11-26 13:00:57 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/introduction.tex: spaces fixed + * doc/: spaces fixed r36 2005-11-26 11:32:35 +0100 mjk: @@ -11968,22 +12749,20 @@ r35 2005-11-26 11:15:54 +0100 mjk: r34 2005-11-26 10:58:13 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrpage2.tex: Fix of version date + * doc/: Fix of version date r33 2005-11-25 11:48:07 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: Widmung prägnanter - gefasst + * doc/: Widmung prägnanter gefasst r32 2005-11-05 10:04:02 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: date fix + * doc/: date fix r31 2005-11-05 10:03:34 +0100 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Erklärung - zu smallheadings, normalheadings, bigheadings erweitert [Stephan - Hennig] + * doc/: Erklärung zu smallheadings, normalheadings, bigheadings + erweitert [Stephan Hennig] r30 2005-11-05 10:01:05 +0100 mjk: @@ -11992,8 +12771,7 @@ r30 2005-11-05 10:01:05 +0100 mjk: r29 2005-10-04 13:29:09 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Einige - ``"~'' gefolgt von Leerzeichen durch ``-'' ersetzt. + * doc/: Einige ``"~'' gefolgt von Leerzeichen durch ``-'' ersetzt. r28 2005-08-30 10:12:40 +0200 mjk: @@ -12011,18 +12789,15 @@ r25 2005-08-13 07:47:02 +0200 mjk: r24 2005-08-12 17:04:01 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex: Explain before - Declaration not after + * doc/: Explain before Declaration not after r23 2005-08-12 16:58:46 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: Explain - before Declaration not after + * doc/: Explain before Declaration not after r22 2005-08-12 16:47:14 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/typearea.tex: Explain should not start - after Declaration but before + * doc/: Explain should not start after Declaration but before r21 2005-08-12 16:42:22 +0200 mjk: @@ -12035,8 +12810,8 @@ r20 2005-08-12 15:48:59 +0200 mjk: r19 2005-08-12 13:17:59 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/htmlsetup, doc/bin/, - doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: Generation of a html index file supported + * doc/, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl: Generation of a html index + file supported r18 2005-08-12 09:53:52 +0200 mjk: @@ -12054,18 +12829,12 @@ r16 2005-08-11 10:47:22 +0200 mjk: r15 2005-08-11 10:45:33 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex: \GuideCopyright - changed ("Bildschirm-Version") + * doc/: \GuideCopyright changed ("Bildschirm-Version") r14 2005-08-10 16:31:33 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/german/adrconvnote.tex, doc/german/scrpage2.tex, - doc/german/typearea.tex, doc/german/scrlfile.tex, - doc/german/introduction.tex, doc/german/scraddr.tex: \phantomsection - at Declaration environment not longer needed and used. Anchors are - more descriptive. + * doc/, doc/scrguide.cls: \phantomsection at Declaration environment + not longer needed and used. Anchors are more descriptive. r13 2005-08-09 17:18:30 +0200 mjk: @@ -12093,8 +12862,7 @@ r8 2005-08-09 14:50:53 +0200 mjk: r7 2005-08-09 14:50:08 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex: \AddSeeIndex - entries fixed + * doc/: \AddSeeIndex entries fixed r6 2005-08-09 14:49:44 +0200 mjk: @@ -12106,10 +12874,9 @@ r5 2005-08-09 14:49:12 +0200 mjk: r4 2005-07-27 09:43:44 +0200 mjk: - * doc/, doc/german/, doc/german/adrconvnote.tex: Initial subversion - import of KOMA-Script 3; see ChangeLog for version information prior - to 2005-07-25 12:14 and ChangeLog.2 for version information of - KOMA-Script < 2.91 + * doc/: Initial subversion import of KOMA-Script 3; see ChangeLog for + version information prior to 2005-07-25 12:14 and ChangeLog.2 for + version information of KOMA-Script < 2.91 r3 2005-07-27 09:41:23 +0200 mjk: @@ -12135,12 +12902,7 @@ r1 2005-07-25 12:19:51 +0200 mjk: .ignore, Makefile.cfg, scrlfile.dtx, scrkernel-basics.dtx, doc/, doc/scrguide.ist, doc/guide.bib, doc/Makefile, doc/guide.tex, doc/scrguide.cls, doc/plength.dtx, doc/Makefile.guide, - doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/german/, doc/german/scrlttr2.tex, - doc/german/Makefile, doc/german/guide-ngerman.tex, - doc/german/scrbookreportarticle.tex, doc/german/scrdatetime.tex, - doc/german/scrpage2.tex, doc/german/typearea.tex, - doc/german/scrlfile.tex, doc/german/introduction.tex, - doc/german/scraddr.tex, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genindex.pl: Initial + doc/Makefile.latexinit, doc/bin/, doc/bin/genindex.pl: Initial subversion import of KOMA-Script 3; see ChangeLog for version information prior to 2005-07-25 12:14 and ChangeLog.2 for version information of KOMA-Script < 2.91 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/Makefile.guide b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/Makefile.guide index f8debae21ce..f6e10d780c6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/Makefile.guide +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/Makefile.guide @@ -82,11 +82,22 @@ TEX_CHAPTERS = preface.tex introduction.tex \ $(TEX_APPENDICES) TEX_MISC = ../guide.tex ../linkalias.tex \ - common-0.tex common-1.tex common-2.tex common-3.tex \ - common-4.tex common-5.tex common-6.tex common-7.tex \ - common-8.tex common-9.tex \ - common-12.tex common-13.tex common-14.tex common-15.tex \ - common-20.tex common-21.tex + common-options.tex \ + common-compatibility.tex \ + common-draftmode.tex \ + common-typearea.tex \ + common-fontsize.tex \ + common-textmarkup.tex \ + common-parmarkup.tex \ + common-oddorevenpage.tex \ + common-interleafpage.tex \ + common-footnotes.tex \ + common-lists.tex \ + common-marginpar.tex \ + common-titles.tex \ + common-dictum.tex \ + common-headfootheight.tex \ + common-pagestylemanipulation.tex EXAMPLE_LETTER_DTX = scrlttr2examples.dtx diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl index a49935fd8df..c0f7be336ae 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/bin/genhtmlidx.pl @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+"$@"}' # ====================================================================== # genhtmlidx.pl -# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013 +# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 # # This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. # @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ eval 'exec perl -S $0 ${1+"$@"}' # This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. # ---------------------------------------------------------------------- # genhtmlidx.pl -# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013 +# Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 # # Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, # Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -81,36 +81,51 @@ while ( $auxfile=shift ) { open AUX,"<$auxfile" or die "Cannot read $auxfile!\n"; while (<AUX>) { my $line=$_; - if ( /^\\newlabel{desc:[^}]+}{{[^}]*}{([^}]*)}{[^}]*}{([^}]*)}/ ) { - my $anchor=$2; - my $page=$1; - my $entry; - if ( $anchor =~ /^([^.]+)\.([^.]+)\.([^.]+)$/ ) { - $entry = "$3.$page.$1.$2"; - if ( "$2" eq "option" ) { - push @option,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "cmd" ) { - push @macro,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "env" ) { - push @environment,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "plength" ) { - push @plength,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "variable" ) { - push @variable,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "pagestyle" ) { - push @pagestyle,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "counter" ) { - push @counter,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "floatstyle" ) { - push @floatstyle,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "fontelement" ) { - push @fontelement,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "package" ) { - push @file,$entry; - } elsif ( "$2" eq "length" ) { - push @length,$entry; - } else { - print STDERR "Unknown type $2!\n"; + if ( /^\\newlabel{(desc:[^}]+)}{(.*)}$/ ) { + my $label=$1; + my $refargs=$2; + if ( $refargs =~ /^{([^{}]*({((?:(?>[^{}]*)|(?1))*)})*)}{([^}]+)}(.*)$/ ) { + my $ref=$1; + my $page=$4; + my $rest=$5; + if ( $rest =~ /^{([^{}]*({((?:(?>[^{}]*)|(?1))*)})*)}{([^}]*)}{(.*)}$/ ) { + my $title=$1; + my $anchor=$4; + my $ignore=$5; +# print STDERR "ref=\"$ref\", page=\"$page\", title=\"$title\", anchor=\"$anchor\", ignore=\"$ignore\"\n"; + my $entry; + if ( $anchor =~ /^desc:([^.]+)\.([^.]+)\.([^.]+)$/ ) { + $entry = "$3.$page.$1.$2"; + if ( "$2" eq "option" ) { + my $i=$1; + if ( $3 =~ /^([^=]+)=(.+)$/ ) { + $entry = "$1.$page.$i.option"; + } + push @option,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "cmd" ) { + push @macro,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "env" ) { + push @environment,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "plength" ) { + push @plength,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "variable" ) { + push @variable,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "pagestyle" ) { + push @pagestyle,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "counter" ) { + push @counter,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "floatstyle" ) { + push @floatstyle,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "fontelement" ) { + push @fontelement,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "package" ) { + push @file,$entry; + } elsif ( "$2" eq "length" ) { + push @length,$entry; + } else { + print STDERR "Unknown type $2!\n"; + } + } } } } @@ -124,6 +139,9 @@ sub process { my $arrayref=shift; my @entries=sort { $a cmp $b } @$arrayref; my $entry=""; + my $lastpage=""; + my $lastlink=""; + my $pageprefix=""; if ( @entries > 0 ) { print "<h2><a name=\"$group\">$titles{$group}</a></h2>\n"; print "<ul>\n"; @@ -132,11 +150,17 @@ sub process { if ( $entry ne $1 ) { print "</li>\n" if ( $entry ne "" ); $entry=$1; + $lastpage=""; + $lastlink=""; + $pageprefix=""; print "<li><a name=\"$4.$entry\"></a><a href=\"\#$4.$entry\">$prefix$entry</a> --> "; - } else { - print ", "; } - print "<a href=\"$baselink\#$3.$4.$1\">$2</a>"; + if ( ( $lastlink ne "$3.$4.$1" ) || ( $lastpage ne "$2" ) ) { + print "$pageprefix<a href=\"$baselink\#desc:$3.$4.$1\">$2</a>"; + $lastlink="$3.$4.$1"; + $lastpage="$2"; + $pageprefix=", "; + } } @entries; print "</li>\n" if ( $entry ne "" ); print "</ul>\n"; diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/adrconvnote.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/adrconvnote.tex index 73e4906b786..e9b26afb6b7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/adrconvnote.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/adrconvnote.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % adrconvnote.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % adrconvnote.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,13 +45,15 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\ProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex}[2012/02/23 KOMA-Script guide (chapter: - adrconv)] +\KOMAProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (chapter: adrconv)] + \translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated german file: 2008/07/31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 -\chapter{Creating Address Files from a Address Database}% +\chapter{Creating Address Files from an Address Database}% \labelbase{addrconv}% \Index{address>file}% \Index{address>database}% @@ -64,7 +66,7 @@ possible from an address database in {\BibTeX} format to create address files compatible with the {\KOMAScript} letter class or with the package \Package{scraddr}. -\begin{lstlisting}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,morekeywords={@address}] +\begin{lstlisting}[morekeywords={@address}] @address{HMUS, name = {Carl McExample}, title = {Dr.}, diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/authorpart.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/authorpart.tex index bb13da3a52a..78be0e66a7c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/authorpart.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/authorpart.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % authorpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % authorpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-12.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 098dee059fd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-12.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,734 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-12.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-12.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-12.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Lists} -\seclabel{lists}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -What is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.lists} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\IfCommon{scrextend}{% - However, \Package{scrextend} does support only the environments - \Environment{labeling}, \Environment{addmargin} and - \Environment{addmargin*}. All the other list environments may be supported - and controlled by the used class.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{lists}% - -Both {\LaTeX} and the standard classes offer different environments for -lists. Though slightly changed or extended all these list are of course -offered in {\KOMAScript} as well. In general, all lists\,---\,even of different -kind\,---\,can be nested up to four levels. From a typographical view, -anything more would make no sense, as more than three levels can no longer be -easily perceived. The recommended\textnote{Hint!} procedure in such a case is -to split the large list into several smaller ones. - -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Because lists are standard elements of \LaTeX{} this section abandons on - examples. Nevertheless, you may find examples either in - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists} from \autopageref{sec:maincls.lists} or in - almost every introduction to \LaTeX.} - -\ifCommonscrextend\else -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{itemize}}\\ - \quad\Macro{item}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{itemize}\\ - \Macro{labelitemi}\\ - \Macro{labelitemii}\\ - \Macro{labelitemiii}\\ - \Macro{labelitemiv} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{itemize}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiv}% -The simplest form of a list is an \Environment{itemize} list. -\iffalse % Umbruckoptimierungstext -The users of a certain disliked word processing package often refer to -this form of a list as \emph{bulletpoints}. Presumably, these users -are unable to envisage that, depending on the level, a different -symbol from a large dot could be used to introduce each -point. % -\fi% -Depending on the level, {\KOMAScript} uses the following marks: -``{\labelitemi}'', ``{\labelitemii}'', ``{\labelitemiii}'' and -``{\labelitemiv}''. The definition of these symbols is specified in -the macros \Macro{labelitemi}, \Macro{labelitemii}, -\Macro{labelitemiii} and \Macro{labelitemiv}, all of which can be -redefined using \Macro{renewcommand}. Every item is introduced with -\Macro{item}.% -% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.itemize.example}% - You have a simple list which is nested in several levels. You write - for example: -\begin{lstcode} - \minisec{Vehicles} - \begin{itemize} - \item aeroplanes - \begin{itemize} - \item biplane - \item jets - \item transport planes - \begin{itemize} - \item single-engined - \begin{itemize} - \item jet-driven - \item propeller-driven - \end{itemize} - \item multi-engined - \end{itemize} - \item helicopters - \end{itemize} - \item automobiles - \begin{itemize} - \item racing cars - \item private cars - \item lorries - \end{itemize} - \item bicycles - \end{itemize} -\end{lstcode} - As output you get: - \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] - \minisec{Vehicles} - \begin{itemize} - \item aeroplanes - \begin{itemize} - \item biplanes - \item jets - \item transport planes - \begin{itemize} - \item single-engined - \begin{itemize} - \item jet-driven - \item propeller-driven - \end{itemize} - \item multi-engined - \end{itemize} - \item helicopters - \end{itemize} -% Falls fuer die Umbruchoptimierung erforderlich, kann die Liste -% beispielsweise so erweitert werden: -% \item motorcycles -% \begin{itemize} -% \item historically accurate -% \item futuristic, not real -% \end{itemize} - \item automobiles - \begin{itemize} - \item racing cars - \item private cars - \item lorries - \end{itemize} - \item bicycles - \end{itemize} - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example} -\fi% \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{itemize}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiv}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{enumerate}}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{enumerate}\\ - \Macro{theenumi}\\ - \Macro{theenumii}\\ - \Macro{theenumiii}\\ - \Macro{theenumiv}\\ - \Macro{labelenumi}\\ - \Macro{labelenumii}\\ - \Macro{labelenumiii}\\ - \Macro{labelenumiv} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{enumerate}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumiv}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiv}% -Another form of a list often used is a numbered list which is already -implemented by the {\LaTeX} kernel. Depending on the level, the -numbering\Index{numbering} uses the following characters: Arabic numbers, -small letters, small roman numerals, and capital letters. The kind of numbering -is defined with the macros \Macro{theenumi} down to \Macro{theenumiv}. The -output format is determined by the macros \Macro{labelenumi} to -\Macro{labelenumiv}. While the small letter of the second level is followed by -a round parenthesis, the values of all other levels are followed by a -dot. Every item is introduced with \Macro{item}.% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.enumerate.example}% - Replacing every occurrence of an \Environment{itemize} environment - with an \Environment{enumerate} environment in the example above we - get the following result: - \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] - \minisec{Vehicles} - \begin{enumerate} - \item aeroplanes - \begin{enumerate} - \item biplanes - \item jets - \item transport planes - \begin{enumerate} - \item single-engined - \begin{enumerate} - \item jet-driven\label{xmp:maincls.jets} - \item propeller-driven - \end{enumerate} - \item multi-engined - \end{enumerate} - \item helicopters - \end{enumerate} -% Wie oben: -% \item motorcycles -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item historically accurate -% \item futuristic, not real -% \end{enumerate} - \item automobiles - \begin{enumerate} - \item racing cars - \item private cars - \item lorries - \end{enumerate} - \item bicycles - \end{enumerate} - \end{ShowOutput} - Using \Macro{label} within a list you can set labels which are - referenced with \Macro{ref}. In the example above, a label was set - after the jet-driven, single-engined transport planes with - \Macro{label}\PParameter{xmp:jets}. The \Macro{ref} value is then - \ref{xmp:maincls.jets}. -\end{Example} -\fi% \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{enumerate}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumiv}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiv}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{description}}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\OParameter{keyword}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{description} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{description}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -A further list form is the description list. Its main use is the description -of several items. The item itself is an optional parameter in -\Macro{item}. The font\Index{font>style}\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% - which is responsible for emphasizing the item can be changed with the commands -\Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) for the element -\FontElement{descriptionlabel}\IndexFontElement{descriptionlabel} (see -\autoref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}). Default -setting is \Macro{sffamily}\linebreak[2]\Macro{bfseries}.% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.description.example}% - Instead of items in sans serif and bold, you want them printed in the - standard font in bold. Using -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{\normalfont\bfseries} -\end{lstcode} - you redefine the font accordingly. - - An example for a description list is the output of the page styles - listed in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}. The heavily - abbreviated source could be: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{description} - \item[empty] is the page style without any header or footer. - \item[plain] is the page style without headings. - \item[headings] is the page style with running headings. - \item[myheadings] is the page style for manual headings. - \end{description} -\end{lstcode} - This abbreviated version gives: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \begin{description} - \item[empty] is the page style without any header or footer. - \item[plain] is the page style without headings. - \item[headings] is the page style with running headings. - \item[myheadings] is the page style for manual headings. - \end{description} - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example} -\fi% \ifComminmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{description}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\fi % \ifCommonscrextend\else - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{labeling}}% - \OParameter{delimiter}\Parameter{widest pattern}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\OParameter{keyword}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{labeling} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{labeling}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -An additional form of a description list is only available in the -{\KOMAScript} classes% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ and the package \Package{scrextend}}: the -\Environment{labeling} environment. Unlike the -\Environment{description} environment, you can provide a pattern whose length -determines the indentation of all items. Furthermore, you can put an optional -\PName{delimiter} between the item and its description. The -font\Index{font>style}\ChangedAt{v3.01}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and - \Package{scrextend}}% - which is responsible for emphasizing the item and the separator can be changed -with the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) for the element -\FontElement{labelinglabel}\IndexFontElement{labelinglabel} and -\FontElement{labelingseparator}\IndexFontElement{labelingseparator} (see -\ifCommonscrextend -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText} -\else -\autoref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}% -\fi). -\ifCommonscrlttr\par\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.env.labeling.example}% - \IfCommon{maincls}{Slightly changing the example from the - \Environment{description} environment, we could write:}% - \IfCommon{scrextend}{A small example of a list like this may be written:}% -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} - \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} - \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} - \item[empty] - Page style without header and footer - \item[plain] - Page style for chapter beginnings without headings - \item[headings] - Page style for running headings - \item[myheadings] - Page style for manual headings - \end{labeling} -\end{lstcode} - As the result we get: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} - \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} - \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} - \item[empty] - Page style without header and footer - \item[plain] - Page style for chapter beginnings without headings - \item[headings] - Page style for running headings - \item[myheadings] - Page style for manual headings - \end{labeling} - \end{ShowOutput} - As can be seen in this example, a font changing command may be set - in the usual way. But if you do not want the font of the separator to - be changed in the same way as the font of the label, you have to set - the font of the separator as well. -\end{Example} -\fi% \ifCommonscrlttr \else -Originally, this environment was implemented for things like ``Precondition, -Assertion, Proof'', or ``Given, Required, Solution'' that are often used in -lecture hand-outs. By now this environment has found many different -applications. For example, the environment for examples in this guide was -defined with the \Environment{labeling} environment.% -% -\EndIndex{Env}{labeling}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% - - -\ifCommonscrextend\else -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{verse}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{verse} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{verse}% -Usually the \Environment{verse} environment is not perceived as a list -environment because you do not work with \Macro{item} -commands. Instead, fixed line breaks are used within the -\Environment{flushleft} environment. Yet internally in both the -standard classes as well as {\KOMAScript} it is indeed a list -environment. - -In general, the \Environment{verse} environment is used for -poems\Index{poems}. Lines are indented both left and -right. Individual lines of verse are ended by a fixed line break -\verb|\\|. Verses are set as paragraphs, separated by an empty -line. Often also \Macro{medskip}\IndexCmd{medskip} or -\Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} is used instead. To avoid a page -break at the end of a line of verse you could, as usual, insert \verb|\\*| -instead of \verb|\\|. -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.verse.example}% - As an example, the first lines of ``Little Red Riding Hood and the - Wolf'' by Roald Dahl: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - As soon as Wolf began to feel\\* - that he would like a decent meal,\\* - He went and knocked on Grandma's door.\\* - When Grandma opened it, she saw\\* - The sharp white teeth, the horrid grin,\\* - And Wolfie said, `May I come in?' - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - The result is as follows: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \begin{verse} - As soon as Wolf began to feel\\* - That he would like a decent meal,\\* - He went and knocked on Grandma's door.\\* - When Grandma opened it, she saw\\* - The sharp white teeth, the horrid grin,\\* - And Wolfie said, `May I come in?' - \end{verse} - \end{ShowOutput} - However, if you have very long lines of verse, for instance: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Both the philosopher and the house-owner - have always something to repair.\\ - \bigskip - Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you - that he has never lied. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - where a line break occurs within a line of verse: -\begin{ShowOutput} - \begin{verse} - Both the philosopher and the house-owner - have always something to repair.\\ - \bigskip - Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you - that he has never lied. - \end{verse} -\end{ShowOutput} - there \verb|\\*| can not prevent a page break occurring within a verse - at such a line break. To prevent such a page break, a - \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} would have to be inserted - somewhere in the first line: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Both the philosopher and the house-owner\nopagebreak - have always something to repair.\\ - \bigskip - Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you\nopagebreak - that he has never lied. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - - In the above example, \Macro{bigskip} was used to separate the lines - of verse. -\end{Example} -\fi % \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{verse}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quote}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quote}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quotation}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quotation} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quote}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quotation}% -These two environments are also list environments and can be found -both in the standard and the {\KOMAScript} classes. Both environments -use justified text which is indented both on the left and right side. -Usually they are used to separate long citations\Index{citations} from -the main text. The difference between these two lies in the manner in -which paragraphs are typeset. While \Environment{quote} paragraphs are -highlighted by vertical space, in \Environment{quotation} paragraphs -the first line is indented. This is also true for the first line of a -\Environment{quotation} environment. To prevent indentation you have -to insert a \Macro{noindent} command\IndexCmd{noindent} before the -text. -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.quote.example}% - You want to highlight a short anecdote. You write the following - \Environment{quotation} environment for this: - % -\begin{lstcode} - A small example for a short anecdote: - \begin{quotation} - The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was - calling; - - Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. - ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! - Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. - This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances - west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' - - Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. - I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. - Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' - \end{quotation} -\end{lstcode} - The result is: - \begin{ShowOutput} - A small example for a short anecdote: - \begin{quotation} - The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was - calling; - - Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. - ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! - Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. - This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances - west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' - - Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. - I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. - Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' - \end{quotation} - \end{ShowOutput} - % - Using a \Environment{quote} environment instead you get: - % - \begin{ShowOutput} - A small example for a short anecdote: - \begin{quote}\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt} - The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was - calling; - - Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. - ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! - Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. - This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances - west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' - - Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. - I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. - Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' - \end{quote} - \end{ShowOutput} - % -\end{Example} -\fi % \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{quote}% -\EndIndex{Env}{quotation}% -\fi % \ifCommonscrextend\else - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{addmargin}}% - \OParameter{left indentation}\Parameter{indentation}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{addmargin}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{addmargin*}}% - \OParameter{inner indentation}\Parameter{indentation}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{addmargin*} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{addmargin}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{addmargin*}% -Similar to \Environment{quote} and \Environment{quotation}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ which are available at the standard classes and also the - \KOMAScript{} classes}% -, the \Environment{addmargin} environment changes the margin\Index{margin}. -In contrast to the first two environments, with \Environment{addmargin} the -user can set the width of the indentation. Besides this, this environment does -not change the indentation of the first line nor the vertical spacing between -paragraphs. - -If only the obligatory argument \PName{indentation} is given, both the -left and right margin are expanded by this value. If the optional -argument \PName{left indentation} is given as well, then at the left -margin the value \PName{left indentation} is used instead of -\PName{indentation}. - -The starred \Environment{addmargin*} only differs from the normal -version in a two-sided layout. Furthermore, the difference only occurs -if the optional argument \PName{inner indentation} is used. In this -case this value \PName{inner indentation} is added to the normal inner -indentation. For right-hand pages this is the left margin, for -left-hand pages the right margin. Then the value of -\PName{indentation} determines the width of the opposite margin. - -Both versions of this environment take also negative values for all -parameters. This has the effect of expanding the environment into the -margin. -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.addmargin.example}% -\begin{lstcode} - \newenvironment{SourceCodeFrame}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% - }{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% - } -\end{lstcode} - If you now put your source code in such an environment it will show - up as: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \newenvironment{SourceCodeFrame}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% - }{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% - } - You define yourself the following environment: - \begin{SourceCodeFrame} -\begin{lstcode} -\newenvironment{\SourceCodeFrame}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% -}{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% -} -\end{lstcode} - \end{SourceCodeFrame} - This may be feasible or not. In any case it shows the usage of this - environment. - \end{ShowOutput} - The optional argument of the \Environment{addmargin*} environment - makes sure that the inner margin is extended by 1\Unit{em}. In turn - the outer margin is decreased by 1\Unit{em}. The result is a shift - by 1\Unit{em} to the outside. Instead of \PValue{1em} you can of - course use a length, for example, \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}. -\end{Example} - -Whether a page is going to be on the left or right side -of the book can not be determined for certain in the first {\LaTeX} -run. For details please refer to the explanation of the commands -\Macro{ifthispageodd} (\autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.oddOrEven}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.ifthispageodd}) and \Macro{ifthispagewasodd} -(\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd}). - -\begin{Explain} - There may be several questions about coexistence of lists and - paragraphs. Because of this additional information may be found at the - description of option \Option{parskip} in - \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.parskip}. Also at the expert part, - in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.env.addmargin*}, you may find additional - information about page breaks inside of \Environment{addmargin*}.% -\end{Explain}% -\fi% \ifCommonscrlttr\else -% -\EndIndex{Env}{addmargin}% -\EndIndex{Env}{addmargin*}% -% -\EndIndex{}{lists} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-14.tex deleted file mode 100644 index b1cbba9af41..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-14.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,649 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-14.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-14.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-14.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - -\section{Document Titles} -\seclabel{titlepage}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -It applies, mutatis mutandis, what is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}. -\IfCommon{scrextend}{But there's a difference:} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{title}% -\BeginIndex{}{document>title}% - -%\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\looseness=1 }% Umbruchoptimierung -In general we distinguish two kinds of document titles. First known are title -pages. In this case the document title will be placed together with additional -document information, like the author, on a page of its own. Besides the main -title page, several further title pages may exist, like the half-title or -bastard title, publisher data, dedication, or similar. The second known kind -of document title is the in-page title. In this case, the document title is -placed at the top of a page and specially emphasized, and may be accompanied -by some additional information too, but it will be followed by more material -in the same page, for instance by an abstract, or the table of contents, or -even a section. -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - -\IfCommon{scrextend}{% - The\textnote{Attention!} document title capabilities of \Package{scrextend} - are part of the optional, advanced features. Therfore they are only - available, if \OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} has been selected while - loading the package (see \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, - \autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}).} -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Beyond that \Package{scrextend} cannot be used with a \KOMAScript{} -class together. Because of this -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} -\end{lstcode} -must be replaced by -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} -\end{lstcode} -at all examples from \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, if \Package{scrextend} -should be used. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{titlepage}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}}% -Using \Macro{maketitle} (see \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.maketitle}), this option\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} switches between document title pages\Index{title>pages} -and in-page title\Index{title>in-page}. For \PName{simple switch}, any value from -\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} may be used. - -The option -\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}} -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{or \Option{titlepage} }makes {\LaTeX} use separate -pages for the titles. Command \Macro{maketitle} sets these pages inside a -\Environment{titlepage} environment and the pages normally have neither header -nor footer. In comparison with standard {\LaTeX}, {\KOMAScript} expands the -handling of the titles significantly. - -The option -\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}} -specifies that an \emph{in-page} title is used. This means that the title is -specially emphasized, but it may be followed by more material on the same -page, for instance by an abstract or a section.% -\EndIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PName{simple switch}}% - -The third choice,\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} -\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% -\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}} does not only select title -pages. It additionally prints the first title page of -\Macro{maketitle}\IndexCmd{maketitle}, this is either the extra title or the -main title, as a cover\Index{cover} page. Every other setting of option -\Option{titlepage} would cancel this setting. The margins\important{% - \Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpagerightmargin}} of the cover page are given by -\Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagetopmargin}, -\Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagebottommargin}, -\Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpageleftmargin} und -\Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagerightmargin}. The -defaults of these depend on the lengths -\Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} and -\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} and can be changed using -\Macro{renewcommand}. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{The default of classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} - is usage of title pages. Class \Class{scrartcl}, on the other hand, uses - in-page titles as default.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{The default depends on the used class and - \Package{scrextend} handles it compatible to the standard class. If a class - does not set up a comparable default, in-page title will be used.}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PName{simple switch}} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{titlepage}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{titlepage} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{titlepage}% -With the standard classes and with {\KOMAScript}, all title pages are defined -in a special environment, the \Environment{titlepage} environment. This -environment always starts a new page\,---\,in the two-sided layout a new right -page\,---\,and in single column mode. For this page, the style is changed by -\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty}, so that neither page number nor -running heading are output. At the end of the environment the page is -automatically shipped out. Should you not be able to use the automatic layout -of the title pages provided by \Macro{maketitle}, that will be described next; -it is advisable to design a new one with the help of this environment. - - -\begin{Example} - Assume you want a title page on which only the word ``Me'' stands at - the top on the left, as large as possible and in bold\,---\,no - author, no date, nothing else. The following document creates just - that: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \begin{titlepage} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{titlepage} - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \begin{titlepage} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{titlepage} - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi -It's simple, isn't it? -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Env}{titlepage} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{maketitle}\OParameter{page number} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{maketitle}% -While the the standard classes produce at least one title page that may have -the three items title, author, and date, with {\KOMAScript} the -\Macro{maketitle} command can produce up to six pages. In contrast to the -standard classes, the \Macro{maketitle} macro in {\KOMAScript} accepts an -optional numeric argument. If it is used, this number is made the page number -of the first title page. However, this page number is not output, but affects -only the numbering. You should choose an odd number, because otherwise the -whole count gets mixed up. In my opinion there are only two meaningful -applications for the optional argument. On the one hand, one could give to the -half-title\Index[indexmain]{half-title} the logical page number \(-\)1 in -order to give the full title page the number 1. On the other hand, it could be -used to start at a higher page number, for instance, 3, 5, or 7, to accommodate -other title pages added by the publishing house. The optional argument is -ignored for \emph{in-page} titles. However, the page style of such a title -page can be changed by redefining the \Macro{titlepagestyle} macro. For that -see \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}. - -The following commands do not lead immediately to the ship-out of the -titles. The typesetting and ship-out of the title pages are always done by -\Macro{maketitle}. By the way, you should note that \Macro{maketitle} should -not be used inside a \Environment{titlepage} -environment. Like\textnote{Attention!} shown in the examples, one should use -either \Macro{maketitle} or \Environment{titlepage} only, but not both. - -The commands explained below only define the contents of the title -pages. Because of this, they have to be used before \Macro{maketitle}. It is, -however, not necessary and, when using, e.\,g., the \Package{babel} -package\IndexPackage{babel}, not recommended to use these in the preamble -before \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} (see \cite{package:babel}). Examples -can be found at the end of this section. - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{extratitle}\Parameter{half-title} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{extratitle}% -\begin{Explain}% - In earlier times the inner book was often not protected from dirt by a cover. - This task was then taken over by the first page of the book which - carried mostly a shortened title called the \emph{half-title}. - Nowadays the extra page is often applied before the real full title - and contains information about the publisher, series number and similar - information. -\end{Explain} -With {\KOMAScript} it is possible to include a page before the real -title page. The \PName{half-title} can be arbitrary text\,---\,even -several paragraphs. The contents of the \PName {half-title} are output -by {\KOMAScript} without additional formatting. Their organisation is -completely left to the user. The back of the half-title remains empty. -The half-title has its own title page even when \emph{in-page} titles -are used. The output of the half-title defined with \Macro{extratitle} -takes place as part of the titles produced by \Macro{maketitle}. - -\begin{Example} - Let's go back to the previous example and assume - that the spartan ``Me'' is the half-title. The full title should - still follow the half-title. One can proceed as follows: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge Me}} - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else - \begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{% - \textbf{\Huge Me}% - } - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} - \end{lstcode} -\fi - You can center the half-title horizontally and put it a little lower down - the page: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\vspace*{4\baselineskip} - \begin{center}\textbf{\Huge Me}\end{center}} - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else - \begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{% - \vspace*{4\baselineskip} - \begin{center} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{center}% - } - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} - \end{lstcode} - \fi% - The command\textnote{Attention!} \Macro{title} is necessary in order to make - the examples above work correctly. It is explained next. -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{extratitle} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{titlehead}\Parameter{title head}\\ - \Macro{subject}\Parameter{subject}\\ - \Macro{title}\Parameter{title}\\ - \Macro{subtitle}\Parameter{subtitle}\\ - \Macro{author}\Parameter{author}\\ - \Macro{date}\Parameter{date}\\ - \Macro{publishers}\Parameter{publisher}\\ - \Macro{and}\\ - \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{footnote} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subject}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{title}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subtitle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{author}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{date}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{publishers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{and}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thanks}% -The contents of the full title page are defined by seven elements. The output -of the full title page occurs as part of the title pages of \Macro{maketitle}, -whereas the now listed elements only define the corresponding elements. - -The\important{\Macro{titlehead}} -\PName{title head}\Index[indexmain]{title>head} is defined with the command -\Macro{titlehead}. It is typeset in regular justification and full width at -the top of the page. It can be freely designed by the user. - -The\important{\Macro{subject}} \PName{subject}\Index[indexmain]{subject} is -output immediately above the \PName{title}. - -The\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{title} is output with a very large font -size. Beside all other element the font size\textnote{Attention!} is, -however, not affected by the font switching element \FontElement{title} (see -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}). - -The\important{\Macro{subtitle}} -\PName{subtitle}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} is set just below the title. - -Below\important{\Macro{author}} the \PName{subtitle} appears the -\PName{author}\Index[indexmain]{author}. Several authors can be -specified in the argument of \Macro{author}. They should be separated -by \Macro{and}. - -Below\important{\Macro{date}} the author or authors appears the -date\Index{date}. The default value is the present date, as produced by -\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}. The \Macro{date} command accepts arbitrary -information\,---\,even an empty argument. - -Finally\important{\Macro{publishers}} comes the -\PName{publisher}\Index[indexmain]{publisher}. Of course this command can also -be used for any other information of little importance. If necessary, the -\Macro{parbox} command can be used to typeset this information over the full -page width like a regular paragraph instead of centering it. Then it is to be -considered equivalent to the title head. However, note that this field is put -above any existing footnotes. - -Footnotes\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{footnotes} on the title page are -produced not with \Macro{footnote}, but with \Macro{thanks}. They serve -typically for notes associated with the authors. Symbols are used as footnote -markers instead of numbers. Note\textnote{Attention!}, that \Macro{thanks} has -to be used inside the argument of another command, e.\,g., at the argument -\PName{author} of the command \Macro{author}. - -While\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} printing the title elements the -equal named font switching elements will be used for all them. The defaults, -that may be found in \autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}, % -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}, }% -may be changed using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -\Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}). \IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{table} -% \centering - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% -% \caption - \begin{captionbeside} - [{Font defaults for the elements of the title}] - {\label{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% - Font defaults for the elements of the title} - [l] - \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} - \toprule - Element name & Default \\ - \midrule - \FontElement{author} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{date} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{dedication} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{publishers} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{subject} & - \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{subtitle} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{large} \\ - \FontElement{title} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ - \FontElement{titlehead} & \\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} -\end{table}} - -With the exception of \PName{titlehead} and possible footnotes, all -the items are centered horizontally. The information is summarised in -\autoref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}}% -. -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{table} -% \centering - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% -% \caption - \begin{captionbeside}[Main title]{% - Font and horizontal positioning of the - elements in the main title page in the order of their vertical - position from top to bottom when typeset with \Macro{maketitle}} - [l] - \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.85\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung - \begin{tabular}[t]{llll} - \toprule - Element & Command & Font & Orientation \\ - \midrule - Title head & \Macro{titlehead} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{titlehead} & justified \\ - Subject & \Macro{subject} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{subject} & centered \\ - Title & \Macro{title} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{huge} & centered \\ - Subtitle & \Macro{subtitle} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{subtitle} & centered \\ - Authors & \Macro{author} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{author} & centered \\ - Date & \Macro{date} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{date} & centered \\ - Publishers & \Macro{publishers} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{publishers} & centered \\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:maincls.mainTitle} - \end{table}} -Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that for the main title \Macro{huge} will be -used after the font switching element \Macro{title}. So you cannot change the -size of the main title using \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont}. - -\begin{Example} - Assume you are writing a dissertation. The title page should have - the university's name and address at the top, flush left, and the - semester, flush right. As usual, a title is to be used, including - author and delivery date. - The adviser must also be indicated, together with the fact that the - document is a dissertation. This can be obtained as follows: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage[english]{babel} - \begin{document} - \titlehead{{\Large Unseen University - \hfill SS~2002\\} - Higher Analytical Institute\\ - Mythological Rd\\ - 34567 Etherworld} - \subject{Dissertation} - \title{Digital space simulation with the DSP\,56004} - \subtitle{Short but sweet?} - \author{Fuzzy George} - \date{30. February 2002} - \publishers{Adviser Prof. John Eccentric Doe} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \titlehead{{\Large Unseen University - \hfill SS~2002\\} - Higher Analytical Institute\\ - Mythological Rd\\ - 34567 Etherworld} - \subject{Dissertation} - \title{Digital space simulation with the DSP\,56004} - \subtitle{Short but sweet?} - \author{Fuzzy George} - \date{30. February 2002} - \publishers{Adviser Prof. John Eccentric Doe} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi -\end{Example} - - -\begin{Explain} - A frequent misunderstanding concerns the role of the full title page. It is - often erroneously assumed that the cover\Index{cover} or dust cover is - meant. Therefore, it is frequently expected that the title page does not - follow the normal page layout, but has equally large left and right margins. - - However, if one takes a book and opens it, one notices very quickly at least - one title page under the cover within the so-called inner book. Precisely - these title pages are produced by \Macro{maketitle}. - - As is the case with the half-title, the full title page belongs to the inner - book, and therefore should have the same page layout as the rest of the - document. A cover is actually something that should be created in a - separate document. The cover often has a very individual format. It can also - be designed with the help of a graphics or DTP program. A separate document - should also be used because the cover will be printed on a different medium, - possibly cardboard, and possibly with another printer. - - Nevertheless, since \KOMAScript~3.12 the first title page of - \Macro{maketitle} can be printed as a cover page with different margins. For - more information about this see the description of option - \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% - \IndexOption{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}} on \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.option.titlepage}. -\end{Explain} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subject}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{title}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subtitle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{author}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{date}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{publishers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{and}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thanks}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{titlebackhead}\\ - \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{titlebackfoot} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{uppertitleback}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lowertitleback}% -% -With the standard classes, the back of the title page of a double-side print -is left empty. However, with {\KOMAScript} the back of the full title page -can be used for other information. Exactly two elements which the user can -freely format are recognized: \PName -{titlebackhead}\Index{title>back}\Index{title>rear side}\Index{title>flipside} -and \PName {titlebackfoot}. The head can reach up to the foot and vice -versa. \iffree{If one takes this manual as an example, the exclusion of - liability was set with the help of the \Macro{uppertitleback} command.}{The - publishers information of this book. e.\,g., could have been set either with - \Macro{uppertitleback} or \Macro{lowertitleback}.}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{uppertitleback}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lowertitleback}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dedication}\Parameter{dedication} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dedication}% -{\KOMAScript} provides a page for dedications. The -dedication\Index{dedication} is centered and uses a slightly larger -type size. The back is empty like the back page of the half-title. -The dedication page is produced by \Macro{maketitle} and must -therefore be defined before this command is issued. - -\begin{Example} - This time assume that you have written a poetry book and you want to - dedicate it to your wife. A solution would look like this: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage[english]{babel} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge In Love}} - \title{In Love} - \author{Prince Ironheart} - \date{1412} - \lowertitleback{This poem book was set with% - the help of {\KOMAScript} and {\LaTeX}} - \uppertitleback{Selfmockery Publishers} - \dedication{To my treasure hazel-hen\\ - in eternal love\\ - from your dormouse.} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \usepackage[english]{babel} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge In Love}} - \title{In Love} - \author{Prince Ironheart} - \date{1412} - \lowertitleback{This poem book was set with% - the help of {\KOMAScript} and {\LaTeX}} - \uppertitleback{Selfmockery Publishers} - \dedication{To my treasure hazel-hen\\ - in eternal love\\ - from your dormouse.} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi - Please use your own favorite pet names. -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dedication}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{maketitle}% -% -\EndIndex{}{document>title}% -\EndIndex{}{title} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-15.tex deleted file mode 100644 index e16de0d64d9..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-15.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,245 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-15.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-15.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-15.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Dicta} -\seclabel{dictum}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -It applies, mutatis mutandis, what is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}. -\IfCommon{scrextend}{% - However, \Package{scrextend} does not support the commands - \Macro{setchapterpreamble} and \Macro{setpartpreamble}. You should read - the manual of the used class, if you want to know, if that class does - support similar commands.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{smart slogan}% -\BeginIndex{}{dictum}% -\BeginIndex{}{excerpt}% - -Sometimes you may find a dictum, a kind of smart slogan or excerpt, often ragged -left above or below the heading of a chapter or section. The text and the -source of the slogan often use special styles. - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dictum}\OParameter{author}\Parameter{dictum}\\ - \Macro{dictumwidth}\\ - \Macro{dictumauthorformat}\Parameter{author}\\ - \Macro{dictumrule}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictum}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictumtext}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictum}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumauthorformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumrule}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictum}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumtext}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumauthor}% -The command \Macro{dictum} inserts such a dictum. -\IfCommon{maincls}{This\textnote{Hint!} macro can be used as obligatory - argument of either the command \Macro{setchapterpreamble} or - \Macro{setpartpreamble}. However, this is not obligatory.\par}% -The dictum together with an optional \PName{author} is inserted in a -\Macro{parbox}\IndexCmd{parbox} (see \cite{latex:usrguide}) of width -\Macro{dictumwidth}. Yet \Macro{dictumwidth} is not a length which can be set -with \Macro{setlength}. It is a macro that can be redefined using -\Macro{renewcommand}. Default setting is \verb;0.3333\textwidth;, which is a -third of the textwidth. The box itself is positioned with the command -\Macro{raggeddictum}. Default here is \Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, -that is, right justified. The command \Macro{raggeddictum} can be redefined -using \Macro{renewcommand}. - -Within the box the \PName{dictum} is set using \Macro{raggeddictumtext}. -Default setting is \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright}, that is, left -justified. Similarly to \Macro{raggeddictum} this can be redefined with -\Macro{renewcommand}. The output uses the default font setting for the -element \FontElement{dictumtext}, which can be changed with the commands -\Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}). Default settings are listed in -\autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}}% -. - -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{table} -% \centering% - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% -% \caption - \begin{captionbeside}{Default settings for the elements of a dictum} - [l] - \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} - \toprule - Element & Default \\ - \midrule - \FontElement{dictumtext} & - \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{small}\\ - \FontElement{dictumauthor} & - \Macro{itshape}\\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:maincls.dictumfont} -\end{table} -\fi - -If there is an \PName{author} name, it is separated from the \PName{dictum} by -a rule to the full width of the -\Macro{parbox}. This\IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{scrextend}}} rule is defined -as vertical object to command \Macro{dictumrule}: -% Satzkorrektur listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\dictumrule}{\vskip-1ex\hrulefill\par} -\end{lstcode} - -The alignment is defined with \Macro{raggeddictumauthor}. Default is -\Macro{raggedleft}. This command can also be redefined using -\Macro{renewcommand}. The format of the output is defined with -\Macro{dictumauthorformat}. This macro expects the \Macro{author} as -argument. As default \Macro{dictumauthorformat} is defined as: -% Satzkorrektur listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\dictumauthorformat}[1]{(#1)} -\end{lstcode} -Thus the \PName{author} is set enclosed in rounded parentheses. For -the element \FontElement{dictumauthor}, a different font than for the -element \FontElement{dictumtext} can be defined. Default settings are -listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Changes can be made using -the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}).% -% -\ifCommonmaincls - -If \Macro{dictum} is used within the macro \Macro{setchapterpreamble} -or \Macro{setpartpreamble} you have to take care of the following: the -horizontal positioning is always done with \Macro{raggeddictum}. -Therefore, the optional argument for horizontal positioning which is -implemented for these two commands has no effect. \Macro{textwidth} is -not the width of the whole text corpus but the actually used text -width. If \Macro{dictumwidth} is set to \verb;.5\textwidth; and -\Macro{setchapterpreamble} has an optional width of -\verb;.5\textwidth; too, you will get a box with a width one quarter -of the text width. Therefore, if you use \Macro{dictum} it is -recommended to refrain from setting the optional width for -\Macro{setchapterpreamble} or \Macro{setpartpreamble}. - -If\textnote{Hint!} you have more than one dictum, one under another, you should -separate them by an additional vertical space, easily accomplished using the -command \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip}. - -\begin{Example} - You are writing a chapter on an aspect of weather forecasting. You - have come across an aphorism which you would like to place at the - beginning of the chapter beneath the heading. You could write: -\begin{lstcode} - \setchapterpreamble[u]{% - \dictum[Anonymous]{Forecasting is the art of saying - what is going to happen and then to explain - why it didn't.}} - \chapter{Weather forecasting} -\end{lstcode} - The output would look as follows: - \begin{ShowOutput} - {\usekomafont{disposition}\usekomafont{chapter}% - 17\enskip Weather forecasting\par} \vspace{\baselineskip} - \dictum[Anonymous]{Forecasting is the art of saying what is going to - happen and then to explain why it didn't.} - \end{ShowOutput} - - If you would rather the dictum span only a quarter of the text width - rather than one third you can redefine \Macro{dictumwidth}: -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\dictumwidth}{.25\textwidth} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} - -For a somewhat more sophisticated formatting of left- or right-aligned -paragraphs including hyphenation you can use the -package~\Package{ragged2e}~\cite{package:ragged2e}.% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictum}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumauthorformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumrule}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictum}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumtext}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumauthor}% -% -\EndIndex{}{excerpt}% -\EndIndex{}{smart slogan}% -\EndIndex{}{dictum}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-21.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-21.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 137605e486a..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-21.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,917 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-21.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-21.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Text that is common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ============================================================================ - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-21.tex} - [$Date: 2013-10-22 11:17:09 +0200 (Di, 22 Okt 2013) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: - Manipulation of defined page styles)] -\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert} - -% Date version of the translated file: 2015-06-18 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts}{} -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - -\section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} -\seclabel{pagestyle.content} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{% - Even though \Package{scrlayer} itself does not define a concrete page style - with content\,---\,the already mentioned page styles \Pagestyle{@everystyle@} - and \Pagestyle{empty} are initially defined without any level and so empty - and without content\,---\,, it provides some options and commands for the - manipulation of the contents.% -} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \hyperref[sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles]% - {Section~\ref*{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}} - states the predefined defaults for the page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} - and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} and how they can be adapted. But - information about the generation of, i.\,e., the running heads, the - manipulation of the widths of page head and footer, and how you can get - horizontal lines printed above or below the page head or footer are still - missing. Even though all these are features of package \Package{scrlayer}, - they will be described consecutively, because these basic features of - \Package{scrlayer} are also a fundamental part of the features of - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}.% -} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage-expert}{% - This section is an add-on to \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content}. It - describes features that may be to complicated for beginners.% -} - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts\else % ------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %------------------------------------------------ nur scrlayer-scrpage - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{automark}\OParameter{section level of the right mark}% - \Parameter{section level of the left mark}\\ - \Macro{automark*}\OParameter{section level of the right mark}% - \Parameter{section level of the left mark}\\ - \Macro{manualmark}\\ - \Option{automark}\\ - \KOption{autooneside}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \Option{manualmark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{manualmark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autooneside~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \begin{Explain} - With the \LaTeX{} standard classes or the \KOMAScript{} classes the - decision whether using automatic running heads\Index{running - heads>automatic}, or static or manual running heads\Index{running - heads>static}\Index{running heads>manual} would be done using either - page style \Pagestyle{headings} or \Pagestyle{myheadings}. Automatic - running heads are replications of a significant, characterizing text - snippet of the page mostly inside the page head, sometimes in the page - footer. - - The article classes\OnlyAt{\Class{article}\and \Class{scrartcl}} - \Class{article} or \Class{scrartcl} with page style - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} use the section heading, - which is either the mandatory or the optional argument of \Macro{section}, - for the automatic running head of single side documents. Double side - documents use this section heading as the \emph{left mark} and at once use - the subsection heading as the \emph{right mark}. The left mark will be - printed on left pages, which founds the name \emph{left mark}. The right - mark will be printed on right\,---\,in single side mode this means - every\,---\,page. The classes by default also remove the right mark - whenever they put the section heading into the left mark. - - The report and book classes \OnlyAt{\Class{report}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{book}\and \Class{scrbook}} start one level - higher. So they use the chapter heading to be the right mark in single - side layout. In double side layout they use the chapter heading to be the - left mark and the section heading to be the right mark. - - If you are using \Pagestyle{myheadings} instead of - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}, the marks in the page - header still exists and would be printed same like using - \Pagestyle{headings}. But section commands will not automatically set the - marks any longer. So you can fill them only using the commands - \Macro{markright}, \Macro{markleft}, and \Macro{markboth}, which will be - described later in this section. - \end{Explain}\par -} -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{In common classes the decision for a page - style\,---\,generally \Pagestyle{headings} and - \Pagestyle{myheading}\,---\,is also a decision to use either automatic or - manual running heads.} -This difference between those two page styles has been abolished by -\Package{scrpage2} and also by \Package{scrlayer}. Instead of distinguishing -between automatic and manual running head by the selection of a page style, -two new commands, \Macro{automark} and \Macro{manualmark}, are provided. - -The command \Macro{manualmark} switches to manual marks and deactivates the -automatic filling of the marks. In contrast to this \Macro{automark} and -\Macro{automark*} can be used to define, which section levels should be used -for the automatic mark filling. The optional argument is the \PName{section - level of the right mark}, the mandatory argument the \PName{section level of - the left mark}. The arguments always should be the name of a section level -like \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, -\PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph}, or \PValue{subparagraph}. - -Generally the higher level should be used for the left mark and the lower -level for the right mark. This is only a convention and not a need, but it -makes sense. - -Please note\textnote{Attention} that not every class provides running heads -for every section level. For example the standard classes never setup the -running head of \Macro{part}. The \KOMAScript{} classes provide running heads -for every section level. - -The difference in \Macro{automark} and \Macro{automark*} is, that -\Macro{automark} deletes all prior usages of \Macro{automark} or -\Macro{automark*}, while \Macro{automark*} changes only the behaviour of the -section levels of its arguments. So you can even build more complex cases. - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Assume you want the chapter heading to be the running head of even pages - and the section heading to be the running head of odd pages like this is - usual for books. But on odd pages you also want the chapter headings as a - running head as long as the first section appears. To do so, you first have - to load \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} and select page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. So you're document starts with: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} -\end{lstcode} - Next you will setup the chapter heading to be not only the left but also the - right mark: -\begin{lstcode} - \automark[chapter]{chapter} -\end{lstcode} - Then the section heading should also become a right mark: -\begin{lstcode} - \automark*[section]{} -\end{lstcode} - Here the star version is used, because the prior \Macro{automark} command - should be still valid. Additionally the mandatory argument for the - \PName{section level of the left mark} is empty, because this mark should be - unchanged. - - Now you just need some document contents to see a result: -\begin{lstcode} - \usepackage{lipsum} - \begin{document} - \chapter{Chapter Heading} - \lipsum[1-20] - \section{Section Heading} - \lipsum[21-40] - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - We once again use package \Package{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} to generate - some dummy text with command \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum}. The package is - really useful. - - If you'd test the example, you'd see, that the chapter start page does not - have a running head as usual. This is, because it automatically uses the - \Pagestyle{plain} page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. Pages~2--4 have - the chapter headings in the running head. After the section heading on - page~4 the running head of page~5 changes into this section heading. From - this page to the end the running head alternates between chapter and section - heading from page to page. -\end{Example} -\fi % ******************************************** Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * - -Instead of the commands you may also use the options \Option{manualmark} and -\Option{automark} to switch between manual and automatic running -heads. Thereby \Option{automark} always uses the default -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \automark[section]{chapter} -\end{lstcode} -for classes with \Macro{chapter} and -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \automark[subsection]{section} -\end{lstcode} -for classes without \Macro{chapter}. - -But normally in single side mode you do not want that the lower level -influences the right mark, you want the higher level, that -will fill only the left mark in double side layout, to be the running head of -all pages. The default option \Option{autooneside} corresponds to this -behaviour. The option understands the values for simple switches, that can be -found in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on -\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If you'd deactivate the option, in single -side layout the optional and the obligatory arguments of \Macro{automark} and -\Macro{automark*} will influence the running head again.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Assume you have a single sided report but want similar running heads as in - the book example before. The chapter headings should be used as a running - head as long as the first section appears. From the first section on, the - section heading should be used. So we modify the previous example a little - bit: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrreprt} - \usepackage[autooneside=false]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \automark[section]{chapter} - \usepackage{lipsum} - \begin{document} - \chapter{Chapter Heading} - \lipsum[1-20] - \section{Section Heading} - \lipsum[21-40] - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - You can see, that we do not need a \Macro{automark*} command in this - case. Please try the example also with \Option{autooneside} set to - \PValue{true} or remove the option and its value. You should find a - difference at the running head in the pages' head from page~4 on. -\end{Example} -\fi% ********************************************* Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * - -Please note\textnote{Attention!}, only loading the package does not have -any effect on the fact whether automatic or manual running heads are used or -what kind of section headings do fill up the marks. Only using an explicit -option \Option{automark} or \Option{manualmark} or one of the commands -\Macro{automark} or \Macro{manualmark} can reach a well defined state.% -\EndIndex{Option}{autooneside~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{manualmark}% -\EndIndex{Option}{automark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{automark}% -\fi % ******************************************** End only scrlayer-scrpage * - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ not scrlayer + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- only scrlayer - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{draft}\PName{simple switch} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{simple switch}}% -This \KOMAScript{} option understands the values for simple switches, that are -shown in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If -the option is active, all elements of the page styles will also show dimension -lines. This might be useful while draft editing. If the option has been set as -a global option (see the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass}), but you -do not want the dimension lines, you can deactivate them for the package only -using \OptionValue{draft}{false} as an optional argument of \Macro{usepackage} -while loading the package.% -\EndIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{string} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% -The automatic running head and only this uses \Macro{MakeMarkcase} for its -output. If the command has not been defined, e.\,g., by the class, while -loading \Package{scrlayer}, it would be defined with the default of outputting -the argument \PName{string} without changes. But the default can be change -either redefining \Macro{MakeMarkcase} or using option \Option{markcase}, that -\ifshortversion has been described in -\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}% -\else will be described next% -\fi% -. Depending on the setting the argument could, e.\,g., be converted into upper -or lower cases. -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% -\fi %***************************************************** End only scrlayer * - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ not scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %----------------------------------------------- only scrlayer-scrpage - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{markcase}\PName{Wert} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{markcase~=\PName{Wert}}% -As already mentioned with \Package{scrlayer} you may switch between manual and -automatic running heads. Using automatic running heads the corresponding marks -will be filled by the section heading commands. Some culture areas do convert -the running heads into upper case letters in opposite to the German -typographic habit. The \LaTeX{} standard classes do so by default. Package -\Package{scrlayer} optionally provides this too. Therefor you'd use option -\OptionValue{markcase}{upper} which results in a redefinition of -\Macro{MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{MakeMarkcase}, a command, that is -used by \Package{scrlayer} for automatic running heads. - -Unfortunately \LaTeX's command for upper case letter typesetting, -\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} results in an very inadequate -typesetting, because it neither uses letter spacing nor does it space -balancing. One reason for this behaviour might be, that a glyph analyzing -would be needed, to incorporate the letter shapes and their combination while -space balancing. Because of this \KOMAScript{} author suggests to abstain from -upper case letter typesetting for running heads. This could be achieved using -\OptionValue{markcase}{used}. Nevertheless, some classes would add -\Macro{MarkUppercase} or even \TeX{} command \Macro{uppercase} into the -running heads. For such cases option \OptionValue{markcase}{noupper} can be -used. This will also deactivate \Macro{MakeUppercase} and \Macro{uppercase} -inside the running heads. - -You can find all valid values for \Option{markcase} in -\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{, - \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}}.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage -\begin{table} - \centering - \caption[Possible values for option \Option{markcase}]{Possible values for - option \Option{markcase} to select upper/lower case letter typesetting in - automatic running heads}% - \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}% - \begin{desctabular} - \pventry{lower}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=lower}% - redefines \Macro{MakeMarkcase} to convert the automatic running heads - into lower case letters using \Macro{MakeLowercase} - (lower case typesetting).% - }% - \pventry{upper}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper}% - redefines \Macro{MakeMarkcase} to convert the automatic running heads - into upper case letters using \Macro{MakeUppercase} - (upper case typesetting).% - }% - \pventry{used}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used}% - redefines \Macro{MakeMarkcase} to use automatic running heads without - any case changes.% - }% - \entry{\PValue{ignoreuppercase}, \PValue{nouppercase}, - \PValue{ignoreupper}, - \PValue{noupper}}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}% - redefines not only \Macro{MakeMarkcase} but also locally to the running - heads \Macro{MakeUppercase} and \Macro{uppercase} to leave the automatic - running heads unchanged.% - }% - \end{desctabular} -\end{table} -\fi -\EndIndex{Option}{markcase~=\PName{Wert}}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{leftmark}\\ - \Macro{rightmark}\\ - \Macro{headmark}\\ - \Macro{pagemark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -If you want to differ from the predefined page styles, usually you need to -decide, where to place the marks' contents. With \Macro{leftmark} you can state -the contents of the left mark. - -Similar you can use \Macro{rightmark} to state the contents of the right -mark. For more information about some intricacies of this see the further -description of \Macro{rightmark} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark}. - -Somehow easier would be usage of \Macro{headmark}. This extension of -\Package{scrlayer} aliases either \Macro{leftmark} or \Macro{rightmark} -depending on whether the current page is even or odd. - -Strictly thought command \Macro{pagemark} is not involved by \TeX's mark -mechanism. It is only used to output a formatted page number. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -The font of element -\FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}} will be used for -the output. This can be changed using command \Macro{setkomafont} or -\Macro{addtokomafont} (see also \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}).% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Assume\label{example.scrlayer-scrpage.headmark} you want to use a left - aligned running head and right aligned page - number in the head of the pages of a document in single side layout. The - following minimal but working examples would do so: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrreprt} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \ihead{\headmark} - \ohead[\pagemark]{\pagemark} - \chead{} - \cfoot[]{} - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Here package \Package{blindtext}\IndexPackage{blindtext} with its command - \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} has been used to easily - generate content for an example document. - - Commands \Macro{ihead} and \Macro{ohead} have been used to place the wanted - marks. Although the page mark will be place not only to pages in page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} but using the optional argument also to pages in - page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. - - Because of both page styles already have marks in the middle of the page - head and page foot, those elements will be cleared using \Macro{chead} and - \Macro{cfoot} with empty arguments. Alternatively you'd use - \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} \emph{before} \Macro{ihead}. You will find a - description of this command in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}. -\end{Example} - -Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that the empty optional argument of -\Macro{cfoot} in the example above is not the same like omitting the optional -argument. Please try it out and have a look at the difference in the footer of -the first page.% -\else % --------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \par % - If you are interested in an example about usage of commands \Macro{headmark} - and \Macro{pagemark}, have a look into - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{example.scrlayer-scrpage.headmark}. The package - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} internally uses a lot of such features of - \Package{scrlayer}.% -\fi% ******************************************* Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -\ifnum\currentversionlt{3.16}\else\par - If all the mark features described above are not sufficient, experienced - users can find more of them on \IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark}}% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark}}. For example, you can find - there \Macro{leftfirstmark} and \Macro{rightbotmark}, which seem to be - useful for lexicon like documents.% -\fi -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{chaptermarkformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{paragraphmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphmarkformat} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmarkformat}% -Usually the \KOMAScript{} classes and package \Package{scrlayer} use these -commands internally to bring the section numbers into wanted form and -additionally they support the \Macro{autodot} mechanism of the \KOMAScript{} -classes. If wanted these commands may be redefined to get another form of -section numbers.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Assume you do not want section numbers but section heading text only in the - running head. So: -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{} -\end{lstcode} - would be a simple solution for this. -\end{Example} -\else % -------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \ See the example in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage.sectionmarkformat} for more - information.% -\fi % ***************************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partmarkformat}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{paragraphmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphmark}\Parameter{Text} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmark}% -Most classes use these commands to setup marks corresponding to the -section commands. Thereby the only argument is the text without the number of -the section heading, that should be used for the running head. For the number -simply the number of the current section level will be used, if the current -level uses numbers. - -Unfortunately\textnote{Attention!}, not all classes use such a command for -every section level. The standard classes for example do not call -\Macro{partmark}. The \KOMAScript{} classes support such commands for all -section levels and therefore also use \Macro{partmark}. - -If users redefine these commands, they should\textnote{Attention!} take care -to also use the counter \Counter{secnumdepth} for the test whether or not the -section level should output a number, even in the case the user -does not change counter \Counter{secnumdepth} himself, because packages and -classes may do so locally and rely on correct handling of -\Counter{secnumdepth}. - -However, package \Package{scrlayer} redefines these commands whenever you use -\Macro{automark} or \Macro{manualmark} or the corresponding options, to -activate or deactivate the wanted running heads.% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partmark}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markleft}\Parameter{left mark}\\ - \Macro{markright}\Parameter{right mark}\\ - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markleft}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -Independent of whether currently manual or automatic running heads are active, -you may change the contents of the \PName{left mark} or the \PName{right mark} -at any time using these commands. You should note, that the resulting contents -of \Macro{leftmark}\IndexCmd{leftmark} is the \PName{left - mark} of the last \Macro{markleft} or \Macro{markboth} command of the -current page. In opposite to this the resulting contents of -\Macro{rightmark}\IndexCmd{rightmark} is the \PName{right mark} of the first -\Macro{rightmark} or \Macro{markboth} command of the current page. - -If you are using manual running heads, the marks will stay valid until one of -the corresponding commands will be used again. If you are using automatic -running heads the marks can loose their validity with the next section heading -depending on the configuration of the automatism. - -You may also use these commands together with the star versions of the section -commands.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage % +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Assume you are using a preface with several pages just before the table of - contents, that should not have an entry at the table of contents - itself. Because of using a separation line at the page head, you want also a - running head for this preface: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \chapter*{Preface} - \markboth{Preface}{Preface} - \blindtext[20] - \tableofcontents - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - First of all this seems to produce the wanted result. But have a closer - look: In difference to the other running heads ``\texttt{Preface}'' is not in - upper case letters. But you can fix this easily: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \chapter*{Preface} - \markboth{\MakeMarkcase{Preface}}{\MakeMarkcase{Preface}} - \blindtext[20] - \tableofcontents - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Using command \Macro{MakeMarkcase} results in getting the same letter case - as for automatic running heads. - - Now, let's move command \Macro{tableofcontents} in front of the - preface. Let's remove the \Macro{markboth} command too. You'll realise, that - the preface now has the running head ``\texttt{CONTENTS}''. This is because - of a quirk of \Macro{chapter*} (see also \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} on - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*}). If in such cases the running head - should be removed, \Macro{markboth} with two empty arguments would be - useful: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \tableofcontents - \chapter*{Preface} - \markboth{}{} - \blindtext[20] - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} -\else % -------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \ You can find a detailed example about usage of \Macro{markboth} with - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage.markboth}. Package - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} is a kind of extension of \Package{scrlayer}.% -\fi % ***************************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markleft}% - -\fi %********************************************* End only scrlayer-scrpage * -\fi %*********************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts * - - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ auch scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %---------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage\else %---------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}\Parameter{name of the section level} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GenericMarkFormat}% -At the running head this command will be used by default for the formatting of -all section numbers below the subsection and with classes without -\Macro{chapter} also for the section level and the subsection level, if the -mark commands for those numbers have not been defined before loading -\Package{scrlayer}. Thereby the package uses \Macro{@seccntmarkformat} if such -a command has been defined, like the \KOMAScript{} classes do. Otherwise -\Macro{@seccntformat} will be used, which is provided by the \LaTeX{} -kernel. The expected, mandatory argument of the command is the \PName{name of - a section level}, i.\,e., \PValue{chapter} or \PValue{section} -\emph{without} the backslash prefix. - -You can change the default formatting of the numbers, that use this command, -by redefining only this single command. Classes can change the default -formatting also by defining this command.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts % ++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage-experts + -\begin{Example} - Assume\label{example:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.GenericMarkFormat} - you want the section numbers of all levels at the running head of - an article to be printed in white colour inside a black coloured box. Using - standard \LaTeX{} \Class{article} class, package \Package{scrlayer} defines - the number mark commands \Macro{sectionmarkformat} and - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} using \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}. So you need to - redefine only this single command: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{article} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{xcolor} - \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% - \colorbox{black}{\strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}} - \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% - \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}\enskip} - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - The colour has been done using package - \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}. See the package manual for more - information about this. Additionally a not visible strut has been - used. Every complete \LaTeX{} introduction should explain the related - command \Macro{strut}. A helper macro \Macro{numberbox} has been defined for - the formatting of the number within a box. In the redefinition of - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} this has been prefixed by - \Macro{protect} to protect it from expansion. This is necessary because - otherwise the upper case letter conversion of \Macro{MakeUppercase} that - will be used for the running head, would result in an ask for colours - ``\texttt{BLACK}'' and ``\texttt{WHITE}'' instead of ``\texttt{black}'' and - ``\texttt{white}'' and those colours are undefined. Alternatively you may - define \Macro{numberbox} using \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand*} instead of - \Macro{newcommand*} and then omit \Macro{protect} (see - \cite{latex:clsguide}). - - If you'd do the same with a \KOMAScript{} class or with one of the \LaTeX{} - standard classes \Class{book} or \Class{report}, you'd additionally have to - redefine \Macro{sectionmarkformat} and \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} - respectively \Macro{chaptermarkformat} and \Macro{sectionmarkformat} too, - because then these would not have been defined using - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{xcolor} - \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% - \colorbox{black}{\strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}} - \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% - \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}\enskip} - \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{\GenericMarkFormat{chapter}} - \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{\GenericMarkFormat{section}} - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} -\else % ------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts - - \par % - A detailed example about cooperation of command \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} - and the commands \Macro{sectionmarkformat} and \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} - that are described at \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.chaptermark} is shown in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.GenericMarkFormat}.% -\fi % ********************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts * -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GenericMarkFormat}% - -\ifnum\currentversionlt{3.16}\else -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{righttopmark}\\ - \Macro{rightbotmark}\\ - \Macro{rightfirstmark}\\ - \Macro{lefttopmark}\\ - \Macro{leftbotmark}\\ - \Macro{leftfirstmark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{righttopmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightbotmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightfirstmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefttopmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftbotmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftfirstmark}% -For page styles \LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} uses a bipartite -\TeX{} mark. Running heads can use the left part of that mark by -\Macro{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}}\IndexCmd{leftmark} and the right -part by -\Macro{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark}. Indeed, it -seems that it was suggested to use \Macro{leftmark} for the running head of -left, even pages and \Macro{rightmark} for the running head of right, odd -pages of double-sided documents. Within single-sided layouts the standard -classes even do not set the left part of the mark. - -\TeX{} itself knows three alternatives to make usage of a mark. The -\Macro{botmark} is the last valid mark of the page that has been build -last. If there has not been set any mark on the page, it is the last mark of the -already shipped out pages. \LaTeX{} command \Macro{leftmark} uses exactly this -mark. So it shows the left part of the last mark of the page. This is the same -like \Macro{leftbotmark}. In opposite to this \Macro{rightbotmark} shows the -right part of that mark. - -\Macro{firstmark} is the first mark of the page that has been build last. This -means the first mark, that has been set on the page. If there has not been set -any mark on the page, this is the last mark of the already shipped out -pages. \LaTeX{} command \Macro{rightmark} uses exaclty this mark. So it shows -the right part of the first mark of the page. This is the same like -\Macro{rightfirstmark}. In opposite to this \Macro{leftfirstmark} shows the -left part of that mark. - -\Macro{topmark} is the content of \Macro{botmark} before building the current -page. \LaTeX{} itself does not use it. Nevertheless, \Package{scrlayer} -provides \Macro{lefttopmark} to show the left part of it and -\Macro{righttopmark} to show the right part of it. - -Note\textnote{Attention!} that the left part and the right part of the mark -can be made all together only. Even if you use -\Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} to change only the right part, the left -part will be made again (unchanged). Accordingly in double-side mode using -page style -\Pagestyle{headings\important{\Pagestyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings}} -the higher section levels always make both parts. For example -\Macro{chaptermark} uses \Macro{markboth} with an empty right argument in this -case. This is the reason why \Macro{rightmark} or \Macro{rightfirstmark} -always shows an empty value on pages with chapter beginnings, even if there -was a \Macro{sectionmark} or \Macro{section} on the same page to make the -right part of the mark. - -Please note\textnote{Attention!} that using any of these commands to show the -left or right part of the mark as part of the page content could have -unexpected results. They are recommended to be used in the head or foot of a -page style only. So with \Package{scrlayer} they should be part of the -contents of a layer. But it does not matter whether or not a layer is -restricted to the background or the foreground. Both kind of layers are -shipped out after building the current page. - -If you need more information about the mark mechanism of \TeX, please have a -look at \cite[chapter~23]{knuth:texbook}. You will find, that marks are an -issue for real experts. So if the explanation above was at least more -confusing than illuminative: Please don't worry. -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftfirstmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftbotmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefttopmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightfirstmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{righttopmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightbotmark}% -\fi - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{@mkleft}\Parameter{left mark}\\ - \Macro{@mkright}\Parameter{right mark}\\ - \Macro{@mkdouble}\Parameter{mark}\\ - \Macro{@mkboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkleft}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkright}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkdouble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkboth}% -Sometimes inside classes and packages the marks for running heads should be -filled up only if automatic running heads are active (see option -\Option{automark} and command \Macro{automark} on -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark}). In the \LaTeX{} standard -classes only \Macro{@mkboth} has been used for this. This command is either -\Macro{@gobbletwo}, that simply destroys both mandatory arguments, or -\Macro{markboth}, a command that fills up the left and \PValue{left mark} and -the \PValue{right mark}. Packages like \Package{babel} also change -\Macro{\@mkboth}, i.\,e., to add language switching to the running head. - -But if a class or package author only wants to change either the \PName{left - mark} or the \PName{right mark} without the other one, a proper command is -missing. Package \Package{scrlayer} itself needs such commands for the -implementation of all cases of automatic running heads. So if command -\Macro{@mkleft} to fill up only the left mark or \Macro{@mkright} to fill up -only the right mark or \Macro{@mkdouble} to fill up both marks with the same -content is undefined while loading \Package{scrlayer}, the package will define -them. Thereby the actual definition of \Macro{@mkboth} will be used as an -indicator whether or not automatic running heads should be used. The new -commands will full up the marks only in the case of automatic running heads. - -Class and package authors can use these commands too, if they want to fill up -only one of the marks or both marks with the same content but only if -automatic running heads are activated. This condition is also the difference -to the commands \Macro{markleft}, \Macro{markright}, and \Macro{markboth}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkboth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkdouble}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkleft}% - -\fi %***************************************************** End only scrlayer * -\fi %***************************************************** End only scrlayer * - -\ifshortversion% -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{% - For more information about manipulation of the contents of page styles see - also \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} from - \autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}.% -}% -\fi - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" -%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex" -%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-5.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 9858c807568..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-5.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,763 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-5.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-5.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-5.tex} - [$Date: 2015-04-04 11:18:50 +0200 (Sat, 04 Apr 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015/04/04 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname -}{} -\expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage -\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname -\makeatother - - -\section{Text Markup} -\seclabel{textmarkup}% -\IgnoreThisfalse -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\ifCommonmaincls\IgnoreThisfalse\fi\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ short version (maincls) + -What is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\else %----------------------------------------- long version (not maincls) - -\BeginIndex{}{text>markup}% -\BeginIndex{}{font}% - -{\LaTeX} offers different possibilities for logical and direct -markup\Index{logical markup}\Index{markup} of text. -Selection of the -font family commands, as well as choosing the font size and width is -supported. More information about the standard font facilities may be found at -\cite{lshort}, \cite{latex:usrguide}, and \cite{latex:fntguide}. - - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage\else -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{textsuperscript}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{textsubscript}\Parameter{Text} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{textsubscript}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{textsuperscript}% -The \LaTeX-Kern already defines the command -\Macro{textsuperscript}\IndexCmd{textsuperscript} to -superscript\Index{text>superscript}\Index{superscript} text. Unfortunately, -{\LaTeX} itself does not offer a command to produce text in -subscript\Index{text>subscript}\Index{subscript} instead of -superscript\Index{text>superscript}\Index{superscript}. {\KOMAScript} -defines \Macro{textsubscript} for this purpose. % -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{You may find an example of usage at - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}.} -\IfCommon{scrextend}{You may find an example of usage at - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}.} -% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}% - You are writing a text on human metabolism. From time to time you - have to give some simple chemical formulas in which the numbers are - in subscript. For enabling logical markup you first define in the - document preamble or in a separate package: -\begin{lstcode} - \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} -\end{lstcode} - \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} - Using this you then write: -\begin{lstcode} - The cell produces its energy partly from reaction of \molec C6\molec - H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\Molec O{} and - \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has a quite - detrimental effect on the metabolism. -\end{lstcode} - The output looks as follows: - \begin{ShowOutput} - The cell produces its energy from reaction of \molec C6\molec - H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\molec O{} and - \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has a quite - detrimental effect on the metabolism. - \end{ShowOutput} - Some time later you decide that the chemical formulas should be - typeset in sans serif. Now you can see the advantages of using - logical markup. You only have the redefine the \Macro{molec} - command: -\begin{lstcode} - \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}} -\end{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\molec}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}} - Now the output in the whole document changes to: - \begin{ShowOutput} - The cell produces its energy partly from reaction of \molec - C6\molec H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\molec - O{} and \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has - a quite detrimental effect on the metabolism. - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example} -\iftrue -\begin{Explain} - In the example above, the notation ``\verb|\molec C6|'' is used. This - makes use of the fact that arguments consisting of only one - character do not have to be enclosed in parentheses. That is why - ``\verb|\molec C6|'' is similar to ``\verb|\molec{C}{6}|''. You - might already know this from indices or powers in mathematical - environments, such as ``\verb|$x^2$|'' instead of ``\verb|$x^{2}$|'' - for ``$x^2$''. -\end{Explain} -\else % vielleicht in einer spaeteren Auflage -F\"ur Experten ist in \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow}, -\autopageref{desc:experts.macroargs} dokumentiert, warum das Beispiel -funktioniert, obwohl teilweise die Argumente von \Macro{Molek} nicht in -geschweifte Klammern gesetzt wurden.% -\fi -\fi% \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{textsuperscript}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{textsubscript}% -\fi% \ifCommonscrlayerscrpage - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomafont}\Parameter{element}\Parameter{commands}\\ - \Macro{addtokomafont}\Parameter{element}\Parameter{commands}\\ - \Macro{usekomafont}\Parameter{element} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomafont}% -With\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} the help of the two commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -\Macro{addtokomafont}, it is possible to define the \PName{commands} that -change the characteristics of a given \PName{element}. Theoretically, all -possible statements including literal text could be used as \PName{commands}. -You should\textnote{Attention!}, however, absolutely limit yourself to those -statements that really switch only one font attribute. This will usually be -the commands \Macro{normalfont}, \Macro{rmfamily}, \Macro{sffamily}, -\Macro{ttfamily}, \Macro{mdseries}, \Macro{bfseries}, \Macro{upshape}, -\Macro{itshape}, \Macro{slshape}, and \Macro{scshape}, as well as the font -size commands \Macro{Huge}, \Macro{huge}, \Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{Large}, -\Macro{large}, \Macro{normalsize}, \Macro{small}, \Macro{footnotesize}, -\Macro{scriptsize}, and \Macro{tiny}. The description of these commands can be -found in \cite{lshort}, \cite{latex:usrguide}, or \cite{latex:fntguide}. Color -switching commands like \Macro{normalcolor} (see \cite{package:graphics} and -\cite{package:xcolor}) are also acceptable. The behavior when using other -commands, especially those that make redefinitions or generate output, is not -defined. Strange behavior is possible and does not represent a bug. - -The command \Macro{setkomafont } provides a font switching command with a -completely new definition. In contrast to this, the \Macro{addtokomafont} -command merely extends an existing definition. It is recommended to not use -both commands inside the document body, but only in the document preamble. -Usage examples can be found in the paragraphs on the corresponding element. -\fi %**************************************** End long version (not maincls) * -Names\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{, defaults,} and meanings of the individual -items are listed in % -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} -%, \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} -}% -. % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{However only the listed elements for the document title, - dicta, footnotes, and the \Environment{labeling} environment are - supported. Though element \FontElement{disposition} exists, it will also be - used for the document title only. This has been done for compatibility with - the \KOMAScript{} classes. }% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{The default values are shown in the - corresponding paragraphs.}% - -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ short version (maincls) + -\else %----------------------------------------- long version (not maincls) - -With command \Macro{usekomafont} the current font style may be changed into -the font style of the selected \PName{element}.% -\ifCommonmaincls %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ maincls only + -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.setkomafont.example}% - Assume that you want to use for the element \FontElement{captionlabel} the - same font specification that is used with - \FontElement{descriptionlabel}. This can be easily done with: -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{captionlabel}{% - \usekomafont{descriptionlabel}% - } -\end{lstcode} - You can find other examples in the paragraphs on each element. -\end{Example} - -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption{% - Elements whose type style can be changed with the {\KOMAScript} command - \Macro{setkomafont} or - \Macro{addtokomafont}\label{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}% - }{% - Elements whose type style can be changed (\emph{continuation})% - }% - \feentry{author}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - author of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{author} when \Macro{maketitle} will be used (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.author})}% - \feentry{caption}{text of a table or figure caption (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.caption})}% - \feentry{captionlabel}{label of a table or figure caption; used according to - the element \FontElement{caption} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.caption})}% - \feentry{chapter}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{chapter} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter})}% - \feentry{chapterentry}{% - table of contents entry of the sectional unit \Macro{chapter} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{chapterentrypagenumber}{% - page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit - \Macro{chapter}, variation on the element \FontElement{chapterentry} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{chapterprefix}{% - chapter number line at setting \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} or - \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix})}% - \feentry{date}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - date of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{date} when \Macro{maketitle} will be used (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.date})}% - \feentry{dedication}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - dedication page after the main title, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{dedication} when \Macro{maketitle} will be used (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dedication})}% - \feentry{descriptionlabel}{labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of - \Macro{item} in the \Environment{description} environment (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.description})}% - \feentry{dictum}{dictum, wise saying, or smart slogan (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dictum})}% - \feentry{dictumauthor}{author of a dictum, wise saying, or smart slogan; - used according to the element \FontElement{dictumtext} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dictum})}% - \feentry{dictumtext}{another name for \FontElement{dictum}}% - \feentry{disposition}{all sectional unit titles, i.\,e., the arguments of - \Macro{part} down to \Macro{subparagraph} and \Macro{minisec}, including - the title of the abstract; used before the element of the corresponding - unit (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.structure})}% - \feentry{footnote}{footnote text and marker (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotelabel}{mark of a footnote; used according to the element - \FontElement{footnote} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotereference}{footnote reference in the text (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnoterule}{% - horizontal rule\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} above the footnotes at the end of the text area (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% - \feentry{labelinglabel}{labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of - \Macro{item} in the \Environment{labeling} environment (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{labelingseparator}{separator, i.\,e., the optional argument of the - \Environment{labeling} environment; used according to the element - \FontElement{labelinglabel} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{minisec}{title of \Macro{minisec} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.minisec})}% - \feentry{pagefoot}{only used if package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} has been - loaded (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% - \feentry{pagehead}{another name for \FontElement{pageheadfoot}}% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{the head of a page, but also the foot of a page (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} ab \autopageref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% - \feentry{pagenumber}{page number in the header or footer (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% - \feentry{pagination}{another name for \FontElement{pagenumber}}% - \feentry{paragraph}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{paragraph} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph})}% - \feentry{part}{title of the \Macro{part} sectional unit, without the line - containing the part number (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part})}% - \feentry{partentry}{% - table of contents entry of the sectional unit \Macro{part} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{partentrypagenumber}{% - Page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit - \Macro{part} variation on the element \FontElement{partentry} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{partnumber}{line containing the part number in a title of the - sectional unit \Macro{part} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part})}% - \feentry{publishers}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - publishers of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{publishers} when \Macro{maketitle} will be used (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.publishers})}% - \feentry{section}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{section} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.section})}% - \feentry{sectionentry}{% - table of contents entry of sectional unit \Macro{section} (only available - in \Class{scrartcl}, see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{sectionentrypagenumber}{% - page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit - \Macro{section}, variation on element \FontElement{sectionentry} (only - available in \Class{scrartcl, see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents}})}% - \feentry{sectioning}{another name for \FontElement{disposition}}% - \feentry{subject}{% - categorization of the document, i.\,e., the argument of \Macro{subject} on - the main title page (see \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subject})}% - \feentry{subparagraph}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{subparagraph} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph})}% - \feentry{subsection}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{subsection} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subsection})}% - \feentry{subsubsection}{title of the sectional unit \Macro{subsubsection} - (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection})}% - \feentry{subtitle}{% - subtitle of the document, i.\,e., the argument of \Macro{subtitle} on the - main title page (see \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.title})}% - \feentry{title}{main title of the document, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{title} (for details about the title size see the additional note in - the text of \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} from - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.title})}% - \feentry{titlehead}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - head above the main title of the document, i.\,e., the argument of - \Macro{titlehead} when \Macro{maketitle} will be used (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead})}% -\end{desclist} -\fi %************************************************** end of maincls only * -\ifCommonscrextend %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ scrextend only + -\begin{Example} - Assumed, you want to print the document title in a serif font and with red - color. You may do this using: -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{title}{\color{red}} -\end{lstcode} - Package \Package{color} or \Package{xcolor} will be needed for command - \lstinline|\color{red}|. The additional usage of \Macro{normalfont} is not - needed in this case, because it is already part of the definition of the - title itself. This\textnote{Attention!} example also needs option - \OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} (see - \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, - \autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). -\end{Example} -\fi %************************************************ end of scrextend only * -\ifCommonscrlttr %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ scrlttr2 only + -\par -A general example for the usage of \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{usekomafont} -may be found in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} at -\autopageref{desc:maincls.setkomafont.example}.% -\fi %************************************************* End of scrlttr2 only * -\fi %*************************************** End long version (not maincls) * -\ifCommonscrlttr % ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ scrlttr2 only + -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption{% - Alphabetical list of elements whose font can be changed in - \Class{scrlttr2} using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont}\label{tab:scrlttr2.elementsWithoutText}% - }{% - Elements whose font can be changed (\emph{continuation})% - }% - \feentry{addressee}{name und address in address field % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield})}% - \feentry{backaddress}{% - return address for a window envelope % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress})}% - \feentry{descriptionlabel}{% - label, i.\,e., the optional argument of \Macro{item}, in a - \Environment{description} environment % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.description})}% - \feentry{foldmark}{% - foldmark on the letter page; intended for color settings % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks})}% - \feentry{footnote}{% - footnote text and marker % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotelabel}{% - mark of a footnote; used according to the element \FontElement{footnote} % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotereference}{% - footnote reference in the text % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnoterule}{% - horizontal rule\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} above the footnotes at - the end of the text area % - (see \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% - \feentry{labelinglabel}{% - labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of \Macro{item} in the - \Environment{labeling} environment % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{labelingseparator}{% - separator, i.\,e., the optional argument of the \Environment{labeling} - environment; used according to the element \FontElement{labelinglabel} % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{pagefoot}{% - used after element \FontElement{pageheadfoot} for the page foot, that has - been defined with variable \Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot}, or - for the page foot of package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} % - (\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% - \feentry{pagehead}{% - another name for \FontElement{pageheadfoot}}% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% - the head of a page, but also the foot of a page at all page style, that - has been defined using \KOMAScript{} % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.fontelement.pageheadfoot})}% - \feentry{pagenumber}{% - page number in the header or footer % - (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.fontelement.pagenumber})}% - \feentry{pagination}{% - another name for \FontElement{pagenumber}}% - \feentry{placeanddate}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% - place and date, if a date line will be used instead of a normal reference - line (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% - \feentry{refname}{% - description or title of the fields in the reference line % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% - \feentry{refvalue}{% - content of the fields in the reference line % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% - \feentry{specialmail}{% - mode of dispatch in the address field % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% - \feentry{lettersubject}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% - subject in the opening of the letter % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% - \feentry{lettertitle}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% - title in the opening of the letter % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.title})}% - \feentry{toaddress}{% - variation of the element \FontElement{addressee} for setting the addressee - address (less the name) in the address field % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% - \feentry{toname}{% - variation of the element \FontElement{addressee} for the name (only) of - the addressee in the address field % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% -\end{desclist} -\fi %************************************************* End of scrlttr2 only * -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage % ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption[{Elements of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} whose type style can be - changed with \KOMAScript{} command \Macro{setkomafont} or - \Macro{addtokomafont}}]% - {Elements of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} whose type style can be changed with - \KOMAScript{} command \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont} and the - default of those, if they have not been defined before loading - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}% - \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}% - }% - {Elements whose type style can be changed (\emph{continuation})}% - \feentry{footbotline}{% - Horizontal line below the footer of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and - \FontElement{pagefoot}\FontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to use - this element for colour changes only.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{footsepline}{% - Horizontal line above the footer of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and - \FontElement{pagefoot}\FontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to use - this element for colour changes only.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{headsepline}{% - Horizontal line below the header of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and - \FontElement{pagehead}\FontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to use - this element for colour changes only.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{headtopline}{% - Horizontal line above the header of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and - \FontElement{pagehead}\FontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to use - this element for colour changes only.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{pagefoot}{% - Contents of the page footer of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the font of element - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{pagehead}{% - Contents of the page header of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the font of element - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par - Default: \emph{empty}% - }% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% - Contents of the page header or footer of a page style defined using - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after - \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont}.\par - Default: \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape}% - }% - \feentry{pagenumber}{% - Pagination set with \Macro{pagemark}. If you redefine \Macro{pagemark}, - you have to take care that your redefinition also uses - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber}!\par - Default: \Macro{normalfont}% - }% -\end{desclist} -% \begin{desclist} -% \desccaption[{Alphabetical list of elements whose font can be changed in -% \Class{scrlayer-scrpage} using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -% \Macro{addtokomafont}}]% -% {Alphabetical list of elements whose font can be changed in -% \Class{scrlayer-scrpage} using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -% \Macro{addtokomafont}% -% \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}% -% }% -% {Elements whose font can be changed (\emph{Fortsetzung})}% -% \feentry{footbotline}{% -% Horizontal line below the foot of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footbotline}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and -% \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to -% use the element for colour changes only.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{footsepline}{% -% Horizontal line above the foot of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footsepline}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and -% \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to -% use the element for colour changes only.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{headsepline}{% -% Horizontal line below the head of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headsepline}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and -% \FontElement{pagehead}\IndexFontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to -% use the element for colour changes only.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{headtopline}{% -% Horizontal line below the head of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headtopline}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and -% \FontElement{pagehead}\IndexFontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to -% use the element for colour changes only.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{pagefoot}{% -% Content of the foot of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{pagehead}{% -% Content of the head of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagehead}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and -% after elements -% \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par -% Default: \emph{leer}% -% }% -% \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% -% Content of the head or foot of a page style defined using -% \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pageheadfoot}). The font of -% the element will be used after \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont}.\par -% Default: \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape}% -% }% -% \feentry{pagenumber}{% -% The pagination of \Macro{pagemark} (see -% \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, -% \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagenumber}). If you -% redefine \Macro{pagemark} you have to make sure that the redefinition -% contains the required\Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber}!\par -% Default: \Macro{normalfont}% -% }% -% \end{desclist} -\fi % ****************************************** Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ short version (maincls) + -\else %----------------------------------------- long version (not maincls) - -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomafont}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usefontofkomafont}\Parameter{element}\\ - \Macro{useencodingofkomafont}\Parameter{element}\\ - \Macro{usesizeofkomafont}\Parameter{element}\\ - \Macro{usefamilyofkomafont}\Parameter{element}\\ - \Macro{useseriesofkomafont}\Parameter{element}\\ - \Macro{useshapeofkomafont}\Parameter{element} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usefontofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useencodingofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usesizeofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usefamilyofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useseriesofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useshapeofkomafont}% -Sometimes\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} and despite the recommendation -users use the font setting feature of elements not only for font settings but -for other settings too. In this case it may be useful to switch only to the -font setting of an element but not to those other settings. You may use -\Macro{usefontofkomafont} in such cases. This will activate the font size and -baseline skip, the font encoding, the font family, the font series, and the -font shape of an element, but no further settings as long as those further -settings are local. - -You may also switch to one of those attributes only using one of the other -commands. Note, that \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} will activate both, the font -size and the baseline skip. - -You should not misunderstand these commands as a legitimation of using all -kind of commands at the font setting of an element. Hence this would result -in errors sooner or later (see \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useshapeofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useseriesofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usefamilyofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usesizeofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useencodingofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usefontofkomafont}% -% -\EndIndex{}{font}% -\EndIndex{}{text>markup} -\fi %*************************************** End long version (not maincls) * - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-8.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-8.tex deleted file mode 100644 index cc41946018f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-8.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,297 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-8.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-8.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-8.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-07-26 11:18:40 +0200 (Sun, 26 Jul 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Interleaf Pages)] -\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015/07/26 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Interleaf Pages} -\seclabel{emptypage}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + - What is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{interleaf page}%% -\BeginIndex{}{page>style}% - -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Interleaf pages are pages that are intended to stay blank. Originally these - pages were really completely white. \LaTeX{}, on the other hand, by default - sets those pages with the current valid page style. So those pages may have - a head and a pagination. \KOMAScript{} provides several extensions to this. - - Interleaf pages may be found in books mostly. Because chapters in - books commonly start on odd pages, sometimes a left page without - contents has to be added before. This is also the reason that - interleaf pages only exist in double-sided printing. The unused back - sides of the one-sided printings are not interleaf pages, really, - although % . Nevertheless at the printing paper - they may seem to be such pages.} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{But} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - at letters interleaf pages are unusual. This may be benefited by the - case, that real two-sided letters are seldom, because binding of - letters is not done often. Nevertheless \Class{scrlttr2} supports - interleaf pages in the case of two-sided letters. Because the - following described commands are seldom used in letters no examples - are shown. If you need examples, please note them at - \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} from - \autopageref{sec:maincls.emptypage} upward.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{cleardoublepage}\PName{page style}\\ - \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PName{page style}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PValue{current}}% -With this option,\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} you may define the page style of the -interleaf pages created by the \Macro{cleardoublepage} to break until the -wanted page. Every already defined \PName{page style} (see -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.pagestyle} from -\autopageref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.pagestyle} and -\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} from \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) may be -used. Besides this, \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} is valid. This case -is the default until \KOMAScript~2.98c and results in interleaf page without -changing the page style. Since -\KOMAScript~3.00\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} the default follows the -recommendation of most typographers and has been changed to blank interleaf -pages with page style \Pagestyle{empty} unless you switch compatibility to an -earlier version (see option \Option{version}, \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.compatibilityOptions}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.option.version}). \ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage.example} - Assume you want interleaf pages almost empty but with pagination. This - means you want to use page style \Pagestyle{plain}. You may use following to - achieve this: -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} -\end{lstcode} - More information about page style \Pagestyle{plain} may be found at - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.plain}. -\end{Example} -\fi -\ifCommonscrextend -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage.example} - Assume you want interleaf pages almost empty but with pagination. This - means you want to use page style \Pagestyle{plain}. You may use following to - achieve this: -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} -\end{lstcode} - More information about page style \Pagestyle{plain} may be found at - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.plain}. -\end{Example} -\fi -\EndIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PValue{current}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PName{page style}} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublepage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublestandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleemptypage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% -The {\LaTeX} kernel contains the \Macro{clearpage} command, which takes -care that all not yet output floats are output, and then starts a new -page. There exists the instruction \Macro{cleardoublepage} which -works like \Macro{clearpage} but which, in the double-sided layouts -(see layout option \Option{twoside} in -\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twoside}) starts a new right-hand -page. An empty left page in the current page style is output if -necessary. - -With\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}, -{\KOMAScript} works as described above. The \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage} -command changes the page style of the empty left page to -\Pagestyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} in order to suppress the -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{running}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{page} head. Analogously, -the page style \Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} is applied to the empty -page with \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}, suppressing the page number as well -as the \IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{running}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{page} head. The page -is thus entirely empty. If another \PName{page style} is wanted for the -interleaf page is may be set with the argument of -\Macro{cleardoubleoddusingpagestyle}. Every already defined \PName{page style} -(see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) may be used. - -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Sometimes chapters should not start on the right-hand page but the - left-hand page. This is in contradition to the classic typography; - nevertheless, it may be suitable, e.\,g., if the double-page spread - of the chapter start is of special contents. \KOMAScript{} therefor - provides the commands \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}, - and \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}, which are equivalent to the odd-page - commands.} - -However, the approach used by the \KOMAScript{} commands -\Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, -\Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, and \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} is -dependent on the option -\Option{cleardoublepage}\important{\Option{cleardoublepage}} described above -and is similar to one of the corresponding commands above. The same is valid for -the standard command \Macro{cleardoublepage}, that may be either -\Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} or \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage}. - -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - In \Class{scrlttr2} the other commands are there only for completeness. More - information about them may be found at - \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage} if needed.}% -\ifCommonscrlttr2\else -\begin{Example} - \label{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage.example}% - Assume you want to set next in your document a double-page spread - with a picture at the left-hand page and a chapter start at the - right-hand page. The picture should have the same size as the text - area without any head line or pagination. If the last chapter - ends with a left-hand page, an interleaf page has to be added, which - should be completely empty. - - First you will use -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=empty} -\end{lstcode} - to make interleaf pages empty. You may use this setting at the document - preamble already. As an alternative you may set it as the optional argument - of \Macro{documentclass}. - - At the relevant place in your document, you'll write: -\begin{lstcode} - \cleardoubleevenemptypage - \thispagestyle{empty} - \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,% - height=\textheight,% - keepaspectratio]% - {picture} - \chapter{Chapter Headline} -\end{lstcode} - The first of these lines switches to the next left page. If needed it also - adds a completely blank right-hand page. The second line makes sure that - the following left-hand page will be set using page style \Pagestyle{empty} - too. From third down to sixth line, an external picture of wanted size will - be loaded without - deformation. Package \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} will be needed - for this command. The last line starts a new chapter on the next page which - will be a right-hand one. -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublestandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleemptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% -% -\EndIndex{}{page>style}% -\EndIndex{}{interleaf page}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-9.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-9.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 0776fe39c00..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-9.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,501 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-9.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-9.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-9.tex} - [$Date: 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 (Mon, 24 Aug 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Footnotes)] -\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} - -% Date of the translated German file: 2015/08/24 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Footnotes} -\seclabel{footnotes}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{% - What is described in - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} applies, mutatis mutandis. } -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{footnotes}% - -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext -\LaTeX{} of course handles footnotes. % -\fi% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% - \KOMAScript{}, unlike the standard classes, provides features for - configuration of the footnote block format.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - The commands for setting footnotes may be found at each introduction into - \LaTeX, e.\,g., at \cite{lshort}. \KOMAScript{} provides additional features - to change the footnote block format.}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrextend}{% - Package \Package{scrextend} supports all the footnote features of - \KOMAScript -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + - \ that are described in \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - . Nevertheless, by default the footnotes are under full control of the used - class. This changes as soon as command \Macro{deffootnote} (see - \autopageref{desc:\ifIgnoreThis maincls\else scrextend\fi.cmd.deffootnote}) - has been used. - - Package \Package{scrextend} does not provide settings for the separation - line above the footnotes.% -}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{footnotes}\PName{setting} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{footnotes~=\PName{setting}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{At several classes footnotes }% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}}Footnotes -}% -will be marked with a tiny superscript number in text by default. If more than -one footnote falls at the same place, one may think that it is only one -footnote with a very large number instead of multiple footnotes -(i.\,e., footnote 12 instead of footnotes 1 and 2). Using \important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}} -\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}\IndexOption{footnotes=~multiple} will -separate multiple footnotes immediately next to each other by a separator -string. The predefined separator at -\Macro{multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}\important{\Macro{multfootsep}} is a -single comma without space. The whole mechanism is compatible with package \Package{footmisc}\IndexPackage{footmisc}\important{\Package{footmisc}}, -Version~5.3d (see \cite{package:footmisc}). It is related not only to -footnotes placed using \Macro{footnote}\IndexCmd{footnote}, but -\Macro{footnotemark}\IndexCmd{footnotemark} too. - -Command \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} may be used to switch back -to the default \OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} at any time. If -any problems using another package that influences footnotes occur, it is -recommended not to use the option anywhere and not to change the -\PName{setting} anywhere inside the document. - -A summary of the available \PName{setting} values of \Option{footnotes} may -be found at \autoref{tab:maincls.footnotes}% -\IfNotCommon{maincl}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.footnotes}}% -.% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{table} - \caption[{Available values for option \Option{footnotes}}] - {Available values for option \Option{footnotes} setting up footnotes} - \label{tab:maincls.footnotes} - \begin{desctabular} - \pventry{multiple}{% - At sequences of immediately following footnote marks, consecutive marks - will be separated by \Macro{multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}.% - \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{multiple}}}% - \pventry{nomultiple}{% - Immediately following footnotes will be handled like single footnotes - and not separated from each other.% - \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{nomultiple}}}% - \end{desctabular} -\end{table}}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{footnotes~=\PName{setting}} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{footnote}\OParameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ - \Macro{footnotemark}\OParameter{number}\\ - \Macro{footnotetext}\OParameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ - \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}\\ - \Macro{multfootsep} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnote}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnotemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnotetext}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{multiplefootnoteseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{multfootsep}% -Similar to the standard classes, footnotes in {\KOMAScript} are produced -with the \Macro{footnote} command, or alternatively the paired usage of the -commands \Macro{footnotemark} and \Macro{footnotetext}. As in the standard -classes, it is possible that a page break occurs within a footnote. Normally -this happens if the footnote mark is placed so near the bottom of a page as to -leave {\LaTeX} no choice but to break the footnote onto the next page. -\KOMAScript\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}}, unlike the standard classes, -can recognize and separate consecutive footnotes -automatically. See\important{\Option{footnote}} the previously documented -option \Option{footnotes} for this. - -If you want to set the separator manually, you may use -\Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}. Note that this command should not be -redefined, because it has been defined not only to be the separator string but -also the type style, i.\,e., font size and superscript. The separator string -without type style may be found at \Macro{multfootsep}. The -predefined default is -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\multfootsep}{,} -\end{lstcode} -and may be changed by redefining the command. - -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote.example}% - Assume you want to place two footnotes following a single word. First you may try -\begin{lstcode} - Word\footnote{1st footnote}\footnote{2nd footnote} -\end{lstcode} - for this. Assume that the footnotes will be numbered with 1 and 2. Now the - reader may think it's a single footnote 12, because the 2 - immediately follows the 1. You may change this using -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{footnotes=multiple} -\end{lstcode} - which would switch on the automatic recognition of footnote sequences. As an - alternative you may use -\begin{lstcode} - Word\footnote{1st footnote}% - \multiplefootnoteseparator - \footnote{2nd footnote} -\end{lstcode} - This should give you the wanted result even if the automatic solution would - fail or could not be used. - - Further, assume you want the footnotes separated not only by a single - comma, but by a comma and a white space. In this case you may redefine -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\multfootsep}{,\nobreakspace} -\end{lstcode} - at the document preamble. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} - instead of a usual space character has been used in this case to avoid - paragraph or at least page breaks within footnote sequences. -\end{Example}% -\fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Examples and additional information may be found at - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} from - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote.example} onward.}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnote}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnotemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnotetext}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{multiplefootnoteseparator}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{multfootsep}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{footref}\Parameter{reference} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footref}% -Sometimes\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} there are single footnotes to - multiple text passages. The least sensible way to typeset this would -be to repeatedly use \Macro{footnotemark} with the same manually set -number. The disadvantages of this method would be that you have to -know the number and manually fix all the \Macro{footnotemark} -commands, and if the number changes because of adding or removing a -footnote before, each \Macro{footnotemark} would have to be -changed. Because of this, \KOMAScript{} provides the use of the -\Macro{label}\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} mechanism in -such cases. After simply setting a \Macro{label} inside the footnote, -\Macro{footref} may be used to mark all the other text passages with -the same footnote mark. -\begin{Example} - Maybe you have to mark each trade name with a footnote which states that it - is a registered trade name. You may write, e.\,g., -\begin{lstcode} - Company SplishSplash\footnote{This is a registered trade name. - All rights are reserved.\label{refnote}} - produces not only SplishPlump\footref{refnote} - but also SplishPlash\footref{refnote}. -\end{lstcode} - This will produce the same footnote mark three times, but only one footnote - text. The first footnote mark is produced by \Macro{footnote} - itself, and the following two footnote marks are produced by - the additional \Macro{footref} commands. The footnote text will be produced by - \Macro{footnote}. -\end{Example} -Because of setting the additional footnote marks using the \Macro{label} -mechanism, changes of the footnote numbers will need at least two \LaTeX{} -runs to ensure correct numbers for all \Macro{footref} marks.% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footref}% -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{deffootnote}\OParameter{mark width}\Parameter{indent}% - \Parameter{parindent}\Parameter{definition}\\ - \Macro{deffootnotemark}\Parameter{definition}\\ - \Macro{thefootnotemark} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deffootnote}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deffootnotemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thefootnotemark}% -Footnotes are formatted slightly differently in {\KOMAScript} to in the -standard classes. As in the standard classes the footnote mark in the text is -depicted using a small superscripted number. The same formatting is used in -the footnote itself. The mark in the footnote is type-set right-aligned in a -box with width \PName{mark width}. The first line of the footnote follows -directly. - -All following lines will be indented by the length of \PName{indent}. If the -optional parameter \PName{mark width} is not specified, it defaults to -\PName{indent}. If the footnote consists of more than one paragraph, then the -first line of a paragraph is indented, in addition to \PName{indent}, by the -value of \PName{parindent}. - -\hyperref[fig:maincls.deffootnote]{Figure~\ref*{fig:maincls.deffootnote}} % -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{at \autopageref{fig:maincls.deffootnote} }% -illustrates the layout parameters. The default configuration of the -{\KOMAScript} classes is: -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em} - {\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} -\Macro{textsuperscript} controls both the superscript and the smaller -font size. Command \Macro{thefootnotemark} is the current footnote mark -without any formatting.% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ % <-- Leerzeichen ist wichtig! - Package \Package{scrextend} in contrast to this does not change the default - footnote settings of the used class. Loading the package does not change any - type style of footnote marks or footnote text in general. You have to copy - the above shown source to use the default - settings of the \KOMAScript{} classes with \Package{scrextend}. This may be - done immediately after loading package \Package{scrextend}.}% - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{figure} -% \centering - \KOMAoption{captions}{bottombeside} - \setcapindent{0pt}% - \begin{captionbeside} - [{Parameters that control the footnote layout}]% - {\label{fig:maincls.deffootnote}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% - Parameters that control the footnote layout}% - [l] - \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} - \begin{picture}(100,22) - \thinlines - % frame of following paragraph - \put(5,0){\line(1,0){90}} - \put(5,0){\line(0,1){5}} - \put(10,5){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,5){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(95,0){\line(0,1){10}} - \put(10,10){\line(1,0){85}} - % frame of first paragraph - \put(5,11){\line(1,0){90}} - \put(5,11){\line(0,1){5}} - \put(15,16){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,16){\line(1,0){10}} - \put(95,11){\line(0,1){10}} - \put(15,21){\line(1,0){80}} - % box of the footnote mark - \put(0,16.5){\framebox(14.5,4.5){\mbox{}}} - % description of paragraphs - \put(45,16){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\textsf{first paragraph of a footnote}}} - \put(45,5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\textsf{next paragraph of a footnote}}} - % help lines - \thicklines - \multiput(0,0)(0,3){7}{\line(0,1){2}} - \multiput(5,0)(0,3){3}{\line(0,1){2}} - % parameters - \put(2,7){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(5,7){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(15,7){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(15,7){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{parindent}}} - % - \put(-3,13){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(0,13){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(10,13){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(10,13){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{indent}}} - % - \put(-3,19){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(0,19){\line(1,0){14.5}} - \put(19.5,19){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(19.5,19){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{mark width}}} - \end{picture} - \end{captionbeside} -\end{figure}} - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnote}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}% -The\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} font element -\FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}} determines the font -of the footnote including the footnote mark. Using the element -\FontElement{footnotelabel}\important{\FontElement{footnotelabel}} the font of -the footnote mark can be changed separately with the commands -\Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}). Please refer also to -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, \autopageref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}}% -. Default setting is no change in the font.% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ % <-- Dieses Leerzeichen ist wichtig! - With \Package{scrextend} the elements may change the fonts only if the - footnotes are handled by the package, i.\,g., after using - \Macro{deffootnote}.} - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotereference}% -The footnote mark in the text is defined separately from the mark in -front of the actual footnote. This is done with -\Macro{deffootnotemark}. Default setting is: -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \deffootnotemark{% - \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} -In the above\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} the font -for the element -\FontElement{footnotereference}\important{\FontElement{footnotereference}} is -applied (see % -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, \autopageref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}}% -). % -Thus the footnote -marks in the text and in the footnote itself are identical. The font -can be changed with the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -\Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont})% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ after usage of \Macro{deffootnotemark}}. - -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote.example}% - A\textnote{Hint!} feature often asked for is footnote marks which are - neither in superscript nor in a smaller font size. They should not touch the - footnote text but be separated by a small space. This can be accomplished as - follows: -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote{1em}{1em}{\thefootnotemark\ } -\end{lstcode} - The footnote mark and the following space are therefore set - right-aligned into a box of width 1\Unit{em}. The following lines of - the footnote text are also indented by 1\Unit{em} from the left - margin. - - Another\textnote{Hint!} often requested footnote layout is left-aligned - footnote marks. These can be obtained with: -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{% - \makebox[1.5em][l]{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} - - If you want however only to change the font for all footnotes, for example - to sans serif, you can solve this problem simply by using the commands - \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}: -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{footnote}{\sffamily} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example}% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{As demonstrated with the examples above, the simple - user interface of {\KOMAScript} provides a great variety of different - footnote formattings.}% -\fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Examples may be found at \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, from - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote} onwards.}% -% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnotereference}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnote}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deffootnote}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deffootnotemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thefootnotemark}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{thickness}\Parameter{length}% -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootnoterule}% -Generally\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} a horizontal -rule will be placed between the text area and the footnote area. But normally -this rule is not as long as the width of the typing area. With Command -\Macro{setfootnoterule} you may change the thickness and the width of that -rule. Thereby the parameters \PName{thickness} and \PName{length} will be -evaluated not at definition time but when setting the rule itself. If -optional argument \PName{thickness} ha been omitted the thickness of the rule -will not be changed. Empty arguments \PName{thickness} or \PName{length} are -also allowed and do not change the corresponding parameter. Using implausible -values may result in warning messages not only setting the arguments but also -when \KOMAScript{} uses the parameters. - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}% -With element \FontElement{footnoterule}\important{\FontElement{footnoterule}} -the color \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} of the rule -may be changed using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and -\Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}). Default is no change of font or -color. For color changes a color package like -\Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}\important{\Package{xcolor}} would be -needed.% -% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootnoterule}% -\EndIndex{}{footnotes}% - - -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: us-ascii -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-compatibility.tex index d7bafd07a64..ac1c120f253 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-1.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-compatibility.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-1.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-compatibility.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-1.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-compatibility.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,83 +45,87 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-1.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-compatibility.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of \KOMAScript} \seclabel{compatibilityOptions} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{typearea}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht typearea + - -It applies, mutatis mutandis, what is written in -\autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{. However, this - feature exists at \Class{scrlttr2} since version~2.9t}. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur typearea - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Compatibility} -\IfCommon{typearea}{Those who achieve their documents in source code set utmost - value to the fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly the same +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + It applies, mutatis mutandis, what is written in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions}. + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{However, this feature exists at + \Class{scrlttr2} since version~2.9t. }% + So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions} you can + switch to \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next}.% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{% + Those who achieve their documents in source code set utmost value to the + fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly the same result. Nevertheless, in some cases improvement and bug corrections of packages will result in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes - this is not wanted.}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{Those who achieve their documents in source code set utmost - value to the fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly the same - result. However, sometimes improvement and bug corrections of classes will result - in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is not wanted.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Those who achieve their documents in source code set - utmost value to the fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly - the same result. In some cases improvement and bug corrections of packages - will result in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is - not wanted.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{In some cases improvement and bug corrections of classes - will result in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is - not wanted.}% + this is not wanted.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Those who achieve their documents in source code set utmost value to the + fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly the same + result. However, sometimes improvement and bug corrections of classes will + result in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is not + wanted. }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Those who achieve their documents in source code set utmost value to the + fact that future \LaTeX{} runs will yield exactly the same result. In + some cases improvement and bug corrections of packages will result in + changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is not wanted.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In some cases improvement and bug corrections of classes will result + in changes of the behaviour and make-up. But sometimes this is not + wanted.% + }{\InternalCommonFileBaseError}% + }% + }% +} \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{version}\PName{value}\\ - \XOptionValue{version}{first}\\ - \XOptionValue{version}{last} + \OptionVName{version}{value}% + \OptionValue{version}{first}% + \OptionValue{version}{last} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{version}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PName{value}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{last}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{first}}% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Since }% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{At }{Since }% \ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% \ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% \ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}% -\IfCommon{typearea}{\ifshortversion % - version~2.96a of \KOMAScript, for \Class{scrlttr2} since - version~2.9t, and for \Package{typearea} since version~3.01b, % - \else% - version~3.01b of \Package{typearea} % - \fi% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{% + version~3.01b of \Package{typearea} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + version~2.96a of \KOMAScript{} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + version~2.9t of \Class{scrlttr2} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \Package{scrextend} }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% + }% }% -\IfCommon{maincls}{version~2.96a of \KOMAScript{} }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{version~2.9t of \Class{scrlttr2} }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{At \Package{scrextend} }% it's your choice if your source code should result in the same make-up at future \LaTeX{} runs or if you like to participate in all improvements of new -releases\IfCommon{maincls}{ of the class}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ of the - class}. You may select the compatible version of \KOMAScript{} with option -\Option{version}. Compatibility to the lowest supported \KOMAScript{} -release may be achieved by +releases\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{ of the class}{}. You +may select the compatible version of \KOMAScript{} with option +\Option{version}. Compatibility to the lowest supported \KOMAScript{} release +may be achieved by \OptionValue{version}{first}\important{\OptionValue{version}{first}} or \OptionValue{version}{2.9} or \OptionValue{version}{2.9t}. Setting -\PName{value} to an unknown release number will result in a warning message and -selects \OptionValue{version}{first} for safety. +\PName{value} to an unknown release number will result in a warning message +and selects \OptionValue{version}{first} for safety. With \OptionValue{version}{last} the most recent version will be selected at every \LaTeX{} run. Be warned, though, that using \OptionValue{version}{last} @@ -144,33 +148,31 @@ influence make-up changes that are motivated by bug fixes. If you need bug compatibility you should physically save the used \KOMAScript{} version together with your document. -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\begin{Example} - The letter examples of this chapter should use and show all the features - of the recent \KOMAScript{} release. To achieve this, we set the - corresponding compatibility:% - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em,lastline=1]{letter-0.tex}% - In this case the symbolic value \PValue{last} has been used to select the - latest version.% -\end{Example}} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \begin{Example} + The letter examples of this chapter should use and show all the features + of the recent \KOMAScript{} release. To achieve this, we set the + corresponding compatibility:% + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em,lastline=1]{letter-0.tex}% + In this case the symbolic value \PValue{last} has been used to select the + latest version.% + \end{Example}% +}{} Please note\textnote{Attention!} that you cannot change option \Option{version} anymore after loading the % -\IfCommon{maincls}{class}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{class}% -\IfCommon{typearea}{package \Package{typearea}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{package \Package{scrextend}}% -. Therefore, the usage of option \Option{version} within the argument of -\Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} is not recommended and will cause an -error.% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PName{value}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{first}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{last}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{class}{% + package \IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{\Package{typearea}}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\Package{scrextend}}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError }% + }% +}. Therefore, the usage of option \Option{version} within the argument of +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} is not recommended and will +cause an error.% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Compatibility} - -\fi % *************************************************** Ende nur typearea * - +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-dictum.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-dictum.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c89b4e093a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-dictum.tex @@ -0,0 +1,240 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-dictum.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-dictum.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-dictum.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] +\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Dicta} +\seclabel{dictum}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{smart slogan}% +\BeginIndex{}{dictum}% +\BeginIndex{}{excerpt}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is written in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum} applies, + mutatis mutandis. % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + However, \Package{scrextend} does not support the commands + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble}. You should read the manual of the + used class, if you want to know, if that class does support similar + commands. % + }{}% + So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum} you can jump to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next} on + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next}.% +} + +Sometimes you may find a dictum, a kind of smart slogan or excerpt, often +ragged left above or below the heading of a chapter or section. The text and +the source of the slogan often use special styles. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{dictum}\OParameter{author}\Parameter{dictum}% + \Macro{dictumwidth}% + \Macro{dictumauthorformat}\Parameter{author}% + \Macro{dictumrule}% + \Macro{raggeddictum}% + \Macro{raggeddictumtext}% + \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} +\end{Declaration}% +The command \Macro{dictum} inserts such a dictum. % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + This\textnote{Hint!} macro can be used as obligatory argument of either the + command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} or + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble}. However, this is not obligatory.\par% +}{}% +The dictum together with an optional \PName{author} is inserted in a +\Macro{parbox}\IndexCmd{parbox} (see \cite{latex:usrguide}) of width +\Macro{dictumwidth}. Yet \Macro{dictumwidth} is not a length which can be set +with \Macro{setlength}. It is a macro that can be redefined using +\Macro{renewcommand}. Default setting is \PValue{0.3333\Length{textwidth}}, +which is a third of the textwidth. The box itself is positioned with the +command \Macro{raggeddictum}. Default here is +\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, that is, right justified. The +command \Macro{raggeddictum} can be redefined using \Macro{renewcommand}. + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictum}\LabelFontElement{dictum}% +Within the box the \PName{dictum} is set using \Macro{raggeddictumtext}. +Default setting is \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright}, that is, left +justified. Similarly to \Macro{raggeddictum} this can be redefined with +\Macro{renewcommand}. The output uses the default font setting for the +element \FontElement{dictum}, which can be changed with the commands +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Default settings are +listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.% + \begin{table} +% \centering% + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% +% \caption + \begin{captionbeside}{Default settings for the elements of a dictum} + [l] + \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} + \toprule + Element & Default \\ + \midrule + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.dictum} & + \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{small}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.dictumauthor} & + \Macro{itshape}\\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictumfont} + \end{table} +}{% + , \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictumfont}.% +} + +If there is an \PName{author} name, it is separated from the \PName{dictum} by +a rule to the full width of the \Macro{parbox}. This% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} % +rule is defined as vertical object to command \Macro{dictumrule}: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\dictumrule}{\vskip-1ex\hrulefill\par} +\end{lstcode} + +The alignment is defined with \Macro{raggeddictumauthor}. Default is +\Macro{raggedleft}. This command can also be redefined using +\Macro{renewcommand}. The format of the output is defined with +\Macro{dictumauthorformat}. This macro expects the \PName{author} as +argument. As default \Macro{dictumauthorformat} is defined as: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\dictumauthorformat}[1]{(#1)} +\end{lstcode} +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictumauthor}\LabelFontElement{dictumauthor}% +Thus the \PName{author} is set enclosed in rounded parentheses. For the +element \FontElement{dictumauthor}, a different font than for the element +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.dictum} can be defined. Default settings are +listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Changes can be made using the +commands \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + If \Macro{dictum} is used within the macro + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} or + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} you have to take care of the + following: the horizontal positioning is always done with + \Macro{raggeddictum}. Therefore, the optional argument for horizontal + positioning which is implemented for these two commands has no + effect. \Length{textwidth} is not the width of the whole text corpus but the + actually used text width. If \Macro{dictumwidth} is set to + \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} and \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} + has an optional width of \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} too, you will get a + box with a width one quarter of the text width. Therefore, if you use + \Macro{dictum} it is recommended to refrain from setting the optional width + for \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} or + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble}. + + If\textnote{Hint!} you have more than one dictum, one under another, you + should separate them by an additional vertical space, easily accomplished + using the command \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip}.% + \iftrue% +}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + + \begin{Example} + You are writing a chapter on an aspect of weather forecasting. You + have come across an aphorism which you would like to place at the + beginning of the chapter beneath the heading. You could write: +\begin{lstcode} + \setchapterpreamble[u]{% + \dictum[Anonymous]{Forecasting is the art of saying + what is going to happen and then to explain + why it didn't.}} + \chapter{Weather forecasting} +\end{lstcode} + The output would look as follows: + \begin{ShowOutput} + {\usekomafont{disposition}\usekomafont{chapter}% + 17\enskip Weather forecasting\par} \vspace{\baselineskip} + \dictum[Anonymous]{Forecasting is the art of saying what is going to + happen and then to explain why it didn't.} + \end{ShowOutput} + + If you would rather the dictum span only a quarter of the text width + rather than one third you can redefine \Macro{dictumwidth}: +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\dictumwidth}{.25\textwidth} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + + For a somewhat more sophisticated formatting of left- or right-aligned + paragraphs including hyphenation you can use the + package~\Package{ragged2e}~\cite{package:ragged2e}.% +\fi +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-draftmode.tex index ccbd2fd1d2e..de1f947fcdb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-draftmode.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-draftmode.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-draftmode.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,30 +45,26 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-2.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-draftmode.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Draft Mode} \seclabel{draft}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -What is written in -\autoref{sec:maincls.draft} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{draft mode}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is written in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} + applies, mutatis mutandis. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} you can jump to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next} on + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next}.% +} + Many classes and packages provide a draft mode aside from the final typesetting mode. The difference of draft and final mode may be as manifold as the classes and package that support these modes. For instance, the @@ -79,9 +75,8 @@ appropriate size containing only the graphic's file name (see \cite{package:graphics}).% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{draft}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{draft}{simple switch} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{simple switch}}% This option\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} is normally used to distinguish between the draft and final versions of a document. \PName{simple switch} @@ -94,12 +89,13 @@ paragraphs that have to be treated manually. With the default lines often vanish using package \Package{microtype}\IndexPackage{microtype}\important{\Package{microtype}} \cite{package:microtype}. -\EndIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{draft mode} - -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * +\EndIndexGroup +\phantomsection +\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.end}% +\endinput %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-fontsize.tex index 16955d7302f..25a090c3f64 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-4.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-fontsize.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-4.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-fontsize.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-4.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-fontsize.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,27 +45,28 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-4.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-fontsize.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: fontsize)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015/03/31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother +\section{Selection of the Document Font Size} +\seclabel{fontOptions}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{font>size}% - -\seclabel{fontOptions} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfCommon{scrextend}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrextend + -What is described in \autoref{sec:maincls.fontOptions} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\else %--------------------------------------------------- nicht scrextend - -\BeginIndex{}{font>size} +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is described in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions} + applies, mutatis mutandis. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions} you can jump to the + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{example at the }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{last paragraph at the }{}% + }% + end of this section on + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end}.% +} The main document font size is one of the basic decisions for the document layout. The maximum width of the text area, and therefore splitting the page @@ -76,9 +77,8 @@ should relate to the main document font. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fontsize}\PName{size} + \OptionVName{fontsize}{size} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{size}}% In contrast to the standard classes and most other classes that provide only a very limited number of font sizes, the \KOMAScript{} classes offer the feature of selection of any desired \PName{size} for the main document @@ -86,35 +86,75 @@ font. In this context, any well known \TeX{} unit of measure may be used and using a number without unit of measure means \PValue{pt}.\iffree{}{ More information about font size selection for experts and interested users may be found in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize}.} + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize}.} If you use this option inside the document, the main document font size and all dependent sizes will change from this point. This may be useful, e.\,g., -if \IfCommon{maincls}{the appendix }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{one more letter }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{the appendix }% +if \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{one more letter }{the appendix }% should be set using smaller fonts on the whole. It should be noted that changing the main font size does not result in an automatic recalculation of -type area and margins (see \Macro{recalctypearea}\IndexCmd{recalctypearea}, +type area and margins (see +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}\IndexCmd{recalctypearea}, \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). On the other hand, each +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). On the other hand, each recalculation of type area and margins will be done on the basis of the current main font size. The effects of changing the main font size to other additionally loaded packages or the used document class depend on those packages and the class. This may even result in error messages or typesetting errors, which cannot be considered a fault of \KOMAScript, and even the -\KOMAScript{} classes do not change all lenghts if the main font size -changes after loading the class. +\KOMAScript{} classes do not change all lengths if the main font size changes +after loading the class. This\textnote{Attention!} option is not intended to be a substitution for \Macro{fontsize} (see \cite{latex:fntguide}). Also, you should not use it instead of one of the main font depending font size commands \Macro{tiny} up to \Macro{Huge}!% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ Default at \Class{scrlttr2} is - \OptionValue{fontsize}{12pt}.} +\phantomsection\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ Default at \Class{scrlttr2} is \OptionValue{fontsize}{12pt}. -\fi %*********************************************** Ende nicht scrextend * + \begin{Example} + Assumed, the example is a letter to \emph{``The friends of insane font + sizes''} and therefor it should be printed with 14\Unit{pt} instead of + 12\Unit{pt}. Only a simple change of the first line is needed:% + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-6}% + Alternatively the option may be set at the optional argument of the + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} environment:% + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-5}% + In the case of this late change of the font size no recalculation of the + type area will happen. Because of this, the two results of + \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} differ. + \begin{figure} + \centering + \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-5}}\quad + \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-6}} + \caption[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, closing, + postscript, distribution list, enclosure, and insane large font + size}]{% + result of a small letter with addressee, opening, text, closing, + postscript, distribution list, enclosure, and insane large font size + (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters): at left one the + font size has been defined by the optional argument of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter}, at the right one the optional + argument of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} has been used} + \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} + \end{figure} + \end{Example} +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + The default at \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} is + \OptionValue{fontsize}{11pt}.\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes} + In contrast, the default of the standard classes would be + \Option{10pt}. You may attend to this if you switch from a standard class + to a \KOMAScript{} class.% + }{}% +}% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup +\endinput %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-footnotes.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-footnotes.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c7c3e5b77c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-footnotes.tex @@ -0,0 +1,542 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-footnotes.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-footnotes.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-footnotes.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Footnotes)] +\translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Footnotes} +\seclabel{footnotes}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{footnotes}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + All of what is described in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} is generally + applicable. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next}.% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \KOMAScript{}, unlike the standard classes, provides features for + configuration of the footnote block format.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + The commands for setting footnotes may be found at each introduction into + \LaTeX, e.\,g., at \cite{lshort}. \KOMAScript{} provides additional + features to change the footnote block format.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Package \Package{scrextend} supports all the footnote features of the + \KOMAScript{} classes. Nevertheless, by default the footnotes are under + full control of the used class. This changes as soon as command + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} (see + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote}) has been used. + + Package \Package{scrextend} does not provide settings for the separation + line above the footnotes.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +} + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{footnotes}{setting} +\end{Declaration} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{At several classes footnotes }{% + Footnotes % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% + }% +}% +will be marked with a tiny superscript number in text by default. If more than +one footnote falls at the same place, one may think that it is only one +footnote with a very large number instead of multiple footnotes (i.\,e., +footnote 12 instead of footnotes 1 and 2). Using +\important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}} +\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}\IndexOption{footnotes=~multiple} will +separate multiple footnotes immediately next to each other by a separator +string. The predefined separator at +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}} +is a single comma without space. The whole mechanism is compatible with +package +\Package{footmisc}\IndexPackage{footmisc}\important{\Package{footmisc}}, +Version~5.3d (see \cite{package:footmisc}). It is related not only to +footnotes placed using +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}\IndexCmd{footnote}, but +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark}\IndexCmd{footnotemark} too. + +Command \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} may be used to switch back to +the default \OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} at any time. If any problems +using another package that influences footnotes occur, it is recommended not +to use the option anywhere and not to change the \PName{setting} anywhere +inside the document. + +A summary of the available \PName{setting} values of \Option{footnotes} may +be found at \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + . + \begin{table} + \caption[{Available values for option \Option{footnotes}}] + {Available values for option \Option{footnotes} setting up footnotes} + \label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes} + \begin{desctabular} + \pventry{multiple}{% + At sequences of immediately following footnote marks, consecutive + marks will be separated by + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}.% + \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{multiple}}}% + \pventry{nomultiple}{% + Immediately following footnotes will be handled like single footnotes + and not separated from each other.% + \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{nomultiple}}}% + \end{desctabular} + \end{table}% +}{, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}.% +}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{footnote}\OParameter{number}\Parameter{text}% + \Macro{footnotemark}\OParameter{number}% + \Macro{footnotetext}\OParameter{number}\Parameter{text}% + \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}% + \Macro{multfootsep} +\end{Declaration}% +Similar to the standard classes, footnotes in {\KOMAScript} are produced with +the \Macro{footnote} command, or alternatively the paired usage of the +commands \Macro{footnotemark} and \Macro{footnotetext}. As in the standard +classes, it is possible that a page break occurs within a footnote. Normally +this happens if the footnote mark is placed so near the bottom of a page as to +leave {\LaTeX} no choice but to break the footnote onto the next page. +\KOMAScript% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +, unlike the standard classes, can recognize and separate consecutive +footnotes +automatically. See\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnote}} +the previously documented option +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnotes} for this. + +If you want to set the separator manually, you may use +\Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}. Note that this command should not be +redefined, because it has been defined not only to be the separator string but +also the type style, i.\,e., font size and superscript. The separator string +without type style may be found at \Macro{multfootsep}. The predefined default +is +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\multfootsep}{,} +\end{lstcode} +and may be changed by redefining the command. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Examples and additional information may be found at + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} from + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.footnote} onward.% + \iffalse% +}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.footnote}% + Assume you want to place two footnotes following a single word. First you + may try +\begin{lstcode} + Word\footnote{1st footnote}\footnote{2nd footnote} +\end{lstcode} + for this. Assume that the footnotes will be numbered with 1 and 2. Now the + reader may think it's a single footnote 12, because the 2 + immediately follows the 1. You may change this using +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{footnotes=multiple} +\end{lstcode} + which would switch on the automatic recognition of footnote sequences. As + an alternative you may use +\begin{lstcode} + Word\footnote{1st footnote}% + \multiplefootnoteseparator + \footnote{2nd footnote} +\end{lstcode} + This should give you the wanted result even if the automatic solution + would fail or could not be used. + + Further, assume you want the footnotes separated not only by a single + comma, but by a comma and a white space. In this case you may redefine +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\multfootsep}{,\nobreakspace} +\end{lstcode} + at the document preamble. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} + instead of a usual space character has been used in this case to avoid + paragraph or at least page breaks within footnote sequences. + \end{Example}% +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{footref}\Parameter{reference} +\end{Declaration} +Sometimes% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +there are single footnotes to multiple text passages. The least sensible way +to typeset this would be to repeatedly use +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} with the same manually set +number. The disadvantages of this method would be that you have to know the +number and manually fix all the +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} commands, and if the number +changes because of adding or removing a footnote before, each +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} would have to be +changed. Because of this, \KOMAScript{} provides the use of the +\Macro{label}\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} mechanism in such +cases. After simply setting a \Macro{label} inside the footnote, +\Macro{footref} may be used to mark all the other text passages with the same +footnote mark. +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.footref}% + Maybe you have to mark each trade name with a footnote which states that + it is a registered trade name. You may write, e.\,g., +\begin{lstcode} + Company SplishSplash\footnote{This is a registered trade name. + All rights are reserved.\label{refnote}} + produces not only SplishPlump\footref{refnote} + but also SplishPlash\footref{refnote}. +\end{lstcode} + This will produce the same footnote mark three times, but only one + footnote text. The first footnote mark is produced by + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} itself, and the following two + footnote marks are produced by the additional \Macro{footref} + commands. The footnote text will be produced by + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}. + \end{Example} +\fi +Because of setting the additional footnote marks using the \Macro{label} +mechanism, changes of the footnote numbers will need at least two \LaTeX{} +runs to ensure correct numbers for all \Macro{footref} marks.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ % + An example for the usage \Macro{footref} can be found in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} on + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.footref}.% +}{}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{deffootnote}\OParameter{mark width}\Parameter{indent}% + \Parameter{parindent}\Parameter{definition}% + \Macro{deffootnotemark}\Parameter{definition}% + \Macro{thefootnotemark} +\end{Declaration}% +Footnotes are formatted slightly differently in {\KOMAScript} to in the +standard classes. As in the standard classes the footnote mark in the text is +depicted using a small superscripted number. The same formatting is used in +the footnote itself. The mark in the footnote is type-set right-aligned in a +box with width \PName{mark width}. The first line of the footnote follows +directly. + +All following lines will be indented by the length of \PName{indent}. If the +optional parameter \PName{mark width} is not specified, it defaults to +\PName{indent}. If the footnote consists of more than one paragraph, then the +first line of a paragraph is indented, in addition to \PName{indent}, by the +value of \PName{parindent}. + +\hyperref[fig:maincls.deffootnote]{Figure~\ref*{fig:maincls.deffootnote}} % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{at \autopageref{fig:maincls.deffootnote} }% +illustrates the layout parameters. The default configuration of the +{\KOMAScript} classes is: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em} + {\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} +\end{lstcode} +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.textsuperscript} controls both the +superscript and the smaller font size. Command \Macro{thefootnotemark} is the +current footnote mark without any formatting.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + Package \Package{scrextend} in contrast to this does not change the default + footnote settings of the used class. Loading the package does not change any + type style of footnote marks or footnote text in general. You have to copy + the above shown source to use the default settings of the \KOMAScript{} + classes with \Package{scrextend}. This may be done immediately after loading + package \Package{scrextend}.% +}{}% + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \begin{figure} +% \centering + \KOMAoption{captions}{bottombeside} + \setcapindent{0pt}% + \begin{captionbeside} + [{Parameters that control the footnote layout}]% + {\label{fig:\ThisCommonLabelBase.deffootnote}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% + Parameters that control the footnote layout}% + [l] + \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm} + \begin{picture}(100,22) + \thinlines + % frame of following paragraph + \put(5,0){\line(1,0){90}} + \put(5,0){\line(0,1){5}} + \put(10,5){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,5){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(95,0){\line(0,1){10}} + \put(10,10){\line(1,0){85}} + % frame of first paragraph + \put(5,11){\line(1,0){90}} + \put(5,11){\line(0,1){5}} + \put(15,16){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,16){\line(1,0){10}} + \put(95,11){\line(0,1){10}} + \put(15,21){\line(1,0){80}} + % box of the footnote mark + \put(0,16.5){\framebox(14.5,4.5){\mbox{}}} + % description of paragraphs + \put(45,16){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\textsf{first paragraph of a footnote}}} + \put(45,5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\textsf{next paragraph of a footnote}}} + % help lines + \thicklines + \multiput(0,0)(0,3){7}{\line(0,1){2}} + \multiput(5,0)(0,3){3}{\line(0,1){2}} + % parameters + \put(2,7){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(5,7){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(15,7){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(15,7){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{parindent}}} + % + \put(-3,13){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(0,13){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(10,13){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(10,13){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{indent}}} + % + \put(-3,19){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(0,19){\line(1,0){14.5}} + \put(19.5,19){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(19.5,19){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{mark width}}} + \end{picture} + \end{captionbeside} + \end{figure}} + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnote}\LabelFontElement{footnote}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}\LabelFontElement{footnotelabel}% +The% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}% +}{}} font element \FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}} +determines the font of the footnote including the footnote mark. Using the +element \FontElement{footnotelabel}\important{\FontElement{footnotelabel}} the +font of the footnote mark can be changed separately with the commands +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Please refer also to +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}. +Default setting is no change in the font.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + With \Package{scrextend} the elements may change the fonts only if the + footnotes are handled by the package, i.\,g., after using + \Macro{deffootnote}.% +}{}% + +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotereference}% +\LabelFontElement{footnotereference}% +The footnote mark in the text is defined separately from the mark in +front of the actual footnote. This is done with +\Macro{deffootnotemark}. Default setting is: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnotemark{% + \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} +\end{lstcode} +In the above% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{} the font for the element +\FontElement{footnotereference}\important{\FontElement{footnotereference}} is +applied (see \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}). Thus the footnote marks +in the text and in the footnote itself are identical. The font can be changed +with the commands \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont})% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ after usage of \Macro{deffootnotemark}}{}. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Examples may be found at \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}, + from \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} onwards.% + \iffalse% +}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.deffootnote}% + A\textnote{Hint!} feature often asked for is footnote marks which are + neither in superscript nor in a smaller font size. They should not touch + the footnote text but be separated by a small space. This can be + accomplished as follows: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote{1em}{1em}{\thefootnotemark\ } +\end{lstcode} + The footnote mark and the following space are therefore set + right-aligned into a box of width 1\Unit{em}. The following lines of + the footnote text are also indented by 1\Unit{em} from the left + margin. + + Another\textnote{Hint!} often requested footnote layout is left-aligned + footnote marks. These can be obtained with: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{% + \makebox[1.5em][l]{\thefootnotemark}} +\end{lstcode} + + If you want however only to change the font for all footnotes, for example + to sans serif, you can solve this problem simply by using the commands + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}): +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{footnote}{\sffamily} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{% + As demonstrated with the examples above, the simple user interface of + {\KOMAScript} provides a great variety of different footnote + formattings.% + }% +\fi% +% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{thickness}\Parameter{length}% +\end{Declaration}% +Generally% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{}% + }% +} % +a horizontal rule will be placed between the text area and the footnote +area. But normally this rule is not as long as the width of the typing +area. With Command \Macro{setfootnoterule} you may change the thickness and +the width of that rule. Thereby the parameters \PName{thickness} and +\PName{length} will be evaluated not at definition time but when setting the +rule itself. If optional argument \PName{thickness} ha been omitted the +thickness of the rule will not be changed. Empty arguments \PName{thickness} +or \PName{length} are also allowed and do not change the corresponding +parameter. Using implausible values may result in warning messages not only +setting the arguments but also when \KOMAScript{} uses the parameters. + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}\LabelFontElement{footnoterule}% +With element \FontElement{footnoterule}\important{\FontElement{footnoterule}} +the color% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{}% + }% +} % +of the rule may be changed using the commands +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} for element +\FontElement{footnoterule} (see \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Default is no change of +font or color. For color changes a color package like +\Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}\important{\Package{xcolor}} would be +needed.% +% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-20.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex index 4e80ea4dc59..54d1873bec5 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-20.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-headfootheight.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-20.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% common-headfootheight.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-20.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% common-headfootheight.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,51 +45,59 @@ % % ============================================================================ -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-20.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-headfootheight.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Head and Foot Height)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommoonscrlayer-scrpage}{\expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Head and Foot Height} \seclabel{height} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer}% +\BeginIndex{}{page>head>height}% +\BeginIndex{}{page>foot>height}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - The \LaTeX{} standard classes do not use the page footer a lot and if they do - use it, they put the contents into a \Macro{mbox} which results in the - footer being a single text line. This is probably the reason that \LaTeX{} itself - does not have a well-defined foot height. Actually there is - \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip} giving the distance between the last base - line of the text area and the base line of the footer. However, if the footer - consists of more than one text line, there is no definite statement whether this - length should be the distance to the first or the last base line of the footer. +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{Explain} + The \LaTeX{} standard classes do not use the page footer a lot and if they + do use it, they put the contents into a \Macro{mbox} which results in the + footer being a single text line. This is probably the reason that \LaTeX{} + itself does not have a well-defined foot height. Actually there is + \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip} giving the distance between the + last base line of the text area and the base line of the footer. However, + if the footer consists of more than one text line, there is no definite + statement whether this length should be the distance to the first or the + last base line of the footer. - Despite the fact that the page header of the standard classes will also be - put into a horizontal box and therefore is a single text line too, \LaTeX{} - indeed has a length to setup the height of the page header. The reason for - this may be that the height will be needed to determine the start of the - text area. } + Despite the fact that the page header of the standard classes will also be + put into a horizontal box and therefore is a single text line too, + \LaTeX{} indeed has a length to setup the height of the page header. The + reason for this may be that the height will be needed to determine the + start of the text area. + \end{Explain}% +}{% + Page head and footer are the main elements not only of a page style. Layer + can also be restricted to these using corresponding options (see + \autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}, + \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}). Therefore the heights of these + elements are very important and have to be well defined.% +} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ not scrlayer-scrpage + -You may find basic information about the height of the page header and footer -in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.height}, -\autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.height}. -\else % ---------------------------------------------- only scrlayer-scrpage - +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + All of what is described in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height} is generally + applicable. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next}.% +} \begin{Declaration} - \Length{footheight}\\ + \Length{footheight}% \Length{headheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Length}{footheight}% -\BeginIndex{Length}{headheight}% The package \Package{scrlayer} introduces \Length{footheight} as a new length similar to \Length{headheight} of the \LaTeX{} kernel. Additionally \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} interprets \Length{footskip} to be the distance @@ -98,9 +106,11 @@ line of the footer. Package \Package{typearea}\IndexPackage{typearea} interprets \Package{footheight} in the same way. So \Package{typearea}'s foot height options may also be used to setup the values for packages \Package{scrlayer} and \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. See option -\Option{footheight} and \Option{footlines} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.footheight}) and option \Option{footinclude} -at \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.footinclude} of the same section. +\DescRef{typearea.option.footheight} and \DescRef{typearea.option.footlines} +in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footheight}) and option +\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude} at +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footinclude} of the same section. If you do not use package \Package{typearea}, you should setup the head and foot height using the lengths directly where necessary. At least for the head @@ -112,10 +122,9 @@ about the changes and proper settings you may use yourself. The automatic changes will become valid immediately after the need for them has been detected. They will never be removed automatically, however, even if content with a lower height requirement should be detected at a later point in time.% -\EndIndex{Length}{headheight}% -\EndIndex{Length}{footheight}% - -\fi % ********************************************* Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..28169a0c58d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-interleafpage.tex @@ -0,0 +1,290 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-interleafpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-interleafpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-interleafpage.tex}% + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: Interleaf Pages)] +\translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Interleaf Pages} +\seclabel{emptypage}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{interleaf page}%% +\BeginIndex{}{page>style}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is described in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage} + applies, mutatis mutandis. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next}.% +} + +Interleaf pages are pages that are intended to stay blank. Originally these +pages were really completely white. \LaTeX{}, on the other hand, by default +sets those pages with the current valid page style. So those pages may have a +head and a pagination. \KOMAScript{} provides several extensions to this. + +Interleaf pages may be found in books mostly. Because chapters in books +commonly start on odd pages, sometimes a left page without contents has to be +added before. This is also the reason that interleaf pages only exist in +double-sided printing. The unused back sides of the one-sided printings are +not interleaf pages, really, although they may seem to be such pages. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + At letters interleaf pages are unusual. This may be benefited by the case, + that real two-sided letters are seldom, because binding of letters is not + done often. Nevertheless \Class{scrlttr2} supports interleaf pages in the + case of two-sided letters. Because the following described commands are + seldom used in letters no examples are shown. If you need examples, please + note them at \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} from + \autopageref{sec:maincls.emptypage} upward.% +}{}% + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{cleardoublepage}{page style} + \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} +\end{Declaration}% +With this option, % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +you may define the page style of the interleaf pages created by the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}, or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage} to break until the wanted +page. Every already defined \PName{page style} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} from +\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} and +\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} from \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) may be +used. Besides this, \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} is valid. This case +is the default until \KOMAScript~2.98c and results in interleaf page without +changing the page style. Since \KOMAScript~3.00% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +the default follows the recommendation of most typographers and has been +changed to blank interleaf pages with page style \PageStyle{empty} unless you +switch compatibility to an earlier version (see option +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}). +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{option.cleardoublepage}% + Assume you want interleaf pages almost empty but with pagination. This + means you want to use page style \PageStyle{plain}. You may use following + to achieve this: +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} +\end{lstcode} + More information about page style \PageStyle{plain} may be found at + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}. + \end{Example} +\else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{option.cleardoublepage}% + Assume you want interleaf pages almost empty but with pagination. This + means you want to use page style \PageStyle{plain}. You may use + following to achieve this: +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} +\end{lstcode} + More information about page style \PageStyle{plain} may be found at + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain}. + \end{Example}% + \fi% +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{clearpage}% + \Macro{cleardoublepage}% + \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}% + \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}\Parameter{page style}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} +\end{Declaration}% +The {\LaTeX} kernel contains the \Macro{clearpage} command, which takes +care that all not yet output floats are output, and then starts a new +page. There exists the instruction \Macro{cleardoublepage} which +works like \Macro{clearpage} but which, in the double-sided layouts +(see layout option \Option{twoside} in +\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside}) starts a new right-hand +page. An empty left page in the current page style is output if +necessary. + +With% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +\Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}, {\KOMAScript} works as described above. +The \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage} command changes the page style of the +empty left page to \PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} in order to +suppress the \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{page}{running} head. +Analogously, the page style \PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} is applied +to the empty page with \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}, suppressing the page +number as well as the \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{page}{running} +head. The page is thus entirely empty. If another \PName{page style} is wanted +for the interleaf page is may be set with the argument of +\Macro{cleardoubleoddusingpagestyle}. Every already defined \PName{page style} +(see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) may be used. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{}{% + Sometimes chapters should not start on the right-hand page but the left-hand + page. This is in contradition to the classic typography; nevertheless, it + may be suitable, e.\,g., if the double-page spread of the chapter start is + of special contents. \KOMAScript{} therefor provides the commands + \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}, + \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}, and \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}, + which are equivalent to the odd-page commands.% +} + +However, the approach used by the \KOMAScript{} commands +\Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, +\Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, and \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} is +dependent on the option +\Option{cleardoublepage}\important{\Option{cleardoublepage}} described above +and is similar to one of the corresponding commands above. The same is valid for +the standard command \Macro{cleardoublepage}, that may be either +\Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} or \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage}. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In \Class{scrlttr2} the other commands are there only for completeness. More + information about them may be found at + \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage} if needed.% +}{}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} +\begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.cleardoublepage}% + Assume you want to set next in your document a double-page spread + with a picture at the left-hand page and a chapter start at the + right-hand page. The picture should have the same size as the text + area without any head line or pagination. If the last chapter + ends with a left-hand page, an interleaf page has to be added, which + should be completely empty. + + First you will use +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=empty} +\end{lstcode} + to make interleaf pages empty. You may use this setting at the document + preamble already. As an alternative you may set it as the optional + argument of \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.documentclass}. + + At the relevant place in your document, you'll write: +\begin{lstcode} + \cleardoubleevenemptypage + \thispagestyle{empty} + \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,% + height=\textheight,% + keepaspectratio]% + {picture} + \chapter{Chapter Headline} +\end{lstcode} + The first of these lines switches to the next left page. If needed it also + adds a completely blank right-hand page. The second line makes sure that + the following left-hand page will be set using page style + \PageStyle{empty} too. From third down to sixth line, an external picture + of wanted size will be loaded without deformation. Package + \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} will be needed for this + command. The last line starts a new chapter on the next page which will be + a right-hand one. + \end{Example}% +\fi% + +The commands \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} respective \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage} +leads to the next odd respectively even page. The page style of an interleaf +page will be set depending on option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.cleardoublepage}.% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: + +% LocalWords: mutatis mutandis Interleaf interleaf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-lists.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-lists.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..acbf59bfed0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-lists.tex @@ -0,0 +1,713 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-lists.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-lists.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-lists.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] +\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Lists} +\seclabel{lists}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{lists}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + All of what is described in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} is + generally applicable. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next}.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + However, \Package{scrextend} does support only the environments + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}, + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin*}. All the other list + environments may be supported and controlled by the used class.% + }{}% +} + +Both {\LaTeX} and the standard classes offer different environments for +lists. Though slightly changed or extended all these list are of course +offered in {\KOMAScript} as well. In general, all lists\,---\,even of different +kind\,---\,can be nested up to four levels. From a typographical view, +anything more would make no sense, as more than three levels can no longer be +easily perceived. The recommended\textnote{Hint!} procedure in such a case is +to split the large list into several smaller ones. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Because lists are standard elements of \LaTeX{} this section abandons on + examples. Nevertheless, you may find examples either in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} from + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} or in almost every + introduction to \LaTeX.% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{itemize}\labelsuffix[itemize] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \Macro{labelitemi}% + \Macro{labelitemii}% + \Macro{labelitemiii}% + \Macro{labelitemiv} + \end{Declaration}% + The simplest form of a list is an \Environment{itemize} list. + \iffalse % Umbruckoptimierungstext + The users of a certain disliked word processing package often refer to + this form of a list as \emph{bulletpoints}. Presumably, these users + are unable to envisage that, depending on the level, a different + symbol from a large dot could be used to introduce each + point. % + \fi% + Depending on the level, {\KOMAScript} uses the following marks: + ``{\labelitemi}'', ``{\labelitemii}'', ``{\labelitemiii}'' and + ``{\labelitemiv}''. The definition of these symbols is specified in + the macros \Macro{labelitemi}, \Macro{labelitemii}, + \Macro{labelitemiii} and \Macro{labelitemiv}, all of which can be + redefined using \Macro{renewcommand}. Every item is introduced with + \Macro{item}.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.itemize}% + You have a simple list which is nested in several levels. You write + for example: +\begin{lstcode} + \minisec{Vehicles} + \begin{itemize} + \item aeroplanes + \begin{itemize} + \item biplane + \item jets + \item transport planes + \begin{itemize} + \item single-engined + \begin{itemize} + \item jet-driven + \item propeller-driven + \end{itemize} + \item multi-engined + \end{itemize} + \item helicopters + \end{itemize} + \item automobiles + \begin{itemize} + \item racing cars + \item private cars + \item lorries + \end{itemize} + \item bicycles + \end{itemize} +\end{lstcode} + As output you get: + \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] + \minisec{Vehicles} + \begin{itemize} + \item aeroplanes + \begin{itemize} + \item biplanes + \item jets + \item transport planes + \begin{itemize} + \item single-engined + \begin{itemize} + \item jet-driven + \item propeller-driven + \end{itemize} + \item multi-engined + \end{itemize} + \item helicopters + \end{itemize} +% Falls fuer die Umbruchoptimierung erforderlich, kann die Liste +% beispielsweise so erweitert werden: +% \item motorcycles +% \begin{itemize} +% \item historically accurate +% \item futuristic, not real +% \end{itemize} + \item automobiles + \begin{itemize} + \item racing cars + \item private cars + \item lorries + \end{itemize} + \item bicycles + \end{itemize} + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example} + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{enumerate}\labelsuffix[enumerate] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \Macro{theenumi}% + \Macro{theenumii}% + \Macro{theenumiii}% + \Macro{theenumiv}% + \Macro{labelenumi}% + \Macro{labelenumii}% + \Macro{labelenumiii}% + \Macro{labelenumiv} + \end{Declaration}% + Another form of a list often used is a numbered list which is already + implemented by the {\LaTeX} kernel. Depending on the level, the + numbering\Index{numbering} uses the following characters: Arabic numbers, + small letters, small roman numerals, and capital letters. The kind of + numbering is defined with the macros \Macro{theenumi} down to + \Macro{theenumiv}. The output format is determined by the macros + \Macro{labelenumi} to \Macro{labelenumiv}. While the small letter of the + second level is followed by a round parenthesis, the values of all other + levels are followed by a dot. Every item is introduced with \Macro{item}.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.enumerate}% + Replacing every occurrence of an + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.itemize} environment with an + \Environment{enumerate} environment in the example above we + get the following result: + \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] + \minisec{Vehicles} + \begin{enumerate} + \item aeroplanes + \begin{enumerate} + \item biplanes + \item jets + \item transport planes + \begin{enumerate} + \item single-engined + \begin{enumerate} + \item jet-driven\label{xmp:maincls.jets} + \item propeller-driven + \end{enumerate} + \item multi-engined + \end{enumerate} + \item helicopters + \end{enumerate} + % Wie oben: + % \item motorcycles + % \begin{enumerate} + % \item historically accurate + % \item futuristic, not real + % \end{enumerate} + \item automobiles + \begin{enumerate} + \item racing cars + \item private cars + \item lorries + \end{enumerate} + \item bicycles + \end{enumerate} + \end{ShowOutput} + Using \Macro{label} within a list you can set labels which are + referenced with \Macro{ref}. In the example above, a label was set + after the jet-driven, single-engined transport planes with + \Macro{label}\PParameter{xmp:jets}. The \Macro{ref} value is then + \ref{xmp:maincls.jets}. + \end{Example} + \fi% + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{description}\labelsuffix[description] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item}\OParameter{keyword} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + A further list form is the description list. Its main use is the description + of several items. The item itself is an optional parameter in + \Macro{item}. % + \BeginIndex{FontElement}{descriptionlabel}% + \LabelFontElement{descriptionlabel}% + The font\Index{font>style}\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% + \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% + which is responsible for emphasizing the item can be changed with the + commands \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) for the element + \FontElement{descriptionlabel} (see + \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}). Default setting is + \Macro{sffamily}\linebreak[1]\Macro{bfseries}.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.description}% + Instead of items in sans serif and bold, you want them printed in the + standard font in bold. Using +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{\normalfont\bfseries} +\end{lstcode} + you redefine the font accordingly. + + An example for a description list is the output of the page styles + listed in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}. The heavily + abbreviated source could be: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{description} + \item[empty] is the page style without any header or footer. + \item[plain] is the page style without headings. + \item[headings] is the page style with running headings. + \item[myheadings] is the page style for manual headings. + \end{description} +\end{lstcode} + This abbreviated version gives: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \begin{description} + \item[empty] is the page style without any header or footer. + \item[plain] is the page style without headings. + \item[headings] is the page style with running headings. + \item[myheadings] is the page style for manual headings. + \end{description} + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example} + \fi% + % + \EndIndexGroup% +\fi + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{labeling} + \OParameter{delimiter}\Parameter{widest pattern} + \labelsuffix[labeling] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item}\OParameter{keyword}\dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} +\end{Declaration}% +An additional form of a description list is only available in the +{\KOMAScript} classes% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ and the package \Package{scrextend}}{}: the +\Environment{labeling} environment. Unlike the % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.description}% +}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}% +} environment, you can provide a +pattern whose length determines the indentation of all items. Furthermore, you +can put an optional \PName{delimiter} between the item and its description. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{labelinglabel}\LabelFontElement{labelinglabel}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{labelingseparator}% +\LabelFontElement{labelingseparator}% +The font\Index{font>style}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +}% +which is responsible for emphasizing the item and the separator can be changed +with the commands \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) for the element +\FontElement{labelinglabel} and \FontElement{labelingseparator} (see +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}). +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\par\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.labeling}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + A small example of a list like this may be written:% + }{% + Slightly changing the example from the + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description} environment, we could + write:% + }% +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} + \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} + \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} + \item[empty] + Page style without header and footer + \item[plain] + Page style for chapter beginnings without headings + \item[headings] + Page style for running headings + \item[myheadings] + Page style for manual headings + \end{labeling} +\end{lstcode} + As the result we get: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} + \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} + \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} + \item[empty] + Page style without header and footer + \item[plain] + Page style for chapter beginnings without headings + \item[headings] + Page style for running headings + \item[myheadings] + Page style for manual headings + \end{labeling} + \end{ShowOutput} + As can be seen in this example, a font changing command may be set + in the usual way. But if you do not want the font of the separator to + be changed in the same way as the font of the label, you have to set + the font of the separator as well. + \end{Example} +\fi% +Originally, this environment was implemented for things like ``Precondition, +Assertion, Proof'', or ``Given, Required, Solution'' that are often used in +lecture hand-outs. By now this environment has found many different +applications. For example, the environment for examples in this guide was +defined with the \Environment{labeling} environment.% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{verse}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Usually the \Environment{verse} environment is not perceived as a list + environment because you do not work with \Macro{item} commands. Instead, + fixed line breaks are used within the \Environment{flushleft} + environment. Yet internally in both the standard classes as well as + {\KOMAScript} it is indeed a list environment. + + In general, the \Environment{verse} environment is used for + poems\Index{poems}. Lines are indented both left and right. Individual + lines of verse are ended by a fixed line break \verb|\\|. Verses are set as + paragraphs, separated by an empty line. Often also + \Macro{medskip}\IndexCmd{medskip} or \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} is + used instead. To avoid a page break at the end of a line of verse you could, + as usual, insert \verb|\\*| instead of \verb|\\|. + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.verse}% + As an example, the first lines of ``Little Red Riding Hood and the + Wolf'' by Roald Dahl: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + As soon as Wolf began to feel\\* + that he would like a decent meal,\\* + He went and knocked on Grandma's door.\\* + When Grandma opened it, she saw\\* + The sharp white teeth, the horrid grin,\\* + And Wolfie said, `May I come in?' + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + The result is as follows: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \begin{verse} + As soon as Wolf began to feel\\* + That he would like a decent meal,\\* + He went and knocked on Grandma's door.\\* + When Grandma opened it, she saw\\* + The sharp white teeth, the horrid grin,\\* + And Wolfie said, `May I come in?' + \end{verse} + \end{ShowOutput} + However, if you have very long lines of verse, for instance: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Both the philosopher and the house-owner + have always something to repair.\\ + \bigskip + Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you + that he has never lied. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + where a line break occurs within a line of verse: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \begin{verse} + Both the philosopher and the house-owner + have always something to repair.\\ + \bigskip + Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you + that he has never lied. + \end{verse} + \end{ShowOutput} + there \verb|\\*| can not prevent a page break occurring within a verse + at such a line break. To prevent such a page break, a + \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} would have to be inserted + somewhere in the first line: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Both the philosopher and the house-owner\nopagebreak + have always something to repair.\\ + \bigskip + Don't trust a man, my son, who tells you\nopagebreak + that he has never lied. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + + In the above example, \Macro{bigskip} was used to separate the lines of + verse. + \end{Example} + \fi % \ifCommonmaincls + % + \EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{quote}\end{Environment} + \begin{Environment}{quotation}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + These two environments are also list environments and can be found both in + the standard and the {\KOMAScript} classes. Both environments use justified + text which is indented both on the left and right side. Usually they are + used to separate long citations\Index{citations} from the main text. The + difference between these two lies in the manner in which paragraphs are + typeset. While \Environment{quote} paragraphs are highlighted by vertical + space, in \Environment{quotation} paragraphs the first line is + indented. This is also true for the first line of a \Environment{quotation} + environment. To prevent indentation you have to insert a \Macro{noindent} + command\IndexCmd{noindent} before the text. + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.quote}% + You want to highlight a short anecdote. You write the following + \Environment{quotation} environment for this:% +\begin{lstcode} + A small example for a short anecdote: + \begin{quotation} + The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was + calling; + + Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. + ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! + Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. + This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances + west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' + + Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. + I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. + Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' + \end{quotation} +\end{lstcode} + The result is: + \begin{ShowOutput} + A small example for a short anecdote: + \begin{quotation} + The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was + calling; + + Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. + ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! + Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. + This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances + west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' + + Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. + I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. + Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' + \end{quotation} + \end{ShowOutput} + % + Using a \Environment{quote} environment instead you get: + % + \begin{ShowOutput} + A small example for a short anecdote: + \begin{quote}\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt} + The old year was turning brown; the West Wind was + calling; + + Tom caught the beechen leaf in the forest falling. + ``I've caught the happy day blown me by the breezes! + Why wait till morrow-year? I'll take it when me pleases. + This I'll mend my boat and journey as it chances + west down the withy-stream, following my fancies!'' + + Little Bird sat on twig. ``Whillo, Tom! I heed you. + I've a guess, I've a guess where your fancies lead you. + Shall I go, shall I go, bring him word to meet you?'' + \end{quote} + \end{ShowOutput} + % + \end{Example} + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup +\fi + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{addmargin} + \OParameter{left indentation}\Parameter{indentation} + \end{Environment} + \begin{Environment}{addmargin*} + \OParameter{inner indentation}\Parameter{indentation} + \end{Environment} +\end{Declaration} +Similar to % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.quote} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.quotation} which are available at the + standard classes and also the \KOMAScript{} classes% +}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quotation}% +} % +the \Environment{addmargin} environment changes the margin\Index{margin}. In +contrast to the first two environments, with \Environment{addmargin} the user +can set the width of the indentation. Besides this, this environment does not +change the indentation of the first line nor the vertical spacing between +paragraphs. + +If only the obligatory argument \PName{indentation} is given, both the +left and right margin are expanded by this value. If the optional +argument \PName{left indentation} is given as well, then at the left +margin the value \PName{left indentation} is used instead of +\PName{indentation}. + +The starred \Environment{addmargin*} only differs from the normal +version in a two-sided layout. Furthermore, the difference only occurs +if the optional argument \PName{inner indentation} is used. In this +case this value \PName{inner indentation} is added to the normal inner +indentation. For right-hand pages this is the left margin, for +left-hand pages the right margin. Then the value of +\PName{indentation} determines the width of the opposite margin. + +Both versions of this environment take also negative values for all +parameters. This has the effect of expanding the environment into the +margin. +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.addmargin}% +\begin{lstcode} + \newenvironment{SourceCodeFrame}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% + }{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% + } +\end{lstcode} + If you now put your source code in such an environment it will show + up as: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \newenvironment{SourceCodeFrame}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% + }{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% + } + You define yourself the following environment: + \begin{SourceCodeFrame} +\begin{lstcode} +\newenvironment{\SourceCodeFrame}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% +}{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% +} +\end{lstcode} + \end{SourceCodeFrame} + This may be feasible or not. In any case it shows the usage of this + environment. + \end{ShowOutput} + The optional argument of the \Environment{addmargin*} environment + makes sure that the inner margin is extended by 1\Unit{em}. In turn + the outer margin is decreased by 1\Unit{em}. The result is a shift + by 1\Unit{em} to the outside. Instead of \PValue{1em} you can of + course use a length, for example, \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}. + \end{Example} +\fi% + +Whether a page is going to be on the left or right side of the book can not be +determined for certain in the first {\LaTeX} run. For details please refer to +the explanation of the commands +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd} +(\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd}) and +\iffree{\Macro{ifthispagewasodd}}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispagewasodd}} +(\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd}). + +\begin{Explain} + There may be several questions about coexistence of lists and + paragraphs. Because of this additional information may be found at the + description of option \Option{parskip} in + \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.parskip}. Also at the expert part, + in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.env.addmargin*}, you may find additional + information about page breaks inside of \Environment{addmargin*}.% +\end{Explain}% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-marginpar.tex index 2351c2601db..ff57abce762 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-13.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-marginpar.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-13.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-marginpar.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-13.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-marginpar.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,46 +45,41 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-13.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-marginpar.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] \translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Margin Notes} \seclabel{marginNotes}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -It applies, mutatis mutandis, what is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{margin>notes}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + All of what is described in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} is generally + applicable. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next}.% +} + Aside from the text area, that normally fills the typing area, usually a marginalia column may be found. Margin notes will be printed at this area. -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{At lot of them may be found in this - \iffree{manual}{book}.}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Nevertheless, margin notes are unusual at letters and - should be used seldomly.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Nevertheless, margin notes are unusual at letters and should be used + seldomly.% +}{% + At lot of them may be found in this \iffree{manual}{book}.% +}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{marginpar}\OParameter{margin note left}\Parameter{margin note}\\ + \Macro{marginpar}\OParameter{margin note left}\Parameter{margin note}% \Macro{marginline}\Parameter{margin note} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{marginpar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{marginline}% Usually margin notes\Index[indexmain]{margin>notes} in {\LaTeX} are inserted with the command \Macro{marginpar}. They are placed in the outer margin. In documents with one-sided layout the right border is @@ -94,61 +89,46 @@ are always set in justified layout. However, experience has shown that many users prefer left- or right-aligned margin notes instead. To facilitate this, {\KOMAScript} offers the command \Macro{marginline}. -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.marginline.example}% - In this chapter, sometimes, the \IfCommon{maincls}{class name - \Class{scrartcl}}\IfCommon{scrextend}{package name \Package{scrextend}} - can be found in the margin. This can be produced with:% -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext - \footnote{In fact, instead of - \Macro{texttt}, a semantic highlighting was used. To avoid - confusion this was replaced in the example.} -\fi -\ifCommonmaincls + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \iftrue% +}{% + An example for this may be found in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} at + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.marginline}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.marginline}% + In this \iffree{document}{book}, sometimes, the class name + \Class{scrartcl} can be found in the margin. This can be produced with:% + \iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext + \footnote{In fact, instead of \Macro{texttt}, a semantic highlighting + was used. To avoid confusion this was replaced in the example.}% + \fi \begin{lstcode} \marginline{\texttt{scrartcl}} \end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \marginline{\texttt{scrextend}} -\end{lstcode} -\fi Instead of \Macro{marginline} you could have used \Macro{marginpar}. In fact the first command is implemented internally as: -\ifCommonmaincls \begin{lstcode} \marginpar[\raggedleft\texttt{scrartcl}] {\raggedright\texttt{scrartcl}} \end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \marginpar[\raggedleft\texttt{scrextend}] - {\raggedright\texttt{scrextend}} -\end{lstcode} -\fi Thus \Macro{marginline} is really only an abbreviated writing of the code above.% \end{Example}% +\fi Experts\textnote{Attention!} and advanced users may find information about problems using \Macro{marginpar} at \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.marginpar}. These are valid for +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.marginpar}. These are valid for \Macro{marginline} also.% -\fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - An example for this may be found in - \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes} - at \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.marginline.example}.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{marginpar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{marginline}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{margin>notes}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-7.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex index 123e2e0b821..1ec1edd6b97 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-7.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-oddorevenpage.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-7.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2013 +% common-oddorevenpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-7.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2013 +% common-oddorevenpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,32 +45,29 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-7.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-oddorevenpage.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Detection of Odd and Even Pages)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of translated German file: 2011/08/26 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} \seclabel{oddOrEven}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -What is described in -\autoref{sec:maincls.oddOrEven} applies, mutatis mutandis. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup% \BeginIndex{}{page>odd}% \BeginIndex{}{page>even}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is described in + \autoref{sec:maincls.oddOrEven} applies, mutatis mutandis. + So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.oddOrEven} you can + switch to \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next}.% +} + In double-sided documents we distinguish left and right pages. Left pages always have an even page number, right pages always have an odd page number. % For this they are mostly called even and odd pages so they @@ -78,24 +75,29 @@ number. % For this they are mostly called even and odd pages so they Thus, they are most often referred to as even and odd pages in this \iffree{guide}{book}. % -\IfCommon{maincls}{This also means that the detection +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + This also means that the detection of a left or right page is same as detection of even and odd page numbers. % Umbruchkorrekturtext \iftrue% - There's no distinction in left and right pages in single-sided - documents. Nevertheless there are pages with even or odd page numbers.% - \fi}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Letters will be set single-side mostly. Nevertheless, - printing letters with single-side layout using both paper sides or - exceptionally generating real double-side letters it may be useful to know - whether producing currently an even or odd page.}% + There's no distinction in left and right pages in single-sided + documents. Nevertheless there are pages with even or odd page numbers.% + \fi% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Letters will be set single-side mostly. Nevertheless, printing letters + with single-side layout using both paper sides or exceptionally generating + real double-side letters it may be useful to know whether producing + currently an even or odd page.% + }{}% +} + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifthispageodd}\Parameter{true part}\Parameter{false part} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifthispageodd}% If one wants to find out with {\KOMAScript} whether a text falls on an even or odd page, one can use the \Macro {ifthispageodd} command. The \PName{true part} argument is executed only if the command falls on an odd @@ -104,7 +106,7 @@ page. Otherwise the \PName{false part} argument is executed. \begin{Example} Assume that you simply want to show whether a text will be placed onto an even or odd page. You may achieve that using -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\baselineskip] +\begin{lstcode} This page has an \ifthispageodd{odd}{even} page number. \end{lstcode} @@ -121,16 +123,13 @@ decision is correct. In the first run a heuristic is used to make the first choice. At \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd} experts may find more +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd} experts may find more information about the problems detecting left and right pages or even and odd page number.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifthispageodd}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{page>odd}% -\EndIndex{}{page>even} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-0.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-options.tex index 8bea4b301ff..66f020ff4b3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-0.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-options.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-0.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-options.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-0.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-options.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -40,82 +40,70 @@ % % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind % Verwaltet von Markus Kohm % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-0.tex} - [$Date: 2016-04-30 08:43:16 +0200 (Sat, 30 Apr 2016) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-options.tex} + [$Date: 2016-11-14 21:06:12 +0100 (Mo, 14. Nov 2016) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] \translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage - \csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayernotecolumn}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayernotecolumn - \csname ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Early or late Selection of Options} \seclabel{options} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{typearea}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis -All of what is described in \autoref{sec:typearea.options} is generally applicable. -\else - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{options}% -In this section a peculiarity of {\KOMAScript} is presented, which, -apart from % -\IfCommon{typearea}{the \Package{typearea} package, is also relevant to other {\KOMAScript} packages and classes}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{the classes \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and - \Class{scrartcl} is also relevant to other {\KOMAScript} classes and packages}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{the class \Class{scrlttr2} is also relevant to other - {\KOMAScript} classes and packages}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{the classes and the \Package{scrextend} package is also relevant to several other - {\KOMAScript} packages}% -\IfCommon{scrhack}{the \Package{scrhack} package, is also relevant to other - \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}% -\IfCommon{scrjura}{the \Package{scrjura} package, is also relevant to other - \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{the \Package{scrlayer} package, is also relevant to other - \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{the \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} package, is also - relevant to other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-notecolumn}{the \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} package, is - also relevant to other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}% -. Such that the user can find all information corresponding to a -single package or a single class in the relevant chapter, this section -is found almost identically in several chapters. Users who are not -only interested in a particular package or class, but wish to gain an -overview of {\KOMAScript} as a whole, may read the section in one -chapter and may thereafter skip it wherever coming across it in the -document. +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + All of what is described in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options} is generally + applicable. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options} you can switch to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next}.% +} + +In this section a peculiarity of {\KOMAScript} is presented, which, apart +from % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{the \Package{typearea} package, is also + relevant to other {\KOMAScript} packages and classes}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{the classes \Class{scrbook}, + \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} is also relevant to other + {\KOMAScript} classes and packages}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{the class \Class{scrlttr2} is also + relevant to other {\KOMAScript} classes and packages}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{the classes and the + \Package{scrextend} package is also relevant to several other + {\KOMAScript} packages}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrhack}{the \Package{scrhack} package, is also + relevant to other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrjura}{the \Package{scrjura} package, is + also relevant to other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{the \Package{scrlayer} package, + is also relevant to other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{the + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} package, is also relevant to other + \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-notecolumn}{the + \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} package, is also relevant to + other \KOMAScript{} packages and classes}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError}}}}}}}}}% +. Such that the user can find all information corresponding to a single +package or a single class in the relevant chapter, this section is found +almost identically in several chapters. Users who are not only interested in a +particular package or class, but wish to gain an overview of {\KOMAScript} as +a whole, may read the section in one chapter and may thereafter skip it +wherever coming across it in the document. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{documentclass}\OParameter{option list}% - \Parameter{{\KOMAScript} class}\\ + \Parameter{{\KOMAScript} class} \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{option list}% - \Parameter{package list} + \Parameter{package list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{documentclass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usepackage}% In \LaTeX{}, provision is made for the user to pass class options as a comma-separated list of keywords as optional arguments to \Macro{documentclass}. @@ -134,26 +122,22 @@ from this difference \Macro{documentclass} and \Macro{usepackage} function the same in {\KOMAScript} as described in \cite{latex:usrguide} or any introduction to \LaTeX, for example \cite{lshort}.% -% -\IfNotCommon{scrjura}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrhack}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer-notecolumn}{% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\par% + +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{% + scrjura,scrhack,scrlayer,scrlayer-scrpage,scrlayer-notecolumn,scrextend% +}{% + When using a {\KOMAScript} class, no options should be passed on % Die Alternativen an dieser Stelle dienen der Verbesserung des Umbruchs - \IfCommon{typearea}{unnecessary, explicit }% - loading of the \Package{typearea} or \Package{scrbase} packages. The - reason for this is that the class already loads these packages - without options and \LaTeX{} refuses multiple loadings of a package - with different option settings.% - \IfCommon{maincls}{\ Actually, it is no longer necessary when using - any {\KOMAScript} class to explicity load either one of these - packages.}% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ Actually, it is no longer necessary when using - any {\KOMAScript} class to explicity load either one of these - packages.}}}}}}} + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{unnecessary, explicit }{}% + loading of the \Package{typearea} or \Package{scrbase} packages. The reason + for this is that the class already loads these packages without options and + \LaTeX{} refuses multiple loadings of a package with different option + settings.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{\ Actually, it is no longer + necessary when using any {\KOMAScript} class to explicity load either one + of these packages.}{}% +}{} You should note\textnote{Attention!}, that in opposite to the interface described below the options interface of \Macro{documentclass} and @@ -162,17 +146,15 @@ constructs may break inside the optional argument of these commands. Because of this, the usage of a \LaTeX{} length inside the value of an option would cause an error before \KOMAScript{} can get the control over the option execution. So, if you want to use a \LaTeX{} length, counter or command a part -of the value of an option, you have to use \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption}. These commands will be described next.% +of the value of an option, you have to use +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}. These commands will be described next.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usepackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{documentclass}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoptions}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoption}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{KOMAoptions}\Parameter{option list}\\ + \Macro{KOMAoptions}\Parameter{option list} \Macro{KOMAoption}\Parameter{option}\Parameter{value list} \end{Declaration} \KOMAScript{}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -188,11 +170,8 @@ Some options also have a default value. If one does not give a value, i.\,e., gives the option simply in the form \PName{option}, then the default value will be used. -Some options can % -%\IfCommon{maincls}{also }% Umbruchkorrektur -%\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{also }% Umbruchkorrektur -assume several values simultaneously. For such options there exists -the possibility, with the help of \Macro{KOMAoption}, to pass a single +Some options can assume several values simultaneously. For such options there +exists the possibility, with the help of \Macro{KOMAoption}, to pass a single \PName{option} a list of values. The individual values are given as a comma-separated \PName{value list}. @@ -208,27 +187,24 @@ comma-separated \PName{value list}. % \PName{value} must be enclosed in curly brackets. To implement this possibility {\KOMAScript} uses the commands - \Macro{FamilyOptions} and \Macro{FamilyOption} with the family - ``\PValue{KOMA}''. + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions} and \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption} + with the family ``\PValue{KOMA}''. \iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur More information on these commands % - \IfCommon{maincls}{for experts }% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{for experts }% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{for experts }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{for experts }{}}% is found in \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. \else For more information in these commands see \autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. \fi \end{Explain} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoptions}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{options}% - -\fi % IgnoreThis +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8c85bf399fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex @@ -0,0 +1,872 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Text that is common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ============================================================================ + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-pagestylemanipulation.tex} + [$Date: 2013-10-22 11:17:09 +0200 (Di, 22 Okt 2013) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: + Manipulation of defined page styles)] +\translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert} + +% Date version of the translated file: 2015-06-18 + +\section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} +\seclabel{pagestyle.content} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{page>style} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + Even though \Package{scrlayer} itself does not define a concrete page style + with content\,---\,the already mentioned page styles + \PageStyle{@everystyle@} and \PageStyle{empty} are initially defined without + any level and so empty and without content\,---\,, it provides some options + and commands for the manipulation of the contents.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \hyperref[sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles]% + {Section~\ref*{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}} states the + predefined defaults for the page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} and + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} and how they can be adapted. But + information about the generation of, i.\,e., the running heads, the + manipulation of the widths of page head and footer, and how you can get + horizontal lines printed above or below the page head or footer are still + missing. Even though all these are features of package \Package{scrlayer}, + they will be described consecutively, because these basic features of + \Package{scrlayer} are also a fundamental part of the features of + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{% + This section is an add-on to + \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content}. It describes features that may + be to complicated for beginners.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +} + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{\iffalse}{% + \csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{automark}\OParameter{section level of the right mark}% + \Parameter{section level of the left mark}% + \Macro{automark*}\OParameter{section level of the right mark}% + \Parameter{section level of the left mark}% + \Macro{manualmark}% + \Option{automark}% + \OptionVName{autooneside}{simple switch}% + \Option{manualmark} + \end{Declaration} + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{Explain} + With the \LaTeX{} standard classes or the \KOMAScript{} classes the + decision whether using automatic running heads\Index{running + heads>automatic}, or static or manual running heads\Index{running + heads>static}\Index{running heads>manual} would be done using either + page style \PageStyle{headings} or \PageStyle{myheadings}. Automatic + running heads are replications of a significant, characterizing text + snippet of the page mostly inside the page head, sometimes in the page + footer. + + The article classes\OnlyAt{\Class{article}\and \Class{scrartcl}} + \Class{article} or \Class{scrartcl} with page style + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} use the section heading, + which is either the mandatory or the optional argument of + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}, for the automatic running head of single side + documents. Double side documents use this section heading as the + \emph{left mark} and at once use the subsection heading as the + \emph{right mark}. The left mark will be printed on left pages, which + founds the name \emph{left mark}. The right mark will be printed on + right\,---\,in single side mode this means every\,---\,page. The classes + by default also remove the right mark whenever they put the section + heading into the left mark. + + The report and book classes \OnlyAt{\Class{report}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{book}\and \Class{scrbook}} start one level + higher. So they use the chapter heading to be the right mark in single + side layout. In double side layout they use the chapter heading to be + the left mark and the section heading to be the right mark. + + If you are using \PageStyle{myheadings} instead of + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}, the marks in the page + header still exists and would be printed same like using + \PageStyle{headings}. But section commands will not automatically set + the marks any longer. So\important{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright}\\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth}}% + you can fill them only using the commands + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth}, which will be described + later in this section. + \end{Explain}\par + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + In common classes the decision for a page style\,---\,generally + \PageStyle{headings} and \PageStyle{myheading}\,---\,is also a decision + to use either automatic or manual running heads. % + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% + This difference between those two page styles has been abolished by + \Package{scrpage2} and also by \Package{scrlayer}. Instead of distinguishing + between automatic and manual running head by the selection of a page style, + two new commands, \Macro{automark} and \Macro{manualmark}, are provided. + + The command \Macro{manualmark} switches to manual marks and deactivates the + automatic filling of the marks. In contrast to this \Macro{automark} and + \Macro{automark*} can be used to define, which section levels should be used + for the automatic mark filling. The optional argument is the \PName{section + level of the right mark}, the mandatory argument the \PName{section level + of the left mark}. The arguments always should be the name of a section + level like \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, + \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph}, or + \PValue{subparagraph}. + + Generally the higher level should be used for the left mark and the lower + level for the right mark. This is only a convention and not a need, but it + makes sense. + + Please note\textnote{Attention} that not every class provides running heads + for every section level. For example the standard classes never setup the + running head of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}. The \KOMAScript{} classes + provide running heads for every section level. + + The difference in \Macro{automark} and \Macro{automark*} is, that + \Macro{automark} deletes all prior usages of \Macro{automark} or + \Macro{automark*}, while \Macro{automark*} changes only the behaviour of the + section levels of its arguments. So you can even build more complex cases. + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{\csname + iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark}% + Assume you want the chapter heading to be the running head of even pages + and the section heading to be the running head of odd pages like this is + usual for books. But on odd pages you also want the chapter headings as + a running head as long as the first section appears. To do so, you first + have to load \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} and select page style + \PageStyle{scrheadings}. So you're document starts with: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} +\end{lstcode} + Next you will setup the chapter heading to be not only the left but also + the right mark: +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[chapter]{chapter} +\end{lstcode} + Then the section heading should also become a right mark: +\begin{lstcode} + \automark*[section]{} +\end{lstcode} + Here the star version is used, because the prior \Macro{automark} + command should be still valid. Additionally the mandatory argument for + the \PName{section level of the left mark} is empty, because this mark + should be unchanged. + + Now you just need some document contents to see a result: +\begin{lstcode} + \usepackage{lipsum} + \begin{document} + \chapter{Chapter Heading} + \lipsum[1-20] + \section{Section Heading} + \lipsum[21-40] + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + We once again use package \Package{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} to + generate some dummy text with command + \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum}. The package is really useful. + + If you'd test the example, you'd see, that the chapter start page does + not have a running head as usual. This is, because it automatically uses + the \PageStyle{plain} page style + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. Pages~2--4 have the chapter headings in + the running head. After the section heading on page~4 the running head + of page~5 changes into this section heading. From this page to the end + the running head alternates between chapter and section heading from + page to page. + \end{Example} + \fi + + Instead of the commands you may also use the options \Option{manualmark} and + \Option{automark} to switch between manual and automatic running + heads. Thereby \Option{automark} always uses the default +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[section]{chapter} +\end{lstcode} + for classes with \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} and +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[subsection]{section} +\end{lstcode} + for classes without \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}. + + But normally in single side mode you do not want that the lower level + influences the right mark, you want the higher level, that will fill only + the left mark in double side layout, to be the running head of all + pages. The default option \Option{autooneside} corresponds to this + behaviour. The option understands the values for simple switches, that can + be found in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on + \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If you'd deactivate the option, in single + side layout the optional and the obligatory arguments of \Macro{automark} + and \Macro{automark*} will influence the running head again.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{\csname + iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark.oneside}% + Assume you have a single sided report but want similar running heads as + in the book example before. The chapter headings should be used as a + running head as long as the first section appears. From the first + section on, the section heading should be used. So we modify the + previous example a little bit: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrreprt} + \usepackage[autooneside=false]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \automark[section]{chapter} + \usepackage{lipsum} + \begin{document} + \chapter{Chapter Heading} + \lipsum[1-20] + \section{Section Heading} + \lipsum[21-40] + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + You can see, that we do not need a \Macro{automark*} command in this + case. Please try the example also with \Option{autooneside} set to + \PValue{true} or remove the option and its value. You should find a + difference at the running head in the pages' head from page~4 on. + \end{Example} + \fi + + Please note\textnote{Attention!}, only loading the package does not have any + effect on the fact whether automatic or manual running heads are used or + what kind of section headings do fill up the marks. Only using an explicit + option \Option{automark} or \Option{manualmark} or one of the commands + \Macro{automark} or \Macro{manualmark} can reach a well defined state.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{draft}{simple switch} + \end{Declaration} + This \KOMAScript{} option understands the values for simple switches, that + are shown in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on + \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the option is active, all elements of + the page styles will also show dimension lines. This might be useful while + draft editing.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + If the option has been set as a global option (see the optional argument + of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}), but you do not want the + dimension lines, you can deactivate them for the package only using + \OptionValue{draft}{false} as an optional argument of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} while loading the package.% + }{}% + \EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{string} + \end{Declaration} + The automatic running head and only this uses \Macro{MakeMarkcase} for its + output. If the command has not been defined, e.\,g., by the class, while + loading \Package{scrlayer}, it would be defined with the default of + outputting the argument \PName{string} without changes. But the default can + be change either redefining \Macro{MakeMarkcase} or using option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.markcase}, that will be described next. + Depending on the setting the argument could, e.\,g., be converted into upper + or lower cases. + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{markcase}{Wert} + \end{Declaration} + As already mentioned with \Package{scrlayer} you may switch between manual + and automatic running heads. Using automatic running heads the corresponding + marks will be filled by the section heading commands. Some culture areas do + convert the running heads into upper case letters in opposite to the German + typographic habit. The \LaTeX{} standard classes do so by default. Package + \Package{scrlayer} optionally provides this too. Therefor you'd use option + \OptionValue{markcase}{upper} which results in a redefinition of + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{MakeMarkcase}, a + command, that is used by \Package{scrlayer} for automatic running heads. + + Unfortunately \LaTeX's command for upper case letter typesetting, + \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} results in an very inadequate + typesetting, because it neither uses letter spacing nor does it space + balancing. One reason for this behaviour might be, that a glyph analyzing + would be needed, to incorporate the letter shapes and their combination + while space balancing. Because of this \KOMAScript{} author suggests to + abstain from upper case letter typesetting for running heads. This could be + achieved using \OptionValue{markcase}{used}. Nevertheless, some classes + would add \Macro{MarkUppercase} or even \TeX{} command \Macro{uppercase} + into the running heads. For such cases option + \OptionValue{markcase}{noupper} can be used. This will also deactivate + \Macro{MakeUppercase} and \Macro{uppercase} inside the running heads. + + You can find all valid values for \Option{markcase} in + \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{, + \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}}.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{table} + \centering + \caption[Possible values for option \Option{markcase}]{Possible values + for option \Option{markcase} to select upper/lower case letter + typesetting in automatic running heads}% + \label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.markcase}% + \begin{desctabular} + \pventry{lower}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=lower}% + redefines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} to convert the + automatic running heads into lower case letters using + \Macro{MakeLowercase} (lower case typesetting).% + }% + \pventry{upper}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper}% + redefines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} to convert the + automatic running heads into upper case letters using + \Macro{MakeUppercase} (upper case typesetting).% + }% + \pventry{used}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used}% + redefines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} to use automatic + running heads without any case changes.% + }% + \entry{\PValue{ignoreuppercase}, \PValue{nouppercase}, + \PValue{ignoreupper}, + \PValue{noupper}}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}% + redefines not only \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} but also + locally to the running heads \Macro{MakeUppercase} and + \Macro{uppercase} to leave the automatic running heads unchanged.% + }% + \end{desctabular} + \end{table} + }{}% + \EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{leftmark}% + \Macro{rightmark}% + \Macro{headmark}% + \Macro{pagemark} + \end{Declaration} + If you want to differ from the predefined page styles, usually you need to + decide, where to place the marks' contents. With \Macro{leftmark} you can + state the contents of the left mark. + + Similar you can use \Macro{rightmark} to state the contents of the right + mark. For more information about some intricacies of this see the further + description of \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in + \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark}. + + Somehow easier would be usage of \Macro{headmark}. This extension of + \Package{scrlayer} aliases either \Macro{leftmark} or \Macro{rightmark} + depending on whether the current page is even or odd. + + Strictly thought command \Macro{pagemark} is not involved by \TeX's mark + mechanism. It is only used to output a formatted page number. + \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% + The font of element + \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}} will be used + for the output. This can be changed using command \Macro{setkomafont} or + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (see also + \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}).% + \EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \par % + If you are interested in an example about usage of commands + \Macro{headmark} and \Macro{pagemark}, have a look into + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark}. The package + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} internally uses a lot of such features of + \Package{scrlayer}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.headmark}% + Assume you want to use a left aligned running head and right aligned + page number in the head of the pages of a document in single side + layout. The following minimal but working examples would do so: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrreprt} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \ihead{\headmark} + \ohead[\pagemark]{\pagemark} + \chead{} + \cfoot[]{} + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Here package \Package{blindtext}\IndexPackage{blindtext} with its + command \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} has been used to + easily generate content for an example document. + + Commands \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}\IndexCmd{ihead} and + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead}\IndexCmd{ohead} have been used to + place the wanted marks. Although the page mark will be place not only to + pages in page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} but using the optional + argument also to pages in page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. + + Because of both page styles already have marks in the middle of the page + head and page foot, those elements will be cleared using + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} and + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot}\IndexCmd{cfoot} with empty + arguments. Alternatively you'd use + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} + \IndexCmd{clearpairofpagestyles} \emph{before} + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}. You will find a description of + this command in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}. + \end{Example} + + Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that the empty optional argument of + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} in the example above is not the same + like omitting the optional argument. Please try it out and have a look at + the difference in the footer of the first page.% + \fi + + If all the mark features described above are not sufficient, experienced + users can find more of them on \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark}}{% + \DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark}}. For example, you can find there + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark} and + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark}, which seem to be useful + for lexicon like documents.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{partmarkformat}% + \Macro{chaptermarkformat}% + \Macro{sectionmarkformat}% + \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}% + \Macro{subsubsectionmarkformat}% + \Macro{paragraphmarkformat}% + \Macro{subparagraphmarkformat} + \end{Declaration} + Usually the \KOMAScript{} classes and package \Package{scrlayer} use these + commands internally to bring the section numbers into wanted form and + additionally they support the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.autodot} mechanism of the + \KOMAScript{} classes. If wanted these commands may be redefined to get + another form of section numbers.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \ See the example in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat} for more + information.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% + }% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + Assume you do not want section numbers but section heading text only in + the running head. So: +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{} +\end{lstcode} + would be a simple solution for this. + \end{Example} + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{partmark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{subsubsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{paragraphmark}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{subparagraphmark}\Parameter{Text} + \end{Declaration} + Most classes use these commands to setup marks corresponding to the section + commands. Thereby the only argument is the text without the number of the + section heading, that should be used for the running head. For the number + simply the number of the current section level will be used, if the current + level uses numbers. + + Unfortunately\textnote{Attention!}, not all classes use such a command for + every section level. The standard classes for example do not call + \Macro{partmark}. The \KOMAScript{} classes support such commands for all + section levels and therefore also use \Macro{partmark}. + + If users redefine these commands, they should\textnote{Attention!} take care + to also use the counter \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} for the test + whether or not the section level should output a number, even in the case + the user does not change counter \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} + himself, because packages and classes may do so locally and rely on correct + handling of \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}. + + However, package \Package{scrlayer} redefines these commands whenever you + use \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} or \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.manualmark} or + the corresponding options, to activate or deactivate the wanted running + heads.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{markleft}\Parameter{left mark}% + \Macro{markright}\Parameter{right mark}% + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark} + \end{Declaration} + Independent of whether currently manual or automatic running heads are + active, you may change the contents of the \PName{left mark} or the + \PName{right mark} at any time using these commands. You should note, that + the resulting contents of \Macro{leftmark}\IndexCmd{leftmark} is the + \PName{left mark} of the last \Macro{markleft} or \Macro{markboth} command + of the current page. In opposite to this the resulting contents of + \Macro{rightmark}\IndexCmd{rightmark} is the \PName{right mark} of the first + \Macro{rightmark} or \Macro{markboth} command of the current page. + + If you are using manual running heads, the marks will stay valid until one + of the corresponding commands will be used again. If you are using automatic + running heads the marks can loose their validity with the next section + heading depending on the configuration of the automatism. + + You may also use these commands together with the star versions of the + section commands.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \ You can find a detailed example about usage of \Macro{markboth} with + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth}. Package + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} is a kind of extension of \Package{scrlayer}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% + }% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.markboth}% + Assume you are using a preface with several pages just before the table + of contents, that should not have an entry at the table of contents + itself. Because of using a separation line at the page head, you want + also a running head for this preface: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \chapter*{Preface} + \markboth{Preface}{Preface} + \blindtext[20] + \tableofcontents + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + First of all this seems to produce the wanted result. But have a closer + look: In difference to the other running heads ``\texttt{Preface}'' is + not in upper case letters. But you can fix this easily: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \chapter*{Preface} + \markboth{\MakeMarkcase{Preface}}{\MakeMarkcase{Preface}} + \blindtext[20] + \tableofcontents + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Using command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} results in getting + the same letter case as for automatic running heads. + + Now, let's move command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents} in front + of the preface. Let's remove the \Macro{markboth} command too. You'll + realise, that the preface now has the running head + ``\texttt{CONTENTS}''. This is because of a quirk of + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*} (see also \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} + on \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}). If in such cases the running + head should be removed, \Macro{markboth} with two empty arguments would + be useful: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \tableofcontents + \chapter*{Preface} + \markboth{}{} + \blindtext[20] + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup +\fi + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}\Parameter{name of the section level} + \end{Declaration} + At the running head this command will be used by default for the formatting + of all section numbers below the subsection and with classes without + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} also for the section level and the subsection + level, if the mark commands for those numbers have not been defined before + loading \Package{scrlayer}. Thereby the package uses + \Macro{@seccntmarkformat} if such a command has been defined, like the + \KOMAScript{} classes do. Otherwise \Macro{@seccntformat} will be used, + which is provided by the \LaTeX{} kernel. The expected, mandatory argument + of the command is the \PName{name of a section level}, i.\,e., + \PValue{chapter} or \PValue{section} \emph{without} the backslash prefix. + + You can change the default formatting of the numbers, that use this command, + by redefining only this single command. Classes can change the default + formatting also by defining this command.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{\iftrue}{% + \par % + A detailed example about cooperation of command \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} + and the commands \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.sectionmarkformat} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsectionmarkformat} that are described + at \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermark} is shown in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.content}, + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.GenericMarkFormat}% + Assume you want the section numbers of all levels at the running head of + an article to be printed in white colour inside a black coloured + box. Using standard \LaTeX{} \Class{article} class, package + \Package{scrlayer} defines the number mark commands + \Macro{sectionmarkformat} and \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} using + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}. So you need to redefine only this single + command: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{article} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{xcolor} + \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% + \colorbox{black}{\strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}} + \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% + \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}\enskip} + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + The colour has been done using package + \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}. See the package manual for more + information about this. + + Additionally a not visible strut has been used. Every complete \LaTeX{} + introduction should explain the related command \Macro{strut}. + + A helper macro \Macro{numberbox} has been defined for the formatting of + the number within a box. In the redefinition of + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} this has been prefixed by \Macro{protect} to + protect it from expansion. This is necessary because otherwise the upper + case letter conversion of \Macro{MakeUppercase} that will be used for + the running head, would result in an ask for colours ``\texttt{BLACK}'' + and ``\texttt{WHITE}'' instead of ``\texttt{black}'' and + ``\texttt{white}'' and those colours are undefined. Alternatively you + may define \Macro{numberbox} using \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand*} instead + of \Macro{newcommand*} and then omit \Macro{protect} (see + \cite{latex:clsguide}). + + If you'd do the same with a \KOMAScript{} class or with one of the + \LaTeX{} standard classes \Class{book} or \Class{report}, you'd + additionally have to redefine \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}} and + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{subsectionmarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}} respectively + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{chaptermarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat}} and + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}} and too, because + then these would not have been defined using \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{xcolor} + \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% + \colorbox{black}{\strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}} + \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% + \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}\enskip} + \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{\GenericMarkFormat{chapter}} + \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{\GenericMarkFormat{section}} + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{righttopmark}% + \Macro{rightbotmark}% + \Macro{rightfirstmark}% + \Macro{lefttopmark}% + \Macro{leftbotmark}% + \Macro{leftfirstmark} + \end{Declaration} + For page styles \LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} uses a bipartite + \TeX{} mark. Running heads can use the left part of that mark by + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}}\IndexCmd{leftmark} and the right + part by \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark}. Indeed, it + seems that it was suggested to use \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} for the + running head of left, even pages and \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} for + the running head of right, odd pages of double-sided documents. Within + single-sided layouts the standard classes even do not set the left part of + the mark. + + \TeX{} itself knows three alternatives to make usage of a mark. The + \Macro{botmark} is the last valid mark of the page that has been build + last. If there has not been set any mark on the page, it is the last mark of + the already shipped out pages. \LaTeX{} command + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} uses exactly this mark. So it shows the left + part of the last mark of the page. This is the same like + \Macro{leftbotmark}. In opposite to this \Macro{rightbotmark} shows the + right part of that mark. + + \Macro{firstmark} is the first mark of the page that has been build + last. This means the first mark, that has been set on the page. If there has + not been set any mark on the page, this is the last mark of the already + shipped out pages. \LaTeX{} command \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} uses + exaclty this mark. So it shows the right part of the first mark of the + page. This is the same like \Macro{rightfirstmark}. In opposite to this + \Macro{leftfirstmark} shows the left part of that mark. + + \Macro{topmark} is the content of \Macro{botmark} before building the + current page. \LaTeX{} itself does not use it. Nevertheless, + \Package{scrlayer} provides \Macro{lefttopmark} to show the left part of it + and \Macro{righttopmark} to show the right part of it. + + Note\textnote{Attention!} that the left part and the right part of the mark + can be made all together only. Even if you use + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} to change only the + right part, the left part will be made again (unchanged). Accordingly in + double-side mode using page style + \PageStyle{headings\important{\PageStyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings}} + the higher section levels always make both parts. For example + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark} uses \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth} with + an empty right argument in this case. This is the reason why + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} or \Macro{rightfirstmark} always shows an + empty value on pages with chapter beginnings, even if there was a + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark} or \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} on the + same page to make the right part of the mark. + + Please note\textnote{Attention!} that using any of these commands to show + the left or right part of the mark as part of the page content could have + unexpected results. They are recommended to be used in the head or foot of a + page style only. So with \Package{scrlayer} they should be part of the + contents of a layer. But it does not matter whether or not a layer is + restricted to the background or the foreground. Both kind of layers are + shipped out after building the current page. + + If you need more information about the mark mechanism of \TeX, please have a + look at \cite[chapter~23]{knuth:texbook}. You will find, that marks are an + issue for real experts. So if the explanation above was at least more + confusing than illuminative: Please don't worry.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{@mkleft}\Parameter{left mark}% + \Macro{@mkright}\Parameter{right mark}% + \Macro{@mkdouble}\Parameter{mark}% + \Macro{@mkboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark} + \end{Declaration} + Sometimes inside classes and packages the marks for running heads should be + filled up only if automatic running heads are active (see option + \DescRef{scrlayer.option.automark} and command + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} on + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark}). In the \LaTeX{} standard + classes only \Macro{@mkboth} has been used for this. This command is either + \Macro{@gobbletwo}, that simply destroys both mandatory arguments, or + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth}, a command that fills up the left and + \PValue{left mark} and the \PValue{right mark}. Packages like + \Package{babel} also change \Macro{\@mkboth}, i.\,e., to add language + switching to the running head. + + But if a class or package author only wants to change either the \PName{left + mark} or the \PName{right mark} without the other one, a proper command is + missing. Package \Package{scrlayer} itself needs such commands for the + implementation of all cases of automatic running heads. So if command + \Macro{@mkleft} to fill up only the left mark or \Macro{@mkright} to fill up + only the right mark or \Macro{@mkdouble} to fill up both marks with the same + content is undefined while loading \Package{scrlayer}, the package will + define them. Thereby the actual definition of \Macro{@mkboth} will be used + as an indicator whether or not automatic running heads should be used. The + new commands will full up the marks only in the case of automatic running + heads. + + Class and package authors can use these commands too, if they want to fill + up only one of the marks or both marks with the same content but only if + automatic running heads are activated. This condition is also the difference + to the commands \Macro{markleft}, \Macro{markright}, and \Macro{markboth}.% + \EndIndexGroup +\fi + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + For more information about manipulation of the contents of page styles see + also \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} from + \autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}.% +}{}% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" +%%% TeX-master: "../guide.tex" +%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-6.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex index 121362dd4ef..dad2091a6f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-6.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-parmarkup.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-6.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2013 +% common-parmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-6.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2013 +% common-parmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,29 +45,19 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-6.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-parmarkup.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Paragraph Markup)] \translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated German file: 2012/01/01 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Paragraph Markup} \seclabel{parmarkup}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{paragraph>markup}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% The\textnote{paragraph indent vs. paragraph spacing} standard classes normally set paragraphs\Index[indexmain]{paragraph} indented and without any vertical inter-paragraph space. This is the best solution when using a @@ -88,43 +78,50 @@ indentation\Index[indexmain]{indentation} is perfectly sufficient by itself. The only drawback of indentation is the reduction of the line length. The use of inter-paragraph spacing\Index{paragraph>spacing} is - therefore justified when using short lines, for instance in a newspaper.}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - In the preliminaries of \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, - \autopageref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} it was argued why paragraph indent is - preferred over paragraph spacing. But the elements the argumentation depends - on, i.\,e., figures, tables, lists, equations, and even new pages, - are rare. Often letters are not so long that an oversighted paragraph will - have serious consequences to the readability of the document. Because of - this, the arguments are less serious for standard letters. This may be one - reason that in letters you often encounter paragraphs marked not with - indentation of the first line, but with a vertical skip between - them. But there may be still some advantages of the paragraph indent. One - may be that such a letter is highlighted in the mass of letters. Another may - be that the \emph{corporate identity} need not be broken for letters only.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Apart from these suggestions, everything that has been - written at \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} for the other \KOMAScript{} - classes is valid for letters too.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - + therefore justified when using short lines, for instance in a newspaper.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In the preliminaries of \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, + \autopageref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} it was argued why paragraph indent is + preferred over paragraph spacing. But the elements the argumentation + depends on, i.\,e., figures, tables, lists, equations, and even new pages, + are rare. Often letters are not so long that an oversighted paragraph will + have serious consequences to the readability of the document. Because of + this, the arguments are less serious for standard letters. This may be one + reason that in letters you often encounter paragraphs marked not with + indentation of the first line, but with a vertical skip between them. But + there may be still some advantages of the paragraph indent. One may be + that such a letter is highlighted in the mass of letters. Another may be + that the \emph{corporate identity} need not be broken for letters only.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Apart from these suggestions, everything that has been written at + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} for the other + \KOMAScript{} classes is valid for letters too. So if you have alread read + and understood \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} you can + jump to \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next} on + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next}.% +} + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{parskip}\PName{manner} + \OptionVName{parskip}{manner} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{parskip~=\PName{manner}}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% Once in a while there are requests for a document layout with vertical inter-paragraph spacing instead of indentation. The \KOMAScript{} classes provide with option \Option{parskip}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} several capabilities to use - inter-paragraph spacing instead of paragraph indent.} -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Especially in letters you often encounter paragraphs marked not with - indentation of the first line, but with a vertical skip between - them. \KOMAScript{} class \Class{scrlttr2} provides several capabilities for - this.} - + inter-paragraph spacing instead of paragraph indent.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Especially in letters you often encounter paragraphs marked not with + indentation of the first line, but with a vertical skip between + them. \KOMAScript{} class \Class{scrlttr2} provides several capabilities for + this.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} % The \PName{manner} consists of two elements. The first element is either \PValue{full} or \PValue{half}, meaning the space amount of one line or only half of a line. The second element is ``\PValue{*}'', ``\PValue{+}'', or @@ -137,8 +134,16 @@ paragraph. The setting may be changed at any place inside the document. In this case the command \Macro{selectfont}\IndexCmd{selectfont}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}}}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \InternalComonFileUsageError% + }% +} % will be called implicitly. The change will be valid and may be seen from the next paragraph. @@ -150,11 +155,9 @@ inter-paragraph spacing of one line with at least 1\Unit{em} white space at the end of the last line of each paragraph. Switching off the options would reactivate the default of 1\Unit{em} indent at the first line of the paragraph instead of paragraph spacing. All the possible values of option -\Option{parskip} are shown in \autoref{tab:maincls.parskip}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ at \autopageref{tab:maincls.parskip}}% -. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% +\Option{parskip} are shown in +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.% \begin{desclist} % Umbruchkorrektur \vskip-\ht\strutbox @@ -164,7 +167,7 @@ paragraph instead of paragraph spacing. All the possible values of option % \caption [{Possible values of option \Option{parskip}}]{% Possible values of option \Option{parskip} to select - the paragraph mark\label{tab:maincls.parskip}% + the paragraph mark\label{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}% }% {% Possible values of option \Option{parskip} (\emph{continuation})% @@ -206,36 +209,43 @@ paragraph instead of paragraph spacing. All the possible values of option quarter of a line free space at the end of a paragraph\IndexOption{parskip~=\PValue{half+}}}% \pventry{never}{% - there \IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}}% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}}% + there% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% + } % will be no inter-paragraph spacing even if additional vertical spacing is needed for the vertical adjustment with \Macro{flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}% \IndexOption{parskip~=\PValue{never}}}% % \end{desctabular} % \end{table}% -\end{desclist}% -} + \end{desclist}% +}{ at \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}.} All\textnote{Attention!} eight \PValue{full} and \PValue{half} option values also change the spacing before, after, and inside list environments. This avoids the problem of these environments or the paragraphs inside them having -a larger separation than the separation between the paragraphs of normal text. -\IfCommon{maincls}{Additionally, these options ensure that the table of - contents and the lists of figures and tables are set without any additional - spacing.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Several element of the first letter page will be set - without inter-paragraph spacing always.} +a larger separation than the separation between the paragraphs of normal text.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{ % + Additionally, these options ensure that the table of contents and the lists + of figures and tables are set without any additional spacing.% +}{ % + Several element of the first letter page will be set without inter-paragraph + spacing always.% +}% The default behaviour of {\KOMAScript} follows \OptionValue{parskip}{false}. In this case, there is no spacing between paragraphs, only an indentation of the first line by 1\Unit{em}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{parskip~=\PName{manner}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{paragraph>markup} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9746ed6ee99 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-textmarkup.tex @@ -0,0 +1,689 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-textmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-textmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-textmarkup.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] +\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Text Markup} +\seclabel{textmarkup}% +\BeginIndexGroup% +\BeginIndex{}{text>markup}% +\BeginIndex{}{font}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is described in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup} + applies, mutatis mutandis. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup.next} you can switch + to \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup.next}.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{ % + But you should have a look at + \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}.% + }% +} + +{\LaTeX} offers different possibilities for logical and direct +markup\Index{logical markup}\Index{markup} of text. +Selection of the +font family commands, as well as choosing the font size and width is +supported. More information about the standard font facilities may be found at +\cite{lshort}, \cite{latex:usrguide}, and \cite{latex:fntguide}. + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlayer-scrpage,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{% + \iffalse}{% + \csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{textsuperscript}\Parameter{Text}% + \Macro{textsubscript}\Parameter{Text} + \end{Declaration} + The \LaTeX-Kern already defines the command + \Macro{textsuperscript}\IndexCmd{textsuperscript} to + superscript\Index{text>superscript}\Index{superscript} text. Unfortunately, + until release 2015/01/01 {\LaTeX} itself does not offer a command to produce + text in subscript\Index{text>subscript}\Index{subscript} instead of + superscript\Index{text>superscript}\Index{superscript}. {\KOMAScript} + defines \Macro{textsubscript} for this purpose. % + \ifthiscommonfirst + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.textsubscript}% + You are writing a text on human metabolism. From time to time you + have to give some simple chemical formulas in which the numbers are + in subscript. For enabling logical markup you first define in the + document preamble or in a separate package: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} +\end{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} + Using this you then write: +\begin{lstcode} + The cell produces its energy partly from reaction of \molec C6\molec + H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\Molec O{} and + \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has a quite + detrimental effect on the metabolism. +\end{lstcode} + The output looks as follows: + \begin{ShowOutput} + The cell produces its energy from reaction of \molec C6\molec + H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\molec O{} and + \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has a quite + detrimental effect on the metabolism. + \end{ShowOutput} + + Some time later you decide that the chemical formulas should be + typeset in sans serif. Now you can see the advantages of using + logical markup. You only have the redefine the \Macro{molec} + command: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\molec}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}} +\end{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\molec}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}} + Now the output in the whole document changes to: + \begin{ShowOutput} + The cell produces its energy partly from reaction of \molec + C6\molec H{12}\molec O6 and \molec O2 to produce \molec H2\molec + O{} and \molec C{}\molec O2. However, arsenic (\molec{As}{}) has + a quite detrimental effect on the metabolism. + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example} + \iftrue + \begin{Explain} + In the example above, the notation ``\verb|\molec C6|'' is used. + This makes use of the fact that arguments consisting of only one + character do not have to be enclosed in parentheses. That is why + ``\verb|\molec C6|'' is similar to ``\verb|\molec{C}{6}|''. You + might already know this from indices or powers in mathematical + environments, such as ``\verb|$x^2$|'' instead of ``\verb|$x^{2}$|'' + for ``$x^2$''. + \end{Explain} + \else % maybe some time I've made an English book + Experts can find information about the reason why the example above does + work unless putting all arguments of \Macro{molec} into braces in + \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow}, + \DescPageRef{experts.macroargs}.% + \fi + \else + You may find an example of usage at + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.textsubscript}. + \fi% + \EndIndexGroup% +\fi + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{setkomafont}\Parameter{element}\Parameter{commands}% + \Macro{addtokomafont}\Parameter{element}\Parameter{commands}% + \Macro{usekomafont}\Parameter{element} +\end{Declaration}% +With\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}} the help of the two commands \Macro{setkomafont} and +\Macro{addtokomafont}, it is possible to define the \PName{commands} that +change the characteristics of a given \PName{element}. Theoretically, all +possible statements including literal text could be used as \PName{commands}. +You should\textnote{Attention!}, however, absolutely limit yourself to those +statements that really switch only one font attribute. This will usually be +the commands \Macro{normalfont}, \Macro{rmfamily}, \Macro{sffamily}, +\Macro{ttfamily}, \Macro{mdseries}, \Macro{bfseries}, \Macro{upshape}, +\Macro{itshape}, \Macro{slshape}, and \Macro{scshape}, as well as the font +size commands \Macro{Huge}, \Macro{huge}, \Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{Large}, +\Macro{large}, \Macro{normalsize}, \Macro{small}, \Macro{footnotesize}, +\Macro{scriptsize}, and \Macro{tiny}. The description of these commands can be +found in \cite{lshort}, \cite{latex:usrguide}, or \cite{latex:fntguide}. Color +switching commands like \Macro{normalcolor} (see \cite{package:graphics} and +\cite{package:xcolor}) are also acceptable. The behavior when using other +commands, especially those that make redefinitions or generate output, is not +defined. Strange behavior is possible and does not represent a bug. + +The command \Macro{setkomafont} provides a font switching command with a +completely new definition. In contrast to this, the \Macro{addtokomafont} +command merely extends an existing definition. It is recommended to not use +both commands inside the document body, but only in the document preamble. +Usage examples can be found in the paragraphs on the corresponding element.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{% + \ Names\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{, defaults,}{} and meanings + of the individual items are listed in % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements} + }{% + \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements} % + }.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + However only the listed elements for the document title, dicta, footnotes, + and the \DescRef{maincls.env.labeling} environment are supported. Though + element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} exists, it will also be + used for the document title only. This has been done for compatibility + with the \KOMAScript{} classes.% + }{}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ % + The default values are shown in the corresponding paragraphs.% + }% +}% + +With command \Macro{usekomafont} the current font style may be changed into +the font style of the selected \PName{element}.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.setkomafont}% + Assume that you want to use for the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.captionlabel} the same font + specification that is used with + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.descriptionlabel}. This can be + easily done with: +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{captionlabel}{% + \usekomafont{descriptionlabel}% + } +\end{lstcode} + You can find other examples in the paragraphs on each element. + \end{Example} + + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption{% + Elements whose type style can be changed with the {\KOMAScript} command + \Macro{setkomafont} or + \Macro{addtokomafont}% + \label{tab:maincls.fontelements}% + \label{tab:scrextend.fontelements}% + }{% + Elements whose type style can be changed (\emph{continuation})% + }% + \feentry{author}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + author of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.author} when + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} will be used (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.author})}% + \feentry{caption}{text of a table or figure caption (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}% + \feentry{captionlabel}{label of a table or figure caption; used according + to the element \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.caption} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}% + \feentry{chapter}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter})}% + \feentry{chapterentry}{% + table of contents entry of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{chapterentrypagenumber}{% + page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter}, variation on the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.chapterentry} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{chapterprefix}{% + chapter number line at setting + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{chapterprefix}{true} or + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{appendixprefix}{true} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix})}% + \feentry{date}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + date of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.date} when + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} will be used (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.date})}% + \feentry{dedication}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + dedication page after the main title, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.dedication} when + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} will be used (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dedication})}% + \feentry{descriptionlabel}{labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.description} in the + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description} environment (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.description})}% + \feentry{dictum}{dictum, wise saying, or smart slogan (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dictum})}% + \feentry{dictumauthor}{author of a dictum, wise saying, or smart slogan; + used according to the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dictum})}% + \feentry{dictumtext}{another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum}}% + \feentry{disposition}{all sectional unit titles, i.\,e., the arguments of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} down to + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec}, including the title of the + abstract; used before the element of the corresponding unit (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.structure})}% + \feentry{footnote}{footnote text and marker (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotelabel}{mark of a footnote; used according to the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotereference}{footnote reference in the text (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnoterule}{% + horizontal rule\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} above the footnotes at the end + of the text area (see \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% + \feentry{labelinglabel}{labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.labeling} in the + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling} environment (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{labelingseparator}{separator, i.\,e., the optional argument of + the \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling} environment; used + according to the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.labelinglabel} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{minisec}{title of \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.minisec})}% + \feentry{pagefoot}{only used if package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} has + been loaded (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% + \feentry{pagehead}{another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{the head of a page, but also the foot of a page + (see \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% + \feentry{pagenumber}{page number in the header or footer (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% + \feentry{pagination}{another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}% + \feentry{paragraph}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.paragraph} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph})}% + \feentry{part}{title of the \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} + sectional unit, without the line containing the part number (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}% + \feentry{partentry}{% + table of contents entry of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{partentrypagenumber}{% + Page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} variation on the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.partentry} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{partnumber}{line containing the part number in a title of the + sectional unit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}% + \feentry{publishers}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + publishers of the document on the main title, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.publishers} when + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} will be used (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.publishers})}% + \feentry{section}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.section})}% + \feentry{sectionentry}{% + table of contents entry of sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (only available in + \Class{scrartcl}, see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{sectionentrypagenumber}{% + page number of the table of contents entry of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section}, variation on element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.sectionentry} (only available + in \Class{scrartcl, see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents}})}% + \feentry{sectioning}{another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.disposition}}% + \feentry{subject}{% + categorization of the document, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subject} on the main title page (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subject})}% + \feentry{subparagraph}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph})}% + \feentry{subsection}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsection} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsection})}% + \feentry{subsubsection}{title of the sectional unit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection})}% + \feentry{subtitle}{% + subtitle of the document, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subtitle} on the main title page (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.title})}% + \feentry{title}{main title of the document, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title} (for details about the title + size see the additional note in the text of + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} from \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.title})}% + \feentry{titlehead}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + head above the main title of the document, i.\,e., the argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlehead} when + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} will be used (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlehead})}% + \end{desclist} +\else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + Assumed, you want to print the document title in a serif font and with + red colour. You may do this using: +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{title}{\color{red}} +\end{lstcode} + Package \Package{color} or \Package{xcolor} will be needed for command + \Macro{color}\PParameter{red}. The additional usage of + \Macro{normalfont} is not needed in this case, because it is already + part of the definition of the title itself. This\textnote{Attention!} + example also needs option + \OptionValueRef{scrextend}{extendedfeature}{title} (see + \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, + \DescPageRef{scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). + \end{Example} + \else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + A general example for the usage of \Macro{setkomafont} and + \Macro{usekomafont} may be found in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} at + \PageRefxmpl{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}. + + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption{% + Alphabetical list of elements whose font can be changed in + \Class{scrlttr2} using the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and + \Macro{addtokomafont}\label{tab:scrlttr2.fontelements}% + }{% + Elements whose font can be changed (\emph{continuation})% + }% + \feentry{addressee}{name und address in address field % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield})}% + \feentry{backaddress}{% + return address for a window envelope % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress})}% + \feentry{descriptionlabel}{% + label, i.\,e., the optional argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.description}, in a + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description} environment % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.description})}% + \feentry{foldmark}{% + foldmark on the letter page; intended for color settings % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks})}% + \feentry{footnote}{% + footnote text and marker % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotelabel}{% + mark of a footnote; used according to the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotereference}{% + footnote reference in the text % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnoterule}{% + horizontal rule\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} above the + footnotes at the end of the text area % + (see \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% + \feentry{labelinglabel}{% + labels, i.\,e., the optional argument of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.labeling} in the + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling} environment % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{labelingseparator}{% + separator, i.\,e., the optional argument of the + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling} environment; used + according to the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.labelinglabel} % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{pagefoot}{% + used after element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot} for the page + foot, that has been defined with variable + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot}, or for + the page foot of package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} % + (\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% + \feentry{pagehead}{% + another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% + the head of a page, but also the foot of a page at all page style, + that has been defined using \KOMAScript{} % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.fontelement.pageheadfoot})}% + \feentry{pagenumber}{% + page number in the header or footer % + (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.fontelement.pagenumber})}% + \feentry{pagination}{% + another name for + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}% + \feentry{placeanddate}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + place and date, if a date line will be used instead of a normal + reference line (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% + \feentry{refname}{% + description or title of the fields in the reference line % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + \feentry{refvalue}{% + content of the fields in the reference line % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + \feentry{specialmail}{% + mode of dispatch in the address field % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% + \feentry{lettersubject}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% + subject in the opening of the letter % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% + \feentry{lettertitle}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% + title in the opening of the letter % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.title})}% + \feentry{toaddress}{% + variation of the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} for setting the + addressee address (less the name) in the address field % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% + \feentry{toname}{% + variation of the element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} for the name + (only) of the addressee in the address field % + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% + \end{desclist} + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption[{Elements of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} whose type + style can be changed with \KOMAScript{} command + \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont}}]% + {Elements of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} whose type style can be + changed with \KOMAScript{} command \Macro{setkomafont} or + \Macro{addtokomafont} and the default of those, if they have not + been defined before loading \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}% + \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}% + }% + {Elements whose type style can be changed (\emph{continuation})}% + \feentry{footbotline}{% + Horizontal line below the footer of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to use this element + for colour changes only.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{footsepline}{% + Horizontal line above the footer of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pagefoot}. It is recommended to use this element + for colour changes only.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{headsepline}{% + Horizontal line below the header of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagehead}% + \IndexFontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to use this element + for colour changes only.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{headtopline}{% + Horizontal line above the header of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the fonts of elements + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} and + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagehead}% + \IndexFontElement{pagehead}. It is recommended to use this element + for colour changes only.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{pagefoot}{% + Contents of the page footer of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the font of element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{pagehead}{% + Contents of the page header of a page style defined using + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} and the font of element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}.\par + Default: \emph{empty}% + }% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% + Contents of the page header or footer of a page style defined + using \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. The font will be used after + \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont}.\par + Default: \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape}% + }% + \feentry{pagenumber}{% + Pagination set with + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark}. If you redefine + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark}, you have to take care + that your redefinition also uses + \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber}!\par + Default: \Macro{normalfont}% + }% + \end{desclist} + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError% + }% + }% + }% + \fi% +\fi +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{usefontofkomafont}\Parameter{element}% + \Macro{useencodingofkomafont}\Parameter{element}% + \Macro{usesizeofkomafont}\Parameter{element}% + \Macro{usefamilyofkomafont}\Parameter{element}% + \Macro{useseriesofkomafont}\Parameter{element}% + \Macro{useshapeofkomafont}\Parameter{element} +\end{Declaration} +Sometimes\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} and despite the recommendation +users use the font setting feature of elements not only for font settings but +for other settings too. In this case it may be useful to switch only to the +font setting of an element but not to those other settings. You may use +\Macro{usefontofkomafont} in such cases. This will activate the font size and +baseline skip, the font encoding, the font family, the font series, and the +font shape of an element, but no further settings as long as those further +settings are local. + +You may also switch to one of those attributes only using one of the other +commands. Note, that \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} will activate both, the font +size and the baseline skip. + +You should not misunderstand these commands as a legitimation of using all +kind of commands at the font setting of an element. Hence this would result +in errors sooner or later (see \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "en_GB" +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: + +% LocalWords: mutatis mutandis diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-titles.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-titles.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5f178c218c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-titles.tex @@ -0,0 +1,631 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-titles.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-titles.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absaetze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-titles.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} + +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 + +\section{Document Titles} +\seclabel{titlepage}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{title}% +\BeginIndex{}{document>title}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + What is written in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} + applies, mutatis mutandis. So if you have alread read and understood + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} you can jump to + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next} on + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next}.% +}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \ But there's a difference: The\textnote{Attention!} document title + capabilities of \Package{scrextend} are part of the optional, advanced + features. Therfore they are only available, if + \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} has been + selected while loading the package (see + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.optionalFeatures}, + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.extendedfeature}). + + Beyond that \Package{scrextend} cannot be used with a \KOMAScript{} + class together. Because of this +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} +\end{lstcode} + must be replaced by +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{book} + \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} +\end{lstcode} + at all examples from \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, if \Package{scrextend} + should be used. +\fi + +In general we distinguish two kinds of document titles. First known are title +pages. In this case the document title will be placed together with additional +document information, like the author, on a page of its own. Besides the main +title page, several further title pages may exist, like the half-title or +bastard title, publisher data, dedication, or similar. The second known kind +of document title is the in-page title. In this case, the document title is +placed at the top of a page and specially emphasized, and may be accompanied +by some additional information too, but it will be followed by more material +in the same page, for instance by an abstract, or the table of contents, or +even a section. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{titlepage}{simple switch}% + \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover} +\end{Declaration}% +Using \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (see +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}), this option% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{} switches between document title pages\Index{title>pages} and in-page +title\Index{title>in-page}. For \PName{simple switch}, any value from +\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} may be used. + +The option +\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{or \Option{titlepage} }makes {\LaTeX} use +separate pages for the titles. Command +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} sets these pages inside a +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage} environment and the pages +normally have neither header nor footer. In comparison with standard {\LaTeX}, +{\KOMAScript} expands the handling of the titles significantly. + +The option +\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}} +specifies that an \emph{in-page} title is used. This means that the title is +specially emphasized, but it may be followed by more material on the same +page, for instance by an abstract or a section.% + +The third choice,% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUseError}% +} \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% +\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}} does not only select title +pages. It additionally prints the first title page of +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}\IndexCmd{maketitle}, this is +either the extra title or the main title, as a cover\Index{cover} page. Every +other setting of option \Option{titlepage} would cancel this setting. The +margins\important{% + \Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpagerightmargin}} of the cover page are given by +\Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagetopmargin}, +\Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagebottommargin}, +\Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpageleftmargin} und +\Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagerightmargin}. The +defaults of these depend on the lengths +\Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} and +\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} and can be changed using +\Macro{renewcommand}. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + The default of classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} is usage of + title pages. Class \Class{scrartcl}, on the other hand, uses in-page titles + as default.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + The default depends on the used class and \Package{scrextend} handles it + compatible to the standard class. If a class does not set up a comparable + default, in-page title will be used.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{titlepage}\end{Environment}% +\end{Declaration}% +With the standard classes and with {\KOMAScript}, all title pages are defined +in a special environment, the \Environment{titlepage} environment. This +environment always starts a new page\,---\,in the two-sided layout a new right +page\,---\,and in single column mode. For this page, the style is changed by +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty}, so that +neither page number nor running heading are output. At the end of the +environment the page is automatically shipped out. Should you not be able to +use the automatic layout of the title pages provided by +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, that will be described next; it +is advisable to design a new one with the help of this environment. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + A simple example for a title page with \Environment{titlepage} is shown in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} on + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.titlepage}% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.titlepage} + Assume you want a title page on which only the word ``Me'' stands at + the top on the left, as large as possible and in bold\,---\,no + author, no date, nothing else. The following document creates just + that: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \begin{titlepage} + \textbf{\Huge Me} + \end{titlepage} + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + It's simple, isn't it? + \end{Example} +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{maketitle}\OParameter{page number} +\end{Declaration}% +While the the standard classes produce at least one title page that may have +the three items title, author, and date, with {\KOMAScript} the +\Macro{maketitle} command can produce up to six pages. In contrast to the +standard classes, the \Macro{maketitle} macro in {\KOMAScript} accepts an +optional numeric argument. If it is used, this number is made the page number +of the first title page. However, this page number is not output, but affects +only the numbering. You should choose an odd number, because otherwise the +whole count gets mixed up. In my opinion there are only two meaningful +applications for the optional argument. On the one hand, one could give to the +half-title\Index[indexmain]{half-title} the logical page number \(-\)1 in +order to give the full title page the number 1. On the other hand, it could be +used to start at a higher page number, for instance, 3, 5, or 7, to +accommodate other title pages added by the publishing house. The optional +argument is ignored for \emph{in-page} titles. However, the page style of such +a title page can be changed by redefining the +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle} macro. For that see +\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}. + +The following commands do not lead immediately to the ship-out of the +titles. The typesetting and ship-out of the title pages are always done by +\Macro{maketitle}. By the way, you should note that \Macro{maketitle} should +not be used inside a \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage} +environment. Like\textnote{Attention!} shown in the examples, one should use +either \Macro{maketitle} or \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage} only, +but not both. + +The commands explained below only define the contents of the title +pages. Because of this, they have to be used before \Macro{maketitle}. It is, +however, not necessary and, when using, e.\,g., the \Package{babel} +package\IndexPackage{babel}, not recommended to use these in the preamble +before \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} (see \cite{package:babel}). Examples +can be found at the end of this section. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{extratitle}\Parameter{half-title} +\end{Declaration}% +\begin{Explain}% + In earlier times the inner book was often not protected from dirt by a cover. + This task was then taken over by the first page of the book which + carried mostly a shortened title called the \emph{half-title}. + Nowadays the extra page is often applied before the real full title + and contains information about the publisher, series number and similar + information. +\end{Explain} +With {\KOMAScript} it is possible to include a page before the real title +page. The \PName{half-title} can be arbitrary text\,---\,even several +paragraphs. The contents of the \PName {half-title} are output by +{\KOMAScript} without additional formatting. Their organisation is completely +left to the user. The back of the half-title remains empty. The half-title +has its own title page even when \emph{in-page} titles are used. The output of +the half-title defined with \Macro{extratitle} takes place as part of the +titles produced by \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + A simple example for a title page with extra title and main title is shown + in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} on + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.extratitle}% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.extratitle} + Let's go back to the previous example and assume + that the spartan ``Me'' is the half-title. The full title should + still follow the half-title. One can proceed as follows: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge Me}} + \title{It's me} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + You can center the half-title horizontally and put it a little lower down + the page: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\vspace*{4\baselineskip} + \begin{center}\textbf{\Huge Me}\end{center}} + \title{It's me} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + The command\textnote{Attention!} \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title} + is necessary in order to make the examples above work correctly. It is + explained next. + \end{Example} +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{titlehead}\Parameter{title head}% + \Macro{subject}\Parameter{subject}% + \Macro{title}\Parameter{title}% + \Macro{subtitle}\Parameter{subtitle}% + \Macro{author}\Parameter{author}% + \Macro{date}\Parameter{date}% + \Macro{publishers}\Parameter{publisher}% + \Macro{and}% + \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{footnote} +\end{Declaration}% +The contents of the full title page are defined by seven elements. The output +of the full title page occurs as part of the title pages of +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, whereas the now listed elements +only define the corresponding elements. + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{titlehead}\LabelFontElement{titlehead}% +The\important{\Macro{titlehead}} \PName{title + head}\Index[indexmain]{title>head} is defined with the command +\Macro{titlehead}. It is typeset with the font of the homonymous element in +regular justification and full width at the top of the page. It can be freely +designed by the user.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}% +The\important{\Macro{subject}} \PName{subject}\Index[indexmain]{subject} is +output with the font of the homonymous element immediately above the +\PName{title}.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}% +The\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{title} is output with a very large font +size. Beside\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}}{} all other element the font size\textnote{Attention!} +is, however, not affected by the font switching element \FontElement{title} +(see \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subtitle}\LabelFontElement{subtitle}% +The\important{\Macro{subtitle}} +\PName{subtitle}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}}{} is output with the font of the homonymous element +just below the title.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{author}\LabelFontElement{author}% +Below\important{\Macro{author}} the \PName{subtitle} appears the +\PName{author}\Index[indexmain]{author}. Several authors can be specified in +the argument of \Macro{author}. They should be separated by \Macro{and}. The +font of element \FontElement{author} is used for the output of the authors.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{date}\LabelFontElement{date}% +Below\important{\Macro{date}} the author or authors appears the +date\Index{date} in the font of the homonymous element. The default value is +the present date, as produced by \Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}. The +\Macro{date} command accepts arbitrary information\,---\,even an empty +argument.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{publishers}\LabelFontElement{publishers}% +Finally\important{\Macro{publishers}} comes the +\PName{publisher}\Index[indexmain]{publisher}. Of course this command can also +be used for any other information of little importance. If necessary, the +\Macro{parbox} command can be used to typeset this information over the full +page width like a regular paragraph instead of centering it. Then it is to be +considered equivalent to the title head. However, note that this field is put +above any existing footnotes. The font of element \FontElement{publishers} is +used for the output.% +\EndIndexGroup + +Footnotes\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{footnotes} on the title page are +produced not with \Macro{footnote}, but with \Macro{thanks}. They serve +typically for notes associated with the authors. Symbols are used as footnote +markers instead of numbers. Note\textnote{Attention!}, that \Macro{thanks} has +to be used inside the argument of another command, e.\,g., at the argument +\PName{author} of the command \Macro{author}. + +While% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} printing the title elements the equal named font switching elements will be +used for all them. The defaults, that may be found in +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts}, % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts}, % +}% +may be changed using the commands +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \begin{table} +% \centering + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% +% \caption + \begin{captionbeside} + [{Font defaults for the elements of the title}] + {\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlefonts}% + Font defaults for the elements of the title} + [l] + \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} + \toprule + Element name & Default \\ + \midrule + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.author} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.date} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dedication} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.publishers} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.subject} & + \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{Large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.subtitle} & + \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{large} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.title} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.titlehead} & \\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \end{table}% +}{} + +With the exception of \PName{titlehead} and possible footnotes, all +the items are centered horizontally. The information is summarised in +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + , \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}}. +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \begin{table} +% \centering + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% + % \caption + \begin{captionbeside}[Main title]{% + Font and horizontal positioning of the + elements in the main title page in the order of their vertical + position from top to bottom when typeset with + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}} + [l] + \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.85\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung + \begin{tabular}[t]{llll} + \toprule + Element & Command & Font & Orientation \\ + \midrule + Title head & \Macro{titlehead} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{titlehead} & justified \\ + Subject & \Macro{subject} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{subject} & centered \\ + Title & \Macro{title} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{huge} & centered \\ + Subtitle & \Macro{subtitle} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{subtitle} & centered \\ + Authors & \Macro{author} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{author} & centered \\ + Date & \Macro{date} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{date} & centered \\ + Publishers & \Macro{publishers} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{publishers} & centered \\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \label{tab:maincls.mainTitle} + \end{table} +}{} % +Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that for the main title \Macro{huge} will be +used after the font switching element +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.title}\IndexFontElement{title}. So +you cannot change the size of the main title using +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} or +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}.% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + An example for a title page with all elements provided by \KOMAScript{} for + the main title page is shown in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} on + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.maintitle}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{maintitle}% + Assume you are writing a dissertation. The title page should have the + university's name and address at the top, flush left, and the semester, + flush right. As usual, a title is to be used, including author and + delivery date. The adviser must also be indicated, together with the fact + that the document is a dissertation. This can be obtained as follows: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage[english]{babel} + \begin{document} + \titlehead{{\Large Unseen University + \hfill SS~2002\\} + Higher Analytical Institute\\ + Mythological Rd\\ + 34567 Etherworld} + \subject{Dissertation} + \title{Digital space simulation with the DSP\,56004} + \subtitle{Short but sweet?} + \author{Fuzzy George} + \date{30. February 2002} + \publishers{Adviser Prof. John Eccentric Doe} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example}% +\fi + +\begin{Explain} + A frequent misunderstanding concerns the role of the full title page. It is + often erroneously assumed that the cover\Index{cover} or dust cover is + meant. Therefore, it is frequently expected that the title page does not + follow the normal page layout, but has equally large left and right margins. + + However, if one takes a book and opens it, one notices very quickly at least + one title page under the cover within the so-called inner book. Precisely + these title pages are produced by + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}. + + As is the case with the half-title, the full title page belongs to the inner + book, and therefore should have the same page layout as the rest of the + document. A cover is actually something that should be created in a + separate document. The cover often has a very individual format. It can also + be designed with the help of a graphics or DTP program. A separate document + should also be used because the cover will be printed on a different medium, + possibly cardboard, and possibly with another printer. + + Nevertheless, since \KOMAScript~3.12 the first title page of + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} can be printed as a cover page + with different margins. For more information about this see the description + of option + \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{titlepage}{firstiscover}% + \IndexOption{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}} on + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.titlepage}. +\end{Explain} +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{titlebackhead}% + \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{titlebackfoot} +\end{Declaration}% +With the standard classes, the back of the title page of a double-side print +is left empty. However, with {\KOMAScript} the back of the full title page +can be used for other information. Exactly two elements which the user can +freely format are recognized: \PName +{titlebackhead}\Index{title>back}\Index{title>rear side}\Index{title>flipside} +and \PName {titlebackfoot}. The head can reach up to the foot and vice +versa. \iffree{If one takes this manual as an example, the exclusion of + liability was set with the help of the \Macro{uppertitleback} command.}{The + publishers information of this book. e.\,g., could have been set either with + \Macro{uppertitleback} or \Macro{lowertitleback}.}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{dedication}\Parameter{dedication} +\end{Declaration}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dedication}\LabelFontElement{dedication}% +{\KOMAScript} provides a page for dedications. The +dedication\Index{dedication} is centered and uses a slightly larger type size +given by the font of the homonymous element. The font can be changed using +command \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} or +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}). The back is empty like +the back page of the half-title. The dedication page is produced by +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} and must therefore be defined +before this command is issued.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + An example with all title pages provided by \KOMAScript{} is shown in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} on + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fulltitle}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{fulltitle}% + This time assume that you have written a poetry book and you want to + dedicate it to your wife. A solution would look like this: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage[english]{babel} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge In Love}} + \title{In Love} + \author{Prince Ironheart} + \date{1412} + \lowertitleback{This poem book was set with% + the help of {\KOMAScript} and {\LaTeX}} + \uppertitleback{Selfmockery Publishers} + \dedication{To my treasure hazel-hen\\ + in eternal love\\ + from your dormouse.} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Please use your own favorite pet names. + \end{Example}% +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: us-ascii +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-typearea.tex index 21cec4435d6..0ca2f88ad3f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-3.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/common-typearea.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-3.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-typearea.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-3.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-typearea.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,23 +45,16 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-3.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-typearea.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: typearea)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of the translated german file: 2015-03-31 - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \section{Page Layout} \seclabel{typearea} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{page>layout} Each page of a document is separated into several different layout elements, diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/expertpart.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/expertpart.tex index c78834a1baf..a2d84d41846 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/expertpart.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/expertpart.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % expertpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % expertpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2013 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{expertpart.tex} - [$Date: 2013-12-13 12:11:01 +0100 (Fri, 13 Dec 2013) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ Part KOMA-Script for Experts] \translator{Markus Kohm} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/guide-english.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/guide-english.tex index 2661ba1b6e5..d38fda9d7a0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/guide-english.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/guide-english.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % guide-english.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % guide-english.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ====================================================================== % \KOMAProvidesFile{guide-english.tex} - [$Date: 2016-05-09 10:57:53 +0200 (Mon, 09 May 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide language dependencies] % % \section{Extra Packages} @@ -543,6 +543,19 @@ \def\changelogname{Change Log}% % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\descriptionname} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsname} +% \begin{macrocode] + \def\descriptionname{description}% + \def\contentname{contents}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\lengthname} +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\lengthname{length}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} } % \end{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/introduction.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/introduction.tex index 4c38e7375ea..c3383f83345 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/introduction.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/introduction.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % introduction.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % introduction.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{introduction.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide introduction] \translator{Kevin Pfeiffer\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated german file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Introduction} \labelbase{introduction} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/japanlco.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/japanlco.tex index 435e518580e..8d16d34e560 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/japanlco.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/japanlco.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % japanlco.tex -% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug and Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug and Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % japanlco.tex -% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug und Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Gernot Hassenpflug und Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ % \KOMAProvidesFile{japanlco.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (appendix: japanlco)] \appendix diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/linkalias.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/linkalias.tex index cfcc44aa11c..16dcdc1d4e8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/linkalias.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/linkalias.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -38,13 +38,23 @@ % Link Aliase, die für die freie Version der Anleitung benötigt werden. % -\ProvidesFile{linkalias.tex}[2014/03/18 link aliases for the free version] +\KOMAProvidesFile{linkalias.tex} + [$Date: 2016-11-20 17:40:30 +0100 (Sun, 20 Nov 2016) $ + link aliases for the free version] \makeatletter \newcommand*{\lalias}[2]{% \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@#1}{% \expandafter\let\csname r@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname r@#2\endcsname - }{}% + }{% + \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% + Label alias `#1'\MessageBreak + to `#2' ignored,\MessageBreak + because of multiply definition% + }% + \gdef \@multiplelabels {% + \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% + }% } \makeatother @@ -57,16 +67,3 @@ \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedsection}{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence} - -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:maincls.option.version}{desc:typearea.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}{desc:maincls.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote}{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule}{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.description}{desc:maincls.env.description} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling}{desc:maincls.env.labeling} - -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/preface.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/preface.tex index fdb92d5c98d..e0f0cf5e78d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/preface.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/preface.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % preface.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % preface.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -36,11 +36,11 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{preface.tex} - [$Date: 2016-05-09 07:33:31 +0200 (Mon, 09 May 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ Preface to the KOMA-Script book] %\translator{Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 0000/00/00 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \addchap{Preface to the English \KOMAScript{} Guide} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scraddr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scraddr.tex index 79e17f6d679..a4a7c5454e2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scraddr.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scraddr.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scraddr.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scraddr.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,28 +46,28 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scraddr.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scraddr)] \translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated german file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Access to Address Files with \Package{scraddr}}% \labelbase{scraddr}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scraddr} \section{Overview}\seclabel{overview} The package \Package{scraddr} is a small extension to the {\KOMAScript} letter class. Its aim is to make access to the data of address files more flexible and easier. Basically, the package implements a new loading mechanism for -address files which contain address entries in the form of \Macro{adrentry} -and newer \Macro{addrentry} commands, as described in \autoref{cha:scrlttr2} -from \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry}. +address files which contain address entries in the form of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} +and newer \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} commands, as described in \autoref{cha:scrlttr2} +from \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry}. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{InputAddressFile}\Parameter{file name} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{InputAddressFile}% The command \Macro{InputAddressFile} is the main command of the \Package{scraddr}, and reads the content of the address file\Index{address>file} given as its parameter. If the file does not @@ -75,53 +75,45 @@ exist the command returns an error message. For every entry in the address file the command generates a set of macros for accessing the data. For large address files this will take -a lot of {\TeX} memory. +a lot of {\TeX} memory. \begin{Declaration}% \Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Lastname}\Parameter{Firstname}% \Parameter{Address}\Parameter{Phone}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% - \Parameter{Comment}\Parameter{Key}\\ + \Parameter{Comment}\Parameter{Key}% % \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Lastname}\Parameter{Firstname}% \Parameter{Address}\Parameter{Phone}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% - \Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4}\Parameter{Key}\\ + \Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4}\Parameter{Key}% % - \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{initial}\\ + \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{initial}% \Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{initial}% \end{Declaration}% -\IndexCmd{adrentry}% -\IndexCmd{addrentry}% -\IndexCmd{adrchar}% -\IndexCmd{addrchar}% - The structure of the address entries in the address file was discussed in detail in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.addressFile} from -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} onwards. The division of +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} onwards. The division of the address file with the help of \Macro{adrchar} or \Macro{addrchar}, also discussed therein, has no meaning for \Package{scraddr} and is simply ignored. The commands for accessing the data are given by the name of the data field they are intended for. + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{Name}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{Address}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{Comment}\Parameter{key}\\ - \Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{key}\\ + \Macro{Name}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{Address}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{Comment}\Parameter{key}% + \Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{key}% \Macro{FreeIV}\Parameter{key} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Name}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FirstName}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Address}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Telephone}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeI}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeII}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeIII}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeIV}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Comment}% These commands give access to data of your address file. The last -parameter, i.\,e., parameter 8 for the \Macro{adrentry} entry and -parameter 9 for the \Macro{addrentry} entry, is the identifier of an +parameter, i.\,e., parameter 8 for the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} entry and +parameter 9 for the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} entry, is the identifier of an entry, thus the \PName{key} has to be unique and non-blank. The \PName{key} should only be composed of multiple uppercase letters out of the namespace of \TeX{} macro names. @@ -129,11 +121,11 @@ namespace of \TeX{} macro names. If the file contains more than one entry with the same \PName{key} value, the last occurrence will be used.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{InputAddressFile}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Name}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FirstName}\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Address}\EndIndex{Cmd}{Telephone}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeI}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeII}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeIII}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeIV}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Comment}% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Usage}\seclabel{usage} @@ -163,7 +155,7 @@ should simply be possible to leave them out. The command \Macro{InputAddressFile} is used to load the address file shown above: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \InputAddressFile{lotr} \end{lstcode} @@ -171,7 +163,7 @@ The command With the help of the commands introduced in this chapter we can now write a letter to old \textsc{Tom Bombadil}. In this letter we ask him if he can remember two fellow-travelers from Elder Days. -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \begin{letter}{\Name{TOM}\\\Address{TOM}} \opening{Dear \FirstName{TOM} \LastName{TOM},} @@ -194,38 +186,36 @@ him if he can remember two fellow-travelers from Elder Days. \end{letter} \end{lstcode} In the address of letters often both firstname and lastname are required, als -shown above in \Macro{opening}. Thus, the command +shown above in \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}. Thus, the command \Macro{Name}\PParameter{key} is an abridgement for \Macro{FirstName}\PParameter{key} \Macro{LastName}\PParameter{key}. -The 5th and 6th parameters of the \Macro{adrentry} or \Macro{adrentry} +The 5th and 6th parameters of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} commands are for free use. They are accessible with the commands \Macro{FreeI} and \Macro{FreeII}. In this example, the 5th parameter contains the name of a person who is the most important in the life of the entry's person, the 6th contains the person's passion. The 7th parameter is a comment or in general also a free parameter. The commands \Macro{Comment} or \Macro{FreeIII} give access to this data. Use of \Macro{FreeIV} is only valid -for \Macro{addrentry} entries; for \Macro{adrentry} entries it results in an -error. More on this is covered in the next section. -\EndIndex{Package}{scraddr} +for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} entries; for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} entries +it results in an error. More on this is covered in the next section. + \section{Package Warning Options} -As mentioned above, the command \Macro{FreeIV} leads to an error if it -is used for \Macro{adrentry} entries. How \Package{scraddr} reacts in +As mentioned above, the command \Macro{FreeIV} leads to an error if it is used +for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} entries. How \Package{scraddr} reacts in such a situation is decide by package options. \begin{Declaration} - \Option{adrFreeIVempty}\\ - \Option{adrFreeIVshow}\\ - \Option{adrFreeIVwarn}\\ + \Option{adrFreeIVempty}% + \Option{adrFreeIVshow}% + \Option{adrFreeIVwarn}% \Option{adrFreeIVstop}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVempty}\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVshow}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVwarn}\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVstop}% These four options allow the user to choose between \emph{ignore} and \emph{rupture} during the {\LaTeX} run if \Macro{FreeIV} has been used -with an \Macro{adrentry} entry. +with an \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} entry. \begin{labeling}[~--]{\Option{adrFreeIVempty}} \item[\Option{adrFreeIVempty}] @@ -242,8 +232,9 @@ To choose the desired reaction, one of these options can be given in the optional argument of the \Macro{usepackage} command. The default setting is \Option{adrFreeIVshow}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVempty}\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVshow}% -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVwarn}\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVstop} +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbase.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbase.tex index 8b68d25fd98..04eb18f25ab 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbase.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbase.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbase.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbase.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,15 +46,15 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbase.tex} - [$Date: 2016-03-09 18:09:14 +0100 (Wed, 09 Mar 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script package scrbase] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Melvin Hendrix} -% Date of the translated German file: 2016-03-09 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Basic Functions of Package \Package{scrbase}} \labelbase{scrbase} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrbase}% The package \Package{scrbase} provides basic features designed and implemented @@ -85,9 +85,8 @@ values to these keys. The options provided by \Package{scrbase} also use \Package{keyval} syntax: \PName{key}\texttt{=}\PName{value}. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{internalonly}\PName{value} + \OptionVName{internalonly}{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{internalonly~=\PName{value}}% Package \Package{scrbase} provides some commands for conditional execution. The primary names for these are builds like \Macro{scr@\PName{name}}, which are internal commands. \KOMAScript{} only uses @@ -109,7 +108,7 @@ use it with or without \PName{value} either as a global option with \Macro{documentclass} or using \Macro{PassOptionsToPackage}. \begin{Example} The user does not want \Package{scrbase} to define commands \Macro{ifVTeX} - and \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax}. Because of this, to load the class, the user + and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}. Because of this, to load the class, the user writes: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass% @@ -118,11 +117,11 @@ use it with or without \PName{value} either as a global option with \end{lstcode} Class name \Class{foo} is, therefore, an placeholder for any class in this example. The meanings of commands \Macro{ifVTeX} and - \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} and many more commands for conditional execution + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} and many more commands for conditional execution is located in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Option}{internalonly~=\PName{value}}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Keys as Attributes of Families and their Members} @@ -137,11 +136,9 @@ more family members. Additionally, a value may be assigned to the key of a family member, to the key of a family, or to the keys of all family members. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DefineFamily}\Parameter{family}\\ + \Macro{DefineFamily}\Parameter{family}% \Macro{DefineFamilyMember}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamily}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyMember}% \Package{scrbase} needs to know the members of a family for different reasons. First, you have to define a new family using \Macro{DefineFamily}, which produces an empty member list. If the family @@ -184,26 +181,19 @@ the same as members of another family. loading all three packages, all three member will be defined. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyMember}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamily}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DefineFamilyKey}}\OParameter{default}\Parameter{action}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyState}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}\\ + \Parameter{key}% + \OParameter{default}\Parameter{action}% + \Macro{FamilyKeyState}% + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}% + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}% + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}% \Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyState}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}% The command \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} defines a \PName{key}. If a \PName{family member} is given, the \PName{key} becomes an attribute of that member in the given \PName{family}. If a \PName{family member} is not given, the member @@ -286,31 +276,25 @@ Generally, the four predefined states should be sufficient. has to be replaced by the corresponding names. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyState}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyKey}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RelaxFamilyKey}% If\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} the \PName{key} of the \PName{family member} of \PName{family} has been defined before, that definition will be cancelled. Afterwards the \PName{key} will not be defined for the \PName{family member} of \PName{family} any longer. Usage of \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey} for a not yet defined \PName{key} of the \PName{family member} of the \PName{family} is also allowed.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RelaxFamilyKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyProcessOptions}% Generally the extension of keys of families to keys of families and family members, as mentioned earlier, uses keys or key-value settings as class or package options. The command \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} is an extension of @@ -344,26 +328,26 @@ options assigned to the package locally leads to an error message. of \Package{keyval}. Ultimately, with the help of \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}, \PName{key=value} pairs become options.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyProcessOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}\OParameter{member}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}% Especially\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrbase}} authors of wrapper classes or wrapper packages sometimes need a hook to execute \PName{code} just before -\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}. The package \Package{scrbase} provides such a -hook and you can add \PName{code} to it using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions}. The package \Package{scrbase} +provides such a hook and you can add \PName{code} to it using \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}. The parameters \PName{member} and -\PName{family} are same to \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}. In difference to -\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} you can add \PName{code} also to the hook of not -yet defined \PName{family} or \PName{member}. +\PName{family} are same to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions}. In +difference to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} you can add +\PName{code} also to the hook of not yet defined \PName{family} or +\PName{member}. Note, the hook of a family member will be cleaned after execution. But if you use an empty \PName{member} the \PName{code} will be executed before the -\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} of every member of the \PName{family} and will +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} of every member of the \PName{family} and will never be deleted. \begin{Example} @@ -382,17 +366,16 @@ never be deleted. \Option{coldcut}, package \Package{liversausage} will throw an undefined option error. If \Option{coldcut} is used as a global option, package \Package{liversausage} will ignore it. But default settings inside - \Package{liversausage}, e.\,g., using \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions} before - \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} are not effected. + \Package{liversausage}, e.\,g., using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions} before + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} are not effected. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{options list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyExecuteOptions}% This command is an extension of \Macro{ExecuteOptions} from the \LaTeX{} kernel (see \cite{latex:clsguide}). The command processes not only options that are defined using \Macro{DeclareOption}, but also processes all keys of @@ -422,13 +405,12 @@ above all other attributes. Usage of the command inside the execution of an option is provided.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyExecuteOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyOptions}\Parameter{family}\Parameter{options list}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOptions}% Hence \PName{options list} is like: \begin{flushleft}\vskip\dp\strutbox\begin{tabular}{l} \PName{key}\texttt{=}\PName{value}\texttt{,}% @@ -446,7 +428,7 @@ keys follow in the order in which the members have been defined. If a given \PName{key} does not exist, either for the family or for any member of the family, then \Macro{FamilyOptions} will result in an error. Package \Package{scrbase} reports an error also if there are members with key -\PName{key}, but all those members signal failure via \Macro{FamilyKeyState}. +\PName{key}, but all those members signal failure via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}. \begin{Example} You extend your butcher project by a package \Package{sausagesalad}. If this package has been loaded, all sausage package should generate cold cuts: @@ -484,22 +466,21 @@ family, then \Macro{FamilyOptions} will result in an error. Package \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} to do nothing for package \Package{sausagesalad}. Because \Macro{@currname} and \Macro{@currext} are not longer valid at this time, the optional argument on - \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} has to be used. But until this re-definition of the + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} has to be used. But until this re-definition of the option, a second definition is made, that calls the option again while \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} for the whole family and so also for other sausage salad packages. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyOption}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{option}\Parameter{values list}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOption}% Besides options that have concurrently excluding values, there may be options -that produce several values at the same time. Using \Macro{FamilyOptions} for +that produce several values at the same time. Using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} for that type of option would result in using the same option several times with different value assignments. Instead of this, \Macro{FamilyOption} may be used to assign a whole \PName{values list} to the same \PName{option}. The @@ -510,7 +491,7 @@ to assign a whole \PName{values list} to the same \PName{option}. The \end{tabular}\end{flushleft} By the way, please note that usage of a comma inside a value may be done only if the value is put inside braces. The general functionality of this command -is the same as that of the previous command \Macro{FamilyOptions}. +is the same as that of the previous command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. \begin{Example} Package \Package{sausagesalad} should have one mire option, to add additional ingredients. Each of the ingredients sets a switch as was done @@ -539,56 +520,55 @@ is the same as that of the previous command \Macro{FamilyOptions}. \end{lstcode} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOption}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}\Parameter{action}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}% Sometimes\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} it is useful to delay the execution of an \PName{action} that is part of a value assignment to a key -until all assignments inside one \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}, -\Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions}, \Macro{FamilyOptions}, or \Macro{FamilyOption} -is finished. This may be done using \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} inside -an option definition. Reporting failure states of \PName{action} is not -possible in this case. Furthermore, the command should not be used outside an -option definition. +until all assignments inside one +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}, or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOption} is finished. This may be done using +\Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} inside an option definition. Reporting failure +states of \PName{action} is not possible in this case. Furthermore, the +command should not be used outside an option definition. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyBoolKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\Parameter{switch name}\\ + \Parameter{key}\Parameter{switch name}% \Macro{FamilySetBool}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key}\Parameter{switch name}\Parameter{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyBoolKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetBool}% In the previous examples, boolean switches often have been used. In the example with option \Option{coldcuts}, it is necessary that the user assigns either value \PValue{true} or value \PValue{false}. There is no error message for wrong value assignment. Because of this, boolean switches are a necessary feature. Package \Package{scrbase} provides \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} for definition of such options. Therefore, the arguments \PName{family member}, \PName{family}, and -\PName{key} are the same as that used by \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}). Argument \PName{switch name} +\PName{key} are the same as that used by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} (see +\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}). Argument \PName{switch name} is the name of the switch without the prefix \Macro{if}. If a switch with this name does not exist already, \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} will define it and initialize it to \PName{false}. Internally \Macro{FamilyBooKey} uses -\Macro{FamilySetBool} as \PName{action} of \Macro{DefineFamilyKey}. The +\Macro{FamilySetBool} as \PName{action} of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}. The \PName{default} for those options is always \PValue{true}. On the other hand, \Macro{FamilySetBool} understands \PName{value} \PValue{on} and \PValue{yes} beside \PName{true} for switching on and \PName{off} and \PName{no} beside \PName{false} for switching off. Unknown values will result -in a call of \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} with the arguments \PName{family}, -\PName{key}, and \PName{value}, which results in setting of -\Macro{FamilyKeyState}. Depending on the command used and other family -members, this may result in an error message about unknown value assignment -(see also \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnkownKeyValue} and -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}). +in a call of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} with the arguments +\PName{family}, \PName{key}, and \PName{value}, which results in setting of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}. Depending on the command used and +other family members, this may result in an error message about unknown value +assignment (see also \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} and +\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}). \begin{Example} The key \Option{coldcuts} should be declared somehow more robust. Additionally, all sausage packages should use the same key. So @@ -624,26 +604,21 @@ members, this may result in an error message about unknown value assignment \end{lstcode} using the additional information at \autopageref{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}, this is not only valid - for \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} but for \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} too. + for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} but for \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} too. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetBool}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyBoolKey} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyNumericalKey}}% + \Parameter{key}% \OParameter{default}\Parameter{command}% - \Parameter{values list}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{family}\Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilySetNumerical}}% + \Parameter{values list}% + \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{family}\Parameter{key}% \Parameter{command}\Parameter{values list}% \Parameter{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyNumericalKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetNumerical}% In contrast to switches that may be either true or false, a key exists that accept several values. For example an alignment may not only be left or not left, but left, centered, or right. Internally such @@ -714,78 +689,67 @@ assignment. \end{lstcode} \end{Example} Internally, \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey} uses \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} as -\PName{action} of \Macro{DefineFamilyKey}. If a unknown value is assigned to -such a key, \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} will call \Macro{FamilyUnkownKeyValue} -with the arguments \PName{family}, \PName{key} and \PName{value}. This will -normally result in an error message about assigning an unknown value. +\PName{action} of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}. If a unknown value +is assigned to such a key, \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} will call +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} with the arguments +\PName{family}, \PName{key} and \PName{value}. This will normally result in an +error message about assigning an unknown value. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetNumerical}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyNumericalKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyCounterKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyCounterKey}}% - \OParameter{default}\Parameter{\LaTeX{} counter}\\ + \Parameter{key}% + \OParameter{default}\Parameter{\LaTeX{} counter}% \Macro{FamilySetCounter}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key}\Parameter{\LaTeX{} counter}\Parameter{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounter}% -Beside\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyNumercialKey} that -defines a macro to a numeric value depending on a symbolic value, there are -circumstances when a \PName{key} directly represents a \PName{\LaTeX{} - counter}, that should be assigned directly to a numeric value. In those -cases, \Macro{FamilyCounterKey} can be used that internally will call -\Macro{FamilySetCounter}. A primary test of the \PName{value} argument is done -that only detects whether or not usage of \PName{value} as a number is -plausible. The assignment is done, only if this plausibility test is -successful. Nevertheless the assignment can still fail and result in a \TeX{} -error. But if the plausibility test fails already, this is signalled by -\Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}. +Beside\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey} that defines a macro to a numeric +value depending on a symbolic value, there are circumstances when a +\PName{key} directly represents a \PName{\LaTeX{} counter}, that should be +assigned directly to a numeric value. In those cases, \Macro{FamilyCounterKey} +can be used that internally will call \Macro{FamilySetCounter}. A primary test +of the \PName{value} argument is done that only detects whether or not usage +of \PName{value} as a number is plausible. The assignment is done, only if +this plausibility test is successful. Nevertheless the assignment can still +fail and result in a \TeX{} error. But if the plausibility test fails already, +this is signalled by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}. If\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} the value is omitted, the \PName{default} is used instead. If there is no \PName{default}, the \PName{key} can be used only with a value being defined.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}}% - \OParameter{default}\Parameter{macro}\\ + \Parameter{key}% + \OParameter{default}\Parameter{macro}% \Macro{FamilySetCounterMacro}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key}\Parameter{macro}\Parameter{value}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterMacroKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounterMacro}% These\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} two commands differ from the -previously described \Macro{FamilyCounterKey} and \Macro{FamilySetCounter} +previously described \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetCounter} only by the fact, that they do not assign a \PName{value} to a \PName{\LaTeX counter}, but define a \Macro{macro} with the \PName{value}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounterMacro}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterMacroKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyLengthKey}}% - \OParameter{default}\Parameter{length}\\ + \Parameter{key}% + \OParameter{default}\Parameter{length}% \Macro{FamilySetLength}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\Parameter{length}\Parameter{value}\\ + \Parameter{key}\Parameter{length}\Parameter{value}% \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}}% - \OParameter{default}\Parameter{Makro}\\ + \Parameter{key}% + \OParameter{default}\Parameter{Makro}% \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\Parameter{Makro}\Parameter{value}% + \Parameter{key}\Parameter{Makro}\Parameter{value}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthMacroKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLengthMacro}% With\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey} you can define a \PName{key} that represents a \PName{length}. It does not matter whether the \PName{length} is a \LaTeX{} length, a \TeX{} skip or a \TeX{} @@ -795,7 +759,7 @@ whether or not it is plausible to assign \PName{length} to \PName{value}. The assignment is done only if this plausibility test is successful. Nevertheless, not all assignment errors can be recognised, so an inaccurate \PName{value} can still result in \TeX{} error. Recognised errors however will be signalled -by \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}. +by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}. If\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} the value is omitted, the \PName{default} is used instead. If there is no \PName{default}, the @@ -805,35 +769,31 @@ In difference to this, \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey} and \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro} do not assign \PName{value} to a \PName{length}, but define a \Macro{macro} with this \PName{value}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLengthMacro}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthMacroKey}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyStringKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% - \Parameter{key}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyStringKey}}% + \Parameter{key}% \OParameter{default}\Parameter{command} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyStringKey}% This defines\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrbase}} a \PName{key} that accepts every value. The value will be stored into the given \Macro{command}. If there is no optional argument for the \PName{default}, \Macro{FamilyStringKey} is the same as: \begin{quote} -\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key}\\ -\hphantom{\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}}% +\hphantom{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}}% \PParameter{\Macro{def}\PName{command}\string{\#1\string}% -\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed}}. \end{quote} If an optional argument \PName{default} is used, \Macro{FamilyStringKey} is the same as: \begin{quote} -\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{family member}\Parameter{family}% \Parameter{key}\\ -\hphantom{\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}}% +\hphantom{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}}% \OParameter{default}% \PParameter{\Macro{def}\PName{command}\string{\#1\string}}. \end{quote} @@ -860,15 +820,13 @@ In this case there are not unknown values because all values are simply used for a macro definition. Nevertheless, you should note that paragraph breaks at the value assignment to the key are not allowed. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyStringKey}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyUnkownKeyValue}\Parameter{family}\Parameter{key}% - \Parameter{value}\Parameter{values list}% + \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}\Parameter{family}\Parameter{key}% + \Parameter{value}\Parameter{values list}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyUnkownKeyValue}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyElseValues}% The command \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} throws and error message about unknown values assigned to a known key. The \PName{values list} is a comma separated list of allowed values in the form: @@ -905,39 +863,42 @@ not used by \Package{scrbase}. \end{lstcode} Let's have a look at the definition of \Option{butcher}: First of all, we try to set the boolean switch of cold cuts using - \Macro{FamilySetBool}. After this command, we test whether or not - \Macro{FamilyKeyState} signals the success of the command with state - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}. If so, only the thin cut has to be - deactivated. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool}. After this command, we test whether + or not \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} signals the success of the + command with state \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed}. If so, + only the thin cut has to be deactivated. In the other case, the value will be tested to be equal to \PValue{thin}. In that case, cold cuts and thin cut are activated and the state will be - switched to \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}. If the last test failed also, - the failure state of \Macro{FamilySetBool} is still valid at the end of the + switched to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed}. If the last + test failed also, the failure state of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} is still valid at the end of the execution. Command \Macro{ifstr} is used for the thin test. It is - described on \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in + described on \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyUnkownKeyValue}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyElseValues} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyElseValues}% With former releases\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} of \Package{scrbase}, -additional allowed values reported by \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} can be -set re-defining \Macro{FamilyElseValues} in the form: +additional allowed values reported by +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} can be set re-defining +\Macro{FamilyElseValues} in the form: \begin{flushleft}\vskip\dp\strutbox\begin{tabular}{l} \texttt{,} `\PName{value}'\texttt{,} `\PName{value}' \dots \end{tabular}\vskip\dp\strutbox\end{flushleft} -Since release~3.12 \Macro{FamilyUnknownValue} does not report errors itself, -but signals them using \Macro{FamilyKeyState}. Therefore, -\Macro{FamilyElseValues} became deprecated. Nevertheless, its former usage is -recognised by \Package{scrbase} and results in a code change demand message.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyElseValues}% +Since release~3.12 \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} does not +report errors itself, but signals them using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}. Therefore, \Macro{FamilyElseValues} +became deprecated. Nevertheless, its former usage is recognised by +\Package{scrbase} and results in a code change demand message.% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Conditional Execution} @@ -945,8 +906,7 @@ recognised by \Package{scrbase} and results in a code change demand message.% The package \Package{scrbase} provides several commands for conditional execution. other than the \TeX{} syntax of conditionals, e.\,g., -% Umbruchkorrektur -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \iftrue ... \else @@ -962,8 +922,8 @@ conditionals of \Package{scrbase} are very basic. Because of this \Package{scrbase} firstly defines these conditionals as internal commands with prefix \Macro{scr@}. Additional user commands without this prefix are subsequently defined. But the definition of the user commands may be -suppressed with option \Option{internalonly} (see -\autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit}, \autopageref{desc:scrbase.option.internalonly}). +suppressed with option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.internalonly} (see +\autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit}, \DescPageRef{scrbase.option.internalonly}). Authors of packages and classes should use the internal commands as \KOMAScript{} itself does. Nevertheless, for completeness the user commands @@ -972,12 +932,10 @@ are described separately. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% - \Parameter{name}\Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{name}\Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax}% \Parameter{name}\Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifundefinedorrelax}% This command has almost the same functionality as \Macro{@ifundefined} from the \LaTeX{} kernel (see \cite{latex:source2e}). So the \PName{then instructions} will be executed if \PName{name} is the name of a command @@ -987,289 +945,270 @@ that is currently either not defined or \Macro{relax}. Otherwise, the in the event it was not defined before. Moreover, using \eTeX{} this case will not consume any hash memory.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifundefinedorrelax}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifpdftex}% - \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifpdftex}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdftex}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpdftex}% If pdf\TeX{} has been used, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Whether or not a PDF-file is generated does not matter, and the pdf\TeX{} test is rarely useful. In general, test for the desired command instead (see previous -\Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} and \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax}). +\Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpdftex}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdftex}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifVTeX}% - \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifVTeX}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifVTeX}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifVTeX}% If V\TeX{} has been used, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. This test is seldom useful. Test for the desired command instead (see previous \Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} and -\Macro{ifundefinedorrelax}). +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifVTeX}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifVTeX}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifpdfoutput}% - \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifpdfoutput}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdfoutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpdfoutput}% When generating a PDF-file the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Whether pdf\TeX{} or V\TeX{} or another \TeX{} engine is used to generate the PDF-file does not matter. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpdfoutput}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdfoutput}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifpsoutput}% - \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifpsoutput}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpsoutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpsoutput}% When generating a PostScript-file the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. V\TeX{} provides direct PostScript generation that will be recognised here. If V\TeX{} is not used, but a switch \Macro{if@dvips} has been defined, the decision depends on that switch. \KOMAScript{} provides \Macro{if@dvips} in \Package{typearea}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpsoutput}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpsoutput}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scr@ifdvioutput}% - \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}\\ + \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions}% \Macro{ifdvioutput}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifdvioutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifdvioutput}% When generating a DVI-file the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. If neither a direct PDF-file generation nor a direct PostScript-file generation has been detected, DVI-file generation is assumed. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifdvioutput}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifdvioutput}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnotundefined}\Parameter{name}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnotundefined}% \eTeX{} will be used to test, whether or not a command with the given \PName{name} has already been defined. The \PName{then instructions} will be executed if the command is defined, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. There is no corresponding internal command. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnotundefined}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifstr}\Parameter{string}\Parameter{string}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifstr}% Both \PName{string} arguments are expanded and afterwards compared. If the expansions are the same, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. There is no corresponding internal command. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifstr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifstrstart}\Parameter{string}\Parameter{string}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifstrstart}% Both\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{string} arguments are expanded and afterwards compared. If aside from white spaces the first string starts with the second one, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifstrstart}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisdimen}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimen}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{dimen}, which is also known as \TeX{} length register, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimen}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisdimension}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimension}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{code} expands to something with the syntax of the value of a length, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Please note\textnote{Attention!} that currently an invalid unit will result in an error message. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimension}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisdimexpr}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimexpr}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{dimexpr}, which is also known as \TeX{} length expression, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Note\textnote{Attention!} that illegal expressions will result in error messages. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisskip}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisskip}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{skip}, which is also known as \TeX{} distance register, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisskip}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisglue}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisglue}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{code} expands to something with the syntax of the value of a skip, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Please note\textnote{Attention!} that currently an invalid unit will result in an error message. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisglue}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisglueexpr}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisglueexpr}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{glueexpr}, which is also known as \TeX{} distance expression, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Note,\textnote{Attention!} that illegal expressions will result in error messages. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisglueexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifiscount}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifiscount}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{count}, which is also known as \TeX{} counter register, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command. For test with \LaTeX{} counters, see -\Macro{ifiscounter}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifiscount}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifiscounter}.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisinteger}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisinteger}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{code} expands to something with the syntax of the value of a counter, which would be a negative or positive integer, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisinteger}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisnumexpr}\Parameter{code}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisnumexpr}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} the expansion of\PName{code} results in a \Macro{numexpr}, which is also known as \TeX{} number expression, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. Note\textnote{Attention!} that illegal expressions will result in error messages. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisnumexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifiscounter}\Parameter{counter}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifiscounter}% If\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{counter} is an already defined \LaTeX{} counter, the \PName{then instructions} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else instructions}. The command is not completely expandable and there is no corresponding internal command.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifiscounter}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnumber}\Parameter{string}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnumber}% Note that this does not compare numbers. The \PName{then instructions} will be executed if the one step expansion of \PName{string} consists of digits only. Otherwise the \PName{else instructions} will be used. There is no corresponding internal command. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnumber}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifdimen}\Parameter{string}% \Parameter{then instructions}\Parameter{else instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifdimen}% Note that this does not compare dimensions. The \PName{then instructions} will be executed, if the one step expansion of \PName{string} consists of digits and a valid unit of length. Otherwise, the \PName{else instructions} will be used. There is no corresponding internal command. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifdimen}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@atdocument}\ \PName{the instructions} - \Macro{else}\ \PName{else instructions} \Macro{fi} + \Macro{if@atdocument}\ \PName{the instructions}\ % + \textMacro{else}\ \PName{else instructions}\ \textMacro{fi} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@atdocument}% This command exists intentionally as internal command only. In the document preamble \Macro{if@atdocument} is same as \Macro{iffalse}. After \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} it's the same as \Macro{iftrue}. Authors of @@ -1278,11 +1217,12 @@ depending on whether it has been used in the preamble or inside the documents body. Please note\textnote{Attention!} that this is a condition in \TeX{} syntax not in \LaTeX{} syntax! % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@atdocument}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition of Language-Dependent Terms} \seclabel{languageSupport} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{language>definition} \index{language>dependent terms|see{language definition}} \index{terms>language-dependent|see{language definition}} @@ -1304,26 +1244,22 @@ provides some additional commands for defining language-dependent terms. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{defcaptionname}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{providecaptionname}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{newcaptionname}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{renewcaptionname}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{defcaptionname*}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{providecaptionname*}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{newcaptionname*}% - \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{renewcaptionname*}% \Parameter{language list}\Parameter{term}\Parameter{definition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defcaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providecaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newcaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewcaptionname}% Using one of these commands, the user can assign a \PName{definition} for a particular language to a \PName{term}. Several languages can be concatenated with comma to a \PName{language list}. The \PName{term} is always a @@ -1493,12 +1429,9 @@ packages are listed and described in \autoref{tab:scrbase.commonNames}. }% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providecaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newcaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewcaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defcaptionname}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{language>definition} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Identification of \KOMAScript} @@ -1512,19 +1445,17 @@ to identify itself as a \KOMAScript{} package. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{KOMAScript} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScript}% This command only sets the word ``\KOMAScript'' with sans-serif font and a little bit tracking for the capitals. By the way: All \KOMAScript{} classes and packages define this command, if it has not been defined already. The definition is robust using \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScript} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{KOMAScriptVersion} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScriptVersion}% \KOMAScript{} defines the main version of \KOMAScript{} in this command. It has the form ``\PName{date} \PName{version} \texttt{KOMA-Script}''. This main version is same for all \KOMAScript{} classes and the \KOMAScript{} packages @@ -1532,7 +1463,7 @@ that are essential for the classes. Because of this, it may be inquired after loading \Package{scrbase}, too. For example, this document has been made using \KOMAScript{} version ``\KOMAScriptVersion''. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScriptVersion}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Extension of the \LaTeX{} Kernel} @@ -1543,11 +1474,9 @@ similar commands that would often be useful, too. Some of those commands for authors of packages and classes are provided by \Package{scrbase}. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ClassInfoNoLine}\Parameter{class name}\Parameter{information}\\ + \Macro{ClassInfoNoLine}\Parameter{class name}\Parameter{information}% \Macro{PackageInfoNoLine}\Parameter{package name}\Parameter{information}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PackageInfoNoLine}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ClassInfoNoLine}% For authors of classes and package the \LaTeX{} kernel already provides commands like \Macro{ClassInfo} and \Macro{PackageInfo} to write information. together with the current line number, into the log-file. Besides @@ -1558,14 +1487,12 @@ numbers. Nevertheless, the commands \Macro{ClassInfoNoLine} and \Macro{PackageInfoNoLine} for writing information without line numbers into the log-file are missing. Package \Package{scrbase} provides them. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ClassInfoNoLine}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PackageInfoNoLine} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{l@addto@macro}\Parameter{command}\Parameter{extension}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{l@addto@macro}% The \LaTeX{} kernel already provides an internal command \Macro{g@addto@macro} to extend the definition of macro \Macro{command} by \PName{extension} globally. This may be used only for macros that have no @@ -1575,7 +1502,7 @@ provides such a command with \Macro{l@addto@macro}. An alternative may be usage of package \Package{etoolbox}\IndexPackage{etoolbox}, which provides several of such commands for different purposes (see \cite{package:etoolbox}). % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{l@addto@macro} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Extension of the Mathematical Features of \eTeX} @@ -1589,11 +1516,9 @@ supported. Correct rounding is done while division. Sometimes additional operators would be useful. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{dividend}\Parameter{divisor}\\ + \Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{dividend}\Parameter{divisor}% \Macro{XmodY}\Parameter{dividend}\Parameter{divisor}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{XdivY}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{XmodY}% Having a division with remainder command\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{XdivY} gives the value of the integer quotient, with command \Macro{XmodY} giving the value of the remainder. This kind of division is @@ -1610,10 +1535,9 @@ The value may be used for assignment to a counter or directly in the expression of \Macro{numexpr}. For output the value as an Arabic number has to be prefixed by \Macro{the}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{XmodY}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{XdivY}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrbase}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex index f2275d6c8a3..ad07ec293a4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -48,14 +48,13 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex} - [$Date: 2016-06-14 09:45:01 +0200 (Tue, 14 Jun 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl for experts)] \translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 2016-06-14 - +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter[{Additional Information about the Main Classes and \Package{scrextend}}]{Additional Information about the Main Classes @@ -63,6 +62,11 @@ \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} as well as the Package \Package{scrextend}} \labelbase{maincls-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl}% +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}% +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt}% +\BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend}% This chapter gives additional information about the \KOMAScript{} classes \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl}. Some of the features @@ -102,11 +106,9 @@ experts. Because the information is addressed to experts it's condensed. % \seclabel{identification} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{KOMAClassName}\\ + \Macro{KOMAClassName}% \Macro{ClassName} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAClassName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ClassName}% \Macro{KOMAClassName} stores the name of the currently used \KOMAScript{} class. If someone wants to know, whether or not or a \KOMAScript{} class is used or which \KOMAScript{} is used this may be tested with this command. In @@ -114,13 +116,12 @@ difference to this, \Macro{ClassName} tells which would be the standard class, that has been replaced by a \KOMAScript{} class. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that the existence of -\Macro{KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} is not a indication for the usage of a -\KOMAScript{} class. First of all: Every \KOMAScript{} package and not only -\KOMAScript{} classes define \Macro{KOMAScript}. Furthermore other packages -may also define the \KOMAScript{} word mark with this name.% +\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} is not a indication for +the usage of a \KOMAScript{} class. First of all: Every \KOMAScript{} package +and not only \KOMAScript{} classes define \Macro{KOMAScript}. Furthermore +other packages may also define the \KOMAScript{} word mark with this name.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ClassName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAClassName}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Entries to the Table of Contents} % \seclabel{toc} @@ -129,7 +130,6 @@ may also define the \KOMAScript{} word mark with this name.% \Macro{addtocentrydefault}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}% \Parameter{heading} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtocentrydefault}% The\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript{} classes do not use \Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline}% @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ number. \KOMAScript{} uses \begin{quote}\raggedright \Macro{addcontentsline}\PParameter{toc}\Parameter{level}% \PParameter{\%\\ - \quad\Macro{protect}\Macro{numberline}\Parameter{number}% + \quad\Macro{protect}\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.numberline}\Parameter{number}% \PName{heading}\%\\ } \end{quote} @@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ to make this. Package authors an authors of wrapper classes may redefined this command to manipulate the entries. For example\textnote{Example} one could suggest -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \renewcommand{\addtocentrydefault}[3]{% \ifstr{#3}{}{% \ifstr{#2}{}{% @@ -180,49 +180,38 @@ manipulate the entries. For example\textnote{Example} one could suggest to omit entries with empty \PName{heading}. In real live this would not be needed, because the \KOMAScript{} classes already use another method to suppress empty entries. See the description of the structuring commands in -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure} from \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part} +\autoref{sec:maincls.structure} from \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part} onward for this.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtocentrydefault} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}\\ + \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading}% \Macro{addsubparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{heading} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addparttocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchaptertocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubsubsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addparagraphtocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubparagraphtocentry}% The\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript{} classes call the previously described -command \Macro{addtocentrydefault}\IndexCmd{addtocentrydefault}% -\important{\Macro{addtocentrydefault}} directly only if no individual command -for the \PName{level} has been defined or if that command is -\Macro{relax}\IndexCmd{relax}\important{\Macro{relax}}. Nevertheless, the +command +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}\IndexCmd{addtocentrydefault}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}} directly only if no +individual command for the \PName{level} has been defined or if that command +is \Macro{relax}\IndexCmd{relax}\important{\Macro{relax}}. Nevertheless, the default definition of all these individual commands simply call -\Macro{addtocentrydefault} with their own \PName{level} passing their -arguments through.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault} with their own \PName{level} +passing their arguments through.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubparagraphtocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubsubsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addparagraphtocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchaptertocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addparttocentry}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{raggedchapterentry} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapterentry}% Previous\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} versions of \KOMAScript{} provide a feature for printing chapter entries at the table of contents left-aligned instead of justified by defining command @@ -244,21 +233,19 @@ text. Nevertheless, it is recommended to use the attribute of style \PValue{tocline} to select justified or left-aligned text.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapterentry} +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Font Settings} % \seclabel{fonts} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}\\ + \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}% \Macro{changefontsizes}\Parameter{font size} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@fontsizefilebase}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{changefontsizes}% The prefix \File{scrsize} for file names of font size files, that has been mentioned\iffree{ in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}}{} at -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize} is only the default of the +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} is only the default of the internal macro \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}\IndexCmd{@fontsizefilebase}. This default is used only, if the macro has not already be defined when loading a \KOMAScript{} class or package \Package{scrextend}. Authors of wrapper classes @@ -269,26 +256,24 @@ by redefinition of macro \Macro{changefontsizes}\important{\Macro{changefontsizes}}. This macro has exactly one argument: the wanted \PName{font size}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{changefontsizes}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@fontsizefilebase}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{newkomafont}\OParameter{warning message}\Parameter{element}% - \Parameter{default}\\ + \Parameter{default}% \Macro{aliaskomafont}\Parameter{alias name}\Parameter{element} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{aliaskomafont}% Experts may use \Macro{newkomafont} to define a \PName{default} for the font style of an \PName{element}. After this that default may be changed using -commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Of course this is not enough to -use the defined font style. The expert himself has to prepare his code to use -command -\Macro{usekomafont}\important{\Macro{usekomafont}}\IndexCmd{usekomafont} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) with that \PName{element} at his -code definitions. +commands \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Of course this is not enough to use +the defined font style. The expert himself has to prepare his code to use +command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}}\IndexCmd{usekomafont} (see +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) with that \PName{element} at his code +definitions. The optional argument \PName{warning message} defines a warning message, that \KOMAScript{} will show whenever the default font style of that @@ -305,20 +290,18 @@ compatibility. Also an \PName{alias name}s may increase usability, because different users may find different names more or less intuitive. \KOMAScript{} itself defines a lot of \PName{alias name}s for several \PName{element}s. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{aliaskomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomafont}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}\Parameter{macro}\\ + \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}\Parameter{macro}% \Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist}\Parameter{macro} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontrelaxlist}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontgobblelist}% As already mentioned in \autoref{part:forAuthors} of this manual, font -settings of elements should consist only in commands to select the size, family, -coding, series, shape, or colour. At least changing the colour is not always -transparent in \LaTeX{} and therefore could result in unwanted effects if -someone uses \Macro{usekomafont} at an inappropriate state. +settings of elements should consist only in commands to select the size, +family, coding, series, shape, or colour. At least changing the colour is not +always transparent in \LaTeX{} and therefore could result in unwanted effects +if someone uses \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont} at an inappropriate state. Users tend to use different, somehow critical things in the font setting of an element, e.\,g., \Macro{MakeUppercase} at the very end of the setting. As long @@ -328,24 +311,24 @@ argument, e.\,g., \Macro{textbf} instead of \Macro{bfseries}, would work mostly, if it the last one in the font setting of an element\,---\,but without warranty. -Inside \KOMAScript, sometimes, it was necessary to restrict the font change -to real font settings. This has been done, e.\,g., using -\Macro{usefontofkomafont}% +Inside \KOMAScript, sometimes, it was necessary to restrict the font change to +real font settings. This has been done, e.\,g., using +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}% \IndexCmd{usefontofkomafont}% \IndexCmd{usesizeofkomafont}\IndexCmd{useencodingofkomafont}% \IndexCmd{usefamilyofkomafont}\IndexCmd{useseriesofkomafont}% -\IndexCmd{useshapeofkomafont} instead of \Macro{usekomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}). - -Nevertheless, command \Macro{usefontofkomafont} and it's siblings have some -limitations. Therefore you must not use a command that always needs a fully -expandable argument inside the font setting of an element. But this is exactly -what \Macro{MakeUppercase} +\IndexCmd{useshapeofkomafont} instead of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont} +(see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}). + +Nevertheless, command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} and it's +siblings have some limitations. Therefore you must not use a command that +always needs a fully expandable argument inside the font setting of an +element. But this is exactly what \Macro{MakeUppercase} needs. Therefore\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript{} holds a list of macros, which should become -\Macro{relax} inside \Macro{usefontofkomafont} and it's siblings. Amongst -others, \Macro{normalcolor}, \Macro{MakeUppercase}, and +\Macro{relax} inside \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} and it's +siblings. Amongst others, \Macro{normalcolor}, \Macro{MakeUppercase}, and \Macro{MakeLowercase} are part of that list. More macros can be added one by one using \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}. @@ -357,31 +340,30 @@ list. The user himself is responsible for all errors resulting in the usage of misunderstood as a legitimation for adding all kind of commands to the font setting of an element! -If\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} a \PName{macro} and it's first argument should be ignored -locally inside \Macro{usefontofkomafont} and it's siblings, you can use +If\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} +a \PName{macro} and it's first argument should be ignored locally inside +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} and it's siblings, you can use \Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist} instead of \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}. An example for this is the command \Macro{color}, that has to be ignored with the colour name and therefore is a default member of the gobble-list.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontgobblelist}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontrelaxlist}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{IfExistskomafont}\Parameter{element}\Parameter{then code}% \Parameter{else code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfExistskomafont}% Which\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} elements are defined depends on the version of \KOMAScript. So sometimes it may be useful to be able to test, whether or not an \PName{element} exists. The command executes the \PName{then - code} only if an \PName{element} has been defined using \Macro{newkomafont} -or \Macro{aliaskomafont} and therefore can be changed using -\Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont} and can be used by one of the + code} only if an \PName{element} has been defined using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.newkomafont} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.aliaskomafont} +and therefore can be changed using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} or +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} and can be used by one of the \Macro{use\dots komafont} commands. Otherwise it executes the \PName{else code}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfExistskomafont}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsubsection{Paragraph Indention or Gap} % \seclabel{parskip} @@ -390,14 +372,13 @@ or \Macro{aliaskomafont} and therefore can be changed using \Macro{setparsizes}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{distance}%^^A \Parameter{last line end space} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setparsizes}% With this command \KOMAScript{} provides to set the indent of the first line of a new paragraph, the distance between paragraphs and the white space that has to be at the end of the last line of each paragraph. This command should be used whenever changes should also be recognized by option -\OptionValue{parskip}{relative}. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{Beispiel} itself uses -this command, e.\,g., with -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{parskip}{relative}. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{Beispiel} +itself uses this command, e.\,g., with +\begin{lstcode} \setparsizes{0pt}{0pt}{0pt plus 1fil} \end{lstcode} to switch of paragraph indent and distance between paragraphs and to allow any @@ -406,7 +387,7 @@ paragraph consists of a box only, that should be printed without vertical distance but with the whole column width. If, in opposite to that, the box should only span the whole width but should be printed with the current settings of paragraph indent and distance between paragraphs, usage of -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \setlength{\parfillskip}{0pt plus 1fil} \end{lstcode} would be recommended. @@ -419,11 +400,12 @@ if they have not been changed since the last usage of this command. This is one more reason not to change these values without using \KOMAScript. With compatibility to a \KOMAScript{} version prior to 3.17 (see \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}, option -\Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValue{version}{3.17}}) +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.version}, option +\DescRef{maincls.option.version}% +\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{version}{3.17}}) this reactivation of the \Macro{setparsizes} values is deactivated.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setparsizes}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Counters} % \seclabel{counter} @@ -434,15 +416,11 @@ this reactivation of the \Macro{setparsizes} values is deactivated.% % \seclabel{sections} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}\\ + \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}% + \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}% + \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name}% \Macro{ProvideSectionCommand}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommand}% With\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} these commands you can either define a new section-like command \Macro{\PName{name}} or change an already defined sectioning command @@ -454,35 +432,36 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \begin{labeling}{\PValue{chapter}:} \item[\PValue{chapter}:] \ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}Style of chapter headings. This style is currently used - for \Macro{chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} and indirectly for - \Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap}. You can define new section-like commands - using this style. To define new or to reconfigure existing commands you can - also use the additional attributes of + for \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} and indirectly for + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap}. You can define new + section-like commands using this style. To define new or to reconfigure + existing commands you can also use the additional attributes of \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}, \autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}. - Note\textnote{Attention!} that command \Macro{addchap} and the star variants - are configured automatically together with \Macro{chapter} and should not be - changed independently. Note that \Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}} does not provide this style. + Note\textnote{Attention!} that command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap} and the + star variants are configured automatically together with + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} and should not be changed independently. Note + that \Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} does not + provide this style. \item[\PValue{part}:] \ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}Style part headings. This style is - currently used for \Macro{part}\IndexCmd{part} and indirectly for - \Macro{addpart}\IndexCmd{addpart}. You can define new section-like commands - using this style. To define new or to reconfigure existing commands you can - also use the additional attributes of + currently used for \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part} and indirectly + for \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart}\IndexCmd{addpart}. You can define new + section-like commands using this style. To define new or to reconfigure + existing commands you can also use the additional attributes of \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys}, \autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys}. - Note\textnote{Attention!} that command \Macro{addpart} and the star variants - are configured automatically together with \Macro{part} and should not be - changed independently. + Note\textnote{Attention!} that command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart} and the + star variants are configured automatically together with + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} and should not be changed independently. \item[\PValue{section}:] Style of section headings. This style is currently - used for \Macro{section}\IndexCmd{section}, - \Macro{subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}, - \Macro{subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}, - \Macro{paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph}, and - \Macro{subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph}. You can define new section-like - commands using this style. To define new or to reconfigure existing commands - you can also use the additional attributes of + used for \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph}, and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph}. You can define + new section-like commands using this style. To define new or to reconfigure + existing commands you can also use the additional attributes of \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys}, \autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys}. Definitions of new commands need at least the \PName{key}s \PValue{style}, @@ -492,13 +471,13 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: redefined as a section-like command using \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}. Note\textnote{Attention!} that command \Macro{addsec} and the star variants are configured automatically together - with \Macro{section} and should not be changed independently. Defining a new - section-like command with this style will also define an element with the - same \PName{name} and the possibility to change its font using - \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), if such an element does not - already exist. + with \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} and should not be changed + independently. Defining a new section-like command with this style will also + define an element with the same \PName{name} and the possibility to change + its font using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} or + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), if such an element does not already + exist. \end{labeling} \begin{table} @@ -509,92 +488,68 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX} \toprule \PName{key} & \PName{value} & Description \\ - \midrule - \PValue{counterwithin} & \PName{counter name} & - The value of the counter of the - heading should depend on - \PName{counter name}. Whenever - \Macro{stepcounter} or - \Macro{refstepcounter} increases the - value of \PName{counter name}, the - value of the counter of this heading - should be set to 0. Also the output - of the value of this heading should - be prefixed by - \Macro{the\PName{counter name}} - followed by a dot.\\ + \midrule \PValue{counterwithin} & \PName{counter name} & The value of the + counter of the heading should depend on \PName{counter name}. Whenever + \Macro{stepcounter} or \Macro{refstepcounter} increases the value of + \PName{counter name}, the value of the counter of this heading should be + set to 0. Also the output of the value of this heading should be prefixed + by \Macro{the\PName{counter name}} + followed by a dot.\\ \ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartl}}% - \PValue{counterwithout} & \PName{counter name} & - Cancels a prior - \PValue{counterwithin} - setting. Therefore it makes sense - only if you re-define an existing - section-like command.\\ + \PValue{counterwithout} & \PName{counter name} & Cancels a prior + \PValue{counterwithin} setting. Therefore it makes sense only if you + re-define an existing + section-like command.\\ \PValue{expandtopt} & \PName{switch}& If the switch is on, all following - values for lengths will be - completely expanded, evaluated and - stored as \texttt{pt} values. - If the switch is off, all following - values for lengths will be - completely expanded, tentatively - evaluated but only expanded stored. - Any values from - \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, - \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} - may be used. Default is - \PValue{false}.\\ - \PValue{level} & \PName{integer} & A number, denoting depth of section - (see counter \Counter{secnumdepth}, - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth}); - the value should be unique.\\ - \PValue{style} & \PName{name} & Defines the style of the - heading.\\ + values for lengths will be completely expanded, evaluated and stored as + \texttt{pt} values. If the switch is off, all following values for + lengths will be completely expanded, tentatively evaluated but only + expanded stored. Any values from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, + \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} may be used. Default is + \PValue{false}.\\ + \PValue{level} & \PName{integer} & A number, denoting depth of section + (see counter \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}, + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}); + the value should be unique.\\ + \PValue{style} & \PName{name} & Defines the style of the + heading.\\ \ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% - \PValue{tocstyle} & \PName{name} & Defines the style of the entries into - the table of contents. You can use - every already defined toc-entry - style (see - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}). An - empty \PName{name} prevents a new - definition of the toc-entry - command.\\ + \PValue{tocstyle} & \PName{name} & Defines the style of the entries into + the table of contents. You can use every already defined toc-entry style + (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}). An empty \PName{name} prevents a + new definition of the toc-entry + command.\\ \ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% - \PValue{toc\PName{option}} & \PName{value} - & Additional options depending on the - TOC-entry style given by - \Option{tocstyle}. See - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, - \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} - for additional information about - TOC-entry styles. See - \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, - \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} - for information about the - attributes of the predefined - TOC-entry styles of package - \Package{tocbasic}, that can be used - as \PName{option}.\\ + \PValue{toc\PName{option}} & \PName{value} & Additional options depending + on the TOC-entry style given by \Option{tocstyle}. See + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} for + additional information about TOC-entry styles. See + \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, + \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} for information about the + attributes of the predefined TOC-entry styles of package + \Package{tocbasic}, that can be used + as \PName{option}.\\ % \PValue{tocindent} & \PName{length} & Total indentation from the left % margin of the entry in the table of % contents corresponding to this % heading, if and only if such an % entry will be made (see - % \Counter{tocdepth} (siehe + % \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} (siehe % \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - % \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}).\\ + % \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}).\\ % \PValue{toclevel} & \PName{integer} & % A number denoting the depth of the % entry in the table of contents % corresponding to this heading, if % this should differ from % \PValue{level} (see - % \Counter{tocdepth} in + % \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} in % \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - % \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}). \\ + % \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). \\ % \PValue{tocnumwidth} & \PName{length} & % Width of the box for the number of % the entry in the table of contents.\\ @@ -625,11 +580,11 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \PValue{font} & \PName{font commands} & The initial font setting that should be used beside - \FontElement{disposition} for the + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} for the heading. You can use all settings, that are allowed for - \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont} for the + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} for the element of the heading.\\ \PValue{indent} & \PName{length} & Indentation of heading from the left margin.\\ @@ -653,15 +608,18 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: value is negative, then the paragraph indent of the text following the heading is - suppressed.\\ + suppressed. This will be done also + for positive values if class option + \DescRef{maincls.option.version} is + set to a value less than 3.22.\\ \PValue{font} & \PName{font commands} & The initial font setting that should be used beside - \FontElement{disposition} for the + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} for the heading. You can use all settings, that are allowed for - \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont} for the + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} for the element of the heading.\\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PName{length} & The vertical skip between the prefix line and the heading's text, if a @@ -679,13 +637,17 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \PValue{prefixfont} & \PName{font commands} & The initial font setting that should be used beside - \FontElement{disposition} and the + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + and the element of the heading for the prefix line of the heading. You can use all settings that are allowed - for \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont} for the - element of the prefix line.\\ + for + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + for the element of the prefix + line.\\ \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \end{table} @@ -702,20 +664,17 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \PValue{afterskip} & \PName{length} & The absolute value is the vertical skip below the heading.\\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PName{length}& The absolute value of the vertical - skip before the heading. If the - value is negative, then the - paragraph indent of the text - following the heading is - suppressed.\\ + skip before the heading.\\ \PValue{font} & \PName{font commands} & The initial font setting that should be used beside - \FontElement{disposition} for the + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + for the heading. You can use all settings, that are allowed for - \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont} for the - element of the heading.\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + for the element of the heading.\\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PName{length} & % \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and % \Class{scrreprt}}% The vertical skip between the prefix @@ -740,13 +699,17 @@ dependent attributes, too. Currently the following styles are provided: \PValue{prefixfont} & \PName{font commands} & The initial font setting that should be used beside - \FontElement{disposition} and the + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + and the element of the heading for the prefix line of the heading. You can use all settings that are allowed - for \Macro{setkomafont} and - \Macro{addtokomafont} for the - element of the prefix line.\\ + for + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + and + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + for the element of the prefix + line.\\ \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \end{table} @@ -801,11 +764,11 @@ attributes. You can set them here too, if you prefix them with \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. \begin{Example} - Because of incomprehensible reasons, the headings of \Macro{paragraph} - shouldn't be run-in headings any longer but headings similar to - \Macro{subsubsection}. The vertical skip above the heading should be 10\,pt - and the following text should be set without any vertical distance. To do - so, you can simply use: + Because of incomprehensible reasons, the headings of + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} shouldn't be run-in headings any longer but + headings similar to \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}. The vertical skip + above the heading should be 10\,pt and the following text should be set + without any vertical distance. To do so, you can simply use: \begin{lstcode} \RedeclareSectionCommand[% beforeskip=-10pt,% @@ -834,11 +797,12 @@ attributes. You can set them here too, if you prefix them with \end{Example} In the example above only \PValue{beforeskip} and \PValue{afterskip} were -needed, because since v3.15 \KOMAScript{} defines \Macro{paragraph} itself -using \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}. All other values are just reused -with their initial definition. Furthermore, the original definition of -\Macro{paragraph} in \Class{scrartcl} reads: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +needed, because since v3.15 \KOMAScript{} defines +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} itself using +\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}. All other values are just reused with their +initial definition. Furthermore, the original definition of +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} in \Class{scrartcl} reads: +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareSectionCommand[% level=4, indent=0pt, @@ -852,14 +816,15 @@ with their initial definition. Furthermore, the original definition of \end{lstcode} \Class{scrreprt} and \Class{scrbook} use slightly different values. -Some settings of \Macro{chapter} depend on option \Option{headings} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}). +Some settings of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} depend on option +\DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}). \hyperref[tab:maincls.chapter.skips]{Table~\ref*{tab:maincls.chapter.skips}} shows the default values of these settings. An overview of all settings is shown in \autoref{tab:maincls.section.defaults}. For more -information\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} about the default of the toc-entry -styles see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}}, +information\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}} about the default of the toc-entry styles see +\autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}}, \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Please note, that \PValue{1ex} and \Length{baselineskip} depend on the default font size of the heading or the table of contents entry.% @@ -867,10 +832,11 @@ table of contents entry.% \begin{table} \centering \caption{Defaults of the chapter headings of \Class{scrbook} - and \Class{scrreprt} subject to option \Option{headings}} + and \Class{scrreprt} subject to option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings}} \label{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \begin{tabular}{ll} - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries With \OptionValue{headings}{big}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries + With \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{big}:}\\ \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule @@ -878,10 +844,11 @@ table of contents entry.% & \PValue{1.725\Length{baselineskip} plus .115\Length{baselineskip} minus .192\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{3.3\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-3.3\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{huge} \\ \bottomrule\\ - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries With \OptionValue{headings}{normal}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries + With \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{normal}:}\\ \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule @@ -889,10 +856,11 @@ table of contents entry.% & \PValue{1.5\Length{baselineskip} plus .1\Length{baselineskip} minus .167\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{3\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-3\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ \bottomrule\\ - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries With \OptionValue{headings}{small}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries + With \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{small}:}\\ \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule @@ -900,7 +868,7 @@ table of contents entry.% & \PValue{1.35\Length{baselineskip} plus .09\Length{baselineskip} minus .15\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{2.8\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-2.8\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{Large} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} @@ -920,19 +888,20 @@ table of contents entry.% \raggedleft\dots\\ \endfoot \endlastfoot - \Macro{part}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{0pt plus 1fil} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{0pt plus 1fil + \Length{baselineskip}} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{part}, + \PValue{font} & see element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.part}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PValue{20pt} \\ \PValue{level} & -1 \\ - \PValue{prefixfont} & see element \FontElement{partnumber}, + \PValue{prefixfont} & see element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.partnumber}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{tocindent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -942,19 +911,20 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{chapter}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & see \autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & see \autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{chapter}, + \PValue{font} & see element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.chapter}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PValue{0pt} \\ \PValue{level} & 0 \\ - \PValue{prefixfont} & see element \FontElement{chapterprefix}, + \PValue{prefixfont} & see element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.chapterprefix}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{tocindent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -964,14 +934,14 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{section}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{2.3ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{section}, + \PValue{font} & see element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.section}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -983,14 +953,15 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subsection}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{1.5ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{subsection}, + \PValue{font} & see element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subsection}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1002,14 +973,15 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subsubsection}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{1.5ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{subsubsection}, + \PValue{font} & see element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subsubsection}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1021,14 +993,14 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{paragraph}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{-1em} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{paragraph}, + \PValue{font} & see element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.paragraph}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1040,14 +1012,15 @@ table of contents entry.% \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subparagraph}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Attribute & Default Value \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{-1em} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & see element \FontElement{subparagraph}, + \PValue{font} & see element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subparagraph}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \Macro{scr@parindent} \\ @@ -1061,22 +1034,19 @@ table of contents entry.% \end{longtable} %end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommand}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{list of names}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{list of names}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{list of names}\\ - \Macro{ProvideSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes}\Parameter{list of names} + \Macro{DeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes} + \Parameter{list of names}% + \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes} + \Parameter{list of names}% + \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes} + \Parameter{list of names}% + \Macro{ProvideSectionCommands}\OParameter{attributes} + \Parameter{list of names} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommands}% With\ChangedAt[2014/11]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} these commands you can either define or change several section-like commands at once. The names of the section-like commands are @@ -1098,40 +1068,31 @@ start values for the first section-like command of the \PName{list of will be increased by the value of \PValue{increaselevel}. If attribute \PValue{increaselevel} is used without an assignment the increase value is 1. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommands}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}\\ - \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}\\ - \Macro{chapterheadendvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadstartvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadmidvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadendvskip}\\ + \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}% + \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}% + \Macro{chapterheadendvskip}% + \Macro{partheadstartvskip}% + \Macro{partheadmidvskip}% + \Macro{partheadendvskip}% \Macro{partheademptypage} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadstartvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadmidvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadendvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadstartvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadmidvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadendvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheademptypage}% -These\important[i]{\Macro{chapter}\\ - \Macro{part}\\ - \Macro{addchap}\\ - \Macro{addpart}} commands are used inside of the definition of the headings -\Macro{chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter}, \Macro{part}, \Macro{addchap}, -\Macro{addpart} and their star-variations. Thereby +These\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart}} commands are used inside of the definition of the headings +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addpart} and their star-variations. Thereby \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} is designed to be a command, that inserts a vertical distance before the chapter heading. Analogues \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} is designed to be a command, that inserts a vertical distance after the chapter heading. If\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} the chapter heading has a prefix number line (see option -\Option{chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}), \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} +\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}), \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} will be used between the number line and the heading text. Vertical distance above and below part headings will be inserted using the @@ -1146,9 +1107,9 @@ page of \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}. Since \KOMAScript~3.15\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} the defaults of these seven commands -are independent from option \Option{headings} (see +are independent from option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}). The original definitions of the +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}). The original definitions of the chapter heading reads since \KOMAScript~3.157\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}:\IndexLength{@tempskipa} @@ -1157,23 +1118,24 @@ chapter heading reads since \newcommand*{\chapterheadmidvskip}{\par\nobreak\vskip\@tempskipa} \newcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vskip\@tempskipa} \end{lstcode} -Every usage of \OptionValue{headings}{big}\IndexOption{headings}, -\OptionValue{headings}{normal}, or \OptionValue{headings}{small} reactivates -these default definitions. +Every usage of \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{big}\IndexOption{headings}, +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{normal}, or +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{small} reactivates these default +definitions. -Command \Macro{chapter} automatically sets the internal length +Command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} automatically sets the internal length \Length{@tempskipa} to the value of the -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} attribute +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} attribute \PValue{beforeskip} before calling \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}. Correspondingly it sets the length to the value of attribute \PValue{afterskip} before calling \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} and \PValue{innerskip} before calling \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}. If you redefine \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}, \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}, or \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} you should also correspond the new definition to -\Length{@tempskipa} to respect the values of \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}. +\Length{@tempskipa} to respect the values of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}. -The default values of the distances of \Macro{part} do not depend on option -\Option{headings}. So the corresponding commands will not be redefined using +The default values of the distances of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} do not depend on option +\DescRef{maincls.option.headings}. So the corresponding commands will not be redefined using the options. The\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} original definitions of these commands of \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} read: @@ -1201,43 +1163,36 @@ and of \Class{scrartcl}: \vskip\@tempskipa } \end{lstcode} -Again \Macro{part} sets \Length{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa} to the -values of \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} before -the internal usage of the command. +Again \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} sets +\Length{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa} to the values of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} +before the internal usage of the command. It\ChangedAt[2015/03]{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} is not recommended to redefine the command for the distances above or below the headings only for changing these distances, because you can reconfigure these distances much easier using -\Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}. Redefinition of the commands should be -reserved to more complex changes. An\textnote{Example!} example that -redefines \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} and \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} to -print extra rules above and below the chapter heading may be found at +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand}. Redefinition of the commands +should be reserved to more complex changes. An\textnote{Example!} example +that redefines \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} and \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} +to print extra rules above and below the chapter heading may be found at \cite{homepage} (in German).% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheademptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadendvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadmidvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadstartvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadendvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadmidvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadstartvskip}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% - \Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ + \Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}% \Macro{chapterlinesformat}% \Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterlinesformat}% These\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} commands are used by headings with style \PValue{chapter} to output the heading number and heading text depending on option -\Option{chapterprefix}\IndexOption{chapterprefix}% -\textnote{\Option{chapterprefix}} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}). If the option is +\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}\IndexOption{chapterprefix}% +\textnote{\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}). If the option is \PValue{true} \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} is used, otherwise \Macro{chapterlinesformat}. @@ -1247,7 +1202,7 @@ done with these commands. If a heading has no number argument \PName{number} will be completely empty also without any format or font commands. The default definitions are very simple: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{% \@hangfrom{#2}{#3}% } @@ -1282,10 +1237,11 @@ The default definitions are very simple: \end{lstcode} Unfortunately you will find, that these re-definitions result in justified text for the headings. The reason is the \Macro{parbox} command. To change - this, you can use \Macro{raggedchapter} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter}) inside the argument of - \Macro{parbox}. Otherwise \Macro{raggedchapter} would be used only before - \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} and \Macro{chapterlinesformat}: + this, you can use \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} (see + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter}) + inside the argument of \Macro{parbox}. Otherwise \Macro{raggedchapter} would + be used only before \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} and + \Macro{chapterlinesformat}: \begin{lstcode} \makeatletter \renewcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{% @@ -1321,30 +1277,29 @@ also changes \Macro{interlinepenalty} as part of \PName{text} to prevent page breaks. It also finishes \PName{text} with an internal paragraph break using \Macro{@par}. -Command \Macro{raggedchapter} is not part of \PName{text} but executed before -\Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} or \Macro{chapterlinesformat}. This makes -it much easier to use, e.\,g., \Macro{MakeUppercase} at a -re-definition. Please note, typographers use individual letter spacing at -majuscule text, but \LaTeX{} command \Macro{MakeUppercase} does not. +Command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} is not part of \PName{text} but +executed before \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} or +\Macro{chapterlinesformat}. This makes it much easier to use, e.\,g., +\Macro{MakeUppercase} at a re-definition. Please note, typographers use +individual letter spacing at majuscule text, but \LaTeX{} command +\Macro{MakeUppercase} does not. The first argument, \PName{level}, is not used by the default definition and also not needed in the example above. It is of interest only, if a user would define several commands with \PValue{chapter} style and need to distinguish -the different levels. The predefined commands \Macro{chapter}, -\Macro{chapter*}, \Macro{addchap}, and \Macro{addchap*} all share the same -\PName{level} \PName{chapter}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterlinesformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% +the different levels. The predefined commands \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}, and +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap*} all share the same \PName{level} +\PName{chapter}.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{sectionlinesformat}% - \Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ + \Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}% \Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat}% - \Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ + \Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionlinesformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectioncatchphraseformat}% These\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} commands are used by headings with style \PValue{section} to output the heading number and heading text. If the heading is printed as @@ -1362,7 +1317,7 @@ done with these commands. If a heading has no number argument \PName{number} will be completely empty also without any format or font commands. The default definitions are: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand{\sectionlinesformat}[4]{% \@hangfrom{\hskip #2#3}{#4}% } @@ -1411,32 +1366,29 @@ changes \Macro{interlinepenalty} to impede page breaks. The first argument, \PName{level}, is not used by the default definition. The example shows how to use it to distinguish different heading levels of the same style \PValue{section}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectioncatchphraseformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionlinesformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{star command}\Parameter{command}\\ - \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{level}% - \Parameter{indent}\Parameter{beforeskip}\Parameter{afterskip}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scr@startsection}}\Parameter{style commands}% - \OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{level}% - \Parameter{indent}\Parameter{beforeskip}\Parameter{afterskip}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scr@startsection}}\Parameter{style commands}% - \texttt{*}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{code}\\ - \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{code}\\ + \Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{star command}\Parameter{command}% + \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}% + \Parameter{beforeskip}\Parameter{afterskip}% + \Parameter{style commands}% + \OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \labelsuffix[*]% + \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{indent}% + \Parameter{beforeskip}\Parameter{afterskip}% + \Parameter{style commands}% + \PValue{*}\Parameter{heading}% + \labelsuffix% + \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{code}% + \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{code}% \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{At@startsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Before@ssect}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Before@sect}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@startsection}% As\ChangedAt[2014/09]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} already explained in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} in the description of the sectioning commands beginning with -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter}, \KOMAScript{} provides additional +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, \KOMAScript{} provides additional features for the optional argument of those commands. Therefore, it was necessary to replace some \LaTeX{} kernel commands, especially \Macro{secdef}\IndexCmd{secdef}\important{\Macro{secdef}} and @@ -1454,9 +1406,9 @@ additional features of \KOMAScript. Nevertheless these commands should not be redefined, because they could be changed in future and so the redefinition would impair \KOMAScript{} again. -\KOMAScript{} internally uses \Macro{SecDef} and -\Macro{scr@startsection} instead of \Macro{secdef} and \Macro{@startsection}, -e.\,g., defining section-like commands by \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}. So +\KOMAScript{} internally uses \Macro{SecDef} and \Macro{scr@startsection} +instead of \Macro{secdef} and \Macro{@startsection}, e.\,g., defining +section-like commands by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}. So later redefinition of \Macro{secdef} or \Macro{@startsection} will not influence the sectioning commands of \KOMAScript. @@ -1481,10 +1433,7 @@ the vertical gap of \Length{@tempskipa} has already been added using The commands \Macro{At@startsection}, \Macro{Before@sect}, and \Macro{Before@ssect} are suggested for package authors.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@startsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Before@sect}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Before@ssect}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{At@startsection}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Appendix} % \seclabel{appendix} @@ -1493,16 +1442,15 @@ The commands \Macro{At@startsection}, \Macro{Before@sect}, and \begin{Declaration} \Macro{appendixmore} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{appendixmore}% -There is a peculiarity within the \Macro{appendix} command in the -{\KOMAScript} classes. If the command \Macro{appendixmore} is defined, this -command is executed also by the \Macro{appendix} command. Internally the -{\KOMAScript} classes \Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}} and \Class{scrreprt} take advantage of this behaviour to -implement the options \Option{appendixprefix} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix}). You\textnote{Attention!} -should take note of this in case you decide to define or redefine the macro +There is a peculiarity within the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix} command in +the {\KOMAScript} classes. If the command \Macro{appendixmore} is defined, +this command is executed also by the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix} +command. Internally the {\KOMAScript} classes +\Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} and +\Class{scrreprt} take advantage of this behaviour to implement the options +\DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}). You\textnote{Attention!} should +take note of this in case you decide to define or redefine the macro \Macro{appendixmore}. In case one of this option has been used, you will receive an error message when using \verb|\newcommand{\appendixmore}{|\dots\verb|}|. This behaviour is intended to @@ -1511,12 +1459,12 @@ prevent you from disabling options without noticing it. \begin{Example} You do not want the chapters in the main part of the classes \Class{scrbook} or \Class{scrreprt} to be introduced by a prefix line (see layout options - \Option{chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}). For consistency you also + \DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}). For consistency you also do not want such a line in the appendix either. Instead, you would like to see the word ``Chapter'' in the language of your choice written in front of the chapter letter and, simultaneously, in the page headings. Instead of - using layout option \Option{appendixprefix}, you would define in the + using layout option \DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}, you would define in the document preamble: % \begin{lstcode} @@ -1529,10 +1477,10 @@ prevent you from disabling options without noticing it. \end{lstcode} % In case you subsequently change your mind and decide to use the option - \Option{appendixprefix} at a later stage, you will get an error message - because of the already defined \Macro{appendixmore} command. This behaviour - prevents the definition made above from invisibly changing the settings - intended with the option. + \DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix} at a later stage, you will get an + error message because of the already defined \Macro{appendixmore} command. + This behaviour prevents the definition made above from invisibly changing + the settings intended with the option. It is also possible to get a similar behaviour of the appendix for the class \Class{scrartcl}. You can write in the preamble of your @@ -1547,11 +1495,11 @@ prevent you from disabling options without noticing it. Redefined commands are explained in more detail in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat} and - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}. + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapterformat} and + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{appendixmore}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Literaturverzeichnis} @@ -1559,17 +1507,12 @@ prevent you from disabling options without noticing it. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{newbibstyle}\OParameter{parent style}\Parameter{name}%^^A - \Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{newblock}\\ - \Macro{@openbib@code}\\ - \Macro{bib@beginhook}\\ + \Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{newblock}% + \Macro{@openbib@code}% + \Macro{bib@beginhook}% \Macro{bib@endhook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newbibstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newblock}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@openbib@code}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bib@beginhook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bib@endhook}% The standard classes\textnote{standard classes} already provide command \Macro{newblock} for structuring of bibliography entries. The exact purpose of this command depends on the class options. Using option @@ -1587,9 +1530,10 @@ bibliography style \PValue{openstyle} is defined using \Macro{newbibstyle}. The \PName{instructions}, that has been defined as part of the implementation, contain the appropriate redefinition of \Macro{@openbib@code} and \Macro{newblock}. Now, if this bibliography style -will be selected using option \OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}% +will be selected using option +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}% -\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}}, then the +\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}}, then the \PName{instructions} will be executed immediately. This will redefine \Macro{@openbib@code} and \Macro{newblock}. @@ -1599,11 +1543,12 @@ style. Command \Macro{bib@beginhook} will be executed immediately after heading and preamble of the bibliography, but before the begin of the list with the bibliography entries. Command \Macro{bib@endhook} will be executed immediately after this list at the end of the bibliography. If -\Macro{BreakBibliography} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.bibliography}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}) intercepts the bibliography, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} (see +\autoref{sec:maincls.bibliography}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}) intercepts the bibliography, these commands will also executed at the begin and end of each part of the bibliography, this would be immediately before and after -\Macro{BreakBibliography}. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}. The commands \Macro{newblock}, \Macro{@openbib@code}, \Macro{bib@beginhook}, and \Macro{bib@endhook} will be reset to an empty definition at the start of @@ -1615,23 +1560,23 @@ executed. Because of this these commands has to be defined using not \Macro{newcommand} inside of argument \PName{instructions}. If the user declares additional \PName{instructions} using -\Macro{AtEndBibliography}%\important[i]{\Macro{AtEndBibliography}\\ -% \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt bloeder Weise nicht! +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}%\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}\\ +% \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt bloeder Weise nicht! \IndexCmd{AtEndBibliography} and -\Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} to be -executed after the preamble or at the end of the bibliography, the -\PName{instructions} of \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble} will be executed -only once at the begin of the bibliography but after the \Macro{bib@beginhook} -\PName{instructions}, and the \PName{instructions} of -\Macro{AtEndBibliography} will be executed only once at the end of the -bibliography but before \Macro{bib@endhook}. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} +to be executed after the preamble or at the end of the bibliography, the +\PName{instructions} of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble} will +be executed only once at the begin of the bibliography but after the +\Macro{bib@beginhook} \PName{instructions}, and the \PName{instructions} of +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography} will be executed only once at the end +of the bibliography but before \Macro{bib@endhook}. Package\textnote{Example!} \Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol}\important{\Package{multicol}} (see \cite{package:multicol}) could be used to define a bibliography style for printing the bibliography with two columns: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \newbibstyle{twocolumstyle}{% \renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}% \renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}% @@ -1639,25 +1584,23 @@ printing the bibliography with two columns: If also an \emph{open}-variation of this style should be defined, one may use the provided heredity feature and specify a \PName{parent style}: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \newbibstyle{twocolumopenstyle}[openstyle]{% \renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}% \renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}% \end{lstcode} -These new defined styles may be selected using option \Option{bibliography} -as usual.% +These new defined styles may be selected using option +\DescRef{maincls.option.bibliography} as usual.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bib@endhook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bib@beginhook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@openbib@code}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newblock}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newbibstyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{More or Less Obsolete Options and Commands} \seclabel{obsolete} \LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{4} +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex index 3ba49ba03e6..29897377100 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrbookreportarticle.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbookreportarticle.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbookreportarticle.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,17 +46,18 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle.tex} - [$Date: 2016-04-07 10:29:28 +0200 (Thu, 07 Apr 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl)] \translator{Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm\and Krickette Murabayashi\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne} -% Date of translated german file: 2016-04-07 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{The Main Classes: \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl}} \labelbase{maincls} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}% \BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt}% \BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl}% @@ -79,13 +80,13 @@ different from the three main classes (see \autoref{cha:scrlttr2}). ``\texttt{scr}'' and the abbreviated name of the corresponding standard class. In order to restrict the length of the names to eight letters, the vowels, starting with the last one, are left off as necessary. The - \autoref{tab:maincls.overview} shows an overview of the correspondence + \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.overview} shows an overview of the correspondence between the standard classes and the {\KOMAScript} classes. \fi The simplest way to use a {\KOMAScript} class instead of a standard one is to substitute the class name in the \verb|\documentclass| command according to -\autoref{tab:maincls.overview}. For example, you may replace +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.overview}. For example, you may replace \Macro{documentclass}\PParameter{book} by \Macro{documentclass}\PParameter{scrbook}. Normally, the document should be processed without errors by {\LaTeX}, just like before the substitution. The @@ -99,7 +100,7 @@ sections. \setcapindent{0pt} % \caption \begin{captionbeside} - [Class correspondence]{\label{tab:maincls.overview}Correspondence between + [Class correspondence]{\label{tab:\LabelBase.overview}Correspondence between standard classes and {\KOMAScript} classes}% and \Script{} styles.} [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} @@ -128,20 +129,18 @@ on this work. When that is done, you can concentrate on the fine points of presentation. Besides the choice of options, this means correcting hyphenation, optimizing page breaks, and the placement of tables and figures. -\LoadCommon{0}% \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} -\LoadCommon{1}% \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of KOMA-Script} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of KOMA-Script} -\LoadCommon{2}% \section{Draft Mode} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode}% \section{Draft Mode} -\LoadCommon{3}% \section{Page Layout} +\LoadCommonFile{typearea}% \section{Page Layout} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{flushbottom}\\ + \Macro{flushbottom}% \Macro{raggedbottom} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedbottom}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{flushbottom}% \begin{Explain} In double-sided documents, it's preferred to have the same visual baseline in not only the first lines of the text areas in a double-side spread, but @@ -157,16 +156,16 @@ hyphenation, optimizing page breaks, and the placement of tables and figures. Using double-sided typesetting with option \Option{twoside}\IndexOption{twoside}\important{\Option{twoside}} (see -\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twoside}) or +\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, \DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside}) or two-column typesetting with option \Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn}\important{\Option{twocolumn}} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twocolumn}) switches on vertical adjustment +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twocolumn}) switches on vertical adjustment also. But\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} with compatibility selection to a \KOMAScript{} version -prior to 3.17 (see \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}, option -\Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValue{version}{3.17}}) -this is not the case, if you use \Macro{KOMAoption} or \Macro{KOMAoptions} to +prior to 3.17 (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.17}}) +this is not the case, if you use \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} to change the setting of these options. Alternatively, vertical adjustment may be switched on @@ -180,32 +179,23 @@ vertical adjustment. This has been done to move footnotes to the bottom of the text area instead of having them close to the last used text line.\iffree{}{ More information about this may be found at \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.footnoterule}.}% + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.footnoterule}.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{flushbottom}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedbottom}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{page>layout} +\EndIndexGroup -\section{Selection of the Document Font Size} -\LoadCommon{4} -The default at \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} is -\OptionValue{fontsize}{11pt}.\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes} In -contrast, the default of the standard classes would be \Option{10pt}. You -may attend to this if you switch from a standard class to a \KOMAScript{} -class.% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{size}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{font>size} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} + -\LoadCommon{5}% \section{Text Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Text Markup} -\LoadCommon{14} %\section{Document Titles} +\LoadCommonFile{titles}% \section{Document Titles} \section{Abstract} \seclabel{abstract} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{summary}% \BeginIndex{}{abstract}% @@ -216,12 +206,11 @@ title, this summary is normally a kind of left- and right-indented block. In contrast to this, a kind of chapter or section is printed using title pages. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{abstract}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{abstract}{simple switch} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{abstract~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% -In\OnlyAt{\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} the standard classes the -\Environment{abstract} environment sets the text ``\abstractname'' centered +In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% +\OnlyAt{\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} the standard classes the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract} environment sets the text ``\abstractname'' centered before the summary text\Index[indexmain]{summary}. This was normal practice in the past. In the meantime, newspaper reading has trained readers to recognize a displayed text at the beginning of an article or report as the @@ -235,69 +224,66 @@ abstract's title with the options \Option{abstract}. For \PName{simple Books typically use another type of summary. In that case there is usually a dedicated summary chapter at the beginning or end of the book. This chapter is often combined with the introduction or a description of wider -prospects. Therefore, the class \Class{scrbook} has no \Environment{abstract} +prospects. Therefore, the class \Class{scrbook} has no \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract} environment. A\textnote{Hint!} summary chapter is also recommended for reports in a wider sense, like a Master's or Ph.D. thesis.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{abstract~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{abstract}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{abstract} + \begin{Environment}{abstract}\end{Environment} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{abstract}% \OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% Some {\LaTeX} classes offer a special environment for this summary, the \Environment{abstract} environment. This is output directly, as it is not a -component of the titles set by \Macro{maketitle}. Please\textnote{Attention!} -note that \Environment{abstract} is an environment, not a command. Whether the -summary has a heading or not is determined by the option \Option{abstract} -(see above). +component of the titles set by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle}. +Please\textnote{Attention!} note that \Environment{abstract} is an +environment, not a command. Whether the summary has a heading or not is +determined by the option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract} (see above). With books (\Class{scrbook}) the summary is frequently a component of the introduction or a separate chapter at the end of the document. Therefore no \Environment{abstract} environment is provided. When using the class \Class{scrreprt} it is surely worth considering whether one should not proceed -likewise. See commands \Macro{chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*} and -\Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} or \Macro{addchap*} at -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure} from \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*} +likewise. See commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} at +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure} from \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} onwards. -When using an in-page title\Index{title>in-page} (see option \Option{titlepage}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.titlepage}), -the abstract is set using the environment -\Environment{quotation}\IndexEnv{quotation} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.env.quotation}) internally. Thereby paragraphs will -be set with indentation of the first line. If that first paragraph of the -abstract should not be indented, this indent may be disabled using +When using an in-page title\Index{title>in-page} (see option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage}, \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.titlepage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage}), the abstract is set using the +environment \Environment{quotation}\IndexEnv{quotation} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lists}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.quotation}) +internally. Thereby paragraphs will be set with indentation of the first +line. If that first paragraph of the abstract should not be indented, this +indent may be disabled using \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent}\important{\Macro{noindent}} \iffree{just after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{abstract}}{at the begin of the environment}.% % -\EndIndex{Env}{abstract}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{summary}% -\EndIndex{}{abstract} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Table of Contents} \seclabel{toc} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{table of contents} The table of contents is normally set after the document title and an optional existing abstract. Often one may find additional lists of floating environments, e.\,g., the list of tables and the list of figures, after the table of contents (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}). +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}). \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{toc}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{toc}{selection} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{toc~=\PName{selection}}% -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.listof}% -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.nolistof}% -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.listofnumbered}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.listof}% +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.nolistof}% +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.listofnumbered}\nobreak It is becoming increasingly common to find entries in the table of contents for the lists of tables and figures, for the bibliography, and, sometimes, even for the index. This is surely also related to the recent trend of putting @@ -319,7 +305,7 @@ one wants to ignore this general agreement, one may use \PName{selection} \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listofnumbered}}. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.index}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.index}\nobreak The\important{\OptionValue{toc}{index}} option \OptionValue{index}{totoc} causes an entry for the index to be included in the table of contents. The index is unnumbered since it too only includes references to the contents of @@ -327,10 +313,10 @@ the other sectional units. Despite\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \important{\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}}objection of the author, \KOMAScript{} does also support to ignore this general agreement using -\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}. +\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{indexnumbered}}. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.bibliography}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.bibliography}\nobreak The bibliography is a different kind of listing. It does not list the contents of the present document but refers instead to external documents. For\important{\begin{tabular}{@{}r@{}} @@ -349,7 +335,7 @@ an unnumbered entry in the table of contents, and that can be achieved with \OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{bibliography}}. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.graduated}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.graduated}\nobreak The table of contents is normally\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% \important{\OptionValue{toc}{graduated}} set up so that different sectional @@ -359,7 +345,7 @@ a fixed-width field. This default setup is selected with the option \OptionValue{toc}{graduated}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{graduated}}. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.toc.flat}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.toc.flat}\nobreak When there are many sections, the corresponding numbering tends to become very wide, so that the reserved field overflows. The German FAQ \cite{DANTE:FAQ} suggests that the table of contents should be redefined in such a @@ -371,13 +357,13 @@ used, where all unit numbers and titles, respectively, are set in a left-justified column. The space necessary for the unit numbers is thus determined automatically.% -The \autoref{tab:maincls.toc} shows an overview of possible values for +The \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.toc} shows an overview of possible values for \PName{selection} of \Option{toc}. \begin{desclist} \desccaption[{Possible values of option \Option{toc}}]{% Possible values of option \Option{toc} to set form and contents of the - table of contents\label{tab:maincls.toc}% + table of contents\label{tab:\LabelBase.toc}% }{% Possible values of option \Option{toc} (\emph{continuation})% }% @@ -456,15 +442,13 @@ The \autoref{tab:maincls.toc} shows an overview of possible values for \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{sectionentrywithoutdots}}}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{toc~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{chapterentrydots}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{sectionentrydots}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{chapterentrydots}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{sectionentrydots}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapterentrydots~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{sectionentrydots~=\PName{simple switch}}% These\ChangedAt[2014/12]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} options configure a dotted separation line between the text and the page number of the chapter entries of classes \Class{scrbook} and @@ -475,72 +459,78 @@ table of contents. For \PName{simple switch}, any value from used. The default is \PValue{false}. It selects an empty gap instead of dots. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrydots}\LabelFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrydots}\LabelFontElement{sectionentrydots}% If a dotted line is selected, you can change their font using element -\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +\FontElement{chapterentrydots}% \important[i]{\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\\ - \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} or -\FontElement{sectionentrydots}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots}. The font + \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} or \FontElement{sectionentrydots}. The font also depends on the element of the page number of the entry (see also -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -and \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). The defaults of the elements -are shown in \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements}. Please -note\textnote{Attention!} that the dots of all entries are equally aligned -only if all dots use the same font.% -\EndIndex{Option}{sectionentrydots~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapterentrydots~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} +and \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). The defaults of the elements are +shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.tocelements}. Please note\textnote{Attention!} +that the dots of all entries are equally aligned only if all dots use the same +font.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tableofcontents} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tableofcontents}% The production of the table of contents is done by the \Macro{tableofcontents} command. To get a correct table of contents, at least two {\LaTeX} runs are necessary after every change. The contents and the form of the table of -contents may be influenced with the above described option \Option{toc}. After +contents may be influenced with the above described option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}. After changing the settings of this option, at least two \LaTeX{} runs are needed again. -The entry for the highest sectional unit below \Macro{part}, i.\,e., -\Macro{chapter} with \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} and -\Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} or \Macro{section} with -\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass {scrartcl} is not indented. There are no dots -between the text of the sectional unit heading and the page number. The -typographic reasons for this are that the font is usually different, and the -desire for appropriate emphasis. The table of contents of this manual is a -good example of these considerations. The font -style\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and +The entry for the highest sectional unit below \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, +i.\,e., \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} with +\Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} +or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section} with \Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass +{scrartcl} is not indented. There are no dots between the text of the +sectional unit heading and the page number. The typographic reasons for this +are that the font is usually different, and the desire for appropriate +emphasis. The table of contents of this manual is a good example of these +considerations. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partentry}\LabelFontElement{partentry}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentry}\LabelFontElement{chapterentry}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentry}\LabelFontElement{sectionentry}% +The font style\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}\important[i]{\FontElement{partentry}\\ \FontElement{chapterentry}\\ \FontElement{sectionentry}} is, however, affected by the settings of the -element \FontElement{partentry}\IndexFontElement{partentry}, and for classes -\Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} by -\FontElement{chapterentry}\IndexFontElement{chapterentry}, and for class -\Class{scrartcl} by -\FontElement{sectionentry}\IndexFontElement{sectionentry}. The font style of -the page numbers may be set dissenting from these elements using -\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{partentrypagenumber} and -\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrypagenumber} -respectively -\FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} -(see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}, and -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). If the optional dots of the -entries of \Macro{chapter} or \Macro{section} are used, you can change their -font using element -\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +element \FontElement{partentry}, and for classes \Class{scrbook} and +\Class{scrreprt} by \FontElement{chapterentry}, and for class \Class{scrartcl} +by \FontElement{sectionentry}. % +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{partentrypagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}% +The font style of the page numbers may be set dissenting from these elements +using \FontElement{partentrypagenumber} and +\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber} respectively +\FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, and +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). % +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrydots}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrydots}% +If the optional dots of the entries of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section} are used, you can change their font using +element \FontElement{chapterentrydots}% \important[i]{\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\\ - \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} or -\FontElement{sectionentrydots}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots}. The font + \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} or \FontElement{sectionentrydots}. The font also depends on the element of the page number of the entry (see also -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -and \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). The defaults of the elements -are shown in \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements}. Please -note\textnote{Attention!} that the dots of all entries are aligned same only -if all dots use the same font.% +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} +and \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). The defaults of the elements are +shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.tocelements}. Please note\textnote{Attention!} +that the dots of all entries are aligned same only if all dots use the same +font.% \begin{table} % \centering % \caption @@ -548,7 +538,7 @@ if all dots use the same font.% \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside} [Font style defaults of the elements of the table of contents] - {\label{tab:maincls.tocelements}% + {\label{tab:\LabelBase.tocelements}% Font style defaults of the elements of the table of contents}% [l] \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.9\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung! @@ -556,46 +546,47 @@ if all dots use the same font.% \toprule Element & Default font style \\ \midrule - \FontElement{partentry} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\Macro{large} \\ - \FontElement{partentrypagenumber} & \\ - \FontElement{chapterentry} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ - \FontElement{chapterentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ - \FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber} & \\ - \FontElement{sectionentry} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ - \FontElement{sectionentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ - \FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} & \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.partentry} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\Macro{large} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.partentrypagenumber} & \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentry} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrypagenumber} & \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentry} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrypagenumber} & \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tableofcontents}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Counter{tocdepth} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{tocdepth}% Normally, the units included in the table of contents are all the units from -\Macro{part} to \Macro{subsection} for the classes \Class{scrbook} and -\Class{scrreprt} or from \Macro{part} to \Macro{subsubsection} for the class +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection} for the classes \Class{scrbook} and +\Class{scrreprt} or from \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} for the class \Class{scrartcl}. The inclusion of a sectional unit in the table of contents is controlled by the counter \Counter{tocdepth}. This has the value \(-\)1 for -\Macro{part}, 0 for \Macro{chapter}, and so on. By incrementing +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, 0 for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, and so on. By incrementing or decrementing the counter, one can choose the lowest sectional unit level to be included in the table of contents. The same happens with the standard classes. -Please note\textnote{Attention!} that for \Macro{part} the values of -\Counter{tocdepth} and \Counter{secnumdepth}\IndexCounter{secnumdepth} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth}) are not the same in +Please note\textnote{Attention!} that for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} the +values of \Counter{tocdepth} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}\IndexCounter{secnumdepth} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}) are not the same in \Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}}. Therefore, you should not use -\Macro{partnumdepth}\IndexCmd{partnumdepth} to set the value of -\Counter{tocdepth}.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partnumdepth}\IndexCmd{partnumdepth} to set the value +of \Counter{tocdepth}.% \begin{Example} Assume that you are preparing an article that uses the sectional - unit \Macro{subsubsection}. However, you do not want this sectional + unit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}. However, you do not want this sectional unit to appear in the table of contents. The preamble of your document might contain the following: \begin{lstcode} @@ -603,9 +594,9 @@ Please note\textnote{Attention!} that for \Macro{part} the values of \setcounter{tocdepth}{2} \end{lstcode} You set the counter \Counter{tocdepth} to 2 because you know that - this is the value for \Macro{subsection}. If you know that + this is the value for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection}. If you know that \Class{scrartcl} normally includes all levels down to - \Macro{subsubsection} in the table of contents, you can simply + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} in the table of contents, you can simply decrement the counter \Counter{tocdepth} by one: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{scrartcl} @@ -621,29 +612,28 @@ units required extra or less and then, as in the above example, use \Macro{addtocounter} to add or subtract that number to or from \Counter{tocdepth}.% % -\EndIndex{Counter}{tocdepth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{table of contents} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{6}% \section{Paragraph Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{parmarkup}% \section{Paragraph Markup} -\LoadCommon{7}% \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} \section{Head and Foot Using Predefined Page Styles} \seclabel{pagestyle} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{page>style} One of the general characteristics of a document is the page style. In {\LaTeX} this means mostly the contents of headers and footers. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{headsepline}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{footsepline}{simple switch} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} order to have or not to have a rule separating the header from the text body, use the option \Option{headsepline} with any value shown in @@ -659,29 +649,28 @@ has the effect of visually bringing header and text body closer together. That does not mean that the header must now be moved farther from the text body. Instead, the header should be considered as belonging to the text body for the purpose of page layout calculations. {\KOMAScript} takes this into -account by automatically passing the option \Option{headinclude} to the -\Package{typearea} package whenever the \Option{headsepline} option is -used. \KOMAScript{} behaves similar to \Option{footinclude} using +account by automatically passing the option +\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude} to the \Package{typearea} package +whenever the \Option{headsepline} option is used. \KOMAScript{} behaves +similar to \DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude} using \Option{footsepline}. Package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) adds additional features to this.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{page style}\\ + \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{page style}% \Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{local page style} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% Usually one distinguishes four different page styles: \begin{description} -\item[empty\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}] is the page +\item[empty\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}\LabelPageStyle{empty}] is the page style with entirely empty headers and footers. In {\KOMAScript} this is completely identical to the standard classes. -\item[headings\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}] is the page style with running - headings in the header. These are headings for which titles are - automatically inserted into the header. +\item[headings\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}\LabelPageStyle{headings}] is + the page style with running headings in the header. These are headings for + which titles are automatically inserted into the header. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}}With the classes \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} the titles of chapters and sections @@ -705,32 +694,34 @@ Usually one distinguishes four different page styles: standard classes do not take these points into consideration. Beyond this {\KOMAScript} classes support rules below the head and above the - foot using options \Option{headsepline} and \Option{footsepline} which are - described above. -\item[myheadings\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}] corresponds mostly to the - page style \PValue{headings}, but the running headings are not automatically - produced\,---\,they have to be defined by the user. The commands \Macro - {markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} can - be used for that purpose (see below). -\item[plain\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}] is the page style with empty header - and only a page number in the footer. With the standard classes this page - number is always centered in the footer. With {\KOMAScript} the page number - appears on double-sided\Index {double-sided} layout on the outer side of the - footer. The one-sided page style behaves like the standard setup. + foot using options \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} which are described above. +\item[myheadings\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}\LabelPageStyle{myheadings}] + corresponds mostly to the page style \PValue{headings}, but the running + headings are not automatically produced\,---\,they have to be defined by the + user. The commands \Macro {markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} can be used for that + purpose (see below). +\item[plain\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}\LabelPageStyle{plain}] is the page + style with empty header and only a page number in the footer. With the + standard classes this page number is always centered in the footer. With + {\KOMAScript} the page number appears on double-sided\Index {double-sided} + layout on the outer side of the footer. The one-sided page style behaves + like the standard setup. \end{description} The page style can be set at any time with the help of the \Macro{pagestyle} command and takes effect with the next page that is output. If\textnote{Hint!} -one uses \Macro{pagestyle} just before a command, that results in an -implicit page break and if the new page style should be used at the resulting -new page first, a \Macro{cleardoublepage} just before \Macro{pagestyle} will -be useful. But usually one sets the page style only once at the beginning of -the document or in the preamble. +one uses \Macro{pagestyle} just before a command, that results in an implicit +page break and if the new page style should be used at the resulting new page +first, a \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} just before +\Macro{pagestyle} will be useful. But usually one sets the page style only +once at the beginning of the document or in the preamble. To\important{\Macro{thispagestyle}} change the page style of the current page only, one uses the \Macro{thispagestyle} command. This also happens automatically at some places in the document. For example, the instruction -\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{\Macro{chapterpagestyle}} is issued +\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle}} is issued implicitly on the first page of a chapter. Please\textnote{Attention!} note that the change between automatic and manual @@ -739,32 +730,30 @@ running headings is no longer performed by page style changes when using the page styles \PValue{headings} and \PValue{myheadings} should not be used together with this package.% % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% Darueber erfahren wir nun nichts mehr +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% In order to change the font style used in the header, footer, or for the page number\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% -, please use the interface described in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}. The same element is used for -header and footer, which you can designate with -\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}% -\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}. The element for the page number within -the header or footer is called -\FontElement{pagenumber}\IndexFontElement{pagenumber}% -\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. The element -\FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}, that is additionally -supported by the \KOMAScript{} classes, will be used only if a page style has -been defined that has text at the foot line, using package +, please use the interface described in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}. The same element is used for header +and footer, which you can designate with +\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}}. The element +for the page number within the header or footer is called +\FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. The element +\FontElement{pagefoot}, that is additionally supported by the \KOMAScript{} +classes, will be used only if a page style has been defined that has text at +the foot line, using package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). The default settings can be found in -\autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}.% +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.defaultFontsHeadFoot}.% % \begin{table} % \centering% @@ -773,18 +762,18 @@ The default settings can be found in % \caption \begin{captionbeside} [{Default values for the elements of a page style}] - {\label{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}% + {\label{tab:\LabelBase.defaultFontsHeadFoot}% Default values for the elements of a page style} [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} \toprule Element & Default value \\ \midrule - \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} & \\ - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoothead} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoothead} & \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape} \\ - \FontElement{pagenumber}\IndexFontElement{pagenumber} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}\IndexFontElement{pagenumber} & \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} @@ -792,7 +781,7 @@ The default settings can be found in \end{table} % \begin{Example} - \leavevmode\phantomsection\exlabel{pagestyle}% + \leavevmode\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.pagestyle}% Assume that you want to set header and footer in a smaller type size and in italics. However, the page number should not be set in italics but bold. Apart from the fact that the result will look @@ -811,17 +800,18 @@ The default settings can be found in As you can see, the last example uses the element \FontElement{pagehead}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}. You can achieve the same result using \PValue{pageheadfoot} instead (see - \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText} on - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). + \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements} on + \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). \end{Example} It is not possible to use these methods to force capitals to be used automatically for the running headings. For that, please use the \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} package (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase}). +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase}). If you define your own page styles, the commands -\Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pageheadfoot}, \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter -{pagenumber}, and \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagefoot} can be useful. If +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pageheadfoot}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter {pagenumber}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pagefoot} can be useful. If you do not use the {\KOMAScript} package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) for that, but, for example, the package \Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr} (see \cite{package:fancyhdr}), you @@ -832,59 +822,52 @@ no effect. The package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} takes care to keep the maximum possible compatibility with other packages itself. % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark}\\ + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark}% \Macro{markright}\Parameter{right mark} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -With page style \Pagestyle{myheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{myheadings}}% +\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% +\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% +With page style \PageStyle{myheadings}\important{\PageStyle{myheadings}}% \IndexPagestyle{myheadings}, there's no automatic setting of the running head. Instead of this one would set it with the help of commands \Macro{markboth} and \Macro{markright}. Thereby \PName{left mark} normally will be used at the head of even pages and \PName{right mark} at the heads of odd pages. With one-sided printing, only the \PName{right mark} exists. Using package -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}, -the additional command -\Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\Macro{markleft}} exists. +\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}, the +additional command \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}% +\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}} exists. The commands may be used with other page styles too. Combination with automatic -running head, e.\,g., with page style \Pagestyle{headings}, limits the effect +running head, e.\,g., with page style \PageStyle{headings}, limits the effect of the commands until the next automatic setting of the corresponding marks.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{titlepagestyle}\\ - \Macro{partpagestyle}\\ - \Macro{chapterpagestyle}\\ + \Macro{titlepagestyle}% + \Macro{partpagestyle}% + \Macro{chapterpagestyle}% \Macro{indexpagestyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}\Index{title>page style}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partpagestyle}\Index{part>page style}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterpagestyle}\Index{chapter>page style}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{indexpagestyle}\Index{index>page style}% -For some pages, a different page style is chosen with the help of the -command \Macro{thispagestyle}. Which page style this actually is, is +\Index{title>page style}% +\Index{part>page style}% +\Index{chapter>page style}% +\Index{index>page style}% +For some pages, a different page style is chosen with the help of the command +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle}. Which page style this actually is, is defined by these four macros, of which \Macro{partpagestyle} and -\Macro{chapterpagestyle}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} -are found only with classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}, but -not in \Class{scrartcl}. The default value for all four cases is -\PValue{plain}. The meaning of these macros can be taken from -\autoref{tab:specialpagestyles}. +\Macro{chapterpagestyle}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} are found +only with classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}, but not in +\Class{scrartcl}. The default value for all four cases is \PValue{plain}. The +meaning of these macros can be taken from \autoref{tab:specialpagestyles}. % \begin{table} \centering @@ -893,7 +876,7 @@ not in \Class{scrartcl}. The default value for all four cases is \begin{desctabular} \mentry{titlepagestyle}{Page style for a title page when using \emph{in-page} titles.}% - \mentry{partpagestyle}{Page style for the pages with \Macro{part} + \mentry{partpagestyle}{Page style for the pages with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} titles.}% \mentry{chapterpagestyle}{Page style for the first page of a chapter.}% \mentry{indexpagestyle}{Page style for the first page of the index.}% @@ -902,13 +885,13 @@ not in \Class{scrartcl}. The default value for all four cases is % The page styles can be redefined with the \Macro{renewcommand} macro. \begin{Example} - Assume that you want the pages with a \Macro{part} heading to have + Assume that you want the pages with a \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} heading to have no number. Then you can use the following command, for example in the preamble of your document: \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\partpagestyle}{empty} \end{lstcode} - As mentioned previously on \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.empty}, + As mentioned previously on \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty}, the page style \PValue{empty} is exactly what is required in this example. Naturally you can also use a user-defined page style. @@ -961,18 +944,15 @@ The page styles can be redefined with the \Macro{renewcommand} macro. \end{lstcode} should read more about the background of \Macro{rightmark} at \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark}. + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark}. \end{Explain} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{indexpagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{pagenumbering}\Parameter{numbering style} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagenumbering}% This command works the same way in {\KOMAScript} as in the standard classes. More precisely it is a feature neither of the standard classes nor of the \KOMAScript{} classes but of the {\LaTeX} kernel. You can specify with @@ -980,7 +960,7 @@ this command the \PName{numbering style} of page numbers. The changes take effect immediately, hence starting with the page that contains the command. It is recommended to use -\Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} to close the last page and start a new odd page +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} to close the last page and start a new odd page before. The possible settings can be found in \autoref{tab:numberKind}. @@ -1011,18 +991,19 @@ the next page which {\TeX} outputs will have the number 1 in the style \end{captionbeside} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagenumbering}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{page>style} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{8}% \section{Interleaf Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Interleaf Pages} + +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Footnotes} -\LoadCommon{9}% \section{Footnotes} \section[Demarcation]{Demarcation\protect\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}}} \seclabel{separation} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{front matter}% \BeginIndex{}{main matter}% \BeginIndex{}{back matter}% @@ -1034,13 +1015,10 @@ Sometimes books are roughly separated into front matter, main matter, and back matter. \KOMAScript{} provides this for \Class{scrbook} also. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{frontmatter}\\ - \Macro{mainmatter}\\ + \Macro{frontmatter}% + \Macro{mainmatter}% \Macro{backmatter} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{frontmatter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{mainmatter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{backmatter}% The macro \Macro{frontmatter}\important{\Macro{frontmatter}} introduces the front matter in which roman numerals are used for the page numbers. Chapter headings in a front matter are not numbered. The section titles which would be @@ -1056,25 +1034,25 @@ need for a deeper structuring than the chapter level. In case the user sees things differently and wishes to use numbered sections\Index{section>number} in the chapters of the front matter, as of version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}% -\important{\OptionValue{version}{2.97e}} the section numbering no longer -contains the chapter number. This change only takes effect when the +\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.97e}} the section numbering +no longer contains the chapter number. This change only takes effect when the compatibility option is set to at least version~2.97e (see option -\Option{version}, \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). It is explicity noted that this -creates a confusion with chapter numbers! The use of \Macro{addsec} and -\Macro{section*} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.section*} and -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addsec}) are thus, in the author's opinion, far -more preferable. - -As of version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}} the numbering -of float environments, such as tables\Index{table>number} and -figures\Index{figure>number}, and equation -numbers\Index{equation>number} in the front matter also contain no -chapter number part. To take effect this too requires the -corresponding compatibility setting (see option \Option{version}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). It is explicity noted that this +creates a confusion with chapter numbers! The use of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} and \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}) +are thus, in the author's opinion, far more preferable. + +As of version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}} the numbering of float +environments, such as tables\Index{table>number} and +figures\Index{figure>number}, and equation numbers\Index{equation>number} in +the front matter also contain no chapter number part. To take effect this too +requires the corresponding compatibility setting (see option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). \Macro{mainmatter}\important{\Macro{mainmatter}} introduces the main matter with the main text. If there is no front matter, then this command can be @@ -1088,19 +1066,13 @@ bibliography\Index{bibliography}, in some cases only the index\Index{index}, and in other cases both of these as well as the appendices. The chapters in the back matter are similar to the chapters in the front matter, but page numbering is not reset. If you do require separate page numbering you may use -the command \Macro{pagenumbering} from \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering}. +the command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering} from +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{frontmatter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{mainmatter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{backmatter}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{front matter}% -\EndIndex{}{main matter}% -\EndIndex{}{back matter}% -\EndIndex{}{matter>front}% -\EndIndex{}{matter>main}% -\EndIndex{}{matter>back}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Structuring of Documents} @@ -1110,9 +1082,8 @@ Structuring of documents means to divide them into parts, chapters, sections, and several other structural elements. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{open}\PName{method} + \OptionVName{open}{method} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{open~=\PName{method}}% \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}}% \KOMAScript{} classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} give you the choice of where to start\Index{chapter>start} a new chapter with double-sided @@ -1124,11 +1095,11 @@ start at the left-hand page of a double-page spread. This would be accomplished with \PName{method} \PValue{left}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}. An overview of the supported methods may be found at -\autoref{tab:maincls.open}. The table also describes the effect on -\Macro{cleardoublepage}, \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, -\Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, and -\Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage}). +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.open}. The table also describes the effect on +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.emptypage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}). \begin{table} \caption[{Available values for option \Option{open}}]{Available values for @@ -1136,29 +1107,40 @@ overview of the supported methods may be found at \Class{scrbook} or \Class{scrreprt}} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{any}{% - Parts, chapter, index, and back matter use \Macro{clearpage} instead of - \Macro{cleardoublepage};% - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and - \Macro{cleardoublepage} behaves same like using + Parts, chapter, index, and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} instead of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage};% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} behaves same like using \OptionValue{open}{right}.% \IndexOption{open~=\PValue{any}}}% \pventry{left}{% - Part, chapter, index and back matter use \Macro{cleardoublepage};% - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and - \Macro{cleardoublepage} result in a page break and add an interleaf - page\Index{page>interleaf} if needed to reach the next left-hand page.% + Part, chapter, index and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage};% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} result in a page break and add + an interleaf page\Index{page>interleaf} if needed to reach the next + left-hand page.% \IndexOption{open~=\PValue{left}}}% \pventry{right}{% - Part, chapter, index and back matter use \Macro{cleardoublepage};% - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and - \Macro{cleardoublepage} result in a page break and add an interleaf - page\Index{page>interleaf} if needed to reach the next right-hand page.% + Part, chapter, index and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage};% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} result in a page break and add + an interleaf page\Index{page>interleaf} if needed to reach the next + right-hand page.% \IndexOption{open~=\PValue{right}}}% \end{desctabular} - \label{tab:maincls.open} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.open} \end{table} Since \LaTeX{} does not differentiate between left-hand and right-hand pages @@ -1167,16 +1149,14 @@ in single-sided printing, the option does not have any influence in that case. In class \Class{scrartcl} the section is the first structural element below the part. Because of this, \Class{scrartcl} does not support this option. % -\EndIndex{Option}{open~=\PName{method}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{chapterprefix}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{appendixprefix}\PName{simple switch}\\ + \OptionVName{chapterprefix}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{appendixprefix}{simple switch}% \Macro{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapterprefix~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{appendixprefix~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}% With\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} the standard classes \Class{book} and \Class{report}, a chapter title\Index[indexmain]{chapter>title} consists of a line with the word @@ -1191,8 +1171,8 @@ be used as \PName{simple switch}. The default, however, is of the standard classes, which would correspond to \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true}. These options also affect the automatic -running titles in the headers (see \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.headings}). +running titles in the headers (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}). Sometimes one wishes to have the chapter titles in simplified form according to @@ -1202,7 +1182,7 @@ followed by the appendix letter. This is achieved by using the \Option{appendixprefix} option (see \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}). Since this results in an inconsistent document layout, I advise against using this option. Final consequence of -using the option is, that \Macro{appendix} changes setting of option +using the option is, that \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.appendix} changes setting of option \Option{chapterprefix}. You\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} can execute code @@ -1211,27 +1191,25 @@ depending on the current setting for the chapter preceding line using active, the \PName{then code} will be executed, otherwise the \PName{else code}. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterprefix}\LabelFontElement{chapterprefix}% The font style of the chapter number line using \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} or \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} may be changed with element -\FontElement{chapterprefix}\IndexFontElement{chapterprefix}% -\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} using commands -\Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Default is the usage of element -\FontElement{chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter}, as well as -\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}).% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}% -\EndIndex{Option}{appendixprefix~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapterprefix~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\FontElement{chapterprefix}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}} using commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Default is the usage of element +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, as well as +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont}).% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headings}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{headings}{selection} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headings~=\PName{selection}}% The font size used for the titles\index{title}\index{document structure} is relatively big, both with the standard classes and with {\KOMAScript}. Not everyone likes this choice; moreover it is especially problematic for small @@ -1246,15 +1224,17 @@ font size defined by the \OptionValue{headings}{small}\IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{small}}, that allow for smaller title font sizes. The font sizes for headings resulting from these options for \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} are shown in -\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. Respectively, the fonts of -the elements \FontElement{chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter}, -\FontElement{section}\IndexFontElement{section}, -\FontElement{subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection}, -\FontElement{subsubsection}\IndexFontElement{subsubsection}, -\FontElement{paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph}, and -\FontElement{subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} will be reset to -these default. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont}. Respectively, the fonts of +the elements \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}% +\IndexFontElement{chapter}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section}\IndexFontElement{section}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection}% +\IndexFontElement{subsubsection}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} +will be reset to these default. For \Class{scrartcl}, smaller font sizes are generally used. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -1269,40 +1249,46 @@ Chapter\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \Option{headings=}\\ \quad\PValue{twolineappendix}\end{tabular}} titles are also influenced by the options \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} and -\OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}, that are same as \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} and -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} (see above). The appendix titles are -influenced by \OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix} and +\OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}, that are same as +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true} and +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} (see above). The appendix +titles are influenced by \OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix} and \OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix}\important[i]{% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}} \Option{headings=}\\ \quad\PValue{onelineappendix} \end{tabular}}, that are the same as the options -\OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} and \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{false} -(see also above). +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} and +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} (see also above). The\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} method of beginning new chapters may be switched by \OptionValue{headings}{openany}\important[i]{% \OptionValue{headings}{openany}\\ \OptionValue{headings}{openright}\\ \OptionValue{headings}{openleft}}, \OptionValue{headings}{openright}, and -\OptionValue{headings}{openleft} alternatively to option \Option{open} with -the values \PValue{any}, +\OptionValue{headings}{openleft} alternatively to option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.open} with the values \PValue{any}, \PValue{right}, and \PValue{left} (see above). Another\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} special feature of \KOMAScript{} is the handling of the -optional argument of the structural commands \Macro{part}, \Macro{chapter}, -etc., down to \Macro{subparagraph}. Function and meaning\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} - \Option{headings=}\\\quad\PValue{optiontohead}\end{tabular}\\ +optional argument of the structural commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, +etc., down to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph}. Function and +meaning\important[i]{% + \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} + \Option{headings=}\\\quad\PValue{optiontohead} + \end{tabular}\\ \OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} - \Option{headings=}\\\quad\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}\end{tabular}} may be -influenced by the options \OptionValue{headings}{optiontohead}% + \Option{headings=}\\\quad\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc} + \end{tabular}% +} may be influenced by the options \OptionValue{headings}{optiontohead}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}}, \OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc}\IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontotoc}}, and \OptionValue{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}}. -A summary of all the available selections of option \Option{headings} may be found in \autoref{tab:maincls.headings}. Examples are at the following +A summary of all the available selections of option \Option{headings} may be +found in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.headings}. Examples are at the following description of the structural commands. \begin{desclist} @@ -1310,7 +1296,7 @@ description of the structural commands. \desccaption[{Available values for option \Option{headings}}]{% Available values for option \Option{headings} to select different kinds of structural headings% - \label{tab:maincls.headings}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.headings}% }{% Available values for option \Option{headings} (\emph{continuation})% }% @@ -1331,33 +1317,42 @@ description of the structural commands. Chapter headings will be set like other headings too.% }% \pventry{openany}{% - The commands \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and \Macro{cleardoublepage} behave same like - using \OptionValue{headings}{openright}.% - Parts, chapter, index, and back matter use \Macro{clearpage} instead of - \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + The commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} behave same like using + \OptionValue{headings}{openright}.% + Parts, chapter, index, and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} instead of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openany}}}% \pventry{openleft}{% - The commands \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and \Macro{cleardoublepage} generate a page - break and if needed insert an interleaf page to reach the next left-hand - page at double-page printing.% - Part, chapter, index and back matter use \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + The commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} generate a page break and if + needed insert an interleaf page to reach the next left-hand page at + double-page printing.% + Part, chapter, index and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openleft}}}% \pventry{openright}{% - The commands \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, and \Macro{cleardoublepage} generate a page - break and if needed insert an interleaf page to reach the next right-hand - page at double-page printing.% - Part, chapter, index and back matter use \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + The commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage}, and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} generate a page break and if + needed insert an interleaf page to reach the next right-hand page at + double-page printing.% + Part, chapter, index and back matter use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openright}}}% \pventry{optiontohead}{% The\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} advanced functionality of the optional argument of the - structural commands \Macro{part} down to \Macro{subparagraph} will be + structural commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} down to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} will be activated. By default the optional argument will be used for the running head only.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}}% @@ -1366,14 +1361,14 @@ description of the structural commands. \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}}}{% The\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} advanced functionality of the optional argument of the - structural commands \Macro{part} down to \Macro{subparagraph} will be + structural commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} down to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} will be activated. By default the optional argument will be used for the running head and the table of contents.% }% \pventry{optiontotoc}{% The\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} advanced functionality of the optional argument of the - structural commands \Macro{part} down to \Macro{subparagraph} will be + structural commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} down to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} will be activated. By default the optional argument will be used for the table of contents only.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}}% @@ -1385,22 +1380,22 @@ description of the structural commands. \PValue{appendixwithprefix}, \PValue{appendixwithprefixline}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{twolineappendix}}}{% Chapters at the appendix will be set with a number line with the contents - of \Macro{chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat}.% + of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat}.% }% \entry{\PValue{twolinechapter}, \PValue{chapterprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithprefixline}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{twolinechapter}}}{% Chapters will be set with a number line with the contents of - \Macro{chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat}.% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat}.% }% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{headings~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{numbers}{selection} + \OptionVName{numbers}{selection} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{numbers~=\PName{selection}}% \begin{Explain}% In German, according to {\small DUDEN}, the numbering of sectional units should have no period at the end if only arabic numbers are used @@ -1409,7 +1404,7 @@ description of the structural commands. end of the numbering (see \cite[R\,4]{DUDEN}). {\KOMAScript} has an internal mechanism that tries to implement this somewhat complex rule. The resulting effect is that, normally, after the sectional - commands \Macro{part} and \Macro{appendix} a switch is made to + commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.appendix} a switch is made to numbering with an ending period. The information is saved in the \File{aux} file and takes effect on the next {\LaTeX} run. \end{Explain} @@ -1432,7 +1427,7 @@ control the numbering format, a further run without changing any options should be made. The\textnote{Attention!} available values are summarized in -\autoref{tab:maincls.numbers}. Unlike most other selections, this +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.numbers}. Unlike most other selections, this option may be changed at the document preamble, before \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}, only. @@ -1440,7 +1435,7 @@ option may be changed at the document preamble, before \caption[{Available values of option \Option{numbers}}]{Available values of option \Option{numbers} for selection of the period at the end of numbers of structural headings} - \label{tab:maincls.numbers} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.numbers} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{autoendperiod}, \PValue{autoenddot}, \PValue{auto}}{% \KOMAScript{} decides, whether or not to set the period at the end of @@ -1462,27 +1457,26 @@ option may be changed at the document preamble, before \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{numbers~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Option{chapteratlists}\\ - \XOption{chapteratlists}=\PName{value} + \Option{chapteratlists}% + \OptionVName{chapteratlists}{value} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapteratlists}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapteratlists~=\PName{value}}% -As mentioned in \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and +As mentioned in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}, normally, every chapter entry generated with -\Macro{chapter} introduces vertical spacing into the lists of floats. Since +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} introduces vertical spacing into the lists of floats. Since version~2.96a\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} this -applies also for the command \Macro{addchap}, if no compatibility option to an -earlier version was chosen (see option \Option{version} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). +applies also for the command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}, if no compatibility option to an +earlier version was chosen (see option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Furthermore, now the option \Option{chapteratlists} can be used to change the spacing, by passing the desired distance as \PName{value}. The default setting -with \OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% +with \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapsmall}} % is 10\,pt. If \OptionValue{chapteratlists}{entry}% \IndexOption{chapteratlists~=\PValue{entry}}% @@ -1494,26 +1488,21 @@ there's no floating environment inside of the chapter. Please\textnote{Attention!} note that changes to the option will only become effective in the lists following two more {\LaTeX} runs.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{chapteratlists~=\PName{value}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapteratlists}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{part}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{section}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ - \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}\\ + \Macro{part}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{section}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% + \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading}% \Macro{subparagraph}\OParameter{short version}\Parameter{heading} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{part}\Index[indexmain]{part}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapter}\Index[indexmain]{chapter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{section}\Index[indexmain]{section}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraph}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph}% +\Index[indexmain]{part}% +\Index[indexmain]{chapter}% +\Index[indexmain]{section}% The standard sectioning commands in {\KOMAScript} work in a similar fashion to those of the standard classes. Thus, an alternative entry for the table of contents and running headings can be specified as an @@ -1521,22 +1510,22 @@ optional argument to the sectioning commands. In addition to this, with\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard - classes} option \important{\Option{headings}} -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontohead}% + classes} option \important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontohead}% \IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}}, \KOMAScript{} does not use the optional argument \PName{short version} at the table of contents, but for the running head only. Nevertheless, such a running head -needs an appropriate page style. See \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} and +needs an appropriate page style. See \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} and \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} about this. With option -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc}% +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc}% \IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontotoc}}, \KOMAScript{} does not use the optional argument \PName{short version} for the running head, but at the table of contents. Nevertheless, the entry will be shown only if -counter \Counter{tocdepth} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}) is great enough. With option -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}% +counter \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}) is great enough. With option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}% \IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}}, \KOMAScript{} uses the optional argument \PName{short version} in both the table of contents and running head. All these three selections will also activate the extended @@ -1548,8 +1537,8 @@ The \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and determines whether there's an equality sign in \PName{short version}. If so, the optional argument will be interpreted as \PName{option list} instead of simple \PName{short version}. Thereby the two -options \KOption{head}\PName{running head}\important{\Option{head}} and -\KOption{tocentry}\PName{table of contents entry} are supported. Commas or +options \OptionVName{head}{running head}\important{\Option{head}} and +\OptionVName{tocentry}{table of contents entry} are supported. Commas or equality signs inside of the values of those options will be accepted only if they are enclosed by braces. @@ -1604,7 +1593,7 @@ you may use an invisible entry like \lstinline|\mbox{}| instead. The recommendation of the braces in the example above will make more sense with one more example. Assume you're using option - \OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc} and now have a heading: + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc} and now have a heading: \begin{lstcode} \section[head=\emph{value}] {Option head=\emph{value}} @@ -1618,8 +1607,8 @@ you may use an invisible entry like \lstinline|\mbox{}| instead. {Option head=\emph{value}} \end{lstcode} - A similar case would be a comma. With the same \Option{headings} option like - before: + A similar case would be a comma. With the same + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings} option like before: \begin{lstcode} \section[head=0, 1, 2, 3, \dots] {Natural Numbers Including the Zero} @@ -1643,7 +1632,7 @@ consecutively over all parts. Furthermore, for classes \Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} and \Class{scrreprt}, the title of the part level together with the corresponding preamble (see \Macro{setpartpreamble}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble}) is set on a separate page. +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setpartpreamble}) is set on a separate page. \Macro{chapter}\important{\Macro{chapter}}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} only exists in book or report classes, that is, in classes @@ -1653,47 +1642,57 @@ this, the command \Macro{chapter} in {\KOMAScript} differs substantially from the version in the standard class. In the standard classes the chapter number is used together with the prefix ``Chapter'', or the corresponding word in the appropriate language, on a separate line above the actual chapter title -text. This overpowering\important[i]{\Option{chapterprefix}\\ - \Option{appendixprefix}} style is replaced in {\KOMAScript} by a simple +text. This overpowering\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}} style is replaced in {\KOMAScript} by a simple chapter number before the chapter heading text, but can be reverted by the -option \Option{chapterprefix} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}). +option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}). Please\textnote{Attention!} note that \Macro{part} and \Macro{chapter} in classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} change the page style for one page. The applied page style in {\KOMAScript} is defined in the macros -\Macro{partpagestyle} and \Macro{chapterpagestyle} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}). \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font}% \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font>size}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{part}\LabelFontElement{part}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partnumber}\LabelFontElement{partnumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapter}\LabelFontElement{chapter}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{section}\LabelFontElement{section}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subsection}\LabelFontElement{subsection}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subsubsection}\LabelFontElement{subsubsection}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{paragraph}\LabelFontElement{paragraph}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subparagraph}\LabelFontElement{subparagraph}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{disposition}\LabelFontElement{disposition}% The font of all headings\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} can be changed with the commands -\Macro{setkomafont}\IndexCmd{setkomafont} and -\Macro{addtokomafont}\IndexCmd{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). In doing this, generally the -element \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition}% -\important{\FontElement{disposition}} is used, followed by a specific -element\important[s]{% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}\IndexCmd{setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}\IndexCmd{addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). In doing this, generally the +element \FontElement{disposition}\important{\FontElement{disposition}} is +used, followed by a specific element\important[s]{% \FontElement{part}\\ \FontElement{chapter}\\ \FontElement{section}\\ \FontElement{subsection}\\ \FontElement{paragraph}\\ \FontElement{subparagraph}} for every section level (see -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). The font for the element -\FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} is predefined as +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). There is a separate element +\FontElement{partnumber} for the number part of parts. The font for the +element \FontElement{disposition} is predefined as \Macro{normalcolor}\linebreak[2]\Macro{sffamily}\linebreak[2]\Macro{bfseries}. The default font size for the specific elements depends on the options -\OptionValue{headings}{big}, \OptionValue{headings}{normal} and -\OptionValue{headings}{small} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}). The defaults are listed in -\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big}, +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{normal} and +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{small} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}). The defaults are listed in +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont}. % \begin{table} % \centering% @@ -1707,52 +1706,55 @@ The default font size for the specific elements depends on the options \toprule Class Option & Element & Default\\ \midrule - \OptionValue{headings}{big} - & \FontElement{part}\IndexFontElement{part} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.part}\IndexFontElement{part} & \Macro{Huge} \\ - & \FontElement{partnumber}\IndexFontElement{partnumber} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.partnumber}% + \IndexFontElement{partnumber} & \Macro{huge} \\ - & \FontElement{chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} & \Macro{huge} \\ - & \FontElement{section}\IndexFontElement{section} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section}\IndexFontElement{section} & \Macro{Large} \\ - & \FontElement{subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection}% + \IndexFontElement{subsection} & \Macro{large} \\ - & \FontElement{subsubsection}% + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection}% \IndexFontElement{subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph}% + \IndexFontElement{subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\[1ex] - \OptionValue{headings}{normal} - & \FontElement{part} & \Macro{huge} \\ - & \FontElement{partnumber} & \Macro{huge} \\ - & \FontElement{chapter} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ - & \FontElement{section} & \Macro{Large} \\ - & \FontElement{subsection} & \Macro{large} \\ - & \FontElement{subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\[1ex] - \OptionValue{headings}{small} - & \FontElement{part} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ - & \FontElement{partnumber} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ - & \FontElement{chapter} & \Macro{Large} \\ - & \FontElement{section} & \Macro{large} \\ - & \FontElement{subsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ - & \FontElement{subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize}\\ + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{normal} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.part} & \Macro{huge} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.partnumber} & \Macro{huge} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section} & \Macro{Large} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection} & \Macro{large} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\[1ex] + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{small} + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.part} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.partnumber} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter} & \Macro{Large} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section} & \Macro{large} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ + & \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize}\\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.structureElementsFont} \end{table} \begin{Example} - Suppose you are using the class option \OptionValue{headings}{big} and - notice that the very big headings of document parts are too - bold. You could change this as follows: + Suppose you are using the class option + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} and notice that the very big + headings of document parts are too bold. You could change this as follows: \begin{lstcode} \setkomafont{disposition}{\normalcolor\sffamily} \part{Appendices} @@ -1771,8 +1773,8 @@ This is done either by: \addtokomafont{part}{\mdseries} \addtokomafont{partnumber}{\mdseries} \end{lstcode} -The last version is to be preferred because it gives you the correct -result even when you make changes to the \FontElement{disposition} +The last version is to be preferred because it gives you the correct result +even when you make changes to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition} element\IndexFontElement{disposition}, for instance: \begin{lstcode} \setkomafont{disposition}{\normalcolor\bfseries} @@ -1807,43 +1809,28 @@ to the following explanation. sans serif is the carefully chosen default in {\KOMAScript}. More variety should, however, be avoided. Font mixing is only for - professionals. In case you want to use other fonts than the standard - {\TeX} fonts\,---\,regardless of whether these are CM\Index{CM - fonts}, EC\Index{EC fonts}, or LM fonts\Index{LM fonts}\,---\,you - should consult an expert, or for safety's sake redefine the font for - the element \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} - as seen in the example above. The author of this documentation - considers the commonly encountered combinations Times and Helvetica - or Palatino with Helvetica as unfavourable. + professionals. In case you want to use other fonts than the standard {\TeX} + fonts\,---\,regardless of whether these are CM\Index{CM fonts}, EC\Index{EC + fonts}, or LM fonts\Index{LM fonts}\,---\,you should consult an expert, or + for safety's sake redefine the font for the element + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} + as seen in the example above. The author of this documentation considers the + commonly encountered combinations Times and Helvetica or Palatino with + Helvetica as unfavourable. \end{Explain} -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font>size}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{part}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{section}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraph}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ + \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Heading}% \Macro{subparagraph*}\Parameter{Heading} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{part*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapter*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{section*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsection*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraph*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph*}% All disposition commands have starred versions, which are unnumbered\Index{numbering}, and produce section headings which do not show up in the table of contents\Index{table>of contents}\Index{contents>table @@ -1858,11 +1845,11 @@ only exists in book and report classes, that is, \Class{book}, \Class{scrbook}, \Class{report} and \Class{scrreport}, but not the article classes \Class{article} and \Class{scrartcl}. -Please\textnote{Attention!} note that \Macro{part} and \Macro{chapter} change +Please\textnote{Attention!} note that \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} change the page style for one page. The applied style is defined in the macros -\Macro{partpagestyle} and \Macro{chapterpagestyle} in {\KOMAScript} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} in {\KOMAScript} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}). As for the possibilities of font switching\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}}, % @@ -1870,13 +1857,8 @@ the same explanations apply as were given above for the unstarred variants. The structuring elements are named the same since they do not indicate variants but structuring levels.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{part*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapter*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{section*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsection*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraph*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph*}% +\EndIndexGroup + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext In the standard classes\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes} there are @@ -1886,27 +1868,21 @@ contents and in the running heading.% \fi \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Heading}\\ - \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}\\ + \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Heading}% + \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Short version}\Parameter{Heading}% \Macro{addsec*}\Parameter{Heading}\textnote[n]{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addpart}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addpart*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchap}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchap*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsec}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsec*}% In addition to the commands of the standard classes, {\KOMAScript} offers the new commands \Macro{addsec} and \Macro{addchap}. They are -similar to the standard commands \Macro{chapter} and -\Macro{section}, except that they are unnumbered. They thus produce +similar to the standard commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}, except that they are unnumbered. They thus produce both a running heading and an entry in the table of contents. The starred variants \Macro{addchap*} and \Macro{addsec*} are similar to the -standard commands \Macro{chapter*} and \Macro{section*} except for a tiny but +standard commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} except for a tiny but important difference: The running headings are deleted. This eliminates the side effect of obsolete headers mentioned above. Instead, the running headings on following pages remain empty. \OnlyAt{\Class{book}\and @@ -1917,16 +1893,16 @@ in book and report classes, namely \Class{book}, \Class{scrbook}, Similarly, the command \Macro{addpart} produces an unnumbered document part with an entry in the table of contents. Since the running -headings are already deleted by \Macro{part} and \Macro{part*} the +headings are already deleted by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} the problem of obsolete headers does not exist. The starred version -\Macro{addpart*} is thus identical to \Macro{part*} and is only +\Macro{addpart*} is thus identical to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} and is only defined for consistency reasons. Please note\textnote{Attention!} that \Macro{addpart} and \Macro{addchap} and their starred versions change the page style for one page. The particular page -style is defined in the macros \Macro{partpagestyle} and -\Macro{chapterpagestyle} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +style is defined in the macros \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle}). As for the possibilities of font switching\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}}, % @@ -1934,18 +1910,12 @@ the same explanations apply as given above for the normal structuring commands. The elements are named the same since they describe not variants but structuring levels.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addpart}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addpart*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchap}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchap*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsec}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsec*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{minisec}\Parameter{Heading} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{minisec}% Sometimes a heading\Index{heading} is wanted which is highlighted but also closely linked to the following text. Such a heading should not be separated by a large vertical skip. @@ -1955,18 +1925,17 @@ heading is not associated with any structuring level. Such a \emph{mini section} does not produce an entry in the table of contents nor does it receive any numbering. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{minisec}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{disposition}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{minisec}\LabelFontElement{minisec}% The font type of the structuring command \Macro{minisec} can be changed using -the element \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} (see -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}) and +the element +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} +(see \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}) and \FontElement{minisec}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{% \Class{scrbook} \and\Class{scrreprt} \and\Class{scrartcl}}. Default setting of element \FontElement{minisec} is empty, so the default of the element -\FontElement{disposition} is active. -% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{disposition}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} is +active.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{minisec}% \begin{Example} @@ -2026,23 +1995,21 @@ of element \FontElement{minisec} is empty, so the default of the element \end{ShowOutput} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{minisec}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{raggedsection}\\ - \Macro{raggedchapter}\\ + \Macro{raggedsection}% + \Macro{raggedchapter}% \Macro{raggedpart} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedpart}% In the standard classes\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes}, headings are set as justified text. That means that hyphenated words can occur and headings with more than one line are stretched up to the text border. This is a rather uncommon approach in typography. {\KOMAScript} therefore formats the headings left aligned with hanging indentation using \Macro{raggedsection} with the definition: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\raggedsection}{\raggedright} \end{lstcode} This command can be redefined with \Macro{renewcommand}. @@ -2058,26 +2025,27 @@ This command can be redefined with \Macro{renewcommand}. You will get a formatting of the headings which is very close to that of the standard classes. It will become even closer when you combine this change with the change of the element - \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} mentioned - above. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} + mentioned above. \end{Example} Because\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} some users want -for \Macro{chapter} another alignment than for all other sections, you can -change only \Macro{chapter} redefining \Macro{raggedchapter}. The default of -this command is usage of \Macro{raggedsection}. So every change of -\Macro{raggedsection} will also change the alignment of chapter headings. - -Unlike all others, the headings of parts (\Macro{part}) will be -horizontally centered instead of set ragged right. This is because command +for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} another alignment than for all other +sections, you can change only \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} redefining +\Macro{raggedchapter}. The default of this command is usage of +\Macro{raggedsection}. So every change of \Macro{raggedsection} will also +change the alignment of chapter headings. + +Unlike all others, the headings of parts (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}) will +be horizontally centered instead of set ragged right. This is because command \Macro{raggedpart} is defined as -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \let\raggedpart\centering \end{lstcode} You may also redefine this using \Macro{renewcommand} too. \begin{Example} - You do not want different alignment at headings of \Macro{part}. So you - put + You do not want different alignment at headings of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}. So you put \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\raggedpart}{\raggedsection} \end{lstcode} @@ -2091,34 +2059,25 @@ You may also redefine this using \Macro{renewcommand} too. \Macro{raggedpart} will be used. \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedpart}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedsection}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partformat}\\ - \Macro{chapterformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionformat}\\ - \Macro{subsectionformat}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionformat}\\ - \Macro{paragraphformat}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphformat}\\ + \Macro{partformat}% + \Macro{chapterformat}% + \Macro{sectionformat}% + \Macro{subsectionformat}% + \Macro{subsubsectionformat}% + \Macro{paragraphformat}% + \Macro{subparagraphformat}% \Macro{othersectionlevelsformat}\Parameter{sectioning - name}\Parameter{}\Parameter{counter output}\\ - \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}\\ + name}\Parameter{}\Parameter{counter output}% + \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \Macro{autodot} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partformat}\Index{part>number}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterformat}\Index{chapter>number}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{othersectionlevelsformat}\Index{section>number}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfUsePrefixLine}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{autodot}% +\Index{part>number}% +\Index{chapter>number}% +\Index{section>number}% {\KOMAScript} has added a further logical level on top of \Macro{the\PName{sectioning name}} to the output of the sectioning numbers. The counters for the respective heading are not merely output. They @@ -2129,12 +2088,12 @@ down to \Macro{subparagraphformat}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Macro{chapterformat} like \Macro{thechapter} does not exist in the class \Class{scrartcl} but only in the classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}. -As described for option \Option{numbers}\important{\Option{numbers}} at the -beginning of this section (see \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers}), +As described for option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}} at the +beginning of this section (see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}), periods in section numbers should be handled for the German-speaking region according to the rules given in \cite{DUDEN}. The command \Macro{autodot} in {\KOMAScript} ensures that these rules are followed. In all levels -except for \Macro{part}, a dot is followed by a further \Macro{enskip}. This +except for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, a dot is followed by a further \Macro{enskip}. This corresponds to a horizontal skip of 0.5\Unit{em}. Since \KOMAScript~3.17\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -2144,8 +2103,9 @@ if the corresponding format command to a section command does not exist or is \Macro{relax}. This should not happen for all section commands defined by \KOMAScript{} itself. Therefore the command is not officially documented any longer. Nevertheless, if a compatibility level prior to 3.17 (see option -\Option{version}, \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}) has been selected, commands +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) has been selected, commands \Macro{sectionformat} down to \Macro{subparagraphformat} are ignored by \KOMAScript{}. In this case \Macro{othersectionlevelsformat} indeed will be used. @@ -2167,7 +2127,7 @@ The definitions of the lower levels correspond to Because\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} of \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} command \Macro{chapterformat} should not be used -outside of \Macro{chapter}. \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} is only valid inside +outside of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}. \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} is only valid inside section commands of \KOMAScript{}. In this case, it executes the \PName{then code} if a prefix line for the number is used, but \PName{else code} otherwise. @@ -2176,19 +2136,20 @@ Do\textnote{Attention!} not forget to change \Macro{newcommand} into \Macro{renewcommand} if you like to re-define one of the commands. \begin{Example} - Assume that when using \Macro{part} you do not want the word + Assume that when using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} you do not want the word ``Part'' written in front of the part number. You could use the following command in the preamble of your document: \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\partformat}{\thepart\autodot} \end{lstcode} Strictly speaking, you could do without \Macro{autodot} at this point and - insert a fixed dot instead. As \Macro{part} is numbered with roman numerals, + insert a fixed dot instead. As \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} is numbered with roman numerals, according to \cite{DUDEN} a period has to be applied. However, you thereby give up the possibility to use one of the options - \OptionValue{numbers}{endperiod} and \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod} and - optionally depart from the rules. More details concerning class options can - be found at \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers}. + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{numbers}{endperiod} and + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{numbers}{noendperiod} and optionally depart from + the rules. More details concerning class options can be found at + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}. An additional possibility could be to place the section numbers in the left margin in such a way that the heading text is left aligned with @@ -2210,28 +2171,20 @@ Do\textnote{Attention!} not forget to change \Macro{newcommand} into \end{Example} If you would like to change more than only the printing of the counter of a -heading, please have a look at \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat}, -\Macro{chapterlinesformat}, \Macro{sectionlinesformat}, and -\Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts} from -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{autodot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfUsePrefixLine}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{othersectionlevelsformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partformat}% +heading, please have a look at +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat}, and +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat} in +\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts} from +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat}.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix}\Parameter{additional text}\\ + \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix}\Parameter{additional text}% \Macro{chapapp} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapappifchapterprefix}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapapp}% These\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}}% \ChangedAt{v2.8o}{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} two commands are not only used internally by {\KOMAScript} but are also provided to @@ -2239,70 +2192,62 @@ the user. Later it will be shown how they can be used, for example, to redefine other commands. Using the layout option -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true}\important{\Option{chapterprefix}} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}) +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}} +(see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}) \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix} outputs the word ``Chapter''\Index{chapter>heading} in the main part of the document in the current language, followed by \PName{additional text}. In the -appendix\Index{appendix}, the word ``Appendix'' in the current -language is output instead, followed by \PName{additional text}. If the -option \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} is set, then nothing is output. +appendix\Index{appendix}, the word ``Appendix'' in the current language is +output instead, followed by \PName{additional text}. If the option +\OptionValue{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} is set, then nothing is output. The command \Macro{chapapp} always outputs the word ``Chapter'' or -``Appendix''. In this case the selection of option \Option{chapterprefix} has -no effect. +``Appendix''. In this case the selection of option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} has no effect. Since chapters only exist in the classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt}, these commands only exist in these classes.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapappifchapterprefix}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapapp}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{running head}\\ - \Macro{addchapmark}\Parameter{running head}\\ - \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{running head}\\ - \Macro{addsecmark}\Parameter{running head}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{running head}\\ - \Macro{chaptermarkformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\\ + \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{running head}% + \Macro{addchapmark}\Parameter{running head}% + \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{running head}% + \Macro{addsecmark}\Parameter{running head}% + \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{running head}% + \Macro{chaptermarkformat}% + \Macro{sectionmarkformat}% \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchapmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsecmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% \begin{Explain}% - As mentioned in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} the page style - \PValue{headings} works with automatic running - heads\Index{running head}. For this, the commands - \Macro{chaptermark} and \Macro{sectionmark}, or \Macro{sectionmark} - and \Macro{subsectionmark}, respectively, are defined. Every - structuring command (\Macro{chapter}, \Macro{section}, etc.) - automatically carries out the respective \Macro{\dots mark} command. - The parameter passed contains the text of the section - heading\Index{heading}. The respective section number is added - automatically in the \Macro{\dots mark} command. The formatting is + As mentioned in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} the page style + \PValue{headings} works with automatic running heads\Index{running + head}. For this, the commands \Macro{chaptermark} and \Macro{sectionmark}, + or \Macro{sectionmark} and \Macro{subsectionmark}, respectively, are + defined. Every structuring command (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}, etc.) automatically carries out the + respective \Macro{\dots mark} command. The parameter passed contains the + text of the section heading\Index{heading}. The respective section number is + added automatically in the \Macro{\dots mark} command. The formatting is done according to the section level with one of the three commands \Macro{chaptermarkformat}, \Macro{sectionmarkformat}, or \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, the running heads of - \Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} and \Macro{addsec}\IndexCmd{addsec} are - also based on \Macro{chaptermark} and \Macro{addsecmark} but locally set - counter \Counter{secnumdepth} to a value that makes chapters respectively - sections not numbered. You should pay attention for this especially if you - redefine \Macro{chaptermark} or \Macro{sectionmark} (see \Macro{ifnumbered} - on \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered}). The star variants - \Macro{addchap*} and \Macro{addsec*} use additional commands - \Macro{addchapmark} and \Macro{addsecmark} that are defined also basing on - \Macro{chaptermark} and \Macro{sectionmark} with local changes of - \Counter{secnumdepth}. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}\IndexCmd{addsec} are also based on + \Macro{chaptermark} and \Macro{addsecmark} but locally set counter + \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth} to a value that makes chapters + respectively sections not numbered. You should pay attention for this + especially if you redefine \Macro{chaptermark} or \Macro{sectionmark} (see + \Macro{ifnumbered} on \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifnumbered}). The star + variants \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec*} use additional commands \Macro{addchapmark} + and \Macro{addsecmark} that are defined also basing on \Macro{chaptermark} + and \Macro{sectionmark} with local changes of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}}Of course there is no command \Macro{chaptermark} or \Macro{chaptermarkformat} in @@ -2311,13 +2256,14 @@ Since chapters only exist in the classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrartcl}. This changes when you use the \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} package (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}).\par \end{Explain} -Similar to \Macro{partformat} down to \Macro{subparagraphformat} for -formatting the numbers in the headings, the commands \Macro{chaptermarkformat} -(not in \Class{scrartcl}), \Macro{sectionmarkformat}, and -\Macro{subsectionmarkformat} (only in \Class{scrartcl}) define the formatting -of the sectioning numbers in the automatic running heads. They can be adapted -to your personal needs with \Macro{renewcommand}. The original definitions for -the {\KOMAScript} classes are: +Similar to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partformat} down to +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraphformat} for formatting the numbers in the +headings, the commands \Macro{chaptermarkformat} (not in \Class{scrartcl}), +\Macro{sectionmarkformat}, and \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} (only in +\Class{scrartcl}) define the formatting of the sectioning numbers in the +automatic running heads. They can be adapted to your personal needs with +\Macro{renewcommand}. The original definitions for the {\KOMAScript} classes +are: \begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{% \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\thechapter\autodot\enskip} @@ -2334,49 +2280,37 @@ the {\KOMAScript} classes are: \chapapp~\thechapter\autodot\enskip} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -As you can see, both the commands \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix} and -\Macro{chapapp} explained above are used here.% +As you can see, both the commands +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapapp} explained above are used here.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsecmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchapmark}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{secnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{partnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{chapternumdepth}\\ - \Macro{sectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{subsectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{paragraphnumdepth}\\ + \Counter{secnumdepth}% + \Macro{partnumdepth}% + \Macro{chapternumdepth}% + \Macro{sectionnumdepth}% + \Macro{subsectionnumdepth}% + \Macro{subsubsectionnumdepth}% + \Macro{paragraphnumdepth}% \Macro{subparagraphnumdepth} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{secnumdepth}\BeginIndex{}{numbering}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapternumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphnumdepth}% +\BeginIndex{}{numbering}% Section levels in the classes \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} and \Class{scrreport}\IndexClass{scrreprt} are, by default, numbered from -\Macro{part}\IndexCmd{part}\IndexCmd{chapter}\IndexCmd{section} down to -\Macro{subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}. In class +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part}\IndexCmd{chapter}\IndexCmd{section} +down to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}. In class \Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} the default numbering is from -\Macro{part} down to \Macro{subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}. The -actual depth to which headings will be numbered is controlled by the \LaTeX{} -counter \Counter{secnumdepth}. Since version~3.12 \KOMAScript{} provides the -commands \Macro{partnumdepth} to \Macro{subparagraphnumdepth} which return the -number that corresponds to the level they bear in their name. This saves users -the trouble of having to remember abstract numbers and allows them to define -the depth to which headings should be numbered with relative ease. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} down to +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}. The actual +depth to which headings will be numbered is controlled by the \LaTeX{} counter +\Counter{secnumdepth}. Since version~3.12 \KOMAScript{} provides the commands +\Macro{partnumdepth} to \Macro{subparagraphnumdepth} which return the number +that corresponds to the level they bear in their name. This saves users the +trouble of having to remember abstract numbers and allows them to define the +depth to which headings should be numbered with relative ease. \KOMAScript{} provides the commands \Macro{partnumdepth} to \Macro{subparagraphnumdepth} so\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -2397,64 +2331,55 @@ Redefining these commands is not allowed. Doing so could lead to unexpected results not only with \KOMAScript{} but also with third party packages. Thus, it is recommended to never redefine any of them. -Do not confuse the counters \Counter{secnumdepth} and \Counter{tocdepth}, -please refer to the explanation concerning the counter \Counter{tocdepth} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}. Actually, depending on the class +Do not confuse the counters \Counter{secnumdepth} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}, please refer to the explanation +concerning the counter \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}. Actually, depending on the class you are using, the meaning of the values of the counters \Counter{secnumdepth} -and \Counter{tocdepth} may deviate from one another for the same section -level.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapternumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{secnumdepth}\EndIndex{}{numbering}% +and \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} may deviate from one another for the +same section level.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnumbered}\Parameter{section level}% - \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}\\ + \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \Macro{ifunnumbered}\Parameter{section level}% \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnumbered}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifunnumbered}% After\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} describing above how to define down to which section level headings are numbered, the commands \Macro{ifnumbered} and \Macro{ifunnumbered} can be used to execute code depending on whether a \PName{section level} is numbered or not. If the current setting of -\Counter{secnumdepth} stipulates that a \PName{section level} will be -numbered, the \PName{then code} after \Macro{ifnumbered} gets executed. If it -is not numbered, the \PName{else code} gets executed. The \Macro{ifunnumbered} -command behaves in exactly the opposite manner, executing the \PName{then - code} if the current level is not numbered and the \PName{else code} if it -is. The \PName{section level} parameter is simply the \LaTeX{} name of a -section like \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth} stipulates that a \PName{section + level} will be numbered, the \PName{then code} after \Macro{ifnumbered} gets +executed. If it is not numbered, the \PName{else code} gets executed. The +\Macro{ifunnumbered} command behaves in exactly the opposite manner, executing +the \PName{then code} if the current level is not numbered and the \PName{else + code} if it is. The \PName{section level} parameter is simply the \LaTeX{} +name of a section like \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph}.\PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph}, or \PValue{subparagraph}. \KOMAScript{} itself uses these tests, for example, in the definition of -\Macro{chaptermark}\IndexCmd{chaptermark} within page style -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. This indirectly guarantees that -headings inserted by \Macro{addchap} do not set a number inside the running -head (see also \Macro{addchapmark}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnumbered}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifunnumbered}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermark}\IndexCmd{chaptermark} within page style +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. This indirectly guarantees that +headings inserted by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap} do not set a number +inside the running head (see also \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark}).% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setpartpreamble}% - \OParameter{position}\OParameter{width}\Parameter{preamble}\\ + \OParameter{position}\OParameter{width}\Parameter{preamble}% \Macro{setchapterpreamble}% \OParameter{position}\OParameter{width}\Parameter{preamble} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setpartpreamble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setchapterpreamble}% Parts\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}\Index{part>preamble}\Index{chapter>preamble} and chapters in {\KOMAScript} can be started with a \PName{preamble}. This is particularly @@ -2462,8 +2387,9 @@ useful when you are using a two column layout with the class option \Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn}, since the heading together with the \PName{preamble} is always set in a one column layout. The \PName{preamble} can comprise more than one paragraph. The command to output the -\PName{preamble} has to be placed before the respective \Macro{part}, -\Macro{addpart}, \Macro{chapter}, or \Macro{addchap} command. +\PName{preamble} has to be placed before the respective \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap} command. \begin{Example} You are writing a report about the condition of a company. You organize the report in such a way that every department gets its own @@ -2481,10 +2407,10 @@ can comprise more than one paragraph. The command to output the \part{Department for Word Processing} \end{lstcode} Depending on the settings for the heading font size\Index{heading} - (see \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}) and the options for - the \Environment{abstract} environment\IndexEnv{abstract} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.abstract}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.abstract}), the result would look + (see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}) and the options for + the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract} environment\IndexEnv{abstract} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract}), the result would look similar to: \begin{ShowOutput}\centering {\LARGE\usekomafont{disposition} Part III.\par\vspace{20pt}} @@ -2503,9 +2429,9 @@ can comprise more than one paragraph. The command to output the \end{Example} Please\textnote{Attention!} note that it is \emph{you} who is responsible for the spaces between the heading, preamble and the following text. Please note -also that there is no \Environment{abstract} environment in the class -\Class{scrbook} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.abstract}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.env.abstract}). +also that there is no \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract} environment in the +class \Class{scrbook} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}). The\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}} first optional argument \PName{position} determines the position at which @@ -2531,37 +2457,36 @@ from the vertical with one letter from the horizontal positioning. A more often usage of \Macro{setchapterpreamble} would be something like a smart slogan or dictum to a heading. The command -\Macro{dictum}\IndexCmd{dictum}, that may be used for this, will be described -at the next section. You will also find an example there. - -Please note\textnote{Attention!} that a \PName{preamble} placed above -the chapter headings will be set into the already existing vertical -space above the heading. The heading will not be moved down. It is -you who is responsible for ensuring that the preamble is small enough and the -space is sufficient. See also \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} in +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.dictum}\IndexCmd{dictum}, that may be used for this, +will be described at the next section. You will also find an example there. + +Please note\textnote{Attention!} that a \PName{preamble} placed above the +chapter headings will be set into the already existing vertical space above +the heading. The heading will not be moved down. It is you who is responsible +for ensuring that the preamble is small enough and the space is +sufficient. See also \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip} for -this.% +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip} for this.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setpartpreamble}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setchapterpreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{15}% \section{Dicta} +\LoadCommonFile{dictum}% \section{Dicta} -\LoadCommon{12}% \section{Lists} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Lists} \section{Math} \seclabel{math}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{equations}% \BeginIndex{}{formulas}% \BeginIndex{}{mathematics}% There are no math environments implemented in the \KOMAScript{} classes. Instead of this, the math features of the \LaTeX{} kernel have been -supported. With this also, the options \Option{leqno} and \Option{fleqn} are -available. +supported. With this also, the options \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.leqno} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fleqn} are available. You will not find a description of the math environments of the \LaTeX{} kernel here. If you want to use \Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath}, @@ -2574,40 +2499,40 @@ recommended (see \cite{package:amsmath}). \begin{Declaration} \Option{leqno} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{leqno}% Equations are normally numbered\Index{equation>number} on the right. The standard option \Option{leqno} causes the standard option file \File{leqno.clo} to be loaded. The equations are then numbered on the left. This\textnote{Attention!} option has to be used as an optional argument -of \Macro{documentclass}. Usage as an argument of \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} is not supported. This would not make sense, because the -recommended math package \Package{amsmath} supports the option at loading -time only too and would not react on run-time changes of the option. +of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}. Usage as an argument of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} is +not supported. This would not make sense, because the recommended math package +\Package{amsmath} supports the option at loading time only too and would not +react on run-time changes of the option. % -\EndIndex{Option}{leqno}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Option{fleqn} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fleqn}% Displayed equations\Index{equation>alignment} are normally centered. The standard option \Option{fleqn} causes the standard option file \File{fleqn.clo} to be loaded. Displayed equations are then left-justified. This option may be used as an optional argument of -\Macro{documentclass} but not as an argument of \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption}. The latter would not make sense, because the recommended -math package \Package{amsmath} supports the option at loading time only too -and would not react on run-time changes of the option. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} but not as an argument of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}. +The latter would not make sense, because the recommended math package +\Package{amsmath} supports the option at loading time only too and would not +react on run-time changes of the option. % -\EndIndex{Option}{fleqn}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{mathematics}% -\EndIndex{}{formulas}% -\EndIndex{}{equations}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Floating Environments of Tables and Figures} \seclabel{floats} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{floats}% \BeginIndex{}{tables}% \BeginIndex{}{figures}% @@ -2637,17 +2562,16 @@ the typesetting of captions of figures and tables. This should be self evident, but it is often not understood. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{captions}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{captions}{selection} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{captions~=\PName{selection}}% The standard classes format titles of floating environments, which are placed -with \Macro{caption}\IndexCmd{caption} (see below), like signatures. They +with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} (see below), like signatures. They differentiate between one-line and multi-line table or figure captions. One-line captions are centered while multi-line captions are left-justified. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.captions.tableheading}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.captions.tableheading}\nobreak For tables, however, headings are often used. That's because there may be tables that span several pages. Surely the reader wants to know the purpose of the table at the first page already. Furthermore tables @@ -2675,7 +2599,7 @@ the caption from above the top of the table to below the bottom of the table or vice versa. It only affects whether the text is formatted as a caption for use above or below a table. Whether the text is in fact placed above or below a table is set through the position of the -\Macro{caption} command inside the \Environment{table} environment. This may +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} command inside the \Environment{table} environment. This may change using package \Package{float}\IndexPackage{float} and command \Macro{restylefloats} (see \cite{package:float}). @@ -2698,7 +2622,7 @@ options\important[i]{\OptionValue{captions}{heading}\\ \OptionValue{captions}{heading}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{heading}} and \OptionValue{captions}{signature}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{signature}} to switch the format of every floating environment. These options may be used -also inside a floating environment but before using \Macro{caption}. +also inside a floating environment but before using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}. Note\textnote{Attention!}\OnlyAt{\Package{float}}\IndexPackage{float} that when using the \Package{float} package, the options @@ -2708,11 +2632,11 @@ when using the \Package{float} package, the options package and \Macro{restylefloat} can be found in \cite{package:float}. Additional support in {\KOMAScript} for the \Package{float} package may be found at the explanation of \PValue{komaabove} -(see \autopageref{desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove}). +(see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.floatstyle.komaabove}). \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.captions.nooneline}\nobreak -\label{desc:maincls.option.captions.oneline}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.captions.nooneline}\nobreak +\label{desc:\LabelBase.option.captions.oneline}\nobreak Furthermore, \KOMAScript{} supports to switch off the distinguish of captions with only one line or more than one line using option \OptionValue{captions}{nooneline}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{nooneline}}% @@ -2722,31 +2646,33 @@ corresponds to \OptionValue{captions}{oneline}. Another special feature of \KOMAScript{} is to alternatively put the caption neither above nor below the floating object but beside -it. For this you need Environment\important{\Environment{captionbeside}} -\Environment{captionsbeside}\IndexEnv{captionbeside}, that will be described -from \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}. Several settings +it. For this you need Environment\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}\IndexEnv{captionbeside}, that will be described +from \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}. Several settings for this environment may be done also using \Option{caption}. You may find all -the available \PName{settings} at \autoref{tab:maincls.captions}. +the available \PName{settings} at \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.captions}. % \begin{desclist} \desccaption[{Available values for option \Option{captions}}]{% Available values for option \Option{captions} to select formation of captions as headings or signatures at floating environments% - \label{tab:maincls.captions}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.captions}% }{% Available values for option \Option{captions} (\emph{continuation})% }% \entry{\PValue{bottombeside}, \PValue{besidebottom}}{% - Captions and contents of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically align + Captions and contents of environment + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically align depending on the bottommost base lines.% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{bottombeside}}}% \entry{\PValue{centeredbeside}, \PValue{besidecentered}, \PValue{middlebeside}, \PValue{besidemiddle}}{% - Captions and contents of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically centered% + Captions and contents of environment + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically centered% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{centeredbeside}}}% \entry{\PValue{figureheading}, \PValue{figureabove}, \PValue{abovefigure}, \PValue{topatfigure}% @@ -2775,19 +2701,18 @@ the available \PName{settings} at \autoref{tab:maincls.captions}. }% \entry{\PValue{innerbeside}, \PValue{besideinner}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{innerbeside}}}{% - Captions of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) - will be placed innermost beside the contents of the environment at - double-side printing. At single-side printing - \OptionValue{captions}{leftbeside} will be used.% + Captions of environment \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be placed innermost + beside the contents of the environment at double-side printing. At + single-side printing \OptionValue{captions}{leftbeside} will be used.% }% \entry{\PValue{leftbeside}, \PValue{besideleft}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{leftbeside}}}{% - Captions of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) will be placed left beside - the contents of the environment.% + Captions of environment \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be placed left beside the + contents of the environment.% }% \pventry{nooneline}{% Captions with only one line will not be handled different from captions @@ -2798,18 +2723,17 @@ the available \PName{settings} at \autoref{tab:maincls.captions}. \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{oneline}}}% \entry{\PValue{outerbeside}, \PValue{besideouter}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{outerbeside}}}{% - Captions of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) - will be placed outermost beside the contents of the environment at - double-side printing. At single-side printing - \OptionValue{captions}{rightbeside} will be used.% + Captions of environment \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be placed outermost + beside the contents of the environment at double-side printing. At + single-side printing \OptionValue{captions}{rightbeside} will be used.% }% \entry{\PValue{rightbeside}, \PValue{besideright}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{rightbeside}}}{% - Captions of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) will be placed right beside + Captions of environment \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be placed right beside the contents of the environment.% }% \entry{\PValue{signature}, \PValue{below}, \PValue{bot}, \PValue{bottom}% @@ -2831,28 +2755,26 @@ the available \PName{settings} at \autoref{tab:maincls.captions}. \entry{\PValue{tablesignature}, \PValue{belowtable}, \PValue{belowtabular}, \PValue{bottomattable}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{tablesignature}}}{% - Captions of tables will use signature formation\,---\,maybe in discrepancy + Captions of tables will use signature formation\,---\,maybe in discrepancy to \OptionValue{captions}{heading}.% }% \entry{\PValue{topbeside}, \PValue{besidetop}}{% - Captions and contents of environment \Environment{captionsbeside} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically align + Captions and contents of environment + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) will be vertically align depending on the topmost base lines.% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{topbeside}}}% \end{desclist}% % -\EndIndex{Option}{captions~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{caption}\OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}\\ - \Macro{captionbelow}\OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}\\ + \Macro{caption}\OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% + \Macro{captionbelow}\OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% \Macro{captionabove}\OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{caption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionabove}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionbelow}% In the standard classes caption text \PName{title} of tables and figures is inserted with the \Macro{caption} command below the table or figure. In general this is correct for figures. Opinions differ as @@ -2866,7 +2788,7 @@ figures. Not only for tables but also for figures or all kind of floating environments the behaviour of \Macro{caption} may be modified using option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions} described at the beginning of this +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions} described at the beginning of this section. For compatibility reasons the default behaviour of \Macro{caption} used with all kinds of floating environments is similar to @@ -2874,7 +2796,7 @@ with all kinds of floating environments is similar to is recommended\textnote{Hint!} to use table headings and therefor switch behaviour of \Macro{caption} inside table environments into \Macro{captionabove} using option -\OptionValue{captions}{tableheading}. Alternatively you may use +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading}. Alternatively you may use \Macro{captionabove} instead of \Macro{caption} inside of every \Environment{table} environment. % @@ -2925,30 +2847,30 @@ behaviour of \Macro{caption} inside table environments into \end{tabular} \end{ShowOutput} Since you want all your tables typeset with captions above, you could - of course use the option \OptionValue{captions}{tableheading} instead (see - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.tableheading}). Then you can use + of course use the option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading} instead (see + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.tableheading}). Then you can use \Macro{caption} as you would in the standard classes. You will get the same result as with \Macro{captionabove}. \end{Example} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{caption}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{captionlabel}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{caption}\LabelFontElement{caption}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{captionlabel}\LabelFontElement{captionlabel}% The font style\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} for the -description and the label\,---\,``Figure'' or ``Table'', followed by -the number and the delimiter\,---\,can be changed with the commands -\Macro{setkomafont} -and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). The respective elements for -this are \FontElement{caption}\important{\FontElement{caption}} and + \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} for the description +and the label\,---\,``Figure'' or ``Table'', followed by the number and the +delimiter\,---\,can be changed with the commands +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). The respective elements for this +are \FontElement{caption}\important{\FontElement{caption}} and \FontElement{captionlabel}\important{\FontElement{captionlabel}} (see -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). First the font style -for the element \FontElement{caption} is applied to the element -\FontElement{captionlabel} too. After this the font style of -\FontElement{captionlabel} is applied on the respective element. The -default settings are listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont}. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fontelements}). +First the font style for the element \FontElement{caption} is applied to the +element \FontElement{captionlabel} too. After this the font style of +\FontElement{captionlabel} is applied on the respective element. The default +settings are listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.captionFont}. % \begin{table} % \centering% @@ -2962,12 +2884,12 @@ default settings are listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont}. \toprule element & default \\ \midrule - \FontElement{caption} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ - \FontElement{captionlabel} & \Macro{normalfont}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.caption} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.captionlabel} & \Macro{normalfont}\\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:maincls.captionFont} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.captionFont} \end{table} % \begin{Example} @@ -2986,25 +2908,19 @@ default settings are listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont}. possible. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{captionlabel}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{caption}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{caption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionabove}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionbelow}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{captionof}\Parameter{float type}\OParameter{entry}% - \Parameter{title}\\ + \Parameter{title}% \Macro{captionbelowof}\Parameter{float type}\OParameter{entry}% - \Parameter{title}\\ + \Parameter{title}% \Macro{captionaboveof}\Parameter{float type}\OParameter{entry}% \Parameter{title} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionof}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionaboveof}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionbelowof}% \KOMAScript{} supports a command \Macro{captionof}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} similar to packages @@ -3012,7 +2928,7 @@ default settings are listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont}. \Package{capt-of}\IndexPackage{capt-of}. You may use this command to place a floating environment caption with corresponding entry into the list of that kind of floating environment but even inside a another floating environment or -outside any floating environment. In difference to \Macro{caption} the kind of +outside any floating environment. In difference to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} the kind of floating environment has to be set as first parameter. Furthermore, \KOMAScript{} provides the additional commands @@ -3024,7 +2940,7 @@ features and parameter of \Macro{captionof}. Of course \KOMAScript\ChangedAt{v3.09a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} takes care of the \PValue{heading} and \PValue{signature} setting of option -\Option{captions}. But this feature may be lost, loading package +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}. But this feature may be lost, loading package \Package{capt-of} or \Package{caption}. Please note the manual of package \Package{caption} for this! % @@ -3059,7 +2975,7 @@ and \PValue{signature} setting of option inter-word distance would be made between the \Environment{minipage} environments. - The figure signature has been done using \Macro{caption}. The table heading + The figure signature has been done using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}. The table heading has been done using \Macro{captionaboveof} with first argument \PValue{table}. Because of this \KOMAScript{} knows, that despite the \Environment{figure} environment a table caption should be made. @@ -3070,7 +2986,7 @@ and \PValue{signature} setting of option is sufficient for the environment itself, it would be very useful at the list of tables. Therefor a somehow more detailed description has been used for the list of tables using the optional argument. The - \autoref{fig:maincls.captionaboveof} shows the result of the example code.% + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.captionaboveof} shows the result of the example code.% \begin{figure} % \centering % \caption @@ -3080,20 +2996,20 @@ and \PValue{signature} setting of option [{Example: Usage of \Macro{captionaboveof} inside another floating environment}] {Example: Usage of \Macro{captionaboveof} inside another floating - environment\label{fig:maincls.captionaboveof}} + environment\label{fig:\LabelBase.captionaboveof}} [l] \begin{minipage}[b]{.66\linewidth}% \raisebox{\depth}{\fbox{\KOMAoptions{captions=oneline}% \begin{minipage}{.5\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule\relax} \centering \rule{4cm}{3cm} - \caption[Example: A rectangle]{A rectangle}\label{fig:maincls.rechteck} + \caption[Example: A rectangle]{A rectangle}\label{fig:\LabelBase.rechteck} \end{minipage}% \begin{minipage}{.5\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep-2\fboxrule\relax} \centering \captionaboveof{table}[Example: Measure of the rectangle in - figure~\ref{fig:maincls.rechteck}]{Rectangle size} - \label{tab:maincls.rechteck} + figure~\ref{fig:\LabelBase.rechteck}]{Rectangle size} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.rechteck} \begin{tabular}{ll} Width: & 4\,cm\\ Height: & 3\,cm @@ -3111,27 +3027,22 @@ environment around the \Environment{minipage} environment may be used, to have a pleasing distance above and below is and to avoid the paragraph indentation of the \Environment{minipage} environment.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionof}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionaboveof}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionbelowof}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% - \OParameter{offset}\\% - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionbeside}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}\OParameter{entry}% - \Parameter{title}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% - \OParameter{offset}\PValue{*}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionbeside} + \begin{Environment}{captionbeside}% + \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% + \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% + \OParameter{offset} + \end{Environment} + \labelsuffix[*]% + \begin{Environment}{captionbeside}% + \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% + \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% + \OParameter{offset}\PValue{*}% + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{captionbeside}% Apart\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} from captions above and below the figure, one often finds captions, in @@ -3143,7 +3054,7 @@ standard classes. However, {\KOMAScript} offers a special environment for this which can be used within the floating environment. The first optional parameter \PName{entry} and the obligatory parameter \PName{title} mean the same as the corresponding parameters of -\Macro{caption}, \Macro{captionabove} or \Macro{captionbelow}. The +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow}. The caption text \PName{title} is placed beside the content of the environment in this case. @@ -3159,8 +3070,8 @@ one of the following letters is allowed: Default setting is to the right of the content of the environment. This default\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} my be changed using option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions}\important{\Option{captions}} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions}) with values like +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}) with values like \PValue{innerbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{innerbeside}}, \PValue{leftbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{leftbeside}}, \PValue{outerbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{outerbeside}}, @@ -3193,8 +3104,8 @@ The default vertical alignment is bottom. This means that the bottommost base lines of the contents of the environment and of the caption are aligned. This setting\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} may be changed using option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions}) with value +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}) with value \PValue{topbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{topbeside}}, \PValue{centeredbeside}% \IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{centeredbeside}}, or @@ -3207,7 +3118,7 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. \begin{Example} An example for the usage of the \Environment{captionbeside} environment - can be found in \autoref{fig:maincls.captionbeside}. + can be found in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.captionbeside}. This figure was typeset with: \begin{lstcode} \begin{figure} @@ -3224,7 +3135,7 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. }% } \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:maincls.captionbeside} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.captionbeside} \end{figure} \end{lstcode} \begin{figure} @@ -3235,7 +3146,7 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. \parbox[b][5\baselineskip][c]{.25\textwidth}{% \hspace*{\fill}\KOMAScript\hspace*{\fill}\par}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:maincls.captionbeside} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.captionbeside} \end{figure} The total width is thus the currently available width \PValue{\Macro{linewidth}}. However, this width is shifted @@ -3248,8 +3159,8 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. problem at all, because \KOMAScript{} itself needs \eTeX{} and every almost up-to-date \LaTeX{} distribution uses \eTeX already. - \hyperref[fig:maincls.captionbesidecentered]% - {Figure~\ref*{fig:maincls.captionbesidecentered}} + \hyperref[fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidecentered]% + {Figure~\ref*{fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidecentered}} shows a centered caption with: \begin{lstcode} \KOMAoption{captions}{centeredbeside} @@ -3265,11 +3176,11 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. \parbox[b][5\baselineskip][c]{.25\textwidth}{% \hspace*{\fill}\KOMAScript\hspace*{\fill}\par}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:maincls.captionbesidecentered} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidecentered} \end{figure} In opposite to the centered example, the top aligned from - \autoref{fig:maincls.captionbesidetop} may be used. To show how to change + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidetop} may be used. To show how to change the baseline using \Macro{raisebox}, the complete example code follows: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[captions=topbeside]{scrbook} @@ -3291,7 +3202,7 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. \includegraphics{examplepicture}% }% \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:maincls.captionbesidetop} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidetop} \end{figure} \end{document} \end{lstcode} @@ -3307,48 +3218,44 @@ e.\,g., using \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox}. \hspace*{\fill}\KOMAScript\hspace*{\fill}\par}}% }% \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:maincls.captionbesidetop} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.captionbesidetop} \end{figure} You may use such a movement not only at graphics replacements like show, but also using \Macro{includegraphics} (see \cite{package:graphics}). \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Env}{captionbeside} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{captionofbeside}}% - \Parameter{float type}% - \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}}% - \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% - \OParameter{offset}\\% - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionofbeside}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}\Parameter{float type}% - \OParameter{entry}% - \Parameter{title}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}}% - \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% - \OParameter{offset}\PValue{*}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionofbeside} + \begin{Environment}{captionofbeside}% + \Parameter{float type}% + \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% + \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% + \OParameter{offset} + \end{Environment} + \labelsuffix[*]% + \begin{Environment}{captionofbeside}% + \Parameter{float type}% + \OParameter{entry}\Parameter{title}% + \OParameter{placement}\OParameter{width}% + \OParameter{offset}\PValue{*}% + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{captionofbeside}% This\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} environment corresponds to \Environment{captionbeside} -in the same manner like \Macro{captionof} corresponds to -\Macro{caption}. The float type is not defined by a floating environment but -by the first mandatory argument.% + \Class{scrartcl}} environment corresponds to +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} in the same manner like +\Macro{captionof} corresponds to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}. The float +type is not defined by a floating environment but by the first mandatory +argument.% % -\EndIndex{Env}{captionofbeside}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \FloatStyle{komaabove}\\ + \FloatStyle{komaabove}% \FloatStyle{komabelow} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Floatstyle}{komaabove}% -\BeginIndex{Floatstyle}{komabelow}% If you use\OnlyAt{\Package{float}} the \Package{float}\IndexPackage{float} package the appearance of the float environments is solely defined by the \emph{float} style. This includes whether captions above or below are used. In @@ -3359,18 +3266,16 @@ and \PValue{komabelow}. When using the \Package{float} package these styles can be activated just like the styles \PValue{plain}\IndexFloatstyle{plain}, \PValue{boxed}\IndexFloatstyle{boxed} or \PValue{ruled}\IndexFloatstyle{ruled} defined in \Package{float}. For details refer to \cite{package:float}. The -style \PValue{komaabove} inserts \Macro{caption}, \Macro{captionabove} and -\Macro{captionbelow} above, whereas \PValue{komabelow} inserts them below the +style \PValue{komaabove} inserts \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow} above, whereas \PValue{komabelow} inserts them below the float content. % -\EndIndex{Floatstyle}{komaabove}% -\EndIndex{Floatstyle}{komabelow}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{captionformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionformat}% In {\KOMAScript} there are different ways to change the formatting of the caption text. The definition of different font styles was already explained above. This or the caption delimiter between the label and @@ -3392,26 +3297,23 @@ This too can be changed with \Macro{renewcommand}. This definition should be put in the preamble of your document. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{figureformat}\\ + \Macro{figureformat}% \Macro{tableformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{figureformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tableformat}% -It was already mentioned that \Macro{captionformat} does not contain -formatting for the label itself. This situation should under no -circumstances be changed using redefinitions of the commands for the -output of counters, \Macro{thefigure} or \Macro{thetable}. Such a -redefinition would have unwanted side effects on the output of -\Macro{ref} or the table of contents, list of figures and list of -tables. To deal with the situation, {\KOMAScript} offers two -\Macro{\dots format} commands instead. These are predefined as -follows: +It was already mentioned that \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionformat} does not +contain formatting for the label itself. This situation should under no +circumstances be changed using redefinitions of the commands for the output of +counters, \Macro{thefigure} or \Macro{thetable}. Such a redefinition would +have unwanted side effects on the output of \Macro{ref} or the table of +contents, list of figures and list of tables. To deal with the situation, +{\KOMAScript} offers two \Macro{\dots format} commands instead. These are +predefined as follows: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\figureformat}{\figurename~\thefigure\autodot} \newcommand*{\tableformat}{\tablename~\thetable\autodot} \end{lstcode} @@ -3432,18 +3334,14 @@ They also can be adapted to your personal preferences with \Environment{figure} or \Environment{table} environments. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{figureformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tableformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setcapindent}\Parameter{indent}\\ - \Macro{setcapindent*}\Parameter{xindent}\\ + \Macro{setcapindent}\Parameter{indent}% + \Macro{setcapindent*}\Parameter{xindent}% \Macro{setcaphanging} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcaphanging}% As mentioned previously, in the standard classes the captions are set in a non-hanging style, that is, in multi-line captions the second and subsequent lines start directly beneath the label. The standard @@ -3465,14 +3363,15 @@ caption text but not subsequent lines are indented by the absolute value of \PName{indent}. Whether one-line captions are set as captions with more than one line or are -treated separately is specified with the option \Option{captions}. For details -please refer to the explanations of these option at -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.oneline}. +treated separately is specified with the option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}. For details please refer to the +explanations of these option at +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.oneline}. \begin{Example} For the examples please refer to - figures~\ref{fig:maincls.caption.first} to - \ref{fig:maincls.caption.last}. As you can see the usage of a fully + figures~\ref{fig:\LabelBase.caption.first} to + \ref{fig:\LabelBase.caption.last}. As you can see the usage of a fully hanging indentation is not advantageous when combined with narrow column width. To illustrate, the source code for the second figure is given here with a modified caption text: @@ -3500,7 +3399,7 @@ of the document. This also of course applies to tables. \caption[Example: Default figure caption]% {\sloppy Equivalent to the standard setting, similar to the usage of \Macro{setcaphanging}} - \label{fig:maincls.caption.first} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.caption.first} \end{minipage} \hspace{.02\linewidth} \begin{minipage}[t]{.48\linewidth}\sloppy @@ -3532,7 +3431,7 @@ of the document. This also of course applies to tables. {With indentation in the second line only and line break before the description using \Macro{setcapindent}\PParameter{-1em}} - \label{fig:maincls.caption.last} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.caption.last} \end{minipage} \end{minipage} \typeout{^^J--- Don't ignore underfull and overfull @@ -3540,21 +3439,15 @@ of the document. This also of course applies to tables. \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcaphanging}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setcapwidth}\OParameter{justification}\Parameter{width}\\ - \Macro{setcapdynwidth}\OParameter{justification}\Parameter{width}\\ - \Macro{setcapmargin}\OParameter{margin left}\Parameter{margin}\\ + \Macro{setcapwidth}\OParameter{justification}\Parameter{width}% + \Macro{setcapdynwidth}\OParameter{justification}\Parameter{width}% + \Macro{setcapmargin}\OParameter{margin left}\Parameter{margin}% \Macro{setcapmargin*}\OParameter{margin inside}\Parameter{margin} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapdynwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin*}% Using\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% \Class{scrbook}\and\Class{scrreprt}\and\Class{scrartcl}} these three commands you can specify the width and justification of the caption @@ -3601,9 +3494,10 @@ case of \Package{longtable}\IndexPackage{longtable}% \important{\Package{longtable}} tables you have to deal with the same problem with justification inside or outside as mentioned with the macro \Macro{setcapwidth}. Furthermore, the usage of \Macro{setcapmargin} or -\Macro{setcapmargin*} switches on the option \OptionValue{captions}{nooneline} -(see \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.nooneline}) for the captions -which are typeset with this margin setting. +\Macro{setcapmargin*} switches on the option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{nooneline} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.nooneline}) for the captions which are +typeset with this margin setting. You\textnote{Hint!} can also submit negative values for \PName{margin} and \PName{margin left} or \PName{margin inside}. This has the effect of the @@ -3614,51 +3508,48 @@ Experts\textnote{Hint!} and advanced users may find a tricky usage of \iffree{\cite{book:komascript}}{\autoref{cha:floattricks}, \autopageref{cha:floattricks}}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin*}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Option{origlongtable} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{origlongtable}% \BeginIndex{Package}{longtable}% If the table captions produced by the \Package{longtable} package (see \cite{package:longtable}) should not be redefined by the {\KOMAScript} classes, activate the \Option{origlongtable} option. This\textnote{Attention!} -option has to be used at the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass}. It -may not be used as a setting of \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoptions}. +option has to be used at the optional argument of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}. It may not be used as a setting of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}. % -\EndIndex{Package}{longtable}% -\EndIndex{Option}{origlongtable}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{listof}\PName{setting} + \OptionVName{listof}{setting} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{tables>list of}\BeginIndex{}{list of>tables}% \BeginIndex{}{figures>list of}\BeginIndex{}{list of>figures}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{listof~=\PName{setting}}% Normally\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} lists of floating environments\,---\,like list of -tables or list of -figures will neither get an -entry at the table of contents nor have a number at the heading. More -information about that may be found in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}. Alternative -to the view from the table of contents to the lists of floating environments, -you may reconsider a view from the lists of floating environments into the -table of contents. Because of this, there are not only the options -\OptionValue{toc}{nolistof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nolistof}}, -\OptionValue{toc}{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listof}}, and -\OptionValue{toc}{listofnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listofnumbered}} -described in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.listof}, but also -\OptionValue{listof}{notoc}, \OptionValue{listof}{totoc}, and + \Class{scrartcl}} lists of floating environments\,---\,like list of tables +or list of figures will neither get an entry at the table of contents nor have +a number at the heading. More information about that may be found in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}. Alternative to the view from the table of +contents to the lists of floating environments, you may reconsider a view from +the lists of floating environments into the table of contents. Because of +this, there are not only the options +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{nolistof}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nolistof}}, +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listof}}, +and \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{listofnumbered}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listofnumbered}} described in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.listof}, but +also \OptionValue{listof}{notoc}, \OptionValue{listof}{totoc}, and \OptionValue{listof}{numbered} with the same meaning. By default the headings of the lists of floating environments use the topmost -level below \Macro{part}. This is the chapter level at \Class{scrbook} and -\Class{scrreprt} and the section level at +level below \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}. This is the chapter level at +\Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} and the section level at \Class{scrartcl}. With\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}} a @@ -3677,8 +3568,9 @@ one step lower level will be used instead. \listoftables \end{lstcode} for the new list, that contains the list of figures and the list of - tables. More information about the command \Macro{addchap*} may be found in - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} at \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*}. + tables. More information about the command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} + may be found in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure} at + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*}. \end{Example} Normally\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% @@ -3693,13 +3585,14 @@ have a lot of tables or figures\,---\, their may be not enough width predefined. There's\important{\OptionValue{listof}{flat}} a setting \OptionValue{listof}{flat}\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{flat}} for the lists of floating environment similar to -\OptionValue{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{flat}} for the table of -contents. Thereby the needed with for printing the number will be determined -at each \LaTeX{} run. See option \OptionValue{toc}{flat}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.flat} for -information about how it works. Please\textnote{Attention!} note again, that -you need more than one \LaTeX{} runs until the lists of floating environments -will become their final result. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{flat}} for the +table of contents. Thereby the needed with for printing the number will be +determined at each \LaTeX{} run. See option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat}, \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.flat} for information about how it +works. Please\textnote{Attention!} note again, that you need more than one +\LaTeX{} runs until the lists of floating environments will become their final +result. Setting \OptionValue{listof}{entryprefix}\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} will automatically activate @@ -3740,18 +3633,19 @@ gap it adds the table of contents entry for the chapter additionally to the lists of floating environments. Please\textnote{Attention!} note, that this would also happen, if the chapter does not have any floating environment. Additional influence of chapters to the lists of floating -environments is available with option \Option{chapteratlists}. See -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists} for more information about +environments is available with option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists}. See +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} for more information about that. An overview about all settings to option \Option{listof} may be found at -\autoref{tab:maincls.listof}. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.listof}. \begin{desclist} \desccaption[{Available values for option \Option{listof}}]{% Available values for option \Option{listof} to modify contents and - formation of the lists of floating environments\label{tab:maincls.listof}% + formation of the lists of floating environments\label{tab:\LabelBase.listof}% }{% Available values for option \Option{listof} (\emph{continuation})% }% @@ -3810,45 +3704,43 @@ An overview about all settings to option \Option{listof} may be found at \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{totoc}}}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{listof~=\PName{setting}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{listoftables}\\ + \Macro{listoftables}% \Macro{listoffigures} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftables}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoffigures}% +\BeginIndex{}{tables>list of}\BeginIndex{}{list of>tables}% +\BeginIndex{}{figures>list of}\BeginIndex{}{list of>figures}% These commands generate a list of tables or figures. Changes in the document that modify these lists will require two {\LaTeX} runs in order to take effect. The layout of the lists can be influenced by the option -\Option{listof}\important{\Option{listof}} with values \PValue{graduated} or -\PValue{flat} (see \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof}). Moreover, the -values \PValue{listof} and \PValue{listofnumbered} of option -\Option{toc}\important{\Option{toc}} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}) as well -as the values \PValue{totoc} and \PValue{numbered} of the previous described -option \Option{listof} have influence to the lists of floating environments. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}} +with values \PValue{graduated} or \PValue{flat} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}). Moreover, the values \PValue{listof} +and \PValue{listofnumbered} of option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}} +(see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}) as well as the values \PValue{totoc} and +\PValue{numbered} of the previous described option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} have influence to the lists of floating +environments. Mostly\textnote{Hint!} the lists of floating environment may be found after the table of contents. But some publishers like to have these lists at the appendix. Nevertheless the author of this guide prefers to find them immediately after the table of contents.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftables}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoffigures}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{figures>list of}\EndIndex{}{list of>figures}% -\EndIndex{}{tables>list of}\EndIndex{}{list of>tables}% -% -\EndIndex{}{figures}% -\EndIndex{}{tables}% -\EndIndex{}{floats} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{13}% \section{Margin Notes} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Margin Notes} \section{Appendix} \seclabel{appendix} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{appendix} The appendix of a document contains mainly the enclosures to the @@ -3862,33 +3754,35 @@ should also be part of the appendix. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{appendix} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{appendix}% The appendix in the standard as well as the {\KOMAScript} classes is introduced with \Macro{appendix}. This command switches, among other things, the chapter numbering to upper case letters, also ensuring that the rules according to \cite{DUDEN} are followed (for German-speaking regions). These rules are explained in more detail in the description of the option -\Option{numbers} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}. Die output of the chapter headings\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} in the appendix are influenced by the options -\Option{chapterprefix} and \Option{appendixprefix}. See -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix} for more information. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}. See +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} for more information. Please\textnote{Attention!} note that \Macro{appendix} is a command, \emph{not} an environment! This command does not expect any -argument. Chapters and sections in the appendix uses \Macro{chapter} and -\Macro{section} just as does the main text.% +argument. Chapters and sections in the appendix uses +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section} just as +does the main text.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{appendix}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{appendix} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Bibliography} \seclabel{bibliography} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{bibliography} The bibliography opens up external resources. Mainly bibliographies will be @@ -3904,9 +3798,8 @@ may be found in \cite{lshort}. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{bibliography}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{bibliography}{selection} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{bibliography~=\PName{selection}}% For a start, \PName{selection}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} may be any already defined bibliography formation style. There are two predefined formation styles at @@ -3921,7 +3814,7 @@ Option\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}} \OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{oldstyle}} selects a compact formation of the bibliography entries. In this case command -\Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} inside of the entries will only result in +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} inside of the entries will only result in a small horizontal distance. The name is a result of the fact, that this is the mostly used classic kind of bibliography. In opposite to this\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} @@ -3930,12 +3823,12 @@ this\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}. selects a more modern and open kind of bibliography. The name is a result of the fact, that command -\Macro{newblock} inserts a paragraph break. The entries will be more +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock} inserts a paragraph break. The entries will be more structured by this. They are less compact and seem more relaxed or open. Information about definition of new formation styles may be found in -description of command \Macro{newbibstyle} in +description of command \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts} at -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}. +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}. Beside the formation style one more feature may be selected using \PName{selection}. The bibliography is a kind of contents list. But instead of @@ -3956,10 +3849,10 @@ the table of contents. A entry without number may be set with option neither a number nor an entry to the table of contents and corresponds to \OptionValue{bibliography}{nottotoc}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{nottotoc}}. For more information see option -\Option{toc} in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, especially values +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, especially values \PValue{bibliographynumbered}, \PValue{bibliography}, and \PValue{nobibliography} to this option at -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.bibliography}. +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.bibliography}. Sometimes\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} it is not usefull to have one bibliography for the whole @@ -3973,15 +3866,15 @@ combine several lists and the bibliography together below one heading. So this option is also available with \Class{scrartcl}. A summary of all available values for option \Option{bibliography} may be -found in \autoref{tab:maincls.bibliography}. Nevertheless you should note, +found in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.bibliography}. Nevertheless you should note, that additional values may be generated using -\Macro{newbibstyle}\IndexCmd{newbibstyle}. +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}\IndexCmd{newbibstyle}. \begin{table} \caption[{Available values of option \Option{bibliography}}]{% Predefined values of option \Option{bibliography} to select the formation of the bibliography} - \label{tab:maincls.bibliography} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.bibliography} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{leveldown}{% \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and @@ -3995,12 +3888,13 @@ that additional values may be generated using \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{nottotoc}}}% \pventry{oldstyle}{% The bibliography will use the classic, compact formation, where - \Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} generates an expandable - horizontal distance only.% + \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} generates an + expandable horizontal distance only.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{oldstyle}}}% \pventry{openstyle}{% The bibliography will use the structured, open formation, where - \Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} generates a paragraph break.% + \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} generates a + paragraph break.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}}% \pventry{totoc}{% The bibliography will have an entry at the table of contents but no @@ -4013,25 +3907,25 @@ that additional values may be generated using \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{bibliography~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setbibpreamble}\Parameter{preamble} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setbibpreamble}% The command \Macro{setbibpreamble} can be used to set a preamble for the bibliography\Index{bibliography}. This can be achieved by placing the preamble before the command for issuing the bibliography. However, it need not be directly in front of it. For example, it could be placed at the beginning of the document. Similar\textnote{Attention!} to the options -\OptionValue{bibliography}{totoc} and -\OptionValue{bibliography}{totocnumbered}, this command can only be successful -if you have not loaded a package which prevents this by redefining the -\Environment{thebibliography} environment. Even though the \Package{natbib} -package\IndexPackage{natbib} makes unauthorized use of internal macros of -{\KOMAScript} it could be achieved that \Macro{setbibpreamble} works with the -current version of \Package{natbib} (see \cite{package:natbib}). +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{bibliography}{totoc} and +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{bibliography}{totocnumbered}, this command can +only be successful if you have not loaded a package which prevents this by +redefining the \Environment{thebibliography} environment. Even though the +\Package{natbib} package\IndexPackage{natbib} makes unauthorized use of +internal macros of {\KOMAScript} it could be achieved that +\Macro{setbibpreamble} works with the current version of \Package{natbib} (see +\cite{package:natbib}). \begin{Example} You want to point out that the sorting of the references in the bibliography is not according to their occurrence in the text, but @@ -4046,32 +3940,30 @@ current version of \Package{natbib} (see \cite{package:natbib}). space.% \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setbibpreamble} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{BreakBibliography}\Parameter{interruption code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BreakBibliography}% This\textnote{Attention!}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} command exists only if the environment \Environment{thebibliography} has not been redefined by another package. It provides a break at the bibliography. The \PName{interruption code} will be expanded inside a group. Such a break may be, e.\,g., a -heading using \Macro{minisec}. Unfortunately it is not possible to add this -command to the \BibTeX{} database using, e.\,g., a special kind of \BibTeX{} -entry. Because of this, users may use is currently only if they make the -bibliography on their own. Because of this usage is very limited.% +heading using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.minisec}. Unfortunately it is not +possible to add this command to the \BibTeX{} database using, e.\,g., a +special kind of \BibTeX{} entry. Because of this, users may use is currently +only if they make the bibliography on their own. Because of this usage is very +limited.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BreakBibliography}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\Parameter{code}\\ + \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\Parameter{code}% \Macro{AtEndBibliography}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterBibliographyPreamble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndBibliography}% In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} some cases it may be useful to add some \PName{code} after the bibliography preamble or just before the end of the bibliography. This may be achieved @@ -4089,16 +3981,16 @@ using one of this instructions. The\textnote{Attention!} functionality of this instruction depends on cooperation with packages modifying the bibliography, if such a package should be used (see \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}).% +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}).% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndBibliography}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterBibliographyPreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{bibliography} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Index} \seclabel{index} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{index} For general information about making an index see \cite{lshort}, @@ -4109,9 +4001,8 @@ index hardly. This would be valid, e.\,g., for usage of package \Package{splitidx}\IndexPackage{splitidx} (see \cite{package:splitindex}). \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{index}\PName{selection}% + \OptionVName{index}{selection}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{index~=\PName{selection}}% \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% The index is chapter (\Class{scrbook} or \Class{scrreprt}) or section (\Class{scrartcl}) without heading number or entry at the table of contents by @@ -4124,16 +4015,16 @@ document. Nevertheless, such an entry may be achieved using option You\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} can even number the index using option \OptionValue{index}{numbered}\IndexOption{index~=\PValue{numbered}}. See also -option \Option{toc} with value \PValue{index} or \PValue{indexnumbered} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.toc} from \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.index} -onward. +option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} with value \PValue{index} or +\PValue{indexnumbered} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc} from +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.index} onward. A summary of all available values for option \Option{index} may be found in -\autoref{tab:maincls.index}. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.index}. \begin{table} \caption{Available values of option \Option{index}}% - \label{tab:maincls.index} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.index} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{default}, \PValue{nottotoc}, \PValue{plainheading}}{% The index will not have an entry at the table of contents.% @@ -4151,13 +4042,12 @@ A summary of all available values for option \Option{index} may be found in \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{index~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setindexpreamble}\Parameter{preamble} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setindexpreamble}% Similarly to the bibliography you can use a preamble to the index. This is often the case if you have more than one index or if you use different kinds of referencing by highlighting the page @@ -4174,24 +4064,24 @@ numbers in different ways. \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -Please note that the page style of the first page of the index is -changed. The applied page style is defined in the macro -\Macro{indexpagestyle} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +Please note that the page style of the first page of the index is changed. The +applied page style is defined in the macro +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle}). The production, sorting and output of the index is done by the standard {\LaTeX} packages and additional programs. Similar to the standard classes {\KOMAScript} only provides the basic macros and environments.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setindexpreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{index} +\EndIndexGroup % % -\EndIndex{Class}{scrbook}% -\EndIndex{Class}{scrreprt}% -\EndIndex{Class}{scrartcl}% +\EndIndexGroup + \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrdatetime.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrdatetime.tex index f64ee91d37d..2cd16e0229d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrdatetime.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrdatetime.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrdatetime.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrdatetime.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,14 +46,15 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrdatetime.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrdate, scrtime)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug} -% Date of translated German file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{The Day of the Week Using \Package{scrdate}} \labelbase{scrdate} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrdate} With version~3.05a the functionality of this package enhanced a lot. Beside of @@ -64,8 +65,6 @@ day of the week of every date of the Gregorian calendar now. \Macro{CenturyPart}\Parameter{year}\\% \Macro{DecadePart}\Parameter{year}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{CenturyPart}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DecadePart}% The\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} command \Macro{CenturyPart} offers the value of the century digits\,---\,hundreds and thousands\,---\,of a \PName{year}. The command \Macro{DecadePart} in difference offers the other @@ -73,8 +72,7 @@ digits which are the units and tens. The number of digits of \PName{year} does not care. The value may be assigned to a counter or may be used for calculations, i.\,e., using \Macro{numexpr}\IndexCmd{numexpr}. For output\textnote{Attention!} of an Arabic number of the value prefix it with -\Macro{the} -\IndexCmd{the}. +\Macro{the}\IndexCmd{the}. \begin{Example} You want to calculate and output the century of the current year. @@ -94,15 +92,13 @@ output\textnote{Attention!} of an Arabic number of the value prefix it with Please\textnote{Attention!} note, that within used method of counting the year~2000 is the year~0\,---\,and therefore the first year\,---\,of the 21st~century.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DecadePart}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{CenturyPart}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DayNumber}\Parameter{year}\Parameter{month}\Parameter{day}\\% \Macro{ISODayNumber}\Parameter{ISO-date}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayNumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISODayNumber}% These\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} two commands offers the value of the number of the day of the week\Index{day>of the week} of any date. The differ only in the kind of date declaration. Command \Macro{DayNumber} needs @@ -151,8 +147,7 @@ date. The days of the week are numbered: Sunday\,=\,0, Monday\,=\,1, Tuesday\,=\,2, Wednesday\,=\,3, Thursday\,=\,4, Friday\,=\,5, and Saturday\,=\,6.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayNumber}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISODayNumber}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} @@ -160,9 +155,6 @@ Wednesday\,=\,3, Thursday\,=\,4, Friday\,=\,5, and Saturday\,=\,6.% \Macro{DayName}\Parameter{year}\Parameter{month}\Parameter{day}\\% \Macro{ISODayName}\Parameter{ISO-date}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayNameByNumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISODayName}% Usually\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} you do not want to know the number of the day of the week, but the name of the day of the week. Because of this, the command \Macro{DayNameByNumber} offers the name of the day of the week @@ -208,21 +200,15 @@ Again a special feature is to make some calculations inside the argument of \end{quote} \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISODayName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayNameByNumber}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ISOToday}\\% - \Macro{IsoToday}\\ - \Macro{todaysname}\\% + \Macro{ISOToday}% + \Macro{IsoToday}% + \Macro{todaysname}% \Macro{todaysnumber}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{todaysname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{todaysnumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISOToday}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IsoToday}% In the prior examples the current date have been given cumbersomely and explicitly using the \TeX{} registers \Macro{year}\IndexCmd{year}, \Macro{month}\IndexCmd{month}, and \Macro{day}\IndexCmd{day}. The commands @@ -234,7 +220,7 @@ numbers less than 10 for the month and day with a 0. In opposite to this digit only. Command \Macro{todaysname} directly offers the name of the current day of the week. Command \Macro{todaysnumber} offers the number of that name instead. More information about usability of this value may be found at -previous description of \Macro{DayNumber} and \Macro{ISODayNumber}. +previous description of \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNumber} and \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber}. \begin{Example} I want to show you the name of the weekday in which this document has been @@ -263,32 +249,28 @@ only for some languages. \Macro{MakeLowercase}\IndexCmd{MakeLowercase}% \important{\Macro{MakeLowercase}}, e.\,g.: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \MakeLowercase{\todaysname} \end{lstcode} This converts the whole argument into lower case letters. Of course, this may be done also using previous described commands - \Macro{DayNameByNumber}\IndexCmd{DayNameByNumber}, - \Macro{DayName}\IndexCmd{DayName} and - \Macro{ISODayName}\IndexCmd{ISODayName}.% + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber}\IndexCmd{DayNameByNumber}, + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayName}\IndexCmd{DayName} and + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayName}\IndexCmd{ISODayName}.% \end{Explain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IsoToday}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISOToday}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{todaysnumber}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{todaysname} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{nameday}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{nameday}% Analogous to how the output of \Macro{today} can be modified using -\Macro{date}\IndexCmd{date}, so the output of \Macro{todaysname} can -be changed to \PName{name} by using \Macro{nameday}. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.date}\IndexCmd{date}, so the output of \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.todaysname} +can be changed to \PName{name} by using \Macro{nameday}. \begin{Example} - You change the current date to a fixed value using \Macro{date}. You - are not interested in the actual name of the day, but want only to - show that it is a workday. So you set: + You change the current date to a fixed value using + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.date}. You are not interested in the actual name of + the day, but want only to show that it is a workday. So you set: \begin{lstlisting} \nameday{workday} \end{lstlisting} @@ -298,21 +280,19 @@ be changed to \PName{name} by using \Macro{nameday}. \end{quote} \end{Example} There's no such command for changing the result of -\Macro{ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} or \Macro{IsoToday}\IndexCmd{IsoToday}. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{nameday} +\DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} or \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.IsoToday}\IndexCmd{IsoToday}. +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newdaylanguage}\Parameter{language}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newdaylanguage}}% - \Parameter{Monday}\Parameter{Tuesday}\Parameter{Wednesday}% - \Parameter{Thursday}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newdaylanguage}}% - \Parameter{Friday}\Parameter{Saturday}\Parameter{Sunday}% + \Macro{newdaylanguage}\Parameter{language}% + \Parameter{Monday}\Parameter{Tuesday}% + \Parameter{Wednesday}\Parameter{Thursday}% + \Parameter{Friday}\Parameter{Saturday} + \Parameter{Sunday}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newdaylanguage} Currently the package \Package{scrdate} knows the following languages: -\begin{itemize} +\begin{itemize}\setlength{\itemsep}{.5\itemsep} \item Croatian (\PValue{croatian}), \item Czech (\PValue{czech}\ChangedAt{v3.13}{\Package{scrdate}}), \item Danish (\PValue{danish}), @@ -356,13 +336,14 @@ correct language will be used. By the way: If you found a suitable definition for a language, that has not been defined before, please mail it to the \KOMAScript{} author. There is a good chance, that he will add support for the language to \Package{scrdate}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newdaylanguage}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrdate} +\EndIndexGroup \chapter{Getting the Time with Package \Package{scrtime}} \labelbase{scrtime} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrtime} This package provides an answer to the question of the current time. Since @@ -371,10 +352,9 @@ the \KOMAScript{} classes and several other \KOMAScript{} packages. See for example \autoref{sec:typearea.options} for more information. \begin{Declaration}% - \Macro{thistime}\OParameter{delimiter}\\ + \Macro{thistime}\OParameter{delimiter}% \Macro{thistime*}\OParameter{delimiter} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thistime}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thistime*}% \Macro{thistime} results in the current time\Index{time}. The delimiter between the values of hour, minutes and seconds can be given in the optional argument. The default symbol of the delimiter is @@ -412,46 +392,47 @@ minute field has always two places. This day is already 12 hours and 25 minutes old. \end{quote} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thistime}\EndIndex{Cmd}{thistime*} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration}% \Macro{settime}\Parameter{time} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{settime}% -\Macro{settime} sets the output of \Macro{thistime} and -\Macro{thistime*} to the value \PName{time}. Now the optional -parameter of \Macro{thistime} or \Macro{thistime*} is ignored, since -the result of \Macro{thistime} or \Macro{thistime*} was completely +\Macro{settime} sets the output of \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} and +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} to the value \PName{time}. Now the optional +parameter of \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} or \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} is ignored, since +the result of \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} or \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} was completely determined using \Macro{settime}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{settime} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{12h}\PName{simple-switch}% + \OptionVName{12h}{simple-switch}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{12h~=\PName{simple switch}}% \BeginIndex{Option}{24h}% With option \Option{12h}\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrtime}} one can select -whether the result of \Macro{thistime} and \Macro{thistime*} is in 12- or in +whether the result of \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} and \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} is in 12- or in 24-hour format. The option understands the values for simple-switch listed in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. The option without a value is same like \OptionValue{12h}{true} and therefore 12-hour-format will be used. The default is \Option{24h}. You may use this option either as a global option in the optional argument of -\Macro{documentclass}, as a package option in the optional argument of -\Macro{usepackage} or after loading the package using \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} (see, e.\,g., \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}). The option has no effect on the -results of \Macro{thistime} and \Macro{thistime*} if \Macro{settime} is used. +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.documentclass}, as a package option in the optional +argument of \DescRef{typearea.cmd.usepackage} or after loading the package +using \DescRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoption} +(see, e.\,g., \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}). The option has no effect on the +results of \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} and \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} +if \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.settime} is used. Only\textnote{Attention!} for compatibility with former releases of \Package{scrtime} also option \Option{24h} will switch to 24-hour format if used in the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass} or \Macro{usepackage}. Nevertheless, you should not use this option any longer.% -\EndIndex{Option}{24h}% -\EndIndex{Option}{12h~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrtime} +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrextend.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrextend.tex index 90a7b16a54a..60fec425f50 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrextend.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrextend.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrextend.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrextend.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,15 +46,17 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrextend.tex} - [$Date: 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 (Mon, 24 Aug 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script package scrextend] \translator{Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-08-24 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 -\chapter{Making Basic Feature of the \KOMAScript{} Classes Available with - Package \Package{scrextend} while Using Other Classes} +\chapter[{\KOMAScript{} Features for other Classes with Package + \Package{scrextend}}]{Making Basic Feature of the \KOMAScript{} Classes + Available with Package \Package{scrextend} while Using Other Classes} \labelbase{scrextend} +\BeginIndexGroup% \BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend}% There are several features, that are shared by all \KOMAScript{} classes. This @@ -97,9 +99,9 @@ designed to be used by authors of classes and packages too. Because of this you may use \Package{tocbasic} together with \Package{scrextend}.% \fi -\LoadCommon{0}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} -\LoadCommon{1}% \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of \KOMAScript} \section{Optional, Extended Features} @@ -111,14 +113,13 @@ additionally. These features are optional, i.\,e., because the conflict with features of the standard classes of often used packages. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{extendedfeature}\PName{feature} + \OptionVName{extendedfeature}{feature} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{extendedfeature~=\PName{feature}}% With this option an extended \PName{feature} of \Package{scrextend} may be activated. Option \Option{extendedfeature} is available only while loading the package \Package{scrextend}. User have to set the option in the optional -argument of \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{optional - argument}\PParameter{scrextend}. +argument of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}\OParameter{optional + argument}\PParameter{scrextend}. % \iffree{% An overview of all available optional features is shown in \autoref{tab:scrextend.optionalFeatures}. @@ -129,12 +130,13 @@ argument of \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{optional features of \Package{scrextend}} \label{tab:scrextend.optionalFeatures} \begin{desctabular} - \entry{\PName{title}}{% - extends the title pages to the features of the \KOMAScript{} classes; - this means not only the commands for the title page but also option - \Option{titlepage} (see \autoref{sec:scrextend.titlepage}, from - \autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage})% - }% + \entry{\PName{title}}{% + extends the title pages to the features of the \KOMAScript{} classes; + this means not only the commands for the title page but also option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage} (see + \autoref{sec:scrextend.titlepage}, from + \autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage})% + }% \end{desctabular} \end{table} }{% @@ -149,24 +151,18 @@ argument of \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{optional pages.% }% % -\EndIndex{Option}{extendedfeature~=\PName{feature}}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{2}% \section{Draft Mode} - -\section{Selection of the Document Font Size} -\LoadCommon{4}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{size}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{font>size} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode}% \section{Draft Mode} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize}% -\LoadCommon{5}% \section{Text Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Text Markup} -\LoadCommon{14} %\section{Document Title Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{titles}% \section{Document Title Pages} -\LoadCommon{7}% \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} \section{Head and Foot Using Predefined Page Styles} \seclabel{pagestyle} @@ -180,30 +176,30 @@ style, but it uses and expects the definition some page styles. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{titlepagestyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}% \Index{title>page style}% Some pages have a different page style automatically selected using -\Macro{thispagestyle}. With \Package{scrextend} this will be used currently -for the page with the in-page title if and only if option -\OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} has been used (see +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}. With \Package{scrextend} this will be +used currently for the page with the in-page title if and only if option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} has been used (see \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, -\autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). In this case the page -style stored at \Macro{thispagestyle} will be used. Default for -\Macro{thispagestyle} is \Pagestyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. This page -style is predefined by the \LaTeX{} kernel. So it should be available always.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}% +\DescPageRef{scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). In this case the page style +stored at \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} will be used. Default for +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} is +\PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. This page style is predefined by the +\LaTeX{} kernel. So it should be available always.% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{8}% \section{Interleaf Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Interleaf Pages} -\LoadCommon{9}% \section{Footnotes} +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Footnotes} -\LoadCommon{15}% \section{Dicta} +\LoadCommonFile{dictum}% \section{Dicta} -\LoadCommon{12}% \section{Lists} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Lists} -\LoadCommon{13}% \section{Margin Notes} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Margin Notes} % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrextend}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrhack.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrhack.tex index 7fb2c10f8f0..74161efd9ac 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrhack.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrhack.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrhack.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrhack.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,14 +46,15 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrhack.tex} - [$Date: 2015-07-08 10:27:58 +0200 (Wed, 08 Jul 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrhack)] \translator{Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-07-08 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Hacks for Third-Party Packages by Package \Package{scrhack}} \labelbase{scrhack} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrhack} Some packages from other authors could have problems with \KOMAScript{}. In my opinion some packages could be improved. With some packages this makes only @@ -81,7 +82,7 @@ foreign packages and will never be finished. Because of this \Package{scrhack} will stay in beta state forever. Though the usage will generally be a benefit, the correct function could not be guaranteed forever. -\LoadCommon{0} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} \section{Usage of \Package{tocbasic}} \seclabel{improvement} @@ -117,17 +118,18 @@ lists. Usage of this package provides much more advantages and features than the two old commands that have been mentioned above. Though the effort using that package is very small, the authors of most of the -packages, that are using the old interface, have not done so currently. Because -of this \Package{scrhack} contains appropriate modifications of packages +packages, that are using the old interface, have not done so +currently. Because of this \Package{scrhack} contains appropriate +modifications of packages \Package{float}\IndexPackage{float}\important{\Package{float}, \Package{floatrow}, \Package{listings}}, \Package{floatrow}\IndexPackage{floatrow}, and \Package{listings}\IndexPackage{listings}. Loading \Package{scrhack} is enough to make these packages recognize not only setting of \KOMAScript{} option -\Option{listof}\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{setting}}, but also language -switching of package \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}. More information -about the features provided by the changeover to package \Package{tocbasic} -can be found in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}. +\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{setting}}, but also +language switching of package \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}. More +information about the features provided by the changeover to package +\Package{tocbasic} can be found in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}. If the modification for any of the packages is not wanted or causes problems, then it can be deactivated selectively with option @@ -170,12 +172,12 @@ load \Package{scrhack} before it. \seclabel{hyperref} Before version~6.79h package \Package{hyperref} set the link anchors after -instead of before the heading of star version commands like \Macro{part*}, -\Macro{chapter*}, and so on. In the meantime this problem have been solved at -the \KOMAScript{} author's suggestion. But because the \KOMAScript{} author -was not patient enough to wait more than a year for the change of -\Package{hyperref}, a corresponding patch has been added to -\Package{scrhack}. This can be deactivated by +instead of before the heading of star version commands like +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.part*}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}, and so on. In +the meantime this problem have been solved at the \KOMAScript{} author's +suggestion. But because the \KOMAScript{} author was not patient enough to +wait more than a year for the change of \Package{hyperref}, a corresponding +patch has been added to \Package{scrhack}. This can be deactivated by \OptionValue{hyperref}{false}. Nevertheless, it is recommended to use the current \Package{hyperref} release. In this case \Package{scrhack} does automatically deactivate the not longer needed patch.% @@ -211,7 +213,7 @@ Please note\textnote{Attention!}, \Package{pdflscape}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{pdflscape} also uses \Package{lscape} and therefore is influenced by \Package{scrhack}, too.% % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrhack} +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrjura.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrjura.tex index a9697cbb2aa..d59fc05acd0 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrjura.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrjura.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrjura.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrjura.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,15 +46,16 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrjura.tex}% - [$Date: 2016-05-10 14:02:52 +0200 (Tue, 10 May 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrjura)] \translator{Alexander Willand\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated German version: 2016/05/09 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Support for the Law Office by \Package{scrjura}} \labelbase{scrjura} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrjura} In case you'd like to write a contract\Index{contract}, the bylaws of a @@ -74,7 +75,9 @@ Note\textnote{Attention!} that the package cooperates with \Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref}. Nevertheless, \Package{hyperref} has to be loaded after \Package{scrjura} as usual. -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} + +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Text Markup} \section{Table of Contents} \label{sec:scrjura.toc} @@ -82,84 +85,83 @@ has to be loaded after \Package{scrjura} as usual. The package \Package{scrjura} provides entries into the table of contents. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratotoc}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{juratotoc}\PName{level number} + \OptionVName{juratotoc}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{juratotoc}{level number} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{level number}}% A clause\Index{clause} is being shown in the table of contents only, if its -\PName{level number} is smaller or equal to the -counter \Counter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} -(see \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Default for the \PName{level - number} is 10000, which as well will be used, if the option is switched off -by the \PName{simple switch}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (see +\PName{level number} is smaller or equal to the counter +\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} (see +\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Default +for the \PName{level number} is 10000, which as well will be used, if the +option is switched off by the \PName{simple + switch}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (see \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}). Because the -counter \Counter{tocdepth} usually has a one digit value, clause entries are -not shown in the table of contents. +counter \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} usually has a one digit value, +clause entries are not shown in the table of contents. If you switch on the option using the \PName{simple switch}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{true}}, as a default \PName{level number} 2 is used, so that clauses are shown in the table of contents on the -same level as subsections. If the counter \Counter{tocdepth} has default -values as well, clauses are shown with all \KOMAScript{} classes.% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{level number}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{simple switch}}% +same level as subsections. If the counter \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} +has default values as well, clauses are shown with all \KOMAScript{} classes.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratocindent}\PName{indent}\\ - \KOption{juratocnumberwidth}\PName{number width} + \OptionVName{juratocindent}{indent}% + \OptionVName{juratocnumberwidth}{number width} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratocindent~=\PName{indent}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratocnumberwidth~=\PName{number width}}% These two options can be used to determine the indentation in the table of contents as well as the reserved space for the numbers there. Defaults are the values for the subsection entries in \Class{scrartcl}.% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratocnumberwidth~=\PName{number width}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratocindent~=\PName{indent}}% - +\EndIndexGroup \section{Environment for Contracts} \label{sec:scrjura.contract} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{contract} The main mechanism of \Package{scrjura} only work inside of the contract environment. \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{contract}}\\ - \dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{\XEnvironment{contract}} + \begin{Environment}{contract}\end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{contract}% Till this date, this is the one and only environment for legal practitioner provided by \Package{scrjura}. Using it will activate the automatic numbering -of paragraphs and the commands \Macro{Clause} and \Macro{SubClause} will -become a form, which will be documented below. - -The\textnote{Attention!} environment \Environment{contract} must not be nested -in itself. Within the document the environment may be used several times. In -this case the clauses within the environment are treated as if they were -within the same environment. Ending the environment means just a break and -with beginning a new environment in the same document the former +of paragraphs and the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} will become a form, which will be +documented below. + +The\textnote{Attention!} environment \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} must +not be nested in itself. Within the document the environment may be used +several times. In this case the clauses within the environment are treated as +if they were within the same environment. Ending the environment means just a +break and with beginning a new environment in the same document the former environment is continued. A break inside a clause is not possible.% -\EndIndex{Env}{contract} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Option{contract} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{contract}% The whole document becomes a contract if you use this option while loading the -package with \Macro{usepackage}\important{\Macro{usepackage}} or as a global -option with \Macro{documentclass}\important{\Macro{documentclass}}. The -document behaves as if you started the contract environment right after the -beginning of the document. +package with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}} or as a global option with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}}. The document behaves as +if you started the contract environment right after the beginning of the +document. + +Neither\textnote{Attention!} you can use this option with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nor with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}, so that it is not possible to switch the +option off in this way. Please use the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} +environment directly.% +\EndIndexGroup -Neither\textnote{Attention!} you can use this option with \Macro{KOMAoption} -nor with \Macro{KOMAoptions}, so that it is not possible to switch the option -off in this way. Please use the \Environment{contract} environment directly.% -\EndIndex{Option}{contract} \subsection{Clauses} \label{sec:scrjura.clause} @@ -167,17 +169,16 @@ off in this way. Please use the \Environment{contract} environment directly.% With \Package{scrjura} clauses\footnote{% In English, the word ``section'' also is used in an act of law or in an - agreement. To distinguish \Macro{section} of most document classes from the - section in \Package{scrjura}, we decided to call the section in the latter - simply ``clause''.} in a legal sense only exist inside of contracts, meaning -inside of the environment \Environment{contract}. + agreement. To distinguish \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} of most document + classes from the section in \Package{scrjura}, we decided to call the + section in the latter simply ``clause''.} in a legal sense only exist inside +of contracts, meaning inside of the environment +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{Clause}\OParameter{options}\\ + \Macro{Clause}\OParameter{options}% \Macro{SubClause}\OParameter{options} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Clause}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{SubClause}% These are the most important commands inside of a contract. Without using further \PName{options} the command \Macro{Clause} creates the heading of a clause, which consists only of the sign »\S«, followed by its number. In @@ -200,7 +201,7 @@ go into the details. \entry{\Option{dummy}}{% The heading will not be printed but counted in the automatic numbering.% }% - \entry{\KOption{head}\PName{running head}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{head}{running head}}{% If running heads are available, \PName{running head} is used instead of the clause \PName{title}.% }% @@ -210,32 +211,34 @@ go into the details. \entry{\Option{notocentry}}{% Does not make an entry into the table of contents.% }% - \entry{\KOption{number}\PName{number}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{number}{number}}{% Uses \PName{number} for the output of the clause number.% }% - \entry{\KOption{preskip}\PName{skip}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{preskip}{skip}}{% Changes the vertical \PName{skip} before the clause heading.% }% - \entry{\KOption{postskip}\PName{skip}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{postskip}{skip}}{% Changes the vertical \PName{skip} after the clause heading.% }% - \entry{\KOption{title}\PName{title}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{title}{title}}{% Additional to the clause number a clause \PName{title} will be printed. This is also used as default for the \PName{running head} and the \PName{entry} in the table of contents.% }% - \entry{\KOption{tocentry}\PName{entry}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentry}{entry}}{% Independent from the clause \PName{title}, an \PName{entry} into the table of contents will be made, if such entries are activated.% }% \end{desctabular} \end{table} -A skip of two lines is inserted before the heading and afterwards a skip of -one line as a default. Via the options \Option{preskip}\important[i]{\Option{preskip}, \Option{postskip}} and \Option{postskip} these skips can -be changed. The new values are not only valid for the current clause but -beginning with the actual clause until the end of the current contract -environment. It is possible as well to set these keys in advance by writing +A skip of two lines is inserted before the heading and afterwards a skip of +one line as a default. Via the options +\Option{preskip}\important[i]{\Option{preskip}, \Option{postskip}} and +\Option{postskip} these skips can be changed. The new values are not only +valid for the current clause but beginning with the actual clause until the +end of the current contract environment. It is possible as well to set these +keys in advance by writing \begin{flushleft}\quad\small \textbf{\Macro{setkeys}}\PParameter{contract}% \PParameter{preskip=\PName{skip},\\ @@ -245,19 +248,22 @@ environment. It is possible as well to set these keys in advance by writing independently from a clause and outside of a contract environment as well. Also it is possible to set the keys inside of the preamble after loading \Package{scrjura}. But it is not possible to set these options while loading -the package or by using \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption}. +the package or by using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{Clause}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause}\LabelFontElement{contract.Clause}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{Clause}\LabelFontElement{Clause}% The headings use as a default the fonts \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{large}. The fonts can be changed using the element \FontElement{contract.Clause}\important{\FontElement{contract.Clause}} with -the help of \Macro{setkomafont}\important[i]{\Macro{setkomafont}, - \Macro{addtokomafont}} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Inside the \Environment{contract} -environment instead of \FontElement{contract.Clause} simply +the help of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}% +\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Inside the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} environment instead of +\FontElement{contract.Clause} simply \FontElement{Clause}\important{\FontElement{Clause}} may be used.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{Clause}% \EndIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause} @@ -282,7 +288,7 @@ With the option \Option{dummy}\important{\Option{dummy}} the output of the whole heading of a clause can be suppressed. The automatic numbering will count this clause nonetheless. Thus you can skip a clause in the automatic numbering with\textnote{Example} -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \Clause{dummy} \end{lstcode} in case the clause has been deleted in a later version of a contract. @@ -290,40 +296,38 @@ in case the clause has been deleted in a later version of a contract. Note\textnote{Attention!}, only the values \PValue{true} and \PValue{false} may be used in combination with \Option{dummy}. All other values will be ignored, but may throw up an error.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{SubClause}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Clause}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{Clauseformat}\Parameter{number} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Clauseformat}% As already mentioned the clauses and subclauses usually are being numbered. The format of the number is done with the help of the command \Macro{Clauseformat}, which expects as one and only argument the number. The default is defined as -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\Clauseformat}[1]{\S~#1} \end{lstcode} and, as you see, it is only the \Macro{S}\IndexCmd{S} followed by a non-breaking space and the number. In case of redefinition take care to keep it expandable.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Clauseformat}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratitlepagebreak}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{juratitlepagebreak}{simple switch} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratitlepagebreak~=\PName{simple switch}}% Usually a page break inside a heading is prohibited. Some jurists may need page breaks inside of clause headings. Such a break may be allowed using \Option{juratitlepagebreak}\important{\Option{juratitlepagebreak}}. The possible values for \PName{simple switch} are printed in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}.% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratitlepagebreak~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{clausemark}\PName{value} + \OptionVName{clausemark}{value} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clausemark~=\PName{value}}% Clauses are a kind of inferior structure with an independent numbering they will not have running headlines as a default. Running headlines are possible and may be created with alternative properties. The @@ -336,8 +340,8 @@ possible \PName{values} and their meaning are listed in \label{tab:scrjura.clausemark}% \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{both}}{% - Clauses generate left and right marks for running heads, if the - document provides automatic running heads.% + Clauses generate left and right marks for running heads, if the document + provides automatic running heads.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{both}}% }% \entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}}{% @@ -346,15 +350,15 @@ possible \PName{values} and their meaning are listed in \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{false}}% }% \entry{\PValue{forceboth}}{% - Clauses use \Macro{markbith} to generate left and right marks for - running heads even if the document does not provide automatic running - heads for the current page style.% + Clauses use \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markboth} to generate left and right + marks for running heads even if the document does not provide automatic + running heads for the current page style.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{forceboth}}% }% \entry{\PValue{forceright}}{% - Clauses use \Macro{markright} to generate right marks for running heads - even if the document does not provide automatic running heads for the - current page style.% + Clauses use \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright} to generate right marks for + running heads even if the document does not provide automatic running + heads for the current page style.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{forceright}}% }% \entry{\PValue{right}}{% @@ -365,27 +369,28 @@ possible \PName{values} and their meaning are listed in \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{clausemark~=\PName{value}}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Paragraphs} \label{sec:scrjura.par} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{paragraph>number}% Within clauses the paragraphs are being numbered automatically. With this, the -paragraphs are a strongly structuring element, similar to \Macro{paragraph} or -\Macro{subparagraph} known, e.\,g., from article classes. Contracts usually -use a vertical skip between paragraphs. The package \Package{scrjura} does not -provide its own mechanism for this. Instead, it uses the option -\Option{parskip}\IndexOption{parskip}\important{\Option{parskip}} of the +paragraphs are a strongly structuring element, similar to +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} or \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph} known, +e.\,g., from article classes. Contracts usually use a vertical skip between +paragraphs. The package \Package{scrjura} does not provide its own mechanism +for this. Instead, it uses the option \DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}% +\IndexOption{parskip}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}} of the \KOMAScript{} classes (see \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.parskip}). +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.parskip}). \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{parnumber}\PName{value} + \OptionVName{parnumber}{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{parnumber~=\PName{value}}% The default numbering of paragraphs is \OptionValue{parnumber}{auto} and \OptionValue{parnumber}{true}. Once in a while it might be necessary to switch off the automatic numbering. This is done with \OptionValue{parnumber}{false}% @@ -408,18 +413,15 @@ has no number. This does only work if there are not two clauses with an identical number in a document. Note that the number of paragraphs in a clause is not available before the end of the clause. Therefore you need a least two \LaTeX{} runs to get the correct, automatic paragraph numbering.% -\EndIndex{Option}{parnumber~=\PName{Einstellung}} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{par}\\ - \Macro{thepar}\\ - \Macro{parformat}\\ + \Counter{par}% + \Macro{thepar}% + \Macro{parformat}% \Macro{parformatseparation} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{par}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thepar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parformatseparation}% For numbering the paragraphs inside a clause we use the counter \Counter{par}. The output of \Macro{thepar} will display an arabic number, because the default is \Macro{arabic}\PParameter{par}. \Macro{parformat} @@ -434,17 +436,13 @@ by one or more delimiter(s). These are provided by Package\textnote{Attention!} \Package{scrjura} assumes internally, that \Macro{thepar} is an arabic number. Don't redefine!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parformatseparation} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thepar}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{par}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ellipsispar}\OParameter{number}\\ + \Macro{ellipsispar}\OParameter{number}% \Macro{parellipsis} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ellipsispar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parellipsis}% Sometimes\ChangedAt{v0.7}{\Package{scrjura}}\,---\,particularly in comparisons\,---\,it is desirable to omit paragraphs, but to mark the omission. Those omitted paragraphs\Index{paragraph>omission} shall be included @@ -484,15 +482,15 @@ the \PName{number} of omitted paragraphs into account. The ellipsis is by default \Macro{textellipsis}\IndexCmd{textellipsis}, if such a command is defined. If not, \Macro{dots} will be used. \Macro{parellipsis} may be redefined with \Macro{renewcommand}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parellipsis}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ellipsispar}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{paragraph>number}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Sentences} \label{sec:scrjura.sentence} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{sentence>number}% In a contract the paragraphs consist of one or more sentences. In German acts of law it is common to number the sentences as well. Regarding @@ -500,13 +498,10 @@ of law it is common to number the sentences as well. Regarding has not been implemented yet. \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{sentence}\\ - \Macro{thesentence}\\ + \Counter{sentence}% + \Macro{thesentence}% \Macro{Sentence} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Counter}{sentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thesentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Sentence}% Manual numbering of sentences is done with the command \Macro{Sentence}. It adds one to the counter \Counter{sentence}. As a default, \Macro{thesentence} is printed as an arabic number. @@ -514,28 +509,24 @@ is printed as an arabic number. Using\textnote{Hint!} \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} offers an easy way to define a short hand for \Macro{Sentence}:% \phantomsection\label{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample}% -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% - moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] \useshorthands{'} \defineshorthand{'S}{\Sentence\ignorespaces} \end{lstcode} With this definition any space after \lstinline|'S| will be ignored. It is even possible to use the dot as abbrevation for dot and new number of the following sentence: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% - moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] \defineshorthand{'.}{. \Sentence\ignorespaces} \end{lstcode} These abbrevations have been tried and tested. For details regarding \Macro{useshorthands} and \Macro{defineshorthands} please consult the manual of the package \Package{babel} (see \cite{package:babel}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Sentence}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thesentence}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{sentence}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{sentence>number} +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{contract}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Cross References} @@ -546,90 +537,67 @@ The conventional mechanism to set cross references using \Macro{pageref} does not suffice. \Package{scrjura} provides more commands. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ref}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refL}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refS}\Parameter{label}\\ + \Macro{ref}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refL}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refS}\Parameter{label}% \Macro{refN}\Parameter{label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ref}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refN}% The commands \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refS}, and \Macro{refN} give a full reference to clause, paragraph and sentence. \Macro{refL} is a long text, \Macro{refS} a short text and \Macro{refN} an abbreviated, numeric form. \Macro{ref} defaults to \Macro{refL}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ref}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{label}\\ + \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{label}% \Macro{refClauseN}\Parameter{label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refClause}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refClauseN}% For a cross reference to to a clause without displaying paragraph and sentences as well. \Macro{refClause} puts a section symbol (\S) in front of the reference, while \Macro{refClauseN} does not.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refClauseN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refClause}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refPar}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{label}\\ + \Macro{refPar}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{label}% \Macro{refParN}\OParameter{number format}\Parameter{label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refPar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParN}% You can make a cross reference to a paragraph using \Macro{refParL}, \Macro{refParS} and \Macro{refParN}. The differences between the forms -correspond to the differences between \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refN} and -\Macro{refS}. A special feature is the optional argument of -\Macro{refParN}. Usually the numeric reference to a paragraph uses a roman -number. The optional argument allows to set a different \PName{number format}, -it may make sense to use arabic numbers. \Macro{refPar} defaults to -\Macro{refParL}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refPar}% +correspond to the differences between \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}. A special +feature is the optional argument of \Macro{refParN}. Usually the numeric +reference to a paragraph uses a roman number. The optional argument allows to +set a different \PName{number format}, it may make sense to use arabic +numbers. \Macro{refPar} defaults to \Macro{refParL}.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refSentence}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{label}\\ - \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{label}\\ + \Macro{refSentence}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{label}% + \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{label}% \Macro{refSentenceN}\Parameter{label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceN}% You can make a cross reference to a sentence with \Macro{refSentenceL}, \Macro{refSentenceS}, or \Macro{refSentenceN}. Again we have a long text form, a short text form and a numerical form. \Macro{refSentence} defaults to \Macro{refSentenceL}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentence}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{ref}\PName{value} + \OptionVName{ref}{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{ref~=\PName{value}}% -The results of \Macro{ref}, \Macro{refPar}, and \Macro{refSentence} depend on -the \PName{value} of option \Option{ref}. Defaults are \Macro{refL}, -\Macro{refParL} and \Macro{refSentenceL}. For possible values and their -meaning see \autoref{tab:scrjura.ref}.% +The results of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar}, +and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} depend on the \PName{value} of option +\Option{ref}. Defaults are \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}. For possible values and their meaning +see \autoref{tab:scrjura.ref}.% % \begin{table} %\begin{desclist} @@ -639,66 +607,68 @@ meaning see \autoref{tab:scrjura.ref}.% format% }]{% Possible values for option \Option{ref} to configure the cross reference - format of \Macro{ref}, \Macro{refPar}, and \Macro{refSentence}% + format of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar}, + and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence}% \label{tab:scrjura.ref}% }% \begin{desctabular} - \entry{\PValue{long}}{% - Combination of \PValue{parlong} and \PValue{sentencelong}.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{numeric}}{% - Combination of \PValue{parnumeric} and \PValue{sentencenumeric}.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{numeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{clauseonly}, \PValue{onlyclause}, - \PValue{ClauseOnly}, \PValue{OnlyClause}}{% - Combination of \PValue{paroff} and \PValue{sentenceoff}; note that - \Macro{refPar} and \Macro{refSentence} have empty results!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parlong}, \PValue{longpar}, \PValue{ParL}}{% - Paragraphs are referenced in long textual form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parnumeric}, \PValue{numericpar}, \PValue{ParN}}{% - Paragraphs are referenced in simple numerical form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parnumeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{paroff}, \PValue{nopar}}{% - Paragraphs have not reference. Note that \Macro{refPar} has an empty - result!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{paroff}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parshort}, \PValue{shortpar}, \PValue{ParS}}{% - Paragraphs are referenced in short textual form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parshort}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentencelong}, \PValue{longsentence}, \PValue{SentenceL}}{% - Sentences are referenced in long textual form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentencenumeric}, \PValue{numericsentence}, - \PValue{SentenceN}}{% - Sentences are referenced in simple numeric form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentencenumeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentenceoff}, \PValue{nosentence}}{% - Sentences have no reference. Note that \Macro{refSentence} has an empty - result!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceoff}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentenceshort}, \PValue{shortsentence}, \PValue{SentenceS}}{% - Sentences are referenced in short textual form.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceshort}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{short}}{% - Combination if \PValue{parshort} and \PValue{sentenceshort}.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{value}}% - }% + \entry{\PValue{long}}{% + Combination of \PValue{parlong} and \PValue{sentencelong}.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{numeric}}{% + Combination of \PValue{parnumeric} and \PValue{sentencenumeric}.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{numeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{clauseonly}, \PValue{onlyclause}, \PValue{ClauseOnly}, + \PValue{OnlyClause}}{% + Combination of \PValue{paroff} and \PValue{sentenceoff}; note that + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} + have empty results!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parlong}, \PValue{longpar}, \PValue{ParL}}{% + Paragraphs are referenced in long textual form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parnumeric}, \PValue{numericpar}, \PValue{ParN}}{% + Paragraphs are referenced in simple numerical form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parnumeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{paroff}, \PValue{nopar}}{% + Paragraphs have not reference. Note that \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} + has an empty result!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{paroff}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parshort}, \PValue{shortpar}, \PValue{ParS}}{% + Paragraphs are referenced in short textual form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parshort}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentencelong}, \PValue{longsentence}, \PValue{SentenceL}}{% + Sentences are referenced in long textual form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentencenumeric}, \PValue{numericsentence}, + \PValue{SentenceN}}{% + Sentences are referenced in simple numeric form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentencenumeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentenceoff}, \PValue{nosentence}}{% + Sentences have no reference. Note that + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} has an empty result!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceoff}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentenceshort}, \PValue{shortsentence}, + \PValue{SentenceS}}{% + Sentences are referenced in short textual form.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceshort}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{short}}{% + Combination if \PValue{parshort} and \PValue{sentenceshort}.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{value}}% + }% \end{desctabular} \end{table} -\EndIndex{Option}{ref~=\PName{Einstellung}}% \begin{Example} Supposed you would like to reference to paragraphs in the form ``paragraph 1 @@ -710,7 +680,8 @@ meaning see \autoref{tab:scrjura.ref}.% in clause~\refClauseN{#1}% } \end{lstcode} - This new command can be used in the same way as \Macro{refParL}.% + This new command can be used in the same way as + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL}.% \end{Example}% \hyperref[tab:scrjura.refexamples]{Table~\ref*{tab:scrjura.refexamples}} @@ -725,24 +696,25 @@ provides examples of the output of the fundamental commands, not configured.% \toprule Command & Example output \\ \midrule - \Macro{refL}\Parameter{label} & § 1 paragraph 1 sentence 1 \\ - \Macro{refS}\Parameter{label} & § 1 par. 1 sent. 1 \\ - \Macro{refN}\Parameter{label} & § 1 I 1. \\ - \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{label} & § 1 \\ - \Macro{refClauseN}\Parameter{label} & 1 \\ - \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{label} & paragraph 1 \\ - \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{label} & par. 1 \\ - \Macro{refParN}\Parameter{label} & I \\ - \Macro{refParN}\POParameter{arabic}\Parameter{label} & 1 \\ - \Macro{refParN}\POParameter{roman}\Parameter{label} & i \\ - \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{label} & sentence 1 \\ - \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{label} & sent. 1 \\ - \Macro{refSentenceN}\Parameter{label} & 1. \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{label} & § 1 paragraph 1 sentence 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{label} & § 1 par. 1 sent. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{label} & § 1 I 1. \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{label} & § 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClauseN}\Parameter{label} & 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL}\Parameter{label} & paragraph 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParS}\Parameter{label} & par. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\Parameter{label} & I \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\POParameter{arabic}\Parameter{label} & 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\POParameter{roman}\Parameter{label} & i \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}\Parameter{label} & sentence 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceS}\Parameter{label} & sent. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceN}\Parameter{label} & 1. \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} \label{tab:scrjura.refexamples} \end{table} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Additional Environments} @@ -759,7 +731,6 @@ contract environment. \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}\Parameter{name}\OParameter{options}% \Parameter{start commands}\Parameter{end commands} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}% This\ChangedAt{v0.9}{\Package{scrjura}} command allows to define new and independent environments of the type contract. The argument \PName{name} is the name of the new environment, of course. \PName{start commands} are @@ -767,30 +738,31 @@ commands which will be executed at the beginning of the environment, as if they were added directly after \Macro{begin}\Parameter{name}. Correspondingly \PName{end commands} will be executed at the end of the environment, as if added directly before \Macro{end}\Parameter{name}. Without any \PName{options} -the new environment behaves similiar to the \Environment{contract} +the new environment behaves similiar to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} environment, but with its own counters. It is possible to set \PName{options} in a comma separated list. Currently the following \PName{options} are supported: \begin{description} -\item[\KOption{Clause}\PName{instruction}:] Defines on which - \PName{instruction} inside the environment the command \Macro{Clause} is - being mapped. The \PName{instruction} expects exactly one argument. To use - it correctly, a deeper knowledge and understanding of the internal functions - of \Package{scrjura} is needed. Furthermore the requirements for +\item[\OptionVName{Clause}{instruction}:] Defines on which \PName{instruction} + inside the environment the command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} is being + mapped. The \PName{instruction} expects exactly one argument. To use it + correctly, a deeper knowledge and understanding of the internal functions of + \Package{scrjura} is needed. Furthermore the requirements for \PName{instruction} may change in future versions. It is recommended not to use this option.% -\item[\KOption{SubClause}\PName{instruction}:] See explanation for +\item[\OptionVName{SubClause}{instruction}:] See explanation for \Option{Clause} above. -\item[\KOption{Sentence}\PName{instruction}:] Defines on which - \PName{instruction} inside the environment the command \Macro{Sentence} is - being mapped. The \PName{instruction} must not have an argument. Typically - it should add one to the counter \Counter{sentence}\IndexCounter{sentence} - (using \Macro{refstepcounter}\IndexCmd{refstepcounter}) and display it +\item[\OptionVName{Sentence}{instruction}:] Defines on which + \PName{instruction} inside the environment the command + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Sentence} is being mapped. The \PName{instruction} + must not have an argument. Typically it should add one to the counter + \Counter{sentence}\IndexCounter{sentence} (using + \Macro{refstepcounter}\IndexCmd{refstepcounter}) and display it somehow. Please avoid undesirable spaces. -\item[\KOption{ClauseNumberFormat}\PName{instruction}:] Formats the numbers of +\item[\OptionVName{ClauseNumberFormat}{instruction}:] Formats the numbers of clauses. Expects exactly one argument, the number of the clause. If the - \PName{instruction} implements a series of instructions and the number is the - last argument of a that series, you may directly use the series of + \PName{instruction} implements a series of instructions and the number is + the last argument of a that series, you may directly use the series of instructions as \PName{instruction}. \end{description} \begin{Example} @@ -808,7 +780,7 @@ supported: \end{lstcode} In cross references will ``Art.'' be used instead of ``\S'', of course.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Support for Different Languages} @@ -819,9 +791,9 @@ lawyer. Therefore primarily it has provided the languages \PValue{german}, \PValue{ngerman}, \PValue{austrian}, and \PValue{naustrian}. Nevertheless, it has been designed to support common language packages like \Package{babel}\important{\Package{babel}}\IndexPackage{babel}. Users can make -language adjustments simply using \Macro{providecaptionname} (see -\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}). But if you have definite +language adjustments simply using \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname} +(see \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, +\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}). But if you have definite information about the correct juristic terms and conventions of a language, it is recommended to contact the \KOMAScript{} author. This has been happened for English and therefore in the meantime \Package{scrjura} also provides terms @@ -829,22 +801,19 @@ for languages \PValue{english}, \PValue{american}, \PValue{british}, \PValue{canadian}, \PValue{USenglish}, and \PValue{UKenglish}. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{parname}\\ - \Macro{parshortname}\\ - \Macro{sentencename}\\ + \Macro{parname}% + \Macro{parshortname}% + \Macro{sentencename}% \Macro{sentenceshortname} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parshortname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sentencename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sentenceshortname}% These are the language-dependent terms used by \Package{scrjura}. The meaning of the terms and the English defaults are shown in \autoref{tab:scrjura.captionnames}. The package itself uses -\Macro{providecaptionname} inside \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} to define -them. So pre-definitions for the same language but before loading -\Package{scrjura} will not be changed. If you use \Package{scrjura} with a -language setting currently not supported, the package throws an error.% +\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname} inside +\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} to define them. So pre-definitions for the +same language but before loading \Package{scrjura} will not be changed. If +you use \Package{scrjura} with a language setting currently not supported, the +package throws an error.% % \begin{table} \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% @@ -870,10 +839,7 @@ language setting currently not supported, the package throws an error.% \label{tab:scrjura.captionnames} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sentenceshortname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sentencename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parshortname} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parname} +\EndIndexGroup \section{A Detailed Example} @@ -887,85 +853,86 @@ using \Package{scrjura}.\footnote{Please note, the example is still in German the translation. Nevertheless, the contents of the example does not matter but the technical realisation.} -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=1-2}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% We use class \Class{scrartcl}. Because paragraph distance instead of paragraph indentation is usual in club statutes we load the class with option -\OptionValue{parskip}{half} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.parskip}). +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{parskip}{half} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.parskip}). -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=4-4}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The club rules are in German. Therefore package \Package{babel} with option \Option{ngerman} is used, too. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange={6-7,9-9}}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Default settings for the fonts are made. Additionally package \Package{textcomp} is loaded, because it does not only provide a usable Euro sign but also an improved section sign (\S). \lstinputcode[{moretexcs=SelectInputMappings,xleftmargin=2em,% - belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% linerange=11-15}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% We want to input special characters and umlauts without commands. To do so, we let \LaTeX{} detect the input encoding. Alternatively we could use package \Package{inputenc}. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=17-17}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Later in the document we want lists numbered not with arabic numbers but with lower letters. We can do this easily with package \Package{enumerate}. \lstinputcode[{moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand},% - belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% + xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=19-27}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Now, it is time for \Package{scrjura}. With option -\OptionValue{clausemark}{forceboth} we enforce left an right clause marks for -the running head. On the other hand we do not want \Macro{section} to change -the marks for the running head. Therefore we use page style -\Pagestyle{myheadings}. This page style generally does not provide automatic -running heads. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{clausemark}{forceboth} we enforce left an right +clause marks for the running head. On the other hand we do not want +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} to change the marks for the running +head. Therefore we use page style \PageStyle{myheadings}. This page style +generally does not provide automatic running heads. Later we also want a table of contents with the clauses. This can be achieved -with option \Option{juratotoc}. Doing so we will see, that the clause number -width is to large for default of the entry into the table of contents. With -\OptionValue{juratocnumberwidth}{2.5em} we declare a larger reserved width. +with option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.juratotoc}. Doing so we will see, that +the clause number width is to large for default of the entry into the table of +contents. With \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{juratocnumberwidth}{2.5em} we +declare a larger reserved width. The definition of short hands has already been shown in \autoref{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample}. We also use this to make the input easier and more readable. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=29-29}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% It is time to begin the document. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=31-35}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Like other documents the statutes have a title. We make it with the usual \KOMAScript{} commands from \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} (see down from \autopageref{sec:maincls.titlepage}). -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=37-37}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% As already stated, we want to have a table of contents. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=39-43}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% -Preambles are not unusual in club statutes. Here we use \Macro{addsec} to -realise it, because we want to have an entry into the table of contents. +Preambles are not unusual in club statutes. Here we use +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addsec} to realise it, because we want to have an entry +into the table of contents. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=45-45}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Here we use a tiny trick. The articles of the club statutes should be numbered with uppercase letters instead of arabic numbers. This is the same like the numbering of appendix sections of an article with \Class{scrartcl}. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=47-49}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% We begin the contract with the first article. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=50-59}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The first clause has a number and a title. We will do the same with all following clauses. @@ -980,59 +947,59 @@ In the second paragraph we have two sentences. Here we can see the short hands sentence number. The second one does not only print the full stop but also the sentence number. With this, both sentences are numbered. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=60-75}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The second clause: also with several paragraphs with one or more sentences. The second paragraph additionally has a numbered list. At the last paragraph we used a label, because we want to reference it later. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=77-84}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The third clause has something special: a cross reference. Here we use the long form with clause, paragraph and sentence. If we would decide, that sentences should not be referenced, we could use option -\OptionValue{ref}{nosentence} globally. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{ref}{nosentence} globally. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=86-87}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Here we have a special kind of clauses. In prior versions of the club statutes this was a real clause. But then it has been removed. Nevertheless, the numbering of the following clauses should not be changed by removing this -one. Therefore the \Macro{Clause} statement has not been removed but -supplemented by option \Option{dummy}. With this, we also can set a label -despite the clause will not be printed. +one. Therefore the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} statement has not been +removed but supplemented by option \Option{dummy}. With this, we also can set +a label despite the clause will not be printed. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=88-92}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Another article starts. To avoid problems with the paragraph numbering we -interrupt the \Environment{contract} environment. +interrupt the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} environment. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=93-93}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The first clause of the next article also has been removed. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=95-104}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% We have a real clause again. We cross reference one of the removed clauses and also use a label. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=107-112}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Once more, this is a special kind of clause. This time we have not removed a clause but added one without renumbering of the following clauses. To do so, -we use \Macro{SubClause}. Therefore the clause number is the same like the -previous one but with an appended ``a''. +we use \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause}. Therefore the clause number is the +same like the previous one but with an appended ``a''. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=114-134}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% The other clauses of this article are very usual. You already know all the features used for them. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=136-150}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% More articles with known features are following. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=152-152}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Then the \LaTeX{} document ends. You can see three pages from the front of the document in \autoref{fig:scrjura.example}.% @@ -1087,26 +1054,27 @@ should still regard it as work in progress. Here are the three reasons for this: The package has been designed much more general than it can be used -currently. For example several environments beside \Environment{contract} has -been expected. Later we find that this one and only environment could be used -very general. Nevertheless we also find that it could be useful to be able to -define additional \Environment{contract} environments, e.\,g., for articles of +currently. For example several environments beside +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} has been expected. Later we find that this +one and only environment could be used very general. Nevertheless we also find +that it could be useful to be able to define additional +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} environments, e.\,g., for articles of constitutional law. This has been implemented now. Neither the cooperation with other packages nor the cooperation of the -\Environment{contract} environment with all kind of \LaTeX{} environments or -document classes has been tested. The main reason for this is that the package -is very special and the package author does not have any requirement to use -it. So all changes, all features, all improvement can only base on detailed -user feedback and only about two and a half users are willing to send such -feedback. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} environment with all kind of \LaTeX{} +environments or document classes has been tested. The main reason for this is +that the package is very special and the package author does not have any +requirement to use it. So all changes, all features, all improvement can only +base on detailed user feedback and only about two and a half users are willing +to send such feedback. The low version number should state that things could change. The author endeavours to preserve compatibility to prior versions. Nevertheless, sometimes compatibility is less important than usability. So compatibility cannot be guaranteed.% % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrjura} +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex index e03b5161bea..512e36dab09 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex index 7b00c686506..aba29286d6f 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-notecolumn.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-notecolumn.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -51,17 +51,17 @@ \translator{Markus Kohm\and Arndt Schubert} -% Date of the translated file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Note Columns with \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} \labelbase{scrlayer-notecolumn} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{note>columns}% \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-notecolumn}% Up to version~3.11b \KOMAScript{} supported note columns only by marginal -notes that get their contents from \Macro{marginpar} and \Macro{marginline} +notes that get their contents from \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} and \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.marginline}). This kind of note columns has +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}). This kind of note columns has several disadvantages: \begin{itemize} \item Marginal notes can be output only completely on one page. Page @@ -121,15 +121,17 @@ could be ambiguous or incomprehensible. \iffree{Please understand that I try to minimise the effort in time and work for the manual of an experimental package.} -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Early or late options} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} + +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Text Markup} \section{Declaration of new Note Columns} \seclabel{declaration} Loading the package already declares a note column named \PValue{marginpar} automatically. The name already adumbrates that this note column is placed in -the area of the normal marginal note column used by \Macro{marginpar} and -\Macro{marginline}. It even recognises the setting of \Macro{reversemarginpar} +the area of the normal marginal note column used by \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} and +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}. It even recognises the setting of \Macro{reversemarginpar} and \Macro{normalmarginpar} page by page instead of note by note. So these switches are irrelevant when the user defines a note but relevant when the package outputs the note during \LaTeX's page building. If you want to use @@ -144,25 +146,20 @@ You should note\textnote{Attention!} that note columns can be output only on pages that use a page style made with package \Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}. Package \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatically loads \Package{scrlayer}, which by -default provides only page style \Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty}. If +default provides only page style \PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty}. If you need additional page styles, the use of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} is recommended. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn}% \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}% - \\ \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}\\% + \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}% \Macro{ProvideNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}\\% + \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}% \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}% \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{note column name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareNoteColumn}% These commands can be used to declare note columns. \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} declares the note column independent of whether or not they already exist. \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn} throws an error message if \PName{note @@ -175,17 +172,20 @@ By the way: Already existing notes of a already existing note column are not lost if you re-declare it using \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} or \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}. +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{note column name}}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}% +\LabelFontElement{notecolumn.marginpar}% Declaring a new note column does also define a new element of which you can -change the font attributes using \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} -if such a element does not already exist. The name of the new element is -\PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{note column name}. Because of this the predefined -note column \PValue{marginnote} has a element -\FontElement{notecolumn.marginpar}. The initial setting of the element's font -can be done using option \Option{font} as part of the \PName{option list}.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{note column name}}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}% +change the font attributes using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} if such a element does not already +exist. The name of the new element is \PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{note column + name}. Because of this the predefined note column \PValue{marginnote} has a +element \FontElement{notecolumn.marginpar}. The initial setting of the +element's font can be done using option \Option{font} as part of the +\PName{option list}.% +\EndIndexGroup + The \PName{option list} is a comma separated list of keys with or without values, also known as options. The available options are shown in @@ -200,20 +200,20 @@ overwrite this default with your individual settings. }% \label{tab:scrlayer-notecolumn.note.column.options}% \begin{desctabular} - \entry{\KOption{font}\PName{font declaration}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{font}{font declaration}}{% The initial font attributes to be used for the note column. Everything, - that is allowed to be set by \Macro{setkomafont} or - \Macro{addtokomafont} can be used as \PName{font declaration} (see - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Note that + that is allowed to be set by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} or + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} can be used as \PName{font + declaration} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Note that \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalsize} will be used before. So you don't need one of them at your own initialisation.\par% Default: \emph{empty}% }% \entry{\Option{marginpar}}{% Sets up \Option{position} and \Option{width} to use the marginal note - column of \Macro{marginpar}. Note that this option does not expect or - allow any value.\par% + column of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar}. Note that this option does + not expect or allow any value.\par% Default: \emph{yes}% }% \entry{\Option{normalmarginpar}}{% @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ overwrite this default with your individual settings. any value.\par% Default: \emph{no}% }% - \entry{\KOption{position}\PName{offset}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{position}{offset}}{% Sets up the horizontal offset of the note column from the left edge of the paper. The \PName{horizontal offset} can be either a \LaTeX{} length, a \TeX{} dimension, a \TeX{} skip, a length value, or a @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ overwrite this default with your individual settings. any value.\par% Default: \emph{no}% }% - \entry{\KOption{width}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{width}{length}}{% Sets up the horizontal size of the note column. You can use the same values for \PName{size} like for \PName{offset} of option \Option{position}.\par% @@ -313,7 +313,8 @@ layers see \autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers}, from Next package \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}\textnote{note columns with \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} is loaded. The required width of the note - column is calculated within \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} after package + column is calculated within + \DescRef{typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea} after package \Package{typearea}'s each new calculation of the typing area. It should be one third of the typing area minus the distance between the main text and the note column. % @@ -360,10 +361,8 @@ layers see \autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers}, from Until now, the example does not give any answer to the question, how the text of the comments will be printed with a smaller width. You will find this in the continuation of the example below.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNoteColumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Making a Note} \seclabel{makenote} @@ -382,14 +381,13 @@ But you should note\textnote{Attention!} that note columns are output only in pages with a page style of package \Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer}. This package will be loaded by \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatically and by default provides only one -page style, \Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty}. Usage of additional +page style, \PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty}. Usage of additional package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} is recommended, if you need more page styles. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{makenote}\OParameter{note column name}\Parameter{note} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{makenote}% This command may be used to make a new \PName{note}. The current vertical position is used as the vertical position of the start of the \PName{note}. The horizontal position depends only on the defined position of @@ -429,9 +427,9 @@ should be used for the \PName{note}. The predefined note column durchaus angebracht ist, sich vor der Weisheit der Verfasser zu verbeugen. \end{lstcode} - Environment \Environment{addmargin}\IndexEnv{addmargin}\textnote{column - width by \Environment{addmargin}}, which is described in - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.addmargin}, is + Environment \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}\IndexEnv{addmargin}\textnote{column + width by \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}}, which is described in + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.addmargin}, is used to reduce the width of the main text by the width of the section column. Here you can see one of the few problems of using @@ -455,13 +453,12 @@ paragraph with one more section and comment, you may have the problem, that the new command will be put immediately after the comment above and not after the section. So the new section would move away from the corresponding comment. Next we will get a solution of this problem.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{makenote}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{syncwithnotecolumn}\OParameter{note column name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumn}% This command adds a synchronisation\textnote{synchronisation}\Index{synchronisation} point into the note column and into the main text of the document. Whenever a @@ -552,12 +549,12 @@ recommended command for this will be described next.% But stop! What, if the section in the \PName{paragraphs} note column wouldn't fit to the last page? Would it be output on the next pages? We will answer this question in the next paragraph.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{syncwithnotecolumns}\OParameter{list of note column names} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumns}% This command will synchronise the main text with all note columns of the comma-separated \PName{list of note column names}. To do so, the main text will be synchronised with the note column, that have the mark closest to the @@ -566,7 +563,7 @@ with each other. If the optional argument is omitted or empty (or begins with \Macro{relax}), synchronisation will be done with all currently declared note columns.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Force Output of Note Columns} @@ -581,7 +578,6 @@ the end of a chapter or the end of the document. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{clearnotecolumn}\OParameter{note column name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumn}% This command can be used to force the output of all notes\textnote{delayed notes} of a selected note column that haven't been output until the end of the current page, but has been made in this page or previous pages. To force @@ -604,47 +600,49 @@ that the forced output is something similar to the synchronisation. But if the forced output really results in an output you will be at the start of a new page and not just at the end of the output afterwards. Nevertheless, a forced output terminates with less \LaTeX{} runs.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{clearnotecolumns}\OParameter{list of note column names} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumns}% -This command is similar to \Macro{clearnotecolumns} with the difference that -the optional argument is not only the name of one note column but a -comma-separated \PName{list of note column names}. It forces the output of the -notes of all these note columns. +This command is similar to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumn} with the +difference that the optional argument is not only the name of one note column +but a comma-separated \PName{list of note column names}. It forces the output +of the notes of all these note columns. If you omit the optional argument, all delayed notes of all note columns will be output.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{autoclearnotecolumns}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{autoclearnotecolumns}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{autoclearnotecolumns}% Usually you would like to force the output of notes whenever a document -implicitly\,---\,e.\,g. because of a \Macro{chapter} command\,---\,or -explicitly executes \Macro{clearpage}. Note that this is also the case at the -end of the document inside \Macro{end}\PParameter{document}. Option -\Option{autoclearnotecolumns} manages whether or not \Macro{clearpage} should -also executes \Macro{clearnotecolumns} without any optional argument. +implicitly\,---\,e.\,g. because of a \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} +command\,---\,or explicitly executes \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}. Note +that this is also the case at the end of the document inside +\Macro{end}\PParameter{document}. Option \Option{autoclearnotecolumns} manages +whether or not \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} should also executes +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} without any optional argument. According to the author's preference the option is active by default. But you can change this with proper values for simple switches (see \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) at any time. You should note, that deactivation of the option can result in lost notes at -the end of the document. So you should insert \Macro{clearnotecolumns} before +the end of the document. So you should insert +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} before \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} if you deactivate the option. This should answer the question from the end of the last section. By default the section would be output even if it would need the output of one more page. But because this would be done after the end of the -\Environment{addmargin} environment, the forced output could overlap with main -text after that environment. So it would be useful to either add one more -synchronisation point or to force the output explicitly immediately at the -end of the \Environment{addmargin} environment. +\DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin} environment, the forced output could overlap +with main text after that environment. So it would be useful to either add one +more synchronisation point or to force the output explicitly immediately at +the end of the \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin} environment. The result of the example is shown in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-notecolumn.example}.\iffree{}{ Only the colour has been @@ -660,10 +658,9 @@ The result of the example is shown in {scrlayer-notecolumn-example}} \end{captionbeside} \end{figure} -\EndIndex{Option}{autoclearnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-notecolumn}% -\EndIndex{}{note>columns}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex index 55b17819a29..fb3282f1d70 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage-experts)] \translator{Markus Kohm} @@ -55,6 +55,7 @@ package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} \labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% Package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides features that have not been described in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} of this \iffree{user @@ -62,24 +63,24 @@ described in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} of this \iffree{user not need those extensions and some of them are only provided for compatibility with \Package{scrpage2}. -\LoadCommon[scrlayerscrpageexperts]{21}% \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} \section{Definition of new Pairs of Page Styles} \seclabel{pagestyle.pairs} In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} the page styles -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} have been +\PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} have been described. These can be seen as a pair of page styles, with -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} being the main page style with a running head and -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} being the corresponding \Pagestyle{plain} page +\PageStyle{scrheadings} being the main page style with a running head and +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} being the corresponding \PageStyle{plain} page style without running head but generally with pagination. Additionally to the configuration of these page styles, \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides also the feature of defining new such pairs of page styles. Thereby the name of the -main page style, e.\,g., \Pagestyle{scrheadings}, can be seen as the name of the +main page style, e.\,g., \PageStyle{scrheadings}, can be seen as the name of the pair of page styles. Most users will not need more than the predefined pair -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}. So the commands of this section may be understood as +\PageStyle{scrheadings}. So the commands of this section may be understood as an addition for special cases. And as each such case is very special, this section also lacks of handsome examples. Nevertheless, if the support will show me a real nice example in the future, I perhaps could use it in @@ -88,26 +89,22 @@ solved using the predefined pair only. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{defpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{newpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}\\ + \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition}% \Macro{providepairofpagestyles}% \OParameter{parent pair}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{definition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpairofpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepairofpagestyles}% With these commands you may define pairs of page styles similar to -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. Thereby +\PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. Thereby \PName{name} is the name of the main page style that is similar to -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}. The name of the corresponding \Pagestyle{plain} page +\PageStyle{scrheadings}. The name of the corresponding \PageStyle{plain} page style will be prefixed by \PValue{plain.} automatically. So \PName{name} is not only the name of the pair of page styles, but also the name of the main page style of that pair, while \PValue{plain.}\PName{name} is the name of the -\Pagestyle{plain} page style of this pair. +\PageStyle{plain} page style of this pair. If the optional argument \PName{parent pair} is given, the settings of the pair of page styles with that name are the initial settings of the new pair of @@ -116,23 +113,23 @@ page styles. So the new pair inherits the configuration of the \PName{parent Reading \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} might have created the impression that the described commands are related to -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} only. However, if +\PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} only. However, if there exist more pairs of page styles, these commands are related to the pair -that has been activated last. In fact, this is the case for \Macro{lehead}, -\Macro{cehead}, \Macro{rehead}, \Macro{lohead}, \Macro{cohead}, -\Macro{rohead}, \Macro{lefoot}, \Macro{cefoot}, \Macro{refoot}, -\Macro{lofoot}, \Macro{cofoot}, \Macro{rofoot}, \Macro{ihead}, \Macro{chead}, -\Macro{ohead}, \Macro{ifoot}, \Macro{cfoot}, and \Macro{ofoot} of +that has been activated last. In fact, this is the case for \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot}, and \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot} of \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}. All those commands and the below described commands -\Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}, \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}, and -\Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} are also designed to be used inside the argument +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} are also designed to be used inside the argument \PName{definition}. In that case, they are a kind of default configuration of the pair of page styles that is executed each time the pair will be activated. A pair of page styles is activated, if one of the page styles of the pair will be activated, which is mostly done by using -\Macro{pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}. Please note that the commands of \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} are for general @@ -148,22 +145,17 @@ ignored, but usage of \Macro{newpairofpagestyles} would result in an error message. To redefine already existing pairs of page styles you may use \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles}. With this an error would be thrown, if at least one of the page styles of the pair does not already exist.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpairofpagestyles}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}\\ - \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}\\ + \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}% + \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}% \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearpairofpagestyles}% Command \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles} will configure the main page style of the lastly activated pair of page styles to be empty. In contrast to this -\Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} will configure the \Pagestyle{plain} page +\Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} will configure the \PageStyle{plain} page style of the lastly activated pair of page styles to be empty. Last but not least \Macro{clearpairofpagestyle} will configure both page styles of the lastly activated pair of page styles to be empty. @@ -184,13 +176,8 @@ The commands \Macro{clearscrheadings}, \Macro{clearscrplain}, and \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} are aliases for these commands provided only for compatibility with \Package{scrpage2}. Nevertheless, they are deprecated and should not be used.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition of Simple Page Styles with Three Parts in Head and Foot } @@ -205,63 +192,43 @@ set of commands. Nevertheless, for new documents it is recommended to instead use the advanced features described in the previous section. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{name of the page style}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% - \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner head element}% - \Parameter{centre head element}% - \Parameter{outer head element}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner foot element}% - \Parameter{centre foot element}% - \Parameter{outer foot element}\\ - \Macro{newtriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{name of the page style}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{thickness of the outer linen}% - \OParameter{thickness of the inner linen}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner head element}% - \Parameter{centre head element}% - \Parameter{outer head element}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner foot element}% - \Parameter{centre foot element}% - \Parameter{outer foot element}\\ - \Macro{renewtriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{name of the page style}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% - \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner head element}% - \Parameter{centre head element}% - \Parameter{outer head element}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner foot element}% - \Parameter{centre foot element}% - \Parameter{outer foot element}\\ - \Macro{providetriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{name of the page style}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% - \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner head element}% - \Parameter{centre head element}% - \Parameter{outer head element}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inner foot element}% - \Parameter{centre foot element}% - \Parameter{outer foot element} + \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}\Parameter{name of the page style}% + \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% + \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}% + \Parameter{inner head element}% + \Parameter{centre head element}% + \Parameter{outer head element}% + \Parameter{inner foot element}% + \Parameter{centre foot element}% + \Parameter{outer foot element}% + \Macro{newtriplepagestyle}\Parameter{name of the page style}% + \OParameter{thickness of the outer linen}% + \OParameter{thickness of the inner linen}% + \Parameter{inner head element}% + \Parameter{centre head element}% + \Parameter{outer head element}% + \Parameter{inner foot element}% + \Parameter{centre foot element}% + \Parameter{outer foot element}% + \Macro{renewtriplepagestyle}\Parameter{name of the page style}% + \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% + \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}% + \Parameter{inner head element}% + \Parameter{centre head element}% + \Parameter{outer head element}% + \Parameter{inner foot element}% + \Parameter{centre foot element}% + \Parameter{outer foot element}% + \Macro{providetriplepagestyle}\Parameter{name of the page style}% + \OParameter{thickness of the outer line}% + \OParameter{thickness of the inner line}% + \Parameter{inner head element}% + \Parameter{centre head element}% + \Parameter{outer head element}% + \Parameter{inner foot element}% + \Parameter{centre foot element}% + \Parameter{outer foot element} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newtriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewtriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providetriplepagestyle}% With these commands you can define a single page style, whose head and foot are parted into three elements: an inner element, a centre element, and an outer element. The contents of the elements are stated via three mandatory @@ -291,9 +258,9 @@ lines will be omitted. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, an empty optional argument is not the same like omitting the optional argument! Empty optional arguments are not allowed in this case. But you may use simple dimension expressions as explained for -\KOMAScript{} option \Option{headwidth} (see +\KOMAScript{} option \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth} (see \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth}) for the optional +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth}) for the optional arguments. \hyperref[fig:scrlayer-scrpage.triplepagestyle]% @@ -481,11 +448,7 @@ The command \Macro{deftriplestyle} of \Package{scrpage2} corresponds to and should not be used with it's old name any longer. Using the old name would result in a warning message. Nevertheless, the result would be the expected one.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providetriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewtriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newtriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftriplepagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition of Complex Page Styles} @@ -503,18 +466,14 @@ section. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{defpagestyle}% - \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}\\ + \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}% \Macro{newpagestyle}% - \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}\\ + \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}% \Macro{providepagestyle}% - \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}\\ + \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}% \Macro{renewpagestyle}% \Parameter{name}\Parameter{head specification}\Parameter{foot specification}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}% These commands can be used to define a single page style with maximum flexibility. Thereby \PName{name} is the name of the page style that should be defined. @@ -530,20 +489,25 @@ identical structure: (\PName{length of the line below},\PName{thickness of the line below})% } \end{quote} -The arguments in the round brackets are options. This means, you may -omit them together with the brackets. In that case, the length and thickness -of the corresponding horizontal line would be given by the \KOMAScript{} -options \Option{headtopline}, \Option{headsepline}, \Option{footsepline} or -\Option{footbotline} (see \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}). +The arguments in the round brackets are options. This means, you may omit them +together with the brackets. In that case, the length and thickness of the +corresponding horizontal line would be given by the \KOMAScript{} options +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline} or +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline} (see +\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}). All three arguments in the curly brackets are mandatory. They hold arbitrary content specifications depending on the page and the layout settings. But for -page styles with running heads usage of \Macro{headmark}, \Macro{leftmark}, or -\Macro{rightmark} is recommended inside the specification. Section numbers or -section headings must not be used in the specifications. Due to the -asynchronous page building of \LaTeX, using them could result in wrong numbers -or texts in the page header or footer. +page styles with running heads usage of +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark}, or +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark} is recommended inside the +specification. Section numbers or section headings must not be used in the +specifications. Due to the asynchronous page building of \LaTeX, using them +could result in wrong numbers or texts in the page header or footer. Command \Macro{defpagestyle} defines the page style no matter if a page style with the same \PName{name} already exists. Command \Macro{newpagestyle} would @@ -554,7 +518,7 @@ style with the \PName{name} does not already exist, and therefore may be used to redefine an existing page style. All these commands are based on the command -\Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}\IndexCmd{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} of package +\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers}\IndexCmd{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} of package \Package{scrlayer}. \hyperref[tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle]{Table~\ref*{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle}} shows the layers that are defined for a page style \PName{name}. More information about layers and layer page styles can be found starting on @@ -602,8 +566,8 @@ information about layers and layer page styles can be found starting on \begin{Example} Assume you want to colour the whole background of page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}' head. Because you read the introduction to - this chapter, you know, that \Pagestyle{scrheadings} last but not least is a + \PageStyle{scrheadings}' head. Because you read the introduction to + this chapter, you know, that \PageStyle{scrheadings} last but not least is a layer page style with, e.\,g., layers \PValue{scrheadings.head.even}, \PValue{scrheadings.head.odd}, and \PValue{scrheadings.head.oneside}. So you define three more layers for the backgrounds and add them at the very @@ -645,25 +609,23 @@ information about layers and layer page styles can be found starting on In this example the coloured background is printed using a \Macro{rule} command. The size arguments of this \Macro{rule} are given by - \Macro{layerwidth} and \Macro{layerheight} which contain the current width - and height of the layer itself. The optional argument of \Macro{rule} is - used to move the rule down by the height of a descender. + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth} and \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerheight} + which contain the current width and height of the layer itself. The optional + argument of \Macro{rule} is used to move the rule down by the height of a + descender. \end{Example} % Instead of using new layers to colour the background in the example above, -\Macro{colorbox} and \Macro{chead} could have been used. It is recommended to -build such a solution as an exercise. Another approach could be to add the -background layers one by one and just before the contents layers. You may do -this as an exercise too.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}% +\Macro{colorbox} and \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} could have been +used. It is recommended to build such a solution as an exercise. Another +approach could be to add the background layers one by one and just before the +contents layers. You may do this as an exercise too.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \KOption{hmode}\PValue{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{hmode}% Package \Package{scrpage2} outputs page heads and page foots in horizontal mode always. In opposite to this \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} does not switch into horizontal mode itself, but the output of horizontal material will do @@ -675,9 +637,9 @@ spaces at the start of the output or the vertical alignment of the output. The options allows for the standard values for simple switches that are given at \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. The option is deactivated by default.% -\EndIndex{Option}{hmode}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex index 77be57d0532..b7254e0df94 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer-scrpage.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-scrpage.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-scrpage.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert\and Jens H\"uhne} @@ -55,12 +55,13 @@ Footers with \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} \labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% Until version 3.11b of \KOMAScript, package \Package{scrpage2} has been the recommended way to customise page headers and footers beyond the options -provided by the page styles \Pagestyle{headings}, \Pagestyle{myheadings}, -\Pagestyle{plain}, and \Pagestyle{empty} of the standard \KOMAScript{} +provided by the page styles \PageStyle{headings}, \PageStyle{myheadings}, +\PageStyle{plain}, and \PageStyle{empty} of the standard \KOMAScript{} classes. Until 2001 there was also package \Package{scrpage} as a supported solution for the same purpose. It was then made obsolete and in 2013, more than ten years later, it was finally removed from the regular @@ -89,13 +90,14 @@ Apart from the aforementioned \KOMAScript{} packages, you could in principle also use \Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr} (see \cite{package:fancyhdr}) in conjunction with a \KOMAScript{} class. However, \Package{fancyhdr}\ has no support for several \KOMAScript{} features, e.\,g., -the element scheme (see \Macro{setkomafont}, \Macro{addtokomafont}, and -\Macro{usekomafont} in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, from -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) or the configurable numbering -format for dynamic headers (see option \Option{numbers} and, e.\,g., -\Macro{chaptermarkformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers} and -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}). Hence, if you are using a +the element scheme (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont} in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, from +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) or the configurable numbering format +for dynamic headers (see option \DescRef{maincls.option.numbers} and, e.\,g., +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermarkformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.numbers} and +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}). Hence, if you are using a \KOMAScript{} class, the usage of package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} is recommended. Of course you can use \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} with other classes, namely the \LaTeX{} standard classes, too. @@ -109,11 +111,11 @@ Nevertheless, should the options described in \autoref{part:forAuthors} be insufficient for your purposes you are encouraged to examine \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts}. -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Early or late Selection of Options} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Early or late Selection of Options} -\LoadCommon{20} % \section{Head and Foot Width} +\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight} % \section{Head and Foot Width} -\LoadCommon{5} % \section{Text Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Text Markup} \section{Usage of Predefined Page Styles} \seclabel{predefined.pagestyles} @@ -122,81 +124,73 @@ The easiest way to your desired design for page header and footer with \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} is to use one of the predefined page styles. \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} + \PageStyle{scrheadings}% + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.scrheadings}% Package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides two page styles, which may be reconfigured to meet your individual reqirements. Let's first of all discuss -page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} which has been designed as a style using +page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} which has been designed as a style using running heads. Its defaults are similar to the page style -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} of the \LaTeX standard classes +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} of the \LaTeX standard classes or the \KOMAScript{} classes. What exactly gets printed in the header or footer can be configured via the commands and otions described hereafter. -The second page style to be mentioned here is \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}, +The second page style to be mentioned here is \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}, which has been designed to be a style with no running head. Its defaults are -very similar to page style \Pagestyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} of \LaTeX's +very similar to page style \PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} of \LaTeX's standard classes or the \KOMAScript{} classes. The following will describe the commands and options you may use to adjust the contents of the header and footer . -You could of course configure \Pagestyle{scrheadings} to be a page style -without a running head and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} to be a page style +You could of course configure \PageStyle{scrheadings} to be a page style +without a running head and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} to be a page style using running heads. It is, however, far more expedient to adhere to the conventions mentioned above, if for the only reason that both page styles mutually influence one another. Once you have opted to apply one of these -page styles, \Pagestyle{scrheadings} will become accessible as -\Pagestyle{headings} and the page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} will -become accessible as \Pagestyle{plain}. Thus, if you use a class or package -that automatically switches between \Pagestyle{headings} and -\Pagestyle{plain}, you only need to select \Pagestyle{scrheadings} or -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} once and the switching class or package will -then switch between \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} +page styles, \PageStyle{scrheadings} will become accessible as +\PageStyle{headings} and the page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} will +become accessible as \PageStyle{plain}. Thus, if you use a class or package +that automatically switches between \PageStyle{headings} and +\PageStyle{plain}, you only need to select \PageStyle{scrheadings} or +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} once and the switching class or package will +then switch between \PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} without even being aware of these page styles. Patches or other adaptions of classes (or packages) will not be necessary. This pair of page styles may thus -serve as a drop-in replacement for \Pagestyle{headings} and \Pagestyle{plain}. +serve as a drop-in replacement for \PageStyle{headings} and \PageStyle{plain}. Should additional similar pairs be required I'd like to point you to \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} in \autoref{part:forExperts} for further reference. For users of the older \Package{scrpage2}, I'd like to mention that, for compatibility with \Package{scrpage2}, page style -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} may also be used under its alias name of -\Pagestyle{scrplain}\IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{scrplain}.% +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} may also be used under its alias name of +\PageStyle{scrplain}\IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{scrplain}.% \iffree{}{ If you use \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}, however, - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} will not be available. Its function is - completely taken over by pagestyle \Pagestyle{scrplain}.} + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} will not be available. Its function is + completely taken over by pagestyle \PageStyle{scrplain}.} % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.scrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lehead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cehead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rehead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{lohead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cohead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rohead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -The contents of the header of page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} and -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} can be defined using these commands. Thereby the +The contents of the header of page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} and +\PageStyle{scrheadings} can be defined using these commands. Thereby the optional argument defines the content of an element of page style -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}, while the mandatory argument sets the content -of the corresponding element of page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}, while the mandatory argument sets the content +of the corresponding element of page style \PageStyle{scrheadings}. Contents of left\,---\,so called even\,---\,pages can be set with \Macro{lehead}, \Macro{cehead}, and \Macro{rohead}. Remark: The ``\texttt{e}'' @@ -221,14 +215,14 @@ Similarly each header has a right aligned element that will be defined by \Macro{rehead} respectively \Macro{rohead}. Remark: The ``\texttt{r}'' at the first position of the commands' names means ``\emph{right aligned}''. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}\LabelFontElement{pagehead}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% However, these elements do not have their own font attributes that may be -changed using commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), -but are grouped in an element named \FontElement{pagehead}. And before the -font of that element additionally the font of element -\FontElement{pageheadfoot} will be used. See +changed using commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), but are grouped in an element named +\FontElement{pagehead}. And before the font of that element additionally the +font of element \FontElement{pageheadfoot} will be used. See \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} for the font default of these elements.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% @@ -372,21 +366,21 @@ sketched in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head}.% foot, but the header is empty! The explanation is very easy. Document class \Class{scrartcl} switches to - page style \Pagestyle{plain} for the page with the title head. After command - \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in the preamble of the short - document this will actually result in page style - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. Using a \KOMAScript{} class the default of + page style \PageStyle{plain} for the page with the title head. After command + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in the preamble of + the short document this will actually result in page style + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. Using a \KOMAScript{} class the default of this page style is an empty page header and a page number in the footer. In the example code the optional arguments of \Macro{lohead} and \Macro{rohead} - are omitted. So page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} remains - unchanged as default and the result for the first page is indeed correct. + are omitted. So page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} remains unchanged + as default and the result for the first page is indeed correct. - Please add some text below \Macro{maketitle} until a second page will be - printed. Alternatively you may just add + Please add some text below \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} until a second + page will be printed. Alternatively you may just add \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} into the document - preamble and \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} below \Macro{maketitle}. You - will see that the head of the second page will show the author and the - document title as we wanted. + preamble and \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} below + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle}. You will see that the head of the second + page will show the author and the document title as we wanted. To see the difference you should also add an optional argument to \Macro{lohead} and \Macro{rohead} containing some content. To do so, change @@ -407,7 +401,7 @@ sketched in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head}.% \end{lstcode} Now, you also get a page header above the title head of the first page. That is because you have reconfigured page style - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} with the two optional arguments. Most of you + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} with the two optional arguments. Most of you will also recognise that it would be better to leave this page style unchanged, because the running head above the document title is certainly annoying. @@ -420,46 +414,34 @@ heading text in the running head, because of the asynchronous page generation and output of \TeX. Instead you should use the mark mechanism and ideally you should use it together with the automatism described in the following section.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% - +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lehead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cehead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rehead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{lohead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cohead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rohead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead*}% The previously described commands have also a version with star\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} that differs only if you omit the optional argument \PName{plain.scrheadings's content}. In this case the version without star does not change the content of -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses the obligatory argument \PName{scrheading's content} also as default for -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only.% \begin{Example} You can shorten the previous example using the star version of - \Macro{lohead} and \Macro{rohead}: + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead}: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{scrartcl} \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} @@ -477,39 +459,28 @@ can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only.% The obsolete package \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} does not provide this feature.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lefoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cefoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{refoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{lofoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cofoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rofoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% -The contents of the footer of page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} and -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} can be defined using these commands. Thereby the +The contents of the footer of page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} and +\PageStyle{scrheadings} can be defined using these commands. Thereby the optional argument defines the content of an element of page style -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}, while the mandatory argument sets the content -of the corresponding element of page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}, while the mandatory argument sets the content +of the corresponding element of page style \PageStyle{scrheadings}. Contents of left\,---\,so called even\,---\,pages can be set with \Macro{lefoot}, \Macro{cefoot}, and \Macro{rohead}. Remark: The ``\texttt{e}'' @@ -534,14 +505,14 @@ Similarly each footer has a right aligned element that will be defined by \Macro{refoot} respectively \Macro{rofoot}. Remark: The ``\texttt{r}'' at the first position of the commands' names means ``\emph{right aligned}''. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement[foot]{pageheadfoot}% However, these elements do not have their own font attributes that may be -changed using commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), -but are grouped in an element named \FontElement{pagefoot}. And before the -font of that element additionally the font of element -\FontElement{pageheadfoot} will be used. See +changed using commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}), but are grouped in an element named +\FontElement{pagefoot}. And before the font of that element additionally the +font of element \FontElement{pageheadfoot} will be used. See \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} for the defaults of the fonts of these elements.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% @@ -694,17 +665,18 @@ sketched in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot}.% \setkomafont{pagehead}{\bfseries} \end{lstcode} For the last command it is important to have it just after - \Package{scrpage-scrlayer} has been loaded, because - the \KOMAScript{} class already defines \FontElement{pagehead} and - \FontElement{pageheadfoot} but with the same meaning. Only loading - \Package{scrpage-scrlayer} changes the meaning of \FontElement{pagehead} and - makes it an element independent of \FontElement{pageheadfoot}. + \Package{scrpage-scrlayer} has been loaded, because the \KOMAScript{} class + already defines \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pagehead} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot} but with the same + meaning. Only loading \Package{scrpage-scrlayer} changes the meaning of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pagehead} and makes it an element + independent of \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}. Now, please add one more \Macro{lipsum} and add option \Option{twoside} to the loading of \Class{scrartcl}. First of all, you will see the page number moving from the middle of the page footer to the outer margin, due to the - changed defaults of \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} using double-sided layout and a \KOMAScript{} + changed defaults of \PageStyle{scrheadings} and + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} using double-sided layout and a \KOMAScript{} class. Simultaneously the author, document title and publisher will vanish from @@ -751,46 +723,35 @@ declaration by one of these commands. This could result in a wrong number or heading text in the running footer, because of the asynchronous page generation and output of \TeX. Instead you should use the mark mechanism ideally together with the automatism described in the following section.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lefoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cefoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{refoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{lofoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cofoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{rofoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot*}% The previously described commands have also a version with star\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} that differs only if you omit the optional argument \PName{plain.scrheadings's content}. In this case the version without star does not change the content of -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses the obligatory argument \PName{scrheading's content} also as default for -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only. \begin{Example} You can shorten the previous example using the star version of - \Macro{lofoot} and \Macro{refoot}: + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lofoot} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refoot}: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl} \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} @@ -814,34 +775,23 @@ can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only. The obsolete package \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} does not provide this feature.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ohead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{chead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ihead}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ofoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cfoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ifoot}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% To define the contents of page headers and footers of odd and the even pages of a double-sided layout using the commands described before, you would have to define the contents of the even page different from the contents of the odd @@ -852,15 +802,16 @@ even pages too. To simplify the definition of such symmetric page styles, \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides a kind of abbreviation. Command -\Macro{ohead} is same like usage of both \Macro{lehead} and -\Macro{rohead}. Command \Macro{chead} is same like \Macro{cehead} and -\Macro{cohead}. And command \Macro{ihead} is same like \Macro{rehead} and -\Macro{lohead}. The corresponding commands for the page footer are defined -accordingly. A sketch of these commands can be found also in -\autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} on \autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} -and \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} on -\autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} together with the relationships of all -the page header and footer commands. +\Macro{ohead} is same like usage of both \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lehead} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead}. Command \Macro{chead} is same like +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cehead} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cohead}. And +command \Macro{ihead} is same like \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rehead} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. The corresponding commands for the page +footer are defined accordingly. A sketch of these commands can be found also +in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} on +\autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} and +\autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} on \autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} +together with the relationships of all the page header and footer commands. % \begin{Example} You can simplify the example before using the new commands: @@ -895,45 +846,35 @@ a wrong number or heading text in the running header or footer, because of the asynchronous page generation and output of \TeX. Instead you should use the mark mechanism ideally together with the automatism described in the following section.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ofoot}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ohead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{chead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ihead*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ofoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{cfoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% - \Parameter{scrheadings's content}\\ + \Parameter{scrheadings's content}% \Macro{ifoot*}\OParameter{plain.scrheadings's content}% \Parameter{scrheadings's content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot*}% The previously described commands have also a version with star\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} that differs only if you omit the optional argument \PName{plain.scrheadings's content}. In this case the version without star does not change the content of -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. The version with star on the other hand uses the obligatory argument \PName{scrheading's content} also as default for -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. So, if both arguments should be the same, you can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only.% \begin{Example} You can shorten the previous example using the star version of - \Macro{ifoot}: + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifoot}: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl} \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} @@ -954,61 +895,56 @@ can simply use the star version with the obligatory argument only.% The obsolete package \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} does not provide this feature.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ofoot*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagestyleset}\PName{setting} + \OptionVName{pagestyleset}{setting} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=KOMA-Script}% \BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=standard}% In the examples above you can already find some information about the defaults -of \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} and -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. Indeed +of \PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} and +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. Indeed \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides two different defaults yet. You may select one of those defaults manually using option \Option{pagestyleset}. If \PName{setting} is \PValue{KOMA-Script} the defaults will be used that would also be activated automatically if a \KOMAScript{} class has been -detected. In this case and within double-sided layout \Pagestyle{scrheadings} +detected. In this case and within double-sided layout \PageStyle{scrheadings} uses running heads outer aligned in the page head. The page number will be printed outer aligned in the page footer. Within single-sided layout the running head will be printed in the middle of the page head and the page number in the middle of the page footer. Upper and lower case will be used for the automatic running head as given by the words you have typed. This would be same like using Option -\OptionValue{markcase}{used}\IndexOption{markcase~=used}. Pagestyle -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} has not got running heads, but the page numbers -will be printed in the same manner. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}\IndexOption{markcase~=used}. +Page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} has not got running heads, but the +page numbers will be printed in the same manner. If \PName{setting} is \PValue{standard} the defaults will be used that are -similar to page style \Pagestyle{headings} and \Pagestyle{plain} of the -standard classes. This \PName{setting} will also be activated automatically -if the option has not been used and \KOMAScript{} class cannot be -detected. Within double-sided layout thereby \Pagestyle{scrheadings} uses +similar to page style \PageStyle{headings} and \PageStyle{plain} of the +standard classes. This \PName{setting} will also be activated automatically if +the option has not been used and \KOMAScript{} class cannot be +detected. Within double-sided layout thereby \PageStyle{scrheadings} uses running heads aligned inner in the page head and the page numbers will be printed\,---\,also in the page head\,---\,aligned outer. Within single-sided -layout \Pagestyle{scrheadings} is the same. But because of single side layout +layout \PageStyle{scrheadings} is the same. But because of single side layout knows only odd pages, the running head will be aligned left always and the page number will be aligned right. In spite of typographic objection, the automatic running head will be converted into upper cases like they would -using \OptionValue{markcase}{upper}\IndexOption{markcase~=upper}. Within -single side layout page style \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} differs a lot from -\Pagestyle{scrheading}, because the page number will be printed in the middle -of the page footer. Using double side layout page style -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} differs from standard classes' -\Pagestyle{plain}. The standard classes would print the page number in the +using +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}\IndexOption{markcase~=upper}. +Within single side layout page style \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} differs a +lot from \PageStyle{scrheading}, because the page number will be printed in +the middle of the page footer. Using double side layout page style +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} differs from standard classes' +\PageStyle{plain}. The standard classes would print the page number in the middle of the page footer. But this would not harmonise with the -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}, so \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} does not print a page -number. But like \Pagestyle{plain} it does not print a running head. +\PageStyle{scrheadings}, so \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} does not print a +page number. But like \PageStyle{plain} it does not print a running head. Please note\textnote{Attention!} that together with this option page style -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} will be activated. This will be also the case, if you +\PageStyle{scrheadings} will be activated. This will be also the case, if you use the option inside the document. \BeginIndex{Option}{komastyle}% @@ -1018,19 +954,15 @@ Options \Option{komastyle} and \Option{standardstyle}, provided by \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. But they are implemented using option \Option{pagestyleset}. They are deprecated and you should not use them.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{standardstyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=standard}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=KOMA-Script}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlayerscrpage]{21} % \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} + +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation} % \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headwidth}\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}\\ - \KOption{footwidth}\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset} + \OptionVName{headwidth}{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}% + \OptionVName{footwidth}{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headwidth~=\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footwidth~=\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}}% By default the page head\Index{head>width} and foot\Index{foot>width} are as wide as the type area. This can be changed using these \KOMAScript{} options. The value \PName{width} is the wanted width of the head respective @@ -1086,7 +1018,7 @@ zero. If you think, this is complicated, you should simply use an explicit the current length of the horizontal line below the page head% }% \ventry{headtopline}{% - the current lenght of the horizontal line above the page head% + the current length of the horizontal line above the page head% }% \ventry{marginpar}{% the current width of the marginal note column including the distance @@ -1094,9 +1026,9 @@ zero. If you think, this is complicated, you should simply use an explicit }% \ventry{page}{% the current width of the page considering a binding correction of - package \Package{typearea} (see option \Option{BCOR} in + package \Package{typearea} (see option \DescRef{typearea.option.BCOR} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.BCOR})% + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR})% }% \ventry{paper}{% the current width of the paper without considering a binding correction% @@ -1112,19 +1044,15 @@ zero. If you think, this is complicated, you should simply use an explicit \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{footwidth~=\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headwidth~=\PName{width\textup{:}offset\textup{:}offset}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headtopline}\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}\\ - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}\\ - \KOption{footbotline}\PName{thickness\textup{:}length} + \OptionVName{headtopline}{thickness\textup{:}length}% + \OptionVName{headsepline}{thickness\textup{:}length}% + \OptionVName{footsepline}{thickness\textup{:}length}% + \OptionVName{footbotline}{thickness\textup{:}length} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footbotline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% The \KOMAScript{} classes provide only a separation line below the page head and above the page head, and you may only switch each of these lines on or off. But package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} provides four such horizontal @@ -1140,24 +1068,24 @@ colon, this will be the \PName{thickness}. For sure, the \PName{length} can be not only shorter than the current width of the page head respectively the page foot, but also longer. See additionally -options \Option{ilines}\IndexOption{ilines}, -\Option{clines}\IndexOption{clines}, and \Option{olines}\IndexOption{olines} -later in this section. - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}% +options \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.ilines}\IndexOption{ilines}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.clines}\IndexOption{clines}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}\IndexOption{olines} later in this section. + +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}\LabelFontElement{headtopline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}\LabelFontElement{headsepline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}\LabelFontElement{footsepline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}\LabelFontElement{footbotline}% Beside the length and thickness also the colour of the lines can be changed. First of all the colour depends on the colour of the head or foot. But independent from those or additional to them the settings of the corresponding elements \FontElement{headtopline}, \FontElement{headsepline}, \FontElement{footsepline}, and \FontElement{footbotline} will be used. You may -change these using command \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} from -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). By default those settings are -empty, which means no change of the current font or colour. Change of font in -opposite to colour would not make sense and is not recommended for these +change these using command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} +from \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). By default those settings +are empty, which means no change of the current font or colour. Change of font +in opposite to colour would not make sense and is not recommended for these elements.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}% \EndIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% @@ -1186,42 +1114,30 @@ on lines. Users often ignored this!% \EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% \EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}% % -\EndIndex{Option}{footbotline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{thickness\textup{:}length}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{plainheadtopline}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{plainheadsepline}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{plainfootsepline}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{plainfootbotline}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{plainheadtopline}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{plainheadsepline}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{plainfootsepline}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{plainfootbotline}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline~=\PName{simple switch}}% These options can be used to inherit the settings of the lines also for the -\Pagestyle{plain} page style. Possible values for \PName{simple switch} can be +\PageStyle{plain} page style. Possible values for \PName{simple switch} can be found in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} on \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If a option is activated, the -\Pagestyle{plain} page style will use the line settings given by the options +\PageStyle{plain} page style will use the line settings given by the options and commands described above. If the option is deactivated, the -\Pagestyle{plain} will not show the corresponding line.% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\PageStyle{plain} will not show the corresponding line.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Option{ilines}\\ - \Option{clines}\\ + \Option{ilines}% + \Option{clines}% \Option{olines} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{ilines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{olines}% You have already been told that the horizontal lines above or below the page head or foot can be shorter or longer than the page head or page foot itself. Only the answer to the question about the alignment of those lines is @@ -1230,11 +1146,9 @@ aligned to the inner margin of the head or foot at double side layout. This is same like using option \Option{ilines}. Alternatively, you can use option \Option{clines} to centre the lines in the head or foot, or option \Option{olines} to align them right respectively to the outer margin.% -\EndIndex{Option}{olines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{clines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{ilines}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer.tex index c0e3824006c..509d80600f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlayer.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,18 +46,18 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer.tex} - [$Date: 2015-11-06 10:16:26 +0100 (Fri, 06 Nov 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer)] \translator{Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated file: 2015-11-06 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter[{Defining Layers and Page Styles Using \Package{scrlayer}}]% {Defining Layers and Page Styles Using \Package{scrlayer}% } \labelbase{scrlayer} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer}% \BeginIndex{}{layer}% Most users of graphics software already know layer models for pages or working @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ recommended for advanced users and developers, describes the current state of development and the released parts of \Package{scrlayer}. Everything, not documented here, should not be used for anything else but testing. -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} \section{Some Generic Information} \seclabel{generic} @@ -110,51 +110,54 @@ This section describes some of the information, that class authors may provide. Generally users need not to care about this. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@chapter}\ \PName{then code} \Macro{else}\ \PName{else code} - \Macro{fi}% + \Macro{if@chapter}\ \PName{then code}\ \textMacro{else}\ % + \PName{else code}\ \textMacro{fi}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@chapter}% If \Macro{if@chapter} is \Macro{iftrue}, \Package{scrlayer} will additionally -consider the chapter level, e.g., processing option \Option{automark}. If it -is defined, but differs from \Macro{iftrue}, only part, section, subsection, -sub\dots subsection, paragraph, subparagraph, sub\dots subparagraph will be -considered. If the macro is not defined, \Package{scrlayer} searches for -\Macro{chapter}. If \Macro{chapter} is defined and not \Macro{relax}, -\Package{scrlayer} will define \Macro{if@chapter} to \Macro{iftrue}, otherwise -\Macro{if@chapter} will become \Macro{iffalse}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@chapter} +consider the chapter level, e.g., processing option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.automark}. If it is defined, but differs from +\Macro{iftrue}, only part, section, subsection, sub\dots subsection, +paragraph, subparagraph, sub\dots subparagraph will be considered. If the +macro is not defined, \Package{scrlayer} searches for +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}. If \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} is defined and +not \Macro{relax}, \Package{scrlayer} will define \Macro{if@chapter} to +\Macro{iftrue}, otherwise \Macro{if@chapter} will become \Macro{iffalse}.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@mainmatter}\ \PName{then code} \Macro{else}\ \PName{else code} - \Macro{fi}% + \Macro{if@mainmatter}\ \PName{then code}\ \textMacro{else}\ % + \PName{else code}\ \textMacro{fi}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@mainmatter}% -Classes like \Class{book} define \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter}, and -\Macro{backmatter}. They also use \Macro{if@mainmatter} to distinguish whether -or not the current matter is the main matter. Classes like \Class{report} and -\Class{article} do not have \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter}, or -\Macro{backmatter} and therefore also do not have \Macro{if@mainmatter}. +Classes like \Class{book} define \DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}, and \DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter}. They +also use \Macro{if@mainmatter} to distinguish whether or not the current +matter is the main matter. Classes like \Class{report} and \Class{article} do +not have \DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}, +or \DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} and therefore also do not have +\Macro{if@mainmatter}. For \Package{scrlayer} it's easier not to test always for the existence of the matter commands, but to use \Macro{if@mainmatter} even with classes like \Class{report} and \Class{article}, simply set to \Macro{iftrue}. So if \Macro{if@mainmatter} is not defined, it will be defined to \Macro{iftrue}. -Some classes have \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter}, or -\Macro{backmatter} but not \Macro{if@mainmatter}. In this case -\Package{scrlayer} also defines \Macro{if@mainmatter} to be \Macro{iftrue} -and it extends definition of \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter}, and -\Macro{backmatter} to set \Macro{if@mainmatter} properly. Other matter -commands are not known, not tested, and not extended. So if there are other -matter commands \Package{scrlayer} needs help of the class author to set +Some classes have \DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}, or \DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} but not +\Macro{if@mainmatter}. In this case \Package{scrlayer} also defines +\Macro{if@mainmatter} to be \Macro{iftrue} and it extends definition of +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}, and +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} to set \Macro{if@mainmatter} properly. Other +matter commands are not known, not tested, and not extended. So if there are +other matter commands \Package{scrlayer} needs help of the class author to set \Macro{if@mainmatter} correctly.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@mainmatter} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}%^^A - \Parameter{level name}\Parameter{level depth} + \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}\Parameter{level name}% + \Parameter{level depth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}% Generally each section level is related to an integer number indicating its depth in the document structure. \LaTeX{} needs this to manage hierarchic section levels. But normally only the document class, that defines the section @@ -175,7 +178,8 @@ it fails, i.\,e., if completely different section commands are used, it would be useful, to be able to define the relationship explicitly. For such cases \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth} gives the class author the opportunity to define the relationship explicitly.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionNumberDepth} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Declaration of Layers} \seclabel{layers} @@ -254,17 +258,12 @@ attributes. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}\\ - \Macro{ProvideLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}\\ + \Macro{DeclareLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}% + \Macro{DeclareNewLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}% + \Macro{ProvideLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}% + \Macro{RedeclareLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name}% \Macro{ModifyLayer}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{layer name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayer}% These commands can be used to define a layer. The \PName{layer name} has to be fully expandable and should expand to letters only. Some additional characters are tolerated, but are not recommended. @@ -308,7 +307,7 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addcontents}\PName{Code}}{% + \OptionVName{addcontents}{Code}}{% Value \PName{code} will be added (or appended) at the very end of the current value of attribute \Option{contents}. So the new content will be generated behind the end of the already existing content. For more @@ -317,28 +316,28 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addheight}\PName{additional height}}{% + \OptionVName{addheight}{additional height}}{% The current value of attribute \Option{height} will be increased by the value of this option. You can use the same kind of values as for \Option{height}.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addhoffset}\PName{additional horizontal offset}}{% + \OptionVName{addhoffset}{additional horizontal offset}}{% The current value of attribute \Option{hoffset} will be increased by the value of this option. You can use the same kind of values as for \Option{hoffset}.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addvoffset}\PName{additional vertical offset}}{% + \OptionVName{addvoffset}{additional vertical offset}}{% The current value of attribute \Option{voffset} will be increased by the value of this option. You can use the same kind of values as for \Option{voffset}.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addwidth}\PName{additional width}}{% + \OptionVName{addwidth}{additional width}}{% The current value of attribute \Option{width} will be increased by the value of this option. You can use the same kind of values as for \Option{width}.% @@ -369,8 +368,8 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. paper to the top edge of the layer. \end{description}% }% - \entry{\KOption{area}{%^^A - \Parameter{hoffset}\Parameter{voffset}%^^A + \entry{\KOption{area}{% + \Parameter{hoffset}\Parameter{voffset}% \Parameter{width}\Parameter{height}}}{% The composed option results in \OptionValue{hoffset}{\PName{hoffset}}, \OptionValue{voffset}{\PName{voffset}}, @@ -497,7 +496,7 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. bottom edge.% }% \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{mode}\PName{mode}}{% + \OptionVName{mode}{mode}}{% The primary option defines the \PName{mode} for the layer output. Default is \OptionValue{mode}{text}. The Baseline of the first text line will be placed the height of one standard text line below the top edge of the @@ -549,7 +548,7 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. the top edge to the bottom edge.% }% \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{pretocontents}\PName{code}}{% + \OptionVName{pretocontents}{code}}{% Value \PName{code} will be added at the very beginning of the current value of attribute \Option{contents}. So the new content will be generated in front of the already existing content. For more information about the @@ -582,7 +581,7 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}% \Option{unrestricted}}{% This option removes all output restrictions of the layer. It is a - combination of \Option{backandforground}, \Option{everyside}, and + combination of \Option{backandforeground}, \Option{everyside}, and \Option{floatornonfloatpage}. The option does not expect any value.% }% \entry{\KOption{voffset}{\PName{length}}}{% @@ -597,26 +596,17 @@ there has not been a layer with \PName{layer name} defined before. }% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareLayer}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{layerhalign}\\ - \Macro{layervalign}\\ - \Macro{layerxoffset}\\ - \Macro{layeryoffset}\\ - \Macro{layerwidth}\\ + \Macro{layerhalign}% + \Macro{layervalign}% + \Macro{layerxoffset}% + \Macro{layeryoffset}% + \Macro{layerwidth}% \Macro{layerheight}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layervalign}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerhalign}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerxoffset}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layeryoffset}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerheight}% These commands are valid during output of the layer's contents only. So they can only be used inside the \PName{code} of option \Option{contents} of the previously described commands. In this case they give the effective alignment, @@ -637,18 +627,12 @@ resulting \Macro{layervalign} is either \PValue{r}, \PValue{c}, or \PValue{b}. Redefinition of the commands to change the stored values is strictly forbidden and would result in unpredictable issues.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerheight}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layeryoffset}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerxoffset}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerhalign}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layervalign}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{LenToUnit}\Parameter{length} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LenToUnit}% This\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} command has been copied from \Package{eso-pic}\IndexPackage{eso-pic} 2.0f. It converts lengths into multiples of \Length{unitlength}. It can be used everywhere \LaTeX{} @@ -663,21 +647,16 @@ It should be noted at this point that using package \cite{package:picture}) supersedes \Macro{LenToUnit} more or less. The package extends environment \Environment{picture} and the picture commands to accept \LaTeX{} lengths directly.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LenToUnit}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{putUL}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{putUR}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{putLL}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{putLR}\Parameter{content}\\ + \Macro{putUL}\Parameter{content}% + \Macro{putUR}\Parameter{content}% + \Macro{putLL}\Parameter{content}% + \Macro{putLR}\Parameter{content}% \Macro{putC}\Parameter{content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putUL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putUR}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putLL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putLR}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putC}% You\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} can use these commands inside the value of primary layer option \PValue{contents}, if the layer is declared with \OptionValue{mode}{picture}. In that case, \Macro{putUL} places the @@ -695,10 +674,11 @@ like \lstinline[breaklines=false]|\put(\LenToUnit{\layerwidth},0)|. Last but not least \Macro{putC} places the \PName{content} relative to the centre of the layer.% \begin{Example} - You want to investigate, how accurate \OptionValue{DIV}{classic} sets the - height of the text area to the width of the page size. So you declare a - layer that not only border the text area, but also places a circle with - paper width as diameter dimension into the centre of the text area: + You want to investigate, how accurate + \OptionValueRef{typearea}{DIV}{classic} sets the height of the text area to + the width of the page size. So you declare a layer that not only border the + text area, but also places a circle with paper width as diameter dimension + into the centre of the text area: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[DIV=classic]{scrartcl} \usepackage{pict2e} @@ -729,32 +709,27 @@ area see \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction}, For more information about command \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} see the description later in \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyles}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}. In short: It +\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}. In short: It defines a new page style using the newly declared layer.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putC}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putLR}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putLL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putUR}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putUL}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{GetLayerContents}\Parameter{layer name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GetLayerContents}% This\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} command results in the whole content of a layer. You have to note\textnote{Attention!} that using this command inside the \PName{code} of the layer attributes \Option{contents}, \Option{addcontents}, or \Option{pretocontents} can result in an infinite recursion, if the content of the current layer is referenced. You yourself should avoid such situations!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GetLayerContents}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{IfLayerExists}% \Parameter{string}\Parameter{then-code}\Parameter{else-code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerExists}% This command may be used to execute code depending on whether or not a layer has been defined already. If the layer exists \PName{then-code} will be executed, otherwise \PName{else-code}. Note, the command cannot really @@ -762,36 +737,39 @@ test whether a layer exists. It uses a heuristic, that will never be false negative, but may be false positive. Nevertheless, if it is false positive something went wrong, either an incompatible package has been used or the user made something he should not do.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerExists} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyLayer}\Parameter{layer name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyLayer}% This command sets all macros corresponding with the layer with given -\PName{layer name} to \Macro{relax}, if a layer with that name exists. As a result the layer cannot be used any longer. It does not matter, if the layer +\PName{layer name} to \Macro{relax}, if a layer with that name exists. As a +result the layer cannot be used any longer. It does not matter, if the layer is still part of the layer list of a page style, because such destroyed layers will be ignored. Nevertheless, destroyed layers may be defined again using -\Macro{DeclareNewLayer} or \Macro{ProvideLayer}, but cannot be changed using -\Macro{RedeclareLayer} or \Macro{ModifyLayer} any longer. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewLayer} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideLayer}, but cannot be changed using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareLayer} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} any longer. The command is intended to be used inside -\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} to remove layers, which have been +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} to remove layers, which have been defined using removable macros of an interface, whenever the interface would be removed.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyLayer} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{layercontentsmeasure}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layercontentsmeasure}% The command \Macro{layercontentsmeasure} prints a ruler at each layer edge, of which the top and left one is labelled with centimeters, the right and bottom one with inches. This command is used internally, if option -\Option{draft}\IndexOption{draft} is enabled. The rulers will be drawn behind -the content of each layer. It can also be used as exclusive content of a -layer.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layercontentsmeasure} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.draft}\IndexOption{draft} is enabled. The rulers +will be drawn behind the content of each layer. It can also be used as +exclusive content of a layer.% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Declaration and Management of Page Styles} @@ -821,7 +799,7 @@ layers and several \emph{hooks}. For description of layers see or execution of page styles you may add additional code to. Advanced users know this already from commands like \Macro{AtBeginDocument} (see \cite{latex:usrguide}) or \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux}). +\DescPageRef{scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux}). Alias page styles are another type of page styles provided by \Package{scrlayer}. An alias page style wraps another page style. In other @@ -837,61 +815,59 @@ styles. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{currentpagestyle} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{currentpagestyle}% -Package scrlayer patches \Macro{pagestyle} to set \Macro{currentpagestyle} to -the currently active page style. Note, \Macro{thispagestyle} does not change -\Macro{currentpagestyle}. But if you use \Macro{thispagestyle} the result of -\Macro{currentpagestyle} may be changed while executing the \LaTeX{} output -routine. However, this change will only occur, if \Macro{currentpagestyle} has -been actively protected from expansion up to execution of the output routine. - -Note, the layer page styles described later in this section, will not need -the patch of \Macro{pagestyle} to set \Macro{currentpagestyle}. The patch has -been made for usage with other page styles. Additionally, -\Macro{currentpagestyle} is empty before the first \Macro{pagestyle} after -loading \Package{scrlayer}. So if you define an end user page style interface, -it may be useful to use an implicit \Macro{pagestyle} to set the current page -style to a default page style.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{currentpagestyle} +Package scrlayer patches \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} to set +\Macro{currentpagestyle} to the currently active page style. Note, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} does not change +\Macro{currentpagestyle}. But if you use \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} +the result of \Macro{currentpagestyle} may be changed while executing the +\LaTeX{} output routine. However, this change will only occur, if +\Macro{currentpagestyle} has been actively protected from expansion up to +execution of the output routine. + +Note, the layer page styles described later in this section, will not need the +patch of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} to set \Macro{currentpagestyle}. The +patch has been made for usage with other page styles. Additionally, +\Macro{currentpagestyle} is empty before the first +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} after loading \Package{scrlayer}. So if you +define an end user page style interface, it may be useful to use an implicit +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} to set the current page style to a default +page style.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{code}\\ - \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{code}%^^A + \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{code}% + \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}% The command \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle} adds \PName{code} to the hook -that will be executed inside of \Macro{pagestyle} just before the page style -will be selected. You may use \texttt{\#1} as a placeholder for the argument -of \Macro{pagestyle}. +that will be executed inside of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} just before +the page style will be selected. You may use \texttt{\#1} as a placeholder for +the argument of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}. The command \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle} is similar, but the \PName{code} will be executed just after the page style has been selected and after -\Macro{currentpagestyle} has been set to the name of the real page style. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.currentpagestyle} has been set to the name of the real +page style. + +Note\textnote{Attention!}, \PName{code} of both commands will be executed only +if a page style will be selected using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}, but +not, e.\,g., if a page style will be selected using +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}. Note also, you cannot remove \PName{code} +from the hook after adding it. But the \PName{code} will be added locally, so +you may use a group to limit the scope of \PName{code}.% +\EndIndexGroup -Note\textnote{Attention!}, \PName{code} of both commands will be executed -only if a page style will be selected using \Macro{pagestyle}, but not, -e.\,g., if a page style will be selected using \Macro{thispagestyle}. Note -also, you cannot remove \PName{code} from the hook after adding it. But -the \PName{code} will be added locally, so you may use a group to limit the -scope of \PName{code}.%^^A -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle} \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclarePageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}\\ + \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}% \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}\\ + \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}% \Macro{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}\\ + \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name}% \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% \Parameter{alias page style name}\Parameter{original page style name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% These commands may be used to define a page style with name \PName{alias page style name} that is simply an alias for an already existing page style with name \PName{original page style name}. If there is already a page style @@ -911,51 +887,45 @@ style or another page style. \PName{alias page style name}. It will destroy that page style and afterwards define the alias. If the page style \PName{alias page style name} does not exist, then you will get an error.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleAlias} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyPageStyleAlias}\Parameter{page style name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyPageStyleAlias}% This command makes the page style with given \PName{page style name} \LaTeX-undefined, if it is an alias for another page style. Afterwards, the page style may be defined newly with, e.g., \Macro{DeclareNewAliasPageStyle} or \Macro{ProvideAliasPageStyle}. The command is intended to be used inside of -\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} to remove page styles that have been +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} to remove page styles that have been declared by an interface and use removable macros of that interface.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyPageStyleAlias} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{GetRealPageStyle}\Parameter{page style name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GetRealPageStyle}% The command will result in the (recursive) real page name of the page style, if the page style with given name \PName{page style name} is an alias of another page style. In all other cases, even if there's no alias and no page style named \PName{page style name}, the result would be simply \PName{page style name}. The command is fully expandable and may be used, e.g., in the second argument of \Macro{edef}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GetRealPageStyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}%^ \OParameter{option list}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}% These commands declare a page style with \PName{page style name}. The page style will consist of the layers given in \PName{layer list}, a comma separated list of layer names. Note, the \PName{page style name} and the @@ -978,79 +948,79 @@ hooks. }{% The \emph{hook} options for page styles (\emph{Continuation})% }% - \entry{\KOption{onselect}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onselect}{code}}{% Execute \PName{code} whenever the page style is selected using, e.g., - \Macro{pagestyle}. Note\textnote{Attention!}, \Macro{thispagestyle} - does not select the page style immediately, but asynchronously inside - \LaTeX's output routine.% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}. Note\textnote{Attention!}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} does not select the page style + immediately, but asynchronously inside \LaTeX's output routine.% + }% + \entry{\OptionVName{oninit}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers is + initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done twice for every page: + once for background layers and once for foreground layers.% }% - \entry{\KOption{oninit}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers - is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done + \entry{\OptionVName{ononeside}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers in + single-side mode is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for foreground layers.% }% - \entry{\KOption{ononeside}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{ontwoside}{code}}{% Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers in - single-side mode is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this - is done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers.% + two-side mode is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done + twice for every page: once for background layers and once for foreground + layers.% }% - \entry{\KOption{ontwoside}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers in - two-side mode is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is - done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onoddpage}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on an odd + page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done twice for + every page: once for background layers and once for foreground + layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that in single-side mode all pages + are odd pages, not only pages with odd page numbers.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onoddpage}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on - an odd page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is - done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that in single-side - mode all pages are odd pages, not only pages with odd page numbers.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onevenpage}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on an even + page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done twice for + every page: once for background layers and once for foreground + layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that there are not even pages in + single-side mode, but all pages are odd pages, not only pages with odd + page numbers.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onevenpage}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on - an even page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is - done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that there are not even - pages in single-side mode, but all pages are odd pages, not only pages - with odd page numbers.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onfloatpage}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on a float + page are initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is be done twice for + every page: once for background layers and once for foreground + layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that float pages are only those + pages with p-placed floating objects.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onfloatpage}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on - a float page are initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is - be done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that float pages are - only those pages with p-placed floating objects.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onnonfloatpage}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on a + non-float page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is done + twice for every page: once for background layers and once for foreground + layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that non-float pages are all pages + that are not float-pages. Those pages may have t-placed, h-placed, + b-placed, or no floating objects.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onnonfloatpage}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers on - a non-float page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this - is done twice for every page: once for background layers and once for - foreground layers. Note\textnote{Attention!} also that non-float pages - are all pages that are not float-pages. Those pages may have t-placed, - h-placed, b-placed, or no floating objects.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onbackground}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers in the + background of a page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is + done once for every page.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onbackground}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output of page style's layers in - the background of a page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, - this is done once for every page.% - }% - \entry{\KOption{onforeground}\PName{code}}{% - Execute \PName{code} whenever the output page style's layers in - the foreground of a page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, - this is done once for every page.% + \entry{\OptionVName{onforeground}{code}}{% + Execute \PName{code} whenever the output page style's layers in the + foreground of a page is initialised. Note\textnote{Attention!}, this is + done once for every page.% }% \end{desclist} The difference of \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} and -\Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} is that \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} -will result in an error, if a page style with name \PName{page style name} -already exists. Note, declaring a page style, which is an alias of another -page style (see \Macro{DeclareAliasPageStyle} prior in this section), will not -re-declare the page style itself, but it's real page style (see -\Macro{GetRealPageStyle} prior in this section). +\Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} is that +\Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} will result in an error, if a page style +with name \PName{page style name} already exists. Note, declaring a page +style, which is an alias of another page style (see +\Macro{DeclareAliasPageStyle} prior in this section), will not re-declare the +page style itself, but it's real page style (see +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.GetRealPageStyle} prior in this section). The difference of \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} and \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers} is that \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers} @@ -1064,87 +1034,63 @@ may be used only if the real page style of \PName{page style name} already exists. Otherwise an error occurs. Please have also a look at the notes to following pseudo page style -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% +\PageStyle{@everystyle@}.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{@everystyle@}\\ - \Pagestyle{empty} + \PageStyle{@everystyle@}% + \PageStyle{empty} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{@everysel@}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% There are two default layer page styles that are somehow special. The first -one is \Pagestyle{@everystyle@}. This page style should not be used like any +one is \PageStyle{@everystyle@}. This page style should not be used like any other page style, but the layers of this page style will be used by all the other layer page styles. So adding a layer to this page style is similar to adding this layer to all other layer page styles even the empty one. There's one difference: Layer referencing commands of the page style interface like -\Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}, \Macro{AddLayerToPageStyleBeforeLayer}, or -\Macro{AddLayerToPageStyleAfterLayer} process only the layers of the page -style that has been referenced but not the layers implicated by -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@}. - -The other somehow special page style is \Pagestyle{empty}. Normally page style -\Pagestyle{empty} is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel, to be a page style +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}, or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer} process only the +layers of the page style that has been referenced but not the layers +implicated by \PageStyle{@everystyle@}. + +The other somehow special page style is \PageStyle{empty}. Normally page style +\PageStyle{empty} is defined by the \LaTeX{} kernel, to be a page style without page head or page foot. Package \Package{scrlayer} re-defines it to be a layer page style without any layer. Nevertheless, you may use it like every other layer page style too. The main advantage above the \LaTeX{} kernel's empty page style is that it also executes the layers of special layer page -style \Pagestyle{@everysel@}.% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{@everysel@}% +style \PageStyle{@everysel@}.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{onpsselect}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsinit}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsoneside}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpstwoside}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsoddpage}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsevenpage}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsfloatpage}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsnonfloatpage}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsbackground}\PValue{code}\\ - \KOption{onpsforeground}\PValue{code} + \OptionVName{onpsselect}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsinit}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsoneside}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpstwoside}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsoddpage}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsevenpage}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsfloatpage}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsnonfloatpage}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsbackground}{code}% + \OptionVName{onpsforeground}{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsselect~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsinit~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsoneside~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpstwoside~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsoddpage~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsevenpage~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsfloatpage~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsnonfloatpage~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsbackground~=\PName{code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsforeground~=\PName{code}}% There's also a \KOMAScript{} option for each of those \texttt{hooks}. The names of the \KOMAScript{} options are similar to the names of the page style options, but with ``\texttt{ps}'' inserted behind ``\texttt{on}''. The value of the \KOMAScript{} options are the initial defaults of the corresponding \texttt{hooks}. These defaults will be extended at every declaration of page style hook options via \PName{option list}. You may remove the default, using -\Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions} described later in this section.% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsforeground~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsbackground~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsnonfloatpage~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsfloatpage~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsevenpage~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsoddpage~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpstwoside~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsoneside~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsinit~=\PName{code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsselect~=\PName{code}}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions} described later in this section.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{deactivatepagestylelayers}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{code}\\ + \OptionVName{deactivatepagestylelayers}{simple switch}% + \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{code}% \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}\Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{deactivatepagestylelayers~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}% As long as \KOMAScript{} option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} has not been activated command \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} can be used to process \PName{code} for every member layer of \PName{page style name}'s layers @@ -1177,24 +1123,19 @@ use \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} internally. So these also do not process any layer if \KOMAScript{} option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} would be activated. So you may use this options, e.g., to hide all layers of all layer page styles.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{deactivatepagestylelayers~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyle}% - \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% - \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% - \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}\\ + \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Macro{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% You can use these commands to add layers to a layer page style or to remove layers from a layer page style. The page style will be referenced by \PName{page style name}. The layers are given by a comma separated @@ -1221,21 +1162,17 @@ them. Note, layers, which are part of \PName{layer list}, but not part of the page style's layer list, will be ignored. But adding or removing layers from a page style, which is not a layer page style or an alias of a layer page style, would be a mistake and result in an error message.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% - \Parameter{reference layer name}\\ + \Parameter{reference layer name}% \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Parameter{reference layer name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% These commands are similar to the commands described before, but they do not add the layers at the begin or end of the layer list of a layer page style, but just before or after a reference layer at the layer list of a layer page @@ -1243,13 +1180,12 @@ style. Note, in this case the order of the \PName{layer list} will be same in the layer list of \PName{page style name} after adding. If the reference layer named \PName{reference layer name} is not part of the layer list of the layer page style, nothing happens.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}\Parameter{page style name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}% With the commands described before in this section you may not only add different layers to a page style, but even add the same layer several times to a page style. In most cases it does not make sense to have one layer several @@ -1260,16 +1196,15 @@ list of a layer page style. Note\textnote{Attention!}, the order of layers may change! So if you want a special order, you should remove all layers and add the layers in the order you want instead of using \Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% - \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{option list}\\ + \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{option list}% \Macro{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{option list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% Command \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions} may be used to modify the page style options of a layer page style. Only options at the comma separated \PName{option list} will be set to the new values given in \PName{option list} @@ -1283,17 +1218,15 @@ the global default value. \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions} in that point. It will not overwrite the previous values, but adds\,---\,or more precisely: concatenates\,---\, the new values to the previous values of the options at \PName{option list}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% - \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}\\ + \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \Macro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}%^ \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}% Command \Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists} tests, whether or not the real page style of \PName{page style name} is a layer page style. If the test is true, \PName{then code} will be executed. If \PName{page style name} is neither a @@ -1308,23 +1241,20 @@ will only be executed, if \PName{page style name} itself is the name of a layer page style. So \PName{else code} will even be executed, if \PName{page style name} is an alias name of a layer page style or the alias name of an alias name of \dots\ a layer page style.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer name}% - \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}\\ + \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \Macro{IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}%^ - \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}\\ - \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% + \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% + \Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% \Parameter{page style name}\Parameter{layer list}% \Parameter{then code}\Parameter{else code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% Command \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle} may be used to test, whether or not a layer named \PName{layer name} is a member of the layer list of a given page style. If the test is true, the \PName{then code} will be executed. If the @@ -1339,14 +1269,12 @@ is a member of the layer list of \PName{page style name}. In difference \Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle} executes the \PName{then code} only if \emph{all} of the layers at \PName{layer list} are members of the layer list of \PName{page style name}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerAtPageStyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}\Parameter{page style name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}% Command \Macro{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle} makes the page style named \PName{page style name} undefined, if and only if it is a layer page style. Nothing will be happen if it is an alias name of a layer page style, if @@ -1354,14 +1282,14 @@ it is another page style, or if it is not a page style. If \PName{page style name} is the name of the current page style the current page style will become a kind of empty page style. If the special page -style\,---\,this may be set using \Macro{thispagestyle}\,---\,is \PName{page - style name}, this will be simply reset. So the previous -\Macro{thispagestyle} will become invalid. +style\,---\,this may be set using \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\,---\,is +\PName{page style name}, this will be simply reset. So the previous +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} will become invalid. Note, the layers of the page style will not be destroyed automatically. If you want to destroy the layers too, you may use % Umbruchkorrektur -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \ForEachLayerOfPageStyle{...}{\DestroyLayer{#1}} \end{lstcode} \emph{before} destroying the layer page style. @@ -1369,11 +1297,11 @@ automatically. If you want to destroy the layers too, you may use The command is intended to be used inside the auto-remove code of an interface See \autoref{sec:scrlayer.enduserinterfaces} below for more information about auto-remove code.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{20} % \section{Height of Page Head and Foot} +\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight}% \section{Height of Page Head and Foot} -\LoadCommon{21} % \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Manipulation of Defined Page Styles} \section{End User Interfaces} \seclabel{enduserinterfaces} @@ -1397,7 +1325,6 @@ in the sections about the particular end user interface, e.g., \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scrlayerInitInterface}\OParameter{interface name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerInitInterface}% Command \Macro{scrlayerInitInterface} registers a new interface. The \PName{interface name} must be unique. If you try to initialise an already initialised interface an error will occur. This @@ -1407,23 +1334,20 @@ argument is omitted, \PValue{\Macro{@currname}.\Macro{@currext}} will be used instead. For classes and packages this will be the file name of the class or package while loading the class or package. But you may use any sequence of characters with category letter or other.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerInitInterface} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{forceoverwrite}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{autoremoveinterfaces}\PName{simple switch}\\ + \OptionVName{forceoverwrite}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{autoremoveinterfaces}{simple switch}% \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}% - \OParameter{interface name}\Parameter{command}\Parameter{code}\\ + \OParameter{interface name}\Parameter{command}\Parameter{code}% \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% \OParameter{interface name}\Parameter{command sequence}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{forceoverwrite}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autoremoveinterfaces}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddToInterface}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% One of the special features of end user interfaces is that they should register all interface dependent commands (also known as \emph{macros}). You -may do this using \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}%^^A +may do this using \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}% . If your interface generates macros not only at load time but also at run time or if the interface name should not be the class's or package's name, you have to use the optional argument to add the command to a dedicated @@ -1443,7 +1367,7 @@ added to the interface, it will be added to the interface, will be set to But when can a command be defined? If a command is undefined or \Macro{relax} it can be defined. If a command has already been defined and registered for another interface \emph{and} if \KOMAScript{} option -\Option{autoremoveinterface} has been switched on, the other interface will be +\Option{autoremoveinterfaces} has been switched on, the other interface will be removed automatically and the new command will be set to \Macro{relax} and will be registered for the given interface. If a command has already been defined but is not part of another interface \emph{and} if @@ -1454,26 +1378,23 @@ Command \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface} is similar to \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface} but does not expect a command as first, mandatory argument, but a command sequence\footnote{A command sequence may consist of any characters with category code letter or other.}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddToInterface} -\EndIndex{Option}{autoremoveinterfaces}% -\EndIndex{Option}{forceoverwrite}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}%^^A + \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}% \OParameter{interface name}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}% -Command \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} -registers \PName{code} to be executed, if the interface will be automatically -removed (see \Option{autoremoveinterfaces} prior in this section). This may be -used, e.g., to automatically destroy layers or page styles (see -\Macro{DestroyLayer}, \Macro{DestroyAliasPageStyle}, and -\Macro{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}% +Command \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} registers \PName{code} to be +executed, if the interface will be automatically removed (see +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.autoremoveinterfaces} prior in this section). This +may be used, e.g., to automatically destroy layers or page styles (see +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyLayer}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}).% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{layer} -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlfile.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlfile.tex index e8fabef495e..8279b16672d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlfile.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlfile.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,15 +46,15 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlfile.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlfile)] \translator{Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated german file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Control Package Dependencies with \Package{scrlfile}} \labelbase{scrlfile} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlfile} The introduction of {\LaTeXe} in 1994 brought many changes in the @@ -124,11 +124,9 @@ loading of files. In the commands used to do this, distinctions are made made between general files, classes, and packages. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeFile}\Parameter{file}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{BeforeFile}\Parameter{file}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterFile}\Parameter{file}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFile}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterFile}% The macro \Macro{BeforeFile} ensures that \PName{instructions} are only executed before the next time \PName{file} is loaded. \Macro{AfterFile} works in a similar fashion, and the @@ -146,58 +144,46 @@ The command \Macro{InputIfFileExists} is used by {\LaTeX} every time a file is to be loaded. This is independent of whether the actual load command is \Macro{include}, \Macro{LoadClass}, \Macro{documentclass}, \Macro{usepackage}, \Macro{RequirePackage}, or similar. Exceptionally, the command -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \input foo \end{lstcode} loads the file \texttt{foo} without utilizing \Macro{InputIfFileExists}. Therefore, one should always use -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \input{foo} \end{lstcode} instead. Notice the parentheses surrounding the file name!% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFile}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterFile}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{BeforeClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{BeforePackage}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforePackage}% -These two commands work in the same way as \Macro{BeforeFile}. The only +These two commands work in the same way as \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeFile}. The only difference is that the document class \PName{class} and the {\LaTeX} package \PName{package} are specified with their names and not with their file names. That means that the file extensions \File{.cls} and \File{.sty} can be omitted.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforePackage}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass*}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass+}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass!}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage*}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage+}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage!}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{AfterClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterClass*}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterClass+}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterClass!}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\Parameter{class}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterPackage}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterPackage*}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterPackage+}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterPackage!}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}\Parameter{package}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass+}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass!}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage+}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage!}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfPackage}% The commands \Macro{AfterClass} and \Macro{AfterPackage} work in the -same way as \Macro{AfterFile}. The only difference is that the +same way as \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile}. The only difference is that the document class \PName{class} and the {\LaTeX} package \PName{package} are specified with their names and not with their file names. That means that the file extensions \File{.cls} and \File{.sty} can be @@ -266,11 +252,12 @@ class or package, that will be loaded, you may use \end{lstcode} After the package \Package{caption2} has been loaded, and only if it has been loaded, {\KOMAScript} redefines its own command - \Macro{setcapindent}. The exact code of the redefinition is not - important. It should only be noted that \Package{caption2} takes - control of the \Macro{caption} macro and that therefore the normal - definition of the \Macro{setcapindent} macro would become ineffective. - The redefinition improves the collaboration with \Package{caption2}. + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent}. The exact code of the redefinition is + not important. It should only be noted that \Package{caption2} takes + control of the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} macro and that therefore the + normal definition of the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent} macro would + become ineffective. The redefinition improves the collaboration with + \Package{caption2}. There are however also useful examples for normal {\LaTeX} user. Suppose a document that should be available as a PS file, using {\LaTeX} and dvips, as @@ -290,7 +277,7 @@ class or package, that will be loaded, you may use \endinput \end{lstcode} - All the rest can now be left to \Macro{AfterFile}. + All the rest can now be left to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile}. \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{article} \usepackage{scrlfile} @@ -316,34 +303,23 @@ class or package, that will be loaded, you may use \end{Example} Furthermore\textnote{Hint!}, the loading of package \Package{scrlfile} and -the \Macro{AfterFile} statement can be written in a private +the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} statement can be written in a private \File{hyperref.cfg}. If you do so, then instead of \Macro{usepackage} the macro \Macro{RequirePackage} ought be used (see \cite{latex:clsguide}). The new lines have to be inserted directly after the \Macro{ProvidesFile} line, thus immediately prior to the execution of the options \Option{dvips} or \Option{pdftex}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass+}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass!}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage+}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage!}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfPackage}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterReadingMainAux}\Parameter{instructions}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClosingMainAux}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterReadingMainAux}% Package authors often want to write something into the \File{aux}-file after the last document page have been shipped out. To do so, often -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \if@filesw \write\@auxout{% @@ -361,7 +337,7 @@ occur: If the last page was not shipped out before \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} the \Macro{writethistoaux} would be written into \File{aux}-file before ship-out the last page. Another often seen suggestion for this problem therefore is: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \if@filesw \clearpage @@ -372,8 +348,9 @@ suggestion for this problem therefore is: } \end{lstcode} This suggestion has a disadvantage again: The ship-out of the last page has -been enforced by the \Macro{clearpage}. After that, instructions like -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +been enforced by the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}. After that, instructions +like +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \par\vspace*{\fill}% Note at the end of the document.\par @@ -384,10 +361,10 @@ document but at the end of one more page. Additionally \Macro{writethistoaux} would be written one page to early into the \File{aux}-file again. The best solution for this problem would be, to write to the \File{aux}-file -immediately after the final \Macro{clearpage}, that is part of +immediately after the final \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}, that is part of \Macro{end}\PParameter{document}, but just before closing the \File{aux}-file. This is the purpose of \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \BeforeClosingMainAux{% \if@filesw \immediate\write\@auxout{% @@ -396,9 +373,9 @@ immediately after the final \Macro{clearpage}, that is part of \fi } \end{lstcode} -This would be successful even if the final \Macro{clearpage} inside of -\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} would not really ship-out any page or if -someone have had used \Macro{clearpage} in the argument of +This would be successful even if the final \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} +inside of \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} would not really ship-out any page +or if someone have had used \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} in the argument of \Macro{AtEndDocument}. Nevertheless there one important limitation using @@ -414,10 +391,10 @@ sense only in some cases, e.\,g., to show statistic information, that will be valid only after input of the \File{aux}-file, or to write such information into the \File{log}-file, or to implement additional \emph{rerun} requests. Typeset instructions are even more critical inside these -\PName{instructions} that inside the argument of \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}.% +\PName{instructions} that inside the argument of +\Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterReadingMainAux}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClosingMainAux}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Replacing Files at Input} @@ -433,7 +410,6 @@ package instead of the one, that has been declared. \Macro{ReplaceInput}\Parameter{source file name}% \Parameter{replacement file name}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceInput}% This\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Package{scrlfile}} command defines a replacement for the file of the first argument: \PName{source file name}, by the file of the second argument: \PName{replacement file name}. If \LaTeX{} will be instructed @@ -472,19 +448,18 @@ In theory is would also be possible to replace a package or class by another one. But \LaTeX{} would recognize the usage of the wrong file name in this case. A solution for this problem will be shown next.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceInput}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ReplaceClass}\Parameter{source class}% - \Parameter{replacement package}\\ + \Parameter{replacement package}% \Macro{ReplacePackage}\Parameter{source package}% \Parameter{replacement package}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplacePackage}% Classes\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Package{scrlfile}}\textnote{Attention!} or packages should never be replaced using previously described command -\Macro{ReplaceInput}. Using this command would result in a \LaTeX{} warning +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput}. Using this command would result in a \LaTeX{} warning because of class or package name not according the file name. \begin{Example} You replace package \Package{fancyhdr} by package \Package{scrpage2} @@ -504,9 +479,10 @@ because of class or package name not according the file name. definition. \end{Example} A solution for this problem would be, to use \Macro{ReplaceClass} or -\Macro{ReplacePackage} instead of \Macro{ReplaceFile}. Please note, that in -this case you have to use the names of the classes or packages only instead of -the whole file name. This is similar to usage of \Macro{documentclass} and +\Macro{ReplacePackage} instead of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput}. Please note, that in this case you have +to use the names of the classes or packages only instead of the whole file +name. This is similar to usage of \Macro{documentclass} and \Macro{usepackage}. The class replacement would perform for all classes, that will be loaded using @@ -518,10 +494,11 @@ package replacement would perform for all packages, that will be loaded using Please\textnote{Attention!} note, that the \PName{replacement class} or the \PName{replacement package} will be loaded with the same options, the \PName{source class} or \PName{replacement class} would until it has been -replaced. Replacement of a class or package by a class or package, that -does not support a requested option, would result in a warning or even an error -message. But you may declare such missing options using \Macro{BeforeClass} or -\Macro{BeforePackage}. +replaced. Replacement of a class or package by a class or package, that does +not support a requested option, would result in a warning or even an error +message. But you may declare such missing options using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeClass} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforePackage}. \begin{Example} Assumed, package \Package{oldfoo} should be replaced by @@ -577,25 +554,20 @@ message. But you may declare such missing options using \Macro{BeforeClass} or To replace classes package \Package{scrlfile} has to be loaded before the class using \Macro{RequirePackage} instead of \Macro{usepackage}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplacePackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceClass}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{UnReplaceInput}\Parameter{file name}\\ - \Macro{UnReplacePackage}\Parameter{package}\\ + \Macro{UnReplaceInput}\Parameter{file name}% + \Macro{UnReplacePackage}\Parameter{package}% \Macro{UnReplaceClass}\Parameter{class}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceInput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplacePackage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceClass}% A\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} replacement definition can be removed using one of these commands. The replacement definition of a input file should be removed using \Macro{UnReplaceInput}, the replacement definition of a package should be removed using \Macro{UnReplacePackage}, and the replacement definition of a class should be removed using \Macro{UnReplaceClass}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplacePackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceInput}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Prevent File Loading} @@ -610,12 +582,10 @@ provides a solution. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\OParameter{instead code}% - \Parameter{package list}\\ + \Parameter{package list}% \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading*}\OParameter{instead code}% \Parameter{package list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading*}% Calling this command\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}} before loading a package using \Macro{usepackage}\IndexCmd{usepackage}, \Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage}, or @@ -655,20 +625,18 @@ info\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} at the log-file only, you may use The optional argument\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} may be used to execute code instead of loading the package. But you must not load another -packages or files inside \PName{instead code}. See \Macro{ReplacePackage} in -\autoref{sec:scrlfile.macros} on -\autopageref{desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage} for information about replacing -a package by another one. Note also, that the \PName{instead code} will be +packages or files inside \PName{instead code}. See +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage} in \autoref{sec:scrlfile.macros} on +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage} for information about replacing a +package by another one. Note also, that the \PName{instead code} will be executed several times, if you try to load the package more than once!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{\Macro{command}}\\ + \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{\textMacro{command}}% \Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}% \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoad}\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}} defines \Macro{command} to be the current list of packages, that should be prevented from being loaded. In opposite to this, @@ -678,8 +646,9 @@ resets the list of packages, that should be prevented from being loaded. After \begin{Example} Assumed, you really need a package inside your own package and you want the user inhibit to prevent loading of that package with - \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\IndexCmd{PreventPackageFromLoading}. Because - of this, you reset the package preventing list before loading the package: + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading}% + \IndexCmd{PreventPackageFromLoading}. Because of this, you reset the package + preventing list before loading the package: \begin{lstcode} \ResetPreventPackageFromLoading \RequirePackage{foo} @@ -710,15 +679,13 @@ expandable. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that \Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} does not clean the \PName{instead code} of a package. Only the execution is not done as long as the prevention is not reactivated.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{package list}\\ + \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{package list}% \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}\Parameter{package list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}% Instead\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} of resetting the whole list of packages, that should prevented from being loaded, you may also remove some packages from that list. The star version of the command does also clean the @@ -749,10 +716,9 @@ packages.% still prevented from being loaded, but their \PName{instead code} has been cleaned and will not be executed any longer.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlfile} +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex index 9b93f3776fc..f27ff563f2c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlttr2-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlttr2-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,17 +46,20 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2-experts.tex} - [$Date: 2015-07-15 18:39:57 +0200 (Wed, 15 Jul 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2 for experts)] \translator{Harald Bongartz\and Georg Grandke\and Raimund Kohl\and Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Stephan Hennig\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Additional Information about the Letter Class \Class{scrlttr2} and the Letter Package \Package{scrletter}} \labelbase{scrlttr2-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2} +\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter} This chapter gives additional information about the \KOMAScript{} class \Class{scrlttr2}. \iffree{Some parts of the chapter are subject to the @@ -70,19 +73,17 @@ only because of compatibility to deprecated \Class{scrlettr} class. Last but not least it will be described in detail how to change a document from the old \Class{scrlettr} class to be used with the current \Class{scrlttr2} class. -\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter}% Since \KOMAScript~3.15\ChangedAt[2014/11]{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} the additional package \Package{scrletter} exists. It can be used with one of the \KOMAScript{} classes \Class{scrartcl}, \Class{scrreprt}, or \Class{scrbook} and provides all the features of \Class{scrlttr2} for those classes. There are, however, small differences described later in this section.% -% -\EndIndex{Package}{scrletter}% \section{Pseudo-Lengths for Experienced Users} \seclabel{pseudoLengths} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{pseudo-lengths} {\TeX} works with a fixed number of registers. There are registers for tokens, @@ -133,87 +134,87 @@ note paper have been omitted to get a more clear arrangement. \pentry{backaddrheight}{% height of the return address at the upper edge of the address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight})% }% \pentry{bfoldmarklength}{% length of the bottommost folding mark % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{bfoldmarkvpos}{% vertical distance of bottommost folding mark from top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{firstfoothpos}{% horizontal distance of the letter footer from the left paper edge; values greater than the width of the paper or smaller than the negative value of the width of the paper will activate special handling % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos})% }% \pentry{firstfootvpos}{% vertical distance of letter footer from top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos})% }% \pentry{firstfootwidth}{% width of letter footer % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth})% }% \pentry{firstheadhpos}{% horizontal distance of the letterhead from the left paper edge; values greater than the width of the paper or smaller than the negative value of the width of the paper will activate special handling % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos})% }% \pentry{firstheadvpos}{% vertical distance of letterhead from top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos})% }% \pentry{firstheadwidth}{% width of the letterhead % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth})% }% \pentry{foldmarkhpos}{% horizontal distance of the horizontal folding marks from left paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos})% }% \pentry{foldmarkvpos}{% vertical distance of the vertical folding marks from the top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{fromrulethickness}{% thickness of an optional horizontal rule in the letterhead % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness})% }% \pentry{fromrulewidth}{% length of an optional horizontal rule in letterhead % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth})% }% \pentry{lfoldmarkhpos}{% horizontal distance of the vertical folding mark from the left paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos})% }% \pentry{lfoldmarklength}{% length of the vertical folding mark % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{locheight}{% height of the field with the extended sender's information, of the value is not zero; \PLength{toaddrheight} will be used instead of zero value % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight})% }% \pentry{lochpos}{% horizontal distance of the field with the extended sender's information @@ -221,135 +222,135 @@ note paper have been omitted to get a more clear arrangement. distance from the left paper edge, if the value is negative; negative value of \PLength{toaddrhpos} will be used instead of zero value % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos})% }% \pentry{locvpos}{% vertical distance of the field with the extended sender's information from the top paper edge, if the value is not zero; \PLength{toaddrvpos} will be used instead of zero value % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos})% }% \pentry{locwidth}{% width of the field with the extended sender's information; for zero value - width is calculated automatically with respect to option \Option{locfield} + width is calculated automatically with respect to option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} that is described in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield} % + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth})% }% \pentry{mfoldmarklength}{% length of the middle horizontal folding mark % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{mfoldmarkvpos}{% vertical distance of the middle horizontal folding mark from the top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{pfoldmarklength}{% length of the puncher hole mark % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{refaftervskip}{% vertical skip below reference fields or business line % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip})% }% \pentry{refhpos}{% horizontal distance of reference fields or business line from left paper edge; for zero value reference fields line is centered horizontally on letter paper % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos})% }% \pentry{refvpos}{% vertical distance of reference fields or business line from top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos})% }% \pentry{refwidth}{% width of reference fields line % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth})% }% \pentry{sigbeforevskip}{% vertical skip between closing and signature % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip})% }% \pentry{sigindent}{% indentation of signature with respect to text body % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent})% }% \pentry{specialmailindent}{% left indentation of mode of dispatch within address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent})% }% \pentry{specialmailrightindent}{% right indentation of mode of dispatch within address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent})% }% \pentry{subjectaftervskip}{% vertical distance after the subject % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% }% \pentry{subjectbeforevskip}{% additional vertical distance before the subject % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip})% }% \pentry{subjectvpos}{% vertical distance of the subject from the top paper edge; zero value will - set the subject depending on option \Option{subject} % + set the subject depending on option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject} % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% }% \pentry{tfoldmarklength}{% length of the topmost horizontal folding mark % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{tfoldmarkvpos}{% vertical distance of the topmost horizontal folding mark from the top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrheight}{% height of address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight})% }% \pentry{toaddrhpos}{% horizontal distance of the address field from left paper edge, for positive values; negative horizontal distance of the address field from right paper edge, for negative values % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrindent}{% left and right indentation of address within address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent})% }% \pentry{toaddrvpos}{% vertical distance of the address field from the top paper edge % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrwidth}{% width of address field % (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth})% }% \end{desclist} @@ -360,10 +361,10 @@ note paper have been omitted to get a more clear arrangement. \label{fig:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLength} \end{figure} + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{@newplength}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@newplength}% This command defines an new pseudo-length. This new pseudo-length is uniquely identified by its \PName{name}. If with this command a redefinition of an already existing pseudo-length is attempted, the @@ -381,21 +382,20 @@ but it can, for example, be used within an \cite{UK:FAQ}). But\textnote{Attention!} inside an \File{lco}-file these two commands should never be used!}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@newplength}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{@setplength}% - \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{pseudo-length}\Parameter{value}\\ + \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{pseudo-length}\Parameter{value}% \Macro{@addtoplength}% \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{pseudo-length}\Parameter{value} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@setplength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@addtoplength}% Using the command \Macro{@setplength} you can assign the multiple of a \PName{value} to a \PName{pseudo-length}. The \PName{factor} is given as an -optional argument (see also \Macro{setlengthtoplength}, +optional argument (see also \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}, \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}). +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}). The command \Macro{@addtoplength} adds the \PName{value} to a \PName{pseudo-length}. Again a \PName{factor} may be given as an optional @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ argument. To assign, or to add the multiple of, one \PName{pseudo-length} to another pseudo-length, the command \Macro{useplength} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}) is used within \PName{value}. To +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}) is used within \PName{value}. To subtract the value of one pseudo-length from another \PName{pseudo-length} a minus sign, or \PValue{-1}, is used as the \PName{factor}. @@ -420,12 +420,12 @@ but can, for example, be used within an \File{lco}-file.\iffree{}{ \cite{UK:FAQ}). But\textnote{Attention!} inside an \File{lco}-file these two commands should never be used!}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@setplength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@addtoplength}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Folding Marks} \seclabel{foldmarks} +\BeginIndexGroup \index{marks>folding|see{folding marks}} \BeginIndex{}{folding marks}% @@ -436,13 +436,10 @@ there is support for a puncher hole mark or center mark which cannot be shifted in the vertical direction. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos}\\ - \PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}\\ + \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos}% + \PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}% \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarkvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarkvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarkvpos}% The letter class \Class{scrlttr2} knows a total of three vertically placed configurable foldmarks. The position of the topmost foldmark, taken from the upper edge of the paper, is governed by the pseudo-length @@ -475,25 +472,19 @@ foldmarks is simply a convenience. In fact, it is not defined that turn must be smaller than \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos}. If on the other hand one of the pseudo-lengths is set to null, then the corresponding foldmark will not be set even if the option -\Option{foldmarks}\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -\important{\Option{foldmarks}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}) is explicity activated. +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}) is explicity activated. % -\EndIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarkvpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarkvpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarkvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{tfoldmarklength}\\ - \PLength{mfoldmarklength}\\ - \PLength{bfoldmarklength}\\ + \PLength{tfoldmarklength}% + \PLength{mfoldmarklength}% + \PLength{bfoldmarklength}% \PLength{pfoldmarklength} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{pfoldmarklength}% These\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} four pseudo-lengths determine the lengths of the four horizontal foldmarks. One\textnote{Attention!} exceptional behaviour exists. If the length is given as null, then the three @@ -501,84 +492,78 @@ vertically-configurable pseudo-lengths \PLength{tfoldmarklength}, \PLength{mfoldmarklength} and \PLength{bfoldmarklength} are set to 2\Unit{mm} in length. The length of the punchmark, \PLength{pfoldmarklength}, is instead set to 4\Unit{mm}.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{pfoldmarklength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkhpos}% This pseudo-length gives the distance of all horizontal foldmarks from the left edge of the paper. Normally, this is 3.5\Unit{mm}. This\textnote{Hint!} value can be changed in the user's own \File{lco}-file, in case the user's printer has a wider unprintable left margin. Whether the foldmarks are typeset -at all depends on the option \Option{foldmarks}\important{\Option{foldmarks}}% +at all depends on the option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}% \IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). % -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarkhpos}% Apart from\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} the horizontal foldmarks there is also a vertical foldmark, whose position from the left margin is set via the pseudo-length \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos}. This foldmark is used, for example, in Japanese Chou- or You-format envelopes, when one wishes to use A4 size sheets with them. This can also be useful for envelopes in C6 format.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarkhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{lfoldmarklength} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarklength}% The\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} length of the vertical foldmark is set via the pseudo-length \PLength{lfoldmarklength}. Here too there is an exceptional behaviour. When the length is set to null, a length of 4\Unit{mm} is actually used.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarklength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkvpos}% This\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} pseudo-length gives the distance of all vertical foldmarks from the upper edge of the paper. Normally this is 3.5\Unit{mm}, but\textnote{Hint!} the value can be changed in the user's personal \File{lco}-file in case the user's printer has a wider unprintable top margin. Whether the foldmarks are typeset at all depends on the option -\Option{foldmarks}\important{\Option{foldmarks}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}% +\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}% \IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). At present there is only one -vertical foldmark, which is designated the left vertical foldmark. +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). At +present there is only one vertical foldmark, which is designated the left +vertical foldmark. % -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkthickness} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkthickness}% This\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} pseudo-length determines the thickness of all foldmarks. Default value is 0.2\Unit{pt}, in other words a very thin hairline. In particular, if the color of the foldmarks is changed, this can be too thin!% -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkthickness}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{folding marks} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Letterhead} \seclabel{firstHead} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{letterhead} The term letterhead here refers to all of the data pertaining to the sender @@ -587,7 +572,7 @@ this information is set via the page style settings. In fact, this was the case in the earlier incarnation of the letter class, \Class{scrlettr}. But\textnote{Attention!} with \Class{scrlttr2}, the letterhead is made independent of the page style setting, and is set by the -command \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. +command \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. % Fuellmaterial \iftrue% The position of the letterhead is absolute and independent of the type @@ -599,20 +584,18 @@ is set using the page style \PValue{empty}.% \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadvpos}% The pseudo-length \PLength{firstheadvpos} gives the distance between the top edge of the paper and start of the letterhead. This value is set differently in the various predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. A typical value is 8\Unit{mm}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadvpos} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadhpos}% A positive value of pseudo-length \PLength{firstheadhpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gives the distance between the left edge of the paper and the start of the @@ -629,13 +612,12 @@ Typical default\textnote{Attention!} is a value of \Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, though the greatest allowed value of a length. This will result in horizontal centering.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadwidth}% The pseudo-length \PLength{firstheadwidth} gives the width of the letterhead. This value is set differently in the various predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. @@ -644,18 +626,16 @@ the left edge of the paper and the adressee address field, it was the type area width in \Option{KOMAold} and has a definite value of 170\Unit{mm} in \Option{NF}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{fromrulethickness}\\ + \PLength{fromrulethickness}% \PLength{fromrulewidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{fromrulethickness}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{fromrulewidth}% Depending on the class option \Option{fromrule} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule}), a horizontal rule can be drawn +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule}), a horizontal rule can be drawn the predefined letterheads under or within the sender address. If\textnote{Attention!} the pseudo-length \PLength{fromrulewidth} has a value of 0\Unit{pt}, which is the default in the predefined \File{lco} @@ -663,18 +643,18 @@ files, the rule length is calculated automatically taking into account, e.\,g., letterhead width or an optional logo. Users can adjust rule length manually in their own \File{lco}-files by setting this pseudo-length to positive values using \Macro{\@setplength} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}). The default thickness of +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}). The default thickness of the line\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \PLength{fromrulethickness}, is 0.4\Unit{pt}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{fromrulethickness}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{fromrulewidth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letterhead}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Addressee} \seclabel{addressee}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{addressee} \index{address|seealso{addressee}} @@ -685,11 +665,9 @@ the latter is especially useful when using window envelopes. The address directly follows the letterhead. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{toaddrvpos}\\ + \PLength{toaddrvpos}% \PLength{toaddrhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrhpos}% These pseudo-lengths define vertical and horizontal position of the address field relative to the top-left corner of the paper. Values are set differently in the various predefined @@ -702,29 +680,26 @@ smallest value of \PLength{toaddrvpos} is found with \Option{DINmtext}. Care must be taken to avoid overlap of letterhead and address field. Whether the address field is output or not can be controlled by class option \Option{addrfield} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}).% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}).% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrhpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrheight}% The pseudo-length \PLength{toaddrheight} defines the height of the address field, including the dispatch type. If no dispatch type is specified, then the address is vertically centered in the field. If a dispatch type is specified, then the address is set below the dispatch type, and vertically centered in the remaining field height. % -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrheight}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrwidth}% This pseudo-length defines the width of the address field. Values are set differently in the various predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-files}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-files}, @@ -750,44 +725,42 @@ according to standard envelope window measures. Typical values are between simply use the option \Option{SNmmarg} instead of \Option{SN}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrindent} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrindent}% Additional indentation of the address within address field can be controlled by the pseudo-length \PLength{toaddrindent}. Its value applies to both left and right margin. Default value is 0\Unit{pt}. With\textnote{Attention!} each of the settings\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} -\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\\ - \OptionValue{addrfield}{image}\\ +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{image}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\ \quad\PValue{backgroundimage} \end{tabular}}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}}, -\OptionValue{addrfield}{image}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{image}}, and -\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{image}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{image}}, and +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% \IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{backgroundimage}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) a value of 0\Unit{pt} will be +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) a value of 0\Unit{pt} will be replaced by a value of 8\Unit{mm}. If really no indent should be used in this case, then 1\Unit{sp} may be used to set a negligible small indent. Additionally \PLength{toaddrindent} will be used also for the distance to the right edge of the address window with the mentioned \Option{addrfield} settings.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrindent}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{backaddrheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{backaddrheight}% For window envelopes the sender is often printed with small font at one line above the addressee. This kind of sender's information is known as return address\textnote{return address}\Index{return address}, because it is visible @@ -801,21 +774,20 @@ this is 5\Unit{mm} in the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. Whether or not to print the return address depend on option \Option{addrfield} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) and \Option{backaddress} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress}).% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) and +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress}).% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{backaddrheight}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{specialmailindent}\\ + \PLength{specialmailindent}% \PLength{specialmailrightindent} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{specialmailindent}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{specialmailrightindent}% An optional dispatch type can be output within the address field between the return address and the addressee address, by setting the variable -\Variable{specialmail}. Left and right alignment are determined by +\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail}. Left and right alignment are determined by pseudo-lengths \PLength{specialmailindent} and \PLength{specialmailrightindent}, respectively. In the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file} @@ -824,29 +796,26 @@ provided by \KOMAScript, \PLength{specialmailindent} is set to rubber length 1\Unit{em}. Thus the dispatch type is set 1\Unit{em} from the address field's right margin. % -\EndIndex{PLength}{specialmailindent}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{specialmailrightindent}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{PPheadheight}\\ + \PLength{PPheadheight}% \PLength{PPheadwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPheadheight}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPheadwidth}% The pseudo-length \PLength{PPheadheight}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} is the height, that will be reserved for the Port-Pay\'e head using the options -\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\\ +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\ \quad\PValue{backgroundimage} \end{tabular}}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} and -\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% \IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{backgroundimage}}. Pseudo-length -\PLength{PPheadwidth} will be used only with \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} (see +\PLength{PPheadwidth} will be used only with \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) and gives the width of the left +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) and gives the width of the left field in the Port-Pay\'e head that contains P.\,P. logo, zip-code and place. The width of the right field with the sender's code and the priority is the remaining width. @@ -856,30 +825,30 @@ pseudo-length \PLength{PPheadheight}'s\textnote{Attention} usual default value from 0\Unit{mm} into 20,74\Unit{pt} and \PLength{PPheadwidth}'s default from 0\Unit{mm} into 42\Unit{mm}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPheadwidth}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPheadheight}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPdatamatrixvskip}% This\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} pseudo-length gives the vertical distance between the Port-Pay\'e head and the data array or data matrix of -option \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}}% -\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} -(see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}). Class\textnote{Attention!} +option \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}}% +\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}). Class\textnote{Attention!} \Class{scrlttr2} automatically changes the default value 0\Unit{mm} into 9\Unit{mm}. The data matrix will be set right aligned with the Port-Pay\'e head.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPdatamatrixvskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{addressee}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Sender's Extensions} \seclabel{locationField} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{sender's extension} \index{sender>extension|see{sender's extension}} @@ -890,43 +859,38 @@ used. In this manual this field is called the \emph{sender's extension}. In former manuals is has been called \emph{location field}. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{locheight}\\ - \PLength{lochpos}\\ - \PLength{locvpos}\\ + \PLength{locheight}% + \PLength{lochpos}% + \PLength{locvpos}% \PLength{locwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locwidth}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locheight}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lochpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locvpos}% The pseudo-lengths \PLength{locwidth} and \PLength{locheight}\ChangedAt{v2.97d}{\Class{scrlttr2}} set the width and height of the sender's extension field. The pseudo-lengths \PLength{lochpos} and \PLength{locvpos} determine the distances from the right and upper paper edges. These value is typically set to 0\Unit{pt} in the predefined \File{lco} files. This\textnote{Attention!} does not mean that the sender's extension has -no width; instead, it means that the actual width is set within \Macro{opening} -when the paper width, address window width, and the distance between the left -and upper edges of the paper and the address window are known. The option -\Option{locfield} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield}) is also taken into account. As is -the case for \PLength{toaddrhpos}, negative values of \PLength{lochpos} take -on a special meaning. In that case, instead of referring to a distance from -the right edge of the paper, \PLength{lochpos} now means a distance from the -left edge of the paper. The meaning is thus the opposite to that of -\PLength{toaddrhpos} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos}).% -% -\EndIndex{PLength}{locwidth} -\EndIndex{PLength}{locheight}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lochpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{locvpos}% -% -\EndIndex{}{sender's extension} +no width; instead, it means that the actual width is set within +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} when the paper width, address window width, and +the distance between the left and upper edges of the paper and the address +window are known. The option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} (see +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield}) is +also taken into account. As is the case for \PLength{toaddrhpos}, negative +values of \PLength{lochpos} take on a special meaning. In that case, instead +of referring to a distance from the right edge of the paper, \PLength{lochpos} +now means a distance from the left edge of the paper. The meaning is thus the +opposite to that of \PLength{toaddrhpos} (see +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos}).% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Business Line} \seclabel{refLine}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{business line} \index{reference>field line|see{business line}} \index{reference>line|see{business line}} @@ -940,49 +904,46 @@ mentioned above is given. Only those fields will be set that are given. To\textnote{Hint!} set a seemingly empty field, one needs to give as value at least a forced white space or \Macro{null}. If you want to have your letter without a business line, then instead of it the label and contents of -the variable \Variable{date} will be set. Information about adding variables +the variable \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.date} will be set. Information about adding variables to the business line or clean up the business line may be found in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields}. +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields}. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{refvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refvpos}% This pseudo-length gives the distance between the upper edge of the paper and the reference fields line. Its value is set differently in the various predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. Typical values are between 80.5\Unit{mm} and 98.5\Unit{mm}. % -\EndIndex{PLength}{refvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{refwidth}\\ + \PLength{refwidth}% \PLength{refhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refwidth}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refhpos}% This pseudo-length gives the width that is available for the reference fields line. The value is set typically to 0\Unit{pt} in the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. This\textnote{Attention!} value has a special meaning: in no way does it determine that there is no available width for the business line; instead, this value means that the width will be calculated within the command -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. Thus the calculated width depends on the -determination of the options \Option{refline}\important{\Option{refline}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. Thus the calculated width depends on the +determination of the options \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PName{Einstellung}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}). At the same time, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}). At the same time, \PLength{refhpos} will be set according to this option. With -\OptionValue{refline}{wide}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{wide}}, the reference +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{wide}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{wide}}, the reference fields line is centered, while with -\OptionValue{refline}{narrow}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{narrow}} it is +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{narrow}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{narrow}} it is aligned on the left inside the typing area. If \PLength{refwidth} is not null, i.\,e., the width of the reference fields -line is therefore not determined by the option \Option{refline}, then +line is therefore not determined by the option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}, then \PLength{refhpos} gives the distance of the reference fields line from the left edge of the paper. If\textnote{Attention!} this distance is null, then the reference fields line is set so that the ratio between its distances from @@ -994,29 +955,30 @@ centered. As a rule, these special cases are likely to be of little interest to the normal user. The\textnote{Attention!} simplest rule is as follows: either \PLength{refhpos} is left at null and so the width and alignment of the -reference fields line are left to the option \Option{refline}, or -\PLength{refwidth} as well as \PLength{refhpos} are set by the user.% +reference fields line are left to the option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}, or \PLength{refwidth} as well as +\PLength{refhpos} are set by the user.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{refwidth}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{refhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{refaftervskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refaftervskip}% This pseudo-length gives the vertical space that has to be inserted beneath the reference fields line. The value is set in the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}. It directly affects the text height of the first page. A typical value lies between one and two lines.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{refaftervskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{business line}% +\EndIndexGroup + \subsection{Subject} \seclabel{subject}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{subject} In different countries the letter's subject will be set different. Some like @@ -1027,13 +989,12 @@ the business line. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{subjectvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectvpos}% \ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% If\textnote{Attention!} the value of this pseudo-length is 0\Unit{pt}, the position of the subject is given by option -\Option{subject}\important{\Option{subject}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}}% \IndexOption{subject~=\PName{Einstellung}} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.subject}). +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}). Every other value defines the distance between the top edge of the paper and the subject. It\textnote{Hint!} is recommended to take care of the available space to surely avoid interferences with other elements. @@ -1051,15 +1012,13 @@ space to surely avoid interferences with other elements. empty line between subject and business line should stay empty, this provides a maximum of two subject lines. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{subjectbeforevskip}\\ + \PLength{subjectbeforevskip}% \PLength{subjectaftervskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectbeforevskip}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectaftervskip}% \ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% If the subject is not positioned absolutely, but before or after the opening phrase, additional vertical spaces may be inserted before and after the @@ -1068,14 +1027,14 @@ distances like the automatic distance of one line after the title. Because of this the default is to use no additional space here. In contrast, the class's default for the space after the subject is two lines.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectaftervskip}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectbeforevskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{subject}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Closing} \seclabel{closing} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{closing} The closing consists of three parts: besides the closing phrase there @@ -1083,11 +1042,9 @@ are a hand-written inscription and the signature, which acts as an explanation for the inscription. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{sigindent}\\ + \PLength{sigindent}% \PLength{sigbeforevskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{sigindent}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{sigbeforevskip}% Closing phrase\Index{closing>phrase}\Index{signature} and signature will be typeset in a box. The width of the box is determined by the length of the longest line of the closing phrase or signature. @@ -1102,14 +1059,14 @@ of which is defined in the pseudo-length \PLength{sigbeforevskip}. In the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file} this is set to two lines. In this space you can then write your inscription.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{sigindent}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{sigbeforevskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{closing}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Letter Footer} \seclabel{firstFoot}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{letter>footer}% \index{note paper>footer|see{letter footer}}%| @@ -1118,55 +1075,55 @@ As the first page of a letter, the note paper, holds a letterhead of its own, it also holds a footer\Index{footer>of note paper}\Index{footer>of letter} of its own. And, as with the letterhead, it will not be set by the page style settings, but directly with the use of -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening}\important{\Macro{opening}}. +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}}. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfootvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfootvpos}% This pseudo-length gives the distance between the letter footer and the upper edge of the paper. It also takes care of preventing text from jutting into the footer area. For this the text height on the first page will be decreased using \Macro{enlargethispage}\IndexCmd{enlargethispage}% \important{\Macro{enlargethispage}} if needed. Likewise, and if it is wanted, the text height can conversely be extended with the help of the option -\Option{enlargefirstpage}\important{\Option{enlargefirstpage}} (see +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}). This way, the distance +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}). This way, the distance between text area and the first letter footer can be reduced to the value \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip}\important{\Length{footskip}}. With\textnote{Attention!} the compatibility option set\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}} up to version -2.9t\IndexOption{version~=\PValue{2.9t}} (see \Option{version} in +2.9t\IndexOption{version~=\PValue{2.9t}} (see +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.version} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}) the footer is set independently of -the type area in all predefined +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.version}) the footer is set independently of the +type area in all predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) except for \Option{KOMAold} and -\Option{NF}. The option -\Option{enlargefirstpage}\important{\Option{enlargefirstpage}} also loses its +\Option{NF}. The option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}% +\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} also loses its effect. From version 2.9u\IndexOption{version~=\PValue{2.9u}} onwards the footer is set in a position at the bottom edge of the paper. In this situation, the height of the type area also becomes dependent on -\Option{enlargefirstpage}. +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}. If the letter footer be switched off using option -\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}\important{\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}}% \IndexOption{firstfoot~=\PValue{false}}\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot}), then the setting of +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.firstfoot}), then the setting of \PLength{firstfootvpos} is ignored, and instead \Length{paperheight}\IndexLength{paperheight} is applied. Thus, there remains a mimimum bottom margin of length \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfootvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfoothpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfoothpos}% \ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% A\textnote{Attention!} positive value of pseudo-length \PLength{firstfoothpos} gives the distance between the letter footer and the left edge of the @@ -1179,27 +1136,28 @@ typing area. Typical default for this value is \Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, that is the maximum allowed value of a length. This results in horizontal centering.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfoothpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfootwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfootwidth}% This pseudo-length gives the width of the letter's first page footer. The value is set equal to that of the pseudo-length \PLength{firstheadwidth}\important{\PLength{firstheadwidth}}% \IndexPLength{firstheadwidth} in the predefined \File{lco}-files\textnote{\File{lco}-file}\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfootwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letter>footer}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{pseudo-lengths}% +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Variables for Experienced Users} \seclabel{variables} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{variables} \KOMAScript{} provides beside the feature of using predefined variable also @@ -1207,17 +1165,12 @@ commands to define new variable or to manipulate the automatic usage of variables in the business line\Index{business line}. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newkomavar}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{name}\\ - \Macro{newkomavar*}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{name}\\ - \Macro{removereffields}\\ - \Macro{defaultreffields}\\ + \Macro{newkomavar}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{name}% + \Macro{newkomavar*}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{name}% + \Macro{removereffields}% + \Macro{defaultreffields}% \Macro{addtoreffields}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtoreffields}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{removereffields}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defaultreffields}% With \Macro{newkomavar} a new variable is defined. This variable is addressed via \PName{name}. As an option you can define a \PName{description} for the variable \PName{name}. In opposite to \PName{name} @@ -1228,7 +1181,7 @@ be output similar to the variable content. Using the command \Macro{addtoreffields} you can add the variable \PName{name} to the reference fields line\Index{business line} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}). The \PName{description} and the +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}). The \PName{description} and the content of the variable are added at the end of the reference fields line. The starred version \Macro{newkomavar*} is similar to the unstarred version, with a subsequent call of the command \Macro{addtoreffields}. Thus, the starred @@ -1259,35 +1212,32 @@ fields line to its predefined format. In doing so, all custom-defined variables are removed from the reference fields line. The\textnote{Attention!} date should not be added to the reference fields line -using \Macro{addtoreffields}. Instead option \Option{date}\important[i]{\OptionValue{refline}{dateleft}\\ - \OptionValue{refline}{dateright}\\ - \OptionValue{refline}{nodate}}% +using \Macro{addtoreffields}. Instead option \Option{date}% +\important[i]{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateleft}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateright}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{nodate}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{dateleft}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{dateright}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{nodate}} should be used to select the date left, right or not at the business line. This option also will change the position of the date if no reference fields will be output.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defaultreffields}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtoreffields}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{removereffields}% -% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name}\\ + \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name}% \Macro{usekomavar*}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% -The commands \Macro{usekomavar} and \Macro{usekomavar*} are, similarly to all -commands where a starred version exists or which can take an optional -argument, not fully expandable. Nevertheless, if used within -\Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth}, \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} or -similar commands, you need not insert a \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} -before using them. Of course this is also true for -\Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} if using package +The commands \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar} and +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*} are, similarly to all commands where a +starred version exists or which can take an optional argument, not fully +expandable. Nevertheless, if used within +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} or similar commands, you +need not insert a \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} before using them. Of +course this is also true for +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} if using package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. However\textnote{Attention!}, these kinds of commands can not be used within commands like \Macro{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} @@ -1299,15 +1249,13 @@ content of a variable using: \usekomavar[\MakeUppercase]{`\PName{Name}'} \end{lstcode} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true}\Parameter{false}\\ + \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true}\Parameter{false}% \Macro{ifkomavarempty*}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true}\Parameter{false} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% It is important to know that the content or description of the variable will be expanded as far as this is possible with \Macro{edef}. If this results in spaces or unexpandable macros like \Macro{relax}, the result will be not empty @@ -1316,22 +1264,22 @@ even where the use of the variable would not result in any visible output. Both\textnote{Attention!} variants of the command also must not be used as the argument of \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} or other commands which have similar effects to their arguments However, they are robust enough -to be used as the argument of, e.\,g., \Macro{markboth} or \Macro{footnote}.% +to be used as the argument of, e.\,g., \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth} or +\Macro{footnote}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{variables}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Differences in the Page Styles of \Package{scrletter}} \seclabel{pagestyleatscrletter} -\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{page>style} As described in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, the page style -\Pagestyle{headings} shows the content of variables \Variable{nexthead} and -\Variable{nextfoot}. Page style \Pagestyle{headings} has already another +\PageStyle{headings} shows the content of variables \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} and +\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot}. Page style \PageStyle{headings} has already another meaning in the \KOMAScript{} classes \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl}. Therefore \Package{scrletter} defines a new pair of page styles (see \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}, @@ -1345,63 +1293,52 @@ Hence, you cannot use \Package{scrletter} with the outdated packages \Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr} that is in general not recommended for use with \KOMAScript. Additionally, internally loading package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} automatically activates page style -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}. This activation -changes page styles \Pagestyle{headings} and \Pagestyle{plain} into aliases of -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}. So these page +\PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}. This activation +changes page styles \PageStyle{headings} and \PageStyle{plain} into aliases of +\PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}. So these page styles are also controlled by \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{pagestyle}\PParameter{\Pagestyle{letter}}\\ - \XMacro{pagestyle}\PParameter{\Pagestyle{plain.letter}}\\ - \XMacro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nexthead}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \XMacro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nextfoot}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \PageStyle{letter} + \PageStyle{plain.letter} + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{letter}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.letter}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -Package \Package{scrletter} defines the pair of page style \Pagestyle{letter} +Package \Package{scrletter} defines the pair of page style \PageStyle{letter} using \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} to become independent from the page styles of -the document class. Variables \Variable{nexthead} and \Variable{nextfoot} are -used by \Package{scrletter}'s \Pagestyle{letter} in the same way as for -\Class{scrlttr2}'s \Pagestyle{headings}. The corresponding \Pagestyle{plain} -page style is also similar to \Class{scrlttr2}'s page style -\Pagestyle{plain}. Notably the position of the page number depends on option -\Option{pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}).% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.letter}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{letter}% +the document class. Variables \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} and +\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot} are used by \Package{scrletter}'s +\PageStyle{letter} in the same way as for \Class{scrlttr2}'s +\PageStyle{headings}. The corresponding \PageStyle{plain} page style is also +similar to \Class{scrlttr2}'s page style \PageStyle{plain}. Notably the +position of the page number depends on option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} (see +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}).% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Option{headsepline}\\ + \Option{headsepline}% \Option{footsepline} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline}% Because of the different internal approach of \Package{scrletter}, the options \Option{headsepline}\important[i]{\Option{headsepline}\\% \Option{footsepline}} and \Option{footsepline} differ slightly from class \Class{scrlttr2}, because they are controlled by package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. Especially the horizontal lines in page head and -foot of the \Pagestyle{plain} page style depend on the options of +foot of the \PageStyle{plain} page style depend on the options of \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. See \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline} and -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline} for information +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline} and +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline} for information about those options.% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagemark}\\ + \Macro{pagemark}% \Macro{letterpagemark} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterpagemark}% The \KOMAScript{} classes already define and use \Macro{pagemark}. So when \Package{scrletter} is loaded, it cannot simply redefine \Macro{pagemark} to add the prefix ``Page'' using \Macro{pagename}, because this would not only @@ -1412,23 +1349,22 @@ defines a new command \Macro{letterpagemark} with the prefix and lets \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} until the end of the letter only. If you want to redefine \Macro{pagemark} for the whole document including the letter pages, you have to add -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \let\letterpagemark\pagemark \end{lstcode} just after the normal redefinition of \Macro{pagemark}. This add-on also will not violate anything if you later decide to switch from package \Package{scrletter} to class \Class{scrlttr2}. Note that the class \Class{scrlttr2} does not provide or use \Macro{letterpagemark}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterpagemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{page>style} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Differences in the Handling of \File{lco}-Files in \Package{scrletter}} \seclabel{lcoatscrletter} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{File}{lco} \BeginIndex{}{letter>class option}% \BeginIndex{}{letter class option}% @@ -1440,27 +1376,22 @@ the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass}. Package \Package{scrletter} does not support this. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{name}\\ + \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{name}% \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{list of names} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% For \Class{scrlttr2} it is only recommended to load \File{lco}-files using -\Macro{LoadLetterOption} or \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}. With \Package{scrletter} -you must use these commands to load \File{lco}-files. Of course, you can use -these commands at the earliest after loading \Package{scrletter}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption} or +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions}. With \Package{scrletter} you must +use these commands to load \File{lco}-files. Of course, you can use these +commands at the earliest after loading \Package{scrletter}.% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}% -\EndIndex{}{letter class option}% -\EndIndex{}{letter>class option}% -% -\EndIndex{Package}{scrletter}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{\File{lco}-Files for Experienced Users} \seclabel{lcoFile} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{File}{lco}% \BeginIndex{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}% @@ -1489,7 +1420,6 @@ paper size. \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}% \Parameter{option name}\Parameter{paper size} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize} In order that you will at least be warned when using another \PName{paper size}, you will find a \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize} command in every \File{lco}-file distributed with {\KOMAScript}. The first argument is the name @@ -1498,7 +1428,7 @@ is the paper size for which the \File{lco}-file is designed. If several \File{lco} files are loaded in succession, a \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize} command can be contained in each of them, -but the \Macro{opening} command will only check the last given \PName{paper +but the \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} command will only check the last given \PName{paper size}. As shown in the following example, an experienced user can thus easily write \File{lco}-files with parameter sets for other paper sizes. \iffalse% Umbruchoptimierung @@ -1533,11 +1463,12 @@ forget about this option and skip the example.% \fi% \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Visualization of Positions} \seclabel{visualize} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Option}{visualize} If someone develops a new \File{lco}-file, e.\,g., to adapt the positions of @@ -1557,7 +1488,6 @@ and \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx}, that are not part of \begin{Declaration} \Macro{showfields}\Parameter{field list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showfields}% This command activates the visualization of note paper fields. Argument \PName{field list} is a comma separated list of fields that should be visualized. Following are the supported fields: @@ -1575,23 +1505,22 @@ visualized. Following are the supported fields: \item[\PValue{location}] is the field of the sender's extension. \item[\PValue{refline}] is the business line. This are has an open bottom. \end{labeling}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{field}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{field}\LabelFontElement{field}% The color of the visualization may be changed using -commands\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with the element +commands\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with the element \FontElement{field}\important{\FontElement{field}}. Default is \Macro{normalcolor}.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{field}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showfields}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setshowstyle}\Parameter{visualization style}\\ + \Macro{setshowstyle}\Parameter{visualization style}% \Macro{edgesize} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setshowstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{edgesize} The default for the visualization of single areas are frames\important{\PValue{frame}} around the areas. Areas with open top or bottom are not framed completely but have an open edge with arrows at the end @@ -1603,24 +1532,18 @@ third\important{\PValue{edges}} available \PName{visualization style} is \PValue{edges}. This will mark the corners of the areas. The corner marks at the open edge of open areas will be omitted. The size of two edges of the corner marks are given by the macro \Macro{edgesize} with default 1\Unit{ex}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{edgesize}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setshowstyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{showenvelope}(\PName{width},\PName{height})% - (\PName{h-offset},\PName{v-offset})% - \OParameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{showISOenvelope}\Parameter{format}\OParameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{showUScommercial}\Parameter{format}\OParameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{showUScheck}\OParameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{showenvelope}\AParameter{width\textup{,}height}% + \AParameter{h-offset\textup{,}v-offset}% + \OParameter{instructions}% + \Macro{showISOenvelope}\Parameter{format}\OParameter{instructions}% + \Macro{showUScommercial}\Parameter{format}\OParameter{instructions}% + \Macro{showUScheck}\OParameter{instructions}% \Macro{unitfactor} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showenvelope}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showISOenvelope}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showUScommercial}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showUScheck}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{unitfactor}% These commands may be used to output a graphics of an envelope. The envelope of the graphic will be rotated by 90\textdegree{} and printed in measure~1:1 to one document page. The addressee window will be generated automatically @@ -1643,22 +1566,22 @@ envelopes in format US-check. The \PName{instructions} may be used to print additional elements inside the envelope. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{letter}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{letter}\LabelFontElement{letter}% The position of the letter sheet will be signed with dash lines inside the envelope. The color of this dash lines may be changed using commands -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with element +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} +(see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with element \FontElement{letter}\important{\FontElement{letter}}. Default is \Macro{normalcolor}.% % \EndIndex{FontElement}{letter}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{measure}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{measure}\LabelFontElement{measure}% The envelope will be dimensioned automatically. The color of the dimensioning -may be changed using commands \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} -(see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with element +may be changed using commands \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with element \FontElement{measure}\important{\FontElement{measure}}. Default is \Macro{normalcolor} The dimensioning will be done in multiply of \Length{unitlength} with accuracy of $1/\Macro{unitfactor}$. Nevertheless @@ -1712,20 +1635,16 @@ very soon. Also shown measure numbers may differ a little bit from the real value. Both are not mistakes of \Option{visualize} but simple implementation limitations of \TeX. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{unitfactor}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showUScheck}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showUScommercial}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showISOenvelope}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showenvelope}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Option}{visualize}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}% -\EndIndex{File}{lco}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Language Support} \seclabel{languages}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{language}% The document class \Class{scrlttr2} supports many languages. These include @@ -1761,12 +1680,12 @@ packages. The package \Package{french}\IndexPackage{french}\important{\Package{french}} (see \cite{package:french}) redefines not only the terms of \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms}, but also other, for instance -some versions of that package even redefine the command \Macro{opening}, since -the package assumes that the definition of the standard \Class{letter} is -used. With \Class{scrlttr2} this is not the case, therefore the package -\Package{french} destroys the definition in \Class{scrlttr2} and does not work -correctly with \KOMAScript. The author views this is a fault in the -\Package{french} package. +some versions of that package even redefine the command +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}, since the package assumes that the definition +of the standard \Class{letter} is used. With \Class{scrlttr2} this is not the +case, therefore the package \Package{french} destroys the definition in +\Class{scrlttr2} and does not work correctly with \KOMAScript. The author +views this is a fault in the \Package{french} package. If one utilizes the \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} package in order to switch to language \PValue{french} while the package @@ -1796,37 +1715,24 @@ are no known problems with the \Package{babel} package for the german language and the various english language selections. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{captionsenglish}\\ - \Macro{captionsUSenglish}\\ - \Macro{captionsamerican}\\ - \Macro{captionsbritish}\\ - \Macro{captionsUKenglish}\\ - \Macro{captionsgerman}\\ - \Macro{captionsngerman}\\ - \Macro{captionsaustrian}\\ - \Macro{captionsnaustrian}\\ - \Macro{captionsfrench}\\ - \Macro{captionsitalian}\\ - \Macro{captionsspanish}\\ - \Macro{captionsdutch}\\ - \Macro{captionscroatian}\\ - \Macro{captionsfinnish}\\ - \Macro{captionsnorsk}\\ + \Macro{captionsenglish}% + \Macro{captionsUSenglish}% + \Macro{captionsamerican}% + \Macro{captionsbritish}% + \Macro{captionsUKenglish}% + \Macro{captionsgerman}% + \Macro{captionsngerman}% + \Macro{captionsaustrian}% + \Macro{captionsnaustrian}% + \Macro{captionsfrench}% + \Macro{captionsitalian}% + \Macro{captionsspanish}% + \Macro{captionsdutch}% + \Macro{captionscroatian}% + \Macro{captionsfinnish}% + \Macro{captionsnorsk}% \Macro{captionsswedish} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsenglish}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsUSenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsamerican}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsbritish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsUKenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsgerman}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsngerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustrian}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrench}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsitalian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsspanish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsdutch}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionscroatian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsfinnish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnorsk}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsswedish}% If one switches the language of a letter then using these commands the language-dependent terms from \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms}, @@ -1834,54 +1740,32 @@ using these commands the language-dependent terms from language selection scheme does not support this then the commands above can be used directly. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsswedish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnorsk}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsenglish}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsUSenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsamerican}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsbritish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsUKenglish}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsngerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustrian}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrench}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsitalian}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsspanish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsdutch}\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionscroatian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsfinnish}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dateenglish}\\ - \Macro{dateUSenglish}\\ - \Macro{dateamerican}\\ - \Macro{datebritish}\\ - \Macro{dateUKenglish}\\ - \Macro{dategerman}\\ - \Macro{datengerman}\\ - \Macro{dateaustrian}\\ - \Macro{datenaustrian}\\ - \Macro{datefrench}\\ - \Macro{dateitalian}\\ - \Macro{datespanish}\\ - \Macro{datedutch}\\ - \Macro{datecroatian}\\ - \Macro{datefinnish}\\ - \Macro{datenorsk}\\ + \Macro{dateenglish}% + \Macro{dateUSenglish}% + \Macro{dateamerican}% + \Macro{datebritish}% + \Macro{dateUKenglish}% + \Macro{dategerman}% + \Macro{datengerman}% + \Macro{dateaustrian}% + \Macro{datenaustrian}% + \Macro{datefrench}% + \Macro{dateitalian}% + \Macro{datespanish}% + \Macro{datedutch}% + \Macro{datecroatian}% + \Macro{datefinnish}% + \Macro{datenorsk}% \Macro{dateswedish} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateenglish}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateUSenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateamerican}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datebritish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateUKenglish}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dategerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datengerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateaustrian}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datefrench}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateitalian}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datespanish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datedutch}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datecroatian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datefinnish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenorsk}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateswedish}% The numerical representation of the date\Index{date} (see option -\Option{numericaldate} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}) will be -written depending on the selected language. Some examples can be found -in \autoref{tab:date}.% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}) will be written depending on the +selected language. Some examples can be found in \autoref{tab:date}.% % \begin{table} % \centering @@ -1915,54 +1799,35 @@ in \autoref{tab:date}.% \label{tab:date} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateswedish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenorsk}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateenglish}\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateUSenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateamerican}\EndIndex{Cmd}{datebritish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateUKenglish}\EndIndex{Cmd}{dategerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datengerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateaustrian}\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datefrench}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateitalian}\EndIndex{Cmd}{datespanish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datedutch}\EndIndex{Cmd}{datecroatian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datefinnish}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{yourrefname}\\ - \Macro{yourmailname}\\ - \Macro{myrefname}\\ - \Macro{customername}\\ - \Macro{invoicename}\\ - \Macro{subjectname}\\ - \Macro{ccname}\\ - \Macro{enclname}\\ - \Macro{headtoname}\\ - \Macro{headfromname}\\ - \Macro{datename}\\ - \Macro{pagename}\\ - \Macro{phonename}\\ - \Macro{faxname}\\ - \Macro{emailname}\\ - \Macro{wwwname}\\ + \Macro{yourrefname}% + \Macro{yourmailname}% + \Macro{myrefname}% + \Macro{customername}% + \Macro{invoicename}% + \Macro{subjectname}% + \Macro{ccname}% + \Macro{enclname}% + \Macro{headtoname}% + \Macro{headfromname}% + \Macro{datename}% + \Macro{pagename}% + \Macro{mobilephonename}% + \Macro{phonename}% + \Macro{faxname}% + \Macro{emailname}% + \Macro{wwwname}% \Macro{bankname} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{yourrefname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{yourmailname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{myrefname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{customername}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{invoicename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subjectname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ccname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{enclname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headtoname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headfromname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datename}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{phonename}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{faxname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{emailname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{wwwname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bankname}% The commands contain the language-dependent terms. These definitions can be modified in order to support a new language or for private customization. How\important[i]{% - \Macro{newcaptionname}\\ - \Macro{renewcaptionname}\\ - \Macro{providecaptionname}} this can be done is described in + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname}\\ + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname}\\ + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}} this can be done is described in \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}. The definitions become active only at \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. Therefore they are not available in the {\LaTeX} preamble and cannot be redefined there. In @@ -1999,6 +1864,7 @@ How\important[i]{% \Macro{invoicename} & Invoice no. & Rechnungsnummer \\ \Macro{myrefname} & Our ref. & Unser Zeichen \\ \Macro{pagename}\footnotemark[1] & Page & Seite \\ + \Macro{mobilephonename} & Mobile phone & Mobiltelefon \\ \Macro{phonename} & Phone & Telefon \\ \Macro{subjectname} & Subject & Betrifft \\ \Macro{wwwname} & Url & URL \\ @@ -2014,22 +1880,12 @@ How\important[i]{% \end{minipage} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{yourrefname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{yourmailname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{myrefname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{customername}\EndIndex{Cmd}{invoicename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subjectname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ccname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{enclname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headtoname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{headfromname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datename}\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{phonename}\EndIndex{Cmd}{faxname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{emailname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{wwwname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bankname}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{language} +\EndIndexGroup \section{From Obsolete \Class{scrlettr} to Current \Class{scrlttr2}} \seclabel{fromscrlettr} -\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlettr} With\textnote{Attention!} the June 2002 release of \Class{scrlttr2} (see \autoref{cha:scrlttr2}) the old letter class \Class{scrlettr} became @@ -2038,7 +1894,7 @@ is no more active development of the old letter class, and support is very restricted. However, if you really need the documentation of the old letter class, you can still find it in the file \File{scrlettr.dtx}, but only in German. You should run it through {\LaTeX} several times, like this: -\begin{lstoutput}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,morekeywords={latex,mkindex}] +\begin{lstoutput}[morekeywords={latex,mkindex}] latex scrlettr.dtx mkindex scrlettr latex scrlettr.dtx @@ -2057,8 +1913,8 @@ this option are provided in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}, \autoref{tab:lcoFiles}. \LoadNonFree{scrlttr2-experts}{0} - -\EndIndex{Class}{scrlettr}% +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2.tex index c2b92f9e897..ef26c720cab 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrlttr2.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlttr2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlttr2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,18 +46,20 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-12-17 11:57:09 +0100 (Thu, 17 Dec 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2)] \translator{Harald Bongartz\and Georg Grandke\and Raimund Kohl\and Jens-Uwe Morawski\and Stephan Hennig\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Markus Kohm} -% Date of translated german file: 2015-12-17 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{The New Letter Class \Class{scrlttr2}} \labelbase{scrlttr2} +\BeginIndexGroup% +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}% +\BeginIndex{}{letters}% -\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}\BeginIndex{}{letters}% \iffalse Since the June 2002 release {\KOMAScript} provides a completely rewritten letter class\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrlttr2}}. Although @@ -78,13 +80,14 @@ users will benefit from its advantages. \section{Variables} \seclabel{variables}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{variables} Apart from options, commands, environments, counters and lengths, additional elements have already been introduced in \KOMAScript. A typical property of an element is the font style and the option to -change it (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). At this point we now +change it (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). At this point we now introduce variables. Variables have a name by which they are called, and they have a content. The content of a variable can be set independently from time and location of the actual usage in the same @@ -98,202 +101,200 @@ This section specifically only gives an introduction to the concept of variables. The following examples have no special meaning. More detailed examples can be found in the explanation of predefined variables of the letter class in the following sections. An overview -of all variables is given in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.variables}. +of all variables is given in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables}. % \begin{desclist} % Umbruchkorrektur \renewcommand*{\abovecaptionskipcorrection}{-\normalbaselineskip}% \desccaption{% Alphabetical list of all supported variables in - \Class{scrlttr2}\label{tab:scrlttr2.variables}% + \Class{scrlttr2}\label{tab:\LabelBase.variables}% }{% Alphabetical list of all supported variables in \Class{scrlttr2} (\emph{continuation})% }% \ventry{addresseeimage}{% instuctions, that will be used to print the Port-Pay\'e head of option - \OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} or the Port-Pay\'e addressee of - option \OptionValue{addrfield}{image} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{backgroundimage} or the Port-Pay\'e + addressee of option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{image} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.addresseeimage})}% \ventry{backaddress}{% return address for window envelopes % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress})}% \ventry{% backaddressseparator}{separator within the return address % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddressseparator})}% \ventry{ccseparator}{% separator between title of additional addressees, and additional addressees % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.ccseparator})}% \ventry{customer}{% customer number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.customer})}% \ventry{date}{% date % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.date})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.date})}% \ventry{emailseparator}{% separator between e-mail name and e-mail address % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.emailseparator})}% \ventry{enclseparator}{% separator between title of enclosure, and enclosures % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.enclseparator})}% \ventry{faxseparator}{% separator between title of fax, and fax number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.faxseparator})}% \ventry{firstfoot}{% page\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} foot of the note paper % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.firstfoot})}% \ventry{firsthead}{% page\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} head of the note paper % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.firsthead})}% \ventry{fromaddress}{% sender's address without sender name % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromaddress})}% \ventry{frombank}{% sender's bank account % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.frombank})}% \ventry{fromemail}{% sender's e-mail % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromemail})}% \ventry{fromfax}{% sender's fax number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromfax})}% \ventry{fromlogo}{% commands for inserting the sender's logo % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromlogo})}% \ventry{frommobilephone}{% \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% sender's mobile telephone number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.frommobilephone})}% \ventry{fromname}{% complete name of sender % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname})}% \ventry{fromphone}{% sender's telephone number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromphone})}% \ventry{fromurl}{% a URL of the sender, e.\,g., the URL of his homepage % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromurl})}% \ventry{fromzipcode}{% zip code or postcode of the sender used at the Port-Pay\'e head of option - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromzipcode})}% \ventry{invoice}{% invoice number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.invoice})}% \ventry{location}{% more details of the sender % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.location})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location})}% \ventry{myref}{% sender's reference % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.myref})}% \ventry{nextfoot}{% page\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} foot using page style - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} or - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot})}% + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} or + \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot})}% \ventry{nexthead}{% page\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} head using page style - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} or - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead})}% + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} or + \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.nexthead})}% \ventry{phoneseparator}{% separator between title of telephone and telephone number % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.phoneseparator})}% \ventry{place}{% sender's place used near date % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.place})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.place})}% \ventry{placeseparator}{% separator between place and date % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.placeseparator})}% \ventry{PPdatamatrix}{% instruction, that print the data array of option - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.PPdatamatrix})}% \ventry{PPcode}{% instructions for the sender's identification code of option - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} % + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.PPcode})}% \ventry{signature}{% signature beneath the ending of the letter % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature})}% \ventry{specialmail}{% mode of dispatch % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.specialmail})}% \ventry{subject}{% letter's subject % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject})}% \ventry{subjectseparator}{% separator between title of subject and subject % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subjectseparator})}% \ventry{title}{% letter title % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.title})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.title})}% \ventry{toaddress}{% address of addressee without addressee name % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toaddress})}% \ventry{toname}{% complete name of addressee % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toname})}% \ventry{yourmail}{% date of addressee's referenced mail % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourmail})}% \ventry{yourref}{% addressee's reference % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourref})}% \ventry{zipcodeseparator}{% separator between the zip code's or postcode's title and the code itself % - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.zipcodeseparator})}% \end{desclist} \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setkomavar}% - \Parameter{name}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ + \Parameter{name}\OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}% \Macro{setkomavar*}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{description} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar*}% With the command \Macro{setkomavar} you determine the \PName{content} of the variable \PName{name}. Using an optional argument you can at the same time change the \PName{description} @@ -334,15 +335,13 @@ empty \PName{description} argument. one command. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar*}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name}\\ + \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name}% \Macro{usekomavar*}\OParameter{command}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% In\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} some cases it is necessary for the user to access the content or the description of a variable, and not to leave this only up to the class. This is specially important when you have defined a @@ -350,16 +349,14 @@ variable which is not added to the reference fields line. Using the command \Macro{usekomavar} you have access to the content of the variable \PName{name}, whereas the starred version \Macro{usekomavar*} allows you to access the description or title. In \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} you may find more +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} you may find more information about defining variable on your own.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifkomavar}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true-code}\Parameter{false-code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavar}% This\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} command may be used to test, whether or not a variable has already been defined. The \PName{true-code} will be executed only, if the variable already exists. The contents of the variable @@ -367,35 +364,33 @@ will not be examined, so it may be empty. The \PName{false-code} will be executed if the variable does not yet exist. Such tests make sense if a variable will be defined at one \File{lco}-file\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} from \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} from \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} onward), but used in another \File{lco}-file if it exists only.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavar}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true-code}% - \Parameter{false-code}\\ + \Parameter{false-code}% \Macro{ifkomavarempty*}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{true-code}% \Parameter{false-code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% With\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} these commands you may check whether or not the expanded content or description of a variable is empty. The \PName{true-code} will be executed if the content or description is empty. Otherwise the \PName{false-code} will be executed. The starred variant handles the description of a variable, the unstarred variant handles the contents.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{variables}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Pseudo-Lengths} \seclabel{pseudoLength} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{pseudo-lengths} \LaTeX{} processes length with commands \Macro{newlength}, \Macro{setlength}, \Macro{addtolength}, and \Macro{the\PName{length}}. Many packages also use @@ -417,9 +412,9 @@ sections of this chapter. Normally users would not need to define a pseudo-length on their own. Because of this, definition of pseudo-lengths will be described in the expert part at \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength}. Setting pseudo-lengths to +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength}. Setting pseudo-lengths to new values is also a work for advanced users. So this will be described in the -expert part too at \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}. +expert part too at \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}. Please note\textnote{Attention!}: Even though these pseudo-lengths are internally implemented as macros, the commands for pseudo-length management @@ -431,24 +426,21 @@ or \LaTeX{} lengths. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{useplength}\Parameter{name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useplength}% Using this command you can access the value of the pseudo-length with the given \PName{name}. This is one of the few user commands in connection with pseudo-lengths. Of course this command can also be used with an \File{lco}-file\Index{lco-file=\File{lco}-file} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}).% +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}).% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useplength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setlengthtoplength}% - \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{length}\Parameter{pseudo-length}\\ + \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{length}\Parameter{pseudo-length}% \Macro{addtolengthplength}% \OParameter{factor}\Parameter{length}\Parameter{pseudo-length} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setlengthtoplength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtolengthplength}% \begin{Explain}% While you can simply prepend a factor to a length, this is not possible with pseudo-lengths. Suppose you have a length \Macro{test} @@ -468,20 +460,19 @@ to a \PName{length}. In this case you can either use a minus sign or \Macro{addtolengthplength} works very similarly; it adds the multiple of a \PName{pseudo-length} to the \PName{length}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setlengthtoplength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtolengthplength}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{pseudo-lengths} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{0} % \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Early or Late Selection of Options} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{1} % \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of % \KOMAScript{}} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{2} % \section{Draft-Mode} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode} % \section{Draft-Mode} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{3} % \section{Page Layout} +\LoadCommonFile{typearea} % \section{Page Layout} Normally it makes no sense to distinguish letters with single-side layout and letters with double-side layout. Mostly letters are not bound like @@ -489,19 +480,20 @@ books. Therefor each page will be viewed on its own. This is also true if both sides of the paper sheet will be used for printing. Vertical adjustment is unusual at letters too. Nevertheless, if you need or want it, you may read the description of \Macro{raggedbottom} and \Macro{flushbottom} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea} at \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom}.% +\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea} at \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}.% % -\EndIndex{}{page>layout} +\EndIndexGroup \section{General Structure of Letter Documents} \seclabel{document} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{letter>structure} The general structure of a letter document differs somewhat from the structure of a normal document. Whereas a book document in general contains only one book, a letter document can contain several -letters. As illustrated in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.document}, a letter +letters. As illustrated in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.document}, a letter document consists of a preamble, the individual letters, and the closing. @@ -513,8 +505,8 @@ closing. }]{% General structure of a letter document with several individual letters (the structure of a single letter is shown in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter})% - \label{fig:scrlttr2.document}% + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter})% + \label{fig:\LabelBase.document}% }[l] \begin{minipage}[b]{.667\linewidth} \centering\small\setlength{\fboxsep}{1.5ex}% @@ -547,9 +539,9 @@ closing. The preamble comprises all settings that in general concern all letters. Most of them can also be overwritten in the settings of the individual letters. The only setting which can not be changed within a single letter is compatibility -to prior versions of \Class{scrlttr2} (see option \Option{version} in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}). +to prior versions of \Class{scrlttr2} (see option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). It is recommended that only general settings such as the loading of packages and the setting of options be placed before @@ -570,8 +562,8 @@ additional comments at this point. General structure of a single letter within a letter document% }]{% General structure of a single letter within a letter document (see also - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.document})% - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter}}[l] + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.document})% + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter}}[l] \begin{minipage}[b]{.667\linewidth}% \centering\small\setlength{\fboxsep}{1.5ex}% \addtolength{\linewidth}{-\dimexpr2\fboxrule+2\fboxsep\relax}% @@ -581,7 +573,7 @@ additional comments at this point. \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] {\centering\emph{settings for this letter}\\} \dots\\ - \Macro{opening}\Parameter{opening}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\Parameter{opening}\\ }}\\[1pt] \fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright% \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] @@ -589,25 +581,25 @@ additional comments at this point. \dots\\ }}\\[1pt] \fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright% - \Macro{closing}\Parameter{closing}\\ - \Macro{ps}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\Parameter{closing}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ps}\\ \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] {\centering\emph{postscript}\\} \dots\\ - \Macro{encl}\Parameter{enclosures}\\ - \Macro{cc}\Parameter{additional addressees}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.encl}\Parameter{enclosures}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cc}\Parameter{additional addressees}\\ \Macro{end}\PParameter{letter}\\ }}\\[\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax] \end{minipage} \end{captionbeside} \end{figure} -As shown in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter}, every single letter itself consists +As shown in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter}, every single letter itself consists of an introduction, the letter body, and the closing. In the introduction, all settings pertaining only to the current letter are defined. It is important that this introduction always ends with -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. Similarly, the closing always starts with -\Macro{closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. The two arguments \PName{opening} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}. Similarly, the closing always starts with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. The two arguments \PName{opening} and \PName{closing} can be left empty, but both commands must be used and must have an argument. @@ -618,18 +610,15 @@ recommended to use further general settings with limited scope between the letters. \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{letter}}% - \OParameter{options}\Parameter{addressee}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{letter} + \begin{Environment}{letter}\OParameter{options}\Parameter{addressee} + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{letter}% \BeginIndex{}{addressee}% The \Environment{letter} environment is one of the key environments of the letter class. A special\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. standard classes} \Class{scrlttr2} feature are optional arguments to the \Environment{letter} environment. These \PName{options} are executed internally via the -\Macro{KOMAoptions} command. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} command. The \PName{addressee} is a mandatory argument passed to the \Environment{letter} environment. Parts\textnote{Attention!} of the addressee @@ -641,7 +630,7 @@ could lead to unexpected results and error messages, as is the case also for the standard letter class. \begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter.example}% + \phantomsection\label{desc:\LabelBase.env.letter.example}% Assumed, someone wants to send a letter to Joana Public. A minimalistic letter document for this may be: \begin{lstcode} @@ -656,19 +645,17 @@ the standard letter class. \end{lstcode} However, this would not result in any printable output. At least there would not be an addressee at the note paper sheet. The reason for this will - be explained at the description of command \Macro{opening} at - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening}. + be explained at the description of command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} at + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{}{addressee}% -\EndIndex{Env}{letter}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AtBeginLetter}\Parameter{instruction code}\\ + \Macro{AtBeginLetter}\Parameter{instruction code}% \Macro{AtEndLetter}\Parameter{instruction code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtBeginLetter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndLetter}% {\LaTeX} enables the user to declare \PName{instruction code} whose execution is delayed until a determined point. Such points are called \emph{hooks}\Index{hook}. Known macros for using hooks are @@ -706,27 +693,23 @@ following example may illustrate. \Package{tabularx}\IndexPackage{tabularx} (see \cite{package:tabularx}). \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndLetter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtBeginLetter}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{letter}\\ - \Macro{thisletter}\\ + \Counter{letter}% + \Macro{thisletter}% \Macro{letterlastpage} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Counter}{letter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thisletter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterlastpage}% If\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} you have more than one letter in one document, it is useful to have a letter number. Since version~3.19 \KOMAScript{} provides counter \Counter{letter} and increases it at every \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}. \begin{Example} - Have one more look into the \Macro{AtBeginLetter} example. Instead of - resetting the counter explicitly at \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}, we can - do it implicitly by defining counter \Counter{Question} depending on counter - \Counter{letter}: + Have one more look into the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtBeginLetter} + example. Instead of resetting the counter explicitly at + \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}, we can do it implicitly by defining + counter \Counter{Question} depending on counter \Counter{letter}: \begin{lstlisting} \newcounter{Question}[letter] \newcommand{\Question}[1]{% @@ -756,15 +739,12 @@ page number of the current letter. Please note, the value of \Macro{label} and \Macro{pageref}. So you need at least two or three \LaTeX{} runs, if you use \Macro{letterlastpage}. Please have a look at \emph{Rerun} terminal or \File{log}-file messages about labels that have been changed.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterlastpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thisletter}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{letter}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{opening}\Parameter{opening} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{opening}% This is one of the most important commands in \Class{scrlttr2}. For the user it may seem that only the \PName{opening}\Index{letter>opening}, e.\,g., ``Dear Mrs~\dots'', is typeset, but\textnote{Attention!} the command also @@ -777,10 +757,10 @@ use an \Macro{opening} command with an empty argument. \begin{Example} Let's extend the example from - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter.example} by an opening: + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter.example} by an opening: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-0.tex} This will result in a note paper sheet shown in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-0}. + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee and opening}]{% @@ -788,7 +768,7 @@ use an \Macro{opening} command with an empty argument. (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-0}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-0} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0} \end{figure} \end{Example} \iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext @@ -799,26 +779,25 @@ capabilities have been enhanced. Thus personal openings are very common, even in mass-production advertising letters.% \fi % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{opening}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{closing}\Parameter{closing phrase} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{closing}% The main purpose of the command \Macro{closing} is to typeset the \PName{closing phrase}\Index{closing}. This may even consists of multiple lines. The lines should be separated by double backslash. Paragraph breaks inside the \PName{closing phrase} are not allowed. Beyond that the command also typesets the content of the variable -\Variable{signature}. More information about the signature and the -configuration of the signature may be found at \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} -ab \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. More information about the signature and the +configuration of the signature may be found at \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} +ab \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. \begin{Example} Let's extend the our example by some lines of text and a closing phrase: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-1.tex} - This will result in a the letter shown in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-1}. + This will result in a the letter shown in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, and @@ -827,16 +806,15 @@ ab \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature}. (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-1}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-1} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{closing}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ps} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ps}% This instruction merely switches to the postscript. Hence, a new paragraph begins, and a vertical distance\,---\,usually below the signature\,---\,is inserted. The command \Macro{ps} is followed by @@ -848,7 +826,7 @@ automatically nor optionally by the class \Class{scrlttr2}. \begin{Example} The example letter extended by a postscript \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-2.tex} - results in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-2}. + results in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-2}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, @@ -858,7 +836,7 @@ automatically nor optionally by the class \Class{scrlttr2}. (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-2}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-2} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-2} \end{figure} \end{Example} @@ -872,15 +850,13 @@ automatically nor optionally by the class \Class{scrlttr2}. of the particular letter. \end{Explain} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ps} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{cc}\Parameter{distribution list}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{ccseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Macro{cc}\Parameter{distribution list}% + \Variable{ccseparator}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cc}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{ccseparator}% With the command \Macro{cc}% \Index{addressee>additional}\Index{distribution list}\Index{carbon copy} it is possible to typeset a \PName{distribution list}. The command takes the @@ -895,7 +871,7 @@ separate the individual entries with a double backslash. This time, the example letter should be send not only to the chairman, but also to all club members: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-3.tex}% - The result is shown in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-3}. + The result is shown in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-3}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, @@ -905,22 +881,18 @@ separate the individual entries with a double backslash. (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-3}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-3} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-3} \end{figure} \end{Example} In front of the distribution list a vertical gap is inserted automatically.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{ccseparator}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cc}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{encl}\Parameter{enclosures}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{enclseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Macro{encl}\Parameter{enclosures}% + \Variable{enclseparator}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{encl}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{enclseparator}% The \PName{enclosures} have the same structure as the distribution list. The only difference is that here the enclosures starts with the name and content of the variable @@ -931,7 +903,7 @@ and content of the variable will be changed also, because there is only one enclosure and the default may be prepared for several enclosures: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-4.tex} - This will result in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-4}. + This will result in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, @@ -941,55 +913,22 @@ and content of the variable (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-4}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-4} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{encl}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{enclseparator}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letter>structure} +\EndIndexGroup -\section{Selection of Document or Letter Font Size} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{4} % \section{Selection of Document Font Size} - -\begin{Example} - Assumed, the example is a letter to \emph{``The friends of insane font - sizes''} and therefor it should be printed with 14\Unit{pt} instead of - 12\Unit{pt}. Only a simple change of the first line is needed:% - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-6}% - Alternatively the option may be set at the optional argument of the - \Environment{letter} environment:% - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-5}% - In the case of this late change of the font size no recalculation of the - type area will happen. Because of this, the two results of - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} differ. - \begin{figure} - \centering - \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-5}}\quad - \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-6}} - \caption[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, - closing, postscript, distribution list, enclosure, and insane large - font size}]{% - result of a small letter with addressee, opening, text, closing, - postscript, distribution list, enclosure, and insane large font size - (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters): at left one the - font size has been defined by the optional argument of - \Environment{letter}, at the right one the optional argument of - \Macro{documentclass} has been used} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} - \end{figure} -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{size}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{font>size} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Selection of Document Font Size} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{5} % \section{Text Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Text Markup} \section{Note Paper} \seclabel{firstpage} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{note paper}% \BeginIndex{}{letter>first page} @@ -999,10 +938,10 @@ contains elements like the letter head with the sender's information and logo. \KOMAScript{} provides to position these elements independent. With this it is not only possible to replicate the note paper directly, but also to complete the destined fields instantaneously. The independent position is -provided by pseudo-lengths (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength} from -\autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength} onward). A schematic display of the +provided by pseudo-lengths (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength} from +\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength} onward). A schematic display of the note page and the used variable is shown by -\autoref{fig:scrlttr2.variables}. Thereby the names of the variables are +\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.variables}. Thereby the names of the variables are printed boldly for better distinction from the commands and their arguments. Following pages\Index{page>following}\Index{following page} are different from @@ -1014,13 +953,12 @@ pages but the first one. \includegraphics[scale=0.99]{varDIN} \caption{schematic display of the note paper with the most important commands and variables for the drafted elements} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.variables} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.variables} \end{figure} \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{foldmarks}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{foldmarks}{selection} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{foldmarks~=\PName{selection}}% Foldmarks\Index{foldmark} or folding marks\Index{folding mark} are tiny horizontal rules at the left margin or tiny vertical rules at the top margin. \KOMAScript{} currently provides three configurable horizontal folding @@ -1033,19 +971,19 @@ two-, three- or four-panel folding, and a single horizontal folding, of the letter, whereby the folding need not result in equal-sized parts. The position of the four horizontal and the single vertical marks are configurable via pseudo-lengths (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks} from -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos} onwards). +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos} onwards). The user has a choice: Either one may use the standard values for simple switches, as described in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}, to activate or deactivate at once all configured folding marks on the left and upper edges of the paper; or\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} one may specify by one or more letters, -as listed in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.foldmark}, the use of the individual +as listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.foldmark}, the use of the individual folding marks independently. Also in the latter case the folding marks will only be shown if they have not been switched off generally with one of \PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, or \PValue{no}. The exact positioning of the folding marks is specified in the user settings, that is, the \File{lco} files (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} from \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} onward) +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} from \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} onward) chosen for a letter. Default values are \PValue{true} and \PValue{TBMPL}. % \begin{table} @@ -1076,7 +1014,7 @@ chosen for a letter. Default values are \PValue{true} and \PValue{TBMPL}. \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.foldmark} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.foldmark} \end{table} % \begin{Example} @@ -1089,7 +1027,7 @@ chosen for a letter. Default values are \PValue{true} and \PValue{TBMPL}. might have been made before, a safer method should be used. This changes our example a little bit: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-7}% - The result is shown in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-7}. + The result is shown in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with addressee, opening, text, @@ -1100,24 +1038,24 @@ chosen for a letter. Default values are \PValue{true} and \PValue{TBMPL}. (the date is a default of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-7}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-7} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7} \end{figure} \end{Example} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}\LabelFontElement{foldmark}% The color of the folding mark may be changed using\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} using the commands -\Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) with element -\FontElement{foldmark}. Default is not change.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +with element \FontElement{foldmark}. Default is not change.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}% % -\EndIndex{Option}{foldmarks~=\PName{selection}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{enlargefirstpage}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{enlargefirstpage}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{enlargefirstpage~=\PName{simple switch}}% The first page of a letter always uses a different page layout. The \Class{scrlttr2} class provides a mechanism to calculate height and vertical alignment of header and footer of the first page independently of the @@ -1128,31 +1066,33 @@ the text area should become larger, supposing that the footer on the first page allows that, you can use this option. At best, a little more text will then fit on the first page. See also the description of the pseudo-length \PLength{firstfootvpos} on -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}. This option can +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}. This option can take the standard values for simple switches, as listed in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Default is \PValue{false}. % -\EndIndex{Option}{enlargefirstpage~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{firsthead}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{firsthead}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{firsthead~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% The\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} letterhead is usually the topmost element of the note paper. This option determines whether the letterhead will be typeset at all. The option accepts the standard values for simple keys, given in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} at \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Default is for the letterhead to be set.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{firsthead~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromalign}\PName{method} + \OptionVName{fromalign}{method} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% \BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromalign~=\PName{method}}% Option\important{\Option{fromalign}} \Option{fromalign} defines the placement of the return address in the letterhead of the first page. Apart from the various options for positioning the return address in the letterhead, there is @@ -1162,58 +1102,54 @@ address to the sender's extension\Index{sender's activate or deactivate the letterhead extensions. If these extensions are deactivated, some other options will have no effect. This will be noted in the explanations of the respective options. Possible values for \Option{fromalign} -are shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromalign}. Default is \PValue{left}.% +are shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign}. Default is \PValue{left}.% % \begin{table} \caption[{Available values for option \Option{fromalign} with \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Available values for option \Option{fromalign} to define the position of the from address in the letterhead with \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromalign} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{center}, \PValue{centered}, \PValue{middle}}{% - return address centered; an optional logo will be above the - extended return address; letterhead extensions will be - activated}% + return address centered; an optional logo will be above the extended + return address; letterhead extensions will be activated}% \entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{off}}{% - standard design will be used for the return address; the - letterhead extensions are deactivated}% + standard design will be used for the return address; the letterhead + extensions are deactivated}% \entry{\PValue{left}}{% - left-justified return address; an optional logo will be right - justified; letterhead extensions will be activated}% + left-justified return address; an optional logo will be right justified; + letterhead extensions will be activated}% \entry{\PValue{locationleft}, \PValue{leftlocation}}{% - return address is set left-justified in the sender's extension; - a logo, if applicable, will be placed above it; the letterhead - is automatically deactivated but can be reactivated using option - \Option{firsthead}.}% + return address is set left-justified in the sender's extension; a logo, + if applicable, will be placed above it; the letterhead is automatically + deactivated but can be reactivated using option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}.}% \entry{\PValue{locationright}, \PValue{rightlocation}, \PValue{location}}{% - return address is set right-justified in the sender's extension; - a logo, if applicable, will be placed above it; the letterhead - is automatically deactivated but can be reactivated using option - \Option{firsthead}.}% + return address is set right-justified in the sender's extension; a logo, + if applicable, will be placed above it; the letterhead is automatically + deactivated but can be reactivated using option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead}.}% \entry{\PValue{right}}{% - right-justified return address; an optional logo will be left - justified; letterhead extensions will be activated}% + right-justified return address; an optional logo will be left justified; + letterhead extensions will be activated}% \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{fromalign~=\PName{method}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromrule}\PName{position}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromname}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromaddress}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{contents} + \OptionVName{fromrule}{position}% + \Variable{fromname}% + \Variable{fromaddress}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromrule~=\PName{position}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromname}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% The\important{\Variable{fromname}} sender's name will be determined by variable \Variable{fromname}. Thereby the \PName{description} (see also -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}) will not +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) will not be used by the predefined letterheads. At\important{\OptionValue{fromrule}{aftername}} the extended letterhead an @@ -1223,7 +1159,7 @@ Alternatively\important[i]{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} \KOption{fromrule}\\\quad\PValue{afteraddress}\end{tabular}} this rule may be placed below the while sender using \OptionValue{fromrule}{afteraddress}. A summary of all available rule position settings shows -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromrule}. The length of this rule is determined by +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}. The length of this rule is determined by pseudo-length \PLength{fromrulewidth}\IndexPLength[indexmain]{fromrulewidth}. \begin{table} @@ -1231,7 +1167,7 @@ pseudo-length \PLength{fromrulewidth}\IndexPLength[indexmain]{fromrulewidth}. \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Possible values of option \Option{fromrule} for the position of the rule in the from address with \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromrule} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{afteraddress}, \PValue{below}, \PValue{on}, \PValue{true}, \PValue{yes}}{% @@ -1248,12 +1184,13 @@ standard letterhead the rule will always be placed below the sender's name. The\important{\Variable{fromaddress}} sender's address follows below the name. The \PName{content} of variable \Variable{fromaddress} determines this -address. The \PName{description} (see also \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}) +address. The \PName{description} (see also \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) will not be used at the predefined letterheads -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromname}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}\LabelFontElement{fromaddress}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromname}\LabelFontElement{fromname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}\LabelFontElement{fromrule}% The font of the whole address is determined by the element \FontElement{fromaddress}\IndexFontElement{fromaddress}% \important{\FontElement{fromaddress}}. Modifications to this may be defined @@ -1266,9 +1203,7 @@ would make sense. But you may use the elements also to change the color, e.\,g. color the rule gray instead of black. See \cite{package:xcolor} for information about colors.% % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromname}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Example} Let's now define the name of the sender at our letter example: @@ -1282,27 +1217,27 @@ information about colors.% {result of a small letter with sender, addressee, opening, text, closing, postscript, distribution list, and enclosure (date and folding marks are defaults of DIN-letters): at left one the standard letterhead using - \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, at right one the - extended letterhead using \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, at right one the + extended letterhead using \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} \end{figure} First of all not the extended but the standard letterhead has been used. The - result is shown at the left side of \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9}. The + result is shown at the left side of \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9}. The right side shows almost the same letter but with - \OptionValue{fromalign}{center} and therefore with the extended + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center} and therefore with the extended letterhead. You may see, that this variation is without any rule. - For the first time \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9} also shows a signature + For the first time \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} also shows a signature below the closing phrase. This has been generated automatically from the sender's name. More information about configuration of the signature may be - found in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} from - \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} onward. + found in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} from + \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} onward. Now, the letter with extended letterhead should use option \Option{fromrule} to print a rule below the sender's name:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-11.tex}% The result may be found at the right side of - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-10-11}. + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-10-11}. \begin{figure} \centering \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-10}}\quad @@ -1314,9 +1249,9 @@ information about colors.% opening, text, closing, signature, postscript, distribution list, enclosure and puncher hole mark (the date is a default of DIN-letters): at left one the standard letterhead using - \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, at right one the extended letterhead - using \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-10-11} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, at right one the extended letterhead + using \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-10-11} \end{figure} In difference to this, the left letter has been set once again with the standard letter head, that does not react on the additional option. @@ -1331,59 +1266,33 @@ are usually not allowed within the sender's address declaration. One has to have very good knowledge of \Class{scrlttr2} to use things like those mentioned above, intelligently. Another point to note is the one should most certainly set the variables for return address (see variable -\Variable{backaddress}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress}) and -signature (see variable \Variable{signature}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature}) oneself.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}) and +signature (see variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}) oneself.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromname}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromaddress}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromrule~=\PName{position}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{symbolicnames}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{fromphone}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{frommobilephone}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{fromfax}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{fromemail}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{fromurl}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromphone}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{frommobilephone}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromfax}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromemail}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromurl}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{phoneseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{mobilephoneseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{faxseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{emailseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{urlseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}% + \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{fromphone}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{frommobilephone}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{fromfax}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{fromemail}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{fromurl}{simple switch}% + \Variable{fromphone}% + \Variable{frommobilephone}% + \Variable{fromfax}% + \Variable{fromemail}% + \Variable{fromurl}% + \Variable{phoneseparator}% + \Variable{mobilephoneseparator}% + \Variable{faxseparator}% + \Variable{emailseparator}% + \Variable{urlseparator}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{symbolicnames~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromphone~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{frommobilephone~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromfax~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromemail~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromurl~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromphone}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{frommobilephone}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromfax}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromemail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromurl}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{emailseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{faxseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{phoneseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{mobilephoneseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{urlseparator}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% Whether or not a telephone number\Index{telephone}\Index{phone}, a mobile\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} telephone number\Index{mobile phone}\Index{cell phone}\Index{cellphone}, a fax number\Index{fax}, an @@ -1394,17 +1303,17 @@ for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} may be assigned to these options. Default is \PValue{false} for all of them. The \PName{contents} depends on the corresponding variable. The default of the \PName{description} or title of -each variable may be found in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}. The separators, +each variable may be found in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}. The separators, that will be inserted between \PName{description} and \PName{content}, may be -found in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator}. +found in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator}. You may\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\Option{symbolicnames}} change the defaults for the description of the separator variables at once using option \Option{symbolicnames}. The option understands the values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Switching on the option replaces the -descriptions from the language depending terms \Macro{emailname}, -\Macro{faxname}, \Macro{mobilephonename}, and \Macro{phonename} into symbols +descriptions from the language depending terms \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname}, \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename}, and \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} into symbols of the package \Package{marvosym}\IndexPackage{marvosym}. Also the colon will be removed from the content of the separator variables. And in this case the description and the content of the URL separator will be @@ -1417,23 +1326,23 @@ first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. \caption[{Predefined descriptions of the variables of the letterhead}]{Predefined descriptions of the variables of the letterhead (the description and contents of the separator variables may be found at - \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator}} + \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator}} \begin{desctabular}[1.8em] - \ventry{fromemail}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{emailseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{emailseparator}}% - \ventry{fromfax}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{faxseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{faxseparator}}% + \ventry{fromemail}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{emailseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{emailseparator}}% + \ventry{fromfax}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{faxseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{faxseparator}}% \ventry{frommobilephone}{% \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% - \Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}}% - \ventry{fromname}{\Macro{headfromname}}% - \ventry{fromphone}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{phoneseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator}}% - \ventry{fromurl}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{urlseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{urlseparator}}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}}% + \ventry{fromname}{\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname}}% + \ventry{fromphone}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{phoneseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator}}% + \ventry{fromurl}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{urlseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{urlseparator}}% \end{desctabular} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm} \end{table} \begin{table}[tp] @@ -1448,15 +1357,15 @@ first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. \toprule variable name & description & content \\ \midrule - \Variable{emailseparator} & \Macro{emailname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{faxseparator} & \Macro{faxname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{mobilephoneseparator} & \Macro{mobilephonename} & \Macro{usekomavaer}\PParameter{phoneseparator} \\ - \Variable{phoneseparator} & \Macro{phonename} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{urlseparator} & \Macro{wwwname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{emailseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{faxseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{mobilephoneseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename} & \Macro{usekomavaer}\PParameter{phoneseparator} \\ + \Variable{phoneseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{urlseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator} \end{table} \begin{Example} @@ -1466,11 +1375,11 @@ first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. defines the content of the needed variables:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-12.tex}% Nevertheless the result at the left side of - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13} is not disillusioning: the options are + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13} is not disillusioning: the options are ignored. That's the case because the additional variables and options will - be used at the extended letterhead only. So option \Option{fromalign} has to + be used at the extended letterhead only. So option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} has to be used, like done at the right letter of - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13}. + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13}. \begin{figure} \centering \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-12}}\quad @@ -1482,16 +1391,16 @@ first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. opening, text, closing, signature, postscript, distribution list, enclosure and puncher hole mark (the date is a default of DIN-letters): at left one the standard letterhead using - \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, at right one the extended letterhead - using \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, at right one the extended letterhead + using \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13} \end{figure} \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-13.tex} An arrangement of alternatives with left aligned using - \OptionValue{fromalign}{left} and right aligned sender - using \OptionValue{fromalign}{right} may be found in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-14-15}. + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left} and right aligned sender + using \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} may be found in + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15}. \begin{figure} \centering \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-14}}\quad @@ -1503,36 +1412,21 @@ first time after \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. opening, text, closing, signature, postscript, distribution list, enclosure and puncher hole mark (the date is a default of DIN-letters): at left one left aligned letterhead using - \OptionValue{fromalign}{left}, at right one right aligned letterhead - using \OptionValue{fromalign}{right}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-14-15} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left}, at right one right aligned letterhead + using \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{urlseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{mobilephoneseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{phoneseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{faxseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{emailseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromurl} -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromemail} -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromfax} -\EndIndex{Variable}{frommobilephone}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromphone}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromurl~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromemail~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromfax~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{frommobilephone~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromphone~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{symbolicnames~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromlogo}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromlogo}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \OptionVName{fromlogo}{simple switch}% + \Variable{fromlogo}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromlogo~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromlogo}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% With option \Option{fromlogo} you may configure whether or not to use a logo\Index{Logo} at the letterhead. The option value may be any \PName{simple switch} from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, @@ -1540,7 +1434,7 @@ logo\Index{Logo} at the letterhead. The option value may be any \PName{simple logo. The logo itself is defined by the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{fromlogo}. The \PName{description} of the logo is empty by default and \KOMAScript{} does not use it anywhere at the predefined note papers (see -also \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% +also \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}).% \begin{Example} Mr Public likes to use a letterhead with logo. He generated a graphics file with the logo and would like to include this using @@ -1548,7 +1442,7 @@ also \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% \Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} (see \cite{package:graphics}).% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-16}% The result may be seen at the left top position of - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-16-18}. The additional letter prints at this + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18}. The additional letter prints at this figure shows the result with right aligned or centered sender. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% @@ -1567,18 +1461,18 @@ also \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% sender}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-18}}\quad \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-16-18} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18} \end{figure} \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromlogo}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromlogo~=\PName{smart value}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{firsthead}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{firsthead}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{firsthead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterhead}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>head}% For many cases, \Class{scrlttr2} with its options and variables offers enough possibilities to create a letterhead. In very rare situations one may wish to have more freedom in terms of layout. In those @@ -1591,7 +1485,7 @@ construction as content of variable \Variable{firsthead}. Within or one underneath the other. An advanced user will thus be able to create a letterhead on his own. Of course the construct may and should use other variables with the help of -\Macro{usekomavar}. \KOMAScript{} does not use the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}. \KOMAScript{} does not use the \PName{description} of variable \Variable{firsthead}. \iffree{}{A detailed example for the definition of a letterhead will be shown in \autoref{cha:modernletters}.} @@ -1601,72 +1495,46 @@ The\textnote{Attention!} command compatibility to former \Class{scrlttr2} versions. However it is deprecated and you should not use it anymore.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{firsthead}% -% -\EndIndex{}{letter>head}% -\EndIndex{}{letterhead}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{addrfield}\PName{mode}\\ - \KOption{backaddress}\PName{value}\\ - \KOption{priority}\PName{priority}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{toname}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{toaddress}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{backaddress}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{backaddressseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{specialmail}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromzipcode}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{zipcodeseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{place}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{PPcode}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{PPdatamatrix}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{addresseeimage}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \OptionVName{addrfield}{mode}% + \OptionVName{backaddress}{value}% + \OptionVName{priority}{priority}% + \Variable{toname}% + \Variable{toaddress}% + \Variable{backaddress}% + \Variable{backaddressseparator}% + \Variable{specialmail}% + \Variable{fromzipcode}% + \Variable{zipcodeseparator}% + \Variable{place}% + \Variable{PPcode}% + \Variable{PPdatamatrix}% + \Variable{addresseeimage}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{addrfield~=\PName{mode}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{toname}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{toaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{backaddress~=\PName{value}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{backaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{backaddressseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{priority~=\PName{priority}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{specialmail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromzipcode}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{zipcodeseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{place}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{PPcode}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{PPdatamatrix}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{addresseeimage}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{addressee}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toname}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toaddress}% +\BeginIndex{}{addressee}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{addressee}\LabelFontElement{addressee}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toname}\LabelFontElement{toname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toaddress}\LabelFontElement{toaddress}% Option \Option{addrfield} defines whether or not to set an address field. Default is to use an address field. This option can take the mode values from -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.addrfield}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}. Default +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}. Default is \PValue{true}. With values \PValue{true}, \PValue{topaligned}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}, \PValue{PP}, and \PValue{backgroundimage} name and address of the addressee will be defined by -the mandatory argument of the \Environment{letter} environment (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter}). These elements will additionally be +the mandatory argument of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} environment (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter}). These elements will additionally be copied into the variables \Variable{toname} and \Variable{toaddress}. The predefined font styles may be changed\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} by -execution of command \Macro{setkomafont} or \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). Thereby three elements +execution of command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Thereby three elements exist. First of all element \FontElement{addressee}\important{\FontElement{addressee}}, that is responsible for the addressee overall. The additional elements @@ -1674,15 +1542,13 @@ responsible for the addressee overall. The additional elements \FontElement{toaddress}\important{\FontElement{toaddress}} are responsible only either for the name or the address of the addressee. They may be used to define modifications from the \FontElement{addressee} configuration.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{toaddress}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{toname}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{addressee}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{table} \caption[{available values for option \Option{addrfield} using \Class{scrlttr2}}]{available values for option \Option{addrfield} to change the addressee mode of \Class{scrlttr2}}% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.addrfield}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}% \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{backgroundimage}, \PValue{PPbackgroundimage}, \PValue{PPBackgroundImage}, \PValue{PPBackGroundImage}, @@ -1730,7 +1596,7 @@ this value \PValue{plain}\important{\OptionValue{backaddress}{plain}} selects a style without underline. Default is \PValue{underlined} and therefore printing an underlined return address. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{backaddress}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{backaddress}\LabelFontElement{backaddress}% The return address itself is defined by the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{backaddress}. Default is a combination of variable \Variable{toname} and \Variable{toaddress} with redefinition of the double backslash to set the @@ -1741,7 +1607,7 @@ by \KOMAScript. The font style of the return address is configurable via element \FontElement{backaddress}\important{\FontElement{backaddress}}. Default for this is \Macro{sffamily} (see -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements}). Before execution of the element's +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}). Before execution of the element's font style \KOMAScript{} switches to \Macro{scriptsize}.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{backaddress}% @@ -1752,11 +1618,6 @@ opposite to this, \OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}% \important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}} will not centre the address but follow it aligned top at the available space. This is the only difference to \OptionValue{addrfield}{true}.% -\EndIndex{Variable}{backaddressseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{backaddress}% -\EndIndex{Option}{backaddress~=\PName{value}}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{toaddress}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{toname}% \begin{table} % \centering @@ -1771,38 +1632,38 @@ to \OptionValue{addrfield}{true}.% \toprule element & font style \\ \midrule - \FontElement{addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee} & \\ - \FontElement{backaddress}\IndexFontElement{backaddress} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.backaddress}\IndexFontElement{backaddress} & \Macro{sffamily}% \\ - \FontElement{PPdata}\IndexFontElement{PPdata} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.PPdata}\IndexFontElement{PPdata} & \Macro{sffamily}% \\ - \FontElement{PPlogo}\IndexFontElement{PPlogo} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.PPlogo}\IndexFontElement{PPlogo} & \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}% \\ - \FontElement{priority}\IndexFontElement{priority} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.priority}\IndexFontElement{priority} & \Macro{fontsize}\PParameter{10pt}\PParameter{10pt}% \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}% \\ - \FontElement{prioritykey}\IndexFontElement{prioritykey} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.prioritykey}\IndexFontElement{prioritykey} & \Macro{fontsize}\PParameter{24.88pt}\PParameter{24.88pt}% \Macro{selectfont}% \\ - \FontElement{specialmail}\IndexFontElement{specialmail} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.specialmail}\IndexFontElement{specialmail} & \\ - \FontElement{toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress} & \\ - \FontElement{toname}\IndexFontElement{toname} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.toname}\IndexFontElement{toname} & \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}% \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}\LabelFontElement{specialmail}% At the default \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} an optional dispatch type\Index{mode of dispatch}\Index{dispatch type} can be output within the address field between the return address and the addressee address, This will @@ -1812,40 +1673,43 @@ selected, which is also the default. Class \Class{scrlttr2} itself does not use the \PName{description} of variable \Variable{specialmail}. The alignment is defined by the pseudo-lengths PLength{specialmailindent} and \PLength{specialmailrightindent} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent}). The predefined +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent}). The predefined font style of element\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \FontElement{specialmail}\important{\FontElement{specialmail}}, that has been -listed in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements}, may be changed using -commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}).% +listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}, may be changed using +commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% \EndIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{priority}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{prioritykey}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{priority}\LabelFontElement{priority}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{prioritykey}\LabelFontElement{prioritykey}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPlogo}\LabelFontElement{PPlogo}% On\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important[i]{\OptionValue{priority}{A}\\ \OptionValue{priority}{B}} the other hand, using an international priority -with \OptionValue{priority}{A} or -\OptionValue{priority}{B} (see \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.priority}) together with -\OptionValue{addrfield}{true} will print the priority as mode of -dispatch. Using it together with +with \OptionValue{priority}{A} or \OptionValue{priority}{B} (see +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.priority}) together with \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} +will print the priority as mode of dispatch. Using it together with \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}} will print the priority at the corresponding position in the Port-Pay\'e head. Thereby the element \FontElement{priority} defines the basic font style and \FontElement{prioritykey} the modification of the basic font style for the -priority key, ``A'' or ``B''. The default font styles are listed in -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements} and may be changed using commands \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}).% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{prioritykey}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{priority}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{specialmail}% +priority key, ``A'' or ``B''. The Port-Pay\'e logo ``P.~P.'' uses the font +style of element \FontElement{PPlogo}. The default font styles are listed in +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} and may be changed using commands +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{table} \caption[{available values for option \Option{priority} in \Class{scrlttr2}}]{available values for option \Option{priority} to select the international priority at the address field of\Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.priority} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.priority} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{manual}}{% Priority will not be printed.}% @@ -1871,8 +1735,8 @@ variable \Variable{fromzipcode} and the place from \PName{content} of variable \PName{content} of variable \Variable{fromzipcode} will be preceded by the \PName{description} of variable \Variable{fromzipcode} and the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{zipcodeseparator}. The predefined \PName{description} -depends on the used \File{lco}-file (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} from -\autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} onward). On the other hand the default of +depends on the used \File{lco}-file (see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} from +\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} onward). On the other hand the default of the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{zipcodeseparator} is a small distance followed by an endash followed by one more small distance (\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}). @@ -1884,20 +1748,15 @@ sender's identification code will be used at the Port-Pay\'e head. This is the addressee an additional data array may be printed. The \PName{content} of variable \Variable{PPdatamatrix} will be used for this. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPdata}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPdata}\LabelFontElement{PPdata}% Zip-code\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, place and code will be printed with default font size 8\Unit{pt}. Thereby the font style of element \FontElement{PPdata}\important{\FontElement{PPdata}} will be used. The default -of the element is listed in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements} and may -be changed using commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}).% +of the element is listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} and may +be changed using commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% \EndIndex{FontElement}{PPdata}% -% -\EndIndex{Variable}{PPcode}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{place}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{zipcodeseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromzipcode}% With\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\\quad\PValue{backgroundimage}\end{tabular}\strut\\ @@ -1909,16 +1768,16 @@ for this. \KOMAScript{} does not use the \PName{description} of that variable. Nothing else but the picture will be printed with option \OptionValue{addrfield}{image}. But with option \OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} the addressee's name and address from -the mandatory argument of the \Environment{letter} environment will be -output. +the mandatory argument of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} environment will +be output. The alignment of the Port-Pay\'e head as long as the alignment of the Port-Pay\'e address is defined by pseudo-length \PLength{toaddrindent} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent}) as well as +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent}) as well as \PLength{PPheadwidth} and \PLength{PPheadheight} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}). The alignment of +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}). The alignment of the data array is defined by pseudo-length \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip} -(see \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip}). +(see \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip}). Please note\textnote{Attention!} that \KOMAScript{} itself cannot set any external graphics or pictures. So, if you want to put external picture files @@ -1928,36 +1787,29 @@ have to use an additional graphics package like \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} to use, i.\,e., the command \Macro{includegraphics} at the \PName{content} of the variables.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{addresseeimage}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{PPdatamatrix}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{addrfield~=\PName{mode}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{priority~=\PName{priority}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Anschrift} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{locfield}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{locfield}{selection} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{sender>additional information}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{locfield~=\PName{selection}}% \Class{scrlttr2} places a field with additional sender attributes next to the address field. This can be used, for example, for bank account or similar additional information. -Depending\important[i]{\OptionValue{fromalign}{center}\\ +Depending\important[i]{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{fromalign}\\\quad\PValue{locationleft}\end{tabular}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{fromalign}\\\quad\PValue{locationright}\end{tabular}} on the -\Option{fromalign} option, it will also be used for the sender -logo. The width of this field may be defined within an \File{lco} file -(see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}). If the width is set to 0 in that file, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} option, it will also be used for the +sender logo. The width of this field may be defined within an \File{lco} file +(see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}). If the width is set to 0 in that file, then the \Option{locfield} option can toggle between two presets for -the field width. See the explanation on the \Variable{locwidth} pseudo +the field width. See the explanation on the \PLength{locwidth} pseudo length in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Possible values for this -option are shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield}. Default is +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Possible values for this +option are shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.locfield}. Default is \PValue{narrow}.% % \begin{table} @@ -1970,7 +1822,7 @@ option are shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield}. Default is \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Possible values of option \Option{locfield} for setting the width of the field with additional sender attributes with \Class{scrlttr2}% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.locfield}}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.locfield}}% [l] \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\linewidth} \begin{desctabular}[t] @@ -1982,10 +1834,9 @@ option are shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield}. Default is \end{table} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{location}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{location}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{location}% +\BeginIndex{}{sender>additional information}% The contents of the sender's extension field is determined by the variable \Variable{location}. To set this variable's \PName{content}, it is permitted to use formatting commands like \Macro{raggedright}. \KOMAScript{} @@ -1996,7 +1847,7 @@ does not use the \PName{description} of the variable. membership. Therefor he uses the \Variable{location} variable:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-19.tex}% This will define the field beside the addressee's address like shown in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-19}. + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with extended sender, logo, @@ -2009,59 +1860,54 @@ does not use the \PName{description} of the variable. mark (the date is a default of DIN-letters)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-19}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-19} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{location}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Option}{locfield~=\PName{selection}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{sender>additional information}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{numericaldate}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{numericaldate}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{numericaldate~=\PName{simple switch}}% This option toggles between the standard, language-dependent date\Index{date}\Index{reference line} presentation, and a short, numerical one. {\KOMAScript} does not provide the standard presentation. It should be defined by packages such as \Package{ngerman}\IndexPackage{ngerman}, \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel}, or -\Package{isodate}\IndexPackage{isodate}. The\important{\OptionValue{numericaldate}{true}} -short, numerical presentation, on the other hand, is produced by -\Class{scrlttr2} itself. This option can take the standard values for simple -switches, as listed in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, -\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Default is \PValue{false}, which results in -standard date presentation. +\Package{isodate}\IndexPackage{isodate}. +The\important{\OptionValue{numericaldate}{true}} short, numerical +presentation, on the other hand, is produced by \Class{scrlttr2} itself. This +option can take the standard values for simple switches, as listed in +\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Default is +\PValue{false}, which results in standard date presentation. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{date}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{date}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{date}% The date in the selected presentation will become the \PName{content} of -variable \Variable{date}. The selection of option \Option{numericaldate} -does not influence the date any longer, if the \PName{content} of this variable -will be changed by the user. Normally the date will be part of the reference -line. If all other elements of the reference line will be empty and therefore -unused a date line instead of a reference line will be printed. See the -description of variable \Variable{place} on -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator} for more information about +variable \Variable{date}. The selection of option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate} does not influence the date any +longer, if the \PName{content} of this variable will be changed by the +user. Normally the date will be part of the reference line. If all other +elements of the reference line will be empty and therefore unused a date line +instead of a reference line will be printed. See the description of variable +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} on +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.placeseparator} for more information about the date line. You should note, that you can change the automatic printing of -the date using option \Option{refline}, that will be described next. +the date using option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}, that will be described next. % -\EndIndex{Variable}{date}% -\EndIndex{Option}{numericaldate~=\PName{switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{refline}\PName{selection} + \OptionVName{refline}{selection} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{reference line}% \index{business line|see{reference line}}% | -\BeginIndex{Option}{refline~=\PName{selection}}% Especially in business letters a line with information like identification code\Index{identification>code}, direct dial, customer's number, invoice's number, or references to previous letters may be found usually. This line will @@ -2072,7 +1918,7 @@ attributes may extend beyond the normal type area to the left and to the right. Option \OptionValue{refline}{wide} defines that this should also apply to the reference fields line. Normally, the reference fields line contains at least the date, but it can hold additional data. Possible values for this -option are shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refline}. Default is \PValue{narrow} +option are shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refline}. Default is \PValue{narrow} and \PValue{dateright}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}.% % \begin{table} @@ -2080,7 +1926,7 @@ and \PValue{dateright}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}.% \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Possible value of option \Option{refline} for setting the width of the reference fields line with \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.refline} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.refline} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{dateleft}{\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% The date will be placed leftmost at the reference line.}% @@ -2096,29 +1942,19 @@ and \PValue{dateright}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}.% \end{table} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{yourref}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{yourmail}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{myref}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{customer}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{invoice}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}% + \Variable{yourref}% + \Variable{yourmail}% + \Variable{myref}% + \Variable{customer}% + \Variable{invoice}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{yourref}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{yourmail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{myref}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{customer}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{invoice}% These five variables represent typical fields of the reference line. Their -meanings are given in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.variables} on -\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.variables}. Each variable has also a predefined -\PName{description}, shown in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.reflineTerm}. Additional +meanings are given in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} on +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.variables}. Each variable has also a predefined +\PName{description}, shown in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm}. Additional information about adding other variables to the reference line may be found in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} from -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} onward.% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} onward.% % \begin{table} % \centering @@ -2133,29 +1969,29 @@ in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} from \toprule variable name & description & e.\,g., in english \\ \midrule - \Variable{yourref} & \Macro{yourrefname} & Your reference \\ - \Variable{yourmail} & \Macro{yourmailname} & Your letter from \\ - \Variable{myref} & \Macro{myrefname} & Our reference \\ - \Variable{customer} & \Macro{customername} & Customer No.: \\ - \Variable{invoice} & \Macro{invoicename} & Invoice No.: \\ - \Variable{date} & \Macro{datename} & date \\ + \Variable{yourref} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname} & Your reference \\ + \Variable{yourmail} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname} & Your letter from \\ + \Variable{myref} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname} & Our reference \\ + \Variable{customer} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername} & Customer No.: \\ + \Variable{invoice} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename} & Invoice No.: \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename} & date \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.reflineTerm} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm} \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refname}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refname}\LabelFontElement{refname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}\LabelFontElement{refvalue}% Font style and color\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} of the \PName{description} and \PName{content} of the fields of the reference line may be changed with elements \FontElement{refname}% \important[i]{\FontElement{refname}\\\FontElement{refvalue}} and -\FontElement{refvalue}. Therefor the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) should be used. The default +\FontElement{refvalue}. Therefor the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) should be used. The default configuration of both elements is listed in -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue}.% +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refnamerefvalue}.% \begin{table}[tp] % \centering \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% @@ -2164,14 +2000,14 @@ configuration of both elements is listed in \begin{captionbeside} [{font style default of elements of the reference line}]{default font style configuration of the elements of the reference line% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue}} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.refnamerefvalue}} [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} \toprule element & default configuration \\ \midrule - \FontElement{refname} & \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{scriptsize} \\ - \FontElement{refvalue} & \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.refname} & \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{scriptsize} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.refvalue} & \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} @@ -2179,45 +2015,43 @@ configuration of both elements is listed in % \EndIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}% \EndIndex{FontElement}{refname}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{place}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{placeseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{placeseparator}% \end{Declaration}% \BeginIndex{Variable}{place}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{placeseparator}% If all variables of the reference line are empty, the line will be omitted. -In this case, the \PName{content} of \Variable{place} and +In this case, the \PName{content} of \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} and \Variable{placeseparator} will be set, followed by the \PName{content} of -\Variable{date}. The predefined \PName{content} of the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date}. The predefined \PName{content} of the \Variable{placeseparator} is a comma followed by a non-breaking space. If the -variable \Variable{place} has no \PName{content} value then the hyphen remains -unset also. The predefined \PName{content} of \Variable{date} is -\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today} and depends on the setting of the option -\Option{numericaldate} (see \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}). +variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} has no \PName{content} value then +the hyphen remains unset also. The predefined \PName{content} of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} is \Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today} and +depends on the setting of the option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate} +(see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}). Since version~3.09\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}} place and date the -alignment of place and date is given by option \Option{refline}. The available -alignment values for this option are listed in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refline}. +alignment of place and date is given by option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}. The available +alignment values for this option are listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refline}. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}\LabelFontElement{placeanddate}% The\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} font setting of place and date in the date line are given by font element\FontElement{placeanddate}\important[i]{\FontElement{placeanddate}} -instead of element \FontElement{refvalue}, which would be used for general +instead of element \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.refvalue}, which would be used for general reference lines. You can change the empty default of the font element using -commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}).% +commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}).% \EndIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}% \begin{Example} Now Mr Public also sets the place:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-20.tex}% - In this case \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-20} shows the place and the + In this case \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20} shows the place and the automatic separator in front of the date. The date has been defined explicitly to make the printed date independent from the date of the \LaTeX{} run. @@ -2233,37 +2067,28 @@ commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (see mark}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-20}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-20} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{place}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{placeseparator}% - % -\EndIndex{Variable}{invoice}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{customer}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{myref}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{yourmail}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{yourref}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Option}{refline~=\PName{selection}}% -\EndIndex{}{reference line}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{title}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{title}% \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{title}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{title}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}\LabelFontElement{lettertitle}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}% With \Class{scrlttr2} a letter can carry an additional title. The title is centered and set with font size \Macro{LARGE} directly after and beneath the reference fields line. The predefined font setup for the element \FontElement{lettertitle}\important{\FontElement{lettertitle}} can be changed -with commands \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). Font size declarations are +with commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (see +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Font size declarations are allowed. Font size \Macro{LARGE} is not part of the predefined default \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries} but nevertheless will be used before the font style of the element. With \Class{scrlttr2} you can also @@ -2283,26 +2108,20 @@ a \KOMAScript{} class, because these classes already define an element Like shown in the example, the \PName{content} of the variable defines the title. \KOMAScript{} will not use the \PName{description}.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{title}% -\EndIndex{}{title}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{subject}\PName{selection}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{subject}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{subjectseparator}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \OptionVName{subject}{selection}% + \Variable{subject}% + \Variable{subjectseparator}% \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{subject}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{subject~=\PName{selection}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{subject}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{subjectseparator}% In case a subject should be set, the \PName{content} of the variable \Variable{subject} need to be defined. First of all with option \OptionValue{subject}{true}\important{\OptionValue{subject}{titled}} the usage of the \PName{description} before the output of the subject may be -configured. See \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.subjectTerm} for the predefined +configured. See \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm} for the predefined \PName{description}. In case of using the \PName{description} the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{subjectseparator}\Index{separator} will be set between the \PName{description} and \PName{content} of the @@ -2320,15 +2139,15 @@ is a colon followed by a white space. \toprule variable name & description \\ \midrule - \Variable{subject} & \Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{subjectseparator}% + \Variable{subject} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{subjectseparator}% \texttt{\%} \\ & \texttt{\quad}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{subjectseparator} \\ - \Variable{subjectseparator} & \Macro{subjectname} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{subjectseparator} \\ + \Variable{subjectseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.subjectTerm} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm} \end{table} On the other hand, \OptionValue{subject}{afteropening}% @@ -2339,7 +2158,7 @@ formatting\important[i]{\OptionValue{subject}{underlined}\\ \OptionValue{subject}{right}} of the subject may be changed using either \OptionValue{subject}{underlined}, \OptionValue{subject}{centered}, or \OptionValue{subject}{right}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}. All -available values are listed in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.subject}. Please +available values are listed in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subject}. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, that with option \OptionValue{subject}{underlined} the while subject must fit at one line! Defaults are \OptionValue{subject}{left}, \OptionValue{subject}{beforeopening}, and @@ -2354,7 +2173,7 @@ the while subject must fit at one line! Defaults are [{available values of option \Option{subject} with \Class{scrlttr2}}] {available values of option \Option{subject} for the position and formatting of the subject with - \Class{scrlttr2}\label{tab:scrlttr2.subject}}% + \Class{scrlttr2}\label{tab:\LabelBase.subject}}% [l] \begin{minipage}[t]{.6\linewidth} \begin{desctabular}[t] @@ -2371,12 +2190,13 @@ the while subject must fit at one line! Defaults are \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}\LabelFontElement{lettersubject}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}% The subject line is set in a separate font\Index{font>style}. To change this -use the commands \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). For element +use the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). For element \FontElement{lettersubject}\important{\FontElement{lettersubject}} the predetermined font is \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries}. With \Class{scrlttr2} you can also use @@ -2391,7 +2211,7 @@ with a \KOMAScript{} class, because these classes already define an element to have a kind of heading to the subject and therefor sets the corresponding option:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-21.tex}% - The result is shown by \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-21}. + The result is shown by \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-21}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with extended sender, logo, @@ -2404,42 +2224,39 @@ with a \KOMAScript{} class, because these classes already define an element puncher hole mark}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-21}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-21} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-21} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{subjectseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{subject}% -\EndIndex{Option}{subject~=\PName{selection}}% -\EndIndex{}{subject}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{firstfoot}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{firstfoot}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{letter>foot}% \BeginIndex{}{letterfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{firstfoot~=\PName{simple switch}}% This\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} option determines whether the letterfoot is set or not. Switching off the letterfoot, e.\,g., using \OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}\important{\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}}, has -an effect when the option \Option{enlargefirstpage} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) is used concurrently. In +an effect when the option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage} (see +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage}) is used concurrently. In this case the text area of the page will be enlarged down to the bottom. Then the normal distance between typing area and the letter foot will become the -only distance remaining between the end of the typing area and the end of -the page. +only distance remaining between the end of the typing area and the end of the +page. The option understands the standard values for simple switches, as given in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Default is the setting of the letter foot. -\EndIndex{Option}{firstfoot~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{firstfoot}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{firstfoot}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{firstfoot}% +\BeginIndex{}{letter>foot}% +\BeginIndex{}{letterfoot}% The first page's footer is preset to empty. However\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, a new construction may be made at the \PName{content} of variable \Variable{firstfoot}. \KOMAScript{} @@ -2450,15 +2267,13 @@ deprecated command \Macro{firstfoot}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{firstfoot} of be used any longer. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{frombank}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{frombank}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{frombank}% This variable at the moment takes on a special meaning: it is not used internally at this point, and the user can make use of it to set, for example, his bank account\Index{bank account} within the sender's additional -information (see variable \Variable{location}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.location}) or the footer.% +information (see variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}) or the footer.% % \begin{Example} In the first page's footer, you may want to set the \PName{content} of the @@ -2515,29 +2330,27 @@ information (see variable \Variable{location}, % described above in this section. \end{Example} In the previous example a multi-line footer was set. With a compatibility -setting to version 2.9u (see \Option{version} in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}) the space will in general not +setting to version 2.9u (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) the space will in general not suffice. In that case, you may need to reduce \PLength{firstfootvpos} (see -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}) appropriately.% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}) appropriately.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{frombank}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{firstfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letter>foot}% -\EndIndex{}{letterfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letter>first page}% -\EndIndex{}{note paper}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{6} % \section{Paragraph Markup} +\LoadCommonFile{parmarkup} % \section{Paragraph Markup} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{7} % \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage} % \section{Detection of Odd and Even Pages} \section{Head and Foot Using Predefined Page Style} \seclabel{pagestyle} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{page>style}% \BeginIndex{}{page>head}% \BeginIndex{}{page>foot}% @@ -2545,7 +2358,7 @@ suffice. In that case, you may need to reduce \PLength{firstfootvpos} (see One of the general properties of a document is the page style. In {\LaTeX} this means mostly the contents of headers and footers. Like\textnote{Attention!} already mentioned in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, the head and foot of the note paper are +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, the head and foot of the note paper are treated as elements of the note paper. Therefore they do not depend on the settings of the page style. So this section describes the page styles of the consecutive pages of letter after the note paper. At single-side letters this is @@ -2556,7 +2369,6 @@ also the page style of all backsides. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{letterpagestyle} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterpagestyle}% The\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} default page style used for letters is specified by the contents of command \Macro{letterpagestyle}. With \Class{scrlttr2} an empty value has been @@ -2564,15 +2376,15 @@ predefined that does not change the page style of the letter from the page style of the document. This has been done, because \Class{scrlttr2} has been made for letter-only-documents. So it is much easier to define the page style of all letters with the page style of -the document using \Macro{pagestyle} inside the preamble or before starting +the document using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} inside the preamble or before starting the first letter. -The \Pagestyle{plain} page style of letters differs from the \Pagestyle{plain} +The \PageStyle{plain} page style of letters differs from the \PageStyle{plain} page style of most classes. Therefore package \Package{scrletter} defines \Macro{letterpagestyle} with the contents -\Pagestyle{plain.letter}\IndexPagestyle{plain.letter}. So all letters will use -the \Pagestyle{plain} style of page style pair -\Pagestyle{letter}\IndexPagestyle{letter} by default and independent from the +\PageStyle{plain.letter}\IndexPagestyle{plain.letter}. So all letters will use +the \PageStyle{plain} style of page style pair +\PageStyle{letter}\IndexPagestyle{letter} by default and independent from the page style of the rest of the document. See \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pagestyleatscrletter} for more information about the characteristics of the page style of package \Package{scrletter}. @@ -2585,19 +2397,17 @@ the characteristics of the page style of package \Package{scrletter}. in your document preamble. Take care about the star of \Macro{renewcommand*}! \end{Example} -Nevertheless, if you use \Macro{pagestyle} or \Macro{thispagestyle} inside a +Nevertheless, if you use \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle} inside a letter, this will overwrite the setting of \Macro{letterpagestyle} that is only the default for the initialisation inside \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterpagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{headsepline}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{footsepline}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% These two options select whether or not to insert a separator line\Index{line>separator}\Index{rule>separator} below the header or above the footer, respectively, on consecutive pages. This option can take the standard @@ -2610,54 +2420,52 @@ head. Activation\important{\OptionValue{footsepline}{true}} of option the options switches of the corresponding rules. Obviously option \Option{headsepline} does not influence page style -\PValue{empty}\important[i]{\Pagestyle{empty}} (see afterwards at this +\PValue{empty}\important[i]{\PageStyle{empty}} (see afterwards at this section). This page style explicitly does not use any page head. -Typographically\important[i]{\Pagestyle{headings}\\ - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\\\Pagestyle{plain}} such a rule make a hard optical +Typographically\important[i]{\PageStyle{headings}\\ + \PageStyle{myheadings}\\\PageStyle{plain}} such a rule make a hard optical connection of head or foot and the text area. This would not mean, that the distance between head and text or text and foot should be increased. Instead of this the head or foot should be seen as parts of the typing area, while calculation of margins and typing area. To achieve this \KOMAScript{} will -pass option -\Option{headinclude}\important[i]{\Opton{headinclude}\\ - \Option{footinclude}} or \Option{footinclude}, respectively, to the -\Package{typearea} package, if option \Option{headsepline} or -\Option{footsepline}, respectively, are used as a class -option. In\important{\Pagestyle{plain}} opposite to \Option{headsepline} -option \Option{footsepline} does influence page style \PValue{plain} also, -because \PValue{plain} uses a page number at the foot. Package -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% +pass option \DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}% +\important[i]{\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}\\ + \DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}} or +\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}, respectively, to the \Package{typearea} +package, if option \Option{headsepline} or \Option{footsepline}, respectively, +are used as a class option. In\important{\PageStyle{plain}} opposite to +\Option{headsepline} option \Option{footsepline} does influence page style +\PValue{plain} also, because \PValue{plain} uses a page number at the +foot. Package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% \important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) provides additional features for rules at head and foot and may be combined with \Class{scrlttr2}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagenumber}\PName{position} + \OptionVName{pagenumber}{position} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagenumber~=\PName{position}}% This option defines if and where a page number will be placed on consecutive pages. This option affects the page -styles\important[i]{\Pagestyle{headings}\\ - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{plain}} \Pagestyle{headings}, \Pagestyle{myheadings}, and -\Pagestyle{plain}. It also affects the default page styles of the +styles\important[i]{\PageStyle{headings}\\ + \PageStyle{myheadings}\\ + \PageStyle{plain}} \PageStyle{headings}, \PageStyle{myheadings}, and +\PageStyle{plain}. It also affects the default page styles of the \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} package, if set before loading the package (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}). It can take values only influencing horizontal, only vertical, or both positions. Available value are shown in -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.pagenumber}. Default is \PValue{botcenter}. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber}. Default is \PValue{botcenter}. \begin{table} \caption[{available values of option \Option{pagenumber} with \Class{scrlttr2}}]{available values of option \Option{pagenumber} for the - position of the page number in page styles \Pagestyle{headings}, - \Pagestyle{myheadings}, and \PValue{plain} with \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.pagenumber} + position of the page number in page styles \PageStyle{headings}, + \PageStyle{myheadings}, and \PValue{plain} with \Class{scrlttr2}} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{bot}, \PValue{foot}}{% page number in footer, horizontal position not changed}% @@ -2688,69 +2496,74 @@ positions. Available value are shown in \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{pagenumber~=\PName{position}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{page style}\\ + \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{page style}% \Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{local page style} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% In letters written with \Class{scrlttr2} there are four different page styles. \begin{description} -\item[\Pagestyle{empty}] is the page style, in which the header and footer of - consecutive pages are completely - empty. This page style is also used for the first page, because - header and footer of this page are set by other means using the - macro \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (see - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening}). -\item[\Pagestyle{headings}] is the page style for running (automatic) headings - on consecutive pages. The inserted marks are the sender's name from the - variable \Variable{fromname}\IndexVariable{fromname} and the subject from - the variable \Variable{subject}\IndexVariable{subject} (see - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname} and - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject}). At which position these - marks and the page numbers are placed, depends on the previously described - option \Option{pagenumber} and the \PName{content} of the variables - \Variable{nexthead}\IndexVariable{nexthead} and - \Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot}. The author can also change - these marks manually after the \Macro{opening} command. To this end, the - commands \Macro{markboth} and \Macro{markright} are available as usual, and - with the use of package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} also \Macro{markleft} - (see \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark}) is available. -\item[\Pagestyle{myheadings}] is the page style for manual page headings on - consecutive pages. This is very similar to \PValue{headings}, but - here the marks must be set by the author using the commands - \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and - \Macro{markright}\Index{markright}. With the use of package - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} also \Macro{markleft} can be utilized. -\item[\Pagestyle{plain}] is the page style with only page numbers in the - header or footer on consecutive pages. The placement of these page numbers is - influenced by the previously described option \Option{pagenumber}. +\item[{\PageStyle{empty}% + \IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{empty}\LabelPageStyle{empty}}] is the page + style, in which the header and footer of consecutive pages are completely + empty. This page style is also used for the first page, because header and + footer of this page are set by other means using the macro + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}). +\item[{\PageStyle{headings}% + \IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{headings}\LabelPageStyle{heading}}] is the page + style for running (automatic) headings on consecutive pages. The inserted + marks are the sender's name from the variable + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname}\IndexVariable{fromname} and the + subject from the variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject}\IndexVariable{subject} (see + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} and + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject}). At which position these marks + and the page numbers are placed, depends on the previously described option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber} and the \PName{content} of the variables + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nexthead}\IndexVariable{nexthead} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot}. The author can also change + these marks manually after the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} command. To + this end, the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright} are available as usual, and with the use + of package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} also + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft} (see + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark}) is available. +\item[{\PageStyle{myheadings}% + \IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{myheadings}\LabelPageStyle{myheadings}}] is the + page style for manual page headings on consecutive pages. This is very + similar to \PValue{headings}, but here the marks must be set by the author + using the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}\Index{markright}. With the use of package + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} also \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft} can be utilized. +\item[{\PageStyle{plain}% + \IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{plain}\LabelPageStyle{plain}}] is the page + style with only page numbers in the header or footer on consecutive + pages. The placement of these page numbers is influenced by the previously + described option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber}. \end{description} Page styles are also influenced by the previously described -options\important[i]{\Option{headsepline}\\\Option{footsepline}} -\Option{headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline} and -\Option{footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline}. The page style beginning with -the current page is switched using \Macro{pagestyle}. In contrast, -\Macro{thispagestyle} changes only the page style of the current +options\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline}. The page +style beginning with the current page is switched using \Macro{pagestyle}. In +contrast, \Macro{thispagestyle} changes only the page style of the current page. The\textnote{Attention!} letter class itself uses \Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty} within -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} for the first page of the letter. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} for the first page of the +letter. +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% For changing the font style of headers or footers you should use the user interface described in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}. For header and footer the same element is used, which you can name either @@ -2759,36 +2572,26 @@ footer the same element is used, which you can name either additional element \FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}} for the page foot. This will be used after \FontElement{pageheadfoot} at page foots, that has been defined either with variable -\Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} or Package +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} or Package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} (see \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). The element for the +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). The element for the page number within the header or footer is named \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. Default settings are listed in \autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}. Please have also a look at the example in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{example:maincls.pagestyle}. +\PageRefxmpl{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}. % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{font>style}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark}\\ + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{left mark}\Parameter{right mark}% \Macro{markright}\Parameter{right mark} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% The possibilities that are offered with variables and options in \Class{scrlttr2} should be good enough in most cases to create letterheads and footers for the consecutive pages that follow the first letter page. Even more @@ -2796,30 +2599,28 @@ so since you can additionally change with \Macro{markboth} and \Macro{markright} the sender's statements that \Class{scrlttr2} uses to create the letterhead. The commands \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} can in particular be used together with -pagestyle \PValue{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}% -\important{\Pagestyle{myheadings}}. If the package +pagestyle \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}% +\important{\PageStyle{myheadings}}. If the package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} is used then this, of course, is valid also for pagestyle \PValue{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}. There the command -\Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} is furthermore available. +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} is furthermore +available. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nexthead}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nextfoot}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{nexthead}% + \Variable{nextfoot}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% At times one wants to have more freedom with creating the letterhead or footer of subsequent pages. Then one has to give up the previously described possibilities of predefined letterheads or footers that could have been chosen -via the option \Option{pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber}. Instead one is +via the option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber}. Instead one is free to create the letterhead and footer of consecutive pages just the way one wants to have them set with page style -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}\important{\Pagestyle{headings}, - \Pagestyle{myheadings}} or -\Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}. For that, one creates the +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}, + \PageStyle{myheadings}} or +\PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}. For that, one creates the desired letterhead or footer construction using the \PName{content} of variable\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \Variable{nexthead} or \Variable{nextfoot}, respectively. Within the \PName{content} of @@ -2828,33 +2629,32 @@ boxes side by side or one beneath the other by use of the \Macro{parbox} command (see \cite{latex:usrguide}). A more advanced user should have no problems creating letterheads of footers of his own. Within \PName{content} you can and should of course also make use of other variables by using -\Macro{usekomavar}. \KOMAScript{} does not use the \PName{description} of both -variables. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}. \KOMAScript{} does not use the +\PName{description} of both variables. -Only\textnote{Attention!} for compatibility reason the deprecated commands \Macro{nexthead}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nexthead} and +Only\textnote{Attention!} for compatibility reason the deprecated commands +\Macro{nexthead}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nexthead} and \Macro{nextfoot}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nextfoot} of former \Class{scrlttr2} releases before 3.08 are also implemented. Nevertheless, you should not use those.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{page>foot}% -\EndIndex{}{page>head}% -\EndIndex{}{page>style}% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{8} % \section{Interleaf Pages} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Interleaf Pages} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{9} % \section{Footnotes} +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Footnotes} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{12}% \section{Lists} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Lists} \section{Math} \seclabel{math}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{equations}% \BeginIndex{}{formulas}% \BeginIndex{}{mathematics}% @@ -2864,9 +2664,10 @@ classes. Instead of this, the math features of the \LaTeX{} kernel have been supported. Furthermore\textnote{Attention!} regular math with numbered equations or formulas is very unusual at letters. Because of this \Class{scrlttr2} does not actively support numbered equations. Therefore -options \Option{leqno} and \Option{fleqn}, that has been described for -\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and \Class{scrartcl} at -\autoref{sec:maincls.math} are not available from \Class{scrlttr2}. +options \DescRef{maincls.option.leqno} and \DescRef{maincls.option.fleqn}, +that has been described for \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, and +\Class{scrartcl} at \autoref{sec:maincls.math} are not available from +\Class{scrlttr2}. You will not find a description of the math environments of the \LaTeX{} kernel here. If you want to use \Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath}, @@ -2876,9 +2677,8 @@ into \LaTeX{} like \cite{lshort}. But\textnote{Hint!} if you want more than very simple mathematics, usage of package \Package{amsmath} would be recommended (see \cite{package:amsmath}).% % -\EndIndex{}{mathematics} -\EndIndex{}{formulas} -\EndIndex{}{equations} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Floating Environments of Tables and Figures} \seclabel{floats} @@ -2893,39 +2693,39 @@ without floating environment may still be done with the letter class \Class{scrlttr2}. -\LoadCommon[scrlttr2]{13} % \section{Margin Notes} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar} % \section{Margin Notes} \section{Closing} \seclabel{closing} +\BeginIndexGroup% \BeginIndex{}{closing}% \BeginIndex{}{letter>closing}% \BeginIndex{}{signature}% \BeginIndex{}{letter>signature}% -That the letter closing will be set by \Macro{closing}\IndexCmd{closing} has -been explained already in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing}. A kind of annotation to the signature -is often placed below the signature of the letter. The signing or hand-written -inscription itself is placed between this signature annotation and the closing -phrase. +That the letter closing will be set by +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing} has been explained already +in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}. A kind +of annotation to the signature is often placed below the signature of the +letter. The signing or hand-written inscription itself is placed between this +signature annotation and the closing phrase. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{signature}}% - \OParameter{description}\Parameter{content} + \Variable{signature}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{signature}% The variable \Variable{signature} holds an explanation or annotation for the inscription, the signing of the letter. The \PName{content} is predefined as -\Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{fromname}. The annotation may consist -of multiple lines. The lines should then be separated by a double +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{fromname}. The annotation may +consist of multiple lines. The lines should then be separated by a double backslash. Paragraph\textnote{Attention!} breaks in the annotation are however not permitted.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{raggedsignature} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedsignature}% Closing phrase and signature will be typeset in a box. The width of the box is determined by the length of the longest line of the closing phrase or signature's \PName{content}. @@ -2934,23 +2734,23 @@ Where to place this box is determined by the pseudo-lengths \PLength{sigindent}\IndexPLength{sigindent} and \PLength{sigbeforevskip}\IndexPLength{sigbeforevskip} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent}). The command +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent}). The command \Macro{raggedsignature} defines the alignment inside the box. In the predefined \File{lco} files the command is either defined as \Macro{centering} (all besides \Option{KOMAold}) or \Macro{raggedright} (\Option{KOMAold}). In order to obtain flush-right or flush-left alignment inside the box, the -command can be redefined in the same way as \Macro{raggedsection} (see -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection}). +command can be redefined in the same way as +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection} (see \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}). \begin{Example} Now, Mr Public really wants to aggrandize himself. Therefor he uses the signature to show again, that he himself was formerly chairman. Because of this he changes \PName{contents} of variable - \Variable{signature}. Additionally he wants the signature be flush-left - aligned and so he also redefines \Macro{raggedsignature}:% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. Additionally he wants the signature + be flush-left aligned and so he also redefines \Macro{raggedsignature}:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-22}% - See \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-22} for the result. + See \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-22} for the result. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Example: letter with extended sender, logo, @@ -2963,22 +2763,18 @@ command can be redefined in the same way as \Macro{raggedsection} (see and puncher hole mark}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-22}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-22} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-22} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedsignature}% -% -\EndIndex{Variable}{signature}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{letter>signature}% -\EndIndex{}{signature}% -\EndIndex{}{letter>closing}% -\EndIndex{}{closing}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Letter Class Option Files} \seclabel{lcoFile}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}% \BeginIndex{}{letter class option}% \BeginIndex{}{letter>class option}% @@ -2994,9 +2790,10 @@ offers the \File{lco}-files. The \File{lco} suffix is an abbreviation for In an \File{lco} file you can use all commands available to the document at the time the \File{lco} file is loaded. Additionally, it can contain internal commands available to package writers. For \Class{scrlttr2}, these are in -particular the commands \Macro{@newplength}\IndexCmd{@newplength}, -\Macro{@setplength}\IndexCmd{@setplength}, and -\Macro{@addtoplength}\IndexCmd{@addtoplength} (see +particular the commands +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength}\IndexCmd{@newplength}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}\IndexCmd{@setplength}, and +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}\IndexCmd{@addtoplength} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}). There are already some \File{lco} files included in the {\KOMAScript} @@ -3022,11 +2819,9 @@ particular complex examples of \File{lco}-files are shown at \cite{homepage} or in \cite{DANTE:TK0203:MJK}. Both locations are mainly in German. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{name}\\ + \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{name}% \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{list of names} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% With \Class{scrlttr2} \File{lco}-files can be loaded by the \Macro{documentclass} command. You enter the name of the \File{lco}-file without suffix as an option\Index{option}. In this case, the \File{lco}-file @@ -3060,10 +2855,10 @@ the order given by the list. \opening{Hello,} \end{lstcode} Since construction of the page does not start before the - \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} command, it is sufficient to load the - \File{lco}-file before this. In particular, the loading need not be done - before \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}. Therefore the changes made by - loading the \File{lco}-file are local to the corresponding letter. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} command, it is sufficient + to load the \File{lco}-file before this. In particular, the loading need not + be done before \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter}. Therefore the changes made + by loading the \File{lco}-file are local to the corresponding letter. \end{Example} If\ChangedAt{v2.97}{\Class{scrlttr2}} an \File{lco}-file is loaded via @@ -3076,7 +2871,7 @@ If\ChangedAt{v2.97}{\Class{scrlttr2}} an \File{lco}-file is loaded via \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{ich.lco}% With this the size of the previous letter decreases to: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-23.tex}% - Nevertheless, as shown in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-23}, the result + Nevertheless, as shown in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23}, the result does not change. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% @@ -3090,7 +2885,7 @@ If\ChangedAt{v2.97}{\Class{scrlttr2}} an \File{lco}-file is loaded via and puncher hole mark using a \File{lco}-file}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-23}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-23} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23} \end{figure} \end{Example} @@ -3107,13 +2902,13 @@ problems with the \Option{SN}\IndexOption{SN} option. Since the Swiss standard SN~101\,130 defines the address field to be placed 8\Unit{mm} from the right paper edge, the headline and the sender attributes too will be set with the same small distance from the paper edge. This also applies to the reference -line when using the \Option{refline}\PValue{=wide} option (see -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}). If\textnote{Hint!} you have this +line when using the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}\PValue{=wide} option +(see \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}). If\textnote{Hint!} you have this kind of problem, create your own \File{lco} file that loads \Option{SN} first and then changes \PLength{toaddrhpos}\IndexPLength{toaddrhpos} (see \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos}) to a smaller +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos}) to a smaller value. Additionally, also reduce \PLength{toaddrwidth} accordingly.% By\textnote{Hint!} the way, the \File{DIN} \File{lco}-file will always be @@ -3220,16 +3015,14 @@ and \Package{keyval} packages.% size warning}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{lco-file=\File{lco}-file}% -\EndIndex{}{letter class option}% -\EndIndex{}{letter>class option}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Address Files and Circular Letters} \seclabel{addressFile}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{address>file}% \BeginIndex{}{circular letters}% \index{serial letters|see circular letters}% @@ -3249,7 +3042,6 @@ of many different addresses. The class \Class{scrlttr2}% \Parameter{address}\Parameter{phone}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% \Parameter{comment}\Parameter{key} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{adrentry}% The class \Class{scrlttr2} supports the use of address files which contain address entries, very useful for circular letters. The file extension of the address file has to be \File{.adr}. Each entry is an @@ -3291,22 +3083,21 @@ letters in order to not interfere with existing {\TeX} or {\LaTeX} commands. file in a special directory. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{adrentry} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{last-name}\Parameter{first-name}% \Parameter{address}\Parameter{phone}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% \Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4}\Parameter{key} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addrentry}% -Over the years people have objected that the \Macro{adrentry} has only two +Over the years people have objected that the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} has only two free parameters. To cater to this demand, there now exists a new command called \Macro{addrentry}\,---\,note the additional ``d''\,---\,which supports four freely-definable parameters. Since {\TeX} supports maximally nine parameters per command, the comment parameter has fallen away. Other than this -difference, the use is the same as that of \Macro{adrentry}. +difference, the use is the same as that of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}. -Both \Macro{adrentry} and \Macro{addrentry} commands can be freely mixed in +Both \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} and \Macro{addrentry} commands can be freely mixed in the \File{adr} files. However, it should be noted that there are some packages which are not suited to the use of \Macro{addrentry}. For example, the \Package{adrconv} by Axel Kielhorn can be used to create address lists from @@ -3314,7 +3105,7 @@ which are not suited to the use of \Macro{addrentry}. For example, the \Macro{addrentry}. In this case, the only choice is to extend the package yourself.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addrentry} +\EndIndexGroup Besides the simple access to addresses, the address files can be easily used in order to write circular letters. Thus, there is no @@ -3336,8 +3127,8 @@ requirement to access a complicated database system via {\TeX}. \input{members.adr} \end{document} \end{lstcode} - If the address file contains \Macro{addrentry} commands too, than an - additional definition for \Macro{addrentry} is required before loading + If the address file contains \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} commands too, than an + additional definition for \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} is required before loading the address file: \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\addrentry}[9]{% @@ -3345,16 +3136,16 @@ requirement to access a complicated database system via {\TeX}. } \end{lstcode} In this simple example the extra freely-definable parameter is not - used, and therefore \Macro{addrentry} is defined with the help of - \Macro{adrentry}. + used, and therefore \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} is defined with the help of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}. \end{Example} With some additional programming one can let the content of the letters depend on the address data. For this the free parameters of -the \Macro{adrentry} and and \Macro{addrentry} commands can be used. +the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} and and \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} commands can be used. \begin{Example} - Suppose the 5\textsuperscript{th} parameter of the \Macro{adrentry} + Suppose the 5\textsuperscript{th} parameter of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} command contains the gender of a member (\PValue{m/f}), and the 6\textsuperscript{th} parameter contains what amount of subscription has not yet been paid by the member. If you would like to write a @@ -3382,16 +3173,14 @@ the \Macro{adrentry} and and \Macro{addrentry} commands can be used. \end{Example} As you can see, the letter text can be made more personal by depending on attributes of the letter's addressee. The number of attributes is only -restricted by number of two free parameters of the \Macro{adrentry} command, -or four free parameters of the \Macro{addrentry} command. +restricted by number of two free parameters of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} command, +or four free parameters of the \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} command. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{initial letter}\\ + \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{initial letter}% \Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{initial letter} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{adrchar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addrchar}% \Index[indexmain]{address>list}\Index[indexmain]{telephone list}% As already mentioned above, it is possible to create address and telephone lists using \File{adr} files. For that, the additional package @@ -3453,18 +3242,16 @@ ignored if the address files are utilized in \Class{scrlettr2}. \end{Example} More about the \Package{adrconv} package can be found in its documentation. There you should also find information about whether the -current version of \Package{adrconv} supports the \Macro{addrentry} and -\Macro{addrchar} commands. Former versions only know the commands -\Macro{adrentry} and \Macro{adrchar}.% +current version of \Package{adrconv} supports the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} and \Macro{addrchar} commands. Former +versions only know the commands \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} and +\Macro{adrchar}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{adrchar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addrchar}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{circular letters}% -\EndIndex{}{address>file}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}% -\EndIndex{}{letters}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: @@ -3476,4 +3263,4 @@ current version of \Package{adrconv} supports the \Macro{addrentry} and %%% End: % LocalWords: scrlttr simpleSwitchValues afteropening beforeopening Combinable -% LocalWords: locfield Hennig Kohm +% LocalWords: locfield Hennig Kohm Foldmarks diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrwfile.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrwfile.tex index 00171d66ce0..56b8569d7bf 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrwfile.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/scrwfile.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrwfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrwfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2010-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrwfile.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrwfile)] -% Date of translated German file: 2015-03-31 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \translator{Markus Kohm\and Jana Schubert} @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ {Economise and Replace Files Using \Package{scrwfile}% } \labelbase{scrwfile} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrwfile} \TeX{} supports 18 write handles only. Handle 0 is used by \TeX{} itself (log @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ incompatibilities. If you find such a problem, please contact the \seclabel{singlefilefeature} At the point the package is loaded using, e.\,g., -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \usepackage{scrwfile} \end{lstcode} \Package{scrwfile} will redefine \Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc} to not @@ -158,7 +158,6 @@ another file, too. We call this cloning. \Macro{TOCclone}% \OParameter{heading}\Parameter{source}\Parameter{destination} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCclone}% activates the clone feature for files with extensions \PName{source} and \PName{destination}. All entries to the file \Macro{jobname}\File{.}\PName{source} will be added to @@ -218,21 +217,21 @@ cannot use because the \Macro{addcontentsline} command would be copied to \File{stoc} too. So we cannot add the command to the \File{toc}-file. Package \Package{tocbasic}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} may be used to solve this: -\csname phantomsection\endcsname\label{example:scrwfile.AfterStartingTOC} +\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} \begin{lstcode} - \AfterStartingTOC[toc]{% + \BeforeStartingTOC[toc]{% \addcontentslinedefault{stoc}{chapter} {\protect\contentsname}% } \end{lstcode} -However, this needs, that the file with extension \File{toc} is under control of -package \Package{tocbasic}, which is indeed the case within all \KOMAScript{} -classes. -See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} on -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} for more information about -\Macro{AfterStartingTOC}.% +However, this needs, that the file with extension \File{toc} is under control +of package \Package{tocbasic}, which is indeed the case within all +\KOMAScript{} classes. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} on +\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} for more information about +\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC}.% \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCclone} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Note on State of Development} \seclabel{draft} @@ -261,7 +260,7 @@ use both, \Package{scrwfile} and \Package{titletoc}, there is no warranty for the correct behaviour of neither of them. This is neither an error of \Package{titletoc} nor of \Package{scrwfile}. -\EndIndex{Package}{scrwfile} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/tocbasic.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/tocbasic.tex index eb017eee545..224ca052f65 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/tocbasic.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/tocbasic.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % tocbasic.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % tocbasic.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,10 +46,10 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{tocbasic.tex} - [$Date: 2016-06-14 09:11:22 +0200 (Tue, 14 Jun 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (package tocbasic)] -% Date of translated German file: 2016/06/13 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \translator{Markus Kohm\and Arndt Schubert} @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ \Package{tocbasic}\protect\footnote{Translation of this chapter has been made by the package author and needs editing!}} \labelbase{tocbasic} - +\BeginIndexGroup% \BeginIndex{Package}{tocbasic}% \BeginIndex{}{table of contents}% \BeginIndex{}{list>of contents}% @@ -108,7 +108,6 @@ contents. \Macro{ifattoclist}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{true part}\Parameter{false part} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifattoclist}% This command may be used to ask, whether or not a file name \PName{extension} is already a known extension. If the \PName{extension} is already known the \PName{true instructions} will be used, otherwise the \PName{false @@ -132,12 +131,12 @@ is already a known extension. If the \PName{extension} is already known the } \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifattoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addtotoclist}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{extension} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtotoclist}% This command adds the \PName{extension} to the list of known extensions. But if the \PName{extension} is a known one already, then an error will be reported to avoid double usage of the same \PName{extension}. @@ -206,19 +205,19 @@ registers file name extension ``\PValue{lof}'' for the list of figures and file name extension ``\PValue{lot}'' for the list of tables with owner ``\PValue{float}'' and sets options for this owner. Package \Package{scrhack} redefines some of package \Package{float}'s commands to do this.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtotoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AtAddToTocList}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtAddToTocList}% This command adds the \PName{instructions} to an internal list of instructions that will be processed whenever a file name extension with the given \PName{owner} will be added to the list of known extensions using -\Macro{addtotoclist}. The optional argument is handled in the same way as -with the command \Macro{addtotoclist}. With an empty \PName{owner} you may +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist}. The optional argument is handled in the same way as +with the command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist}. With an empty \PName{owner} you may add \Parameter{instructions}, that will be processed at every successful -\Macro{addtotoclist}, after processing the instructions for the individual +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist}, after processing the instructions for the individual owner. While processing the \PValue{instructions}, \Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} will be set to the extension of the currently added extension. @@ -235,27 +234,27 @@ the extension of the currently added extension. \end{Example} The two \Macro{expandafter} commands are needed, because the argument of -\Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel} has to be expanded! See the description of -\Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel} at \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}% -, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} for more information.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtAddToTocList}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} has to be expanded! See the description of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} at \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}% +, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} for more information.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{removefromtoclist}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{extension} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{removefromtoclist}% This command removes the \PName{extension} from the list of known extensions. If the optional argument, \OParameter{owner}, was given, the \PName{extension} will only be removed if it was added by this \PName{owner}. See description of -\Macro{addtotoclist} for information of omitting optional argument. Note that +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} for information of omitting optional argument. Note that an empty \PName{owner} is not the same like omitting the optional argument, but removes the \PName{extension} without any owner test.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{removefromtoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{doforeachtocfile}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{doforeachtocfile}% Until now you've learned to know commands that result in more safety in handling file name extensions, but also needs some additional effort. With \Macro{doforeachtocfile} you will win for this. The command provides to @@ -275,18 +274,18 @@ only file name extensions with an empty owner will be processed. \doforeachtocfile[foo]{\typeout{\@currext}} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{doforeachtocfile}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasicautomode} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasicautomode}% This command redefines \LaTeX{} kernel macro \Macro{@starttoc} to add all not yet added extensions to the list of known extensions and use -\Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} instead of \Macro{@starttoc}. See +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} instead of \Macro{@starttoc}. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} for more information about -\Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} and \Macro{@starttoc}. +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} for more information about +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} and \Macro{@starttoc}. This means that after using \Macro{tocbasicautomode} every table of contents or list of something, that will be generated using \Macro{@starttoc} will be @@ -297,7 +296,8 @@ it would be better if the author of the corresponding class or package will use \Package{tocbasic} explicitly. In that case additional advantages of \Package{tocbasic} may be used that will be described at the following sections.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasicautomode}% +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Creating a Table or List of Contents} \label{sec:tocbasic.toc} @@ -312,7 +312,6 @@ known extensions. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addtoeachtocfile}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{content} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtoeachtocfile}% This command writes \PName{content} to the TOC-files\Index{TOC} of every known file name extension of \PName{owner} using \LaTeX{} kernel command \Macro{addtocontents}. If you omit the optional argument, \PName{content} is @@ -339,14 +338,14 @@ extension of the currently handled file. Commands, that shouldn't be expanded while writing, should be prefixed by \Macro{protect} in the same way like they should be in the argument of \Macro{addtocontents}. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtoeachtocfile}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addxcontentsline}% \Parameter{extension}\Parameter{level}\OParameter{number}% \Parameter{text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentsline}% The command \Macro{addxcontentsline} adds an entry of given \PName{level} to TOC-file with file name \PName{extension}. If the \Parameter{number} is empty or omitted the entry will not have number for the entry with the given @@ -373,29 +372,28 @@ numbered entries of the same \PName{level}, depending on the Note that \Macro{addxcontentsline} uses \Macro{add\PName{level}\PName{extension}entry} if such a macro exists and -\Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} otherwise. Therefore you cannot define +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} otherwise. Therefore you cannot define a macro \Macro{add\PName{level}\PName{extension}entry} using -\Macro{addxcontentsline} but \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}. +\Macro{addxcontentsline} but \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline}. It is recommended to use \Macro{addxcontentsline} instead of \Macro{addcontentsline} whenever possible.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentsline} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}\OParameter{owner}\Parameter{level}% - \Parameter{contentsline}\\ + \Parameter{contentsline}% \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}\OParameter{owner}% \Parameter{level}\OParameter{number}\Parameter{text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% The first command is something like \Macro{addcontentsline} from \LaTeX{} kernel. In difference to that it writes the \PName{contentsline} not only into one file, but into all files of all known file name extensions or of all known file name extensions of a given owner. The command \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} is similar but uses -\Macro{addxcontentsline} instead of \Macro{addcontentsline} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} instead of \Macro{addcontentsline} and therefore supports \Package{tocbasic} feature \PValue{numberline}. \begin{Example} You are a class author and want to write the chapter entry not only to the @@ -414,19 +412,15 @@ written. It is recommended to use \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} instead of \Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile} whenever possible. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{listoftoc}\OParameter{list of title}\Parameter{extension}\\ - \Macro{listoftoc*}\Parameter{extension}\\ - \Macro{listofeachtoc}\OParameter{owner}\\ + \Macro{listoftoc}\OParameter{list of title}\Parameter{extension}% + \Macro{listoftoc*}\Parameter{extension}% + \Macro{listofeachtoc}\OParameter{owner}% \Macro{listof\PName{extension}name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listofeachtoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listof\PName{extension}name}% These commands may be used to print the TOC corresponding to file name \PName{extension}. The\important{\Macro{listoftoc*}} star version \Macro{listoftoc*} needs only one argument, the \PName{extension} of the @@ -467,11 +461,11 @@ the user itself may use \Macro{listofeachtoc}. \end{lstcode} Note that in this case no entry at the table of contents will be created, even if you'd used the setup command above. - See command \Macro{setuptoc} - at \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} + See command \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} + at \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} for more information about the attribute of generating entries into the table of contents using - \Macro{setuptoc}. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}. If you've defined \begin{lstcode} @@ -503,55 +497,49 @@ if there are no more write handles left. Loading package \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile} (see \autoref{cha:scrwfile}) may solve this problem. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listof\PName{extension}name}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listofeachtoc}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterStartingTOC}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeStartingTOC}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterStartingTOC}% Sometimes it's useful, to process \PName{instructions} immediately before reading the auxiliary file of a TOC. These commands may be used to process \PName{instructions} before or after loading the file with given -\PName{extension} using \Macro{listoftoc*}, \Macro{listoftoc}, or -\Macro{listofeachtoc}. If you omit the optional argument (or set an empty +\PName{extension} using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}, or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}. If you omit the optional argument (or set an empty one) the general hooks will be set. The general before hook will be called before the individuel one and the general after hook will be called after the individuel one. While calling the hooks \Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} is the extension of the TOC-file and should not be changed. -An example\textnote{Example} for usage of \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} may be +An example\textnote{Example} for usage of \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} may be found in \autoref{sec:scrwfile.clonefilefeature} at -\autopageref{example:scrwfile.AfterStartingTOC}. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterStartingTOC}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeStartingTOC}% +\PageRefxmpl{scrwfile.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC}. +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeTOCHead}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{BeforeTOCHead}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterTOCHead}\OParameter{extension}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeTOCHead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterTOCHead}% This commands may be used to process \PName{instructions} before or after setting the title of a TOC corresponding to given file name \PName{extension} -using \Macro{listoftoc*} or \Macro{listoftoc}. If you omit the optional -argument (or set an empty one) the general hooks will be set. The general -before hook will be called before the individuel one and the general after -hook will be called after the individuel one. While calling the hooks +using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}. If you omit the optional argument (or set +an empty one) the general hooks will be set. The general before hook will be +called before the individuel one and the general after hook will be called +after the individuel one. While calling the hooks \Macro{@currext}IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} is the extension of the corresponding file and should not be changed. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterTOCHead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeTOCHead}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% Whenever \Package{tocbasic} sets a mark for a running head, The text of the mark will be an argument of \Macro{MakeMarkcase}. This command may be used, to change the case of the letters at the running head if wanted. The default is, @@ -588,41 +576,41 @@ cannot recognize and take into account the glyphs of the letters. Because of this\textnote{Attention!} typesetting whole words and phrases is expert work and almost ever must be hand made. So average users are recommended to not do that or to use it only spare and not at exposed places like running heads.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{deftocheading}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{definition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftocheading}% The package \Package{tocbasic} contains a standard definition for typesetting headings of TOCs. This standard definition is configurable by several -features, described at \Macro{setuptoc} next. But if all those features are +features, described at \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} next. But if all those features are not enough, an alternative heading command may be defined using \Macro{deftocheading}. Thereby \PName{extension} is the file name extension of the corresponding TOC-file. The \PName{definition} of the heading command may use one single parameter \PValue{\#1}. While calling the newly defined command -inside of \Macro{listoftoc} or \Macro{listofeachtoc} that \PValue{\#1} will be +inside of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} that \PValue{\#1} will be replaced by the corresponding heading term.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftocheading}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setuptoc}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{feature list}\\ + \Macro{setuptoc}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{feature list}% \Macro{unsettoc}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{feature list} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setuptoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{unsettoc}% This commands set up and unset features bound to a file name \PName{extension}. The \PName{feature list} is a comma separated list of single features. \Package{tocbasic} does know following features: \begin{description} \item[\texttt{leveldown}] uses not the top level heading below - \Macro{part}\,---\,\Macro{chapter} if available, \Macro{section} - otherwise\,---\,but the first sub level. This feature will be evaluated by - the internal heading command. On the other hand, if an user defined heading - command has been made with \Macro{deftocheading}, that user is responsible - for the evaluation of the feature. The \KOMAScript{} classes set this - feature using option - \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}important{\OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}}% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\,---\,\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} if available, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} otherwise\,---\,but the first sub level. This + feature will be evaluated by the internal heading command. On the other + hand, if an user defined heading command has been made with + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}, that user is responsible for the evaluation of the + feature. The \KOMAScript{} classes set this feature using option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}% + important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{leveldown}} for all file name extensions of the owner \PValue{float}. \item[\texttt{nobabel}] prevents usage of the language switch of @@ -653,18 +641,18 @@ single features. \Package{tocbasic} does know following features: \item[\texttt{numbered}] uses a numbered heading for the TOC and because of this also generates an entry to the table of contents. This feature will be evaluated by the internal heading command. On the other hand, if an user - defined heading command has been made with \Macro{deftocheading}, that user + defined heading command has been made with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}, that user is responsible for the evaluation of the feature. The \KOMAScript{} classes - set this feature using option - \OptionValue{listof}{numbered}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{numbered}}% + set this feature using option \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{numbered}} for all file name extensions of the owner \PValue{float}. \item[\texttt{numberline}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}% - redefines \Macro{nonumberline} to use \Macro{numberline}. With this the not + redefines \Macro{nonumberline} to use \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}. With this the not numbered entries generated by \KOMAScript{} or using \Macro{nonumberline} at the very beginning of the last argument of \Macro{addcontentline} will also be indented like numbered entries of the same - type. Using\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} \Macro{numberline} for + type. Using\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} for entries without number\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} can have additional side effects if you use entry style \PValue{tocline}. See style attribute \Option{breakafternumber} and \Option{entrynumberformat} in @@ -672,17 +660,18 @@ single features. \Package{tocbasic} does know following features: \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} downwards. \KOMAScript{} classes set this feature for the file name extensions of the - owner \PValue{float} if you use option \OptionValue{listof}{numberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{listof}{numberline}}% + owner \PValue{float} if you use option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{numberline}} and for file name extension - \PValue{toc} if you use option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\important{\OptionValue{toc}{numberline}}% + \PValue{toc} if you use option \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}}% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}}. Analogous they reset this feature if - you use \OptionValue{listof}{nonumberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{listof}{nonumberline}}% + you use \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{nonumberline}} or - \OptionValue{toc}{nonumberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{toc}{nonumberline}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}}% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nonumberline}}. \item[\texttt{onecolumn}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Package{tocbasic}}% typesets the corresponding TOC with internal one column mode of @@ -690,19 +679,20 @@ single features. \Package{tocbasic} does know following features: done only, if the corresponding table of contents or list of something does not use feature \PValue{leveldown}\important{\PValue{leveldown}}. The \KOMAScript{} classes \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} activate this - feature with \Macro{AtAddToTocList} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) for all TOCs with owner - \PValue{float} or with themselves as owner. With this, e.\,g., the table of - contents, the list of figures and the list of tables of both classes will be - single columned automatically. The multiple-column-mode of package - \Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol} will not be recognised or changed - by this option. + feature with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList} (see + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) + for all TOCs with owner \PValue{float} or with themselves as owner. With + this, e.\,g., the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of + tables of both classes will be single columned automatically. The + multiple-column-mode of package \Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol} + will not be recognised or changed by this option. \item[\texttt{totoc}] writes the title of the corresponding TOC to the table of contents. This feature will be evaluated by the internal heading command. On the other hand, if an user defined heading command has been made - with \Macro{deftocheading}, that user is responsible for the evaluation of + with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}, that user is responsible for the evaluation of the feature. The \KOMAScript{} classes set this feature using option - \OptionValue{listof}{totoc}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{totoc}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{totoc}} for all file name extensions of the owner \PValue{float}. \end{description} @@ -711,10 +701,10 @@ know following additional features: \begin{description} \item[\texttt{chapteratlist}] activates special code to be put into the TOC at start of a new chapter. This code may either be vertical space or the - heading of the chapter. See - \Option{listof}\IndexOption{listof}\important{\Option{listof}} in - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof} for - more information about such features. + heading of the chapter. See \DescRef{maincls.option.listof}% + \IndexOption{listof}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}} in + \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.listof} for more + information about such features. \end{description} \begin{Example} Because \KOMAScript{} classes use \Package{tocbasic} for the list of figures @@ -731,16 +721,16 @@ know following additional features: \begin{lstcode} \setuptoc{loa}{chapteratlist} \end{lstcode} - And if classes with \Macro{chapter} should also force single column mode for - the list of algorithms you may use + And if classes with \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} should also force single + column mode for the list of algorithms you may use \begin{lstcode} \ifundefinedorrelax{chapter}{}{% \setuptoc{loa}{onecolumn}% } \end{lstcode} - Usage of \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} presumes package \Package{scrbase} (see - \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). + Usage of \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} presumes package + \Package{scrbase} (see \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). It\textnote{Hint!} doesn't matter if you're package would be used with another class. You should never the less set this feature. And if the other @@ -751,27 +741,29 @@ As you may see, packages that use \Package{tocbasic}, already provide several interesting features, without the need of a lot of implementation effort. Such an effort would be needed only without \Package{tocbasic} and because of this, most packages currently lack of such features.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{unsettoc}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setuptoc}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{iftocfeature}\Parameter{extension}\Parameter{feature}% \Parameter{true-instructions}\Parameter{false-instructions} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{iftocfeature}% This command may be used, to test, if a \PName{feature} was set for file name \PName{extension}. If so the \PName{true-instructions} will be processed, otherwise the \PName{false-instruction} will be. This may be useful, e.\,g., -if you define your own heading command using \Macro{deftocheading} but want to -support the features \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{numbered} or \PValue{leveldown}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{iftocfeature}% +if you define your own heading command using +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} but want to support the features +\PValue{totoc}, \PValue{numbered} or \PValue{leveldown}.% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Configuration of Entries to a Table or List of Contents} \seclabel{tocstyle}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{table of contents>entry}% \Index{list of contents|\see{table of contents}} + Since\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} version~3.20 package \Package{tocbasic} can not only configure the tables or lists of contents and their auxiliary files but also influence their entries. To do so, you can @@ -781,12 +773,35 @@ package \Package{tocstyle} that never became an official part of the \KOMAScript{} bundle. The \KOMAScript{} classes intensively use the TOC-entry styles of \Package{tocbasic} since version~3.20. + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{numberline}\Parameter{entry number}\\ + \Counter{tocdepth} +\end{Declaration} +Entries to tables or lists of contents are in hierarchical order. Therefore +each entry level has a numerical value. Higher values correspond with deeper +levels. Within the standard classes, e.\,g., parts have the numerical entry +level -1 in the table of contents and chapter entries have value 0. Counter +\Counter{tocdepth} defines the deepest level that should be shown in the +tables and lists of any contents. + +Class \Class{book} sets \Counter{tocdepth} to 2, so entries of the levels +\PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, and \PValue{subsection} are +printed. Deeper levels like \PValue{subsubsection}, which has the numerical +value 3, are not printed. Nevertheless the entries are part of the auxiliary +file for the table of contents. + +Most entry styles of \Package{tocbasic} also cares about +\Counter{tocdepth}. Only style \PValue{gobble} (see +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\iffree{}{, later in this + section}) ignores \Counter{tocdepth}. +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{numberline}\Parameter{entry number}% \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline}\OParameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{numberline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usetocbasicnumberline}% Though\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the \LaTeX{} kernel already defines command \Macro{numberline}, the kernel definition is not sufficient for \Package{tocbasic}. Therefore \Package{tocbasic} has its own @@ -807,24 +822,22 @@ you just do not want such a message, use an empty optional argument. Please note\textnote{Attention!}, as a side effect \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} can globally change the internal switch \Macro{@tempswa}!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usetocbasicnumberline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{numberline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\OParameter{option list}\Parameter{style}% \Parameter{entry level} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% This\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} command is used to define or configure the TOC-entries of a given \PName{entry level}. Argument \PName{entry level} is a symbolic name, e.\,g., \PValue{section} for the entry to the table of contents of the section level with the same name or -\PValue{figure} for an entry of a figure to the list of figures. A \PName{style} -is assigned to each \PName{entry level}. The \PName{style} has to be defined -before using it as an argument of \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}. The -\PName{option list} is used to configure several \PName{style}-dependent -attributes of the \PName{entry level}. +\PValue{figure} for an entry of a figure to the list of figures. A +\PName{style} is assigned to each \PName{entry level}. The \PName{style} has +to be defined before using it as an argument of +\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}. The \PName{option list} is used to configure +several \PName{style}-dependent attributes of the \PName{entry level}. Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles: \begin{description} @@ -894,35 +907,35 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles: \label{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} \end{figure} \item[\PValue{gobble}] is the most ordinary style. Independently from the - setting of - \Counter{tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}}, + setting of \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}% + \IndexCounter{tocdepth}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}}, entries with this style will never be printed. The style simply gobbles the entries. Nevertheless, it supports the standard attribute \PValue{level} but does ignore it. -\item[\PValue{largetocline}] is similar to the style used by the - standard classes for the level \PValue{part}. It supports attributes - \PValue{level} and \PValue{indent} only. The last one is already a variation - of the standard classes that do not support an indent of the \PValue{part} - entries. +\item[\PValue{largetocline}] is similar to the style used by the standard + classes for the level \PValue{part}. It supports attributes \PValue{level} + and \PValue{indent} only. The last one is already a variation of the + standard classes that do not support an indent of the \PValue{part} entries. Before an entry a page break will be made easier. The entries will be indented by the value of \PValue{indent} from the left. They are printed - using \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries}. If \Macro{numberline} is used, the - number width is 3\Unit{em}. \Macro{numberline} is not redefined. The - standard classes do not use \Macro{numberline} for \PName{part} entries. The - value of \PName{indent} even does not influence the indent from the second - line of an entry. + using \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries}. If \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} + is used, the number width is 3\Unit{em}. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} + is not redefined. The standard classes do not use + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} for \PName{part} entries. The value of + \PName{indent} even does not influence the indent from the second line of an + entry. \hyperref[fig:tocbasic.largetocline]% - {Figure~\ref*{fig:tocbasic.largetocline}} illustrates the attributes of - this style. There you can also see that the style copies inconsistencies of - the standard classes, e.\,g. the missing indent of the second and following + {Figure~\ref*{fig:tocbasic.largetocline}} illustrates the attributes of this + style. There you can also see that the style copies inconsistencies of the + standard classes, e.\,g. the missing indent of the second and following lines of an entry or the different values of \Macro{@pnumwidth} that results from the font size dependency. This can even result in a to small distance between the entry text and the page number. Please note, the entry number - width shown in the figure is only valid if \Macro{numberline} has been - used. In contrast, the standard classes use a distance of 1\Unit{em} after - the number. + width shown in the figure is only valid if + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} has been used. In contrast, the standard + classes use a distance of 1\Unit{em} after the number. \begin{figure} \centering \resizebox{.8\linewidth}{!}{% @@ -976,7 +989,7 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles: on the name of the \PName{entry level}. They correspond to the results of the standard classes. So after loading \Package{tocbasic}, you can change the style of the standard classes entries to the table of contents into - \PValue{tocline} using \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle} without obvious visual + \PValue{tocline} using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle} without obvious visual changes unless you change exactly these attributes that should induce such changes. Same is valid for list of figures or list of tables of the standard classes. @@ -1145,10 +1158,11 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles: Before an entry, a page break will be made easier. The entries will be indented by the value of \PValue{indent} from the left. They are printed - using \Macro{bfseries}. \Macro{numberline} is used unchanged. The width of - the entry number is given by the value of \PValue{numwidth}. For multiline - entries the indent will be increased by the value of \PValue{numwidth} for - the second and following lines. \hyperref[fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline]% + using \Macro{bfseries}. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} is used + unchanged. The width of the entry number is given by the value of + \PValue{numwidth}. For multiline entries the indent will be increased by the + value of \PValue{numwidth} for the second and following + lines. \hyperref[fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline]% {Figure~\ref*{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline}} illustrates the attributes of this style. \begin{figure} @@ -1194,13 +1208,13 @@ Currently, \Package{tocbasic} defines the following entry styles: {Table~\ref*{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}} describes all attributes of all styles defined by \Package{tocbasic}. If\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} you want -to use these attributes as options to \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (see -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) you have to prefix the names of -the attribute by \PValue{tocentry}, e\,g., attribute \PValue{level} becomes +to use these attributes as options to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC} +(see \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) you have to prefix the names +of the attribute by \PValue{tocentry}, e\,g., attribute \PValue{level} becomes option \Option{tocentrylevel}. -If\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} you want to use -these attributes as options to \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} (see -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) and similar +If\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} you want to use these +attributes as options to \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} +(see \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) and similar commands you have to prefix the names of the attributes by \PValue{toc}, e\,g., attribute \PValue{level} becomes option \Option{toclevel}. @@ -1214,7 +1228,7 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. }{% Attributes of the TOC-entry styles (\emph{continuation})% }% - \entry{\KOption{beforeskip}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{beforeskip}{length}}{% vertical distance, inserted before an entry of this level using style \PValue{tocline} (see \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). The distance is made using either \Macro{vskip} or \Macro{addvspace} depending on the @@ -1227,31 +1241,33 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. \PValue{section} is initialised with \texttt{1em plus 1pt}. The initial value for all other levels is \texttt{0pt plus .2pt}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{breakafternumber}\PName{switch}}{% - \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from + \entry{\OptionVName{breakafternumber}{switch}}{% + \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the switch is active with style \PValue{tocline}, there will be a line break - after the entry number of \Macro{numberline}\IndexCmd{numberline}. The - line after the entry number again starts left aligned with the number. + after the entry number of + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}\IndexCmd{numberline}. The line after + the entry number again starts left aligned with the number. This switch is not active by default at style \PValue{tocline}. If\textnote{Attention!} the feature \Option{numberline} of a list of - something has been activated (see \Macro{setuptoc}, - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}), - i.\,e., if a \KOMAScript{} class with option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} is - used, then the not numbered entries will nevertheless have a (by default - empty) number line using the format code of \Option{entrynumberformat}.% + something has been activated (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), i.\,e., + if a \KOMAScript{} class with option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} is used, then the not numbered + entries will nevertheless have a (by default empty) number line using the + format code of \Option{entrynumberformat}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{dynnumwidth}\PName{switch}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{dynnumwidth}{switch}}{% \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the switch is active with style \PValue{tocline}, attribute \PValue{numwidth} is ignored. Instead of that the maximum number width detected at the previous \LaTeX{} run increased by the value of \PValue{numsep} is used.% }% - \entry{\KOption{entryformat}\PName{command}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{entryformat}{command}}{% This attributes makes the format of the entry. The value should be a \PName{command} with exactly one argument. The \PName{command} should not expect the argument to be fully expandable. Commands like @@ -1267,24 +1283,25 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. no level \PValue{chapter} exists, \PValue{section} used \Macro{bfseries}. All other levels print the argument unchanged.% }% - \entry{\KOption{entrynumberformat}\PName{command}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{entrynumberformat}{command}}{% This attribute makes the format of the entry number within - \Macro{numberline}. The value should be a \PName{command} with exactly one - argument. Font changes are relative to the one of attribute - \Option{entryformat}. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}. The value should be a \PName{command} + with exactly one argument. Font changes are relative to the one of + attribute \Option{entryformat}. The initial \PName{command} prints the argument unchanged. This means the entry number will be printed as it is. If\textnote{Attention!} the feature \Option{numberline} of a list of - something has been activated (see \Macro{setuptoc}, - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}), - i.\,e., if a \KOMAScript{} class with option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} is - used, then the not numbered entries will nevertheless execute the + something has been activated (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), i.\,e., + if a \KOMAScript{} class with option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} + is used, then the not numbered entries will nevertheless execute the \PName{command}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{indent}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{length}}{% Horizontal distance of the entry relative to the left margin (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} and \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). @@ -1295,41 +1312,43 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. \PValue{tocline} the initial values of levels \PValue{part} down to \PValue{subparagraph} and the levels \PValue{figure} and \PValue{table} are compatible with the standard classes. All other levels do not have an - initial value. Therefore you have to set an explicit value for such - levels when they are defined first time.% + initial value. Therefore you have to set an explicit value for such levels + when they are defined first time.% }% - \entry{\KOption{level}\PName{integer}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{level}{integer}}{% The numerical value of the \PName{entry level}. Only those entries are - printed that have a numerical value less or equal to counter - \Counter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}. + printed that have a numerical value less or equal to counter + \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}% + \important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}. This attribute is mandatory for all styles and will be defined automatically at the declaration of the style. At style \PValue{tocline} all entry levels with a name starting with ``\texttt{sub}'', the initial value is the level value of the entry level - without this prefix increased by one. At the styles \PValue{dottedtocline}, - \PValue{largetocline}, \PValue{tocline}, and \PValue{undottedtocline} - entry levels \PValue{part} down to \PValue{subparagraph}, \PValue{figure}, - and \PValue{table} are initialised compatible with the standard - classes. For all other levels the initialisation is done with the value of - \Macro{\PName{entry level}numdepth} if this is defined.% + without this prefix increased by one. At the styles + \PValue{dottedtocline}, \PValue{largetocline}, \PValue{tocline}, and + \PValue{undottedtocline} entry levels \PValue{part} down to + \PValue{subparagraph}, \PValue{figure}, and \PValue{table} are initialised + compatible with the standard classes. For all other levels the + initialisation is done with the value of \Macro{\PName{entry + level}numdepth} if this is defined.% }% - \entry{\KOption{linefill}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{linefill}{code}}{% At style \PValue{tocline} there can be a filler between the end of the entry text and the page number. The value of attribute \PName{linefill} is a \PName{code} that prints this filler. For \PName{entry level} \PValue{part} and \PValue{chapter} the attribute is initialised with \Macro{hfill}. If currently no \PName{entry level} \PValue{chapter} has been defined, \PValue{section} also uses \Macro{hfill}. All other entry - levels are initialised with \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill} (see - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}). + levels are initialised with \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} (see + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}). If \PName{code} does not result in filling the distance, you should also activate attribute \PValue{raggedpagenumber}, to avoid ``\texttt{underfull \Macro{hbox}}'' messages.% }% - \entry{\KOption{numsep}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{numsep}{length}}{% Style \PValue{tocline} tries to ensure a minimum distance of \PName{length} between the entry number and the entry text. If \PValue{dynnumwidth} is active, it will correct the number width to achieve @@ -1337,7 +1356,7 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. The initial \PName{length} is 0.4\Unit{em}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{numwidth}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{numwidth}{length}}{% The reserved width for the entry number (see \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} until \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline}). At the styles @@ -1355,7 +1374,7 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. have to explicitly set \PValue{numwidth} at the first definition of the entry.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstarthigherlevel}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstarthigherlevel}{code}}{% Style \PValue{tocline} can execute \PName{code} at the start of an entry, if the numerical level is greater than the numerical level of the previous entry. Remember: The numerical level of, e.\,g., \PValue{section} is @@ -1365,10 +1384,10 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. Please note that the detection of the level of the previous entry depends on a valid unchanged value of \Macro{lastpenalty}. - The initial \PName{code} is \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower} (see - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower}).% + The initial \PName{code} is \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower} (see + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower}).% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstartlowerlevel}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstartlowerlevel}{code}}{% Style \PValue{tocline} can execute \PName{code} at the start of an entry, if the numerical level is lower than the numerical level of the previous entry. Remember: The numerical level of, e.\,g., \PValue{part} is @@ -1378,26 +1397,26 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. Please note that the detection of the level of the previous entry depends on a valid unchanged value of \Macro{lastpenalty}. - The initial \PName{code} is \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} (see - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher}).% + The initial \PName{code} is \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher} (see + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher}).% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstartsamelevel}\PName{code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstartsamelevel}{code}}{% Style \PValue{tocline} can execute \PName{code} at the start of an entry, if the level is same like the level of the previous entry. Please note that the detection of the level of the previous entry depends on a valid unchanged value of \Macro{lastpenalty}. - The initial \PName{code} is \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame} (see - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame}).% + The initial \PName{code} is \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame} (see + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame}).% }% - \entry{\KOption{pagenumberbox}\PName{command}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberbox}{command}}{% By default the page number of an entry is printed right aligned in a box of width \Macro{@pnumwidth}. At style \PValue{tocline} the \PName{command} to print the number can be changed using this attribute. The \PName{command} should have exactly one argument, the page number.% }% - \entry{\KOption{pagenumberformat}\PName{command}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberformat}{command}}{% This attribute is the format of the page number of an entry. The \PName{command} should have exactly one argument, the page number. Font changes are relative to the font of \Option{entryformat} followed by @@ -1408,7 +1427,7 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. all other levels prints the argument in \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{raggedentrytext}\PName{switch}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{raggedentrytext}{switch}}{% \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the @@ -1418,7 +1437,7 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. This switch is not active by default.% }% - \entry{\KOption{raggedpagenumber}\PName{switch}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{raggedpagenumber}{switch}}{% \PName{switch} is one of the values for simple switches from \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. If the switch is active, style \PValue{tocline} does not force the page number to @@ -1429,43 +1448,44 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. unwanted warning messages. So both attributes should correspond. By default the switch is not activated and therefore corresponds with an - initial value \Macro{hfill} or \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill} of attribute + initial value \Macro{hfill} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} of attribute \PValue{linefill}.% }% \end{desclist}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{style}% \OParameter{initial code}% - \Parameter{command code}\\ + \Parameter{command code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption}\Parameter{option}\OParameter{default value}% - \Parameter{code}\\ + \Parameter{code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}\Parameter{option}% \OParameter{default value}% \Parameter{prefix}% \Parameter{postfix}% - \Parameter{description}\\% - %\OParameter{initial code}\\ + \Parameter{description}%% + %\OParameter{initial code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}\Parameter{option}% \OParameter{default value}% \Parameter{prefix}% \Parameter{postfix}% - \Parameter{description}\\% - %\OParameter{initial code}\\ + \Parameter{description}%% + %\OParameter{initial code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}\Parameter{option}% \OParameter{default value}% \Parameter{prefix}% \Parameter{postfix}% - \Parameter{description}\\% - %\OParameter{initial code}\\ + \Parameter{description}%% + %\OParameter{initial code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}\Parameter{option}% \OParameter{default value}% \Parameter{prefix}% \Parameter{postfix}% - \Parameter{description}\\% - %\OParameter{initial code}\\ + \Parameter{description}%% + %\OParameter{initial code}% \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}\Parameter{option}% \OParameter{default value}% \Parameter{prefix}% @@ -1473,34 +1493,26 @@ command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. \Parameter{description}% %\OParameter{initial code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}% \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} is one of the most complex commands in \KOMAScript. It is addressed to \LaTeX{} developers not the \LaTeX{} users. It provides the definition of a new TOC-entry \PName{style}. Usually TOC-entries are made using \Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline}, or, if you use \Package{tocbasic}, with recommended -\Macro{addxcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addxcontentsline} (see +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addxcontentsline} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}). In both cases \LaTeX{} +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}). In both cases \LaTeX{} writes a corresponding \Macro{contentsline}\IndexCmd{contentsline} into the given auxiliary file. Reading this auxiliary file each \Macro{contentsline} results in execution of a command \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. Whenever you assign a \PName{style} to a TOC-entry level using -\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}, first of all the \PName{initial code} is -executed and then \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}} is defined to be +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}, first of all the \PName{initial + code} is executed and then \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}} is defined to be \PName{command code}. So \PName{command code} is the code that will be -expanded and executed by \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. Inside -\PName{command code} \texttt{\#1} is the name of the TOC-entry level and -\texttt{\#\#1} and \texttt{\#\#2} are the arguments of -\Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. +expanded and executed by \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. Inside \PName{command + code} \texttt{\#1} is the name of the TOC-entry level and \texttt{\#\#1} and +\texttt{\#\#2} are the arguments of \Macro{l@\PName{entry level}}. The \PName{initial code} should initialise all attributes of the \PName{style}. Developers are recommended to use \PName{initial code} to @@ -1511,7 +1523,7 @@ the definition of options to setup the attributes of the \PName{style}. Option can be got in \PName{command code} using \Macro{@nameuse}\PParameter{\#1tocdepth}% \important{\Macro{\PName{entry level}tocdepth}}, e.\,g., to compare it with -the counter \Counter{tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}. +the counter \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}. Commands \Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}, \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}, @@ -1535,31 +1547,31 @@ in error messages, warnings or information output on the terminal and into the The most simple style of \Package{tocbasic}, \PValue{gobble}, is defined using: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareTOCEntryStyle{gobble}{}% \end{lstcode} If you would define a entry level \PValue{dummy} using: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1]{gobble}{dummy} \end{lstcode} among others this would do something like: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \def\dummytocdepth{1} \def\l@dummy#1#2{} \end{lstcode} Inside style \PValue{tocline} for example -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{linefill}[\TOCLineLeaderFill]% {scr@tso@}{@linefill}{filling between text and page number}% \end{lstcode} is used to define option \Option{linefill} with \PName{default value} -\Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}. A call like: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}. A call like: +\begin{lstcode} \RedeclareTOCStyleEntry[linefill]{tocline}{part} \end{lstcode} would therefore result in a definition like: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \def\scr@tso@part@linefill{\TOCLineLeaderFill} \end{lstcode} @@ -1569,25 +1581,20 @@ the much more complex definition of style \PValue{tocline} gives a lot of hints of the correct usage of the described commands. In many cases it will be enough to clone an existing style using -\Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle} and to change the initial code of the new style -using \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} or \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle} and to change the initial code of +the new style using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}. \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption} is merely used to define the other commands. It is not recommended to define options directly using \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption}. Normally this is even not needed. It is alluded only for completeness.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{style}\Parameter{new style}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{CloneTOCEntryStyle}% With\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} this command you can clone an existing \PName{style}. This defines a \PName{new style} with the same attributes and settings like the existing \PName{style}. The package itself @@ -1596,23 +1603,23 @@ of \PValue{dottedtocline}. The \KOMAScript{} classes use the command to declare the styles \PValue{part}, \PValue{section}, and \PValue{chapter} or \PValue{subsection} as a clone of \PValue{tocline} and the style \PValue{default} new as a clone of \PValue{section} or \PValue{subsection}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{CloneTOCEntryStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}\Parameter{style}% - \Parameter{initial code}\\ + \Parameter{initial code}% \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}\Parameter{style}% \Parameter{initial code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}% Every\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} TOC-entry style has an initialisation code. This is used whenever a \PName{style} is assigned to an -TOC-entry using \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}. This \PName{initial code} should -never do anything global, because it is also used for local initialisation -inside other commands like \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC}. The -\PName{initial code} not only defines all attributes of a \PName{style}. It -also should set the defaults for those attributes. +TOC-entry using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle}. This +\PName{initial code} should never do anything global, because it is also used +for local initialisation inside other commands like +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC}. The \PName{initial code} not +only defines all attributes of a \PName{style}. It also should set the +defaults for those attributes. You can use \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} and \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} to extend the already existing initialisation @@ -1623,7 +1630,7 @@ of the existing initialisation code. The \KOMAScript{} classes, e.\,g., are using \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} to change the filling, font and vertical distances of style \PValue{part} that is a clone of \PValue{tocline}. Class \Class{scrbook} and \Class{scrreprt} use -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \CloneTOCEntryStyle{tocline}{section} \TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode{section}{% \expandafter\providecommand% @@ -1632,17 +1639,14 @@ vertical distances of style \PValue{part} that is a clone of } \end{lstcode} to declare \PValue{section} as a modified clone of \PValue{tocline}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}\\ - \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame}\\ + \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}% + \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame}% \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasSame}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasLower}% At\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the very beginning entries with style \PValue{tocline} \Package{tocbasic} executes one of these three commands depending on \Macro{lastpenalty}. \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} and @@ -1656,14 +1660,12 @@ Users should not redefine these commands. Instead of a redefinition you should change the behaviour of single entry levels using attributes \PValue{onstartlowerlevel}, \PValue{onstartsamelevel}, and \PValue{onstarthigherlevel}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasLower}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasSame}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}\OParameter{filling code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCLineLeaderFill}% Command\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} has been made to be used as value of option \Option{linefill} of assigning style \PName{tocline} to a TOC-entry. It is a line filler between the end of the entry text and the entry @@ -1674,9 +1676,8 @@ As implied by the name of the command it uses \Macro{leaders} to put the \PName{filling code}. The distance is defined analogous to the \LaTeX{} kernel command \Macro{@dottedtocline} by \Macro{mkern}\Macro{@dotsep}\Unit{\texttt{mu}}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCLineLeaderFill}% -% -\EndIndex{}{table of contents>entry} +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \section{Internal Commands for Class and Package Authors} @@ -1689,7 +1690,6 @@ should not change them! \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel}\Parameter{extension} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@extend@babel}% The Package \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} (see \cite{package:babel}), or more specifically a \LaTeX{} kernel that has been extended by the language management of \Package{babel} writes instructions to change the language @@ -1702,10 +1702,10 @@ Otherwise the meaning of the argument may change until it will be used really. Normally this command will be used by default for every file name \PName{extension} that will be added to the list of known extensions using -\Macro{addtotoclist}. This may be suppressed using feature -\PValue{nobabel}\important{\PValue{nobabel}} (see \Macro{setuptoc}, -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}). For the -file name extensions \File{toc}, \File{lof}, and \File{lot} this will be done +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist}. This may be suppressed using feature +\PValue{nobabel}\important{\PValue{nobabel}} (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, +\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}). For the file +name extensions \File{toc}, \File{lof}, and \File{lot} this will be done automatically by \Package{tocbasic} to avoid double language switching in the corresponding files. @@ -1715,19 +1715,19 @@ and so are not in \Package{tocbasic}'s list of known file name extensions, but nevertheless should be handled by the language change mechanism of \Package{babel}. The command may be used explicitly for those files. But please note that this should be done only once per file name extension!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@extend@babel}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@starttoc}\Parameter{extension} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@starttoc} This command is something like the \LaTeX{} kernel macro \Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}\important{\Macro{@starttoc}}. It is the -command behind \Macro{listoftoc*} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*}). Authors of classes or packages +command behind \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*}). Authors of classes or packages who want to participate from the advantages of \Package{tocbasic} should at least use this command. Nevertheless it is recommended to use -\Macro{listoftoc}. Command \Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} internally uses +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}. Command \Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} internally uses \Macro{\@starttoc}, but sets \Length{parskip}\IndexLength{parskip}\important{\Length{parskip}\\ \Length{parindent}\\ @@ -1750,108 +1750,103 @@ if there are no more unused write handles. This may be solved, e.\,g., using package \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile}. See \autoref{cha:scrwfile} for more information about that package.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@starttoc} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook}% \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@before@hook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@after@hook}% The hook \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook} will be executed immediately before reading a auxiliary file for a TOC even before execution of the instructions -of a \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} command. It is permitted to extend this hook -using \Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro}. +of a \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} command. It is permitted to +extend this hook using \Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro}. Similarly \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} will be executed immediately after reading such an auxiliary file and before execution of instructions of -\Macro{AfterStartingTOC}. It is permitted to extend this hook using -\Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC}. It is permitted to extend this hook +using \Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro}. \KOMAScript{} uses these hooks, to provide the automatic width calculation of the place needed by heading numbers. Only classes and packages should use these hooks. Users\textnote{Attention!} should really use -\Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} and \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} instead. Authors of -packages should also favour those commands! These hooks should not be used to -generate any output! +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} instead. Authors of packages should +also favour those commands! These hooks should not be used to generate any +output! + +If neither\textnote{Attention!} \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} nor +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} nor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} are +used for the output of a TOC, the hooks should be executed explicitly.% +\EndIndexGroup -If neither\textnote{Attention!} \Macro{listofeachtoc} nor \Macro{listoftoc} -nor \Macro{listoftoc*} are used for the output of a TOC, the hooks should be -executed explicitly.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@before@hook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@after@hook}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@before@hook}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@before@hook}% \Macro{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@after@hook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@before@hook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@after@hook}% -These hooks are processed after \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook}, respectively -before \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} before and after loading the TOC-file with +These hooks are processed after \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook}, respectively +before \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook} before and after loading the TOC-file with the corresponding file \PName{extension}. Authors\textnote{Attention!} of classes and packages should never manipulate them! But if -neither\textnote{Attention!} \Macro{listofeachtoc} nor \Macro{listoftoc} nor -\Macro{listoftoc*} are used for the output of a TOC, the hooks should be -executed explicitly, if they are defined. Please note that they even can be -undefined.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@after@hook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@\PName{extension}@before@hook}% +neither\textnote{Attention!} \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} nor +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} nor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} are +used for the output of a TOC, the hooks should be executed explicitly, if they +are defined. Please note that they even can be undefined.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@listhead}\Parameter{title} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead}% -This command is used by \Macro{listoftoc} to set the heading of the TOC, +This command is used by \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} to set the heading of the TOC, either the default heading or the individually defined heading. If you define -your own TOC-command not using \Macro{listoftoc} you may use +your own TOC-command not using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} you may use \Macro{tocbasic@listhead}. In this case you should define \Macro{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}}\IndexCmd{@currext} to be the file extension of the corresponding TOC-file before using \Macro{tocbasic@listhead}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{extension}}\Parameter{title} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{extension}}% -This command is used in \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} to set the individual +This command is used in \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead} to set the individual headings, optional table of contents entry, and running head, if it was defined. If it was not defined it will be defined and used in -\Macro{tocbasic@listhead} automatically. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{extension}}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead} automatically. +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% - \Parameter{extension}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}\\ + \Parameter{extension}\Parameter{level}\Parameter{number}\Parameter{text}% \Macro{nonumberline} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{nonumberline}% Command\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} uses \Macro{addcontentsline} to either create a numbered or not numbered text entry to the TOC-file with the given \PName{extension}. Note, all parameters of \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} are mandatory. But you may use an empty \PName{number} argument, if you do not want a number. In this case the \PName{text} will be prefixed by \Macro{nonumberline} without any argument. In -the other case, if \PName{number} is not empty, \Macro{numberline} with -argument \PName{number} will used as usual. - -Command \Macro{nonumberline} is redefined inside \Macro{listoftoc} (see -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc}) -depending on feature \PValue{numberline} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}). This guarantees that changes of the -feature results in changes of the corresponding TOC immediately at the next -\LaTeX{} run.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{nonumberline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% +the other case, if \PName{number} is not empty, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} with argument \PName{number} will used as +usual. + +Command \Macro{nonumberline} is redefined inside +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}) depending on feature \PValue{numberline} +(see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}). This +guarantees that changes of the feature results in changes of the corresponding +TOC immediately at the next \LaTeX{} run.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{entry level}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{entry level}% \Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}\Parameter{entry level} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}% At\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} the end of TOC-entry style \PValue{tocline} (see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) \Macro{penalty} is set to prohibit page breaks. The used penalty value depends on the \PName{entry @@ -1871,8 +1866,7 @@ macros \Macro{scr@tso@\PName{entry level}@LastTOCLevelWasHigher}, \Macro{scr@tso@\PName{entry level}@LastTOCLevelWasSame} and \Macro{scr@tso@\PName{entry level}@LastTOCLevelWasLower} to store the current values of the options.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{A Complete Example} @@ -1888,7 +1882,7 @@ has to be put into a package or class, or has to be placed between First\textnote{environment} of all, a new floating environment will be needed. This could simply be done using: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newenvironment{remarkbox}{% \@float{remarkbox}% }{% @@ -1899,7 +1893,7 @@ To the new environment is named \Environment{remarkbox}. Each\textnote{placement} floating environment has a default placement. This is build by some of the well known placement options: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\fps@remarkbox}{tbp} \end{lstcode} So, the new floating environment should be placed by default only either at @@ -1910,14 +1904,14 @@ type. Environments with the same active bit at the floating type cannot change their order. Figures and table normally use type~1 and 2. So a figure that comes later at the source code than a table, may be output earlier than the table and vica versa. -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\ftype@remarkbox}{4} \end{lstcode} The new environment has floating type~4, so it may pass figures and floats and may be passed by those. The\textnote{number} captions of floating environment also have numbers. -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcounter{remarkbox} \newcommand*{\remarkboxformat}{% Remark~\theremarkbox\csname autodot\endcsname} @@ -1928,12 +1922,12 @@ or the counters of other structural levels. \LaTeX{} itself also defines \Macro{theremarkbox} with the default Arabic representation of the counter's value. Afterwards this has been used defining the formatted output of the counter. Last this formatted output has been used for the output of the -environment number of the \Macro{caption} command. +environment number of the \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} command. Floating\textnote{file name extension} environments have lists of themselves and those need a auxiliary file with name \Macro{jobname} and a file name extension, the TOC-file\Index{TOC-file}: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\ext@remarkbox}{lor} \end{lstcode} The file name extension of the TOC-file for the list of @@ -1942,18 +1936,18 @@ The file name extension of the TOC-file for the list of This was the definition of the floating environment. But the list of this new environment's captions is still missing. To reduce the implementation effort package \Package{tocbasic} will be used for this. This will be loaded using -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \usepackage{tocbasic} \end{lstcode} inside of document preambles. Authors of classes or packages would use -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \RequirePackage{tocbasic} \end{lstcode} instead. Now\textnote{extension} we register the file name extension for package \Package{tocbasic}: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \addtotoclist[float]{lor} \end{lstcode} Thereby the owner \PValue{float} has been used, to allude all further @@ -1962,7 +1956,7 @@ one. Next\textnote{title} we define a title or heading for the list of \Environment{remarkbox}es: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\listoflorname}{List of Remarks} \end{lstcode} You may use package \Package{scrbase} to additionally support titles in other @@ -1970,20 +1964,20 @@ languages than English. Also\textnote{entry} a command is needed to define the layout of the entries to the list of remarks: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\l@remarkbox}{\l@figure} \end{lstcode} Here simply the entries to the list of remarks get the same layout like the entries to the list of figures. This would be the easiest solution. A more explicit would be, e.\,g., -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1,indent=1em,numwidth=1.5em]% {tocline}{remarkbox} \end{lstcode} Additionally\textnote{chapter entry} you may want structure the list of remarks depending on chapters. -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \setuptoc{lor}{chapteratlist} \end{lstcode} The \KOMAScript{} classes provide that feature and maybe other classes do so @@ -1991,9 +1985,10 @@ too. Unfortunately the standard classes do not. This\textnote{list of remarks} would already be enough. Now, users may already select different kinds of headings either using the corresponding options of -the \KOMAScript{} classes, or \Macro{setuptoc}, e.\,g., with or without entry -in the table of contents, with or without number. But a simple -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +the \KOMAScript{} classes, or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, e.\,g., with +or without entry in the table of contents, with or without number. But a +simple +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\listofremarkboxes}{\listoftoc{lor}} \end{lstcode} may make the usage a little bit easier again. @@ -2005,18 +2000,19 @@ table of contents. Optional even a lower document structure level may be used for the heading. Running headers are provides with the \KOMAScript{} classes, the standard classes, and all classes that explicitly support \Package{tocbasic}. Supporting classes even pay attention to this new list of -remarks at every new \Macro{chapter}. Even changes of the current language are -handled inside the list of remarks like they will inside the list of figures -or inside the list of tables. +remarks at every new \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}. Even changes of the +current language are handled inside the list of remarks like they will inside +the list of figures or inside the list of tables. Moreover,\textnote{additional features} an author of a package may add more -features. For example, options to hide \Macro{setuptoc} from the users may be -added. On the other hand, the \Package{tocbasic} manual may be referenced to -describe the corresponding features. The advantage of this would be that user -would get information about new features provides by \Package{tocbasic}. But -if the user should be able to set the features of the remarks even without -knowledge about the file name extension \File{lor} a simple -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +features. For example, options to hide \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} from +the users may be added. On the other hand, the \Package{tocbasic} manual may +be referenced to describe the corresponding features. The advantage of this +would be that user would get information about new features provides by +\Package{tocbasic}. But if the user should be able to set the features of the +remarks even without knowledge about the file name extension \File{lor} a +simple +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\setupremarkboxes}{\setuptoc{lor}} \end{lstcode} would be enough to use a list of features argument to @@ -2033,27 +2029,28 @@ easier. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\OParameter{options}\Parameter{extension} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewTOC}% This command declares\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{tocbasic}} in one step only a new TOC, the heading of that TOC, the term used for the TOC-entries, and to manage the file name \PName{extension}. Additionally optional floating and non-floating environments may be defined, and inside of both such environments -\Macro{caption}\important{\Macro{caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} may be used. The -additional features \Macro{captionabove}\important[i]{% - \Macro{captionabove}\\ - \Macro{captionbelow}}, \Macro{captionbelow}, and \Environment{captionbeside} -of the \KOMAScript{} classes (see \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}) may also be -used inside of those environments. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} may be used. The +additional features \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\important[i]{% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow}}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow}, and +\DescRef{maincls.env.captionbeside} of the \KOMAScript{} classes (see +\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}) may also be used inside of those environments. Argument \PName{extension} is the file name extension of the TOC-file, that represents the list of something. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics} for more information about this. This argument is mandatory and must not be empty! Argument \PName{options} is a comma separated list, like you know it from, -e.\,g., \Macro{KOMAoptions} (see +e.\,g., \DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions} (see \autoref{sec:typearea.options}). Nevertheless\textnote{Attention!}, those -options cannot be set using \Macro{KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions}! An -overview of all available options may be found in +options cannot be set using +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions}! An overview of all +available options may be found in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}. If\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} option \Option{tocentrystyle} @@ -2065,17 +2062,18 @@ i.\,e., \OptionValue{tocentrystyle}{} or the risk to get a lot of errors while printing that list. Depending\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% -\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} on the style of the -entries to the list of something, you can setup all valid attributes of the -selected style as part of the \PName{options}. To do so you have to prefix the -names of the attributes given in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} -from \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} by prefix +\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} on the style of the entries to +the list of something, you can setup all valid attributes of the selected +style as part of the \PName{options}. To do so you have to prefix the names of +the attributes given in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} from +\autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} by prefix \PValue{tocentry}. Later changes of the style of the entries can be made using -\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% -\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\important{\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}. See +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}}. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} for more information -about the styles.% +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} for more information about +the styles.% % \begin{desclist} \renewcommand*{\abovecaptionskipcorrection}{-\normalbaselineskip}% @@ -2086,17 +2084,17 @@ about the styles.% }{% Options for command \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (\emph{continuation})% }% - \entry{\KOption{atbegin}\PName{instructions}% + \entry{\OptionVName{atbegin}{instructions}% \ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% The \PName{instructions} will be executed at the begin of the floating or non-floating environment.% }% - \entry{\KOption{atend}\PName{instructions}% + \entry{\OptionVName{atend}{instructions}% \ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% The \PName{instructions} will be executed at the end of the floating or non-floating environment.% }% - \entry{\KOption{counterwithin}\PName{\LaTeX{} counter}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{counterwithin}{\LaTeX{} counter}}{% If you define a float or non-float, the captions will be numbered and a counter \PName{type} (see option \Option{type}) will be defined. You may declare another counter to be the parent \LaTeX{} counter. In this case, @@ -2109,12 +2107,12 @@ about the styles.% environments are the value of \PName{type} and for double column floats the value of \PName{type} with addendum ``\PValue{*}''.% }% - \entry{\KOption{floatpos}\PName{float positions}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{floatpos}{float positions}}{% The default floating position of the float. If no float position was given, ``tbp'' will be used like the standard classes do for figures and tables.% }% - \entry{\KOption{floattype}\PName{number}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{floattype}{number}}{% The numerical float type of the defined floats. Float types with common bits cannot be reordered. At the standard classes figures has float type 1 and tables has float type 2. If no float type was given, 16 will be used.% @@ -2123,7 +2121,7 @@ about the styles.% If set, the names will be even defined, if they where already defined before.% }% - \entry{\KOption{hang}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{hang}{length}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% This option is deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Now, the amount of the @@ -2132,11 +2130,11 @@ about the styles.% \Option{tocentrystyle}. The styles of \KOMAScript{} provide an attribute \PValue{numwidth}. If the used style has such an attribute, \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} will initialise it with 1.5\Unit{em}. You can change - the real \PName{value} using \KOption{tocentrynumwidth}\PName{value}. The + the real \PName{value} using \OptionVName{tocentrynumwidth}{value}. The \KOMAScript{} classed for example use \OptionValue{tocentrynumwidth}{2.3em}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{indent}\PName{length}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{length}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% This option is deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Now, the amount of @@ -2145,11 +2143,11 @@ about the styles.% \Option{tocentrystyle}. The styles of \KOMAScript{} provide an attribute \PValue{indent}. If the used style has such an attribute, \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} will initialise it with 1\Unit{em}. You can change - the real \PName{value} using \KOption{tocentryindent}\PName{value}. The + the real \PName{value} using \OptionVName{tocentryindent}{value}. The \KOMAScript{} classed for example use \OptionValue{tocentrynumwidth}{1.5em}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{level}\PName{number}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{level}{number}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% This option is deprecated since \KOMAScript~3.20. Now, the level of the @@ -2157,14 +2155,14 @@ about the styles.% of the TOC-entry style given by option \Option{tocentrystyle}. Nevertheless all styles have an attribute \PValue{level} and \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} initialises it with 1. You can - change the real \PName{value} using \KOption{tocentrylevel}\PName{value}.% + change the real \PName{value} using \OptionVName{tocentrylevel}{value}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{listname}\PName{string}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{listname}{string}}{% The name of the TOC. If not given the value of \PValue{types} with upper case first char using \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} prefixed by ``List of '' will be used.% }% - \entry{\KOption{name}\PName{string}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{name}{string}}{% The name of an element. If no name is given, the value of \PValue{type} with upper case first char will be used.% }% @@ -2172,11 +2170,11 @@ about the styles.% If set, a non floating environment will be defined. The name of the environment is the value of \PName{type} with attached ``\PValue{-}''.% }% - \entry{\KOption{owner}\PName{string}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{owner}{string}}{% The owner as described in the sections before. If no owner was given owner \PValue{float} will be used.% }% - \entry{\KOption{tocentrystyle}\PName{TOC-entry style}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentrystyle}{TOC-entry style}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \PName{TOC-entry style} is the style that should be used for all entries into the TOC corresponding to the \PName{extension}. The name of the entry @@ -2188,7 +2186,7 @@ about the styles.% the styles and their attributes see \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} from \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{tocentry\PName{style-option}}\PName{value}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentry\PName{style-option}}{value}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% Additional options depending on the \PName{TOC-entry style} given by \Option{tocentrystyle}. See \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, @@ -2198,12 +2196,12 @@ about the styles.% attributes of the predefined TOC-entry styles of package \Package{tocbasic}, that can be used as \PName{style-option}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{type}\PName{string}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{type}{string}}{% sets the type of the new declared TOC. The type will be used e.\,g. to defined a \Macro{listof}\PName{string}. If no type is set up the extension from the mandatory argument will be used.% }% - \entry{\KOption{types}\PName{string}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{types}{string}}{% the plural of the type. If no plural was given the value of \PValue{type} with attached ``s'' will be used.% }% @@ -2232,7 +2230,7 @@ about the styles.% defined. If the package should use a default for the floating type, option Option{floattype} may be omitted. If option \Option{nonfloat} will be used additionally, then a non-floating environment \Environment{remarkbox-} will - be also defined. You may use \Macro{caption}\IndexCmd{caption} inside of + be also defined. You may use \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} inside of that non-floating environment as usual for floating environments. \hyperref[tab:tocbasic.comparison]{Figure~\ref*{tab:tocbasic.comparison}} shows a comparison of the commands, counters and environments of the @@ -2256,18 +2254,18 @@ about the styles.% & columns spanning floating environments of the respective types\\[1ex] \Counter{remarkbox} & \Counter{figure} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} - & counter used by \Macro{caption}\\[1ex] + & counter used by \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\\[1ex] \Macro{theremarkbox} & \Macro{thefigure} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} & output command to the respective counters\\[1ex] - \Macro{remarkboxformat} & \Macro{figureformat} + \Macro{remarkboxformat} & \DescRef{maincls.cmd.figureformat} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} & formatting command to the respective counters used by - \Macro{caption}\\[1ex] + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\\[1ex] \Macro{remarkboxname} & \Macro{figurename} & \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{name} - & names used in the label of \Macro{caption}\\[1ex] - \Macro{listofremarkboxes} & \Macro{listoffigures} + & names used in the label of \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\\[1ex] + \Macro{listofremarkboxes} & \DescRef{maincls.cmd.listoffigures} & \Option{types}, \Option{float} & command to show the list of the respective environments\\[1ex] \Macro{listremarboxname} & \Macro{listfigurename} @@ -2314,11 +2312,10 @@ Users of \Package{hyperref} should always use option \Package{hyperref} usually has a problem with the \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} command that is used to change the case of the first letter of \Option{types} in the name of the list.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewTOC}% -\EndIndex{Package}{tocbasic}% -\EndIndex{}{table of contents}% -\EndIndex{}{list>of contents}% -\EndIndex{}{file>extension}% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup +% \endinput %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea-experts.tex index d0fb50cf691..834fcd6ace1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % typearea-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % typearea-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,14 +46,17 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{typearea-experts.tex} - [$Date: 2015-05-21 15:48:01 +0200 (Thu, 21 May 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:27:16 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug} -% Date of the translated German file: 2015-05-21 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Additional Information about package \Package{typearea}} \labelbase{typearea-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Package}{typearea} + This chapter gives additional information about package \Package{typearea}. \iffree{Some parts of the chapter are subject to the @@ -68,6 +71,64 @@ because of compatibility to former \KOMAScript{} releases, are printed with a sans serif font. You should not use them any longer. +\section{Experimental Features} +\seclabel{experimental} + +This section describes experimental features. Experimental in this context +means, the function of a feature is not guarantied. There are two reasons for +this. First of all the final function is not yet defined or implementation is +not yet established. Second reason is, that a feature may depend on internal +functions of other packages and therefore the feature can not be guarantied, +if the other package changes. + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{usegeometry}{simple switch} +\end{Declaration} +Usually \Package{typearea} simply ignores whether or not it is used in any +constellation with package \Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry} (see +\cite{package:geometry}). This means, \Package{geometry} does not recognize +any page parameter change done with \Package{typearea}, especially if you +change the page size or page orientation\,---\,a feature not provided by +\Package{geometry} itself. + +Once you set option \Option{usegeometry}, \Package{typearea} tries to +translate all of its options into options of \Package{geometry}. If you use +\Package{typearea} inside the document, it even calls \Macro{newgeometry}. But +since \Package{geometry} does not provide changes of page size or page +orientation with \Macro{newgeometry}, \Package{typearea} uses internal macros +and lengths of \Package{geometry} to, nevertheless, provide such changes. This +has been tested with \Package{geometry}~5.3 up to 5.6. + +Note that using \Package{geometry} and changing page size or orientation with +\Package{typearea} and active \Option{usegeometry} does not mean, that +\Package{geometry} will automatically use the new paper size in an expected +manner. \Package{geometry} has an over estimated amount of options. So you +often need to set up the margins and size of typing area newly using +\Macro{newgeometry}, because otherwise the typing area may be to large or to +small. Nevertheless the combination of \Package{typearea} with option +\Option{usegeometry} and package \Package{geometry} can offer additional +features or at least option \Option{usegeometry} can improve the co-existence +of both packages.% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{areasetadvanced}{simple switch} + \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{width}\Parameter{height} +\end{Declaration} +Usually \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} does not care for options to define +height of page header or page footer or whether or not margin elements should +be part of the typing area same like \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}. With +option \Option{areasetadvance} you can change this at most. Nevertheless, +settings that result in same size of typing area still need not result in same +top margin and bottom margin. This is, because \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea} +only changes the bottom margin to have a integer number of lines in the typing +area and \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} always sets the ratio 1:2 for top +margin to bottom margin. So the identical sizes of typing areas my be shifted +vertically a little bit depending on which command has been used.% +\EndIndexGroup + + \section{Expert Commands} \seclabel{experts} @@ -78,13 +139,12 @@ experts. Because the information is addressed to experts it's condensed. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{activateareas} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{activateareas}% Package \Package{typearea} uses this command to assign settings of typing area and margins to internal \LaTeX{} lengths, whenever the type area is newly calculated inside of the document, i\.e., after -\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. If option \Option{pagesize} has been used, -it will be executed again afterward. With this, e.\,g., the page size may vary -inside of a PDF document. +\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document}. If option +\DescRef{typearea.option.pagesize} has been used, it will be executed again +afterward. With this, e.\,g., the page size may vary inside of a PDF document. Experts may use this command, if they change lengths like \Length{textwidth} or \Length{textheight} inside a document manually for any reason. Nevertheless @@ -92,20 +152,16 @@ the expert himself is responsible for eventually needed page breaks before or after usage of \Macro{activateareas}. Moreover all changes of \Macro{activateareas} are local!% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{activateareas} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{storeareas}\Parameter{\Macro{command}}\\ - \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas}\Parameter{code}\\ - \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}\Parameter{code}\\ - \Macro{AfterRestoreareas}\Parameter{code}\\ + \Macro{storeareas}\Parameter{\textMacro{command}}% + \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas}\Parameter{code}% + \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}\Parameter{code}% + \Macro{AfterRestoreareas}\Parameter{code}% \Macro{AfterRestoreareas*}\Parameter{code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{storeareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas*}% With \Macro{storeareas} a \PName{\Macro{command}} will be defined that may be used to restore all current settings of typing area and margins. This provides to store the current settings, change them, do anything with valid changed @@ -129,7 +185,7 @@ settings and restore the previous settings afterwards. \noindent\rule{\textwidth}{\textheight} \end{document} \end{lstcode} - Command \Macro{clearpage}\textnote{Attention} before calling + Command \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage}\textnote{Attention} before calling \Macro{MySavedValues} is important to restore the saved values at the next page. \end{Example} @@ -145,56 +201,56 @@ used to define the \PName{\Macro{command}}. So re-usage of a corresponding error message. Often\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{typearea}} it is useful to automatically -execute commands like \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} before restoring the settings -of a \Macro{command} generated by \Macro{storeareas}. You can do so using -\Macro{BeforeRestoreareas} or \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}. Analogously you can -use \Macro{AfterRestoreareas} or \Macro{AfterRestoreareas*} to automatically -execute \PName{code} after restoring the settings. The variants with and -without star differs so that the star variant changes only the auto-execution -\PName{code} of future \PName{command}s and the variant without star also -changes the auto-execution \PName{code} of already defined \PName{command}s. +execute commands like \DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} before +restoring the settings of a \Macro{command} generated by +\Macro{storeareas}. You can do so using \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas} or +\Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}. Analogously you can use \Macro{AfterRestoreareas} +or \Macro{AfterRestoreareas*} to automatically execute \PName{code} after +restoring the settings. The variants with and without star differs so that the +star variant changes only the auto-execution \PName{code} of future +\PName{command}s and the variant without star also changes the auto-execution +\PName{code} of already defined \PName{command}s. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{storeareas} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea*}\Parameter{instructions}\\ - \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\Parameter{instructions}\\ + \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea*}\Parameter{instructions}% + \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\Parameter{instructions}% \Macro{AfterSettingArea*}\Parameter{instructions} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterCalculatingTypearea}% These commands manage \emph{hooks}. \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} and it's star version provide experts to execute \PName{instructions} every time \Package{typearea} has recalculated the typing area and margins either -implicitly or because of an explicit usage of \Macro{typearea}. Similar +implicitly or because of an explicit usage of +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}. Similar \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\ChangedAt{v3.11}{\Package{typearea}} and it's star -version provide execution of \PName{instructions} every time \Macro{areaset} -has been used. While normal versions work globally the influence of the star -versions is only local. The \PName{instructions} will be executed instantly -before execution of \Macro{activateareas}.\iffree{}{ In - \autoref{cha:modernletters} \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} will be used in - letter class option \File{asymTypB.lco} to change the division of the - margins.}% +version provide execution of \PName{instructions} every time +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} has been used. While normal versions work +globally the influence of the star versions is only local. The +\PName{instructions} will be executed instantly before execution of +\Macro{activateareas}.\iffree{}{ In \autoref{cha:modernletters} + \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} will be used in letter class option + \File{asymTypB.lco} to change the division of the margins.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterCalculatingTypearea} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Local Settings with File \File{typearea.cfg}} \seclabel{cfg} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{File}{typearea.cfg} \LoadNonFree{typearea-experts}{0} - -\EndIndex{File}{typearea.cfg} +% +\EndIndexGroup \section{More or Less Obsolete Options and Commands} \seclabel{obsolete} - \LoadNonFree{typearea-experts}{1} +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea.tex index 615cb298a4c..d16c6d1a53b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/english/typearea.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % typearea.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % typearea.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,13 +46,15 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{typearea.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-09-04 17:26:05 +0200 (Fri, 04 Sep 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)] \translator{Markus Kohm\and Gernot Hassenpflug\and Krickette Murabayashi} -% Date of translated german file: 2015-09-04 +% Date of the translated German file: 2017-01-02 \chapter{Construction of the Page Layout with \Package{typearea}} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Package}{typearea} \labelbase{typearea} Many {\LaTeX} classes, including the standard classes, present the user @@ -335,12 +337,12 @@ user, but rather at authors of classes and packages. \autopageref{sec:typearea.typearea} onwards). There is also a command to explicitly calculate the type area by providing these values as parameters (also see \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.typearea}). + \DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}). The \Package{typearea} package can automatically determine the optimal value of \Var{DIV} for the font and leading used. Again, see \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}. + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}. \end{Explain} @@ -367,12 +369,12 @@ user, but rather at authors of classes and packages. or a special package option, a \Var{DIV} value is chosen to match the perfect values of the late Middle Age method as closely as possible. See also \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}. + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}. \end{Explain} -\LoadCommon{0} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Early or late Selection of Options} -\LoadCommon{1}% TODO: Translate! +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Compatibility with Earlier Versions of \KOMAScript} \section{Options and Macros to Influence the Page Layout} \seclabel{typearea} @@ -391,12 +393,11 @@ existing {\KOMAScript} class but a hypothetical one. This\iffree{ documentation}{ book} assumes that ideally there exists a class for every specific task. -\BeginIndex{Option}{BCOR~=\PName{value}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{BCOR}\PName{correction} + \OptionVName{BCOR}{correction} \end{Declaration}% With the aid of the option -\KOption{BCOR}\PName{correction}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} +\OptionVName{BCOR}{correction}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} one may specify the absolute value of the binding correction\Index{binding correction}, i.\,e., the width of the area which will be lost from the paper width in the binding process. This @@ -438,39 +439,40 @@ unit understood by \TeX{} is valid. \end{lstcode} Thus, at the loading of the \Class{scrreprt} class standard settings will be used. When changing the setting with the use of the command - \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} a new page layout with new + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} a new page layout with new margins will automatically be calculated. \end{Example} -Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} -classes as in the example above, it must be used either as a class -option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after -loading the class. The \Package{typearea} package should neither be -loaded explicitly with \Macro{usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} -class, nor should the option be given as an optional argument -thereto. If the option is changed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock and -margins are automatically recalculated anew.% +Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes +as in the example above, it must be used either as a class option, or passed +via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. The +\Package{typearea} package should neither be loaded explicitly with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} class, nor +should the option be given as an optional argument thereto. If the option is +changed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock +and margins are automatically recalculated anew.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{BCOR~=\PName{value}} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PName{value}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{DIV}\PName{Factor} + \OptionVName{DIV}{factor} \end{Declaration}% With the aid of the option -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Factor}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} the +\OptionVName{DIV}{factor}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} the number of stripes into which the page is divided horizontally and vertically during the page layout construction is set. The exact construction method is found in \autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction}. Of importance is that the -larger the \PName{Factor}, the larger the text block and the smaller +larger the \PName{factor}, the larger the text block and the smaller the margins. Any integer value greater than 4 is valid for -\PName{Factor}. Please note that large values can lead to +\PName{factor}. Please note that large values can lead to unfulfillment of various minor conditions in the type area, depending on further options chosen. Thus, in an extreme case, the header may fall outside of the page. Users applying the option -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Factor} are themselves responsible for fulfillment +\OptionVName{DIV}{factor} are themselves responsible for fulfillment of the marginal conditions and setting of a typographically aesthetic line length. @@ -550,19 +552,19 @@ the minor conditions dependent on font size are not considered. \end{Example} Please note that when using the \Option{DIV} option with one of the -{\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, it must be used either -as a class option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the class. The \Package{typearea} -package should neither be loaded explicitly with \Macro{usepackage} -when using a {\KOMAScript} class, nor should the option be given as an -optional argument thereto. If the option is changed via -\Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the package, -the textblock and margins are automatically recalculated anew.% - -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=classic}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=calc}% +{\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, it must be used either as a +class option, or passed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. The +\Package{typearea} package should neither be loaded explicitly with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} class, nor +should the option be given as an optional argument thereto. If the option is +changed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock +and margins are automatically recalculated anew.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}\\ + \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}% \OptionValue{DIV}{classic} \end{Declaration}% As\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} already mentioned in @@ -573,7 +575,7 @@ then the \Package{typearea} package independently calculates an appropriate \Var{DIV} value. Of course this same calculation can be applied also to A4. To obtain this result, one simply uses the \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} option in place of the -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Factor} option. This option can just as easily be +\OptionVName{DIV}{factor} option. This option can just as easily be explicity given for other paper formats. If one desires an automatic calculation, this also makes good sense, since the possibility exists to configure different predefined settings in a configuration file @@ -592,19 +594,20 @@ settings. \end{tabular} \end{table} -The classical page layout construction, the Middle Age book design -canon, mentioned in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction}, is -similarly selectable. Instead of the \KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor} or -\OptionValue{DIV}{calc} option, one may use the -\OptionValue{DIV}{classic} option. A \Var{DIV} value closest to the -Middle Age book design canon is then chosen. +The classical page layout construction, the Middle Age book design canon, +mentioned in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction}, is similarly +selectable. Instead of the +\OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{factor} or +\OptionValue{DIV}{calc} option, one may use the \OptionValue{DIV}{classic} +option. A \Var{DIV} value closest to the Middle Age book design canon is then +chosen. \begin{Example} In the example using the Bookman font with the - \KOption{DIV}\PName{Factor} option, exactly that problem of choosing - a more appropriate \Var{DIV} value for the font arose. As a - variation on that example, one could simply leave the choice of such - a value to the \Package{typearea} package: + \OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{factor} option, exactly that + problem of choosing a more appropriate \Var{DIV} value for the font + arose. As a variation on that example, one could simply leave the choice of + such a value to the \Package{typearea} package: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[a4paper,twoside]{protocol} \usepackage{bookman} @@ -612,23 +615,22 @@ Middle Age book design canon is then chosen. \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} -classes as in the example above, it must be used either as a class -option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after -loading the class. The \Package{typearea} package should neither be -loaded explicitly with \Macro{usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} -class, nor should the option be given as an optional argument -thereto. If the option is changed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock and -margins are automatically recalculated anew.% +Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes +as in the example above, it must be used either as a class option, or passed +via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. The +\Package{typearea} package should neither be loaded explicitly with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} class, nor +should the option be given as an optional argument thereto. If the option is +changed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock +and margins are automatically recalculated anew.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=classic}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=calc}% +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=current}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=last}% \begin{Declaration} - \OptionValue{DIV}{current}\\ + \OptionValue{DIV}{current}% \OptionValue{DIV}{last} \end{Declaration}% Readers\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} who have followed the @@ -638,19 +640,20 @@ class is used together with a font package. \begin{Explain} The problem is that the {\KOMAScript} class already loads the - \Package{typearea} package itself. Thus, it is not possible to pass - options as optional arguments to \Macro{usepackage}. It would also - be pointless to pass the \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} option as an - optional argument to \Macro{documentclass}. This option would be - evaluated immediately on loading the \Package{typearea} package and - as a result the text block and margin would be chosen according to - the {\LaTeX} standard font and not for the later loaded - font. However, it is quite possible to recalculate the text block - and margins anew after loading the font, with the aid of - \Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=calc} or - \Macro{KOMAoption}\PParameter{DIV}\PParameter{calc}. Via - \PValue{calc} an appropriate \Var{DIV} value for a good line length - is then chosen. + \Package{typearea} package itself. Thus, it is not possible to pass options + as optional arguments to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}. It would also + be pointless to pass the \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc} option as an + optional argument to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}. This option + would be evaluated immediately on loading the \Package{typearea} package and + as a result the text block and margin would be chosen according to the + {\LaTeX} standard font and not for the later loaded font. However, it is + quite possible to recalculate the text block and margins anew after loading + the font, with the aid of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}% + \PParameter{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}} or + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}% + \PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}\PParameter{calc}. Via + \PValue{calc} an appropriate \Var{DIV} value for a good line length is then + chosen. As it is often more practical to set the \Option{DIV} option not after loading the font, but at a more visible point, such as when @@ -658,7 +661,7 @@ class is used together with a font package. symbolic values for this option. \end{Explain} -With \KOption{DIV}\PName{current}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} +With \OptionVName{DIV}{current}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} a renewed calculation of text block and margin is requested, in which the currently set \Var{DIV} will be used. This is less of interest for renewed type area calculations after loading a different font; it is @@ -667,7 +670,7 @@ leading, while keeping \Var{DIV} the same, that the marginal condition is fulfilled that \Length{textheight} less \Length{topskip} is a multiple of \Length{baselineskip}. -With \KOption{DIV}\PName{last}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} a +With \OptionVName{DIV}{last}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} a renewed calculation of text block and margin is requested, where exactly the same setting is used as in the last calculation. @@ -676,7 +679,7 @@ exactly the same setting is used as in the last calculation. length is required for a type area using the Bookman font. At the same time, a {\KOMAScript} class is to be used. This is easily possible using the symbolic value \PValue{last} and the command - \Macro{KOMAoptions}: + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[BCOR=12mm,DIV=calc,twoside]{scrartcl} \usepackage{bookman} @@ -684,7 +687,7 @@ exactly the same setting is used as in the last calculation. \end{lstcode} If it should later be decided that a different \Var{DIV} value is required, then only the setting of the optional argument to -\Macro{documentclass} need be changed. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} need be changed. \end{Example} A summary of all possible symbolic values for the \Option{DIV} option @@ -694,8 +697,8 @@ can also lead to \LaTeX{} loading a different font. \begin{table} \caption[{Symbolic values for the \Option{DIV} option and the - \PName{DIV} argument to \Macro{typearea}}]{Possible symbolic values for the \Option{DIV} option or the \PName{DIV} argument to - \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}} + \PName{DIV} argument to \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.typearea}}]{Possible symbolic values for the \Option{DIV} option or the \PName{DIV} argument to + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}} \label{tab:symbolicDIV} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{areaset}{Recalculate page @@ -775,42 +778,40 @@ page should be reset to the normal value. \end{document} \end{lstcode} See further also the notes in \autoref{sec:typearea.tips}. The command - \Macro{AfterTOCHead}\IndexCmd{AfterTOCHead} will be described in - \autoref{cha:tocbasic} of \autoref{part:forExperts} on - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead}. + \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead}\IndexCmd{AfterTOCHead} will be described + in \autoref{cha:tocbasic} of \autoref{part:forExperts} on + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead}. \end{Example} -Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} -classes as in the example above, it must be used either as a class -option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after -loading the class. The \Package{typearea} package should neither be -loaded explicitly with \Macro{usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} -class, nor should the option be given as an optional argument -thereto. If the option is changed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock and -margins are automatically recalculated anew.% +Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes +as in the example above, it must be used either as a class option, or passed +via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. The +\Package{typearea} package should neither be loaded explicitly with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} when using a {\KOMAScript} class, nor +should the option be given as an optional argument thereto. If the option is +changed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the package, the textblock +and margins are automatically recalculated anew.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=current}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=last}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PName{value}} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{typearea}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{recalctypearea}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}\\ + \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}% \Macro{recalctypearea} \end{Declaration}% \begin{Explain} - If the \Option{DIV} option or the \Option{BCOR} option is set after - loading of the \Package{typearea} package, then internally the - command \Macro{typearea} is called. When setting the \Option{DIV} - option the symbolic value \PValue{current} is used internally for - \PName{BCOR}, which for reasons of completeness is found also in - \autoref{tab:symbolicBCOR}. When setting the \Option{BCOR} option, - the symbolic value \PValue{last} is used internally for - \PName{DIV}. If it is instead desired that the text block and - margins should be recalculated using the symbolic value - \PValue{current} for \PName{DIV}, then + If the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option or the + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} option is set after loading of the + \Package{typearea} package, then internally the command \Macro{typearea} is + called. When setting the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option the symbolic + value \PValue{current} is used internally for \PName{BCOR}, which for + reasons of completeness is found also in \autoref{tab:symbolicBCOR}. When + setting the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} option, the symbolic value + \PValue{last} is used internally for \PName{DIV}. If it is instead desired + that the text block and margins should be recalculated using the symbolic + value \PValue{current} for \PName{DIV}, then \Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{current} can be used directly. \end{Explain} @@ -826,12 +827,13 @@ margins are automatically recalculated anew.% \end{desctabular} \end{table} -If both \PName{BCOR} and \PName{DIV} need changing, then it is -recommended to use \Macro{typearea}, since then the text block and -margins are recalculated only once. With -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{\KOption{DIV}\PName{DIV},% - \KOption{BCOR}\PName{BCOR}} the text block and margins are -recalculated once for the change to \PName{DIV} and again for the +If both \PName{BCOR} and \PName{DIV} need changing, then it is recommended to +use \Macro{typearea}, since then the text block and margins are recalculated +only once. With +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}% +\PParameter{\OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{DIV},% + \OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}}{BCOR}} the text block and +margins are recalculated once for the change to \PName{DIV} and again for the change to \PName{BCOR}. \begin{Explain} @@ -845,9 +847,9 @@ change to \PName{BCOR}. \end{Explain} Since \Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{last} or -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=last} are often needed for -recalculation of the type area, there exists specially the -abbreviated command +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}% +\PParameter{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{last}} are often needed for +recalculation of the type area, there exists specially the abbreviated command \Macro{recalctypearea}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}. \begin{Example} @@ -866,13 +868,11 @@ abbreviated command \recalctypearea \end{lstcode} \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{recalctypearea}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{typearea} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{twoside~=semi}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{twoside}\PName{simple switch}\\ + \OptionVName{twoside}{simple switch}% \OptionValue{twoside}{semi} \end{Declaration}% As already explained in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics}, the margin @@ -912,8 +912,8 @@ Apart from the values in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} the value value \PValue{semi} results in a double-sided typesetting with single-sided margins and single-sided, i.\ e., not alternating, margin notes. Nevertheless\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}}, since \KOMAScript{} -version 3.12 binding corrections (see \Option{BCOR}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.BCOR}) will be part of the left margin on +version 3.12 binding corrections (see \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR}) will be part of the left margin on odd pages but part of the right margin on even pages. But if you use compatibility with prior versions of \KOMAScript (see \autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions}, @@ -921,28 +921,29 @@ compatibility with prior versions of \KOMAScript (see part of the left margin on both pages while using \OptionValue{twoside}{semi}. The option can also be passed as class option in -\Macro{documentclass}, as package option to \Macro{usepackage}, or -even after loading of the \Package{typearea} package with the use of - \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption}. Use of the option after -loading the \Package{typearea} package results automatically in -recalculation of the type area using \Macro{recalctypearea} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). If double-sided -typesetting was active before the option was set, then before the -recalculation a page break is made to the next odd page.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}, as package option to +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}, or even after loading of the +\Package{typearea} package with the use of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}. Use of the option after loading the +\Package{typearea} package results automatically in recalculation of the type +area using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). If double-sided typesetting +was active before the option was set, then before the recalculation a page +break is made to the next odd page.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{twoside~=semi}% -\EndIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PName{simple switch}} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{twocolumn~=\PName{simple switch}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{twocolumn}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{twocolumn}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} For the calculation of a good type area with the help of -\OptionValue{DIV}{calc} it is useful to know in advance if the -document is to be typeset one-column or two-column. Since the -observations about line length in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} then -apply to each column, the width of a type area in a two-column -document can be up to double that in a one-column document. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc} it is useful to know in advance if the +document is to be typeset one-column or two-column. Since the observations +about line length in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} then apply to each column, +the width of a type area in a two-column document can be up to double that in +a one-column document. To implement this difference, the \Package{typearea} package must be told via the \Option{twocolumn} option whether the document is to be @@ -953,21 +954,21 @@ assumed, i.\,e., two-column typesetting. Deactivation of the option results in one-column typesetting. The option can also be passed as class option in -\Macro{documentclass}, as package option to \Macro{usepackage}, or -even after loading of the \Package{typearea} package with the use of - \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption}. Use of the option after -loading the \Package{typearea} package results automatically in -recalculation of the type area using \Macro{recalctypearea} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}, as package option to +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}, or even after loading of the +\Package{typearea} package with the use of +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}. Use of the option after loading the +\Package{typearea} package results automatically in recalculation of the type +area using \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{twocolumn~=\PName{simple switch}} +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Option}{headinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headinclude}\PName{simple switch}\\ - \KOption{footinclude}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{headinclude}{simple switch}% + \OptionVName{footinclude}{simple switch} \end{Declaration}% \begin{Explain}% So far we have discussed how the type area is @@ -976,11 +977,11 @@ recalculation of the type area using \Macro{recalctypearea} (see block. However, one important question has not been answered: What constitutes the margins? - At first glance the question appears trivial: Margins are those - parts on the right, left, top and bottom which remain empty. But - this is only half the story. Margins are not always empty. There may - be margin notes, for example (see \Macro{marginpar} command in - \cite{lshort} or \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}). + At first glance the question appears trivial: Margins are those parts on the + right, left, top and bottom which remain empty. But this is only half the + story. Margins are not always empty. There may be margin notes, for example + (see \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} command in \cite{lshort} or + \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}). One could also ask whether headers\Index{page header} and footers\Index{page footer} belong to the upper and lower margins or @@ -1048,24 +1049,22 @@ packages used (see \autoref{sec:maincls.options} and Please note that when using these options with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, they must be used -either as a class option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options +either as a class option, or passed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options after loading the \Package{typearea} package does not result in an automatic recalculation of the type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next recalculation of the type area. For -recalculation of the type area, refer to the \Option{DIV} option with +recalculation of the type area, refer to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or \PValue{current} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the -\Macro{recalctypearea} command (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} command (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Option}{mpinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{mpinclude}\PName{simple switch} + \OptionVName{mpinclude}{simple switch} \end{Declaration} Besides\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} documents where the head and foot are part of the @@ -1102,7 +1101,7 @@ double-sided page layout has been chosen. The option \Option{mpinclude} option is primarily left for experts. Of course one can set up the margin-width to reach a third right into the normal margin; for example, using -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \setlength{\marginparwidth}{1.5\marginparwidth} \end{lstcode} gives the desired result. @@ -1115,32 +1114,30 @@ double-sided page layout has been chosen. The option width \Length{marginparwidth} by the same amount. Unfortunately, this cannot be combined with automatic calculation of the \PName{DIV} value. In contrast - \Option{DIV=calc}\IndexOption{DIV~=calc} (see - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}) heeds + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}\IndexOption{DIV~=calc} (see + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}) heeds \Option{mpinclude}. \end{Explain} Please note that when using this option with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, it must be used either as a class -option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after +option, or passed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of this option after loading the \Package{typearea} package does not result in an automatic recalculation of the type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next recalculation of the type area. For recalculation of the -type area, refer to the \Option{DIV} option with the values +type area, refer to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or \PValue{current} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the -\Macro{recalctypearea} command (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} command (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{mpinclude~=\PName{simple switch}}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Option}{headlines~=\PName{number}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headheight~=\PName{height}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headlines}\PName{number of lines}\\ - \KOption{headheight}\PName{height} + \OptionVName{headlines}{number of lines}\\ + \OptionVName{headheight}{height} \end{Declaration}% We have seen how to calculate the type area using the \Package{typearea} package and how to specify whether header and @@ -1186,46 +1183,46 @@ option, is decisive. Please note that when using these options with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, they must be used -either as a class option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options +either as a class option, or passed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options after loading the \Package{typearea} package does not result in an automatic recalculation of the type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next recalculation of the type area. For -recalculation of the type area, refer to the \Option{DIV} option with +recalculation of the type area, refer to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or \PValue{current} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the -\Macro{recalctypearea} command (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} command (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headheight~=\PName{height}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headlines~=\PName{number}} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{footlines}\PName{number}\\ - \KOption{footheight}\PName{height} + \OptionVName{footlines}{number of lines}% + \OptionVName{footheight}{height}% + \Length{footheight}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{footlines~=\PName{number}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footheight~=\PName{height}}% As\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}} well as we needed a height value for the head, we need a height value for the page footer. But in difference to the height of the head, \LaTeX itself do not provide a length for the height of the page footer. So \Package{typearea} defines the new length -\Length{footheight}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footheight}, if it does not -exist. Wether or not this length will be used by classes or packages depends -on the classes and packages, that will be used. The \KOMAScript{} package -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} incorporates \Length{footheight} and actively -cooperates with \Package{typearea}. The \KOMAScript{} classes do not recognize -\Length{footheight}, because without any package assistance they provide only -page styles with single-line page footers. - -You can use \Option{footlines} to setup the \PName{number} of lines in the -page footer, similar to \Option{headlines} for the number of lines in the page -header. By default \Package{typearea} uses 1.25 footlines. This is a -compromise, large enough for overlining or underlining footers and small -enough that the relative weight of the bottom margin is not affected too mich -when the footer is neither over- nor underlined. Thus in most cases you may -leave \PName{footlines} at its default value and adapt it only in special -cases. +\Length{footheight}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footheight}, if +it does not exist. Wether or not this length will be used by classes or +packages depends on the classes and packages, that will be used. The +\KOMAScript{} package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} incorporates +\Length{footheight} and actively cooperates with +\Package{typearea}. The \KOMAScript{} classes do not recognize +\Length{footheight}, because without any package assistance +they provide only page styles with single-line page footers. + +You can use \Option{footlines} to setup the \PName{number of lines} in the +page footer, similar to \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines} for the number +of lines in the page header. By default \Package{typearea} uses 1.25 +footlines. This is a compromise, large enough for overlining or underlining +footers and small enough that the relative weight of the bottom margin is not +affected too mich when the footer is neither over- nor underlined. Thus in +most cases you may leave \PName{number of lines} at its default value and +adapt it only in special cases. \begin{Example} Assume a two-lined copyright note should be placed in the page @@ -1260,46 +1257,44 @@ option, is decisive. Please note that when using these options with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes as in the example above, they must be used -either as a class option, or passed via \Macro{KOMAoptions} or -\Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options +either as a class option, or passed via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} after loading the class. Changing of these options after loading the \Package{typearea} package does not result in an automatic recalculation of the type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next recalculation of the type area. For -recalculation of the type area, refer to the \Option{DIV} option with +recalculation of the type area, refer to the \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or \PValue{current} (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the -\Macro{recalctypearea} command (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% -\EndIndex{Option}{footheight~=\PName{height}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footlines~=\PName{number}}% - +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} command (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{areaset}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Width}\Parameter{Height} + \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{width}\Parameter{height} \end{Declaration}% -So far we have seen how a good or even very good -type area\Index{type area} is calculated and how the -\Package{typearea} package can support these calculations, giving you -at the same time the freedom to adapt the layout to your needs. -However, there are cases where the text body has to fit exactly some -specified dimensions. At the same time the margins should be well -spaced and a binding correction should be possible. The -\Package{typearea} package offers the command \Macro{areaset} for this -purpose. As parameters this command accepts the binding correction and -the width and height of the text body. Width and position of the -margins will then be calculated automatically, taking account of the -options \Option{headinclude}, \OptionValue{headinclude}{false}, -\Option{footinclude} and \OptionValue{footinclude}{false} where -needed. On the other hand, the options -\Option{headlines}\IndexOption{headlines} and -\Option{headheight}\IndexOption{headheight} are ignored! +So far we have seen how a good or even very good type area\Index{type area} is +calculated and how the \Package{typearea} package can support these +calculations, giving you at the same time the freedom to adapt the layout to +your needs. However, there are cases where the text body has to fit exactly +some specified dimensions. At the same time the margins should be well spaced +and a binding correction should be possible. The \Package{typearea} package +offers the command \Macro{areaset} for this purpose. As parameters this +command accepts the binding correction and the width and height of the text +body. Width and position of the margins will then be calculated +automatically, taking account of the options +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headinclude}, +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headinclude}{false}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footinclude} and +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{footinclude}{false} where needed. On the other +hand, the options \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines}\IndexOption{headlines} +and \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headheight}\IndexOption{headheight} are +ignored! The default of \PName{BCOR} is 0\Unit{pt}. If you want to re-use the current binding correction, e.\,g. the value set by option -\Option{BCOR}\IndexOption{BCOR}, you can use the symbolic value -\PValue{current} at the optional argument. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}\IndexOption{BCOR}, you can use the symbolic +value \PValue{current} at the optional argument. \begin{Example} Assume a text, printed on A4 paper, should have a width of exactly 60 @@ -1332,24 +1327,26 @@ other hand, hang below the dimensions of the type area. \areaset[1cm]{15cm}{15cm} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{areaset} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=areaset}% \begin{Declaration} \OptionValue{DIV}{areaset} \end{Declaration}% -In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} rare cases it is useful to be -able to reconstruct the current type area anew. This is possible via -the option \OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}, where -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=areaset} corresponds to the -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} rare cases it is useful to be able to +reconstruct the current type area anew. This is possible via the option +\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}, where +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\PParameter{\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}} +corresponds to the +\begin{lstcode} \areaset[current]{\textwidth}{\textheight} \end{lstcode} command. The same result is obtained if one uses -\OptionValue{DIV}{last} and the typearea was last set with -\Macro{areaset}.% +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{last} and the typearea was last set with +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=areaset}% +\EndIndexGroup + The \Package{typearea} package was not made to set up predefined margin values. If you have to do so you may use package @@ -1359,6 +1356,7 @@ margin values. If you have to do so you may use package \section{Paper Format Selection} \seclabel{paperTypes}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{paper>format}% The paper format is a definitive characteristic of any document. As @@ -1372,10 +1370,8 @@ supports in conjunction with the \Package{typearea} package even exotic paper sizes. -\BeginIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{format}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{orientation}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{paper}\PName{format} + \OptionVName{paper}{format} \end{Declaration}% The option \Option{paper}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} is the central element for format selection in \KOMAScript. \PName{Format} @@ -1391,19 +1387,28 @@ that application \File{dvips} rotates at \PValue{landscape} by -90\Unit{\textdegree}, while it rotates by +90\Unit{\textdegree} at \PValue{seascape}. So you may use \PValue{seascape} whenever a PostScript viewer application shows landscape pages upside-down. But you may see the -difference only if you do not deactivate option \Option{pagesize}, which will -be described next. - -Additionally, the \PName{format} can also be specified in the form -\PName{height}\texttt{:}\PName{width}. Note that until -version~3.01a\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}} \PName{height} and -\PName{width} has been interchanged. -% You should at least pay attention to this, -This is important -if you use compatibility settings (see option -\Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\Option{version}}, +difference only if you do not deactivate option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagesize}, which will be described next. + +Additionally\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}, the \PName{format} can +also be specified in the form \PName{height}\texttt{:}\PName{width} or +\PName{width}\texttt{:}\PName{height}. +Whether\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Package{typearea}} the first or the second value is +the \PName{height} or \PName{width} depends on the paper orientation. With +\OptionValue{paper}{landscape} or \OptionValue{paper}{seascape} the smaller +value is the \PName{height} and the larger one is the \PName{width}. With +\OptionValue{paper}{portrait} the smaller value is the \PName{width} and the +larger one is the \PName{height}. + +Note\textnote{Attention!} that until version~3.01a the first value was always +the \PName{height} and the second one the \PName{width}. From version~3.01b +until version~3.21, the first value was always the \PName{width} and the +second one the \PName{height}. This is important if you use compatibility +settings (see option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}% +\IndexOption{version}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}}, \autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.version}). +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.version}). \begin{Example} Assume one wishes to print on ISO A8 file cards in landscape @@ -1427,7 +1432,7 @@ code. \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{article} \usepackage[headinclude=false,footinclude=false,% - paper=A8,paper=5cm:3cm]{typearea} + paper=landscape,paper=5cm:3cm]{typearea} \areaset{4cm}{2.4cm} \pagestyle{empty} \begin{document} @@ -1444,23 +1449,21 @@ which by default use the American letter paper format. Please note that when using these options with one of the {\KOMAScript} classes, it must be used either as a class option, or passed via -\Macro{KOMAoptions} or \Macro{KOMAoption} after loading the -class. Changing of this option after loading the \Package{typearea} -package does not result in an automatic recalculation of the -type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next -recalculation of the type area. For recalculation of the type area, -refer to the \Option{DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or -\PValue{current} (see \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) or -the \Macro{recalctypearea} command (see -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} or \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} +after loading the class. Changing of this option after loading the +\Package{typearea} package does not result in an automatic recalculation of +the type area. Instead, the changes only take effect at the next recalculation +of the type area. For recalculation of the type area, refer to the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} option with the values \PValue{last} or +\PValue{current} (see \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) or the +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} command (see +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{orientation}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{format}} +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagesize}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagesize~=\PName{output driver}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagesize}\PName{output driver} + \OptionVName{pagesize}{output driver} \end{Declaration}% \begin{Explain}% The above-mentioned mechanisms for choice of paper format only @@ -1498,7 +1501,7 @@ default\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{typearea}} is \Option{pagesize}. This usage without value is same like \OptionValue{pagesize}{auto}. % \begin{table} - \caption{Output driver for option \KOption{pagesize}\PName{output driver}} + \caption{Output driver for option \OptionVName{pagesize}{output driver}} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{auto}{Uses output driver \PValue{pdftex} if pdf\TeX-specific registers \Macro{pdfpagewidth}\IndexLength{pdfpagewidth} and @@ -1553,10 +1556,9 @@ this data file. It is recommended always to specify this option. Generally the method without \PName{output driver}, or with \PValue{auto} or \PValue{automedia}, is useful.% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagesize}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagesize~=\PName{output driver}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{paper>format} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Tips} @@ -1603,26 +1605,24 @@ these rules have to be either ignored or at least interpreted generously. For example one may interpret ``60 characters per line'' not as a fixed, but as an average or maximal value.% -As executed, record regulations are usually intended to obtain a -usable result even if the author does not know what needs to be -considered. \emph{Usable} frequently means readable and correctable. In -the author's opinion the type area of a text set with {\LaTeX} and the -\Package{typearea} package meets these criteria well right from the -start. Thus if one is confronted with regulations which deviate -obviously substantially from it, then the author recommends submitting -an extract from the text to the responsible person and inquiring -whether it is permitted to submit the work despite deviations in the -format. If necessary the type area can be moderately adapted by -modification of option \Option{DIV}. The author advises against the -use of \Macro{areaset} for this purpose however. In the worst case -one may make use of the geometry package (see -\cite{package:geometry}), which is not part of \KOMAScript, or change -the type area parameters of \LaTeX. One may find the values -determined by \Package{typearea} in the \File{log} file of one's -document. Thus moderate adjustments should be possible. However, one -should make absolutely sure that the proportions of the text area -correspond approximately to those of the page including consideration -of the binding correction. +As executed, record regulations are usually intended to obtain a usable result +even if the author does not know what needs to be considered. \emph{Usable} +frequently means readable and correctable. In the author's opinion the type +area of a text set with {\LaTeX} and the \Package{typearea} package meets +these criteria well right from the start. Thus if one is confronted with +regulations which deviate obviously substantially from it, then the author +recommends submitting an extract from the text to the responsible person and +inquiring whether it is permitted to submit the work despite deviations in the +format. If necessary the type area can be moderately adapted by modification +of option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}. The author advises against the use +of \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset} for this purpose however. In the worst +case one may make use of the geometry package (see \cite{package:geometry}), +which is not part of \KOMAScript, or change the type area parameters of +\LaTeX. One may find the values determined by \Package{typearea} in the +\File{log} file of one's document. Thus moderate adjustments should be +possible. However, one should make absolutely sure that the proportions of +the text area correspond approximately to those of the page including +consideration of the binding correction. If it should prove absolutely necessary to set the text with a line spacing of 1.5, then one should not under any circumstances redefine @@ -1639,12 +1639,12 @@ contents and various listings\,---\,as well as the bibliography and the index. The \Package{setspace} package offers for this a special environment and its own instructions. -The \Package{typearea} package, even with option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}, -calculates a very generous text area. Many conservative typographers -will state that the resulting line length is still excessive. The -calculated \Var{DIV} value may be found in the \File{log} file for the -respective document. Thus one can select a smaller value easily after -the first {\LaTeX} run. +The \Package{typearea} package, even with option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}, calculates a very generous text area. +Many conservative typographers will state that the resulting line length is +still excessive. The calculated \Var{DIV} value may be found in the \File{log} +file for the respective document. Thus one can select a smaller value easily +after the first {\LaTeX} run. The question is not infrequently put to the author, why he spends an entire chapter discussing type area calculations, when it would be @@ -1669,6 +1669,8 @@ German words in the German scrguide. typography is primarily concerned with information, errors cannot only irritate, but may even cause damage.} \end{quote} +% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/linkalias.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/linkalias.tex index cfcc44aa11c..16dcdc1d4e8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/linkalias.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/linkalias.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -38,13 +38,23 @@ % Link Aliase, die für die freie Version der Anleitung benötigt werden. % -\ProvidesFile{linkalias.tex}[2014/03/18 link aliases for the free version] +\KOMAProvidesFile{linkalias.tex} + [$Date: 2016-11-20 17:40:30 +0100 (Sun, 20 Nov 2016) $ + link aliases for the free version] \makeatletter \newcommand*{\lalias}[2]{% \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@#1}{% \expandafter\let\csname r@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname r@#2\endcsname - }{}% + }{% + \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% + Label alias `#1'\MessageBreak + to `#2' ignored,\MessageBreak + because of multiply definition% + }% + \gdef \@multiplelabels {% + \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% + }% } \makeatother @@ -57,16 +67,3 @@ \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedsection}{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence} - -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:maincls.option.version}{desc:typearea.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}{desc:maincls.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote}{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule}{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.description}{desc:maincls.env.description} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling}{desc:maincls.env.labeling} - -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex index 1b715e99469..eb97491e76d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/adrconvnote.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % adrconvnote.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % adrconvnote.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,8 +45,9 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\ProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex}[{2008/07/31 KOMA-Script guide (chapter: - adrconv)}] +\KOMAProvidesFile{adrconvnote.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (chapter: adrconv)] \chapter{Adressdateien aus Adressdatenbanken}% \labelbase{addrconv}% @@ -63,7 +64,7 @@ Adressdatenbanken im \BibTeX-Format Adressdateien für die \KOMAScript-Briefklasse oder für das \Package{scraddr}-Paket erstellt werden konnten. -\begin{lstlisting}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,morekeywords={@address}] +\begin{lstlisting}[morekeywords={@address}] @address{HMUS, name = {Hans Mustermann}, title = {Mag. art.}, diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex index ed54b8a47a2..9cc3e39ed6a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/authorpart.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % authorpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % authorpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-0.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-0.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 017beb831cd..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-0.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,258 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-0.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-0.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-0.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage - \csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayernotecolumn}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayernotecolumn - \csname ifCommonscrlayer-notecolumn\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - -\section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} -\seclabel{options} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{typearea}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht typearea + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:typearea.options} geschrieben wurde. -\else %------------------------------------------------------ nur typearea - - -\BeginIndex{}{Optionen}% - -In diesem Abschnitt wird eine Besonderheit von \KOMAScript{} vorgestellt, die -neben % -\IfCommon{typearea}{\Package{typearea} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete und - "~Klassen }% -\IfCommon{maincls}{den Klassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und - \Class{scrartcl} auch andere \KOMAScript-Klassen und "~Pakete }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} auch andere - \KOMAScript-Klassen und "~Pakete }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{den Klassen und \Package{scrextend} auch einige andere - \KOMAScript-Pakete }% -\IfCommon{scrhack}{\Package{scrhack} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete und - "~Klassen }% -\IfCommon{scrjura}{\Package{scrjura} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete und - "~Klassen }% -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{\Package{scrlayer} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete und - "-Klassen }% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch andere - \KOMAScript-Pakete und "-Klassen }% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-notecolumn}{\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} auch andere - \KOMAScript-Pakete und "-Klassen }% -betrifft. % -% Umbruchvarianten: -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{Damit die Anwender alle Informationen zu einem Paket - oder einer Klasse im jeweiligen Kapitel finden, ist dieser Abschnitt nahezu - gleichlautend in mehreren Kapiteln zu finden. Anwender, die nicht nur an - der Anleitung zu einem Paket oder einer Klasse interessiert sind, sondern - sich einen Gesamtüberblick über \KOMAScript{} verschaffen wollen, brauchen - diesen Abschnitt nur in einem der Kapitel zu lesen und können ihn - \IfCommon{maincls}{bei den weiteren Kapitel überspringen.}% - \IfNotCommon{maincls}{beim weiteren Studium der Anleitung dann - überspringen.}% -} % -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Im Sinne der Abgeschlossenheit der Kapitel ist dieser - Abschnitt nahezu identisch in mehreren Kapiteln zu finden, braucht aber beim - Studium des gesamten von \KOMAScript{} natürlich nur in einem gelesen - werden.} - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{documentclass}\OParameter{Optionenliste}% - \Parameter{\KOMAScript-Klasse}\\ - \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{Optionenliste}% - \Parameter{Paket-Liste} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{documentclass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usepackage}% -Bei \LaTeX{} ist vorgesehen, dass Anwender Klassenoptionen in Form einer durch -Komma getrennten Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von -\Macro{documentclass} angeben. Außer an die Klasse werden diese Optionen auch -an alle Pakete weitergereicht, die diese Optionen verstehen. Ebenso ist -vorgesehen, dass Anwender Paketoptionen in Form einer durch Komma getrennten -Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage} -angeben. \KOMAScript{} erweitert\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} den -Mechanismus der Optionen für die \KOMAScript-Klassen und einige Pakete um -weitere Möglichkeiten. So haben die meisten Optionen bei \KOMAScript{} -zusätzlich einen Wert. Eine Option hat also nicht unbedingt nur die Form -\PName{Option}, sondern kann auch die Form -\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert} haben. Bis auf diesen Unterschied -arbeiten \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} bei \KOMAScript{} wie in -\cite{latex:usrguide} oder jeder \LaTeX-Einführung, beispielsweise -\cite{l2kurz}, beschrieben.% -% -\iffree{}{\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par - Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket - \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} - besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Es versteht daher nur einfache - Optionen ohne Wertzuweisung.\par}}% -% -\IfNotCommon{scrjura}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrhack}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrlayer-notecolumn}{% - \IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\par% - Bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse\textnote{Achtung!} sollten - im Übrigen beim -% Umbruchoptimierung!!! -% Die Alternativen an dieser Stelle dienen der Verbesserung des Umbruchs -% \IfCommon{typearea}{überflüssigen, expliziten }% - Laden des Pakets \Package{typearea} oder \Package{scrbase} keine - Optionen angegeben werden. Das ist darin begründet, dass die - Klasse diese Pakete bereits ohne Optionen lädt und \LaTeX{} das - mehrmalige Laden eines Pakets mit unterschiedlicher Angabe von - Optionen verweigert.% -% \IfCommon{maincls}{\ Überhaupt ist es bei Verwendung einer -% \KOMAScript-Klasse nicht notwendig, eines dieser Pakete auch -% noch explizit zu laden.}% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ Überhaupt ist es bei Verwendung einer - \KOMAScript-Klasse nicht notwendig, eines dieser Pakete auch - noch explizit zu laden.}}}}}}} - -% Umbruchoptimierung!!! -\IfCommon{typearea}{Das Setzen der Optionen mit \Macro{documentclass} oder - \Macro{usepackage} hat übrigens einen\textnote{Achtung!} entscheidenden - Nachteil:} % -\IfNotCommon{typearea}{Gegenüber der nachfolgend vorgestellten Schnittstelle - zu Einstellungen von Optionen haben \Macro{documentclass} und - \Macro{usepackage} einen Nachteil, der unbedingt zu - beachten\textnote{Achtung!} ist:} % -Anweisungen, Längen, Zähler und ähnliches können darin leicht zerbrechen. So -führt die Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge im Wert einer Option bei diesen -Anweisungen zu einer Fehlermeldung, noch bevor der Wert an \KOMAScript{} -übergeben wird, es also die Kontrolle darüber übernehmen -könnte. Wertzuweisungen mit \LaTeX-Längen oder \LaTeX-Zählern sollten daher -nie per \Macro{documentclass} oder \Macro{usepackage}, sondern immer mit den -nachfolgend dokumentierten Anweisungen \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder -\Macro{KOMAoption} vorgenommen werden.% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usepackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{documentclass}% - - -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoptions}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoption}% -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{KOMAoptions}\Parameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \Macro{KOMAoption}\Parameter{Option}\Parameter{Werteliste} -\end{Declaration} -\KOMAScript{}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} bietet bei -den meisten Klassen- und Paketoptionen auch die Möglichkeit, den Wert der -Optionen noch nach dem Laden der Klasse beziehungsweise des Pakets zu -ändern. Man kann dann wahlweise mit der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} die -Werte einer Reihe von Optionen ändern. Jede Option der \PName{Optionenliste} -hat dabei die Form \PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}. - -Einige Optionen besitzen auch einen Säumniswert (engl. \emph{default - value}). Versäumt man die Angabe eines Wertes, verwendet man die Option also -einfach in der Form \PName{Option}, so wird automatisch dieser Säumniswert -angenommen. - -Manche Optionen können % -%\IfCommon{maincls}{auch }% Umbruchkorrektur -%\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{auch }% Umbruchkorrektur -gleichzeitig mehrere Werte besitzen. Für solche Optionen besteht die -Möglichkeit, mit \Macro{KOMAoption} der einen \PName{Option} -nacheinander eine Reihe von Werten zuzuweisen. Die einzelnen Werte sind dabei -in der \PName{Werteliste} durch Komma voneinander getrennt. - -Soll\textnote{Achtung!} ein \PName{Wert} ein Gleichheitszeichen oder ein Komma -enthalten, so ist der \PName{Wert} in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen. - -\begin{Explain} - \KOMAScript{} bedient sich für die Realisierung dieser Möglichkeit der - Anweisungen \Macro{FamilyOptions} und \Macro{FamilyOption} mit der Familie - »\PValue{KOMA}«. -\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur - Näheres zu diesen Anweisungen ist % - \IfCommon{maincls}{für Experten }% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{für Experten }% - in \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions} zu finden. -\else - % - Siehe dazu \autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. - % -\fi - -\end{Explain}% -\iffree{}{\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par - Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket - \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} - besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Optionen können daher nur über - die zuvor erklärte Möglichkeit während des Ladens des Pakets gesetzt - werden.}}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAoptions}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Optionen}% - -\fi % ************************************************** Ende nur typearea * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-1.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 1e1af2f5306..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-1.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,192 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-1.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-1.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-1.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} -\seclabel{compatibilityOptions} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{typearea}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht typearea + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions} -geschrieben wurde. \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Allerdings existiert diese Möglichkeit - bei \Class{scrlttr2} bereits seit Version~2.9t}. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur typearea - -\BeginIndex{}{Kompatibilität} - -\IfCommon{typearea}{Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der - Regel allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer - wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen führen aber - Verbesserungen und Korrekturen am Paket zu Änderungen im Verhalten, - inbesondere beim Umbruch. Dies ist jedoch manchmal eher unerwünscht.}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der - Regel allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer - wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen führen aber - Verbesserungen und Korrekturen am Paket zu unerwünschten Änderungen im - Verhalten und insbesondere bezüglich des Umbruchs.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der - Regel allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer - wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen ist es aber - so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der Klasse zu Änderungen im - Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und - Korrekturen an der Klasse zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim - Umbruch, führen. Dies ist jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{version}\PName{Wert}\\ - \XOptionValue{version}{first}\\ - \XOptionValue{version}{last} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{version}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PName{Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{last}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{first}}% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Seit }% -\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% -\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% -\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}% -\IfCommon{typearea}{\ifshortversion - Version~2.96a besteht bei \KOMAScript, bei \Class{scrlttr2} bereits seit - Version~2.9t und bei \Package{typearea} erst seit Version~3.01b, - \else - Version~3.01b besteht bei \Package{typearea} - \fi -}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{Version~2.96a besteht bei \KOMAScript\ }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Version~2.9t besteht bei \Class{scrlttr2} }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Bei \Package{scrextend} besteht }% -die Wahl, ob eine Quelldatei soweit irgend möglich auch zukünftig bei einem -\LaTeX{}-Lauf zu exakt demselben Ergebnis führen soll oder ob jeweils -entsprechend der Anpassungen der neusten Version\IfCommon{maincls}{ der - Klasse}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ der Klasse} zu setzen ist. Zu welcher Version -Kompatibilität herzustellen ist, wird dabei über die Option \Option{version} -festgelegt. Kompatibilität zur ältesten unterstützten \KOMAScript-Version kann -mit \OptionValue{version}{first}\important{\OptionValue{version}{first}} -oder \OptionValue{version}{2.9} oder \OptionValue{version}{2.9t} -erreicht werden. Bei Angabe einer unbekannten Version als \PName{Wert} wird -eine Warnung ausgegeben und sicherheitshalber \OptionValue{version}{first} -angenommen. - -Mit \OptionValue{version}{last} -kann die jeweils neuste Version ausgewählt werden. In diesem Fall wird also -auf zukünftige Kompatibilität verzichtet. Wird die Option ohne Wertangabe -verwendet, so wird ebenfalls \PValue{last} -angenommen. \ChangedAt{v3.01a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrextend}}Dies -entspricht auch der Voreinstellung, solange keine obsolete Option verwendet -wird. - -Bei\textnote{Achtung!} der Verwendung einer obsoleten Option von -\KOMAScript~2 setzt \KOMAScript~3 automatisch \OptionValue{version}{first}. In -der dabei ausgegebenen Warnung wird erklärt, wie man diese -Kompatibilitätsumschaltung verhindern kann. Alternativ kann man auch nach der -obsoleten Option selbst eine abweichende Einstellung für Option -\Option{version} wählen. - -Die Frage der Kompatibilität betrifft in erster Linie Fragen des -Umbruchs. Neue Möglichkeiten, die sich nicht auf den Umbruch auswirken, sind -auch dann verfügbar, wenn man per Option die Kompatibilität zu einer älteren -Version ausgewählt hat. Die Option hat keine Auswirkungen auf -Umbruchänderungen, die bei Verwendung einer neueren Version durch Beseitigung -eindeutiger Fehler entstehen. Wer\textnote{Tipp!} auch im Fehlerfall -unbedingte Umbruchkompatibilität benötigt, sollte stattdessen mit dem Dokument -auch die verwendete \KOMAScript-Version archivieren. - -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\begin{Example} - Die Beispielbriefe dieses Kapitels sollen alle Möglichkeiten nutzen, die in - der neusten Version von \KOMAScript{} zur Verfügung stehen. Dazu muss beim - Laden der Klasse die Kompatibilität entsprechend gesetzt werden:% - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em,lastline=1]{letter-0.tex}% - \iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur - Hier wurde einfach mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{last} die neuste - Version gewählt.% - \else% - Um nicht bei jeder neuen Version eine neue Versionsnummer angeben zu - müssen, wurde hier die Möglichkeit des symbolischen Wertes \PValue{last} - gewählt.% - \fi -\end{Example}} - -Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass die Option \Option{version} nach -dem Laden % -\IfCommon{maincls}{der Klasse }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{der Klasse }% -\IfCommon{typearea}{des Pakets \Package{typearea} }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{des Pakets \Package{scrextend} }% -nicht mehr verändert werden kann. -Das Setzen mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder -\Macro{KOMAoption} ist -% Umbruchkorrektur!!!! -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{\IfNotCommon{typearea}{für diese Option }}% -daher nicht vorgesehen.% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PName{Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{first}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version~=\PValue{last}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{version}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Kompatibilität} - -\fi % *************************************************** Ende nur typearea * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-12.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-12.tex deleted file mode 100644 index c2aefe1117f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-12.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,876 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-12.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-12.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-12.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Listen} -\seclabel{lists}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.lists} geschrieben -wurde. \IfCommon{scrextend}{Allerdings werden vom Paket \Package{scrextend} - nur die Umgebungen \Environment{labeling}, \Environment{addmargin} und - \Environment{addmargin*} definiert. Alle anderen Listenumgebungen bleiben - der Verantwortung und Kontrolle der verwendeten Klasse überlassen.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{Listen}% - -{\LaTeX} und die Standardklassen bieten verschiedene Umgebungen für -Listen. All diese Umgebungen bietet {\KOMAScript} selbstverständlich auch, -teilweise jedoch mit leichten Abwandlungen oder Erweiterungen. Grundsätzlich -gilt, dass Listen -- auch unterschiedlicher Art -- bis zu einer Tiefe von vier -Listen geschachtelt werden können. Eine tiefere Schachtelung wäre auch aus -typografischen Gründen kaum sinnvoll, da genau genommen schon mehr als drei -Ebenen nicht mehr überblickt werden können. Ich empfehle\textnote{Tipp!} in -solchen Fällen, die eine große Liste in mehrere kleinere Listen aufzuteilen. - -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Da Listen zu den Standardelementen von \LaTeX{} gehören, - wurde in diesem Abschnitt auf Beispiele verzichtet. Sie finden solche in - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists} ab \autopageref{sec:maincls.lists} oder in jeder - \LaTeX-Einführung.} - -\ifCommonscrextend\else -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{itemize}}\\ - \quad\Macro{item}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{itemize}\\ - \Macro{labelitemi}\\ - \Macro{labelitemii}\\ - \Macro{labelitemiii}\\ - \Macro{labelitemiv} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{itemize}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiv}% -Die einfachste Form einer Liste ist die Stichpunkt- oder -\Environment{itemize}-Liste. % -\iffalse % Umbruchoptimierungstext -Die Benutzer einer unbeliebten Textverarbeitung nennen diese Form der Liste -auch gerne \emph{Bulletpoints}. Vermutlich können sie sich nicht vorstellen, -dass je nach Ebene auch ein anderes Zeichen als ein fetter Punkt zur -Einleitung eines Stichpunkts verwendet werden kann. % -\fi% -Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen werden je nach Ebene folgende Aufzählungszeichen -zur Einleitung eines Listenelements verwendet: »{\labelitemi}«, -»{\labelitemii}«, »{\labelitemiii}« und »{\labelitemiv}«. Die Definition der -Zeichen für die einzelnen Ebenen sind in den Makros \Macro{labelitemi}, -\Macro{labelitemii}, \Macro{labelitemiii} und \Macro{labelitemiv} -abgelegt. Sie können diese leicht mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefinieren. Die -einzelnen Stichpunkte werden mit \Macro{item} eingeleitet.% -% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.itemize.example}% - Sie haben eine einfache Aufzählung, die in mehreren Ebenen geschachtelt - ist. Sie schreiben beispielsweise: -\begin{lstcode} - \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} - \begin{itemize} - \item Flugzeuge - \begin{itemize} - \item Doppeldecker - \item Transportmaschinen - \begin{itemize} - \item einmotorig - \begin{itemize} - \item{düsengetrieben} - \item{propellergetrieben} - \end{itemize} - \item zweimotorig - \begin{itemize} - \item{düsengetrieben} - \item{propellergetrieben} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} - \item Drehflügler - \end{itemize} - \item Motorräder - \item Automobile - \begin{itemize} - \item Rennwagen - \item Personenwagen - \item Lastwagen - \end{itemize} - \item Fahrräder - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} -\end{lstcode} - Anschließend erhalten Sie: - \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] - \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} - \begin{itemize} - \item Flugzeuge - \begin{itemize} - \item Doppeldecker -% \item Jets - \item Transportmaschinen - \begin{itemize} - \item einmotorig - \begin{itemize} - \item{düsengetrieben} - \item{propellergetrieben} - \end{itemize} - \item zweimotorig - \begin{itemize} - \item{düsengetrieben} - \item{propellergetrieben} - \end{itemize} - \end{itemize} - \item Drehflügler - \end{itemize} - \item Motorräder -% \begin{itemize} -% \item historisch korrekt -% \item futurisch nicht real -% \end{itemize} - \item Automobile - \begin{itemize} - \item Rennwagen - \item Personenwagen - \item Lastwagen - \end{itemize} - \item Fahrräder - \end{itemize} - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{itemize}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelitemiv}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{enumerate}}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{enumerate}\\ - \Macro{theenumi}\\ - \Macro{theenumii}\\ - \Macro{theenumiii}\\ - \Macro{theenumiv}\\ - \Macro{labelenumi}\\ - \Macro{labelenumii}\\ - \Macro{labelenumiii}\\ - \Macro{labelenumiv} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{enumerate}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{theenumiv}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumi}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiii}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiv}% -Die nummerierte Liste ist ebenfalls sehr häufig zu finden und bereits vom -{\LaTeX}-Kern vorgesehen. Die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung} erfolgt je nach -Ebene in unterschiedlicher Art: mit arabischen Zahlen, mit Kleinbuchstaben, -mit kleinen römischen Zahlen und mit Großbuchstaben. Die Art der Nummerierung -wird dabei über die Makros \Macro{theenumi} bis \Macro{theenumiv} -festgelegt. Das Format der Ausgabe wird von den Makros \Macro{labelenumi} bis -\Macro{labelenumiv} bestimmt. Dabei folgt auf den Wert der zweiten Ebene, der -in Kleinbuchstaben ausgegeben wird, eine runde Klammer, während die Werte -aller anderen Ebenen von einem Punkt gefolgt werden. Die einzelnen -Stichpunkte werden wieder mit \Macro{item} eingeleitet.% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.enumerate.example}% - Verkürzen wir das vorherige Beispiel und verwenden statt der - \Environment{itemize}- eine - \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung: -% Übernehmen wir das Beispiel der \Environment{itemize}-Umgebung, -% wobei wir jede \Environment{itemize}-Umgebung durch eine -% \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung ersetzen. Das Ergebnis wäre dann: - \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] - \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} - \begin{enumerate} - \item Flugzeuge - \begin{enumerate} - \item Doppeldecker -% \item Jets - \item Transportmaschinen - \begin{enumerate} - \item einmotorig - \begin{enumerate} - \item{düsengetrieben}\label{xmp:maincls.jets} - \item{propellergetrieben} - \end{enumerate} - \item mehrmotorig - \end{enumerate} -% \item Drehflügler - \end{enumerate} - \item Motorräder - \begin{enumerate} - \item historisch korrekt - \item futurisch nicht real - \end{enumerate} -% \item Automobile -% \begin{enumerate} -% \item Rennwagen -% \item Personenwagen -% \item Lastwagen -% \end{enumerate} -% \item Fahrräder - \end{enumerate} - \end{ShowOutput} - Innerhalb der Aufzählung können ganz normal mit \Macro{label} Marken - gesetzt werden, auf die dann mit \Macro{ref} zugegriffen werden - kann. So wurde oben hinter den düsengetriebenen, einmotorigen - Flugzeugen mit »\Macro{label}\PParameter{bsp:duesen}« ein Label - gesetzt. Der \Macro{ref}-Wert ist dann »\ref{xmp:maincls.jets}«. -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{enumerate}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{theenumiv}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumi}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiii}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{labelenumiv}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{description}}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\OParameter{Stichwort}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{description} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{description}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -Eine weitere Listenform ist die Stichwortliste. Sie dient in erster Linie der -Beschreibung einzelner Begriffe. Diese werden als optionale Parameter bei -\Macro{item} angegeben. Die -Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, die für die Hervorhebung des -Stichworts verwendet wird, kann außerdem bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit Hilfe -der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) für das -Element \FontElement{descriptionlabel}\IndexFontElement{descriptionlabel} -(siehe \autoref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}) geändert -werden. In der Voreinstellung wird \Macro{sffamily}""\Macro{bfseries} -verwendet.% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.description.example}% - Sie wollen, dass die Stichworte statt serifenlos und fett lediglich - fett, aber in der Standardschriftart ausgegeben werden. Mit -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{\normalfont - \bfseries} -\end{lstcode} - definieren Sie daher die Schrift entsprechend um. - - Ein Beispiel für die Ausgabe einer Stichwortliste ist eine Aufzählung der - Seitenstile. Der Quelltext dazu lautet beispielsweise: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{description} - \item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- - und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. - \item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem - keinerlei Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. - \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für - automatische Kolumnentitel. - \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für - manuelle Kolumnentitel. - \end{description} -\end{lstcode} - Diese ergibt: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \begin{description} - \item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und - Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. - \item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei - Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. - \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für automatische - Kolumnentitel. - \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle - Kolumnentitel. - \end{description} - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{description}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% -\fi % \ifCommonscrextend\else - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{labeling}}% - \OParameter{Trennzeichen}\Parameter{längstes - Muster}\\ - \quad\XMacro{item}\OParameter{Schlüsselwort}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{labeling} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{labeling}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{item}% -Eine andere Form der % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{in vielen Klassen als \Environment{description}-Umgebung - vorhandenen }% -Stichwortliste ist nur bei den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{und \Package{scrextend} }% -vorhanden: die \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung. Im Unterschied zur zuvor -vorgestellten Umgebung \Environment{description} kann bei -\Environment{labeling} ein Muster angegeben werden, dessen Länge die -Einrücktiefe bei allen Stichpunkten ergibt. Darüber hinaus kann zwischen -Stichpunkt und Beschreibungstext ein optionales \PName{Trennzeichen} -festgelegt werden. Die -Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}\ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}, die für die -Hervorhebung des Schlüsselworts verwendet wird, kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element -\FontElement{labelinglabel}\IndexFontElement{labelinglabel} (siehe -\ifCommonscrextend -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}% -\else -\autoref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}% -\fi) geändert -werden. Für die davon abweichende Schriftart der Trennzeichen ist das Element -\FontElement{labelingseparator}\IndexFontElement{labelingseparator} (siehe -ebenfalls -\ifCommonscrextend -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}% -\else -\autoref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}% -\fi -) zuständig. -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.env.labeling.example}% - \IfCommon{maincls}{Wir schreiben das Beispiel der - \Environment{description}-Umgebung etwas um:}% - \IfCommon{scrextend}{Eine einfache Liste könnte beispielsweise wie folgt - definiert werden:}% -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} - \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} - \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} - \item[empty] - Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß - \item[plain] - Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne - Kolumnentitel - \item[headings] - Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel - \item[myheadings] - Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel - \end{labeling} -\end{lstcode} - Als Ergebnis erhalten wir dann: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} - \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} - \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} - \item[empty] - Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß - \item[plain] - Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne - Kolumnentitel - \item[headings] - Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel - \item[myheadings] - Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel - \end{labeling} - \end{ShowOutput} - Wie in diesem Beispiel zu sehen ist, kann eine eventuell geforderte - Schriftumschaltung in bei \KOMAScript{} gewohnter Weise erreicht werden. Da - sich die Schriftumschaltung für das Schlüsselwort aber auch auf die - Trennzeichen auswirkt, kann es eventuell erforderlich sein, die - Schriftumschaltung dafür explizit aufzuheben. -\end{Example} -Gedacht war die Umgebung ursprünglich für Strukturen wie »Voraussetzung, -Aussage, Beweis« oder »Gegeben, Gesucht, Lösung«, wie man sie in -Vorlesungsskripten häufiger findet. Inzwischen findet die Umgebung aber ganz -unterschiedliche Anwendungen. So wurde die Umgebung für Beispiele in dieser -Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{labeling}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{item}% - - -\ifCommonscrextend\else -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{verse}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{verse} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{verse}% -Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung wird normalerweise nicht als Listenumgebung -wahrgenommen, da hier nicht mit \Macro{item} gearbeitet wird. Stattdessen wird -wie innerhalb der \Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung mit festen Zeilenumbrüchen -gearbeitet. Intern handelt es sich jedoch sowohl bei den Standardklassen als -auch bei {\KOMAScript} durchaus um eine Listenumgebung. - -Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung findet hauptsächlich für -Gedichte\Index{Gedichte} Anwendung. Dabei werden die Zeilen links und rechts -eingezogen. Einzelne Verse werden mit einem festen Zeilenumbruch, also mit -\verb|\\|\IndexCmd{\textbackslash} beendet. Strophen werden ganz normal als -Absatz gesetzt, also durch eine Leerzeile getrennt. Häufig findet stattdessen -auch \Macro{medskip}\IndexCmd{medskip} oder \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} -Verwendung. Will man verhindern, dass am Ende eines Verses ein Seitenumbruch -erfolgt, so verwendet man ganz normal \verb|\\*|\IndexCmd{\textbackslash*} an -Stelle von \verb|\\|.% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.verse.example}% - Als Beispiel ein kurzes Gedicht von Wilhelm Busch: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\* - Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\* - Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\* - So irrt sich der. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - Mit dem Resultat: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \vskip-.8\baselineskip% Umbruchkorrektur - \begin{verse} - Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\* - Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\* - Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\* - So irrt sich der. - \end{verse} - \end{ShowOutput} - Bei einem sehr langen Vers wie: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat - immer Reparaturen.\\* - \bigskip - Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, - dem traue nicht, mein Sohn. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - bei dem ein Zeilenumbruch innerhalb des Verses erfolgt: - \begin{ShowOutput} - \vskip-.8\baselineskip% Umbruchkorrektur - \begin{verse} - Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat immer Reparaturen.\\ - \bigskip - Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein - Sohn. - \end{verse} - \end{ShowOutput} - kann mit \verb|\\*| allerdings nicht verhindert werden, dass am - Zeilenumbruch auch ein Seitenumbruch erfolgt. Um dies zu erreichen, müsste - innerhalb der ersten Zeile zusätzlich ein - \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} eingefügt werden: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer\nopagebreak{} - hat immer Reparaturen.\\ - \bigskip - Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie\nopagebreak{} - gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein Sohn. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} -\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext - Hier noch zwei Sprüche, die man immer bedenken sollte, wenn man mit - scheinbar seltsamen Fragen zu {\LaTeX} oder den dazugehörigen Antworten - konfrontiert ist: -\begin{lstcode} - \begin{verse} - Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\* - Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\ - \bigskip - Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\* - Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst. - \end{verse} -\end{lstcode} - \begin{ShowOutput} - \vskip-.8\baselineskip% Umbruchkorrektur - \begin{verse} - Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\* - Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\ - \bigskip - Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\* - Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst. - \end{verse} - \end{ShowOutput} -\fi - In diesen Beispielen wurde übrigens jeweils \Macro{bigskip} verwendet, um - zwei Sprüche voneinander zu trennen. -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{verse}% - - -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturvarianten -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quote}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quote} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quote}% -Dies ist intern ebenfalls eine Listenumgebung und sowohl bei den -Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} zu finden. Der Inhalt der Umgebung -wird im Blocksatz mit beidseitigem Einzug gesetzt. Die Umgebung wird häufig -verwendet, um längere Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Dabei werden Absätze -innerhalb der Umgebung durch einen vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet.% -\EndIndex{Env}{quote}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quotation}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quotation} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quotation}% -Diese Umgebung ist mit \Environment{quote} vergleichbar. Während bei -\Environment{quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet werden, -wird bei \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem Einzug der ersten Zeile -eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den ersten Absatz einer -\Environment{quotation}-Umgebung. Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, -müssen Sie die \Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} voranstellen.% -\EndIndex{Env}{quotation}% - -\else - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quote}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quote}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{quotation}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{quotation} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quote}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{quotation}% -Diese beiden Umgebungen sind intern ebenfalls Listenumgebungen und sowohl bei -den Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} zu finden. Beide Umgebungen -setzen Blocksatz, der rechts und links eingezogen ist. Verwendet werden die -Umgebungen häufig, um längere Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Der Unterschied -zwischen beiden liegt in der Art und Weise, wie Absätze abgesetzt -werden. Während bei \Environment{quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand -gekennzeichnet werden, wird bei \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem -Einzug der ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den -ersten Absatz einer \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung% Umbruchkorrektur -\IfCommon{maincls}{, außer es wird \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent} - vorangestellt.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{. Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die - \Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} voranstellen.}% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.env.quote.example}% - Sie wollen eine kleine Anekdote hervorheben. Also schreiben Sie - unter Verwendung der Umgebung \Environment{quotation}: - % -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[paper=a5,pagesize]{scrartcl} - \usepackage{selinput} - \SelectInputMappings{adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß}} - \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} - \begin{document} - Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich - einst in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: - \begin{quotation} - Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in - Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht - ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem - Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze - in der Hand. - - "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem - Ton, doch bestem Hochdeutsch, - "`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr - gegessen."' - - Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und - entgegnet im Brustton vollster Überzeugung: - - "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' - \end{quotation} - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Das Ergebnis könnte dann so aussehen: - \begin{ShowOutput} -\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext - Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst - in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: -\fi - \begin{quotation} - Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in - Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein - unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem - Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in - der Hand. - - "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, - doch bestem Hochdeutsch, -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext - während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt, -\fi - "`ich habe - seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."' - - Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet - im Brustton vollster Überzeugung: - - "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' - \end{quotation} - \end{ShowOutput} - % - Zum Vergleich sei das Ganze an Stelle von \Environment{quotation} auch - noch mit einer \Environment{quote}-Umgebung gezeigt: - % - \begin{ShowOutput} -\iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext - Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst - in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: -\fi - \begin{quote}\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt} - Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in Stuttgart. Als die - Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich - schäbigem Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in der Hand. - - "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, doch bestem - Hochdeutsch, -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext - während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt, -\fi - "`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."' - - Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet im Brustton vollster - Überzeugung: - - "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' - \end{quote} - \end{ShowOutput} - % -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Env}{quote}% -\EndIndex{Env}{quotation}% -\fi % Umbruchkorrekturvarianten -\fi % \ifCommonscrextend\else - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{addmargin}}% - \OParameter{linker Einzug}\Parameter{Einzug}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{addmargin}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{addmargin*}}% - \OParameter{innerer Einzug}\Parameter{Einzug}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{addmargin*} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{addmargin}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{addmargin*}% -Wie bei % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{den in den Standardklassen und den \KOMAScript-Klassen - vorhandenen Umgebungen }% -\Environment{quote} und \Environment{quotation} handelt es sich bei -\Environment{addmargin} um eine Umgebung, die den Rand\Index{Rand} -verändert. Im Unterschied zu den beiden erstgenannten Umgebungen kann der -Anwender jedoch bei \Environment{addmargin} wählen, um welchen Wert der Rand -verändert werden kann. Des Weiteren verändert die Umgebung den Absatzeinzug -und den Absatzabstand nicht. Es wird auch kein zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand -vor und nach der Umgebung eingefügt. - -Ist nur das obligatorische Argument \PName{Einzug} angegeben, so wird der -Inhalt der Umgebung rechts und links um diesen Wert eingezogen. Ist das -optionale Argument \PName{linker Einzug} hingegen angegeben, so wird links -abweichend von \PName{Einzug} der Wert \PName{linker Einzug} zum Rand addiert. - -Die Sternvariante \Environment{addmargin*} unterscheidet sich nur im -doppelseitigen Satz von der Variante ohne Stern, wobei der Unterschied auch -nur dann auf"|tritt, wenn das optionale Argument \PName{innerer Einzug} -verwendet wird. Dabei wird dann der Wert von \PName{innerer Einzug} zum -inneren Randanteil der Seite addiert. Dies ist bei rechten Seiten der linke -Rand der Seite, bei linken Seiten jedoch der rechte Rand der -Seite. \PName{Einzug} gilt dann für den jeweils anderen Rand. - -Bei beiden Varianten der Umgebung sind für alle Parameter auch negative Werte -erlaubt. % Umbruchkorrektur -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Damit kann man erreichen, dass die Umgebung in den - Rand hineinragt.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Die Umgebung ragt dann entsprechend in den Rand hinein.}% -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.env.addmargin.example}% - Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Anleitung mit kurzen - Quellcode-Beispielen. Um diese sehr stark hervorzuheben, sollen sie mit - horizontalen Linien vom Text abgesetzt und leicht in den äußeren Rand - verschoben werden. Sie definieren sich dafür zunächst eine Umgebung: -\begin{lstcode} - \newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% - }{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% - } -\end{lstcode} -\ifCommonmaincls - \begin{ShowOutput} - \newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% - }{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% - } - Zur Demonstration sei die Definition der Umgebung in der Umgebung selbst - gesetzt: - \begin{QuellcodeRahmen} -\begin{lstcode} -\newenvironment{\QuellcodeRahmen}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% -}{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% -} -\end{lstcode} - \end{QuellcodeRahmen} - Nicht zwingend schön, aber es zeigt den Nutzen. - \end{ShowOutput} -\else - Ein Beispiel für die Verwendung könnte nun so aussehen: - \begin{ShowOutput} - Es wird die Verwendung von \Package{scrextend} - zusammen mit \Class{book} gezeigt: - \newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{% - \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% - \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% - \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% - }{% - \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% - \end{minipage}% - \end{addmargin*}% - }% - \begin{QuellcodeRahmen} -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} -\end{lstcode} - \end{QuellcodeRahmen} - Man beachte, dass hier auch die Titelerweiterung aktiviert wurde. - \end{ShowOutput} -\fi - Das optionale Argument der \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebung sorgt - dafür, dass der innere Rand um den Wert - 1\Unit{em} vergrößert wird. Dafür wird der äußere - Rand um den negativen Wert vergrößert, also in Wirklichkeit um - 1\Unit{em} verkleinert. Dies resultiert in einer - Verschiebung um 1\Unit{em} nach außen. Selbstverständlich kann statt - \PValue{1em} auch eine Länge, beispielsweise - \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}, verwendet werden. -\end{Example} - -Ob eine Seite eine linke oder eine rechte Seite ist, kann übrigens beim ersten -\LaTeX-Durchlauf nicht zuverlässig festgestellt werden. Siehe dazu die -Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen \Macro{ifthispageodd} (\autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.oddOrEven}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.ifthispageodd}) und \Macro{ifthispagewasodd} -(\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd}). - -\begin{Explain} - Im Zusammenspiel von Umgebungen wie Listen mit Absätzen ergeben sich für - Laien häufiger Fragen. Daher widmet sich die weiterführende Erklärung zu - Option \Option{parskip} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.parskip} auch diesem - Thema. Ebenfalls im Expertenteil in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.env.addmargin*} wird die - Problematik von mehrseitigen \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebungen behandelt. -\end{Explain}% -\fi% \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Env}{addmargin}% -\EndIndex{Env}{addmargin*}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Listen} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-14.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-14.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 8c1bc2c398b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-14.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,770 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-14.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-14.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-14.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - -\section{Dokumenttitel} -\seclabel{titlepage}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} geschrieben -wurde. \IfCommon{scrextend}{Es gibt jedoch einen Unterschied:} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{Titel}% - -%\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\looseness=1 }% Umbruchoptimierung -Bei Dokumenten wird zwischen zwei %\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{verschiedenen }% -Arten von Titeln \IfNotCommon{scrextend}{für das gesamte Dokument -}unterschieden. Zum einen gibt es die Titelseiten. Hierbei steht der -Dokumenttitel zusammen mit einigen zusätzlichen Informationen wie dem Autor -auf einer eigenen Seite. Neben der Haupttitelseite kann es dabei weitere -Titelseiten, etwa Schmutztitel, Verlagsinformationen, Widmung oder -ähnliche, geben. Zum anderen gibt es den Titelkopf. Dabei erscheint der Titel -lediglich am Anfang einer neuen \IfNotCommon{scrextend}{-- in der Regel der - ersten -- }Seite. Unterhalb dieser Titelzeilen\Index{Titel>Zeilen} wird -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{das Dokument }beispielsweise mit der Zusammenfassung, -einem Vorwort oder dem Inhaltsverzeichnis -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{fortgesetzt}\IfCommon{scrextend}{fortgefahren}. -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - -\IfCommon{scrextend}{% - Die\textnote{Achtung!} Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend} zum - Dokumenttitel gehören zu den optionalen, erweiterten Möglichkeiten und - stehen daher nur zur Verfügung, wenn beim Laden des Pakets - \OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} gewählt wurde (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, - \autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}).} -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Darüber hinaus kann \Package{scrextend} nicht mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse -zusammen verwendet werden. In allen Beispielen aus -\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} muss daher bei Verwendung von -\Package{scrextend} -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} -\end{lstcode} -durch -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} -\end{lstcode} -ersetzt werden. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{titlepage}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}}% -Mit dieser Option\IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}} wird ausgewählt, ob für die mit -\Macro{maketitle} (siehe \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.maketitle}) gesetzte Titelei eigene -Seiten\Index{Titel>Seite} verwendet werden, oder stattdessen die Titelei von -\Macro{maketitle} als Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf} gesetzt wird. -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\nopagebreak}% -Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter -aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet -werden. - -Mit \OptionValue{titlepage}{true}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}} -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{oder \Option{titlepage} }wird die Titelei in Form von -Titelseiten ausgewählt. Die Anweisung \Macro{maketitle} verwendet -\IfCommon{scrextend}{dabei }\Environment{titlepage}-Umgebungen zum Setzen -dieser Seiten, die somit normalerweise weder Seitenkopf noch Seitenfuß -erhalten. Bei {\KOMAScript} wurde die Titelei gegenüber den Standardklassen -stark erweitert. - -Demgegenüber wird mit -\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}}\OptionValue{titlepage}{false} -erreicht, dass ein Titelkopf (engl.: \emph{in-page title}) gesetzt wird. Das -heißt, die Titelei wird lediglich speziell hervorgehoben, auf der Seite mit -dem Titel kann aber nachfolgend weiteres Material, beispielsweise eine -Zusammenfassung oder ein Abschnitt gesetzt werden. - -Mit\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} der dritten Möglichkeit, -\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% -\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}}, werden nicht nur -Titelseiten aktiviert. Es wird auch dafür gesorgt, dass die erste von -\Macro{maketitle}\IndexCmd{maketitle} ausgegebene Titelseite, also entweder -der Schmutztitel oder der Haupttitel, als Umschlagseite\Index{Umschlag} -ausgegeben wird. Jede andere Einstellung für die Option \Option{titlepage} hebt -diese Einstellung wieder auf. Die Ränder\important{% - \Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\\ - \Macro{coverpagebottommargin}} dieser Umschlagseite werden über -\Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagetopmargin} (oberer -Rand), \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpageleftmargin} -(linker Rand), -\Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagerightmargin} -(rechter Rand) und natürlich -\Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagebottommargin} -(unterer Rand) bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen sind von den Längen -\Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} und -\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} abhängig und können mit -\Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{Bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} sind - Titelseiten voreingestellt. Demgegenüber verwendet \Class{scrartcl} in der - Voreinstellung einen Titelkopf.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Die Voreinstellung ist von der verwendeten Klasse - abhängig und wird von \Package{scrextend} kompatibel zu den Standardklassen - erkannt. Setzt eine Klasse keine entsprechende Voreinstellung, so ist der - Titelkopf voreingestellt.}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{titlepage~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{titlepage}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{titlepage} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{titlepage}% -Grundsätzlich werden bei den Standardklassen und bei {\KOMAScript} alle -Titelseiten in einer speziellen Umgebung, der -\Environment{titlepage}-Umgebung, gesetzt. Diese Umgebung startet immer mit -einer neuen Seite -- im zweiseitigen Layout sogar mit einer neuen rechten -Seite~-- im einspaltigen Modus. Für eine Seite wird der Seitenstil mit -\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty} geändert, so dass weder Seitenzahl -noch Kolumnentitel ausgegeben werden. Am Ende der Umgebung wird die Seite -automatisch beendet. Sollten Sie nicht das automatische Layout der Titelei, -wie es das nachfolgend beschriebene \Macro{maketitle} bietet, verwenden -können, ist zu empfehlen, eine eigene Titelei mit Hilfe dieser Umgebung zu -entwerfen. - -\begin{Example} - Angenommen, Sie wollen eine Titelseite, auf der lediglich oben links - möglichst groß und fett das Wort »Me« steht -- kein Autor, kein Datum, - nichts weiter. Folgendes Dokument ermöglicht das: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \begin{titlepage} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{titlepage} - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \begin{titlepage} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{titlepage} - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Env}{titlepage} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{maketitle}\OParameter{Seitenzahl} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{maketitle}% -Während bei den Standardklassen nur maximal eine Titelseite mit den -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{drei }Angaben Titel, Autor und Datum existiert, können -bei {\KOMAScript} mit \Macro{maketitle} bis zu sechs Titelseiten gesetzt -werden. Im Gegensatz zu den Standardklassen kennt \Macro{maketitle} bei -{\KOMAScript} außerdem noch ein optionales nummerisches Argument. Findet es -Verwendung, so wird die Nummer als Seitenzahl der ersten Titelseite -benutzt. Diese Seitenzahl wird jedoch nicht ausgegeben, sondern beeinflusst -lediglich die Zählung. Sie sollten hier unbedingt eine ungerade Zahl wählen, -da sonst die gesamte Zählung durcheinander gerät. Meiner Auf"|fassung nach -gibt es nur zwei sinnvolle Anwendungen für das optionale Argument. Zum einen -könnte man dem Schmutztitel\Index[indexmain]{Schmutztitel} die logische -Seitenzahl \(-\)1 geben, um so die Seitenzählung erst ab der Haupttitelseite -mit 1 zu beginnen. Zum anderen könnte man mit einer höheren Seitenzahl -beginnen, beispielsweise 3, 5 oder 7, um so weitere Titelseiten zu -berücksichtigen, die erst vom Verlag hinzugefügt werden. Wird ein Titelkopf -verwendet, wird das optionale Argument ignoriert. Dafür kann der Seitenstil -einer solchen Titelei durch Umdefinierung des Makros -\Macro{titlepagestyle}\important{\Macro{titlepagestyle}} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}) verändert werden. - -Die folgenden Anweisungen führen nicht unmittelbar zum Setzen der Titelei. Das -Setzen der Titelei erfolgt immer mit \Macro{maketitle}. Es sei an dieser -Stelle auch darauf hingewiesen, dass \Macro{maketitle} nicht innerhalb einer -\Environment{titlepage}-Umgebung zu verwenden ist. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} in -den Beispielen angegeben, sollte man nur entweder \Macro{maketitle} oder -\Environment{titlepage} verwenden. - -Mit den nachfolgend erklärten Anweisungen werden lediglich die Inhalte der -Titelei festgelegt. Sie müssen daher auch unbedingt vor \Macro{maketitle} -verwendet werden. Es ist jedoch nicht notwendig und bei Verwendung des -\Package{babel}-Pakets\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe \cite{package:babel}) auch -nicht empfehlenswert, diese Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel vor -\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} zu verwenden. Beispieldokumente finden Sie -am Ende des Abschnitts. - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{extratitle}\Parameter{Schmutztitel} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{extratitle}% -\begin{Explain}% - Früher war der Buchblock oftmals nicht durch einen Buchdeckel vor - Verschmutzung geschützt. Diese Aufgabe übernahm dann die erste Seite des - Buches, die meist einen Kurztitel, eben den \emph{Schmutztitel} trug. Auch - heute noch wird diese Extraseite vor dem eigentlichen Haupttitel gerne - verwendet und enthält dann Verlagsangaben, Buchreihennummer und ähnliche - Angaben. -\end{Explain} -Bei {\KOMAScript} ist es möglich, vor der eigentlichen Titelseite eine weitere -Seite zu setzen. Als \PName{Schmutztitel}\Index{Schmutztitel} kann dabei -beliebiger Text -- auch mehrere Absätze -- gesetzt werden. Der Inhalt von -\PName{Schmutztitel} wird von {\KOMAScript} ohne zusätzliche Beeinflussung der -Formatierung ausgegeben. Dadurch ist dessen Gestaltung völlig dem Anwender -überlassen. Die Rückseite des Schmutztitels bleibt leer. Der Schmutztitel -ergibt auch dann eine eigene Titelseite, wenn mit Titelköpfen gearbeitet -wird. Die Ausgabe des mit \Macro{extratitle} definierten Schmutztitels erfolgt -als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \Macro{maketitle}. - -\begin{Example} - Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von oben zurück und gehen davon aus, dass das - spartanische »Me« nur den Schmutztitel darstellt. Nach dem Schmutztitel soll - noch der Haupttitel folgen. Dann kann wie folgt verfahren werden: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge Me}} - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{% - \textbf{\Huge Me}% - } - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi - Sie können den Schmutztitel aber auch horizontal zentriert und etwas - tiefer setzen: -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\vspace*{4\baselineskip} - \begin{center}\textbf{\Huge Me}\end{center}} - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{% - \vspace*{4\baselineskip} - \begin{center} - \textbf{\Huge Me} - \end{center}% - } - \title{It's me} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi% - Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \Macro{title} ist beim Setzen der Titelei - mit Hilfe von \Macro{maketitle} grundsätzlich notwendig, damit die Beispiele - fehlerfrei sind. Sie wird nachfolgend erklärt. -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{extratitle} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{titlehead}\Parameter{Kopf}\\ - \Macro{subject}\Parameter{Typisierung}\\ - \Macro{title}\Parameter{Titel}\\ - \Macro{subtitle}\Parameter{Untertitel}\\ - \Macro{author}\Parameter{Autor}\\ - \Macro{date}\Parameter{Datum}\\ - \Macro{publishers}\Parameter{Verlag}\\ - \Macro{and}\\ - \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{Fußnote} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subject}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{title}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subtitle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{author}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{date}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{publishers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{and}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thanks}% -Für den Inhalt der Haupttitelseite stehen sieben Elemente zur Verfügung. Die -Ausgabe der Haupttitelseite erfolgt als Bestandteil der Titelei mit -\Macro{maketitle}, während die hier aufgeführten Anweisungen lediglich der -Definition der entsprechenden Elemente dienen. - -Der\important{\Macro{titlehead}} -\PName{Kopf}\Index[indexmain]{Titel>Seitenkopf} des Haupttitels wird mit der -Anweisung \Macro{titlehead} definiert. Er wird über die gesamte Textbreite in -normalem Blocksatz am Anfang der Seite ausgegeben. Er kann vom Anwender frei -gestaltet werden. Seine\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{titlehead} -Schrift\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} wird über das Element -\FontElement{titlehead}\important{\FontElement{titlehead}} mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) -gesteuert. Die Voreinstellung ist \autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}} zu entnehmen. - -Die\important{\Macro{subject}} -\PName{Typisierung}\Index[indexmain]{Typisierung} wird unmittelbar über dem -\PName{Titel} ausgegeben. Dabei\ChangedAt{v2.95}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} findet die Schriftumschaltung für das -Element \FontElement{subject}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{subject}% -\important{\FontElement{subject}} Anwendung. Die Voreinstellung, die in -\autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}}% -\ zu finden ist, kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. - -Der\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{Titel} wird in einer sehr großen Schrift -ausgegeben. Dabei\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} findet \IfNotCommon{scrextend}{abgesehen von der Größe -}% Umbruchkorrektur -auch die Schriftumschaltung für das Element -\FontElement{title}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{title}% -\important{\FontElement{title}} Anwendung. Voreingestellt ist die gleiche -Schrift, die für das Element -\FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} verwendet wird (siehe -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). Die Voreinstellungen können -mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert -werden. Die Größe\textnote{Achtung!} ist jedoch davon unabhängig (siehe -\autoref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}). - -Der\important{\Macro{subtitle}} -\PName{Untertitel}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} wird in der über das Element -\FontElement{subtitle}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{subtitle}% -\important{\FontElement{subtitle}} eingestellten Schrift knapp unter dem Titel -ausgegeben. Die Voreinstellung, die \autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}}% -\ zu entnehmen ist, kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{table} -% \centering -% \caption - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% -% \addtokomafont{caption}{\raggedright}% - \begin{captionbeside} - [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Titels}] - {\label{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% - \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Titels} - [l] - \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} - \toprule - Element-Name & Voreinstellung \\ - \midrule - \FontElement{author} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{date} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{dedication} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{publishers} & \Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{subject} & - \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{Large} \\ - \FontElement{subtitle} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{large} \\ - \FontElement{title} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ - \FontElement{titlehead} & \\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} -\end{table}} - -Unter\important{\Macro{author}} dem \PName{Untertitel} folgt der -\PName{Autor}\Index[indexmain]{Autor}. Es kann auch durchaus mehr als ein -Autor innerhalb des Arguments von \Macro{author} angegeben werden. Die Autoren -sind dann mit \Macro{and} voneinander zu -trennen. Auch\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} für die -Autoren\important{\FontElement{author}} kann die Schrift über das gleichnamige -Element \FontElement{author}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{author}, dessen -Voreinstellung \autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}}% -\ zu entnehmen ist, mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. - -Unter\important{\Macro{date}} dem Autor oder den Autoren folgt das -Datum\Index{Datum}. Dabei ist das aktuelle Datum, -\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}, voreingestellt. Es kann jedoch mit \Macro{date} -eine beliebige Angabe -- auch ein leere -- erreicht werden. Die -Schrift\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}\important{\FontElement{date}} wird -über das Element \FontElement{date}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{date} mit -Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) -gesteuert. Die Voreinstellung ist \autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}}% -\ zu entnehmen. - -Als\important{\Macro{publishers}} Letztes folgt schließlich der -\PName{Verlag}\Index[indexmain]{Verlag}. Selbstverständlich kann diese -Anweisung auch für andere Angaben geringer Wichtigkeit verwendet -werden. Notfalls kann durch Verwendung einer \Macro{parbox} über die gesamte -Seitenbreite auch erreicht werden, dass diese Angabe nicht zentriert, sondern -im Blocksatz gesetzt wird. Sie ist dann als Äquivalent zum Kopf zu -betrachten. Dabei ist jedoch zu beachten, dass sie oberhalb von eventuell -vorhandenen Fußnoten ausgegeben wird. Die\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and - \Package{scrextend}} Schrift\important{\FontElement{publishers}} der -Verlagsangaben ist über das Element -\FontElement{publishers}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{publishers} mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) -veränderbar. Die Voreinstellung ist wiederum in -\autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}}% -\ angegeben. - -Fußnoten\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{Fussnoten=Fußnoten} werden auf der -Titelseite nicht mit \Macro{footnote}, sondern mit der Anweisung -\Macro{thanks} erzeugt. Sie dienen in der Regel für Anmerkungen bei den -Autoren. Als Fußnotenzeichen werden dabei Symbole statt Zahlen -verwendet. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass \Macro{thanks} -innerhalb des Arguments einer der übrigen Anweisungen, beispielsweise im -Argument \PName{Autor} der Anweisung \Macro{author}, zu verwenden ist. Die -Schrifteinstellung erfolgt dabei über das Element -\FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}}% -\IndexFontElement{footnote} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.footnotes}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.fontelement.footnote}). % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Beim Paket \Package{scrextend} muss für die Verwendung - dieser Schrifteinstellung allerdings nicht nur die Titelerweiterung - aktiviert sein, es muss auch dafür gesorgt sein, dass die Fußnoten mit - diesem Paket gesetzt werden (siehe Einleitung von \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.footnotes}, \autopageref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.footnotes}). Trifft dies nicht zu, so wird die - Schrift verwendet, die von der Klasse oder anderen für die Fußnoten - verwendeten Paketen vorgegeben ist.% -} - -Bis auf den \PName{Kopf} und eventuelle Fußnoten werden alle Ausgaben -horizontal zentriert. \IfCommon{scrextend}{Die Formatierungen der einzelnen - Elemente}\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Diese Angaben} sind noch einmal kurz -zusammengefasst in \autoref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.mainTitle}} zu finden. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% - \begin{table} -% \centering - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% -% \caption - \begin{captionbeside}[Der Haupttitel]{% - \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% - Schrift\-größe und - Ausrichtung der Elemente der Haupttitelseite bei Verwendung von - \Macro{maketitle}} - [l] - \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.7\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung - \begin{tabular}[t]{llll} - \toprule - Element & Anweisung & Schrift & Satz \\ - \midrule - Seitenkopf & \Macro{titlehead} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{titlehead} & Block- \\ - Typisierung & \Macro{subject} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{subject} - & zentriert \\ - Titel & \Macro{title} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{huge} & zentriert \\ - Untertitel & \Macro{subtitle} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{subtitle} & zentriert \\ - Autoren & \Macro{author} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{author} & zentriert \\ - Datum & \Macro{date} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{date} & zentriert \\ - Verlag & \Macro{publishers} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{publishers} & zentriert \\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:maincls.mainTitle} -\end{table}} - -\begin{Example} - Nehmen wir nun einmal an, Sie schreiben eine Diplomarbeit. Dabei sei - vorgegeben, dass die Titelseite oben linksbündig das Institut - einschließlich Adresse und rechtsbündig das Semester wiedergibt. Wie - üblich ist ein Titel einschließlich Autor und Abgabedatum zu setzen. - Außerdem soll der Betreuer angegeben und zu erkennen sein, dass es - sich um eine Diplomarbeit handelt. Sie könnten das wie folgt - erreichen: -\ifCommonmaincls % Umbruchvarianten -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} - \begin{document} - \titlehead{{\Large Universit"at Schlauenheim - \hfill SS~2001\\} - Institut f"ur Raumkr"ummung\\ - Hochschulstra"se~12\\ - 34567 Schlauenheim} - \subject{Diplomarbeit} - \title{Digitale Raumsimulation mit dem - DSP\,56004} - \subtitle{Klein aber fein?} - \author{cand. stup. Uli Ungenau} - \date{30. Februar 2001} - \publishers{Betreut durch - Prof. Dr. rer. stup. Naseweis} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} - \begin{document} - \titlehead{{\Large Universit"at Schlauenheim - \hfill SS~2001\\} - Institut f"ur Raumkr"ummung\\ - Hochschulstra"se~12\\ - 34567 Schlauenheim} - \subject{Diplomarbeit} - \title{Digitale Raumsimulation mit dem DSP\,56004} - \subtitle{Klein aber fein?} - \author{cand. stup. Uli Ungenau} - \date{30. Februar 2001} - \publishers{Betreut durch Prof. Dr. rer. stup. - Naseweis} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi -\end{Example} - -\begin{Explain} - Ein häufiges Missverständnis betrifft die Bedeutung der - Haupttitelseite. Irrtümlich wird oft angenommen, es handle sich dabei um den - Buchumschlag\textnote{Umschlag}\Index{Umschlag} oder Buchdeckel. Daher wird - häufig erwartet, dass die Titelseite nicht den Randvorgaben für - doppelseitige Satzspiegel gehorcht, sondern rechts und links gleich große - Ränder besitzt. Nimmt man jedoch einmal ein Buch zur Hand und klappt es auf, - trifft man sehr schnell auf mindestens eine Titelseite\textnote{Titelseiten} - unter dem Buchdeckel innerhalb des so genannten Buchblocks. Genau diese - Titelseiten werden mit \Macro{maketitle} gesetzt. - - Wie beim Schmutztitel handelt es sich also auch bei der Haupttitelseite um - eine Seite innerhalb des Buchblocks, die deshalb dem Satzspiegel des - gesamten Dokuments gehorcht. Überhaupt ist ein Buchdeckel, das \emph{Cover}, - etwas, das man in einem getrennten Dokument erstellt. Schließlich hat er oft - eine sehr individuelle Gestalt. Es spricht auch nichts dagegen, hierfür ein - Grafik- oder DTP-Programm zu Hilfe zu nehmen. Ein getrenntes Dokument sollte - auch deshalb verwendet werden, weil es später auf ein anderes Druckmedium, - etwa Karton, und möglicherweise mit einem anderen Drucker ausgegeben werden - soll. - - Seit \KOMAScript~3.12 kann man die erste von \Macro{maketitle} ausgegebene - Titelseite alternativ aber auch als Umschlagseite formatieren lassen. Dabei - ändern sich nur die für diese Seite verwendeten Ränder (siehe Option - \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% - \IndexOption{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}} auf \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.option.titlepage}). -\end{Explain} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subject}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{title}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subtitle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{author}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{date}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{publishers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{and}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thanks}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenkopf}\\ - \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenfuß} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{uppertitleback}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lowertitleback}% -Im doppelseitigen Druck bleibt bei den Standardklassen die Rückseite des -Blatts mit der Titelseite leer. Bei {\KOMAScript} lässt sich die Rückseite der -Haupttitelseite hingegen für weitere Angaben nutzen. Dabei wird zwischen genau -zwei Elementen unterschieden, die der Anwender frei gestalten kann: dem -\PName{Titelrückseitenkopf}\Index{Titel>Rueckseite=Rückseite} und dem -\PName{Titelrückseitenfuß}. Dabei kann der Kopf bis zum Fuß reichen und -umgekehrt. \iffree{Nimmt man diese Anleitung als Beispiel, so wurde der - Haftungsausschluss mit Hilfe von \Macro{uppertitleback} - gesetzt.}{Beispielsweise hätte man die Verlagsinformationen zu diesem Buch - wahlweise mit \Macro{uppertitleback} oder \Macro{lowertitleback} setzen - können.}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{uppertitleback}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lowertitleback}% - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dedication}\Parameter{Widmung} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dedication}% -{\KOMAScript} bietet eine eigene Widmungsseite. Diese Widmung\Index{Widmung} -wird zentriert und in der Voreinstellung mit etwas größerer Schrift -gesetzt. Die\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and - \Package{scrextend}}\important{\FontElement{dedication}} genaue -Schrifteinstellung für das Element -\FontElement{dedication}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{dedication}, die -\autoref{tab:maincls.titlefonts}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.titlefonts} -zu entnehmen ist, kann über die Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. - -Die Rückseite ist wie bei der Seite mit dem Schmutztitel grundsätzlich -leer. Die Widmungsseite wird zusammen mit der restlichen Titelei mit -\Macro{maketitle} ausgegeben und muss daher vor dieser Anweisung definiert -sein. - -\begin{Example} - Nehmen wir dieses Mal an, dass Sie einen Gedichtband schreiben, den - Sie Ihrer Frau widmen wollen. Das könnte wie folgt aussehen: -\ifCommonmaincls% Umbruchkorrekturvariante -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge In Liebe}} - \title{In Liebe} - \author{Prinz Eisenherz} - \date{1412} - \lowertitleback{% - Dieser Gedichtband wurde mit Hilfe von - {\KOMAScript} und {\LaTeX} gesetzt.} - \uppertitleback{% - Selbstverlach\par - Auf"|lage: 1 Exemplar} - \dedication{% - Meinem Schnuckelchen\\ - in ewiger Liebe\\ - von Deinem Hasenboppelchen.} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{book} - \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} - \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} - \begin{document} - \extratitle{% - \textbf{\Huge In Liebe}} - \title{In Liebe} - \author{Prinz Eisenherz} - \date{1412} - \lowertitleback{% - Dieser Gedichtband wurde mit Hilfe von - {\KOMAScript} und {\LaTeX} gesetzt.} - \uppertitleback{% - Selbstverlach\par - Auf"|lage: 1 Exemplar} - \dedication{% - Meinem Schnuckelchen\\ - in ewiger Liebe\\ - von Deinem Hasenboppelchen.} - \maketitle - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\fi - Ich bitte, die Kosenamen nach eigenen Vorlieben zu ersetzen. -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dedication}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{maketitle}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Titel} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-15.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-15.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 862c5387a57..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-15.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,261 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-15.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-15.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-15.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Schlauer Spruch} -\seclabel{dictum}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum} geschrieben -wurde. \IfCommon{scrextend}{Allerdings werden von \Package{scrextend} die - Anweisungen \Macro{setchapterpreamble} und \Macro{setpartpreamble} nicht - definiert. Ob die verwendete Klasse eine entsprechende Anweisung bietet, ist - der Anleitung zur jeweiligen Klasse zu entnehmen.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{Spruch}% -\BeginIndex{}{Zitat}% -\BeginIndex{}{Redewendung}% - -Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element ist ein Zitat oder eine Redewendung, die -rechtsbündig unter oder über einer Überschrift gesetzt wird. Dabei werden der -Spruch selbst und der Quellennachweis in der Regel speziell formatiert. - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dictum}\OParameter{Urheber}\Parameter{Spruch}\\ - \Macro{dictumwidth}\\ - \Macro{dictumauthorformat}\Parameter{Urheber}\\ - \Macro{dictumrule}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictum}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictumtext}\\ - \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictum}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumauthorformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dictumrule}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictum}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumtext}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumauthor}% -Ein solcher Spruch kann mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{dictum} gesetzt werden. -\IfCommon{maincls}{Bei\textnote{Tipp!} \KOMAScript-Klassen wird für Kapitel - oder Teile empfohlen, \Macro{dictum} als obligatorisches Argument der - Anweisung \Macro{setchapterpreamble} beziehungsweise \Macro{setpartpreamble} - (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble}) zu verwenden. Dies ist - jedoch nicht zwingend.\par}% -Der Spruch wird\IfCommon{scrextend}{ hierzu} zusammen mit einem optional anzugebenden \PName{Urheber} in -einer \Macro{parbox}\IndexCmd{parbox} (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) der Breite -\Macro{dictumwidth} gesetzt. Dabei ist \Macro{dictumwidth} keine Länge, die -mit \Macro{setlength} gesetzt wird. Es handelt sich um ein Makro, das mit -\Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden kann. Vordefiniert ist -\lstinline;0.3333\textwidth;, also ein Drittel der jeweiligen Textbreite. Die -Box selbst wird mit der Anweisung \Macro{raggeddictum} -ausgerichtet. Voreingestellt ist dabei -\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, also rechtsbündig. -\Macro{raggeddictum} kann mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert -werden. - -Innerhalb der Box wird der \PName{Spruch} mit \Macro{raggeddictumtext} -angeordnet. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright}, -also linksbündig. Eine Umdefinierung ist auch hier mit \Macro{renewcommand} -möglich. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der für Element -\FontElement{dictumtext}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{dictumtext}% -\important{\FontElement{dictumtext}} eingestellten Schriftart, die mit den -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert -werden kann. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte -\autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}}% -. - -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{table} -% \centering% -% \caption - \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% - \setcapindent{0pt}% - \begin{captionbeside} - [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des - Spruchs}] - {\label{tab:maincls.dictumfont}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% - Voreinstel\-lungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Spruchs} - [l] - \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} - \toprule - Element & Voreinstellung \\ - \midrule - \FontElement{dictumtext} & - \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{small}\\ - \FontElement{dictumauthor} & - \Macro{itshape}\\ - \bottomrule - \end{tabular} - \end{captionbeside} -\end{table} -\fi - -Ist ein \PName{Urheber} angegeben, so wird dieser mit einer Linie über die -gesamte Breite der \Macro{parbox} vom \PName{Spruch} abgetrennt. -Diese\IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{scrextend}}} Linie ist in -\Macro{dictumrule} definiert. Es handelt sich dabei um ein vertikales Objekt, -das mit -% Satzkorrektur listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\dictumrule}{\vskip-1ex\hrulefill\par} -\end{lstcode} -vordefiniert ist. - -Mit \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} wird die Ausrichtung für die Linie und den -Urheber vorgenommen. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{raggedleft}. Auch diese -Anweisung kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden. Die Ausgabe -erfolgt in der Form, die mit \Macro{dictumauthorformat} festgelegt ist. Das -Makro erwartet schlicht den \Macro{Urheber} als Argument. In der -Voreinstellung ist \Macro{dictumauthorformat} als -% Satzkorrektur listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\dictumauthorformat}[1]{(#1)} -\end{lstcode} -definiert. Der \PName{Urheber} wird also in runde Klammern gesetzt. Für das -Element \FontElement{dictumauthor}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{dictumauthor}% -\important{\FontElement{dictumauthor}} kann dabei eine Abweichung der Schrift -von der des Elementes -\FontElement{dictumtext}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{dictumtext}% -\important{\FontElement{dictumtext}} definiert werden. Die Voreinstellung -entnehmen Sie bitte \autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Eine Änderung ist mit -Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) möglich.% -% -\ifCommonmaincls - -Wird \Macro{dictum} innerhalb der Anweisung \Macro{setchapterpreamble} oder -\Macro{setpartpreamble} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble}) verwendet, so ist Folgendes -zu beachten:\textnote{Achtung!} Die horizontale Anordnung erfolgt immer mit -\Macro{raggeddictum}. Das optionale Argument zur horizontalen Anordnung, das -die beiden Anweisungen vorsehen, bleibt daher ohne Wirkung. \Macro{textwidth} -ist nicht die Breite des gesamten Textkörpers, sondern wie bei -\Environment{minipage} die aktuelle Textbreite. Ist also die Breite -\Macro{dictumwidth} als \lstinline;.5\textwidth; definiert und bei -\Macro{setchapterpreamble} wird als optionales Argument für die Breite -ebenfalls \lstinline;.5\textwidth; angegeben, so erfolgt die Ausgabe in einer -Box, deren Breite ein Viertel der Breite des Textkörpers ist. Es wird -empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, bei Verwendung von \Macro{dictum} auf die -optionale Angabe einer Breite bei \Macro{setchapterpreamble} oder -\Macro{setpartpreamble} zu verzichten. - -Sollen\textnote{Tipp!} mehrere schlaue Sprüche untereinander gesetzt werden, -so sollten diese durch einen zusätzlichen Abstand vertikal voneinander -abgesetzt werden. Ein solcher kann leicht mit der Anweisung -\Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} gesetzt werden. - -\begin{Example} - Sie schreiben ein Kapitel über die moderne Ehe. Dabei wollen sie in der - Präambel zur Kapitelüberschrift einen schlauen Spruch setzen. Dieser soll - unter der Überschrift erscheinen. Also schreiben Sie: -\begin{lstcode} - \setchapterpreamble[u]{% - \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, - wer sich ewig bindet \dots}} - \chapter{Die moderne Ehe} -\end{lstcode} - Die Ausgabe erfolgt dann in der Form: - \begin{ShowOutput} - {\usekomafont{disposition}\usekomafont{chapter}\Large - 17\enskip Die moderne Ehe\raggedright\par} - \vspace{\baselineskip} - \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, wer sich ewig bindet~\dots} - \end{ShowOutput} - - Wenn Sie wollen, dass nicht ein Drittel, sondern nur ein Viertel der - verfügbaren Textbreite für den Spruch verwendet wird, so definieren Sie - \Macro{dictumwidth} wie folgt um: -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\dictumwidth}{.25\textwidth} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} - -An dieser Stelle sei noch auf das -Paket~\Package{ragged2e}\important{\Package{ragged2e}}\IndexPackage{ragged2e} -hingewiesen, mit dem man Flattersatz mit Trennung erreichen kann (siehe -\cite{package:ragged2e}).% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictum}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumauthorformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dictumrule}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictum}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumtext}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggeddictumauthor}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Redewendung}% -\EndIndex{}{Zitat}% -\EndIndex{}{Spruch}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-21.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-21.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 9ac4281a20f..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-21.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1029 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-21.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-21.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Text that is common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ============================================================================ - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-21.tex} - [$Date: 2015-08-29 12:11:08 +0200 (Sat, 29 Aug 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: - Setting up defined page styles)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts}{} -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - -\section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} -\seclabel{pagestyle.content} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{% - Obwohl \Package{scrlayer} selbst keine konkreten Seitenstile mit Inhalt - definiert -- die erwähnten Seitenstile \Pagestyle{@everystyle@} und - \Pagestyle{empty} werden ja zunächst ohne Ebenen, also leer definiert --, - stellt es einige Optionen und Befehle zur Beeinflussung von Inhalten zur - Verfügung.% -} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurde erklärt, wie - die Seitenstile \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} - grundlegend vordefiniert sind und wie diese Vorbelegung grundsätzlich - geändert werden kann. Es fehlen jedoch noch Informationen, wie - beispielsweise die Kolumnentitel zustande kommen, wie man die Breite des - Kopfes und Fußes verändern kann und wie man Linien über oder unter Kopf oder - Fuß setzen kann. Obwohl dies eigentlich Fähigkeiten des Pakets - \Package{scrlayer} sind, werden sie nachfolgend erläutert, da diese - grundlegenden Eigenschaften von \Package{scrlayer} einen wichtigen Teil der - Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ausmachen.% -} - -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{% - Dieser Abschnitt ist als Ergänzung zu - \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content} zu verstehen und beschreibt Dinge, - die sich dem Anfänger nicht unbedingt sofort erschließen.% -} - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts\else % ------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %------------------------------------------------ nur scrlayer-scrpage - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{automark}\OParameter{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke}\\ - \phantom{\XMacro{automark}}\Parameter{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke}\\ - \Macro{automark*}\OParameter{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke}\\ - \phantom{\XMacro{automark*}}\Parameter{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke}\\ - \Macro{manualmark}\\ - \Option{automark}\\ - \KOption{autooneside}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \Option{manualmark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{manualmark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autooneside~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \begin{Explain} - Bei den Standardklassen und auch bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen fällt die - Entscheidung, ob mit lebenden oder statischen - Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>lebend}\Index{Kolumnentitel>statisch} - gearbeitet werden soll, über die Wahl des entsprechenden Seitenstils. Wie - bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} erklärt, erhält man bei Wahl - von \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}% - \important{\Pagestyle{headings}} lebende Kolumnentitel. Unter lebenden - Kolumnentiteln versteht man die Wiederholung eines für die Seite oder die - \emph{Kolumne} markanten Textes meist im Kopf, seltener im Fuß der Seite. - - Bei den Artikel-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{article}\and \Class{scrartcl}} - \Class{article} oder \Class{scrartcl} wird für den lebenden - Kolumnentitel\textnote{lebende Kolumnentitel} im einseitigen Modus die - Abschnittsüberschrift, also das obligatorische oder das optionale Argument - von \Macro{section} verwendet. Diese wird als \emph{rechte Marke} - behandelt. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird dieselbe Überschrift als - \emph{linke Marke} verwendet und gleichzeitig die - Unterabschnittsüberschrift als \emph{rechte Marke}. Ausgegeben wird die - linke Marke wie der Name schon sagt auf der linken Seite, während die - rechte Marke auf rechten Seiten -- im einseitigen Modus also auf allen - Seiten -- ausgegeben wird. Beim Setzen der linken Marke für den Abschnitt - werden von den Klassen in der Voreinstellung außerdem auch immer die - rechten Marken gelöscht. - - Bei den Bericht- und Buch-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{report}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{book}\and \Class{scrbook}} wird eine Ebene - höher begonnen. Im einseitigen Modus wird also die Kapitelüberschrift als - rechte Marke gesetzt. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird die Kapitelüberschrift - als linke Marke und die Abschnittsüberschrift als rechte Marke gesetzt. - - Verwendet man hingegen als Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}% - \important{\Pagestyle{myheadings}}\textnote{manuelle Kolumnentitel}, so - existieren zwar die Marken im Kopf genauso und auch die Seitenzahlen - werden gleich platziert, allerdings werden die Marken nicht automatisch - durch die Überschriften gesetzt. Man kann sie dann nur - manuell\important{\Macro{markright}\\\Macro{markboth}} über die später in - diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen \Macro{markright} und - \Macro{markboth} befüllen. - \end{Explain}\par% -}% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{Bei den meisten Klassen bestimmt die Wahl des - Seitenstils, meist \Pagestyle{headings} und \Pagestyle{myheadings}, darüber, - ob die Kolumnentitel automatisch oder manuell erzeugt werden.} -Genau diese Unterscheidung wurde bei \Package{scrpage2} und nun auch bei -\Package{scrlayer} aufgehoben. Statt die Unterscheidung zwischen -automatischen\textnote{lebende und manuelle Kolumnentitel} und manuellen -Kolumnentiteln über den Seitenstil vorzunehmen, gibt es die beiden Anweisungen -\Macro{automark} und \Macro{manualmark}. - -Mit \Macro{manualmark}\important{\Macro{manualmark}} wird dabei auf manuelle -Marken umgeschaltet. Es deaktiviert also das automatische Setzen der -Marken. Demgegenüber kann mit \Macro{automark}\important{\Macro{automark}} und -\Macro{automark*} festgelegt werden, welche Gliederungsebenen für das -automatische Setzen der Marke verwendet werden sollen. Das optionale Argument -gibt dabei die \PName{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke} an, während das -obligatorische Argument die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke} ist. Als -Argument werden jeweils die Namen der Gliederungsebenen angegeben, also -\PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, \PValue{subsection}, -\PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph}. - -Normalerweise sollte die höhere Ebene die linke Marke setzen, während die -tiefere Ebene für die rechte Marke zu verwenden ist. Diese übliche Konvention -ist jedoch keine Pflicht, sondern lediglich sinnvoll. - -Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass nicht alle Klassen Kolumnentitel -für alle Ebenen ermöglichen. So setzen die Standardklassen beispielsweise nie -Kolumnentitel für \Macro{part}. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen unterstützen hingegen -alle Ebenen. - -Der Unterschied zwischen \Macro{automark} und -\Macro{automark*}\important{\Macro{automark*}} liegt darin, dass -\Macro{automark} alle vorherigen Befehle zum automatischen Setzen der Marken -aufhebt, während die Stern-Version \Macro{automark*} lediglich die Aktionen -für die angegebenen Gliederungsebenen ändert. Man kann so auch relativ -komplexe Fälle abdecken.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\iffree{}{\par - Das veraltete Paket - \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} - kennt sowohl \Macro{manualmark} als auch \Macro{automark}, jedoch nicht - \Macro{automark*}. Daher sind die nachfolgenden Beispielen nicht vollständig - auf die Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2} übertragbar.}% -% -\begin{Example} - Angenommen\label{example:scrlayer.mark} Sie wollen, dass wie üblich auf den - linken Seiten eines Buches die Kapitelüberschriften als automatische - Kolumnentitel verwendet werden und auf den rechten Seiten die - Abschnittsüberschriften. Allerdings soll auf rechte Seiten so lange - ebenfalls die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, bis der erste Abschnitt - auftaucht. Dazu wird zuerst \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen und der - Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Das Dokument beginnt also mit: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} -\end{lstcode} - Als nächstes wird dafür gesorgt, dass die Kapitelüberschriften sowohl die - linke als auch die rechte Marke setzen: -\begin{lstcode} - \automark[chapter]{chapter} -\end{lstcode} - Dann sollen die Abschnittsüberschriften zusätzlich die rechten Marken - setzen: -\begin{lstcode} - \automark*[section]{} -\end{lstcode} - Hier findet die Stern-Version Anwendung, da die vorherige - \Macro{automark}-Anweisung weiterhin wirksam bleiben soll. Außerdem bleibt - das Argument für die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke} leer, weil - diese Marke unverändert bleiben soll. - - Alles, was jetzt noch fehlt, ist ein wenig Dokumentinhalt: -\begin{lstcode} - \usepackage{lipsum} - \begin{document} - \chapter{Kapitel} - \lipsum[1-20] - \section{Abschnitt} - \lipsum[21-40] - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Dabei ist das Paket \Package{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} mit seiner - Anweisung \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} sehr nützlich. - - Wenn Sie dieses Beispiel einmal testen, werden Sie sehen, dass die - Kapitelanfangsseite wie üblich ohne Kolumnentitel ist, da sie automatisch im - \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} gesetzt - wird. Seite~2 bis 4 tragen als Kolumnentitel die Kapitelüberschrift. Nachdem - auf Seite~4 eine Abschnittsüberschrift ausgegeben wurde, ändert sich der - Kolumnentitel auf Seite~5 in die Abschnittsüberschrift. Ab dann werden die - beiden Überschriften im Kopf wechselweise ausgegeben, auf linken Seiten die - Kapitelüberschrift, auf rechten Seiten die Abschnittsüberschrift. -\end{Example} -\fi % ******************************************** Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * - -Außer mit den Befehlen kann auch direkt mit den beiden Optionen -\Option{manualmark}\important{\Option{manualmark}\\\Option{automark}} und -\Option{automark} zwischen automatischen und manuellen Kolumnentiteln hin- und -hergeschaltet werden. Dabei verwendet \Option{automark} bei Klassen mit -\Macro{chapter}-Anweisung immer die Voreinstellung -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \automark[section]{chapter} -\end{lstcode} -und bei anderen Klassen -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \automark[subsection]{section} -\end{lstcode} - -Im einseitigen Modus\textnote{einseitiger Satz} will man in der Regel nicht, -dass die untergeordnete Ebene die rechte Marke beeinflusst. Stattdessen soll -auch mit der Voreinstellung nur die höhere Ebene, die beispielsweise im -doppelseitigen Modus in der Voreinstellung alleine die linke Marke -beeinflusst, den Kolumnentitel aller Seiten vorgeben. Diese Voreinstellung -entspricht einer aktiven Option -\Option{autooneside}\important{\Option{autooneside}}. Die Option versteht die -Werte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf -\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Wird die Option deaktiviert, -so wirken sich im einseitigen Satz sowohl das optionale als auch das -obligatorische Argument auf den Kolumnentitel aus.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen,\label{example:scrlayer.mark.oneside} Sie wollen im einseitigen - Modus eines Berichts eine ganz ähnliche Verwendung des Kolumnentitels - erreichen, wie im vorherigen Beispiel. Konkret soll so lange die - Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, bis ein Abschnitt gesetzt wird. Ab dann - soll nur noch die Abschnittsüberschrift verwendet werden. Dazu wird das - Beispiel wie folgt abgewandelt: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrreprt} - \usepackage[autooneside=false]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \automark[section]{chapter} - \usepackage{lipsum} - \begin{document} - \chapter{Kapitel} - \lipsum[1-20] - \section{Abschnitt} - \lipsum[21-40] - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Wie zu sehen ist, wird in diesem Fall keine ergänzende - \Macro{automark*}-Anweisung benötigt. Sie sollten zum Vergleich die Option - \Option{autooneside} auch einmal auf \PValue{true} setzen oder sie - entfernen. Ein Unterschied ist dann ab Seite~4 im Kolumnentitel im Kopf der - Seiten zu sehen. -\end{Example} -\fi% ********************************************* Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * - -Das\textnote{Achtung!} Laden des Pakets selbst hat übrigens noch keine -Auswirkung darauf, ob mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird oder -nicht. Erst die explizite Verwendung einer der Optionen \Option{automark} oder -\Option{manualmark} oder einer der beiden Anweisungen \Macro{automark} oder -\Macro{manualmark} schafft hier klare Verhältnisse.% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par% - Bei Bedarf finden Sie weitere Hintergründe und Beispiele zur Verwendung - dieser Befehle und Optionen mit dem auf \Package{scrlayer} basierenden Paket - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark}.}% -\EndIndex{Option}{autooneside~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{manualmark}% -\EndIndex{Option}{automark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{automark}% -\fi % ******************************************** Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht scrlayer + -\else %-------------------------------------------------------- nur scrlayer - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{draft}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -Die \KOMAScript-Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die -in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} -angegeben sind. Ist die Option aktiviert, so werden alle Elemente der -Seitenstile zusätzlich mit Maßlinien versehen. Dies kann während der -Entwurfsphase manchmal nützlich sein.\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{ Falls diese - Option global gesetzt wurde, die Maßlinien aber nicht gewünscht sind, kann - die Option auch nur für das Paket deaktiviert werden, indem man - \OptionValue{draft}{false} als optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage} - beim Laden des Pakets angibt.}% -\EndIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{Text} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% -Die automatischen, nicht jedoch die manuellen Kolumnentitel verwenden -\Macro{MakeMarkcase} für ihre Ausgabe. Ist die Anweisung beim Laden von -\Package{scrlayer} nicht definiert, so wird sie in der Voreinstellung derart -definiert, dass sie ihr Argument \PName{Text} unverändert ausgibt. Diese -Voreinstellung kann jedoch entweder durch Umdefinierung von -\Macro{MakeMarkcase} oder durch die % -\ifshortversion in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} % -\else später in diesem Abschnitt % -\fi% -dokumentierte Option -\Option{markcase}\IndexOption{markcase}\important{\Option{markcase}} geändert -werden. Je nach Einstellung wird das Argument dann beispielsweise in Groß- -oder Kleinbuchstaben umgewandelt. -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% -\fi %***************************************************** Ende nur scrlayer * - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThisfalse}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %------------------------------------------------ nur scrlayer-scrpage - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{markcase}\PName{Wert} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{markcase~=\PName{Wert}}% -Wie bereits früher erläutert, kann man bei \Package{scrlayer} zwischen -manuellen und automatischen Kolumnentiteln wählen. Bei den automatischen -Kolumnentiteln werden dabei die entsprechenden Marken über die -Gliederungsbefehle gesetzt. In manchen Kulturkreisen ist es im Gegensatz zur -Typografie des deutschsprachigen Raums üblich, die Kolumnentitel in -Großbuchstaben zu setzen. Die Standardklassen machen genau dies in der -Voreinstellung. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} unterstützt das optional -ebenfalls. Hierzu gibt man als Option -\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}}% -\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper} an. Im Endeffekt führt das zu einer -Umdefinierung von \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{MakeMarkcase}, -einer Anweisung, die von \Package{scrlayer} beim Setzen von automatischen -Kolumnentiteln verwendet wird. - -Leider führt die von \LaTeX{} für derartigen -Versalsatz\Index{Versalsatz} vorgesehene Anweisung -\Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} zu einem sehr unzureichenden -Satz, da weder gesperrt noch ausgeglichen wird. Dies liegt teilweise sicher -daran, dass für typografisch korrekten Versalsatz eine Glyphenanalyse -notwendig ist, um die konkrete Form der Buchstaben und ihrer Kombinationen in -den Ausgleich der Sperrung einfließen zu lassen. Der \KOMAScript-Autor -empfiehlt daher, auf Versalsatz für die Kolumnentitel zu verzichten. Dies ist -normalerweise mit -\OptionValue{markcase}{used}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{used}}% -\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used} möglich. Allerdings fügen einige -Klassen selbst beispielsweise bei den Kolumnentitel für Verzeichnisse ein -\Macro{MakeUppercase} oder sogar die \TeX-Anweisung \Macro{uppercase} ein. Für -diese Fälle gibt es auch noch die Einstellung -\OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}}% -\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}, mit deren Hilfe -\Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase} für die Kolumnentitel lokal -deaktiviert werden können. - -Alle für \Option{markcase} möglichen Werte sind noch einmal in -\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{, - \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}} zusammengefasst. -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage -\begin{table} - \centering - \caption[Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{markcase}]{Mögliche Werte für - Option \Option{markcase} zur Wahl von Groß-/Kleinschreibung in - automatischen Kolumnentiteln}% - \label{tab:\csname label@base\endcsname.markcase}% - \begin{desctabular} - \pventry{lower}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=lower}% - definiert \Macro{MakeMarkcase} so um, dass automatische Kolumnentitel - mit Hilfe von \Macro{MakeLowercase} in Kleinbuchstaben gewandelt werden - (Minuskelsatz).% - }% - \pventry{upper}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper}% - definiert \Macro{MakeMarkcase} so um, dass automatische Kolumnentitel - mit Hilfe von \Macro{MakeUppercase} in Großbuchstaben gewandelt werden - (Versalsatz).% - }% - \pventry{used}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used}% - definiert \Macro{MakeMarkcase} so um, dass für automatische - Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung der Groß-/Kleinschreibung - durchgeführt wird.% - }% - \entry{\PValue{ignoreuppercase}, \PValue{nouppercase}, - \PValue{ignoreupper}, - \PValue{noupper}}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}% - definiert nicht nur \Macro{MakeMarkcase} so um, dass für automatische - Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung der Groß-/Kleinschreibung - durchgeführt wird, sondern deaktiviert zusätzlich lokal für alle Ebenen - aller Seitenstile \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase}.% - }% - \end{desctabular} -\end{table} -\fi -\EndIndex{Option}{markcase~=\PName{Wert}}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{leftmark}\\ - \Macro{rightmark}\\ - \Macro{headmark}\\ - \Macro{pagemark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -Will man von den vordefinierten Seitenstilen abweichen, so muss man in der -Regel auch selbst entscheiden können, wo die Marken gesetzt werden sollen. Mit -\Macro{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} platziert man die linke -Marke. Diese wird dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den entsprechenden -Inhalt ersetzt. - -Dementsprechend kann man mit \Macro{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}} -die rechte Marke platzieren, die dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den -entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt wird. Für einige Feinheiten dabei, sei auch auf -die weiterführenden Erklärungen zu \Macro{rightmark} in -\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} verwiesen. - -Mit \Macro{headmark}\important{\Macro{headmark}} kann man sich das Leben -erleichtern. Diese Erweiterung von \Package{scrlayer} entspricht je nachdem, -ob die aktuelle Seite eine linke oder rechte ist, \Macro{leftmark} oder -\Macro{rightmark}. - -Die Anweisung \Macro{pagemark}\important{\Macro{pagemark}} hat genau genommen -nichts mit den Marken von \TeX{} zu tun. Sie dient dazu eine formatierte -Seitenzahl zu platzieren. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -Bei ihrer Ausgabe wird dann auch die Schrifteinstellung für das Element -\FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}} verwendet. Diese -kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} -verändert werden (siehe auch \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}).% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen,\label{example.scrlayer-scrpage.headmark} Sie wollen, dass auch - im einseitigen Modus der Kolumnentitel immer am linken Rand und die - Seitenzahl immer am rechten Rand ausgerichtet wird. Beide sollen im Kopf - platziert werden. Das folgende, vollständige Minimalbeispiel liefert genau - dies: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass{scrreprt} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \ihead{\headmark} - \ohead[\pagemark]{\pagemark} - \chead{} - \cfoot[]{} - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Das Paket \Package{blindtext}\IndexPackage{blindtext} mit seiner Anweisung - \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} wird hier für die komfortable - Erzeugung eines Beispieldokumentinhalts verwendet. - - Mit den Anweisungen \Macro{ihead}\IndexCmd{ihead} und - \Macro{ohead}\IndexCmd{ohead} werden die gewünschten Marken platziert. Dabei - wird die Seitenzahl-Marke mit Hilfe des optionalen Argument von - \Macro{ohead} nicht nur auf den mit - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} gesetzten Seiten, - sondern auch für den auf der ersten Seite automatisch verwendeten - \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} - konfiguriert. - - Da die beiden Seitenstile bereits mit Marken in der Mitte von Kopf und Fuß - vordefiniert sind, werden diese beiden Elemente mit \Macro{chead} und - \Macro{cfoot} gelöscht. Hierzu werden leere Argumente verwendet. Alternativ - dazu hätte man auch - \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles}\IndexCmd{clearpairofpagestyles} \emph{vor} - \Macro{ihead} verwenden können. Diese Anweisung wird jedoch erst in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} auf - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} erklärt - werden. -\end{Example}% - -Bitte beachten Sie, dass das leere optionale Argument bei \Macro{cfoot} im -Beispiel nicht gleichbedeutend mit dem Weglassen dieses optionalen Arguments -ist. Sie sollten das einmal selbst ausprobieren und dabei den Fuß der ersten -Seite beobachten.% -\else % --------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \par % - Bei Bedarf finden Sie ein Beispiel zur - Verwendung der Anweisungen \Macro{headmark} und \Macro{pagemark} mit dem auf - \Package{scrlayer} basierenden Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab - \autopageref{example.scrlayer-scrpage.headmark}.% -\fi% ******************************************* Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -\ifnum\currentversionlt{3.16}\else\par -Sollten die hier vorgestellten Möglichkeiten für Marken einmal nicht -ausreichen, so sind für fortgeschrittene Anwender ab -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark}}% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark}} weitere Anweisungen -dokumentiert. Beispielsweise ist für lexikonartige Dokumente das dort -erklärte \Macro{leftfirstmark} und \Macro{rightbotmark} recht -nützlich.% -\fi -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{chaptermarkformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{paragraphmarkformat}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphmarkformat} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmarkformat}% -Diese Anweisungen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen und auch von -\Package{scrlayer} intern üblicherweise verwendet, um die Gliederungsnummern -der automatischen Kolumnentitel zu formatieren. Dabei wird auch der -\Macro{autodot}-Mechanismus der \KOMAScript-Klassen unterstützt. Bei Bedarf -können diese Anweisungen umdefiniert werden, um eine andere Formatierung der -Nummern zu erreichen.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage% ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen,\label{example:scrlayer-scrpage.sectionmarkformat} Sie wollen, - dass Abschnittsüberschriften im Kolumnentitel ohne Gliederungsnummer gesetzt - werden, so ist das ganz einfach mit: -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{} -\end{lstcode} - zu erreichen. -\end{Example}% -\else % -------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \ Siehe dazu gegebenenfalls das Beispiel in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - auf \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage.sectionmarkformat}.% -\fi % ***************************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partmarkformat}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{paragraphmark}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphmark}\Parameter{Text} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmark}% -Diese Anweisungen werden intern von den meisten Klassen verwendet, um die -Marken entsprechend der Gliederungsbefehle zu setzen. Dabei wird als Argument -lediglich der Text, nicht jedoch die Nummer erwartet. Die Nummer wird -stattdessen automatisch über den aktuellen Zählerstand ermittelt, falls mit -nummerierten Überschriften gearbeitet wird. - -Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} verwenden nicht alle Klassen in allen -Gliederungsebenen eine solche Anweisung. So wird beispielsweise -\Macro{partmark} von den Standardklassen nie aufgerufen, während die -\KOMAScript-Klassen selbstverständlich auch \Macro{partmark} unterstützen. - -Falls diese Anweisungen vom Anwender umdefiniert werden, sollte -er\textnote{Achtung!} unbedingt darauf achten, vor dem Setzen der Nummer -ebenfalls über \Counter{secnumdepth} zu prüfen, ob die Nummern auszugeben -sind. Dies gilt auch, wenn der Anwender \Counter{secnumdepth} selbst nicht -verändert, weil Pakete und Klassen sich eventuell auf die Wirkung von -\Counter{secnumdepth} verlassen! - -Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} definiert diese Anweisungen außerdem bei jedem -Aufruf von \Macro{automark} oder \Macro{manualmark} oder den entsprechenden -Optionen teilweise neu, um so die gewünschten automatischen oder manuellen -Kolumnentitel zu erreichen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partmark}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markleft}\Parameter{linke Marke}\\ - \Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke}\\ - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markleft}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -Unabhängig davon, ob gerade mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln -gearbeitet wird, kann man jederzeit die \PName{linke Marke} oder \PName{rechte - Marke} mit einer dieser Anweisungen setzen. Dabei ist zu beachten, dass die -resultierende linke Marke in -\Macro{leftmark}\IndexCmd{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} die letzte auf -der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ist, während die resultierende rechte -Marke in \Macro{rightmark}\IndexCmd{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}} -die erste auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ausgibt. Näheres dazu -ist den weiterführenden Erklärungen zu \Macro{rightmark} in -\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} zu entnehmen. - -Wird mit manuellen Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gearbeitet, so -bleiben die Marken gültig, bis sie durch erneute Verwendung der entsprechenden -Anweisung explizit ersetzt werden. Bei automatischen Kolumnentiteln können -Marken hingegen je nach Konfigurierung des Automatismus ihre Gültigkeit mit -einer der nächsten Gliederungsüberschriften verlieren. - -Auch im Zusammenhang mit den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle können -diese Anweisungen nützlich sein.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage % +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen,\label{example:scrlayer-scrpage.markboth} Sie schreiben noch vor - dem Inhaltsverzeichnis ein Vorwort über mehrere Seiten, das jedoch im - Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht auftauchen soll. Da Sie aber Trennlinien im Kopf - verwenden, soll der Kolumnentitel das Vorwort dennoch zeigen: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \chapter*{Vorwort} - \markboth{Vorwort}{Vorwort} - \blindtext[20] - \tableofcontents - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Zunächst erscheint das Ergebnis wunschgemäß. Vielleicht erst beim zweiten - Blick fällt aber - auf, dass der Kolumnentitel »\texttt{Vorwort}« im Gegensatz zu den übrigen - Kolumnentiteln nicht im Versalsatz erscheint. Das ist jedoch leicht zu - ändern: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \chapter*{Vorwort} - \markboth{\MakeMarkcase{Vorwort}} - {\MakeMarkcase{Vorwort}} - \blindtext[20] - \tableofcontents - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Wie zu sehen ist, wurde - \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd{MakeMarkcase}\important{\Macro{MakeMarkcase}} - verwendet, um auch den manuell korrigierten Kolumnentitel des Vorworts - entsprechend der automatischen Kolumnentitel des restlichen Dokuments - anzupassen. - - Verschieben Sie nun einmal \Macro{tableofcontents}% - \Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis}\IndexCmd{tableofcontents}% - \important{\Macro{tableofcontents}} vor das Vorwort und entfernen Sie die - \Macro{markboth}-Anweisung. Sie werden entdecken, dass das Vorwort als - Kolumnentitel nun »\texttt{CONTENTS}« trägt. Das liegt an einer Eigenart von - \Macro{chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*}\important{\Macro{chapter*}} (siehe auch - in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} auf - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*}). Soll hier stattdessen kein - Kolumnentitel erscheinen, so ist dies sehr einfach mit \Macro{markboth} mit - zwei leeren Argumenten zu erreichen: -\begin{lstcode} - \documentclass[headsepline]{book} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \begin{document} - \tableofcontents - \chapter*{Vorwort} - \markboth{}{} - \blindtext[20] - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} -\else % -------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - - \ Ausführliche Beispiele für die Verwendung von \Macro{markboth} mit dem von - \Package{scrlayer} abgeleiteten Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} sind in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab - \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage.markboth} zu finden.% -\fi % ***************************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markleft}% - -\fi %********************************************* Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * -\fi %*********************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts * - - -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ auch scrlayer-scrpage + -\else %---------------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage\else %---------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}\Parameter{Gliederungsname} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GenericMarkFormat}% -Diese Anweisung wird in der Voreinstellung zur Formatierung aller -Gliederungsnummern in automatischen Kolumnentiteln unterhalb der -Unterabschnitte und bei Klassen ohne \Macro{chapter} zusätzlich auch für die -Ebene der Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte verwendet, soweit die entsprechenden -Mark-Anweisungen nicht bereits anderweitig definiert sind. Dabei verwendet die -Anweisung in der Voreinstellung -\Macro{@seccntmarkformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntmarkformat}% -\important{\Macro{@seccntmarkformat}}, wenn eine solche interne Anweisung wie -bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen definiert ist. Anderenfalls wird mit -\Macro{@seccntformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntformat}\important{\Macro{@seccntformat}} -eine Anweisung verwendet, die bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen und Pakete -bereitgestellt und von \KOMAScript{} etwas modifiziert wird. Als Argument -erwartet \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} den Namen der Gliederung, also -beispielsweise \PValue{chapter} oder \PValue{section} \emph{ohne} -vorangestellten umgekehrten Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}). - -Durch Umdefinierung dieser Anweisung kann damit die Standardformatierung aller -Gliederungsnummern im Kolumnentitel geändert werden, die darauf -zurückgreifen. Ebenso kann eine Klasse darüber eine andere -Standardformatierung vorgeben, ohne alle Befehle einzeln ändern zu müssen.% -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpageexperts % ++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage-experts + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen,\label{example:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.GenericMarkFormat} Sie - wollen, dass bei allen Gliederungsnummern im Kolumnentitel - eines Artikels die Nummer als weiße Schrift auf einem schwarzen Kasten - ausgegeben wird. Da bei Artikeln mit \Class{article} die Anweisungen - \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% - \important{\Macro{sectionmarkformat}\\\Macro{subsectionmarkformat}} und - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}\IndexCmd{subsectionmarkformat} von - \Package{scrlayer} mit Hilfe von \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} definiert werden, - genügt dafür die entsprechende Umdefinierung dieser einen Anweisung: -\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox,textcolor}] - \documentclass{article} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{xcolor} - \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% - \colorbox{black}{% - \strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}% - } - \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% - \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \enskip - } - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} - Für die Farbumschaltungen werden Anweisungen des Pakets - \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor} verwendet. Näheres dazu ist der - Anleitung zum Paket zu entnehmen (siehe \cite{package:xcolor}). - - Außerdem wird eine unsichtbare Stütze mit \Macro{strut} eingefügt. Diese - Anweisung sollte in keiner ausführlichen \LaTeX-Einführung fehlen. - - Für den Kasten mit der Nummer wird eine eigene Hilfsanweisung - \Macro{numberbox} definiert. Diese wird in der Umdefinierung von - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit - \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect}\important{\Macro{protect}} vor der - Expansion geschützt. Dies ist notwendig, weil sonst durch das - \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}} - für den Versalsatz der Kolumnentitel nicht mehr die Farben »\texttt{black}« - und »\texttt{white}«, sondern die Farben »\texttt{BLACK}« und - »\texttt{WHITE}« verlangt werden, die gar nicht definiert sind. Alternativ - könnte man \Macro{numberbox} auch mit Hilfe von - \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand*} statt mit \Macro{newcommand*} definieren - (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). - - Wollte man dasselbe mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder mit den - Standardklassen \Class{book} oder \Class{report} erreichen, so müsste man - übrigens zusätzlich \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% - \important{\Macro{sectionmarkformat}} und -- je nach Klasse -- - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}\IndexCmd{subsectionmarkformat}% - \important{\Macro{subsectionmarkformat}} beziehungsweise - \Macro{chaptermarkformat}\IndexCmd{chaptermarkformat}% - \important{\Macro{chaptermarkformat}} umdefinieren, da diese bei Verwendung - der genannten Klassen \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} nicht verwenden: -\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox,textcolor}] - \documentclass{scrbook} - \usepackage{blindtext} - \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} - \pagestyle{scrheadings} - \usepackage{xcolor} - \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% - \colorbox{black}{% - \strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}% - } - \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% - \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}% - \enskip - } - \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{% - \GenericMarkFormat{chapter}% - } - \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{% - \GenericMarkFormat{section}% - } - \begin{document} - \blinddocument - \end{document} -\end{lstcode} -\end{Example} -\else % ------------------------------------- nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts - - \par % - Ein ausführliches Beispiel für das Zusammenspiel der Anweisung - \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit den auf - \autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.chaptermark} - erklärten Anweisungen \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und - \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} beziehungsweise \Macro{chaptermarkformat} bei - Verwendung des von \Package{scrlayer} abgeleiteten Pakets - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ist in - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.content}, ab - \autopageref{example:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.GenericMarkFormat} zu finden.% - -\fi % ********************************** Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage-experts * -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GenericMarkFormat}% - -\ifnum\currentversionlt{3.16}\else -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{righttopmark}\\ - \Macro{rightbotmark}\\ - \Macro{rightfirstmark}\\ - \Macro{lefttopmark}\\ - \Macro{leftbotmark}\\ - \Macro{leftfirstmark} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{righttopmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightbotmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightfirstmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefttopmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftbotmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftfirstmark}% -\LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} verwendet für die Seitenstile -normalerweise eine zweiteilige \TeX-Marke. Im Kolumnentitel kann auf den -linken Teil der Marke mit -\Macro{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}}\IndexCmd{leftmark} zugegriffen -werden, während der rechte Teil der Marke über -\Macro{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark} verfügbar -ist. Tatsächlich ist es wohl auch so gedacht, dass \Macro{leftmark} für linke -Seiten und \Macro{rightmark} für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Druck -verwendet wird. Im einseitigen Layout setzen die Gliederungsbefehle der -Standardklassen den linken Teil der Marke hingegen gar nicht erst. - -\TeX{} selbst kennt drei Möglichkeiten auf eine Marke zuzugreifen. Die -\Macro{botmark} ist die auf der zuletzt zusammengestellten Seite zuletzt -gültige Marke. Das entspricht der zuletzt gesetzten Marke der Seite. Wurde auf -der Seite keine Marke gesetzt, so entspricht es der zuletzt gesetzten Marke -auf den bereits ausgegebenen Seiten. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung \Macro{leftmark} -verwendet genau diese Marke, gibt also den linken Teil der letzten Marke der -Seite aus. Dies entspricht auch genau \Macro{leftbotmark}. Im Vergleich dazu -gibt \Macro{rightbotmark} den rechten Teil dieser Marke aus. - -\Macro{firstmark} ist die erste Marke der zuletzt zusammengestellten -Seite. Das entspricht der ersten Marke, die auf der Seite gesetzt wurde. Wurde -auf der Seite keine Marke gesetzt, so entspricht es der zuletzt gesetzten -Marke auf den bereits ausgegebenen Seiten. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung -\Macro{rightmark} verwendet genau diese Marke, gibt also den rechten Teil der -ersten Marke der Seite aus. Dies entspricht auch genau -\Macro{rightfirstmark}. Im Vergleich dazu gibt \Macro{leftfirstmark} den -linken Teil dieser Marke aus. - -\Macro{topmark} ist der Inhalt den \Macro{botmark} hatte, bevor die aktuelle -Seite zusammengestellt wurde. \LaTeX{} verwendet dies selbst -nie. Trotzdem bietet \Package{scrlayer} die Möglichkeit mit -\Macro{lefttopmark} auf den linken Teil dieser Marke und mit -\Macro{righttopmark} auf den rechten Teil zuzugreifen. - -Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass der linke und rechte Teil der -Marke immer nur gemeinsam gesetzt werden kann. Selbst, wenn man mit -\Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} nur den rechten Teil verändert, wird der -linke Teil (unverändert) mit gesetzt. Entsprechend setzen im doppelseitigen -Layout die höheren Gliederungsebenen beim Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings}\important{\Pagestyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings} -immer beide Teile. Beispielsweise verwendet \Macro{chaptermark} dann -\Macro{markboth} mit einem leeren rechten Argument. Das ist auch der Grund, -warum \Macro{rightmark} beziehungsweise \Macro{rightfirstmark} auf der Seite -einer Kapitelüberschrift immer einen leeren Wert zurück gibt, selbst wenn -danach beispielsweise über \Macro{sectionmark} oder indirekt über -\Macro{section} ein neuer rechter Teil der Marke gesetzt wurde. - -Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung einer der hier -erklärten Anweisungen zur Ausgabe des linken oder rechten Teils der Marke -innerhalb einer Seite zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen führen kann. Sie sind -wirklich nur zur Verwendung im Kopf oder Fuß eines Seitenstils gedacht. Daher -sollten sie bei \Package{scrlayer} immer Teil des Inhalts einer Ebene -sein. Dagegen spielt es keine Rolle, ob sie auf den Hintergrund oder den -Vordergrund beschränkt werden, da alle Ebenen erst nach der Zusammenstellung -der aktuellen Seite ausgegeben werden. - -Näheres zum Mark-Mechanismus von \TeX{} ist beispielsweise -\cite[Kapitel~23]{knuth:texbook} zu entnehmen. Das Thema ist dort als -absolutes Expertenwissen markiert. Sollte Sie obige Erklärung also eher -verwirrt haben, machen Sie sich bitte nichts daraus.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftfirstmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftbotmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefttopmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightfirstmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{righttopmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightbotmark}% -\fi - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{@mkleft}\Parameter{linke Marke}\\ - \Macro{@mkright}\Parameter{rechte Marke}\\ - \Macro{@mkdouble}\Parameter{Marke}\\ - \Macro{@mkboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkleft}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkright}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkdouble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@mkboth}% -Innerhalb der Klassen und Pakete kommt es vor, dass Kolumnentitel nur dann -gesetzt werden sollen, wenn automatische Kolumnentitel (siehe Option -\Option{automark} und Anweisung \Macro{automark} auf \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.automark}) aktiviert sind. Bei den Standardklassen -geht dies ausschließlich über \Macro{@mkboth}. Diese Anweisung entspricht -entweder \Macro{@gobbletwo}, einer Anweisung, die ihre beiden Argumente -vernichtet, oder \Macro{markboth}, einer Anweisung, mit der sowohl eine -\PName{linke Marke} als auch eine \PName{rechte Marke} gesetzt wird. Pakete -wie \Package{babel} hängen sich ebenfalls in \Macro{@mkboth} ein, um -beispielsweise noch eine Sprachumschaltung im Kolumnentitel vorzunehmen. - -Will man nun jedoch nur eine \PName{linke Marke} oder nur eine \PName{rechte - Marke} setzen, ohne die jeweils andere Marke zu verändern, so fehlen -entsprechende Anweisungen. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} selbst benötigt -entsprechende Anweisungen beispielsweise im Rahmen der automatischen -Kolumnentitel. Sind \Macro{@mkleft} zum Setzen nur der \PName{linken Marke}, -\Macro{@mkright} zum Setzen nur der \PName{rechten Marke} oder -\Macro{@mkdouble} zum Setzen sowohl der rechten als auch der linken -\PName{Marke} mit demselben Inhalt beim Laden von \Package{scrlayer} nicht -definiert, so werden sie vom Paket selbst definiert. Dabei wird eine -Definition gewählt, die am Zustand von \Macro{@mkboth} erkennt, ob mit -automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird. Nur in diesem Fall setzen die -Befehle auch eine entsprechende Marke.% - -Klassen- und Paketautoren können ebenfalls auf diese Anweisungen -zurückgreifen, wenn sie nur linke oder nur rechte Marken setzen wollen und -auch diese nur, wenn mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkboth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkdouble}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@mkleft}% - -\fi %******************************************* Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * -\fi %******************************************* Ende nicht scrlayer-scrpage * - -\ifshortversion% -\IfCommon{scrlayer}{% - Zu weiteren Möglichkeiten zur Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen - siehe auch \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}.% -}% -\fi - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" -%%% TeX-master: "scrlayer-de.tex" -%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t -%%% End: - -% LocalWords: Seitenstilen Ebenenmodell scrpage headings myheadings plain -% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern -% LocalWords: Standardklassen Seitenstile konsistenteren Befehlssatzes -% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift -% LocalWords: Maßlinien Entwurfsphase Unterabschnittsüberschrift Versalsatz -% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschrift Kapitelüberschrift Glyphenanalyse -% LocalWords: Hilfsanweisung content Expertenwissen Gliederungsebenen diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-4.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 69e7facc15b..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-4.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,132 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-4.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-4.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-4.tex} - [$Date: 2016-04-29 07:56:21 +0200 (Fri, 29 Apr 2016) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: fontsize)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\seclabel{fontOptions} -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfCommon{scrextend}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrextend + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.fontOptions} geschrieben -wurde. -\else %--------------------------------------------------- nicht scrextend - -\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe} - -Die Grundschrift und deren Größe sind zentrale Elemente der Gestaltung eines -Dokuments. Wie in \autoref{cha:typearea} ausgeführt wurde, hängt die -Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern wesentlich davon ab. Die -Grundschrift ist dabei die Schrift, die für die Masse des Textes eines -Dokuments verwendet wird. Alle davon abweichenden Einstellungen, sei es in der -Form, der Dicke, der Neigung oder der Größe, stehen in einer Beziehung zur -Grundschrift. - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fontsize}\PName{Größe} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{Größe}}% -Während von den Standardklassen und den meisten anderen Klassen nur eine sehr -beschränkte Anzahl an Schriftgrößen unterstützt wird, bietet \KOMAScript{} die -Möglichkeit, jede beliebige \PName{Größe} für die Grundschrift -anzugeben. Dabei kann als Einheit für die \PName{Größe} auch jede bekannte -\TeX-Einheit verwendet werden. Wird die \PName{Größe} ohne Einheit angegeben, -so wird \PValue{pt} als Einheit angenommen. \iffree{}{Das genaue Verfahren, - nach dem die Schriftgröße dann eingestellt wird, ist für Experten und - interessierte Anwender in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize} dokumentiert.} - -Wird die Option innerhalb des Dokuments gesetzt, so werden ab diesem Punkt die -Grundschriftgröße und alle davon abhängigen Größen geändert. Das kann -beispielsweise dann nützlich sein, wenn % -\IfCommon{maincls}{der Anhang }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ein weiterer Brief }% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{der Anhang }% -insgesamt in einer kleineren Schriftgröße gesetzt werden soll. Es wird darauf -hingewiesen, dass bei Verwendung nach dem Laden der Klasse die Auf"|teilung -zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern nicht automatisch neu berechnet wird (siehe -\Macro{recalctypearea}\IndexCmd{recalctypearea}, -\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). Wird diese Neuberechnung -jedoch vorgenommen, so erfolgt sie auf Basis der jeweils gültigen -Grundschriftgröße. Die Auswirkungen des Wechsels der Grundschriftgröße auf -zusätzlich geladene Pakete oder die verwendete Klasse sind von diesen Paketen -und der Klasse abhängig. -\IfCommon{maincls}{Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von - \KOMAScript{} angesehen werden, und auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst - passen nicht alle Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene - Änderung der Grundschriftgröße an.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Dabei sind Fehler möglich, die nicht als Fehler von - \KOMAScript{} betrachtet werden und auch die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} selbst - passt nicht alle Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene - Änderung der Grundschriftgröße an.}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler - von \KOMAScript{} angesehen werden.}% - -Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Option sollte keinesfalls als Ersatz für -\Macro{fontsize} (siehe \cite{latex:fntguide}) missverstanden werden. Sie -sollte auch nicht an Stelle einer der von der Grundschrift abhängigen -Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ Bei \Class{scrlttr2} ist - \OptionValue{fontsize}{12pt} voreingestellt.} - -\fi %*********************************************** Ende nicht scrextend * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-5.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-5.tex deleted file mode 100644 index 1c34c49a61e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-5.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,726 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-5.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-5.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-5.tex} - [$Date: 2015-04-04 11:18:50 +0200 (Sat, 04 Apr 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage}{% - \expandafter\newif\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname -}{} -\expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage -\csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname -\makeatother - -\section{Textauszeichnungen} -\seclabel{textmarkup}% -\IgnoreThisfalse -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThistrue\ifCommonmaincls\IgnoreThisfalse\fi\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Kurzfassung (nicht maincls) + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup} geschrieben -wurde. Dabei sind Namen und Bedeutung der einzelnen Elemente in -\else %----------------------------------------- Langfassung (nur maincls) - -\BeginIndex{}{Text>Auszeichnung}% -\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Art}% - -\LaTeX{} verfügt über eine ganze Reihe von Anweisungen zur Textauszeichnung. % -% Umbruchkorrektur -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{Neben der Wahl der Schriftart gehören dazu auch Befehle - zur Wahl einer Textgröße oder der Textausrichtung. }% -Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz}, -\cite{latex:usrguide} und \cite{latex:fntguide} zu entnehmen. - -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage\else -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{textsuperscript}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{textsubscript}\Parameter{Text} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{textsubscript}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{textsuperscript}% -Im \LaTeX-Kern ist bereits die Anweisung -\Macro{textsuperscript}\IndexCmd{textsuperscript} definiert, mit der -\PName{Text} höher gestellt werden kann. Leider bietet \LaTeX{} selbst keine -entsprechende Anweisung, um Text tief\Index{Tiefstellung} statt -hoch\Index{Hochstellung} zu stellen. \KOMAScript{} definiert dafür -\Macro{textsubscript}. % -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Ein Anwendungsbeispiel finden Sie in - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}.} -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Ein Anwendungsbeispiel finden Sie in - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}.} -% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.textsubscript.example}% - Sie schreiben einen Text über den menschlichen Stoffwechsel. Darin kommen - hin und wieder einfache chemische Summenformeln vor. Dabei sind einzelne - Ziffern tief zu stellen. Im Sinne des logischen Markups definieren Sie - zunächst in der Dokumentpräambel oder einem eigenen Paket: - % Umbruchkorrektur: listings-Fehler - \begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\baselineskip] - \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} - \end{lstcode} - \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}}% - Damit schreiben Sie dann: - % Umbruchkorrektur: listings-Fehler - \begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\baselineskip] - Die Zelle bezieht ihre Energie unter anderem aus - der Reaktion von \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 - und \Molek O2 zu \Molek H2\Molek O{} und - \Molek C{}\Molek O2. Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt - sich auf den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. - \end{lstcode} - Das Ergebnis sieht daraufhin so aus: - \begin{ShowOutput} - Die Zelle bezieht ihre Energie unter anderem - aus der Reaktion von - \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 und \Molek O2 zu - \Molek H2\Molek O{} und \Molek C{}\Molek O2. - Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt sich auf - den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. - \end{ShowOutput} - - Etwas später entscheiden Sie, dass Summenformeln grundsätzlich serifenlos - geschrieben werden sollen. Nun zeigt sich, wie gut die Entscheidung für - konsequentes logisches Markup war. Sie müssen nur die - \Macro{Molek}-Anweisung umdefinieren: - % Umbruchkorrektur: listings-Fehler - \begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\baselineskip] - \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{% - \textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}% - } - \end{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\Molek}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}}% - Schon ändert sich die Ausgabe im gesamten Dokument: - \begin{ShowOutput} - Die Zelle bezieht ihr Energie unter anderem aus der Reaktion von - \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 und \Molek O2 zu \Molek H2\Molek - O{} und \Molek C{}\Molek O2. Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt sich - auf den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. - \end{ShowOutput} -\end{Example} -\iffalse % vielleicht in einer späteren Auf-lage -Für Experten ist in \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow}, -\autopageref{desc:experts.macroargs} dokumentiert, warum das Beispiel -funktioniert, obwohl teilweise die Argumente von \Macro{Molek} nicht in -geschweifte Klammern gesetzt wurden.% -\fi -\fi% \ifCommonmaincls -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{textsuperscript}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{textsubscript}% -\fi% \ifCommonscrlayerscrpage - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Befehle}\\ - \Macro{addtokomafont}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Befehle}\\ - \Macro{usekomafont}\Parameter{Element} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomafont}% -Mit\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% - \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} ist es möglich, die -\PName{Befehle} festzulegen, mit denen die Schrift eines bestimmten -\PName{Element}s umgeschaltet wird. Theoretisch könnten als \PName{Befehle} -alle möglichen Anweisungen einschließlich Textausgaben verwendet werden. -Sie\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich jedoch unbedingt auf solche Anweisungen -beschränken, mit denen wirklich nur ein Schriftattribut umgeschaltet wird. In -der Regel werden dies Befehle wie \Macro{normalfont}, \Macro{rmfamily}, -\Macro{sffamily}, \Macro{ttfamily}, \Macro{mdseries}, \Macro{bfseries}, -\Macro{upshape}, \Macro{itshape}, \Macro{slshape}, \Macro{scshape} oder einer -der Befehle \Macro{Huge}, \Macro{huge}, \Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{Large}, -\Macro{large}, \Macro{normalsize}, \Macro{small}, \Macro{footnotesize}, -\Macro{scriptsize} und \Macro{tiny} sein. Die Erklärung zu diesen Befehlen -entnehmen Sie bitte \cite{l2kurz}, \cite{latex:usrguide} oder -\cite{latex:fntguide}. Auch Farbumschaltungen wie \Macro{normalcolor} sind -möglich (siehe \cite{package:graphics} und \cite{package:xcolor}). -\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext - Das Verhalten bei Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die - zu Umdefinierungen führen oder Ausgaben tätigen, ist nicht - definiert. Seltsames Verhalten ist möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar. - \else Die Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die - Umdefinierungen vornehmen oder zu Ausgaben führen, ist nicht vorgesehen. - Seltsames Verhalten ist in diesen Fällen möglich und stellt keinen Fehler - dar.% -\fi - -Mit \Macro{setkomafont} wird die Schriftumschaltung eines Elements mit einer -völlig neuen Definition versehen. Demgegenüber wird mit \Macro{addtokomafont} -die existierende Definition lediglich erweitert. Es wird empfohlen, beide -Anweisungen nicht innerhalb des Dokuments, sondern nur in der Dokumentpräambel -zu verwenden. Beispiele für die Verwendung entnehmen Sie bitte den Abschnitten -zu den jeweiligen Elementen. Namen und Bedeutung der einzelnen Elemente -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{und deren Voreinstellungen }sind -in % -\fi %******************************************* Ende Langform (nur maincls) * -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText} }}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText} }% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} -%, \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} -}% -aufgelistet. % -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Allerdings werden davon in \Package{scrextend} nur die - Elemente für den Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten und die - \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung behandelt. Das Element - \FontElement{disposition} ist zwar auch verfügbar, wird jedoch von - \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel verwendet. -}% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{Die Voreinstellungen sind den jeweiligen - Abschnitten zu entnehmen.}% - -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Kurzfassung (nicht maincls) + -\else %----------------------------------------- Langfassung (nur maincls) - -Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomafont} kann die aktuelle Schriftart auf -diejenige umgeschaltet werden, die für das angegebene \PName{Element} -definiert ist. -\ifCommonmaincls % +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur maincls + -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:maincls.setkomafont.example}% - Angenommen, für das Element - \FontElement{captionlabel} soll dieselbe Schriftart wie - für \FontElement{descriptionlabel} verwenden. Das - erreichen Sie einfach mit: -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{captionlabel}{% - \usekomafont{descriptionlabel}% - } -\end{lstcode} - Weitere Beispiele finden Sie in den Abschnitten zu den jeweiligen - Elementen. -\end{Example} - -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption{% - Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} oder - \Class{scrartcl} mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} - verändert werden kann\label{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}% - }{% - Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})% - }% - \feentry{author}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - Autorangaben im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit \Macro{maketitle}, also das - Argument von \Macro{author} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.author})}% - \feentry{caption}{Text einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder - "~überschrift (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.caption})}% - \feentry{captionlabel}{% - Label einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder "~überschrift; Anwendung - erfolgt nach dem Element \FontElement{caption} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.caption})}% - \feentry{chapter}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{chapter} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter})}% - \feentry{chapterentry}{% - Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene \Macro{chapter} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{chapterentrydots}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% - Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene - \Macro{chapter} abweichend vom Element - \FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{chapterentrypagenumber}{% - Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene \Macro{chapter} - abweichend vom Element \FontElement{chapterentry} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{chapterprefix}{% - Kapitelnummernzeile bei Einstellung \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} oder - \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix})}% - \feentry{date}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - Datum im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit \Macro{maketitle}, also das Argument - von \Macro{date} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.date})}% - \feentry{dedication}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - Widmung nach dem Haupttitel des Dokuments mit \Macro{maketitle}, also das - Argument von \Macro{dedication} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dedication})}% - \feentry{descriptionlabel}{% - Label, also das optionale Argument der \Macro{item}-Anweisung, in einer - \Environment{description}-Umgebung (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.description})}% - \feentry{dictum}{% - mit \Macro{dictum} gesetzter schlauer Spruch (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dictum})}% - \feentry{dictumauthor}{% - Urheber eines schlauen Spruchs; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element - \FontElement{dictum} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.dictum})}% - \feentry{dictumtext}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{dictum}}% - \feentry{disposition}{% - alle Gliederungsüberschriften, also die Argumente von \Macro{part} bis - \Macro{subparagraph} und \Macro{minisec} sowie die Überschrift der - Zusammenfassung; die Anwendung erfolgt vor dem Element der jeweiligen - Gliederungsebene (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.structure})}% - \feentry{footnote}{% - Marke und Text einer Fußnote (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotelabel}{% - Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element - \FontElement{footnote} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotereference}{% - Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnoterule}{% - Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} über dem Fußnotenapparat (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% - \feentry{labelinglabel}{% - Label, also das optionale Argument der \Macro{item}-Anweisung, und - Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der - \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung, in einer \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung - (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{labelingseparator}{% - Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der - \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung, in einer \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung; - Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element \FontElement{labelinglabel} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{minisec}{% - mit \Macro{minisec} gesetzte Überschrift (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.minisec})}% - \feentry{pagefoot}{% - wird nur verwendet, wenn das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen ist - (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% - \feentry{pagehead}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{pageheadfoot}}% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% - Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten - Seitenstilen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% - \feentry{pagenumber}{% - Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% - \feentry{pagination}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{pagenumber}}% - \feentry{paragraph}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{paragraph} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph})}% - \feentry{part}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{part}, jedoch ohne die Zeile mit der Nummer - des Teils (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part})}% - \feentry{partentry}{% - Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene \Macro{part} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{partentrypagenumber}{% - Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene \Macro{part} - abweichend vom Element \FontElement{partentry} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{partnumber}{% - Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils in Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{part} - (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part})}% - \feentry{publishers}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - Verlagsangabe im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit \Macro{maketitle}, also das - Argument von \Macro{publishers} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.publishers})}% - \feentry{section}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{section} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.section})}% - \feentry{sectionentry}{% - Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene \Macro{section} (nur bei - \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{sectionentrydots}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrartcl}}% - Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene - \Macro{section} abweichend vom Element - \FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} (nur bei - \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{sectionentrypagenumber}{% - Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene \Macro{section} - abweichend vom Element \FontElement{sectionentry} (nur bei - \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% - \feentry{sectioning}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{disposition}}% - \feentry{subject}{% - Typisierung des Dokuments, also das Argument von \Macro{subject} auf der - Haupttitelseite mit \Macro{maketitle} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subject})}% - \feentry{subparagraph}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{subparagraph} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph})}% - \feentry{subsection}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{subsection} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subsection})}% - \feentry{subsubsection}{% - Überschrift der Ebene \Macro{subsubsection} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection})}% - \feentry{subtitle}{% - Untertitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von \Macro{subtitle} auf der - Haupttitelseite mit \Macro{maketitle} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.title})}% - \feentry{title}{% - Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von \Macro{title} bei - Verwendung von \Macro{maketitle} (bezüglich der Größe des Haupttitels - siehe die ergänzenden Bemerkungen im Text von - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} ab \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.title})}% - \feentry{titlehead}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% - Kopf über dem Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von - \Macro{titlehead} mit \Macro{maketitle} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead})}% -\end{desclist} -% -\fi % *************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\ifCommonscrextend % +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrextend + -\begin{Example} - Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass der Titel in Serifenschrift und rot gesetzt - wird. Das erreichen Sie einfach mit: -\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs=color] - \setkomafont{title}{% - \color{red}% - } -\end{lstcode} - Für die Anweisung \Macro{color}\PParameter{red} wird das Paket - \Package{color} oder \Package{xcolor} benötigt. Die zusätzliche Angabe von - \Macro{normalfont} ist in diesem Beispiel deshalb nicht notwendig, weil - diese Anweisung bereits in der Definition des Titels enthalten - ist. Das\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel setzt voraus, dass - \OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} gesetzt ist (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, - \autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). -\end{Example} -\fi % ************************************************* Ende nur scrextend * -\ifCommonscrlttr % ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlttr2 + -\par -Ein allgemeines Beispiel für die Anwendung von \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{usekomafont} finden Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.setkomafont.example}. -\fi % ************************************************** Ende nur scrlttr2 * -\fi %***************************************** Ende Langform (nur maincls) * -\ifCommonscrlttr % ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlttr2 + -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption{% - Elemente, deren Schrift bei der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} mit - \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden - kann\label{tab:scrlttr2.elementsWithoutText}% - }{% - Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})% - }% - \feentry{addressee}{Name und Anschrift im Anschriftfenster - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield})}% - \feentry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für einen Fensterbriefumschlag - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress})}% - \feentry{descriptionlabel}{Label, also das optionale Argument von - \Macro{item}, in einer \Environment{description}-Umgebung - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.description})}% - \feentry{foldmark}{Faltmarke auf dem Briefpapier; ermöglicht Änderung der - Linienfarbe (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks})}% - \feentry{footnote}{% - Marke und Text einer Fußnote (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotelabel}{% - Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element - \FontElement{footnote} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnotereference}{% - Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% - \feentry{footnoterule}{% - Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} über dem Fußnotenapparat - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% - \feentry{fromaddress}{Absenderadresse im Briefkopf - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress})}% - \feentry{fromname}{Name des Absenders im Briefkopf abweichend von - \PValue{fromaddress} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname})}% - \feentry{fromrule}{Linie im Absender im Briefkopf; gedacht für - Farbänderungen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule})}% - \feentry{labelinglabel}{% - Label, also das optionale Argument der \Macro{item}-Anweisung, und - Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der - \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung, in einer \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung - (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{labelingseparator}{% - Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der - \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung, in einer \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung; - Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element \FontElement{labelinglabel} (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% - \feentry{pagefoot}{% - wird nach dem Element \FontElement{pageheadfoot} für den mit Variable - \Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} definierten Seitenfuß - verwendet oder wenn das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen ist - (\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% - \feentry{pagehead}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{pageheadfoot}}% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% - Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten - Seitenstilen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.fontelement.pageheadfoot})}% - \feentry{pagenumber}{% - Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.fontelement.pagenumber})}% - \feentry{pagination}{% - alternative Bezeichnung für \FontElement{pagenumber}}% - \feentry{placeanddate}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% - Ort und Datum, falls statt einer Geschäftszeile nur eine Datumszeile - verwendet wird (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% - \feentry{refname}{% - Bezeichnung der Felder in der Geschäftszeile - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% - \feentry{refvalue}{% - Werte der Felder in der Geschäftszeile (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% - \feentry{specialmail}{Versandart im Anschriftfenster - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% - \feentry{lettersubject}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% - Betreff in der Brieferöffnung - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% - \feentry{lettertitle}{% - \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% - Titel in der Brieferöffnung - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.title})}% - \feentry{toaddress}{Abweichung vom Element \FontElement{addressee} für die - Anschrift (ohne Name) des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% - \feentry{toname}{Abweichung vom Element \FontElement{addressee} für den - Namen des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% -\end{desclist} -\fi % ************************************************** Ende nur scrlttr2 * -\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage % ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nur scrlayer-scrpage + -\begin{desclist} - \desccaption[{Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} mit - \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden kann, - einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}]% - {Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} mit - \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden kann, - einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung, falls die Elemente beim - Laden von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} nicht bereits definiert sind% - \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}% - }% - {Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})}% - \feentry{footbotline}{% - Linie unter dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footbotline}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach den Elementen - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und - \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird - empfohlen dieses Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer} }% - \feentry{footsepline}{% - Linie über dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footsepline}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach den Elementen - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und - \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird - empfohlen dieses Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \feentry{headsepline}{% - Linie unter dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headsepline}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach den Elementen - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und - \FontElement{pagehead}\IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird - empfohlen dieses Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \feentry{headtopline}{% - Linie über dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headtopline}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach den Elementen - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und - \FontElement{pagehead}\IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird - empfohlen dieses Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \feentry{pagefoot}{% - Inhalt eines Fußes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach dem Element - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} angewandt.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \feentry{pagehead}{% - Inhalt eines Kopfes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten - Seitenstils (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagehead}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach Element - \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} angewandt.\par - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% - Inhalt eines Kopfes oder Fußes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} - definierten Seitenstils (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pageheadfoot}). Das Element - wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} angewandt.\par - Voreinstellung: \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape}% - }% - \feentry{pagenumber}{% - Die mit \Macro{pagemark} gesetzte Paginierung (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagenumber}). Bei einer - etwaigen Umdefinierung von \Macro{pagemark} ist dafür zu sorgen, dass die - Umdefinierung auch ein \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} - enthält!\par - Voreinstellung: \Macro{normalfont}% - }% -\end{desclist} -\fi % ****************************************** Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Kurzfassung (nicht maincls) + -\else %----------------------------------------- Langfassung (nur maincls) - -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomafont}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usefontofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\\ - \Macro{useencodingofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\\ - \Macro{usesizeofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\\ - \Macro{usefamilyofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\\ - \Macro{useseriesofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\\ - \Macro{useshapeofkomafont}\Parameter{Element} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usefontofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useencodingofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usesizeofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usefamilyofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useseriesofkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useshapeofkomafont}% -Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} werden in der Schrifteinstellung -eines Elements auch Dinge vorgenommen, die mit der Schrift eigentlich gar -nichts zu tun haben, obwohl dies ausdrücklich nicht empfohlen wird. Soll dann -nur die Schrifteinstellung aber keine dieser zusätzlichen Einstellungen -ausgeführt werden, so kann statt \Macro{usekomafont} die Anweisung -\Macro{usefontofkomafont} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung übernimmt nur die -Schriftgröße und den Grundlinienabstand, die Codierung -(engl. \emph{encoding}), die Familie (engl. \emph{family}), die Strichstärke -oder Ausprägung (engl. \emph{font series}) und die Form oder Ausrichtung -(engl. \emph{font shape}). - -Mit den übrigen Anweisungen können auch einzelne Schriftattribute -übernommen werden. Dabei übernimmt \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} sowohl die -Schriftgröße als auch den Grundlinienabstand. - -Diese Befehle sollten jedoch nicht als Legitimation dafür verstanden werden, -in die Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente beliebige Anweisungen einzufügen. Das -kann nämlich sehr schnell zu Fehlern führen (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useshapeofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useseriesofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usefamilyofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usesizeofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useencodingofkomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usefontofkomafont}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Schrift>Art}% -\EndIndex{}{Text>Auszeichnung} -\fi %***************************************** Ende Langform (nur maincls) * - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-8.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-8.tex deleted file mode 100644 index bddad797497..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-8.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,320 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-8.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-8.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-8.tex} - [$Date: 2015-07-26 11:18:40 +0200 (Sun, 26 Jul 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Vakatseiten} -\seclabel{emptypage}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} geschrieben -wurde. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{Vakatseite}%% -\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% - -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{Vakatseiten sind Seiten, die beim Satz eines Dokuments - absichtlich leer bleiben. Bei \LaTeX{} werden sie jedoch in der - Voreinstellung mit dem aktuell gültigen Seitenstil gesetzt. \KOMAScript{} - bietet hier diverse Erweiterungen. - - Vakatseiten findet man hauptsächlich in Büchern. Da es bei Büchern üblich - ist, dass Kapitel auf einer rechten Seite beginnen, muss in dem Fall, dass - das vorherige Kapitel ebenfalls auf einer rechten Seite endet, eine leere - linke Seite eingefügt werden. Aus dieser Erklärung ergibt sich auch, dass - Vakatseiten normalerweise nur im doppelseitigen Satz existieren. -% -\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur - Die leeren - Rückseiten im einseitigen Druck werden eher nicht als Vakatseiten - bezeichnet, obwohl sie auf Druckbögen im Ergebnis als solche erscheinen. -% -\fi}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Aber} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Vakatseiten sind bei Briefen eher unüblich. Das liegt - nicht zuletzt daran, dass wahrhaft doppelseitige Briefe recht selten sind, - da Briefe normalerweise nicht gebunden werden. Trotzdem unterstützt auch - \Class{scrlttr2} für den Fall von doppelseitigen Briefen Einstellungen für - Vakatseiten. Da die hier vorgestellten Anweisungen aber in Briefen kaum - Verwendung finden, finden Sie hier keine Beispiele. Bei Bedarf orientieren - Sie sich bitte an den Beispielen in \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.emptypage}.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{cleardoublepage}\PName{Seitenstil}\\ - \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PName{Seitenstil}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PValue{current}}% -Mit Hilfe dieser Option\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} kann man den -\PName{Seitenstil} der Vakatseite bestimmen, die bei Bedarf von der Anweisung -\Macro{cleardoublepage} eingefügt wird, um bis zur gewünschten Seite zu -umbrechen. Als \PName{Seitenstil} sind dabei alle bereits definierten -Seitenstile (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.pagestyle} ab -\autopageref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.pagestyle} und -\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} ab \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) -verwendbar. Daneben ist auch \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} -möglich. Dieser Fall entspricht der Voreinstellung von \KOMAScript{} bis -Version~2.98c und führt dazu, dass die Vakatseite mit dem Seitenstil erzeugt -wird, der beim Einfügen gerade aktuell ist. Ab -Version~3.00\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} werden in der Voreinstellung -entsprechend der typografischen Gepflogenheiten Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{empty} erzeugt, wenn man nicht Kompatibilität zu früheren -\KOMAScript-Versionen eingestellt hat (siehe Option \Option{version}, -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.option.version}). -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.option.cleardoublepage.example}% - Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass die Vakatseiten bis auf die Paginierung leer - sind\iffree{, also mit Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} erzeugt werden}{}. Dies - erreichen Sie \iffree{beispielsweise }{}mit: -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} -\end{lstcode} - Näheres zum Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} ist in - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.plain} - zu finden. -\end{Example} -\fi -\ifCommonscrextend -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage.example} - Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass die Vakatseiten bis auf die Paginierung leer - sind, also mit Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} erzeugt werden. Dies erreichen - Sie beispielsweise mit -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} -\end{lstcode} - Näheres zum Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} ist in - \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.plain} - zu finden. -\end{Example} -\fi -\EndIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PValue{current}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{cleardoublepage~=\PName{Seitenstil}} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublepage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}\\ - \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublestandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleemptypage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% -Im \LaTeX-Kern existiert die Anweisung -\Macro{clearpage}, die dafür sorgt, dass alle noch nicht ausgegebenen -Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden und anschließend eine neue Seite begonnen -wird. Außerdem existiert die Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage}, die wie -\Macro{clearpage} arbeitet, durch die aber im doppelseitigen Layout (siehe -Option \Option{twoside} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twoside}) eine neue rechte Seite begonnen -wird. Dazu wird gegebenenfalls eine linke Vakatseite im aktuellen Seitenstil -ausgegeben. - -Bei {\KOMAScript} arbeitet -\Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} genau in der -soeben für die Standardklassen beschriebenen Art und Weise. Die Anweisung -\Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage} ändert demgegenüber den Seitenstil der leeren -linken Seite zusätzlich auf \Pagestyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}, um den % -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{Kolumnentitel}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf}% -\ zu unterdrücken. Analog dazu wird bei der Anweisung -\Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage} der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} verwendet, um sowohl % -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{Kolumnentitel als auch Seitenzahl}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf als auch Seitenfuß}% -\ auf der leeren linken Seite zu unterdrücken. Die Seite ist damit vollständig -leer. Will man für die Vakatseite einen eigenen \PName{Seitenstil} vorgeben, -so ist dieser als Argument von \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle} -anzugeben. Dabei kann jeder bereits definierte Seitenstil (siehe auch -\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) verwendet werden. - -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Manchmal möchte man nicht, dass Kapitel mit neuen - rechten Seiten, sondern links auf einer Doppelseite beginnen. Dies - widerspricht zwar dem klassischen Buchdruck, kann jedoch seine Berechtigung - haben, wenn die Doppelseite am Kapitelanfang einen ganz speziellen Inhalt - hat. Bei \KOMAScript{} ist deshalb die Anweisung - \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} als Äquivalent zur Anweisung - \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage} definiert, jedoch mit dem Unterschied, - dass die nächste Seite eine linke Seite ist. Entsprechendes gilt für die - Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage} und % - \IfCommon{maincls}{% Umbruchoptimierungsalternative - für die ein Argument erwartende Anweisung }% - \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}.} - -Die Arbeitsweise der Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, -\Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage} und der ein -Argument erwartenden Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} % -\IfCommon{maincls}{ist ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung - \Macro{cleardoublepage} von der in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.open} erklärten Option - \Option{open}\IndexOption{open}\important{\Option{open}} abhängig und - entspricht je nach Einstellung einer der in den vorherigen Absätzen - erläuterten Anweisungen. - -}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{entspricht \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{bei der Klasse - \Class{scrlttr2}}\IfCommon{scrextend}{beim Paket \Package{scrextend}} - ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage} den - entsprechenden, zuvor erklärten Anweisungen\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{ für den - Umbruch zur nächsten ungeraden Seite}.} \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - Die übrigen Anweisungen sind bei \Class{scrlttr2} nur aus Gründen der - Vollständigkeit definiert. Näheres zu diesen ist bei Bedarf - \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage} zu entnehmen.}% -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \label{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage.example}% - Angenommen, Sie wollen innerhalb eines Dokuments als nächstes eine - Doppelseite setzen, bei der auf der linken Seite eine Abbildung in Größe des - Satzspiegels platziert wird und rechts ein neues Kapitel beginnt. Falls das - vorherige Kapitel mit einer linken Seite endet, muss also eine Vakatseite - eingefügt werden. Diese soll komplett leer sein. Ebenso soll die linke - Bildseite weder Kopf noch Fußzeile besitzen. Zunächst wird mit -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=empty} -\end{lstcode} - dafür gesorgt, dass Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil \Pagestyle{empty}, also - ohne Kopf- und Fußzeile gesetzt werden. Diese Einstellung können Sie bereits - in der Dokumentpräambel vornehmen. Die Optionen können alternativ auch als - optionale Argumente von \Macro{documentclass} angegeben werden. - - An der gewünschten Stelle - \IfNotCommon{scrextend}{im Dokument }% Umbruchoptimierung!!! - schreiben Sie nun: -\begin{lstcode} - \cleardoubleevenemptypage - \thispagestyle{empty} - \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,% - height=\textheight,% - keepaspectratio]% - {bild} - \chapter{Kapitelüberschrift} -\end{lstcode} - Die erste Zeile wechselt auf die nächste linke Seite und fügt zu diesem - Zweck bei Bedarf eine komplett leere rechte Seite ein. Die zweite Zeile - sorgt dafür, dass diese linke Seite ebenfalls mit dem Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{empty} gesetzt wird. Die dritte bis sechste Zeile lädt die - Bilddatei mit dem Namen \File{bild} und bringt sie auf die gewünschte Größe, - ohne sie dabei zu verzerren. Hierfür wird das Paket - \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} benötigt (siehe - \cite{package:graphics}). Die letzte Zeile beginnt auf der nächsten -- dann - rechten -- Seite ein neues Kapitel. -\end{Example}% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublepageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoublestandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleemptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenstandardpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% -\EndIndex{}{Vakatseite}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-9.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-9.tex deleted file mode 100644 index a8dccf7307d..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-9.tex +++ /dev/null @@ -1,577 +0,0 @@ -% ====================================================================== -% common-9.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. -% -% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of -% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. -% The latest version of this license is in -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX -% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. -% -% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". -% -% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. -% -% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-9.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 -% -% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, -% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. -% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist -% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt -% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX -% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. -% -% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" -% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). -% -% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. -% -% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. -% ====================================================================== -% -% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide -% Maintained by Markus Kohm -% -% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% -% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind -% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm -% -% ====================================================================== - -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-9.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 (Mon, 24 Aug 2015) $ - KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] - -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - -\section{Fußnoten} -\seclabel{footnotes}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Es gilt sinngemäß, was in - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} geschrieben wurde.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - -\BeginIndex{}{Fussnoten=Fußnoten}% - -\iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext -Selbstverständlich beherrscht \LaTeX{} auch Fußnoten. % -\fi% -\IfCommon{maincls}{Im Unterschied zu den Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} - die Möglichkeit, die Form von Fußnoten zu konfigurieren.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Die Anweisungen zum Setzen von Fußnoten sind in jeder - \LaTeX-Einführung, beispielsweise \cite{l2kurz}, zu finden. \KOMAScript{} - bietet darüber hinaus aber auch noch die Möglichkeit, die Form der Fußnoten - zu verändern. - \iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung - - Ob Fußnoten bei Briefen überhaupt zulässig sind, hängt sehr - stark von der Art des Briefs und dessen Layout ab. So sind beispielsweise - optische Kollisionen mit dem Fuß des Briefbogens oder Verwechslungen mit der - Auflistung von Verteilern oder ähnlichen typischen Elementen von Briefen zu - vermeiden. Dies liegt in der Verantwortung des Anwenders.% - - Da Fußnoten in Briefen eher selten verwendet werden, wurde auf Beispiele - in diesem Abschnitt verzichtet. Sollten Sie Beispiele benötigen, können Sie - solche in \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.footnotes} finden.% - \fi}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Die Fußnoten-Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen% - \ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + - , die in \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} beschrieben sind,% - \fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - \ werden von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls bereitgestellt. In der - Voreinstellung wird die Formatierung der Fußnoten jedoch der verwendeten - Klasse überlassen. Dies ändert sich, sobald die Anweisung - \Macro{deffootnote} verwendet wird, die auf \autopageref{desc:\ifIgnoreThis - maincls\else scrextend\fi.cmd.deffootnote} näher erläutert - wird. - - Die Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Trennlinie über den Fußnoten werden - hingegen von \Package{scrextend} nicht bereitgestellt.% -}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - - -\begin{Declaration} - \KOption{footnotes}\PName{Einstellung} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{footnotes~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{Bei vielen Klassen werden Fußnoten }% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}}Fußnoten werden -}% -im Text in der Voreinstellung mit kleinen, hochgestellten Ziffern -markiert. Werden zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten hintereinander gesetzt, -so entsteht der Eindruck, dass es sich nicht um zwei einzelne Fußnoten, -sondern um eine einzige Fußnote mit hoher Nummer handelt. -Mit\important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}} -\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}\IndexOption{footnotes=~multiple} -werden Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, stattdessen mit -Trennzeichen aneinander gereiht. Das in -\Macro{multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep}\important{\Macro{multfootsep}} -definierte Trennzeichen ist mit einem Komma vorbelegt. Der gesamte Mechanismus -ist kompatibel zu -\Package{footmisc}\IndexPackage{footmisc}\important{\Package{footmisc}}, -Version~5.3d (siehe \cite{package:footmisc}) implementiert. Er wirkt sich -sowohl auf Fußnotenmarkierungen aus, die mit -\Macro{footnote}\IndexCmd{footnote} gesetzt wurden, als auch auf solche, die -direkt mit \Macro{footnotemark}\IndexCmd{footnotemark} ausgegeben werden. - -Es ist jederzeit möglich, mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} auf -die Voreinstellung \OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zurückzuschalten. Bei -Problemen mit anderen Paketen, die Einfluss auf die Fußnoten -nehmen, sollte die Option jedoch nicht verwendet und die Einstellung auch -nicht innerhalb des Dokuments umgeschaltet werden. - -Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von -\Option{footnotes} bietet \autoref{tab:maincls.footnotes}% -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{, \autopageref{tab:maincls.footnotes}}% -.% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{table} - \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{footnotes}}]{Mögliche Werte für - Option \Option{footnotes} zur Einstellung der Fußnoten} - \label{tab:maincls.footnotes} - \begin{desctabular} - \pventry{multiple}{% - Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden durch - \Macro{multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep} voneinander getrennt - ausgegeben.% - \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{multiple}}}% - \pventry{nomultiple}{% - Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden auch - unmittelbar aufeinander folgend ausgegeben.% - \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{nomultiple}}}% - \end{desctabular} -\end{table}}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{footnotes~=\PName{Einstellung}} - - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{footnote}\OParameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{footnotemark}\OParameter{Nummer}\\ - \Macro{footnotetext}\OParameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}\\ - \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}\\ - \Macro{multfootsep} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnote}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnotemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footnotetext}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{multiplefootnoteseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{multfootsep}% -Fußnoten werden bei {\KOMAScript} genau wie bei den Standardklassen mit der -Anweisung \Macro{footnote} oder den paarweise zu verwendenden Anweisungen -\Macro{footnotemark} und \Macro{footnotetext} erzeugt. Genau wie bei den -Standardklassen ist es möglich, dass innerhalb einer Fußnote ein -Seiten"-umbruch erfolgt. Dies geschieht in der Regel dann, wenn die zugehörige -Fußnotenmarkierung so weit unten auf der Seite gesetzt wird, dass keine andere -Wahl bleibt, als die Fußnote auf die nächste Seite zu umbrechen. Im -Unterschied\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} zu den Standardklassen bietet -\KOMAScript{} aber zusätzlich die Möglichkeit, Fußnoten, die unmittelbar -aufeinander folgen, automatisch zu erkennen und durch ein Trennzeichen -auseinander zu rücken. Siehe\important{\Option{footnote}} hierzu die zuvor -dokumentierte Option \Option{footnotes}. - -Will man dieses Trennzeichen stattdessen von Hand setzen, so erhält man es -durch Aufruf von \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}. Diese Anweisung sollten -Anwender jedoch nicht umdefinieren, da sie neben dem Trennzeichen auch die -Formatierung des Trennzeichen, beispielsweise die Wahl der Schriftgröße und -das Hochstellen, enthält. Das Trennzeichen selbst ist in der Anweisung -\Macro{multfootsep} gespeichert. In der Voreinstellung ist dieses als -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \newcommand*{\multfootsep}{,} -\end{lstcode} -definiert. Dieses kann umdefiniert werden. - -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.footnote.example}% - Angenommen, Sie wollen zu einem Wort zwei Fußnoten setzen. Im ersten Ansatz - schreiben Sie dafür -\begin{lstcode} - Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}\footnote{Fußnote 2}. -\end{lstcode} - Nehmen wir weiter an, dass die Fußnoten mit 1 und 2 nummeriert werden. Da - die beiden Fußnotennummern direkt aufeinander folgen, entsteht jedoch der - Eindruck, dass das Wort nur eine Fußnote mit der Nummer 12 besitzt. Sie - könnten dies nun dadurch ändern, dass Sie mit -\begin{lstcode} - \KOMAoptions{footnotes=multiple} -\end{lstcode} - die automatische Erkennung von Fußnotenhäufungen aktivieren. Stattdessen - können Sie aber auch -\begin{lstcode} - Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}% - \multiplefootnoteseparator - \footnote{Fußnote 2} -\end{lstcode} - verwenden. Das sollte auch dann noch funktionieren, wenn die automatische - Erkennung aus irgendwelchen Gründen versagt oder nicht verwendet werden - kann. - - Nehmen wir nun an, dass Sie außerdem wollen, dass die Fußnotennummern - nicht nur durch ein Komma, sondern durch ein Komma gefolgt von einem - Leerzeichen getrennt werden sollen. In diesem Fall schreiben Sie -\begin{lstcode} - \renewcommand*{\multfootsep}{,\nobreakspace} -\end{lstcode} - in Ihre Dokumentpräambel. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} wurde - hier an Stelle eines normalen Leerzeichens gewählt, damit innerhalb der - Reihung der Fußnotenzeichen kein Absatz- oder Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. -\end{Example}% -\fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Beispiele und ergänzende Hinweise sind - \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} ab - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote.example} zu entnehmen.}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnote}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnotemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footnotetext}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{multiplefootnoteseparator}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{multfootsep}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{footref}\Parameter{Referenz} -\end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footref}% -Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} hat man in einem Dokument eine -Fußnote, zu der es im Text mehrere Verweise geben soll. Die ungünstige Lösung -dafür wäre die Verwendung von \Macro{footnotemark} unter Angabe der -gewünschten Nummer. Ungünstig an dieser Lösung ist, dass man die Nummer kennen -muss und sich diese jederzeit ändern kann. \KOMAScript{} bietet deshalb die -Möglichkeit, den -\Macro{label}-Mechanismus\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} auch für -Verweise auf Fußnoten zu verwenden. Man setzt dabei in der entsprechenden -Fußnote eine \Macro{label}-Anweisung und kann dann mit \Macro{footref} alle -weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen. -\ifCommonscrlttr % Umbruchkorrektur über diverse Varianten!!! -\else -\begin{Example} - Sie\label{example:\csname label@base\endcsname.footref} schreiben einen - Text, in dem sie bei jedem Auf"|treten eines Markennamens eine Fußnote - setzen müssen, die darauf hinweist, dass es sich um einen geschützten - Markennamen handelt. Sie schreiben beispielsweise:% -\ifCommonmaincls -\begin{lstcode} - Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem - Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte - Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem - Markeninhaber vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} - stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} - auch noch die verbesserte Version - SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her. -\end{lstcode} - Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit - \Macro{footnote} direkt und zweimal mit \Macro{footref}. -\else\iftrue%\ifCommonscrlttr -\begin{lstcode} - Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem - Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte - Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem - Markeninhaber vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} - stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} - auch noch die verbesserte Version - SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her. -\end{lstcode} - Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit - \Macro{footnote} direkt und zweimal mit \Macro{footref}. -\else -\begin{lstcode} - Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem - Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte - Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem - Markeninhaber, der Firma SplischSplasch, - vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} - stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} - auch noch die verbesserte Version - SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} und das sehr - beliebte - SplischSplaschPlumps\footref{refnote} her. -\end{lstcode} - Es wird dann vier Mal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit - \Macro{footnote} direkt und drei Mal mit \Macro{footref}. -\fi\fi -\end{Example} -\fi -Da die Fußnotenmarken mit Hilfe des \Macro{label}-Mechanismus gesetzt werden, -werden nach Änderungen, die sich auf die Fußnotennummerierung auswirken, -gegebenenfalls zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt, bis die mit \Macro{footref} -gesetzten Marken korrekt sind.% -\ifCommonscrlttr -\par Ein Beispiel zur Verwendung von \Macro{footref} finden Sie in -\autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes} auf \autopageref{example:maincls.footref}.% -\fi -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footref}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{deffootnote}\OParameter{Markenbreite}\Parameter{Einzug}% - \Parameter{Absatzeinzug}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{deffootnote}}% - \Parameter{Markendefinition}\\ - \Macro{deffootnotemark}\Parameter{Markendefinition}\\ - \Macro{thefootnotemark} -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deffootnote}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deffootnotemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thefootnotemark}% -Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen Fußnoten etwas anders als die Standardklassen. -Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text, also die Referenzierung der Fußnote, erfolgt -wie bei den Standardklassen durch kleine hochgestellte Zahlen. Genauso werden -die Markierungen auch in der Fußnote selbst wiedergegeben. Sie werden dabei -rechtsbündig in einem Feld der Breite \PName{Markenbreite} gesetzt. Die erste -Zeile der Fußnote schließt direkt an das Feld der Markierung an. - -Alle weiteren Zeilen werden um den Betrag von \PName{Einzug} eingezogen -ausgegeben. Wird der optionale Parameter \PName{Markenbreite} nicht angegeben, -dann entspricht er dem Wert von \PName{Einzug}. Sollte die Fußnote aus -mehreren Absätzen bestehen, dann wird die erste Zeile eines Absatzes -zusätzlich mit dem Einzug der Größe \PName{Absatzeinzug} versehen. - -\autoref{fig:maincls.deffootnote} % -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{auf \autopageref{fig:maincls.deffootnote} }% -veranschaulicht die verschiedenen Parameter% -\IfCommon{maincls}{ nochmals}% -. Die Voreinstellung in den \KOMAScript-Klassen entspricht folgender -Definition: -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren! -\ifCommonscrextend -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{% - \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{% - \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}% - } -\end{lstcode} -\fi -Dabei wird mit Hilfe von \Macro{textsuperscript} sowohl die Hochstellung als -auch die Wahl einer kleineren Schrift erreicht. Die Anweisung -\Macro{thefootnotemark} liefert die aktuelle Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche -Formatierung.% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ Das Paket \Package{scrextend} überlässt hingegen in der - Voreinstellung das Setzen der Fußnoten der verwendeten Klasse. Das Laden des - Pakets allein sollte daher noch zu keinerlei Änderungen bei der Formatierung - der Fußnoten oder der Fußnotenmarken führen. Zur Übernahme der - Voreinstellungen der \KOMAScript-Klassen muss man vielmehr obige Einstellung - selbst vornehmen. Dazu kann obige Code-Zeile beispielsweise unmittelbar nach - dem Laden von \Package{scrextend} eingefügt werden.}% - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% -\begin{figure} -% \centering - \KOMAoption{captions}{bottombeside} - \setcapindent{0pt}% - \begin{captionbeside}[{Parameter für die Darstellung der - Fußnoten}]% - {\label{fig:maincls.deffootnote}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% - \mbox{Parameter} für die Darstellung der Fußnoten}% - [l] - \setlength{\unitlength}{1.02mm} - \begin{picture}(95,22) - \thinlines - % frame of following paragraph - \put(5,0){\line(1,0){90}} - \put(5,0){\line(0,1){5}} - \put(10,5){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,5){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(95,0){\line(0,1){10}} - \put(10,10){\line(1,0){85}} - % frame of first paragraph - \put(5,11){\line(1,0){90}} - \put(5,11){\line(0,1){5}} - \put(15,16){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,16){\line(1,0){10}} - \put(95,11){\line(0,1){10}} - \put(15,21){\line(1,0){80}} - % box of the footnote mark - \put(0,16.5){\framebox(14.5,4.5){\mbox{}}} - % description of paragraphs - \put(45,16){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\textsf{erster Absatz einer Fußnote}}} - \put(45,5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\textsf{folgender Absatz einer Fußnote}}} - % help lines - \thicklines - \multiput(0,0)(0,3){7}{\line(0,1){2}} - \multiput(5,0)(0,3){3}{\line(0,1){2}} - % parameters - \put(2,7){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(5,7){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(15,7){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(15,7){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Absatzeinzug}}} - % - \put(-3,13){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(0,13){\line(1,0){5}} - \put(10,13){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(10,13){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Einzug}}} - % - \put(-3,19){\vector(1,0){3}} - \put(0,19){\line(1,0){14.5}} - \put(19.5,19){\vector(-1,0){5}} - \put(19.5,19){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Markenbreite}}} - \end{picture} - \end{captionbeside} -\end{figure}} - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnote}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}% -Auf\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} die Fußnote einschließlich der Markierung findet außerdem -die für das Element \FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}} -eingestellte Schriftart Anwendung. Die % Umbruchkorrekturvarianten -\IfCommon{maincls}{davon abweichende }% -Schriftart der Markierung kann % -\IfNotCommon{maincls}{jedoch }% -mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) für das -Element \FontElement{footnotelabel}\important{\FontElement{footnotelabel}} -davon abweichend eingestellt werden. Siehe hierzu auch % -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, \autopageref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}}% -. Voreingestellt ist jeweils keine Umschaltung der Schrift.% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{ Die Elemente finden bei scrextend jedoch nur dann - Anwendung, wenn die Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden, also - \Macro{deffootnote} verwendet wurde.}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnote}% - -Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text wird getrennt von der Markierung vor der -Fußnote definiert. Dies geschieht mit der Anweisung -\Macro{deffootnotemark}. Voreingestellt ist hier: -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] - \deffootnotemark{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} -Dabei findet\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} die Schriftart für das Element -\FontElement{footnotereference}\IndexFontElement{footnotereference}% -\important{\FontElement{footnotereference}} Anwendung -(siehe % -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}, \autopageref{tab:\csname - label@base\endcsname.elementsWithoutText}}% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}}% -). Die Markierungen im Text und in der Fußnote selbst sind also identisch. Die -Schriftart kann mit den Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:\csname - label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) jedoch geändert werden% -\IfCommon{scrextend}{, sobald die Anweisung \Macro{deffootnotemark} verwendet - wird}% -. - -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.deffootnote.example}% - Relativ\textnote{Tipp!} häufig wird gewünscht, dass die Markierung in der - Fußnote selbst weder hochgestellt noch kleiner gesetzt wird. Dabei soll sie - aber nicht direkt am Text kleben, sondern geringfügig davor stehen. Dies - kann zum einen wie folgt erreicht werden: -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote{1em}{1em}{\thefootnotemark\ } -\end{lstcode} - Die Fußnotenmarkierung und das folgende Leerzeichen wird also - rechtsbündig in eine Box der Breite 1\Unit{em} gesetzt. Die folgenden - Zeilen der Fußnote werden gegenüber dem linken Rand ebenfalls um 1\Unit{em} - eingezogen. - - Eine\textnote{Tipp!} weitere, oft gefragte Formatierung sind linksbündige - Fußnotenmarkierungen in der Fußnote. Diese können mit folgender Definition - erhalten werden: -\ifCommonscrextend -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{% - \makebox[1.5em][l]{\thefootnotemark}} -\end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{% - \makebox[1.5em][l]{\thefootnotemark}% - } -\end{lstcode} -\fi - - Sollen jedoch die Fußnoten insgesamt lediglich in einer anderen Schriftart, - beispielsweise serifenlos gesetzt werden, so ist dies ganz einfach mit Hilfe - der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) zu lösen: -\begin{lstcode} - \setkomafont{footnote}{\sffamily} -\end{lstcode}% -\end{Example}% -\IfNotCommon{scrextend}{Wie die Beispiele zeigen, ermöglicht {\KOMAScript} mit - dieser einfachen Benutzerschnittstelle eine große Vielfalt unterschiedlicher - Fußnotenformatierungen.}% -\fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Beispiele finden Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote}.}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deffootnote}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deffootnotemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thefootnotemark}% - -\begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{Höhe}\Parameter{Länge}% -\end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootnoterule}% -Üblicherweise\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} wird zwischen -dem Textbereich und dem Fußnotenapparat eine Trennlinie gesetzt, die jedoch -normalerweise nicht über die gesamte Breite des Satzspiegels geht. Mit Hilfe -dieser Anweisung kann die genaue Länge und die Höhe oder Dicke der Linie -bestimmt werden. Dabei werden \PName{Höhe} und \PName{Länge} erst beim Setzen -der Linie selbst abhängig von \Macro{normalsize} ausgewertet. Der optionale -Parameter \PName{Höhe} kann komplett entfallen und wird dann nicht -geändert. Ist das Argument \PName{Höhe} oder \PName{Länge} leer, so wird die -jeweilige Größe ebenfalls nicht geändert. Es gibt sowohl beim Setzen als auch -bei Verwendung der Größen für unplausible Werte eine Warnung. - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}% -Die Farbe\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} der Linie -kann über das Element -\FontElement{footnoterule}\important{\FontElement{footnoterule}} mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:\csname label@base\endcsname.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:\csname label@base\endcsname.cmd.setkomafont}) eingestellt -werden. Voreingestellt ist hierbei keinerlei Änderung von Schrift oder -Farbe. Um die Farbe ändern zu können, muss außerdem ein Farbpaket wie -\Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}\important{\Package{xcolor}} geladen -sein.% -% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootnoterule}% -\EndIndex{}{Fussnoten=Fußnoten} - -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - - -%%% Local Variables: -%%% mode: latex -%%% mode: flyspell -%%% coding: iso-latin-1 -%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" -%%% TeX-master: "../guide" -%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..08a97c0c3d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-compatibility.tex @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-compatibility.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-compatibility.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-compatibility.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} +\seclabel{compatibilityOptions} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Kompatibilität} + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions} geschrieben + wurde.\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ Allerdings existiert diese + Möglichkeit bei \Class{scrlttr2} bereits seit Version~2.9t.}{} Falls Sie + also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.compatibilityOptions} + bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next} auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.next} + fortfahren.% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{typearea,maincls}{% + Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der Regel allergrößten + Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer wieder exakt + dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen führen aber Verbesserungen + und Korrekturen am Paket zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim + Umbruch. Dies ist jedoch manchmal eher unerwünscht.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Wer seine Dokumente im Quellcode archiviert, legt in der Regel + allergrößten Wert darauf, dass bei zukünftigen \LaTeX{}-Läufen immer + wieder exakt dasselbe Ergebnis erzielt wird. In einigen Fällen ist es aber + so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der Klasse zu Änderungen im + Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, führen.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In einigen Fällen ist es so, dass Verbesserungen und Korrekturen an der + Klasse zu Änderungen im Verhalten, inbesondere beim Umbruch, + führen. Dies ist jedoch nicht immer erwünscht.% + }{}% + }% +}% + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{version}{Wert} + \OptionValue{version}{first} + \OptionValue{version}{last} +\end{Declaration} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Bei }{Seit }% +\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% +\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% +\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{% + Version~3.01b besteht bei \Package{typearea} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Version~2.96a besteht bei \KOMAScript{} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Version~2.9t besteht bei \Class{scrlttr2} }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\Package{scrextend} besteht }{% + \InteralCommonFileUsageError }% + }% + }% +}% +die Wahl, ob eine Quelldatei soweit irgend möglich auch zukünftig bei einem +\LaTeX{}-Lauf zu exakt demselben Ergebnis führen soll oder ob jeweils +entsprechend der Anpassungen der neusten +Version\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{ der Klasse}{} zu setzen +ist. Zu welcher Version Kompatibilität herzustellen ist, wird dabei über die +Option \Option{version} festgelegt. Kompatibilität zur ältesten unterstützten +\KOMAScript-Version kann mit +\OptionValue{version}{first}\important{\OptionValue{version}{first}} oder +\OptionValue{version}{2.9} oder \OptionValue{version}{2.9t} erreicht +werden. Bei Angabe einer unbekannten Version als \PName{Wert} wird eine +Warnung ausgegeben und sicherheitshalber \OptionValue{version}{first} +angenommen. + +Mit \OptionValue{version}{last} kann die jeweils neuste Version ausgewählt +werden. In diesem Fall wird also auf zukünftige Kompatibilität +verzichtet. Wird die Option ohne Wertangabe verwendet, so wird ebenfalls +\PValue{last} angenommen. \ChangedAt{v3.01a}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}\and + \Package{scrextend}}Dies entspricht auch der Voreinstellung, solange keine +obsolete Option verwendet wird. + +Bei\textnote{Achtung!} der Verwendung einer obsoleten Option von +\KOMAScript~2 setzt \KOMAScript~3 automatisch \OptionValue{version}{first}. In +der dabei ausgegebenen Warnung wird erklärt, wie man diese +Kompatibilitätsumschaltung verhindern kann. Alternativ kann man auch nach der +obsoleten Option selbst eine abweichende Einstellung für Option +\Option{version} wählen. + +Die Frage der Kompatibilität betrifft in erster Linie Fragen des +Umbruchs. Neue Möglichkeiten, die sich nicht auf den Umbruch auswirken, sind +auch dann verfügbar, wenn man per Option die Kompatibilität zu einer älteren +Version ausgewählt hat. Die Option hat keine Auswirkungen auf +Umbruchänderungen, die bei Verwendung einer neueren Version durch Beseitigung +eindeutiger Fehler entstehen. Wer\textnote{Tipp!} auch im Fehlerfall +unbedingte Umbruchkompatibilität benötigt, sollte stattdessen mit dem Dokument +auch die verwendete \KOMAScript-Version archivieren. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\begin{Example} + Die Beispielbriefe dieses Kapitels sollen alle Möglichkeiten nutzen, die in + der neusten Version von \KOMAScript{} zur Verfügung stehen. Dazu muss beim + Laden der Klasse die Kompatibilität entsprechend gesetzt werden:% + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em,lastline=1]{letter-0.tex}% + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrektur + Hier wurde einfach mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{last} die neuste + Version gewählt.% + \else% + Um nicht bei jeder neuen Version eine neue Versionsnummer angeben zu + müssen, wurde hier die Möglichkeit des symbolischen Wertes \PValue{last} + gewählt.% + \fi +\end{Example}} + +Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass die Option \Option{version} nach +dem Laden % +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{der Klasse }{% + des Pakets \IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{\Package{typearea}}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\Package{scrextend}}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError }% + }% +} nicht mehr verändert werden kann. Das Setzen mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} ist +% Umbruchkorrektur!!!! +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{scrlttr2,typearea}{für diese Option }{}% +daher nicht vorgesehen.% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +\phantomsection +\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions.end} +\endinput + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8fc8edd2a01 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-dictum.tex @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-dictum.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-dictum.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-dictum.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + + + + +\section{Schlauer Spruch} +\seclabel{dictum}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Spruch}% +\BeginIndex{}{Zitat}% +\BeginIndex{}{Redewendung}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum} + geschrieben wurde. % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Allerdings werden von \Package{scrextend} die Anweisungen + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} nicht definiert. Ob die verwendete + Klasse eine entsprechende Anweisung bietet, ist der Anleitung zur + jeweiligen Klasse zu entnehmen. % + }{}% + Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictum} bereits + gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictum.next} fortfahren.% +} + +Ein häufiger anzutreffendes Element ist ein Zitat oder eine Redewendung, die +rechtsbündig unter oder über einer Überschrift gesetzt wird. Dabei werden der +Spruch selbst und der Quellennachweis in der Regel speziell formatiert. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{dictum}\OParameter{Urheber}\Parameter{Spruch} + \Macro{dictumwidth} + \Macro{dictumauthorformat}\Parameter{Urheber} + \Macro{dictumrule} + \Macro{raggeddictum} + \Macro{raggeddictumtext} + \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} +\end{Declaration}% +Ein solcher Spruch kann mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{dictum} gesetzt werden. +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Bei\textnote{Tipp!} \KOMAScript-Klassen wird für Kapitel oder Teile + empfohlen, \Macro{dictum} als obligatorisches Argument der Anweisung + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} beziehungsweise + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble}) zu verwenden. Dies ist jedoch + nicht zwingend.\par% +}% +Der Spruch wird\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ hierzu}{} zusammen mit einem +optional anzugebenden \PName{Urheber} in einer \Macro{parbox}\IndexCmd{parbox} +(siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) der Breite \Macro{dictumwidth} gesetzt. Dabei +ist \Macro{dictumwidth} keine Länge, die mit \Macro{setlength} gesetzt +wird. Es handelt sich um ein Makro, das mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert +werden kann. Vordefiniert ist \PValue{0.3333\Length{textwidth}}, also ein +Drittel der jeweiligen Textbreite. Die Box selbst wird mit der Anweisung +\Macro{raggeddictum} ausgerichtet. Voreingestellt ist dabei +\Macro{raggedleft}\IndexCmd{raggedleft}, also rechtsbündig. +\Macro{raggeddictum} kann mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert +werden. + +Innerhalb der Box wird der \PName{Spruch} mit \Macro{raggeddictumtext} +angeordnet. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{raggedright}\IndexCmd{raggedright}, +also linksbündig. Eine Umdefinierung ist auch hier mit \Macro{renewcommand} +möglich. % +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictum}\LabelFontElement{dictum}% +\LabelFontElement{dictumtext}% +Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der für Element +\FontElement{dictum}\important{\FontElement{dictum}} eingestellten +Schriftart, die mit den Anweisungen +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann. Die +Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictumfont}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.% + \begin{table} +% \centering% +% \caption + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% + \begin{captionbeside} + [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des + Spruchs}] + {\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.dictumfont}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% + Voreinstel\-lungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Spruchs} + [l] + \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} + \toprule + Element & Voreinstellung \\ + \midrule + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum} & + \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{small}\\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictumauthor} & + \Macro{itshape}\\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \end{table} +}{% + , \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.dictumfont}.% +}% +\EndIndexGroup + +Ist ein \PName{Urheber} angegeben, so wird dieser mit einer Linie über die +gesamte Breite der \Macro{parbox} vom \PName{Spruch} abgetrennt. Diese% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} % +Linie ist in \Macro{dictumrule} definiert. Es handelt sich dabei um ein +vertikales Objekt, das mit +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\dictumrule}{\vskip-1ex\hrulefill\par} +\end{lstcode} +vordefiniert ist. + +Mit \Macro{raggeddictumauthor} wird die Ausrichtung für die Linie und den +Urheber vorgenommen. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{raggedleft}. Auch diese +Anweisung kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden. Die Ausgabe +erfolgt in der Form, die mit \Macro{dictumauthorformat} festgelegt ist. Das +Makro erwartet schlicht den \PName{Urheber} als Argument. In der +Voreinstellung ist \Macro{dictumauthorformat} als +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\dictumauthorformat}[1]{(#1)} +\end{lstcode} +definiert. Der \PName{Urheber} wird also in runde Klammern gesetzt. % +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dictumauthor}\LabelFontElement{dictumauthor}% +Für das Element +\FontElement{dictumauthor}\important{\FontElement{dictumauthor}} kann dabei +eine Abweichung der Schrift von der des Elementes +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum}% +\IndexFontElement{dictum}% +\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum}} definiert +werden. Die Voreinstellung entnehmen Sie bitte +\autoref{tab:maincls.dictumfont}. Eine Änderung ist mit Hilfe der Anweisungen +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) möglich.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Wird \Macro{dictum} innerhalb der Anweisung + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} oder + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble}) verwendet, so ist Folgendes zu + beachten:\textnote{Achtung!} Die horizontale Anordnung erfolgt immer mit + \Macro{raggeddictum}. Das optionale Argument zur horizontalen Anordnung, das + die beiden Anweisungen vorsehen, bleibt daher ohne + Wirkung. \Length{textwidth} ist nicht die Breite des gesamten Textkörpers, + sondern wie bei \Environment{minipage} die aktuelle Textbreite. Ist also die + Breite \Macro{dictumwidth} als \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} definiert und + bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} wird als optionales Argument + für die Breite ebenfalls \PValue{.5\Length{textwidth}} angegeben, so erfolgt + die Ausgabe in einer Box, deren Breite ein Viertel der Breite des + Textkörpers ist. Es wird empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, bei Verwendung von + \Macro{dictum} auf die optionale Angabe einer Breite bei + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble} oder + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble} zu verzichten. + + Sollen\textnote{Tipp!} mehrere schlaue Sprüche untereinander gesetzt werden, + so sollten diese durch einen zusätzlichen Abstand vertikal voneinander + abgesetzt werden. Ein solcher kann leicht mit der Anweisung + \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} gesetzt werden.% + \iftrue% +}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + + \begin{Example} + Sie schreiben ein Kapitel über die moderne Ehe. Dabei wollen sie in der + Präambel zur Kapitelüberschrift einen schlauen Spruch setzen. Dieser soll + unter der Überschrift erscheinen. Also schreiben Sie: +\begin{lstcode} + \setchapterpreamble[u]{% + \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, + wer sich ewig bindet \dots}} + \chapter{Die moderne Ehe} +\end{lstcode} + Die Ausgabe erfolgt dann in der Form: + \begin{ShowOutput} + {\usekomafont{disposition}\usekomafont{chapter}\Large + 17\enskip Die moderne Ehe\raggedright\par} + \vspace{\baselineskip} + \dictum[Schiller]{Drum prüfe, wer sich ewig bindet~\dots} + \end{ShowOutput} + + Wenn Sie wollen, dass nicht ein Drittel, sondern nur ein Viertel der + verfügbaren Textbreite für den Spruch verwendet wird, so definieren Sie + \Macro{dictumwidth} wie folgt um: +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\dictumwidth}{.25\textwidth} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + + An dieser Stelle sei noch auf das Paket~\Package{ragged2e}% + \important{\Package{ragged2e}}\IndexPackage{ragged2e} hingewiesen, mit dem + man Flattersatz mit Trennung erreichen kann (siehe + \cite{package:ragged2e}).% +\fi +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex index e1c1ebc3f2c..fd88d76a313 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-draftmode.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-draftmode.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-draftmode.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,34 +45,31 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-2.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-draftmode.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: draft)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - \section{Entwurfsmodus} \seclabel{draft}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.draft} geschrieben wurde. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Entwurf}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} + geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.draft} bereits gelesen und + verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.draft.next} fortfahren.% +} + Viele Klassen und viele Pakete kennen neben dem normalen Satzmodus auch einen Entwurfsmodus. Die Unterschiede zwischen diesen beiden sind so vielfältig wie die Klassen und Pakete, die diese Unterscheidung anbieten. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{draft}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{draft}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Mit dieser Option\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} wird zwischen Dokumenten im Entwurfsstadium und fertigen Dokumenten\Index{Endfassung} unterschieden. Als @@ -88,12 +85,9 @@ Pakets \Package{microtype}\IndexPackage{microtype}\important{\Package{microtype}} \cite{package:microtype}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Entwurf} - -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * - +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cecc7e5fcfa --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-fontsize.tex @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-fontsize.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-fontsize.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-fontsize.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: fontsize)] + +\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} +\seclabel{fontOptions} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe} + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions} geschrieben + wurde. Falls Sie also + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontOptions} bereits gelesen und + verstanden haben, können Sie \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{beim Beispiel + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{letzten Absatz }{}% + }% + am Ende dieses Abschnitts auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end} fortfahren.% +} + +Die Grundschrift und deren Größe sind zentrale Elemente der Gestaltung eines +Dokuments. Wie in \autoref{cha:typearea} ausgeführt wurde, hängt die +Auf"|teilung zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern wesentlich davon ab. Die +Grundschrift ist dabei die Schrift, die für die Masse des Textes eines +Dokuments verwendet wird. Alle davon abweichenden Einstellungen, sei es in der +Form, der Dicke, der Neigung oder der Größe, stehen in einer Beziehung zur +Grundschrift. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{fontsize}{Größe} +\end{Declaration} +Während von den Standardklassen und den meisten anderen Klassen nur eine sehr +beschränkte Anzahl an Schriftgrößen unterstützt wird, bietet \KOMAScript{} die +Möglichkeit, jede beliebige \PName{Größe} für die Grundschrift +anzugeben. Dabei kann als Einheit für die \PName{Größe} auch jede bekannte +\TeX-Einheit verwendet werden. Wird die \PName{Größe} ohne Einheit angegeben, +so wird \PValue{pt} als Einheit angenommen. \iffree{}{Das genaue Verfahren, + nach dem die Schriftgröße dann eingestellt wird, ist für Experten und + interessierte Anwender in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} dokumentiert.} + +Wird die Option innerhalb des Dokuments gesetzt, so werden ab diesem Punkt die +Grundschriftgröße und alle davon abhängigen Größen geändert. Das kann +beispielsweise dann nützlich sein, wenn % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{ein weiterer Brief }{der Anhang }% +insgesamt in einer kleineren Schriftgröße gesetzt werden soll. Es wird darauf +hingewiesen, dass bei Verwendung nach dem Laden der Klasse die Auf"|teilung +zwischen Satzspiegel und Rändern nicht automatisch neu berechnet wird (siehe +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}\IndexCmd{recalctypearea}, +\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). Wird diese Neuberechnung +jedoch vorgenommen, so erfolgt sie auf Basis der jeweils gültigen +Grundschriftgröße. Die Auswirkungen des Wechsels der Grundschriftgröße auf +zusätzlich geladene Pakete oder die verwendete Klasse sind von diesen Paketen +und der Klasse abhängig. % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{} + angesehen werden, und auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst passen nicht alle + Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der + Grundschriftgröße an.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Dabei sind Fehler möglich, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{} + betrachtet werden und auch die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} selbst passt nicht + alle Längen an eine nach dem Laden der Klasse vorgenommene Änderung der + Grundschriftgröße an.% + }{% + Es können also Fehler auf"|treten, die nicht als Fehler von \KOMAScript{} + angesehen werden.% + }% +}% + +Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Option sollte keinesfalls als Ersatz für +\Macro{fontsize} (siehe \cite{latex:fntguide}) missverstanden werden. Sie +sollte auch nicht an Stelle einer der von der Grundschrift abhängigen +Schriftgrößenanweisungen, \Macro{tiny} bis \Macro{Huge}, verwendet werden!% +\phantomsection\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontOptions.end}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ Bei \Class{scrlttr2} ist \OptionValue{fontsize}{12pt} voreingestellt. + + \begin{Example} + Angenommen, bei dem Verein aus dem Beispielbrief handelt es sich um die + \emph{»Freunde ungesunder Schriftgrößen«}, weshalb er in 14\Unit{pt} statt + in 12\Unit{pt} gesetzt werden soll. Dies kann durch eine kleine Änderung + der ersten Zeile erreicht werden:% + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-6}% + Alternativ könnte die Option auch als optionales Argument von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt werden: + \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-5}% + Da bei dieser späten Änderung der Schriftgröße der Satzspiegel nicht + geändert wird, unterscheiden sich die beiden Ergebnisse in + \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6}. + \begin{figure} + \centering +% \setcapindent{0pt} +% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, +% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer +% Schrift}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, +% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer +% Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für +% DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von +% \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt, rechts als optionales Argument von +% \Macro{documentclass}}[l] + \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-5}}\quad + \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-6}} +% \end{captionbeside} + \caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, + Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund + großer Schrift}] + {Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, + Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer + Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für + DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} gesetzt, rechts als optionales + Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}} + \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} + \end{figure} + \end{Example}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Voreingestellt ist bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und + \Class{scrartcl} \OptionValue{fontsize}{11pt}.\textnote{\KOMAScript{} + vs. Standardklassen} Demgegenüber ist übrigens bei den Standardklassen + \Option{10pt} voreingestellt. Dies ist bei einem Wechsel von den + Standardklassen zu den \KOMAScript-Klassen gegebenenfalls zu beachten.% + }{}% +}% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..711e9c154af --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-footnotes.tex @@ -0,0 +1,628 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-footnotes.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-footnotes.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-footnotes.tex}% + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Fußnoten} +\seclabel{footnotes}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Fussnoten=Fußnoten}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} geschrieben wurde. Falls + Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} bereits gelesen + und verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next} mit + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes.next} fortfahren.% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Im Unterschied zu den Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, + die Form von Fußnoten zu konfigurieren.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Die Anweisungen zum Setzen von Fußnoten sind in jeder \LaTeX-Einführung, + beispielsweise \cite{l2kurz}, zu finden. \KOMAScript{} bietet darüber + hinaus aber auch noch die Möglichkeit, die Form der Fußnoten zu verändern. + \iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung + + Ob Fußnoten bei Briefen überhaupt zulässig sind, hängt sehr stark von + der Art des Briefs und dessen Layout ab. So sind beispielsweise optische + Kollisionen mit dem Fuß des Briefbogens oder Verwechslungen mit der + Auflistung von Verteilern oder ähnlichen typischen Elementen von Briefen + zu vermeiden. Dies liegt in der Verantwortung des Anwenders.% + + Da Fußnoten in Briefen eher selten verwendet werden, wurde auf Beispiele + in diesem Abschnitt verzichtet. Sollten Sie Beispiele benötigen, können + Sie solche in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} ab + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} finden.% + \fi% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Die Fußnoten-Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen werden von + \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls bereitgestellt. In der Voreinstellung wird + die Formatierung der Fußnoten jedoch der verwendeten Klasse + überlassen. Dies ändert sich, sobald die Anweisung + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} verwendet wird, die auf + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote} näher erläutert + wird. + + Die Einstellmöglichkeiten für die Trennlinie über den Fußnoten werden + hingegen von \Package{scrextend} nicht bereitgestellt.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +}% + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{footnotes}{Einstellung} +\end{Declaration} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Bei vielen Klassen werden Fußnoten }{% + Fußnoten % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% + } % + werden % +}% +im Text in der Voreinstellung mit kleinen, hochgestellten Ziffern +markiert. Werden zu einer Textstelle mehrere Fußnoten hintereinander gesetzt, +so entsteht der Eindruck, dass es sich nicht um zwei einzelne Fußnoten, +sondern um eine einzige Fußnote mit hoher Nummer handelt. +Mit\important{\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}} +\OptionValue{footnotes}{multiple}\IndexOption{footnotes=~multiple} werden +Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, stattdessen mit Trennzeichen +aneinander gereiht. Das in \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}% +\IndexCmd{multfootsep}\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}} +definierte Trennzeichen ist mit einem Komma vorbelegt. Der gesamte Mechanismus +ist kompatibel zu +\Package{footmisc}\IndexPackage{footmisc}\important{\Package{footmisc}}, +Version~5.3d (siehe \cite{package:footmisc}) implementiert. Er wirkt sich +sowohl auf Fußnotenmarkierungen aus, die mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}\IndexCmd{footnote} gesetzt wurden, +als auch auf solche, die direkt mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark}\IndexCmd{footnotemark} +ausgegeben werden. + +Es ist jederzeit möglich, mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} +oder \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} auf die Voreinstellung +\OptionValue{footnotes}{nomultiple} zurückzuschalten. Bei Problemen mit +anderen Paketen, die Einfluss auf die Fußnoten nehmen, sollte die Option +jedoch nicht verwendet und die Einstellung auch nicht innerhalb des Dokuments +umgeschaltet werden. + +Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von +\Option{footnotes} bietet +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + . + \begin{table} + \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{footnotes}}]{Mögliche Werte für + Option \Option{footnotes} zur Einstellung der Fußnoten} + \label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes} + \begin{desctabular} + \pventry{multiple}{% + Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden durch + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.multfootsep}\IndexCmd{multfootsep} + voneinander getrennt ausgegeben.% + \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{multiple}}}% + \pventry{nomultiple}{% + Unmittelbar aufeinander folgende Fußnotenmarkierungen werden auch + unmittelbar aufeinander folgend ausgegeben.% + \IndexOption{footnotes~=\PValue{nomultiple}}}% + \end{desctabular} + \end{table}% +}{, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}.% +}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{footnote}\OParameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{footnotemark}\OParameter{Nummer} + \Macro{footnotetext}\OParameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator} + \Macro{multfootsep} +\end{Declaration}% +Fußnoten werden bei {\KOMAScript} genau wie bei den Standardklassen mit der +Anweisung \Macro{footnote} oder den paarweise zu verwendenden Anweisungen +\Macro{footnotemark} und \Macro{footnotetext} erzeugt. Genau wie bei den +Standardklassen ist es möglich, dass innerhalb einer Fußnote ein +Seiten"-umbruch erfolgt. Dies geschieht in der Regel dann, wenn die zugehörige +Fußnotenmarkierung so weit unten auf der Seite gesetzt wird, dass keine andere +Wahl bleibt, als die Fußnote auf die nächste Seite zu umbrechen. Im +Unterschied% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +zu den Standardklassen bietet \KOMAScript{} aber zusätzlich die Möglichkeit, +Fußnoten, die unmittelbar aufeinander folgen, automatisch zu erkennen und +durch ein Trennzeichen auseinander zu +rücken. Siehe\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnote}} hierzu +die zuvor dokumentierte Option +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.footnotes}. + +Will man dieses Trennzeichen stattdessen von Hand setzen, so erhält man es +durch Aufruf von \Macro{multiplefootnoteseparator}. Diese Anweisung sollten +Anwender jedoch nicht umdefinieren, da sie neben dem Trennzeichen auch die +Formatierung des Trennzeichen, beispielsweise die Wahl der Schriftgröße und +das Hochstellen, enthält. Das Trennzeichen selbst ist in der Anweisung +\Macro{multfootsep} gespeichert. In der Voreinstellung ist dieses als +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\multfootsep}{,} +\end{lstcode} +definiert. Dieses kann umdefiniert werden. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Beispiele und ergänzende Hinweise sind + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} ab + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.footnote} zu entnehmen.% + \iffalse% +}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.footnote}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen zu einem Wort zwei Fußnoten setzen. Im ersten + Ansatz schreiben Sie dafür +\begin{lstcode} + Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}\footnote{Fußnote 2}. +\end{lstcode} + Nehmen wir weiter an, dass die Fußnoten mit 1 und 2 nummeriert werden. Da + die beiden Fußnotennummern direkt aufeinander folgen, entsteht jedoch der + Eindruck, dass das Wort nur eine Fußnote mit der Nummer 12 besitzt. Sie + könnten dies nun dadurch ändern, dass Sie mit +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{footnotes=multiple} +\end{lstcode} + die automatische Erkennung von Fußnotenhäufungen aktivieren. Stattdessen + können Sie aber auch +\begin{lstcode} + Wort\footnote{Fußnote 1}% + \multiplefootnoteseparator + \footnote{Fußnote 2} +\end{lstcode} + verwenden. Das sollte auch dann noch funktionieren, wenn die automatische + Erkennung aus irgendwelchen Gründen versagt oder nicht verwendet werden + kann. + + Nehmen wir nun an, dass Sie außerdem wollen, dass die Fußnotennummern + nicht nur durch ein Komma, sondern durch ein Komma gefolgt von einem + Leerzeichen getrennt werden sollen. In diesem Fall schreiben Sie +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\multfootsep}{,\nobreakspace} +\end{lstcode} + in Ihre Dokumentpräambel. \Macro{nobreakspace}\IndexCmd{nobreakspace} wurde + hier an Stelle eines normalen Leerzeichens gewählt, damit innerhalb der + Reihung der Fußnotenzeichen kein Absatz- oder Seitenumbruch erfolgen kann. + \end{Example}% +\fi% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{footref}\Parameter{Referenz} +\end{Declaration} +Manchmal% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +hat man in einem Dokument eine Fußnote, zu der es im Text mehrere Verweise +geben soll. Die ungünstige Lösung dafür wäre die Verwendung von +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnotemark} unter Angabe der gewünschten +Nummer. Ungünstig an dieser Lösung ist, dass man die Nummer kennen muss und +sich diese jederzeit ändern kann. \KOMAScript{} bietet deshalb die +Möglichkeit, den +\Macro{label}-Mechanismus\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}} auch für +Verweise auf Fußnoten zu verwenden. Man setzt dabei in der entsprechenden +Fußnote eine \Macro{label}-Anweisung und kann dann mit \Macro{footref} alle +weiteren Fußnotenmarken für diese Fußnote im Text setzen. +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + % Umbruchkorrektur über diverse Varianten!!! + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.footref}% + Sie schreiben einen Text, in dem sie bei jedem Auf"|treten eines + Markennamens eine Fußnote setzen müssen, die darauf hinweist, dass es sich + um einen geschützten Markennamen handelt. Sie schreiben beispielsweise:% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}% +\begin{lstcode} + Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem + Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte + Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem + Markeninhaber vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} + stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} + auch noch die verbesserte Version + SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her. +\end{lstcode} + Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und zweimal mit + \Macro{footref}. + \else\iftrue +\begin{lstcode} + Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem + Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte + Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem + Markeninhaber vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} + stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} + auch noch die verbesserte Version + SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} her. +\end{lstcode} + Es wird dann dreimal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal + mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und zweimal mit + \Macro{footref}. + \else +\begin{lstcode} + Die Firma SplischSplasch\footnote{Bei diesem + Namen handelt es sich um eine registrierte + Marke. Alle Rechte daran sind dem + Markeninhaber, der Firma SplischSplasch, + vorbehalten.\label{refnote}} + stellt neben SplischPlumps\footref{refnote} + auch noch die verbesserte Version + SplischPlatsch\footref{refnote} und das sehr + beliebte + SplischSplaschPlumps\footref{refnote} her. +\end{lstcode} + Es wird dann vier Mal eine Marke auf dieselbe Fußnote gesetzt, einmal + mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote} direkt und drei Mal + mit \Macro{footref}. + \fi% + \fi + \end{Example} +\fi +Da die Fußnotenmarken mit Hilfe des \Macro{label}-Mechanismus gesetzt werden, +werden nach Änderungen, die sich auf die Fußnotennummerierung auswirken, +gegebenenfalls zwei \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt, bis die mit \Macro{footref} +gesetzten Marken korrekt sind.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\par% + Ein Beispiel zur Verwendung von \Macro{footref} finden Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes} auf + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.footref}.% +}{}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{deffootnote}\OParameter{Markenbreite}\Parameter{Einzug}% + \Parameter{Absatzeinzug}% + \Parameter{Markendefinition} + \Macro{deffootnotemark}\Parameter{Markendefinition} + \Macro{thefootnotemark} +\end{Declaration}% +Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen Fußnoten etwas anders als die Standardklassen. +Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text, also die Referenzierung der Fußnote, erfolgt +wie bei den Standardklassen durch kleine hochgestellte Zahlen. Genauso werden +die Markierungen auch in der Fußnote selbst wiedergegeben. Sie werden dabei +rechtsbündig in einem Feld der Breite \PName{Markenbreite} gesetzt. Die erste +Zeile der Fußnote schließt direkt an das Feld der Markierung an. + +Alle weiteren Zeilen werden um den Betrag von \PName{Einzug} eingezogen +ausgegeben. Wird der optionale Parameter \PName{Markenbreite} nicht angegeben, +dann entspricht er dem Wert von \PName{Einzug}. Sollte die Fußnote aus +mehreren Absätzen bestehen, dann wird die erste Zeile eines Absatzes +zusätzlich mit dem Einzug der Größe \PName{Absatzeinzug} versehen. + +\autoref{fig:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.deffootnote} % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{auf + \autopageref{fig:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.deffootnote} }{}% +veranschaulicht die verschiedenen Parameter% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{ nochmals}{}% +. Die Voreinstellung in den \KOMAScript-Klassen entspricht folgender +Definition: \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname + iffalse\endcsname}% +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{% + \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} +\end{lstcode} +\else +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{% + \textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}% + } +\end{lstcode} +\fi% +Dabei wird mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.textsuperscript} +sowohl die Hochstellung als auch die Wahl einer kleineren Schrift +erreicht. Die Anweisung \Macro{thefootnotemark} liefert die aktuelle +Fußnotenmarke ohne jegliche Formatierung.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + Das Paket \Package{scrextend} überlässt hingegen in der Voreinstellung das + Setzen der Fußnoten der verwendeten Klasse. Das Laden des Pakets allein + sollte daher noch zu keinerlei Änderungen bei der Formatierung der Fußnoten + oder der Fußnotenmarken führen. Zur Übernahme der Voreinstellungen der + \KOMAScript-Klassen muss man vielmehr obige Einstellung selbst + vornehmen. Dazu kann obige Code-Zeile beispielsweise unmittelbar nach dem + Laden von \Package{scrextend} eingefügt werden.% +}{}% + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \begin{figure} +% \centering + \KOMAoption{captions}{bottombeside} + \setcapindent{0pt}% + \begin{captionbeside}[{Parameter für die Darstellung der + Fußnoten}]% + {\label{fig:\ThisCommonLabelBase.deffootnote}\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% + \mbox{Parameter} für die Darstellung der Fußnoten}% + [l] + \setlength{\unitlength}{1.02mm} + \begin{picture}(95,22) + \thinlines + % frame of following paragraph + \put(5,0){\line(1,0){90}} + \put(5,0){\line(0,1){5}} + \put(10,5){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,5){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(95,0){\line(0,1){10}} + \put(10,10){\line(1,0){85}} + % frame of first paragraph + \put(5,11){\line(1,0){90}} + \put(5,11){\line(0,1){5}} + \put(15,16){\line(0,1){5}}\put(5,16){\line(1,0){10}} + \put(95,11){\line(0,1){10}} + \put(15,21){\line(1,0){80}} + % box of the footnote mark + \put(0,16.5){\framebox(14.5,4.5){\mbox{}}} + % description of paragraphs + \put(45,16){\makebox(0,0)[l]{% + \small\textsf{erster Absatz einer Fußnote}}} + \put(45,5){\makebox(0,0)[l]{% + \small\textsf{folgender Absatz einer Fußnote}}} + % help lines + \thicklines + \multiput(0,0)(0,3){7}{\line(0,1){2}} + \multiput(5,0)(0,3){3}{\line(0,1){2}} + % parameters + \put(2,7){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(5,7){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(15,7){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(15,7){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Absatzeinzug}}} + % + \put(-3,13){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(0,13){\line(1,0){5}} + \put(10,13){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(10,13){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Einzug}}} + % + \put(-3,19){\vector(1,0){3}} + \put(0,19){\line(1,0){14.5}} + \put(19.5,19){\vector(-1,0){5}} + \put(19.5,19){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\small\PName{Markenbreite}}} + \end{picture} + \end{captionbeside} + \end{figure}% +}{} + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnote}\LabelFontElement{footnote}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotelabel}\LabelFontElement{footnotelabel}% +Auf% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{} die Fußnote einschließlich der Markierung findet außerdem die für das +Element \FontElement{footnote}\important{\FontElement{footnote}} eingestellte +Schriftart Anwendung. Die % Umbruchkorrekturvarianten +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{davon abweichende }{}% +Schriftart der Markierung kann % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{}{jedoch }% +mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element +\FontElement{footnotelabel}\important{\FontElement{footnotelabel}} davon +abweichend eingestellt werden. Siehe hierzu auch +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fontelements}. Voreingestellt +ist jeweils keine Umschaltung der Schrift.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + Die Elemente finden bei scrextend jedoch nur dann Anwendung, wenn die + Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden, also + \Macro{deffootnote} verwendet wurde.% +}{}% + +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnotereference}% +\LabelFontElement{footnotereference}% +Die Fußnotenmarkierung im Text wird getrennt von der Markierung vor der +Fußnote definiert. Dies geschieht mit der Anweisung +\Macro{deffootnotemark}. Voreingestellt ist hier: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnotemark{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} +\end{lstcode} +Dabei findet% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{} die Schriftart für das Element +\FontElement{footnotereference}\IndexFontElement{footnotereference}% +\important{\FontElement{footnotereference}} Anwendung (siehe % +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}). Die Markierungen im Text +und in der Fußnote selbst sind also identisch. Die Schriftart kann mit den +Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) jedoch geändert werden% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{, sobald die Anweisung + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.deffootnotemark} verwendet wird}{}. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.deffootnote}% + Relativ\textnote{Tipp!} häufig wird gewünscht, dass die Markierung in der + Fußnote selbst weder hochgestellt noch kleiner gesetzt wird. Dabei soll + sie aber nicht direkt am Text kleben, sondern geringfügig davor + stehen. Dies kann zum einen wie folgt erreicht werden: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote{1em}{1em}{\thefootnotemark\ } +\end{lstcode} + Die Fußnotenmarkierung und das folgende Leerzeichen wird also rechtsbündig + in eine Box der Breite 1\Unit{em} gesetzt. Die folgenden Zeilen der + Fußnote werden gegenüber dem linken Rand ebenfalls um 1\Unit{em} + eingezogen. + + Eine\textnote{Tipp!} weitere, oft gefragte Formatierung sind linksbündige + Fußnotenmarkierungen in der Fußnote. Diese können mit folgender Definition + erhalten werden: +\begin{lstcode} + \deffootnote{1.5em}{1em}{% + \makebox[1.5em][l]{\thefootnotemark}% + } +\end{lstcode} + + Sollen jedoch die Fußnoten insgesamt lediglich in einer anderen + Schriftart, beispielsweise serifenlos gesetzt werden, so ist dies ganz + einfach mit Hilfe der Anweisungen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) zu lösen: +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{footnote}{\sffamily} +\end{lstcode}% + \end{Example}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{% + Wie die Beispiele zeigen, ermöglicht {\KOMAScript} mit dieser einfachen + Benutzerschnittstelle eine große Vielfalt unterschiedlicher + Fußnotenformatierungen.% + }% +\fi% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Beispiele finden Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.footnotes}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.deffootnote}.% +}{}% +% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{setfootnoterule}\OParameter{Höhe}\Parameter{Länge}% +\end{Declaration}% +Üblicherweise% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{}% + }% +} % +wird zwischen dem Textbereich und dem Fußnotenapparat eine Trennlinie gesetzt, +die jedoch normalerweise nicht über die gesamte Breite des Satzspiegels +geht. Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann die genaue Länge und die Höhe oder Dicke +der Linie bestimmt werden. Dabei werden \PName{Höhe} und \PName{Länge} erst +beim Setzen der Linie selbst abhängig von \Macro{normalsize} ausgewertet. Der +optionale Parameter \PName{Höhe} kann komplett entfallen und wird dann nicht +geändert. Ist das Argument \PName{Höhe} oder \PName{Länge} leer, so wird die +jeweilige Größe ebenfalls nicht geändert. Es gibt sowohl beim Setzen als auch +bei Verwendung der Größen für unplausible Werte eine Warnung. + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footnoterule}\LabelFontElement{footnoterule}% +Die Farbe% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{}% + }% +} % +der Linie kann über das Element +\FontElement{footnoterule}\important{\FontElement{footnoterule}} mit Hilfe der +Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) eingestellt +werden. Voreingestellt ist hierbei keinerlei Änderung von Schrift oder +Farbe. Um die Farbe ändern zu können, muss außerdem ein Farbpaket wie +\Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor}\important{\Package{xcolor}} geladen +sein.% +% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: + +% LocalWords: Fußnotennummern Fußnotenmarkierung Satzspiegels +% LocalWords: Standardklassen Fußnotenformatierungen diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-20.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex index bc338a2852f..58a01bb033a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-20.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-headfootheight.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-20.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% common-headfootheight.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-20.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% common-headfootheight.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,27 +45,21 @@ % % ============================================================================ -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-20.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-headfootheight.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: Head and Foot Height)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayer}{\newif\ifCommonscrlayer}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommoonscrlayer-scrpage}{\expandafter\newif\csname - ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlayerscrpage}{% - \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifCommonscrlayerscrpage - \csname ifCommonscrlayer-scrpage\endcsname}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother + + \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß} \seclabel{height} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}% \BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}% -\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% -\begin{Explain}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{Explain}% Vermutlich, weil der Fuß bei den Standardklassen kaum besetzt ist und zudem als \Macro{mbox} immer einzeilig ist, gibt es bei \LaTeX{} keine definierte Höhe des Fußes. Zwar ist der Abstand von der letzten Grundlinie @@ -81,64 +75,62 @@ \LaTeX{} für die Kopfhöhe tatsächlich selbst eine Länge zur Einstellung ihrer Höhe vorgesehen. Dies erklärt sich vermutlich daraus, dass diese Höhe zur Bestimmung des Anfangs des Textbereichs benötigt wird.% -\end{Explain}% -}% -\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \end{Explain}% +}{% Der Kopf und der Fuß einer Seite sind zentrale Elemente nicht nur des Seitenstils. Auch eine Ebene kann bei der Definition über entsprechende Optionen genau darauf beschränkt werden (siehe \autoref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys} ab - \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}). Deshalb muss die Höhe beider - Elemente bekannt sein.% + \autopageref{tab:scrlayer.layerkeys}). Deshalb muss die Höhe beider Elemente + bekannt sein.% +} + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height} geschrieben + wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.height} + bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.height.next} fortfahren.% } -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi -\ifIgnoreThis %++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht scrlayer-scrpage + -Für grundlegende Informationen zur Höhe von Kopf und Fuß siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.height}, -\autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.height}. -\else % ----------------------------------------------- nur scrlayer-scrpage - \begin{Declaration} - \Length{footheight}\\ + \Length{footheight} \Length{headheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Length}{footheight}% -\BeginIndex{Length}{headheight}% Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} führt als neue Länge \Length{footheight} analog -zur Höhe \Length{headheight}\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{ des \LaTeX-Kerns} -ein. Gleichzeitig interpretiert -\Package{scrlayer\IfCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{-scrpage}} \Length{footskip} so, -dass es den Abstand der letzten Grundlinie des Textbereichs von der ersten -Standard-Grundlinie des Fußes darstellt. Das Paket +zur Höhe \Length{headheight}\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ des + \LaTeX-Kerns} ein. Gleichzeitig interpretiert +\Package{scrlayer\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{-scrpage}{}} +\Length{footskip} so, dass es den Abstand der letzten Grundlinie des +Textbereichs von der ersten Standard-Grundlinie des Fußes darstellt. Das Paket \Package{typearea}\IndexPackage{typearea} betrachtet dies in gleicher Weise, so dass die dortigen Optionen zum Setzen der Höhe des Fußes (siehe die -Optionen \Option{footheight} und \Option{footlines} in -\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.footheight}) und zur Berücksichtigung des -Fußes bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels (siehe Option \Option{footinclude} -in demselben Abschnitt, \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.footinclude}) sehr -gut zum Setzen der Werte für \Package{scrlayer} verwendet werden können und -auch das gewünschte Ergebnis liefern. +Optionen \DescRef{typearea.option.footheight} und +\DescRef{typearea.option.footlines} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footheight}) und zur Berücksichtigung des Fußes +bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels (siehe Option +\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude} in demselben Abschnitt, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.footinclude}) sehr gut zum Setzen der Werte für +\Package{scrlayer} verwendet werden können und auch das gewünschte Ergebnis +liefern. Wird das Paket \Package{typearea} nicht verwendet, so sollte man gegebenenfalls die Höhe von Kopf und Fuß über entsprechende Werte für die Längen einstellen. Zumindest für den Kopf bietet aber beispielsweise auch das Paket \Package{geometry} entsprechende Einstellmöglichkeiten. Wurde der Kopf oder der Fuß für den tatsächlich verwendeten Inhalt zu klein gewählt, so -versucht\IfNotCommon{scrlayer-scrpage}{ beispielsweise} +versucht\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ beispielsweise} \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} die Längen selbst entsprechend anzupassen. Gleichzeitig wird eine entsprechende Warnung ausgegeben, die auch Ratschläge für passende Einstellungen enthält. Die automatischen Änderungen haben dann ab dem Zeitpunkt, an dem ihre Notwendigkeit erkannt wurde, Gültigkeit und werden nicht automatisch aufgehoben, wenn beispielsweise der Inhalt von Kopf oder Fuß wieder kleiner wird.% -\EndIndex{Length}{headheight}% -\EndIndex{Length}{footheight}% -\EndIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}% -\EndIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}% - -\fi % ********************************************* Ende nur scrlayer-scrpage * +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b426812b857 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-interleafpage.tex @@ -0,0 +1,322 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-interleafpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-interleafpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-interleafpage.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Vakatseiten} +\seclabel{emptypage}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Vakatseite}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage} geschrieben + wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.emptypage} + bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.emptypage.next} fortfahren.% +} + +Vakatseiten sind Seiten, die beim Satz eines Dokuments absichtlich leer +bleiben. Bei \LaTeX{} werden sie jedoch in der Voreinstellung mit dem aktuell +gültigen Seitenstil gesetzt. \KOMAScript{} bietet hier diverse Erweiterungen. + +Vakatseiten findet man hauptsächlich in Büchern. Da es bei Büchern üblich ist, +dass Kapitel auf einer rechten Seite beginnen, muss in dem Fall, dass das +vorherige Kapitel ebenfalls auf einer rechten Seite endet, eine leere linke +Seite eingefügt werden. Aus dieser Erklärung ergibt sich auch, dass +Vakatseiten normalerweise nur im doppelseitigen Satz existieren. +% +\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur + Die leeren Rückseiten im einseitigen Druck werden eher nicht als Vakatseiten + bezeichnet, obwohl sie auf Druckbögen im Ergebnis als solche erscheinen.% +\fi% + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Vakatseiten sind bei Briefen eher unüblich. Das liegt nicht zuletzt daran, + dass wahrhaft doppelseitige Briefe recht selten sind, da Briefe + normalerweise nicht gebunden werden. Trotzdem unterstützt auch + \Class{scrlttr2} für den Fall von doppelseitigen Briefen Einstellungen für + Vakatseiten. Da die hier vorgestellten Anweisungen aber in Briefen kaum + Verwendung finden, finden Sie hier keine Beispiele. Bei Bedarf orientieren + Sie sich bitte an den Beispielen in \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.emptypage}.% +}{}% + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{cleardoublepage}{Seitenstil}% + \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} +\end{Declaration}% +Mit Hilfe dieser Option% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +kann man den \PName{Seitenstil} der Vakatseite bestimmen, die bei Bedarf von +den Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage} eingefügt wird, um bis zur +gewünschten Seite zu umbrechen. Als \PName{Seitenstil} sind dabei alle bereits +definierten Seitenstile (siehe \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} ab +\autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.pagestyle} und +\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} ab \autopageref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) +verwendbar. Daneben ist auch \OptionValue{cleardoublepage}{current} +möglich. Dieser Fall entspricht der Voreinstellung von \KOMAScript{} bis +Version~2.98c und führt dazu, dass die Vakatseite mit dem Seitenstil erzeugt +wird, der beim Einfügen gerade aktuell ist. Ab Version~3.00% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +werden in der Voreinstellung entsprechend der typografischen Gepflogenheiten +Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{empty} erzeugt, wenn man nicht +Kompatibilität zu früheren \KOMAScript-Versionen eingestellt hat (siehe Option +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.version}). +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{option.cleardoublepage}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass die Vakatseiten bis auf die Paginierung leer + sind\iffree{, also mit Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} erzeugt + werden}{}. Dies erreichen Sie \iffree{beispielsweise }{}mit: +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} +\end{lstcode} + Näheres zum Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} ist in + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain} zu finden. + \end{Example} +\else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{option.cleardoublepage}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass die Vakatseiten bis auf die Paginierung + leer sind, also mit Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} erzeugt werden. Dies + erreichen Sie beispielsweise mit +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=plain} +\end{lstcode} + Näheres zum Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} ist in + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.pagestyle.plain} + zu finden. + \end{Example}% + \fi% +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{clearpage}% + \Macro{cleardoublepage}% + \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}% + \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} +\end{Declaration}% +Im \LaTeX-Kern existiert die Anweisung +\Macro{clearpage}, die dafür sorgt, dass alle noch nicht ausgegebenen +Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden und anschließend eine neue Seite begonnen +wird. Außerdem existiert die Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage}, die wie +\Macro{clearpage} arbeitet, durch die aber im doppelseitigen Layout (siehe +Option \DescRef{typearea.option.twoside} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside}) eine neue rechte Seite begonnen +wird. Dazu wird gegebenenfalls eine linke Vakatseite im aktuellen Seitenstil +ausgegeben. + +Bei {\KOMAScript} arbeitet \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{}% +} % +genau in der soeben für die Standardklassen beschriebenen Art und Weise. Die +Anweisung \Macro{cleardoubleoddplainpage} ändert demgegenüber den Seitenstil +der leeren linken Seite zusätzlich auf +\PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}, um den +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf}{Kolumnentitel} zu +unterdrücken. Analog dazu wird bei der Anweisung +\Macro{cleardoubleoddemptypage} der Seitenstil +\PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} verwendet, um sowohl +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Seitenkopf als auch Seitenfuß}{Kolumnentitel + als auch Seitenzahl} auf der leeren linken Seite zu unterdrücken. Die Seite +ist damit vollständig leer. Will man für die Vakatseite einen eigenen +\PName{Seitenstil} vorgeben, so ist dieser als Argument von +\Macro{cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle} anzugeben. Dabei kann jeder bereits +definierte Seitenstil (siehe auch \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) verwendet +werden. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{}{% + Manchmal möchte man nicht, dass Kapitel mit neuen rechten Seiten, sondern + links auf einer Doppelseite beginnen. Dies widerspricht zwar dem klassischen + Buchdruck, kann jedoch seine Berechtigung haben, wenn die Doppelseite am + Kapitelanfang einen ganz speziellen Inhalt hat. Bei \KOMAScript{} ist + deshalb die Anweisung \Macro{cleardoubleevenstandardpage} als Äquivalent zur + Anweisung \Macro{cleardoubleoddstandardpage} definiert, jedoch mit dem + Unterschied, dass die nächste Seite eine linke Seite ist. Entsprechendes + gilt für die Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoubleevenplainpage}, + \Macro{cleardoubleevenemptypage} und % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% Umbruchoptimierungsalternative + für die ein Argument erwartende Anweisung }{}% + \Macro{cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle}.% +} + +Die Arbeitsweise der Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, +\Macro{cleardoubleemptypage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage} und der ein +Argument erwartenden Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle} % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + ist ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage} von der in + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.open} erklärten + Option \DescRef{maincls.option.open}% + \IndexOption{open}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.open}} abhängig und + entspricht je nach Einstellung einer der in den vorherigen Absätzen + erläuterten Anweisungen. + +}{% + entspricht \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{bei der Klasse + \Class{scrlttr2}}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{beim Paket \Package{scrextend}}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + } ebenso wie die Standard-Anweisung \Macro{cleardoublepage} den + entsprechenden, zuvor erklärten Anweisungen% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{. % + Die übrigen Anweisungen sind bei \Class{scrlttr2} nur aus Gründen der + Vollständigkeit definiert. Näheres zu diesen ist bei Bedarf + \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage} zu entnehmen% + }{% + für den Umbruch zur nächsten ungeraden Seite% + }.% +} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.cleardoublepage}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen innerhalb eines Dokuments als nächstes eine + Doppelseite setzen, bei der auf der linken Seite eine Abbildung in Größe + des Satzspiegels platziert wird und rechts ein neues Kapitel + beginnt. Falls das vorherige Kapitel mit einer linken Seite endet, muss + also eine Vakatseite eingefügt werden. Diese soll komplett leer + sein. Ebenso soll die linke Bildseite weder Kopf noch Fußzeile + besitzen. Zunächst wird mit +\begin{lstcode} + \KOMAoptions{cleardoublepage=empty} +\end{lstcode} + dafür gesorgt, dass Vakatseiten mit dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{empty}, also + ohne Kopf- und Fußzeile gesetzt werden. Diese Einstellung können Sie + bereits in der Dokumentpräambel vornehmen. Die Optionen können alternativ + auch als optionale Argumente von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.documentclass} angegeben werden. + + An der gewünschten Stelle + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{im Dokument }% Umbruchoptimierung!!! + schreiben Sie nun: +\begin{lstcode} + \cleardoubleevenemptypage + \thispagestyle{empty} + \includegraphics[width=\textwidth,% + height=\textheight,% + keepaspectratio]% + {bild} + \chapter{Kapitelüberschrift} +\end{lstcode} + Die erste Zeile wechselt auf die nächste linke Seite und fügt zu diesem + Zweck bei Bedarf eine komplett leere rechte Seite ein. Die zweite Zeile + sorgt dafür, dass diese linke Seite ebenfalls mit dem Seitenstil + \PageStyle{empty} gesetzt wird. Die dritte bis sechste Zeile lädt die + Bilddatei mit dem Namen \File{bild} und bringt sie auf die gewünschte + Größe, ohne sie dabei zu verzerren. Hierfür wird das Paket + \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} benötigt (siehe + \cite{package:graphics}). Die letzte Zeile beginnt auf der nächsten -- + dann rechten -- Seite ein neues Kapitel. + \end{Example}% +\fi + +Die Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} und \Macro{cleardoubleevenpage} +führen immer zur nächsten linken beziehungsweise rechten Seite. Dabei wird für +eine gegebenenfalls einzufügende Vakatseite der Seitenstil entsprechend Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.cleardoublepage} gewählt.% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: + +% LocalWords: Gleitumgebungen Seitenkopf Kolumnentitel Seitenfuß Bilddatei +% LocalWords: Satzspiegels Bildseite diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf8e75daa4c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-lists.tex @@ -0,0 +1,831 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-lists.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-lists.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-lists.tex}% + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Listen} +\seclabel{lists}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Listen}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} + geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} bereits gelesen und verstanden + haben, können Sie auf \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.lists.next} fortfahren.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + Allerdings werden vom Paket \Package{scrextend} nur die Umgebungen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}, + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.addmargin*} definiert. Alle anderen + Listenumgebungen bleiben der Verantwortung und Kontrolle der verwendeten + Klasse überlassen.% + }{}% +} + +{\LaTeX} und die Standardklassen bieten verschiedene Umgebungen für +Listen. All diese Umgebungen bietet {\KOMAScript} selbstverständlich auch, +teilweise jedoch mit leichten Abwandlungen oder Erweiterungen. Grundsätzlich +gilt, dass Listen -- auch unterschiedlicher Art -- bis zu einer Tiefe von vier +Listen geschachtelt werden können. Eine tiefere Schachtelung wäre auch aus +typografischen Gründen kaum sinnvoll, da genau genommen schon mehr als drei +Ebenen nicht mehr überblickt werden können. Ich empfehle\textnote{Tipp!} in +solchen Fällen, die eine große Liste in mehrere kleinere Listen aufzuteilen. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Da Listen zu den Standardelementen von \LaTeX{} gehören, wurde in diesem + Abschnitt auf Beispiele verzichtet. Sie finden solche in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} ab + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.lists} oder in jeder + \LaTeX-Einführung.% +} + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{itemize} + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \Macro{labelitemi} + \Macro{labelitemii} + \Macro{labelitemiii} + \Macro{labelitemiv} + \end{Declaration}% + Die einfachste Form einer Liste ist die Stichpunkt- oder + \Environment{itemize}-Liste. % + \iffalse % Umbruchoptimierungstext + Die Benutzer einer unbeliebten Textverarbeitung nennen diese Form der + Liste auch gerne \emph{Bulletpoints}. Vermutlich können sie sich nicht + vorstellen, dass je nach Ebene auch ein anderes Zeichen als ein fetter + Punkt zur Einleitung eines Stichpunkts verwendet werden kann. % + \fi% + Bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen werden je nach Ebene folgende Aufzählungszeichen + zur Einleitung eines Listenelements verwendet: »{\labelitemi}«, + »{\labelitemii}«, »{\labelitemiii}« und »{\labelitemiv}«. Die Definition der + Zeichen für die einzelnen Ebenen sind in den Makros \Macro{labelitemi}, + \Macro{labelitemii}, \Macro{labelitemiii} und \Macro{labelitemiv} + abgelegt. Sie können diese leicht mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefinieren. Die + einzelnen Stichpunkte werden mit \Macro{item} eingeleitet.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.itemize}% + Sie haben eine einfache Aufzählung, die in mehreren Ebenen geschachtelt + ist. Sie schreiben beispielsweise: +\begin{lstcode} + \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} + \begin{itemize} + \item Flugzeuge + \begin{itemize} + \item Doppeldecker + \item Transportmaschinen + \begin{itemize} + \item einmotorig + \begin{itemize} + \item{düsengetrieben} + \item{propellergetrieben} + \end{itemize} + \item zweimotorig + \begin{itemize} + \item{düsengetrieben} + \item{propellergetrieben} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} + \item Drehflügler + \end{itemize} + \item Motorräder + \item Automobile + \begin{itemize} + \item Rennwagen + \item Personenwagen + \item Lastwagen + \end{itemize} + \item Fahrräder + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} +\end{lstcode} + Anschließend erhalten Sie: + \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] + \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} + \begin{itemize} + \item Flugzeuge + \begin{itemize} + \item Doppeldecker + % \item Jets + \item Transportmaschinen + \begin{itemize} + \item einmotorig + \begin{itemize} + \item{düsengetrieben} + \item{propellergetrieben} + \end{itemize} + \item zweimotorig + \begin{itemize} + \item{düsengetrieben} + \item{propellergetrieben} + \end{itemize} + \end{itemize} + \item Drehflügler + \end{itemize} + \item Motorräder + % \begin{itemize} + % \item historisch korrekt + % \item futurisch nicht real + % \end{itemize} + \item Automobile + \begin{itemize} + \item Rennwagen + \item Personenwagen + \item Lastwagen + \end{itemize} + \item Fahrräder + \end{itemize} + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{enumerate}\labelsuffix[enumerate] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \Macro{theenumi} + \Macro{theenumii} + \Macro{theenumiii} + \Macro{theenumiv} + \Macro{labelenumi} + \Macro{labelenumii} + \Macro{labelenumiii} + \Macro{labelenumiv} + \end{Declaration}% + Die nummerierte Liste ist ebenfalls sehr häufig zu finden und bereits vom + {\LaTeX}-Kern vorgesehen. Die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung} erfolgt je + nach Ebene in unterschiedlicher Art: mit arabischen Zahlen, mit + Kleinbuchstaben, mit kleinen römischen Zahlen und mit Großbuchstaben. Die + Art der Nummerierung wird dabei über die Makros \Macro{theenumi} bis + \Macro{theenumiv} festgelegt. Das Format der Ausgabe wird von den Makros + \Macro{labelenumi} bis \Macro{labelenumiv} bestimmt. Dabei folgt auf den + Wert der zweiten Ebene, der in Kleinbuchstaben ausgegeben wird, eine runde + Klammer, während die Werte aller anderen Ebenen von einem Punkt gefolgt + werden. Die einzelnen Stichpunkte werden wieder mit \Macro{item} + eingeleitet.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.enumerate}% + Verkürzen wir das vorherige Beispiel und verwenden statt der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.itemize}- eine + \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung: + % Übernehmen wir das Beispiel der + % \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.itemize}-Umgebung, + % wobei wir jede \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.itemize}-Umgebung durch eine + % \Environment{enumerate}-Umgebung ersetzen. Das Ergebnis wäre dann: + \begin{ShowOutput}[\baselineskip] + \minisec{Die Fahrzeuge im Spiel} + \begin{enumerate} + \item Flugzeuge + \begin{enumerate} + \item Doppeldecker + % \item Jets + \item Transportmaschinen + \begin{enumerate} + \item einmotorig + \begin{enumerate} + \item{düsengetrieben}\label{xmp:maincls.jets} + \item{propellergetrieben} + \end{enumerate} + \item mehrmotorig + \end{enumerate} + % \item Drehflügler + \end{enumerate} + \item Motorräder + \begin{enumerate} + \item historisch korrekt + \item futurisch nicht real + \end{enumerate} + % \item Automobile + % \begin{enumerate} + % \item Rennwagen + % \item Personenwagen + % \item Lastwagen + % \end{enumerate} + % \item Fahrräder + \end{enumerate} + \end{ShowOutput} + Innerhalb der Aufzählung können ganz normal mit \Macro{label} Marken + gesetzt werden, auf die dann mit \Macro{ref} zugegriffen werden + kann. So wurde oben hinter den düsengetriebenen, einmotorigen + Flugzeugen mit »\Macro{label}\PParameter{bsp:duesen}« ein Label + gesetzt. Der \Macro{ref}-Wert ist dann »\ref{xmp:maincls.jets}«. + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{description}\labelsuffix[description] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item}\OParameter{Stichwort} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Eine weitere Listenform ist die Stichwortliste. Sie dient in erster Linie + der Beschreibung einzelner Begriffe. Diese werden als optionale Parameter + bei \Macro{item} angegeben. % + \BeginIndex{FontElement}{descriptionlabel}% + \LabelFontElement{descriptionlabel}% + Die Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, die für die Hervorhebung des + Stichworts verwendet wird, kann außerdem bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit + Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element + \FontElement{descriptionlabel} (siehe + \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. In der + Voreinstellung wird \Macro{sffamily}""\Macro{bfseries} verwendet.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.description}% + Sie wollen, dass die Stichworte statt serifenlos und fett lediglich + fett, aber in der Standardschriftart ausgegeben werden. Mit +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{descriptionlabel}{\normalfont + \bfseries} +\end{lstcode} + definieren Sie daher die Schrift entsprechend um. + + Ein Beispiel für die Ausgabe einer Stichwortliste ist eine Aufzählung + der Seitenstile. Der Quelltext dazu lautet beispielsweise: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{description} + \item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- + und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. + \item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem + keinerlei Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. + \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für + automatische Kolumnentitel. + \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für + manuelle Kolumnentitel. + \end{description} +\end{lstcode} + Diese ergibt: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \begin{description} + \item[empty] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und + Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. + \item[plain] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei + Kolumnentitel verwendet wird. + \item[headings] ist der Seitenstil für automatische + Kolumnentitel. + \item[myheadings] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle + Kolumnentitel. + \end{description} + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup% +\fi + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{labeling}\OParameter{Trennzeichen} + \Parameter{längstes Schlüsselwort} + \labelsuffix[labeling] + \begin{Body} + \Macro{item}\OParameter{Stichwort} \dots + \BodyDots + \end{Body} + \end{Environment} +\end{Declaration}% +Eine andere Form der % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + in vielen Klassen als + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung vorhandenen % +}{}% +Stichwortliste ist nur bei den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ und \Package{scrextend} }{}% +vorhanden: die \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung. Im Unterschied zur zuvor +vorgestellten Umgebung % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.description}% +}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}% +} kann bei \Environment{labeling} ein Muster angegeben werden, dessen Länge +die Einrücktiefe bei allen Stichpunkten ergibt. Darüber hinaus kann zwischen +Stichpunkt und Beschreibungstext ein optionales \PName{Trennzeichen} +festgelegt werden. % +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{labelinglabel}\LabelFontElement{labelinglabel}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{labelingseparator}% +\LabelFontElement{labelingseparator}% +Die Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.02}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +}% +, die für die Hervorhebung des Schlüsselworts verwendet wird, kann mit Hilfe +der Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element +\FontElement{labelinglabel}\IndexFontElement{labelinglabel} (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) geändert werden. Für die +davon abweichende Schriftart der Trennzeichen ist das Element +\FontElement{labelingseparator}\IndexFontElement{labelingseparator} (siehe +ebenfalls \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}) zuständig. +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\par\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.labeling}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Eine einfache Liste könnte beispielsweise wie folgt definiert werden:% + }{% + Wir schreiben das Beispiel der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung etwas um:% + }% +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} + \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} + \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} + \item[empty] + Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß + \item[plain] + Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne + Kolumnentitel + \item[headings] + Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel + \item[myheadings] + Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel + \end{labeling} +\end{lstcode} + Als Ergebnis erhalten wir dann: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \setkomafont{labelinglabel}{\ttfamily} + \setkomafont{labelingseparator}{\normalfont} + \begin{labeling}[~--]{myheadings} + \item[empty] + Seitenstil für leere Seiten ohne Kopf und Fuß + \item[plain] + Seitenstil für Kapitelanfänge ganz ohne + Kolumnentitel + \item[headings] + Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel + \item[myheadings] + Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel + \end{labeling} + \end{ShowOutput} + Wie in diesem Beispiel zu sehen ist, kann eine eventuell geforderte + Schriftumschaltung in bei \KOMAScript{} gewohnter Weise erreicht + werden. Da sich die Schriftumschaltung für das Schlüsselwort aber auch auf + die Trennzeichen auswirkt, kann es eventuell erforderlich sein, die + Schriftumschaltung dafür explizit aufzuheben. + \end{Example} +\fi +\EndIndexGroup +Gedacht war die Umgebung ursprünglich für Strukturen wie »Voraussetzung, +Aussage, Beweis« oder »Gegeben, Gesucht, Lösung«, wie man sie in +Vorlesungsskripten häufiger findet. Inzwischen findet die Umgebung aber ganz +unterschiedliche Anwendungen. So wurde die Umgebung für Beispiele in dieser +Anleitung mit Hilfe der \Environment{labeling}-Umgebung definiert.% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{verse}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung wird normalerweise nicht als Listenumgebung + wahrgenommen, da hier nicht mit \Macro{item} gearbeitet wird. Stattdessen + wird wie innerhalb der \Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung mit festen + Zeilenumbrüchen gearbeitet. Intern handelt es sich jedoch sowohl bei den + Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} durchaus um eine Listenumgebung. + + Die \Environment{verse}-Umgebung findet hauptsächlich für + Gedichte\Index{Gedichte} Anwendung. Dabei werden die Zeilen links und rechts + eingezogen. Einzelne Verse werden mit einem festen Zeilenumbruch, also mit + \verb|\\|\IndexCmd{\textbackslash} beendet. Strophen werden ganz normal als + Absatz gesetzt, also durch eine Leerzeile getrennt. Häufig findet + stattdessen auch \Macro{medskip}\IndexCmd{medskip} oder + \Macro{bigskip}\IndexCmd{bigskip} Verwendung. Will man verhindern, dass am + Ende eines Verses ein Seitenumbruch erfolgt, so verwendet man ganz normal + \verb|\\*|\IndexCmd{\textbackslash*} an Stelle von \verb|\\|.% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.verse}% + Als Beispiel ein kurzes Gedicht von Wilhelm Busch: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\* + Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\* + Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\* + So irrt sich der. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + Mit dem Resultat: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \iffree{}{\vskip-.8\baselineskip}% Umbruchkorrektur + \begin{verse} + Wenn einer, der mit Mühe kaum\\* + Gekrochen ist auf einen Baum,\\* + Schon meint, dass er ein Vogel wär,\\* + So irrt sich der. + \end{verse} + \end{ShowOutput} + Bei einem sehr langen Vers wie: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat + immer Reparaturen.\\* + \bigskip + Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, + dem traue nicht, mein Sohn. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + bei dem ein Zeilenumbruch innerhalb des Verses erfolgt: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \iffree{}{\vskip-.8\baselineskip}% Umbruchkorrektur + \begin{verse} + Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer hat immer Reparaturen.\\ + \bigskip + Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein + Sohn. + \end{verse} + \end{ShowOutput} + kann mit \verb|\\*| allerdings nicht verhindert werden, dass am + Zeilenumbruch auch ein Seitenumbruch erfolgt. Um dies zu erreichen, + müsste innerhalb der ersten Zeile zusätzlich ein + \Macro{nopagebreak}\IndexCmd{nopagebreak} eingefügt werden: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Der Philosoph wie der Hausbesitzer\nopagebreak{} + hat immer Reparaturen.\\ + \bigskip + Wer dir sagt, er hätte noch nie\nopagebreak{} + gelogen, dem traue nicht, mein Sohn. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext + Hier noch zwei Sprüche, die man immer bedenken sollte, wenn man mit + scheinbar seltsamen Fragen zu {\LaTeX} oder den dazugehörigen Antworten + konfrontiert ist: +\begin{lstcode} + \begin{verse} + Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\* + Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\ + \bigskip + Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\* + Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst. + \end{verse} +\end{lstcode} + \begin{ShowOutput} + \iffree{}{\vskip-.8\baselineskip}% Umbruchkorrektur + \begin{verse} + Wir mögen's keinem gerne gönnen,\\* + Dass er was kann, was wir nicht können.\\ + \bigskip + Wie klein ist das, was einer ist,\\* + Wenn man's mit seinem Dünkel misst. + \end{verse} + \end{ShowOutput} + \fi + In diesen Beispielen wurde übrigens jeweils \Macro{bigskip} verwendet, + um zwei Sprüche voneinander zu trennen. + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturvarianten + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{quote}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Dies ist intern ebenfalls eine Listenumgebung und sowohl bei den + Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} zu finden. Der Inhalt der + Umgebung wird im Blocksatz mit beidseitigem Einzug gesetzt. Die Umgebung + wird häufig verwendet, um längere Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Dabei + werden Absätze innerhalb der Umgebung durch einen vertikalen Abstand + gekennzeichnet.% + \EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{quotation}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Diese Umgebung ist mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} + vergleichbar. Während bei \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} Absätze + durch vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet werden, wird bei + \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem Einzug der ersten Zeile eines + Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den ersten Absatz einer + \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung. Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, + müssen Sie die \Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} + voranstellen.% + \EndIndexGroup + \else + \begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{quote}\end{Environment} + \begin{Environment}{quotation}\end{Environment} + \end{Declaration}% + Diese beiden Umgebungen sind intern ebenfalls Listenumgebungen und sowohl + bei den Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} zu finden. Beide + Umgebungen setzen Blocksatz, der rechts und links eingezogen + ist. Verwendet werden die Umgebungen häufig, um längere + Zitate\Index{Zitat} abzusetzen. Der Unterschied zwischen beiden liegt in + der Art und Weise, wie Absätze abgesetzt werden. Während bei + \Environment{quote} Absätze durch vertikalen Abstand gekennzeichnet + werden, wird bei \Environment{quotation} mit horizontalem Einzug der + ersten Zeile eines Absatzes gearbeitet. Dies gilt auch für den ersten + Absatz einer \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung% Umbruchkorrektur + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + , außer es wird \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent} vorangestellt.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + . Wollen Sie dort den Einzug verhindern, müssen Sie die + \Macro{noindent}-Anweisung\IndexCmd{noindent} voranstellen.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% + \IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.quote}% + Sie wollen eine kleine Anekdote hervorheben. Also schreiben Sie + unter Verwendung der Umgebung \Environment{quotation}:% +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[paper=a5,pagesize]{scrartcl} + \usepackage{selinput} + \SelectInputMappings{adieresis={ä},germandbls={ß}} + \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} + \begin{document} + Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich + einst in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: + \begin{quotation} + Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in + Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht + ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem + Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze + in der Hand. + + "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem + Ton, doch bestem Hochdeutsch, + "`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr + gegessen."' + + Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und + entgegnet im Brustton vollster Überzeugung: + + "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' + \end{quotation} + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Das Ergebnis könnte dann so aussehen: + \begin{ShowOutput} + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext + Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst + in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: + \fi + \begin{quotation} + Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in + Stuttgart. Als die Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein + unrasierter Mann in reichlich schäbigem + Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in + der Hand. + + "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, + doch bestem Hochdeutsch, + \iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext + während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt, + \fi + "`ich habe + seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."' + + Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet + im Brustton vollster Überzeugung: + + "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' + \end{quotation} + \end{ShowOutput}% + Zum Vergleich sei das Ganze an Stelle von \Environment{quotation} auch + noch mit einer \Environment{quote}-Umgebung gezeigt:% + \begin{ShowOutput} + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext + Ein kleines Beispiel für eine Anekdote, die sich einst + in Schwaben zugetragen haben soll: + \fi + \begin{quote}\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 2pt minus 2pt} + Es klingelt an der Tür eines Pfarrhauses in Stuttgart. Als die + Haushälterin öffnet, steht ein unrasierter Mann in reichlich + schäbigem Mantel vor der Tür und hält seine Strickmütze in der Hand. + + "`Gute Frau,"' verkündet der Mann in gequältem Ton, doch bestem + Hochdeutsch, + \iffalse% Umbruchkorrekturtext + während er verlegen von einem Bein auf das andere wechselt, + \fi + "`ich habe seit drei Tagen nichts mehr gegessen."' + + Die Frau schüttelt mitleidig den Kopf und entgegnet im Brustton + vollster Überzeugung: + + "`Guda Moh, Sie missat sich halt zwinga!"' + \end{quote} + \end{ShowOutput} + % + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + \fi % Umbruchkorrekturvarianten +\fi + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{addmargin}\OParameter{linker Einzug}\Parameter{Einzug} + \end{Environment} + \begin{Environment}{addmargin*}\OParameter{innerer Einzug}\Parameter{Einzug} + \end{Environment} +\end{Declaration} +Wie bei % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + den in den Standardklassen und den \KOMAScript-Klassen vorhandenen + Umgebungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.quote} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.quotation}% +}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quote} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.quotation}% +} % +handelt es sich bei \Environment{addmargin} um eine Umgebung, die den +Rand\Index{Rand} verändert. Im Unterschied zu den beiden erstgenannten +Umgebungen kann der Anwender jedoch bei \Environment{addmargin} wählen, um +welchen Wert der Rand verändert werden kann. Des Weiteren verändert die +Umgebung den Absatzeinzug und den Absatzabstand nicht. Es wird auch kein +zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor und nach der Umgebung eingefügt. + +Ist nur das obligatorische Argument \PName{Einzug} angegeben, so wird der +Inhalt der Umgebung rechts und links um diesen Wert eingezogen. Ist das +optionale Argument \PName{linker Einzug} hingegen angegeben, so wird links +abweichend von \PName{Einzug} der Wert \PName{linker Einzug} zum Rand addiert. + +Die Sternvariante \Environment{addmargin*} unterscheidet sich nur im +doppelseitigen Satz von der Variante ohne Stern, wobei der Unterschied auch +nur dann auf"|tritt, wenn das optionale Argument \PName{innerer Einzug} +verwendet wird. Dabei wird dann der Wert von \PName{innerer Einzug} zum +inneren Randanteil der Seite addiert. Dies ist bei rechten Seiten der linke +Rand der Seite, bei linken Seiten jedoch der rechte Rand der +Seite. \PName{Einzug} gilt dann für den jeweils anderen Rand. + +Bei beiden Varianten der Umgebung sind für alle Parameter auch negative Werte +erlaubt. % Umbruchkorrektur +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Die Umgebung ragt dann entsprechend in den Rand hinein.% +}{% + Damit kann man erreichen, dass die Umgebung in den Rand hineinragt.% +}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.addmargin}% + Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Anleitung mit kurzen + Quellcode-Beispielen. Um diese sehr stark hervorzuheben, sollen sie mit + horizontalen Linien vom Text abgesetzt und leicht in den äußeren Rand + verschoben werden. Sie definieren sich dafür zunächst eine Umgebung: +\begin{lstcode} + \newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% + }{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% + } +\end{lstcode} + \begin{ShowOutput} + \newenvironment{QuellcodeRahmen}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% + }{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% + } + Zur Demonstration sei die Definition der Umgebung in der Umgebung selbst + gesetzt: + \begin{QuellcodeRahmen} +\begin{lstcode} +\newenvironment{\QuellcodeRahmen}{% + \begin{addmargin*}[1em]{-1em}% + \begin{minipage}{\linewidth}% + \rule{\linewidth}{2pt}% +}{% + \rule[.25\baselineskip]{\linewidth}{2pt}% + \end{minipage}% + \end{addmargin*}% +} +\end{lstcode} + \end{QuellcodeRahmen} + Nicht zwingend schön, aber es zeigt den Nutzen. + \end{ShowOutput} + Das optionale Argument der \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebung sorgt dafür, + dass der innere Rand um den Wert 1\Unit{em} vergrößert wird. Dafür wird + der äußere Rand um den negativen Wert vergrößert, also in Wirklichkeit um + 1\Unit{em} verkleinert. Dies resultiert in einer Verschiebung um + 1\Unit{em} nach außen. Selbstverständlich kann statt \PValue{1em} auch + eine Länge, beispielsweise \PValue{2\Macro{parindent}}, verwendet werden. + \end{Example} +\fi% + +Ob eine Seite eine linke oder eine rechte Seite ist, kann übrigens beim ersten +\LaTeX-Durchlauf nicht zuverlässig festgestellt werden. Siehe dazu die +Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd} +(\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispageodd}) und +\iffree{\Macro{ifthispagewasodd}}{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.ifthispagewasodd}} +(\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd}). + +\begin{Explain} + Im Zusammenspiel von Umgebungen wie Listen mit Absätzen ergeben sich für + Laien häufiger Fragen. Daher widmet sich die weiterführende Erklärung zu + Option \DescRef{maincls-experts.option.parskip} in + \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.parskip} auch diesem + Thema. Ebenfalls im Expertenteil in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.env.addmargin*} wird die Problematik von + mehrseitigen \Environment{addmargin*}-Umgebungen behandelt. +\end{Explain}% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-13.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex index 7de327ac8f7..6486922a99c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-13.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-marginpar.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-13.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-marginpar.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-13.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-marginpar.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,45 +45,42 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-13.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-marginpar.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother + \section{Randnotizen} \seclabel{marginNotes}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes} geschrieben -wurde. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Randnotizen}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} geschrieben wurde. Falls + Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes} bereits gelesen + und verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.marginNotes.next} fortfahren.% +} + Außer dem eigentlichen Textbereich, der normalerweise den Satzspiegel ausfüllt, existiert in Dokumenten noch die so genannte Marginalienspalte. In -dieser können Randnotizen gesetzt werden. % Umbruchkorrekturtext -\IfNotCommon{scrlttr2}{In diesem \iffree{Dokument}{Buch} wird davon ebenfalls - Gebrauch gemacht.}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Bei Briefen sind Randnotizen allerdings eher unüblich und - sollten äußerst sparsam eingesetzt werden.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +dieser können Randnotizen gesetzt werden. % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Bei Briefen sind Randnotizen allerdings eher unüblich und sollten äußerst + sparsam eingesetzt werden.% +}{% + In diesem \iffree{Dokument}{Buch} wird davon ebenfalls Gebrauch gemacht.% +}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{marginpar}\OParameter{Randnotiz links}\Parameter{Randnotiz}\\ + \Macro{marginpar}\OParameter{Randnotiz links}\Parameter{Randnotiz} \Macro{marginline}\Parameter{Randnotiz} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{marginpar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{marginline}% Für Randnotizen\Index[indexmain]{Randnotizen} ist bei {\LaTeX} normalerweise Anweisung \Macro{marginpar} vorgesehen. Die \PName{Randnotiz} wird dabei im äußeren Rand gesetzt. Bei einseitigen Dokumenten wird der rechte Rand @@ -94,69 +91,56 @@ Randnotizen statt des Blocksatzes oft je nach Rand linksbündiger oder rechtsbündiger Flattersatz zu bevorzugen ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet hierfür die Anweisung \Macro{marginline}. -\ifCommonscrlttr\else -\begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:\csname - label@base\endcsname.cmd.marginline.example}% - In diesem Kapitel ist an einigen Stellen die % - \IfCommon{maincls}{Klassenangabe \Class{scrartcl} }% - \IfCommon{scrextend}{Paketangabe \Package{scrextend} }% - im Rand zu finden. Diese kann mit: -\ifCommonmaincls +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \iftrue% +}{% + Ein ausführliches Beispiel hierzu finden Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.marginNotes}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.marginline}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.marginline}% + In diesem \iffree{Dokument}{Buch} ist an einigen Stellen die + Klassenangabe \Class{scrartcl} + im Rand zu finden. Diese kann mit: \begin{lstcode} \marginline{\texttt{scrartcl}} \end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \marginline{\texttt{scrextend}} -\end{lstcode} -\fi - erreicht werden.% -\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext - \footnote{Tatsächlich wurde nicht \Macro{texttt}, - sondern eine semantische Auszeichnung verwendet. Um nicht unnötig - zu verwirren, wurde diese im Beispiel ersetzt.}% -\fi + erreicht werden.% + \iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext + \footnote{Tatsächlich wurde nicht \Macro{texttt}, + sondern eine semantische Auszeichnung verwendet. Um nicht unnötig + zu verwirren, wurde diese im Beispiel ersetzt.}% + \fi - Statt der Anweisung \Macro{marginline} wäre auch die Verwendung von - \Macro{marginpar} möglich gewesen. Tatsächlich wird bei obiger Verwendung - von \Macro{marginline} intern nichts anders gemacht als: -\ifCommonmaincls + Statt der Anweisung \Macro{marginline} wäre auch die Verwendung von + \Macro{marginpar} möglich gewesen. Tatsächlich wird bei obiger Verwendung + von \Macro{marginline} intern nichts anders gemacht als: \begin{lstcode} \marginpar[\raggedleft\texttt{scrartcl}] {\raggedright\texttt{scrartcl}} \end{lstcode} -\else -\begin{lstcode} - \marginpar[\raggedleft\texttt{scrextend}] - {\raggedright\texttt{scrextend}} -\end{lstcode} + Damit ist \Macro{marginline} also nur eine abkürzende Schreibweise.% + \end{Example}% \fi - Damit ist \Macro{marginline} also nur eine abkürzende Schreibweise.% -\end{Example}% Für\textnote{Achtung!} Experten sind in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.marginpar} Probleme bei der Verwendung -von \Macro{marginpar} dokumentiert. Diese gelten ebenso für -\Macro{marginline}. Darüber hinaus wird in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-notecolumn} -ein Paket vorgestellt, mit dem sich auch Notizspalten mit eigenem -Seitenumbruch realisieren lassen. % +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.marginpar} Probleme bei der Verwendung von +\Macro{marginpar} dokumentiert. Diese gelten ebenso für \Macro{marginline}. +Darüber hinaus wird in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-notecolumn} ein Paket +vorgestellt, mit dem sich auch Notizspalten mit eigenem Seitenumbruch +realisieren lassen. % \iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur -Allerdings ist das Paket -\Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-notecolumn} eher als eine -Konzeptstudie und weniger als fertiges Paket zu verstehen.% -\fi% + Allerdings ist das Paket + \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-notecolumn} eher als + eine Konzeptstudie und weniger als fertiges Paket zu verstehen.% \fi% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Ein ausführliches Beispiel hierzu finden Sie in - \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.marginline.example}.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{marginpar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{marginline}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Randnotizen}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-7.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex index ed34eac3f96..da0ef14d305 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-7.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-oddorevenpage.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-7.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-oddorevenpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-7.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-oddorevenpage.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,52 +45,54 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-7.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-oddorevenpage.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} \seclabel{oddOrEven}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.oddOrEven} geschrieben -wurde. -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>gerade}% \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>ungerade}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.oddOrEven} geschrieben + wurde. Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.oddOrEven} + bereits gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next} auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.oddOrEven.next} fortfahren.% +} + Bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten wird zwischen linken und rechten Seiten unterschieden. Dabei hat eine linke Seite immer eine gerade Nummer und eine rechte Seite immer eine ungerade Nummer. % -\IfCommon{maincls}{Die Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten ist damit +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Die Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten ist damit gleichbedeutend mit der Erkennung von Seiten mit gerader oder ungerader Nummer. In \iffree{dieser Anleitung}{diesem Buch} ist vereinfachend von ungeraden und geraden Seiten die Rede.% -% Umbruchkorrekturtext + % Umbruchkorrekturtext \iftrue% - Bei einseitigen Dokumenten existiert die Unterscheidung zwischen linken und - rechten Seiten nicht. Dennoch gibt es natürlich auch bei einseitigen - Dokumenten sowohl Seiten mit gerader als auch Seiten mit ungerader Nummer.% - \fi}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{In der Regel werden Briefe einseitig -gesetzt. Sollen Briefe mit einseitigem Layout jedoch auf Vorder- und Rückseite -gedruckt, oder ausnahmsweise tatsächlich doppelseitige Briefe erstellt werden, -kann unter Umständen das Wissen, ob man sich auf einer Vorder- oder einer -Rückseite befindet, nützlich sein.}% + Bei einseitigen Dokumenten existiert die Unterscheidung zwischen linken + und rechten Seiten nicht. Dennoch gibt es natürlich auch bei einseitigen + Dokumenten sowohl Seiten mit gerader als auch Seiten mit ungerader + Nummer.% + \fi% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In der Regel werden Briefe einseitig gesetzt. Sollen Briefe mit + einseitigem Layout jedoch auf Vorder- und Rückseite gedruckt, oder + ausnahmsweise tatsächlich doppelseitige Briefe erstellt werden, kann unter + Umständen das Wissen, ob man sich auf einer Vorder- oder einer Rückseite + befindet, nützlich sein.% + }{}% +} \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifthispageodd}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifthispageodd}% Will man bei \KOMAScript{} feststellen, ob ein Text auf einer geraden oder einer ungeraden Seite ausgegeben wird, so verwendet man die Anweisung \Macro{ifthispageodd}. Dabei wird das Argument \PName{Dann-Teil} nur dann @@ -101,11 +103,10 @@ befindet. Anderenfalls kommt das Argument \PName{Sonst-Teil} zur Anwendung. Angenommen, Sie wollen einfach nur ausgeben, ob ein Text auf einer geraden oder ungeraden Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie könnten dann beispielsweise mit der Eingabe - % Satzkorrektur: listings - \begin{lstcode}[belowskip=-\baselineskip] +\begin{lstcode} Dies ist eine Seite mit \ifthispageodd{un}{}gerader Seitenzahl. - \end{lstcode} +\end{lstcode} \iffree{}{mit leerem \PName{Sonst-Teil} }% Umbruchkorrekturtext!!! die Ausgabe \begin{quote} @@ -124,13 +125,11 @@ Entscheidung eine Heuristik verwendet. Näheres zur Problematik der Erkennung von linken und rechten Seiten oder geraden und ungeraden Seitennummern ist für Experten in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd} zu finden.% +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ifthispageodd} zu finden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifthispageodd}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>ungerade}% -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>gerade} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-options.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-options.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ce20e734239 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-options.tex @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-options.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-options.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-options.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\seclabel{options} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Optionen}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options} geschrieben wurde. Falls + Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.options} bereits gelesen + und verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.next} fortfahren.% +} + +In diesem Abschnitt wird eine Besonderheit von \KOMAScript{} vorgestellt, die +neben % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{\Package{typearea} auch andere + \KOMAScript-Pakete und "~Klassen }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{den Klassen \Class{scrbook}, + \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} auch andere \KOMAScript-Klassen und + "~Pakete }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} auch andere + \KOMAScript-Klassen und "~Pakete }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{den Klassen und \Package{scrextend} + auch einige andere \KOMAScript-Pakete }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrhack}{\Package{scrhack} auch andere + \KOMAScript-Pakete und "~Klassen }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrjura}{\Package{scrjura} auch andere + \KOMAScript-Pakete und "~Klassen }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{\Package{scrlayer} auch andere + \KOMAScript-Pakete und "-Klassen }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete und + "-Klassen }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-notecolumn}{% + \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} auch andere \KOMAScript-Pakete + und "-Klassen }{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError}}}}}}}}}%% +betrifft. % +% Umbruchvarianten: +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{Im Sinne der Abgeschlossenheit der Kapitel + ist dieser Abschnitt nahezu identisch in mehreren Kapiteln zu finden, + braucht aber beim Studium des gesamten von \KOMAScript{} natürlich nur in + einem gelesen werden.% +}{Damit die Anwender alle Informationen zu einem Paket oder einer Klasse im + jeweiligen Kapitel finden, ist dieser Abschnitt nahezu gleichlautend in + mehreren Kapiteln zu finden. Anwender, die nicht nur an der Anleitung zu + einem Paket oder einer Klasse interessiert sind, sondern sich einen + Gesamtüberblick über \KOMAScript{} verschaffen wollen, brauchen diesen + Abschnitt nur in einem der Kapitel zu lesen und können ihn + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{bei den weiteren Kapitel überspringen.}{beim + weiteren Studium der Anleitung dann überspringen.}% +} % + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{documentclass}\OParameter{Optionenliste}% + \Parameter{\KOMAScript-Klasse}% + \Macro{usepackage}\OParameter{Optionenliste}% + \Parameter{Paket-Liste} +\end{Declaration} +Bei \LaTeX{} ist vorgesehen, dass Anwender Klassenoptionen in Form einer durch +Komma getrennten Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von +\Macro{documentclass} angeben. Außer an die Klasse werden diese Optionen auch +an alle Pakete weitergereicht, die diese Optionen verstehen. Ebenso ist +vorgesehen, dass Anwender Paketoptionen in Form einer durch Komma getrennten +Liste einfacher Schlüsselwörter als optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage} +angeben. \KOMAScript{} erweitert\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} den +Mechanismus der Optionen für die \KOMAScript-Klassen und einige Pakete um +weitere Möglichkeiten. So haben die meisten Optionen bei \KOMAScript{} +zusätzlich einen Wert. Eine Option hat also nicht unbedingt nur die Form +\PName{Option}, sondern kann auch die Form +\PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert} haben. Bis auf diesen Unterschied +arbeiten \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} bei \KOMAScript{} wie in +\cite{latex:usrguide} oder jeder \LaTeX-Einführung, beispielsweise +\cite{l2kurz}, beschrieben.% +% +\iffree{}{\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par + Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket + \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} + besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Es versteht daher nur einfache + Optionen ohne Wertzuweisung.\par}{}}% + +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf{% + scrjura,scrhack,scrlayer,scrlayer-scrpage,scrlayer-notecolumn,scrextend% +}{% + Bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse\textnote{Achtung!} sollten im + Übrigen beim Laden des Pakets \Package{typearea} oder \Package{scrbase} + keine Optionen angegeben werden. Das ist darin begründet, dass die Klasse + diese Pakete bereits ohne Optionen lädt und \LaTeX{} das mehrmalige Laden + eines Pakets mit unterschiedlicher Angabe von Optionen verweigert.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\ Überhaupt ist es bei Verwendung einer + \KOMAScript-Klasse nicht notwendig, eines dieser Pakete auch noch explizit + zu laden.}{}} + +% Umbruchoptimierung!!! +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{typearea}{Das Setzen der Optionen mit + \Macro{documentclass} oder \Macro{usepackage} hat übrigens + einen\textnote{Achtung!} entscheidenden + Nachteil: +}{% + zu Einstellungen von Optionen haben \Macro{documentclass} und + \Macro{usepackage} einen Nachteil, der unbedingt zu + beachten\textnote{Achtung!} ist: +}% +Anweisungen, Längen, Zähler und ähnliches können darin leicht zerbrechen. So +führt die Verwendung einer \LaTeX-Länge im Wert einer Option bei diesen +Anweisungen zu einer Fehlermeldung, noch bevor der Wert an \KOMAScript{} +übergeben wird, es also die Kontrolle darüber übernehmen +könnte. Wertzuweisungen mit \LaTeX-Längen oder \LaTeX-Zählern sollten daher +nie per \Macro{documentclass} oder \Macro{usepackage}, sondern immer mit den +nachfolgend dokumentierten Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} vorgenommen werden. +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{KOMAoptions}\Parameter{Optionenliste}\\ + \Macro{KOMAoption}\Parameter{Option}\Parameter{Werteliste} +\end{Declaration} +\KOMAScript{}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{typearea}} bietet bei +den meisten Klassen- und Paketoptionen auch die Möglichkeit, den Wert der +Optionen noch nach dem Laden der Klasse beziehungsweise des Pakets zu +ändern. Man kann dann wahlweise mit der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} die +Werte einer Reihe von Optionen ändern. Jede Option der \PName{Optionenliste} +hat dabei die Form \PName{Option}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}. + +Einige Optionen besitzen auch einen Säumniswert (engl. \emph{default + value}). Versäumt man die Angabe eines Wertes, verwendet man die Option also +einfach in der Form \PName{Option}, so wird automatisch dieser Säumniswert +angenommen. + +Manche Optionen können gleichzeitig mehrere Werte besitzen. Für solche +Optionen besteht die Möglichkeit, mit \Macro{KOMAoption} der einen +\PName{Option} nacheinander eine Reihe von Werten zuzuweisen. Die einzelnen +Werte sind dabei in der \PName{Werteliste} durch Komma voneinander getrennt. + +Soll\textnote{Achtung!} ein \PName{Wert} ein Gleichheitszeichen oder ein Komma +enthalten, so ist der \PName{Wert} in geschweifte Klammern zu setzen. + +\begin{Explain} + \KOMAScript{} bedient sich für die Realisierung dieser Möglichkeit der + Anweisungen \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions} und + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption} mit der Familie »\PValue{KOMA}«. +\iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur + Näheres zu diesen Anweisungen ist % + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{maincls,scrlttr2}{für Experten }{}% + in \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions} zu finden. \else + % + Siehe dazu \autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{sec:scrbase.keyvalue}, + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions}. + % +\fi +\end{Explain}% +\iffree{}{\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par + Das als veraltet zu betrachtende Paket + \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} + besitzt diese Erweiterung übrigens nicht. Optionen können daher nur über + die zuvor erklärte Möglichkeit während des Ladens des Pakets gesetzt + werden.}{}}% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +\phantomsection +\label{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.options.end} +\endinput + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..577094beabc --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-pagestylemanipulation.tex @@ -0,0 +1,995 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-pagestylemanipulation.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Text that is common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapitels in der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ============================================================================ + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-pagestylemanipulation.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraph: + Setting up defined page styles)] + +\section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} +\seclabel{pagestyle.content} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + Obwohl \Package{scrlayer} selbst keine konkreten Seitenstile mit Inhalt + definiert -- die erwähnten Seitenstile \PageStyle{@everystyle@} und + \PageStyle{empty} werden ja zunächst ohne Ebenen, also leer definiert --, + stellt es einige Optionen und Befehle zur Beeinflussung von Inhalten zur + Verfügung.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurde erklärt, wie + die Seitenstile \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} + grundlegend vordefiniert sind und wie diese Vorbelegung grundsätzlich + geändert werden kann. Es fehlen jedoch noch Informationen, wie + beispielsweise die Kolumnentitel zustande kommen, wie man die Breite des + Kopfes und Fußes verändern kann und wie man Linien über oder unter Kopf + oder Fuß setzen kann. Obwohl dies eigentlich Fähigkeiten des Pakets + \Package{scrlayer} sind, werden sie nachfolgend erläutert, da diese + grundlegenden Eigenschaften von \Package{scrlayer} einen wichtigen Teil + der Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ausmachen.% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{% + Dieser Abschnitt ist als Ergänzung zu + \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyle.content} zu verstehen und beschreibt + Dinge, die sich dem Anfänger nicht unbedingt sofort erschließen.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% +} + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{\iffalse}{% + \csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{automark}\OParameter{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke} + \Parameter{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke} + \Macro{automark*}\OParameter{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke} + \Parameter{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke} + \Macro{manualmark} + \Option{automark} + \OptionVName{autooneside}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Option{manualmark} + \end{Declaration} + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{Explain} + Bei den Standardklassen und auch bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen fällt die + Entscheidung, ob mit lebenden oder statischen + Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>lebend}\Index{Kolumnentitel>statisch} + gearbeitet werden soll, über die Wahl des entsprechenden + Seitenstils. Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} erklärt, + erhält man bei Wahl von \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}% + \important{\PageStyle{headings}} lebende Kolumnentitel. Unter lebenden + Kolumnentiteln versteht man die Wiederholung eines für die Seite oder + die \emph{Kolumne} markanten Textes meist im Kopf, seltener im Fuß der + Seite. + + Bei den Artikel-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{article}\and \Class{scrartcl}} + \Class{article} oder \Class{scrartcl} wird für den lebenden + Kolumnentitel\textnote{lebende Kolumnentitel} im einseitigen Modus die + Abschnittsüberschrift, also das obligatorische oder das optionale + Argument von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} verwendet. Diese wird als + \emph{rechte Marke} behandelt. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird dieselbe + Überschrift als \emph{linke Marke} verwendet und gleichzeitig die + Unterabschnittsüberschrift als \emph{rechte Marke}. Ausgegeben wird die + linke Marke wie der Name schon sagt auf der linken Seite, während die + rechte Marke auf rechten Seiten -- im einseitigen Modus also auf allen + Seiten -- ausgegeben wird. Beim Setzen der linken Marke für den + Abschnitt werden von den Klassen in der Voreinstellung außerdem auch + immer die rechten Marken gelöscht. + + Bei den Bericht- und Buch-Klassen\OnlyAt{\Class{report}\and + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{book}\and \Class{scrbook}} wird eine Ebene + höher begonnen. Im einseitigen Modus wird also die Kapitelüberschrift + als rechte Marke gesetzt. Im doppelseitigen Satz wird die + Kapitelüberschrift als linke Marke und die Abschnittsüberschrift als + rechte Marke gesetzt. + + Verwendet man hingegen als Seitenstil + \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}% + \important{\PageStyle{myheadings}}\textnote{manuelle Kolumnentitel}, so + existieren zwar die Marken im Kopf genauso und auch die Seitenzahlen + werden gleich platziert, allerdings werden die Marken nicht automatisch + durch die Überschriften gesetzt. Man kann sie dann nur + manuell\important{% + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright}\\ + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth}}% + über die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markright} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.markboth} befüllen. + \end{Explain}\par% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + Bei den meisten Klassen bestimmt die Wahl des Seitenstils, meist + \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{myheadings}, darüber, ob die + Kolumnentitel automatisch oder manuell erzeugt werden. % + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% + }% + Genau diese Unterscheidung wurde bei \Package{scrpage2} und nun auch bei + \Package{scrlayer} aufgehoben. Statt die Unterscheidung zwischen + automatischen\textnote{lebende und manuelle Kolumnentitel} und manuellen + Kolumnentiteln über den Seitenstil vorzunehmen, gibt es die beiden + Anweisungen \Macro{automark} und \Macro{manualmark}. + + Mit \Macro{manualmark}\important{\Macro{manualmark}} wird dabei auf manuelle + Marken umgeschaltet. Es deaktiviert also das automatische Setzen der + Marken. Demgegenüber kann mit \Macro{automark}\important{\Macro{automark}} + und \Macro{automark*} festgelegt werden, welche Gliederungsebenen für das + automatische Setzen der Marke verwendet werden sollen. Das optionale + Argument gibt dabei die \PName{Gliederungsebene der rechten Marke} an, + während das obligatorische Argument die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken + Marke} ist. Als Argument werden jeweils die Namen der Gliederungsebenen + angegeben, also \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, \PValue{section}, + \PValue{subsection}, \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder + \PValue{subparagraph}. + + Normalerweise sollte die höhere Ebene die linke Marke setzen, während die + tiefere Ebene für die rechte Marke zu verwenden ist. Diese übliche + Konvention ist jedoch keine Pflicht, sondern lediglich sinnvoll. + + Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass nicht alle Klassen Kolumnentitel + für alle Ebenen ermöglichen. So setzen die Standardklassen beispielsweise + nie Kolumnentitel für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen + unterstützen hingegen alle Ebenen. + + Der Unterschied zwischen \Macro{automark} und + \Macro{automark*}\important{\Macro{automark*}} liegt darin, dass + \Macro{automark} alle vorherigen Befehle zum automatischen Setzen der Marken + aufhebt, während die Stern-Version \Macro{automark*} lediglich die Aktionen + für die angegebenen Gliederungsebenen ändert. Man kann so auch relativ + komplexe Fälle abdecken.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{\csname + iffalse\endcsname}% + \iffree{}{\par + Das veraltete Paket + \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} + kennt sowohl \Macro{manualmark} als auch \Macro{automark}, jedoch nicht + \Macro{automark*}. Daher sind die nachfolgenden Beispielen nicht + vollständig auf die Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2} übertragbar.% + }% + % + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark}% + Angenommen Sie wollen, dass wie üblich auf den linken Seiten eines + Buches die Kapitelüberschriften als automatische Kolumnentitel verwendet + werden und auf den rechten Seiten die + Abschnittsüberschriften. Allerdings soll auf rechte Seiten so lange + ebenfalls die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, bis der erste + Abschnitt auftaucht. Dazu wird zuerst \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen + und der Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Das Dokument + beginnt also mit: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} +\end{lstcode} + Als nächstes wird dafür gesorgt, dass die Kapitelüberschriften sowohl + die linke als auch die rechte Marke setzen: +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[chapter]{chapter} +\end{lstcode} + Dann sollen die Abschnittsüberschriften zusätzlich die rechten Marken + setzen: +\begin{lstcode} + \automark*[section]{} +\end{lstcode} + Hier findet die Stern-Version Anwendung, da die vorherige + \Macro{automark}-Anweisung weiterhin wirksam bleiben soll. Außerdem + bleibt das Argument für die \PName{Gliederungsebene der linken Marke} + leer, weil diese Marke unverändert bleiben soll. + + Alles, was jetzt noch fehlt, ist ein wenig Dokumentinhalt: +\begin{lstcode} + \usepackage{lipsum} + \begin{document} + \chapter{Kapitel} + \lipsum[1-20] + \section{Abschnitt} + \lipsum[21-40] + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Dabei ist das Paket \Package{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} mit seiner + Anweisung \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} sehr nützlich. + + Wenn Sie dieses Beispiel einmal testen, werden Sie sehen, dass die + Kapitelanfangsseite wie üblich ohne Kolumnentitel ist, da sie + automatisch im \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} gesetzt wird. Seite~2 bis 4 tragen als + Kolumnentitel die Kapitelüberschrift. Nachdem auf Seite~4 eine + Abschnittsüberschrift ausgegeben wurde, ändert sich der Kolumnentitel + auf Seite~5 in die Abschnittsüberschrift. Ab dann werden die beiden + Überschriften im Kopf wechselweise ausgegeben, auf linken Seiten die + Kapitelüberschrift, auf rechten Seiten die Abschnittsüberschrift. + \end{Example} + \fi + + Außer mit den Befehlen kann auch direkt mit den beiden Optionen + \Option{manualmark}\important{\Option{manualmark}\\\Option{automark}} und + \Option{automark} zwischen automatischen und manuellen Kolumnentiteln hin- + und hergeschaltet werden. Dabei verwendet \Option{automark} bei Klassen mit + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}-Anweisung immer die Voreinstellung +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[section]{chapter} +\end{lstcode} + und bei anderen Klassen +\begin{lstcode} + \automark[subsection]{section} +\end{lstcode} + + Im einseitigen Modus\textnote{einseitiger Satz} will man in der Regel nicht, + dass die untergeordnete Ebene die rechte Marke beeinflusst. Stattdessen soll + auch mit der Voreinstellung nur die höhere Ebene, die beispielsweise im + doppelseitigen Modus in der Voreinstellung alleine die linke Marke + beeinflusst, den Kolumnentitel aller Seiten vorgeben. Diese Voreinstellung + entspricht einer aktiven Option + \Option{autooneside}\important{\Option{autooneside}}. Die Option versteht + die Werte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf + \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Wird die Option + deaktiviert, so wirken sich im einseitigen Satz sowohl das optionale als + auch das obligatorische Argument auf den Kolumnentitel aus.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{\csname + iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{mark.oneside}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen im einseitigen Modus eines Berichts eine ganz + ähnliche Verwendung des Kolumnentitels erreichen, wie im vorherigen + Beispiel. Konkret soll so lange die Kapitelüberschrift verwendet werden, + bis ein Abschnitt gesetzt wird. Ab dann soll nur noch die + Abschnittsüberschrift verwendet werden. Dazu wird das Beispiel wie folgt + abgewandelt: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrreprt} + \usepackage[autooneside=false]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \automark[section]{chapter} + \usepackage{lipsum} + \begin{document} + \chapter{Kapitel} + \lipsum[1-20] + \section{Abschnitt} + \lipsum[21-40] + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Wie zu sehen ist, wird in diesem Fall keine ergänzende + \Macro{automark*}-Anweisung benötigt. Sie sollten zum Vergleich die + Option \Option{autooneside} auch einmal auf \PValue{true} setzen oder + sie entfernen. Ein Unterschied ist dann ab Seite~4 im Kolumnentitel im + Kopf der Seiten zu sehen. + \end{Example} + \fi + + Das\textnote{Achtung!} Laden des Pakets selbst hat übrigens noch keine + Auswirkung darauf, ob mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird oder + nicht. Erst die explizite Verwendung einer der Optionen \Option{automark} + oder \Option{manualmark} oder einer der beiden Anweisungen \Macro{automark} + oder \Macro{manualmark} schafft hier klare Verhältnisse.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\par% + Bei Bedarf finden Sie weitere Hintergründe und Beispiele zur Verwendung + dieser Befehle und Optionen mit dem auf \Package{scrlayer} basierenden + Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark}.% + }{}% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{draft}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \end{Declaration} + Die \KOMAScript-Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die + in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} + angegeben sind. Ist die Option aktiviert, so werden alle Elemente der + Seitenstile zusätzlich mit Maßlinien versehen. Dies kann während der + Entwurfsphase manchmal nützlich sein.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + Falls diese Option global gesetzt wurde, die Maßlinien aber nicht + gewünscht sind, kann die Option auch nur für das Paket deaktiviert werden, + indem man \OptionValue{draft}{false} als optionales Argument von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} beim Laden des Pakets angibt.% + }{}% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{MakeMarkcase}\Parameter{Text} + \end{Declaration} + Die automatischen, nicht jedoch die manuellen Kolumnentitel verwenden + \Macro{MakeMarkcase} für ihre Ausgabe. Ist die Anweisung beim Laden von + \Package{scrlayer} nicht definiert, so wird sie in der Voreinstellung derart + definiert, dass sie ihr Argument \PName{Text} unverändert ausgibt. Diese + Voreinstellung kann jedoch entweder durch Umdefinierung von + \Macro{MakeMarkcase} oder durch die nachfolgend + dokumentierte Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.markcase}% + \IndexOption{markcase}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.markcase}} + geändert werden. Je nach Einstellung wird das Argument dann beispielsweise + in Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben umgewandelt. + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{markcase}{Wert} + \end{Declaration} + Wie bereits früher erläutert, kann man bei \Package{scrlayer} zwischen + manuellen und automatischen Kolumnentiteln wählen. Bei den automatischen + Kolumnentiteln werden dabei die entsprechenden Marken über die + Gliederungsbefehle gesetzt. In manchen Kulturkreisen ist es im Gegensatz zur + Typografie des deutschsprachigen Raums üblich, die Kolumnentitel in + Großbuchstaben zu setzen. Die Standardklassen machen genau dies in der + Voreinstellung. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} unterstützt das optional + ebenfalls. Hierzu gibt man als Option + \OptionValue{markcase}{upper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}}% + \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper} an. Im Endeffekt führt das zu einer + Umdefinierung von + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{MakeMarkcase}, einer + Anweisung, die von \Package{scrlayer} beim Setzen von automatischen + Kolumnentiteln verwendet wird. + + Leider führt die von \LaTeX{} für derartigen Versalsatz\Index{Versalsatz} + vorgesehene Anweisung \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} zu einem + sehr unzureichenden Satz, da weder gesperrt noch ausgeglichen wird. Dies + liegt teilweise sicher daran, dass für typografisch korrekten Versalsatz + eine Glyphenanalyse notwendig ist, um die konkrete Form der Buchstaben und + ihrer Kombinationen in den Ausgleich der Sperrung einfließen zu lassen. Der + \KOMAScript-Autor empfiehlt daher, auf Versalsatz für die Kolumnentitel zu + verzichten. Dies ist normalerweise mit + \OptionValue{markcase}{used}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{used}}% + \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used} möglich. Allerdings fügen einige + Klassen selbst beispielsweise bei den Kolumnentitel für Verzeichnisse ein + \Macro{MakeUppercase} oder sogar die \TeX-Anweisung \Macro{uppercase} + ein. Für diese Fälle gibt es auch noch die Einstellung + \OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{noupper}}% + \IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}, mit deren Hilfe + \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase} für die Kolumnentitel lokal + deaktiviert werden können. + + Alle für \Option{markcase} möglichen Werte sind noch einmal in + \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{, + \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.markcase}} zusammengefasst.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{table} + \centering + \caption[Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{markcase}]{Mögliche Werte für + Option \Option{markcase} zur Wahl von Groß-/Kleinschreibung in + automatischen Kolumnentiteln}% + \label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.markcase}% + \begin{desctabular} + \pventry{lower}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=lower}% + definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass + automatische Kolumnentitel mit Hilfe von \Macro{MakeLowercase} in + Kleinbuchstaben gewandelt werden (Minuskelsatz).% + }% + \pventry{upper}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=upper}% + definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass + automatische Kolumnentitel mit Hilfe von \Macro{MakeUppercase} in + Großbuchstaben gewandelt werden (Versalsatz).% + }% + \pventry{used}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=used}% + definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, dass für + automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung der + Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird.% + }% + \entry{\PValue{ignoreuppercase}, \PValue{nouppercase}, + \PValue{ignoreupper}, + \PValue{noupper}}{\IndexOption[indexmain]{markcase~=noupper}% + definiert nicht nur \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.MakeMarkcase} so um, + dass für automatische Kolumnentitel keine automatische Veränderung + der Groß-/Kleinschreibung durchgeführt wird, sondern deaktiviert + zusätzlich lokal für alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile + \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{uppercase}.% + }% + \end{desctabular} + \end{table} + }{}% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{leftmark} + \Macro{rightmark} + \Macro{headmark} + \Macro{pagemark} + \end{Declaration} + Will man von den vordefinierten Seitenstilen abweichen, so muss man in der + Regel auch selbst entscheiden können, wo die Marken gesetzt werden + sollen. Mit \Macro{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} platziert man die + linke Marke. Diese wird dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den + entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt. + + Dementsprechend kann man mit \Macro{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}} + die rechte Marke platzieren, die dann bei der Ausgabe der Seite durch den + entsprechenden Inhalt ersetzt wird. Für einige Feinheiten dabei, sei auch + auf die weiterführenden Erklärungen zu + \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in + \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} verwiesen. + + Mit \Macro{headmark}\important{\Macro{headmark}} kann man sich das Leben + erleichtern. Diese Erweiterung von \Package{scrlayer} entspricht je nachdem, + ob die aktuelle Seite eine linke oder rechte ist, \Macro{leftmark} oder + \Macro{rightmark}. + + Die Anweisung \Macro{pagemark}\important{\Macro{pagemark}} hat genau + genommen nichts mit den Marken von \TeX{} zu tun. Sie dient dazu eine + formatierte Seitenzahl zu platzieren. + \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% + Bei ihrer Ausgabe wird dann auch die Schrifteinstellung für das Element + \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}} + verwendet. Diese kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + verändert werden (siehe auch \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}).% + \EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \par% + Bei Bedarf finden Sie ein Beispiel zur Verwendung der Anweisungen + \Macro{headmark} und \Macro{pagemark} mit dem auf \Package{scrlayer} + basierenden Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.headmark}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{headmark}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass auch im einseitigen Modus der Kolumnentitel + immer am linken Rand und die Seitenzahl immer am rechten Rand + ausgerichtet wird. Beide sollen im Kopf platziert werden. Das folgende, + vollständige Minimalbeispiel liefert genau dies: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrreprt} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \ihead{\headmark} + \ohead[\pagemark]{\pagemark} + \chead{} + \cfoot[]{} + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Das Paket \Package{blindtext}\IndexPackage{blindtext} mit seiner + Anweisung \Macro{blinddocument}\IndexCmd{blinddocument} wird hier für + die komfortable Erzeugung eines Beispieldokumentinhalts verwendet. + + Mit den Anweisungen + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}\IndexCmd{ihead} und + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead}\IndexCmd{ohead} werden die + gewünschten Marken platziert. Dabei wird die Seitenzahl-Marke mit Hilfe + des optionalen Argument von \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead} nicht + nur auf den mit \PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} + gesetzten Seiten, sondern auch für den auf der ersten Seite automatisch + verwendeten \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} + konfiguriert. + + Da die beiden Seitenstile bereits mit Marken in der Mitte von Kopf und + Fuß vordefiniert sind, werden diese beiden Elemente mit + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} und + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} gelöscht. Hierzu werden leere + Argumente verwendet. Alternativ dazu hätte man auch + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} + \IndexCmd{clearpairofpagestyles} + \emph{vor} \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead} verwenden können. Diese + Anweisung wird jedoch erst in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} auf + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} + erklärt werden. + \end{Example}% + + Bitte beachten Sie, dass das leere optionale Argument bei + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot} im Beispiel nicht gleichbedeutend mit + dem Weglassen dieses optionalen Arguments ist. Sie sollten das einmal + selbst ausprobieren und dabei den Fuß der ersten Seite beobachten.% + \fi + + Sollten die hier vorgestellten Möglichkeiten für Marken einmal nicht + ausreichen, so sind für fortgeschrittene Anwender ab + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark}}{% + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.righttopmark}} weitere + Anweisungen dokumentiert. Beispielsweise ist für lexikonartige Dokumente das + dort erklärte \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark} und + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark} recht nützlich.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{partmarkformat} + \Macro{chaptermarkformat} + \Macro{sectionmarkformat} + \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} + \Macro{subsubsectionmarkformat} + \Macro{paragraphmarkformat} + \Macro{subparagraphmarkformat} + \end{Declaration} + Diese Anweisungen werden von den \KOMAScript-Klassen und auch von + \Package{scrlayer} intern üblicherweise verwendet, um die Gliederungsnummern + der automatischen Kolumnentitel zu formatieren. Dabei wird auch der + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.autodot}-Mechanismus der \KOMAScript-Klassen + unterstützt. Bei Bedarf können diese Anweisungen umdefiniert werden, um eine + andere Formatierung der Nummern zu erreichen.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \ Siehe dazu gegebenenfalls das Beispiel in + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + auf \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% + }% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass Abschnittsüberschriften im Kolumnentitel + ohne Gliederungsnummer gesetzt werden, so ist das ganz einfach mit: +\begin{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{} +\end{lstcode} + zu erreichen. + \end{Example}% + \fi + % + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{partmark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{subsubsectionmark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{paragraphmark}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{subparagraphmark}\Parameter{Text} + \end{Declaration} + Diese Anweisungen werden intern von den meisten Klassen verwendet, um die + Marken entsprechend der Gliederungsbefehle zu setzen. Dabei wird als + Argument lediglich der Text, nicht jedoch die Nummer erwartet. Die Nummer + wird stattdessen automatisch über den aktuellen Zählerstand ermittelt, falls + mit nummerierten Überschriften gearbeitet wird. + + Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} verwenden nicht alle Klassen in allen + Gliederungsebenen eine solche Anweisung. So wird beispielsweise + \Macro{partmark} von den Standardklassen nie aufgerufen, während die + \KOMAScript-Klassen selbstverständlich auch \Macro{partmark} unterstützen. + + Falls diese Anweisungen vom Anwender umdefiniert werden, sollte + er\textnote{Achtung!} unbedingt darauf achten, vor dem Setzen der Nummer + ebenfalls über \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} zu prüfen, ob die + Nummern auszugeben sind. Dies gilt auch, wenn der Anwender + \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} selbst nicht verändert, weil Pakete + und Klassen sich eventuell auf die Wirkung von + \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth} verlassen! + + Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} definiert diese Anweisungen außerdem bei jedem + Aufruf von \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} oder + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.manualmark} oder den entsprechenden Optionen teilweise + neu, um so die gewünschten automatischen oder manuellen Kolumnentitel zu + erreichen.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{markleft}\Parameter{linke Marke} + \Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke} + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke} + \end{Declaration} + Unabhängig davon, ob gerade mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln + gearbeitet wird, kann man jederzeit die \PName{linke Marke} oder + \PName{rechte Marke} mit einer dieser Anweisungen setzen. Dabei ist zu + beachten, dass die resultierende linke Marke in + \Macro{leftmark}\IndexCmd{leftmark}\important{\Macro{leftmark}} die letzte + auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ist, während die resultierende + rechte Marke in + \Macro{rightmark}\IndexCmd{rightmark}\important{\Macro{rightmark}} die erste + auf der entsprechenden Seite gesetzte Marke ausgibt. Näheres dazu ist den + weiterführenden Erklärungen zu \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} in + \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} zu entnehmen. + + Wird mit manuellen Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gearbeitet, + so bleiben die Marken gültig, bis sie durch erneute Verwendung der + entsprechenden Anweisung explizit ersetzt werden. Bei automatischen + Kolumnentiteln können Marken hingegen je nach Konfigurierung des + Automatismus ihre Gültigkeit mit einer der nächsten Gliederungsüberschriften + verlieren. + + Auch im Zusammenhang mit den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle können + diese Anweisungen nützlich sein.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iftrue}{% + \ Ausführliche Beispiele für die Verwendung von \Macro{markboth} mit dem + von \Package{scrlayer} abgeleiteten Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} sind + in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, ab + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth} zu finden.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% + }% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.markboth}% + Angenommen, Sie schreiben noch vor dem Inhaltsverzeichnis ein Vorwort + über mehrere Seiten, das jedoch im Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht auftauchen + soll. Da Sie aber Trennlinien im Kopf verwenden, soll der Kolumnentitel + das Vorwort dennoch zeigen: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \chapter*{Vorwort} + \markboth{Vorwort}{Vorwort} + \blindtext[20] + \tableofcontents + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Zunächst erscheint das Ergebnis wunschgemäß. Vielleicht erst beim + zweiten Blick fällt aber auf, dass der Kolumnentitel »\texttt{Vorwort}« + im Gegensatz zu den übrigen Kolumnentiteln nicht im Versalsatz + erscheint. Das ist jedoch leicht zu ändern: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \chapter*{Vorwort} + \markboth{\MakeMarkcase{Vorwort}} + {\MakeMarkcase{Vorwort}} + \blindtext[20] + \tableofcontents + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Wie zu sehen ist, wurde \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase}% + \IndexCmd{MakeMarkcase}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase}} + verwendet, um auch den manuell korrigierten Kolumnentitel des Vorworts + entsprechend der automatischen Kolumnentitel des restlichen Dokuments + anzupassen. + + Verschieben Sie nun einmal \DescRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents}% + \Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis}\IndexCmd{tableofcontents}% + \important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents}} vor das Vorwort und + entfernen Sie die \Macro{markboth}-Anweisung. Sie werden entdecken, dass + das Vorwort als Kolumnentitel nun »\texttt{CONTENTS}« trägt. Das liegt + an einer Eigenart von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}% + \IndexCmd{chapter*}\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}} (siehe + auch in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} auf + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}). Soll hier stattdessen kein + Kolumnentitel erscheinen, so ist dies sehr einfach mit \Macro{markboth} + mit zwei leeren Argumenten zu erreichen: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass[headsepline]{book} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \begin{document} + \tableofcontents + \chapter*{Vorwort} + \markboth{}{} + \blindtext[20] + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + \fi% + % + \EndIndexGroup +\fi + + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{\iffalse}{\csname iftrue\endcsname} + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat}\Parameter{Gliederungsname} + \end{Declaration} + Diese Anweisung wird in der Voreinstellung zur Formatierung aller + Gliederungsnummern in automatischen Kolumnentiteln unterhalb der + Unterabschnitte und bei Klassen ohne \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} + zusätzlich auch für die Ebene der Abschnitte und Unterabschnitte verwendet, + soweit die entsprechenden Mark-Anweisungen nicht bereits anderweitig + definiert sind. Dabei verwendet die Anweisung in der Voreinstellung + \Macro{@seccntmarkformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntmarkformat}% + \important{\Macro{@seccntmarkformat}}, wenn eine solche interne Anweisung + wie bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen definiert ist. Anderenfalls wird mit + \Macro{@seccntformat}\IndexCmd{@seccntformat}\important{\Macro{@seccntformat}} + eine Anweisung verwendet, die bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern für Klassen und Pakete + bereitgestellt und von \KOMAScript{} etwas modifiziert wird. Als Argument + erwartet \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} den Namen der Gliederung, also + beispielsweise \PValue{chapter} oder \PValue{section} \emph{ohne} + vorangestellten umgekehrten Schrägstrich (engl. \emph{backslash}). + + Durch Umdefinierung dieser Anweisung kann damit die Standardformatierung + aller Gliederungsnummern im Kolumnentitel geändert werden, die darauf + zurückgreifen. Ebenso kann eine Klasse darüber eine andere + Standardformatierung vorgeben, ohne alle Befehle einzeln ändern zu müssen.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts}{\iftrue}{% + \par % + Ein ausführliches Beispiel für das Zusammenspiel der Anweisung + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit den auf + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermark} erklärten + Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.sectionmarkformat} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsectionmarkformat} beziehungsweise + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chaptermarkformat} bei Verwendung des + von \Package{scrlayer} abgeleiteten Pakets \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} ist + in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.content}, ab + \PageRefxmpl{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat} zu + finden.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.GenericMarkFormat}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass bei allen Gliederungsnummern im + Kolumnentitel eines Artikels die Nummer als weiße Schrift auf einem + schwarzen Kasten ausgegeben wird. Da bei Artikeln mit \Class{article} + die Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% + \important{% + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}\\ + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}} und + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{subsectionmarkformat} von \Package{scrlayer} mit Hilfe von + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} definiert werden, genügt dafür die + entsprechende Umdefinierung dieser einen Anweisung: +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox,textcolor}] + \documentclass{article} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{xcolor} + \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% + \colorbox{black}{% + \strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}% + } + \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% + \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \enskip + } + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Für die Farbumschaltungen werden Anweisungen des Pakets + \Package{xcolor}\IndexPackage{xcolor} verwendet. Näheres dazu ist der + Anleitung zum Paket zu entnehmen (siehe \cite{package:xcolor}). + + Außerdem wird eine unsichtbare Stütze mit \Macro{strut} eingefügt. Diese + Anweisung sollte in keiner ausführlichen \LaTeX-Einführung fehlen. + + Für den Kasten mit der Nummer wird eine eigene Hilfsanweisung + \Macro{numberbox} definiert. Diese wird in der Umdefinierung von + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} mit + \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect}\important{\Macro{protect}} vor der + Expansion geschützt. Dies ist notwendig, weil sonst durch das + \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}% + \important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}} für den Versalsatz der Kolumnentitel + nicht mehr die Farben »\texttt{black}« und »\texttt{white}«, sondern die + Farben »\texttt{BLACK}« und »\texttt{WHITE}« verlangt werden, die gar + nicht definiert sind. Alternativ könnte man \Macro{numberbox} auch mit + Hilfe von \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand*} statt mit \Macro{newcommand*} + definieren (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). + + Wollte man dasselbe mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder mit den + Standardklassen \Class{book} oder \Class{report} erreichen, so müsste + man übrigens zusätzlich + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{sectionmarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat}} und -- + je nach Klasse -- + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{subsectionmarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat}} + beziehungsweise \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat}% + \IndexCmd{chaptermarkformat}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat}} + umdefinieren, da diese bei Verwendung der genannten Klassen + \Macro{GenericMarkFormat} nicht verwenden: +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={colorbox,textcolor}] + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage{blindtext} + \usepackage[automark]{scrlayer-scrpage} + \pagestyle{scrheadings} + \usepackage{xcolor} + \newcommand*{\numberbox}[1]{% + \colorbox{black}{% + \strut~\textcolor{white}{#1}~}% + } + \renewcommand*{\GenericMarkFormat}[1]{% + \protect\numberbox{\csname the#1\endcsname}% + \enskip + } + \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{% + \GenericMarkFormat{chapter}% + } + \renewcommand*{\sectionmarkformat}{% + \GenericMarkFormat{section}% + } + \begin{document} + \blinddocument + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} + \fi% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{righttopmark} + \Macro{rightbotmark} + \Macro{rightfirstmark} + \Macro{lefttopmark} + \Macro{leftbotmark} + \Macro{leftfirstmark} + \end{Declaration} + \LaTeX\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} verwendet für die Seitenstile + normalerweise eine zweiteilige \TeX-Marke. Im Kolumnentitel kann auf den + linken Teil der Marke mit \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark}}\IndexCmd{leftmark} zugegriffen + werden, während der rechte Teil der Marke über + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}% + \important{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark}}\IndexCmd{rightmark} verfügbar + ist. Tatsächlich ist es wohl auch so gedacht, dass + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} für linke Seiten und + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} für rechte Seiten im doppelseitigen Druck + verwendet wird. Im einseitigen Layout setzen die Gliederungsbefehle der + Standardklassen den linken Teil der Marke hingegen gar nicht erst. + + \TeX{} selbst kennt drei Möglichkeiten auf eine Marke zuzugreifen. Die + \Macro{botmark} ist die auf der zuletzt zusammengestellten Seite zuletzt + gültige Marke. Das entspricht der zuletzt gesetzten Marke der Seite. Wurde + auf der Seite keine Marke gesetzt, so entspricht es der zuletzt gesetzten + Marke auf den bereits ausgegebenen Seiten. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.leftmark} verwendet genau diese Marke, gibt also den + linken Teil der letzten Marke der Seite aus. Dies entspricht auch genau + \Macro{leftbotmark}. Im Vergleich dazu gibt \Macro{rightbotmark} den rechten + Teil dieser Marke aus. + + \Macro{firstmark} ist die erste Marke der zuletzt zusammengestellten + Seite. Das entspricht der ersten Marke, die auf der Seite gesetzt + wurde. Wurde auf der Seite keine Marke gesetzt, so entspricht es der zuletzt + gesetzten Marke auf den bereits ausgegebenen Seiten. Die \LaTeX-Anweisung + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} verwendet genau diese Marke, gibt also den + rechten Teil der ersten Marke der Seite aus. Dies entspricht auch genau + \Macro{rightfirstmark}. Im Vergleich dazu gibt \Macro{leftfirstmark} den + linken Teil dieser Marke aus. + + \Macro{topmark} ist der Inhalt den \Macro{botmark} hatte, bevor die aktuelle + Seite zusammengestellt wurde. \LaTeX{} verwendet dies selbst nie. Trotzdem + bietet \Package{scrlayer} die Möglichkeit mit \Macro{lefttopmark} auf den + linken Teil dieser Marke und mit \Macro{righttopmark} auf den rechten Teil + zuzugreifen. + + Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass der linke und rechte Teil der + Marke immer nur gemeinsam gesetzt werden kann. Selbst, wenn man mit + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} nur den rechten Teil + verändert, wird der linke Teil (unverändert) mit gesetzt. Entsprechend + setzen im doppelseitigen Layout die höheren Gliederungsebenen beim + Seitenstil + \PageStyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings} + immer beide Teile. Beispielsweise verwendet + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark} dann + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth} mit einem leeren rechten Argument. Das ist + auch der Grund, warum \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.rightmark} beziehungsweise + \Macro{rightfirstmark} auf der Seite einer Kapitelüberschrift immer einen + leeren Wert zurück gibt, selbst wenn danach beispielsweise über + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark} oder indirekt über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} ein neuer rechter Teil der Marke gesetzt + wurde. + + Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass die Verwendung einer der hier + erklärten Anweisungen zur Ausgabe des linken oder rechten Teils der Marke + innerhalb einer Seite zu unerwarteten Ergebnissen führen kann. Sie sind + wirklich nur zur Verwendung im Kopf oder Fuß eines Seitenstils + gedacht. Daher sollten sie bei \Package{scrlayer} immer Teil des Inhalts + einer Ebene sein. Dagegen spielt es keine Rolle, ob sie auf den Hintergrund + oder den Vordergrund beschränkt werden, da alle Ebenen erst nach der + Zusammenstellung der aktuellen Seite ausgegeben werden. + + Näheres zum Mark-Mechanismus von \TeX{} ist beispielsweise + \cite[Kapitel~23]{knuth:texbook} zu entnehmen. Das Thema ist dort als + absolutes Expertenwissen markiert. Sollte Sie obige Erklärung also eher + verwirrt haben, machen Sie sich bitte nichts daraus.% + \EndIndexGroup + + + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{@mkleft}\Parameter{linke Marke}% + \Macro{@mkright}\Parameter{rechte Marke}% + \Macro{@mkdouble}\Parameter{Marke}% + \Macro{@mkboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke}% + \end{Declaration} + Innerhalb der Klassen und Pakete kommt es vor, dass Kolumnentitel nur dann + gesetzt werden sollen, wenn automatische Kolumnentitel (siehe Option + \DescRef{scrlayer.option.automark} und Anweisung + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark} auf + \DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.automark}) aktiviert sind. Bei + den Standardklassen geht dies ausschließlich über \Macro{@mkboth}. Diese + Anweisung entspricht entweder \Macro{@gobbletwo}, einer Anweisung, die ihre + beiden Argumente vernichtet, oder \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.markboth}, + einer Anweisung, mit der sowohl eine \PName{linke Marke} als auch eine + \PName{rechte Marke} gesetzt wird. Pakete wie \Package{babel} hängen sich + ebenfalls in \Macro{@mkboth} ein, um beispielsweise noch eine + Sprachumschaltung im Kolumnentitel vorzunehmen. + + Will man nun jedoch nur eine \PName{linke Marke} oder nur eine \PName{rechte + Marke} setzen, ohne die jeweils andere Marke zu verändern, so fehlen + entsprechende Anweisungen. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} selbst benötigt + entsprechende Anweisungen beispielsweise im Rahmen der automatischen + Kolumnentitel. Sind \Macro{@mkleft} zum Setzen nur der \PName{linken Marke}, + \Macro{@mkright} zum Setzen nur der \PName{rechten Marke} oder + \Macro{@mkdouble} zum Setzen sowohl der rechten als auch der linken + \PName{Marke} mit demselben Inhalt beim Laden von \Package{scrlayer} nicht + definiert, so werden sie vom Paket selbst definiert. Dabei wird eine + Definition gewählt, die am Zustand von \Macro{@mkboth} erkennt, ob mit + automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird. Nur in diesem Fall setzen die + Befehle auch eine entsprechende Marke.% + + Klassen- und Paketautoren können ebenfalls auf diese Anweisungen + zurückgreifen, wenn sie nur linke oder nur rechte Marken setzen wollen und + auch diese nur, wenn mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird.% + \EndIndexGroup +\fi + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer}{% + Zu weiteren Möglichkeiten zur Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen + siehe auch \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}.% +}{}% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% mode: flyspell +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% ispell-local-dictionary: "de_DE" +%%% TeX-master: "scrlayer-de.tex" +%%% TeX-PDF-mode: t +%%% End: + +% LocalWords: Seitenstilen Ebenenmodell scrpage headings myheadings plain +% LocalWords: empty scrlayer Seitenstil Rückgriffe Gliederungsnummern +% LocalWords: Standardklassen Seitenstile konsistenteren Befehlssatzes +% LocalWords: Einstellmöglichkeiten Seiteninhalts Gliederungsüberschrift +% LocalWords: Maßlinien Entwurfsphase Unterabschnittsüberschrift Versalsatz +% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschrift Kapitelüberschrift Glyphenanalyse +% LocalWords: Hilfsanweisung content Expertenwissen Gliederungsebenen +% LocalWords: Gliederungsüberschriften Kapitelüberschriften Kolumnentitel +% LocalWords: Abschnittsüberschriften Gliederungsnummer Kapitelanfangsseite +% LocalWords: Kolumnentiteln diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-6.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex index d7a264b49ae..f277d753405 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-6.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-parmarkup.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-6.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-parmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-6.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-parmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,37 +45,27 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-6.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-parmarkup.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - - \section{Absatzauszeichnung} \seclabel{parmarkup}% -\ifshortversion\IgnoreThisfalse\IfNotCommon{maincls}{\IgnoreThistrue}\fi% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Absatz>Auszeichnung}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% - Die\textnote{Absatzeinzug vs. Absatzabstand} - Standardklassen setzen Absätze\Index[indexmain]{Absatz} normalerweise - mit Absatzeinzug und ohne Absatzabstand. Bei Verwendung eines normalen - Satzspiegels, wie ihn \Package{typearea} bietet, ist dies die - vorteilhafteste Absatzauszeichnung. Würde man ohne Einzug und Abstand - arbeiten, hätte der Leser als Anhaltspunkt nur die Länge der letzten Zeile. - Im Extremfall kann es sehr schwer sein, zu erkennen, ob eine Zeile voll ist - oder nicht. Des Weiteren stellt der Typograf fest, dass die Auszeichnung des - Absatzendes am Anfang der nächsten Zeile leicht vergessen ist. Demgegenüber - ist eine Auszeichnung am Absatzanfang einprägsamer. Der Absatzabstand hat - den Nachteil, dass er in verschiedenem Zusammenhang leicht verloren geht. So +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Die\textnote{Absatzeinzug vs. Absatzabstand} Standardklassen setzen + Absätze\Index[indexmain]{Absatz} normalerweise mit Absatzeinzug und ohne + Absatzabstand. Bei Verwendung eines normalen Satzspiegels, wie ihn + \Package{typearea} bietet, ist dies die vorteilhafteste + Absatzauszeichnung. Würde man ohne Einzug und Abstand arbeiten, hätte der + Leser als Anhaltspunkt nur die Länge der letzten Zeile. Im Extremfall kann + es sehr schwer sein, zu erkennen, ob eine Zeile voll ist oder nicht. Des + Weiteren stellt der Typograf fest, dass die Auszeichnung des Absatzendes am + Anfang der nächsten Zeile leicht vergessen ist. Demgegenüber ist eine + Auszeichnung am Absatzanfang einprägsamer. Der Absatzabstand hat den + Nachteil, dass er in verschiedenem Zusammenhang leicht verloren geht. So wäre nach einer abgesetzten Formel nicht mehr festzustellen, ob der Absatz fortgesetzt wird oder ein neuer beginnt. Auch am Seitenanfang müsste zurückgeblättert werden, um feststellen zu können, ob mit der Seite auch ein @@ -85,63 +75,77 @@ alleine ist deutlich genug. Der einzige Nachteil des Absatzeinzugs liegt in der Verkürzung der Zeile. Damit gewinnt der Absatzabstand\Index{Absatz>Abstand} bei ohnehin kurzen Zeilen, etwa im - Zeitungssatz, seine Berechtigung.}% -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% - In der Einleitung zu \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} ab - \autopageref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} wird dargelegt, warum der Absatzeinzug - gegenüber dem Absatzabstand vorzuziehen ist. Die Elemente, auf die sich - diese Argumente beziehen, beispielsweise Abbildungen, Tabellen, Listen, - abgesetzte Formeln und auch neue Seiten, sind in Standardbriefen eher - selten. Auch sind Briefe normalerweise nicht so umfänglich, dass ein nicht - erkannter Absatz sich schwerwiegend auf die Lesbarkeit auswirkt. Die - Argumente sind daher bei Standardbriefen eher schwach. Dies dürfte ein Grund - dafür sein, dass der Absatzabstand bei Briefen eher gebräuchlich ist. Es - bleiben damit für Standardbriefe im Wesentlichen zwei Vorteile des - Absatzeinzugs. Zum einen hebt sich ein solcher Brief aus der Masse hervor - und zum anderen durchbricht man damit nicht nur für Briefe das einheitliche - Erscheinungsbild aller Dokumente aus einer Quelle, die so genannte - \emph{Corporate Identity}.}% -\ifIgnoreThis %+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ nicht maincls + -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ Von dieser Unterscheidung gegenüber den anderen - \KOMAScript-Klassen abgesehen gilt, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} - geschrieben wurde.} -\else %------------------------------------------------------- nur maincls - + Zeitungssatz, seine Berechtigung.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + In der Einleitung zu \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.parmarkup} wird dargelegt, warum der Absatzeinzug + gegenüber dem Absatzabstand vorzuziehen ist. Die Elemente, auf die sich + diese Argumente beziehen, beispielsweise Abbildungen, Tabellen, Listen, + abgesetzte Formeln und auch neue Seiten, sind in Standardbriefen eher + selten. Auch sind Briefe normalerweise nicht so umfänglich, dass ein nicht + erkannter Absatz sich schwerwiegend auf die Lesbarkeit auswirkt. Die + Argumente sind daher bei Standardbriefen eher schwach. Dies dürfte ein + Grund dafür sein, dass der Absatzabstand bei Briefen eher gebräuchlich + ist. Es bleiben damit für Standardbriefe im Wesentlichen zwei Vorteile des + Absatzeinzugs. Zum einen hebt sich ein solcher Brief aus der Masse hervor + und zum anderen durchbricht man damit nicht nur für Briefe das + einheitliche Erscheinungsbild aller Dokumente aus einer Quelle, die so + genannte \emph{Corporate Identity}.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Über diese Überlegungen hinaus gilt sinngemäß, was in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} geschrieben wurde. + Falls Sie also \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parmarkup} bereits + gelesen und verstanden haben, können Sie nach dem Ende dieses Abschnitts auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.parmarkup.next} fortfahren.% +} + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{parskip}\PName{Methode} + \OptionVName{parskip}{Methode} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{parskip~=\PName{Methode}}% -\IfCommon{maincls}{% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% Hin und wieder wird ein Layout mit Absatzabstand an Stelle des voreingestellten Absatzeinzugs gefordert. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen bieten mit der Option \Option{parskip}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} }% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{Bei Briefen findet man häufiger ein Layout mit - Absatzabstand an Stelle des voreingestellten Absatzeinzugs. Die - \KOMAScript-Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} bietet mit der Option \Option{parskip} + \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} % +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Bei Briefen findet man häufiger ein Layout mit Absatzabstand an Stelle des + voreingestellten Absatzeinzugs. Die \KOMAScript-Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} + bietet mit der Option \Option{parskip} % + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% }% -eine Reihe von Möglichkeiten, um dies -zu erreichen. Die \PName{Methode} setzt sich dabei aus zwei Teilen -zusammen. Der erste Teil ist entweder \PValue{full} oder \PValue{half}, wobei -\PValue{full} für einen Absatzabstand von einer Zeile und \PValue{half} für -einen Absatzabstand von einer halben Zeile steht. Der zweite Teil ist eines -der Zeichen »\PValue{*}«, »\PValue{+}«, »\PValue{-}« und kann auch -entfallen. Lässt man das Zeichen weg, so wird in der letzten Zeile des -Absatzes am Ende mindestens ein Geviert, das ist 1\Unit{em}, frei gelassen. -Mit dem Pluszeichen wird am Zeilenende mindestens ein Drittel und mit dem -Stern mindestens ein Viertel einer normalen Zeile frei gelassen. Mit der -Minus-Variante werden keine Vorkehrungen für die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes -getroffen. +eine Reihe von Möglichkeiten, um dies zu erreichen. Die \PName{Methode} setzt +sich dabei aus zwei Teilen zusammen. Der erste Teil ist entweder \PValue{full} +oder \PValue{half}, wobei \PValue{full} für einen Absatzabstand von einer +Zeile und \PValue{half} für einen Absatzabstand von einer halben Zeile +steht. Der zweite Teil ist eines der Zeichen »\PValue{*}«, »\PValue{+}«, +»\PValue{-}« und kann auch entfallen. Lässt man das Zeichen weg, so wird in +der letzten Zeile des Absatzes am Ende mindestens ein Geviert, das ist +1\Unit{em}, frei gelassen. Mit dem Pluszeichen wird am Zeilenende mindestens +ein Drittel und mit dem Stern mindestens ein Viertel einer normalen Zeile frei +gelassen. Mit der Minus-Variante werden keine Vorkehrungen für die letzte +Zeile eines Absatzes getroffen. Die Einstellung kann jederzeit geändert werden. Wird sie innerhalb des Dokuments geändert, so wird implizit die Anweisung -\Macro{selectfont}\IndexCmd{selectfont}\IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}}}\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}} -ausgeführt. Änderungen der -Absatzauszeichnung innerhalb eines Absatzes werden erst beim nächsten -Absatz sichtbar. +\Macro{selectfont}\IndexCmd{selectfont}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + }{% + \InternalComonFileUsageError% + }% +} % +ausgeführt. Änderungen der Absatzauszeichnung innerhalb eines Absatzes +werden erst beim nächsten Absatz sichtbar. Neben den sich so ergebenden acht Kombinationen ist es noch möglich, als \PName{Methode} die Werte für einfache Schalter aus @@ -152,11 +156,8 @@ mindestens einem Geviert Freiraum am Ende des Absatzes. Das Ausschalten der Option schaltet hingegen wieder auf Absatzeinzug von einem Geviert um. Dabei darf die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für \PName{Methode} bietet -\autoref{tab:maincls.parskip}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{ auf \autopageref{tab:maincls.parskip}}% -. - -\IfCommon{maincls}{% +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{.% \begin{desclist} % Umbruchkorrektur \vskip-\ht\strutbox @@ -166,7 +167,7 @@ darf die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen % \caption [{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip}}]{% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} zur Auswahl der Kennzeichnung - von Absätzen\label{tab:maincls.parskip}% + von Absätzen\label{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}% }% {% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{parskip} (\emph{Fortsetzung})% @@ -217,38 +218,44 @@ darf die letzte Zeile eines Absatzes auch bis zum rechten Rand reichen. Einen Viertel einer normalen Zeile gekennzeichnet.\IndexOption{parskip~=\PValue{half*}}}% \pventry{never}{% - Es \IfCommon{maincls}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}}% - \IfCommon{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}}% + Es % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}}}{}% + }% wird auch dann kein Abstand zwischen Absätzen eingefügt, wenn für den vertikalen Ausgleich der Einstellung - \Macro{flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand - verteilt werden muss.\IndexOption{parskip~=\PValue{never}}}% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom} zusätzlicher + vertikaler Abstand verteilt werden + muss.\IndexOption{parskip~=\PValue{never}}}% % \end{desctabular} % \end{table}% -\end{desclist}% -} + \end{desclist}% +}{ auf \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.parskip}.} Wird\textnote{Achtung!} ein Absatzabstand verwendet, so verändert sich auch der Abstand vor, nach und innerhalb von Listenumgebungen. Dadurch wird verhindert, dass diese Umgebungen oder Absätze innerhalb dieser Umgebungen stärker vom Text abgesetzt werden als die Absätze des normalen Textes voneinander.% -\IfCommon{maincls}{ Inhalts"~, Abbildungs"~ und Tabellenverzeichnis werden - immer ohne zusätzlichen Absatzabstand gesetzt.}% -\IfCommon{scrlttr2}{% Umbruchkorrekturtext +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{ % + Inhalts"~, Abbildungs"~ und Tabellenverzeichnis werden immer ohne + zusätzlichen Absatzabstand gesetzt.% +}{% \iffalse% - \ Verschiedene Elemente des Briefbogens werden immer ohne Absatzabstand - gesetzt.% - \fi}% + \ Verschiedene Elemente des Briefbogens werden immer ohne Absatzabstand + gesetzt.% + \fi% +}% Voreingestellt ist bei \KOMAScript{} \OptionValue{parskip}{false}. Hierbei gibt es keinen Absatzabstand, sondern einen Absatzeinzug von 1\Unit{em}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{parskip~=\PName{Methode}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Absatz>Auszeichnung} -\fi %**************************************************** Ende nur maincls * +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..833e1aa0970 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-textmarkup.tex @@ -0,0 +1,768 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-textmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-textmarkup.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-textmarkup.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + +\section{Textauszeichnungen} +\seclabel{textmarkup}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Text>Auszeichnung}% +\BeginIndex{}{Schrift>Art}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup} + geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup} bereits gelesen und + verstanden haben, können Sie + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrextend,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{% + sich auf \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements}, + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements} beschränken und + ansonsten }% + auf \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup.next} fortfahren.% +} + + +\LaTeX{} verfügt über eine ganze Reihe von Anweisungen zur Textauszeichnung. % +% Umbruchkorrektur +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{}{% + Neben der Wahl der Schriftart gehören dazu auch Befehle + zur Wahl einer Textgröße oder der Textausrichtung. % +}% +Näheres zu den normalerweise definierten Möglichkeiten ist \cite{l2kurz}, +\cite{latex:usrguide} und \cite{latex:fntguide} zu entnehmen. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrlayer-scrpage,scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{% + \iffalse% +}{% + \csname iftrue\endcsname}% + \begin{Declaration} + \Macro{textsuperscript}\Parameter{Text} + \Macro{textsubscript}\Parameter{Text} + \end{Declaration} + Im \LaTeX-Kern ist bereits die Anweisung + \Macro{textsuperscript}\IndexCmd{textsuperscript} definiert, mit der + \PName{Text} höher gestellt werden kann. Eine + entsprechende Anweisung, um Text tief\Index{Tiefstellung} statt + hoch\Index{Hochstellung} zu stellen, bietet \LaTeX{} erst seit Version + 2015/01/01. Für ältere \LaTeX-Versionen definiert \KOMAScript{} daher + \Macro{textsubscript}. % + \ifthiscommonfirst + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection + \xmpllabel{cmd.textsubscript}% + Sie schreiben einen Text über den menschlichen Stoffwechsel. Darin + kommen hin und wieder einfache chemische Summenformeln vor. Dabei sind + einzelne Ziffern tief zu stellen. Im Sinne des logischen Markups + definieren Sie zunächst in der Dokumentpräambel oder einem eigenen + Paket: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}} +\end{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{#1\textsubscript{#2}}% + Damit schreiben Sie dann: +\begin{lstcode} + Die Zelle bezieht ihre Energie unter anderem aus + der Reaktion von \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 + und \Molek O2 zu \Molek H2\Molek O{} und + \Molek C{}\Molek O2. Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt + sich auf den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. +\end{lstcode} + Das Ergebnis sieht daraufhin so aus: + \begin{ShowOutput} + Die Zelle bezieht ihre Energie unter anderem + aus der Reaktion von + \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 und \Molek O2 zu + \Molek H2\Molek O{} und \Molek C{}\Molek O2. + Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt sich auf + den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. + \end{ShowOutput} + + Etwas später entscheiden Sie, dass Summenformeln grundsätzlich + serifenlos geschrieben werden sollen. Nun zeigt sich, wie gut die + Entscheidung für konsequentes logisches Markup war. Sie müssen nur die + \Macro{Molek}-Anweisung umdefinieren: +\begin{lstcode} + \newcommand*{\Molek}[2]{% + \textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}% + } +\end{lstcode} + \renewcommand*{\Molek}[2]{\textsf{#1\textsubscript{#2}}}% + Schon ändert sich die Ausgabe im gesamten Dokument: + \begin{ShowOutput} + Die Zelle bezieht ihr Energie unter anderem aus der Reaktion von + \Molek C6\Molek H{12}\Molek O6 und \Molek O2 zu \Molek H2\Molek + O{} und \Molek C{}\Molek O2. Arsen (\Molek{As}{}) wirkt sich + auf den Stoffwechsel sehr nachteilig aus. + \end{ShowOutput} + \end{Example} + \iffalse % vielleicht in einer späteren Auf-lage + Für Experten ist in \autoref{sec:experts.knowhow}, + \DescPageRef{experts.macroargs} dokumentiert, warum das Beispiel + funktioniert, obwohl teilweise die Argumente von \Macro{Molek} nicht in + geschweifte Klammern gesetzt wurden.% + \fi% + \else% + Ein Anwendungsbeispiel finden Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.textmarkup}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.textsubscript}.% + \fi% + \EndIndexGroup% +\fi + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{setkomafont}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Befehle}% + \Macro{addtokomafont}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Befehle}% + \Macro{usekomafont}\Parameter{Element} +\end{Declaration}% +Mit% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +} Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} ist es +möglich, die \PName{Befehle} festzulegen, mit denen die Schrift eines +bestimmten \PName{Element}s umgeschaltet wird. Theoretisch könnten als +\PName{Befehle} alle möglichen Anweisungen einschließlich Textausgaben +verwendet werden. Sie\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich jedoch unbedingt auf +solche Anweisungen beschränken, mit denen wirklich nur ein Schriftattribut +umgeschaltet wird. In der Regel werden dies Befehle wie \Macro{normalfont}, +\Macro{rmfamily}, \Macro{sffamily}, \Macro{ttfamily}, \Macro{mdseries}, +\Macro{bfseries}, \Macro{upshape}, \Macro{itshape}, \Macro{slshape}, +\Macro{scshape} oder einer der Befehle \Macro{Huge}, \Macro{huge}, +\Macro{LARGE}, \Macro{Large}, \Macro{large}, \Macro{normalsize}, +\Macro{small}, \Macro{footnotesize}, \Macro{scriptsize} und \Macro{tiny} +sein. Die Erklärung zu diesen Befehlen entnehmen Sie bitte \cite{l2kurz}, +\cite{latex:usrguide} oder \cite{latex:fntguide}. Auch Farbumschaltungen wie +\Macro{normalcolor} sind möglich (siehe \cite{package:graphics} und +\cite{package:xcolor}).% +\iffalse % Umbruchkorrekturtext + \ Das Verhalten bei Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die + zu Umdefinierungen führen oder Ausgaben tätigen, ist nicht + definiert. Seltsames Verhalten ist möglich und stellt keinen Fehler dar. + \else Die Verwendung anderer Anweisungen, inbesondere solcher, die + Umdefinierungen vornehmen oder zu Ausgaben führen, ist nicht vorgesehen. + Seltsames Verhalten ist in diesen Fällen möglich und stellt keinen Fehler + dar.% +\fi + +Mit \Macro{setkomafont} wird die Schriftumschaltung eines Elements mit einer +völlig neuen Definition versehen. Demgegenüber wird mit \Macro{addtokomafont} +die existierende Definition lediglich erweitert. Es wird empfohlen, beide +Anweisungen nicht innerhalb des Dokuments, sondern nur in der Dokumentpräambel +zu verwenden. Beispiele für die Verwendung entnehmen Sie bitte den Abschnitten +zu den jeweiligen Elementen.% +\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{% + \ Namen und Bedeutung der einzelnen Elemente + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{und deren Voreinstellungen }{}% + sind in % + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements} + }{% + \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelements} % + }% + aufgelistet.% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{ % + Allerdings werden davon in \Package{scrextend} nur die Elemente für den + Dokumenttitel, den schlauen Spruch, die Fußnoten und die + \DescRef{maincls.env.labeling}-Umgebung behandelt. Das Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} ist zwar auch verfügbar, wird + jedoch von \Package{scrextend} ebenfalls nur für den Dokumenttitel + verwendet.% + }{}% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{}{ % + Die Voreinstellungen sind den jeweiligen Abschnitten zu entnehmen.% + }% +}% + +Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomafont} kann die aktuelle Schriftart auf +diejenige umgeschaltet werden, die für das angegebene \PName{Element} +definiert ist. +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.setkomafont}% + Angenommen, für das Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.captionlabel} soll dieselbe Schriftart wie + für \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.descriptionlabel} verwenden. Das + erreichen Sie einfach mit: +\begin{lstcode} + \setkomafont{captionlabel}{% + \usekomafont{descriptionlabel}% + } +\end{lstcode} + Weitere Beispiele finden Sie in den Abschnitten zu den jeweiligen + Elementen. + \end{Example} + + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption{% + Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} oder + \Class{scrartcl} mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} + verändert werden kann% + \label{tab:maincls.fontelements}% + \label{tab:scrextend.fontelements}% + }{% + Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})% + }% + \feentry{author}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + Autorangaben im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.author} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.author})}% + \feentry{caption}{Text einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder + "~überschrift (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}% + \feentry{captionlabel}{% + Label einer Abbildungs- oder Tabellenunter- oder "~überschrift; + Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.caption} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.caption})}% + \feentry{chapter}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter})}% + \feentry{chapterentry}{% + Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{chapterentrydots}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% + Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} abweichend vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrypagenumber} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{chapterentrypagenumber}{% + Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.chapter} abweichend vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.chapterentry} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{chapterprefix}{% + Kapitelnummernzeile bei Einstellung + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{chapterprefix}{true} oder + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{appendixprefix}{true} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix})}% + \feentry{date}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + Datum im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.date} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.date})}% + \feentry{dedication}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + Widmung nach dem Haupttitel des Dokuments mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.dedication} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dedication})}% + \feentry{descriptionlabel}{% + Label, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.description}-Anweisung, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.description})}% + \feentry{dictum}{% + mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.dictum} gesetzter schlauer Spruch + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dictum})}% + \feentry{dictumauthor}{% + Urheber eines schlauen Spruchs; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.dictum}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.dictum})}% + \feentry{dictumtext}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.dictum}}% + \feentry{disposition}{% + alle Gliederungsüberschriften, also die Argumente von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} bis + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} sowie die Überschrift der + Zusammenfassung; die Anwendung erfolgt vor dem Element der jeweiligen + Gliederungsebene (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.structure})}% + \feentry{footnote}{% + Marke und Text einer Fußnote (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotelabel}{% + Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotereference}{% + Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnoterule}{% + Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}} über dem Fußnotenapparat (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% + \feentry{labelinglabel}{% + Label, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.labeling}-Anweisung, und + Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{labelingseparator}{% + Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung; Anwendung erfolgt + nach dem Element \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.labelinglabel} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{minisec}{% + mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.minisec} gesetzte Überschrift + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.minisec})}% + \feentry{pagefoot}{% + wird nur verwendet, wenn das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen + ist (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% + \feentry{pagehead}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% + Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten + Seitenstilen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} ab + \autopageref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% + \feentry{pagenumber}{% + Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle})}% + \feentry{pagination}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}% + \feentry{paragraph}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.paragraph} + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph})}% + \feentry{part}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part}, jedoch + ohne die Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}% + \feentry{partentry}{% + Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{partentrypagenumber}{% + Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} abweichend vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.partentry} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{partnumber}{% + Zeile mit der Nummer des Teils in Überschrift der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.part} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part})}% + \feentry{publishers}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + Verlagsangabe im Haupttitel des Dokuments mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.publishers} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.publishers})}% + \feentry{section}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.section})}% + \feentry{sectionentry}{% + Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} (nur bei \Class{scrartcl} + verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{sectionentrydots}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrartcl}}% + Optionale Verbindungspunkte in Inhaltsverzeichniseinträgen der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} abweichend vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrypagenumber} (nur bei + \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{sectionentrypagenumber}{% + Seitenzahl des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags der Ebene + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.section} abweichend vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.sectionentry} (nur bei \Class{scrartcl} + verfügbar, siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.tableofcontents})}% + \feentry{sectioning}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.disposition}}% + \feentry{subject}{% + Typisierung des Dokuments, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subject} auf der Haupttitelseite mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subject})}% + \feentry{subparagraph}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph})}% + \feentry{subsection}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsection} + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsection})}% + \feentry{subsubsection}{% + Überschrift der Ebene \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} + (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection})}% + \feentry{subtitle}{% + Untertitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.subtitle} auf der Haupttitelseite mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.title})}% + \feentry{title}{% + Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title} bei Verwendung von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (bezüglich der Größe des + Haupttitels siehe die ergänzenden Bemerkungen im Text von + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} ab \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.title})}% + \feentry{titlehead}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}}% + Kopf über dem Haupttitel des Dokuments, also das Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlehead} mit + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlehead})}% + \end{desclist} +\else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname} + \begin{Example} + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass der Titel in Serifenschrift und rot gesetzt + wird. Das erreichen Sie einfach mit: +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs=color] + \setkomafont{title}{% + \color{red}% + } +\end{lstcode} + Für die Anweisung \Macro{color}\PParameter{red} wird das Paket + \Package{color} oder \Package{xcolor} benötigt. Die zusätzliche Angabe + von \Macro{normalfont} ist in diesem Beispiel deshalb nicht notwendig, + weil diese Anweisung bereits in der Definition des Titels enthalten + ist. Das\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel setzt voraus, dass + \OptionValueRef{scrextend}{extendedfeature}{title} gesetzt ist + (siehe \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, + \DescPageRef{scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). + \end{Example} + \else + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlttr2}{% + Ein allgemeines Beispiel für die Anwendung von \Macro{setkomafont} und + \Macro{usekomafont} finden Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, + \PageRefxmpl{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}. + + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption{% + Elemente, deren Schrift bei der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} mit + \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden + kann\label{tab:scrlttr2.fontelements}% + }{% + Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann (\emph{Fortsetzung})% + }% + \feentry{addressee}{Name und Anschrift im Anschriftfenster + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield})}% + \feentry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für einen Fensterbriefumschlag + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress})}% + \feentry{descriptionlabel}{Label, also das optionale Argument von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.description}, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.description}-Umgebung + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.description})}% + \feentry{foldmark}{Faltmarke auf dem Briefpapier; ermöglicht Änderung + der Linienfarbe (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks})}% + \feentry{footnote}{% + Marke und Text einer Fußnote (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotelabel}{% + Marke einer Fußnote; Anwendung erfolgt nach dem Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnotereference}{% + Referenzierung der Fußnotenmarke im Text + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote})}% + \feentry{footnoterule}{% + Linie\ChangedAt{v3.07}{\Class{scrlttr2}} über dem Fußnotenapparat + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.footnotes}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule})}% + \feentry{fromaddress}{Absenderadresse im Briefkopf + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress})}% + \feentry{fromname}{Name des Absenders im Briefkopf abweichend von + \PValue{fromaddress} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.fromname})}% + \feentry{fromrule}{Linie im Absender im Briefkopf; gedacht für + Farbänderungen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule})}% + \feentry{labelinglabel}{% + Label, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.item.labeling}-Anweisung, und + Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{labelingseparator}{% + Trennzeichen, also das optionale Argument der + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung, in einer + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.labeling}-Umgebung; Anwendung + erfolgt nach dem Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.labelinglabel} (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lists}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.env.labeling})}% + \feentry{pagefoot}{% + wird nach dem Element \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot} + für den mit Variable + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} + definierten Seitenfuß verwendet oder wenn das Paket + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} geladen ist + (\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot})}% + \feentry{pagehead}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}}% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% + Seitenkopf und Seitenfuß bei allen von \KOMAScript{} definierten + Seitenstilen (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.fontelement.pageheadfoot})}% + \feentry{pagenumber}{% + Seitenzahl im Kopf oder Fuß der Seite + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.fontelement.pagenumber})}% + \feentry{pagination}{% + alternative Bezeichnung für + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagenumber}}% + \feentry{placeanddate}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% + Ort und Datum, falls statt einer Geschäftszeile nur eine Datumszeile + verwendet wird (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% + \feentry{refname}{% + Bezeichnung der Felder in der Geschäftszeile + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + \feentry{refvalue}{% + Werte der Felder in der Geschäftszeile + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + \feentry{specialmail}{Versandart im Anschriftfenster + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% + \feentry{lettersubject}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% + Betreff in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% + \feentry{lettertitle}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}% + Titel in der Brieferöffnung (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.title})}% + \feentry{toaddress}{Abweichung vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für die Anschrift (ohne + Name) des Empfängers im Anschriftfeld + (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% + \feentry{toname}{Abweichung vom Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.addressee} für den Namen des + Empfängers im Anschriftfeld (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% + \end{desclist} + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrlayer-scrpage}{% + \begin{desclist} + \desccaption[{Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden + kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung}]% + {Elemente, deren Schrift bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} mit + \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} verändert werden + kann, einschließlich der jeweiligen Voreinstellung, falls die + Elemente beim Laden von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} nicht bereits + definiert sind% + \label{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}% + }% + {Elemente, deren Schrift verändert werden kann + (\emph{Fortsetzung})}% + \feentry{footbotline}{% + Linie unter dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footbotline}). Das + Element wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach + den Elementen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen dieses + Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer} }% + \feentry{footsepline}{% + Linie über dem Fuß eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.footsepline}). Das + Element wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach + den Elementen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagefoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pagefoot} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen dieses + Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \feentry{headsepline}{% + Linie unter dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headsepline}). Das + Element wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach + den Elementen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagehead}% + \IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen dieses + Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \feentry{headtopline}{% + Linie über dem Kopf eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.headtopline}). Das + Element wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach + den Elementen + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} und + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pagehead}% + \IndexFontElement{pagehead} angewandt. Es wird empfohlen dieses + Element lediglich für Farbänderungen zu verwenden.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \feentry{pagefoot}{% + Inhalt eines Fußes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}). Das Element + wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach dem + Element \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} angewandt.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \feentry{pagehead}{% + Inhalt eines Kopfes eines mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} + definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagehead}). Das Element + wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} und nach Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.pageheadfoot}% + \IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot} angewandt.\par + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \feentry{pageheadfoot}{% + Inhalt eines Kopfes oder Fußes eines mit + \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstils (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pageheadfoot}). Das + Element wird nach \Macro{normalfont}\IndexCmd{normalfont} + angewandt.\par + Voreinstellung: \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{slshape}% + }% + \feentry{pagenumber}{% + Die mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark} gesetzte + Paginierung (siehe + \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}, + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagenumber}). Bei einer + etwaigen Umdefinierung von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.pagemark} ist dafür zu sorgen, + dass die Umdefinierung auch ein + \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} enthält!\par + Voreinstellung: \Macro{normalfont}% + }% + \end{desclist} + }{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf{scrjura,scrlayer-notecolumn}{}{% + \InternalCommonFileUsageError% + }% + }% + }% + \fi% +\fi +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{usefontofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% + \Macro{useencodingofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% + \Macro{usesizeofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% + \Macro{usefamilyofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% + \Macro{useseriesofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% + \Macro{useshapeofkomafont}\Parameter{Element}% +\end{Declaration} +Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}\and \Package{scrextend}} werden in der Schrifteinstellung +eines Elements auch Dinge vorgenommen, die mit der Schrift eigentlich gar +nichts zu tun haben, obwohl dies ausdrücklich nicht empfohlen wird. Soll dann +nur die Schrifteinstellung aber keine dieser zusätzlichen Einstellungen +ausgeführt werden, so kann statt +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont} die Anweisung +\Macro{usefontofkomafont} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung übernimmt nur die +Schriftgröße und den Grundlinienabstand, die Codierung +(engl. \emph{encoding}), die Familie (engl. \emph{family}), die Strichstärke +oder Ausprägung (engl. \emph{font series}) und die Form oder Ausrichtung +(engl. \emph{font shape}). + +Mit den übrigen Anweisungen können auch einzelne Schriftattribute +übernommen werden. Dabei übernimmt \Macro{usesizeofkomafont} sowohl die +Schriftgröße als auch den Grundlinienabstand. + +Diese Befehle sollten jedoch nicht als Legitimation dafür verstanden werden, +in die Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente beliebige Anweisungen einzufügen. Das +kann nämlich sehr schnell zu Fehlern führen (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist}).% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..cf11a11d63c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-titles.tex @@ -0,0 +1,692 @@ +% ====================================================================== +% common-titles.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. +% +% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of +% the LaTeX Project Public License, version 1.3c of the license. +% The latest version of this license is in +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% and version 1.3c or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX +% version 2005/12/01 or later and of this work. +% +% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "author-maintained". +% +% The Current Maintainer and author of this work is Markus Kohm. +% +% This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% common-titles.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 +% +% Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, +% Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. +% Die neuste Version dieser Lizenz ist +% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt +% und Version 1.3c ist Teil aller Verteilungen von LaTeX +% Version 2005/12/01 oder spaeter und dieses Werks. +% +% Dieses Werk hat den LPPL-Verwaltungs-Status "author-maintained" +% (allein durch den Autor verwaltet). +% +% Der Aktuelle Verwalter und Autor dieses Werkes ist Markus Kohm. +% +% Dieses Werk besteht aus den in manifest.txt aufgefuehrten Dateien. +% ====================================================================== +% +% Paragraphs that are common for several chapters of the KOMA-Script guide +% Maintained by Markus Kohm +% +% ---------------------------------------------------------------------- +% +% Absätze, die mehreren Kapiteln der KOMA-Script-Anleitung gemeinsam sind +% Verwaltet von Markus Kohm +% +% ====================================================================== + +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-titles.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ + KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs)] + + + + + +\section{Dokumenttitel} +\seclabel{titlepage}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Titel}% + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + Es gilt sinngemäß, was in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} + geschrieben wurde. Falls Sie also + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} bereits gelesen und + verstanden haben, können Sie auf + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next} mit + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlepage.next} fortfahren.% +}% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{\iftrue}{\csname iffalse\endcsname}% + \ Die\textnote{Achtung!} Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrextend} zum + Dokumenttitel gehören jedoch zu den optionalen, erweiterten Möglichkeiten + und stehen daher nur zur Verfügung, wenn beim Laden des Pakets + \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} gewählt + wurde (siehe \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.optionalFeatures}, + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.extendedfeature}). + + Darüber hinaus kann \Package{scrextend} nicht mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse + zusammen verwendet werden. In allen Beispielen aus + \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage} muss daher bei Verwendung von + \Package{scrextend} +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} +\end{lstcode} +durch +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{book} + \usepackage[extendedfeature=title]{scrextend} +\end{lstcode} + ersetzt werden. +\fi + +Bei Dokumenten wird zwischen zwei Arten von Titeln +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{für das gesamte Dokument +}unterschieden. Zum einen gibt es die Titelseiten. Hierbei steht der +Dokumenttitel zusammen mit einigen zusätzlichen Informationen wie dem Autor +auf einer eigenen Seite. Neben der Haupttitelseite kann es dabei weitere +Titelseiten, etwa Schmutztitel, Verlagsinformationen, Widmung oder ähnliche, +geben. Zum anderen gibt es den Titelkopf. Dabei erscheint der Titel lediglich +am Anfang einer neuen \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{-- in der Regel der + ersten -- }Seite. Unterhalb dieser Titelzeilen\Index{Titel>Zeilen} wird +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{das Dokument }beispielsweise mit der +Zusammenfassung, einem Vorwort oder dem Inhaltsverzeichnis +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{fortgefahren}{fortgesetzt}. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{titlepage}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover} +\end{Declaration}% +Mit dieser Option% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{} wird ausgewählt, ob für die mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}) gesetzte Titelei eigene +Seiten\Index{Titel>Seite} verwendet werden, oder stattdessen die Titelei von +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} als Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf} +gesetzt wird. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für +einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, +\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. + +Mit \OptionValue{titlepage}{true}\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{true}} +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{oder \Option{titlepage} }wird die Titelei +in Form von Titelseiten ausgewählt. Die Anweisung +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} verwendet +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{dabei +}{}\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage}-Umgebungen zum Setzen dieser +Seiten, die somit normalerweise weder Seitenkopf noch Seitenfuß erhalten. Bei +{\KOMAScript} wurde die Titelei gegenüber den Standardklassen stark erweitert. + +Demgegenüber wird mit +\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{false}}\OptionValue{titlepage}{false} +erreicht, dass ein Titelkopf (engl.: \emph{in-page title}) gesetzt wird. Das +heißt, die Titelei wird lediglich speziell hervorgehoben, auf der Seite mit +dem Titel kann aber nachfolgend weiteres Material, beispielsweise eine +Zusammenfassung oder ein Abschnitt gesetzt werden. + +Mit% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUseError}% +} der dritten Möglichkeit, \OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}% +\important{\OptionValue{titlepage}{firstiscover}}, werden nicht nur +Titelseiten aktiviert. Es wird auch dafür gesorgt, dass die erste von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle}\IndexCmd{maketitle} ausgegebene Titelseite, also entweder +der Schmutztitel oder der Haupttitel, als Umschlagseite\Index{Umschlag} +ausgegeben wird. Jede andere Einstellung für die Option \Option{titlepage} +hebt diese Einstellung wieder auf. Die Ränder\important{% + \Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\\ + \Macro{coverpagebottommargin}} dieser Umschlagseite werden über +\Macro{coverpagetopmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagetopmargin} (oberer +Rand), \Macro{coverpageleftmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpageleftmargin} +(linker Rand), +\Macro{coverpagerightmargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagerightmargin} +(rechter Rand) und natürlich +\Macro{coverpagebottommargin}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{coverpagebottommargin} +(unterer Rand) bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen sind von den Längen +\Length{topmargin}\IndexLength{topmargin} und +\Length{evensidemargin}\IndexLength{evensidemargin} abhängig und können mit +\Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden. + +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + Bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} sind Titelseiten + voreingestellt. Demgegenüber verwendet \Class{scrartcl} in der + Voreinstellung einen Titelkopf.% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Die Voreinstellung ist von der verwendeten Klasse abhängig und wird von + \Package{scrextend} kompatibel zu den Standardklassen erkannt. Setzt eine + Klasse keine entsprechende Voreinstellung, so ist der Titelkopf + voreingestellt.% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \begin{Environment}{titlepage}\end{Environment} +\end{Declaration}% +\BeginIndex{Env}{titlepage}% +Grundsätzlich werden bei den Standardklassen und bei {\KOMAScript} alle +Titelseiten in einer speziellen Umgebung, der +\Environment{titlepage}-Umgebung, gesetzt. Diese Umgebung startet immer mit +einer neuen Seite -- im zweiseitigen Layout sogar mit einer neuen rechten +Seite~-- im einspaltigen Modus. Für eine Seite wird der Seitenstil mit +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty} geändert, +so dass weder Seitenzahl noch Kolumnentitel ausgegeben werden. Am Ende der +Umgebung wird die Seite automatisch beendet. Sollten Sie nicht das +automatische Layout der Titelei, wie es das nachfolgend beschriebene +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} bietet, verwenden können, ist zu +empfehlen, eine eigene Titelei mit Hilfe dieser Umgebung zu entwerfen. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit \Environment{titlepage} finden + Sie in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.env.titlepage}% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{env.titlepage}% + Angenommen, Sie wollen eine Titelseite, auf der lediglich oben links + möglichst groß und fett das Wort »Me« steht -- kein Autor, kein Datum, + nichts weiter. Folgendes Dokument ermöglicht das: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \begin{titlepage} + \textbf{\Huge Me} + \end{titlepage} + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example} +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{maketitle}\OParameter{Seitenzahl} +\end{Declaration}% +Während bei den Standardklassen nur maximal eine Titelseite mit den +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{drei }Angaben Titel, Autor und Datum +existiert, können bei {\KOMAScript} mit \Macro{maketitle} bis zu sechs +Titelseiten gesetzt werden. Im Gegensatz zu den Standardklassen kennt +\Macro{maketitle} bei {\KOMAScript} außerdem noch ein optionales nummerisches +Argument. Findet es Verwendung, so wird die Nummer als Seitenzahl der ersten +Titelseite benutzt. Diese Seitenzahl wird jedoch nicht ausgegeben, sondern +beeinflusst lediglich die Zählung. Sie sollten hier unbedingt eine ungerade +Zahl wählen, da sonst die gesamte Zählung durcheinander gerät. Meiner +Auf"|fassung nach gibt es nur zwei sinnvolle Anwendungen für das optionale +Argument. Zum einen könnte man dem Schmutztitel\Index[indexmain]{Schmutztitel} +die logische Seitenzahl \(-\)1 geben, um so die Seitenzählung erst ab der +Haupttitelseite mit 1 zu beginnen. Zum anderen könnte man mit einer höheren +Seitenzahl beginnen, beispielsweise 3, 5 oder 7, um so weitere Titelseiten zu +berücksichtigen, die erst vom Verlag hinzugefügt werden. Wird ein Titelkopf +verwendet, wird das optionale Argument ignoriert. Dafür kann der Seitenstil +einer solchen Titelei durch Umdefinierung des Makros +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}% +\important{\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}} (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}) +verändert werden. + +Die folgenden Anweisungen führen nicht unmittelbar zum Setzen der Titelei. Das +Setzen der Titelei erfolgt immer mit \Macro{maketitle}. Es sei an dieser +Stelle auch darauf hingewiesen, dass \Macro{maketitle} nicht innerhalb einer +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage}-Umgebung zu verwenden +ist. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} in den Beispielen angegeben, sollte man nur +entweder \Macro{maketitle} oder \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.env.titlepage} +verwenden. + +Mit den nachfolgend erklärten Anweisungen werden lediglich die Inhalte der +Titelei festgelegt. Sie müssen daher auch unbedingt vor \Macro{maketitle} +verwendet werden. Es ist jedoch nicht notwendig und bei Verwendung des +\Package{babel}-Pakets\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe \cite{package:babel}) auch +nicht empfehlenswert, diese Anweisungen in der Dokumentpräambel vor +\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} zu verwenden. Beispieldokumente finden Sie +am Ende des Abschnitts. + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{extratitle}\Parameter{Schmutztitel} +\end{Declaration}% +\begin{Explain}% + Früher war der Buchblock oftmals nicht durch einen Buchdeckel vor + Verschmutzung geschützt. Diese Aufgabe übernahm dann die erste Seite des + Buches, die meist einen Kurztitel, eben den \emph{Schmutztitel} trug. Auch + heute noch wird diese Extraseite vor dem eigentlichen Haupttitel gerne + verwendet und enthält dann Verlagsangaben, Buchreihennummer und ähnliche + Angaben. +\end{Explain} +Bei {\KOMAScript} ist es möglich, vor der eigentlichen Titelseite eine weitere +Seite zu setzen. Als \PName{Schmutztitel}\Index{Schmutztitel} kann dabei +beliebiger Text -- auch mehrere Absätze -- gesetzt werden. Der Inhalt von +\PName{Schmutztitel} wird von {\KOMAScript} ohne zusätzliche Beeinflussung der +Formatierung ausgegeben. Dadurch ist dessen Gestaltung völlig dem Anwender +überlassen. Die Rückseite des Schmutztitels bleibt leer. Der Schmutztitel +ergibt auch dann eine eigene Titelseite, wenn mit Titelköpfen gearbeitet +wird. Die Ausgabe des mit \Macro{extratitle} definierten Schmutztitels erfolgt +als Bestandteil der Titelei mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + Ein Beispiel für eine einfache Titelseite mit Schmutztitel und Haupttitel + finden Sie in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage}, + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.cmd.extratitle}% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.extratitle}% + Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von oben zurück und gehen davon aus, dass das + spartanische »Me« nur den Schmutztitel darstellt. Nach dem Schmutztitel + soll noch der Haupttitel folgen. Dann kann wie folgt verfahren werden: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge Me}} + \title{It's me} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Sie können den Schmutztitel aber auch horizontal zentriert und etwas + tiefer setzen: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\vspace*{4\baselineskip} + \begin{center}\textbf{\Huge Me}\end{center}} + \title{It's me} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.title} + ist beim Setzen der Titelei mit Hilfe von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} grundsätzlich notwendig, + damit die Beispiele fehlerfrei sind. Sie wird nachfolgend erklärt. + \end{Example} +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{titlehead}\Parameter{Kopf} + \Macro{subject}\Parameter{Typisierung} + \Macro{title}\Parameter{Titel} + \Macro{subtitle}\Parameter{Untertitel} + \Macro{author}\Parameter{Autor} + \Macro{date}\Parameter{Datum} + \Macro{publishers}\Parameter{Verlag} + \Macro{and} + \Macro{thanks}\Parameter{Fußnote} +\end{Declaration}% +Für den Inhalt der Haupttitelseite stehen sieben Elemente zur Verfügung. Die +Ausgabe der Haupttitelseite erfolgt als Bestandteil der Titelei mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle}, während die hier aufgeführten +Anweisungen lediglich der Definition der entsprechenden Elemente dienen. + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{titlehead}% +\LabelFontElement{titlehead}% +Der\important{\Macro{titlehead}} +\PName{Kopf}\Index[indexmain]{Titel>Seitenkopf} des Haupttitels wird mit der +Anweisung \Macro{titlehead} definiert. Er wird über die gesamte Textbreite in +normalem Blocksatz am Anfang der Seite ausgegeben. Er kann vom Anwender frei +gestaltet werden. Für die Ausgabe wird die Schrift des gleichnamigen Elements +verwendet (siehe \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}% +Die\important{\Macro{subject}} +\PName{Typisierung}\Index[indexmain]{Typisierung} wird unmittelbar über dem +\PName{Titel} in der Schrift des gleichnamigen Elements ausgegeben.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}% +Der\important{\Macro{title}} \PName{Titel} wird in einer sehr großen Schrift +ausgegeben. Dabei\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}}{} findet \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{}{abgesehen + von der Größe }% Umbruchkorrektur +Schriftgrößenumschaltungen für das Element +\FontElement{title}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{title}% +\important{\FontElement{title}} keine Wirkung (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subtitle}\LabelFontElement{subtitle}% +Der\important{\Macro{subtitle}} +\PName{Untertitel}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}} wird knapp unter dem Titel in der Schrift des +gleichnamigen Elements ausgegeben (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{author}\LabelFontElement{author}% +Unter\important{\Macro{author}} dem \PName{Untertitel} folgt der +\PName{Autor}\Index[indexmain]{Autor}. Es kann auch durchaus mehr als ein +Autor innerhalb des Arguments von \Macro{author} angegeben werden. Die Autoren +sind dann mit \Macro{and} voneinander zu +trennen. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der Schrift des gleichnamigen Elements (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{date}\LabelFontElement{date}% +Unter\important{\Macro{date}} dem Autor oder den Autoren folgt das +Datum\Index{Datum}. Dabei ist das aktuelle Datum, +\Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today}, voreingestellt. Es kann jedoch mit \Macro{date} +eine beliebige Angabe -- auch ein leere -- erreicht werden. Die Ausgabe +erfolgt in der Schrift des gleichnamigen Elements (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{publishers}% +\LabelFontElement{publishers}% +Als\important{\Macro{publishers}} Letztes folgt schließlich der +\PName{Verlag}\Index[indexmain]{Verlag}. Selbstverständlich kann diese +Anweisung auch für andere Angaben geringer Wichtigkeit verwendet +werden. Notfalls kann durch Verwendung einer \Macro{parbox} über die gesamte +Seitenbreite auch erreicht werden, dass diese Angabe nicht zentriert, sondern +im Blocksatz gesetzt wird. Sie ist dann als Äquivalent zum Kopf zu +betrachten. Dabei ist jedoch zu beachten, dass sie oberhalb von eventuell +vorhandenen Fußnoten ausgegeben wird. Die Ausgabe erfolgt in der Schrift des +gleichnamigen Elements (siehe +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}).% +\EndIndexGroup + +Fußnoten\important{\Macro{thanks}}\Index{Fussnoten=Fußnoten} werden auf der +Titelseite nicht mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.footnote}, sondern mit +der Anweisung \Macro{thanks} erzeugt. Sie dienen in der Regel für Anmerkungen +bei den Autoren. Als Fußnotenzeichen werden dabei Symbole statt Zahlen +verwendet. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass \Macro{thanks} +innerhalb des Arguments einer der übrigen Anweisungen, beispielsweise im +Argument \PName{Autor} der Anweisung \Macro{author}, zu verwenden ist. % +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + Damit die Schrifteinstellung für das Element + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.fontelement.footnote} beim Paket + \Package{scrextend} Beachtung findet muss allerdings nicht nur die + Titelerweiterung aktiviert sein, es muss auch dafür gesorgt sein, dass die + Fußnoten mit diesem Paket gesetzt werden (siehe Einleitung von + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes}, + \autopageref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.footnotes}). Trifft dies nicht zu, so + wird die Schrift verwendet, die von der Klasse oder anderen für die Fußnoten + verwendeten Paketen vorgegeben ist.% +}{}% + +Für% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}% +} die Ausgabe der Titelelemente kann die Schrift über gleichnamige Elemente +mit Hilfe der Befehle \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) eingestellt werden. Die +Voreinstellungen sind \autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts}, % +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts}, % +}% +zu entnehmen.% +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \begin{table} +% \centering +% \caption + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% +% \addtokomafont{caption}{\raggedright}% + \begin{captionbeside} + [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente des Titels}] + {\label{tab:\ThisCommonLabelBase.titlefonts}% + \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}Voreinstellungen der Schrift für die Elemente des Titels} + [l] + \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} + \toprule + Element-Name & Voreinstellung \\ + \midrule + \FontElement{author} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \FontElement{date} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \FontElement{dedication} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \FontElement{publishers} & \Macro{Large} \\ + \FontElement{subject} & + \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{Large} \\ + \FontElement{subtitle} & + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{large} \\ + \FontElement{title} & + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ + \FontElement{titlehead} & \\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \end{table}% +}{}% + +Bis auf den \PName{Kopf} und eventuelle Fußnoten werden alle Ausgaben +horizontal zentriert. \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{Die Formatierungen der + einzelnen Elemente}{Diese Angaben} sind noch einmal kurz zusammengefasst in +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}\IfThisCommonFirstRun{}{% + , \autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.mainTitle}} zu finden. +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{% + \begin{table} + % \centering + \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% + \setcapindent{0pt}% + % \caption + \begin{captionbeside}[Der Haupttitel]{% + \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% + Schrift\-größe und + Ausrichtung der Elemente der Haupttitelseite bei Verwendung von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle}} + [l] + \setlength{\tabcolsep}{.7\tabcolsep}% Umbruchoptimierung + \begin{tabular}[t]{llll} + \toprule + Element & Anweisung & Schrift & Satz \\ + \midrule + Seitenkopf & \Macro{titlehead} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{titlehead} & Block- \\ + Typisierung & \Macro{subject} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{subject} + & zentriert \\ + Titel & \Macro{title} & + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{title}\Macro{huge} & zentriert \\ + Untertitel & \Macro{subtitle} & + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{subtitle} & zentriert \\ + Autoren & \Macro{author} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{author} & zentriert \\ + Datum & \Macro{date} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{date} & zentriert \\ + Verlag & \Macro{publishers} & \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{publishers} & zentriert \\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular} + \end{captionbeside} + \label{tab:maincls.mainTitle} + \end{table}% +}{} + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + Ein Beispiel mit allen von \KOMAScript{} angebotenen Elementen für die + Haupttitelseite finden Sie in + \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} auf + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.maintitle}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{maintitle}% + Nehmen wir nun einmal an, Sie schreiben eine Diplomarbeit. Dabei sei + vorgegeben, dass die Titelseite oben linksbündig das Institut + einschließlich Adresse und rechtsbündig das Semester wiedergibt. Wie + üblich ist ein Titel einschließlich Autor und Abgabedatum zu setzen. + Außerdem soll der Betreuer angegeben und zu erkennen sein, dass es + sich um eine Diplomarbeit handelt. Sie könnten das wie folgt + erreichen: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} + \begin{document} + \titlehead{{\Large Universit"at Schlauenheim + \hfill SS~2001\\} + Institut f"ur Raumkr"ummung\\ + Hochschulstra"se~12\\ + 34567 Schlauenheim} + \subject{Diplomarbeit} + \title{Digitale Raumsimulation mit dem + DSP\,56004} + \subtitle{Klein aber fein?} + \author{cand. stup. Uli Ungenau} + \date{30. Februar 2001} + \publishers{Betreut durch + Prof. Dr. rer. stup. Naseweis} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + \end{Example}% +\fi + +\begin{Explain} + Ein häufiges Missverständnis betrifft die Bedeutung der + Haupttitelseite. Irrtümlich wird oft angenommen, es handle sich dabei um den + Buchumschlag\textnote{Umschlag}\Index{Umschlag} oder Buchdeckel. Daher wird + häufig erwartet, dass die Titelseite nicht den Randvorgaben für + doppelseitige Satzspiegel gehorcht, sondern rechts und links gleich große + Ränder besitzt. Nimmt man jedoch einmal ein Buch zur Hand und klappt es auf, + trifft man sehr schnell auf mindestens eine Titelseite\textnote{Titelseiten} + unter dem Buchdeckel innerhalb des so genannten Buchblocks. Genau diese + Titelseiten werden mit \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} gesetzt. + + Wie beim Schmutztitel handelt es sich also auch bei der Haupttitelseite um + eine Seite innerhalb des Buchblocks, die deshalb dem Satzspiegel des + gesamten Dokuments gehorcht. Überhaupt ist ein Buchdeckel, das \emph{Cover}, + etwas, das man in einem getrennten Dokument erstellt. Schließlich hat er oft + eine sehr individuelle Gestalt. Es spricht auch nichts dagegen, hierfür ein + Grafik- oder DTP-Programm zu Hilfe zu nehmen. Ein getrenntes Dokument sollte + auch deshalb verwendet werden, weil es später auf ein anderes Druckmedium, + etwa Karton, und möglicherweise mit einem anderen Drucker ausgegeben werden + soll. + + Seit \KOMAScript~3.12 kann man die erste von + \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} ausgegebene Titelseite + alternativ aber auch als Umschlagseite formatieren lassen. Dabei ändern sich + nur die für diese Seite verwendeten Ränder (siehe Option + \OptionValueRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{titlepage}{firstiscover}% + \IndexOption{titlepage~=\PValue{firstiscover}} auf + \DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.option.titlepage}). +\end{Explain} +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{uppertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenkopf} + \Macro{lowertitleback}\Parameter{Titelrückseitenfuß} +\end{Declaration}% +Im doppelseitigen Druck bleibt bei den Standardklassen die Rückseite des +Blatts mit der Titelseite leer. Bei {\KOMAScript} lässt sich die Rückseite der +Haupttitelseite hingegen für weitere Angaben nutzen. Dabei wird zwischen genau +zwei Elementen unterschieden, die der Anwender frei gestalten kann: dem +\PName{Titelrückseitenkopf}\Index{Titel>Rueckseite=Rückseite} und dem +\PName{Titelrückseitenfuß}. Dabei kann der Kopf bis zum Fuß reichen und +umgekehrt. \iffree{Nimmt man diese Anleitung als Beispiel, so wurde der + Haftungsausschluss mit Hilfe von \Macro{uppertitleback} + gesetzt.}{Beispielsweise hätte man die Verlagsinformationen zu diesem Buch + wahlweise mit \Macro{uppertitleback} oder \Macro{lowertitleback} setzen + können.}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{dedication}\Parameter{Widmung} +\end{Declaration}% +{\KOMAScript} bietet eine eigene Widmungsseite. Diese Widmung\Index{Widmung} +wird zentriert und in der Voreinstellung mit etwas größerer Schrift +gesetzt. +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{dedication}% +\LabelFontElement{dedication} +Die% +\IfThisCommonLabelBase{maincls}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}}% +}{% + \IfThisCommonLabelBase{scrextend}{% + \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrextend}}% + }{\InternalCommonFileUseError}% +}\important{\FontElement{dedication}} genaue Schrifteinstellung für das +Element \FontElement{dedication}, die +\autoref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts}, +\autopageref{tab:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlefonts} zu entnehmen ist, kann +über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\ThisCommonLabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% +\EndIndexGroup + +Die Rückseite ist wie bei der Seite mit dem Schmutztitel grundsätzlich +leer. Die Widmungsseite wird zusammen mit der restlichen Titelei mit +\DescRef{\ThisCommonLabelBase.cmd.maketitle} ausgegeben und muss daher vor +dieser Anweisung definiert sein. + +\IfThisCommonFirstRun{\iftrue}{% + Ein Beispiel mit allen von \KOMAScript{} angebotenen Titelseiten finden Sie + in \autoref{sec:\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.titlepage} auf + \PageRefxmpl{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase.fulltitle}.% + \csname iffalse\endcsname% +}% + \begin{Example} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{fulltitle} + Nehmen wir dieses Mal an, dass Sie einen Gedichtband schreiben, den + Sie Ihrer Frau widmen wollen. Das könnte wie folgt aussehen: +\begin{lstcode} + \documentclass{scrbook} + \usepackage[ngerman]{babel} + \begin{document} + \extratitle{\textbf{\Huge In Liebe}} + \title{In Liebe} + \author{Prinz Eisenherz} + \date{1412} + \lowertitleback{% + Dieser Gedichtband wurde mit Hilfe von + {\KOMAScript} und {\LaTeX} gesetzt.} + \uppertitleback{% + Selbstverlach\par + Auf"|lage: 1 Exemplar} + \dedication{% + Meinem Schnuckelchen\\ + in ewiger Liebe\\ + von Deinem Hasenboppelchen.} + \maketitle + \end{document} +\end{lstcode} + Ich bitte, die Kosenamen nach eigenen Vorlieben zu ersetzen. + \end{Example}% +\fi% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup + +%%% Local Variables: +%%% mode: latex +%%% coding: iso-latin-1 +%%% TeX-master: "../guide" +%%% End: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex index 76febd4bacb..40b11f1f21d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-3.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/common-typearea.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== -% common-3.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-typearea.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ % % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -% common-3.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% common-typearea.tex +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -45,20 +45,14 @@ % % ====================================================================== -\KOMAProvidesFile{common-3.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ +\KOMAProvidesFile{common-typearea.tex} + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (common paragraphs: typearea)] -\makeatletter -\@ifundefined{ifCommonmaincls}{\newif\ifCommonmaincls}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrextend}{\newif\ifCommonscrextend}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifCommonscrlttr}{\newif\ifCommonscrlttr}{}% -\@ifundefined{ifIgnoreThis}{\newif\ifIgnoreThis}{}% -\makeatother - \section{\texorpdfstring{Seitenauf"|teilung}{Seitenaufteilung}} \seclabel{typearea} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Aufteilung=Auf\/teilung} Eine Dokumentseite besteht aus unterschiedlichen Teilen, wie den Rändern, dem diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex index 786ed2a5339..ab237414c08 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/expertpart.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % expertpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % expertpart.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex index 9c7e8727554..c18d00f7323 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/guide-ngerman.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % guide-ngerman.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % guide-ngerman.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ====================================================================== % \KOMAProvidesFile{guide-ngerman.tex} - [$Date: 2016-03-09 18:14:56 +0100 (Wed, 09 Mar 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide language dependencies] % % \section{Title} @@ -545,7 +545,20 @@ % \begin{macro}{\changelogname} % The name of the change log index. % \begin{macrocode} - \def\changelogname{\"Anderungliste}% + \def\changelogname{\"Anderungsliste}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\descriptionname} +% \begin{macro}{\contentsname} +% \begin{macrocode] + \def\descriptionname{Bezeichnung}% + \def\contentname{Inhalt}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\lengthname} +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\lengthname{L\"ange}% % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macrocode} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/introduction.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/introduction.tex index 729d2ee4f1e..25313d5e360 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/introduction.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/introduction.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % introduction.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % introduction.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{introduction.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide introduction] \chapter{Einleitung} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/linkalias.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/linkalias.tex index cfcc44aa11c..16dcdc1d4e8 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/linkalias.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/linkalias.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % linkalias.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2016 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -38,13 +38,23 @@ % Link Aliase, die für die freie Version der Anleitung benötigt werden. % -\ProvidesFile{linkalias.tex}[2014/03/18 link aliases for the free version] +\KOMAProvidesFile{linkalias.tex} + [$Date: 2016-11-20 17:40:30 +0100 (Sun, 20 Nov 2016) $ + link aliases for the free version] \makeatletter \newcommand*{\lalias}[2]{% \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@#1}{% \expandafter\let\csname r@#1\expandafter\endcsname\csname r@#2\endcsname - }{}% + }{% + \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% + Label alias `#1'\MessageBreak + to `#2' ignored,\MessageBreak + because of multiply definition% + }% + \gdef \@multiplelabels {% + \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}% + }% } \makeatother @@ -57,16 +67,3 @@ \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize}{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos} \lalias{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedsection}{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence} - -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:maincls.option.version}{desc:typearea.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}{desc:maincls.option.version} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote}{desc:maincls.cmd.footnote} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule}{desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.description}{desc:maincls.env.description} -\lalias{desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling}{desc:maincls.env.labeling} - -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark} -\lalias{desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.automark}{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/preface.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/preface.tex index 16f6ac1ea2b..a0e7cce989c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/preface.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/preface.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % preface.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % preface.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2012 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex index e5333131808..0c64ff8a3d7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scraddr.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scraddr.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scraddr.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,11 +46,12 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scraddr.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scraddr)] \chapter{Adressdateien mit \Package{scraddr} erschließen}% \labelbase{scraddr}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scraddr} \section{Überblick}\seclabel{overview} @@ -58,15 +59,14 @@ Das Paket \Package{scraddr} ist eine kleine Beigabe zur Briefklasse von \KOMAScript. Ziel ist, die Benutzung von Adressdateien zu vereinfachen und ihre Anwendung flexibler zu gestalten. Im Grunde stellt das Paket nur einen Lademechanismus für Adressdateien bereit, die aus -\Macro{adrentry}- und neueren \Macro{addrentry}-Einträgen bestehen, wie sie in -\autoref{cha:scrlttr2} ab \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} beschrieben +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}- und neueren \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträgen bestehen, wie sie in +\autoref{cha:scrlttr2} ab \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} beschrieben sind. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{InputAddressFile}\Parameter{Dateiname} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{InputAddressFile}% Der Befehl \Macro{InputAddressFile} ist der zentrale Ladebefehl von \Package{scraddr}. Er erwartet als obligatorisches Argument den @@ -77,54 +77,48 @@ Für jeden Eintrag dieser Adressdatei wird eine Reihe von Makros generiert, die es ermöglichen, auf die Daten der Adressdatei zuzugreifen. Es soll an dieser Stelle nicht verschwiegen werden, dass dies bei großen Adressdateien sehr viel \TeX-Speicher kostet. +% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration}% - \Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}% - \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% - \Parameter{Kommentar}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{adrentry}}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ - % - \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}% - \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}% - \Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{addrentry}}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ - % - \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}\\ - \Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}% + \Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse} + \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2} + \Parameter{Kommentar}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse} + \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2} + \Parameter{F3}\Parameter{F4} + \Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben} + \Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben} \end{Declaration}% -\IndexCmd{adrentry}% -\IndexCmd{addrentry}% -\IndexCmd{adrchar}% -\IndexCmd{addrchar}% Der Aufbau der Adresseinträge in der Adressdatei wurde in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.addressFile} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} ausführlich besprochen. Die +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry} ausführlich besprochen. Die ebenfalls dort erwähnte Unterteilung der Adressdatei mit Hilfe von \Macro{adrchar} oder \Macro{addrchar} hat für \Package{scraddr} keine Bedeutung und wird vom Paket ignoriert. Die Zugriffsbefehle sind mit englischen, den Argumenten entsprechenden Bezeichnungen versehen. +% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{Address}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{Comment}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{Kürzel}\\ -\Macro{FreeIV}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{Address}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{Telephone}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{FreeI}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{FreeII}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{Comment}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{FreeIII}\Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{FreeIV}\Parameter{Kürzel} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Name}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FirstName}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Address}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Telephone}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeI}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeII}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeIII}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FreeIV}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Comment}% Der Zugriff erfolgt anhand des Kürzels im letzten Argument eines Eintrags, das heißt Argument Nummer 8 -für \Macro{adrentry}-Einträge beziehungsweise Argument Nummer 9 -für \Macro{addrentry}-Einträge. Das bedeutet auch, dass dieses Argument +für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträge beziehungsweise Argument Nummer 9 +für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge. Das bedeutet auch, dass dieses Argument nicht leer sein darf. Um eine sichere Funktionsweise zu garantieren, empfiehlt es sich, das Kürzel nur als Folge von Buchstaben aufzubauen, @@ -134,15 +128,14 @@ Weiterhin ist zu beachten, dass bei mehrmaligem Auf"|treten eines Kürzels in den Einträgen die Angaben beim letzten Auf"|treten die gültigen sind.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{InputAddressFile}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Name}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FirstName}\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Address}\EndIndex{Cmd}{Telephone}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeI}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeII}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeIII}\EndIndex{Cmd}{FreeIV}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Comment}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Benutzung}\seclabel{usage} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{addrentry}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{adrentry}% Um das Paket benutzen zu können, ist eine gültige Adressdatei zu erstellen. Diese, hier \File{lotr.adr} genannt, könnte beispielsweise @@ -166,17 +159,30 @@ Das vierte Argument, die Telefonnummer, wurde hier leer gelassen. Erstens hat es in dem Zusammenhang keinen Sinn und zweitens sollte dies ja auch möglich sein. +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{InputAddressFile} Mit dem oben beschriebenen Ladebefehl lesen wir die Adressdatei in unser Briefdokument ein: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \InputAddressFile{lotr} \end{lstcode} +\EndIndexGroup +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{Name}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{Address}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FirstName}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{LastName}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeI}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeII}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeIII}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{FreeIV}% +\BeginIndex[indexother]{Cmd}{Comment}% Mit Hilfe der vorgestellten Makros können wir dann einen Brief an den alten \textsc{Tom Bombadil} schreiben, in dem wir ihn fragen, ob er sich noch an zwei Gefährten aus alter Zeit erinnern kann. -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \begin{letter}{\Name{TOM}\\\Address{TOM}} \opening{Lieber \FirstName{TOM} \LastName{TOM},} @@ -199,49 +205,49 @@ erinnern kann. und Lachen des Laubes!"'} \end{letter} \end{lstcode} -Die in diesem Beispiel in \Macro{opening} verwendete Zusammensetzung aus -\Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel} und \Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel} -kann auch direkt mittels \Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel} erhalten werden. +Die in diesem Beispiel in \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} verwendete +Zusammensetzung aus \Macro{FirstName}\Parameter{Kürzel} und +\Macro{LastName}\Parameter{Kürzel} kann auch direkt mittels +\Macro{Name}\Parameter{Kürzel} erhalten werden. + +Das fünf"|te und sechste Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} steht zur freien Verfügung. Mit den Makros +\Macro{FreeI} und \Macro{FreeII} kann auf diese Inhalte zugegriffen werden. Im +vorliegenden Fall wurde das fünf"|te Argument für die Person benutzt, die der +Person des Eintrags am nächsten steht. Das sechste Argument enthält im +Beispiel die besondere Vorliebe der jeweiligen Person. Das siebente Argument +ist ebenfalls ein freier Eintrag. Der Zugriff erfolgt per \Macro{Comment} oder +\Macro{FreeIII}. Der Zugriff auf das vierte freie Argument mittels +\Macro{FreeIV} ist nur für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Einträge gültig. +Bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen ist seine Verwendung nicht +zulässig. Näheres hierzu findet sich im nächsten Abschnitt. +% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup -Das fünf"|te und sechste Argument von \Macro{adrentry} und -\Macro{addrentry} steht zur freien Verfügung. -Mit den Makros \Macro{FreeI} und \Macro{FreeII} kann auf -diese Inhalte zugegriffen werden. Im vorliegenden Fall wurde -das fünf"|te Argument für die Person benutzt, die der Person des -Eintrags am nächsten steht. Das sechste Argument -enthält im Beispiel die besondere Vorliebe der jeweiligen Person. -Das siebente Argument ist ebenfalls ein freier Eintrag. Der Zugriff -erfolgt per \Macro{Comment} oder \Macro{FreeIII}. -Der Zugriff auf das vierte freie Argument mittels \Macro{FreeIV} -ist nur für \Macro{addrentry}-Einträge gültig. -Bei \Macro{adrentry}-Einträgen ist seine Verwendung nicht zulässig. Näheres -hierzu findet sich im nächsten Abschnitt. \section{Paketoptionen für Warnungen} Wie im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnt, ist die Benutzung des Zugriffsbefehls -\Macro{FreeIV} bei \Macro{adrentry}-Einträgen nicht zulässig. Wie +\Macro{FreeIV} bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Einträgen nicht zulässig. Wie \Package{scraddr} darauf reagiert, ist allerdings durch Paketoptionen konfigurierbar. Bitte beachten Sie\textnote{Achtung!}, dass dieses Paket die -erweiterte Optionenschnittstelle mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} und -\Macro{KOMAoption} nicht unterstützt. Die Optionen sind also entweder als -globale Optionen bei \Macro{documentclass} oder als lokale Optionen bei -\Macro{usepackage} anzugeben. +erweiterte Optionenschnittstelle mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoption} nicht unterstützt. Die Optionen sind also +entweder als globale Optionen bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.documentclass} oder als +lokale Optionen bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usepackage} anzugeben. \begin{Declaration} -\Option{adrFreeIVempty}\\ -\Option{adrFreeIVshow}\\ -\Option{adrFreeIVwarn}\\ +\Option{adrFreeIVempty} +\Option{adrFreeIVshow} +\Option{adrFreeIVwarn} \Option{adrFreeIVstop} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVempty}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVshow}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVwarn}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVstop}% -Diese vier Optionen erlauben die Auswahl aus vier verschiedenen -Reaktionen zwischen \emph{Ignorieren} bis \emph{Abbruch} falls bei einem -\Macro{adrentry}-Eintrag der Zugriffsbefehl \Macro{FreeIV} verwendet wird: +Diese vier Optionen erlauben die Auswahl aus vier verschiedenen Reaktionen +zwischen \emph{Ignorieren} bis \emph{Abbruch} falls bei einem +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Eintrag der Zugriffsbefehl \Macro{FreeIV} +verwendet wird: % \begin{labeling}[~--]{\Option{adrFreeIVempty}} \item[\Option{adrFreeIVempty}] @@ -256,11 +262,9 @@ Reaktionen zwischen \emph{Ignorieren} bis \emph{Abbruch} falls bei einem \end{labeling} Wird für das Paket keine Option angegeben, so ist \Option{adrFreeIVshow} voreingestellt.% -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVstop}% -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVwarn}% -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVshow}% -\EndIndex{Option}{adrFreeIVempty}% - +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput %%% Local Variables: diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex index cbdc64ff4d9..44a4c70860a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbase.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbase.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbase.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,12 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbase.tex} - [$Date: 2016-03-09 18:09:14 +0100 (Wed, 09 Mar 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script package scrbase] \chapter{Grundlegende Funktionen im Paket \Package{scrbase}} \labelbase{scrbase} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrbase}% Das Paket \Package{scrbase} stellt einige grundlegende Funktionen bereit, die @@ -81,9 +81,8 @@ Werten zuzuweisen. Auch die Optionen, die \Package{scrbase} bereitstellt, verwenden die \Package{keyval}-Syntax: \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{internalonly}\PName{Wert} + \OptionVName{internalonly}{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{internalonly~=\PName{Wert}}% Von \Package{scrbase} werden einige Verzweigungsanweisungen bereitgestellt. Dabei verwendet es primär die Bezeichnungen \Macro{scr@\PName{Name}}. Es handelt sich somit um interne @@ -105,7 +104,7 @@ Anwender können sie mit oder ohne Wertangabe entweder als globale Option bei \Macro{documentclass} oder per \Macro{PassOptionsToPackage} angeben. \begin{Example} Der Anwender will nicht, dass die Anweisungen \Macro{ifVTeX} und - \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} von \Package{scrbase} definiert werden. Also + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} von \Package{scrbase} definiert werden. Also verwendet er beim Laden der Klasse: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass% @@ -114,13 +113,13 @@ Anwender können sie mit oder ohne Wertangabe entweder als globale Option bei \end{lstcode} Der Klassenname \Class{foo} wird hier als Platzhalter für irgendeine Klasse verwendet. Die Bedeutungen der Anweisungen \Macro{ifVTeX} und - \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} sowie weitere Verzweigungsanweisungen sind - \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, %\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX} und - %\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} sowie weitere Verzweigungsanweisungen sind + \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, %\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX} und + %\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} ab \autopageref{sec:scrbase.if} zu entnehmen. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Option}{internalonly~=\PName{Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Schlüssel als Eigenschaften von Familien und deren Mitgliedern} @@ -136,11 +135,9 @@ Schlüssel eines Familienmitglieds, einem Schlüssel einer Familie oder einem Schlüssel aller Familienmitglieder zugewiesen werden. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DefineFamily}\Parameter{Familienname}\\ + \Macro{DefineFamily}\Parameter{Familienname} \Macro{DefineFamilyMember}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familienname} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamily}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyMember}% \Package{scrbase} muss aus verschiedenen Gründen die Mitglieder einer Familie kennen. Daher ist es notwendig, eine neue Familie zunächst mit \Macro{DefineFamily} zu definieren und so eine leere Mitgliederliste zu @@ -187,26 +184,19 @@ Pakete im Gesamtpaket als Mitglied zu verwenden. definiert. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyMember}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamily}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DefineFamilyKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}}% - \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Aktion}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyState}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}\\ - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}\\ + \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Aktion} + \Macro{FamilyKeyState} + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknown} + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} + \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} \Macro{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyState}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}% Mit dieser Anweisung wird ein \PName{Schlüssel} definiert. Ist ein \PName{Mitglied} angegeben, so ist der \PName{Schlüssel} eine Eigenschaft dieses Mitglieds der angegebenen \PName{Familie}. Ist kein Mitglied @@ -222,12 +212,12 @@ eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert} angegeben wird, kann später der \begin{Explain} \phantomsection\label{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}% Letztlich führt -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,escapeinside=»«] +\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«] \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«} [»\PName{Säumniswert}«]{»\PName{Aktion}«} \end{lstcode} zu dem Aufruf -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,moretexcs={define@key},escapeinside=»«] +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={define@key},escapeinside=»«] \define@key{»\PName{Familie\,Mitglied}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«} [»\PName{Säumniswert}«]{»\PName{erweiterte Aktion}«} \end{lstcode} @@ -307,30 +297,25 @@ sollten jedoch die vier vordefinierten Zustände verwendet werden. ersetzen. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateNeedValue}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateProcessed}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyStateUnknown}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyKeyState}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineFamilyKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \Macro{RelaxFamilyKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RelaxFamilyKey}% Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Schlüssel} zuvor als \PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} definiert, so wird diese Definition quasi aufgehoben. Der \PName{Schlüssel} ist dann für dieses \PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} nicht mehr definiert. Die Verwendung für einen \PName{Schlüssel}, der für dieses \PName{Mitglied} der \PName{Familie} gar nicht definiert ist, ist ebenfalls zulässig.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RelaxFamilyKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyProcessOptions}% Grundsätzlich ist die Erweiterung der Schlüssel von Familien auf Familien und Familienmitglieder dazu gedacht, dass Schlüssel beziehungsweise die Wertzuweisung an Schlüssel als ganz normale Klassen- oder Paketoptionen @@ -375,17 +360,17 @@ verwendet werden. Es ist also insbesondere auch nicht erlaubt, innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen Pakete zu laden.%, die selbst %\Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} verwenden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyProcessOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% \Parameter{Code}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}% Insbesondere\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrbase}} Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen wünschen manchmal, in ein Paket oder eine Klasse noch vor der Verarbeitung der Optionen eines zukünftig geladenen Pakets oder einer zukünftig geladenen -Klasse mit \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} eingreifen zu können. Dies ist mit +Klasse mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} eingreifen zu können. Dies ist mit \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions} möglich. Das Paket \Package{scrbase} bietet dafür einen sogenannten Haken (engl. \emph{hook}). Diesem kann man mit \Macro{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions} neuen \PName{Code} hinzufügen. Die @@ -415,17 +400,17 @@ bleibt auch über die Ausführung hinaus erhalten. meldet das Paket \Package{Mettwurst}, dass diese Option nicht bekannt ist. Wird die Option \Option{Aufschnitt} als globale Option angegeben, so ignoriert Paket \Package{Mettwurst} diese. Voreinstellungen innerhalb des - Pakets beispielsweise mit \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions} noch vor - \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions} sind allerdings davon unabhängig. + Pakets beispielsweise mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions} noch vor + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions} sind allerdings davon + unabhängig. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFamilyProcessOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Optionenliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyExecuteOptions}% Diese Anweisung stellt eine Erweiterung von \Macro{ExecuteOptions} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern dar (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). Dabei verarbeitet die Anweisung nicht nur Optionen, @@ -460,13 +445,12 @@ Gliederungsbefehlen vor allen anderen auszuwerten. Diese Anweisung darf auch innerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyExecuteOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyOptions}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Optionenliste}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOptions}% Die \PName{Optionenliste} hat dabei die Form: \begin{flushleft}\begin{tabular}{l} \PName{Schlüssel}\texttt{=}\PName{Wert}\texttt{,}% @@ -486,7 +470,7 @@ Mitglieder definiert wurden. Existiert ein angegebener \PName{Schlüssel} weder für die Familie noch für ein Mitglied der Familie, so wird von \Macro{FamilyOptions} ein Fehler ausgegeben. Dies geschieht ebenfalls, wenn zwar für einige Mitglieder ein Schlüssel existiert, jedoch jedes dieser -Mitglieder über \Macro{FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler zurückmeldet. +Mitglieder über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler zurückmeldet. \begin{Example} Sie ergänzen das Fleischermeister-Projekt um ein weiteres Paket \Package{Wurstsalat}. Wird dieses Paket verwendet, so sollen alle @@ -527,22 +511,22 @@ Mitglieder über \Macro{FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler zurückmeldet. definiert, dass sie für das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} keine Funktion mehr ausübt. Da zu diesem Zeitpunkt \Macro{@currname} und \Macro{@currext} nicht mehr gültig sind, muss dabei das optionale Argument von - \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} verwendet werden. Bis zu dieser Umdefinierung der + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} verwendet werden. Bis zu dieser Umdefinierung der Option wird jedoch eine Definition verwendet, die während \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} die Option erneut für die gesamte Familie ausführt und damit auch für andere Wurstpakete setzt. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyOption}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Option}\Parameter{Werteliste}% + \Parameter{Option}\Parameter{Werteliste}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOption}% Neben Optionen, die sich gegenseitig ausschließende Werte besitzen, kann es auch Optionen geben, die gleichzeitig mehrere Werte annehmen können. Für diese -wäre es bei Verwendung von \Macro{FamilyOptions} notwendig, der Option mehrfach +wäre es bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} notwendig, der Option mehrfach einen Wert zuzuweisen und dabei die Option selbst mehrfach anzugeben. Stattdessen kann man einfach mit \Macro{FamilyOption} einer einzigen \PName{Option} eine ganze \PName{Werteliste} zuweisen. Die @@ -553,7 +537,7 @@ einzigen \PName{Option} eine ganze \PName{Werteliste} zuweisen. Die In diesem Zusammenhang sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die Verwendung eines Kommas in einem Wert möglich ist, wenn man den Wert in geschweifte Klammern setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu -\Macro{FamilyOptions} zu entnehmen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions} zu entnehmen. \begin{Example} Das Paket \Package{Wurstsalat} soll eine Option bekommen, über die man weitere Zutaten bestimmen kann. Für jede Zutat wird dabei wieder ein @@ -583,35 +567,36 @@ setzt. Die weitere Funktionsweise ist der vorhergehenden Erklärung zu verwenden. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyOption}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}\Parameter{Aktion}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}% Manchmal\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} ist es vorteilhafter, wenn nicht jede Wertzuweisung an eine Option unmittelbar eine \PName{Aktion} auslöst, sondern dies erst geschieht, wenn alle Wertzuweisungen innerhalb eines Aufrufs -von \Macro{FamilyProcessOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyProcessOptions} oder -\Macro{FamilyExecuteOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyExecuteOptions} beziehungsweise -\Macro{FamilyOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions} oder -\Macro{FamilyOption}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions} abgeschlossen sind. Genau das ist -mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} möglich. Die Rückmeldung von -Fehlerzuständen ist über diese Anweisung jedoch ebenso wenig möglich, wie die -Verwendung dieser Anweisung außerhalb der Ausführung von Optionen. +von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyProcessOptions} +oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyExecuteOptions} +beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOptions}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions} +oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyOption}\IndexCmd{FamilyOptions} +abgeschlossen sind. Genau das ist mit Hilfe von \Macro{AtEndOfFamilyOptions} +möglich. Die Rückmeldung von Fehlerzuständen ist über diese Anweisung jedoch +ebenso wenig möglich, wie die Verwendung dieser Anweisung außerhalb der +Ausführung von Optionen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndOfFamilyOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyBoolKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetBool}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername}\Parameter{Wert} + \Macro{FamilyBoolKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername} + \Macro{FamilySetBool}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Schaltername} + \Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyBoolKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetBool}% In den vorherigen Beispielen wurden schon mehrfach Schalter gesetzt. Im Beispiel der Option \Option{Aufschnitt} war es dabei notwendig, dass der Anwender als Wert \PValue{true} oder \PValue{false} angibt. Es existierte @@ -619,25 +604,25 @@ keine Fehlerbehandlung, falls der Anwender einen falschen Wert verwendet. Da solche booleschen Schalter ein häufiger Anwendungsfall sind, kann man sie bei \Package{scrbase} einfach mit \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} definieren. Dabei sind die Argumente \PName{Mitglied}, \PName{Familie} und \PName{Schlüssel} die gleichen -wie bei \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}). Das Argument +wie bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} (siehe +\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}). Das Argument \PName{Schaltername} ist der Name eines Schalter ohne den Präfix \Macro{if}. Existiert dieser Schalter noch nicht, so wird er automatisch definiert und mit \PName{false} voreingestellt. Intern verwendet \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} dann \Macro{FamilySetBool} als \PName{Aktion} für -\Macro{DefineFamilyKey}. Der Säumniswert für eine solche Option ist immer +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}. Der Säumniswert für eine solche Option ist immer \PValue{true}. \Macro{FamilySetBool} wiederum versteht als \PName{Wert} neben \PValue{true} auch die Werte \PValue{on} und \PValue{yes} zum Einschalten und neben \PValue{false} auch die Werte \PValue{off} und \PValue{no} zum Ausschalten. Wird ein unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird die Anweisung -\Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den Argumenten \PName{Familie}, -\PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen und so \Macro{FamilyKeyState} -entsprechend gesetzt. Dadurch wird dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über -eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben (siehe auch -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} und -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}). +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den Argumenten +\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen und so +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} entsprechend gesetzt. Dadurch wird +dann gegebenenfalls eine Meldung über eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben +(siehe auch \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} und +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState}). \begin{Example} Der Schlüssel \Option{Aufschnitt} soll in den Wurstpaketen etwas robuster definiert werden. Außerdem sollen alle Wurstpakete denselben Schalter @@ -676,12 +661,12 @@ eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben (siehe auch \end{lstcode} unter Ausnutzung des weiterführenden Hinweises auf \autopageref{explain:scrbase.macro.DefineFamilyKey}, der nicht nur für - \Macro{DefineFamilyKey}, sondern entsprechend auch für \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey}, sondern entsprechend auch für \Macro{FamilyBoolKey} gilt. - Da \Macro{FamilyKeyState} bereits von \Macro{FamilySetBool} gesetzt wird, + Da \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} bereits von \Macro{FamilySetBool} gesetzt wird, kann innerhalb der Definition der Option mit Hilfe von - \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} der Status gegebenenfalls auch abgefragt werden. So + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} der Status gegebenenfalls auch abgefragt werden. So könnte man im ersten Fall beispielsweise nach \Macro{FamilySetBool} einen Test der Art: \begin{lstcode} @@ -698,23 +683,18 @@ eine unbekannte Wertzuweisung ausgegeben (siehe auch vermeiden. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetBool}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyBoolKey} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyNumericalKey}}% + \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makroname}% - \Parameter{Werteliste}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilySetNumerical}}% + \Parameter{Werteliste} + \Macro{FamilySetNumerical}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel} \Parameter{Makroname}\Parameter{Werteliste}% - \Parameter{Wert} + \Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyNumericalKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetNumerical}% Während Schalter nur zwei Werte annehmen können, gibt es auch Schlüssel, die mehrere Werte kennen. So kann beispielsweise eine Ausrichtung nicht nur links oder nicht links, sondern beispielsweise links, mittig oder rechts @@ -786,87 +766,82 @@ expandiert wird. unterschieden werden. \end{Example} % -Intern wird von \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey} dann \Macro{DefineFamilyKey} mit -der Anweisung \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} verwendet. Wird an einen solchen -Schlüssel ein unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird von -\Macro{FamilySetNumerical} Anweisung \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den -Argumenten \PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} -aufgerufen. Dies führt zu einer Fehlersignalisierung in \Macro{FamilyKeyState} -mit Hilfe des Status \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} und beispielsweise bei -der Verwendung als lokale Option zu einer Fehlermeldung. Ebenso wird beim -Aufruf von \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} auch der Erfolg via -\Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} in \Macro{FamilyKeyState} signalisiert.% +Intern wird von \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey} dann +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey} mit der Anweisung +\Macro{FamilySetNumerical} verwendet. Wird an einen solchen Schlüssel ein +unbekannter Wert übergeben, so wird von \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} mit den Argumenten +\PName{Familie}, \PName{Schlüssel} und \PName{Wert} aufgerufen. Dies führt zu +einer Fehlersignalisierung in \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} mit +Hilfe des Status \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} und +beispielsweise bei der Verwendung als lokale Option zu einer +Fehlermeldung. Ebenso wird beim Aufruf von \Macro{FamilySetNumerical} auch der +Erfolg via \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} in +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} signalisiert.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetNumerical}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyNumericalKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyCounterKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\% - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyCounterKey}}% - \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetCounter}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler}\Parameter{Wert} + \Macro{FamilyCounterKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler} + \Macro{FamilySetCounter}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{\LaTeX-Zähler} + \Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounter}% -Während\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} bei \Macro{FamilyNumericalKey} ein -Makro aufgrund eines symbolischen \PName{Wert}s auf einen korrespondierenden -nummerischen Wert gesetzt wurde, gibt es natürlich auch Fälle, in denen ein -\PName{Schlüssel} direkt einen \PName{\LaTeX-Zähler} rerpäsentiert, dem -unmittelbar ein nummerischer \PName{Wert} zugewiesen werden soll. Dazu dient -die Anweisung \Macro{FamilyCounterKey}, von der intern dann -\Macro{FamilySetCounter} aufgerufen wird. Dabei finden einige grundlegende -Prüfungen des \PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um festzustellen, ob dieses -Argument für eine Zuweisung an einen Zähler in Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung -findet nur statt, wenn diese Prüfungen gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht -alle Fehler erkannt werden, so dass eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer -Fehlermeldung von \TeX{} selbst führen kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen -über \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} signalisiert. +Während\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} bei +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey} ein Makro aufgrund eines +symbolischen \PName{Wert}s auf einen korrespondierenden nummerischen Wert +gesetzt wurde, gibt es natürlich auch Fälle, in denen ein \PName{Schlüssel} +direkt einen \PName{\LaTeX-Zähler} rerpäsentiert, dem unmittelbar ein +nummerischer \PName{Wert} zugewiesen werden soll. Dazu dient die Anweisung +\Macro{FamilyCounterKey}, von der intern dann \Macro{FamilySetCounter} +aufgerufen wird. Dabei finden einige grundlegende Prüfungen des +\PName{Wert}-Arguments statt um festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine +Zuweisung an einen Zähler in Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn +diese Prüfungen gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt +werden, so dass eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer Fehlermeldung von \TeX{} +selbst führen kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} signalisiert. Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird stattdessen der \PName{Säumniswert} eingesetzt. Falls kein \PName{Säumniswert} angegeben wird, kann später der \PName{Schlüssel} nur mit Wertübergabe verwendet werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\% - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}}% - \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetCounterMacro}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}\Parameter{Wert}% + \Macro{FamilyCounterMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro} + \Macro{FamilySetCounterMacro}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro} + \Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterMacroKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounterMacro}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} beiden Anweisungen unterscheiden -sich von den zuvor erklärten \Macro{FamilyCounterKey} und -\Macro{FamilySetCounter} nur dadurch, dass nicht ein \LaTeX-Zähler auf einen +sich von den zuvor erklärten \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetCounter} nur dadurch, dass nicht ein \LaTeX-Zähler auf einen Wert gesetzt wird, sondern ein \PName{Makro} mit diesem Wert definiert wird.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetCounterMacro}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyCounterMacroKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyLengthKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\% - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyLengthKey}}% - \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Länge}\\ + \Macro{FamilyLengthKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Länge} \Macro{FamilySetLength}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Wert}\\ - \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\% - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}}% - \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro}\\ - \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro}\Parameter{Wert}% + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Länge} + \Parameter{Wert} + \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} + \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro} + \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel}\Parameter{Makro} + \Parameter{Wert}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthMacroKey}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLengthMacro}% Über\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \Macro{FamilyLengthKey} kann ein \PName{Schlüssel} definiert werden, der eine \PName{Länge} repräsentiert. Dabei spielt es keine Rolle, ob eine \LaTeX-Länge, ein @@ -877,7 +852,7 @@ festzustellen, ob dieses Argument für eine Zuweisung an eine \PName{Länge} in Frage kommt. Die Zuweisung findet nur statt, wenn diese Prüfungen gelingen. Allerdings können hier nicht alle Fehler erkannt werden, so dass eine falsche Zuweisung auch zu einer Fehlermeldung von \TeX{} selbst führen -kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über \Macro{FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} +kann. Erkannte Fehler werden hingegen über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue} signalisiert. Wurde\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrbase}} kein Wert übergeben, so wird @@ -889,29 +864,25 @@ Bei Verwendung der Anweisungen \Macro{FamilyLengthMacroKey} und \Macro{FamilySetLengthMacro} findet die Speicherung des Werts nicht in einer \Macro{Länge}, sondern in einem \Macro{Makro} statt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLengthMacro}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthMacroKey}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilySetLength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyLengthKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyStringKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie}% - \Parameter{Schlüssel}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{FamilyStringKey}}% + \Macro{FamilyStringKey}\OParameter{Mitglied}\Parameter{Familie} + \Parameter{Schlüssel} \OParameter{Säumniswert}\Parameter{Makro} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyStringKey}% Hier wird nun\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrbase}} ein Schlüssel definiert, der jeden beliebigen Wert annehmen kann. Der Wert wird in dem angegebenen \PName{Makro} gespeichert. Wird das optionale Argument für den \PName{Säumniswert} weggelassen, so entspricht die Anweisung: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,escapeinside=»«] +\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«] \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«} {\def»\PName{Makro}«{#1}} \end{lstcode} Existiert das optionale Argument für den \PName{Säumniswert} so entspricht die Anweisung: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,escapeinside=»«] +\begin{lstcode}[escapeinside=»«] \DefineFamilyKey[»\PName{Mitglied}«]{»\PName{Familie}«}{»\PName{Schlüssel}«} [»\PName{Säumniswert}«] {\def»\PName{Makro}«{#1}\FamilyKeyStateProcessed} @@ -943,16 +914,17 @@ In diesem Fall existieren keine unbekannten Werte, da alle Werte schlicht für eine Makrodefinition verwendet werden. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, dass in der Wertzuweisung an den Schlüssel keine Absätze enthalten sein dürfen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyStringKey}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel}% - \Parameter{Wert}\Parameter{Werteliste} + \Macro{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}\Parameter{Familie}\Parameter{Schlüssel} + \Parameter{Wert}\Parameter{Werteliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}% -Diese Anweisung signalisiert über \Macro{FamilyKeyState} einen Fehler aufgrund -eines unbekannten oder unerlaubten Werts. Dabei wird als \PName{Werteliste} -eine durch Komma separierte Liste von erlaubten Werten der Form +Diese Anweisung signalisiert über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} +einen Fehler aufgrund eines unbekannten oder unerlaubten Werts. Dabei wird als +\PName{Werteliste} eine durch Komma separierte Liste von erlaubten Werten der +Form \begin{flushleft}\vskip\dp\strutbox\begin{tabular}{l} `\PName{Wert}'\texttt{,} `\PName{Wert}' \dots \end{tabular}\vskip\dp\strutbox\end{flushleft} @@ -987,39 +959,41 @@ erwartet. Allerdings\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} wird die }% \end{lstcode} Zunächst wird versucht, den booleschen Schalter für Aufschnitt über - \Macro{FamilySetBool} zu setzen. Gelingt dies, wurde also - \Macro{FamilyKeyState} zu \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} definiert, wird + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} zu setzen. Gelingt dies, wurde also + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} definiert, wird der Feinschnitt abgeschaltet. Anderenfalls wird überprüft, ob an Stelle eines gültigen Werts für einen booleschen Schalter %der Wert \PValue{fein} übergeben wurde. In diesem Fall wird sowohl der Feinschnitt, als auch Aufschnitt aktiviert und mit Hilfe von - \Macro{FamilyKeyStateProcessed} der Erfolgs-Status gesetzt. Ist auch das - nicht der Fall, bleibt der von \Macro{FamilySetBool} signalisierte + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed} der Erfolgs-Status gesetzt. Ist auch das + nicht der Fall, bleibt der von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilySetBool} signalisierte Fehler-Zustand bestehen. Die bei den Tests verwendete Anweisung \Macro{ifstr}\IndexCmd{ifstr} ist auf - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if} erklärt. + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifstr} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if} erklärt. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyUnknownKeyValue}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{FamilyElseValues} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{FamilyElseValues}% In\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} früheren Versionen von -\Package{scrbase} konnte man über die Anweisung \Macro{FamilyElseValues} weitere -erlaubte Werte für die Bearbeitung durch \Macro{FamilyUnknownValue} in der Form +\Package{scrbase} konnte man über die Anweisung \Macro{FamilyElseValues} +weitere erlaubte Werte für die Bearbeitung durch +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} in der Form \begin{flushleft}\vskip\dp\strutbox\begin{tabular}{l} \texttt{,} `\PName{Wert}'\texttt{,} `\PName{Wert}' \dots \end{tabular}\vskip\dp\strutbox\end{flushleft} ablegen, die dann ebenfalls in einer Fehlermeldung mit ausgegeben wurden. Seit -Version~3.12 gibt \Macro{FamilyUnknownValue} keine Fehlermeldungen mehr -aus, sondern setzt nur noch \Macro{FamilyKeyState} entsprechend. Damit ist die -Verwendung von \Macro{FamilyElseValue} ebenfalls überholt. Ihre Verwendung -wird jedoch erkannt und führt dann zu einer Aufforderung, den Code -entsprechend anzupassen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{FamilyElseValues}% +Version~3.12 gibt \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue} keine +Fehlermeldungen mehr aus, sondern setzt nur noch +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.FamilyKeyState} entsprechend. Damit ist die Verwendung +von \Macro{FamilyElseValue} ebenfalls überholt. Ihre Verwendung wird jedoch +erkannt und führt dann zu einer Aufforderung, den Code entsprechend +anzupassen.% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Verzweigungen} @@ -1028,7 +1002,7 @@ entsprechend anzupassen.% Das Paket \Package{scrbase} stellt eine ganze Reihe von Verzweigungsanweisungen zur Verfügung. Dabei wird nicht auf die \TeX-Syntax von Verzweigungen, wie beispielsweise -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \iftrue ... \else @@ -1047,22 +1021,20 @@ zwangsläufig zu einem Problem aufgrund der unterschiedlichen Syntax führen. Deshalb definiert \Package{scrbase} einige dieser Anweisungen zunächst als interne Anweisungen mit dem Präfix \Macro{scr@}. Für den Anwender werden dann gleichbedeutende Anweisungen ohne diesen Präfix bereit -gestellt. Letzteres kann jedoch mit Hilfe der Option \Option{internalonly} -(siehe \autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit}, -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.option.internalonly}) verhindert werden. +gestellt. Letzteres kann jedoch mit Hilfe der Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.internalonly} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrbase.loadit}, +\DescPageRef{scrbase.option.internalonly}) verhindert werden. Paket- und Klassenautoren sollten wie \KOMAScript{} selbst auch die internen Namen verwenden. Zur Vollständigkeit sind aber auch die Anwenderanweisungen angegeben. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax}% + \Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifundefinedorrelax}% Diese Anweisung funktioniert prinzipiell wie \Macro{@ifundefined} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern (siehe \cite{latex:source2e}). Es wird also der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, wenn \PName{Name} der @@ -1072,275 +1044,266 @@ allerdings \Macro{\PName{Name}} nicht als \Macro{relax} definiert, wenn es zuvor undefiniert war. Unter Verwendung von \eTeX{} wird in diesem Fall noch nicht einmal Hash-Speicher belegt. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifundefinedorrelax}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifpdftex}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifpdftex}% + \Macro{scr@ifpdftex} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifpdftex} \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdftex}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpdftex}% Wird mit pdf\TeX{} gearbeitet, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Dabei ist es unerheblich, ob tatsächlich eine PDF-Datei ausgegeben werden soll, oder nicht. Diese Unterscheidung ist nur sehr selten wirklich von Nutzen. In der Regel sollte man eher auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpdftex} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdftex} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifVTeX}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifVTeX}% + \Macro{scr@ifVTeX} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifVTeX} \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifVTeX}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifVTeX}% Wird mit V\TeX{} gearbeitet, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Diese Unterscheidung ist nur sehr selten wirklich von Nutzen. In der Regel sollte man eher auf die gewünschte Anweisung testen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifVTeX} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifVTeX} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifpdfoutput}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifpdfoutput}% + \Macro{scr@ifpdfoutput} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifpdfoutput} \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdfoutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpdfoutput}% Wird eine PDF-Datei erzeugt, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Dabei ist es unerheblich, ob die PDF-Datei mit Hilfe von pdf\TeX{} oder mit Hilfe von V\TeX{} erzeugt wird. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpdfoutput} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpdfoutput} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifpsoutput}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifpsoutput}% + \Macro{scr@ifpsoutput} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifpsoutput} \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpsoutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifpsoutput}% Wird eine PostScript-Datei erzeugt, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. V\TeX{} kann PostScript direkt erzeugen, was hier auch erkannt wird. Wird hingegen kein V\TeX{} verwendet, ist aber ein Schalter \Macro{if@dvips} definiert, so wird die Entscheidung darüber getroffen. \KOMAScript{} stellt \Macro{if@dvips} in \Package{typearea} bereit. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifpsoutput} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifpsoutput} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scr@ifdvioutput}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifdvioutput}% + \Macro{scr@ifdvioutput} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifdvioutput} \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifdvioutput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifdvioutput}% Wird eine DVI-Datei erzeugt, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es wird immer dann davon ausgegangen, dass eine DVI-Datei erzeugt wird, wenn keine direkte Ausgabe einer PDF- oder Postscript-Datei erkannt werden kann. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifdvioutput} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@ifdvioutput} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnotundefined}\Parameter{Name}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnotundefined}% Unter Verwendung von \eTeX{} wird hier tatsächlich getestet, ob die Anweisung mit dem angegebenen \PName{Name} noch undefiniert ist. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnotundefined} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifstr}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifstr}% Die beiden Argumente \PName{Zeichenfolge} werden expandiert und dann verglichen. Sind sie dabei gleich, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifstr} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifstrstart}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{ifstrstart}}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifstrstart}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifstrstart}% Die\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} beiden Argumente \PName{Zeichenfolge} werden expandiert und dann verglichen. Beginnt die erste Zeichenfolge von Leerzeichen abgesehen mit der zweiten Zeichenfolge, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifstrstart}% +% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisdimen}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimen}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einem \Macro{dimen}, also einem \TeX-Längenregister, resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimen}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisdimension}\Parameter{Code}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimension}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert einer Länge entspricht, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass derzeit unbekannte Einheiten zu einer Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimension}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifisdimexpr}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifisdimexpr}\Parameter{Code} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimexpr}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einer \Macro{dimexpr}, also einem \TeX-Längenausdruck resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisdimexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisskip}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisskip}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einem \Macro{skip}, also einem \TeX-Abstand, resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisskip}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisglue}\Parameter{Code}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisglue}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert eines Abstandes entspricht, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass derzeit unbekannte Einheiten zu einer Fehlermeldung führen. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisglue}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisglueexpr}\Parameter{Code}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisglueexpr}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einer \Macro{glueexpr}, also einem \TeX-Abstandsausdruck resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisglueexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifiscount}\Parameter{Code}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifiscount}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einem \Macro{count}, also einem \TeX-Zähler, resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Für einen Test auf einen \LaTeX-Zähler -siehe \Macro{ifiscounter}. Von dieser +siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifiscounter}. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifiscount}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisinteger}\Parameter{Code}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisinteger}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in etwas resultiert, das syntaktisch dem Wert eines Zählers entspricht, also eine negative oder positive ganze Zahl ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisinteger}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifisnumexpr}\Parameter{Code}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifisnumexpr}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} die Expansion von \PName{Code} in einer \Macro{numexpr}, also einem \TeX-Zahlenausdruck resultiert, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Es ist zu beachten,\textnote{Achtung!} dass fehlerhafte Ausdrücke zu Fehlermeldungen führen! Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifisnumexpr}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifiscounter}\Parameter{Zähler}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifiscounter}% Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrbase}} \PName{Zähler} ein definierter \LaTeX-Zähler ist, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Die Anweisung ist nicht voll expandierbar. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifiscounter}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnumber}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnumber}% Hier werden keine Zahlen verglichen. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird vielmehr ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der \PName{Zeichenfolge} nur aus Ziffern besteht. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} verwendet. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnumber} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifdimen}\Parameter{Zeichenfolge}% \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifdimen}% Hier werden keine Längen verglichen. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird vielmehr ausgeführt, wenn die einfache Expansion der \PName{Zeichenfolge} eine gültige Länge mit einer gültigen Längeneinheit ist. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} verwendet. Von dieser Anweisung gibt es keine interne Variante. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifdimen} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@atdocument}\ \PName{Dann-Teil} - \Macro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Teil} \Macro{fi} + \Macro{if@atdocument}\ \PName{Dann-Teil}\ % + \textMacro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Teil} \textMacro{fi} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@atdocument}% Diese Verzweigung existiert ganz bewusst nur als interne Anweisung. Dabei entspricht \Macro{if@atdocument} in der Dokumentpräambel \Macro{iffalse}, nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} entspricht \Macro{if@atdocument} hingegen @@ -1350,11 +1313,12 @@ verhalten sollen als innerhalb des Dokuments. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass es sich bei dieser Anweisung um eine Verzweigung in \TeX-Syntax und nicht in \LaTeX-Syntax handelt! % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@atdocument} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition sprachabhängiger Bezeichner} \seclabel{languageSupport} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Sprachdefinition} Normalerweise muss man zur Definition oder zur Änderung sprachabhängiger @@ -1382,27 +1346,23 @@ selbst einige zusätzliche Anweisungen, die ihn von vielen dieser Überlegungen entlasten. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{defcaptionname}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{providecaptionname}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{newcaptionname}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{renewcaptionname}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{defcaptionname*}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{providecaptionname*}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{newcaptionname*}% - \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ + \Macro{defcaptionname} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{providecaptionname} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{newcaptionname} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{renewcaptionname} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{defcaptionname*} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{providecaptionname*} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{newcaptionname*} + \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} \Macro{renewcaptionname*}% \Parameter{Sprachliste}\Parameter{Begriff}\Parameter{Inhalt} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defcaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providecaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newcaptionname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewcaptionname}% Mit Hilfe dieser vier Anweisungen und ihrer Sternvarianten ist es möglich, einem \PName{Begriff} in Abhängigkeit der Sprache einen \PName{Inhalt} zuzuweisen. Mehrere Sprachen können durch Komma voneinander getrennt als @@ -1445,7 +1405,7 @@ Sprache nicht definiert zu sein. \KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet \Macro{providecaptionname} um die Begriffe aus \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.languages}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname} zu definieren. +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname} zu definieren. \begin{Example} Möchten Sie »Abb.« statt »Abbildung« in den Abbildungsunterschriften, so @@ -1600,12 +1560,9 @@ finden. }% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewcaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newcaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providecaptionname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defcaptionname}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Sprachdefinition}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Identifikation von \KOMAScript} @@ -1620,20 +1577,18 @@ Pakete und Klassen verwendet werden kann, so ist es dennoch ein \begin{Declaration} \Macro{KOMAScript} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScript}% Diese Anweisung setzt schlicht die Wortmarke »\KOMAScript« in serifenloser Schrift und mit leichter Sperrung des in Versalien gesetzten Teils. \Macro{KOMAScript} wird übrigens bei Bedarf von allen \KOMAScript-Klassen und "~Paketen definiert. Die Definition erfolgt mit \Macro{DeclareRobustCommand}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScript} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{KOMAScriptVersion} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScriptVersion}% Bei \KOMAScript{} ist in dieser Anweisung die Hauptversion von \KOMAScript{} in der Form »\PName{Datum} \PName{Version} \texttt{KOMA-Script}« abgelegt. Diese Hauptversion ist für alle \KOMAScript-Klassen und alle @@ -1642,7 +1597,7 @@ sie auch nach dem Laden von \Package{scrbase} abgefragt werden. Diese Anleitung wurde beispielsweise mit der \KOMAScript-Version »\KOMAScriptVersion« erstellt. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAScriptVersion}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Erweiterungen des \LaTeX-Kerns} @@ -1654,11 +1609,9 @@ oder eigentlich nahe liegen, vermissen. Einige wenige solcher Anweisungen für Klassen- und Paketautoren stellt \Package{scrbase} zur Verfügung. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ClassInfoNoLine}\Parameter{Klassenname}\Parameter{Information}\\ - \Macro{PackageInfoNoLine}\Parameter{Paketname}\Parameter{Information}% + \Macro{ClassInfoNoLine}\Parameter{Klassenname}\Parameter{Information} + \Macro{PackageInfoNoLine}\Parameter{Paketname}\Parameter{Information} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PackageInfoNoLine}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ClassInfoNoLine}% Der \LaTeX-Kern bietet dem Klassen- und Paketautor zwar Anweisungen wie \Macro{PackageInfo} und \Macro{ClassInfo}, um Informationen mit aktueller Zeilennummer in die Log-Datei zu schreiben. Er bietet neben @@ -1670,13 +1623,12 @@ Zeilennummer auszugeben. Die nahe liegenden Anweisungen ohne Zeilennummer in die Log-Datei zu schreiben, fehlen jedoch. Diese werden von \Package{scrbase} bereit gestellt. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ClassInfoNoLine}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PackageInfoNoLine} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{l@addto@macro}\Parameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Erweiterung}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{l@addto@macro}% Der \LaTeX-Kern bietet mit \Macro{g@addto@macro} eine interne Anweisung, um die Definition eines Makro \PName{Anweisung} global um den Code \PName{Erweiterung} zu erweitern. Das funktioniert in dieser Form nur für @@ -1684,11 +1636,12 @@ Makros ohne Argumente. Dennoch könnte man diese Anweisung in einigen Fällen auch in einer Form benötigen, die lokal zur aktuellen Gruppe arbeitet. Diese wird mit \Macro{l@addto@macro} von \Package{scrbase} bereit gestellt. Eine Alternative stellt hier die Verwendung des Pakets -\Package{etoolbox}\IndexPackage{etoolbox} dar, das eine ganze Reihe solcher +\Package{etoolbox}\IndexPackage{etoolbox} oder +\Package{xpatch}\IndexPackage{xpatch} dar, das eine ganze Reihe solcher Anweisungen für unterschiedliche Zwecke bietet (siehe -\cite{package:etoolbox}). +\cite{package:etoolbox} beziehungsweise \cite{package:xpatch}). % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{l@addto@macro} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Erweiterungen der mathematischen Fähigkeiten von \eTeX} @@ -1702,8 +1655,8 @@ unterstützt. Bei der Division wird korrekt gerundet. Manchmal sind weitere Operationen nützlich. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{Dividend}\Parameter{Divisor}\\ - \Macro{XmodY}\Parameter{Dividend}\Parameter{Divisor}% + \Macro{XdivY}\Parameter{Dividend}\Parameter{Divisor} + \Macro{XmodY}\Parameter{Dividend}\Parameter{Divisor} \end{Declaration}% \BeginIndex{Cmd}{XdivY}% \BeginIndex{Cmd}{XmodY}% @@ -1724,10 +1677,9 @@ Der Wert kann jeweils zur Zuweisung an einen Zähler oder direkt innerhalb eines Ausdrucks mit \Macro{numexpr} verwendet werden. Zur Ausgabe als arabische Zahl ist \Macro{the} voran zu stellen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{XmodY}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{XdivY}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrbase}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput @@ -1748,3 +1700,4 @@ arabische Zahl ist \Macro{the} voran zu stellen.% % LocalWords: AtEndOfFamilyOptions FamilyBoolKey FamilySetBool Schaltername % LocalWords: FamilyLengthKey FamilySetLength FamilyLengthMacroKey % LocalWords: FamilySetLengthMacro Wertübergabe Gliederungsbefehlen + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex index 2123ff47c17..0b7d34490f6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle-experts.tex}% - [$Date: 2016-06-14 09:45:01 +0200 (Tue, 14 Jun 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl for experts)] @@ -60,6 +60,11 @@ Paket \Package{scrextend}} \labelbase{maincls-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl} +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook} +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt} +\BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend} In diesem Kapitel finden Sie zusätzliche Informationen zu den \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} und einigen Anweisungen, die auch in \Package{scrextend} vorhanden sind. @@ -104,11 +109,9 @@ gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst. % \seclabel{identification} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{KOMAClassName}\\ + \Macro{KOMAClassName} \Macro{ClassName} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{KOMAClassName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ClassName}% In \Macro{KOMAClassName} ist der Name der aktuell verwendeten \KOMAScript-Klasse abgelegt. Will man also wissen, ob eine oder welche \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet wird, so kann man einfach auf diese Anweisung @@ -116,22 +119,22 @@ testen. Demgegenüber gibt \Macro{ClassName} Auskunft, welche Standardklasse durch diese \KOMAScript-Klasse ersetzt wird. Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei in diesem Zusammenhang darauf hingewiesen, dass -demgegenüber die Existenz von \Macro{KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} nicht -als Indiz für die Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse dienen kann. Zum einen -definieren alle \KOMAScript-Pakete diese Anweisung, zum anderen können auch -andere Pakete es für sinnvoll erachten, das \KOMAScript-Piktogramm unter -diesem Namen zu definieren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ClassName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{KOMAClassName}% +demgegenüber die Existenz von +\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript}\IndexCmd{KOMAScript} nicht als Indiz für die +Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse dienen kann. Zum einen definieren alle +\KOMAScript-Pakete diese Anweisung, zum anderen können auch andere Pakete es +für sinnvoll erachten, das \KOMAScript-Piktogramm unter diesem Namen zu +definieren.% +\EndIndexGroup + % \subsection{Einträge ins Inhaltsverzeichnis} % \seclabel{toc} \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addtocentrydefault}\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}% - \Parameter{Überschrift} + \Parameter{Überschrift} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtocentrydefault}% Die\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \KOMAScript-Klassen verwenden \Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline}% @@ -154,7 +157,8 @@ soll. In der Voreinstellung wird dies mit \begin{quote}\small\raggedright \Macro{addcontentsline}\PParameter{toc}\Parameter{Ebene}% \PParameter{\%\\ - \quad\Macro{protect}\Macro{nonumberline} \PName{Überschrift}\%\\ + \quad\Macro{protect}\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline} + \PName{Überschrift}\%\\ } \end{quote} erreicht. Ist das Argument jedoch nicht leer, so soll ein nummerierter Eintrag @@ -163,7 +167,7 @@ der Voreinstellung verwendet \KOMAScript{} \begin{quote}\small\raggedright \Macro{addcontentsline}\PParameter{toc}\Parameter{Ebene}% \PParameter{\%\\ - \quad\Macro{protect}\Macro{numberline}\Parameter{Nummer}% + \quad\Macro{protect}\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.numberline}\Parameter{Nummer}% \PName{Überschrift}\%\\ } \end{quote} @@ -172,7 +176,7 @@ zur Erzeugung dieses Eintrags. Paketautoren und Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen können diese Anweisung umdefinieren, um Einfluss auf die Einträge zu nehmen. So\textnote{Beispiel} wäre beispielsweise denkbar mit -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \renewcommand{\addtocentrydefault}[3]{% \ifstr{#3}{}{% }{% @@ -189,50 +193,37 @@ erst gar nicht vorgenommen werden. Eine solche Änderung ist in der Praxis jedoch nicht notwendig, da die Unterdrückung leerer Einträge bereits auf andere Weise in die \KOMAScript-Klassen eingebaut ist. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärung zu den Gliederungsbefehlen in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.part}.% +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.part}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtocentrydefault} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ + \Macro{addparttocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addchaptertocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addsubsubsectiontocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} \Macro{addsubparagraphtocentry}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Überschrift} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addparttocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchaptertocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubsubsectiontocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addparagraphtocentry}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsubparagraphtocentry}% Auch \ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} die oben dokumentierte Anweisung -\Macro{addtocentrydefault}\IndexCmd{addtocentrydefault}% -\important{\Macro{addtocentrydefault}} wird von den \KOMAScript-Klassen nur -dann direkt aufgerufen, wenn für die angegebene \PName{Ebene} keine direkte -Anweisung definiert oder diese +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}\IndexCmd{addtocentrydefault}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault}} wird von den +\KOMAScript-Klassen nur dann direkt aufgerufen, wenn für die angegebene +\PName{Ebene} keine direkte Anweisung definiert oder diese \Macro{relax}\IndexCmd{relax}\important{\Macro{relax}} ist. In der Voreinstellung sind die angegebenen Anweisungen alle so definiert, dass sie -ihre \PName{Ebene} und die Argumente direkt an \Macro{addtocentrydefault} -weiter geben.% +ihre \PName{Ebene} und die Argumente direkt an +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtocentrydefault} weiter geben.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubparagraphtocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubsubsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addparagraphtocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsubsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsectiontocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchaptertocentry}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addparttocentry}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{raggedchapterentry} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapterentry}% Bei früheren\ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Version von \KOMAScript{} gab es die Möglichkeit das \Macro{raggedchapterentry} als \Macro{raggedright} zu definieren, um den Text der Kapiteleinträge ins @@ -259,20 +250,18 @@ Ergebnissen. Empfohlen wird, eventuell gewünschten Flattersatz für Verzeichniseinträge stattdessen über die genannte Eigenschaft des Verzeichniseintragsstils \PValue{tocline} zu wählen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapterentry} +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Schrifteinstellungen} % \seclabel{fonts} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}\\ + \Macro{@fontsizefilebase} \Macro{changefontsizes}\Parameter{Schriftgröße} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@fontsizefilebase}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{changefontsizes}% Der\iffree{ in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}}{} auf -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.option.fontsize} für die +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.option.fontsize} für die Schriftgrößendateien angegebene Präfix \File{scrsize}, ist lediglich die Voreinstellung für das interne Makro \Macro{@fontsizefilebase}\IndexCmd{@fontsizefilebase}, die verwendet wird, @@ -283,26 +272,25 @@ verwenden. Ebenso\textnote{Tipp!} können Autoren von Wrapper-Klassen die \emph{fallback}-Lösung dadurch ändern oder abschalten, dass sie das Macro \Macro{changefontsizes}\important{\Macro{changefontsizes}}, das als Argument die gewünschte \PName{Schriftgröße} erwartet, umdefinieren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{changefontsizes}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@fontsizefilebase}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newkomafont}\OParameter{Warnung}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Voreinstellung}\\ + \Macro{newkomafont}\OParameter{Warnung}\Parameter{Element} + \Parameter{Voreinstellung} \Macro{aliaskomafont}\Parameter{Aliasname}\Parameter{Element} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomafont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{aliaskomafont}% Experten können mit \Macro{newkomafont} eine \PName{Voreinstellung} für die Schrift eines \PName{Element}s definieren. Anschließend kann diese -Voreinstellung mit den Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Natürlich wird -diese Schrift damit noch lange nicht verwendet. Der Experte muss selbst Sorge -dafür tragen, dass er an den entsprechenden Stellen die Anweisung -\Macro{usekomafont}\important{\Macro{usekomafont}}\IndexCmd{usekomafont} -(siehe \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) für dieses Element in -seinen Definitionen einbaut. +Voreinstellung mit den Anweisungen \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Natürlich wird diese +Schrift damit noch lange nicht verwendet. Der Experte muss selbst Sorge dafür +tragen, dass er an den entsprechenden Stellen die Anweisung +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}}\IndexCmd{usekomafont} (siehe +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont}) für dieses Element in seinen +Definitionen einbaut. Das optionale Argument \PName{Warnung} definiert eine Warnmeldung. Diese wird bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen per \Macro{ClassWarning} oder beim Paket @@ -322,22 +310,19 @@ Benutzerfreundlichkeit erhöht werden, indem einem Element all die Namen als Alias zugeordnet werden, die unterschiedliche Benutzer intuitiv wählen würden. \KOMAScript{} selbst macht von dieser Möglichkeit reichen Gebrauch. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{aliaskomafont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomafont}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}\Parameter{Makro}\\ + \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist}\Parameter{Makro} \Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist}\Parameter{Makro} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontrelaxlist}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontgobblelist}% Wie bereits in \autoref{part:forAuthors} der Anleitung erklärt, dürfen in den Schrifteinstellungen der Elemente nur Befehle zur Wahl der Größe, Familie, Codierung, Strichstärke, Form und Farbe enthalten sein. Dabei erfolgt schon die Änderung der Farbe bei \LaTeX{} nicht transparent und kann damit -unerwünschte Effekte hervorrufen, wenn man \Macro{usekomafont} an ungünstiger -Stelle verwendet. +unerwünschte Effekte hervorrufen, wenn man \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont} +an ungünstiger Stelle verwendet. Nun neigen Anwender dazu, in die Schrifteinstellungen auch ganz andere, teilweise sehr kritische Dinge zu packen, beispielsweise ein @@ -351,24 +336,25 @@ jedoch nicht. In Einzelfällen war es innerhalb von \KOMAScript{} notwendig, die Umschaltung wirklich auf Schrifteinstellungen zu beschränken. Dies erfolgt dann -beispielsweise mit \Macro{usefontofkomafont}\IndexCmd{usefontofkomafont}% +beispielsweise mit +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}\IndexCmd{usefontofkomafont}% \IndexCmd{usesizeofkomafont}\IndexCmd{useencodingofkomafont}% \IndexCmd{usefamilyofkomafont}\IndexCmd{useseriesofkomafont}% -\IndexCmd{useshapeofkomafont} statt \Macro{usekomafont} (siehe +\IndexCmd{useshapeofkomafont} statt \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usekomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}). +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont}). -Die Anweisung \Macro{usefontofkomafont} und ihre Geschwister haben allerdings -ihre Grenzen. Daher darf die vermeintliche Schrifteinstellung eines Elements -keinesfalls ein voll expandierbares Argument erwarten. Genau das ist aber -beispielsweise bei \Macro{MakeUppercase} der +Die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} und ihre Geschwister +haben allerdings ihre Grenzen. Daher darf die vermeintliche Schrifteinstellung +eines Elements keinesfalls ein voll expandierbares Argument erwarten. Genau +das ist aber beispielsweise bei \Macro{MakeUppercase} der Fall. Daher\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} verwaltet \KOMAScript{} eine interne Liste von Makros, -die innerhalb von \Macro{usefontofkomafont} und ihren Geschwistern zu -\Macro{relax} werden sollen. In der Voreinstellung sind das unter anderem: -\Macro{normalcolor}, \Macro{MakeUppercase} und -\Macro{MakeLowercase}. Weitere Anweisungen können mit -\Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist} einzeln hinzugefügt werden. + \Class{scrartcl}} verwaltet \KOMAScript{} eine interne Liste von Makros, die +innerhalb von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} und ihren Geschwistern +zu \Macro{relax} werden sollen. In der Voreinstellung sind das unter anderem: +\Macro{normalcolor}, \Macro{MakeUppercase} und \Macro{MakeLowercase}. Weitere +Anweisungen können mit \Macro{addtokomafontrelaxlist} einzeln hinzugefügt +werden. Es ist zu beachten, dass das angegebene \PName{Makro} wirklich stur auf \Macro{relax} gesetzt wird. Irgendwelche Argumente innerhalb der @@ -382,47 +368,46 @@ hinzuzufügen! Soll\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} hingegen ein \PName{Makro} innerhalb -\Macro{usefontofkomafont} und ihren Geschwistern einschließen eines einzelnen -Arguments des Makros ignoriert werden, so ist stattdessen +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont} und ihren Geschwistern einschließen +eines einzelnen Arguments des Makros ignoriert werden, so ist stattdessen \Macro{addtokomafontgobblelist} zu verwenden. Ein Beispiel dafür ist die Anweisung \Macro{color}, die einschließlich des Namens der Farbe ignoriert werden muss und deshalb bereits in der Voreinstellung Teil dieser Liste ist.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontgobblelist}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtokomafontrelaxlist}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{IfExistskomafont}\Parameter{Element}\Parameter{Dann-Code}% - \Parameter{Sonst-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfExistskomafont}% Da\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrlttr2}} die Schrift mancher Elemente erst ab bestimmten Versionen von \KOMAScript{} geändert werden können, ist es manchmal sinnvoll, vorher testen zu können, ob ein \PName{Element} mit dieser Möglichkeit überhaupt existiert. Die Anweisung führt den \PName{Dann-Code} -genau dann aus, wenn das \PName{Element} über \Macro{newkomafont} oder -\Macro{aliaskomafont} definiert wurde und daher auch mit \Macro{setkomafont} -oder \Macro{addtokomafont} geändert und mit den \Macro{use\dots - komafont}-Anweisungen abgefragt werden kann. Anderenfalls wird der -\PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfExistskomafont}% +genau dann aus, wenn das \PName{Element} über +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.newkomafont} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.aliaskomafont} definiert wurde und daher auch mit +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} +geändert und mit den \Macro{use\dots komafont}-Anweisungen abgefragt werden +kann. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Code} ausgeführt.% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Absatzmarkierung} % \seclabel{parskip} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setparsizes}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand}%^^A - \Parameter{Endzeilenleerraum} + \Macro{setparsizes}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand} + \Parameter{Endzeilenleerraum} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setparsizes}% \KOMAScript{} bietet mit dieser Anweisung die Möglichkeit, sowohl den Absatzeinzug, als auch den Absatzabstand und den Freiraum am Ende der letzten Zeile des Absatzes einzustellen. Diese Anweisung ist immer dann zu verwenden, -wenn die Änderungen auch bei Einstellung \OptionValue{parskip}{relative} -beachtet werden sollen. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{Beispiel} selbst verwendet sie -beispielsweise in der Form -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +wenn die Änderungen auch bei Einstellung +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{parskip}{relative} beachtet werden +sollen. \KOMAScript{}\textnote{Beispiel} selbst verwendet sie beispielsweise +in der Form +\begin{lstcode} \setparsizes{0pt}{0pt}{0pt plus 1fil} \end{lstcode} um sowohl den Einzug als auch den Abstand abzuschalten und am Ende des @@ -431,7 +416,7 @@ wenn ein Absatz nur aus einer Box besteht, die ohne Abstand nach oben oder unten gesetzt werden soll und die gesamte Spaltenbreite einnimmt. Soll demgegenüber die Box nur die gesamte Breite einnehmen, jedoch mit der aktuellen Einstellung bezüglich des Absatzabstandes gesetzt werden, so ist -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \setlength{\parfillskip}{0pt plus 1fil} \end{lstcode} vorzuziehen. @@ -445,11 +430,12 @@ Werte nicht zwischenzeitlich geändert wurden. Dies sollte ein Grund mehr sein, nicht an \KOMAScript{} vorbei die Einstellungen zu ändern. Die Neuberechnung wird bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer früheren Version (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}, Option -\Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValue{version}{3.17}}) +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.version}, Option +\DescRef{maincls.option.version}% +\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{version}{3.17}}) deaktiviert.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setparsizes}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Zähler} % \seclabel{counter} @@ -460,15 +446,11 @@ deaktiviert.% % \seclabel{sections} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name}\\ + \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name} + \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name} + \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name} \Macro{ProvideSectionCommand}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommand}% Mit\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} diesen Anweisungen kann ein neuer Gliederungsbefehl \Macro{\PName{Name}} definiert oder der vorhandene Gliederungsbefehl @@ -485,15 +467,15 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \Class{scrreprt}}Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} einer Kapitelüberschrift. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für - \Macro{chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und indirekt für - \Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} verwendet. Neue Überschriften in diesem + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter} und indirekt für + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} verwendet. Neue Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration des vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys}, \autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarechapterstyle.keys} zur - Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \Macro{addchap} wird ebenso wie - die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \Macro{chapter} umkonfiguriert und + Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap} wird ebenso wie + die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon verändert werden. Es ist zu beachten, dass dieser Stil von \Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} nicht bereitgestellt wird. @@ -501,7 +483,7 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil \PValue{part}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{part}} einer Teileüberschrift. Dieser Stil wird in der Voreinstellung für - \Macro{part}\IndexCmd{part} und indirekt für + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part} und indirekt für \Macro{addpart}\IndexCmd{addpart} verwendet. Neue Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden, haben dann aber nicht automatisch auch eine \Macro{add\dots}-Variante. Für die Konfiguration des vorhandenen oder neuer @@ -509,15 +491,15 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys}, \autopageref{tab:maincls-experts.declarepartstyle.keys} zur Verfügung. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \Macro{addpart} wird ebenso wie - die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \Macro{part} umkonfiguriert und + die Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon verändert werden. \item[\PValue{section}:] Stil\textnote{Gliederungsstil \PValue{section}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{section}} einer Abschnittsüberschrift. Dieser Stil wird derzeit für - \Macro{section}\IndexCmd{section}, \Macro{subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}, - \Macro{subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}, - \Macro{paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph} und - \Macro{subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph} verwendet. Neue Überschriften in + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}\IndexCmd{section}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection}, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}\IndexCmd{paragraph} und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}\IndexCmd{subparagraph} verwendet. Neue Überschriften in diesem Stil können definiert werden. Für die Konfigurierung der vorhandenen oder neuer Überschriften stehen zusätzlich die Eigenschaften aus \autoref{tab:maincls-experts.declaresectionstyle.keys}, @@ -528,12 +510,12 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: gilt auch, falls ein Befehl, der bisher kein Gliederungsbefehl war, mit \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} zu einem Gliederungsbefehl umdefiniert wird. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisung \Macro{addsec} wird ebenso wie die - Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \Macro{section} umkonfiguriert und kann + Sternformen automatisch zusammen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} umkonfiguriert und kann nicht unabhängig davon verändert werden. Bei der Definition eines Gliederungsbefehls in diesem Stil wird gleichzeitig ein gleichnamiges - Element angelegt, dessen Schrifteinstellung mit \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann, falls ein + Element angelegt, dessen Schrifteinstellung mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann, falls ein solches Element noch nicht existiert. \end{labeling} @@ -546,97 +528,68 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{llX} \toprule \PName{Schlüssel} & \PName{Wert} & Bedeutung \\ - \midrule - \PValue{counterwithin} & \PName{Zählername} & - Der zur Gliederungsebene gehörende - Zähler soll vom als Wert angegebenen - Zähler abhängig sein. Wird - \PName{Zählername} über - \Macro{stepcounter} oder - \Macro{refstepsounter} erhöht, so - wird der zur Gliederungsebene - gehörende Zähler auf 0 - zurückgesetzt. Darüber hinaus wird - \Macro{the\PName{Zählername}} - gefolgt von einem Punkt in - der Ausgabe des zur Gliederungsebene - gehörenden Zählers vorangestellt.\\ + \midrule \PValue{counterwithin} & \PName{Zählername} & Der zur + Gliederungsebene gehörende Zähler soll vom als Wert angegebenen Zähler + abhängig sein. Wird \PName{Zählername} über \Macro{stepcounter} oder + \Macro{refstepsounter} erhöht, so wird der zur Gliederungsebene gehörende + Zähler auf 0 zurückgesetzt. Darüber hinaus wird + \Macro{the\PName{Zählername}} gefolgt von einem Punkt in der Ausgabe des + zur Gliederungsebene + gehörenden Zählers vorangestellt.\\ \ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartl}}% - \PValue{counterwithout} & \PName{Zählername} & - Hebt eine früher vorgenommene - \PValue{counterwithin}-Einstellung - auf und ist daher nur bei Änderung - vorhandener Gliederungsbefehle - sinnvoll.\\ - \PValue{expandtopt} & \PName{Schalter} & - Ist dieser Schalter aktiv, so werden - alle in den \PName{Einstellungen} - nachfolgend angegebenen Werte - für Längen vollständig expandiert, - ausgewertet und in \texttt{pt} - umgerechnet gespeichert. - Ist der Schalter nicht aktiv, so - werden alle nachfolgend angegebenen - Werte für Längen nur testweise - expandiert und ausgewertet aber - lediglich expandiert gespeichert. - Es werden die Werte für einfache - Schalter aus - \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, - \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} - verstanden.\\ - \PValue{level} & \PName{Ganzzahl} & Nummerischer Wert der - Gliederungsebene (siehe Zähler - \Counter{secnumdepth}, - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth}); - der Wert sollte eindeutig sein. \\ - \PValue{style} & \PName{Name} & Legt den Stil der Überschriften - fest.\\ + \PValue{counterwithout} & \PName{Zählername} & Hebt eine früher + vorgenommene \PValue{counterwithin}-Einstellung auf und ist daher nur bei + Änderung vorhandener Gliederungsbefehle + sinnvoll.\\ + \PValue{expandtopt} & \PName{Schalter} & Ist dieser Schalter aktiv, so + werden alle in den \PName{Einstellungen} nachfolgend angegebenen Werte für + Längen vollständig expandiert, ausgewertet und in \texttt{pt} umgerechnet + gespeichert. Ist der Schalter nicht aktiv, so werden alle nachfolgend + angegebenen Werte für Längen nur testweise expandiert und ausgewertet aber + lediglich expandiert gespeichert. Es werden die Werte für einfache + Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, + \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} + verstanden.\\ + \PValue{level} & \PName{Ganzzahl} & Nummerischer Wert der Gliederungsebene + (siehe Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}, + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.secnumdepth}); + der Wert sollte eindeutig sein. \\ + \PValue{style} & \PName{Name} & Legt den Stil der Überschriften + fest.\\ \ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% - \PValue{tocstyle} & \PName{Name} & Legt den Stil der - Verzeichniseinträge fest. Es können - alle bisher definierten - Verzeichniseintragsstile (siehe - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) - verwendet werden. Ein leerer - \PName{Name} verhindert die - Definition des Befehls für - Verzeichniseinträge.\\ + \PValue{tocstyle} & \PName{Name} & Legt den Stil der Verzeichniseinträge + fest. Es können alle bisher definierten Verzeichniseintragsstile (siehe + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) verwendet werden. Ein leerer \PName{Name} + verhindert die Definition des Befehls für + Verzeichniseinträge.\\ \ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% - \PValue{toc\PName{Option}} & \PName{Wert} - & Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom - via \Option{tocstyle} gewählten - Verzeichniseintragsstil. Siehe dazu - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab - \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. - Für die von \Package{tocbasic} - vordefinierten - Verzeichniseintragsstile finden sich - die als \PName{Option} verwendbaren - Attribute in - \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, - ab - \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.\\ + \PValue{toc\PName{Option}} & \PName{Wert} & Weitere Optionen in + Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocstyle} gewählten + Verzeichniseintragsstil. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab + \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. Für die von \Package{tocbasic} + vordefinierten Verzeichniseintragsstile finden sich die als \PName{Option} + verwendbaren Attribute in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, ab + \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.\\ % \PValue{tocindent} & \PName{Länge} & Der horizontale Einzug des zum % Gliederungsbefehls gehörenden % Eintrags ins Inhaltsverzeichnis, % falls ein solcher abhängig von - % \Counter{tocdepth} (siehe + % \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} (siehe % \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - % \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}) + % \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}) % erzeugt wird.\\ % \PValue{toclevel} & \PName{Ganzzahl} & % Die Ebene des zum Gliederungsbefehl % gehörenden Eintrags ins % Inhaltsverzeichnis, falls diese von % \PValue{level} abweichen soll - % (siehe auch \Counter{tocdepth} in + % (siehe auch \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} in % \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, - % \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}). \\ + % \DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). \\ % \PValue{tocnumwidth} & \PName{Länge}& Die Breite, die für die % Gliederungsnummer im zum % Gliederungsbefehl gehörenden Eintrag @@ -675,14 +628,16 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \PValue{font} & \PName{Schrifteinstellung} & Die Fonteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element - \FontElement{disposition} bei der - Ausgabe der Überschrift verwendet - werden sollen. Hier sind alle - Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch über - \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} für das - Element des Gliederungsbefehls - erlaubt sind.\\ + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + bei der Ausgabe der Überschrift + verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind + alle Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch + über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + für das Element des + Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\ \PValue{indent} & \PName{Länge} & Einzug vom linken Rand vor der Ausgabe der Nummer und des Textes der Überschrift.\\ @@ -710,18 +665,25 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten in diesem Fall, dass der Absatz nach der Überschrift ohne horizontalen - Einzug gesetzt werden soll.\\ + Einzug gesetzt werden soll. Bei + Einstellungen der Klassen-Option + \DescRef{maincls.option.version} auf + einen kleineren Wert als 3.22 gibt + es auch mit positiven Werten keinen + Einzug.\\ \PValue{font} & \PName{Schrifteinstellung} & Die Fonteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element - \FontElement{disposition} bei der - Ausgabe der Überschrift verwendet - werden sollen. Hier sind alle - Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch über - \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} für das - Element des Gliederungsbefehls - erlaubt sind.\\ + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + bei der Ausgabe der Überschrift + verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind + alle Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch + über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + für das Element des + Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PName{Länge} & Der vertikale Abstand zwischen Präfixzeile und Text der Überschrift, falls eine Präfixzeile @@ -738,15 +700,17 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \PValue{prefixfont} & \PName{Schrifteinstellung} & Die Fonteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element - \FontElement{disposition} und dem - Element des Gliederungsbefehls bei - der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der - Überschrift verwendet werden - sollen. Hier sind alle - Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch über - \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} für das - Element der Präfixzeile des + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + und dem Element des + Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe + einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift + verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind + alle Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch + über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + für das Element der Präfixzeile des Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\ \bottomrule \end{tabularx} @@ -765,24 +729,20 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \PValue{afterskip} & \PName{Länge} & Der Betrag gibt den vertikalen Abstand nach der Überschrift an.\\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PName{Länge} & Der Betrag gibt den vertikalen - Abstand vor der Überschrift an. Ist - der Wert negativ, so wird also - trotzdem ein positiver Abstand - eingefügt. Negative Werte bedeuten - in diesem Fall, dass der Absatz nach - der Überschrift ohne horizontalen - Einzug gesetzt werden soll.\\ + Abstand vor der Überschrift an.\\ \PValue{font} & \PName{Schrifteinstellung} & Die Fonteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element - \FontElement{disposition} bei der - Ausgabe der Überschrift verwendet - werden sollen. Hier sind alle - Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch über - \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} für das - Element des Gliederungsbefehls - erlaubt sind.\\ + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + bei der Ausgabe der Überschrift + verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind + alle Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch + über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + für das Element des + Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PName{Länge} & %\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and % \Class{scrreprt}}% Der vertikale Abstand zwischen @@ -808,15 +768,17 @@ folgenden Stile zur Verfügung: \PValue{prefixfont} & \PName{Schrifteinstellung} & Die Fonteinstellungen, die zusätzlich zum Element - \FontElement{disposition} und dem - Element des Gliederungsbefehls bei - der Ausgabe einer Präfixzeile in der - Überschrift verwendet werden - sollen. Hier sind alle - Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch über - \Macro{setkomafont} und - \Macro{addtokomafont} für das - Element der Präfixzeile des + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.disposition} + und dem Element des + Gliederungsbefehls bei der Ausgabe + einer Präfixzeile in der Überschrift + verwendet werden sollen. Hier sind + alle Einstellungen erlaubt, die auch + über + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addtokomafont} + für das Element der Präfixzeile des Gliederungsbefehls erlaubt sind.\\ \bottomrule \end{tabularx} @@ -881,9 +843,9 @@ der Verzeichniseinträge siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab Seite \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}. \begin{Example} - Aus unerfindlichen Gründen sollen die Überschriften von \Macro{paragraph} + Aus unerfindlichen Gründen sollen die Überschriften von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} nicht mehr als Spitzmarken, sondern als Überschriften ähnlich - \Macro{subsubsection} umdefiniert werden. Dabei soll über der Überschrift + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection} umdefiniert werden. Dabei soll über der Überschrift ein kleiner Abstand von 10\,pt und unter der Überschrift kein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Das wäre bereits mit \begin{lstcode} @@ -901,10 +863,10 @@ der Verzeichniseinträge siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab Seite Überschrift in der Form einer Spitzmarke. Der kleinste positive Wert ist 1\,sp. - In der Regel ist es für den vertikalen Ausgleich (siehe \Macro{flushbottom}, - \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom}) - besser, wenn man die Abstände mit etwas Spielraum, dem sogenannten Leim, - versieht: + In der Regel ist es für den vertikalen Ausgleich (siehe + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}, \autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}, + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}) besser, wenn man die Abstände + mit etwas Spielraum, dem sogenannten Leim, versieht: \begin{lstcode} \RedeclareSectionCommand[% beforeskip=-10pt plus -2pt minus -1pt,% @@ -920,11 +882,11 @@ der Verzeichniseinträge siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab Seite Dass im Beispiel tatsächlich nur die Schlüssel \PValue{beforeskip} und \PValue{afterskip} verwendet werden mussten, liegt daran, dass seit -\KOMAScript{} v3.15 \Macro{paragraph} intern bereits mit +\KOMAScript{} v3.15 \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} intern bereits mit \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert wird und daher die übrigen Einstellungen unverändert übernommen werden können. Die Originaldefinition von -\Macro{paragraph} entspricht bei \Class{scrartcl}: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} entspricht bei \Class{scrartcl}: +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareSectionCommand[% level=4, indent=0pt, @@ -939,15 +901,16 @@ Einstellungen unverändert übernommen werden können. Die Originaldefinition von Bei \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrbook} werden teilweise abweichende Werte verwendet. -Für \Macro{chapter} sind einige Einstellungen für die Überschriften von Option -\Option{headings} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}) abhängig. Diese abhängigen -Einstellungen sind in \autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} zu finden. Eine -Übersicht über alle Voreinstellungen bietet -\autoref{tab:maincls.section.defaults}. Es ist zu beachten, dass dabei -\PValue{1ex} und \Length{baselineskip} von der voreingestellten Größe der -Überschrift beziehungsweise des Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags abhängig -sind. Weitere Voreinstellungen\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and +Für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} sind einige Einstellungen für die +Überschriften von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}) +abhängig. Diese abhängigen Einstellungen sind in +\autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} zu finden. Eine Übersicht über alle +Voreinstellungen bietet \autoref{tab:maincls.section.defaults}. Es ist zu +beachten, dass dabei \PValue{1ex} und \Length{baselineskip} von der +voreingestellten Größe der Überschrift beziehungsweise des +Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags abhängig sind. Weitere +Voreinstellungen\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die Stile der Verzeichniseinträge sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu entnehmen. @@ -955,10 +918,10 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \begin{table} \centering \caption{Voreinstellungen für die Kapitelüberschriften von \Class{scrbook} - und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option \Option{headings}} + und \Class{scrreprt} in Abhängigkeit von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings}} \label{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \begin{tabular}{ll} - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValue{headings}{big}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{big}:}\\ \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule @@ -966,10 +929,10 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab & \PValue{1.725\Length{baselineskip} plus .115\Length{baselineskip} minus .192\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{3.3\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-3.3\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{huge} \\ \bottomrule\\ - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValue{headings}{normal}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{normal}:}\\ \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule @@ -977,10 +940,10 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab & \PValue{1.5\Length{baselineskip} plus .1\Length{baselineskip} minus .167\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{3\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-3\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ \bottomrule\\ - \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValue{headings}{small}:}\\ + \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\bfseries Mit \OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{small}:}\\ \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule @@ -988,7 +951,7 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab & \PValue{1.35\Length{baselineskip} plus .09\Length{baselineskip} minus .15\Length{baselineskip}} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} - & \PValue{2.8\Length{baselineskip}+\Length{parskip}} \\ + & \PValue{-2.8\Length{baselineskip}-\Length{parskip}} \\ \PValue{font} & \Macro{Large} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} @@ -1008,19 +971,20 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \raggedleft\dots\\ \endfoot \endlastfoot - \Macro{part}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{0pt plus 1fil} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{0pt plus 1fil + \Length{baselineskip}} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{part}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.part}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PValue{20pt} \\ \PValue{level} & -1 \\ - \PValue{prefixfont} & siehe Element \FontElement{partnumber}, + \PValue{prefixfont} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.partnumber}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{tocindent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1030,19 +994,20 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{chapter}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.chapter.skips} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{chapter}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.chapter}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{innerskip} & \PValue{0pt} \\ \PValue{level} & 0 \\ - \PValue{prefixfont} & siehe Element \FontElement{chapterprefix}, + \PValue{prefixfont} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.chapterprefix}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{tocindent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1052,14 +1017,14 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{section}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{2.3ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.5ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{section}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.section}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1071,14 +1036,15 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subsection}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{1.5ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{subsection}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subsection}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1090,14 +1056,15 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subsubsection}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsubsection}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{1.5ex plus .2ex} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{-3.25ex plus -1ex minus -.2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{subsubsection}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subsubsection}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1109,14 +1076,15 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{paragraph}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{-1em} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{paragraph}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.paragraph}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \PValue{0pt} \\ @@ -1128,14 +1096,15 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \bottomrule \end{tabularx} \\ \addlinespace[\normalbaselineskip] - \Macro{subparagraph}: \\* + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}: \\* \begin{tabularx}{\linewidth}{ll} \toprule Einstellung & voreingestellter Wert \\ \midrule\nopagebreak \PValue{afterskip} & \PValue{-1em} \\ \PValue{beforeskip} & \PValue{3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex} \\ - \PValue{font} & siehe Element \FontElement{subparagraph}, + \PValue{font} & siehe Element + \DescRef{maincls.fontelement.subparagraph}, \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} \\ \PValue{indent} & \Macro{scr@parindent} \\ @@ -1149,26 +1118,19 @@ sind \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} ab \end{longtable} %end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommand}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{Einstellungen}% - \Parameter{Namensliste}\\ + \Parameter{Namensliste} \Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommands}\OParameter{Einstellungen}% - \Parameter{Namensliste}\\ + \Parameter{Namensliste} \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommands}\OParameter{Einstellungen}% - \Parameter{Namensliste}\\ + \Parameter{Namensliste} \Macro{ProvideSectionCommands}\OParameter{Einstellungen}% \Parameter{Namensliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommands}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommands}% Mit\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} diesen Anweisungen können gleich eine ganze Reihe von Gliederungsbefehlen definiert oder geändert werden. Dabei ist @@ -1192,42 +1154,32 @@ Werte von \PValue{level} und \PValue{toclevel} um den Wert von \PValue{increaselevel} erhöht. Wurde die Einstellung \PValue{increaselevel} ohne Wertzuweisung verwendet, so wird der Wert 1 angenommen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewSectionCommands}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionCommands}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}\\ - \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip}\\ - \Macro{chapterheadendvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadstartvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadmidvskip}\\ - \Macro{partheadendvskip}\\ + \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} + \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} + \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} + \Macro{partheadstartvskip} + \Macro{partheadmidvskip} + \Macro{partheadendvskip} \Macro{partheademptypage} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadstartvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadsmidvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadendvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadstartvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadmidvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheadendvskip}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partheademptypage}% -Diese\important[i]{\Macro{chapter}\\ - \Macro{part}\\ - \Macro{addchap}\\ +Diese\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}\\ \Macro{addpart}} Anweisungen werden innerhalb der Definition der -Überschriften \Macro{chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter}, \Macro{part}, -\Macro{addchap}, \Macro{addpart} und deren Sternvarianten verwendet. Dabei ist +Überschriften \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}\IndexCmd{chapter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap}, \Macro{addpart} und deren Sternvarianten verwendet. Dabei ist \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, vor der Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand einzufügen. Entsprechend ist \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} eine Anweisung, die dafür vorgesehen ist, nach der Kapitelüberschrift einen vertikalen Abstand einzufügen. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Kapitelüberschriften mit eigener Nummernzeile (siehe Option -\Option{chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}) wird zwischen der +\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}) wird zwischen der Nummernzeile und der eigentlichen Überschrift außerdem \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} ausgeführt. @@ -1245,8 +1197,8 @@ gegebenenfalls für die leere Seite nach der Überschrift verwendet. Die Voreinstellungen für diese sieben Anweisungen sind seit \KOMAScript~3.15\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} von der Einstellung von Option \Option{headings} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}) + \Class{scrartcl}} von der Einstellung von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.headings}) unabhängig. Die Original-Definitionen für die Kapitelüberschriften ab \KOMAScript~3.17\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} entsprechen:\IndexLength{@tempskipa} @@ -1256,28 +1208,32 @@ unabhängig. Die Original-Definitionen für die Kapitelüberschriften ab \newcommand*{\chapterheadendvskip}{\vskip\@tempskipa} \end{lstcode} Diese werden auch bei jeder Verwendung von Option -\OptionValue{headings}{big}\IndexOption{headings}, -\OptionValue{headings}{normal} oder \OptionValue{headings}{small} reaktiviert. - -Die Anweisung \Macro{chapter} setzt die interne Länge \Length{@tempskipa} vor -Aufruf von \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} automatisch auf den Wert, der sich -aus der -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} -\PValue{beforeskip} ergibt. Entsprechendes geschieht vor dem Aufruf von -\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} mit dem Wert, der sich aus der -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung \PValue{afterskip} ergibt, und vor -dem Aufruf von \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} mit dem Wert, der sich aus -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung \PValue{innerskip} ergibt. Werden -\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}, \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} oder +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{big}\IndexOption{headings}, +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{normal} oder +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{headings}{small} reaktiviert. + +Die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} setzt die interne Länge +\Length{@tempskipa} vor Aufruf von \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} automatisch +auf den Wert, der sich aus der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung% +\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} \PValue{beforeskip} ergibt. Entsprechendes +geschieht vor dem Aufruf von \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} mit dem Wert, der +sich aus der \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung +\PValue{afterskip} ergibt, und vor dem Aufruf von \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} +mit dem Wert, der sich aus +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}-Einstellung \PValue{innerskip} +ergibt. Werden \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip}, \Macro{chapterheadmidvskip} oder \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} umdefiniert und sollen die Abstände weiterhin -beispielsweise mit \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} konfigurierbar sein, so -sollte man in der neuen Definition ebenfalls \Length{@tempskipa} verwenden. - -Da die Voreinstellungen für die Abstände von \Macro{part} nicht von Option -\Option{headings} abhängen, werden auch die zugehörigen Anweisungen von dieser -Option nicht neu definiert. Ihre\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Original-Definitionen entsprechen bei -\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}: +beispielsweise mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} +konfigurierbar sein, so sollte man in der neuen Definition ebenfalls +\Length{@tempskipa} verwenden. + +Da die Voreinstellungen für die Abstände von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} nicht +von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.headings} abhängen, werden auch die +zugehörigen Anweisungen von dieser Option nicht neu +definiert. Ihre\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and + \Class{scrartcl}} Original-Definitionen entsprechen bei \Class{scrbook} und +\Class{scrreprt}: \begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\partheadstartvskip}{% \null\vskip-\baselineskip\vskip\@tempskipa @@ -1303,43 +1259,39 @@ und bei \Class{scrartcl}: } \end{lstcode} Auch hier wird \Length{@tempskipa}\IndexLength{@tempskipa} vor der Verwendung -der Befehle innerhalb von \Macro{part} entsprechend der Einstellungen von -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} gesetzt. - -Da\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} die Abstände über, innerhalb und unter den Überschriften -wesentlich einfacher mit \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} eingestellt werden +der Befehle innerhalb von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} entsprechend der +Einstellungen von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}\IndexCmd{DeclareSectionCommand} +gesetzt. + +Da\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} +die Abstände über, innerhalb und unter den Überschriften wesentlich einfacher +mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} eingestellt werden können, wird nicht empfohlen zu diesem Zweck stattdessen die hier beschriebenen Anweisungen umzudefinieren. Sie sollten für tiefgreifendere -Änderungen reserviert bleiben, die nicht über \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} -zu erreichen sind. Auf\textnote{Beispiel!} \cite{homepage} findet sich dazu -es ein Beispiel, bei dem durch Umdefinierung von \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} -und \Macro{chapterheadendvskip} Linien über und unter der Kapitelüberschrift +Änderungen reserviert bleiben, die nicht über +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} zu erreichen sind. +Auf\textnote{Beispiel!} \cite{homepage} findet sich dazu es ein Beispiel, bei +dem durch Umdefinierung von \Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} und +\Macro{chapterheadendvskip} Linien über und unter der Kapitelüberschrift gesetzt werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheademptypage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadendvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadmidvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partheadstartvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadendvskip}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterheadstartvskip}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% - \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}\\ + \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} \Macro{chapterlinesformat}% \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterlinesformat}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} beiden Anweisungen werden von Überschriften des Stils \PValue{chapter}\textnote{Gliederungsstil \PValue{chapter}}\Index{Gliederung>Stil>~\PValue{chapter}} in Abhängigkeit -von Option \Option{chapterprefix}\IndexOption{chapterprefix}% -\textnote{\Option{chapterprefix}} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}) verwendet. Dabei gibt +von Option \DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}\IndexOption{chapterprefix}% +\textnote{\DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}) verwendet. Dabei gibt \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} die Ausgabe bei aktivierter Option vor, während \Macro{chapterlinesformat} die Ausgabe bei deaktivierter Option bestimmt. @@ -1352,7 +1304,7 @@ ein komplett leeres Argument, enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen. Vordefiniert sind die beiden Anweisungen mit: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{% \@hangfrom{#2}{#3}% } @@ -1390,10 +1342,11 @@ bisher eher spartanisch. Allerdings fällt Ihnen nach einiger Zeit auf, dass mit dieser Umdefinierung die Überschriften wieder im Blocksatz gesetzt werden. Das liegt daran, dass \Macro{parbox} sein Argument so setzt. Um dies zu korrigieren, fügen Sie die - Anweisung \Macro{raggedchapter} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter}), die automatisch bereits vor - \Macro{chapterlinesformat} und \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} - aufgerufen wird, in die Definitionen ein: + Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} (siehe + \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter}), + die automatisch bereits vor \Macro{chapterlinesformat} und + \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} aufgerufen wird, in die Definitionen + ein: \begin{lstcode} \makeatletter \renewcommand{\chapterlinesformat}[3]{% @@ -1431,9 +1384,9 @@ von \PName{Text} so, dass darin kein Seitenumbruch stattfinden darf. Gleichzeitig endet \PName{Text} immer mit einem internen Absatz, \Macro{@par}. -Die Anweisung \Macro{raggedchapter} ist übrigens nicht Bestandteil von -\PName{Text}, weil anderenfalls beispielsweise die Verwendung von -\Macro{MakeUppercase} innerhalb der Umdefinierung von +Die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedchapter} ist übrigens nicht +Bestandteil von \PName{Text}, weil anderenfalls beispielsweise die Verwendung +von \Macro{MakeUppercase} innerhalb der Umdefinierung von \Macro{chapterlinesformat} oder \Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat} erheblich erschwert wäre. Dennoch sei darauf hingewiesen, dass typografischen Regeln zufolge Versalsatz mit gängigen Fonts immer der Sperrung und des Ausgleichs @@ -1445,20 +1398,19 @@ erforderlich. Erst, wenn der Anwender mehrere Anweisungen im Stil \PValue{chapter} definiert und man innerhalb der Definition nach den Anweisungen unterscheiden will, kann dies über \PName{Ebene} erfolgen. Dabei ist \PName{Ebene} der vom Namen der Anweisung abgeleitete Name der -Gliederungsebene. Bei \Macro{chapter}, \Macro{chapter*}, \Macro{addchap} und -\Macro{addchap*} ist \PName{Ebene} daher einheitlich \PValue{chapter}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterlinesformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterlineswithprefixformat}% +Gliederungsebene. Bei \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter*}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addchap*} ist \PName{Ebene} daher einheitlich +\PValue{chapter}.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{sectionlinesformat}% - \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text}\\ + \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} \Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat}% \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Nummer}\Parameter{Text} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionlinesformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectioncatchphraseformat}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} beiden Anweisungen werden von Überschriften des Stils \PValue{section}\textnote{Gliederungsstil @@ -1480,7 +1432,7 @@ nummerierten Überschriften ist \PName{Nummer} ein komplett leeres Argument, enthält also auch keine Formatierungsanweisungen. Vordefiniert sind die beiden Anweisungen als: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand{\sectionlinesformat}[4]{% \@hangfrom{\hskip #2#3}{#4}% } @@ -1534,32 +1486,30 @@ Das erste Argument, \PName{Ebene}, wird von den Anweisungen in der Voreinstellung nicht verwendet. Wie das Beispiel zeigt, kann es aber sehr gut dazu verwendet werden, nach unterschiedlichen Gliederungsebenen im gemeinsamen Stil \PValue{section} zu unterscheiden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectioncatchphraseformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionlinesformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{Sternanweisung}\Parameter{Normalanweisung}\\ + \Macro{SecDef}\Parameter{Sternanweisung}\Parameter{Normalanweisung} \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Ebene}% - \Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand davor}\Parameter{Abstand danach}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scr@startsection}}\Parameter{Stilanweisungen}% - \OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ + \Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand davor}\Parameter{Abstand danach} + \Parameter{Stilanweisungen}% + \OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \labelsuffix[*]% \Macro{scr@startsection}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Ebene}% - \Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand davor}\Parameter{Abstand danach}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scr@startsection}}\Parameter{Stilanweisungen}% - \texttt{*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{Code}\\ + \Parameter{Einzug}\Parameter{Abstand davor} + \Parameter{Abstand danach} + \Parameter{Stilanweisungen}% + \nobreak\texttt{*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \labelsuffix + \Macro{At@startsection}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{Before@ssect}\Parameter{Code} \Macro{Before@sect}\Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{At@startsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Before@ssect}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Before@sect}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scr@startsection}% Wie\ChangedAt[2014/09]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} bei der Beschreibung zu den Gliederungsbefehlen ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter} erklärt, verfügt \KOMAScript{} +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} erklärt, verfügt \KOMAScript{} bezüglich des optionalen Arguments der Gliederungsbefehle über erweiterte Möglichkeiten. Um dies möglich zu machen, war es notwendig, einige Anweisungen des \LaTeX-Kerns zu ersetzen. Dazu gehören auch die Anweisungen @@ -1584,9 +1534,9 @@ könnte. \KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet intern \Macro{SecDef} und \Macro{scr@startsection} an Stelle von \Macro{secdef} und \Macro{@startsection} beispielsweise bei den Gliederungsbefehlen, die mit -\Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} definiert werden. Eine nachträgliche -Umdefinierung von \Macro{secdef} und \Macro{@startsection} hat daher keine -Auswirkungen auf diese Gliederungsbefehle. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} definiert werden. Eine +nachträgliche Umdefinierung von \Macro{secdef} und \Macro{@startsection} hat +daher keine Auswirkungen auf diese Gliederungsbefehle. Als Ersatz für die Umdefinierung der Anweisungen bietet \KOMAScript{} die Möglichkeit, zusätzlichen \PName{Code} in die Ausführung der @@ -1611,10 +1561,7 @@ Die Anweisungen \Macro{At@startsection}, \Macro{Before@sect}, \Macro{Before@ssect} sind als Anweisungen für Paketautoren entworfen und für diese zur Verwendung freigegeben.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scr@startsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Before@sect}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Before@ssect}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{At@startsection}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Anhang} % \seclabel{appendix} @@ -1622,33 +1569,33 @@ diese zur Verwendung freigegeben.% \begin{Declaration} \Macro{appendixmore} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{appendixmore}% Bei den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen gibt es innerhalb der Anweisung -\Macro{appendix}\IndexCmd{appendix}\important{\Macro{appendix}} eine +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix}% +\IndexCmd{appendix}\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix}} eine Besonderheit. Ist nämlich \Macro{appendixmore} definiert, so wird diese -Anweisung von \Macro{appendix} ebenfalls ausgeführt. Intern wird dies von den -{\KOMAScript}-Klassen \Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and +Anweisung von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.appendix} ebenfalls ausgeführt. Intern wird +dies von den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen \Class{scrbook}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} und \Class{scrreprt} für die Realisierung der Layoutoption -\Option{appendixprefix} genutzt (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix}). Dies\textnote{Achtung!} -sollten Sie unbedingt beachten, falls Sie selbst das Makro -\Macro{appendixmore} definieren oder umdefinieren wollen. Ist diese -Option verwendet, so erhalten Sie bei -\verb|\newcommand{\appendixmore}{|\dots\verb|}| eine Fehlermeldung. Dadurch -soll verhindert werden, dass Sie die Optionen außer Kraft setzen, ohne es zu -merken. +\DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix} genutzt (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}). Dies\textnote{Achtung!} sollten +Sie unbedingt beachten, falls Sie selbst das Makro \Macro{appendixmore} +definieren oder umdefinieren wollen. Ist diese Option verwendet, so erhalten +Sie bei \verb|\newcommand{\appendixmore}{|\dots\verb|}| eine Fehlermeldung. +Dadurch soll verhindert werden, dass Sie die Optionen außer Kraft setzen, ohne +es zu merken. \begin{Example} Sie wollen nicht, dass bei Verwendung der Klasse \Class{scrbook} oder \Class{scrreprt} im Hauptteil die Kapitel mit einer Präfixzeile versehen - werden (siehe Layoutoption \Option{chapterprefix} + werden (siehe Layoutoption \DescRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}). Damit die Konsistenz + \DescPageRef{maincls.option.chapterprefix}). Damit die Konsistenz gewahrt bleibt, wollen Sie auch nicht, dass eine solche Zeile im Anhang verwendet wird. Stattdessen soll in den Anhängen direkt vor dem Kapitelbuchstaben das Wort »Anhang« in der jeweiligen Sprache stehen. Dies soll auch für die Kolumnentitel gelten. Also verwenden Sie nicht die - Layoutoption \Option{appendixprefix}, sondern + Layoutoption \DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix}, sondern definieren in der Dokumentpräambel: \begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\appendixmore}{% @@ -1658,8 +1605,8 @@ merken. \appendixname~\thechapter\autodot\enskip}} \end{lstcode} Sollten Sie später dann doch noch entscheiden, dass Sie die Option - \Option{appendixprefix} verwenden wollen, so erhalten Sie aufgrund - der dann bereits definierten Anweisung \Macro{appendixmore} eine + \DescRef{maincls.option.appendixprefix} verwenden wollen, so erhalten Sie + aufgrund der dann bereits definierten Anweisung \Macro{appendixmore} eine Fehlermeldung. Damit wird verhindert, dass obige Definition unbemerkt die Einstellungen überschreibt, die Sie per Option getroffen haben. @@ -1677,28 +1624,23 @@ merken. Die Erklärungen zu den in diesem Beispiel umdefinierten Anweisungen finden Sie in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat} und - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}. + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chapterformat} und + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}. \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{appendixmore}% +\EndIndexGroup % \subsection{Literaturverzeichnis} % \seclabel{bibliography} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newbibstyle}\OParameter{Elternstil}\Parameter{Name}%^^A - \Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{newblock}\\ - \Macro{@openbib@code}\\ - \Macro{bib@beginhook}\\ + \Macro{newbibstyle}\OParameter{Elternstil}\Parameter{Name}% + \Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{newblock} + \Macro{@openbib@code} + \Macro{bib@beginhook} \Macro{bib@endhook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newbibstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newblock}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@openbib@code}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bib@beginhook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bib@endhook}% Schon die Standardklassen\textnote{Standardklassen} kennen zur Unterteilung der Einträge in das Literaturverzeichnis die Anweisung \Macro{newblock}. Was diese Anweisung genau macht, hängt dabei von den Klassenoptionen ab. Wird die @@ -1717,9 +1659,9 @@ umdefiniert. Stattdessen wird mit \Macro{newbibstyle} der Stil \PName{Anweisungen}, die dabei in der Implementierung angegeben wurden, beinhalten die gewünschten Umdefinierung von \Macro{@openbib@code} und von \Macro{newblock}. Wird nun mit Hilfe der Option -\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}% +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}% -\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}} dieser +\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{bibliography}{openstyle}} dieser Literaturverzeichnisstil gewählt, so werden die \PName{Anweisungen} unmittelbar ausgeführt, also \Macro{@openbib@code} und \Macro{newblock} umdefiniert. @@ -1730,12 +1672,12 @@ werden. Die Anweisung \Macro{bib@beginhook} wird unmittelbar nach der Überschrift und der Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses, aber noch vor der Liste mit den Literatureinträgen ausgeführt. Die Anweisung \Macro{bib@endhook} wird direkt nach dieser Liste am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses -ausgeführt. Im Falle eines mit \Macro{BreakBibliography} (siehe +ausgeführt. Im Falle eines mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.bibliography}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}) unterbrochenen +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography}) unterbrochenen Literaturverzeichnisses werden diese Anweisungen außerdem am Anfang und Ende -jedes Teil, also unmittelbar vor und nach \Macro{BreakBibliography} -ausgeführt. +jedes Teil, also unmittelbar vor und nach +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography} ausgeführt. Die Anweisungen \Macro{newblock}, \Macro{@openbib@code}, \Macro{bib@beginhook} und \Macro{bib@endhook} werden bei der Verwendung eines @@ -1749,23 +1691,24 @@ keinesfalls mit \Macro{newcommand}, sondern mit definiert werden sollten. Setzt der Anwender mit den Anweisungen -\Macro{AtEndBibliography}%\important[i]{\Macro{AtEndBibliography}\\ -% \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt blöder Weise nicht! +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}%\important[i]{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography}\\ +% \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}}% Passt blöder Weise nicht! \IndexCmd{AtEndBibliography} und -\Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} weitere -\PName{Anweisungen} für die Ausführung nach der Präambel und am Ende des -Literaturverzeichnisses, so werden die mit \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble} -festgelegten \PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Anfang des -Literaturverzeichnisses nach \Macro{bib@beginhook} und die mit -\Macro{AtEndBibliography} festgelegten \PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Ende -des Literaturverzeichnisses vor \Macro{bib@endhook} ausgeführt. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}% +\IndexCmd{AfterBibliographyPreamble} weitere \PName{Anweisungen} für die +Ausführung nach der Präambel und am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses, so +werden die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble} festgelegten +\PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Anfang des Literaturverzeichnisses nach +\Macro{bib@beginhook} und die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography} +festgelegten \PName{Anweisungen} einmalig am Ende des Literaturverzeichnisses +vor \Macro{bib@endhook} ausgeführt. Mit\textnote{Beispiel!} Hilfe des Pakets \Package{multicol}\IndexPackage{multicol}\important{\Package{multicol}} (siehe \cite{package:multicol}) könnte man beispielsweise einen Literaturstil für ein zweispaltiges Literaturverzeichnis definieren: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \newbibstyle{twocolumstyle}{% \renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}% \renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}% @@ -1774,26 +1717,23 @@ Soll es außerdem eine \emph{open}-Variante davon geben, kann man hier die Möglichkeiten der Vererbung verwenden und bei der Definition einen Elternstil mit angeben: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1ex] +\begin{lstcode} \newbibstyle{twocolumopenstyle}[openstyle]{% \renewcommand*{\bib@beginhook}{\begin{multicols}{2}}% \renewcommand*{\bib@endhook}{\end{multicols}}}% \end{lstcode} Die Auswahl eines dieser neuen Stile erfolgt dann einfach wieder über die -Option \Option{bibliography}. +Option \DescRef{maincls.option.bibliography}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bib@endhook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bib@beginhook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@openbib@code}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newblock}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newbibstyle}% - +\EndIndexGroup \section{Mehr oder weniger obsolete Optionen und Anweisungen} \seclabel{obsolete} \LoadNonFree{scrbookreportarticle-experts}{4} +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput @@ -1807,14 +1747,13 @@ Option \Option{bibliography}. % LocalWords: Sternvarianten Kapitelüberschrift Standardklassen Paketautoren % LocalWords: Klassenoptionen Gliederungsbefehlen Namensliste umzudefinieren - -% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags Abstandsanweisungen Sternformen -% LocalWords: Teilüberschriften Benutzerfreundlichkeit Absatzmarkierung -% LocalWords: umkonfiguriert Teileüberschrift Abschnittsüberschrift -% LocalWords: Absolutwert Gliederungsbefehls Präfixzeile Schrifteinstellung -% LocalWords: Zählername Spitzmarke Kolumnentitels Schrifteinstellungen -% LocalWords: Strichstärke expandierbar expandierbaren expandierbares -% LocalWords: spartanisch Kapitelstil Spitzmarken Formatierungsanweisungen -% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschriften Gliederungsebenen Verzeichniseinträge -% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintragsstile Gliederungsbefehl Verzeichniseintrag -% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Verzeichniseintragsstilen +% LocalWords: Inhaltsverzeichniseintrags Abstandsanweisungen Sternformen +% LocalWords: Teilüberschriften Benutzerfreundlichkeit Absatzmarkierung +% LocalWords: umkonfiguriert Teileüberschrift Abschnittsüberschrift +% LocalWords: Absolutwert Gliederungsbefehls Präfixzeile Schrifteinstellung +% LocalWords: Zählername Spitzmarke Kolumnentitels Schrifteinstellungen +% LocalWords: Strichstärke expandierbar expandierbaren expandierbares +% LocalWords: spartanisch Kapitelstil Spitzmarken Formatierungsanweisungen +% LocalWords: Kapitelüberschriften Gliederungsebenen Verzeichniseinträge +% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintragsstile Gliederungsbefehl Verzeichniseintrag +% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Verzeichniseintragsstilen diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex index 5cf5d29486e..7bbf260da33 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrbookreportarticle.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrbookreportarticle.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrbookreportarticle.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,11 +46,12 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrbookreportarticle.tex} - [$Date: 2016-05-08 10:45:54 +0200 (Sun, 08 May 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrbook, scrreprt, scrartcl)] \chapter{Die Hauptklassen \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt}, \Class{scrartcl}} \labelbase{maincls}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrbook}% \BeginIndex{Class}{scrreprt}% \BeginIndex{Class}{scrartcl}% @@ -116,22 +117,20 @@ Tabellen. % %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} %\iffree{}{\clearpage}% Umbruchkorrektur!!! -\LoadCommon{1} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} -\LoadCommon{2} % \section{Entwurfsmodus} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode} % \section{Entwurfsmodus} -\LoadCommon{3} % \section{Seitenauf"|teilung} +\LoadCommonFile{typearea} % \section{Seitenauf"|teilung} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{flushbottom}\\ + \Macro{flushbottom} \Macro{raggedbottom} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedbottom}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{flushbottom}% \begin{Explain} Insbesondere bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten ist es wünschenswert, wenn nicht nur alle ersten Zeilen eines Satzspiegels mit ihrer Grundlinie auf der @@ -151,18 +150,20 @@ Tabellen. Wird über die Option \Option{twoside}\IndexOption{twoside}\important{\Option{twoside}} (siehe -\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twoside}) +\autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \DescPageRef{typearea.option.twoside}) doppelseitiger oder über Option \Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn}\important{\Option{twocolumn}} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.twocolumn}) zweispaltiger Satz angefordert, -so wird der vertikale Ausgleich ebenfalls +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.twocolumn}) zweispaltiger Satz angefordert, so +wird der vertikale Ausgleich ebenfalls eingeschaltet. Das\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} gilt jedoch bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu einer -\KOMAScript-Version vor 3.17 (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}, Option -\Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValue{version}{3.17}}) -nicht, wenn die Option über \Macro{KOMAoption} oder \Macro{KOMAoptions} -geändert wird. +\KOMAScript-Version vor 3.17 (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}% +\IndexOption{version}\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{3.17}}) +nicht, wenn die Option über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} geändert wird. Man kann den vertikalen Ausgleich auch mit \Macro{flushbottom} jederzeit ab der aktuellen Seite explizit fordern. Umgekehrt ist es möglich, mit @@ -172,32 +173,22 @@ abzuschalten. Dies entspricht der Voreinstellung bei einseitigem Satz. {\KOMAScript} verwendet übrigens einen leicht modifizierten Verzicht auf den vertikalen Ausgleich. \iffree{}{Näheres dazu ist in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.footnoterule} zu erfahren.}% + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.footnoterule} zu erfahren.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{flushbottom}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedbottom}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Aufteilung=Auf\/teilung} +\EndIndexGroup -\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -\LoadCommon{4} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -Voreingestellt ist bei \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} -\OptionValue{fontsize}{11pt}.\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} -Demgegenüber ist übrigens bei den Standardklassen \Option{10pt} -voreingestellt. Dies ist bei einem Wechsel von den Standardklassen zu den -\KOMAScript-Klassen gegebenenfalls zu beachten.% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{Größe}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -\LoadCommon{5} % \section{Textauszeichnungen} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnungen} -\LoadCommon{14}% \section{Dokumenttitel} +\LoadCommonFile{titles}% \section{Dokumenttitel} \section{Zusammenfassung} \seclabel{abstract} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Zusammenfassung}% Insbesondere bei Artikeln, seltener bei Berichten findet man unmittelbar unter @@ -207,97 +198,98 @@ und links eingezogener Block. Im Vergleich dazu wird bei Verwendung von Titelseiten die Zusammenfassung eher als Kapitel oder Abschnitt gesetzt. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{abstract}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{abstract}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{abstract~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% -Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} den +Bei\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% +\OnlyAt{\Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} setzt die -\Environment{abstract}-Umgebung noch den zentrierten Titel »\abstractname« vor -die Zusammenfassung. Früher war dies durchaus üblich. Inzwischen sind wir -durch das Zeitunglesen darin geübt, einen entsprechend hervorgehobenen Text am -Anfang eines Artikels oder Berichts als Zusammenfassung zu erkennen. Dies gilt -umso mehr, wenn dieser Text noch vor dem Inhaltsverzeichnis steht. Zudem -verwundert es, wenn ausgerechnet diese Überschrift klein und zentriert -ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet mit der Option \Option{abstract} die Möglichkeit, -die Überschrift über der Zusammenfassung ein- oder auszuschalten. Als -\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus -\autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet -werden. Voreingestellt ist bei \KOMAScript{} \PValue{false}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung noch den zentrierten Titel +»\abstractname« vor die Zusammenfassung. Früher war dies durchaus +üblich. Inzwischen sind wir durch das Zeitunglesen darin geübt, einen +entsprechend hervorgehobenen Text am Anfang eines Artikels oder Berichts als +Zusammenfassung zu erkennen. Dies gilt umso mehr, wenn dieser Text noch vor +dem Inhaltsverzeichnis steht. Zudem verwundert es, wenn ausgerechnet diese +Überschrift klein und zentriert ist. {\KOMAScript} bietet mit der Option +\Option{abstract} die Möglichkeit, die Überschrift über der Zusammenfassung +ein- oder auszuschalten. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann einer der +Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, +\autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Voreingestellt ist bei +\KOMAScript{} \PValue{false}. Bei Büchern wird in der Regel eine andere Art der Zusammenfassung verwendet. Dort setzt man ein entsprechendes Kapitel an den Anfang oder Ende des Werks. Oft wird diese Zusammenfassung entweder mit der Einleitung oder einem weiteren Ausblick verknüpft. Daher gibt es bei \Class{scrbook} überhaupt -keine \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung. Bei\textnote{Tipp!} Berichten im -weiteren Sinne, etwa einer Studien- oder Diplomarbeit, ist ebenfalls eine -Zusammenfassung in dieser Form zu empfehlen.% +keine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung. Bei\textnote{Tipp!} +Berichten im weiteren Sinne, etwa einer Studien- oder Diplomarbeit, ist +ebenfalls eine Zusammenfassung in dieser Form zu empfehlen.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{abstract~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{abstract}}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{abstract} + \begin{Environment}{abstract}\end{Environment} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Env}{abstract}% \OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% Einige \LaTeX-Klassen bieten eine spezielle Umgebung für diese Zusammenfassung, die \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung. Diese wird unmittelbar -ausgegeben, ist also nicht Bestandteil der mit \Macro{maketitle} gesetzten -Titelei. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie unbedingt, dass es sich bei -\Environment{abstract} um eine Umgebung und nicht um eine Anweisung -handelt. Ob die Zusammenfassung mit einer Überschrift versehen wird oder -nicht, wird über die Option \Option{abstract} gesteuert (siehe oben). +ausgegeben, ist also nicht Bestandteil der mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.maketitle} gesetzten Titelei. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} +beachten Sie unbedingt, dass es sich bei \Environment{abstract} um eine +Umgebung und nicht um eine Anweisung handelt. Ob die Zusammenfassung mit einer +Überschrift versehen wird oder nicht, wird über die Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract} gesteuert (siehe oben). Bei Büchern ist die Zusammenfassung häufig Bestandteil der Einleitung oder eines gesonderten Kapitels am Ende des Dokuments. Daher gibt es bei \Class{scrbook} keine \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung. Bei Verwendung der Klasse \Class{scrreprt} ist es sicher eine Überlegung wert, ob man nicht -genauso verfahren sollte. Siehe hierzu in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} die -Anweisungen \Macro{chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*} und -\Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} oder \Macro{addchap*} -(\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addchap}). - -Wird ein Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf} (siehe Option \Option{titlepage}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.titlepage}) -verwendet, so wird die Zusammenfassung intern mit Hilfe einer +genauso verfahren sollte. Siehe hierzu in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure} +die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*}\IndexCmd{chapter*} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} +(\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}). + +Wird ein Titelkopf\Index{Titel>Kopf} (siehe Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage}, \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.titlepage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage}) verwendet, so wird die +Zusammenfassung intern mit Hilfe einer \Environment{quotation}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{quotation} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.quotation}) +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lists}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.quotation}) gesetzt. Dabei werden Absatzanfänge normalerweise mit Einzug gesetzt. Soll der erste Absatz nicht eingezogen werden, so kann dieser Einzug mit \Macro{noindent}\IndexCmd{noindent}\important{\Macro{noindent}} \iffree{unmittelbar nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{abstract}}{am Anfang der Umgebung} unterdrückt werden.% % -\EndIndex{Env}{abstract}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Zusammenfassung} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Inhaltsverzeichnis} \seclabel{toc} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Inhaltsverzeichnis} Auf die Titelei und eine eventuell vorhandene Zusammenfassung folgt normalerweise das Inhaltsverzeichnis. Häufig findet man nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis auch noch die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise von Tabellen und Abbildungen (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}). +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}). Es ist zu beachten, dass neben den in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten -Möglichkeiten auch noch die Anweisungen \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand}, -\Macro{DeclareNewSectionCommand}, \Macro{RedeclareSectionCommand} und -\Macro{ProvideSectionCommand} Auswirkungen auf das Inhaltsverzeichnis haben -können. Siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}. +Möglichkeiten auch noch die Anweisungen +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand} und +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand} Auswirkungen auf das +Inhaltsverzeichnis haben können. Siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{toc}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{toc}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{toc~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Neuerdings ist es fast schon üblich geworden Tabellen- und Abbildungsverzeichnis sowie das Literaturverzeichnis, seltener das Stichwortverzeichnis, ins Inhaltsverzeichnis aufzunehmen. Dies hat sicher auch @@ -330,32 +322,32 @@ nicht nummeriert. Eine\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Abweichung\important{\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}} von diesem Grundsatz wird von \KOMAScript{} trotz Bedenken des Autors mit -\OptionValue{toc}{index}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{indexnumbered}} ebenfalls -unterstützt. +\OptionValue{toc}{indexnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{indexnumbered}} +ebenfalls unterstützt. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak \label{desc:maincls.option.toc.bibliography}\nobreak Das Literaturverzeichnis stellt eine etwas andere Art von Verzeichnis dar. Hier wird nicht der Inhalt des vorliegenden Werks aufgelistet, sondern auf externe Inhalte -verwiesen. Mit\important{\begin{tabular}{@{}r@{}} +verwiesen. Mit\important{% + \begin{tabular}{@{}r@{}} \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\Option{toc=}}\\ ~\PValue{bibliographynumbered}\\ - \end{tabular}} -dieser Begründung könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis ein -eigenes Kapitel bzw. einen eigenen Abschnitt darstelle und somit eine Nummer -verdiene. Die Option -\OptionValue{toc}{bibliographynumbered}% -\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{bibliographynumbered}} -führt genau dazu, einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im -Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst bin allerdings der Meinung, dass bei dieser -Argumentation auch ein klassisches, kommentiertes Quellenverzeichnis ein -eigenes Kapitel wäre. Außerdem ist das Literaturverzeichnis letztlich nichts, -was man selbst geschrieben -hat. Deshalb\important{\OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}} erscheint mir -allenfalls ein nicht nummerierter Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis angemessen, -was mit der Einstellung -\OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{bibliography}} erreicht wird. + \end{tabular}% +} dieser Begründung könnte man argumentieren, dass das Literaturverzeichnis +ein eigenes Kapitel bzw. einen eigenen Abschnitt darstelle und somit eine +Nummer verdiene. Die Option \OptionValue{toc}{bibliographynumbered}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{bibliographynumbered}} führt genau dazu, +einschließlich des dann fälligen Eintrags im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Ich selbst +bin allerdings der Meinung, dass bei dieser Argumentation auch ein +klassisches, kommentiertes Quellenverzeichnis ein eigenes Kapitel +wäre. Außerdem ist das Literaturverzeichnis letztlich nichts, was man selbst +geschrieben hat. Deshalb\important{\OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}} erscheint +mir allenfalls ein nicht nummerierter Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis +angemessen, was mit der Einstellung +\OptionValue{toc}{bibliography}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{bibliography}} +erreicht wird. \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak \label{desc:maincls.option.toc.graduated}\nobreak @@ -431,7 +423,7 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit dem Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt.% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}}}% @@ -450,7 +442,7 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für das Inhaltsverzeichnis gelöscht. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit den Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt. Dies entspricht der Voreinstellung.% @@ -489,15 +481,13 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{sectionentrywithoutdots}}}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{toc~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{chapterentrydots}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{sectionentrydots}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{chapterentrydots}{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ + \OptionVName{sectionentrydots}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapterentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{sectionentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Diese\ChangedAt[2014/12]{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Optionen legen fest, ob im Inhaltsverzeichnis bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} für die @@ -510,85 +500,95 @@ Eintrags und der zugehörigen Seitenzahl verwendet werden soll. Als werden. Voreingestellt ist für beide Optionen \PValue{false}, wodurch statt einer punktierten Linie lediglich ein Abstand verwendet wird. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrydots}\LabelFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrydots}\LabelFontElement{sectionentrydots}% Wird die punktierte Linie verwendet, so kann deren Schrift über die Elemente -\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +\FontElement{chapterentrydots}% \important[i]{\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\\ \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} und -\FontElement{sectionentrydots}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber +\FontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber den Einstellungen für die Seitenzahlen in den Einträgen verändert werden -(siehe auch \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}, sowie -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). Die Voreinstellungen der +(siehe auch \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, sowie +\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente sind \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Pünktchen nur sauber untereinander stehen, wenn die Schrift aller Pünktchen identisch ist.% -\EndIndex{Option}{sectionentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapterentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tableofcontents} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tableofcontents}% Die Ausgabe des Inhaltsverzeichnisses wird mit \Macro{tableofcontents} erreicht. Um ein korrektes Inhaltsverzeichnis zu erhalten, sind nach jeder Änderung mindestens zwei \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. Mit der oben erläuterten -Option \Option{toc} kann der Umfang und die Form des Inhaltsverzeichnisses -beeinflusst werden. Nach einer Umschaltung der Option sind ebenfalls -mindestens zwei weitere \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. - -Der Eintrag für die oberste Gliederungsebene unter \Macro{part}, also -\Macro{chapter} bei \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und -\Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} beziehungsweise \Macro{section} bei -\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl}, sowie der Gliederungsebene \Macro{part} +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} kann der Umfang und die Form des +Inhaltsverzeichnisses beeinflusst werden. Nach einer Umschaltung der Option +sind ebenfalls mindestens zwei weitere \LaTeX-Läufe notwendig. + +Der Eintrag für die oberste Gliederungsebene unter \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, also +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} bei \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und +\Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section} bei +\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl}, sowie der Gliederungsebene \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} selbst wird nicht eingerückt. Gleichzeitig befinden sich zwischen dem Text der Gliederungsebene und der Seitenzahl keine Pünktchen. Die typografischen Gründe dafür liegen in der normalerweise anderen Schriftart sowie der erwünschten Hervorhebung. Dies\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} kann jedoch beispielsweise mit Option \Option{toc} -geändert werden (siehe \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc} und -\autoref{tab:maincls.toc} ab \autopageref{tab:maincls.toc}). Das -Inhaltsverzeichnis dieser Anleitung ist mit den Voreinstellungen gesetzt und -dient als Beispiel. - + \Class{scrartcl}} kann jedoch beispielsweise mit Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} geändert werden (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} und \autoref{tab:maincls.toc} ab +\autopageref{tab:maincls.toc}). Das Inhaltsverzeichnis dieser Anleitung ist +mit den Voreinstellungen gesetzt und dient als Beispiel. + +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partentry}\LabelFontElement{partentry}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentry}\LabelFontElement{chapterentry}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentry}\LabelFontElement{sectionentry}% Die\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}\important[i]{\FontElement{partentry}\\ \FontElement{chapterentry}\\ \FontElement{sectionentry}} Schrift der beiden oberen Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ist außerdem über die Elemente -\FontElement{partentry}\IndexFontElement{partentry} und für \Class{scrbook} +\FontElement{partentry} und für \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} über -\FontElement{chapterentry}\IndexFontElement{chapterentry} beziehungsweise -\FontElement{sectionentry}\IndexFontElement{sectionentry} für \Class{scrartcl} -einstellbar. Die Schrift der Seitenzahlen kann jeweils davon abweichend über -die Elemente -\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{partentrypagenumber}% +\FontElement{chapterentry} beziehungsweise +\FontElement{sectionentry} für \Class{scrartcl} +einstellbar. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{partentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{partentrypagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{sectionentrypagenumber}% +\LabelFontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}% +Die Schrift der Seitenzahlen kann jeweils davon abweichend über die Elemente +\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}% \important{\FontElement{partentrypagenumber}} und -\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}% +\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}% \important[i]{\FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber}\\ \FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}} (\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}) -beziehungsweise -\FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} -(\Class{scrartcl}) eingestellt werden (siehe auch -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}, -sowie \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). +beziehungsweise \FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} (\Class{scrartcl}) +eingestellt werden (siehe auch \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, sowie +\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Werden\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die Kapitel- beziehungsweise Abschnittseinträge ebenfalls punktierte Verbindungslinien zu den Seitenzahlen über Option -\Option{toc}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{chapterentrywithdots}}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{chapterentrywithdots}}% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{sectionentrywithdots}}, \Option{chapterentrydots}\IndexOption{chapterentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} oder \Option{sectionentrydots}\IndexOption{sectionentrydots~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} verwendet, so kann deren Schrift über die Elemente -\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}% -\important[i]{\FontElement{chapterentrydots}\\ - \FontElement{sectionentrydots}} und -\FontElement{sectionentrydots}\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber -den Einstellungen für die Seitenzahlen verändert werden. Die Voreinstellungen -der Elemente sind \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots}% +\IndexFontElement{chapterentrydots}% +\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapterentrydots}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrydots}} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.sectionentrydots}% +\IndexFontElement{sectionentrydots} gegenüber den Einstellungen für die +Seitenzahlen verändert werden. Die Voreinstellungen der Elemente sind +\autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. \begin{table} % \centering % \caption @@ -607,12 +607,12 @@ der Elemente sind \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. Element & Voreinstellung \\ \midrule \FontElement{partentry} & - \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\Macro{large} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\Macro{large} \\ \FontElement{partentrypagenumber} & \\ - \FontElement{chapterentry} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ + \FontElement{chapterentry} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition}\\ \FontElement{chapterentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ \FontElement{chapterentrypagenumber} & \\ - \FontElement{sectionentry} & \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ + \FontElement{sectionentry} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{disposition} \\ \FontElement{sectionentrydots} & \Macro{normalfont} \\ \FontElement{sectionentrypagenumber} & \\ \bottomrule @@ -620,35 +620,34 @@ der Elemente sind \autoref{tab:maincls.tocelements} zu entnehmen. \end{captionbeside} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tableofcontents}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Counter{tocdepth} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{tocdepth}% Normalerweise werden bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} die -Gliederungsebenen \Macro{part} bis \Macro{subsection} und bei der Klasse -\Class{scrartcl} die Ebenen \Macro{part} bis \Macro{subsubsection} in das +Gliederungsebenen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection} und bei der Klasse +\Class{scrartcl} die Ebenen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen. Dies wid über den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} -gesteuert. Dabei steht der Wert \(-\)1 für \Macro{part}, 0 für -\Macro{chapter} und so weiter. Durch Setzen oder Erhöhen oder Verringern des +gesteuert. Dabei steht der Wert \(-\)1 für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, 0 für +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und so weiter. Durch Setzen oder Erhöhen oder Verringern des Zählers kann bestimmt werden, bis zu welcher Gliederungsebene Einträge in das Inhaltsverzeichnis erfolgen sollen. Dies ist übrigens bei den Standardklassen ganz genauso. Bitten beachten Sie\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Werte für \Counter{tocdepth} -und \Counter{secnumdepth}\IndexCounter{secnumdepth} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth}) bei -\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für \Macro{part} nicht -übereinstimmen. Dies wurde aus Gründen der Kompatibilität von der +und \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}\IndexCounter{secnumdepth} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth}) bei +\Class{scrartcl}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrartcl}} für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} +nicht übereinstimmen. Dies wurde aus Gründen der Kompatibilität von der Standardklasse \Class{article} übernommen. Daher sollte die Anweisung -\Macro{partnumdepth}\IndexCmd{partnumdepth} nicht zum Setzen von -\Counter{tocdepth} verwendet werden.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partnumdepth}\IndexCmd{partnumdepth} nicht zum Setzen +von \Counter{tocdepth} verwendet werden.% \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie setzen einen Artikel, bei dem die Gliederungsebene - \Macro{subsubsection} verwendet wird. Gehen wir weiter davon aus, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} verwendet wird. Gehen wir weiter davon aus, dass Sie diese Gliederungsebene aber nicht im Inhaltsverzeichnis haben wollen. Dann könnte die Präambel Ihres Dokuments wie folgt aussehen: @@ -657,9 +656,9 @@ Standardklasse \Class{article} übernommen. Daher sollte die Anweisung \setcounter{tocdepth}{2} \end{lstcode} Sie setzen den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} also auf 2, weil Sie - wissen, dass dies der Wert für \Macro{subsection} ist. Wissen Sie + wissen, dass dies der Wert für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection} ist. Wissen Sie stattdessen nur, dass normalerweise bei \Class{scrartcl} Einträge in - das Inhaltsverzeichnis bis zur Ebene \Macro{subsubsection} erfolgen, + das Inhaltsverzeichnis bis zur Ebene \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection} erfolgen, können Sie auch einfach vom voreingestellten Wert des Zählers \Counter{tocdepth} eins abziehen: \begin{lstcode} @@ -685,19 +684,20 @@ Sie dann wie eben mit Hilfe von \Macro{addtocounter} in der Präambel Ihres Dokuments.% \fi % -\EndIndex{Counter}{tocdepth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Inhaltsverzeichnis} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{6} % \section{Absatzauszeichnung} +\LoadCommonFile{parmarkup}% \section{Absatzauszeichnung} -\LoadCommon{7} % \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} \section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen} \seclabel{pagestyle} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% Eine der allgemeinen Eigenschaften eines Dokuments ist der Seitenstil. Bei {\LaTeX} versteht man unter dem Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der @@ -705,11 +705,9 @@ Kopf- und Fußzeilen. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{headsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{footsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Mit diesen Optionen kann eingestellt werden, ob\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} unter Kolumnentiteln oder über dem Fuß eine horizontale Linie\Index{Trennlinie} @@ -732,42 +730,43 @@ Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt werden müsste. Stattdessen sollte der Kopf dann bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend betrachtet werden. Dies wird bei {\KOMAScript} dadurch erreicht, dass bei Verwendung der Klassenoption \Option{headsepline} automatisch die Paketoption -\Option{headinclude}\IndexOption{headinclude}\important{\Option{headinclude}} -mit gleichem Wert an das \Package{typearea}-Paket weitergereicht +\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}% +\IndexOption{headinclude}\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}} mit +gleichem Wert an das \Package{typearea}-Paket weitergereicht wird. Entsprechendes gilt bei \Option{footsepline} für -\Option{footinclude}\IndexOption{footinclude}\important{\Option{footinclude}}. +\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}% +\IndexOption{footinclude}\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}}. Im Gegensatz zu \Option{headsepline} wirkt sich die Option \Option{footsepline} auch beim Seitenstil \PValue{plain} aus, da -\PValue{plain} eine Seitenzahl im Fuß ausgibt. +\PValue{plain} eine Seitenzahl im Fuß ausgibt. Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels -aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option \Option{DIV} mit den -Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe \autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}) -in \autoref{cha:typearea}. +aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option +\DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder +\PValue{current} (siehe \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die +Anweisung \DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}) in \autoref{cha:typearea}. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% \important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für Linien im Kopf und Fuß.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}\\ + \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil} \Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{lokaler Seitenstil} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% Üblicherweise wird zwischen vier verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden: \begin{description} -\item[{\Pagestyle{empty}\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}}] ist der Seitenstil, - bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. Dies ist bei - {\KOMAScript} vollkommen identisch zu den Standardklassen.% -\item[{\Pagestyle{headings}\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}}] ist der - Seitenstil für lebende Kolumnentitel. Das sind Kolumnentitel, bei denen +\item[{\PageStyle{empty}% + \BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{empty}\LabelPageStyle{empty}}] ist der + Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile vollständig leer bleiben. Dies ist + bei {\KOMAScript} vollkommen identisch zu den Standardklassen.% +\item[{\PageStyle{headings}% + \BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{headings}\LabelPageStyle{headings}}] ist + der Seitenstil für lebende Kolumnentitel. Das sind Kolumnentitel, bei denen Überschriften automatisch\Index[indexmain]{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} in den Seitenkopf übernommen werden. Im Internet oder in Beschreibungen zu \LaTeX-Paketen findet man auch häufig die englische Bezeichnung @@ -794,23 +793,26 @@ bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für Linien im Kopf und Fuß.% werden (siehe hierzu beispielsweise \cite{JTschErfreulich}). All dies findet bei den Standardklassen keine Beachtung. - Darüber hinaus können bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den - Optionen \Option{headsepline} und \Option{footsepline} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headsepline}) Linien unter dem Kopf und - über dem Fuß gesetzt werden.% -\item[{\Pagestyle{myheadings}\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}}] entspricht - weitgehend dem Seitenstil \texttt{headings}, allerdings werden die - Kolumnentitel nicht automatisch\Index[indexmain]{Kolumnentitel>manuell} + Darüber hinaus können bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Optionen + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}) Linien unter dem Kopf und über + dem Fuß gesetzt werden.% +\item[{\PageStyle{myheadings}% + \BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{myheadings}\LabelPageStyle{myheadings}}] + entspricht weitgehend dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings}, allerdings werden + die Kolumnentitel nicht automatisch\Index[indexmain]{Kolumnentitel>manuell} erzeugt, sondern liegen in der Verantwortung des Anwenders. Er verwendet - dazu die Anweisungen \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und - \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright}\important[i]{% - \Macro{markboth}\\ - \Macro{markright}} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.markright}). -\item[{\Pagestyle{plain}\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}}]\looseness=-1 ist der - Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel} verwendet, - sondern nur eine Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl}\Index{Paginierung} ausgegeben - wird. Bei\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} den + dazu die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} + und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright}\important[i]{% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}). +\item[{\PageStyle{plain}% + \BeginIndex[indexmain]{Pagestyle}{plain}\LabelPageStyle{plain}}] + ist der Seitenstil, bei dem keinerlei Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel} + verwendet, sondern nur eine Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl}\Index{Paginierung} + ausgegeben wird. Bei\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} den Standardklassen wird diese Seitenzahl immer mittig im Fuß ausgegeben. Bei {\KOMAScript} erfolgt die Ausgabe im doppelseitigen\Index{doppelseitig} Layout stattdessen außen im Fuß. Der einseitige Seitenstil entspricht bei @@ -827,7 +829,7 @@ gesetzt werden. Verwendet\textnote{Tipp!} man \Macro{pagestyle} vor Anweisungen, die einen Seitenumbruch mit Einfügen einer Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite}\textnote{Vakatseite} herbeiführen können, und soll die Änderung erst ab der neuen Seite gelten, so ist ein -\Macro{cleardoublepage} davor nützlich. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} davor nützlich. % \iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur Üblicherweise verwendet man \Macro{pagestyle} aber nur einmal zu @@ -839,28 +841,30 @@ Für\important{\Macro{thispagestyle}} eine Änderung des Seitenstils nur der aktuellen Seite verwendet man stattdessen die Anweisung \Macro{thispagestyle}. Dies geschieht auch an einigen Stellen im Dokument automatisch. Beispielsweise wird bei allen Kapitelanfangsseiten implizit die -Anweisung \Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{\Macro{chapterpagestyle}} +Anweisung +\Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle}} ausgeführt. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass die Umschaltung zwischen automatischen und manuellen Kolumnentiteln bei Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} nicht mehr über den Seitenstil, sondern mit speziellen Anweisungen erfolgt. Die beiden -Seitenstile \Pagestyle{headings} und \Pagestyle{myheadings} sollten nicht +Seitenstile \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{myheadings} sollten nicht zusammen mit diesem Paket verwendet werden. +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% Um die Schriftarten von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenzahl zu ändern\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}, % -verwenden Sie die Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} -(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}). Für den Kopf und den Fuß ist -dabei das gleiche Element -\FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}% +verwenden Sie die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für den Kopf und den Fuß ist dabei +das gleiche Element \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\IndexFontElement{pageheadfoot}% \important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}} zuständig. Das Element für die Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder Fußes heißt \FontElement{pagenumber}\IndexFontElement{pagenumber}% @@ -869,7 +873,7 @@ bereitgestellte Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\IndexFontElement{pagefoot}% \important{\FontElement{pagefoot}} wird nur verwendet, wenn man mit dem Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) einen Seitenstil +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) einen Seitenstil definiert, bei dem auch der Fuß Text enthält. Die Voreinstellungen sind in \autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot} zu @@ -903,7 +907,7 @@ finden. \end{table} % \begin{Example} - \leavevmode\phantomsection\exlabel{pagestyle}% + \leavevmode\phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.pagestyle}% Angenommen, Sie wollen Kopf und Fuß einen Schriftgrad kleiner und kursiv setzen. Die Seitenzahl soll jedoch nicht kursiv, sondern fett gesetzt werden. Davon abgesehen, dass das Ergebnis grauenvoll aussehen wird, können @@ -922,22 +926,23 @@ finden. \FontElement{pagehead}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}} verwendet. Das gleiche Ergebnis erhalten Sie auch, wenn Sie stattdessen \FontElement{pageheadfoot} verwenden (siehe - \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, - \autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). + \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, + \autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). \end{Example} Es ist an dieser Stelle nicht möglich, Versalien für die automatischen Kolumnentitel zu erzwingen. Wenn Sie dies wünschen, müssen Sie entweder -\Macro{MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd{MakeMarkcase} entsprechend umdefinieren. Es wird -jedoch empfohlen, in solchen Fällen das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} zu -verwenden (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase}). +\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase}\IndexCmd{MakeMarkcase} entsprechend +umdefinieren. Es wird jedoch empfohlen, in solchen Fällen das Paket +\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} zu verwenden (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase}). Werden\textnote{Tipp!} eigene Seitenstile definiert, sind eventuell die -Befehle \Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pageheadfoot}, -\Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} sowie -\Macro{usekomafont}\PParameter{pagefoot} nützlich. Insbesondere falls Sie -dafür nicht das \KOMAScript-Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (siehe -\autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}), sondern beispielsweise das Paket +Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pageheadfoot}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pagenumber} sowie +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont}\PParameter{pagefoot} +nützlich. Insbesondere falls Sie dafür nicht das \KOMAScript-Paket +\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}), sondern +beispielsweise das Paket \Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr}\important{\Package{fancyhdr}} (siehe \cite{package:fancyhdr}) einsetzen, können Sie diese Befehle in Ihren Definitionen verwenden. Dadurch bleiben Sie zu \KOMAScript{} möglichst @@ -946,60 +951,47 @@ so bleiben Schriftänderungen wie in den vorangehenden Beispielen unbeachtet. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} sorgt selbst für maximale Kompatibilität.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke}\\ + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke} \Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -Beim Seitenstil \Pagestyle{myheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{myheadings}}% +Beim Seitenstil \PageStyle{myheadings}\important{\PageStyle{myheadings}}% \IndexPagestyle{myheadings} wird der Kolumnentitel nicht automatisch gesetzt. Stattdessen setzt man ihn mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{markboth} und \Macro{markright}. Dabei wird die \PName{linke Marke} normalerweise im Kopf linker Seiten und die \PName{rechte Marke} im Kopf rechter Seiten verwendet. Im einseitigen Satz existiert nur die rechte Marke. Bei Verwendung -des Paketes -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} -steht außerdem die Anweisung -\Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\Macro{markleft}} zur Verfügung. +des Paketes \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} steht außerdem die Anweisung +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}% +\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}} zur +Verfügung. Die Anweisungen können auch zusammen mit anderen Seitenstilen verwendet werden. Bei Kombination mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln, etwa dem Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings}, ist der Wirkungsbereich allerdings bis zum nächsten +\PageStyle{headings}, ist der Wirkungsbereich allerdings bis zum nächsten automatischen Setzen der entsprechenden Marke begrenzt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% - +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{titlepagestyle}\\ - \Macro{partpagestyle}\\ - \Macro{chapterpagestyle}\\ + \Macro{titlepagestyle} + \Macro{partpagestyle} + \Macro{chapterpagestyle} \Macro{indexpagestyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}\Index{Titel>Seitenstil}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partpagestyle}\Index{Teil>Seitenstil}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterpagestyle}\Index{Kapitel>Seitenstil}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{indexpagestyle}\Index{Stichwortverzeichnis>Seitenstil}% -Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von \Macro{thispagestyle} automatisch ein -anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Welcher Seitenstil dies ist, wird diesen vier -Makros entnommen, wobei \Macro{partpagestyle} und +\Index{Titel>Seitenstil}% +\Index{Teil>Seitenstil}% +\Index{Kapitel>Seitenstil}% +\Index{Stichwortverzeichnis>Seitenstil}% +Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle} +automatisch ein anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Welcher Seitenstil dies ist, wird +diesen vier Makros entnommen, wobei \Macro{partpagestyle} und \Macro{chapterpagestyle}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} nur bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} nicht jedoch bei \Class{scrartcl} existieren. In der Voreinstellung ist der Seitenstil in allen @@ -1012,13 +1004,13 @@ bitte \autoref{tab:specialpagestyles}. \label{tab:specialpagestyles} \begin{desctabular} \mentry{titlepagestyle}{Seitenstil der Seite mit der Titelei bei - Titelköpfen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage})}% - \mentry{partpagestyle}{Seitenstil der Seiten mit \Macro{part}-Titeln - (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure})}% + Titelköpfen (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.titlepage})}% + \mentry{partpagestyle}{Seitenstil der Seiten mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}-Titeln + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure})}% \mentry{chapterpagestyle}{Seitenstil auf Kapitelanfangsseiten (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.structure})}% + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure})}% \mentry{indexpagestyle}{Seitenstil der ersten Stichwortverzeichnisseite - (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.index})}% + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.index})}% \end{desctabular} \end{table} % @@ -1026,12 +1018,12 @@ Die Seitenstile können mit Hilfe von \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden. \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie wollen nicht, dass die Seiten mit der - \Macro{part}-Überschrift mit einer Nummer versehen werden. Dann setzen Sie + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}-Überschrift mit einer Nummer versehen werden. Dann setzen Sie folgende Anweisung beispielsweise in der Präambel Ihres Dokuments: \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\partpagestyle}{empty} \end{lstcode} - Wie Sie auf \autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.empty} erfahren haben, ist + Wie Sie auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.empty} erfahren haben, ist der Seitenstil \PValue{empty} genau das, was in diesem Beispiel verlangt wird. Natürlich können Sie auch einen selbst definierten Seitenstil verwenden. @@ -1050,8 +1042,8 @@ werden. Angenommen, Sie wollen das Inhaltsverzeichnis\Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis}\textnote{Inhaltsverzeichnis} eines Buches insgesamt nicht mit Seitenzahlen versehen. Danach soll aber - wieder mit dem Seitenstil \PValue{headings} gearbeitet werden, sowie mit - \PValue{plain} auf den Kapitelanfangsseiten. Dann verwenden Sie + wieder mit dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings} gearbeitet werden, sowie mit + \PageStyle{plain} auf den Kapitelanfangsseiten. Dann verwenden Sie beispielsweise: \begin{lstcode} \clearpage @@ -1088,20 +1080,16 @@ werden. \renewcommand*{\chapterpagestyle}{headings} \end{lstcode} verwendet, sollte in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.addInfos}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} Näheres über die + \DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.rightmark} Näheres über die Hintergründe zu \Macro{rightmark} nachlesen. \end{Explain} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{indexpagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{pagenumbering}\Parameter{Nummerierungsstil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagenumbering}% Diese Anweisung funktioniert bei \KOMAScript{} in der gleichen Weise wie bei den Standardklassen. Genau genommen handelt es sich dabei weder um eine Fähigkeit der Standardklassen noch der \KOMAScript-Klassen, sondern um eine @@ -1109,9 +1097,11 @@ Anweisung des \LaTeX-Kerns. Sie wird verwendet, um den \PName{Nummerierungsstil} für die Seitenzahlen umzuschalten. Die Umschaltung gilt ab sofort, also ab der Seite, auf der diese Anweisung -aufgerufen wird. Gegebenenfalls sollte also zuvor mit \Macro{clearpage} oder -\Macro{cleardoublepage} diese Seite erst beendet werden. Mögliche Angaben für -den \PName{Nummerierungsstil} sind \autoref{tab:numberKind} zu entnehmen. +aufgerufen wird. Gegebenenfalls sollte also zuvor mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} diese Seite erst beendet +werden. Mögliche Angaben für den \PName{Nummerierungsstil} sind +\autoref{tab:numberKind} zu entnehmen. Der\textnote{Achtung!} Aufruf von \Macro{pagenumbering} setzt immer die Seitenzahl\Index{Seiten>Zahl} zurück. Die aktuelle Seite bekommt also die @@ -1141,13 +1131,13 @@ Nummer 1 im gewählten \PName{Nummerierungsstil}. \end{captionbeside} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagenumbering}% -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{8}% \section{Vakatseiten} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten} -\LoadCommon{9}% \section{Fußnoten} +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten} \section[Abgrenzung]{Abgrenzung\protect\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}}} \seclabel{separation} @@ -1159,13 +1149,10 @@ Bei Büchern gibt es teilweise die Grobauf"|teilung in \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{frontmatter}\\ - \Macro{mainmatter}\\ + \Macro{frontmatter} + \Macro{mainmatter} \Macro{backmatter} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{frontmatter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{mainmatter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{backmatter}% Mit \Macro{frontmatter}\important{\Macro{frontmatter}} wird der Vorspann eingeleitet. Im Vorspann werden die nummerierten Seiten mit römischen Seitenzahlen versehen. Kapitelüberschriften sind im Vorspann nicht @@ -1183,28 +1170,27 @@ Gliederungsebene als Kapitel benötigt. Für den Fall, dass der Anwender dies anders sieht und nummerierte Abschnitte\Index{Abschnitt>Nummer} in den Kapiteln des Vorspanns haben will, enthält ab Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}% -\important{\OptionValue{version}{2.97e}} die Nummerierung der Abschnitte keine -Kapitelnummer. Diese Änderung gibt es nur, wenn eine Kompatibilität ab -Version~2.97e eingestellt ist (siehe Option \Option{version}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). Es wird ausdrücklich darauf +\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.97e}} die Nummerierung der +Abschnitte keine Kapitelnummer. Diese Änderung gibt es nur, wenn eine +Kompatibilität ab Version~2.97e eingestellt ist (siehe Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Es wird ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen, dass dadurch bezüglich der Nummern eine Verwechslung mit -Kapitelnummern gegeben ist! Die Verwendung von \Macro{addsec} und -\Macro{section*} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.section*} und -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addsec}) sind aus Sicht des Autors im Vorspann -deshalb unbedingt vorzuziehen! - -Ab -Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}% -\important{\OptionValue{version}{2.97e}} -enthalten auch die Nummern für Gleitumgebungen wie -Tabellen\Index{Tabellen>Nummern} und Abbildungen\Index{Abbildungen>Nummern} -und die Gleichungsnummern\Index{Gleichungen>Nummern} im Vorspann keinen +Kapitelnummern gegeben ist! Die Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} und \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}) +sind aus Sicht des Autors im Vorspann deshalb unbedingt vorzuziehen! + +Ab Version~2.97e\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrbook}}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{version}{2.97e}} enthalten auch die +Nummern für Gleitumgebungen wie Tabellen\Index{Tabellen>Nummern} und +Abbildungen\Index{Abbildungen>Nummern} und die +Gleichungsnummern\Index{Gleichungen>Nummern} im Vorspann keinen Kapitelanteil. Auch dies erfordert eine entsprechende -Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \Option{version}, -\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). +Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Mit \Macro{mainmatter}\important{\Macro{mainmatter}} wird der Hauptteil eingeleitet. Existiert kein Vorspann, so kann diese Anweisung auch @@ -1218,16 +1204,16 @@ nur das Stichwortverzeichnis\Index{Stichwortverzeichnis} gesetzt. Manchmal erscheint der gesamte Anhang im Nachspann. Der Nachspann gleicht bezüglich der Gliederungsüberschriften dem Vorspann. Eine getrennte Seitennummerierung ist jedoch nicht vorgesehen. Falls Sie dies ebenfalls benötigen, bedienen Sie sich -bitte der Anweisung \Macro{pagenumbering} aus \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering}.% +bitte der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering} aus +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagenumbering}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{frontmatter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{mainmatter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{backmatter}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Gliederung} \seclabel{structure}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Gliederung} Unter der Gliederung versteht man die Einteilung eines Dokuments in @@ -1235,27 +1221,27 @@ Teile, Kapitel, Abschnitte und weitere Gliederungsebenen. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{open}\PName{Methode} + \OptionVName{open}{Methode} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{open~=\PName{Methode}}% -Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} -den \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} kann gewählt -werden, wo im doppelseitigen Satz neue Kapitel beginnen. In der Voreinstellung -beginnen bei \Class{scrreprt} neue Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Anfang} auf der -nächsten neuen Seite. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} -\PValue{any}. Demgegenüber beginnen bei \Class{scrbook} neue Kapitel auf der -nächsten rechten Seite. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{right} und -ist bei den meisten Büchern üblich. In einigen Fällen sollen neue Kapitel -jedoch auf der linken Seite einer kompletten Doppelseite beginnen. Dies -entspricht der \PName{Methode} +Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} den \KOMAScript-Klassen +\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} kann gewählt werden, wo im doppelseitigen +Satz neue Kapitel beginnen. In der Voreinstellung beginnen bei +\Class{scrreprt} neue Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Anfang} auf der nächsten neuen +Seite. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{any}. Demgegenüber beginnen +bei \Class{scrbook} neue Kapitel auf der nächsten rechten Seite. Dies +entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{right} und ist bei den meisten Büchern +üblich. In einigen Fällen sollen neue Kapitel jedoch auf der linken Seite +einer kompletten Doppelseite beginnen. Dies entspricht der \PName{Methode} \PValue{left}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}. Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte findet sich noch einmal in \autoref{tab:maincls.open}. Dabei sind auch die Auswirkungen auf die -Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublepage}, -\Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, -\Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage} und -\Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.emptypage}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage}) angegeben. +Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.emptypage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}) angegeben. \begin{table} \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{open}}]{Mögliche Werte für @@ -1263,28 +1249,37 @@ Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublepage}, \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{any}{% - Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden \Macro{clearpage}, aber - nicht \Macro{cleardoublepage}; % - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und - \Macro{cleardoublepage} verhalten sich wie bei + Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage}, aber nicht + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}; % + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} verhalten sich wie bei \OptionValue{open}{right}.% }% \pventry{left}{% - Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden \Macro{cleardoublepage}; % - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und - \Macro{cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und fügen ggf. eine - Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen Satz auf die - nächste linke Seite zu gelangen.% + Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}; % + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch + und fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im + doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen.% \IndexOption{open~=\PValue{left}}}% \pventry{right}{% - Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden \Macro{cleardoublepage}; % - \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und - \Macro{cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und fügen ggf. eine - Vakatseite ein, um im doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste rechte Seite - zu gelangen.% + Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}; % + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch + und fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite ein, um im doppelseitigen Satz auf die + nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen.% \IndexOption{open~=\PValue{right}}}% \end{desctabular} \label{tab:maincls.open} @@ -1296,17 +1291,14 @@ wird, hat die Option dort keine Wirkung. Bei der Klasse \Class{scrartcl} ist die oberste Gliederungsebene unter dem Teil der Abschnitt. Daher unterstützt \Class{scrartcl} diese Option nicht.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{open~=\PName{Methode}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{chapterprefix}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{appendixprefix}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ + \OptionVName{chapterprefix}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{appendixprefix}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \Macro{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapterprefix~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{appendixprefix~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}% Bei\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} den Standardklassen \Class{book} und \Class{report} werden Kapitelüberschriften% \Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der Form ausgegeben, dass zunächst @@ -1324,8 +1316,8 @@ einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, Verhalten\important{\Option{chapterprefix}} der Standardklassen \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} entspricht. Die Optionen wirken sich außerdem auf das Aussehen der automatischen Kolumnentitel für Kapitel aus -(siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.pagestyle.headings}). +(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.pagestyle.headings}). Zuweilen kommt es vor, dass man die Kapitelüberschriften im Hauptteil durchaus in der einfachen Form von \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} setzen @@ -1343,27 +1335,26 @@ Mit der Anweisung für die Präfixzeile ausführen. Ist \Option{chapterprefix} aktiv, so wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. -Die Schriftart der Kapitelnummernzeile bei -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} oder \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} kann -mit den beiden Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) -für das Element -\FontElement{chapterprefix}\IndexFontElement{chapterprefix}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and - \Class{scrreprt}} geändert werden. Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des -Elements \FontElement{chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chapter}, sowie +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapterprefix}\LabelFontElement{chapterprefix}% +Die Schriftart der Kapitelnummernzeile bei \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} +oder \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} kann mit den beiden Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +für das Element \FontElement{chapterprefix}% +\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} geändert +werden. Voreingestellt ist die Verwendung des Elements +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, sowie \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}).% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfChapterUsesPrefixLine}% -\EndIndex{Option}{appendixprefix~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapterprefix~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headings}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{headings}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headings~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Die Überschriften\index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} werden sowohl bei den Standardklassen als auch bei {\KOMAScript} normalerweise recht groß gesetzt. Dies gefällt nicht jedem und wirkt insbesondere bei kleinen @@ -1380,28 +1371,30 @@ Verfügung, mit denen man insgesamt kleinere Überschriften erhält. Die aus den Optionen resultierenden Schriftgrößen sind für die Überschriften der Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} zu entnehmen. -Konkret setzen alle drei Einstellungen die Schrift für die -Elemente \FontElement{chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter}, -\FontElement{section}\IndexFontElement{section}, -\FontElement{subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection}, -\FontElement{subsubsection}\IndexFontElement{subsubsection}, -\FontElement{paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph} und -\FontElement{subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} auf entsprechende -Voreinstellungen zurück. Bei -\Class{scrartcl} werden generell etwas kleinere Überschriften verwendet. -\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}Die Abstände vor und nach -Kapitelüberschriften werden von diesen Optionen ebenfalls neu definiert. +\autopageref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont} zu entnehmen. Konkret setzen +alle drei Einstellungen die Schrift für die Elemente +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.chapter}\IndexFontElement{chapter}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.section}\IndexFontElement{section}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsection}\IndexFontElement{subsection}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subsubsection}\IndexFontElement{subsubsection}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.paragraph}\IndexFontElement{paragraph} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} +auf entsprechende Voreinstellungen zurück. Bei \Class{scrartcl} werden +generell etwas kleinere Überschriften verwendet. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and + \Class{scrreprt}}Die Abstände vor und nach Kapitelüberschriften werden von +diesen Optionen ebenfalls neu definiert. \iffalse Auf Kapitelüberschriften wirkt sich außerdem die Option \Option{headings} mit den Einstellungen \PValue{twolinechapter} oder \PValue{onelinechapter} aus, die den oben erklärten Optionen -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} und \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true} und +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} entsprechen. Im Anhang gibt es zusätzlich Auswirkungen durch die Einstellungen \PValue{onelineappendix} und \PValue{twolineappendix} für Option -\Option{headings}, was dann \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{false} und -\OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} entspricht (siehe ebenfalls oben). +\Option{headings}, was dann \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} +und \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} entspricht (siehe +ebenfalls oben). \else Auf\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \Option{headings=}\\ \quad\PValue{twolinechapter}\end{tabular}\\ @@ -1412,14 +1405,16 @@ Auf\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} Kapitelüberschriften wirken sich außerdem die Optionen \OptionValue{headings}{twolinechapter} und \OptionValue{headings}{onelinechapter}, was -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true} und \OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true} und +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} entspricht (siehe oben) aus. Für den Anhang stehen \OptionValue{headings}{twolineappendix} und \OptionValue{headings}{onelineappendix}\important[i]{% \begin{tabular}[b]{@{}l@{}} \Option{headings=}\\ \quad\PValue{onelineappendix} \end{tabular}} zur Verfügung, die den Optionen -\OptionValue{appendixprefix}{true} und \OptionValue{appendixprefix}{false} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{true} und +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{appendixprefix}{false} entspricht (siehe ebenfalls oben). \fi @@ -1429,8 +1424,8 @@ Für\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} Kapitel kann mit \OptionValue{headings}{openright}\\ \OptionValue{headings}{openleft}}, \OptionValue{headings}{openright} und \OptionValue{headings}{openleft} die Methode für Kapitelanfänge alternativ zur -Verwendung der Option \Option{open} mit den Werten \PValue{any}, -\PValue{right} und \PValue{left} (siehe oben) gesetzt werden. +Verwendung der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.open} mit den Werten +\PValue{any}, \PValue{right} und \PValue{left} (siehe oben) gesetzt werden. Eine\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} weitere Besonderheit von \KOMAScript{} betrifft die @@ -1482,27 +1477,34 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten. \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{onelinechapter}}}{% Kapitelüberschriften werden wie andere Überschriften auch gesetzt.}% \pventry{openany}{% - Für die Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und \Macro{cleardoublepage} entspricht dies + Für die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} entspricht dies \OptionValue{headings}{openright}. Teile, Kapitel, Index und Nachspann - verwenden \Macro{clearpage}, aber nicht \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearpage}, aber nicht + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openany}}}% \pventry{openleft}{% - Die Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und \Macro{cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen - Seitenumbruch und fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im - doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen. Teile, - Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + Die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und + fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen + Satz auf die nächste linke Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und + Nachspann verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openleft}}}% \pventry{openright}{% - Die Anweisungen \Macro{cleardoublepageusingstyle}, - \Macro{cleardoublestandardpage}, \Macro{cleardoubleplainpage}, - \Macro{cleardoubleemptypage} und \Macro{cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen - Seitenumbruch und fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im - doppelseitigen Satz auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, - Kapitel, Index und Nachspann verwenden \Macro{cleardoublepage}.% + Die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage} erzeugen einen Seitenumbruch und + fügen ggf. eine Vakatseite\Index{Vakatseite} ein, um im doppelseitigen + Satz auf die nächste rechte Seite zu gelangen. Teile, Kapitel, Index und + Nachspann verwenden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cleardoublepage}.% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{openright}}}% \pventry{optiontohead}{% Die\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and @@ -1536,22 +1538,21 @@ der Gliederungsbefehle enthalten. \PValue{appendixwithprefix}, \PValue{appendixwithprefixline}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{twolineappendix}}}{% Kapitelüberschriften im Anhang werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt, - deren Inhalt von \Macro{chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat} bestimmt + deren Inhalt von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat} bestimmt wird.}% \entry{\PValue{twolinechapter}, \PValue{chapterprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithprefix}, \PValue{chapterwithprefixline}% \IndexOption{headings~=\PValue{twolinechapter}}}{% Kapitelüberschriften werden mit einer Vorsatzzeile gesetzt, deren Inhalt - von \Macro{chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat} bestimmt wird.}% + von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterformat}\IndexCmd{chapterformat} bestimmt wird.}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{headings~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{numbers}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{numbers}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{numbers~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Nach {\small DUDEN} steht in Gliederungen\Index{Gliederung}, in denen ausschließlich arabische Ziffern für die Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung} verwendet werden, am Ende der Gliederungsnummern kein abschließender Punkt @@ -1560,22 +1561,21 @@ römischen Zahlen oder Groß- oder Kleinbuchstaben gearbeitet, so steht am Ende aller Gliederungsnummern ein abschließender Punkt (siehe \cite[R\,4]{DUDEN}). In {\KOMAScript} ist ein Automatismus eingebaut, der diese etwas komplexe Regel zu erfüllen versucht. Der Automatismus wirkt sich -so aus, dass normalerweise bei Verwendung des Gliederungsbefehls \Macro{part} -oder eines Anhangs (\Macro{appendix}) auf Gliederungsnummer mit abschließendem +so aus, dass normalerweise bei Verwendung des Gliederungsbefehls \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} +oder eines Anhangs (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.appendix}) auf Gliederungsnummer mit abschließendem Punkt umgeschaltet wird. Diese Information wird in der \File{aux}-Datei gespeichert und wirkt sich dann beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf auf das gesamte Dokument aus. -Manchmal versagt der mit -\OptionValue{numbers}{autoendperiod}\IndexOption{numbers~=\PValue{autoendperiod}} -voreingestellte Automatismus zum Setzen oder Weglassen des abschließenden -Punktes in der Gliederungsnummer. Teilweise sehen andere Sprachen auch andere -Regeln vor. Deshalb ist es beispielsweise mit der Einstellung +Manchmal versagt der mit \OptionValue{numbers}{autoendperiod}% +\IndexOption{numbers~=\PValue{autoendperiod}} voreingestellte Automatismus zum +Setzen oder Weglassen des abschließenden Punktes in der +Gliederungsnummer. Teilweise sehen andere Sprachen auch andere Regeln +vor. Deshalb ist es beispielsweise mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{numbers}{endperiod}\IndexOption{numbers~=\PValue{endperiod}}% \important[i]{\OptionValue{numbers}{endperiod}\\ - \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod}} möglich, den -Punkt manuell vorzuschreiben oder mit \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod} zu -verbieten. + \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod}} möglich, den Punkt manuell +vorzuschreiben oder mit \OptionValue{numbers}{noendperiod} zu verbieten. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass der Automatismus immer erst für den nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf die Verwendung des abschließenden Punktes ein- oder @@ -1616,29 +1616,28 @@ also vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} vorgenommen werden. \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{numbers~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Option{chapteratlists}\\ - \XOption{chapteratlists}=\PName{Wert} + \Option{chapteratlists} + \OptionVName{chapteratlists}{Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapteratlists}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{chapteratlists~=\PName{Wert}}% -Wie\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} -auch bei der Option \Option{listof} in \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof} erwähnt wird, fügt +Wie\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} auch bei der Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} erwähnt wird, fügt normalerweise\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} jeder -mit \Macro{chapter} erzeugte Kapiteleintrag einen vertikalen Abstand in die +mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} erzeugte Kapiteleintrag einen vertikalen Abstand in die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen ein. Seit Version~2.96a gilt dies auch für -die Anweisung \Macro{addchap}, wenn nicht eine Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu -einer früheren Version gewählt wurde (siehe Option \Option{version} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}). +die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}, wenn nicht eine Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu +einer früheren Version gewählt wurde (siehe Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Außerdem kann mit der Option \Option{chapteratlists} der Abstand verändert werden. Dazu gibt man als \PName{Wert} den gewünschten Abstand an. Bei der -Voreinstellung \OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% +Voreinstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapsmall}} sind dies 10\Unit{pt}. Mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{chapteratlists}{entry}\IndexOption{chapteratlists~=\PValue{entry}}% @@ -1652,26 +1651,21 @@ Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass sich eine Änderung der Einstellung je nach Art der Änderung erst nach zwei weiteren \LaTeX-Läufen im Verzeichnis auswirkt.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{chapteratlists~=\PName{Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{chapteratlists}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{part}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{section}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ + \Macro{part}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{chapter}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{section}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{subsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{subsubsection}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{paragraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} \Macro{subparagraph}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{part}\Index[indexmain]{Teil}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapter}\Index[indexmain]{Kapitel}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{section}\Index[indexmain]{Abschnitt}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraph}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph}% +\Index[indexmain]{Teil}% +\Index[indexmain]{Kapitel}% +\Index[indexmain]{Abschnitt}% Die Standardgliederungsbefehle funktionieren bei {\KOMAScript} im Grundsatz wie bei den Standardklassen. So kann in der Voreinstellung ganz normal über ein optionales Argument ein abweichender Text für den Kolumnentitel und das @@ -1679,21 +1673,21 @@ Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgegeben werden. Mit\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} der -Einstellung\important{\Option{headings}} -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontohead}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}} +Einstellung\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontohead}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontohead}} wird das optionale Argument bei \KOMAScript{} hingegen nur noch für den Kolumnentitel verwendet. Ein konkreter Eintrag in den Kolumnentitel erfolgt natürlich nur, wenn ein Seitenstil\Index{Seiten>Stil} gewählt wird, bei dem die entsprechende Gliederungsebene überhaupt für den Kolumnentitel verwendet -wird. Siehe hierzu \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} sowie +wird. Siehe hierzu \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} sowie \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}. Mit der Einstellung -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontotoc}} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontotoc}} wird das optionale Argument hingegen ausschließlich für den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet. Auch dies selbstverständlich nur, wenn die -Einstellung für den Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}) einen +Einstellung für den Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}) einen Eintrag der entsprechenden Ebene überhaupt vorsieht. Mit der Einstellung -\OptionValue{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}} +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontoheadandtoc}\IndexOption[indexmain]{headings~=\PValue{optiontoheadandtoc}} findet schließlich das optionale Argument wieder sowohl für den Kolumnentitel als auch den Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis Verwendung. Allen drei Einstellungen ist gemeinsam, dass sie im Gegensatz zur Voreinstellung die @@ -1770,7 +1764,7 @@ wie \lstinline|\mbox{}| erreicht werden. Die Notwendigkeit der geschweiften Klammern im vorherigen Beispiel lässt sich am besten an einem weiteren Beispiel verdeutlichen. Angenommen, sie - haben als Option \OptionValue{headings}{optiontotoc} gewählt und setzen nun + haben als Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{optiontotoc} gewählt und setzen nun die Überschrift: \begin{lstcode} \section[head=\emph{Wert}] @@ -1811,7 +1805,7 @@ Abschnitt-Ebene (bei \Class{scrartcl}) über alle Teile hinweg durchgehend nummeriert wird. Darüber hinaus steht bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} die Überschrift dieser Ebene zusammen mit ihrer Präambel (siehe Anweisung -\Macro{setpartpreamble}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble}) +\Macro{setpartpreamble}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setpartpreamble}) alleine auf einer Seite. \Macro{chapter}\important{\Macro{chapter}}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -1823,46 +1817,61 @@ jedoch bei den Artikelklassen \Class{article} und gravierend von der Version der Standardklassen. Bei den Standardklassen wird die Kapitelnummer mit dem Präfix »Kapitel« beziehungsweise dem Kapitelnamen in der gewählten Sprache in einer Zeile vor dem eigentlichen Text der Überschrift -ausgegeben. Diese\important[i]{\Option{chapterprefix}\\ - \Option{appendixprefix}} sehr mächtige Form +ausgegeben. Diese\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix}} sehr mächtige Form wird bei {\KOMAScript} durch eine einfache Nummer vor dem Text abgelöst, lässt -sich aber durch die Optionen \Option{chapterprefix} und -\Option{appendixprefix} einstellen (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}). +sich aber durch die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} einstellen (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}). Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie, dass \Macro{part} und \Macro{chapter} bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschaltet. Der jeweilige -Seitenstil ist bei \KOMAScript{} in den Makros \Macro{partpagestyle} und -\Macro{chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +Seitenstil ist bei \KOMAScript{} in den Makros +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle}). +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{disposition}\LabelFontElement{disposition}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{part}\LabelFontElement{part}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{parnumber}\LabelFontElement{partnumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{chapter}\LabelFontElement{chapter}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{section}\LabelFontElement{section}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subsection}\LabelFontElement{subsection}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subsubsection}\LabelFontElement{subsubsection}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{paragraph}\LabelFontElement{paragraph}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subparagraph}\LabelFontElement{subparagraph}% Die\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Schriftart aller -sieben Gliederungsebenen kann mit den Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) bestimmt werden. Dabei wird -zunächst generell das Element -\FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition}\important{\FontElement{disposition}} -und anschließend zusätzlich je Gliederungsebene ein spezifisches +sieben Gliederungsebenen kann mit den Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +bestimmt werden. Dabei wird zunächst generell das Element +\FontElement{disposition}\important{\FontElement{disposition}} und +anschließend zusätzlich je Gliederungsebene ein spezifisches Element\important[s]{% \FontElement{part}\\ + \FontElement{partnumber}\\ \FontElement{chapter}\\ \FontElement{section}\\ \FontElement{subsection}\\ \FontElement{paragraph}\\ \FontElement{subparagraph}} verwendet (siehe -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). Die Schriftart für das Element -\FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} ist als +\autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Für den Nummernteil der +Teile-Überschrift wird zusätzlich das Element \FontElement{partnumber} +verwendet. Die Schriftart für das Element \FontElement{disposition} ist als \Macro{normalcolor}""\Macro{sffamily}""\Macro{bfseries} vordefiniert. Die Voreinstellungen für die spezifischen Elemente sind mit einer Schriftgröße vorbelegt und daher von den Einstellungen \PValue{big}, \PValue{normal} und -\PValue{small} für die Option \Option{headings}\IndexOption{headings} abhängig -(siehe \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}). Sie finden die -Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. +\PValue{small} für die Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}\IndexOption{headings} abhängig (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}). Sie finden die Voreinstellungen in +\autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. % Umbruchkorrektur: Tabelle verschoben \begin{table} % \centering% @@ -1879,7 +1888,7 @@ Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. \toprule Klassenoption & Element & Voreinstellung \\ \midrule - \OptionValue{headings}{big} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} & \FontElement{part}\IndexFontElement{part} & \Macro{Huge} \\ & \FontElement{partnumber}\IndexFontElement{partnumber} @@ -1896,7 +1905,7 @@ Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. & \Macro{normalsize} \\ & \FontElement{subparagraph}\IndexFontElement{subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\[1ex] - \OptionValue{headings}{normal} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{normal} & \FontElement{part} & \Macro{huge} \\ & \FontElement{partnumber} & \Macro{huge} \\ & \FontElement{chapter} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ @@ -1905,7 +1914,7 @@ Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. & \FontElement{subsubsection} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ & \FontElement{paragraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\ & \FontElement{subparagraph} & \Macro{normalsize} \\[1ex] - \OptionValue{headings}{small} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{small} & \FontElement{part} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ & \FontElement{partnumber} & \Macro{LARGE} \\ & \FontElement{chapter} & \Macro{Large} \\ @@ -1921,14 +1930,14 @@ Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. % \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie stellen bei Verwendung der Klassenoption - \OptionValue{headings}{big} fest, dass die sehr großen Überschriften von - Teildokumenten (\Macro{part} oder \Macro{addpart}) zu fett wirken. Nun - könnten Sie natürlich wie folgt % -\iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung!!!! + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{headings}{big} fest, dass die sehr großen + Überschriften von Teildokumenten (\Macro{part} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}) zu fett + wirken. Nun könnten Sie natürlich wie folgt % + \iftrue % Umbruchoptimierung!!!! verfahren:% -\else % + \else % für Abhilfe sorgen:% -\fi + \fi \begin{lstcode} \setkomafont{disposition}{\normalcolor\sffamily} \part{\appendixname} @@ -1948,9 +1957,9 @@ Voreinstellungen in \autoref{tab:maincls.structureElementsFont}. \addtokomafont{part}{\mdseries} \addtokomafont{partnumber}{\mdseries} \end{lstcode} - möglich. Die Verwendung von \Macro{setkomafont} wäre zwar grundsätzlich + möglich. Die Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} wäre zwar grundsätzlich möglich, müsste aber auch die Auswahl der Schriftgröße enthalten und würde - damit die Größenänderung über die Option \Option{headings} verhindern. + damit die Größenänderung über die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings} verhindern. Die zweite Version mit \Macro{mdseries} ist vorzuziehen, da diese auch dann noch zum gewünschten Ergebnis führt, wenn Sie später das Element @@ -1997,34 +2006,20 @@ die folgende Erklärung. Times mit Helvetica oder Palatino mit Helvetica werden vom Autor als ungünstig betrachtet. \end{Explain} -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{part}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{section}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraph}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ + \Macro{part*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{chapter*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{section*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{subsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{subsubsection*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{paragraph*}\Parameter{Überschrift} \Macro{subparagraph*}\Parameter{Überschrift} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{part*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapter*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{section*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsection*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraph*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph*}% Bei den Sternvarianten der Gliederungsbefehle erfolgt keine Nummerierung\Index{Nummerierung}, wird kein Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} gesetzt und kein Eintrag im @@ -2041,10 +2036,10 @@ Artikelklassen \Class{article} und \Class{scrartcl}. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \Macro{part*} und \Macro{chapter*} den Seitenstil für eine Seite umschalten. Während die Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} dabei den -Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} verwenden, ist bei \KOMAScript{} der zu -verwendende Seitenstil in den Makros \Macro{partpagestyle} und -\Macro{chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} verwenden, ist bei \KOMAScript{} der zu +verwendende Seitenstil in den Makros \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}). Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} % @@ -2052,13 +2047,8 @@ gilt das Gleiche wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu den sternlosen Varianten geschrieben. Die Elemente tragen die gleichen Namen, da sie nicht Varianten, sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{part*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapter*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{section*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsection*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsection*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraph*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraph*}% +\EndIndexGroup + \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext Bei den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} gibt @@ -2070,29 +2060,25 @@ bei denen ein automatischer Kolumnentitel erzeugt wird. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift}\\ - \Macro{addsec*}\Parameter{Überschrift}\textnote[n]{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} + \Macro{addpart}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addpart*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addchap}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addchap*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addsec}\OParameter{Kurzform}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \Macro{addsec*}\Parameter{Überschrift} + \textnote[n]{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addpart}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addpart*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchap}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchap*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsec}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsec*}% -{\KOMAScript} bietet über die -Gliederungsbefehle der Standardklassen hinaus die Anweisungen \Macro{addpart}, -\Macro{addchap} und \Macro{addsec}. Diese ähneln bis auf die fehlende -Nummerierung sehr den Standardanweisungen \Macro{part}, \Macro{chapter} und -\Macro{section}. Sie erzeugen also sowohl einen automatischen Kolumnentitel -als auch einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, wobei auch die Einstellungen von -Option \Option{headings}\important{\Option{headings}} beachtet werden. +{\KOMAScript} bietet über die Gliederungsbefehle der Standardklassen hinaus +die Anweisungen \Macro{addpart}, \Macro{addchap} und \Macro{addsec}. Diese +ähneln bis auf die fehlende Nummerierung sehr den Standardanweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}. Sie +erzeugen also sowohl einen automatischen Kolumnentitel als auch einen Eintrag +im Inhaltsverzeichnis, wobei auch die Einstellungen von Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}} beachtet werden. Die Sternvarianten \Macro{addchap*} und \Macro{addsec*} gleichen hingegen den -Standardanweisungen \Macro{chapter*} und \Macro{section*} mit einem winzigen, +Standardanweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} mit einem winzigen, aber wichtigen Unterschied: Die Kolumnentitel werden gelöscht. Dadurch wird der oben erwähnte Effekt veralteter Kolumnentitel ausgeschlossen. Stattdessen bleibt der Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten leer. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and @@ -2100,38 +2086,35 @@ bleibt der Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten leer. \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and selbstverständlich nur bei Buch- und Berichtklassen, also bei \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}, nicht jedoch bei der Artikelklasse \Class{scrartcl}. -Die Anweisung \Macro{addpart} erstellt entsprechend einen nicht -nummerierten Dokumentteil mit einem Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Da -bereits \Macro{part} und \Macro{part*} den Kolumnentitel löschen, -ergibt sich hier nicht das oben genannte Problem mit veralteten -Kolumnentiteln. Die Sternvariante \Macro{addpart*} ist daher identisch -mit der Sternvariante \Macro{part*} und wurde nur aus -Konsistenzgründen definiert. +Die Anweisung \Macro{addpart} erstellt entsprechend einen nicht nummerierten +Dokumentteil mit einem Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis. Da bereits +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} den +Kolumnentitel löschen, ergibt sich hier nicht das oben genannte Problem mit +veralteten Kolumnentiteln. Die Sternvariante \Macro{addpart*} ist daher +identisch mit der Sternvariante \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*} und wurde nur +aus Konsistenzgründen definiert. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \Macro{addpart} und \Macro{addchap} und deren Sternvarianten den Seitenstil für eine Seite -umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros \Macro{partpagestyle} -und \Macro{chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +umschalten. Der jeweilige Seitenstil ist in den Makros +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partpagestyle} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapterpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.titlepagestyle}). Bezüglich der Möglichkeiten der Schriftumschaltung\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} % -gilt das gleiche wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu \Macro{part*}, \Macro{chapter*} -und \Macro{section*} geschrieben. Die Elemente tragen die gleichen Namen, da -sie nicht Varianten, sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.% +gilt das gleiche wie zuvor in der Erklärung zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part*}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter*} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section*} +geschrieben. Die Elemente tragen die gleichen Namen, da sie nicht Varianten, +sondern Gliederungsebenen bezeichnen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addpart}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addpart*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchap}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchap*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsec}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsec*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{minisec}\Parameter{Überschrift} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{minisec}% Manchmal ist eine Art Überschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} wünschenswert, die zwar hervorgehoben wird, ansonsten aber eng mit dem nachfolgenden Text zusammenhängt. Eine solche Überschrift soll dann ohne große @@ -2142,19 +2125,18 @@ Der Befehl \Macro{minisec} bewirkt genau eine derartige Überschrift. Diese \emph{Mini-Section} wird nicht in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen und erhält auch keine Nummerierung. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{minisec}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{disposition}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{minisec}\LabelFontElement{minisec}% Die Schriftart des Gliederungsbefehls \Macro{minisec} kann über die Elemente -\FontElement{disposition}% -\important[i]{\FontElement{disposition}\\\FontElement{minisec}} -und \FontElement{minisec}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}% +\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\\ + \FontElement{minisec}} und \FontElement{minisec}\ChangedAt{v2.96a}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} beeinflusst -werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). Die Voreinstellung für das -Element \FontElement{minisec} ist leer, so dass in der Voreinstellung nur -das Element \FontElement{disposition} wirkt.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{disposition}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{minisec}% +werden (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Die Voreinstellung für das Element +\FontElement{minisec} ist leer, so dass in der Voreinstellung nur das Element +\DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition} wirkt.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Example} Sie haben einen Bausatz für eine Mausefalle entwickelt und wollen @@ -2260,26 +2242,23 @@ das Element \FontElement{disposition} wirkt.% verwiesen. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{minisec}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{raggedsection}\\ - \Macro{raggedchapter}\\ + \Macro{raggedsection} + \Macro{raggedchapter} \Macro{raggedpart} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedsection}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedpart}% -Bei den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} werden -die Überschriften ganz normal im Blocksatz -ausgegeben. Dadurch können in den Überschriften Trennungen auf"|treten und -mehrzeilige Überschriften werden auf Textbreite gedehnt. Dieses Vorgehen ist -in der Typografie eher unüblich. {\KOMAScript} setzt Überschriften von -\Macro{chapter} bis \Macro{subparagraph} daher in linksbündigem Flattersatz -mit hängendem Einzug. Verantwortlich ist dafür die Anweisung -\Macro{raggedsection}, die vordefiniert ist als: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +Bei den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} werden die +Überschriften ganz normal im Blocksatz ausgegeben. Dadurch können in den +Überschriften Trennungen auf"|treten und mehrzeilige Überschriften werden auf +Textbreite gedehnt. Dieses Vorgehen ist in der Typografie eher +unüblich. {\KOMAScript} setzt Überschriften von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraph} +daher in linksbündigem Flattersatz mit hängendem Einzug. Verantwortlich ist +dafür die Anweisung \Macro{raggedsection}, die vordefiniert ist als: +\begin{lstcode} \let\raggedsection\raggedright \end{lstcode} Die Anweisung \Macro{raggedsection} kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert @@ -2297,7 +2276,7 @@ werden. Sie erreichen somit eine ähnliche Formatierung der Überschriften wie bei den Standardklassen. Noch ähnlicher wird es, wenn Sie diese Änderung mit der oben vorgestellten Änderung für das Element - \FontElement{disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.disposition}\IndexFontElement{disposition} kombinieren. \end{Example} @@ -2308,16 +2287,16 @@ Voreinstellung verwendet die Anweisung jedoch einfach \Macro{raggedsection}, so dass eine Änderung von \Macro{raggedsection} sich indirekt auch auf \Macro{raggedchapter} auswirkt. -Die Überschriften von Teilen (\Macro{part}) werden in der Voreinstellung als +Die Überschriften von Teilen (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}) werden in der Voreinstellung als einzige nicht in linksbündigem Flattersatz, sondern zentriert gesetzt. Dafür ist die Anweisung \Macro{raggedpart} verantwortlich, die als: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \let\raggedpart\centering \end{lstcode} vordefiniert ist. Auch diese Anweisung kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} umdefiniert werden. \begin{Example} - Sie wollen, dass Überschriften mit \Macro{part} in der gleichen Weise + Sie wollen, dass Überschriften mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} in der gleichen Weise formatiert werden, wie alle anderen Ebenen. Dazu schreiben Sie \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\raggedpart}{\raggedsection} @@ -2333,36 +2312,24 @@ umdefiniert werden. \Macro{raggedpart}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedsection}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedchapter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedpart}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{partformat}\\ - \Macro{chapterformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionformat}\\ - \Macro{subsectionformat}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionformat}\\ - \Macro{paragraphformat}\\ - \Macro{subparagraphformat}\\ - \Macro{othersectionlevelsformat}\Parameter{Gliederungsname}\Parameter{}\Parameter{Zählerausgabe}\\ - \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ + \Macro{partformat} + \Macro{chapterformat} + \Macro{sectionformat} + \Macro{subsectionformat} + \Macro{subsubsectionformat} + \Macro{paragraphformat} + \Macro{subparagraphformat} + \Macro{othersectionlevelsformat}\Parameter{Gliederungsname}\Parameter{}\Parameter{Zählerausgabe} + \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \Macro{autodot} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partformat}\Index{Teil>Nummer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapterformat}\Index{Kapitel>Nummer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{othersectionlevelsformat}\Index{Abschnitt>Nummer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfUsePrefixLine}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{autodot}% \KOMAScript{} fügt der Ausgabe der Gliederungsnummern oberhalb von \Macro{the\PName{Gliederungsname}} (siehe \Macro{the\PName{Zähler}}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.the}) eine weitere logische Ebene +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.the}) eine weitere logische Ebene hinzu. Die Zähler werden für die jeweilige Überschrift nicht einfach nur ausgegeben. Sie werden mit Hilfe der parameterlosen Anweisungen \Macro{partformat}, \Macro{chapterformat} bis @@ -2373,13 +2340,14 @@ ausgegeben. Sie werden mit Hilfe der parameterlosen Anweisungen selbstverständlich nicht in der Klasse \Class{scrartcl}, sondern nur in den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}. -Wie bereits bei Option \Option{numbers}\important{\Option{numbers}} am Anfang -dieses Abschnitts (siehe \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers}) erläutert -wurde, müssen gemäß \cite{DUDEN} die Gliederungsnummern je nach Gliederung mit -einem nachfolgenden Punkt versehen werden oder dieser hat zu entfallen. Die -Anweisung \Macro{autodot} ist bei {\KOMAScript} für die Einhaltung dieser -Regel verantwortlich. Auf den Punkt folgt bei allen Gliederungsebenen außer -\Macro{part} noch ein \Macro{enskip}. Dies entspricht einem Leerraum von +Wie bereits bei Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}} am Anfang dieses Abschnitts +(siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}) erläutert wurde, müssen gemäß +\cite{DUDEN} die Gliederungsnummern je nach Gliederung mit einem nachfolgenden +Punkt versehen werden oder dieser hat zu entfallen. Die Anweisung +\Macro{autodot} ist bei {\KOMAScript} für die Einhaltung dieser Regel +verantwortlich. Auf den Punkt folgt bei allen Gliederungsebenen außer +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} noch ein \Macro{enskip}. Dies entspricht einem Leerraum von 0,5\Unit{em}, also einem Halbgeviert. Die Anweisung @@ -2390,8 +2358,9 @@ Format-Anweisung definiert oder diese \Macro{relax} ist, was jedoch in der Voreinstellung für die Gliederungsebenen von KOMA-Script nicht zutrifft. Daher wird sie auch nicht mehr offiziell dokumentiert. Bei einer Kompatibilitätseinstellung zu Versionen vor 3.17 (siehe Option -\Option{version}, \autoref{sec:maincls.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.version}) haben hingegen die Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}, +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) haben hingegen die Anweisungen \Macro{sectionformat} bis \Macro{subparagraphformat} keine interne Funktion. Stattdessen wird für diese Ebenen dann weiterhin \Macro{othersectionlevelsformat} verwendet. @@ -2414,7 +2383,7 @@ Die Definitionen der tieferen Ebenen entsprechen der von Wegen\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} der Verwendung von \Macro{IfUsePrefixLine} sollte \Macro{chapterformat} nicht außerhalb von -\Macro{chapter} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung ist nur innerhalb der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} verwendet werden. Diese Anweisung ist nur innerhalb der Gliederungsbefehle von \KOMAScript{} wohldefiniert. In diesem Fall wird im Falle der Verwendung einer Präfixzeile für die Nummer der Überschrift der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, während im anderen Fall der \PName{Sonst-Teil} @@ -2424,19 +2393,19 @@ Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie außerdem, dass bei der Umdefinierung \Macro{newcommand} durch \Macro{renewcommand} zu ersetzen ist. \begin{Example} - Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass bei \Macro{part} das Wort »Teil« vor + Angenommen, Sie wollen, dass bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} das Wort »Teil« vor der Nummer nicht ausgegeben wird. Dann können Sie beispielsweise folgende Anweisung in die Präambel Ihres Dokuments schreiben: \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\partformat}{\thepart\autodot} \end{lstcode} Genau genommen könnten Sie an dieser Stelle auch auf \Macro{autodot} - verzichten und stattdessen einen festen Punkt setzen. Da \Macro{part} mit + verzichten und stattdessen einen festen Punkt setzen. Da \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} mit römischen Zahlen nummeriert wird, muss der Punkt laut \cite{DUDEN} folgen. Allerdings bringen Sie sich dann um die Möglichkeit, die Option - \Option{numbers}\important{\Option{numbers}} einzusetzen und so von der + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}} einzusetzen und so von der Regel abzuweichen. Näheres zu der Option siehe - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers}. + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers}. Eine weitere Möglichkeit besteht darin, die Nummerierung der Abschnitte so in den Rand zu platzieren, dass der Überschriftentext @@ -2460,83 +2429,66 @@ Umdefinierung \Macro{newcommand} durch \Macro{renewcommand} zu ersetzen ist. Für Formatierungsänderungen bei den Überschriften, die über die Ausgabe der Nummer hinaus gehen, sie ausdrücklich auf -\Macro{chapterlineswithprefixformat}, \Macro{chapterlinesformat}, -\Macro{sectionlinesformat} und \Macro{sectioncatchphraseformat} in +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat}, +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat} und +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat} -verwiesen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{autodot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfUsePrefixLine}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{othersectionlevelsformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapterformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partformat}% +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat} verwiesen.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix}\Parameter{Zusatztext}\\ + \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix}\Parameter{Zusatztext} \Macro{chapapp} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapappifchapterprefix}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapapp}% Diese \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% \ChangedAt{v2.8o}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}% beiden Anweisungen werden nicht nur intern von {\KOMAScript} verwendet, sondern stehen auch dem Anwender zur Verfügung. Nachfolgend werden sie beispielsweise für die Umdefinierung anderer Anweisungen verwendet. -Bei Verwendung von Option -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{true}\important{\Option{chapterprefix}} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix}) setzt +Bei Verwendung von Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{true}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix}) setzt \Macro{chapappifchapterprefix} im Hauptteil des Dokuments das Wort »Kapitel«\Index{Kapitel>Ueberschrift=Überschrift} in der aktuellen Sprache gefolgt vom \PName{Zusatztext}. Im Anhang\Index{Anhang} wird stattdessen das Wort »Anhang« in der aktuellen Sprache, ebenfalls gefolgt vom \PName{Zusatztext}, ausgegeben. Bei der Einstellung -\OptionValue{chapterprefix}{false} wird hingegen nichts ausgegeben. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{chapterprefix}{false} wird hingegen nichts +ausgegeben. Die Anweisung \Macro{chapapp} setzt immer das Wort »Kapitel« beziehungsweise »Anhang«. Dabei spielt die Einstellung der Option -\Option{chapterprefix} keine Rolle. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} keine Rolle. Da es Kapitel nur bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} gibt, existieren die beiden Anweisungen auch nur bei diesen Klassen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapappifchapterprefix}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapapp}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel}\\ - \Macro{addchapmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel}\\ - \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel}\\ - \Macro{addsecmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel}\\ - \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel}\\ - \Macro{chaptermarkformat}\\ - \Macro{sectionmarkformat}\\ + \Macro{chaptermark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel} + \Macro{addchapmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel} + \Macro{sectionmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel} + \Macro{addsecmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel} + \Macro{subsectionmark}\Parameter{Kolumnentitel} + \Macro{chaptermarkformat} + \Macro{sectionmarkformat} \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addchapmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addsecmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}\Index{Kapitel}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}\Index{Abschnitt}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% \begin{Explain} - Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle} erwähnt, arbeitet der + Wie bereits in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle} erwähnt, arbeitet der Seitenstil \PValue{headings} mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}. Dazu werden die Anweisungen \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} beziehungsweise \Macro{sectionmark} und \Macro{subsectionmark} entsprechend definiert. - Gliederungsbefehle (\Macro{chapter}, \Macro{section}~\dots) führen - automatisch eine entsprechende \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung aus. Der - übergebene Parameter beinhaltet dabei den Text der + Gliederungsbefehle (\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section}~\dots) führen automatisch eine + entsprechende \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung aus. Der übergebene Parameter + beinhaltet dabei den Text der Gliederungsüberschrift\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften}. Die zugehörige Gliederungsnummer wird automatisch in der \Macro{\dots mark}-Anweisung hinzugefügt. Die Formatierung erfolgt dabei je nach Gliederungsebene mit @@ -2544,16 +2496,18 @@ gibt, existieren die beiden Anweisungen auch nur bei diesen Klassen.% \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und \Macro{subsectionmarkformat}. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Kolumnentitel von - \Macro{addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} und \Macro{addsec}\IndexCmd{addsec} - ebenfalls auf \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} basieren. Dabei - wird aber lokal der Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} auf einen Wert gesetzt, mit - dem die Nummerierung von Kapiteln beziehungsweise Abschnitten abgeschaltet - wird. Dies sollte man beispielsweise bei der Umdefinierung von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}\IndexCmd{addchap} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec}\IndexCmd{addsec} ebenfalls auf + \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} basieren. Dabei wird aber lokal + der Zähler \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.secnumdepth} auf einen Wert gesetzt, + mit dem die Nummerierung von Kapiteln beziehungsweise Abschnitten + abgeschaltet wird. Dies sollte man beispielsweise bei der Umdefinierung von \Macro{chaptermark} und \Macro{sectionmark} berücksichtigen (siehe - \Macro{ifnumbered} auf \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered}). Für die - Sternformen \Macro{addchap*} und \Macro{addsec*} existieren außerdem die - Anweisungen \Macro{addchapmark} und \Macro{addsecmark}, die in der - Voreinstellung ebenfalls in der genannten Weise definiert sind. + \Macro{ifnumbered} auf \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifnumbered}). Für die + Sternformen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addsec*} existieren außerdem die Anweisungen + \Macro{addchapmark} und \Macro{addsecmark}, die in der Voreinstellung + ebenfalls in der genannten Weise definiert sind. Während\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} bei \Class{scrartcl} weder \Macro{chaptermark} noch \Macro{addchapmark} oder @@ -2563,13 +2517,14 @@ gibt, existieren die beiden Anweisungen auch nur bei diesen Klassen.% Pakets \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} ändert sich dies jedoch (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}). \end{Explain} -So wie mit \Macro{partformat} bis \Macro{subparagraphformat} die -Nummern der Gliederungsüberschriften formatiert ausgegeben werden, werden mit -den Anweisungen \Macro{chaptermarkformat}, \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und +So wie mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.partformat} bis +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subparagraphformat} die Nummern der +Gliederungsüberschriften formatiert ausgegeben werden, werden mit den +Anweisungen \Macro{chaptermarkformat}, \Macro{sectionmarkformat} und \Macro{subsectionmarkformat} die Nummern der Gliederungsebenen in den -automatischen Kolumnentiteln formatiert ausgegeben. Mit -\Macro{renewcommand} können sie eigenen Anforderungen angepasst werden. Die -Originaldefinitionen aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind: +automatischen Kolumnentiteln formatiert ausgegeben. Mit \Macro{renewcommand} +können sie eigenen Anforderungen angepasst werden. Die Originaldefinitionen +aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind: \begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{% \chapappifchapterprefix{\ }\thechapter\autodot\enskip} @@ -2587,43 +2542,32 @@ Originaldefinitionen aus den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen sind: \chapapp~\thechapter\autodot\enskip} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -Wie Sie sehen, finden hier die beiden Anweisungen \Macro{chapapp} und -\Macro{chapappifchapterprefix} Verwendung, die weiter oben erklärt wurden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chaptermarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionmarkformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addsecmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addchapmark}% +Wie Sie sehen, finden hier die beiden Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapapp} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix} Verwendung, die weiter oben +erklärt wurden.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{secnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{partnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{chapternumdepth}\\ - \Macro{sectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{subsectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{subsubsectionnumdepth}\\ - \Macro{paragraphnumdepth}\\ + \Counter{secnumdepth} + \Macro{partnumdepth} + \Macro{chapternumdepth} + \Macro{sectionnumdepth} + \Macro{subsectionnumdepth} + \Macro{subsubsectionnumdepth} + \Macro{paragraphnumdepth} \Macro{subparagraphnumdepth} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{secnumdepth}\BeginIndex{}{Nummerierung}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{partnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chapternumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{paragraphnumdepth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphnumdepth}% +\BeginIndex{}{Nummerierung}% Normalerweise werden bei den Klassen \Class{scrbook}\IndexClass{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt}\IndexClass{scrreprt} die Gliederungsebenen -\Macro{part}\IndexCmd{part}\IndexCmd{chapter}\IndexCmd{section} bis -\Macro{subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection} und bei der Klasse -\Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} die Ebenen \Macro{part} bis -\Macro{subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection} nummeriert. Gesteuert wird dies -über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}\IndexCmd{part}\IndexCmd{chapter}\IndexCmd{section} +bis \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsection}\IndexCmd{subsection} und bei der +Klasse \Class{scrartcl}\IndexClass{scrartcl} die Ebenen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} bis +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.subsubsection}\IndexCmd{subsubsection} +nummeriert. Gesteuert wird dies über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth}. Damit\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} sich der Anwender keine abstrakten Nummern merken muss, um @@ -2646,27 +2590,18 @@ nicht empfohlen, da dies zu unvorhergesehenen Ergebnissen sowohl mit \KOMAScript{} als auch bei Verwendung von Drittpaketen führen kann. Der Zähler \Counter{secnumdepth} ist nicht zu verwechseln mit dem Zähler -\Counter{tocdepth} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Auch sind die Werte je nach +\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth} (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}). Auch sind die Werte je nach Klasse nicht eins zu eins übertragbar.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subparagraphnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{paragraphnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsubsectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subsectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sectionnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chapternumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{partnumdepth}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{secnumdepth}\EndIndex{}{Nummerierung} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifnumbered}\Parameter{Gliederungsebene}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Else-Teil}\\ + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Else-Teil} \Macro{ifunnumbered}\Parameter{Gliederungsebene}% - \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Else-Teil} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Else-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifnumbered}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifunnumbered}% Nachdem\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} zuvor erklärt wurde, wie man bestimmen kann, welche Gliederungsebenen nummeriert werden sollen, kann mit diesen Anweisungen nun @@ -2682,23 +2617,21 @@ wohingegen \Macro{ifunnumbered} den \PName{Dann-Teil} ausführt. Als \PValue{subsubsection}, \PValue{paragraph} oder \PValue{subparagraph}. \KOMAScript{} selbst verwendet diesen Test beispielsweise in der Definition -von \Macro{chaptermark}\IndexCmd{chaptermark} beim Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. Dadurch wird indirekt auch -sichergestellt, dass Überschriften mit \Macro{addchap} den Kolumnentitel nicht -mit einer Nummer versehen (siehe auch \Macro{addchapmark}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifnumbered}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifunnumbered}% +von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermark}\IndexCmd{chaptermark} beim Seitenstil +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}. Dadurch wird indirekt auch +sichergestellt, dass Überschriften mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap} den +Kolumnentitel nicht mit einer Nummer versehen (siehe auch +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchapmark}).% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setpartpreamble}% - \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel}\\ + \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel} \Macro{setchapterpreamble}% \OParameter{Position}\OParameter{Breite}\Parameter{Präambel} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setpartpreamble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setchapterpreamble}% \OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}}Teile\Index{Teil>Praeambel=Präambel} und Kapitel\Index{Kapitel>Praeambel=Präambel} können bei {\KOMAScript} mit einer @@ -2707,8 +2640,9 @@ Layout mit der Klassenoption \Option{twocolumn}\IndexOption{twocolumn} nützlich, da die \PName{Präambel} zusammen mit der Überschrift einspaltig gesetzt wird. Die \PName{Präambel} kann auch mehrere Absätze beinhalten. Die Anweisung zum Setzen der \PName{Präambel} muss vor der jeweiligen -\Macro{part}- oder \Macro{addpart}- bzw. \Macro{chapter}- oder -\Macro{addchap}-Anweisung stehen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part}- oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addpart}- +bzw. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter}- oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap}-Anweisung stehen. \begin{Example} Sie schreiben einen Bericht über den Zustand einer Firma. Dabei organisieren Sie den Bericht so, dass jeder Abteilung ein eigener @@ -2724,9 +2658,9 @@ Anweisung zum Setzen der \PName{Präambel} muss vor der jeweiligen \end{lstcode} Je nach Einstellung der Optionen für die Überschriftengröße\Index{Ueberschriften=Überschriften} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.headings}) und der Optionen für die Form - der \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{abstract} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.abstract}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.abstract}), + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.headings}) und der Optionen für die Form + der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung\IndexEnv{abstract} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.abstract}), sieht das Ergebnis ungefähr wie folgt aus: \begin{ShowOutput}\centering {\LARGE\usekomafont{disposition} Teil III.\par\vspace{14pt}} @@ -2743,9 +2677,9 @@ Anweisung zum Setzen der \PName{Präambel} muss vor der jeweiligen \end{Example} Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass Sie für die Abstände der Präambel zur Teilüberschrift bzw. zum Kapiteltext selbst verantwortlich sind. Bitte -beachten Sie auch, dass die \Environment{abstract}-Umgebung bei der Klasse -\Class{scrbook} nicht existiert (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.abstract}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.env.abstract}). +beachten Sie auch, dass die \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}-Umgebung bei der +Klasse \Class{scrbook} nicht existiert (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.abstract}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.abstract}). Das\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} erste optionale Argument \PName{Position} bestimmt über ein bis zwei @@ -2774,31 +2708,31 @@ kombiniert werden. Eine häufigere Anwendung von \Macro{setchapterpreamble} dürfte ein Spruch oder Zitat zu einer Überschrift sein. Die dazu verwendbare Anweisung -\Macro{dictum}\IndexCmd{dictum} ist im nachfolgenden Abschnitt erläutert. Dort -findet sich auch ein entsprechendes Beispiel. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.dictum}\IndexCmd{dictum} ist im nachfolgenden +Abschnitt erläutert. Dort findet sich auch ein entsprechendes Beispiel. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass \PName{Präambel} bei der Platzierung über der Überschrift in den dort vorhandenen freien Platz gesetzt wird. Die Überschrift wird dabei nicht nach unten verschoben. Der Anwender ist also selbst dafür verantwortlich dass \PName{Präambel} nicht zu groß ist und der vorhandene freie Platz über der Überschrift genügt. Siehe dazu auch -\Macro{chapterheadstartvskip} in +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip} in \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts} auf -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip}. +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip}. % % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setpartpreamble}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setchapterpreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Gliederung} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{15}% \section{Schlauer Spruch} +\LoadCommonFile{dictum}% \section{Schlauer Spruch} -\LoadCommon{12}% \section{Listen} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Listen} \section{Mathematik} \seclabel{math}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Mathematik}% \BeginIndex{}{Formeln}% \BeginIndex{}{Gleichungen}% @@ -2807,7 +2741,7 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen stellen keine eigenen Umgebungen für mathematische Formeln, Gleichungssysteme oder ähnliche Elemente der Mathematik bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll und ganz auf den \LaTeX-Kern. Dies gilt auch für die Realisierung der beiden -Optionen \Option{leqno} und \Option{fleqn}. +Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.leqno} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fleqn}. Auf eine Beschreibung der Mathematikumgebungen des \LaTeX-Kerns, also \Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath}, @@ -2821,43 +2755,42 @@ die Verwendung von Paket \Package{amsmath}\textnote{Tipp!} empfohlen (siehe \begin{Declaration} \Option{leqno} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{leqno}% Gleichungen\Index{Gleichungen>Nummern} werden normalerweise auf der rechten Seite nummeriert. Mit Hilfe der Standardoption \Option{leqno} wird die Standardoptionsdatei \File{leqno.clo} geladen. Dadurch erfolgt die Nummerierung von Gleichungen links. Diese Option ist als optionales -Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \Macro{documentclass} zu verwenden. Eine -Einstellung per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} wird nicht -unterstützt. Dies wäre auch deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den -Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket \Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, -nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese Option reagieren kann.% +Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu +verwenden. Eine Einstellung per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch +deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket +\Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese +Option reagieren kann.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{leqno}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Option{fleqn} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fleqn}% Gleichungen\Index{Gleichungen>Ausrichtung} werden normalerweise horizontal zentriert ausgegeben. Mit Hilfe der Standardoption \Option{fleqn} wird die Standardoptionsdatei \File{fleqn.clo} geladen. Dadurch erfolgt die Ausgabe von Gleichungen linksbündig. Diese Option ist als optionales -Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \Macro{documentclass} zu verwenden. Eine -Einstellung per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} wird nicht -unterstützt. Dies wäre auch deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den -Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket \Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, -nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese Option reagieren kann.% +Argument\textnote{Achtung!} von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu +verwenden. Eine Einstellung per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. Dies wäre auch +deshalb nicht sinnvoll, weil das für den Mathematiksatz empfohlene Paket +\Package{amsmath} ebenfalls nur beim Laden, nicht aber zur Laufzeit auf diese +Option reagieren kann.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{fleqn}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Gleichungen}% -\EndIndex{}{Formeln}% -\EndIndex{}{Mathematik} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen} \seclabel{floats} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Gleitumgebungen} \BeginIndex{}{Tabellen} \BeginIndex{}{Abbildungen} @@ -2898,11 +2831,10 @@ selbstverständlich sein, wird aber leider häufig nicht bedacht. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{captions}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{captions}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{captions~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Bei den Standardklassen werden die Titel von Gleitumgebungen, die mit der -Anweisung \Macro{caption}\IndexCmd{caption} (siehe unten) gesetzt werden, als +Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} (siehe unten) gesetzt werden, als Unterschrift formatiert. Darüber hinaus wird zwischen ein"~ und mehrzeiligen Unterschriften unterschieden, wobei einzeilige Unterschriften horizontal zentriert werden. @@ -2936,7 +2868,7 @@ wird wieder die Voreinstellung der Formatierung als Tabellenunterschrift gewählt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass die beiden Werte lediglich die Formatierung ändern. Der Ort, an dem die Über"~ oder Unterschrift gesetzt wird, hängt bei den Gleitumgebungen von -\KOMAScript{} allein vom Ort ab, an dem die Anweisung \Macro{caption} +\KOMAScript{} allein vom Ort ab, an dem die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} verwendet wird. Dies ändert sich jedoch bei Verwendung des Pakets \Package{float}\IndexPackage{float} mit der Anweisung \Macro{restylefloat}\IndexCmd{restylefloat}\important{\Macro{restylefloat}} @@ -2973,7 +2905,7 @@ Unterschriften oder Überschriften nicht mehr funktionieren, sobald Sie \Package{float}-Paket und \Macro{restylefloat} entnehmen Sie bitte \cite{package:float}. Die zusätzliche Unterstützung, die \KOMAScript{} bei Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets bietet, finden Sie bei der Erklärung zu -\PValue{komaabove} (siehe \autopageref{desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove}). +\PValue{komaabove} (siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.floatstyle.komaabove}). \leavevmode\phantomsection\nobreak \label{desc:maincls.option.captions.nooneline}\nobreak @@ -2990,9 +2922,9 @@ horizontal zentriert werden, entspricht der Einstellung Als Besonderheit bietet \KOMAScript{} innerhalb von Gleitumgebungen die Möglichkeit, den Titel statt als Über"~ oder Unterschrift neben den -eigentlichen Inhalt zu setzen. Die\important{\Environment{captionbeside}} dazu -notwendige Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside}\IndexEnv{captionbeside} ist -ab \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside} erklärt. Die Einstellungen für +eigentlichen Inhalt zu setzen. Die\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}} dazu +notwendige Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}\IndexEnv{captionbeside} ist +ab \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} erklärt. Die Einstellungen für diese Umgebung können ebenfalls mit der Option \Option{captions} geändert werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind \autoref{tab:maincls.captions} zu entnehmen. @@ -3008,17 +2940,17 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{captions} (\emph{Fortsetzung})% }% \entry{\PValue{bottombeside}, \PValue{besidebottom}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der untersten + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der untersten Grundlinie auf Höhe der untersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung ausgerichtet.% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{bottombeside}}}% \entry{\PValue{centeredbeside}, \PValue{besidecentered}, \PValue{middlebeside}, \PValue{besidemiddle}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden zum Inhalt der + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden zum Inhalt der Gleitumgebung vertikal zentriert ausgerichtet.% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{centeredbeside}}}% \entry{\PValue{figureheading}, \PValue{figureabove}, \PValue{abovefigure}, @@ -3046,17 +2978,17 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind \OptionValue{captions}{figureheading}.}% \entry{\PValue{innerbeside}, \PValue{besideinner}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{innerbeside}}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden bei doppelseitigem - Satz in der Voreinstellung innen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden bei doppelseitigem Satz + in der Voreinstellung innen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung gesetzt. Dies entspricht im einseitigen Satz \OptionValue{captions}{leftbeside}.}% \entry{\PValue{leftbeside}, \PValue{besideleft}\IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{leftbeside}}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden in der Voreinstellung + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden in der Voreinstellung links neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung gesetzt.}% \pventry{nooneline}{% Einzeilige Über"~ und Unterschriften von Gleitumgebungen werden nicht @@ -3068,17 +3000,17 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{oneline}}}% \entry{\PValue{outerbeside}, \PValue{besideouter}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{outerbeside}}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden bei doppelseitigem - Satz in der Voreinstellung außen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden bei doppelseitigem Satz + in der Voreinstellung außen neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung gesetzt. Dies entspricht im einseitigen Satz \OptionValue{captions}{rightbeside}.}% \entry{\PValue{rightbeside}, \PValue{besideright}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{rightbeside}}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden in der Voreinstellung + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden in der Voreinstellung rechts neben dem Inhalt der Gleitumgebung gesetzt.}% \entry{\PValue{signature}, \PValue{below}, \PValue{bot}, \PValue{bottom}% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{signature}}}{% @@ -3099,25 +3031,22 @@ werden. Die dabei möglichen Werte für die jeweilige \PName{Einstellung} sind Bei Tabellen wird (ggf. abweichend von \OptionValue{captions}{heading}) die Formatierung als Unterschrift gewählt.}% \entry{\PValue{topbeside}, \PValue{besidetop}}{% - Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \Environment{captionsbeside} (siehe - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der obersten + Gleitumgebungstitel der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} + (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.floats}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside}) werden mit der obersten Grundlinie auf Höhe der obersten Grundlinie des Inhalts der Gleitumgebung ausgerichtet.% \IndexOption{captions~=\PValue{topbeside}}}% \end{desclist}% % -\EndIndex{Option}{captions~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{caption}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}\Parameter{Titel}\\ - \Macro{captionbelow}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}\Parameter{Titel}\\ + \Macro{caption}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}\Parameter{Titel} + \Macro{captionbelow}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}\Parameter{Titel} \Macro{captionabove}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}\Parameter{Titel} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{caption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionabove}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionbelow}% Tabellen und Abbildungen werden bei den Standardklassen mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{caption} mit einem \PName{Titel} in Form einer Unterschrift\Index{Tabellen>Unterschrift} versehen. Bei Abbildungen ist dies @@ -3131,13 +3060,13 @@ Gegensatz zu den Standardklassen die Anweisungen \Macro{captionbelow} für Sowohl bei Tabellen als auch bei Abbildungen oder generell für alle Gleitumgebungen lässt sich das Verhalten von \Macro{caption} mit der Option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions} steuern, die am Anfang dieses -Abschnitts zu finden ist. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität ist voreingestellt, -dass sich \Macro{caption} bei allen Gleitumgebungen wie \Macro{captionbelow} -verhält. Es wird jedoch empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, Tabellenüberschriften zu -verwenden und auf die Formatierung mit \OptionValue{captions}{tableheading} -entsprechend umzustellen oder bei Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu -greifen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions} steuern, die am +Anfang dieses Abschnitts zu finden ist. Aus Gründen der Kompatibilität ist +voreingestellt, dass sich \Macro{caption} bei allen Gleitumgebungen wie +\Macro{captionbelow} verhält. Es wird jedoch empfohlen\textnote{Tipp!}, +Tabellenüberschriften zu verwenden und auf die Formatierung mit +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading} entsprechend umzustellen oder bei +Tabellen auf \Macro{captionabove} zurück zu greifen. % \begin{Example} Sie wollen mit @@ -3190,24 +3119,26 @@ greifen. \end{ShowOutput} Da Sie konsequent nicht nur eine, sondern alle Tabellen mit Überschriften versehen, können Sie stattdessen auch die Option - \OptionValue{captions}{tableheading} setzen (siehe - \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.tableheading}). Dann genügt es, + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{tableheading} setzen (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.tableheading}). Dann genügt es, wenn Sie wie bei den Standardklassen \Macro{caption} verwenden. Sie erhalten trotzdem das Ergebnis von \Macro{captionabove}. \end{Example} \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{caption}\LabelFontElement{caption}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{captionlabel}\LabelFontElement{captionlabel}% Die Schriftart\ChangedAt{v2.8p}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} für die Beschreibung und das Label~-- »Abbildung« oder »Tabelle« gefolgt von der -Nummer und einem Trennzeichen -- kann über die Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} -und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Zuständig -sind hier die Elemente \FontElement{caption}\IndexFontElement{caption} und -\FontElement{captionlabel}\IndexFontElement{captionlabel} (siehe -\autoref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}, -\autopageref{tab:maincls.elementsWithoutText}). Dabei wird die Schriftart für -das Element \FontElement{caption} zunächst auch auf das Element +Nummer und einem Trennzeichen -- kann über die Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +verändert werden. Zuständig sind hier die Elemente \FontElement{caption} und +\FontElement{captionlabel} (siehe \autoref{tab:maincls.fontelements}, +\autopageref{tab:maincls.fontelements}). Dabei wird die Schriftart für das +Element \FontElement{caption} zunächst auch auf das Element \FontElement{captionlabel} angewandt, bevor dessen spezifische Schriftart Anwendung findet. Die Vorbelegungen sind \autoref{tab:maincls.captionFont} zu entnehmen. @@ -3248,33 +3179,27 @@ entnehmen. \begin{lstcode} \setkomafont{captionlabel}{\sffamily\bfseries} \end{lstcode} - Das Ergebnis wäre bei Verwendung von \Macro{addtokomafont} in diesem Fall - übrigens gleich. + Das Ergebnis wäre bei Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} + in diesem Fall übrigens gleich. \end{Example}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{caption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionabove}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionbelow}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{captionof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}% - \Parameter{Titel}\\ - \Macro{captionaboveof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}% - \Parameter{Titel}\\ - \Macro{captionbelowof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag}% - \Parameter{Titel} + \Macro{captionof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag} + \Parameter{Titel} + \Macro{captionaboveof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag} + \Parameter{Titel} + \Macro{captionbelowof}\Parameter{Objekttyp}\OParameter{Verzeichniseintrag} + \Parameter{Titel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionbelowof}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionaboveof}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionof}% Ähnlich wie die Pakete \Package{caption}\IndexPackage{caption} und \Package{capt-of}\IndexPackage{capt-of} bietet auch \KOMAScript{} die Anweisung \Macro{captionof}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} mit der man auch außerhalb einer Gleitumgebung oder in einer fremden Gleitumgebung einen entsprechenden Titel mit Eintrag in das jeweilige Verzeichnis setzen kann. Dabei muss im Gegensatz -zu \Macro{caption} die Art des Gleitobjekts als zusätzliches erstes Argument +zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} die Art des Gleitobjekts als zusätzliches erstes Argument angegeben werden. Darüber hinaus bietet \KOMAScript{} zusätzlich auch die @@ -3284,7 +3209,7 @@ dienen als Gegenstücke zu \Macro{captionabove} und \Macro{captionbelow}. Selbstverständlich berücksichtigt\ChangedAt{v3.09a}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} \Macro{captionof} auch die -Einstellungen von Option \Option{captions} bezüglich der Formatierung des +Einstellungen von Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} bezüglich der Formatierung des Titels als Über- oder Unterschrift. Diese Fähigkeit geht jedoch eventuell durch das Laden von Paketen wie \Package{capt-of} oder \Package{caption} verloren. Bei Verwendung von \Package{caption} ist die Anleitung zu diesem @@ -3320,11 +3245,11 @@ Paket zu beachten!% zusätzlicher Wortabstand zwischen die beiden \Environment{minipage}-Umgebungen gesetzt würde. - Die Abbildungsunterschrift wurde mit \Macro{caption} gesetzt. Für die - Tabellenüberschrift wurde \Macro{captionaboveof} verwendet. Als erstes - Argument wurde \PValue{table} angegeben. Dadurch weiß \KOMAScript{}, - dass es sich trotz \Environment{figure}-Umgebung um eine Tabellenüberschrift - handelt. + Die Abbildungsunterschrift wurde mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} + gesetzt. Für die Tabellenüberschrift wurde \Macro{captionaboveof} + verwendet. Als erstes Argument wurde \PValue{table} angegeben. Dadurch weiß + \KOMAScript{}, dass es sich trotz \Environment{figure}-Umgebung um eine + Tabellenüberschrift handelt. Das optionale Argument von \Macro{captionaboveof} setzt den Eintrag in das Tabellenverzeichnis. Ohne das optionale Argument würde der als letztes @@ -3376,28 +3301,28 @@ kann. Zusätzlich sollte man die \Environment{minipage} dann noch in eine \Environment{flushleft}-Umgebung einbetten, um einerseits einen gefälligen Abstand zum Text davor und dahinter zu erreichen, und andererseits den Absatzeinzug vor der \Environment{minipage} zu verhindern.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionof}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionaboveof}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionbelowof}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel}\Parameter{Titel}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{Anordnung}\OParameter{Breite}% - \OParameter{Offset}\\% - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionbeside}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}\OParameter{Verzeichnistitel}% - \Parameter{Titel}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionbeside}}% - \OParameter{Anordnung}\OParameter{Breite}% - \OParameter{Offset}\PValue{*}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionbeside} + \begin{Environment}{captionbeside} + \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel} + \Parameter{Titel} + \OParameter{Anordnung} + \OParameter{Breite} + \OParameter{Offset} + \begin{Body}\BodyDots\end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \labelsuffix[*] + \begin{Environment}{captionbeside} + \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel} + \Parameter{Titel} + \OParameter{Anordnung} + \OParameter{Breite} + \OParameter{Offset}\PValue{*} + \begin{Body}\BodyDots\end{Body} + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{captionbeside}% Neben \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% \Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% den Unter- und Überschriften findet man insbesondere bei kleineren @@ -3410,7 +3335,7 @@ bietet jedoch eine spezielle Umgebung. Diese Umgebung kann innerhalb der Gleitumgebungen verwendet werden. Der erste optionale Parameter \PName{Verzeichnistitel} und der obligatorische Parameter \PName{Titel} entsprechen dabei genau den gleichnamigen Parametern von -\Macro{caption}, \Macro{captionabove} oder \Macro{captionbelow}. Der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow}. Der \PName{Titel} wird dabei neben den Inhalt der Umgebung gesetzt. Ob der \PName{Titel} rechts oder links daneben gesetzt wird, kann mit @@ -3428,8 +3353,8 @@ genau einer der folgenden Buchstaben angegeben werden: Voreingestellt ist rechts neben dem Inhalt der Umgebung. Diese Voreinstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann jedoch mit der Option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions}\important{\Option{captions}} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions}) und deren Werte +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}) und deren Werte \PValue{innerbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{innerbeside}}, \PValue{leftbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{leftbeside}}, \PValue{outerbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{outerbeside}} @@ -3466,8 +3391,8 @@ dass die untere Grundlinie des Inhalts des Gleitobjekts und die untere Grundlinie von \PName{Titel} auf einer Höhe liegen. Diese Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann mit der Option -\Option{captions}\IndexOption{captions} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions}) und deren Werte +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}\IndexOption{captions} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions}) und deren Werte \PValue{topbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{topbeside}}, \PValue{centeredbeside}\IndexOption[indexmain]{captions~=\PValue{centeredbeside}} und @@ -3594,45 +3519,46 @@ Anweisung \Macro{raisebox}\IndexCmd{raisebox} verändert werden. \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Env}{captionbeside} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{captionofbeside}}% - \Parameter{Objekttyp}% - \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel}\Parameter{Titel}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}}% - \OParameter{Anordnung}\OParameter{Breite}% - \OParameter{Offset}\\% - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionofbeside}\\ - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}\Parameter{Objekttyp}% - \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel}% - \Parameter{Titel}\texttt{\%}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{begin}\PParameter{captionofbeside}}% - \OParameter{Anordnung}\OParameter{Breite}% - \OParameter{Offset}\PValue{*}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{captionofbeside} + \begin{Environment}{captionofbeside} + \Parameter{Objekttyp} + \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel} + \Parameter{Titel} + \OParameter{Anordnung} + \OParameter{Breite} + \OParameter{Offset} + \begin{Body}\BodyDots\end{Body} + \end{Environment} + \labelsuffix[*] + \begin{Environment}{captionofbeside} + \Parameter{Objekttyp} + \OParameter{Verzeichnistitel} + \Parameter{Titel} + \OParameter{Anordnung} + \OParameter{Breite} + \OParameter{Offset}\PValue{*} + \begin{Body}\BodyDots\end{Body} + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{captionofbeside}% Wie\ChangedAt{v3.10}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} zu \Macro{caption} mit \Macro{captionof} eine Variante -existiert, bei der der \PName{Objekttyp} nicht durch die Verwendung innerhalb -einer Gleitumgebung dieses Typs bestimmt wird, so gibt es passend zur Umgebung -\Environment{captionbeside} mit \Environment{captionofbeside} auch eine -entsprechende Umgebung. Im Unterschied zu -\Environment{captionbeside} ist auch hier, dass der \PName{Objekttyp} als -zusätzliches, erstes Argument anzugeben ist.% + \Class{scrartcl}} zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption} mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionof} eine Variante existiert, bei der der +\PName{Objekttyp} nicht durch die Verwendung innerhalb einer Gleitumgebung +dieses Typs bestimmt wird, so gibt es passend zur Umgebung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} mit \Environment{captionofbeside} auch +eine entsprechende Umgebung. Im Unterschied zu +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.captionbeside} ist auch hier der \PName{Objekttyp} als +zusätzliches, erstes Argument anzugeben.% % -\EndIndex{Env}{captionofbeside} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \FloatStyle{komaabove}\\ + \FloatStyle{komaabove} \FloatStyle{komabelow} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Floatstyle}{komaabove}% -\BeginIndex{Floatstyle}{komabelow}% Bei\OnlyAt{\Package{float}} Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets\IndexPackage{float} wird das Aussehen der damit definierten Gleitumgebungen allein vom \emph{float}-Stil bestimmt. Dies @@ -3645,18 +3571,16 @@ können bei Verwendung des \Package{float}-Pakets wie die dort definierten Stile \PValue{plain}\IndexFloatstyle{plain}, \PValue{boxed}\IndexFloatstyle{boxed} oder \PValue{ruled}\IndexFloatstyle{ruled} aktiviert werden. Siehe dazu -\cite{package:float}. Beim Stil \PValue{komaabove} werden \Macro{caption}, -\Macro{captionabove} und \Macro{captionbelow} als Überschrift, beim Stil +\cite{package:float}. Beim Stil \PValue{komaabove} werden \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.caption}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionabove} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionbelow} als Überschrift, beim Stil \PValue{komabelow} als Unterschrift gesetzt.% % -\EndIndex{Floatstyle}{komaabove}% -\EndIndex{Floatstyle}{komabelow}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{captionformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionformat}% Bei {\KOMAScript} gibt es verschiedene Eingriffsmöglichkeiten, um die Formatierung der Beschreibung zu ändern. Die Änderung der Schriftart wurde bereits erläutert. Das oder die Trennzeichen zwischen dem Label @@ -3665,7 +3589,7 @@ und dem eigentlichen Beschreibungstext sind im Makro \Macro{\dots}format-Anweisungen ist hier also nicht der Zähler, sondern nur die auf den Zähler folgenden Angaben enthalten. Die Originaldefinition lautet: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\captionformat}{:\ } \end{lstcode} Auch diese kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden. @@ -3681,25 +3605,22 @@ Auch diese kann mit \Macro{renewcommand} geändert werden. Dokuments stellen. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{figureformat}\\ + \Macro{figureformat} \Macro{tableformat} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{figureformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tableformat}% -Es wurde schon darauf hingewiesen, dass \Macro{captionformat} keine -Formatierung für das Label selbst enthält. Dieses sollte nun -keineswegs über Umdefinierung der Anweisungen für die Zählerausgabe, -\Macro{thefigure} oder \Macro{thetable}, verändert werden. Eine solche -Umdefinierung hätte nämlich auch Auswirkungen auf die Ausgabe von -\Macro{ref} oder der Verzeichnisse. Stattdessen bietet {\KOMAScript} -auch hier zwei \Macro{\dots format}-Anweisungen. Diese sind wie folgt -vordefiniert: +Es wurde schon darauf hingewiesen, dass \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.captionformat} +keine Formatierung für das Label selbst enthält. Dieses sollte nun keineswegs +über Umdefinierung der Anweisungen für die Zählerausgabe, \Macro{thefigure} +oder \Macro{thetable}, verändert werden. Eine solche Umdefinierung hätte +nämlich auch Auswirkungen auf die Ausgabe von \Macro{ref} oder der +Verzeichnisse. Stattdessen bietet {\KOMAScript} auch hier zwei \Macro{\dots + format}-Anweisungen. Diese sind wie folgt vordefiniert: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\figureformat}{\figurename~\thefigure\autodot} \newcommand*{\tableformat}{\tablename~\thetable\autodot} \end{lstcode} @@ -3721,18 +3642,14 @@ angepasst werden. werden. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{figureformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tableformat}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setcapindent}\Parameter{Einzug}\\ - \Macro{setcapindent*}\Parameter{XEinzug}\\ + \Macro{setcapindent}\Parameter{Einzug} + \Macro{setcapindent*}\Parameter{XEinzug} \Macro{setcaphanging} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcaphanging}% Wie bereits erwähnt wurde, werden in den Standardklassen\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} die Beschreibungen nicht hängend gesetzt. Das heißt: In mehrzeiligen @@ -3757,10 +3674,10 @@ Beschreibung, nicht jedoch die folgenden, um den Betrag von \PName{Einzug} eingerückt werden. Ob einzeilige Beschreibungen wie mehrzeilige Beschreibungen gesetzt werden -oder eine Sonderbehandlung erfahren, wird über die Option \Option{captions} -gewählt. Siehe hierzu die Erklärung zu den Werten \PValue{oneline} und -\PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.oneline}. +oder eine Sonderbehandlung erfahren, wird über die Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.captions} gewählt. Siehe hierzu die Erklärung zu +den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \PValue{nooneline} dieser Option auf +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.oneline}. \begin{Example} Die Abbildungen~\ref{fig:maincls.caption.first} bis @@ -3833,21 +3750,15 @@ gewählt. Siehe hierzu die Erklärung zu den Werten \PValue{oneline} und \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapindent*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcaphanging}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setcapwidth}\OParameter{Ausrichtung}\Parameter{Breite}\\ - \Macro{setcapdynwidth}\OParameter{Ausrichtung}\Parameter{Breite}\\ - \Macro{setcapmargin}\OParameter{Rand \kern-.25em links}\Parameter{Rand}\\ + \Macro{setcapwidth}\OParameter{Ausrichtung}\Parameter{Breite} + \Macro{setcapdynwidth}\OParameter{Ausrichtung}\Parameter{Breite} + \Macro{setcapmargin}\OParameter{Rand \kern-.25em links}\Parameter{Rand} \Macro{setcapmargin*}\OParameter{Rand \kern-.25em innen}\Parameter{Rand} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapdynwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin*}% Mit \ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Hilfe dieser drei Befehle kann die Breite und Anordnung der Beschreibung beeinflusst werden. Normalerweise steht die gesamte Text- @@ -3900,8 +3811,8 @@ Hier\textnote{Achtung!} ergibt sich bei \important{\Package{longtable}} das gleiche Problem wie bei der Ausrichtung außen oder innen bei der Anweisung \Macro{setcapwidth}. Die Verwendung von \Macro{setcapmargin} oder \Macro{setcapmargin*} aktiviert außerdem -\OptionValue{captions}{nooneline} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.captions.nooneline}) für die Beschreibungen, +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{captions}{nooneline} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.captions.nooneline}) für die Beschreibungen, die mit dieser Randeinstellung gesetzt werden. Man\textnote{Tipp!} kann übrigens auch negative Werte für \PName{Rand} und @@ -3914,54 +3825,48 @@ trickreiche Anwendung für \Macro{setcapwidth} in \iffree{\cite{book:komascript}}{\autoref{cha:floattricks}, \autopageref{cha:floattricks}} zu finden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapdynwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setcapmargin*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Option{origlongtable} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{origlongtable}% \BeginIndex{Package}{longtable}% Falls die Tabellenüberschriften des \Package{longtable}-Pakets (siehe \cite{package:longtable}) von den \KOMAScript-Klassen nicht umdefiniert werden sollen, kann die Option \Option{origlongtable} gesetzt werden. Diese Option\textnote{Achtung!} ist als optionales Argument von -\Macro{documentclass} zu verwenden. Eine Einstellung per \Macro{KOMAoptions} -oder \Macro{KOMAoption} wird nicht unterstützt. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} zu verwenden. Eine Einstellung per +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} +wird nicht unterstützt. % -\EndIndex{Package}{longtable}% -\EndIndex{Option}{origlongtable}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Abbildungen}% -\EndIndex{}{Tabellen}% -\EndIndex{}{Gleitumgebungen}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{listof}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{listof}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} werden die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen -- wie das Tabellen"~\Index{Tabellen>Verzeichnis} und das -Abbildungsverzeichnis\Index{Abbildungen>Verzeichnis} -- nicht nummeriert -oder in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen. In \autoref{sec:maincls.toc} wurde +Abbildungsverzeichnis\Index{Abbildungen>Verzeichnis} -- nicht nummeriert oder +in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen. In \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc} wurde dies bereits näher ausgeführt. Alternativ zu den dort erwähnten Einstellungen -\OptionValue{toc}{nolistof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nolistof}}, -\OptionValue{toc}{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listof}} und -\OptionValue{toc}{listofnumbered}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listofnumbered}}, kann -dieses Verhalten auch aus Sicht der Verzeichnisse selbst gesehen werden. Daher -kann man die gleichen Ergebnisse auch mit den Einstellungen -\OptionValue{listof}{notoc}, \OptionValue{listof}{totoc} und -\OptionValue{listof}{numbered} erreichen. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{nolistof}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nolistof}}, +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{listof}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listof}} und +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{listofnumbered}% +\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{listofnumbered}}, kann dieses Verhalten auch aus +Sicht der Verzeichnisse selbst gesehen werden. Daher kann man die gleichen +Ergebnisse auch mit den Einstellungen \OptionValue{listof}{notoc}, +\OptionValue{listof}{totoc} und \OptionValue{listof}{numbered} erreichen. Dabei werden in der Voreinstellung für die Überschriften der Verzeichnisse die -oberste verfügbare Gliederungsebene unterhalb von \Macro{part} verwendet. Bei -\Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} ist das die Kapitelebene, bei -\Class{scrartcl} die +oberste verfügbare Gliederungsebene unterhalb von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.part} verwendet. Bei \Class{scrbook} und +\Class{scrreprt} ist das die Kapitelebene, bei \Class{scrartcl} die Abschnittsebene. Mit\important{\OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}}% \ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Hilfe der Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown} kann hingegen die nächst @@ -3979,8 +3884,9 @@ tiefere Gliederungsebene verwendet werden. \listoffigures \listoftables \end{lstcode} - Näheres zur Anweisung \Macro{addchap*} ist \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*} zu entnehmen. + Näheres zur Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} ist + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addchap*} zu + entnehmen. \end{Example} Normalerweise\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{% @@ -3994,17 +3900,17 @@ entspricht der Verwendung der Einstellung Werden die Nummern sehr breit, weil beispielsweise sehr viele Tabellen verwendet werden, so reicht der vorgesehene Platz irgendwann nicht mehr aus. Vergleichbar\important{\OptionValue{listof}{flat}} zur Einstellung -\OptionValue{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{flat}} für das Inhaltsverzeichnis -bietet \KOMAScript{} daher die Einstellung -\OptionValue{listof}{flat}\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{flat}} für die Verzeichnisse der -Gleitumgebungen. Dabei wird die Breite der Nummern automatisch ermittelt und -der Platz entsprechend angepasst. Bezüglich der Nebenwirkungen und -Funktionsweise gilt, was in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.flat} für die Einstellung -\OptionValue{toc}{flat} erklärt wurde. Es sei an dieser Stelle jedoch nochmals -darauf hingewiesen, dass mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{flat} -mehrere \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt werden, bis die Verzeichnisse ihre -endgültige Form erhalten haben. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{flat}} für das +Inhaltsverzeichnis bietet \KOMAScript{} daher die Einstellung +\OptionValue{listof}{flat}\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{flat}} für die +Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen. Dabei wird die Breite der Nummern +automatisch ermittelt und der Platz entsprechend angepasst. Bezüglich der +Nebenwirkungen und Funktionsweise gilt, was in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.flat} für die Einstellung +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{toc}{flat} erklärt wurde. Es sei an dieser Stelle +jedoch nochmals darauf hingewiesen, dass mit der Einstellung +\OptionValue{listof}{flat} mehrere \LaTeX-Durchläufe benötigt werden, bis die +Verzeichnisse ihre endgültige Form erhalten haben. Die Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{flat} wird automatisch aktiviert, falls die Einstellung @@ -4031,14 +3937,13 @@ Abstand in die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen ein. Dieses Verhalten, das es auch bei den Standardklassen gibt, dient dazu, diese Verzeichnisse nach Kapiteln zu gruppieren. Es entspricht bei \KOMAScript{} der Einstellung\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and - \Class{scrartcl}} -\OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% -\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapsmall}}. -Dabei wird ein fester vertikaler Abstand von 10\Unit{pt} + \Class{scrartcl}} \OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapsmall}% +\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapsmall}}. Dabei wird ein fester +vertikaler Abstand von 10\Unit{pt} verwendet. Mit\important{\OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapline}} der Einstellung \OptionValue{listof}{chaptergapline}% -\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapline}} kann -man stattdessen einen vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile +\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{chaptergapline}} kann man stattdessen einen +vertikalen Abstand von einer Zeile erreichen. Mit\important{\OptionValue{listof}{nochaptergap}} \OptionValue{listof}{nochaptergap}\IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{nochaptergap}} kann man den vertikalen Abstand komplett @@ -4050,9 +3955,10 @@ Kapitel in das Verzeichnis der Gleitumgebungen eingefügt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass ein solcher Eintrag auch dann erfolgt, wenn das Kapitel keine Gleitumgebung enthält. Eine noch direktere Beeinflussung, was in den Verzeichnissen der Gleitumgebungen -bei neuen Kapiteln geschehen soll, ist mit der Option \Option{chapteratlists} -zu erreichen, die in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure} auf -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists} erläutert wird. +bei neuen Kapiteln geschehen soll, ist mit der Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} zu erreichen, die in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure} auf +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.chapteratlists} erläutert wird. Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \Option{listof} ist in \autoref{tab:maincls.listof} zu finden. @@ -4102,32 +4008,32 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise das Abbildungs"~ und das Tabellenverzeichnis, gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit dem Text von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt. Allerdings bieten die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst keine nicht nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst, - aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \Macro{addxcontentsline} (siehe - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}) erzeugt werden.% + aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} (siehe + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}) + erzeugt werden.% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}}}% \entry{\PValue{leftaligntextentries}, \PValue{leftalignunnumbered}, \PValue{nonumberline}}{% \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% Die Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) wird für die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen, beispielsweise das Abbildungs"~ und das Tabellenverzeichnis, gesetzt. Dadurch werden nicht nummerierte Einträge linksbündig mit der Nummer von nummerierten Einträgen gleicher Ebene gesetzt. Allerdings bieten die \KOMAScript-Klassen selbst keine nicht nummerierten Einträge in diese Verzeichnisse. Dies hat daher nur Auswirkungen auf entsprechende Einträge, die nicht von den Klassen selbst, - aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \Macro{addxcontentsline} (siehe - \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}) erzeugt werden.% + aber dennoch mit Hilfe von \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline} (siehe + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}) + erzeugt werden.% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}}}% \entry{\PValue{leveldown}}{% Die Verzeichnisse werden um eine Gliederungsebene nach unten verschoben.% @@ -4153,26 +4059,25 @@ Einen Überblick über alle möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{totoc}}}% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Option}{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{listoftables}\\ + \Macro{listoftables} \Macro{listoffigures} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftables}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoffigures}% Mit diesen Anweisungen kann ein Verzeichnis der Tabellen beziehungsweise der Abbildungen ausgegeben werden. Änderungen, die Auswirkungen auf diese Verzeichnisse haben, werden erst nach zwei \LaTeX{}-Läufen sichtbar. Die Form -der Verzeichnisse kann durch die Option \Option{listof}\important{\Option{listof}} mit den Werten -\PValue{graduated} und \PValue{flat} beeinflusst werden (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof}). Darüber hinaus wirken sich indirekt +der Verzeichnisse kann durch die Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}} +mit den Werten \PValue{graduated} und \PValue{flat} beeinflusst werden (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.listof}). Darüber hinaus wirken sich indirekt die Werte \PValue{listof} und \PValue{listofnumbered} für die Option -\Option{toc}\important{\Option{toc}} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc}), sowie die Werte \PValue{totoc} und -\PValue{totocnumbered} der oben erläuterten Option \Option{listof} auf die -Verzeichnisse aus. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}} +(siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc}), +sowie die Werte \PValue{totoc} und \PValue{totocnumbered} der oben erläuterten +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.listof} auf die Verzeichnisse aus. In\textnote{Tipp!} der Regel findet man die Verzeichnisse der Gleitumgebungen\Index{Gleitumgebungen}, also das @@ -4182,15 +4087,15 @@ Inhaltsverzeichnis. In einigen Dokumenten wandern diese auch in den Anhang. Der Autor bevorzugt jedoch die Platzierung unmittelbar nach dem Inhaltsverzeichnis.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoffigures}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftables}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{13}% \section{Randnotizen} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Randnotizen} \section{Anhang} \seclabel{appendix} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Anhang} Der Anhang eines Dokuments besteht im Wesentlichen aus den Anlagen zu einem @@ -4206,35 +4111,34 @@ gesetzt. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{appendix} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{appendix}% Der Anhang wird in den Standardklassen und den {\KOMAScript}-Klassen mit der Anweisung \Macro{appendix} eingeleitet. Diese Anweisung schaltet unter anderem die Kapitelnummerierung auf Großbuchstaben um und sorgt gleichzeitig dafür, dass die Regeln für die Nummerierung der Gliederungsebenen nach \cite{DUDEN} eingehalten werden. Diese Regeln sind in der Beschreibung der Option -\Option{numbers} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers} näher erläutert. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numbers} näher erläutert. Die Form der Kapitelüberschriften\OnlyAt{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}} -im Anhang wird durch die Optionen \Option{chapterprefix} und -\Option{appendixprefix} bestimmt. Näheres dazu ist -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix} zu entnehmen. +im Anhang wird durch die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.chapterprefix} +und \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} bestimmt. Näheres dazu ist +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.structure}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.appendixprefix} zu entnehmen. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass es sich bei \Macro{appendix} um eine Anweisung und \emph{nicht} um eine Umgebung handelt! Die Anweisung erwartet auch nicht etwa ein Argument. Die Kapitel beziehungsweise Abschnitte -des Anhangs werden ganz normal mit \Macro{chapter} und \Macro{section} -gesetzt.% +des Anhangs werden ganz normal mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chapter} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.section} gesetzt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{appendix}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Anhang} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Literaturverzeichnis} \seclabel{bibliography} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Literaturverzeichnis} Das Literaturverzeichnis erschließt externe Quellen. In der Regel wird das @@ -4251,9 +4155,8 @@ eines Literaturverzeichnisses sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{bibliography}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{bibliography}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{bibliography~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Als \PName{Einstellung}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} kann zunächst einmal jeder definierte Formatierungsstil gewählt werden. Vordefiniert sind bei \KOMAScript{} zwei @@ -4269,7 +4172,7 @@ Mit\important{\OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}} \OptionValue{bibliography}{oldstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{oldstyle}} wird die kompakte Formatierung gewählt. Dabei führt die Anweisung -\Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} in den einzelnen Einträgen lediglich zu +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} in den einzelnen Einträgen lediglich zu einem dehnbaren horizontalen Abstand. Der Name kommt daher, dass dies die häufigste klassische Form eines Literaturverzeichnisses ist. Demgegenüber\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} @@ -4278,12 +4181,12 @@ ist. Demgegenüber\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} man die etwas modernere, offene Form mit der Einstellung \OptionValue{bibliography}{openstyle}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}. Der -Name kommt daher, dass hier die Anweisung \Macro{newblock} einen Absatz +Name kommt daher, dass hier die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock} einen Absatz einfügt. Die Einträge im Literaturverzeichnis werden so stärker gegliedert. Sie sind weniger kompakt und deutlich aufgelockerter oder geöffnet. Bezüglich der Möglichkeit, neue Formatierungsstile zu definieren, -sei auf \Macro{newbibstyle}, \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle} verwiesen. +sei auf \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}, \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle} verwiesen. Neben dem Formatierungsstil gibt es eine weitere Eigenschaft, die über \PName{Einstellung} verändert werden kann. Das Literaturverzeichnis stellt @@ -4310,10 +4213,10 @@ erreicht wird. Die Voreinstellung, bei der das Literaturverzeichnis als nicht nummeriertes Kapitel ohne eigenen Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag gesetzt wird, entspricht \OptionValue{bibliography}{nottotoc}% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{nottotoc}}. Siehe -hierzu auch Option \Option{toc} in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, +hierzu auch Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc}, insbesondere die Werte \PValue{bibliographynumbered}, \PValue{bibliography} und \PValue{nobibliography} ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.bibliography}. +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.bibliography}. In\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} einigen Fällen wird nicht das gesamte Dokumente mit einem einzigen @@ -4330,8 +4233,8 @@ soll. Daher ist diese Option auch in \Class{scrartcl} verfügbar. Eine Zusammenfassung möglicher Werte für \PName{Einstellung} ist \autoref{tab:maincls.bibliography} zu entnehmen. Es ist jedoch zu beachten, -dass mit \Macro{newbibstyle}\IndexCmd{newbibstyle} weitere Werte definiert -werden können. +dass mit \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle}\IndexCmd{newbibstyle} +weitere Werte definiert werden können. \begin{table} \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{bibliography}}]{Vordefinierte @@ -4346,17 +4249,18 @@ werden können. verschoben.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{leveldown}}}% \pventry{nottotoc}{% - Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis - und wird auch nicht nummeriert.% + Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält keinen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis und + wird auch nicht nummeriert.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{nottotoc}}}% \pventry{oldstyle}{% Es wird die klassische, kompakte Formatierung gewählt, bei der - \Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} nur einen dehnbaren horizontalen - Abstand darstellt.% + \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} nur einen + dehnbaren horizontalen Abstand darstellt.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{oldstyle}}}% \pventry{openstyle}{% Es wird eine untergliederte, offene Formatierung gewählt, bei der - \Macro{newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} einen Absatz darstellt.% + \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.newblock}\IndexCmd{newblock} einen Absatz + darstellt.% \IndexOption{bibliography~=\PValue{openstyle}}}% \pventry{totoc}{% Das Literaturverzeichnis erhält einen Eintrag im Inhaltsverzeichnis, @@ -4369,13 +4273,12 @@ werden können. \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{bibliography~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setbibpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setbibpreamble}% Mit der Anweisung \Macro{setbibpreamble} kann eine Präambel für das Literaturverzeichnis gesetzt werden. Bedingung dafür ist, dass die Präambel vor der Anweisung zum Setzen des Literaturverzeichnisses gesetzt wird. Dies @@ -4404,34 +4307,32 @@ funktioniert (siehe \cite{package:natbib}). Zwischenraum gesetzt wird.% \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setbibpreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{BreakBibliography}\Parameter{Unterbrechung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BreakBibliography}% Diese\textnote{Achtung!}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Anweisung existiert nur, wenn Umgebung \Environment{thebibliography} nicht durch ein Paket neu definiert wurde. In diesem Fall ist es möglich, mit dieser Anweisung das Literaturverzeichnis zu unterbrechen. Die \PName{Unterbrechung} wird dann innerhalb einer Gruppe ausgegeben. Eine solche \PName{Unterbrechung} könnte -beispielsweise eine Überschrift mit Hilfe von \Macro{minisec} sein. Leider -gibt es bisher keine Möglichkeit, diese Anweisung beispielsweise mit Hilfe -eines speziellen Eintrags in der Literaturdatenbank von \BibTeX{} erzeugen zu -lassen. Daher kann sie derzeit nur von Anwendern verwendet werden, die das -Literaturverzeichnis selbst editieren. Ihr Nutzen ist damit sehr beschränkt.% +beispielsweise eine Überschrift mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.minisec} +sein. Leider gibt es bisher keine Möglichkeit, diese Anweisung beispielsweise +mit Hilfe eines speziellen Eintrags in der Literaturdatenbank von \BibTeX{} +erzeugen zu lassen. Daher kann sie derzeit nur von Anwendern verwendet werden, +die das Literaturverzeichnis selbst editieren. Ihr Nutzen ist damit sehr +beschränkt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BreakBibliography}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{AfterBibliographyPreamble}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AtEndBibliography}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterBibliographyPreamble}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndBibliography}% In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} einigen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man nach der Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses oder unmittelbar vor dem Ende des @@ -4451,18 +4352,16 @@ Die\textnote{Achtung!} Realisierung dieser Anweisung bedarf bei Verwendung eines Pakets, das die Umgebung für Literaturverzeichnisse umdefiniert, der Zusammenarbeit mit dem entsprechenden Paket (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.coexistence}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}).% +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble}).% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndBibliography}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterBibliographyPreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Literaturverzeichnis} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Stichwortverzeichnis} \seclabel{index} -\BeginIndex{}{Stichwortverzeichnis} - +\BeginIndexGroup Das Stichwortverzeichnis ist auch unter den Bezeichnungen Index oder Register bekannt. Zur generellen Verwendung eines Stichwortverzeichnisses sei auf @@ -4477,9 +4376,8 @@ nicht jedoch bei Verwendung von \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{index}\PName{Einstellung}% + \OptionVName{index}{Einstellung}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{index~=\PName{Einstellung}}% \ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}}% In der Voreinstellung \OptionValue{index}{default}\IndexOption{index~=\PValue{default}} ist das @@ -4494,9 +4392,9 @@ Stichwortverzeichnis gearbeitet wird, so kann dies mit der Einstellung werden. Soll\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} der Index entgegen aller Gepflogenheiten sogar nummeriert werden, so verwendet man Option \OptionValue{index}{numbered}. Siehe hierzu -auch Option \Option{toc} mit dem Wert \PValue{index} oder -\PValue{indexnumbered} in \autoref{sec:maincls.toc} ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.toc.index}. +auch Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.toc} mit dem Wert \PValue{index} oder +\PValue{indexnumbered} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.toc} ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.toc.index}. Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \Option{index} ist in \autoref{tab:maincls.index} zu finden. @@ -4522,13 +4420,12 @@ Eine Zusammenfassung der möglichen Werte für die \PName{Einstellung} von \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{index~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setindexpreamble}\Parameter{Präambel} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setindexpreamble}% Analog zur Präambel des Literaturverzeichnisses können Sie auch das Stichwortverzeichnis mit einer Präambel versehen. Dies findet häufig dann Anwendung, wenn es mehr als einen Index gibt oder im Index @@ -4552,9 +4449,9 @@ Hervorhebung der Seitenzahlen markiert werden. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass für die erste Seite des Index der Seitenstil umgeschaltet wird. Welcher Seitenstil hierbei Verwendung findet, -ist im Makro \Macro{indexpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe -\autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}). +ist im Makro \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle} abgelegt (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.indexpagestyle}). Für die Erstellung, Sortierung und Ausgabe des Stichwortverzeichnisses sind die üblichen Standard-\LaTeX-Pakete und Zusatzprogramme @@ -4565,13 +4462,11 @@ zuständig.% gestellt.% \fi % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setindexpreamble}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Stichwortverzeichnis}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Class}{scrbook}% -\EndIndex{Class}{scrreprt}% -\EndIndex{Class}{scrartcl}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput @@ -4585,5 +4480,8 @@ zuständig.% % LocalWords: Teildokumenten Klassenoption Tabellenunterschrift float % LocalWords: Satzspiegels Schrifteinstellung Abschnittseinträgen -% LocalWords: Vakatseiten Kolumnentitel Sternformen Teiltabelle +% LocalWords: Vakatseiten Kolumnentitel Sternformen Teiltabelle Seitenstil + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex index 1d7295258bf..e0f282efa17 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrdatetime.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrdatetime.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrdatetime.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,22 +46,21 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrdatetime.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrdate, scrtime)] \chapter{Der Wochentag mit \Package{scrdate}} \labelbase{scrdate} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrdate} Mit Version~3.05a wurde der Funktionsumfang dieses Pakets erheblich erweitert. Neben dem aktuellen Wochentag\Index{Wochentag} kann es nun auch den Wochentag jedes beliebigen Datums nach dem Gregorianischen Kalender bestimmen. -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{CenturyPart}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DecadePart}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{CenturyPart}\Parameter{Jahr}\\% - \Macro{DecadePart}\Parameter{Jahr}% + \Macro{CenturyPart}\Parameter{Jahr} + \Macro{DecadePart}\Parameter{Jahr} \end{Declaration}% Die\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} Anweisung \Macro{CenturyPart} ergibt den Wert der Jahrhundert-Stellen eines Jahres. Die Anweisung @@ -91,14 +90,12 @@ voran zu stellen. Bitte\textnote{Achtung!} beachten Sie, dass hier die Zählweise verwendet wird, bei der das Jahr 2000 das Jahr~0 -- also das erste Jahr -- des 21.~Jahrhunderts ist.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DecadePart}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{CenturyPart}% +\EndIndexGroup + -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayNumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISODayNumber}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DayNumber}\Parameter{Jahr}\Parameter{Monat}\Parameter{Tag}\\% - \Macro{ISODayNumber}\Parameter{ISO-Datum}% + \Macro{DayNumber}\Parameter{Jahr}\Parameter{Monat}\Parameter{Tag} + \Macro{ISODayNumber}\Parameter{ISO-Datum} \end{Declaration}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} beiden Anweisungen geben den Wert der Nummer des Wochentags\Index{Wochentag} zu einem Datum zurück. Sie @@ -151,17 +148,13 @@ Die Wochentage werden dabei wie folgt nummeriert: Sonntag\,=\,0, Montag\,=\,1, Dienstag\,=\,2, Mittwoch\,=\,3, Donnerstag\,=\,4, Freitag\,=\,5 und Samstag\,=\,6.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayNumber}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISODayNumber}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayNameByNumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DayName}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISODayName}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DayNameByNumber}\Parameter{Wochentagsnummer}\\% - \Macro{DayName}\Parameter{Jahr}\Parameter{Monat}\Parameter{Tag}\\% - \Macro{ISODayName}\Parameter{ISO-Datum}% + \Macro{DayNameByNumber}\Parameter{Wochentagsnummer} + \Macro{DayName}\Parameter{Jahr}\Parameter{Monat}\Parameter{Tag} + \Macro{ISODayName}\Parameter{ISO-Datum} \end{Declaration}% Üblicherweise\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrdate}} ist man weniger an der Nummer eines Wochentags als dem Namen des Wochentags interessiert. Daher @@ -210,19 +203,13 @@ anzustellen: \end{quote} \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISODayName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayName}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DayNameByNumber}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{todaysname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{todaysnumber}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ISOToday}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IsoToday}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ISOToday}\\% - \Macro{IsoToday}\\ - \Macro{todaysname}\\% + \Macro{ISOToday} + \Macro{IsoToday} + \Macro{todaysname} \Macro{todaysnumber} \end{Declaration}% In den bisherigen Beispielen dieses Abschnitts wurde das aktuelle Datum immer @@ -235,7 +222,7 @@ zweistellig ausgibt, während \Macro{IsoToday} Monat und Tag bei Werten kleiner 10 einstellig ausgibt. Die Anweisung \Macro{todaysname} bietet direkt den aktuellen Wochentag, während \Macro{todaysnumber} den Wert des aktuellen Wochentags liefert. Näheres zur Verwendung dieses Wertes ist den obigen -Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen \Macro{DayNumber} und \Macro{ISODayNumber} zu +Erklärungen zu den Anweisungen \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNumber} und \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber} zu entnehmen. \begin{Example} @@ -256,60 +243,54 @@ entnehmen. können Sie das erreichen, obwohl die Namen der Wochentage in \Package{scrdate} alle groß geschrieben sind. Greifen Sie mit % Umbruchkorrektur: listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \MakeLowercase{\todaysname} \end{lstcode} einfach auf die \LaTeX-Anweisung \Macro{MakeLowercase}\IndexCmd{MakeLowercase}% \important{\Macro{MakeLowercase}} zurück. Diese wandelt ihr Argument komplett in Kleinbuchstaben. Natürlich funktioniert dieser Tipp auch für - obige Anweisungen \Macro{DayNameByNumber}\IndexCmd{DayNameByNumber}, - \Macro{DayName}\IndexCmd{DayName} und - \Macro{ISODayName}\IndexCmd{ISODayName}.% + obige Anweisungen \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber}\IndexCmd{DayNameByNumber}, + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.DayName}\IndexCmd{DayName} und + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISODayName}\IndexCmd{ISODayName}.% \end{Explain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IsoToday}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ISOToday}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{todaysnumber}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{todaysname} +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{nameday}% \begin{Declaration} \Macro{nameday}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration}% -So wie mit \Macro{date}\IndexCmd{date} die Ausgabe von \Macro{today} -direkt geändert werden kann, setzt \Macro{nameday} die Ausgabe von -\Macro{todaysname} auf den Wert \PName{Name}. +So wie mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.date}\IndexCmd{date} die Ausgabe von +\Macro{today} direkt geändert werden kann, setzt \Macro{nameday} die Ausgabe +von \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.todaysname} auf den Wert \PName{Name}. \begin{Example} - Sie setzen mit \Macro{date} das aktuelle Datum auf einen festen - Wert. Für die Ausgabe des zugehörigen Wochentags interessiert es nur, + Sie setzen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.date} das aktuelle Datum auf einen + festen Wert. Für die Ausgabe des zugehörigen Wochentags interessiert es nur, dass dieser Tag ein Werktag war. Daher schreiben Sie \begin{lstcode} \nameday{Werktag} \end{lstcode} und erhalten so mit dem Satz aus dem vorherigen Beispiel zu - \Macro{todaysname}: + \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.todaysname}: \begin{quote}\nameday{Werktag} Dieses Dokument entstand an einem {\todaysname}. \end{quote} \end{Example} -Für \Macro{ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} und -\Macro{IsoToday}\IndexCmd{IsoToday} existieren keine entsprechenden +Für \DescRef{scrdate.cmd.ISOToday}\IndexCmd{ISOToday} und +\DescRef{scrdate.cmd.IsoToday}\IndexCmd{IsoToday} existieren keine entsprechenden Anweisungen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{nameday} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newdaylanguage}\Parameter{Sprache}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newdaylanguage}}% - \Parameter{Montag}\Parameter{Dienstag}\Parameter{Mittwoch}% - \Parameter{Donnerstag}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newdaylanguage}}% - \Parameter{Freitag}\Parameter{Samstag}\Parameter{Sonntag}% + \Macro{newdaylanguage}\Parameter{Sprache} + \Parameter{Montag}\Parameter{Dienstag} + \Parameter{Mittwoch}\Parameter{Donnerstag} + \Parameter{Freitag}\Parameter{Samstag} + \Parameter{Sonntag} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newdaylanguage} Das \Package{scrdate}-Paket beherrscht derzeit die folgenden Sprachen: -\begin{itemize}\raggedright +\begin{itemize}\raggedright\setlength{\itemsep}{.5\itemsep} \item Dänisch (\PValue{danish}), \item Deutsch (\PValue{austrian}\ChangedAt{v3.08b}{\Package{scrdate}}, \PValue{german}, \PValue{naustrian}, \PValue{ngerman}, \PValue{nswissgerman}, @@ -350,13 +331,14 @@ Natürlich ist es sinnvoll Definitionen für bisher nicht unterstützte Sprachen an den \KOMAScript-Autor zu melden. In diesem Fall stehen die Chancen gut, dass künftige \KOMAScript-Versionen die Sprache ebenfalls unterstützen werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newdaylanguage}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrdate} +\EndIndexGroup \chapter{Die aktuelle Zeit mit \Package{scrtime}} \labelbase{scrtime} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrtime} Mit Hilfe dieses Pakets kann die Frage nach der aktuellen Zeit beantwortet @@ -365,9 +347,8 @@ werden. Seit Version~3.05 unterstützt das Paket auch die von den Möglichkeiten zur Angabe von Optionen. Siehe dazu beispielsweise \autoref{sec:typearea.options}. -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thistime}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thistime*}% \begin{Declaration}% - \Macro{thistime}\OParameter{Trennung}\\ + \Macro{thistime}\OParameter{Trennung} \Macro{thistime*}\OParameter{Trennung} \end{Declaration}% \Macro{thistime} liefert die aktuelle Zeit\Index{Zeit} in Stunden und @@ -408,32 +389,30 @@ erweitert wird. Beim nächsten Ton ist es 23\ Uhr,\ 9 Minuten und 42 Sekunden. \end{quote} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thistime}\EndIndex{Cmd}{thistime*} +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{settime}% \begin{Declaration}% \Macro{settime}\Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\Macro{settime} setzt die Ausgabe von \Macro{thistime} und -\Macro{thistime*} auf einen festen \PName{Wert}% +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.settime} setzt die Ausgabe von \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} und +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} auf einen festen \PName{Wert}% %\footnote{Allerdings darf man nicht erwarten, dass nun die Zeit % stillsteht!} . % -Anschließend wird das optionale Argument von \Macro{thistime} bzw. -\Macro{thistime*} ignoriert, da ja die komplette Zeichenkette, die -\Macro{thistime} bzw. \Macro{thistime*} nun liefert, hiermit explizit +Anschließend wird das optionale Argument von \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} bzw. +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} ignoriert, da ja die komplette Zeichenkette, die +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} bzw. \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} nun liefert, hiermit explizit festgelegt wurde.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{settime} +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Option}{12h~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{24h}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{12h}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{12h}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% +\BeginIndex{Option}{24h}% Mit der Option \Option{12h}\ChangedAt{v3.05a}{\Package{scrtime}} kann gewählt -werden, ob die Zeit bei \Macro{thistime} und \Macro{thistime*} im 12-Stunden- +werden, ob die Zeit bei \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime} und \DescRef{scrtime.cmd.thistime*} im 12-Stunden- oder 24-Stunden-Format ausgegeben werden soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet @@ -444,23 +423,25 @@ Voreingestellt ist hingegen das 24-Stunden-Format.% % Sternzeit nach \textsc{StarTrek}\Index{StarTrek}, ein echter % Mangel!} -Die Option kann wahlweise als Klassenoption bei \Macro{documentclass}, als -Paketoption bei \Macro{usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von -\Package{scrtime} per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} (siehe -beispielsweise \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}) gesetzt werden. Sie verliert -jedoch bei einem Aufruf von \Macro{settime} ihre Gültigkeit. Die -Uhrzeit wird nach Verwendung dieser Anweisung nur noch mit dem dort -angegebenen Wert im dort verwendeten Format ausgegeben. +Die Option kann wahlweise als Klassenoption bei +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.documentclass}, als Paketoption bei +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von +\Package{scrtime} per \DescRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoption} (siehe beispielsweise +\autoref{sec:typearea.options}, \DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}) +gesetzt werden. Sie verliert jedoch bei einem Aufruf von +\DescRef{scrtime.cmd.settime} ihre Gültigkeit. Die Uhrzeit wird nach +Verwendung dieser Anweisung nur noch mit dem dort angegebenen Wert im dort +verwendeten Format ausgegeben. Rein\textnote{Achtung!} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen -von \Package{scrtime} wird bei \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} -auch noch die Option \Option{24h} zur Umschaltung auf das 24-Stunden-Format -unterstützt. Deren Verwendung wird jedoch nicht mehr empfohlen.% -\EndIndex{Option}{12h~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{24h}% +von \Package{scrtime} wird bei \DescRef{typearea.cmd.documentclass} und +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.usepackage} auch noch die Option \Option{24h} zur +Umschaltung auf das 24-Stunden-Format unterstützt. Deren Verwendung wird +jedoch nicht mehr empfohlen.% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrtime} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex @@ -471,20 +452,4 @@ unterstützt. Deren Verwendung wird jedoch nicht mehr empfohlen.% %%% TeX-PDF-mode: t %%% End: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - % LocalWords: Gregorianischen diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex index efce4891f99..b1fea3c20ba 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrextend.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrextend.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrextend.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrextend.tex} - [$Date: 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 (Mon, 24 Aug 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script package scrextend] \chapter[tocentry={Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der @@ -56,6 +56,7 @@ {Grundlegende Fähigkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen mit Hilfe des Pakets \Package{scrextend} anderen Klassen erschließen} \labelbase{scrextend} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrextend}% Es gibt einige Möglichkeiten, die allen \KOMAScript-Klassen gemeinsam @@ -100,9 +101,9 @@ finden sind. Natürlich kann \Package{tocbasic} aber auch zusammen mit \Package{scrextend} verwendet werden. \fi -\LoadCommon{0}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl bei \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl bei \KOMAScript} -\LoadCommon{1}% \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility}% \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} \section{Optionale, erweiterte Möglichkeiten} @@ -115,16 +116,15 @@ sind beispielsweise deshalb optional, weil sie in Konflikt mit den Möglichkeiten der Standardklassen oder häufig benutzter Pakete stehen. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{extendedfeature}\PName{Möglichkeit} + \OptionVName{extendedfeature}{Möglichkeit} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{extendedfeature~=\PName{Möglichkeit}}% Mit dieser Option kann eine optionale Möglichkeit von \Package{scrextend} ausgewählt werden. Diese Option steht nur während des Ladens von \Package{scrextend} zur Verfügung. Anwender geben diese Option daher als -optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{scrextend} an. +optionales Argument von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}\PParameter{scrextend} an. % \iffree{% - Eine - Übersicht über die verfügbaren optionalen Möglichkeiten bietet + Eine Übersicht über die verfügbaren optionalen Möglichkeiten bietet \autoref{tab:scrextend.optionalFeatures}. \begin{table} @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{scrextend} an. \entry{\PName{title}}{% die Titelseiten werden auf die Möglichkeiten der \KOMAScript-Klassen erweitert; dies betrifft neben den Anweisungen für die Titelseiten - auch die Option \Option{titlepage} (siehe + auch die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.titlepage} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrextend.titlepage}, ab \autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage})% } @@ -153,25 +153,18 @@ optionales Argument von \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{scrextend} an. \autopageref{sec:scrextend.titlepage} beschrieben sind.% }% % -\EndIndex{Option}{extendedfeature~=\PName{Möglichkeit}}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{2}% \section{Entwurfsmodus} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode}% \section{Entwurfsmodus} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -\LoadCommon{4}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{Größe}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe} - +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen} -\LoadCommon{5}% \section{Textauszeichnungen} +\LoadCommonFile{titles}% \section{Dokumenttitel} -\LoadCommon{14}% \section{Dokumenttitel} - -\LoadCommon{7}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} \section{Wahl eines vordefinierten Seitenstils} @@ -187,31 +180,29 @@ Seitenstile des \LaTeX-Kerns. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{titlepagestyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}\Index{Titel>Seitenstil}% -Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von \Macro{thispagestyle} automatisch ein -anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Bei \Package{scrextend} betrifft dies bisher nur -die Titelseiten und auch dies nur, wenn mit -\OptionValue{extendedfeature}{title} gearbeitet wird (siehe +\BeginIndex{}{Titel>Seitenstil}% +Auf einigen Seiten wird mit Hilfe von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} +automatisch ein anderer Seitenstil gewählt. Bei \Package{scrextend} betrifft +dies bisher nur die Titelseiten und auch dies nur, wenn mit +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{extendedfeature}{title} gearbeitet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:scrextend.optionalFeatures}, -\autopageref{desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). Welcher Seitenstil dies -ist, wird dem Makro \Macro{titlepagestyle} entnommen. In der Voreinstellung -ist der Seitenstil \PValue{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. Dieser Seitenstil -wird bereits im \LaTeX-Kern vordefiniert und sollte daher immer verfügbar -sein.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{titlepagestyle}% - +\DescPageRef{scrextend.option.extendedfeature}). Welcher Seitenstil dies ist, +wird dem Makro \Macro{titlepagestyle} entnommen. In der Voreinstellung ist der +Seitenstil \PValue{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain}. Dieser Seitenstil wird +bereits im \LaTeX-Kern vordefiniert und sollte daher immer verfügbar sein.% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{8}% \section{Vakatseiten} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten} -\LoadCommon{9}% \section{Fußnoten} +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten} -\LoadCommon{15}% \section{Schlauer Spruch} +\LoadCommonFile{dictum}% \section{Schlauer Spruch} -\LoadCommon{12}% \section{Listen} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Listen} -\LoadCommon{13}% \section{Randnotizen} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Randnotizen} % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrextend}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex index 60f8683ae5b..2f25ab50f7e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrhack.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrhack.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrhack.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrhack.tex} - [$Date: 2015-07-08 10:27:58 +0200 (Wed, 08 Jul 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrhack)] \chapter{Fremdpakete verbessern mit \Package{scrhack}} \labelbase{scrhack} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrhack} Einige Pakete außerhalb von \KOMAScript{} arbeiten nicht sehr gut mit \KOMAScript{} zusammen. Für den \KOMAScript-Autor ist es dabei oftmals sehr @@ -79,7 +80,7 @@ existiert von \Package{scrhack} dauerhaft nur eine Beta-Version. Obwohl die Benutzung in der Regel einige Vorteile mit sich bringt, kann die Funktion nicht dauerhaft garantiert werden. -\LoadCommon{0} +\LoadCommonFile{options} \section{Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic}} \seclabel{improvement} @@ -125,8 +126,9 @@ entsprechende Anpassungen für die Pakete \Package{floatrow}\IndexPackage{floatrow} und \Package{listings}\IndexPackage{listings}. Allein durch das Laden von \Package{scrhack} reagieren diese Pakete dann nicht nur auf die Einstellungen -von Option \Option{listof}\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}}, sondern -beachten auch Sprachumschaltungen durch das +von Option +\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}\IndexOption{listof~=\PName{Einstellung}}, +sondern beachten auch Sprachumschaltungen durch das \Package{babel}-Paket\IndexPackage{babel}. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten, die durch die Umstellung der Pakete auf \Package{tocbasic} nun zur Verfügung stehen, ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} zu entnehmen. @@ -209,15 +211,16 @@ mit Option \OptionValue{lscape}{false}\IndexOption[indexmain]{lscape~=\PValue{false}} deaktiviert werden. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass eine nachträgliche Zuweisung an Option \Option{lscape} mit -\Macro{KOMAoption}\IndexCmd{KOMAoption} oder -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} nur eine Wirkung hat, wenn sie -während des Ladens von \Package{lscape} nicht \PValue{false} war. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}\IndexCmd{KOMAoption} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} nur eine Wirkung +hat, wenn sie während des Ladens von \Package{lscape} nicht \PValue{false} +war. Im übrigens\textnote{Achtung!} wird \Package{lscape} auch von dem Paket \Package{pdflscape}\IndexPackage[indexmain]{pdflscape} verwendet, so dass \Package{scrhack} sich auch auf die Funktion dieses Pakets auswirkt.% % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrhack} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex index 66b710f926c..413bb615c8b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrjura.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrjura.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrjura.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2011-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,24 +46,25 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{scrjura.tex}% - [$Date: 2016-05-09 11:37:44 +0200 (Mon, 09 May 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrjura)] \chapter{Unterstützung für die Anwaltspraxis durch \Package{scrjura}} \labelbase{scrjura} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrjura} -Will man einen Vertrag\Index{Vertraege=Verträge}, die Satzung -einer Gesellschaft oder eines Vereins, ein Gesetz oder gleich einen +Will man einen Vertrag\Index{Vertraege=Verträge}, die Satzung einer +Gesellschaft oder eines Vereins, ein Gesetz oder gleich einen Gesetzeskommentar schreiben, so übernimmt das Paket \Package{scrjura} den typografischen Teil der Unterstützung für diese Tätigkeit. Obwohl -\Package{scrjura} als allgemeine Hilfe für anwaltliche Schriftstücke -angedacht ist, hat sich gezeigt, dass der Vertrag dabei ein ganz zentrales -Element ist. Besonderes Augenmerk gilt hier dem -Paragraphen\Index{Paragraphen>juristische} mit Nummer, Titel, -nummerierten Absätzen -- falls es mehrere davon in einem Paragraphen gibt --, -bedarfsweise nummerierten Sätzen, Einträgen in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und -Querverweisen in den deutschen Gepflogenheiten entsprechenden Formen. +\Package{scrjura} als allgemeine Hilfe für anwaltliche Schriftstücke angedacht +ist, hat sich gezeigt, dass der Vertrag dabei ein ganz zentrales Element +ist. Besonderes Augenmerk gilt hier dem +Paragraphen\Index{Paragraphen>juristische} mit Nummer, Titel, nummerierten +Absätzen -- falls es mehrere davon in einem Paragraphen gibt --, bedarfsweise +nummerierten Sätzen, Einträgen in das Inhaltsverzeichnis und Querverweisen in +den deutschen Gepflogenheiten entsprechenden Formen. Das Paket ist in Zusammenarbeit mit Rechtsanwalt Dr.\,Alexander Willand, Karlsruhe, entstanden. Die folgenden Ausführungen erklären das Paket aus einem @@ -73,7 +74,9 @@ Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass das Paket mit \Package{hyperref}\IndexPackage{hyperref} zusammenarbeitet, aber wie üblich \Package{hyperref} nach \Package{scrjura} geladen werden muss! -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} + +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen} \section{Verzeichnisse} \label{sec:scrjura.toc} @@ -82,68 +85,61 @@ Das Paket \Package{scrjura} sieht auch Einträge in das Inhaltsverzeichnis\Index{Inhaltsverzeichnis} vor. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratotoc}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{juratotoc}\PName{Ebenennummer} + \OptionVName{juratotoc}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{juratotoc}{Ebenennummer} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{Ebennummer}}% Im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt werden Paragraphen\Index{Paragraphen>juristische} nur, wenn ihre \PName{Ebenennummer} -kleiner oder gleich dem Zähler -\Counter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} ist +kleiner oder gleich dem Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} ist (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Voreingestellt ist für +\DescPageRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth}). Voreingestellt ist für \PName{Ebenennummer} der Wert 10000, der auch verwendet wird, wenn die Option über einen \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{false}} (siehe \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}) -ausgeschaltet wird. Da der Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} üblicherweise einen -kleinen, einstelligen Wert besitzt, werden die Paragraphen-Einträge im -Inhaltsverzeichnis daher normalerweise nicht angezeigt. +ausgeschaltet wird. Da der Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} +üblicherweise einen kleinen, einstelligen Wert besitzt, werden die +Paragraphen-Einträge im Inhaltsverzeichnis daher normalerweise nicht +angezeigt. Wird die Option hingegen über einen \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\important{\OptionValue{juratotoc}{true}} eingeschaltet, so wird als \PName{Ebenennummer} 2 voreingestellt. Damit werden sie in Inhaltsverzeichnissen bei allen \KOMAScript-Klassen auf derselben Ebene wie -\Macro{subsection} eingeordnet. In der Voreinstellung von \Counter{tocdepth} -werden sie dann auch bei allen \KOMAScript-Klassen im Inhaltsverzeichnis -angezeigt.% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{Ebenennummer}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratotoc~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection} eingeordnet. In der Voreinstellung von +\DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} werden sie dann auch bei allen +\KOMAScript-Klassen im Inhaltsverzeichnis angezeigt.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratocindent}\PName{Einzug}\\ - \KOption{juratocnumberwidth}\PName{Nummernbreite} + \OptionVName{juratocindent}{Einzug} + \OptionVName{juratocnumberwidth}{Nummernbreite} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratocindent~=\PName{Einzug}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratocnumberwidth~=\PName{Nummernbreite}}% Mit diesen beiden Optionen kann für die Einträge der Paragraphen ins Inhaltsverzeichnis sowohl der Einzug als auch die Breite, die für Nummern reserviert wird, festgelegt werden. Voreingestellt sind dieselben Werte wie -für \Macro{subsection}-Einträge bei \Class{scrartcl}. +für \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}-Einträge bei \Class{scrartcl}. % -\EndIndex{Option}{juratocnumberwidth~=\PName{Nummernbreite}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratocindent~=\PName{Einzug}}% - +\EndIndexGroup \section{Umgebung für Verträge} \label{sec:scrjura.contract} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Vertraege=Verträge} Die wesentlichen Mechanismen von \Package{scrjura} stehen ausschließlich innerhalb von Verträgen der zugehörigen Umgebung zur Verfügung. \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{contract}}\\ - \dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{\XEnvironment{contract}} + \begin{Environment}{contract}\end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{contract}% Dies ist die erste und bisher einzige Umgebung für Juristen, die \Package{scrjura} bereit stellt. Durch ihre Verwendung wird die automatische -Absatznummerierung aktiviert und die Anweisungen \Macro{Clause} und -\Macro{SubClause} mit einer konkreten Form versehen, die später näher -dokumentiert wird. +Absatznummerierung aktiviert und die Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} mit +einer konkreten Form versehen, die später näher dokumentiert wird. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Umgebung \Environment{contract} darf nicht in sich selbst geschachtelt werden. Innerhalb eines Dokuments dürfen jedoch mehrere @@ -153,46 +149,47 @@ Umgebung. Durch das Beenden der Umgebung wird diese also quasi lediglich unterbrochen und durch den Beginn einer neuen Umgebung wird sozusagen die alte Umgebung fortgesetzt. Dabei sind allerdings keine Unterbrechungen innerhalb eines Paragraphen möglich.% -\EndIndex{Env}{contract} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Option{contract} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{contract}% Bei Angabe dieser Option beim Laden des Pakets beispielsweise mit -\Macro{usepackage}\important{\Macro{usepackage}} oder als globale Option bei -\Macro{documentclass}\important{\Macro{documentclass}} wird das gesamte -Dokument zu einem Vertrag. Das Dokument verhält sich dann also genauso, als -würde es genau eine \Environment{contract}-Umgebung enthalten. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage}} oder als globale Option bei +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}} wird das gesamte Dokument +zu einem Vertrag. Das Dokument verhält sich dann also genauso, als würde es +genau eine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung enthalten. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass Option \Option{contract} -weder mit \Macro{KOMAoption} oder \Macro{KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden kann! -Damit ist es auch nicht möglich die Option wieder abzuschalten. Verwenden Sie -in einem solchen Fall stattdessen direkt eine \Environment{contract}-Umgebung. +weder mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden kann! Damit ist es auch +nicht möglich die Option wieder abzuschalten. Verwenden Sie in einem solchen +Fall stattdessen direkt eine \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung. % -\EndIndex{Option}{contract} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Juristische Paragraphen} \label{sec:scrjura.clause} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Paragraphen>juristische} Paragraphen\footnote{Obwohl der korrekte Begriff für juristische Paragraphen im Englischen »\emph{section}« wäre, sind die Bezeichnungen in \Package{scrjura} von »\emph{clause}« abgeleitet. Dadurch sollen - Verwechslungen sowohl mit \Macro{section} als auch mit \Macro{paragraph} - vermieden werden.} im juristischen Sinn, sind bei \Package{scrjura} nur -innerhalb von Verträgen, also innerhalb der Umgebung \Environment{contract} -definiert. + Verwechslungen sowohl mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} als auch mit + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} vermieden werden.} im juristischen Sinn, +sind bei \Package{scrjura} nur innerhalb von Verträgen, also innerhalb der +Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} definiert. \begin{Declaration} \phantomsection\label{desc:scrjura.contract.macro.Clause}% - \Macro{Clause}\OParameter{Einstellungen}\\ + \Macro{Clause}\OParameter{Einstellungen} \phantomsection\label{desc:scrjura.contract.macro.SubClause}% \Macro{SubClause}\OParameter{Einstellungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Clause}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{SubClause}% Dies sind die wichtigsten Anweisungen innerhalb eines Vertrags. Ohne zusätzliche \PName{Einstellungen} erzeugt \Macro{Clause} eine Paragraphenüberschrift, die nur aus dem Paragraphenzeichen gefolgt von einer @@ -204,10 +201,9 @@ Gesetzen oder Verträgen nicht nur Paragraphen umformuliert oder gestrichen werden, sondern zwischen existierenden Paragraphen neue eingefügt werden, ohne dass eine komplett neue Nummerierung erfolgt. -Als \PName{Einstellungen} kann -bei beiden Anweisungen eine durch Komma separierte Liste von -Eigenschaften angegeben werden. Eine Übersicht über die möglichen -Eigenschaften bietet \autoref{tab:scrjura.Clause.options}. Auf die +Als \PName{Einstellungen} kann bei beiden Anweisungen eine durch Komma +separierte Liste von Eigenschaften angegeben werden. Eine Übersicht über die +möglichen Eigenschaften bietet \autoref{tab:scrjura.Clause.options}. Auf die wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden. \begin{table} @@ -218,7 +214,7 @@ wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden. \entry{\Option{dummy}}{% Die Überschrift wird nicht gesetzt aber gezählt.% }% - \entry{\KOption{head}\PName{Kolumnentitel}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{head}{Kolumnentitel}}{% Sind Kolumnentitel aktiviert wird unabhängig von einem Titel für den Paragraphen dieser Kolumnentitel verwendet.% }% @@ -228,21 +224,21 @@ wichtigsten soll noch näher eingegangen werden. \entry{\Option{notocentry}}{% Es wird kein Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgenommen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{number}\PName{Nummer}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{number}{Nummer}}{% Die Nummer für den Paragraphen wird direkt angegeben.% }% - \entry{\KOption{preskip}\PName{Abstand}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{preskip}{Abstand}}{% Neuer Abstand vor den Überschriften der Paragraphen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{postskip}\PName{Abstand}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{postskip}{Abstand}}{% Neuer Abstand nach den Überschrift der Paragraphen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{title}\PName{Überschrift}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{title}{Überschrift}}{% Der Paragraph wird zusätzlich zur Nummer mit einem Titel versehen. Dies ist gleichzeitig die Grundeinstellung für die Einträge in den Kolumnentitel und das Inhaltsverzeichnis.% }% - \entry{\KOption{tocentry}\PName{Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentry}{Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag}}{% Unabhängig von einem Titel für den Paragraphen wird dieser Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis vorgenommen.% }% @@ -263,23 +259,26 @@ möglich, die entsprechende Einstellung bereits vorab mit Hilfe von \hspace{11.5em}postskip=\PName{Abstand}} \end{flushleft} unabhängig von einem konkreten Paragraphen und auch außerhalb einer -\Environment{contract}-Umgebung vorzunehmen. Auch das Setzen innerhalb der -Präambel nach dem Laden von \Package{scrjura} ist so möglich. Dagegen ist es -nicht möglich, diese beiden Optionen bereits beim Laden des Pakets anzugeben -oder sie per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} zu setzen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung vorzunehmen. Auch das Setzen +innerhalb der Präambel nach dem Laden von \Package{scrjura} ist so +möglich. Dagegen ist es nicht möglich, diese beiden Optionen bereits beim +Laden des Pakets anzugeben oder sie per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} +oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} zu setzen. \BeginIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{Clause}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{Clause}\LabelFontElement{Clause}% In der Voreinstellung wird für die Überschrift des Paragraphen als Schrift \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}\Macro{large} verwendet. Über das Element -\FontElement{contract.Clause}\important{\FontElement{contract.Clause}} -kann diese Schrift jederzeit mit Hilfe der Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont}\important[i]{\Macro{setkomafont}, \Macro{addtokomafont}} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden. Innerhalb der -\Environment{contract}-Umgebung kann statt \FontElement{contract.Clause} -auch \FontElement{Clause}\important{\FontElement{Clause}} -verwendet werden.% +\FontElement{contract.Clause}\important{\FontElement{contract.Clause}} kann +diese Schrift jederzeit mit Hilfe der Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}% +\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont}} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +geändert werden. Innerhalb der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung kann +statt \FontElement{contract.Clause} auch +\FontElement{Clause}\important{\FontElement{Clause}} verwendet werden.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{Clause}% \EndIndex{FontElement}{contract.Clause} @@ -306,7 +305,7 @@ Mit der Eigenschaft \Option{dummy}\important{\Option{dummy}} kann man die Ausgabe der kompletten Überschrift des Paragraphen unterdrücken. In der automatischen Zählung wird der Paragraph aber dennoch berücksichtigt. Auf diese Weise kann man beispielsweise\textnote{Beispiel} mit -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \Clause{dummy} \end{lstcode} einen Paragraphen in der automatischen Zählung überspringen, falls der @@ -317,29 +316,28 @@ Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} als Wert allenfalls \PValue{true} und \PValue{false} versteht. Alle anderen Werte werden normalerweise ignoriert, können im ungünstigsten Fall aber auch zu einer Fehlermeldung führen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{SubClause}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Clause}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{Clauseformat}\Parameter{Nummer} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Clauseformat}% Wie bereits in der vorausgehenden Erklärung erwähnt, werden juristische Paragraphen und Unterparagraphen normalerweise nummeriert. Die Formatierung der Nummer erfolgt dabei mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{Clauseformat}, die als einziges Argument die Nummer erwartet. Bei der Vordefinierung als -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\Clauseformat}[1]{\S~#1} \end{lstcode} wird der Nummer mit \Macro{S}\IndexCmd{S} lediglich das Paragraphensymbol gefolgt von einem nicht trennbaren Leerzeichen vorangestellt. Bei Umdefinierungen ist auf die Expandierbarkeit zu achten!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Clauseformat}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{juratitlepagebreak}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{juratitlepagebreak}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{juratitlepagebreak~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Normalerweise sind Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von Überschriften aller Art verboten. Einige Juristen benötigen jedoch Seitenumbrüche innerhalb von Paragraphentiteln. Daher kann ein solcher Umbruch mit @@ -347,17 +345,16 @@ Paragraphentiteln. Daher kann ein solcher Umbruch mit werden. Die möglichen Einstellungen für \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} sind \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} zu entnehmen.% -\EndIndex{Option}{juratitlepagebreak~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{clausemark}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{clausemark}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clausemark~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Da Paragraphen eine untergeordnete Gliederung mit unabhängiger Nummerierung sind, erzeugen sie in der Voreinstellung keine Kolumnentitel. Über alternative Einstellungen können jedoch auch Kolumnentitel erzeugt werden. Die möglichen -Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind \autoref{tab:scrjura.clausemark} zu -entnehmen.% +Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind \autoref{tab:scrjura.clausemark} zu entnehmen.% % \begin{table} \caption{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{clausemark} zur Erzeugung von @@ -374,15 +371,16 @@ entnehmen.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{false}}% }% \entry{\PValue{forceboth}}{% - Paragraphen erzeugen mit \Macro{markboth} linke und rechte Marken für - Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument beispielsweise über den - Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel verwendet.% + Paragraphen erzeugen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markboth} linke und rechte + Marken für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument + beispielsweise über den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel + verwendet.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{forceboth}}% }% \entry{\PValue{forceright}}{% - Paragraphen erzeugen mit \Macro{markright} rechte Marken für - Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument beispielsweise über den - Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel verwendet.% + Paragraphen erzeugen mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.markright} rechte Marken + für Kolumnentitel unabhängig davon, ob das Dokument beispielsweise über + den Seitenstil überhaupt lebende Kolumnentitel verwendet.% \IndexOption{clausemark~=\PValue{forceright}}% }% \entry{\PValue{right}}{% @@ -393,27 +391,27 @@ entnehmen.% \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{clausemark~=\PName{Einstellung}}% - +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Absätze} \label{sec:scrjura.par} - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Absatz>Nummerierung}% Innerhalb von Paragraphen werden Absätze von \Package{scrjura} normalerweise automatisch nummeriert. Sie sind damit ein stark gliederndes Element, ähnlich -\Macro{paragraph} oder \Macro{subparagraph} in normalen Texten. Innerhalb von -Verträgen wird deshalb häufig auch gerne mit Abstand zwischen den Absätzen -gearbeitet. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} bietet keinen eigenen Mechanismus -hierfür. Stattdessen sei auf die Option -\Option{parskip}\IndexOption{parskip}\important{\Option{parskip}} der +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph} in +normalen Texten. Innerhalb von Verträgen wird deshalb häufig auch gerne mit +Abstand zwischen den Absätzen gearbeitet. Das Paket \Package{scrjura} bietet +keinen eigenen Mechanismus hierfür. Stattdessen sei auf die Option +\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}% +\IndexOption{parskip}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.parskip}} der \KOMAScript-Klassen verwiesen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.parskip}). +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.parskip}). \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{parnumber}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{parnumber}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{parnumber~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Die automatische Nummerierung der Absätze entspricht den beiden Einstellungen \OptionValue{parnumber}{auto} und \OptionValue{parnumber}{true}. Manchmal ist es notwendig, die automatische Nummerierung abzuschalten. Das ist mit @@ -439,18 +437,14 @@ Paragraphen mit identischer Nummer in einem Dokument befinden. Da\textnote{Achtung!} die Information erst am Ende eines Paragraphen zur Verfügung steht, werden in der Regel zwei \LaTeX-Läufe benötigt, bis die automatische Absatznummerierung korrekt erfolgt.% -\EndIndex{Option}{parnumber~=\PName{Einstellung}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{par}\\ - \Macro{thepar}\\ - \Macro{parformat}\\ + \Counter{par} + \Macro{thepar} + \Macro{parformat} \Macro{parformatseparation} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Counter}{par}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thepar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parformat}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parformatseparation}% Für die Nummerierung der Absätze wird der Zähler \Counter{par} verwendet. Seine Darstellung, \Macro{thepar} ist mit \Macro{arabic}\PParameter{par} als arabische Zahl voreingestellt. Die Ausgabe @@ -470,17 +464,13 @@ voreingestellt. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass \Package{scrjura} intern davon ausgeht, dass \Macro{thepar} eine arabische Zahl ist. Daher sollte diese Anweisung keinesfalls umdefiniert werden!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parformatseparation} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parformat}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thepar}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{par}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ellipsispar}\OParameter{Anzahl}\\ + \Macro{ellipsispar}\OParameter{Anzahl} \Macro{parellipsis} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ellipsispar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parellipsis}% Manchmal\ChangedAt{v0.7}{\Package{scrjura}} -- insbesondere in vergleichenden Kommentaren -- ist es wünschenswert, wenn man Absätze in Gesetzen auslassen, aber gleichzeitig die Auslassung\Index{Absatz>Auslassung} markieren kann. Die @@ -528,14 +518,13 @@ Die Auslassungszeichen sind so vordefiniert, dass Anweisung definiert ist. Anderenfalls wird \Macro{dots} verwendet. Eine Umdefinierung von \Macro{parellipsis} ist mit \Macro{renewcommand} jederzeit möglich.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parellipsis}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ellipsispar}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Absatz>Nummerierung}% +\EndIndexGroup + \subsection{Sätze} \label{sec:scrjura.sentence} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Satz>Nummerierung}% Absätze in Verträge bestehen aus einem oder mehreren Sätzen, die teilweise ebenfalls nummeriert werden. Da eine automatische Nummerierung jedoch @@ -543,13 +532,10 @@ problematisch und fehleranfällig ist, wurde eine solche bisher nicht implementiert. \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{sentence}\\ - \Macro{thesentence}\\ + \Counter{sentence} + \Macro{thesentence} \Macro{Sentence} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Counter}{sentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thesentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{Sentence}% Die Nummerierung von Sätzen erfolgt manuell mit der Anweisung \Macro{Sentence}. Dabei wird der Zähler \Counter{sentence} automatisch erhöht und in der Voreinstellung von \Macro{thesentence} als arabische Zahl @@ -558,31 +544,27 @@ ausgegeben. Bei\textnote{Tipp!} Verwendung von \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} ist es einfach möglich, eine Abkürzung für \Macro{Sentence} zu definieren:% \phantomsection\label{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample}% -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% - moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] \useshorthands{'} \defineshorthand{'S}{\Sentence\ignorespaces} \end{lstcode} Bei dieser Definition wurde dafür gesorgt, dass Leerzeichen nach \lstinline|'S| ignoriert werden. Es ist sogar möglich zusätzlich eine Abkürzung für einen Punkt gefolgt von einer neuen Satznummer zu definieren: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% - moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] +\begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand}] \defineshorthand{'.}{. \Sentence\ignorespaces} \end{lstcode} Diese beiden Abkürzungen haben sich in der Praxis sehr bewährt. Näheres zur Verwendung von \Macro{useshorthands} und \Macro{defineshorthand} ist der Anleitung zum Paket \Package{babel} zu entnehmen (siehe \cite{package:babel}).% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{Sentence}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thesentence}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{sentence}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Satz>Nummerierung} +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Paragraphen>juristische}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Vertraege=Verträge}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Querverweise} @@ -594,93 +576,71 @@ Querverweise mit \Macro{label}\IndexCmd{label}\important{\Macro{label}}, \Package{scrjura} um weitere Anweisungen ergänzt. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ref}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refL}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refS}\Parameter{Label}\\ + \Macro{ref}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refL}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refS}\Parameter{Label} \Macro{refN}\Parameter{Label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ref}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refN}% Die Anweisungen \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refS} und \Macro{refN} referenzieren Paragraph, Absatz und Satz immer vollständig. \Macro{refL} verwendet dabei eine textuelle Langform, während \Macro{refS} eine textuelle Kurzform bietet. \Macro{refN} ist eine rein nummerische Kurzform. \Macro{ref} entspricht in der Voreinstellung \Macro{refL}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ref}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{Label}\\ + \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{Label} \Macro{refClauseN}\Parameter{Label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refClause}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refClauseN}% -Für die Referenzierung von Paragraphen ohne Absatz und Satz, unterscheiden sich -\Macro{refClause} und \Macro{refClauseN} nur darin, dass ersteres -automatisch ein Paragraphenzeichen voran stellt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refClauseN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refClause}% +Für die Referenzierung von Paragraphen ohne Absatz und Satz, unterscheiden +sich \Macro{refClause} und \Macro{refClauseN} nur darin, dass ersteres +automatisch ein Paragraphenzeichen voran stellt.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refPar}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{Label}\\ + \Macro{refPar}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{Label} \Macro{refParN}\OParameter{Zahlenformat}\Parameter{Label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refPar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refParN}% Nur den Absatz kann man mit \Macro{refParL}, \Macro{refParS} und \Macro{refParN} referenzieren. Die Formen unterscheiden sich dabei wie bereits -für \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refN} und \Macro{refS} angegeben. Eine Besonderheit -stellt das optionale Argument von \Macro{refParN} dar. Normalerweise werden -Absätze in rein nummerischer Form als römische Zahlen referenziert. Über das -optionale Argument kann jedoch auch ein anderes Format vorgegeben -werden. Sinnvoll ist hier in erster Linie das \PValue{Zahlenformat} -\PValue{arabic} für eine arabische Absatznummer. \Macro{refPar} entspricht in -der Voreinstellung \Macro{refParL}. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refParL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refPar}% +für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS} angegeben. Eine Besonderheit stellt das +optionale Argument von \Macro{refParN} dar. Normalerweise werden Absätze in +rein nummerischer Form als römische Zahlen referenziert. Über das optionale +Argument kann jedoch auch ein anderes Format vorgegeben werden. Sinnvoll ist +hier in erster Linie das \PValue{Zahlenformat} \PValue{arabic} für eine +arabische Absatznummer. \Macro{refPar} entspricht in der Voreinstellung +\Macro{refParL}. +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{refSentence}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{Label}\\ - \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{Label}\\ + \Macro{refSentence}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{Label} + \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{Label} \Macro{refSentenceN}\Parameter{Label} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentence}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceS}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceN}% Der Satz ohne Paragraph und Absatz kann mit \Macro{refSentenceL}, \Macro{refSentenceS} oder \Macro{refSentenceN} referenziert werden. Auch hier gibt es wieder eine textuelle Langform, eine textuelle Kurzform und eine rein nummerische Form. \Macro{refSentence} entspricht in der Voreinstellung \Macro{refSentenceL}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceN}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceS}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentenceL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refSentence}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{ref}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{ref}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{ref~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -Die Ergebnisse von \Macro{ref}, \Macro{refPar} und \Macro{refSentence} sind +Die Ergebnisse von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} sind von der \PName{Einstellung} für Option \Option{ref} abhängig. In der -Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refParL} und -\Macro{refSentenceL}. Mögliche Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind +Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}. Mögliche Werte und ihre Bedeutung sind \autoref{tab:scrjura.ref} zu entnehmen.% % \begin{table} @@ -691,73 +651,76 @@ Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refParL} und Referenzierungsformate% }]{% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} zur Einstellung des Formats von - \Macro{ref}, \Macro{refPar} und \Macro{refSentence}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ref}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence}% \label{tab:scrjura.ref}% }% % {% % Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{ref} \emph{(Fortsetzung)}% % }% \begin{desctabular} - \entry{\PValue{long}}{% - Die Einstellungen \PValue{parlong} und \PValue{sentencelong} werden - kombiniert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{numeric}}{% - Die Einstellungen \PValue{parnumeric} und \PValue{sentencenumeric} werden - kombiniert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{numeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{clauseonly}, \PValue{onlyclause}, - \PValue{ClauseOnly}, \PValue{OnlyClause}}{% - Die Einstellungen \PValue{paroff} und \PValue{sentenceoff} werden - kombiniert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch sowohl \Macro{refPar} als - auch \Macro{refSentence} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugen!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parlong}, \PValue{longpar}, \PValue{ParL}}{% - Der Absatz wird in der textuellen Langform referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parnumeric}, \PValue{numericpar}, \PValue{ParN}}{% - Der Absatz wird in der rein nummerischen Form referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parnumeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{paroff}, \PValue{nopar}}{% - Der Absatz wird nicht mit referenziert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch - \Macro{refPar} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugt!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{paroff}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{parshort}, \PValue{shortpar}, \PValue{ParS}}{% - Der Absatz wird in der textuellen Kurzform referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parshort}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentencelong}, \PValue{longsentence}, \PValue{SentenceL}}{% - Der Satz wird in der textuellen Langform referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentencenumeric}, \PValue{numericsentence}, - \PValue{SentenceN}}{% - Der Satz wird in der rein nummerischen Form referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentencenumeric}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentenceoff}, \PValue{nosentence}}{% - Der Satz wird nicht mit referenziert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch - von \Macro{refSentence} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugt wird!% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceoff}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{sentenceshort}, \PValue{shortsentence}, \PValue{SentenceS}}{% - Der Satz wird in der textuellen Kurzform referenziert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceshort}}% - }% - \entry{\PValue{short}}{% - Die Einstellungen \PValue{parshort} und \PValue{sentenceshort} werden - kombiniert.% - \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{short}}% - }% + \entry{\PValue{long}}{% + Die Einstellungen \PValue{parlong} und \PValue{sentencelong} werden + kombiniert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{numeric}}{% + Die Einstellungen \PValue{parnumeric} und \PValue{sentencenumeric} + werden kombiniert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{numeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{clauseonly}, \PValue{onlyclause}, \PValue{ClauseOnly}, + \PValue{OnlyClause}}{% + Die Einstellungen \PValue{paroff} und \PValue{sentenceoff} werden + kombiniert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch sowohl + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} als auch + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugen!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{long}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parlong}, \PValue{longpar}, \PValue{ParL}}{% + Der Absatz wird in der textuellen Langform referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parnumeric}, \PValue{numericpar}, \PValue{ParN}}{% + Der Absatz wird in der rein nummerischen Form referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parnumeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{paroff}, \PValue{nopar}}{% + Der Absatz wird nicht mit referenziert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refPar} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugt!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{paroff}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{parshort}, \PValue{shortpar}, \PValue{ParS}}{% + Der Absatz wird in der textuellen Kurzform referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parshort}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentencelong}, \PValue{longsentence}, \PValue{SentenceL}}{% + Der Satz wird in der textuellen Langform referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{parlong}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentencenumeric}, \PValue{numericsentence}, + \PValue{SentenceN}}{% + Der Satz wird in der rein nummerischen Form referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentencenumeric}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentenceoff}, \PValue{nosentence}}{% + Der Satz wird nicht mit referenziert. Es ist zu beachten, dass dadurch + von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentence} ein leeres Ergebnis erzeugt + wird!% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceoff}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{sentenceshort}, \PValue{shortsentence}, + \PValue{SentenceS}}{% + Der Satz wird in der textuellen Kurzform referenziert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{sentenceshort}}% + }% + \entry{\PValue{short}}{% + Die Einstellungen \PValue{parshort} und \PValue{sentenceshort} werden + kombiniert.% + \IndexOption{ref~=\PValue{short}}% + }% \end{desctabular} \end{table} -\EndIndex{Option}{ref~=\PName{Einstellung}}% \begin{Example} Angenommen Sie wollen, dass auf Absätze immer in der Form »Absatz 1 in @@ -771,7 +734,7 @@ Voreinstellung entsprechen diese \Macro{refL}, \Macro{refParL} und } \end{lstcode} sehr einfach erreichen. Die so neu definierte Anweisung ist genau wie - \Macro{refParL} zu verwenden.% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL} zu verwenden.% \end{Example}% Beispiele für die Ergebnisse der nicht konfigurierbaren, grundlegenden @@ -786,24 +749,26 @@ Anweisungen finden sich in \autoref{tab:scrjura.refexamples}. \toprule Anweisung & Beispielausgabe \\ \midrule - \Macro{refL}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 1 \\ - \Macro{refS}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Abs. 1 S. 1 \\ - \Macro{refN}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 I 1. \\ - \Macro{refClause}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 \\ - \Macro{refClauseN}\Parameter{Label} & 1 \\ - \Macro{refParL}\Parameter{Label} & Absatz 1 \\ - \Macro{refParS}\Parameter{Label} & Abs. 1 \\ - \Macro{refParN}\Parameter{Label} & I \\ - \Macro{refParN}\POParameter{arabic}\Parameter{Label} & 1 \\ - \Macro{refParN}\POParameter{roman}\Parameter{Label} & i \\ - \Macro{refSentenceL}\Parameter{Label} & Satz 1 \\ - \Macro{refSentenceS}\Parameter{Label} & S. 1 \\ - \Macro{refSentenceN}\Parameter{Label} & 1. \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refL}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Absatz 1 Satz 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refS}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 Abs. 1 S. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refN}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 I 1. \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClause}\Parameter{Label} & § 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refClauseN}\Parameter{Label} & 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParL}\Parameter{Label} & Absatz 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParS}\Parameter{Label} & Abs. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\Parameter{Label} & I \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\POParameter{arabic}\Parameter{Label} & 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refParN}\POParameter{roman}\Parameter{Label} & i \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceL}\Parameter{Label} & Satz 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceS}\Parameter{Label} & S. 1 \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.refSentenceN}\Parameter{Label} & 1. \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} \label{tab:scrjura.refexamples} \end{table} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Zusätzliche Vertragsumgebungen} \label{sec:scrjura.newenv} @@ -812,14 +777,14 @@ Einer der Anwender setzt mit \Package{scrjura} keine Verträge oder Kommentare zu einzelnen Gesetzen, sondern Werke, in denen unterschiedliche Arten von Gesetzen behandelt werden. Es ist daher erforderliche, dass ein Paragraph nicht immer mit demselben Präfix »\S« versehen wird, sondern beispielsweise -als »Art.« oder »GG« oder was auch immer bezeichnet wird. Darüber hinaus -wird eine unabhängige Zählung der unterschiedlichen Paragraphen benötigt. +als »Art.« oder »GG« oder was auch immer bezeichnet wird. Darüber hinaus wird +eine unabhängige Zählung der unterschiedlichen Paragraphen benötigt. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}\Parameter{Name}\OParameter{Optionen}% - \Parameter{Start-Anweisungen}\Parameter{End-Anweisungen} + \Macro{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}\Parameter{Name}\OParameter{Optionen} + \Parameter{Start-Anweisungen} + \Parameter{End-Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}% Über\ChangedAt{v0.9}{\Package{scrjura}} diese Anweisung können weitere, voneinander unabhängige Umgebungen für Vertrags- oder Gesetzestexte deklariert werden. Das Argument \PName{Name} ist dabei der Name der neuen @@ -829,30 +794,32 @@ Umgebung ausgeführt werden, ganz als ob man sie jedes Mal unmittelbar hinter \PName{End-Anwesiungen} immer am Ende der Umgebung ausgeführt, ganz als ob man sie jedes Mal unmittelbar vor \Macro{end}\Parameter{Name} einfügen würde. Ohne \PName{Optionen} entspricht die neue Umgebung \PName{Name} einer -\Environment{contract}-Umgebung mit eigenen Zählern. Es besteht jedoch die -Möglichkeit über eine mit Komma separierte Liste an \PName{Optionen} darauf -Einfluss zu nehmen. Derzeit werden folgende \PName{Optionen} unterstützt: +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung mit eigenen Zählern. Es besteht +jedoch die Möglichkeit über eine mit Komma separierte Liste an +\PName{Optionen} darauf Einfluss zu nehmen. Derzeit werden folgende +\PName{Optionen} unterstützt: \begin{description} -\item[\KOption{Clause}\PName{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche - \PName{Anweisung} innerhalb der Umgebung die Anweisung \Macro{Clause} - abgebildet werden soll. Die \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für - \Environment{contract} dokumentierte Anweisung genau ein Argument - erwarten. Für eine korrekte Anwendung dieser Option sind erweiterte - Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion von \Package{scrjura} - notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an die \PName{Anweisung} - von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit empfohlen, die Option - nicht zu verwenden! -\item[\KOption{SubClause}\PName{Anweisung}:] Siehe Option \Option{Clause}, - allerdings für \Macro{SubClause} statt \Macro{Clause}. -\item[\KOption{Sentence}\PName{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche - \PName{Anweisung} innerhalb der Umgebung die Anweisung \Macro{Sentence} - abgebildet werden soll. Die \Macro{Anweisung} sollte kein Argument - besitzen. Normalerweise sollte sie den Zähler - \Counter{sentence}\IndexCounter{sentence} mit +\item[\OptionVName{Clause}{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche + \PName{Anweisung} innerhalb der Umgebung die Anweisung + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause} abgebildet werden soll. Die + \PName{Anweisung} sollte wie die für \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} + dokumentierte Anweisung genau ein Argument erwarten. Für eine korrekte + Anwendung dieser Option sind erweiterte Kenntnisse über die interne Funktion + von \Package{scrjura} notwendig. Außerdem können sich die Anforderungen an + die \PName{Anweisung} von Version zu Version noch ändern. Daher wird derzeit + empfohlen, die Option nicht zu verwenden! +\item[\OptionVName{SubClause}{Anweisung}:] Siehe Option \Option{Clause}, + allerdings für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} statt + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause}. +\item[\OptionVName{Sentence}{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche + \PName{Anweisung} innerhalb der Umgebung die Anweisung + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Sentence} abgebildet werden soll. Die + \Macro{Anweisung} sollte kein Argument besitzen. Normalerweise sollte sie + den Zähler \Counter{sentence}\IndexCounter{sentence} mit \Macro{refstepcounter}\IndexCmd{refstepcounter} erhöhen und dann in geeigneter Form ausgeben. Dabei ist besonders darauf zu achten, dass keine unerwünschten Leerzeichen eingebaut werden! -\item[\KOption{ClauseNumberFormat}\PName{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche +\item[\OptionVName{ClauseNumberFormat}{Anweisung}:] Legt fest, auf welche Weise die Paragraphen"=Nummern dieser Umgebung bei der Ausgabe formatiert werden. Es wird eine Anweisung mit genau einem Argument erwartet, der Nummer des Paragraphen. Falls diese Nummer das letzte Argument einer Kette von @@ -874,7 +841,7 @@ Einfluss zu nehmen. Derzeit werden folgende \PName{Optionen} unterstützt: verwendet werden. Natürlich wird dann auch bei der Referenzierung automatisch »Art.« an Stelle von »\S« vorangestellt.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewJuraEnvironment}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen} @@ -887,8 +854,9 @@ Deutsches Recht entwickelt. Daher unterstützte zunächst auch nur die Sprachen Sprachpaketen wie \Package{babel}\important{\Package{babel}}\IndexPackage{babel} zusammen arbeitet. Anwender können solche Anpassungen einfach mit -\Macro{providecaptionname} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}) vornehmen. Sollten Sie über +\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname} (siehe +\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, +\DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}) vornehmen. Sollten Sie über gesicherte Informationen zu den im juristischen Umfeld gebräuchlichen Begriffen in anderen Sprachen verfügen, würde sich der Autor über entsprechende Rückmeldungen freuen. Auf diesem Weg ist inzwischen auch @@ -896,15 +864,11 @@ Unterstützung für \PValue{english}, \PValue{american}, \PValue{british}, \PValue{canadian}, \PValue{USenglish} und \PValue{UKenglish} hinzu gekommen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{parname}\\ - \Macro{parshortname}\\ - \Macro{sentencename}\\ + \Macro{parname} + \Macro{parshortname} + \Macro{sentencename} \Macro{sentenceshortname} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{parshortname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sentencename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{sentenceshortname}% Dies sind die sprachabhängigen Bezeichnungen, die von \Package{scrjura} verwendet werden. Die Bedeutung und die im Deutschen vordefinierten Werte sind \autoref{tab:scrjura.captionnames} zu entnehmen. Dabei nimmt \Package{scrjura} @@ -938,10 +902,8 @@ verwendet, so wird eine entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben.% \label{tab:scrjura.captionnames} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sentenceshortname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{sentencename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parshortname} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{parname} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Ein ausführliches Beispiel} \label{sec:scrjura.example} @@ -952,90 +914,91 @@ wollte. Damit so etwas möglich ist, muss es auch einen Verein mit einer Satzung geben, die das vorschreibt. Eine Vereinssatzung ist letztlich eine Art Vertrag und kann mit \Package{scrjura} gesetzt werden. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=1-2}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Als Klasse wird \Class{scrartcl} verwendet. Da es bei Satzungen eher üblich ist, die Absätze mit einem Abstand zu setzen, wird Option -\OptionValue{parskip}{half} verwendet (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.option.parskip}). +\OptionValueRef{maincls}{parskip}{half} verwendet (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.parmarkup}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.parskip}). -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=4-4}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Die Satzung soll in Deutsch verfasst werden. Daher wird das Paket \Package{babel} mit Option \Option{ngerman} geladen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange={6-7,9-9}}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Es werden einige Standardeinstellungen für die Schrift vorgenommen. Dazu kommt das Paket \Package{textcomp}, das neben einem brauchbaren Euro-Zeichen für einige Schriften auch ein verbessertes Paragraphenzeichen bereit stellt. \lstinputcode[{moretexcs=SelectInputMappings,xleftmargin=2em,% - belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,% linerange=11-15}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Damit Sonderzeichen und Umlaute direkt eingegeben werden können, wird die Eingabecodierung ermittelt. Alternativ könnte hier auch das Paket \Package{inputenc} zum Einsatz kommen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=17-17}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Später sollen Listen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Kleinbuchstaben nummeriert werden. Dies ist beispielsweise mit dem Paket \Package{enumerate} möglich. \lstinputcode[{moretexcs={useshorthands,defineshorthand},% - belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% + xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=19-27}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Nun ist es Zeit für \Package{scrjura}. Mit Option -\OptionValue{clausemark}{forceboth} wird für Paragraphen das Setzen von -linken und rechten Marken für Kolumnentitel erzwungen. Da andererseits nicht -erwünscht ist, dass \Macro{section} Kolumnentitel erzeugen, wird Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{myheadings} verwendet, der normalerweise keine lebenden -Kolumnentitel aktiviert. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{clausemark}{forceboth} wird für Paragraphen das +Setzen von linken und rechten Marken für Kolumnentitel erzwungen. Da +andererseits nicht erwünscht ist, dass \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} +Kolumnentitel erzeugen, wird Seitenstil \PageStyle{myheadings} verwendet, der +normalerweise keine lebenden Kolumnentitel aktiviert. Es soll später auch ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden, in das die -Paragraphen ebenfalls aufgenommen werden. Das wird mit \Option{juratotoc} -erreicht. Später werden wir feststellen, dass die voreingestellte Breite für -die Paragraphennummern im Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht genügt. Daher wird mit -\OptionValue{juraticnumberwidth}{2.5em} für etwas mehr Platz gesorgt. +Paragraphen ebenfalls aufgenommen werden. Das wird mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.juratotoc} erreicht. Später werden wir feststellen, +dass die voreingestellte Breite für die Paragraphennummern im +Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht genügt. Daher wird mit +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{juratocnumberwidth}{2.5em} für etwas mehr Platz +gesorgt. Die Definition der Abkürzungen wurde bereits in \autoref{sec:scrjura.shorthandexample} erklärt. Im Beispiel wurde sie übernommen, um später die Eingabe zu vereinfachen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=29-29}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Es ist Zeit, das eigentliche Dokument zu beginnen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=31-35}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Wie jedes Dokument hat auch eine Satzung einen Titel. Dieser wird mit den gewohnten \KOMAScript-Mitteln (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.titlepage}, ab \autopageref{sec:maincls.titlepage}) erstellt. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=37-37}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Wie bereits erwähnt, soll ein Inhaltsverzeichnis erstellt werden. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=39-43}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Präambeln sind in Satzungen nicht ungewöhnlich. Hier wird sie mit -\Macro{addsec} gesetzt, damit sie auch einen Eintrag ins Inhaltsverzeichnis -erhält. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.addsec} gesetzt, damit sie auch einen Eintrag ins +Inhaltsverzeichnis erhält. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=45-45}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Hier wird ein kleiner Trick angewendet. Die einzelnen Artikel der Satzung sollen nicht mit arabischen Zahlen, sondern mit Großbuchstaben nummeriert werden -- genau wie dies auch im Anhang eines Artikels mit \Class{scrartcl} der Fall ist. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=47-49}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Mit dem ersten Artikel beginnt auch der Vertrag. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=50-59}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Der erste Paragraph erhält neben der Nummer auch einen Titel. Dies wird auch bei den nachfolgenden Paragraphen so sein. @@ -1053,65 +1016,66 @@ Abkürzungen \texttt{'S} und erzeugt. Mit der zweiten wird nicht nur ein Punkt, sondern nachfolgend auch eine Satznummer erzeugt. Beide Sätze des Absatzes sind somit nummeriert. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=60-75}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Der zweite Paragraph: Auch dieser enthält wieder mehrere Absätze, die teilweise auch mehrere Sätze umfassen. Im zweiten Absatz ist darüber hinaus eine Aufzählung zu finden. Beim letzten Absatz wurde ein Label gesetzt, da auf diesen später noch verwiesen werden soll. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=77-84}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Der dritte Paragraph enthält als Besonderheit einen Querverweis. In diesem Fall wird in der Langform mit Paragraph, Absatz und Satz referenziert. Soll der Satz später doch entfallen, so kann dies global durch Setzen der Option -\OptionValue{ref}{nosentence} erreicht werden. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{ref}{nosentence} erreicht werden. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=86-87}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Hier gibt es nun einen ersten Spezialfall eines Paragraphen. Dieser Paragraph war in einer früheren Fassung der Satzung noch enthalten, wurde dann aber entfernt. Dabei sollen jedoch die nachfolgenden Paragraphen nicht neu nummeriert werden, sondern ihre alte Nummer behalten. Deshalb wurde die -\Macro{Clause}-Anweisung nicht entfernt, sondern lediglich um die -Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} erweitert. Außerdem kann so auch weiterhin ein +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.Clause}-Anweisung nicht entfernt, sondern lediglich um +die Eigenschaft \Option{dummy} erweitert. Außerdem kann so auch weiterhin ein Label für diesen Paragraphen gesetzt werden, obwohl der Paragraph selbst nicht angezeigt wird. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=88-92}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Es wird ein weiterer Artikel begonnen. Damit Probleme mit der Absatznummerierung ausgeschlossen sind, wird dazu kurzzeitig die -\Environment{contract}-Umgebung unterbrochen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung unterbrochen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=93-93}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Auch der erste Paragraph im nächsten Artikel wurde gestrichen. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=95-104}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Hier haben wir wieder einen echten Paragraphen. Darin wird zum einen auf einen der gestrichenen Paragraphen verwiesen. Zum anderen wird auch wieder ein Label gesetzt. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=107-112}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Hier haben wir den zweiten Spezialfall eines Paragraphen. In diesem Fall wurde kein Paragraph gestrichen, sondern ein neuer Paragraph eingefügt, ohne dass -nachfolgend Paragraphen neu nummeriert werden. Dazu wurde \Macro{SubClause} -verwendet. Somit erhält dieser Paragraph die Nummer des vorherigen -Paragraphen, die zur Unterscheidung um ein kleines »a« erweitert wurde. +nachfolgend Paragraphen neu nummeriert werden. Dazu wurde +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.SubClause} verwendet. Somit erhält dieser Paragraph +die Nummer des vorherigen Paragraphen, die zur Unterscheidung um ein kleines +»a« erweitert wurde. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=114-134}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Die übrigen Paragraphen dieses Artikels enthalten nur bereits bekannte Anweisungen und keine neuen Besonderheiten. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=136-150}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Es folgt noch ein weiterer Artikel ohne Besonderheiten. -\lstinputcode[{belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt,xleftmargin=2em,% +\lstinputcode[{xleftmargin=2em,% linerange=152-152}]{scrjuraexample.tex}% Danach endet das \LaTeX-Dokument, dessen vordere drei Seiten \autoref{fig:scrjura.example} zeigt.% @@ -1159,6 +1123,7 @@ Danach endet das \LaTeX-Dokument, dessen vordere drei Seiten \label{fig:scrjura.example} \end{figure} + \section{Entwicklungsstand} \label{sec:scrjura.draft} @@ -1169,14 +1134,15 @@ im Wesentlichen drei Ursachen. Zum Einen ist das Paket wesentlich allgemeiner entworfen als es derzeit genutzt wird. So war beispielsweise ursprünglich geplant, neben -\Environment{contract} weitere, ähnliche Umgebungen zu erstellen. Erst später -stellte sich heraus, dass diese eine Umgebung alle wesentlichen Anwendungen -bereits abdeckt. Allerdings hat sich später gezeigt, dass es nützlich wäre, neue -\Environment{contract}-Umgebungen definieren zu können, beispielsweise für -Grundgesetzartikel. Dies ist inzwischen implementiert. - -Zum Anderen ist weder das Zusammenspiel mit vielen anderen Paketen -noch die Funktion der \Environment{contract}-Umgebung mit allen möglichen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract} weitere, ähnliche Umgebungen zu +erstellen. Erst später stellte sich heraus, dass diese eine Umgebung alle +wesentlichen Anwendungen bereits abdeckt. Allerdings hat sich später gezeigt, +dass es nützlich wäre, neue \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebungen +definieren zu können, beispielsweise für Grundgesetzartikel. Dies ist +inzwischen implementiert. + +Zum Anderen ist weder das Zusammenspiel mit vielen anderen Paketen noch die +Funktion der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.contract}-Umgebung mit allen möglichen \LaTeX-Umgebungen und Einstellungen verschiedener Klassen und Pakete getestet. Dies liegt nicht zuletzt daran, dass es sich bei \Package{scrjura} um ein sehr spezielles Paket handelt, das weit außerhalb der täglichen Praxis @@ -1188,7 +1154,7 @@ Dinge in \Package{scrjura} noch ändern können. Zwar ist der Autor bemüht, dabei die Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen zu erhalten. Garantiert kann diese jedoch nicht werden.% % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrjura} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex index e03b5161bea..512e36dab09 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-notecolumn-example.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex index d946953c5b1..8785d988ffb 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-notecolumn.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-notecolumn.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-notecolumn.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,18 +46,17 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-notecolumn.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer-notecolumn)] \chapter{Notizspalten mit \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} \labelbase{scrlayer-notecolumn} -\BeginIndex{}{Notiz>Spalte}% -\BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-notecolumn}% +\BeginIndexGroup Bis einschließlich Version~3.11b unterstützte \KOMAScript{} Notizspalten nur -in Form der Marginalienspalte, die mit \Macro{marginpar} und -\Macro{marginline} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.marginline}) mit Inhalt versehen werden +in Form der Marginalienspalte, die mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}) mit Inhalt versehen werden können. Jene Art der Randnotizen hat allerdings einige Nachteile: \begin{itemize} \item Randnotizen können nur vollständig auf einer einzelnen Seite gesetzt @@ -131,15 +130,17 @@ Support dafür bietet. Das liegt in der Natur eines Pakets, das nur zu Demonstrationszwecken geschrieben wurde.% \fi -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options}% \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} + +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup}% \section{Textauszeichnungen} \section{Deklaration neuer Notizspalten} \seclabel{declaration} Beim Laden des Pakets wird bereits automatisch eine Notizspalte namens \PValue{marginpar} deklariert. Wie der Name andeutet, liegt diese Notizspalte -im Bereich der normalen Marginalienspalte von \Macro{marginpar} und -\Macro{marginline}. Dabei werden auch die Einstellungen +im Bereich der normalen Marginalienspalte von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginline}. Dabei werden auch die Einstellungen \Macro{reversemarginpar} und \Macro{normalmarginpar} beachtet, allerdings nicht für die einzelnen Notizen, sondern nur für die gesamten Notizen einer Seite. Maßgeblich ist dabei die Einstellung, die am Ende der Seite, nämlich @@ -159,32 +160,20 @@ ausgegeben werden, deren Seitenstil auf dem Paket \Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer} basiert. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} wird von \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatisch geladen und stellt in der Voreinstellung lediglich den Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile +\PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} empfohlen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclareNoteColumn}}% - \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn}}% - \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte}\\ - \Macro{ProvideNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{ProvideNoteColumn}}% - \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}% - \OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}}% - \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte}% + \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn}\OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen} + \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte} + \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn}\OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen} + \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte} + \Macro{ProvideNoteColumn}\OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen} + \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte} + \Macro{RedeclareNoteColumn}\OParameter{Liste der Einstellungen} + \Parameter{Name der Notizspalte}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideNoteColumn}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareNoteColumn}% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisungen können Notizspalten angelegt werden. Dabei erzeugt \Macro{DeclareNoteColumn} die Notizspalte ungeachtet der Tatsache, ob sie bereits existiert, während \Macro{DeclareNewNoteColumn} einen @@ -200,15 +189,15 @@ erhalten. \BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{Name der Notizspalte}}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}% -Für neue Notizspalten wird immer ein Element zur Änderung der -Schriftattribute mit \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} angelegt, +Für neue Notizspalten wird immer ein Element zur Änderung der Schriftattribute +mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} angelegt, falls dieses noch nicht existiert. Als Name für das Element wird \PValue{notecolumn.}\PName{Name der Notizspalte} verwendet. Dementsprechend existiert für die vordefinierte Notizspalte \PValue{marginpar} das -Element\textnote{Name des Elements} -\PValue{notecolumn.marginpar}. Die Voreinstellung kann bei der Deklaration -einer Notizspalte direkt über die Option \Option{font} innerhalb der -optionalen \PName{Liste der Einstellungen} angegeben werden.% +Element\textnote{Name des Elements} \PValue{notecolumn.marginpar}. Die +Voreinstellung kann bei der Deklaration einer Notizspalte direkt über die +Option \Option{font} innerhalb der optionalen \PName{Liste der Einstellungen} +angegeben werden.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.marginpar}% \EndIndex{FontElement}{notecolumn.\PName{Name der Notizspalte}}% @@ -232,54 +221,52 @@ individuelle Einstellungen überschrieben werden. % (\emph{Fortsetzung})% % }% \begin{desctabular} - \entry{\KOption{font}\PName{Schriftattribute}}{% - Einstellung der \PName{Schriftattribute} der Notizspalte mit Hilfe von - \Macro{setkomafont}. Für erlaubte Werte sei auf - \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont} verwiesen.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% - }% - \entry{\Option{marginpar}}{% - Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der - Marginalienspalte von \Macro{marginpar} entsprechen. Eine Umschaltung - zwischen \Macro{reversemarginpar}\IndexCmd{reversemarginpar} und - \Macro{normalmarginpar}\IndexCmd{normalmarginpar} wird immer nur am Ende - der Seite bei der Ausgabe der Notizspalte beachtet. Es wird darauf - hingewiesen, dass diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{ja} - }% - \entry{\Option{normalmarginpar}}{% - Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der - Marginalienspalte von \Macro{marginpar} bei Einstellung - \Macro{normalmarginpar} entsprechen. Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass - diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{nein} - }% - \entry{\KOption{position}\PName{Abstand}}{% - Die Notizspalte wird mit \PName{Abstand} vom linken Rand des Papiers - gesetzt. Dabei sind für \PName{Abstand} auch komplexe Ausdrücke gestattet, - solange diese voll expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der Ausgabe der - Notizspalte zu einer Länge oder zu einem Längenwert oder einem - Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für - weitere Informationen zu Längenausdrücken.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}% - }% - \entry{\Option{reversemarginpar}}{% - Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der - Marginalienspalte von \Macro{marginpar} bei Einstellung - \Macro{reversemarginpar} entsprechen. Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass - diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{nein} - }% - \entry{\KOption{width}\PName{Breite}}{% - Die Notizspalte wird mit der angegebenen Breite gesetzt. Dabei sind für - \PName{Breite} auch komplexe Ausdrücke gestattet, solange diese voll - expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer - Länge oder einem Längenwert oder einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe - \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu - Längenausdrücken.\par% - Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}% - }% + \entry{\OptionVName{font}{Schriftattribute}}{% + Einstellung der \PName{Schriftattribute} der Notizspalte mit Hilfe von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}. Für erlaubte Werte sei auf + \autoref{sec:maincls.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont} + verwiesen.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{leer}% + }% + \entry{\Option{marginpar}}{% + Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der + Marginalienspalte von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} entsprechen. Eine + Umschaltung zwischen \Macro{reversemarginpar}\IndexCmd{reversemarginpar} + und \Macro{normalmarginpar}\IndexCmd{normalmarginpar} wird immer nur am + Ende der Seite bei der Ausgabe der Notizspalte beachtet. Es wird darauf + hingewiesen, dass diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{ja} }% + \entry{\Option{normalmarginpar}}{% + Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der + Marginalienspalte von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} bei Einstellung + \Macro{normalmarginpar} entsprechen. Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass + diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{nein} }% + \entry{\OptionVName{position}{Abstand}}{% + Die Notizspalte wird mit \PName{Abstand} vom linken Rand des Papiers + gesetzt. Dabei sind für \PName{Abstand} auch komplexe Ausdrücke + gestattet, solange diese voll expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der + Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer Länge oder zu einem Längenwert oder + einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe + \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu + Längenausdrücken.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}% + }% + \entry{\Option{reversemarginpar}}{% + Position und Breite der Notizspalte werden so eingestellt, dass sie der + Marginalienspalte von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} bei Einstellung + \Macro{reversemarginpar} entsprechen. Es wird darauf hingewiesen, dass + diese Option kein Argument erwartet oder erlaubt.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{nein} }% + \entry{\OptionVName{width}{Breite}}{% + Die Notizspalte wird mit der angegebenen Breite gesetzt. Dabei sind für + \PName{Breite} auch komplexe Ausdrücke gestattet, solange diese voll + expandierbar sind und zum Zeitpunkt der Ausgabe der Notizspalte zu einer + Länge oder einem Längenwert oder einem Längenausdruck expandieren. Siehe + \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} für weitere Informationen zu + Längenausdrücken.\par% + Voreinstellung: \emph{durch Option \Option{marginpar}}% + }% \end{desctabular} \end{table} %\end{desclist} @@ -355,7 +342,8 @@ entnehmen. Dann wird das Paket \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}\textnote{Notizspalte mit \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn}} für die Notizspalten geladen. Die gewünschte Breite der Notizspalte wird über - \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea}\IndexPackage{typearea}% + \DescRef{typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea}% + \IndexPackage{typearea}% \IndexCmd{AfterCalculatingTypearea} nach jeder etwaigen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels\textnote{Satzspiegel mit \Package{typearea}} neu berechnet. Sie soll jeweils ein Drittel der Satzspiegelbreite betragen, wobei der Abstand @@ -408,10 +396,8 @@ testen, können Sie vorübergehend Offen blieb in dem Beispiel die Frage, wie der Text für den Kommentar schmaler gesetzt werden kann. Dies werden Sie bei der Fortsetzung des Beispiels erfahren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewNoteColumn}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNoteColumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Erstellen einer Notiz} \seclabel{makenote} @@ -433,14 +419,14 @@ ausgegeben werden, deren Seitenstil auf dem Paket \Package{scrlayer}\IndexPackage{scrlayer} basiert. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} wird von \Package{scrlayer-notecolumn} automatisch geladen und stellt in der Voreinstellung lediglich den Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile +\PageStyle{empty}\IndexPagestyle{empty} bereit. Werden weitere Seitenstile benötigt, wird zusätzlich das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} empfohlen. + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{makenote}\OParameter{Name der Notizspalte}\Parameter{Notiz} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{makenote}% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung kann eine \PName{Notiz} erstellt werden. Dabei wird die aktuelle vertikale Position als vertikale Position für den Anfang der \PName{Notiz} verwendet. Die horizontale Position für die Notiz ergibt sich @@ -484,10 +470,10 @@ verwendet.% durchaus angebracht ist, sich vor der Weisheit der Verfasser zu verbeugen. \end{lstcode} - Die in \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.env.addmargin} + Die in \autoref{sec:maincls.lists}, \DescPageRef{maincls.env.addmargin} dokumentierte Umgebung - \Environment{addmargin}\IndexEnv{addmargin}\textnote{Spaltenbreite - mit \Environment{addmargin}} wird genutzt, um den + \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}\IndexEnv{addmargin}\textnote{Spaltenbreite + mit \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}} wird genutzt, um den Haupttext in der Breite um die Spalte für die Paragraphen zu vermindern. @@ -512,12 +498,12 @@ hinzufügen, ergibt sich eventuell das Problem, dass der Kommentar nicht unterhalb des Gesetzestextes, sondern direkt im Anschluss an den bisherigen Kommentar fortgesetzt wird. Eine Lösung für dieses Problem, werden Sie gleich kennenlernen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{makenote}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{syncwithnotecolumn}\OParameter{Name der Notizspalte} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumn}% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung wird in einer Notizspalte und im Haupttext des Dokuments je ein Synchronisierungspunkt\textnote{Synchronisation}\Index{Synchronisation} @@ -619,12 +605,12 @@ wird nachfolgend beschrieben.% Doch halt! Was wäre, wenn in diesem Beispiel der Paragraph nicht mehr auf die Seiten passen würde? Würde er dann auf der nächsten Seite ausgegeben? Diese Frage wird im nächsten Abschnitt beantwortet werden. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{syncwithnotecolumns}\OParameter{Liste von Notizspalte-Namen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumns}% Diese Anweisung führt eine Synchronisierung des Haupttextes mit allen in der mit Komma separierten \PName{Liste von Notizspalten-Namen} durch. Dabei wird der Haupttext mit der Notizspalte synchronisiert, deren Marke am weitesten @@ -634,7 +620,7 @@ untereinander synchronisiert. Wird das optionale Argument nicht angegeben oder ist es leer (oder beginnt es mit \Macro{relax}), so wird mit allen deklarierten Notizspalten synchronisiert.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{syncwithnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Erzwungene Ausgabe von Notizspalten} @@ -651,7 +637,6 @@ Ende eines Kapitels oder das Ende des Dokuments. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{clearnotecolumn}\OParameter{Name der Notizspalte} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumn}% Mit dieser Anweisung werden alle Notizen einer bestimmen Notizspalte ausgegeben, die\textnote{anhängige Notizen}\Index{Notiz>anhaengige=anhängige} bis zum Ende der aktuellen Seite noch nicht ausgegeben sind, aber auf dieser @@ -682,33 +667,35 @@ erzwungenen Ausgabe im Fall, dass tatsächlich eine Ausgabe stattfindet, am Anfang der Seite nach der letzten Ausgabe und nicht unmittelbar unterhalb der letzten Ausgabe. Dafür terminiert die erzwungene Ausgabe in der Regel mit weniger \LaTeX-Läufen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumn}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{clearnotecolumns}\OParameter{Liste von Notizspalten-Namen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumns}% -Diese Anweisung arbeitet vergleichbar mit \Macro{clearnotecolumn}. Allerdings -kann hier als optionales Argument nicht nur eine Notizspalte angegeben werden, -sondern es ist eine durch Komma getrennte Liste mehrerer Namen von -Notizspalten erlaubt. Es werden dann die anhängigen Notizen all dieser Spalten -ausgegeben. +Diese Anweisung arbeitet vergleichbar mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumn}. Allerdings kann hier als optionales +Argument nicht nur eine Notizspalte angegeben werden, sondern es ist eine +durch Komma getrennte Liste mehrerer Namen von Notizspalten erlaubt. Es werden +dann die anhängigen Notizen all dieser Spalten ausgegeben. Wurde das optionale Argument nicht angegeben oder ist es leer, so werden die anhängigen Notizen aller Notizspalten ausgegeben.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{autoclearnotecolumns}\PName{Ein-Aus-Schalter} + \OptionVName{autoclearnotecolumns}{Ein-Aus-Schalter} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{autoclearnotecolumns}% In der Regel wird man anhängige Notizen immer dann ausgeben lassen, wenn im -Dokument explizit oder implizit -- beispielsweise in Folge von \Macro{chapter} --- die Anweisung \Macro{clearpage} ausgeführt wird. Dies ist auch am Ende -eines Dokuments innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} der Fall. Über -die Option \Option{autoclearnotecolumns} kann daher gesteuert werden, ob bei -Ausführung von \Macro{clearpage} automatisch auch \Macro{clearnotecolumns} -ohne Argument ausgeführt werden soll. +Dokument explizit oder implizit -- beispielsweise in Folge von +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} -- die Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} +ausgeführt wird. Dies ist auch am Ende eines Dokuments innerhalb von +\Macro{end}\PParameter{document} der Fall. Über die Option +\Option{autoclearnotecolumns} kann daher gesteuert werden, ob bei Ausführung +von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} automatisch auch +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} ohne Argument ausgeführt werden +soll. Da davon ausgegangen wird, dass dies in der Regel erwünscht ist, ist die Option in der Voreinstellung aktiv. Man kann sie jedoch über die @@ -720,16 +707,16 @@ Es ist zu beachten, dass im Falle der Deaktivierung der automatischen Ausgabe anhängiger Notizen am Ende des Dokument Notizen ganz oder teilweise verloren gehen können. Daher sollte man in diesem Fall vor \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} sicherheitshalber ein -\Macro{clearnotecolumns} einfügen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.clearnotecolumns} einfügen. Damit ist nun auch die Frage nach dem Beispiel im letzten Abschnitt beantwortet, ob der Paragraph auch komplett ausgegeben würde, wenn er auf die nächste Seite umbrochen werden müsste. Dies ist in der Voreinstellung selbstverständlich der Fall. Da es jedoch nach dem Ende der -\Environment{addmargin}-Umgebung geschehen würde, könnte es eventuell noch -zu Überlappungen durch nachfolgenden Text kommen. Daher wäre es im Beispiel -durchaus sinnvoll, nach der \Environment{addmargin}-Umgebung einen weiteren -Synchronisationspunkt einzufügen. +\DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}-Umgebung geschehen würde, könnte es eventuell +noch zu Überlappungen durch nachfolgenden Text kommen. Daher wäre es im +Beispiel durchaus sinnvoll, nach der \DescRef{maincls.env.addmargin}-Umgebung +einen weiteren Synchronisationspunkt einzufügen. Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in \autoref{fig:scrlayer-notecolumn.example} zu sehen.\iffree{}{ Dabei wurde @@ -746,10 +733,10 @@ Das Ergebnis des Beispiels ist übrigens in {scrlayer-notecolumn-example}} \end{captionbeside} \end{figure} -\EndIndex{Option}{autoclearnotecolumns}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-notecolumn}% -\EndIndex{}{Notiz>Spalte} +\EndIndexGroup + %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex index 333fd564d47..331a92a911a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlayer-scrpage for experts)] \chapter[{Zusätzliche Möglichkeiten von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}] @@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} \labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage-experts} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% Über die Erklärungen in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage} von \autoref{part:forAuthors} diese\iffree{r Anleitung}{s Buches} hinaus bietet @@ -63,54 +64,50 @@ nicht zwingend benötigt oder die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu wissen brauchen. All diese Dinge werden daher hier in \autoref{part:forExperts} dokumentiert. -\LoadCommon[scrlayerscrpageexperts]{21}% \section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} \section{Definition eigener Seitenstil-Paare} \seclabel{pagestyle.pairs} In \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} wurden die beiden -Seitenstile \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} -vorgestellt. Diese bilden quasi ein Paar, bei dem \Pagestyle{scrheadings} als +Seitenstile \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} +vorgestellt. Diese bilden quasi ein Paar, bei dem \PageStyle{scrheadings} als Haupt-Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen ist, während -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} ein dazu passender \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} ein dazu passender \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel aber üblicherweise mit Paginierung, also mit Seitenzahl ist. Neben der Konfiguration dieses vordefinierten Paars bietet \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch die Möglichkeit, zusätzliche Paare zu -definieren. Der Name des Haupt-Seitenstils \Pagestyle{scrheadings} dient dabei +definieren. Der Name des Haupt-Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} dient dabei quasi auch als Name des Seitenstil-Paars. Die allermeisten Anwender werden in der Regel mit dem einen vordefinierten -Seitenstil-Paar \Pagestyle{scrheadings} auskommen. Die in diesem Abschnitt +Seitenstil-Paar \PageStyle{scrheadings} auskommen. Die in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten Anweisungen sind daher eher Ergänzungen für besondere Fälle. Da mir während des Abfassens dieser Anleitung keine handlichen Anwendungsbeispiele eingefallen sind, gibt es auch keine ausführlichen Beispiele. Sollte mir im Support einmal eine besonders schöne Anwendung begegnen, werde ich solche aber in zukünftigen Fassungen gerne aufgreifen. Ich bin jedoch gleichzeitig sicher, dass sich all diese Fälle auch mit dem einen -Paar \Pagestyle{scrheadings} lösen lassen. +Paar \PageStyle{scrheadings} lösen lassen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{defpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{Eltern-Paar}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition}\\ - \Macro{newpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{Eltern-Paar}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition}\\ - \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{Eltern-Paar}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition}\\ - \Macro{providepairofpagestyles}% - \OParameter{Eltern-Paar}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition} + \Macro{defpairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition} + \Macro{newpairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition} + \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition} + \Macro{providepairofpagestyles}\OParameter{Eltern-Paar} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Definition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepairofpagestyles}% Mit diesen Anweisungen können Paare von Seitenstilen vergleichbar zu -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} definiert -werden. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des zu \Pagestyle{scrheadings} +\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} definiert +werden. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des zu \PageStyle{scrheadings} vergleichbaren Hauptseitenstils, der für die Verwendung mit Kolumnentiteln -ausgelegt ist. Für den Namen des zugehörigen \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil wird +ausgelegt ist. Für den Namen des zugehörigen \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil wird \PName{Name} automatisch \PValue{plain.} vorangestellt. \PName{Name} ist also gleichzeitig der Name des Paares und des Hauptseitenstils dieses Paares, während -\PValue{plain.}\PName{Name} der Name des \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstils dieses +\PValue{plain.}\PName{Name} der Name des \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstils dieses Paares ist. Ist das optionale Argument \PName{Eltern-Paar} angegeben, so ist dies der Name @@ -120,30 +117,38 @@ werden soll. Das neue Paar erbt also quasi die Konfiguration des Während in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles} der Eindruck entstanden sein mag, dass sich die dort erläuterten Anweisungen nur auf -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} beziehen, gilt das +\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} beziehen, gilt das tatsächlich nur, solange diese beiden Seitenstile das einzige Seitenstil-Paar darstellen. Sobald es mehrere Seitenstil-Paare gibt, beziehen sich die Anweisungen auf das zuletzt aktive Paar. Dies gilt für -\Macro{lehead}, \Macro{cehead}, \Macro{rehead}, \Macro{lohead}, -\Macro{cohead}, \Macro{rohead}, \Macro{lefoot}, \Macro{cefoot}, -\Macro{refoot}, \Macro{lofoot}, \Macro{cofoot}, \Macro{rofoot}, \Macro{ihead}, -\Macro{chead}, \Macro{ohead}, \Macro{ifoot}, \Macro{cfoot}, \Macro{ofoot} aus +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot}, \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot} aus \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.predefined.pagestyles}. {\setlength{\emergencystretch}{1em}% -Neben den achtzehn vorgenannten sind auch die drei nachfolgend dokumentierten -Anweisungen \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}, -\Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} und \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} -für die Verwendung im letzten Parameter, \PName{Definition}, gedacht. In -diesem Fall stellen sie eine Art Grundkonfiguration des Seitenstil-Paars dar, -die immer dann ausgeführt wird, wenn das Seitenstil-Paar aktiviert wird. Ein -Seitenstil-Paar wird aktiviert, indem einer der beiden Seitenstile des Paares -aktiviert wird. Dies geschieht in der Regel mit Hilfe von -\Macro{pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}.\par} + Neben den achtzehn vorgenannten sind auch die drei nachfolgend + dokumentierten Anweisungen + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles}, + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles} und + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles} für die + Verwendung im letzten Parameter, \PName{Definition}, gedacht. In diesem Fall + stellen sie eine Art Grundkonfiguration des Seitenstil-Paars dar, die immer + dann ausgeführt wird, wenn das Seitenstil-Paar aktiviert wird. Ein + Seitenstil-Paar wird aktiviert, indem einer der beiden Seitenstile des + Paares aktiviert wird. Dies geschieht in der Regel mit Hilfe von + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}.\par} Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die Anweisungen aus -\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ohnehin allgemeiner Natur -sind und für alle mit \Pagestyle{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstile +\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ab +\autopageref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content} ohnehin allgemeiner Natur +sind und für alle mit \PageStyle{scrlayer-scrpage} definierten Seitenstile gelten. Während \Macro{defpairofpagestyles} das Seitenstil-Paar unabhängig davon, ob @@ -156,23 +161,18 @@ Definition bei \Macro{providepairofpagestyles} ignoriert, wohingegen sie bei bereits existierender Paare kann \Macro{renewpairofpagestyles} verwendet werden. Hier wird ein Fehler gemeldet, wenn einer der beiden Seitenstile oder beide Seitenstile des Paares noch nicht existieren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpairofpagestyles}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}\\ - \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}\\ + \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles} + \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearpairofpagestyles}% Mit \Macro{clearmainofpairofpagestyles} wird der Hauptseitenstil des zuletzt aktivierten Seitenstil-Paares leer konfiguriert. Dagegen wird mit der Anweisung \Macro{clearplainofpairofpagestyles} der -\Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil des entsprechenden Seitenstil-Paares leer +\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil des entsprechenden Seitenstil-Paares leer konfiguriert. Anweisung \Macro{clearpairofpagestyles} konfiguriert schließlich beide Seitenstile des entsprechenden Paares als leer. @@ -195,13 +195,7 @@ Die drei Anweisungen \Macro{clearscrheadings}, \Macro{clearscrplain} und \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} sind Aliase für diese Anweisungen, die nur aus Gründen der Kompatibilität mit \Package{scrpage2} existieren. Sie sollten nicht mehr verwendet werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% -% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearplainofpairofpagestyles}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearmainofpairofpagestyles}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition einfacher Seitenstile mit dreigeteiltem Kopf und Fuß} @@ -218,83 +212,43 @@ Möglichkeit zurück zu greifen, sondern die deutlich überlegenen Möglichkeiten der vorherigen Abschnitte oder des nachfolgenden Abschnitts zu nutzen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name des Seitenstils}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{deftriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement}\\ - \Macro{newtriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name des Seitenstils}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linien}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linien}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{newtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement}\\ - \Macro{renewtriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name des Seitenstils}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{renewtriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement}\\ - \Macro{providetriplepagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name des Seitenstils}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{inneres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{providetriplepagestyle}}% - \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement} + \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}\Parameter{Name des Seitenstils} + \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie} + \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie} + \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{inneres Fußelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement} + \Macro{newtriplepagestyle}\Parameter{Name des Seitenstils} + \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linien} + \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linien} + \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{inneres Fußelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement} + \Macro{renewtriplepagestyle}\Parameter{Name des Seitenstils} + \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie} + \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie} + \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{inneres Fußelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement} + \Macro{providetriplepagestyle}\Parameter{Name des Seitenstils} + \OParameter{Dicke der äußeren Linie} + \OParameter{Dicke der inneren Linie} + \Parameter{inneres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Kopfelement} + \Parameter{inneres Fußelement} + \Parameter{mittleres Fußelement} + \Parameter{äußeres Fußelement} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newtriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewtriplepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providetriplepagestyle}% Mit diesen Anweisungen kann ein einzelner Seitenstil definiert werden, bei dem Kopf und Fuß in drei Elemente aufgeteilt sind: ein inneres Element, ein mittleres Element und ein äußeres Element. Diese werden über jeweils drei @@ -324,12 +278,13 @@ Argumente angegeben, so entfallen alle Linien. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass leere optionale Argumente nicht gleichbedeutend mit dem Weglassen der optionalen Argumente sind! Leere optionale Argumente sind in diesem Fall nicht erlaubt. Dagegen sind einfache -Längenausdrücke, wie sie bereits bei Option \Option{headwidth} (siehe +Längenausdrücke, wie sie bereits bei Option +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth}) erklärt wurden, erlaubt. +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth}) erklärt wurden, erlaubt. Die Bedeutung der einzelnen Argumente ist in -\autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.triplepagestyle} noch einmal an einer +\autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.triplepagestyle} noch einmal an einer schematischen Doppelseite veranschaulicht. Dabei dienen »\textsl{außen}«, »\textsl{innen}«, »\textsl{mittig}« als beispielhafte Inhalte. Die zugehörigen Pfeile verdeutlichen die Ausbreitung dieser Inhalte. Die \iffree{farbigen @@ -476,7 +431,7 @@ Elemente der Seite. der dreigeteilten Seitenstile mit den Anweisungen \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}, \Macro{newtriplepagestyle}, \Macro{providetriplepagestyle} und \Macro{renewtriplepagestyle}} - \label{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.triplepagestyle} + \label{fig:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.triplepagestyle} \end{figure} @@ -510,11 +465,7 @@ entspricht damit der neuen Anweisung \Macro{deftriplepagestyle}. Sie wurde aus Gründen der Vereinheitlichung der Namen der Anweisungen jedoch umbenannt und sollte nicht mehr verwendet werden. Wird sie dennoch verwendet, resultiert daraus eine Warnung.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providetriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewtriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newtriplepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftriplepagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Definition komplexer Seitenstile} @@ -534,19 +485,19 @@ ist. Weniger erfahrene Anwender dürfen den Rest dieses Kapitels daher gerne überspringen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{defpagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ - \Macro{newpagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ - \Macro{providepagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ - \Macro{renewpagestyle}% - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}% + \Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name} + \Parameter{Kopfdefinition} + \Parameter{Fußdefinition} + \Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name} + \Parameter{Kopfdefinition} + \Parameter{Fußdefinition} + \Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name} + \Parameter{Kopfdefinition} + \Parameter{Fußdefinition} + \Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name} + \Parameter{Kopfdefinition} + \Parameter{Fußdefinition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}% Diese Anweisungen dienen der Definition eines einzelnen Seitenstils mit maximaler Flexibilität. Dabei ist \PName{Name} der Name des Seitenstils, der definiert werden soll. @@ -565,24 +516,28 @@ den identischen Aufbau: \end{flushleft} Dabei sind die Argumente in den runden Klammern optional, das heißt, sie können zusammen mit den Klammern weggelassen -werden. In\important[i]{\Option{headtopline}\\ \Option{headsepline}\\ - \Option{footsepline}\\ \Option{footbotline}} diesem Fall richten sich die +werden. In\important[i]{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}\\ + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline}\\ + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline}\\ + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline}} diesem Fall richten sich die Längen und Dicken je nach Linie nach den Angaben der Optionen -\Option{headtopline}\IndexOption{headtopline}, -\Option{headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline}, -\Option{footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline} und -\Option{footbotline}\IndexOption{footbotline} (siehe +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}\IndexOption{headtopline}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline} und +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline}\IndexOption{footbotline} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}). +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline}). Die drei Argumente mit den Definitionen sind obligatorisch und werden je nach Seite und Layouteinstellung verwendet. Der Inhalt der Definitionen ist frei wählbar. Für Seitenstile mit Kolumnentitel wird jedoch die Verwendung von -\Macro{headmark}, \Macro{leftmark} oder \Macro{rightmark} innerhalb der -Definitionen empfohlen. Keinesfalls sollte man hier direkt eine -Gliederungsnummer oder einen Überschriftentext als Kolumnentitel -angeben. Aufgrund des asynchronen Seitenaufbaus von \LaTeX{} kann sonst die -falsche Nummer oder der falsche Text im Seitenkopf erscheinen. +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark}, +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark} oder +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark} innerhalb der Definitionen +empfohlen. Keinesfalls sollte man hier direkt eine Gliederungsnummer oder +einen Überschriftentext als Kolumnentitel angeben. Aufgrund des asynchronen +Seitenaufbaus von \LaTeX{} kann sonst die falsche Nummer oder der falsche Text +im Seitenkopf erscheinen. Bei \Macro{defpagestyle} wird der Seitenstil unabhängig davon, ob er bereits existiert oder nicht, neu definiert. Demgegenüber meldet \Macro{newpagestyle} @@ -594,12 +549,12 @@ umdefiniert werden. Für einen neuen Namen meldet diese Anweisung dagegen einen Fehler. Alle vier Anweisungen basieren auf -\Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}\IndexCmd{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} des Pakets -\Package{scrlayer}. Die dabei für einen Seitenstil \PName{Name} definierten -Ebenen sind in \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle} -aufgeführt. Näheres zu Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist -\autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab \autopageref{cha:scrlayer} in -\autoref{part:forExperts} zu entnehmen.% +\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% +\IndexCmd{DeclarePageStyleByLayers} des Pakets \Package{scrlayer}. Die dabei +für einen Seitenstil \PName{Name} definierten Ebenen sind in +\autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle} aufgeführt. Näheres zu +Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \autoref{cha:scrlayer} ab +\autopageref{cha:scrlayer} in \autoref{part:forExperts} zu entnehmen.% \begin{table} % \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside} @@ -638,9 +593,9 @@ aufgeführt. Näheres zu Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie wollen den gesamten Kopf des Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} mit einer Farbe hinterlegen. Aufgrund der Einleitung + \PageStyle{scrheadings} mit einer Farbe hinterlegen. Aufgrund der Einleitung zu diesem Kapitel und \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.layersperstyle}, - wissen Sie, dass \Pagestyle{scrheadings} ein Ebenen-Seitenstil + wissen Sie, dass \PageStyle{scrheadings} ein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist, der unter anderem aus den Ebenen \PValue{scrheadings.head.oneside}, \PValue{scrheadings.head.odd} und \PValue{scrheadings.head.even} besteht. Sie definieren nun drei weitere Ebenen für deren Hintergrund und @@ -690,29 +645,28 @@ aufgeführt. Näheres zu Ebenen und Ebenen-Seitenstilen ist Der farbige Hintergrund selbst wurde in diesem Beispiel mit einer \Macro{rule}-Anweisung gesetzt. Für die Größe wurde dabei mit - \Macro{layerwidth}\IndexCmd{layerwidth}\important[i]{\Macro{layerwidth}\\ - \Macro{layerheight}} und \Macro{layerheight}\IndexCmd{layerheight} die - aktuelle Breite und Höhe der Ebene verwendet. Diese wurde per optionalem - Argument um die Höhe der Unterlängen \Macro{dp}\Macro{strutbox} nach unten - verschoben. + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth}\IndexCmd{layerwidth}% + \important[i]{\DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth}\\ + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerheight}} und + \DescRef{scrlayer.cmd.layerheight}\IndexCmd{layerheight} die aktuelle Breite + und Höhe der Ebene verwendet. Diese wurde per optionalem Argument um die + Höhe der Unterlängen \Macro{dp}\Macro{strutbox} nach unten verschoben. \end{Example} % Statt wie im Beispiel für die Hintergrundfarbe neue Ebenen hinzuzufügen, hätte -man das Problem übrigens auch mit \Macro{colorbox} und \Macro{chead} lösen -können. Es wird empfohlen, eine entsprechende Lösung als Übung zu -erarbeiten. Ebenso \iffree{}{\pagebreak}% Umbruchkorrektur -hätte man die Hintergrundebenen auch einzeln und jeweils -unmittelbar vor der entsprechenden Inhaltsebene einfügen können. Auch dies -sei als Übung empfohlen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}% +man das Problem übrigens auch mit \Macro{colorbox} und +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead} lösen können. Es wird empfohlen, eine +entsprechende Lösung als Übung zu erarbeiten. Ebenso +\iffree{}{\pagebreak}% Umbruchkorrektur +hätte man die Hintergrundebenen auch einzeln und jeweils unmittelbar vor der +entsprechenden Inhaltsebene einfügen können. Auch dies sei als Übung +empfohlen.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{hmode}\PValue{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{hmode}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{hmode}% Bei \Package{scrpage2} wurden die Köpfe und Füße der Seitenstile noch grundsätzlich im horizontalen Modus ausgegeben. Bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} wird hingegen in der Voreinstellung erst durch entsprechende Ausgaben selbst @@ -726,9 +680,9 @@ haben. Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. In der Voreinstellung ist der Schalter deaktiviert.% -\EndIndex{Option}{hmode}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex @@ -738,4 +692,6 @@ sind. In der Voreinstellung ist der Schalter deaktiviert.% %%% TeX-master: "../guide" %%% End: -% LocalWords: Hintergrundebene Seitenkopf + +% LocalWords: Hintergrundebene Seitenkopf Seitenstils Kopfelement +% LocalWords: Seitenstile diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex index 8ab8c25cf56..7f22dda1bc9 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer-scrpage.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer-scrpage.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer-scrpage.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2014-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer-scrpage.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer-scrpage)] \chapter[{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}] @@ -52,13 +52,14 @@ \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} \labelbase{scrlayer-scrpage} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% \begin{Explain} Bis \KOMAScript~3.11b war das Paket \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2} das Mittel der Wahl, wenn es darum ging, den Kopf und den Fuß der Seite über das hinaus zu verändern, was die - \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Seitenstilen \Pagestyle{headings}, - \Pagestyle{myheadings}, \Pagestyle{plain} und \Pagestyle{empty} boten. Bis + \KOMAScript-Klassen mit den Seitenstilen \PageStyle{headings}, + \PageStyle{myheadings}, \PageStyle{plain} und \PageStyle{empty} boten. Bis 2001 gab es dafür auch noch das Paket \Package{scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrpage}, das aber seit 2013 nicht mehr mit \KOMAScript{} zusammen verteilt wird. @@ -101,13 +102,16 @@ Neben \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\iffree{ oder \Package{scrpage2}}{} wäre auch \Package{fancyhdr} (siehe \cite{package:fancyhdr}) grundsätzlich geeignet, um Kopf und Fuß der Seiten zu konfigurieren. Allerdings unterstützt dieses Paket diverse Möglichkeiten von \KOMAScript{}, angefangen von Änderungen der Schrift -über das Elemente-Modell (siehe \Macro{setkomafont}, \Macro{addtokomafont} und -\Macro{usekomafont} in \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}) bis hin zum -konfigurierbaren Format der Gliederungsnummern in Kolumnentiteln (siehe Option -\Option{numbers} und beispielsweise Anweisung \Macro{chaptermarkformat} in -\autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.numbers} und -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}), nicht. Daher wird für die +über das Elemente-Modell (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomafont} in +\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) bis hin zum konfigurierbaren Format +der Gliederungsnummern in Kolumnentiteln (siehe Option +\DescRef{maincls.option.numbers} und beispielsweise Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.chaptermarkformat} in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, +\DescPageRef{maincls.option.numbers} und +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat}), nicht. Daher wird für die Verwendung mit den \KOMAScript-Klassen das neue Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} empfohlen. \iffree{Bei Problemen damit kann auch auf \Package{scrpage2} zurückgegriffen werden.}{\ignorespaces} Natürlich @@ -122,11 +126,11 @@ Anwender von Interesse sein dürfte und daher in hier in \autoref{part:forAuthors} dokumentierten Möglichkeiten für Sie nicht ausreichen, sei Ihnen auch jenes Kapitel nahe gelegt. -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} -\LoadCommon{20} % \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß} +\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight} % \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß} -\LoadCommon{5} % \section{Textauszeichnung} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnung} \section{Verwendung vordefinierter Seitenstile} \seclabel{predefined.pagestyles} @@ -146,87 +150,79 @@ vorgefertigten Seitenstils. \fi \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} + \PageStyle{scrheadings} + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.scrheadings}% Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} stellt zwei Seitenstile zur Verfügung, die nach eigenen Wünschen umgestaltet werden können. Als erstes wäre der -Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{scrheadings}} zu +Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{scrheadings}} zu nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in der Voreinstellung dem Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} der Standard- oder der +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} der Standard- oder der \KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben wird, ist über die nachfolgend beschriebenen Befehle und Optionen einstellbar. Als zweites ist der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}} zu +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}} zu nennen. Dieser ist als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel vorgesehen. Er ähnelt in -der Voreinstellung dem Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} der +der Voreinstellung dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain}\IndexPagestyle{plain} der Standard- oder der \KOMAScript-Klassen. Was genau im Kopf und Fuß ausgegeben wird, ist auch hier über die nachfolgend beschriebenen Befehle und Optionen einstellbar. -Natürlich kann auch \Pagestyle{scrheadings} als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel -und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel +Natürlich kann auch \PageStyle{scrheadings} als Seitenstil ohne Kolumnentitel +und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} als Seitenstil mit Kolumnentitel konfiguriert werden. Es ist jedoch zweckmäßig, sich an die vorgenannte Konvention zu halten. Die beiden Seitenstile beeinflussen sich nämlich in gewisser Weise gegenseitig. Sobald einer der Seitenstile einmal ausgewählt -wurde, ist \Pagestyle{scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen -\Pagestyle{headings}\important{\Pagestyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings} -und der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen -\Pagestyle{plain}\important{\Pagestyle{plain}}\IndexPagestyle{plain} +wurde, ist \PageStyle{scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen +\PageStyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}}\IndexPagestyle{headings} +und der Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} auch unter dem Namen +\PageStyle{plain}\important{\PageStyle{plain}}\IndexPagestyle{plain} aktivierbar. Das hat den Vorteil, dass bei Klassen, die automatisch zwischen -\Pagestyle{headings} und \Pagestyle{plain} umschalten, durch einmalige Auswahl -von \Pagestyle{scrheadings} oder \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} nun zwischen +\PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{plain} umschalten, durch einmalige Auswahl +von \PageStyle{scrheadings} oder \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} nun zwischen diesen beiden Stilen umgeschaltet wird. Direkte Anpassungen der entsprechenden Klassen sind nicht erforderlich. Die beiden Seitenstile stellen also quasi ein -Paar dar, das als Ersatz für \Pagestyle{headings} und \Pagestyle{plain} +Paar dar, das als Ersatz für \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{plain} verwendet werden kann. Sollten weitere solche Paare benötigt werden, so sei auf \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs} in \autoref{part:forExperts} verwiesen. Für\important{\Package{scrpage2}} frühere Benutzer des alten \KOMAScript-Pakets \Package{scrpage2} sei ausdrücklich noch darauf -hingewiesen, dass \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität +hingewiesen, dass \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität mit jenem Paket auch unter dem Alias-Namen -\Pagestyle{scrplain}\IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{scrplain} angesprochen werden +\PageStyle{scrplain}\IndexPagestyle[indexmain]{scrplain} angesprochen werden kann.\iffree{}{ Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2} - existiert hingegen \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} nicht. Dessen Funktion wird - dann vollständig vom Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrplain} übernommen.} -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.scrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% + existiert hingegen \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} nicht. Dessen Funktion wird + dann vollständig vom Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrplain} übernommen.} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lehead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \Macro{cehead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \Macro{rehead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \Macro{lohead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \Macro{cohead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \Macro{rohead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -Was in den Kopf der Seitenstile \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ -- +Was in den Kopf der Seitenstile \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ -- beim veralteten Paket \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} - entsprechend in den Kopf von \Pagestyle{scrplain} --} und -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle + entsprechend in den Kopf von \PageStyle{scrplain} --} und +\PageStyle{scrheadings} geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle einstellbar. Dabei setzt das optionale Argument jeweils den Inhalt eines -Elements in \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ beziehungsweise - \Pagestyle{scrplain}}, während das obligatorische Argument jeweils einen -Inhalt in \Pagestyle{scrheadings} setzt. +Elements in \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ beziehungsweise + \PageStyle{scrplain}}, während das obligatorische Argument jeweils einen +Inhalt in \PageStyle{scrheadings} setzt. Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den Befehlen \Macro{lehead}, \Macro{cehead} und \Macro{rehead} gesetzt. Das @@ -258,20 +254,20 @@ respektive \Macro{rohead} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für »rechtsbündig«). -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}\LabelFontElement{pagehead}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit -Hilfe der Befehle \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe +Hilfe der Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen über das Element \FontElement{pagehead}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}}. Vor diesem wird außerdem noch das Element \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}} angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} zu entnehmen.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% +\EndIndexGroup In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} ist die Bedeutung der einzelnen Befehle für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.% @@ -412,22 +408,23 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.% Die Erklärung dafür ist einfach: Die Klasse \Class{scrartcl} schaltet wie auch die Standardklasse \Class{article} für die Seite mit dem Titelkopf in - der Voreinstellung auf den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain}. Nach der Anweisung - \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in der Präambel unseres Beispiels - führt dies tatsächlich zur Verwendung des Seitenstils - \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} für die Seite mit dem Titelkopf. Dieser + der Voreinstellung auf den Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain}. Nach der Anweisung + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} in der Präambel + unseres Beispiels führt dies tatsächlich zur Verwendung des Seitenstils + \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} für die Seite mit dem Titelkopf. Dieser Seitenstil ist bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse mit leerem Kopf und Seitenzahl im Fuß vorkonfiguriert. Da im Beispiel das optionale Argument von \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} gar nicht verwendet wird, bleibt der - Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} unverändert. Das Ergebnis ist für + Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} unverändert. Das Ergebnis ist für die erste Seite also tatsächlich korrekt. - Fügen Sie jetzt im Beispiel nach \Macro{maketitle} so viel Text ein, dass - eine zweite Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie können dazu auch einfach - \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} in der - Dokumentpräambel und \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} nach \Macro{maketitle} - ergänzen. Wie Sie sehen werden, enthält der Kopf der zweiten Seite nun, - genau wie gewünscht, den Namen des Autors und den Titel des Dokuments. + Fügen Sie jetzt im Beispiel nach \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} so viel + Text ein, dass eine zweite Seite ausgegeben wird. Sie können dazu auch + einfach \Macro{usepackage}\PParameter{lipsum}\IndexPackage{lipsum} in der + Dokumentpräambel und \Macro{lipsum}\IndexCmd{lipsum} nach + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.maketitle} ergänzen. Wie Sie sehen werden, enthält der + Kopf der zweiten Seite nun, genau wie gewünscht, den Namen des Autors und + den Titel des Dokuments. Zum Vergleich sollten Sie zusätzlich das optionale Argument der Anweisungen \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} mit einem Inhalt versehen. Ändern Sie das @@ -450,17 +447,18 @@ für den Kopf der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert.% \end{lstcode} Jetzt haben Sie den Kopf auch auf der ersten Seite direkt über dem Titelkopf selbst. Das kommt daher, dass Sie mit den beiden optionalen Argumenten den - Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} nun ebenfalls entsprechend + Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} nun ebenfalls entsprechend konfiguriert haben. Wie Sie am Ergebnis vermutlich auch erkennen, ist es jedoch besser, diesen Seitenstil unverändert zu lassen, da der Kolumnentitel über dem Titelkopf doch eher störend ist. - Alternativ zur Konfigurierung von \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} hätte man + Alternativ zur Konfigurierung von \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} hätte man bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse übrigens auch den Seitenstil für Seiten mit Titelkopf ändern können. Siehe dazu - \Macro{titlepagestyle}\important{\Macro{titlepagestyle}}% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}% + \important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}}% \IndexCmd{titlepagestyle} in \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}. + \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle}. \end{Example} % \iffree{}{Der Code aus dem Beispiel funktioniert übrigens unverändert auch @@ -475,44 +473,34 @@ geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Überschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird. Stattdessen ist der Mark-Mechanismus idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den Automatismen, die im nächsten Abschnitt erklärt werden, zu verwenden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{lehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{rehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{lohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{rohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% + \Macro{lehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{rehead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{lohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{rohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead*}% Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich lediglich bei Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \PName{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} von der Form ohne Stern. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt von -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt scrheadings} auch für -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% % \begin{Example} - Mit der Sternform von \Macro{lohead} und \Macro{rohead} lässt sich das + Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead} lässt sich das Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{scrartcl} @@ -533,42 +521,31 @@ sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% Das veraltete Paket \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} verfügt nicht über diese Möglichkeit.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{lefoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cefoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{refoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{lofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{rofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% + \Macro{lefoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cefoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{refoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{lofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{rofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% -Was in den Fuß der Seitenstile \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ -- +Was in den Fuß der Seitenstile \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\iffree{}{ -- beim veralteten Paket \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} - entsprechend in den Fuß von \Pagestyle{scrplain} --} und -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle + entsprechend in den Fuß von \PageStyle{scrplain} --} und +\PageStyle{scrheadings} geschrieben wird, ist mit Hilfe dieser Befehle einstellbar. Dabei setzt das optionale Argument jeweils den Inhalt eines -Elements in \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}, während das obligatorische Argument -jeweils einen Inhalt in \Pagestyle{scrheadings} setzt. +Elements in \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}, während das obligatorische Argument +jeweils einen Inhalt in \PageStyle{scrheadings} setzt. Die Inhalte für gerade, also linke Seiten\textnote{linke Seite} werden mit den Befehlen \Macro{lefoot}, \Macro{cefoot} und \Macro{refoot} gesetzt. Das @@ -600,20 +577,20 @@ respektive \Macro{rofoot} gesetzt werden kann. Das »\texttt{r}« am Anfang des Befehlsnamens steht hier für »\emph{right aligned}« (engl. für »rechtsbündig«). -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement[.foot]{pageheadfoot}% Diese Elemente besitzen jedoch nicht jedes für sich eine Schriftzuordnung mit -Hilfe der Befehle \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe +Hilfe der Befehle \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}), sondern alle zusammen über das Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}}. Vor diesem wird außerdem noch das Element \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pageheadfoot}} angewandt. Die Voreinstellungen für diese beiden Elemente sind \autoref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements}, \autopageref{tab:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelements} zu entnehmen.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% +\EndIndexGroup In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} ist die Bedeutung der einzelnen Befehle für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert. @@ -746,7 +723,7 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert. \end{lstcode} Der Verlag wird Ihnen nun aber wiederum nicht auf der Seite mit dem Titelkopf ausgegeben. Die Begründung ist dieselbe wie beim Beispiel zu - \Macro{lohead}. Ebenso ist die Lösung, um den Verlag auch auf diese Seite + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Ebenso ist die Lösung, um den Verlag auch auf diese Seite zu bekommen, entsprechend: \begin{lstcode} \lofoot[Verlag Naseblau, Irgendwo] @@ -782,7 +759,7 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert. \Option{twoside}\IndexOption{twoside}\important{\Option{twoside}} beim Laden von \Class{scrartcl} hinzu. Zum einen wandert die Seitenzahl im Fuß nun von der Mitte nach außen. Das liegt an der geänderten Voreinstellung für - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} für doppelseitige + \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} für doppelseitige Dokumente mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse. Gleichzeitig verschwinden aber auch Autor, Dokumenttitel und Verlag von @@ -824,7 +801,7 @@ für den Fuß der Seiten im doppelseitigen Modus noch einmal skizziert. \iffree{}{Der Code dieses Beispiels funktioniert ebenfalls mit dem veralteten Paket \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}}. Wegen - der Verwendung von \Macro{setkomafont} gilt das aber nur, solange eine + der Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} gilt das aber nur, solange eine \KOMAScript-Klasse wie \Class{scrartcl} verwendet wird.}% Da es etwas umständlich ist, die Angaben bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten wie im @@ -840,45 +817,34 @@ kann es sonst leicht geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Mark-Mechanismus idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den Automatismen, die im nächsten Abschnitt erklärt werden, zu verwenden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{lefoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cefoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{refoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{lofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{rofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% + \Macro{lefoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cefoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{refoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{lofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{rofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot*}% Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich lediglich bei Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \PName{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} von der Form ohne Stern. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt von -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt scrheadings} auch für -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% % \begin{Example} - Mit der Sternform von \Macro{lofoot} und \Macro{rofoot} lässt sich das + Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lofoot} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rofoot} lässt sich das Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung etwas verkürzen: % \begin{lstcode} @@ -906,34 +872,23 @@ sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% Das veraltete Paket \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} verfügt nicht über diese Möglichkeit.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ohead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{chead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ihead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cfoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ifoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% + \Macro{ohead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{chead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ihead}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ofoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cfoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ifoot}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% Um Kopf und Fuß im doppelseitigen Layout zu konfigurieren, müsste man mit den zuvor erklärten Befehlen die linken und die rechten Seiten getrennt voneinander konfigurieren. Meist ist es jedoch so, dass linke und rechte Seite @@ -944,10 +899,10 @@ Elemente sind normalerweise auf beiden Seiten mittig angeordnet. Zur Vereinfachung der Einstellungen für diesen Standardfall gibt es bei \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} sozusagen Abkürzungen. Der Befehl \Macro{ohead} -entspricht einem Aufruf sowohl von \Macro{lehead} als auch \Macro{rohead}. Der -Befehl \Macro{chead} entspricht sowohl \Macro{cehead} als auch -\Macro{cohead}. Und Befehl \Macro{ihead} entspricht \Macro{rehead} und -\Macro{lohead}. Entsprechendes gilt für die Anweisungen des Fußes. In +entspricht einem Aufruf sowohl von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lehead} als auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rohead}. Der +Befehl \Macro{chead} entspricht sowohl \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cehead} als auch +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cohead}. Und Befehl \Macro{ihead} entspricht \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.rehead} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.lohead}. Entsprechendes gilt für die Anweisungen des Fußes. In \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} auf \autopageref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.head} und \autoref{fig:scrlayer-scrpage.foot} auf @@ -997,45 +952,34 @@ kann es sonst leicht geschehen, dass die falsche Nummer oder die falsche Überschrift im Kolumnentitel ausgegeben wird. Stattdessen ist der Mark-Mechanismus idealer Weise in Verbindung mit den Automatismen, die im nächsten Abschnitt erklärt werden, zu verwenden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ofoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{chead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ihead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{cfoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% - \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings}\\ - \Macro{ifoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings}% + \Macro{ohead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{chead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ihead*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ofoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{cfoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} + \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} + \Macro{ifoot*}\OParameter{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} \Parameter{Inhalt scrheadings} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ofoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot*}% Die Sternvarianten\ChangedAt{v3.14}{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} der zuvor erklärten Befehle unterscheiden sich lediglich bei Weglassen des optionalen Arguments \PName{Inhalt plain.scrheadings} von der Form ohne Stern. Während die Form ohne Stern in diesem Fall den Inhalt von -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} unangetastet lässt, wird bei der Sternvariante dann das obligatorische Argument \PName{Inhalt scrheadings} auch für -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} verwendet. Sollen also beide Argumente gleich sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% % \begin{Example} - Mit der Sternform von \Macro{ifoot} lässt sich das + Mit der Sternform von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ifoot} lässt sich das Beispiel aus der vorherigen Erklärung weiter verkürzen: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[twoside]{scrartcl} @@ -1059,41 +1003,36 @@ sein, so kann man einfach die Sternvariante mit nur einem Argument verwenden.% Das veraltete Paket \Package{scrpage2}\important{\Package{scrpage2}} verfügt nicht über diese Möglichkeit.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ofoot*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagestyleset}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{pagestyleset}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=KOMA-Script}% \BeginIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=standard}% In den zurückliegenden Beispielen wurde bereits mehrfach auf die Voreinstellung der Seitenstile -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} und -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} +\PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} und +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{plain.scrheadings} hingewiesen. Tatsächlich unterstützt \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} derzeit zwei unterschiedliche Voreinstellungen. Diese sind von Hand über Option \Option{pagestyleset} auswählbar. Mit der \PName{Einstellung} \PValue{KOMA-Script}% -\important{\KOption{pagestyleset}\quad\\\quad\PValue{KOMA-Script}} -wird die Voreinstellung gewählt, die auch automatisch eingestellt wird, falls -die Option nicht angegeben ist und eine \KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt -wurde. Dabei werden für \Pagestyle{scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz -Kolumnentitel außen im Kopf und Seitenzahlen außen im Fuß gesetzt. Im -einseitigen Satz wird der Kolumnentitel stattdessen mittig im Kopf und die -Seitenzahl mittig im Fuß platziert. Für die automatischen Kolumnentitel werden -Groß- und Kleinbuchstaben verwendet, wie diese vorgefunden werden. Dies -entspricht der gleichzeitigen Verwendung von Option -\OptionValue{markcase}{used}\IndexOption{markcase~=used}% -\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{used}}. Für \Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} -entfallen die Kolumnentitel. Die Seitenzahlen werden jedoch identisch -platziert. +\important{\KOption{pagestyleset}\quad\\\quad\PValue{KOMA-Script}} wird die +Voreinstellung gewählt, die auch automatisch eingestellt wird, falls die +Option nicht angegeben ist und eine \KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei +werden für \PageStyle{scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz Kolumnentitel außen +im Kopf und Seitenzahlen außen im Fuß gesetzt. Im einseitigen Satz wird der +Kolumnentitel stattdessen mittig im Kopf und die Seitenzahl mittig im Fuß +platziert. Für die automatischen Kolumnentitel werden Groß- und +Kleinbuchstaben verwendet, wie diese vorgefunden werden. Dies entspricht der +gleichzeitigen Verwendung von Option +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}\IndexOption{markcase~=used}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{used}}. Für +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} entfallen die Kolumnentitel. Die Seitenzahlen +werden jedoch identisch platziert. Wird allerdings \Class{scrlttr2}\important{\Class{scrlttr2}}\IndexClass{scrlttr2} als Klasse @@ -1105,27 +1044,27 @@ Mit der \PName{Einstellung} \PValue{standard}% \important{\KOption{pagestyleset}\quad\\\quad\PValue{standard}} wird die Voreinstellung gewählt, die den Standard-Klassen entspricht. Diese wird auch automatisch eingestellt, falls die Option nicht angegeben ist und keine -\KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei wird für \Pagestyle{scrheadings} im +\KOMAScript-Klasse erkannt wurde. Dabei wird für \PageStyle{scrheadings} im doppelseitigen Satz der Kolumnentitel im Kopf innen und die Seitenzahl -- ebenfalls im Kopf -- außen ausgerichtet platziert. Im einseitigen Satz werden dieselben Einstellungen verwendet. Da hierbei nur rechte Seiten existieren, steht der Kolumnentitel dann immer linksbündig im Kopf, die Seitenzahl entsprechend rechtsbündig. Die automatischen Kolumnentitel werden -- trotz erheblicher typografischer Bedenken -- entsprechend -\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}\IndexOption{markcase~=upper}% -\important{\OptionValue{markcase}{upper}} in Großbuchstaben -umgewandelt. Von \Pagestyle{scrheadings} deutlich abweichend hat -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} die Seitenzahl im einseitigen Satz mittig im -Fuß. Abweichend vom Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} der Standardklassen entfällt +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}\IndexOption{markcase~=upper}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{markcase}{upper}} in Großbuchstaben +umgewandelt. Von \PageStyle{scrheadings} deutlich abweichend hat +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} die Seitenzahl im einseitigen Satz mittig im +Fuß. Abweichend vom Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} der Standardklassen entfällt die Seitenzahl im doppelseitigen Modus. Die Standardklassen setzen die Seitenzahl stattdessen mittig im Fuß, was im doppelseitigen Satz nicht zum übrigen Stil der Seiten passt. Der Kolumnentitel entfällt bei -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} natürlich in jedem Fall. +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} natürlich in jedem Fall. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass mit der Verwendung dieser Option gleichzeitig der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}% -\important{\Pagestyle{scrheadings}} aktiviert wird. Dies gilt auch, wenn die +\PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}% +\important{\PageStyle{scrheadings}} aktiviert wird. Dies gilt auch, wenn die Option innerhalb eines Dokuments verwendet wird. \BeginIndex{Option}{komastyle}% @@ -1140,19 +1079,16 @@ werden.\iffree{}{ Bei Verwendung des veralteten Pakets sie hingegen die einzige Möglichkeit zwischen den beiden unterschiedlichen Voreinstellungen umzuschalten, da dort Option \Option{pagestyleset} nicht existiert.}% -\EndIndex{Option}{standardstyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=standard}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagestyleset~=KOMA-Script}% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} -\LoadCommon[scrlayerscrpage]{21} % \section{Beeinflussung von definierten Seitenstilen} \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headwidth}\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}\\ - \KOption{footwidth}\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset} + \OptionVName{headwidth}{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset} + \OptionVName{footwidth}{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headwidth~=\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footwidth~=\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}}% In der Voreinstellung sind Kopf\Index{Kopf>Breite} und Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} genauso breit wie der Satzspiegel. Mit Hilfe dieser beiden \KOMAScript-Optionen lässt sich das jedoch ändern. Die \PName{Breite} @@ -1221,8 +1157,8 @@ immer Null. Falls Ihnen das zu kompliziert ist, sollten Sie den gewünschten \ventry{page}{% die Breite der Seite unter Berücksichtigung einer eventuell mit Hilfe des Pakets \Package{typearea} definierten Bindekorrektur (siehe Option - \Option{BCOR} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.BCOR})% + \DescRef{typearea.option.BCOR} in \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR})% }% \ventry{paper}{% die Breite des Papiers ohne Berücksichtigung einer etwaigen @@ -1239,14 +1175,14 @@ immer Null. Falls Ihnen das zu kompliziert ist, sollten Sie den gewünschten \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{footwidth~=\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headwidth~=\PName{Breite\textup{:}Offset\textup{:}Offset}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headtopline}\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}\\ - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}\\ - \KOption{footbotline}\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge} + \OptionVName{headtopline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge} + \OptionVName{headsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge} + \OptionVName{footsepline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge} + \OptionVName{footbotline}{Dicke\textup{:}Länge} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% \BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% @@ -1267,15 +1203,18 @@ ist dies die \PName{Dicke}. Natürlich darf die \PName{Länge} nicht nur kürzer als die aktuelle Breite des Kopfes respektive des Fußes sein. Sie darf auch länger sein. Siehe dazu auch -die Optionen \Option{ilines}\IndexOption{ilines}\important{\Option{ilines}, - \Option{clines}, \Option{olines}}, \Option{clines}\IndexOption{clines} und -\Option{olines}\IndexOption{olines}, die später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt -werden. - -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}% +die Optionen \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.ilines}\IndexOption{ilines}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.ilines}, + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.clines}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.clines}\IndexOption{clines} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.olines}\IndexOption{olines}, die später in diesem +Abschnitt erklärt werden. + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}\LabelFontElement{headtopline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}\LabelFontElement{headsepline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}\LabelFontElement{footsepline}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}\LabelFontElement{footbotline}% Neben der Dicke und der Länge kann man auch die Farben der Linien ändern. Zunächst richtet sich diese natürlich nach der Farbe, die für den Kopf und den Fuß eingestellt ist. Davon unabhängig werden aber auch noch die @@ -1285,18 +1224,17 @@ Einstellungen für die gleich benannten Elemente \FontElement{footsepline}\\ \FontElement{footbotline}}, \FontElement{headsepline}, \FontElement{footsepline} und \FontElement{footbotline} angewendet. Diese -können mit den Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} -geändert werden (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont}). In der Voreinstellung -sind die Einstellungen für diese Elemente leer, so dass sie zu keiner Änderung -der Schrift oder Farbe führen. Änderungen der Schrift sind im Gegensatz zu +können mit den Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} geändert werden (siehe +\autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.textmarkup}, ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). In der Voreinstellung sind die +Einstellungen für diese Elemente leer, so dass sie zu keiner Änderung der +Schrift oder Farbe führen. Änderungen der Schrift sind im Gegensatz zu Farbänderungen an dieser Stelle ohnehin nicht sinnvoll und werden daher nicht empfohlen.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}% +\EndIndexGroup +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}% \BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% \BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootsepline}% @@ -1329,49 +1267,33 @@ nie dazu gedacht waren, die entsprechenden Linien einzuschalten. Vielmehr waren sie ausschließlich zur Einstellung von \PName{Länge} und \PName{Dicke} der Linien gedacht, wenn diese über die Optionen eingeschaltet wurden. Dies wurde von den Anwendern aber leider häufig nicht beachtet!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootbotline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootsepline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Option}{footbotline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headtopline~=\PName{Dicke\textup{:}Länge}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{plainheadtopline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{plainheadsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{plainfootsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{plainfootbotline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{plainheadtopline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{plainheadsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{plainfootsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{plainfootbotline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Mit diesen Optionen können die Einstellungen für die Linien auch für den -\Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil übernommen werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} +\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil übernommen werden. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} stehen die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} auf \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind, zur Verfügung. Bei aktivierter Option werden die entsprechenden Linieneinstellungen übernommen. Bei deaktivierter Option wird die -entsprechende Linie im \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil hingegen nicht angezeigt. +entsprechende Linie im \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil hingegen nicht angezeigt. % -\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Option{ilines}\\ - \Option{clines}\\ + \Option{ilines} + \Option{clines} \Option{olines} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{ilines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{olines}% Wie bereits zuvor erklärt wurde, können Trennlinien für den Kopf oder Fuß konfiguriert werden, die länger oder kürzer als die Breite des Kopfes beziehungsweise des Fußes sind. Bisher blieb die Frage offen, wie diese Linien @@ -1382,11 +1304,9 @@ mit Option \Option{clines} auch horizontal bezüglich der Breite des Kopfes beziehungsweise Fußes zentriert werden. Ebenso ist mit Hilfe von Option \Option{olines} eine Ausrichtung am äußeren beziehungsweise rechten Rand möglich.% -\EndIndex{Option}{olines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{clines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{ilines}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex @@ -1397,3 +1317,5 @@ möglich.% %%% End: % LocalWords: Paketoptionen Ebenenmodell Sternvariante Sternform Längenwert + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex index f422ef4db91..aa9eaf85194 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlayer.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlayer.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlayer.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2013-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlayer.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-11-06 10:16:26 +0100 (Fri, 06 Nov 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter:scrlayer)] \chapter[{Definition von Ebenen und Seitenstilen mit \Package{scrlayer}}] @@ -54,6 +54,7 @@ mit \Package{scrlayer}} \labelbase{scrlayer} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlayer}% \BeginIndex{}{Ebenen}% Anwender von Grafikprogrammen sind mit dem Modell der Ebenen für eine Seite @@ -99,7 +100,7 @@ Teile von \Package{scrlayer} wieder, die als zur Verwendung freigegeben eingestuft sind. Dinge, die hier nicht dokumentiert sind, sollten allenfalls zu Testzwecken Verwendung finden. -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} \section{Einige grundlegende Informationen} \seclabel{generic.information} @@ -116,41 +117,44 @@ bereitstellen können. Anwender sollten sich im Normalfall nicht darum zu kümmern brauchen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@chapter}\ \PName{Dann-Code} \Macro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Code} - \Macro{fi} + \Macro{if@chapter}\ \PName{Dann-Code}\ % + \textMacro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Code}\ \textMacro{fi} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@chapter}% Wenn \Macro{if@chapter} definiert ist und \Macro{iftrue}\IndexCmd{iftrue} entspricht, berücksichtigt \Package{scrlayer} bei seiner Arbeit die -Kapitel-Ebene beispielsweise bei Verwendung von Option \Option{automark}. Wenn -es definiert ist, aber nicht \Macro{iftrue} entspricht, behandelt -\Package{scrlayer} nur die Ebenen der Befehle \Macro{part}, \Macro{section}, -\Macro{subsection}, \Macro{sub\dots subsection}, \Macro{paragraph}, -\Macro{subparagraph}, \Macro{sub\dots subparagraph}. Wenn das Makro nicht -definiert ist, macht \Package{scrlayer} die Frage, ob auch die Kapitel-Ebene -zu behandeln ist, an der Anweisung \Macro{chapter} fest. Ist diese Anweisung +Kapitel-Ebene beispielsweise bei Verwendung von Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.automark}. Wenn es definiert ist, aber nicht +\Macro{iftrue} entspricht, behandelt \Package{scrlayer} nur die Ebenen der +Befehle \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.subsection}, \Macro{sub\dots subsection}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.paragraph}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.subparagraph}, +\Macro{sub\dots subparagraph}. Wenn das Makro nicht definiert ist, macht +\Package{scrlayer} die Frage, ob auch die Kapitel-Ebene zu behandeln ist, an +der Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} fest. Ist diese Anweisung definiert und entspricht sie nicht \Macro{relax}, dann definiert \Package{scrlayer} das Makro \Macro{if@chapter} selbst als Synonym für \Macro{iftrue}. Anderenfalls definiert es \Macro{if@chapter} als Synonym für \Macro{iffalse}\IndexCmd{iffalse}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@chapter}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{if@mainmatter}\ \PName{Dann-Code} \Macro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Code} - \Macro{fi} + \Macro{if@mainmatter}\ \PName{Dann-Code}\ % + \textMacro{else}\ \PName{Sonst-Code}\ \textMacro{fi} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{if@mainmatter}% Klassen wie \Class{book} oder \Class{scrbook} bieten -\Macro{frontmatter}\IndexCmd{frontmatter}, -\Macro{mainmatter}\IndexCmd{mainmatter} und -\Macro{backmatter}\IndexCmd{backmatter}, um zwischen Vorderteil, Hauptteil und -Endteil eines Buches umschalten zu können. In der Regel verwenden diese -Klassen intern \Macro{if@mainmatter}, um entscheiden zu können, ob gerade im -Hauptteil des Dokuments gearbeitet wird oder nicht. Klassen wie \Class{report} -oder \Class{article} haben kein \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter} oder -\Macro{backmatter} und deshalb auch kein \Macro{if@mainmatter}. Stattdessen -gehen sie davon aus, dass es nur einen Hauptteil gibt. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}\IndexCmd{frontmatter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter}\IndexCmd{mainmatter} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter}\IndexCmd{backmatter}, um zwischen Vorderteil, +Hauptteil und Endteil eines Buches umschalten zu können. In der Regel +verwenden diese Klassen intern \Macro{if@mainmatter}, um entscheiden zu +können, ob gerade im Hauptteil des Dokuments gearbeitet wird oder +nicht. Klassen wie \Class{report} oder \Class{article} haben kein +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} oder +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} und deshalb auch kein +\Macro{if@mainmatter}. Stattdessen gehen sie davon aus, dass es nur einen +Hauptteil gibt. Für \Package{scrlayer} ist es aber einfacher, nicht ständig erneut die Existenz und Verwendung der Umschaltanweisungen zu erkennen und damit zu @@ -161,26 +165,25 @@ schlicht \Macro{iftrue}\IndexCmd{iftrue} entsprechen. Wenn also \Macro{if@mainmatter} nicht definiert ist, dann definiert \Package{scrlayer} es als Synonym für \Macro{iftrue}. -Einige Klassen definieren jedoch \Macro{frontmatter}, -\Macro{mainmatter} oder \Macro{backmatter} und trotzdem kein -\Macro{if@mainmatter}. In diesem Fall definiert \Package{scrlayer} -\Macro{if@mainmatter} ebenfalls als Synonym für \Macro{iftrue} und erweitert -darüber hinaus die gefundenen Definitionen von \Macro{frontmatter}, \Macro{mainmatter} und -\Macro{backmatter} so, dass diese \Macro{if@mainmatter} passend +Einige Klassen definieren jedoch \DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} und +trotzdem kein \Macro{if@mainmatter}. In diesem Fall definiert +\Package{scrlayer} \Macro{if@mainmatter} ebenfalls als Synonym für +\Macro{iftrue} und erweitert darüber hinaus die gefundenen Definitionen von +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.frontmatter}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.mainmatter} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.backmatter} so, dass diese \Macro{if@mainmatter} passend umdefinieren. Falls es jedoch weitere, vergleichbare Befehle zur Umschaltung zwischen unterschiedlichen Dokumentteilen gibt, so kennt \Package{scrlayer} diese nicht, testet nicht auf diese und erweitert sie daher auch nicht passend. In diesem Fall ist \Package{scrlayer} also auf die Mitarbeit des Klassenautors angewiesen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{if@mainmatter}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}% - \Parameter{Name der Gliederungsebene}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}}% - \Parameter{Tiefe der Gliederungsebene} + \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}\Parameter{Name der Gliederungsebene} + \Parameter{Tiefe der Gliederungsebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}% Jeder Gliederungsebene ist normalerweise eine nummerische Tiefe zugeordnet. Das ist notwendig, damit \LaTeX{} die Hierarchie der Gliederungsebenen verwalten kann. Allerdings sind die Werte normalerweise nur @@ -205,7 +208,8 @@ korrekten Ergebnis führt, beispielsweise falls es vollkommen andere Gliederungsbefehle gibt, kann man die Zuordnung eben mit \Macro{DeclareSectionNumberDepth} auch explizit vornehmen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareSectionNumberDepth}% +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Deklaration von Ebenen} \seclabel{layers} @@ -300,17 +304,12 @@ weitere Eigenschaften kennen lernen, die jedoch auf diese primären Eigenschaften abgebildet werden können. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}\\ - \Macro{ProvideLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}\\ - \Macro{RedeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene}\\ + \Macro{DeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} + \Macro{DeclareNewLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} + \Macro{ProvideLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} + \Macro{RedeclareLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} \Macro{ModifyLayer}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvideLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayer}% Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu definieren. Der \PName{Name der Ebene} muss voll expandierbar sein. Die Expansion sollte in ASCII-Buchstaben resultieren. Einige zusätzliche Zeichen werden ebenfalls @@ -360,7 +359,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addcontents}\PName{Code}}{% + \OptionVName{addcontents}{Code}}{% Der angegebene Wert wird an den aktuellen Wert des Attributs \Option{contents} angehängt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die Behandlung von \PName{Code} @@ -368,33 +367,33 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addheight}\PName{zusätzliche Höhe}}{% + \OptionVName{addheight}{zusätzliche Höhe}}{% Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{height} wird um den Wert dieser Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei \Option{height} möglich.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addhoffset}\PName{zusätzlicher horizontaler Abstand}}{% + \OptionVName{addhoffset}{zusätzlicher horizontaler Abstand}}{% Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{hoffset} wird um den Wert dieser Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei \Option{hoffset} möglich.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addvoffset}\PName{zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand}}{% + \OptionVName{addvoffset}{zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand}}{% Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{voffset} wird um den Wert dieser Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei \Option{voffset} möglich.% }% \entry{% \ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{addwidth}\PName{zusätzliche Breite}}{% + \OptionVName{addwidth}{zusätzliche Breite}}{% Der aktuelle Wert von Attribut \Option{width} wird um den Wert dieser Option erhöht. Als Wert sind die gleichen Angaben wie bei \Option{width} möglich.% }% - \nentry{\KOption{align}\PName{Ausrichtungszeichen}}{% + \nentry{\OptionVName{align}{Ausrichtungszeichen}}{% Über die \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} wird die gewünschte Ausrichtung der Ebene bestimmt. Dabei steht jedes einzelne \PName{Ausrichtungszeichen} für eine mögliche Anwendung der Werte \PName{Abstand} der Optionen @@ -420,9 +419,9 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. \entry{\KOption{area}\Parameter{horizontaler Abstand}\Parameter{vertikaler Abstand}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe}}{% Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft resultiert in den primären Eigenschaften - \KOption{hoffset}\PName{horizontaler Abstand}, - \KOption{voffset}\PName{vertikaler Abstand}, - \KOption{width}\PName{Breite}, \KOption{height}\PName{Höhe}.% + \OptionVName{hoffset}{horizontaler Abstand}, + \OptionVName{voffset}{vertikaler Abstand}, + \OptionVName{width}\PName{Breite}, \KOption{height}{Höhe}.% }% \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}% \Option{backandforeground}}{% @@ -446,7 +445,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. dem Seitenfuß bis zur unteren Papierkante abdeckt. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.% }% - \entry{\KOption{clone}\PName{Name einer Ebene}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{clone}{Name einer Ebene}}{% Die zusammengesetzte Eigenschaft setzt alle primären Eigenschaften entsprechend der aktuellen, primären Eigenschaften der Ebene mit dem angegebenen \PName{Name einer Ebene}. Es ist zu beachten, dass \PName{Name @@ -455,7 +454,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. jedoch nicht empfohlen! Die Ebene mit dem angegebenen \PName{Name einer Ebene} muss außerdem bereits existieren.% }% - \entry{\KOption{contents}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{contents}{Code}}{% Der angegebene \PName{Code} wird immer dann expandiert und ausgeführt, wenn die Ebene ausgegeben wird. Damit definiert \PName{Code} das, was auf der Ebene zu sehen ist. Es werden keine Tests durchgeführt, ob @@ -532,7 +531,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. entspricht damit der Länge \Length{headsep}. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.% }% - \entry{\KOption{height}\PName{Höhe}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{height}{Höhe}}{% Setzt die \PName{Höhe} der Ebene. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Höhe} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} @@ -540,7 +539,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. unter Verwendung von +, -, /, *, (, und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{hoffset}\PName{Abstand}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{hoffset}{Abstand}}{% Setzt den \PName{Abstand} der Ebene von der linken Kante des Papiers. Wie der \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align} ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein @@ -566,7 +565,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. und erlaubt keinen Wert.% }% \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{mode}\PName{Modus}}{% + \OptionVName{mode}{Modus}}{% Diese primäre Eigenschaft bestimmt in welchem \PName{Modus} der Inhalt der Ebene ausgegeben wird. Die Voreinstellung ist \PValue{text}. Dabei wird die oberste Grundlinie um die Höhe einer Standardtextzeile unterhalb der @@ -626,7 +625,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.% }% \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}}% - \KOption{pretocontents}\PName{Code}}{% + \OptionVName{pretocontents}{Code}}{% Der angegebene Wert wird dem aktuellen Wert des Attributs \Option{contents} vorangestellt. Es wird also ein zusätzlicher Inhalt vor dem bisherigen Inhalt generiert. Zu näheren Informationen über die @@ -661,11 +660,11 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. \entry{\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{scrlayer}}% \Option{unrestricted}}{% Hebt alle Ausgabebeschränkungen auf. Damit ist die Option eine Kombination - von \Option{backandforground}, \Option{everyside} und + von \Option{backandforeground}, \Option{everyside} und \Option{floatornonfloatpage}. Diese Option erwartet und erlaubt keinen Wert.% }% - \entry{\KOption{voffset}\PName{Abstand}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{voffset}{Abstand}}{% Setzt den \PName{Abstand} der Ebene von der Papieroberkante. Wie der \PName{Abstand} gemessen wird, hängt von Eigenschaft \Option{align} ab. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Abstand} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein @@ -675,7 +674,7 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. und ). Die genaue Syntax eines Längenausdrucks ist \cite[Abschnitt~3.5]{manual:eTeX} zu entnehmen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{width}\PName{Breite}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{width}{Breite}}{% Setzt die \PName{Breite} der Ebene. Beachten Sie, dass \PName{Breite} wahlweise eine \LaTeX-Länge sein kann, die mit \Macro{newlength} definiert wurde, eine \TeX-Länge, die mit \Macro{newdimen} oder \Macro{newskip} @@ -685,26 +684,17 @@ Ebene stellt bei beiden Anweisungen einen Fehler dar. }% \end{desclist} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclareLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvideLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareLayer}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{layerhalign}\\ - \Macro{layervalign}\\ - \Macro{layerxoffset}\\ - \Macro{layeryoffset}\\ - \Macro{layerwidth}\\ - \Macro{layerheight}% + \Macro{layerhalign} + \Macro{layervalign} + \Macro{layerxoffset} + \Macro{layeryoffset} + \Macro{layerwidth} + \Macro{layerheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layervalign}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerhalign}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerxoffset}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layeryoffset}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layerheight}% Diese Anweisungen sind nur innerhalb der Ausgabe des mit \Option{contents}, \Option{addcontents} oder \Option{pretocontents} angegebenen \PName{Code} gültig. In diesem Fall enthalten sie die tatsächlich verwendete Ausrichtung, @@ -727,17 +717,12 @@ und \Macro{layervalign} immer entweder \PValue{r}, \PValue{c} oder \PValue{b}. Eine\textnote{Achtung!} Umdefinierung der Anweisungen und damit Änderung der in ihnen gespeicherten Werte ist nicht gestattet und führt zu unvorhersehbaren Ergebnissen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerheight}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerwidth}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layeryoffset}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerxoffset}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layerhalign}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layervalign}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{LenToUnit}\Parameter{Länge} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LenToUnit}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisung stammt ursprünglich von \Package{eso-pic}\IndexPackage{eso-pic} ab Version~2.0f. Sie rechnet Längen-Werte in Vielfache von \Length{unitlength} um und kann daher an Stelle @@ -754,20 +739,16 @@ Es sei an dieser Stelle darauf hingewiesen, dass man bei Verwendung von Paket mehr benötigt. Das Paket erweitert die \Environment{picture}-Umgebung und deren Anweisung so, dass man für Koordinaten auch direkt \LaTeX-Längen verwenden kann.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LenToUnit}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{putUL}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{putUR}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{putLL}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{putLR}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ + \Macro{putUL}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{putUR}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{putLL}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{putLR}\Parameter{Inhalt} \Macro{putC}\Parameter{Inhalt} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putUL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putUR}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putLL}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putLR}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{putC}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Package{scrlayer}} Anweisungen können innerhalb der primären Ebeneneigenschaft \PValue{contents} verwendet werden, wenn die Ebene mit \OptionValue{mode}{picture} erstellt wurde. In diesem Fall platziert @@ -787,10 +768,10 @@ schließlich platziert \PName{Inhalt} relativ zur Mitte der Ebene.% % \begin{Example} Sie wollen feststellen, wie genau die Höhe des Textbereichs bei - \OptionValue{DIV}{classic} tatsächlich der Breite der Seite entspricht und - erstellen dazu eine Ebene, die sowohl den Textbereich umrandet als auch - einen Kreis mit der Papierbreite als Durchmesser im Zentrum des Textbereichs - platziert: + \OptionValueRef{typearea}{DIV}{classic} tatsächlich der Breite der Seite + entspricht und erstellen dazu eine Ebene, die sowohl den Textbereich + umrandet als auch einen Kreis mit der Papierbreite als Durchmesser im + Zentrum des Textbereichs platziert: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[DIV=classic]{scrartcl} \usepackage{pict2e} @@ -821,20 +802,15 @@ finden Sie übrigens in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction}, Die im Beispiel bereits verwendete Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} wird leider erst in \autoref{sec:scrlayer.pagestyles}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} erklärt +\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers} erklärt werden. Sie dient hier zur Definition eines Seitenstils, der die neu definierte Ebene auch tatsächlich verwendet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putC}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putLR}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putLL}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putUR}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{putUL}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{GetLayerContents}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GetLayerContents}% Mit\ChangedAt{v3.16}{\Package{scrlayer}} dieser Anweisung kann der aktuelle Inhalt einer Ebene ermittelt werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist unbedingt zu beachten, dass bei Verwendung dieser Anweisung im \PName{Code} der @@ -842,13 +818,13 @@ Ebenen-Attribute \Option{contents}, \Option{addcontents} oder \Option{pretocontents} unendliche Rekursionen entstehen können, wenn dabei auf den Inhalt der aktuellen Ebene zugegriffen wird. Der Anwender ist selbst dafür verantwortlich solche Situationen zu vermeiden!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GetLayerContents}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{IfLayerExists}%^^A - \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code} + \Macro{IfLayerExists}\Parameter{Name} + \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerExists}% Diese Anweisung kann dazu verwendet werden, Code in Abhängigkeit davon, ob ein eine Ebene existiert oder nicht, auszuführen. Wenn die Ebene mit dem angegebenen \PName{Name} existiert, so wird der \PName{Dann-Code} @@ -859,53 +835,55 @@ Extremfall falsch-positiv sein könnten. Nichtsdestotrotz: Falls der Test falsch-positiv ist, läuft etwas schief. Beispielsweise könnte dies ein Indikator für die Verwendung eines inkompatiblen Pakets oder dafür sein, dass der Anwender etwas tut, was er besser nicht tun sollte.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerExists} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyLayer}\Parameter{Name der Ebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyLayer}% Existiert eine Ebene mit dem angegebenen \PName{Name der Ebene}, so werden alle zu dieser Ebene gehörenden Makros zu \Macro{relax}. Anschließend kann die Ebene nicht länger verwendet werden. Allerdings ist es kein Problem, falls die Ebene Bestandteil eines mit \Package{scrlayer} definierten Seitenstils ist, da derart zerstörte Ebenen schlicht ignoriert werden. Nichtsdestotrotz können -zerstörte Ebenen anschließend mit \Macro{DeclareNewLayer} oder -\Macro{ProvideLayer} neu definiert werden. Sie können jedoch vor einer -neuerlichen Definition nicht länger mit \Macro{RedeclareLayer} oder -\Macro{ModifyLayer} verändert werden. +zerstörte Ebenen anschließend mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewLayer} +oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ProvideLayer} neu definiert werden. Sie können +jedoch vor einer neuerlichen Definition nicht länger mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.RedeclareLayer} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayer} verändert werden. Die Anweisung ist dazu bestimmt, innerhalb des Arguments \PName{Code} von -\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer.enduserinterfaces}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu +\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu werden. Damit können Ebenen, die unter Verwendung von entfernbaren Anweisungen einer entfernbaren Benutzerschnittstelle definiert wurden, zusammen mit dieser Benutzerschnittstelle entfernt werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyLayer}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{layercontentsmeasure} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{layercontentsmeasure}% Mit Hilfe der \KOMAScript-Option -\Option{draft}\IndexOption{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} kann für das Paket -\Package{scrlayer} ein Entwurfsmodus aktiviert werden. In diesem Entwurfsmodus -wird hinter jeder Ebene zunächst eine Bemaßung der Ebene ausgegeben. Diese -Bemaßung erfolgt mit \Macro{layercontentsmeasure}. Diese Anweisung zeigt am -oberen und linken Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zentimeter und am rechten und -unteren Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zoll. Die Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.draft}\IndexOption{draft~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} +kann für das Paket \Package{scrlayer} ein Entwurfsmodus aktiviert werden. In +diesem Entwurfsmodus wird hinter jeder Ebene zunächst eine Bemaßung der Ebene +ausgegeben. Diese Bemaßung erfolgt mit \Macro{layercontentsmeasure}. Diese +Anweisung zeigt am oberen und linken Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zentimeter +und am rechten und unteren Rand der Ebene ein Maßband in Zoll. Die Anweisung \Macro{layercontentsmeasure} kann statt über die Option auch schlicht als alleiniger \PName{Code} für die Eigenschaft \Option{contents} einer Ebene verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{layercontentsmeasure}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Deklaration und Verwaltung von Seitenstilen} \seclabel{pagestyles} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% Wir kennen nun Ebenen und wissen, wie diese definiert und verwaltet werden. Aber bisher wissen wir noch nicht, wie sie verwendet werden. Die möglicherweise überraschende Antwort lautet: mit Hilfe von @@ -930,7 +908,8 @@ erklärt wurden. Als Ergebnis dieser Überlegungen ist eine Form von Seitenstilen, die \Package{scrlayer} bietet, der -Ebenen-Seitenstil\textnote{Ebenen-Seitenstil}\Index{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}\Index{Ebenen>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil}. Ein +Ebenen-Seitenstil\textnote{Ebenen-Seitenstil}% +\Index{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}\Index{Ebenen>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil}. Ein solcher Ebenen-Seitenstil besteht aus Ebenen und zusätzlich aus mehreren Haken (engl. \emph{hooks}). Die Ebenen wurden bereits in \autoref{sec:scrlayer.layers} beschrieben. Die Haken sind Punkte in der @@ -938,10 +917,11 @@ Expansion oder Anwendung von Seitenstilen, zu denen zusätzlicher Code hinzugefügt werden kann. Erfahrene Anwender kennen dieses Konzept bereits von beispielsweise \Macro{AtBeginDocument} (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) oder \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux}). +\DescPageRef{scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux}). Eine zweite Form von Seitenstilen, die \Package{scrlayer} bietet, ist der -Alias-Seitenstil\textnote{Alias-Seitenstil}\Index{Seitenstil>Alias-}\Index{Alias>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil} oder +Alias-Seitenstil\textnote{Alias-Seitenstil}% +\Index{Seitenstil>Alias-}\Index{Alias>Seitenstil}\Index{Seiten>Stil} oder Seitenstil-Alias. Ein Seitenstil-Alias besteht in Wirklichkeit aus einem anderen Seitenstil. Anders ausgedrückt ist der Name eines Seitenstil-Alias ein Alias-Name für einen anderen Seitenstil-Alias oder einen primären @@ -956,87 +936,76 @@ Seitenstile. Seitenstil-Aliase können nicht nur für Seitenstile definiert werden, die mit \Package{scrlayer} definiert wurden, sondern für alle Seitenstile. + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{currentpagestyle} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{currentpagestyle}% Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} erweitert die \LaTeX-Anweisung -\Macro{pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle} so, dass diese \Macro{currentpagestyle} -als den Namen des jeweils aktiven Seitenstils +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}\IndexCmd{pagestyle} so, dass diese +\Macro{currentpagestyle} als den Namen des jeweils aktiven Seitenstils definiert. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass -\Macro{thispagestyle}\IndexCmd{thispagestyle} selbst \Macro{currentpagestyle} -nicht verändert. Wird \Macro{thispagestyle} verwendet, so kann sich +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}\IndexCmd{thispagestyle} selbst +\Macro{currentpagestyle} nicht verändert. Wird +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} verwendet, so kann sich \Macro{currentpagestyle} aber innerhalb der \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion verändern. Dies hat jedoch nur dann Auswirkungen, wenn -\Macro{currentpagestyle} bis in die \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion geschützt -verwendet wird. +\Macro{currentpagestyle} bis in die \LaTeX-Ausgabefunktion geschützt verwendet +wird. Es sei darauf hingewiesen, dass die später in diesem Abschnitt dokumentierten -Ebenen-Seitenstile nicht auf diese Erweiterung von \Macro{pagestyle} angewiesen -sind, da sie selbst auch \Macro{currentpagestyle} umdefinieren. Die -Erweiterung wurde für die Verwendung von anderen Seitenstilen, die nicht auf -\Package{scrlayer} basieren, vorgenommen. Es ist außerdem zu -beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass \Macro{currentpagestyle} vor der ersten -Verwendung von \Macro{pagestyle} nach dem Laden von \Package{scrlayer} leer +Ebenen-Seitenstile nicht auf diese Erweiterung von +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} angewiesen sind, da sie selbst auch +\Macro{currentpagestyle} umdefinieren. Die Erweiterung wurde für die +Verwendung von anderen Seitenstilen, die nicht auf \Package{scrlayer} +basieren, vorgenommen. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass +\Macro{currentpagestyle} vor der ersten Verwendung von +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} nach dem Laden von \Package{scrlayer} leer ist. Bei der Definition einer Endanwender-Schnittstelle dürfte es daher -nützlich sein, mit einer impliziten \Macro{pagestyle}-Anweisung den aktuellen -Seitenstil auf eine Voreinstellung zu setzen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{currentpagestyle}% +nützlich sein, mit einer impliziten \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}-Anweisung +den aktuellen Seitenstil auf eine Voreinstellung zu setzen.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code}% + \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}\Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}% Die Anweisung \Macro{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle} fügt einem Haken (engl. \emph{hook}) \PName{Code} hinzu, der innerhalb der Ausführung von -Anweisung \Macro{pagestyle}\important{\Macro{pagestyle}}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}, -unmittelbar vor der Auswahl des Seitenstils ausgeführt wird. Innerhalb von -\PName{Code} kann \texttt{\#1} als Platzhalter für das Argument von -\Macro{pagestyle} verwendet werden. +Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}, unmittelbar +vor der Auswahl des Seitenstils ausgeführt wird. Innerhalb von \PName{Code} +kann \texttt{\#1} als Platzhalter für das Argument von +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} verwendet werden. Die Anweisung \Macro{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle} arbeitet ähnlich. Allerdings wird hier \PName{Code} ausgeführt, nachdem der Seitenstil gewählt und -\Macro{currentpagestyle} auf den Namen des realen Seitenstils gesetzt wurde. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.currentpagestyle} auf den Namen des realen Seitenstils +gesetzt wurde. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass \PName{Code} jeweils nur bei der -Wahl eines Seitenstils mit Hilfe von \Macro{pagestyle} ausgeführt wird. Wird -ein Seitenstil auf andere Art, beispielsweise mit Hilfe von -\Macro{thispagestyle}, gewählt, so wird \PName{Code} nicht ausgeführt. Es ist -außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass einmal hinzugefügter -\PName{Code} nicht mehr entfernt werden kann. Allerdings wird der \PName{Code} -lokal hinzugefügt. Sein Gültigkeitsbereich kann daher mit einer Gruppe -beschränkt werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterSelectAnyPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle}% +Wahl eines Seitenstils mit Hilfe von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} +ausgeführt wird. Wird ein Seitenstil auf andere Art, beispielsweise mit Hilfe +von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle}, gewählt, so wird \PName{Code} nicht +ausgeführt. Es ist außerdem zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass einmal +hinzugefügter \PName{Code} nicht mehr entfernt werden kann. Allerdings wird +der \PName{Code} lokal hinzugefügt. Sein Gültigkeitsbereich kann daher mit +einer Gruppe beschränkt werden.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclarePageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclarePageStyleAlias}}% - \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}}% - \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name}\\ - \Macro{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{ProvidePageStyleAlias}}% - \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name}\\ - \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}}% - \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name}% + \Macro{DeclarePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} + \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name} + \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} + \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name} + \Macro{ProvidePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} + \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name} + \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} + \Parameter{originärer Seitenstil-Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% \BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}% \BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}% -\BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um einen Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} zu definieren, der einfach nur ein Alias für einen bereits existierenden Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{originärer @@ -1064,31 +1033,30 @@ eine Fehlermeldung. \csname if@tempswa\endcsname% Umbruchkorrekturtext \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie schreiben eine Klasse und verwenden darin für - Kapitelanfangsseiten den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{chapter}. In der - Voreinstellung soll dieser Seitenstil dem Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} + Kapitelanfangsseiten den Seitenstil \PageStyle{chapter}. In der + Voreinstellung soll dieser Seitenstil dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} entsprechen. Daher verwenden Sie das Paket \Package{scrlayer} und definieren mit \begin{lstcode} \DeclareNewPageStyleAlias{chapter}{plain} \end{lstcode} - den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{chapter} als Alias für den Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{plain}. Will hingegen der Anwender später, dass der Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{chapter} dem Seitenstil \Pagestyle{empty} entspricht, so erreicht + den Seitenstil \PageStyle{chapter} als Alias für den Seitenstil + \PageStyle{plain}. Will hingegen der Anwender später, dass der Seitenstil + \PageStyle{chapter} dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{empty} entspricht, so erreicht er dies mit: \begin{lstcode} \RedeclarePageStyleAlias{chapter}{empty} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} \fi -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleAlias}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleAlias} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyPageStyleAlias}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Alias-Name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyPageStyleAlias}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}% Mit dieser Anweisung wird der Seitenstil-Alias mit dem angegebenen Namen \PName{Seitenstil-Alias-Name} für \LaTeX{} wieder undefiniert, wenn es tatsächlich einen Alias-Seitenstil dieses Namens gibt. Anschließend kann der @@ -1096,17 +1064,19 @@ Seitenstil auch mit \Macro{DeclareNewAliasPageStyle} oder \Macro{ProvideAliasPageStyle} wieder neu definiert werden. Die Anweisung ist dazu bestimmt, innerhalb des Arguments \PName{Code} von -\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer.enduserinterfaces}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu +\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu werden, um Seitenstile, die als Teil eines Endanwender-Interfaces definiert wurden, beim automatischen Entfernen dieses Interfaces mit zu entfernen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyPageStyleAlias}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{GetRealPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{GetRealPageStyle}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}% Diese Anweisung sucht rekursiv nach dem tatsächlichen Namen eines Seitenstils, wenn der angegebene \PName{Seitenstil-Name} zu einem Alias-Seitenstil gehört. Ist \PName{Seitenstil-Name} nicht der Name eines @@ -1115,32 +1085,23 @@ gilt auch, falls ein Seitenstil namens \PName{Seitenstil-Name} gar nicht existiert. Die Anweisung ist voll expandierbar und kann damit beispielsweise auch im zweiten Argument einer \Macro{edef}-Anweisung verwendet werden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{GetRealPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{}{Alias>Seitenstil}% -\EndIndex{}{Seitenstil>Alias-}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}% - \OParameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Ebenenliste}% + \Macro{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}\OParameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}\OParameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}\OParameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}\OParameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}% \BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% \BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Diese Anweisungen deklarieren einen Seitenstil mit dem @@ -1168,33 +1129,33 @@ diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und ihrer Bedeutung sind }{% Optionen für die Haken von Ebenen-Seitenstilen (\emph{Fortsetzung})% }% - \entry{\KOption{onselect}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onselect}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn der - Seitenstil beispielsweise mit \Macro{pagestyle} ausgewählt wird. Es ist zu - beachten, dass \Macro{thispagestyle} selbst keinen Seitenstil unmittelbar + Seitenstil beispielsweise mit \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} ausgewählt wird. Es ist zu + beachten, dass \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} selbst keinen Seitenstil unmittelbar auswählt, sondern der Seitenstil in diesem Fall erst innerhalb der Ausgaberoutine von \LaTeX{} aktiviert wird.% }% - \entry{\KOption{oninit}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{oninit}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{ononeside}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{ononeside}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn im einseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{ontwoside}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{ontwoside}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn im doppelseitigen Modus die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal geschieht: einmal für Hintergrund-Ebenen und einmal für Vordergrund-Ebenen.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onoddpage}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onoddpage}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer rechten Seite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede @@ -1202,7 +1163,7 @@ diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und ihrer Bedeutung sind Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus alle Seiten rechte Seiten sind.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onevenpage}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onevenpage}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer linken Seite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede Seite zweimal @@ -1210,7 +1171,7 @@ diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und ihrer Bedeutung sind Vordergrund-Ebenen. Beachten Sie außerdem, dass im einseitigen Modus keine linken Seiten existieren.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onfloatpage}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onfloatpage}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer Gleitumgebungsseite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies für jede @@ -1219,7 +1180,7 @@ diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und ihrer Bedeutung sind Gleitumgebungsseiten nur diejenigen Seiten sind, auf denen eine oder mehrere p-platzierte Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onnonfloatpage}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onnonfloatpage}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Seitenstil auf einer Seite initialisiert wird, die keine Gleitumgebungsseite ist. Beachten Sie, dass @@ -1229,13 +1190,13 @@ diesem Abschnitt verwiesen. Details zu den Haken und ihrer Bedeutung sind mehrere p-platzierte Gleitumgebungen ausgegeben werden, und auf anderen Seiten sehr wohl t-, b- oder h-platzierte Gleitumgebungen stehen können.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onbackground}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onbackground}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Hintergrund einer Seite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies auf jeder Seite genau einmal der Fall ist.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onforeground}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onforeground}{Code}}{% Der \PName{Code} dieses Hakens wird immer dann ausgeführt, wenn die Ausgabe der Ebenen für den Vordergrund einer Seite initialisiert wird. Beachten Sie, dass dies auf jeder Seite genau @@ -1253,7 +1214,8 @@ existiert. Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie, dass die Deklaration eines Seitenstils, der bereits ein Alias für einen anderen Seitenstil ist (siehe beispielsweise \Macro{DeclareAliasPageStyle} zuvor in diesem Abschnitt) nicht zu der Umdefinierung des angegebenen Alias-Seitenstils, sondern des realen -Seitenstils (siehe \Macro{GetRealPageStyle} zuvor in diesem Abschnitt) führt. +Seitenstils (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.GetRealPageStyle} zuvor in diesem +Abschnitt) führt. Im Unterschied dazu wird bei \Macro{ProvidePageStyleByLayers} der Seitenstil unverändert erhalten, wenn bereits ein Seitenstil des Namens @@ -1266,75 +1228,63 @@ definiert dessen realen Seitenstil dann um. Existiert jedoch noch kein Seitenstil des angegebenen Namens, so resultiert daraus eine Fehlermeldung. Beachten Sie auch die nachfolgenden Anmerkungen zum Pseudo-Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@}.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RedeclarePageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ProvidePageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclarePageStyleByLayers}% +\PageStyle{@everystyle@}.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{@everystyle@}\\ - \Pagestyle{empty} + \PageStyle{@everystyle@} + \PageStyle{empty} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{@everystyle@}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} definiert von sich aus bereits zwei in gewisser Weise spezielle Seitenstile. Der erste davon ist -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@}\important{\Pagestyle{@everystyle@}}. Dieser +\PageStyle{@everystyle@}\important{\PageStyle{@everystyle@}}. Dieser Seitenstil sollte niemals als normaler Seitenstil beispielsweise mit -\Macro{pagestyle} oder \Macro{thispagestyle} oder als Ziel eines -Alias-Seitenstils verwendet werden. Stattdessen werden die Ebenen und Haken -dieses Seitenstils von allen anderen Ebenen-Seitenstilen mit verwendet. Dabei -werden die Haken von \Pagestyle{@everystyle@} jeweils vor den entsprechenden -Haken und die Ebenen jeweils vor den entsprechenden Ebenen des aktiven -Seitenstils ausgeführt. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle} oder \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} oder +als Ziel eines Alias-Seitenstils verwendet werden. Stattdessen werden die +Ebenen und Haken dieses Seitenstils von allen anderen Ebenen-Seitenstilen mit +verwendet. Dabei werden die Haken von \PageStyle{@everystyle@} jeweils vor den +entsprechenden Haken und die Ebenen jeweils vor den entsprechenden Ebenen des +aktiven Seitenstils ausgeführt. Damit ist das Hinzufügen einer Ebene zum Pseudo-Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@} oder von Code zu einem Haken dieses Seitenstils +\PageStyle{@everystyle@} oder von Code zu einem Haken dieses Seitenstils vergleichbar mit dem Hinzufügen einer Ebene beziehungsweise von Haken-Code zu allen Ebenen-Seitenstile. Der eine entscheidende Unterschied ist: Befehle, die sich auf die Ebenen eines Seitenstils beziehen, das sind neben -\Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} beispielsweise auch die Anweisungen -\Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer} oder -\Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}, lassen die Ebenen des Seitenstils -\Pagestyle{@everystyle@} unberücksichtigt, wenn sie auf einen anderen -Ebenen-Seitenstil angewendet werden. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} beispielsweise auch die +Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}, lassen die Ebenen des +Seitenstils \PageStyle{@everystyle@} unberücksichtigt, wenn sie auf einen +anderen Ebenen-Seitenstil angewendet werden. Der zweite etwas andere Ebenen-Seitenstil ist -\Pagestyle{empty}\important{\Pagestyle{empty}}. Bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern wird +\PageStyle{empty}\important{\PageStyle{empty}}. Bereits vom \LaTeX-Kern wird ein Seitenstil dieses Namens definiert, der einen leeren Kopf und Fuß hat. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer} definiert diesen Seitenstil als Ebenen-Seitenstil ohne Ebenen um. Nichtsdestotrotz kann er wie jeder andere Ebenen-Seitenstil verwendet werden. Der Hauptvorteil dieses Ebenen-Seitenstils gegenüber dem ursprünglichen Seitenstil aus dem \LaTeX-Kern ist, dass er ebenfalls die Haken -und Ebenen des Pseudo-Seitenstils \Pagestyle{@everystyle@} ausführt.% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{@everystyle@}% +und Ebenen des Pseudo-Seitenstils \PageStyle{@everystyle@} ausführt.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{onpsselect}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsinit}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsoneside}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpstwoside}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsoddpage}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsevenpage}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsfloatpage}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsnonfloatpage}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsbackground}\PValue{Code}\\ - \KOption{onpsforeground}\PValue{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsselect}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsinit}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsoneside}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpstwoside}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsoddpage}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsevenpage}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsfloatpage}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsnonfloatpage}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsbackground}{Code} + \OptionVName{onpsforeground}{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsselect~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsinit~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsoneside~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpstwoside~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsoddpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsevenpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsfloatpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsnonfloatpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsbackground~=\PName{Code}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{onpsforeground~=\PName{Code}}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Für jeden der Haken aus \autoref{tab:scrlayer.pagestyle.hooks} existiert außerdem eine \KOMAScript-Option. Die Namen der \KOMAScript-Optionen ähneln den Namen der Optionen für die Befehle zur Deklaration von @@ -1344,29 +1294,20 @@ Ebenen-Seitenstilen. Es wird lediglich ein »\texttt{ps}« nach dem verwendet. Dieser Anfangswert wird dann um alle Werte, die dem entsprechenden Haken in der \PName{Optionenliste} der Deklarationsbefehle zugewiesen werden, erweitert. Der Anfangswert kann mit Hilfe der Anweisung -\Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}, die später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}, die später in diesem Abschnitt erklärt wird, entfernt werden.% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsforeground~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsbackground~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsnonfloatpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsfloatpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsevenpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsoddpage~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpstwoside~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsoneside~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsinit~=\PName{Code}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{onpsselect~=\PName{Code}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{deactivatepagestylelayers}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}% - \Parameter{Code} + \OptionVName{deactivatepagestylelayers}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Code} + \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{deactivatepagestylelayers~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Solange \KOMAScript-Option \Option{deactivatepagestylelayers} nicht aktiviert ist, kann mit \Macro{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle} für jede Ebene des Seitenstils mit dem Namen \PName{Seitenstil-Name} beliebiger \PName{Code} @@ -1404,24 +1345,21 @@ Diverse Anweisungen von \Package{scrlayer} setzen intern selbst ebenfalls Option kann also verwendet werden, um alle Ebenen aller Seitenstile temporär zu deaktivieren oder zu verstecken. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ForEachLayerOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{deactivatepagestylelayers~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \Macro{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}% + \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Macro{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Diese Anweisungen können verwendet werden, um Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil hinzuzufügen oder davon zu entfernen. Der Seitenstil wird dabei über seinen \PName{Seitenstil-Name} referenziert. Die Ebenen werden in einer durch Komma @@ -1449,23 +1387,19 @@ ignoriert, führt also nicht zu einer Fehlermeldung. Dagegen ist der Versuch, Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil, der kein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist und auch kein Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, hinzuzufügen oder von einem solchen zu entfernen ein Fehler und wird als solcher gemeldet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{RemoveLayersFromPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}}% - \Parameter{Referenzebenen-Name}\\ - \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}}% - \Parameter{Referenzebenen-Name}% + \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Parameter{Referenzebenen-Name} + \Macro{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Parameter{Referenzebenen-Name}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Diese beiden Befehle ähneln den vorangegangenen. Allerdings wird hier zusätzlich ein \PName{Referenzebenen-Name} angegeben. Die Ebenen des über den \PName{Seitenstil-Name} angegebenen Seitenstils werden nach dieser @@ -1479,13 +1413,14 @@ Ist die Referenzebene nicht Bestandteil des Seitenstils, so wird auch nichts eingefügt. Ist der Seitenstil hingegen kein Ebenen-Seitenstil und auch kein Alias-Seitenstil, der zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt, so wird ein Fehler gemeldet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Bei den Befehlen zur Definition eines Seitenstils oder zum Hinzufügen von Ebenen zu einem Seitenstil wird nicht darauf geachtet, ob eine Ebene mehrfach Bestandteil eines Seitenstils ist oder wird. Dies ist also durchaus @@ -1500,16 +1435,17 @@ Ebenen ändern kann. Wird also eine spezielle Reihenfolge gewünscht, sollten stattdessen alle Ebenen entfernt und die gewünschten Ebenen in der erwarteten Reihenfolge neu hinzugefügt werden. In einem solchen Fall ist \Macro{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle} also nicht geeignet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnifyLayersAtPageStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Optionenliste}\\ - \Macro{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Optionenliste}% + \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Optionenliste} + \Macro{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Optionenliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können die Optionen und damit die Haken eines Ebenen-Seitenstils nachträglich verändert werden. Bei \Macro{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}\textnote{Seitenstil-Optionen ändern} @@ -1527,21 +1463,19 @@ Die Anweisung \Macro{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}\textnote{Seitenstil-Optionen erweitern} dagegen überschreibt die bisher vorhandenen Werte nicht, sondern fügt die neuen zu den bisherigen hinzu oder -- genauer gesagt -- hängt die neuen Werte an die alten an.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AddToLayerPageStyleOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{IfLayerPageStyleExists}}% - \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}\\ - \Macro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}}% - \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}% + \Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Dann-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} + \Macro{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Dann-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Mit diesen Anweisungen kann Code in Abhängigkeit davon ausgeführt werden, ob ein Seitenstil ein Ebenen-Seitenstil ist oder nicht. Dabei führt \Macro{IfLayerPageStyleExists} den \PName{Dann-Code} nur dann aus, wenn @@ -1555,26 +1489,25 @@ führt den \PName{Dann-Code} nur dann aus, wenn der über ist. Im Falle eines Alias-Seitenstils führt diese Anweisung also selbst dann \PName{Sonst-Code} aus, wenn dieser Alias-Seitenstil zu einem Ebenen-Seitenstil führt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfRealLayerPageStyleExists}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerPageStyleExists}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenen-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}}% - \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}\\ - \Macro{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}}% - \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}\\ - \Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% - \Parameter{Seitenstil-Name}\Parameter{Ebenenliste}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{IfLayersAtPageStyle}}% - \Parameter{Dann-Code}\Parameter{Sonst-Code}% + \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenen-Name} + \Parameter{Dann-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} + \Macro{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Parameter{Dann-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} + \Macro{IfLayersAtPageStyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil-Name} + \Parameter{Ebenenliste} + \Parameter{Dann-Code} + \Parameter{Sonst-Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Mit diesen Anweisungen kann überprüft werden, ob ein oder mehrere Ebenen Bestandteil eines Seitenstils sind. \Macro{IfLayerAtPageStyle}\textnote{genau eine Ebene} @@ -1597,14 +1530,14 @@ ausgeführt. Durch geeignete Schachtelung sind auch komplexe Bedingungen abbildbar. Gibt man statt einer \PName{Ebenenliste} jeweils nur einen \PName{Ebenen-Name} an, so sind alle drei Anweisungen gleichbedeutend.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayersAtPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{IfLayerAtPageStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}\Parameter{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% +\BeginIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% Mit dieser Anweisung kann ein Ebenen-Seitenstil aus \LaTeX-Sicht wieder undefiniert werden. Dies gilt jedoch nur, wenn es einen Ebenen-Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} auch tatsächlich gibt. Handelt es sich @@ -1613,35 +1546,33 @@ Ebenen-Seitenstil führt -- oder um einen anderen Seitenstil oder ist gar kein Seitenstil mit dem Namen \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} bekannt, so geschieht nichts, die Anweisung wird ignoriert. -Falls \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} der Name des aktuellen Seitenstils ist, so -wird der aktuelle Seitenstil auf eine Art leerer Seitenstil gesetzt. Falls der -Spezial-Seitenstil, der durch \Macro{thispagestyle} gesetzt wurde, auf -\PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} lautet, so wird dieser einfach nur -zurückgesetzt. Die vorherige Anweisung \Macro{thispagestyle} verliert damit -ihre aktuelle Auswirkung. +Falls \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} der Name des aktuellen Seitenstils ist, +so wird der aktuelle Seitenstil auf eine Art leerer Seitenstil gesetzt. Falls +der Spezial-Seitenstil, der durch \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} gesetzt +wurde, auf \PName{Ebenen-Seitenstil-Name} lautet, so wird dieser einfach nur +zurückgesetzt. Die vorherige Anweisung \DescRef{maincls.cmd.thispagestyle} +verliert damit ihre aktuelle Auswirkung. Es ist zu beachten\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Ebenen des Seitenstils nicht automatisch mit vernichtet werden. Falls Sie die Ebenen ebenfalls vernichten möchten, so können Sie dies beispielsweise mit: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \ForEachLayerOfPageStyle{...}{\DestroyLayer{#1}} \end{lstcode} vor der Vernichtung des Seitenstils selbst erreichen. Die Anweisung ist dazu bestimmt, innerhalb des Arguments \PName{Code} von -\Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer.enduserinterfaces}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu +\DescPageRef{scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}) verwendet zu werden, um Seitenstile, die als Teil eines Endanwender-Interfaces definiert wurden, beim automatischen Entfernen dieses Interfaces mit zu entfernen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}% -\EndIndex{}{Ebenen>Seitenstil}% -\EndIndex{}{Seitenstil>Ebenen-}% -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Stil}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon{20} % \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß} +\LoadCommonFile{headfootheight}% \section{Höhe von Kopf und Fuß} -\LoadCommon{21} % \section{Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen} +\LoadCommonFile{pagestylemanipulation}% \section{Beeinflussung der Inhalte von Seitenstilen} \section{Definition und Verwaltung von Schnittstellen für Endanwender} \seclabel{enduserinterfaces} @@ -1666,10 +1597,10 @@ aufbauen. Endanwender finden Informationen zu konkreten Endanwender-Schnittstellen in \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage-experts} und \autoref{cha:scrlayer-notecolumn}. + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{scrlayerInitInterface}\OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerInitInterface}% Mit dieser Anweisung wird eine neue Schnittstelle mit dem Namen \PName{Schnittstellen-Name} registriert. Der \PName{Schnittstellen-Name} muss einzigartig sein. Das bedeutet, dass eine @@ -1684,30 +1615,23 @@ Pakete ist dies der Dateiname der Klasse respektive des Pakets. Aber selbstverständlich kann jede andere Zeichenfolge der Kategorie \emph{letter} oder \emph{other} verwendet werden. Dies ist beispielsweise sinnvoll, wenn eine Klasse oder ein Paket mehrere Endanwender-Schnittstellen definiert.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerInitInterface}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{forceoverwrite}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{autoremoveinterfaces}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}% - \OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scrlayerAddToInterface}}% - \Parameter{Befehl}\Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% - \OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}}% - \Parameter{Befehlssequenz}\Parameter{Code} + \OptionVName{forceoverwrite}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{autoremoveinterfaces}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}\OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name} + \Parameter{Befehl}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}\OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name} + \Parameter{Befehlssequenz}\Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{forceoverwrite}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autoremoveinterfaces}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddToInterface}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% Eine der besonderen Eigenschaften der Endanwender-Schnittstellen von \Package{scrlayer} ist es, dass die Schnittstelle verwendete Befehle (auch bekannt als \emph{Makros} oder engl. \emph{macros}) registrieren sollte. Dies kann mit \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface} erfolgen. Das optionale Argument \PName{Schnittstellen-Name} entspricht hier dem Namen, der mit -\Macro{scrlayerInitInterface} zuvor registriert wurde. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface} zuvor registriert wurde. Werden\textnote{Achtung!} Anweisungen nicht nur während des Ladens einer Klasse oder eines Pakets, sondern auch zur Laufzeit definiert, so ist das @@ -1731,7 +1655,7 @@ Wann aber kann ein \PName{Befehl}\textnote{definierbare Befehle} definiert werden? Ist ein \PName{Befehl} undefiniert oder \Macro{relax}, so kann er immer definiert werden. Wurde ein \PName{Befehl} bereits definiert \emph{und} für eine andere Endanwender-Schnittstelle registriert \emph{und} wurde auch die -\KOMAScript-Option \Option{autoremoveinterface} aktiviert, so wird diese +\KOMAScript-Option \Option{autoremoveinterfaces} aktiviert, so wird diese andere Endanwender-Schnittstelle automatisch entfernt, der \PName{Befehl} auf \Macro{relax} gesetzt und für die angegebene neue Endanwender-Schnittstelle registriert. Damit ist \PName{Befehl} auch dann definierbar. Falls ein @@ -1742,7 +1666,7 @@ Endanwender-Schnittstelle ist, \emph{und} falls die \KOMAScript-Option registriert. Der \PName{Befehl} ist also auch in diesem Fall definierbar. In allen anderen Fällen ist er jedoch nicht definierbar, also insbesondere, falls er bereits definiert ist und die \KOMAScript-Optionen -\Option{autoremoveinterface} und \Option{forceoverwrite} deaktiviert sind. +\Option{autoremoveinterfaces} und \Option{forceoverwrite} deaktiviert sind. Die Anweisung \Macro{scrlayerAddCsToInterface} arbeitet ganz ähnlich der vorgenannten Anweisung \Macro{scrlayerAddToInterface}. Allerdings erwartet sie @@ -1751,30 +1675,28 @@ als erstes Argument keinen \PName{Befehl}, sondern eine expandierbar sein und ihre Expansion muss zu Zeichen der Kategorie \emph{letter}, \emph{other} oder \emph{space} führen.}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddCsToInterface}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerAddToInterface}% -\EndIndex{Option}{autoremoveinterfaces}% -\EndIndex{Option}{forceoverwrite}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}%^^A - \OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}\OParameter{Schnittstellen-Name} + \Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}% Für den Fall, dass die Endanwender-Schnittstelle mit dem angegebenen \PName{Schnittstellen-Name} automatisch entfernt wird (siehe -\KOMAScript-Option \Option{autoremoveinterface} zuvor in diesem Abschnitt) -kann zusätzlich \PName{Code} ausgeführt werden. Dies kann beispielsweise -verwendet werden, um Ebenen oder Seitenstile automatisch mit zu vernichten -(siehe \Macro{DestroyLayer}, \Macro{DestroyAliasPageStyle}, and -\Macro{DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}), die auf Befehlen der +\KOMAScript-Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.autoremoveinterfaces} zuvor in +diesem Abschnitt) kann zusätzlich \PName{Code} ausgeführt werden. Dies kann +beispielsweise verwendet werden, um Ebenen oder Seitenstile automatisch mit zu +vernichten (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyLayer}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias}, and +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle}), die auf Befehlen der Endanwender-Schnittstelle beruhen. Bezüglich der Voreinstellung für das optionale Argument sei auf die Erklärung zu -\Macro{scrlayerInitInterface} verwiesen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface}% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface} verwiesen.% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlayer}% -\EndIndex{}{Ebenen}% +\EndIndexGroup + %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex index a58820b7312..b53924fc9fe 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlfile.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,13 +46,14 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlfile.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlfile)] \chapter{Paketabhängigkeiten mit \Package{scrlfile} beherrschen} \labelbase{scrlfile} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrlfile} Die Einführung von \LaTeXe{} brachte 1994 eine Menge Neuerungen im Umgang mit @@ -131,10 +132,8 @@ ausgelöst werden. Bei den dazu verwendeten Befehlen wird zwischen allgemeinen Dateien, Klassen und Paketen unterschieden. -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFile}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterFile}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeFile}\Parameter{Datei}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{BeforeFile}\Parameter{Datei}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterFile}\Parameter{Datei}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration}% Mit Hilfe von \Macro{BeforeFile} kann dafür gesorgt werden, dass die @@ -159,63 +158,49 @@ Datei mit \Macro{LoadClass}, \Macro{documentclass}, \Macro{usepackage}, \Macro{RequirePackage}, \Macro{include} oder vergleichbaren Anweisungen geladen wird. Lediglich % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \input foo \end{lstcode} lädt die Datei \texttt{foo} ohne Verwendung von \Macro{InputIfFileExists}. Sie sollten daher stattdessen immer % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigieren -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \input{foo} \end{lstcode} verwenden. Beachten Sie die Klammern um den Dateinamen!% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeFile}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterFile}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforePackage}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{BeforeClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{BeforePackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration}% -Diese beiden Befehle arbeiten vergleichbar zu \Macro{BeforeFile} mit dem einen +Diese beiden Befehle arbeiten vergleichbar zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeFile} mit dem einen Unterschied, dass die \PName{Klasse} beziehungsweise das \PName{Paket} mit seinem Namen und nicht mit seinem Dateinamen angegeben wird. Die Endungen »\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforePackage}% - - -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass+}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass!}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage+}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage!}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfPackage}% +\EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass*}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass+}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterClass!}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage*}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage+}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterPackage!}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{AfterClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterClass*}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterClass+}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterClass!}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterAtEndOfClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterPackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterPackage*}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterPackage+}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterPackage!}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration}% Die Anweisungen \Macro{AfterClass} und \Macro{AfterPackage} arbeiten -weitgehend wie \Macro{AfterFile} mit dem winzigen Unterschied, dass die -\PName{Klasse} beziehungsweise das \PName{Paket} mit seinem Namen und nicht -mit seinem Dateinamen angegeben wird. Die Endungen »\File{.cls}« und -»\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also. +weitgehend wie \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} mit dem winzigen +Unterschied, dass die \PName{Klasse} beziehungsweise das \PName{Paket} mit +seinem Namen und nicht mit seinem Dateinamen angegeben wird. Die Endungen +»\File{.cls}« und »\File{.sty}« entfallen hier also. Bei\important[i]{\Macro{AfterClass*}\\\Macro{AfterPackage*}} den Sternvarianten gibt es eine zusätzliche Funktionalität. Wurde oder wird die @@ -286,12 +271,13 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.% \end{lstcode}% }} Nach dem Laden von \Package{caption2} und nur falls das Paket geladen wird, wird hier die \KOMAScript{} eigene Anweisung - \Macro{setcapindent} umdefiniert. Der Inhalt der Umdefinierung ist - für dieses Beispiel unerheblich. Es sei nur erwähnt, dass - \Package{caption2} die Kontrolle über die \Macro{caption}-Anweisung - übernimmt und daher die normale Definition von \Macro{setcapindent} - keinerlei Wirkung mehr hätte. Die Umdefinierung verbessert dann die - Zusammenarbeit mit \Package{caption2}. + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent} umdefiniert. Der Inhalt der Umdefinierung + ist für dieses Beispiel unerheblich. Es sei nur erwähnt, dass + \Package{caption2} die Kontrolle über die + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}-Anweisung übernimmt und daher die normale + Definition von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setcapindent} keinerlei Wirkung mehr + hätte. Die Umdefinierung verbessert dann die Zusammenarbeit mit + \Package{caption2}. Es gibt aber auch Beispiele für den sinnvollen Einsatz der neuen Anweisungen durch normale Anwender. Angenommen, Sie erstellen ein @@ -315,7 +301,7 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.% \endinput \end{lstcode} - Alles weitere kann nun \Macro{AfterFile} überlassen werden: + Alles weitere kann nun \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} überlassen werden: \begin{lstcode}[moretexcs={hypersetup}] \documentclass{article} \usepackage{scrlfile,ngerman} @@ -343,29 +329,18 @@ und für Pakete \Macro{AfterAtEndOfPackage}.% \end{Example} Übrigens\textnote{Tipp!} können Sie das Laden von \Package{scrlfile} und die -obigen Anweisungen \Macro{AfterFile} auch in Ihre private \File{hyperref.cfg} +obigen Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterFile} auch in Ihre private \File{hyperref.cfg} (siehe oben) einfügen. Verwenden Sie dabei jedoch zum Laden des Paketes besser \Macro{RequirePackage} an Stelle von \Macro{usepackage} (siehe \cite{latex:clsguide}). Die neuen Zeilen müssen in obigem Beispiel unmittelbar nach der \Macro{ProvidesFile}-Zeile, also unbedingt vor der Ausführung der Optionen \Option{dvips} oder \Option{pdftex}, eingefügt werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass+}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterClass!}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage+}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterPackage!}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterAtEndOfPackage}% - - -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClosingMainAux}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterReadingMainAux}% +\EndIndexGroup + + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterReadingMainAux}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} Diese Anweisungen unterscheiden sich in einem Detail von den zuvor erklärten @@ -375,7 +350,7 @@ Problem, dass sie Anweisungen in die \File{aux}-Datei schreiben wollen, nachdem die letzte Seite des Dokuments ausgegeben wurde. Dazu wird -- in Unkenntnis der dadurch verursachten Probleme -- häufig Code wie der folgende eingesetzt: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \if@filesw \write\@auxout{% @@ -392,7 +367,7 @@ umgekehrte Problem: wurde die letzte Seite bei \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} noch nicht ausgegeben, so wird \Macro{writethistoaux} zu früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben. Man sieht daher häufig auch Lösungsversuche wie: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \if@filesw \clearpage @@ -404,7 +379,7 @@ daher häufig auch Lösungsversuche wie: \end{lstcode} Diese Lösung hat jedoch den Nachteil, dass damit die Ausgabe der letzten Seite erzwungen wird. Eine Anweisung wie: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \AtEndDocument{% \par\vspace*{\fill}% Hinweis am Ende des Dokuments.\par @@ -416,11 +391,11 @@ ausgegeben. Gleichzeitig würde \Macro{writethistoaux} wieder eine Seite zu früh in die \File{aux}-Datei geschrieben. Die beste Lösung des Problems wäre nun, wenn man unmittelbar in die -\File{aux}-Datei schreiben könnte, nachdem das finale \Macro{clearpage} -innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} ausgeführt, aber bevor die -\File{aux}-Datei geschlossen wird. Dies ist das Ziel von -\Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\File{aux}-Datei schreiben könnte, nachdem das finale +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} +ausgeführt, aber bevor die \File{aux}-Datei geschlossen wird. Dies ist das +Ziel von \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}: +\begin{lstcode} \BeforeClosingMainAux{% \if@filesw \immediate\write\@auxout{% @@ -429,11 +404,11 @@ innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} ausgeführt, aber bevor die \fi } \end{lstcode} -Das ist auch dann erfolgreich, wenn das finale \Macro{clearpage} innerhalb -von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich zu keiner Ausgabe einer Seite -mehr führt oder wenn -- sei es korrekt verwendet oder in Unkenntnis der oben -erläuterten Probleme -- \Macro{clearpage} innerhalb einer -\Macro{AtEndDocument}-Anweisung zum Einsatz kam. +Das ist auch dann erfolgreich, wenn das finale \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} +innerhalb von \Macro{end}\PParameter{document} tatsächlich zu keiner Ausgabe +einer Seite mehr führt oder wenn -- sei es korrekt verwendet oder in +Unkenntnis der oben erläuterten Probleme -- \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} +innerhalb einer \Macro{AtEndDocument}-Anweisung zum Einsatz kam. Es gibt jedoch für \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux} eine Einschränkung: Im Argument \Macro{Anweisungen} sollte keine Satzanweisung verwendet @@ -452,8 +427,7 @@ Implementierung zusätzlicher \emph{Rerun}-Aufforderungen. Satzanweisungen sind an dieser Stelle noch kritischer zu betrachten als bei \Macro{BeforeClosingMainAux}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterReadingMainAux}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeClosingMainAux}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Dateien beim Einlesen ersetzen} @@ -464,7 +438,6 @@ ist, vor oder nach dem Einlesen einer bestimmten Datei, eines bestimmten Pakets oder einer Klasse Aktionen auszuführen. Es ist mit \Package{scrlfile} aber auch möglich, eine ganz andere Datei als die angeforderte einzulesen. -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceInput}% \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ReplaceInput}\Parameter{Dateiname}\Parameter{Ersatzdatei} \end{Declaration} @@ -505,18 +478,16 @@ oder eine Klasse durch eine andere zu ersetzen. Dabei würde \LaTeX{} aber erkennen, dass die angeforderten Dateinamen nicht zum Namen des Pakets oder der Klasse passen. Eine Lösung dieses Problems finden Sie nachfolgend. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceInput}% +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceClass}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ReplacePackage}% \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ReplaceClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Ersatzklasse}\\ + \Macro{ReplaceClass}\Parameter{Klasse}\Parameter{Ersatzklasse} \Macro{ReplacePackage}\Parameter{Paket}\Parameter{Ersatzpaket} \end{Declaration} Eine\ChangedAt{v2.96}{\Package{scrlfile}}\textnote{Achtung!} Klasse oder ein Paket sollte niemals mit Hilfe der oben erklärten Anweisung -\Macro{ReplaceInput} ersetzt werden. In diesem Fall würde \LaTeX{} eine +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput} ersetzt werden. In diesem Fall würde \LaTeX{} eine Warnung über nicht übereinstimmende Klassen- oder Paketnamen melden. \begin{Example} Sie ersetzen das Paket \Package{fancyhdr} leichtfertig durch das nicht @@ -533,7 +504,7 @@ Warnung über nicht übereinstimmende Klassen- oder Paketnamen melden. gar nicht \Package{scrpage2}, sondern tatsächlich \Package{fancyhdr} angefordert, das jedoch durch \Package{scrpage2} ersetzt wurde. \end{Example} -Eine Lösung dieses Problems besteht nun darin, statt \Macro{ReplaceInput} eine +Eine Lösung dieses Problems besteht nun darin, statt \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplaceInput} eine der Anweisungen \Macro{ReplaceClass} oder \Macro{ReplacePackage} zu verwenden. Es ist zu beachten, dass wie bei \Macro{documentclass} und \Macro{usepackage} der Name der Klasse oder des Pakets und nicht deren @@ -552,7 +523,8 @@ würden. Wird ein Paket oder eine Klasse durch ein Paket oder eine Klasse ersetzt, das eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde dies zu den üblichen Warnungen und Fehlern führen. Es ist jedoch möglich, solche in der \PName{Ersatzklasse} oder dem \PName{Ersatzpaket} fehlenden Optionen per -\Macro{BeforeClass} oder \Macro{BeforePackage} neu zu definieren. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeClass} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforePackage} neu zu definieren. \begin{Example} Angenommen, das Paket \Package{oldfoo} soll beim Laden durch das @@ -608,17 +580,14 @@ ersetzt, das eine geforderte Option nicht unterstützt, würde dies zu den Damit Klassen ersetzt werden können, ist es erforderlich \Package{scrlfile} mit Hilfe von \Macro{RequirePackage} vor der Klasse zu laden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplacePackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ReplaceClass}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{UnReplaceInput}\Parameter{Dateinamen}\\ - \Macro{UnReplacePackage}\Parameter{Paket}\\ - \Macro{UnReplaceClass}\Parameter{Klasse}% + \Macro{UnReplaceInput}\Parameter{Dateinamen} + \Macro{UnReplacePackage}\Parameter{Paket} + \Macro{UnReplaceClass}\Parameter{Klasse} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceInput}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplacePackage}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceClass}% Eine\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} Ersetzung kann auch wieder aufgehoben werden. Dabei sollten Ersetzungen von Dateien immer mit \Macro{UnReplaceInput}, Ersetzungen von Paketen mit \Macro{UnReplacePackage} @@ -628,9 +597,7 @@ der Aufhebung der Ersetzung führen Ladebefehle für den entsprechenden \PName{Klasse} dann wieder dazu, dass die Datei, das Paket oder die Klasse selbst an Stelle der Ersatzdatei, des Ersatzpakets oder der Ersatzklasse geladen wird.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceClass}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplacePackage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnReplaceInput}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Dateien gar nicht erst einlesen} @@ -644,13 +611,11 @@ zu einem Problem kommt, muss man irgendwie das Laden des problematischen Paketes verhindern. Auch hier bietet \Package{scrlfile} eine einfache Lösung. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\OParameter{Stattdessencode}% - \Parameter{Paketliste}\\ - \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading*}\OParameter{Stattdessencode}% - \Parameter{Paketliste} + \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\OParameter{Stattdessencode} + \Parameter{Paketliste} + \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading*}\OParameter{Stattdessencode} + \Parameter{Paketliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading*}% Wird diese Anweisung\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}} vor dem Laden eines Paket mit \Macro{usepackage}\IndexCmd{usepackage}, \Macro{RequirePackage}\IndexCmd{RequirePackage} oder @@ -693,19 +658,17 @@ Das optionale Argument\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} kann verwendet werden, wenn an Stelle des Ladens des Pakets etwas anderes getan werden soll. Innerhalb des \PName{Stattdessencode}s dürfen jedoch keine anderen Pakete und keine Dateien geladen werden. Zum Laden eines anderen Pakets siehe -\Macro{ReplacePackage} in \autoref{sec:scrlfile.replace} auf -\autopageref{desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage}. Beachten Sie bitte auch, dass -der \PName{Stattdessencode} mehrfach ausgeführt wird, falls Sie versuchen, -das Paket mehrfach zu laden!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{PreventPackageFromLoading} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage} in \autoref{sec:scrlfile.replace} auf +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ReplacePackage}. Beachten Sie bitte auch, dass der +\PName{Stattdessencode} mehrfach ausgeführt wird, falls Sie versuchen, das +Paket mehrfach zu laden!% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{\Macro{Anweisung}}\\ + \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{\textMacro{Anweisung}} \Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}% \Macro{Anweisung} wird mit \Macro{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Package{scrlfile}} als die aktuelle Liste der Pakete definiert, für die das Laden verhindert @@ -717,7 +680,8 @@ können wieder alle Pakete geladen werden. Angenommen, Sie sind innerhalb eines Pakets unbedingt auf das Laden eines anderen Pakets angewiesen und wollen nicht, dass der Anwender das Laden dieses Pakets mit - \Macro{PreventPackageFromLoading}\IndexCmd{PreventPackageFromLoading} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading}% + \IndexCmd{PreventPackageFromLoading} verhindern kann. Also setzen Sie die Paketliste für die Ausnahmen zuvor zurück: \begin{lstcode} @@ -752,15 +716,13 @@ Beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie bitte auch, dass \Macro{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading} den \PName{Stattdessencode} für ein Paket nicht löscht, sondern nur vorübergehend dessen Ausführung nicht mehr erfolgt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ResetPreventPackageFromLoading}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{StorePreventPackageFromLoading}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{Paketliste}\\ + \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}\Parameter{Paketliste} \Macro{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}\Parameter{Paketliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}% Statt\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{scrlfile}} die Liste der Pakete, für die das Laden verhindert werden soll, komplett zurück zu setzen, kann man auch einzelne oder mehrere Pakete gezielt von dieser Liste entfernen. Die @@ -794,10 +756,9 @@ einer gespeicherten Liste wiederhergestellt wird, wird dann der \PName{Stattdessencode} existiert aber nicht mehr und wird nicht mehr ausgeführt.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{UnPreventPackageFromLoading}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrlfile} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex index 776419c76e0..6d503beea33 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlttr2-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlttr2-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Diese Datei ist Teil der KOMA-Script-Sammlung für LaTeX2e. % @@ -48,13 +48,15 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2-experts.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-07-15 18:39:57 +0200 (Wed, 15 Jul 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2 for experts)] \chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zur Briefklasse \Class{scrlttr2} und zum Briefpaket \Package{scrletter}} \labelbase{scrlttr2-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2} In diesem Kapitel finden Sie zusätzliche Informationen zu der \KOMAScript-Klasse \Class{scrlttr2}. % \iffree{Einige Teile des Kapitels sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch @@ -80,10 +82,11 @@ Darüber hinaus gibt es seit kann. Es stellt nahezu die komplette Funktionalität von \Class{scrlttr2} für die drei genannten Klassen zur Verfügung. Einige wenige Unterschiede gibt es jedoch, die ebenfalls in diesem Kapitel genannt werden.% -\EndIndex{Package}{scrletter}% + \section{Pseudolängen für fortgeschrittene Anwender} \seclabel{pseudoLengths} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen} \TeX{} arbeitet mit einem festen Satz an Registern. Es gibt Register für @@ -138,90 +141,90 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet. \pentry{backaddrheight}{% Höhe der Rücksendeadresse am oberen Rand des Anschriftfeldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight})% }% \pentry{bfoldmarklength}{% Länge der unteren horizontalen Faltmarke (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{bfoldmarkvpos}{% Abstand der unteren horizontalen Faltmarke von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{firstfoothpos}{% Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der linken Kante des Papiers; Werte größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden gesondert behandelt (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos})%| + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos})%| }% \pentry{firstfootvpos}{% Abstand des Brief"|fußes von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos})%| + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos})%| }% \pentry{firstfootwidth}{% Breite des Brief"|fußes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstFoot}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth})%| + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth})%| }% \pentry{firstheadhpos}{% Abstand des Briefkopfes von der linken Kante des Papiers; Werte größer der Breite oder kleiner der negativen Breite des Papiers werden gesondert behandelt (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos})% }\iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchkorrektur!!! \pentry{firstheadvpos}{% Abstand des Briefkopfes von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos})% }% \pentry{firstheadwidth}{% Breite des Briefkopfes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth})% }% \pentry{foldmarkhpos}{% Abstand der horizontalen Faltmarken von der linken Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos})% }% \pentry{foldmarkvpos}{% Abstand der vertikalen Faltmarken von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{fromrulethickness}{% Dicke einer optionalen \iffalse horizontalen \fi% Umbruchkorrektur Linie im Briefkopf (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness})% }% \pentry{fromrulewidth}{% Länge einer optionalen \iffalse horizontalen \fi% Umbruchkorrektur Linie im Briefkopf (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.firstHead}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth})% }% \pentry{lfoldmarkhpos}{% Abstand der vertikalen Faltmarke von der linken Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos})% }% \pentry{lfoldmarklength}{% Länge der vertikalen Faltmarke (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{locheight}{% Höhe der Absenderergänzung, falls der Wert nicht 0 ist; bei 0 wird stattdessen \PLength{toaddrheight} verwendet (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight})% }% \pentry{lochpos}{% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der rechten Papierkante, falls der Wert @@ -229,148 +232,148 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet. Papierkante, falls der Wert negativ ist; bei 0 wird stattdessen der negative Wert von \PLength{toaddrhpos} verwendet (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos})% }% \pentry{locvpos}{% Abstand der Absenderergänzung von der oberen Papierkante, falls der Wert nicht 0 ist; bei 0 wird stattdessen \PLength{toaddrvpos} verwendet (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos})% }% \pentry{locwidth}{% Breite des Feldes für die Absenderergänzung, wobei bei einem Wert von 0 die Breite automatisch aufgrund der in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield} beschriebenen Option - \Option{locfield} berechnet wird + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} beschriebenen Option + \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} berechnet wird (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth})% }\iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchkorrektur!!!% \pentry{mfoldmarklength}{% Länge der mittleren horizontalen Faltmarke (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{mfoldmarkvpos}{% Abstand der mittleren horizontalen Faltmarke von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{pfoldmarklength}{% Länge der Lochermarke (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{PPdatamatrixvskip}{% vertikaler Abstand zwischen Port-Payé-Kopf und Data-Matrix bei - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip})% }% \pentry{PPheadheight}{% Höhe für den Port-Payé-Kopf (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight})% }% \pentry{PPheadwidth}{% - Breite des linken Port-Payé-Feldes bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} + Breite des linken Port-Payé-Feldes bei \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth})% }% \pentry{refaftervskip}{% vertikaler Abstand nach der Geschäftszeile (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip})% }% \pentry{refhpos}{% Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der linken Papierkante, wobei bei einem Wert von 0 automatisch relativ zur Papierbreite zentriert wird (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos})% }% \pentry{refvpos}{% Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos})% }% \pentry{refwidth}{% Breite der Geschäftszeile (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.refLine}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth})% }% \pentry{sigbeforevskip}{% vertikaler Abstand zwischen Gruß und Signatur (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip})% }% \pentry{sigindent}{% Einzug der Signatur gegenüber dem Textkörper (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent})% }% \pentry{specialmailindent}{% linker Einzug der Versandart innerhalb des Anschriftfeldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent})% }% \pentry{specialmailrightindent}{% rechter Einzug der Versandart innerhalb des Anschriftfeldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent})% }% \pentry{subjectaftervskip}{% vertikaler Abstand nach dem Betreff (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% }% \pentry{subjectbeforevskip}{% zusätzlicher vertikaler Abstand vor dem Betreff (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip})% }% \pentry{subjectvpos}{% Abstand des Betreffs von der oberen Kante des Papiers, wobei ein Wert von - 0 stattdessen den Betreff gemäß Option \Option{subject} setzt + 0 stattdessen den Betreff gemäß Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject} setzt (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.subject}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip})% }% \pentry{tfoldmarklength}{% Länge der oberen horizontalen Faltmarke (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength})% }% \pentry{tfoldmarkvpos}{% Abstand der oberen horizontalen Faltmarke von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrheight}{% Höhe des Anschriftfeldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight})% }% \pentry{toaddrhpos}{% Abstand des Anschriftfeldes von der linken Papierkante, falls der Wert positiv ist, oder negativer Abstand des Anschriftfeldes von der rechten Papierkante, falls der Wert negativ ist (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrindent}{% linker und rechter Einzug der Anschrift innerhalb des Anschrift\-feldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent})% }% \iffree{}{\enlargethispage*{\baselineskip}}% Umbruchoptimierung!!! \pentry{toaddrvpos}{% Abstand des Anschriftfeldes von der oberen Kante des Papiers (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos})% }% \pentry{toaddrwidth}{% Breite des Anschriftfeldes (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth})% + \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth})% }% \end{desclist} @@ -385,7 +388,6 @@ auf einige weniger häufig benötigte Pseudolängen jedoch auch verzichtet. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{@newplength}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@newplength}% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung wird eine neue Pseudolänge definiert. Die neue Pseudolänge ist dann über ihren \PName{Namen} eindeutig identifiziert. Jeder Name kann also nur einmal vergeben werden. @@ -417,21 +419,21 @@ werden. Anweisungen jedoch niemals verwendet werden!}% \fi % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@newplength}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{@setplength}% - \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert}\\ + \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert} \Macro{@addtoplength}% \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\Parameter{Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@setplength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{@addtoplength}% -Mit Hilfe von \Macro{@setplength} kann einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das -Vielfache eines \PName{Wertes} zugewiesen werden. Der \PName{Faktor} wird -dabei als optionales Argument übergeben (siehe auch -\Macro{setlengthtoplength}, \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}). +Mit Hilfe von \Macro{@setplength} kann einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache +eines \PName{Wertes} zugewiesen werden. Der \PName{Faktor} wird dabei als +optionales Argument übergeben (siehe auch +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}, +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength}). Mit \Macro{@addtoplength} kann man zu einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache von einem \PName{Wert} addieren. Auch dabei wird der \PName{Faktor} als @@ -441,7 +443,7 @@ Um einer \PName{Pseudolänge} das Vielfache einer anderen Pseudolänge zuzuweisen oder zu ihr zu addieren, verwendet man innerhalb von \PName{Wert} die Anweisung \Macro{useplength} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}). Um von einer \PName{Pseudolänge} +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.useplength}). Um von einer \PName{Pseudolänge} den Wert einer anderen \PName{Pseudolänge} zu subtrahieren, verwendet man gleichzeitig als \PName{Faktor} ein Minuszeichen oder \PValue{-1} oder einen anderen negativen Faktor. @@ -450,7 +452,7 @@ Da der Anwender selbst normalerweise keine Pseudolängen ändern muss, handelt es sich bei diesen Befehlen um keine Benutzeranweisungen. % \iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!! Zur Verwendung innerhalb eines Dokuments gilt dasselbe wie für - \Macro{@newplength} zuvor dargelegt. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.@newplength} zuvor dargelegt. \else Sie können nicht innerhalb des Dokuments, wohl aber beispielsweise innerhalb einer \File{lco}-Datei verwendet werden. % @@ -463,12 +465,12 @@ es sich bei diesen Befehlen um keine Benutzeranweisungen. % sollten diese beiden Anweisungen jedoch niemals verwendet werden!% }% \fi -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@setplength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{@addtoplength}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Faltmarken} \seclabel{foldmarks} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Faltmarke}% Falt- oder Falzmarken sind kleine horizontale Striche am linken und kleine @@ -479,13 +481,10 @@ unterstützt, die nicht in der Vertikalen verschoben werden kann. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos}\\ - \PLength{mfoldmarkvpos}\\ + \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos} + \PLength{mfoldmarkvpos} \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarkvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarkvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarkvpos}% Die Briefklasse \Class{scrlttr2} kennt insgesamt drei in der vertikalen Platzierung konfigurierbare Faltmarken. Die Position der oberen Faltmarke vom oberen Papierrand wird von der Pseudolänge \PLength{tfoldmarkvpos} @@ -521,25 +520,19 @@ Sprachkonvention darstellen. Tatsächlich ist nicht festgelegt, dass als \PLength{bfoldmarkvpos} sein muss. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} eine der Pseudolängen hingegen Null, so wird die entsprechende Faltmarke auch dann nicht gesetzt, wenn sie per Option -\Option{foldmarks}\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}\important{\Option{foldmarks}} +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}) explizit aktiviert wurde.% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}) explizit aktiviert wurde.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarkvpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarkvpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarkvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{tfoldmarklength}\\ - \PLength{mfoldmarklength}\\ - \PLength{bfoldmarklength}\\ + \PLength{tfoldmarklength} + \PLength{mfoldmarklength} + \PLength{bfoldmarklength} \PLength{pfoldmarklength} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarklength}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{pfoldmarklength}% Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} vier Pseudolängen bestimmen die Länge der vier horizontalen Marken. Dabei gilt eine Besonderheit. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} die Länge nämlich mit Null angegeben, so @@ -548,87 +541,80 @@ werden bei den Pseudolängen \PLength{tfoldmarklength}, vertikalen Position konfigurierbaren Faltmarken stattdessen 2\Unit{mm} als Länge verwendet. Die Länge der Lochermarke, \PLength{pfoldmarklength}, wird hingegen auf 4\Unit{mm} gesetzt.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{tfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{mfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{bfoldmarklength}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{pfoldmarklength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkhpos}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand aller horizontalen Faltmarken vom linken Papier\-rand an. Normalerweise sind das 3{,}5\Unit{mm}. Sie\textnote{Tipp!} können den Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie einen Drucker verwenden, der einen breiteren unbedruckbaren linken Rand hat. Ob die Faltmarken überhaupt gesetzt werden, hängt außerdem von der Option -\Option{foldmarks}\important{\Option{foldmarks}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}% \IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} ab (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}).% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}).% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarkhpos}% Neben\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} den horizontalen Faltmarken gibt es auch noch eine vertikale Faltmarke. Deren Abstand von der linken Papierkante wird über die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarkhpos} bestimmt. Diese Faltmarke wird beispielsweise bei Briefen für einige japanische Chou- oder You-Umschläge benötigt, wenn man diese für A4-Papier verwenden will. Auch für Umschläge im C6-Format kann sie nützlich sein.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarkhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{lfoldmarklength} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarklength}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{lfoldmarklength} bestimmt die\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Länge der vertikalen Faltmarke. Auch\textnote{Achtung!} hier gibt es die Besonderheit, dass bei einer angegebenen Länge von Null stattdessen 4\Unit{mm} verwendet werden.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lfoldmarklength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkvpos}% Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand aller vertikalen Faltmarken vom oberen Papier\-rand an. Normalerweise sind das 3{,}5\Unit{mm}. Sie\textnote{Tipp!} können den Wert aber auch in Ihrer eigenen \File{lco}-Datei ändern, falls Sie einen Drucker verwenden, der einen breiteren unbedruckbaren oberen Rand hat. Ob die Faltmarken überhaupt gesetzt werden, hängt außerdem von der Option -\Option{foldmarks}\important{\Option{foldmarks}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}}% \IndexOption{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}} ab (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). Derzeit gibt es nur eine +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks}). Derzeit gibt es nur eine einzige vertikale Faltmarke, die als linke vertikale Faltmarke bezeichnet wird.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{foldmarkthickness} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{foldmarkthickness}% Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Pseudolänge gibt die Dicke aller Faltmarken an. Voreingestellt sind 0,2\Unit{pt}, also eine sehr dünne Haarlinie. Insbesondere\textnote{Tipp!}, wenn die Farbe der Faltmarken geändert wird, kann dies zu wenig sein!% -\EndIndex{PLength}{foldmarkthickness}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Faltmarke}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Briefkopf} \seclabel{firstHead} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Briefkopf}% Unter dem Briefkopf verstehen wir alle Angaben, die den Absender betreffen und @@ -636,7 +622,7 @@ die über der Anschrift stehen. Normalerweise würde man erwarten, dass diese über den Seitenstil gesetzt werden. Bei der alten Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr} war dies auch so. Bei\textnote{Achtung!} \Class{scrlttr2} wird der Briefkopf jedoch unabhängig vom Seitenstil von der Anweisung -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ausgegeben. +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ausgegeben. % Fuellmaterial \iftrue% Dabei wird der Briefkopf absolut positioniert, ist also vom @@ -650,18 +636,16 @@ gesetzt.% \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadvpos}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadvpos} gibt den Abstand des Briefkopfes von der oberen Papierkante an. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} unterschiedlich gesetzt. Ein typischer Wert ist 8\Unit{mm}.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadhpos}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadhpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gibt bei einem positiven Wert den Abstand des Briefkopfes von der linken Papierkante an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert sogar größer oder gleich der @@ -675,13 +659,12 @@ so wird der Briefkopf bündig zum linken Rand des Satzspiegels platziert. Voreingestellt\textnote{Achtung!} ist typischerweise ein Wert von \Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadhpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstheadwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstheadwidth}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstheadwidth} gibt die Breite des Briefkopfes an. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} @@ -689,34 +672,33 @@ unterschiedlich gesetzt. Während er normalerweise von der Papierbreite und dem horizontalen Abstand der Empfängeradresse vom linken Papierrand abhängt, entspricht er bei \Option{KOMAold} der Breite des Satzspiegels und ist bei \Option{NF} fest auf 170\Unit{mm} eingestellt.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstheadwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{fromrulethickness}\\ + \PLength{fromrulethickness} \PLength{fromrulewidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{fromrulethickness}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{fromrulewidth}% -Wie bereits bei Option \Option{fromrule}\IndexOption{fromrule} in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule} +Wie bereits bei Option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule}\IndexOption{fromrule} in +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.fromrule} erwähnt wurde, kann in den vordefinierten Briefköpfen eine Linie im oder unter dem Absender gesetzt werden. Hat\textnote{Achtung!} die Pseudolänge \PLength{fromrulewidth} die Länge 0, so wird dabei die Länge dieser Linie automatisch bestimmt. Dies ist die Voreinstellung bei den vordefinierten -\File{lco}-Dateien. Der Wert kann mit \Macro{@setplength} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}) in eigenen +\File{lco}-Dateien. Der Wert kann mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.@setplength} +(siehe \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}) in eigenen \File{lco}-Dateien aber auch abweichend gesetzt werden. Die voreingestellte Dicke\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \PLength{fromrulethickness}, der Linie beträgt 0,4\Unit{pt}.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{fromrulethickness}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{fromrulewidth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Briefkopf}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Anschrift} \seclabel{addressee}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}% Unter der Anschrift versteht man normalerweise nur den Namen und die Adresse @@ -728,11 +710,9 @@ Anschrift folgt unmittelbar auf den Briefkopf. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{toaddrvpos}\\ + \PLength{toaddrvpos} \PLength{toaddrhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrvpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrhpos}% Diese Pseudolängen geben den Abstand des Anschriftfensters eines Fensterbriefumschlags vom oberen und vom linken Rand des Papiers an. Sie werden in den vordefinierten @@ -745,27 +725,24 @@ oder \Option{NF}. Am kleinsten ist der Wert \PLength{toaddrvpos} bei \Option{DINmtext}. Hier kann es schnell passieren, dass der Briefkopf in das Anschriftfenster ragt. Ob das Anschriftfenster überhaupt gesetzt wird, hängt von der Option \Option{addrfield} ab (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}).% -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrhpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrvpos}% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}).% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrheight}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Höhe des Anschriftfeldes einschließlich der Versandart an. Ist keine Versandart angegeben, so wird die Anschrift vertikal innerhalb dieses Feldes zentriert. Ist eine Versandart angegeben, so wird die Anschrift unterhalb der Versandart vertikal im Rest des Anschriftfeldes zentriert.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrheight} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrwidth}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Anschriftfensters an. Diese wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} entsprechend der unterschiedlichen Normen unterschiedlich eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 70\Unit{mm} und @@ -791,13 +768,12 @@ unterschiedlich eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 70\Unit{mm} und Sie dann \Option{SNmmarg} an Stelle von \Option{SN}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{toaddrindent} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{toaddrindent}% Manchmal will man, dass die Anschrift nicht am linken Rand des Anschriftfensters beginnt und bis zum rechten Rand des Fensters reicht, sondern ein wenig eingezogen wird. Der Wert dieses Einzugs kann über die @@ -806,30 +782,29 @@ dieser Wert jedoch 0\Unit{pt}. Bei\textnote{Achtung!} jeder der Einstellungen\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} -\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\\ - \OptionValue{addrfield}{image}\\ +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{image}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\ \quad\PValue{backgroundimage} \end{tabular}}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}}, -\OptionValue{addrfield}{image}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{image}} und -\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{image}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{image}} und +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% \IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{backgroundimage}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) wird beim Wert 0\Unit{pt} +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) wird beim Wert 0\Unit{pt} stattdessen ein Einzug von 8\Unit{mm} verwendet. Soll hier tatsächlich kein Einzug verwendet werden, so kann mit 1\Unit{sp} ein vernachlässigbar kleiner Einzug gesetzt werden. Desweiteren wird \PLength{toaddrindent} bei den genannten Einstellungen für \Option{addrfield} auch für den Abstand zum rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters verwendet.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{toaddrindent}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{backaddrheight} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{backaddrheight}% Bei Fensterbriefumschlägen wird der Absender häufig in einer kleinen Schrift einzeilig über der Empfängeradresse ausgegeben. Diese Absenderangabe nennt man Rücksendeadresse\textnote{Rücksendeadresse}% @@ -844,22 +819,19 @@ Verfügung steht, ist in der Pseudolänge \PLength{backaddrheight} abgelegt. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien typischerweise auf 5\Unit{mm} eingestellt. Ob die Rücksendeadresse überhaupt gesetzt wird, bestimmt der Anwender mit den Optionen \Option{addrfield} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) und \Option{backaddress} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress}).% -\EndIndex{PLength}{backaddrheight}% +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.backaddress}).% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{specialmailindent}\\ + \PLength{specialmailindent} \PLength{specialmailrightindent} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{specialmailindent}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{specialmailrightindent}% Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann noch eine optionale Versandart\Index{Versandart} gesetzt werden. Diese wird genau dann gesetzt, -wenn die Variable \Variable{specialmail} einen Inhalt hat. Die Ausrichtung +wenn die Variable \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.specialmail} einen Inhalt hat. Die Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen \PLength{specialmailindent} und \PLength{specialmailrightindent} festgelegt. Diese geben den linken und rechten Einzug der Zeile an. In den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist @@ -867,29 +839,27 @@ rechten Einzug der Zeile an. In den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist während \PLength{specialmailrightindent} auf 1\Unit{em} eingestellt ist. Damit wird die Versandart 1\Unit{em} vom rechten Rand des Anschriftfensters gesetzt.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{specialmailindent}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{specialmailrightindent}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{PPheadheight}\\ + \PLength{PPheadheight} \PLength{PPheadwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPheadheight}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPheadwidth}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} gibt bei den beiden Einstellungen\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} -\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\\ +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\important[i]{% + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\ \quad\PValue{backgroundimage} \end{tabular}}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} und -\OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{backgroundimage}% \IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{backgroundimage}} die Höhe an, die am Anfang des Adressfeldes für den Port-Payé-Kopf reserviert wird. Die Pseudolänge -\PLength{PPheadwidth} wird nur bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} (siehe +\PLength{PPheadwidth} wird nur bei \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) verwendet und gibt die Breite +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) verwendet und gibt die Breite des linken Feldes des Port-Payé-Kopf mit dem P.\,P.-Logo, der Postleitzahl und dem Ort an. Die Breite des rechten Feldes mit dem Code für den Absender und der Priorität ist durch die Restbreite bestimmt. @@ -899,28 +869,29 @@ Pseudolänge \PLength{PPheadheight} ändert \Class{scrlttr2} selbständig in 20,74\Unit{pt}. Den normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} für \PLength{PPheadwidth} ändert \Class{scrlttr2} selbständig in 42\Unit{mm}.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPheadwidth}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPheadheight}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{PPdatamatrixvskip}% Durch\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} diese Pseudolänge wird der vertikale Abstand zwischen dem Port-Payé-Kopf und der Data-Matrix bei -\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}}\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} -(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) -festgelegt. Den\textnote{Achtung!} normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von -0\Unit{mm} ändert \Class{scrlttr2} selbständig in 9\Unit{mm}. Die Data-Matrix -wird rechtsbündig zum Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{PPdatamatrixvskip}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{addrfield}{PP}}% +\IndexOption{addrfield~=\PValue{PP}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.addrfield}) festgelegt. Den\textnote{Achtung!} +normalerweise voreingestellten Wert von 0\Unit{mm} ändert \Class{scrlttr2} +selbständig in 9\Unit{mm}. Die Data-Matrix wird rechtsbündig zum +Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt.% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Anschrift}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Absenderergänzungen} \seclabel{locationField} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}% Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen reicht der Platz im Briefkopf und im @@ -931,15 +902,11 @@ genannt. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{locheight}\\ - \PLength{lochpos}\\ - \PLength{locvpos}\\ + \PLength{locheight} + \PLength{lochpos} + \PLength{locvpos} \PLength{locwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locwidth}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locheight}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{lochpos}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{locvpos}% Die Pseudolängen \PLength{locwidth} und \PLength{locheight}\ChangedAt{v2.97d}{\Class{scrlttr2}} geben die Breite und Höhe der Absenderergänzung an. Die Pseudolängen \PLength{lochpos} und @@ -947,28 +914,26 @@ Höhe der Absenderergänzung an. Die Pseudolängen \PLength{lochpos} und Papierkante an. Diese Werte werden in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien typischerweise auf 0\Unit{pt} gesetzt. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} Wert nimmt eine Sonderstellung ein. Er bedeutet, dass die Werte erst bei -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} an Hand der Breite des Papiers, der Breite -des Anschriftfensters und des Abstandes des Anschriftfensters von der linken -und oberen Papierkante gesetzt werden. Dabei findet auch die Option -\Option{locfield} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield}) +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} an Hand der Breite des +Papiers, der Breite des Anschriftfensters und des Abstandes des +Anschriftfensters von der linken und oberen Papierkante gesetzt werden. Dabei +findet auch die Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield} (siehe +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.locfield}) Berücksichtigung. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} auch bei \PLength{toaddrhpos} nehmen negative Werte für \PLength{lochpos} eine Sonderstellung ein. Es wird dann statt des Abstandes vom rechten Papierrand der Betrag von \PLength{lochpos} als Abstand vom linken Papierrand verwendet. Die Bedeutung ist also genau umgekehrt zu der bei \PLength{toaddrhpos} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos}).% -\EndIndex{PLength}{locwidth}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{locheight}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{lochpos}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{locvpos}% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos}).% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Geschäftszeile} \seclabel{refLine}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}% Die Geschäftszeile kann auch länger als eine Zeile sein und wird nur gesetzt, @@ -977,82 +942,79 @@ werden nur die Felder gesetzt, die nicht leer sind. Um\textnote{Tipp!} ein scheinbar leeres Feld zu setzen, muss man der entsprechenden Variablen einen scheinbar leeren Inhalt, beispielsweise ein festes Leerzeichen oder \Macro{null}, geben. Wird auf die Geschäftszeile verzichtet, so werden an -ihrer Stelle Bezeichnung und Inhalt der Variablen \Variable{date} +ihrer Stelle Bezeichnung und Inhalt der Variablen \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.date} ausgegeben. Informationen, wie Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt oder entfernt werden, sind in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields} zu finden. +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields} zu finden. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{refvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refvpos}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der Oberkante des Papiers an. Ihr Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} unterschiedlich eingestellt. Typische Werte liegen zwischen 80{,}5\Unit{mm} und 98{,}5\Unit{mm}.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{refvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{refwidth}\\ + \PLength{refwidth} \PLength{refhpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refwidth}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refhpos}% Die Pseudolänge \PLength{refwidth} gibt die Breite an, die für die Geschäftszeile zur Verfügung steht. Ihr Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien typischerweise auf 0\Unit{pt} gesetzt. Dieser\textnote{Achtung!} Wert hat eine besondere Bedeutung. Es wird damit keineswegs festgelegt, dass für die Geschäftszeile keine Breite zur Verfügung steht. Vielmehr bedeutet der Wert, dass die verfügbare Breite erst -innerhalb von \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ermittelt wird. Die dort +innerhalb von \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} ermittelt wird. Die dort ermittelte Breite richtet sich dann nach der Einstellung der Option -\Option{refline}\important{\Option{refline}}% +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PName{Einstellung}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}). Gleichzeitig wird dann auch +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}). Gleichzeitig wird dann auch \PLength{refhpos} entsprechend der Option gesetzt. Bei -\OptionValue{refline}{wide}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{wide}} wird die +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{wide}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{wide}} wird die Geschäftszeile zentriert, wohingegen sie bei -\OptionValue{refline}{narrow}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{narrow}} am +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{narrow}\IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{narrow}} am Satzspiegel links ausgerichtet wird. Ist \PLength{refwidth} von Null verschieden, wird die Breite der -Geschäftszeile also nicht von der Option \Option{refline} bestimmt, so gibt -\PLength{refhpos} den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der linken Papierkante -an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} dieser Abstand Null, so wird die Geschäftszeile so -ausgerichtet, dass das Verhältnis zwischen ihrem Abstand von der linken -Papierkante zu ihrem Abstand von der rechten Papierkante dem Verhältnis -zwischen dem Abstand des Satzspiegels von der linken Papierkante zu seinem -Abstand von der rechten Papierkante entspricht. Bei auf dem Papier horizontal -zentriertem Satzspiegel wird also auch die Geschäftszeile zentriert. +Geschäftszeile also nicht von der Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline} +bestimmt, so gibt \PLength{refhpos} den Abstand der Geschäftszeile von der +linken Papierkante an. Ist\textnote{Achtung!} dieser Abstand Null, so wird die +Geschäftszeile so ausgerichtet, dass das Verhältnis zwischen ihrem Abstand von +der linken Papierkante zu ihrem Abstand von der rechten Papierkante dem +Verhältnis zwischen dem Abstand des Satzspiegels von der linken Papierkante zu +seinem Abstand von der rechten Papierkante entspricht. Bei auf dem Papier +horizontal zentriertem Satzspiegel wird also auch die Geschäftszeile +zentriert. In der Regel werden diese Sonderfälle für die häufigsten Anwendungen von -geringem Interesse sein. Die\textnote{Tipp!} einfachste Regel lautet -hier: Entweder wird \PLength{refwidth} auf Null belassen und die Breite und -Ausrichtung der Geschäftszeile über die Option \Option{refline} bestimmt, -oder sowohl \PLength{refwidth} als auch \PLength{refhpos} werden vom Anwender -vorgegeben.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{refwidth}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{refhpos}% +geringem Interesse sein. Die\textnote{Tipp!} einfachste Regel lautet hier: +Entweder wird \PLength{refwidth} auf Null belassen und die Breite und +Ausrichtung der Geschäftszeile über die Option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.refline} bestimmt, oder sowohl \PLength{refwidth} als +auch \PLength{refhpos} werden vom Anwender vorgegeben.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{refaftervskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{refaftervskip}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt den vertikalen Abstand an, der nach der Geschäftszeile eingefügt werden soll. Der Wert wird in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} eingestellt. Er wirkt sich unmittelbar auf die Höhe des Textbereiches der ersten Seite aus. Der typische Wert liegt zwischen einer und zwei Zeilen.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{refaftervskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Betreff} \seclabel{subject}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Betreff} Der Betreff eine Briefes wird in unterschiedlichen Ländern unterschiedlich @@ -1063,13 +1025,13 @@ haben. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{subjectvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectvpos}% \ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% Ist\textnote{Achtung!} der Wert dieser Pseudolänge 0\Unit{pt}, so bestimmt die -Option \Option{subject}\important{\Option{subject}}% +Option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}}% \IndexOption{subject~=\PName{Einstellung}} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.subject}) -die Position des Betreffs. Dabei spielen dann auch die nachfolgend erklärten +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.subject}) die +Position des Betreffs. Dabei spielen dann auch die nachfolgend erklärten Pseudolängen \PLength{subjectbeforevskip} und \PLength{subjectaftervskip} ihre Rolle. Bei allen anderen Werten wird der Betreff mit dem entsprechenden Abstand von der oberen Papierkante platziert. Es\textnote{Tipp!} wird @@ -1089,15 +1051,13 @@ steht, damit Überschneidungen mit anderen Elementen unwahrscheinlich sind. Will man, dass zwischen Betreff und Geschäftszeile noch mindestens eine Zeile frei bleibt, hat man so Platz für maximal zwei Zeilen Betreff. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{subjectbeforevskip}\\ + \PLength{subjectbeforevskip} \PLength{subjectaftervskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectbeforevskip}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{subjectaftervskip}% \ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% Wird der Betreff nicht absolut platziert, sondern vor oder nach der Anrede, so kann vor und nach dem Betreff ein zusätzlicher Abstand eingefügt werden. Der @@ -1106,13 +1066,13 @@ automatischen Abstand von einer Zeile nach dem Titel, zusammen. In der Voreinstellung wird daher in der Regel kein weiterer Abstand an dieser Stelle eingefügt. Der Abstand nach dem Betreff beträgt in der Voreinstellung der Klasse hingegen zwei Zeilen.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectaftervskip}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{subjectbeforevskip}% -\EndIndex{}{Betreff} +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Schlussgruß} \seclabel{closing} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß} Der Schlussgruß\Index{Gruss=Gruß} eines Briefes besteht aus mehreren Teilen. @@ -1121,11 +1081,9 @@ eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift. \begin{Declaration} - \PLength{sigindent}\\ + \PLength{sigindent} \PLength{sigbeforevskip} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{sigindent}% -\BeginIndex{PLength}{sigbeforevskip}% Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} werden innerhalb einer Box gesetzt. Die Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und @@ -1139,36 +1097,35 @@ Zwischen Grußfloskel und Erläuterung wird ein vertikaler Abstand eingefügt, der mit der Pseudolänge \PLength{sigbeforevskip} festgelegt ist. In den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist der Wert auf zwei Zeilen eingestellt. In diese Lücke setzen Sie dann Ihre Unterschrift.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{sigindent}% -\EndIndex{PLength}{sigbeforevskip}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Briefbogenfuß} \seclabel{firstFoot}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}% Die erste Seite eines Briefes, der Briefbogen, enthält nicht nur einen eigenen Kopf, den Briefkopf. Diese Seite enthält auch einen eigenen Fuß\Index{Fuss=Fuß}. Auch dieser wird nicht über den Seitenstil, sondern -direkt von \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening}\important{\Macro{opening}} +direkt von \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}} ausgegeben. \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfootvpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfootvpos}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt den Abstand des Fußes der ersten Briefseite von der Oberkante des Papiers an. Es wird außerdem dafür gesorgt, dass der Textbereich nicht in den Fuß hineinragt. Hierzu wird auf der ersten Seite gegebenenfalls die Höhe des Textbereiches mit Hilfe von \Macro{enlargethispage}\IndexCmd{enlargethispage}% \important{\Macro{enlargethispage}} verkleinert. Mit Hilfe der Option -\Option{enlargefirstpage}\important{\Option{enlargefirstpage}} (siehe +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) kann dafür gesorgt +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) kann dafür gesorgt werden, dass die Höhe des Textbereiches umgekehrt gegebenenfalls auch vergrößert wird. Damit kann dann der Abstand zwischen Textbereich und Fuß der ersten Seite auf den Wert der Länge @@ -1177,33 +1134,33 @@ verringert werden. Bei\textnote{Achtung!} Kompatibilitätseinstellungen\ChangedAt{v2.9t}{\Class{scrlttr2}} bis -Version~2.9t (siehe \Option{version} in +Version~2.9t (siehe \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.version} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}) wird außer bei \Option{KOMAold} -und \Option{NF} in allen vordefinierten +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.version}) wird außer bei \Option{KOMAold} und +\Option{NF} in allen vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien\textnote{\File{lco}-Datei}\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) der Fuß abhängig vom Satzspiegel -gesetzt. Damit hat dann auch -\Option{enlargefirstpage}\important{\Option{enlargefirstpage}} keine -Wirkung. Ab Version 2.9u bekommt der Fuß eine Position am unteren Ende des -Papiers. Damit ist dann die Höhe des Satzspiegels des Briefbogens eventuell -auch von der Option \Option{enlargefirstpage} abhängig. +gesetzt. Damit hat dann auch \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}% +\important{\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}} keine Wirkung. Ab +Version 2.9u bekommt der Fuß eine Position am unteren Ende des Papiers. Damit +ist dann die Höhe des Satzspiegels des Briefbogens eventuell auch von der +Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage} abhängig. Sollte der Briefbogenfuß mittels Option -\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}\important{\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}}% +\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}% +\important{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{firstfoot}{false}}% \IndexOption{firstfoot~=\PValue{false}}\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot}) abgeschaltet sein, so wird die +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.firstfoot}) abgeschaltet sein, so wird die Einstellung von \PLength{firstfootvpos} ignoriert und stattdessen \Length{paperheight}\IndexLength{paperheight} angenommen. Es bleibt damit dann ein minimaler unterer Rand von \Length{footskip}\IndexLength{footskip}.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfootvpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfoothpos} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfoothpos}% Die\textnote{Achtung!} Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfoothpos}\ChangedAt{v3.05}{\Class{scrlttr2}} gibt bei einem positiven Wert den Abstand des Briefbogenfußes von der linken Papierkante @@ -1217,27 +1174,27 @@ Rand des Satzspiegels platziert. Voreingestellt ist typischerweise ein Wert von \Length{maxdimen}\IndexLength{maxdimen}, also der größtmögliche Wert für eine Länge. Die Folge ist eine horizontale Zentrierung.% -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfoothpos}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \PLength{firstfootwidth} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{PLength}{firstfootwidth}% Diese Pseudolänge gibt die Breite des Fußes der ersten Briefseite, also des Briefbogens, an. Der Wert stimmt in den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien mit \PLength{firstheadwidth}\important{\PLength{firstheadwidth}}% \IndexPLength{firstheadwidth} überein.% % -\EndIndex{PLength}{firstfootwidth}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Pseudolängen} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Variablen für fortgeschrittene Anwender} \seclabel{variables} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Variablen} Neben der Möglichkeit, vordefinierte Variablen zu verwenden, bietet @@ -1246,17 +1203,12 @@ automatische Verwendung innerhalb der Geschäftszeile zu beeinflussen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{newkomavar}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Name}\\ - \Macro{newkomavar*}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Name}\\ - \Macro{removereffields}\\ - \Macro{defaultreffields}\\ + \Macro{newkomavar}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Name} + \Macro{newkomavar*}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Name} + \Macro{removereffields} + \Macro{defaultreffields} \Macro{addtoreffields}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtoreffields}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{removereffields}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defaultreffields}% Mit \Macro{newkomavar} wird eine neue Variable definiert. Diese Variable wird über \PName{Name} angesprochen. Optional kann eine \PName{Bezeichnung} für die Variable \PName{Name} angegeben werden. Eine \PName{Bezeichnung} wird dabei im @@ -1266,7 +1218,7 @@ einer Variable, die ähnlich ihrem Inhalt ausgegeben werden kann. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields} kann die Variable \PName{Name} der Geschäftszeile\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}) +\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.refline}) hinzugefügt werden. Dabei wird die \PName{Bezeichnung} und der Inhalt der Variablen an das Ende der Geschäftszeile angehängt, falls ihr Inhalt nicht leer ist. Die Sternvariante \Macro{newkomavar*} entspricht der Variante ohne @@ -1302,9 +1254,9 @@ selbst definierten Variablen aus der Geschäftszeile entfernt. Das\textnote{Achtung!} Datum sollte der Geschäftszeile nicht über die Anweisung \Macro{addtoreffields} hinzugefügt werden. Stattdessen stellt man mit Option -\Option{date}\important[i]{\OptionValue{refline}{dateleft}\\ - \OptionValue{refline}{dateright}\\ - \OptionValue{refline}{nodate}}% +\Option{date}\important[i]{\OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateleft}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{dateright}\\ + \OptionValueRef{scrlttr2}{refline}{nodate}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{dateleft}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{dateright}}% \IndexOption{refline~=\PValue{nodate}} ein, ob das Datum links, rechts oder @@ -1312,27 +1264,26 @@ gar nicht in der Geschäftszeile erscheinen soll. Diese Optionen haben darüber hinaus auch einen Einfluss auf die Position des Datums, wenn gar keine Geschäftszeile verwendet wird.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defaultreffields}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar}\EndIndex{Cmd}{newkomavar*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtoreffields}\EndIndex{Cmd}{removereffields}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name}\\ + \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name} \Macro{usekomavar*}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% -Die Anweisungen \Macro{usekomavar} und \Macro{usekomavar*} sind wie alle -Anweisungen, von denen es eine Sternvariante gibt oder die ein optionales -Argument besitzen, nicht voll expandierbar. Bei Verwendung innerhalb von -\Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth}, \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} -oder ähnlichen Anweisungen muss dennoch kein \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} -vorangestellt werden. Selbstverständlich gilt dies bei Verwendung von -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch für \Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} (siehe +Die Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*} sind wie alle Anweisungen, von denen +es eine Sternvariante gibt oder die ein optionales Argument besitzen, nicht +voll expandierbar. Bei Verwendung innerhalb von +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright} oder ähnlichen +Anweisungen muss dennoch kein \Macro{protect}\IndexCmd{protect} vorangestellt +werden. Selbstverständlich gilt dies bei Verwendung von +\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} auch für +\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}). -Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} können die Anweisungen nicht innerhalb von +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}). Allerdings\textnote{Achtung!} +können die Anweisungen nicht innerhalb von \Macro{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase} und ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden, die direkten Einfluss auf ihr Argument haben. Diese Anweisungen können jedoch als optionales Argument @@ -1342,16 +1293,13 @@ Großbuchstaben mit: \usekomavar[\MakeUppercase]{»\PName{Name}«} \end{lstcode} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Wahr}\Parameter{Falsch}\\ + \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Wahr}\Parameter{Falsch} \Macro{ifkomavarempty*}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Wahr}\Parameter{Falsch} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% Für die exakte Funktion ist wichtig, dass der Inhalt der Variablen soweit expandiert wird, wie dies mit \Macro{edef} möglich ist. Bleiben dabei Leerzeichen oder unexpandierbare Makros wie \Macro{relax} übrig, so gilt der @@ -1360,24 +1308,25 @@ Ausgabe führen würde. Auch\textnote{Achtung!} diese Anweisung kann nicht innerhalb von \Macro{MakeUppercase} oder ähnlichen Anweisungen verwendet werden. Sie ist -jedoch robust genug, um beispielsweise als Argument von \Macro{markboth} oder -\Macro{footnote} zu funktionieren. +jedoch robust genug, um beispielsweise als Argument von +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.markboth} oder \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.footnote} zu +funktionieren. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Variablen} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Unterschiede bei den Seitenstilen von \Package{scrletter}} \seclabel{pagestyleatscrletter} -\BeginIndex{Package}{scrletter} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil} In \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle} wurde dokumentiert, dass beim Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings} der Inhalt der Variablen \Variable{nexthead} und -\Variable{nextfoot} den Kopf und Fuß der Seite bestimmt. Da dieser Seitenstil -bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen bereits anderweitig vordefiniert ist, definiert +\PageStyle{headings} der Inhalt der Variablen +\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot} +den Kopf und Fuß der Seite bestimmt. Da dieser Seitenstil bei den +\KOMAScript-Klassen bereits anderweitig vordefiniert ist, definiert \Package{scrletter} ein neues Seitenstil-Paar mit Hilfe von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.pagestyle.pairs}, @@ -1389,63 +1338,53 @@ veralteten Pakete \Package{scrpage2}\IndexPackage{scrpage2} und \Package{fancyhdr}\IndexPackage{fancyhdr} nicht zusammen mit \Package{scrletter} verwendet werden. Darüber hinaus wird durch das interne Laden von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} automatisch der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Dies führt -dazu, dass die Seitenstile \Pagestyle{headings} und \Pagestyle{plain} der -verwendeten Klasse Aliase von \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und -\Pagestyle{plain.scrheadings} werden und somit der Kontrolle von +\PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Dies führt +dazu, dass die Seitenstile \PageStyle{headings} und \PageStyle{plain} der +verwendeten Klasse Aliase von \PageStyle{scrheadings} und +\PageStyle{plain.scrheadings} werden und somit der Kontrolle von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} unterstehen. \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{pagestyle}\PParameter{\Pagestyle{letter}}\\ - \XMacro{pagestyle}\PParameter{\Pagestyle{plain.letter}}\\ - \XMacro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nexthead}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \XMacro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nextfoot}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \PageStyle{letter} + \PageStyle{plain.letter} + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} + \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{letter}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.letter}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -Das Seitenstil-Paar\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} \Pagestyle{letter} +Das Seitenstil-Paar\ChangedAt{v3.15}{\Package{scrletter}} \PageStyle{letter} wird bei \Package{scrletter} mit Hilfe von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} definiert, um unabhängig von den Seitenstilen der Klasse zu sein. Dabei werden -die Variablen \Variable{nexthead} und \Variable{nextfoot} für -\Pagestyle{letter} so verwendet, wie dies in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle} -für den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{headings} dokumentiert ist. Der zugehörige -\Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil entspricht ebenfalls weitgehend dem Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{plain} von \Class{scrlttr2}. Insbesondere wird die Seitenzahl -entsprechend Option \Option{pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}) platziert.% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain.letter}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{letter}% +die Variablen \DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nexthead} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot} für \PageStyle{letter} so verwendet, wie +dies in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle} für den Seitenstil +\PageStyle{headings} dokumentiert ist. Der zugehörige +\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil entspricht ebenfalls weitgehend dem Seitenstil +\PageStyle{plain} von \Class{scrlttr2}. Insbesondere wird die Seitenzahl +entsprechend Option +\DescRef{scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} (siehe +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.pagenumber}) platziert.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Option{headsepline}\\ + \Option{headsepline} \Option{footsepline} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline}% Die bei \Class{scrlttr2} vorhandenen Optionen \Option{headsepline}\important[i]{\Option{headsepline}\\\Option{footsepline}} und \Option{footsepline} gehorchen bei \Package{scrletter} den Regeln von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}. Dies betrifft insbesondere das Setzen der Linien -in Kopf und Fuß des \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstils -\Pagestyle{plain.letter}. Siehe dazu +in Kopf und Fuß des \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstils +\PageStyle{plain.letter}. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline} und -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline}.% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline}% +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline} und +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline}.% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagemark}\\ + \Macro{pagemark} \Macro{letterpagemark} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterpagemark}% Da bereits die \KOMAScript-Klassen \Macro{pagemark} definieren und verwenden und daher eine Umdefinierung durch \Package{scrletter} nicht nur die Paginierung der Briefe, sondern alle Paginierungen betreffen würde, kann @@ -1457,22 +1396,21 @@ voranstellen. Stattdessen\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{scrletter}} definiert es Definition von \Macro{letterpagemark}. Will man daher \Macro{pagemark} sowohl für das normale Dokument als auch für die Briefe umdefinieren, so sollte man nach der normalen Umdefinierung von \Macro{pagemark} noch -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \let\letterpagemark\pagemark \end{lstcode} ergänzen. Diese Anweisung stört im übrigen auch nicht, wenn man später auf die Briefklasse \Class{scrlttr2} umstellt, die \Macro{letterpagemark} weder kennt noch verwendet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterpagemark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% -% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Stil} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Unterschiede in der Behandlung von \File{lco}-Dateien bei \Package{scrletter}} \seclabel{lcoatscrletter} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{File}{lco} \BeginIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} @@ -1481,30 +1419,27 @@ erklärt, dass man \File{lco}-Dateien direkt über \Macro{documentclass} laden kann. Für \Package{scrletter} wurde auf diese Möglichkeit verzichtet. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name}\\ + \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name} \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{Liste von Namen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% -Während für \Class{scrlttr2} lediglich -empfohlen wird, \File{lco}-Dateien über \Macro{LoadLetterOption} oder -\Macro{LoadLetterOptions} zu laden, ist dies für \Package{scrletter} -zwingend. Natürlich können die \File{lco}-Dateien auch erst nach -\Package{scrletter} geladen werden. +Während für \Class{scrlttr2} lediglich empfohlen wird, \File{lco}-Dateien über +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption} oder +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions} zu laden, ist dies für +\Package{scrletter} zwingend. Natürlich können die \File{lco}-Dateien auch +erst nach \Package{scrletter} geladen werden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrletter}% -\EndIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}% -\EndIndex{}{Letter-Class-Option}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{\File{lco}-Dateien für fortgeschrittene Anwender} \seclabel{lcoFile} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{File}{lco} \BeginIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Papier>Format}% Obwohl jedes von \Package{typearea} einstellbare Format verwendbar ist, kann es bei der Ausgabe der ersten Briefseite mit manchen Formaten zu unerwünschten @@ -1527,7 +1462,6 @@ Papiergröße eingestellt ist. \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}% \Parameter{Optionsname}\Parameter{Papiergröße} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}% Damit man bei Verwendung einer in der \File{lco}-Datei nicht vorgesehenen \PName{Papiergröße} zumindest gewarnt wird, sind in den mit \KOMAScript{} ausgelieferten \File{lco}-Dateien @@ -1538,7 +1472,7 @@ wird dabei der Name der \File{lco}-Datei ohne die Endung »\File{.lco}« Werden nacheinander mehrere \File{lco}-Dateien geladen, so kann jede dieser \File{lco}-Dateien eine Anweisung \Macro{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize} -enthalten. Innerhalb von \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wird jedoch nur auf +enthalten. Innerhalb von \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wird jedoch nur auf die jeweils letzte angegebene \PName{Papiergröße} geprüft. Wie das nachfolgende Beispiel zeigt, ist es daher für den versierten Anwender leicht möglich, \File{lco}-Dateien mit Parametersätzen für andere Papierformate zu @@ -1567,19 +1501,21 @@ und auch das Beispiel überspringen. \endinput \end{lstcode} Eleganter wäre es natürlich, die Marken mit Hilfe der Option - \Option{foldmarks} abzuschalten. Außerdem muss auch noch die Position des - Seitenfußes, also die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfootvpos}, angepasst - werden. Ich überlasse es dem Leser, dafür einen geeigneten Wert zu + \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.foldmarks} abzuschalten. Außerdem muss auch noch + die Position des Seitenfußes, also die Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfootvpos}, + angepasst werden. Ich überlasse es dem Leser, dafür einen geeigneten Wert zu ermitteln. Mit einer solchen \File{lco}-Datei ist es lediglich wichtig, dass andere \File{lco}-Dateioptionen wie \File{SN} vor dem Laden von »\File{a5.lco}«, angegeben werden. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LetterOptionNeedsPapersize}% -\EndIndex{}{Papier>Format}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup + \subsection{Positionen sichtbar machen} \seclabel{visualize} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Option}{visualize} Wenn man selbst \File{lco}-Dateien entwickelt, beispielsweise um die @@ -1600,7 +1536,6 @@ gehören. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{showfields}\Parameter{Feldliste} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showfields}% Mit dieser Anweisung kann die Visualisierung von Feldern des Briefbogens aktiviert werden. Das Argument \PName{Feldliste} ist dabei eine durch Komma separierte Liste der Feldern, die visualisiert werden sollen. Folgende Felder @@ -1619,22 +1554,21 @@ werden derzeit unterstützt: \item[\PValue{refline}] ist die Geschäftszeile. Es handelt sich hier um ein nach unten offenes Feld. \end{labeling}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{field}% -Mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{field}\LabelFontElement{field}% +Mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element \FontElement{field}\important{\FontElement{field}} kann die Farbe der Visualisierung geändert werden. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{normalcolor}.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{field}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showfields} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setshowstyle}\Parameter{Visualisierungsstil}\\ + \Macro{setshowstyle}\Parameter{Visualisierungsstil} \Macro{edgesize} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setshowstyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{edgesize} In der Voreinstellung werden die einzelnen Felder durch Begrenzungslinien\important{\PValue{frame}} markiert. Dies entspricht dem \PName{Visualisierungsstil} \PValue{frame}. Nach unten offene Felder werden @@ -1649,22 +1583,18 @@ dritte\important{\PValue{edges}} verfügbare \PName{Visualisierungsstil} ist offenen Feldern entfallen dabei die unteren Eckmarkierungen. Die Größe der Eckmarkierungen ist im Makro \Macro{edgesize} abgelegt und mit 1\Unit{ex} voreingestellt. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{edgesize} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setshowstyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{showenvelope}(\PName{Breite},\PName{Höhe})% - (\PName{HOffset},\PName{VOffset})\OParameter{Zusatz}\\ - \Macro{showISOenvelope}\Parameter{Format}\OParameter{Zusatz}\\ - \Macro{showUScommercial}\Parameter{Format}\OParameter{Zusatz}\\ - \Macro{showUScheck}\OParameter{Zusatz}\\ + \Macro{showenvelope}\AParameter{Breite\textup{,}Höhe} + \AParameter{HOffset\textup{,}VOffset} + \OParameter{Zusatz} + \Macro{showISOenvelope}\Parameter{Format}\OParameter{Zusatz} + \Macro{showUScommercial}\Parameter{Format}\OParameter{Zusatz} + \Macro{showUScheck}\OParameter{Zusatz} \Macro{unitfactor} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showenvelope}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showISOenvelope}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showUScommercial}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{showUScheck}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{unitfactor}% Diese Anweisungen dienen dazu eine Seite mit einer Zeichnung eines Umschlags auszugeben. Der Umschlag wird dabei immer um 90° gedreht auf einer eigenen Seite im Maßstab~1:1 ausgegeben. Das Anschriftfenster wird automatisch aus den @@ -1685,21 +1615,22 @@ DL (auch bekannt als C5/6) oder C6 erzeugt werden. Mit \PName{Format} 9 oder 10 ausgegeben. \Macro{showUScheck} schließlich ist für Umschläge im US-Check-Format zuständig. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{letter}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{letter}\LabelFontElement{letter}% Innerhalb des Umschlags wird die Lage des Briefbogens gestrichelt angedeutet. Die dabei verwendete Farbe kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} +(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element \FontElement{letter}\important{\FontElement{letter}} verändert werden. Voreingestellt ist \Macro{normalcolor}.% \EndIndex{FontElement}{letter} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{measure}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{measure}\LabelFontElement{measure}% Die Umschlagzeichnung wird automatisch bemaßt. Die Farbe der Bemaßung und die -Größe deren Beschriftung kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} -und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element +Größe deren Beschriftung kann mit Hilfe der Anweisungen +\DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont} +(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) für das Element \FontElement{measure}\important{\FontElement{measure}} verändert werden. Voreingestellt ist hier \Macro{normalcolor}. Die Bemaßung erfolgt in Vielfachen von \Length{unitlength} mit einer maximalen Genauigkeit von @@ -1755,20 +1686,16 @@ ausgegebene Maßzahlen geringfügig vom tatsächlichen Wert abweichen. Beides sind keine Fehler von \Option{visualize}, sondern lediglich Implementierungsgrenzen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{unitfactor}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showUScheck}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showUScommercial}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showISOenvelope}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{showenvelope}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Option}{visualize}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}% -\EndIndex{File}{lco}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Unterstützung verschiedener Sprachen} \seclabel{languages}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Sprachen}% Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} unterstützt viele Sprachen. Dazu zählen Deutsch (\PValue{german} für alte deutsche Rechtschreibung, \PValue{ngerman} für neue @@ -1804,12 +1731,13 @@ Sprachumschaltpaketen. Das Paket \cite{package:french}) nimmt neben der Umdefinierung der Begriffe aus \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} weitere Änderungen vor. So -definiert es etwa die Anweisung \Macro{opening} um. Dabei geht es einfach -davon aus, dass \Macro{opening} immer wie in der Standardbriefklasse -\Class{letter} definiert ist. Dies ist bei \Class{scrlttr2} jedoch nicht der -Fall. Das Paket \Package{french} zerstört deshalb die Definition aus -\Class{scrlttr2} und arbeitet nicht korrekt mir \KOMAScript{} zusammen. Ich -betrachte dies als Fehler des Paketes \Package{french}. +definiert es etwa die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} um. Dabei geht +es einfach davon aus, dass \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.opening} immer wie in der +Standardbriefklasse \Class{letter} definiert ist. Dies ist bei +\Class{scrlttr2} jedoch nicht der Fall. Das Paket \Package{french} zerstört +deshalb die Definition aus \Class{scrlttr2} und arbeitet nicht korrekt mir +\KOMAScript{} zusammen. Ich betrachte dies als Fehler des Paketes +\Package{french}. Wird das Paket \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} für die Umschaltung auf die Sprache \PValue{french} verwendet und ist gleichzeitig das @@ -1836,7 +1764,7 @@ Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das \Package{babel} verwendet wird, so empfehle ich% \iftrue , mit -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \usepackage[...,francais,...]{babel} \end{lstcode} französische Sprache auszuwählen. @@ -1869,161 +1797,78 @@ Option explizit angegeben wird, dass \Package{babel} das \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{captionsacadian}\\ - \Macro{captionsamerican}\\ - \Macro{captionsaustralien}\\ - \Macro{captionsaustrian}\\ - \Macro{captionsbritish}\\ - \Macro{captionscanadian}\\ - \Macro{captionscanadien}\\ - \Macro{captionscroatian}\\ - \Macro{captionsczech}\\ - \Macro{captionsdutch}\\ - \Macro{captionsenglish}\\ - \Macro{captionsfinnish}\\ - \Macro{captionsfrancais}\\ - \Macro{captionsfrench}\\ - \Macro{captionsgerman}\\ - \Macro{captionsitalian}\\ - \Macro{captionsnaustrian}\\ - \Macro{captionsnewzealand}\\ - \Macro{captionsngerman}\\ - \Macro{captionsnorsk}\\ - \Macro{captionsnswissgerman}\\ - \Macro{captionspolish}\\ - \Macro{captionsslovak}\\ - \Macro{captionsspanish}\\ - \Macro{captionsswedish}\\ - \Macro{captionsswissgerman}\\ - \Macro{captionsUKenglish}\\ + \Macro{captionsacadian} + \Macro{captionsamerican} + \Macro{captionsaustralien} + \Macro{captionsaustrian} + \Macro{captionsbritish} + \Macro{captionscanadian} + \Macro{captionscanadien} + \Macro{captionscroatian} + \Macro{captionsczech} + \Macro{captionsdutch} + \Macro{captionsenglish} + \Macro{captionsfinnish} + \Macro{captionsfrancais} + \Macro{captionsfrench} + \Macro{captionsgerman} + \Macro{captionsitalian} + \Macro{captionsnaustrian} + \Macro{captionsnewzealand} + \Macro{captionsngerman} + \Macro{captionsnorsk} + \Macro{captionsnswissgerman} + \Macro{captionspolish} + \Macro{captionsslovak} + \Macro{captionsspanish} + \Macro{captionsswedish} + \Macro{captionsswissgerman} + \Macro{captionsUKenglish} \Macro{captionsUSenglish} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsacadian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsamerican}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustralien}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsbritish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionscanadian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionscanadien}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionscroatian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsdutch}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsfinnish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrancais}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrench}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsgerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnewzealand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsngerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnorsk}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsnswissgerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsitalian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionspolish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsczech}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsspanish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsswedish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsswissgerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsUKenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsUSenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{captionsslovak}% -\strut Wird die Sprache eines Briefes gewechselt, so werden über diese +Wird die Sprache eines Briefes gewechselt, so werden über diese Anweisungen die Begriffe aus \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} umdefiniert. Sollte das verwendete Sprachumschaltpaket dies nicht unterstützen, so können obige Anweisungen notfalls auch direkt verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsslovak}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsacadian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsamerican}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustralien}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsbritish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionscanadian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionscanadien}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionscroatian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsdutch}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsfinnish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrancais}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsfrench}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnewzealand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsngerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnorsk}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsnswissgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsitalian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionspolish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsczech}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsspanish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsswedish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsswissgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsUKenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{captionsUSenglish}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{dateacadian}\\ - \Macro{dateamerican}\\ - \Macro{dateaustralien}\\ - \Macro{dateaustrian}\\ - \Macro{datebritish}\\ - \Macro{datecanadian}\\ - \Macro{datecanadien}\\ - \Macro{datecroatian}\\ - \Macro{dateczech}\\ - \Macro{datedutch}\\ - \Macro{dateenglish}\\ - \Macro{datefinnish}\\ - \Macro{datefrancais}\\ - \Macro{datefrench}\\ - \Macro{dategerman}\\ - \Macro{dateitalian}\\ - \Macro{datenaustrian}\\ - \Macro{datenewzealand}\\ - \Macro{datengerman}\\ - \Macro{datenorsk}\\ - \Macro{datenswissgerman}\\ - \Macro{datepolish}\\ - \Macro{dateslovak}\\ - \Macro{datespanish}\\ - \Macro{dateswedish}\\ - \Macro{dateswissgerman}\\ - \Macro{dateUKenglish}\\ + \Macro{dateacadian} + \Macro{dateamerican} + \Macro{dateaustralien} + \Macro{dateaustrian} + \Macro{datebritish} + \Macro{datecanadian} + \Macro{datecanadien} + \Macro{datecroatian} + \Macro{dateczech} + \Macro{datedutch} + \Macro{dateenglish} + \Macro{datefinnish} + \Macro{datefrancais} + \Macro{datefrench} + \Macro{dategerman} + \Macro{dateitalian} + \Macro{datenaustrian} + \Macro{datenewzealand} + \Macro{datengerman} + \Macro{datenorsk} + \Macro{datenswissgerman} + \Macro{datepolish} + \Macro{dateslovak} + \Macro{datespanish} + \Macro{dateswedish} + \Macro{dateswissgerman} + \Macro{dateUKenglish} \Macro{dateUSenglish} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateacadian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateamerican}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateaustralien}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datebritish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datecanadian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datecanadien}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datecroatian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datedutch}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datefinnish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datefrancais}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datefrench}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dategerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenaustrian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenewzealand}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datengerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenorsk}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datenswissgerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateitalian}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datepolish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateczech}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateslovak}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datespanish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateswedish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateswissgerman}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateUKenglish}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{dateUSenglish}% Je nach verwendeter Sprache werden auch die Datumsangaben\Index{Datum} des -nummerischen Datums (siehe Option \Option{numericaldate} in +nummerischen Datums (siehe Option \DescRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}) in unterschiedlicher Form +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}) in unterschiedlicher Form umgesetzt. Die genauen Angaben können der \autoref{tab:date} entnommen werden.% % @@ -2071,75 +1916,40 @@ werden.% \label{tab:date} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateacadian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateamerican}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateaustralien}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datebritish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datecanadian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datecanadien}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datecroatian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datedutch}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datefinnish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datefrancais}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datefrench}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dategerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenaustrian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenewzealand}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datengerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenorsk}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datenswissgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateitalian}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datepolish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateczech}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateslovak}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datespanish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateswedish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateswissgerman}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateUKenglish}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{dateUSenglish}% - -\clearpage% Umbruchoptimierung!!!! +\EndIndexGroup + +\clearpage% Umbruchoptimierung \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{yourrefname}\\ - \Macro{yourmailname}\\ - \Macro{myrefname}\\ - \Macro{customername}\\ - \Macro{invoicename}\\ - \Macro{subjectname}\\ - \Macro{ccname}\\ - \Macro{enclname}\\ - \Macro{headtoname}\\ - \Macro{headfromname}\\ - \Macro{datename}\\ - \Macro{pagename}\\ - \Macro{phonename}\\ - \Macro{faxname}\\ - \Macro{emailname}\\ - \Macro{wwwname}\\ + \Macro{yourrefname} + \Macro{yourmailname} + \Macro{myrefname} + \Macro{customername} + \Macro{invoicename} + \Macro{subjectname} + \Macro{ccname} + \Macro{enclname} + \Macro{headtoname} + \Macro{headfromname} + \Macro{datename} + \Macro{pagename} + \Macro{mobilephonename} + \Macro{phonename} + \Macro{faxname} + \Macro{emailname} + \Macro{wwwname} \Macro{bankname} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{yourrefname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{yourmailname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{myrefname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{customername}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{invoicename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{subjectname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ccname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{enclname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headtoname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headfromname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{datename}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagename}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{phonename}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{faxname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{emailname}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{wwwname}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{bankname}% Die aufgeführten Anweisungen enthalten die jeweiligen sprachtypischen Begriffe. Diese können für die Realisierung einer weiteren Sprache oder aber auch zur eigenen freien Gestaltung wie\important[i]{% - \Macro{newcaptionname}\\ - \Macro{renewcaptionname}\\ - \Macro{providecaptionname}} in \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport} erklärt -angepasst werden. Von \Class{scrlttr2} werden die Begriffe erst nach der -Präambel, also bei \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} gesetzt. Sie sind daher -vorher nicht verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname}\\ + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname}\\ + \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname}} in +\autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport} erklärt angepasst werden. Von +\Class{scrlttr2} werden die Begriffe erst nach der Präambel, also bei +\Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} gesetzt. Sie sind daher vorher nicht +verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In \autoref{tab:scrlttr2-experts.languageTerms} sind die Voreinstellungen für \Option{english} und \Option{ngerman} zu finden.% % @@ -2174,6 +1984,7 @@ vorher nicht verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In \Macro{invoicename} & Invoice no. & Rechnungsnummer \\ \Macro{myrefname} & Our ref. & Unser Zeichen \\ \Macro{pagename}\footnotemark[1] & Page & Seite \\ + \Macro{mobilephonename} & Mobile phone & Mobiltelefon \\ \Macro{phonename} & Phone & Telefon \\ \Macro{subjectname} & Subject & Betrifft \\ \Macro{wwwname} & Url & URL \\ @@ -2191,23 +2002,15 @@ vorher nicht verfügbar und können vorher auch nicht geändert werden. In \end{minipage} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{yourrefname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{yourmailname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{myrefname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{customername}\EndIndex{Cmd}{invoicename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{subjectname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ccname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{enclname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headtoname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{headfromname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{datename}\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagename}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{phonename}\EndIndex{Cmd}{faxname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{emailname}\EndIndex{Cmd}{wwwname}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{bankname}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Sprachen}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Von der obsoleten \Class{scrlettr} zur aktuellen \Class{scrlttr2}} \seclabel{fromscrlettr} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrlettr} Die\textnote{Achtung!} alte Briefklasse \Class{scrlettr} wurde mit Einführung @@ -2217,7 +2020,7 @@ werden. Die Klasse wird nicht mehr weiterentwickelt und es findet daher auch kein Support mehr dafür statt. Wer dennoch unbedingt die Anleitung zur alten Briefklasse benötigt, kann diese in \File{scrlettr.dtx} finden. Am besten führt man dazu einige \LaTeX-Läufe mit jener Datei durch, also beispielsweise: -\begin{lstoutput}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox,morekeywords={latex,mkindex}] +\begin{lstoutput}[morekeywords={latex,mkindex}] latex scrlettr.dtx mkindex scrlettr latex scrlettr.dtx @@ -2235,8 +2038,10 @@ stimmen nicht überein. Näheres dazu ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}, \autoref{tab:lcoFiles} zu entnehmen. \LoadNonFree{scrlttr2-experts}{0} - -\EndIndex{Class}{scrlettr}% +% +\EndIndexGroup +% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex index 8572b667ee8..b0bd6764c1b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrlttr2.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrlttr2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrlttr2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrlttr2.tex}% - [$Date: 2015-12-17 11:57:09 +0100 (Thu, 17 Dec 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrlttr2)] \chapter{Die Briefklasse \Class{scrlttr2}} \labelbase{scrlttr2} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}\BeginIndex{}{Briefe}% \iffalse Seit der Ausgabe vom Juni 2002 beinhaltet \KOMAScript{} eine komplett @@ -72,13 +73,14 @@ nicht nur dem geübten Anwender einige Vorteile. \section{Variablen} \seclabel{variables}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Variablen}% Neben Optionen, Anweisungen (oder Befehlen), Umgebungen, Zählern und Längen wurden in \autoref{cha:maincls} für \KOMAScript{} bereits zusätzlich Elemente eingeführt. Eine typische Eigenschaft eines Elements ist seine Schriftart und -die Möglichkeit, diese zu ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). An dieser Stelle werden nun +die Möglichkeit, diese zu ändern (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). An dieser Stelle werden nun zusätzlich Variablen eingeführt. Variablen haben einen Namen\Index{Variablen>Name}, über den sie angesprochen werden und einen Inhalt\Index{Variablen>Inhalt}. Der Inhalt einer Variablen kann zeitlich @@ -95,152 +97,150 @@ Dieser Abschnitt beschränkt sich bewusst auf die Einführung des Begriffs der Variablen. Die zur Verdeutlichung verwendeten Beispiele sind ohne tiefere Bedeutung. Konkretere Anwendungsbeispiele gibt es bei der Erläuterung der in der Briefklasse bereits definierten und von ihr verwendeten Variablen in den -nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.variables} gibt eine +nachfolgenden Abschnitten. \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} gibt eine Übersicht über alle in \Class{scrlttr2} definierten Variablen. % \begin{desclist} \desccaption{Von der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} unterstützte - Variablen\label{tab:scrlttr2.variables}} {Von der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} + Variablen\label{tab:\LabelBase.variables}} {Von der Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} unterstützte Variablen (\emph{Fortsetzung})} \ventry{addresseeimage}{Anweisungen, die zum Setzen des Port-Payé-Kopfes bei - der Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} oder der - Port-Payé-Anschrift bei der Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{image}, - verwendet werden (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage})}% + der Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{backgroundimage} oder der + Port-Payé-Anschrift bei der Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{image}, + verwendet werden (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.addresseeimage})}% \ventry{backaddress}{Rücksendeadresse für Fensterbriefumschläge - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress})}% \ventry{backaddressseparator}{Trennzeichen innerhalb der Rücksendeadresse - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddressseparator})}% \ventry{ccseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Verteilertitel und Verteiler - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.ccseparator})}% \ventry{customer}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Kundennummer« - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer})}% - \ventry{date}{Datum (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.date})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.customer})}% + \ventry{date}{Datum (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.date})}% \ventry{emailseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen E-Mail-Bezeichnung und - E-Mail-Adresse (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator})}% + E-Mail-Adresse (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.emailseparator})}% \ventry{enclseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Anlagetitel und Anlagen - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.enclseparator})}% \ventry{faxseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Faxbezeichner und Faxnummer - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.faxseparator})}% \ventry{firstfoot}{% Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} des Briefbogens - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.firstfoot})}% \ventry{firsthead}{% Kopf\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} des Briefbogens - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.firsthead})}% \ventry{fromaddress}{Absenderadresse ohne Absendername - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromaddress})}% \ventry{frombank}{Bankverbindung des Absenders - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.frombank})}% \ventry{fromemail}{E-Mail-Adresse des Absenders - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail})}% - \ventry{fromfax}{Faxnummer des Absenders (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromemail})}% + \ventry{fromfax}{Faxnummer des Absenders (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromfax})}% \ventry{fromlogo}{Anweisungen zum Setzen des Absenderlogos - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromlogo})}% \ventry{frommobilephone}{% \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% - Handynummer des Absenders (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone})}% + Handynummer des Absenders (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.frommobilephone})}% \ventry{fromname}{vollständiger Absendername - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname})}% \ventry{fromphone}{Telefonnummer des Absenders - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone})}% - \ventry{fromurl}{eine URL des Absenders (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromphone})}% + \ventry{fromurl}{eine URL des Absenders (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromurl})}% \ventry{fromzipcode}{Postleitzahl des Absenders für den Port-Payé-Kopf bei - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromzipcode})}% \ventry{invoice}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Rechnungsnummer« - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.invoice})}% \ventry{location}{erweiterte Absenderangabe - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.location})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location})}% \ventry{mobilephoneseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Handybezeichner und - Handynummer (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator})}% + Handynummer (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.mobilephoneseparator})}% \ventry{myref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Mein Zeichen« - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.myref})}% \ventry{nextfoot}{Seitenfuß\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} oder - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot})}% + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} oder + \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot})}% \ventry{nexthead}{Kopf\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} im Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} oder - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pagestyle}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead})}% + \PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings} oder + \PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pagestyle}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.nexthead})}% \ventry{phoneseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Telefonbezeichner und - Telefonnummer (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator})}% - \ventry{place}{Ort (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.place})}% + Telefonnummer (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.phoneseparator})}% + \ventry{place}{Ort (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.place})}% \ventry{placeseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Ort und Datum - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.placeseparator})}% \ventry{PPdatamatrix}{Anweisungen zum Setzen einer Data-Matrix bei der - Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix})}% + Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.PPdatamatrix})}% \ventry{PPcode}{Code zur Identifizierung des Absenders bei Einstellung - \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode})}% + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{addrfield}{PP} (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.PPcode})}% \ventry{signature}{Signatur unter Unterschrift und Grußformel - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature})}% - \ventry{specialmail}{Versandart (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail})}% - \ventry{subject}{Betreff (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature})}% + \ventry{specialmail}{Versandart (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.specialmail})}% + \ventry{subject}{Betreff (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject})}% \ventry{subjectseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen Betreff"|titel und Betreff - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator})}% - \ventry{title}{Brief"|titel (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.title})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subjectseparator})}% + \ventry{title}{Brief"|titel (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.title})}% \ventry{toaddress}{Empfängeradresse ohne Empfängername - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toaddress})}% \ventry{toname}{vollständiger Empfängername - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.toname})}% \ventry{yourmail}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Schreiben« - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourmail})}% \ventry{yourref}{Geschäftszeilenfeld »Ihr Zeichen« - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref})}% + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.yourref})}% \ventry{zipcodeseparator}{Trennzeichen zwischen der Bezeichnung und dem - Inhalt der Variablen \Variable{fromzipcode} - (\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator})}% + Inhalt der Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromzipcode} + (\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.zipcodeseparator})}% \end{desclist} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}% - \Parameter{Name}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ + \Macro{setkomavar} + \Parameter{Name}\OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} \Macro{setkomavar*}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Bezeichnung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar*}% Mit der Anweisung \Macro{setkomavar} wird der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \PName{Name} gesetzt. Dabei kann per optionalem Argument gleichzeitig auch die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen geändert werden. Demgegenüber kann mit der @@ -285,16 +285,13 @@ Bezeichnung der Variablen gelöscht werden. ihre Bezeichnung gelöscht. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setkomavar*}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name}\\ + \Macro{usekomavar}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name} \Macro{usekomavar*}\OParameter{Anweisung}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% In\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} manchen Fällen wird es notwendig sein, selbst auf den Inhalt oder die Bezeichnung einer Variablen zuzugreifen, dies also nicht allein der Klasse zu überlassen. Das gilt insbesondere dann, wenn @@ -303,15 +300,13 @@ hinzugefügt werden. Mit der Anweisung \Macro{usekomavar} können Sie auf den Inhalt der Variablen \PName{Name} zugreifen, während Sie mit der Sternvariante \Macro{usekomavar*} ihre Bezeichnung erhalten. Näheres zur Definition eigener Variablen ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} zu entnehmen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usekomavar*}% +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} zu entnehmen.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ifkomavar}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavar}% Mit\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} dieser Anweisung kann man feststellen, ob eine Variable definiert ist. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird nur dann ausgeführt, wenn die Variable existiert. Dabei wird der Inhalt der Variablen @@ -319,18 +314,18 @@ nicht getestet, kann also auch leer sein. Der \PName{Sonst-Teil} wird hingegen ausgeführt, wenn die Variable nicht existiert. Solche Tests können beispielsweise dann sinnvoll sein, wenn eigene Variablen in einer \File{lco}-Datei\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) definiert werden und in einer anderen \File{lco}-Datei diese Variable nur dann verwendet werden soll, wenn sie existiert. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavar}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifkomavarempty}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil}\\ - \Macro{ifkomavarempty*}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifkomavarempty} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifkomavarempty*} + \Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% Mit\ChangedAt{v2.9i}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Hilfe dieser Anweisungen kann man feststellen, ob der Inhalt oder die Bezeichnung einer Variablen leer ist oder nicht. Der \PName{Dann-Teil} wird nur dann ausgeführt, @@ -339,14 +334,14 @@ Variablen \PName{Name} leer ist. Anderenfalls wird der \PName{Sonst-Teil} ausgeführt. Die Sternvariante der Anweisung bezieht sich dabei auf die Bezeichnung der Variablen, während die normale Variante den Inhalt behandelt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifkomavarempty}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Variablen} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Pseudolängen} \seclabel{pseudoLength} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Pseudolängen} Längen werden bei \LaTeX{} mit den drei Anweisungen @@ -371,10 +366,10 @@ Abschnitten dieses Kapitels. Da der Anwender normalerweise keine eigenen Pseudolängen definieren muss, wird dieser Teil nicht hier, sondern im Expertenteil in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength} behandelt. Ebenso ist das +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength} behandelt. Ebenso ist das Setzen von Pseudolängen eher dem fortgeschrittenen Anwender vorbehalten. Also wird auch dies im Abschnitt für Experten ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength} erklärt. +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength} erklärt. Bitte beachten\textnote{Achtung!} Sie unbedingt, dass die Pseudolängen zwar intern als Makros implementiert sind, bei den Befehlen zur Nutzung der @@ -385,25 +380,22 @@ umgekehrten Schrägstrich geschrieben! \begin{Declaration} \Macro{useplength}\Parameter{Name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{useplength}% Mit Hilfe dieser Anweisung wird auf den Wert der Pseudolänge mit dem angegebenen \PName{Namen} zugegriffen. Dies ist eine der wenigen Benutzeranweisung rund um Pseudolängen. Natürlich kann diese Anweisung dennoch auch innerhalb einer \File{lco}-Datei\Index{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{useplength}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setlengthtoplength}% - \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge}\\ - \Macro{addtolengthplength}% + \Macro{setlengthtoplength} + \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge} + \Macro{addtolengthplength} \OParameter{Faktor}\Parameter{Länge}\Parameter{Pseudolänge} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setlengthtoplength}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtolengthplength}% \begin{Explain}% Während man einer Länge einfach einen Faktor voranstellen kann, ist dies bei Pseudolängen nicht möglich. Angenommen, eine Länge @@ -434,20 +426,19 @@ Die Anweisung\important{\Macro{addtolengthplength}} \Macro{addtolengthplength} arbeitet ähnlich. Nur wird die mit \PName{Faktor} multiplizierte \PName{Pseudolänge} zur \PName{Länge} addiert.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setlengthtoplength}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtolengthplength}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Pseudolängen}% +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{1} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} %\iffree{}{\vfill}% Umbruchoptimierung! -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{2} % \section{Entwurfsmodus} +\LoadCommonFile{draftmode} % \section{Entwurfsmodus} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{3} % \section{Seitenauf"|teilung} +\LoadCommonFile{typearea} % \section{Seitenauf"|teilung} Die Unterscheidung zwischen ein- und doppelseitigem Satz ist bei Briefen jedoch in der Regel nicht sinnvoll. Da Briefe normalerweise nicht gebunden @@ -455,20 +446,22 @@ werden, betrachtet man bei Briefen jede Seite für sich. Das gilt auch dann, wenn ausnahmsweise Vorder- oder Rückseite bedruckt werden. Daher spielt bei Briefen normalerweise auch der vertikale Ausgleich keine Rolle. Sollten Sie diesen trotzdem benötigen oder wissen wollen, was das ist, sei auf die in -\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom} -erklärten Anweisungen \Macro{raggedbottom} und \Macro{flushbottom} verwiesen.% +\autoref{sec:maincls.typearea}, \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} +erklärten Anweisungen \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom} und +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} verwiesen.% % -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Aufteilung=Auf\/teilung} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Genereller Aufbau eines Briefdokuments} \seclabel{document} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Briefe>Aufbau} Der generelle Aufbau eines Briefdokuments weicht etwas vom Aufbau eines normalen Dokuments ab. Während ein Buchdokument normalerweise nur ein Buch enthält, kann ein einzelnes Briefdokument mehrere Briefe enthalten. Wie in -\autoref{fig:scrlttr2.document} veranschaulicht wird, besteht ein +\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.document} veranschaulicht wird, besteht ein Briefdokument aus einem Vorspann, den einzelnen Briefen und dem Abschluss. \begin{figure} @@ -478,8 +471,8 @@ Briefdokument aus einem Vorspann, den einzelnen Briefen und dem Abschluss. vielen einzelnen Briefen}]{% Genereller Aufbau eines Briefdokuments mit beliebig vielen einzelnen Briefen (den Aufbau eines einzelnen - Briefs zeigt \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter})% - \label{fig:scrlttr2.document}}[l] + Briefs zeigt \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter})% + \label{fig:\LabelBase.document}}[l] \begin{minipage}[b]{.667\linewidth} \centering\small\setlength{\fboxsep}{1.5ex}% \addtolength{\linewidth}{-\dimexpr2\fboxrule+2\fboxsep\relax}% @@ -513,8 +506,8 @@ betreffen. Diese können in den Einstellungen der einzelnen Briefe jedoch zumindest teilweise überschrieben werden. Die einzige Einstellung, die derzeit nicht innerhalb eines einzelnen Briefes überschrieben werden kann, ist die Version von \Class{scrlttr2}, zu der Kompatibilität erreicht werden soll (siehe -Option \Option{version} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}). +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}). Ich empfehle, vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} nur allgemeine Einstellungen wie das Laden von Paketen und das Setzen von Optionen @@ -534,8 +527,8 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen. \begin{captionbeside}[{Genereller Aufbau eines einzelnen Briefes innerhalb eines Briefdokuments}]{Genereller Aufbau eines einzelnen Briefes innerhalb eines Briefdokuments (siehe - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.document})% - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter}}[l] + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.document})% + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter}}[l] \begin{minipage}[b]{.667\linewidth}% \centering\small\setlength{\fboxsep}{1.5ex}% \addtolength{\linewidth}{-\dimexpr2\fboxrule+2\fboxsep\relax}% @@ -545,7 +538,7 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen. \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] {\centering\emph{Einstellungen für diesen Brief}\\} \dots\\ - \Macro{opening}\Parameter{Anrede}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\Parameter{Anrede}\\ }}\\[1pt] \fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright% \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] @@ -553,25 +546,25 @@ zusätzliche Kommentare einfügen. \dots\\ }}\\[1pt] \fbox{\parbox{\linewidth}{\raggedright% - \Macro{closing}\Parameter{Grußformel}\\ - \Macro{ps}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\Parameter{Grußformel}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.ps}\\ \dots\\[\dp\strutbox] {\centering\emph{Postscriptum}\\} \dots\\ - \Macro{encl}\Parameter{Anlagen}\\ - \Macro{cc}\Parameter{Verteiler}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.encl}\Parameter{Anlagen}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.cc}\Parameter{Verteiler}\\ \Macro{end}\PParameter{letter}\\ }}\\[\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax] \end{minipage} \end{captionbeside} \end{figure} -Wie in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter} verdeutlicht wird, bestehen die einzelnen +Wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter} verdeutlicht wird, bestehen die einzelnen Briefe wiederum aus einer Einleitung, dem eigentlichen Brief"|text und einem Schlussteil. In der Einleitung werden alle Einstellungen vorgenommen, die nur für diesen einen Brief gelten sollen. Entscheidend ist hierbei, dass diese -Einleitung immer mit \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} endet. Ebenso beginnt -der Schlussteil immer mit \Macro{closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. Gegebenenfalls +Einleitung immer mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} endet. Ebenso beginnt +der Schlussteil immer mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing}. Gegebenenfalls können die Argumente \PName{Anrede} und \PName{Grußformel} der beiden Anweisungen leer bleiben, die Anweisungen müssen jedoch gesetzt werden und haben immer ein Argument. @@ -592,18 +585,15 @@ nicht empfehlen% \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{begin}\PParameter{\Environment{letter}}% - \OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger}\\ - \quad\dots\\ - \XMacro{end}\PParameter{letter} + \begin{Environment}{letter}\OParameter{Optionen}\Parameter{Empfänger} + \end{Environment} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Env}{letter}% \BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}% Die Briefumgebung \Environment{letter} ist einer der zentralen Dreh- und Angelpunkte der Briefklasse. Als Besonderheit\textnote{\KOMAScript{} vs. Standardklassen} kann man bei \Class{scrlttr2} der Briefumgebung zusätzliche \PName{Optionen} mit auf den Weg geben. Diese werden dann intern -per \Macro{KOMAoptions}-Anweisung ausgeführt. +per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}-Anweisung ausgeführt. Der \PName{Empfänger} wird als obligatorischer Parameter an die Umgebung übergeben. Dabei\textnote{Achtung!} dient der doppelte Backslash als @@ -615,7 +605,7 @@ erlaubt. Sie können zu unerwarteten Effekten und Fehlermeldungen führen. Dies ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso. \begin{Example} - \phantomsection\label{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter.example}% + \phantomsection\label{desc:\LabelBase.env.letter.example}% Angenommen, jemand wollte einen Brief an Petra Mustermann schreiben. Ein minimalistisches Briefdokument dafür würde so aussehen: \begin{lstcode} @@ -630,21 +620,17 @@ ist übrigens bei der Standardbriefklasse genauso. \end{lstcode} Allerdings würde dabei noch keinerlei Ausgabe entstehen. Es würde noch nicht einmal die Anschrift auf dem Briefbogen ausgegeben. Warum das so ist, - erfahren Sie bei der Erklärung zur Anweisung \Macro{opening} auf - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening}. + erfahren Sie bei der Erklärung zur Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} auf + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Env}{letter}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Anschrift}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AtBeginLetter}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{AtBeginLetter}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AtEndLetter}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtBeginLetter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtEndLetter}% Wie in \cite{latex:clsguide} erwähnt, gibt es bei \LaTeX{} die Möglichkeit, zu bestimmten Gelegenheiten während des \LaTeX-Laufs eines Dokuments zusätzliche \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu lassen. Zu diesem Zweck stellt der @@ -689,28 +675,25 @@ folgende Beispiel zeigt dies. \cite{package:tabularx}). \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtEndLetter}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtBeginLetter}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Counter{letter}\\ - \Macro{thisletter}\\ + \Counter{letter} + \Macro{thisletter} \Macro{letterlastpage} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Counter}{letter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thisletter}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterlastpage}% Für\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} den Fall, dass sich mehrere Briefe in einem Dokument befinden, werden die Briefe intern von \KOMAScript{} durchnummeriert. Hierfür ist seit Version~3.19 der Zähler \Counter{letter} definiert, der mit jedem \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} referenzierbar um eins erhöht wird. \begin{Example} - Kommen wir auf das Beispiel zu \Macro{AtBeginLetter} zurück. Statt den - Zähler explizit innerhalb von \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} - zurückzusetzen, kann dies auch implizit erfolgen, indem der Zähler - \Counter{Frage} abhängig von \Counter{letter} definiert wird: + Kommen wir auf das Beispiel zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtBeginLetter} + zurück. Statt den Zähler explizit innerhalb von + \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} zurückzusetzen, kann dies auch implizit + erfolgen, indem der Zähler \Counter{Frage} abhängig von \Counter{letter} + definiert wird: \begin{lstcode} \newcounter{Frage}[letter] \newcommand{\Frage}[1]{% @@ -744,15 +727,12 @@ des Briefes die Nummer der letzten Seite des Briefes auszugeben. Da die Ausgabe allerdings erst nach mehreren \LaTeX-Läufen -- meist zwei oder drei -- gültig. Achten Sie gegebenenfalls auf entsprechende \emph{Rerun}-Meldungen in der Terminal-Ausgabe oder der \File{log}-Datei.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterlastpage}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thisletter}% -\EndIndex{Counter}{letter}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{opening}\Parameter{Anrede} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{opening}% Dies ist eine der wichtigsten Anweisungen in \Class{scrlttr2}. Vordergründig wird damit die \PName{Anrede}\Index{Anrede} des Briefes, beispielsweise »Sehr geehrte Frau \dots«, gesetzt. Tatsächlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt diese @@ -766,10 +746,10 @@ gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben. \begin{Example} Kommen wir auf das Beispiel von - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter.example} zurück. Wird dieses + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter.example} zurück. Wird dieses um eine Anrede ergänzt, dann ergibt sich aus \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-0.tex} - der Briefbogen von \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-0}. + der Briefbogen von \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0}. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit @@ -778,7 +758,7 @@ gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben. Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-0}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-0} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-0} \end{figure} \end{Example} \iftrue % Umbruchkorrekturtext @@ -788,13 +768,12 @@ gesetzt werden, so muss eben das Argument von \Macro{opening} leer bleiben. waren. Heute sind persönliche Anreden auch bei Massensendungen üblich.% \end{Explain}% \fi -\EndIndex{Cmd}{opening}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{closing}\Parameter{Grußfloskel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{closing}% Mit der Anweisung \Macro{closing} wird in erster Linie die \PName{Grußfloskel}\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß} gesetzt. Diese kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten dann @@ -802,15 +781,15 @@ mit doppeltem Backslash voneinander getrennt werden. Absätze innerhalb der \PName{Grußfloskel} sind jedoch nicht gestattet. Darüber hinaus setzt diese Anweisung aber auch noch gleich den Inhalt der -Variablen \Variable{signature} als Signatur. Näheres zur Signatur und deren -Konfiguration ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature} zu entnehmen. +Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature} als Signatur. Näheres zur Signatur und deren +Konfiguration ist \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature} zu entnehmen. \begin{Example} Erweitern wir unser Beispiel um einige Zeilen Brieftext und eine Grußfloskel zu: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-1.tex} - Damit sieht das Ergebnis wie in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-1} aus. + Damit sieht das Ergebnis wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1} aus. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, @@ -819,17 +798,16 @@ Konfiguration ist \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} ab Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-1}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-1} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-1} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{closing}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{ps} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ps}% Diese Anweisung schaltet lediglich auf das Postskriptum\Index{Postskriptum} um. Dazu wird ein neuer Absatz begonnen und ein vertikaler Abstand -- in der Regel zur Signatur -- @@ -842,7 +820,7 @@ automatisch noch optional. \begin{Example} Unser Beispielbrief, um ein Postskriptum erweitert, \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-2.tex} - sieht dann wie in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-2} aus. + sieht dann wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-2} aus. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, @@ -852,7 +830,7 @@ automatisch noch optional. DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-2}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-2} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-2} \end{figure} \end{Example} @@ -869,16 +847,13 @@ automatisch noch optional. \fi \end{Explain} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ps} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{cc}\Parameter{Verteiler}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{ccseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{cc}\Parameter{Verteiler} + \Variable{ccseparator} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cc}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{ccseparator}% Ein \PName{Verteiler}\Index{Verteiler} kann mit der Anweisung \Macro{cc} gesetzt werden. Der \PName{Verteiler} wird der Anweisung dabei als Argument übergeben. Wenn der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen @@ -893,7 +868,7 @@ trennen. Der Beispielbrief soll dieses Mal nicht nur an die Vorsitzende, sondern mit Verteiler auch an alle Mitglieder des Vereins gehen: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-3.tex}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-3} zu sehen. + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-3} zu sehen. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, @@ -903,22 +878,18 @@ trennen. für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-3}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-3} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-3} \end{figure} \end{Example} Vor dem Verteiler wird automatisch ein Abstand eingefügt.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{ccseparator}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{cc}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{encl}\Parameter{Anlagen}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{enclseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{encl}\Parameter{Anlagen} + \Variable{enclseparator} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{encl}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{enclseparator}% Die \PName{Anlagen}\Index{Anlagen} sind genauso aufgebaut wie der Verteiler. Der einzige Unterschied besteht darin, dass die Einleitung hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen @@ -928,7 +899,7 @@ hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen beigefügt. Da es nur eine Anlage gibt, wird auch die voreingestellte Bezeichnung passend geändert: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-4.tex} - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-4} zu sehen. + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4} zu sehen. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, @@ -938,65 +909,22 @@ hier von der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-4}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-4} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-4} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{encl}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{enclseparator}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Briefe>Aufbau} +\EndIndexGroup -\section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument oder einen Brief} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{4} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} - -\begin{Example} - Angenommen, bei dem Verein aus dem Beispielbrief handelt es sich um die - \emph{»Freunde ungesunder Schriftgrößen«}, weshalb er in 14\Unit{pt} statt - in 12\Unit{pt} gesetzt werden soll. Dies kann durch eine kleine Änderung der - ersten Zeile erreicht werden:% - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-6}% - Alternativ könnte die Option auch als optionales Argument von - \Environment{letter} gesetzt werden: - \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-5}% - Da bei dieser späten Änderung der Schriftgröße der Satzspiegel nicht - geändert wird, unterscheiden sich die beiden Ergebnisse in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6}. - \begin{figure} - \centering -% \setcapindent{0pt} -% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, -% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer -% Schrift}]{Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, -% Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer -% Schrift (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für -% DIN-Briefe); links wurde die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von -% \Environment{letter} gesetzt, rechts als optionales Argument von -% \Macro{documentclass}}[l] - \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-5}}\quad - \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-6}} -% \end{captionbeside} - \caption[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, - Grußfloskel, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund - großer Schrift}] - {Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, - Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und ungesund großer Schrift (Datum und - Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); links wurde - die Schriftgröße als optionales Argument von \Environment{letter} - gesetzt, rechts als optionales Argument von \Macro{documentclass}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-5-6} - \end{figure} -\end{Example} -% -\EndIndex{Option}{fontsize~=\PName{Größe}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Schrift>Groesse=Größe} +\LoadCommonFile{fontsize} % \section{Wahl der Schriftgröße für das Dokument} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{5} % \section{Textauszeichnungen} +\LoadCommonFile{textmarkup} % \section{Textauszeichnungen} \section{Briefbogen} \seclabel{firstpage} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Briefbogen} Der Briefbogen ist die erste Seite und damit das Aushängeschild jedes @@ -1006,10 +934,10 @@ und Logo bereits enthalten sind. Bei \KOMAScript{} sind diese Elemente frei positionierbar. Damit ist es nicht nur möglich, einen Briefbogen direkt nachzubilden, sondern auch vorgesehene Felder wie die Anschrift unmittelbar auszufüllen. Die freie Positionierbarkeit wird über Pseudolängen (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength} ab -\autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.pseudoLength}) erreicht. Eine schematische +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength} ab +\autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.pseudoLength}) erreicht. Eine schematische Darstellung des Briefbogens und der dafür verwendeten Variablen ist in -\autoref{fig:scrlttr2.variables} zu finden. Dabei sind die Namen der Variablen +\autoref{fig:\LabelBase.variables} zu finden. Dabei sind die Namen der Variablen zur besseren Unterscheidung von Anweisungen und deren Argumenten fett gedruckt. @@ -1023,14 +951,13 @@ Briefseiten abgesehen von der ersten. \includegraphics[scale=0.99]{varDIN} \caption{Schematische Darstellung des Briefbogens mit den wichtigsten Anweisungen und Variablen für die skizzierten Elemente} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.variables} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.variables} \end{figure} \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{foldmarks}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{foldmarks}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Falt- oder Falzmarken sind kleine horizontale Striche am linken und kleine vertikale Striche am oberen Rand. \KOMAScript{} unterstützt für den Briefbogen derzeit drei konfigurierbare horizontale und eine konfigurierbare vertikale @@ -1043,20 +970,20 @@ aktiviert oder deaktiviert werden. Die einzelnen Teile müssen dabei nicht äquidistant sein. Die Positionen von drei der vier horizontalen und der vertikalen Marke sind über Pseudolängen konfigurierbar (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.foldmarks} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos}). +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos}). Über die Option \Option{foldmarks} können entweder mit den Standardwerten für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind, alle konfigurierten Faltmarken am linken und oberen Rand ein- und ausgeschaltet werden, oder\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} es kann durch die Angabe eines oder -mehrerer Buchstaben aus \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.foldmark} die Verwendung der +mehrerer Buchstaben aus \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.foldmark} die Verwendung der einzelnen Faltmarken gezielt konfiguriert werden. Auch in diesem Fall werden die Faltmarken nur dann angezeigt, wenn die Faltmarken nicht mit \PValue{false}, \PValue{off} oder \PValue{no} generell abgeschaltet wurden. Die genaue Position der Faltmarken ist von den Einstellungen des Anwenders beziehungsweise der \File{lco}-Dateien (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und \PValue{TBMPL}. % \begin{table} @@ -1070,7 +997,7 @@ abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und \PValue{TBMPL}. }]{% \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% Kombinierbare Werte für die Konfiguration der Faltmarken mit der - Option \Option{foldmarks}\label{tab:scrlttr2.foldmark}% + Option \Option{foldmarks}\label{tab:\LabelBase.foldmark}% }[l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} \toprule @@ -1103,7 +1030,7 @@ abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und \PValue{TBMPL}. sollten Sie lieber auf Nummer Sicher gehen. Unser Beispiel ist dann entsprechend abzuändern.% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-7}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-7} zu sehen. + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7} zu sehen. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit Anschrift, @@ -1113,25 +1040,22 @@ abhängig. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{true} und \PValue{TBMPL}. (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-7}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-7} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-7} \end{figure} \end{Example} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}\LabelFontElement{foldmark}% Über\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} das Element \FontElement{foldmark} kann die Farbe der Faltmarken geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verwendet. Voreingestellt ist +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verwendet. Voreingestellt ist keine Änderung.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{foldmark}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{foldmarks~=\PName{Einstellung}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{enlargefirstpage}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{enlargefirstpage}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{enlargefirstpage~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% \begin{Explain} Die erste Seite eines Briefes fällt % \iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur @@ -1151,18 +1075,17 @@ werden, falls der Fuß der ersten Seite dies erlaubt, so kann das mit dieser Option erreicht werden. Es passt dann bestenfalls etwas mehr Text auf die erste Seite. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärung zur Pseudolänge \PLength{firstfootvpos} auf -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}. Als +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{false}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{enlargefirstpage~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{firsthead}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{firsthead}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{firsthead~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Das\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} oberste Element eines Briefbogens ist normalerweise der Briefkopf. Bei \KOMAScript{} kann mit der Option \Option{firsthead} gewählt werden, ob der Briefkopf auf dem Briefbogen @@ -1171,14 +1094,13 @@ Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. In der Voreinstellung ist der Briefkopf aktiviert.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{firsthead~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromalign}\PName{Methode} + \OptionVName{fromalign}{Methode} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{Briefkopf}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromalign~=\PName{Methode}}% Die\important{\Option{fromalign}} Option \Option{fromalign} bestimmt, wo der Absender\Index{Absender} auf der ersten Seite platziert werden soll. Neben verschiedenen Platzierungen im Briefkopf gibt es @@ -1188,16 +1110,17 @@ unter zu bringen. Gleichzeitig\textnote{Achtung!} dient diese Option als zentraler Schalter, um die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung überhaupt zu aktivieren oder zu deaktivieren. Sind die Erweiterungen deaktiviert, so bleiben die übrigen nachfolgend angegebenen Optionen ohne Wirkung. Mögliche -Werte für \Option{fromalign} sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromalign} zu +Werte für \Option{fromalign} sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}. % -\EndIndex{Option}{fromalign~=\PName{Methode}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{table} + \Index{Briefkopf}% \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromalign} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{fromalign} zur Platzierung des Absenders auf dem Briefbogen von \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromalign} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromalign} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{center}, \PValue{centered}, \PValue{middle}}{% Absender wird innerhalb des Briefkopfs zentriert; ein Logo wird @@ -1213,14 +1136,14 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}. \entry{\PValue{locationleft}, \PValue{leftlocation}}{% Absender steht linksbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch - deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \Option{firsthead} wieder aktiviert - werden.}% + deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead} + wieder aktiviert werden.}% \entry{\PValue{locationright}, \PValue{rightlocation}, \PValue{location}}{% Absender steht rechtsbündig in der Absenderergänzung; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls darüber platziert; der Briefkopf wird automatisch - deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \Option{firsthead} wieder aktiviert - werden.}% + deaktiviert, kann aber über Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.firsthead} + wieder aktiviert werden.}% \entry{\PValue{right}}{% Absender steht rechtsbündig im Briefkopf; ein Logo wird gegebenenfalls linksbündig platziert; die Erweiterungen der Briefkopfgestaltung werden @@ -1228,20 +1151,16 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist der Wert \PValue{left}. \end{desctabular} \end{table} + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromrule}\PName{Position}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromname}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromaddress}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \OptionVName{fromrule}{Position} + \Variable{fromname} + \Variable{fromaddress} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromrule~=\PName{Position}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromname}% Der\important{\Variable{fromname}} Name des Absenders wird über die Variable \Variable{fromname} bestimmt. Im Briefkopf wird dabei die \PName{Bezeichnung} -(siehe auch \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, -\autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}) nicht gesetzt. +(siehe auch \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, +\autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) nicht gesetzt. Optional\important{\OptionValue{fromrule}{aftername}} kann mit Einstellung \OptionValue{fromrule}{aftername} im erweiterten Briefkopf auf den Namen eine @@ -1249,7 +1168,7 @@ horizontale Linie folgen. Alternativ\important[i]{\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}\KOption{fromrule}\\\quad\PValue{afteraddress}\end{tabular}} kann die Linie mit \OptionValue{fromrule}{afteraddress} auch unterhalb des kompletten Absenders gesetzt werden. Eine Übersicht über alle möglichen Einstellungen für -die Linie bietet \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromrule}. Die Länge der Linie wird +die Linie bietet \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}. Die Länge der Linie wird über die Pseudolänge \PLength{fromrulewidth} bestimmt. \begin{table} @@ -1265,7 +1184,7 @@ die Linie bietet \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromrule}. Die Länge der Linie wird Platzierung einer horizontalen Linie im Absender des erweiterten Briefkopfs von \Class{scrlttr2}% } - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromrule}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromrule}% % [l] % \begin{minipage}[t]{.6\linewidth}% \begin{desctabular} @@ -1288,12 +1207,13 @@ aktiviert. Im Standardbriefkopf wird die Linie immer nach dem Namen gesetzt. Unter\important{\Variable{fromaddress}} dem Namen folgt die Anschrift des Absenders. Diese wird über die Variable \Variable{fromaddress} bestimmt. Im Briefkopf wird dabei die \PName{Bezeichnung} (siehe auch -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}) nicht +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}) nicht gesetzt. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromname}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}\LabelFontElement{fromaddress}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromname}\LabelFontElement{fromname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}\LabelFontElement{fromrule}% Die Schrift, die für den kompletten Absender verwendet wird, kann über das Element \FontElement{fromaddress}\IndexFontElement{fromaddress}% \important{\FontElement{fromaddress}} eingestellt werden. Abweichungen davon @@ -1307,9 +1227,7 @@ Schriftumschaltung hauptsächlich dazu gedacht, die Farbe der Linie ändern zu können, um etwa Grau an Stelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu \cite{package:xcolor}.% % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromrule}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromname}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{fromaddress}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Example} Geben wir nun dem Absender @@ -1327,28 +1245,28 @@ können, um etwa Grau an Stelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu {Ergebnis eines kleinen Briefes mit Absender, Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen und Verteiler (Datum und Faltmarken entstammen den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); links der - Standardbriefkopf mit \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, rechts der - erweiterte Briefkopf mit \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9} + Standardbriefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, rechts der + erweiterte Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} \end{figure} Dabei wird zunächst einmal nicht der erweiterte Briefkopf, sondern nur der Standardbriefkopf verwendet. Das Ergebnis ist in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9}, links zu sehen. Im Vergleich dazu ist + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9}, links zu sehen. Im Vergleich dazu ist rechts daneben das gleiche Beispiel, jedoch mit Option - \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}, also mit den aktivierten Erweiterungen für + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}, also mit den aktivierten Erweiterungen für den Briefkopf, abgebildet. Wie zu sehen ist, hat diese Variante zunächst einmal keine Linie. - In \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-8-9} taucht nun auch erstmals eine Signatur + In \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-8-9} taucht nun auch erstmals eine Signatur unter dem Gruß auf. Diese wird automatisch aus dem Absendername gewonnen. Wie sie konfiguriert werden kann, ist in - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.closing} zu + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.closing} zu finden. Nun soll der Brief mit aktivierter Erweiterung für den Briefkopf mit Hilfe der Option \Option{fromrule} auch noch eine Linie unter dem Namen erhalten:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-11.tex}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-10-11} rechts zu sehen. % + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-10-11} rechts zu sehen. % \iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur Im Vergleich dazu ist links daneben das gleiche Beispiel noch einmal mit dem Standardbriefkopf und ohne Reaktion auf die zusätzliche Option. @@ -1368,9 +1286,9 @@ können, um etwa Grau an Stelle von Schwarz zu verwenden. Siehe hierzu Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); links der Standardbriefkopf mit - \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, rechts der erweiterte - Briefkopf mit \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-10-11} + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, rechts der erweiterte + Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-10-11} \end{figure} \end{Example} @@ -1386,65 +1304,39 @@ innerhalb der Absenderangaben normalerweise nicht gestattet% . Man muss \Class{scrlttr2} schon sehr genau kennen, um solche Mittel gegebenenfalls sinnvoll im Absender einsetzen zu können. Außerdem sollte man in dem Fall unbedingt die Variablen für Rücksendeadresse (siehe Variable -\Variable{backaddress}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress}) und -Signatur (siehe Variable \Variable{signature}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature}) selbst setzen.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}) und Signatur (siehe Variable +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}) selbst setzen.% \else % \ und hätten außerdem gegebenenfalls Auswirkungen auf die Rücksendeadresse -(siehe Variable \Variable{backaddress}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress}) und Signatur (siehe Variable -\Variable{signature}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature}).% +(siehe Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.backaddress}) und Signatur (siehe Variable +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}).% \fi % % -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromname}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromaddress}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromrule~=\PName{Position}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{symbolicnames}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{fromphone}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{frommobilephone}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{fromfax}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{fromemail}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{fromurl}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromphone}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{frommobilephone}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromfax}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromemail}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromurl}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{phoneseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{mobilephoneseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{faxseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{emailseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{urlseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}% + \OptionVName{symbolicnames}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{fromphone}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{frommobilephone}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{fromfax}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{fromemail}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{fromurl}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Variable{fromphone} + \Variable{frommobilephone} + \Variable{fromfax} + \Variable{fromemail} + \Variable{fromurl} + \Variable{phoneseparator} + \Variable{mobilephoneseparator} + \Variable{faxseparator} + \Variable{emailseparator} + \Variable{urlseparator} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{symbolicnames~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromphone~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{frommobilephone~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromfax~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromemail~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{fromurl~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromphone}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{frommobilephone}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromfax}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromemail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromurl}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{emailseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{faxseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{phoneseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{mobilephoneseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{urlseparator}% Mit Hilfe der fünf Optionen \Option{fromphone}, \Option{frommobilephone}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, \Option{fromfax}, \Option{fromemail} und \Option{fromurl} kann bestimmt werden, ob die @@ -1455,18 +1347,18 @@ soll. Als \PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} kann dabei einer der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} verwendet werden. Voreingestellt ist jeweils \PValue{false}. Die Inhalte selbst werden über die gleichnamigen Variablen bestimmt. Die Voreinstellungen -für die dabei verwendeten Bezeichnungen sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm} +für die dabei verwendeten Bezeichnungen sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm} zu entnehmen, die verwendeten Trennzeichen, die zwischen der \PName{Bezeichnung} und dem \PName{Inhalt} einer Variablen eingefügt werden, -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator}. +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator}. Mit\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important{\Option{symbolicnames}} Option \Option{symbolicnames} kann diese Voreinstellung auf einen Schlag geändert werden. Die Option versteht die \PName{Ein-Aus-Werte} für einfache Schalter, wie sie in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Durch Aktivierung der Option -werden statt der sprachabhängigen Bezeichner \Macro{emailname}, -\Macro{faxname}, \Macro{mobilephonename} und \Macro{phonename} Symbole aus dem +werden statt der sprachabhängigen Bezeichner \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname}, \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename} und \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} Symbole aus dem \Package{marvosym}\IndexPackage{marvosym}-Paket verwendet. Gleichzeitig entfällt der Doppelpunkt bei der Definition der Trennzeichen. Für die URL entfallen in diesem Fall sowohl der sprachabhängige @@ -1480,22 +1372,22 @@ die Option erst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird. Absenderangaben im Briefkopf}]{Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der Variablen für die Absenderangaben im Briefkopf (die Bezeichnungen und Inhalte der verwendeten Variablen für Trennzeichen ist - \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator} zu entnehmen)} + \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator} zu entnehmen)} \begin{desctabular}[1.8em] - \ventry{fromemail}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{emailseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{emailseparator}}% - \ventry{fromfax}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{faxseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{faxseparator}}% + \ventry{fromemail}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{emailseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{emailseparator}}% + \ventry{fromfax}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{faxseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{faxseparator}}% \ventry{frommobilephone}{% - \Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}}% - \ventry{fromname}{\Macro{headfromname}}% - \ventry{fromphone}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{phoneseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator}}% - \ventry{fromurl}{\Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{urlseparator}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{urlseparator}}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{mobilephoneseparator}}% + \ventry{fromname}{\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname}}% + \ventry{fromphone}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{phoneseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator}}% + \ventry{fromurl}{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{urlseparator}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{urlseparator}}% \end{desctabular} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm} \end{table} \begin{table}[tp] @@ -1512,16 +1404,16 @@ die Option erst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird. \toprule Name & Bezeichnung & Inhalt \\ \midrule - \Variable{emailseparator} & \Macro{emailname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{faxseparator} & \Macro{faxname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{mobilephoneseparator} & \Macro{mobilephonename} & - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator} \\ - \Variable{phoneseparator} & \Macro{phonename} & \texttt{:\~} \\ - \Variable{urlseparator} & \Macro{wwwname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{emailseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{faxseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{mobilephoneseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{phoneseparator} \\ + \Variable{phoneseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename} & \texttt{:\~} \\ + \Variable{urlseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname} & \texttt{:\~} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabularx} % \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.fromSeparator} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.fromSeparator} \end{table} \begin{Example} @@ -1530,11 +1422,11 @@ die Option erst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird. soll die Trennlinie nun nach dem Briefkopf stehen. Also gibt er die entsprechenden Optionen an und setzt auch die zugehörigen Variablen:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-12.tex}% - Das Ergebnis aus \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13}, links ist jedoch + Das Ergebnis aus \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13}, links ist jedoch ernüchternd. Die Optionen werden ignoriert. Das liegt daran, dass diese zusätzlichen Variablen und Optionen nur im erweiterten Briefkopf verwendet - werden. Es muss also wie in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13}, rechts die - Option \Option{fromalign} verwendet werden: + werden. Es muss also wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13}, rechts die + Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} verwendet werden: \begin{figure} \centering \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-12}}\quad @@ -1545,16 +1437,16 @@ die Option erst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird. kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); - links der Standardbriefkopf mit \OptionValue{fromalign}{false}, rechts - der erweiterte Briefkopf mit \OptionValue{fromalign}{center}} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-12-13} + links der Standardbriefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{false}, rechts + der erweiterte Briefkopf mit \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-12-13} \end{figure} \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-13.tex} Den Vergleich zweier Alternativen mit linksbündigem Absender durch - Einstellung \OptionValue{fromalign}{left} und rechtsbündigem - Absender durch Einstellung \OptionValue{fromalign}{right} zeigt - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-14-15}. + Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left} und rechtsbündigem + Absender durch Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} zeigt + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15}. \begin{figure} \centering \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-14}}\quad @@ -1565,33 +1457,18 @@ die Option erst nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} aktiviert wird. kleinen Briefes mit erweitertem Absender, Trennlinie, Anschrift, Anrede, Text, Grußfloskel, Signatur, Postskriptum, Anlagen, Verteiler und Lochermarke (das Datum entstammt den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe); - links mit linksbündigem Kopf durch \OptionValue{fromalign}{left}, rechts - mit Option \OptionValue{fromalign}{right} und damit rechtsbündigem Kopf} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-14-15} + links mit linksbündigem Kopf durch \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{left}, rechts + mit Option \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{right} und damit rechtsbündigem Kopf} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-14-15} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{urlseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{mobilephoneseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{phoneseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{faxseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{emailseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromurl} -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromemail} -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromfax} -\EndIndex{Variable}{frommobilephone}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromphone}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromurl~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromemail~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromfax~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{frommobilephone~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromphone~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{symbolicnames~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{fromlogo}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromlogo}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \OptionVName{fromlogo}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Variable{fromlogo} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{Option}{fromlogo~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% \BeginIndex{Variable}{fromlogo}% @@ -1602,7 +1479,7 @@ der Standardwerte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \PValue{false}, also kein Logo. Das Logo selbst wird über die Variable \Variable{fromlogo} definiert. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} für das Logo ist in der Voreinstellung leer und wird von \KOMAScript{} auch nicht verwendet (siehe -auch \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% +auch \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.fromTerm}).% \begin{Example} Herr Musterfrau findet es besonders schick, wenn er seine Briefe mit einem Logo versieht. Sein Logo hat er als Grafikdatei gespeichert, die er gerne @@ -1610,8 +1487,8 @@ auch \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% zusätzlich das Paket \Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} (siehe \cite{package:graphics}) ein.% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-16}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-16-18}, - \autopageref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-16-18} links oben zu sehen. Die beiden + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18}, + \autopageref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18} links oben zu sehen. Die beiden anderen Bilder in dieser Abbildung zeigen das Ergebnis bei rechtsbündigem und bei zentriertem Absender. \begin{figure} @@ -1630,18 +1507,16 @@ auch \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.fromTerm}).% mit zentriertem Absender und rechts mit rechtsbündigem Absender}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-18}}\quad \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-16-18} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-16-18} \end{figure} \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromlogo}% -\EndIndex{Option}{fromlogo~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{firsthead}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{firsthead} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{firsthead}% In vielen Fällen reichen die Möglichkeiten aus, die \Class{scrlttr2} über Optionen und obige Variablen für die Gestaltung des Briefkopfes bietet. In einigen Fällen will man jedoch den Briefkopf freier gestalten können. In @@ -1653,7 +1528,7 @@ definiert man den gewünschten Aufbau über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \Macro{parbox}-Anweisung (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) mehrere Boxen neben- und untereinander gesetzt werden. Einem versierten Anwender sollte es so möglich sein, seinen eigenen Briefkopf zu gestalten. Natürlich kann und sollte -man dabei auch Zugriffe auf andere Variablen mit Hilfe von \Macro{usekomavar} +man dabei auch Zugriffe auf andere Variablen mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar} nehmen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{firsthead} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht verwendet. \iffree{}{Ein ausführliches Beispiel für @@ -1664,73 +1539,51 @@ Versionen von \Class{scrlttr2} existiert auch noch Anweisung \Macro{firsthead}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{firsthead}. Diese sollte jedoch nicht mehr verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{firsthead}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Briefkopf}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{addrfield}\PName{Modus}\\ - \KOption{backaddress}\PName{Wert}\\ - \KOption{priority}\PName{Priorität}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{toname}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{toaddress}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{backaddress}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{backaddressseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{specialmail}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{fromzipcode}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{zipcodeseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{place}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{PPcode}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{PPdatamatrix}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{addresseeimage}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \OptionVName{addrfield}{Modus} + \OptionVName{backaddress}{Wert} + \OptionVName{priority}{Priorität} + \Variable{toname} + \Variable{toaddress} + \Variable{backaddress} + \Variable{backaddressseparator} + \Variable{specialmail} + \Variable{fromzipcode} + \Variable{zipcodeseparator} + \Variable{place} + \Variable{PPcode} + \Variable{PPdatamatrix} + \Variable{addresseeimage} \end{Declaration}% \BeginIndex{}{Anschrift}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{addrfield~=\PName{Modus}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{toname}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{toaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{backaddress~=\PName{Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{backaddress}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{backaddressseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{priority~=\PName{Priorität}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{specialmail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{fromzipcode}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{zipcodeseparator}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{place}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{PPcode}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{PPdatamatrix}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{addresseeimage}% Mit der Option \Option{addrfield} kann gewählt werden, ob ein Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden soll oder nicht. Voreingestellt ist die \iffree{}{\nopagebreak} % Umbruchoptimierung Verwendung eines Anschriftfeldes. Die Option versteht die in -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.addrfield}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} -%, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.addrfield} +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} +%, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield} angegebenen Werte für den \PName{Modus}. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{true}. Bei den Werten \PValue{true}, \PValue{topaligned}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}}, \PValue{PP} und \PValue{backgroundimage} werden Name und Adresse des Empfängers, die im Anschriftfeld gesetzt werden, über das -Argument der Umgebung \Environment{letter} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.env.letter} ) +Argument der Umgebung \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.env.letter} ) bestimmt. Diese Angaben werden außerdem in die Variablen \Variable{toname} und -\Variable{toaddress} kopiert. Die voreingestellten Schriftarten -können\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} über die Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Dabei -existieren drei Elemente. Zunächst gibt es das Element +\Variable{toaddress} kopiert. +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{addressee}\LabelFontElement{addressee}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toname}\LabelFontElement{toname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{toaddress}\LabelFontElement{toaddress}% +Die voreingestellten Schriftarten können\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} +über die Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden. Dabei existieren +drei Elemente. Zunächst gibt es das Element \FontElement{addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee}% \important{\FontElement{addressee}}, das generell für die Anschrift zuständig ist. Dazu gibt es die Elemente @@ -1739,13 +1592,14 @@ und \FontElement{toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress}% \important{\FontElement{toaddress}}, die sich nur auf den Namen bzw. die Adresse des Empfängers beziehen. Für \FontElement{toname} und \FontElement{toaddress} können also Abweichungen von der Einstellung für -\FontElement{addressee} definiert werden. +\FontElement{addressee} definiert werden.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{table} \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{addrfield} zur Auswahl der Art der Anschrift bei \Class{scrlttr2}% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.addrfield}}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.addrfield}}% \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{backgroundimage}, \PValue{PPbackgroundimage}, \PValue{PPBackgroundImage}, \PValue{PPBackGroundImage}, @@ -1797,17 +1651,21 @@ das Setzen der unterstrichenen Rücksendeadresse. Die Rücksendeadresse selbst wird über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variable \Variable{backaddress} bestimmt. Voreingestellt ist hier der über -\Variable{fromname} angegebene Name und die über \Variable{fromaddress} -angegebene Adresse, wobei der Doppelbackslash in diesem Fall durch den Inhalt -der Variablen \Variable{backaddressseparator} ersetzte wird. Für diese ist ein -Komma gefolgt von einem nicht umbrechbaren Leerzeichen vordefiniert. Die -\PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{backaddress} wird von -\KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. Die Schriftart der Rücksendeadresse ist über das -Element \FontElement{backaddress}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{backaddress}% -\important{\FontElement{backaddress}} konfigurierbar. Voreingestellt ist -hierbei \Macro{sffamily} (siehe \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements}), -wobei vor der Anwendung der konfigurierten Schriftumschaltung noch auf -\Macro{scriptsize} umgeschaltet wird. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} angegebene Name und die über +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromaddress} angegebene Adresse, wobei der +Doppelbackslash in diesem Fall durch den Inhalt der Variablen +\Variable{backaddressseparator} ersetzt wird. Für diese ist ein Komma gefolgt +von einem nicht umbrechbaren Leerzeichen vordefiniert. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} +der Variablen \Variable{backaddress} wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. +\BeginIndexGroup\BeginIndex{FontElement}{backaddress}% +\LabelFontElement{backaddress}% +Die Schriftart der Rücksendeadresse ist über das Element +\FontElement{backaddress}\important{\FontElement{backaddress}} +konfigurierbar. Voreingestellt ist hierbei \Macro{sffamily} (siehe +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}), wobei vor der Anwendung der +konfigurierten Schriftumschaltung noch auf \Macro{scriptsize} umgeschaltet +wird.% +\EndIndexGroup Während die Adresse in der Voreinstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{true}\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and @@ -1816,12 +1674,6 @@ zentriert wird, entfällt die Zentrierung mit \OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}% \important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{topaligned}}. Sie wird dann oben bündig im verfügbaren Platz gesetzt. -% -\EndIndex{Variable}{backaddressseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{backaddress}% -\EndIndex{Option}{backaddress~=\PName{Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{toaddress}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{toname}% \begin{table} % \centering @@ -1833,44 +1685,45 @@ verfügbaren Platz gesetzt. }]{% \hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente des Anschriftfensters% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements}% }% [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} \toprule Element & Voreinstellung \\ \midrule - \FontElement{addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.addressee}\IndexFontElement{addressee} & \\ - \FontElement{backaddress}\IndexFontElement{backaddress} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.backaddress}\IndexFontElement{backaddress} & \Macro{sffamily}% \\ - \FontElement{PPdata}\IndexFontElement{PPdata} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.PPdata}\IndexFontElement{PPdata} & \Macro{sffamily}% \\ - \FontElement{PPlogo}\IndexFontElement{PPlogo} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.PPlogo}\IndexFontElement{PPlogo} & \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}% \\ - \FontElement{priority}\IndexFontElement{priority} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.priority}\IndexFontElement{priority} & \Macro{fontsize}\PParameter{10pt}\PParameter{10pt}% \Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}% \\ - \FontElement{prioritykey}\IndexFontElement{prioritykey} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.prioritykey}\IndexFontElement{prioritykey} & \Macro{fontsize}\PParameter{24.88pt}\PParameter{24.88pt}% \Macro{selectfont}% \\ - \FontElement{specialmail}\IndexFontElement{specialmail} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.specialmail}\IndexFontElement{specialmail} & \\ - \FontElement{toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.toaddress}\IndexFontElement{toaddress} & \\ - \FontElement{toname}\IndexFontElement{toname} & + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.toname}\IndexFontElement{toname} & \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{specialmail} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}\LabelFontElement{specialmail} Zwischen Rücksendeadresse und Empfängeradresse kann bei \iffree{der }{}Standardeinstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} noch eine optionale Versandart\Index{Versandart} gesetzt werden. Diese wird genau dann gesetzt, @@ -1880,39 +1733,42 @@ wird, was der Voreinstellung entspricht. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} von \Variable{specialmail} wird durch \Class{scrlttr2} nicht genutzt. Die Ausrichtung wird mit Hilfe der Pseudolängen \PLength{specialmailindent} und \PLength{specialmailrightindent} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent}) festgelegt. Die +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent}) festgelegt. Die voreingestellte Schriftart des Elements\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \FontElement{specialmail}\important{\FontElement{specialmail}}, die Sie -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{specialmail}% - +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der +Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{priority}\LabelFontElement{priority}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{prioritykey}\LabelFontElement{prioritykey}% Wird\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}\important[i]{\OptionValue{priority}{A}\\ \OptionValue{priority}{B}} hingegen mit \OptionValue{priority}{A} oder -\OptionValue{priority}{B} (siehe \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.priority}) eine +\OptionValue{priority}{B} (siehe \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.priority}) eine internationale Priorität ausgewählt, so wird diese bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{true} als Versandart und bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}} an entsprechender Stelle im Port-Payé-Kopf gesetzt. Dabei wird die Grundschrift\important[i]{\FontElement{priority}\\ \FontElement{prioritykey}} über das Element -\FontElement{priority}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{priority} und die davon +\FontElement{priority} und die davon abweichende Schrift für den Prioritätsschlüssel, »A« oder »B«, über das -Element \FontElement{prioritykey}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{prioritykey} +Element \FontElement{prioritykey} bestimmt. Die voreingestellten Schriftarten der beiden Elemente, die Sie -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% -\EndIndex{Variable}{specialmail}% +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} entnehmen können, kann mit Hilfe der +Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{table} \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{priority} zur Auswahl einer internationalen Priorität im Adressfeld von \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.priority} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.priority} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{false}, \PValue{off}, \PValue{no}, \PValue{manual}}{% Es wird keine Priorität gesetzt.}% @@ -1937,10 +1793,10 @@ von \Variable{fromzipcode}, die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{fromzipcode} gefolgt vom \PName{Inhalt} von \Variable{zipcodeseparator} vorangestellt. Für diese \PName{Bezeichnung} hängt die Voreinstellung von der verwendeten \File{lco}-Datei (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) ab. Für -den \PName{Inhalt} von \Variable{zipcodeseparator} ist hingegen ein kleiner -Abstand, gefolgt von einem Streckenstrich, gefolgt von einem kleinen Abstand -(\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}) voreingestellt. +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile} ab \autopageref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) +ab. Für den \PName{Inhalt} von \Variable{zipcodeseparator} ist hingegen ein +kleiner Abstand, gefolgt von einem Streckenstrich, gefolgt von einem kleinen +Abstand (\Macro{,}\texttt{-{}-}\Macro{,}) voreingestellt. Darüber\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}} hinaus wird bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}\important{\OptionValue{addrfield}{PP}} im @@ -1949,18 +1805,26 @@ identifiziert. Dieser ist in Variable \Variable{PPcode} abgelegt. Rechts von der Anschrift kann zusätzlich eine Data-Matrix gesetzt werden, die in Variable \Variable{PPdatamatrix} abgelegt ist. +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPdata}\LabelFontElement{PPdata} Postleitzahl\ChangedAt{v3.03}{\Class{scrlttr2}}, Ort und Code werden in der Voreinstellung mit einer Schrift der Größe 8\,pt gesetzt. Dabei wird die -Schrift des Elements \FontElement{PPdata}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{PPdata}% +Schrift des Elements \FontElement{PPdata}% \important{\FontElement{PPdata}} verwendet. Dessen Voreinstellung ist -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.AddresseeElements} zu entnehmen und kann mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verändert werden.% -\EndIndex{Variable}{PPcode}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{place}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{zipcodeseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{fromzipcode}% +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} zu entnehmen und kann mit Hilfe der +Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +verändert werden.% +\EndIndexGroup + +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{PPlogo}\LabelFontElement{PPlogo} +Für den Port-Payé-Schriftzug »P.P.« kommt dagegen die Schrift des Elements +\FontElement{PPlogo}\important{\FontElement{PPlogo}} zur Anwendung. Dessen +Voreinstellung ist ebenfalls Tabelle +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.AddresseeElements} zu entnehmen.% +\EndIndexGroup Bei\important[i]{\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{addrfield}\\\quad\PValue{backgroundimage}\end{tabular}\strut\\ @@ -1972,15 +1836,16 @@ abgelegt. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} dieser Variablen wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. Während bei Einstellung \OptionValue{addrfield}{image} außer der Abbildung nichts gesetzt wird, wird bei \OptionValue{addrfield}{backgroundimage} zusätzlich noch die Anschrift aus dem -obligatorischen Argument der \Environment{letter}-Umgebung ausgegeben. +obligatorischen Argument der \DescRef{\LabelBase.env.letter}-Umgebung +ausgegeben. Die Anordnung des Port-Payé-Kopfes wird ebenso wie die Anordnung der Port-Payé-Anschrift über die Pseudolängen \PLength{toaddrindent} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent}) sowie +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent}) sowie \PLength{PPheadwidth} und \PLength{PPheadheight} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}) bestimmt. Für die +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight}) bestimmt. Für die Anordnung der Data-Matrix ist die Pseudolänge \PLength{PPdatamatrixvskip} -(siehe \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip}) +(siehe \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip}) zuständig. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird an dieser Stelle ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen, @@ -1990,37 +1855,30 @@ externe Abbildungen gesetzt werden, so ist beispielsweise das Grafikpaket \Package{graphics}\IndexPackage{graphics} oder \Package{graphicx}\IndexPackage{graphicx} zu laden und in den Variablen dessen Anweisung \Macro{includegraphics} zu verwenden.% -\EndIndex{Variable}{addresseeimage}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{PPdatamatrix}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{addrfield~=\PName{Modus}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{priority~=\PName{Priorität}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Anschrift} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{locfield}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{locfield}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{locfield~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Neben dem Anschriftfeld setzt \Class{scrlttr2} noch ein Feld mit erweiterter Absenderangabe. Der Inhalt ist frei wählbar. -Je\important[i]{\OptionValue{fromalign}{center}\\ +Je\important[i]{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{fromalign}{center}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{fromalign}\\\quad\PValue{locationleft}\end{tabular}\\ \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}} \KOption{fromalign}\\\quad\PValue{locationright}\end{tabular}} nach -Einstellung der oben erklärten Option \Option{fromalign} wird es außerdem für -das Logo des Absenders oder den Absender selbst mitverwendet. Die Breite -dieses Feldes kann beispielsweise in einer \File{lco}-Datei (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.lcoFile}) gesetzt werden. Wird dort die Breite 0 -gesetzt, so kann über die Option \Option{locfield} zwischen zwei -unterschiedlichen Voreinstellungen für die Breite dieses Feldes gewählt -werden. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärungen zur Pseudolänge \Variable{locwidth} +Einstellung der oben erklärten Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.fromalign} +wird es außerdem für das Logo des Absenders oder den Absender selbst +mitverwendet. Die Breite dieses Feldes kann beispielsweise in einer +\File{lco}-Datei (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.lcoFile}) gesetzt werden. Wird +dort die Breite 0 gesetzt, so kann über die Option \Option{locfield} zwischen +zwei unterschiedlichen Voreinstellungen für die Breite dieses Feldes gewählt +werden. Siehe hierzu auch die Erklärungen zur Pseudolänge \PLength{locwidth} in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.locationField}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Mögliche Werte für die -Option sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth}. Mögliche Werte für die +Option sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.locfield} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{narrow}. % \begin{table} @@ -2032,7 +1890,7 @@ Option sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \Class{scrlttr2}}] {Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{locfield} zur Wahl der Breite des Feldes für die Absenderergänzung bei \Class{scrlttr2}% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.locfield}}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.locfield}}% [l] \begin{minipage}[t]{.55\linewidth} \begin{desctabular}[t] @@ -2044,10 +1902,8 @@ Option sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.locfield} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \end{table} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{location}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{location} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{location}% Der Inhalt der Absenderergänzung, soweit er nicht durch Logo oder den Absender selbst belegt ist, wird mit der Variablen \Variable{location} festgelegt. Für den \PName{Inhalt} dieser Variablen dürfen auch Formatierungsanweisungen wie @@ -2059,7 +1915,7 @@ wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. Mitgliedschaft angeben. Er wählt dazu die Absenderergänzung:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-19.tex}% Das entsprechende Feld neben der Anschrift wird dann wie in - \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-19} gesetzt. + \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19} gesetzt. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo, @@ -2071,20 +1927,17 @@ wird von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. den Voreinstellungen für DIN-Briefe)}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-19}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-19} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-19} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{location}% -\EndIndex{Option}{locfield~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Absenderergaenzung=Absenderergänzung}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{numericaldate}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{numericaldate}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{numericaldate~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Mit dieser Option kann zwischen der sprachabhängigen Standarddarstellung des Datums\Index{Datum}\Index{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile} und einem ebenfalls sprachabhängigen, kurzen, rein nummerischen Datum umgeschaltet werden. Die @@ -2099,30 +1952,27 @@ die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \PValue{false} die Verwendung der Standarddarstellung. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{date}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{date} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{date}% Das Datum in der gewählten Darstellung wird in im \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen -\Variable{date} abgelegt. Die Einstellung von \Option{numericaldate} hat keine +\Variable{date} abgelegt. Die Einstellung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate} hat keine Auswirkung, wenn diese Variable überschrieben wird. Gesetzt wird das Datum normalerweise als Teil der Geschäftszeile. Wenn die Geschäftszeile ansonsten leer bleibt wird allerdings nur eine Datumszeile, bestehend aus dem Ort und dem Datum gesetzt. Trotzdem haben auch in diesem Fall die Einstellungen der -nachfolgend beschriebenen Option \Option{refline} Auswirkungen auf diese +nachfolgend beschriebenen Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline} Auswirkungen auf diese Datumszeile. Weitere Informationen zum Ort finden Sie in der Beschreibung zur -Variablen \Variable{place}\IndexVariable{place} auf -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator}.% +Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place}\IndexVariable{place} auf +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.placeseparator}.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{date}% -\EndIndex{Option}{numericaldate~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{refline}\PName{Einstellung} + \OptionVName{refline}{Einstellung} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{refline~=\PName{Einstellung}}% Insbesondere bei Geschäftsbriefen findet sich häufig eine Zeile mit Angaben wie Namenskürzeln\Index{Kuerzel=Kürzel}, Durchwahl\Index{Durchwahl}, Kunden-\Index{Kundennummer} und Rechnungsnummer\Index{Rechnungsnummer} oder @@ -2135,14 +1985,14 @@ Absenderergänzung links und rechts aus dem normalen Satzspiegel herausragen. gewählt werden, dass dies auch für die Geschäftszeile gelten soll. Die Geschäftszeile enthält normalerweise zumindest das Datum, kann aber auch weitere Angaben aufnehmen. Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refline} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt sind +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refline} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt sind \PValue{narrow} und \PValue{dateright}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}.% % \begin{table} \caption[{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} bei \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{refline} zur Konfiguration der Geschäftszeile bei \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.refline} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.refline} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{dateleft}{\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}}% Das Datum steht automatisch links in der Geschäftszeile.}% @@ -2158,22 +2008,12 @@ weitere Angaben aufnehmen. Mögliche Werte für diese Option sind \end{table} \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{yourref}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{yourmail}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{myref}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{customer}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{invoice}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}% + \Variable{yourref} + \Variable{yourmail} + \Variable{myref} + \Variable{customer} + \Variable{invoice} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{yourref}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{yourmail}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{myref}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{customer}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{invoice}% Typische Felder der Geschäftszeile werden über die fünf Variablen \Variable{yourref}, \Variable{yourmail}, \Variable{myref}, \Variable{customer} und \Variable{invoice} verwaltet. % @@ -2182,12 +2022,12 @@ Die Bedeutung dieser Felder % \else % Ihre Bedeutung % \fi % -ist \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.variables}, \autopageref{tab:scrlttr2.variables} zu +ist \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.variables}, \autopageref{tab:\LabelBase.variables} zu entnehmen. Jede dieser Variablen hat auch eine vordefinierte -\PName{Bezeichnung}, die in \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.reflineTerm} zu finden +\PName{Bezeichnung}, die in \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm} zu finden ist. Wie weitere Variablen zur Geschäftszeile hinzugefügt werden können, ist in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} erklärt. +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar} erklärt. \begin{table} % \centering @@ -2199,34 +2039,36 @@ in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.variables} ab Geschäftszeile}] {Vordefinierte Bezeichnungen der typischen Variablen der Geschäftszeile unter Verwendung sprachabhängiger Anweisungen% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.reflineTerm}% + \label{tab:\LabelBase.reflineTerm}% } [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{lll} \toprule Name & Bezeichnung & bei deutscher Sprache \\ \midrule - \Variable{yourref} & \Macro{yourrefname} & Ihr Zeichen \\ - \Variable{yourmail} & \Macro{yourmailname} & Ihr Schreiben vom \\ - \Variable{myref} & \Macro{myrefname} & Unser Zeichen \\ - \Variable{customer} & \Macro{customername} & Kundennummer \\ - \Variable{invoice} & \Macro{invoicename} & Rechnungsnummer \\ - \Variable{date} & \Macro{datename} & Datum \\ + \Variable{yourref} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname} & Ihr Zeichen \\ + \Variable{yourmail} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname} & Ihr Schreiben vom \\ + \Variable{myref} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname} & Unser Zeichen \\ + \Variable{customer} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername} & Kundennummer \\ + \Variable{invoice} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename} & Rechnungsnummer \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename} & Datum \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refname}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refname}\LabelFontElement{refname}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}\LabelFontElement{refvalue}% Schriftart und Farbe\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} der Feldbezeichnung und des Feldinhaltes können über die beiden Elemente \FontElement{refname}% \important[i]{\FontElement{refname}\\\FontElement{refvalue}} und \FontElement{refvalue} geändert werden. Dazu werden die Anweisungen -\Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) verwendet. Die Voreinstellungen -der beiden Elemente sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue} zu entnehmen.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +verwendet. Die Voreinstellungen der beiden Elemente sind +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refnamerefvalue} zu entnehmen.% \begin{table}[tp] % \centering \KOMAoptions{captions=topbeside}% @@ -2235,7 +2077,7 @@ der beiden Elemente sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue} zu entnehmen.% \begin{captionbeside} [{Schriftvoreinstellungen für die Elemente der Geschäftszeile}] {Voreinstellungen für die Schrift der Elemente der Geschäftszeile% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue}} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.refnamerefvalue}} [l] \begin{tabular}[t]{ll} \toprule @@ -2248,54 +2090,53 @@ der beiden Elemente sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refnamerefvalue} zu entnehmen.% \end{captionbeside} \end{table}% % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{refvalue}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{refname}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{place}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{placeseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{placeseparator} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{place}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{placeseparator}% -Sind bis auf \Variable{date} alle Variablen der Geschäftszeile leer, so wird -keine eigentliche Geschäftszeile gesetzt. Stattdessen werden dann nur -Ort\Index{Ort} und Datum\Index{Datum} ausgegeben. Dabei bestimmt -der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \Variable{place} den Ort. Für das -Trennzeichen, das in diesem Fall nach dem Ort gesetzt wird, ist der -\PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \Variable{placeseparator} zuständig. Der -vordefinierte \PName{Inhalt} des Trennzeichens ist dabei ein Komma gefolgt von -einem nicht umbrechbaren Leerzeichen. Ist der Ort leer, so wird auch das -Trennzeichen nicht gesetzt. Der vordefinierte \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen -\Variable{date} ist \Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today} und hängt von der -Einstellung der Option \Option{numericaldate} ab (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate}). +Sind bis auf \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} alle Variablen der +Geschäftszeile leer, so wird keine eigentliche Geschäftszeile +gesetzt. Stattdessen werden dann nur Ort\Index{Ort} und Datum\Index{Datum} +ausgegeben. Dabei bestimmt der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.place} den Ort. Für das Trennzeichen, das in +diesem Fall nach dem Ort gesetzt wird, ist der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen +\Variable{placeseparator} zuständig. Der vordefinierte \PName{Inhalt} des +Trennzeichens ist dabei ein Komma gefolgt von einem nicht umbrechbaren +Leerzeichen. Ist der Ort leer, so wird auch das Trennzeichen nicht +gesetzt. Der vordefinierte \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} ist \Macro{today}\IndexCmd{today} und hängt +von der Einstellung der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate} ab +(siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.numericaldate}). Seit Version~3.09\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Class{scrlttr2}} werden Ort und Datum nicht mehr zwingend rechtsbündig ausgegeben. Stattdessen findet auch im Falle -der Datumszeile die Datumseinstellung von Option \Option{refline}, wie sie in -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.refline} angegeben ist, Anwendung. +der Datumszeile die Datumseinstellung von Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}, wie sie in +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.refline} angegeben ist, Anwendung. -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}\LabelFontElement{placeanddate}% Falls\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Class{scrlttr2}} statt der Geschäftszeile eine solche Datumszeile mit Ort gesetzt wird, so findet nicht die Schrifteinstellung des -Elements \FontElement{refvalue} Anwendung. Stattdessen wird in diesem Fall das -Element \FontElement{placeanddate}\important[i]{\FontElement{placeanddate}} -verwendet, dessen leere Voreinstellung wie gewohnt mit Hilfe der -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden kann.% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{placeanddate}% +Elements \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.refvalue} Anwendung. Stattdessen wird +in diesem Fall das Element +\FontElement{placeanddate}\important[i]{\FontElement{placeanddate}} verwendet, +dessen leere Voreinstellung wie gewohnt mit Hilfe der Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) +geändert werden kann.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Example} Herr Musterfrau setzt nun auch die Variable für den Ort: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-20.tex}% - Damit erscheint vor dem Datum, wie in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-20}, - \autopageref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-20} zu sehen, der Ort gefolgt von den + Damit erscheint vor dem Datum, wie in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20}, + \autopageref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20} zu sehen, der Ort gefolgt von den automatischen Trennzeichen vor dem Datum. Dieses Datum wurde im Beispielcode - über Variable \Variable{date} ebenfalls explizit gesetzt, damit bei einem + über Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.date} ebenfalls explizit gesetzt, damit bei einem späteren \LaTeX-Durchlauf des Briefes das ursprüngliche Datum erhalten bleibt und nicht etwa automatisch das Datum des \LaTeX-Laufs verwendet wird. \begin{figure} @@ -2309,46 +2150,35 @@ Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe Lochermarke}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-20}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-20} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-20} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{place}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{placeseparator}% -% -\EndIndex{Variable}{invoice}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{customer}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{myref}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{yourmail}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{yourref}% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{refline~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -% -\EndIndex{}{Geschaeftszeile=Geschäftszeile}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{title}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{title} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{title}% Bei \Class{scrlttr2} kann ein Brief zusätzlich mit einem Titel\Index{Titel} versehen werden. Der Titel wird zentriert in der Schriftgröße \Macro{LARGE} -unterhalb der Geschäftszeile ausgegeben. % -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}% -Die Schriftart für das -Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} -\FontElement{lettertitle} -\important{\FontElement{lettertitle}} kann mit den -Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden. Dabei sind auch +unterhalb der Geschäftszeile ausgegeben. +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettertitle}\LabelFontElement{lettertitle}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{title}\LabelFontElement{title}% +Die Schriftart für das Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and + \Package{scrletter}} \FontElement{lettertitle} +\important{\FontElement{lettertitle}} kann mit den Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}) geändert werden. Dabei sind auch Größenangaben erlaubt. Die Größe \Macro{LARGE} wird der Schriftauswahl dabei -immer voran gestellt und ist daher auch nicht Teil der -Voreinstellung \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}. Bei -\Class{scrlttr2} kann als Alias für \FontElement{lettertitle} auch -\FontElement{title}\important{\FontElement{title}} -verwendet werden. Bei +immer voran gestellt und ist daher auch nicht Teil der Voreinstellung +\Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{sffamily}\Macro{bfseries}. Bei \Class{scrlttr2} kann +als Alias für \FontElement{lettertitle} auch +\FontElement{title}\important{\FontElement{title}} verwendet werden. Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrletter} mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse ist das nicht möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element \FontElement{title} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel existiert.% @@ -2366,26 +2196,21 @@ Während der \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen, wie im Beispiel gezeigt, den Titel definiert, wird die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen \Variable{title} von \KOMAScript{} nicht genutzt. % -\EndIndex{Variable}{title} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{subject}\PName{Einstellung}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{subject}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{subjectseparator}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \OptionVName{subject}{Einstellung} + \Variable{subject} + \Variable{subjectseparator} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{Betreff}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{subject~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{subject}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{subjectseparator}% Um einen Betreff zu setzen, legt man den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen \Variable{subject} entsprechend fest. Mit Option \OptionValue{subject}{titled}\important{\OptionValue{subject}{titled}} kann dann zum einen gewählt werden, dass der Betreff mit einem Titel versehen werden soll oder nicht. Der Titel wird über die Bezeichnung der Variablen -\Variable{subject} bestimmt (siehe \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.subjectTerm}). Der +\Variable{subject} bestimmt (siehe \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm}). Der vordefinierte Inhalt des Trennzeichens\Index{Trennzeichen} \Variable{subjectseparator} besteht aus einem Doppelpunkt, gefolgt von einem Leerzeichen. @@ -2404,15 +2229,15 @@ Leerzeichen. \toprule Name & Bezeichnung \\ \midrule - \Variable{subject} & \Macro{usekomavar*}\PParameter{subjectseparator}% + \Variable{subject} & \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar*}\PParameter{subjectseparator}% \texttt{\%} \\ & \texttt{\quad}% - \Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{subjectseparator} \\ - \Variable{subjectseparator} & \Macro{subjectname} \\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{subjectseparator} \\ + \Variable{subjectseparator} & \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname} \\ \bottomrule \end{tabular} \end{captionbeside} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.subjectTerm} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.subjectTerm} \end{table} Zum anderen kann über \OptionValue{subject}{afteropening}% @@ -2424,7 +2249,7 @@ soll. Eine andere Formatierung% \OptionValue{subject}{right}} kann mit \OptionValue{subject}{underlined} und \OptionValue{subject}{centered} oder \OptionValue{subject}{right}\ChangedAt{v2.97c}{\Class{scrlttr2}} eingestellt werden. Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} sind -\autoref{tab:scrlttr2.subject} zu entnehmen. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird +\autoref{tab:\LabelBase.subject} zu entnehmen. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird ausdrücklich darauf hingewiesen, dass bei der Einstellung \OptionValue{subject}{underlined} der Betreff komplett in eine Zeile passen muss! Voreingestellt sind \OptionValue{subject}{left}, @@ -2440,7 +2265,7 @@ muss! Voreingestellt sind \OptionValue{subject}{left}, {\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{subject} zur Platzierung und Formatierung eines Betreffs bei \Class{scrlttr2}% - \label{tab:scrlttr2.subject}} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.subject}} [l] \begin{minipage}[t]{.667\linewidth} \begin{desctabular}[t] @@ -2458,12 +2283,15 @@ muss! Voreingestellt sind \OptionValue{subject}{left}, \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}% +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}\LabelFontElement{lettersubject}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{subject}\LabelFontElement{subject}% Der Betreff wird in einer eigenen Schriftart\Index{Schrift>Art} gesetzt. Um -diese zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und -\Macro{addtokomafont} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup} ab -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont}). Für das +diese zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtokomafont} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} ab +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}). Für das Element\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} \FontElement{lettersubject} \important{\FontElement{lettersubject}} ist als Schrift \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries} voreingestellt. Bei @@ -2472,8 +2300,7 @@ Schrift \Macro{normalcolor}\Macro{bfseries} voreingestellt. Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrletter} mit einer \KOMAScript-Klasse ist das nicht möglich, da bei diesen Klassen bereits ein Element \FontElement{subject} mit abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel existiert. -\EndIndex{FontElement}{subject}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{lettersubject}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Example} Herr Musterfrau setzt nun auch den Betreff. Als eher traditioneller @@ -2481,7 +2308,7 @@ abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel existiert. entsprechenden Spitzmarke versehen wird und setzt deshalb auch die entsprechende Option:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-21.tex}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-21} zu sehen. + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-21} zu sehen. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo, @@ -2493,26 +2320,23 @@ abweichender Einstellung für den Dokumenttitel existiert. und Lochermarke}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-21}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-21} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-21} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Variable}{subjectseparator}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{subject}% -\EndIndex{Option}{subject~=\PName{Einstellung}}% -\EndIndex{}{Betreff}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{firstfoot}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{firstfoot}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} \BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{firstfoot~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Diese\ChangedAt{v2.97e}{\Class{scrlttr2}} Option bestimmt, ob der Briefbogenfuß überhaupt gesetzt wird. Das Abschalten mit \OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}\important{\OptionValue{firstfoot}{false}} hat -Auswirkungen wenn gleichzeitig Option \Option{enlargefirstpage} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage}) verwendet wird, da sich +Auswirkungen wenn gleichzeitig Option +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.enlargefirstpage}) verwendet wird, da sich dadurch die Seite logisch nach unten verlängert. Zwischen dem Ende des Satzspiegels und dem Seitenende bleibt dann nur der normale Abstand zwischen Satzspiegel und Seitenfuß. @@ -2521,14 +2345,13 @@ Die Option versteht die Standardwerte für einfache Schalter, die in \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch} angegeben sind. Voreingestellt ist das Setzen des Briefbogenfußes.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{firstfoot~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{firstfoot}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{firstfoot} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{firstfoot}% +\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß}% Der Fuß der ersten Seite ist in der Voreinstellung leer. Es besteht jedoch die Möglichkeit, über den \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \Variable{firstfoot} einen @@ -2537,7 +2360,7 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von \BeginIndex{Variable}{frombank}% \begin{Example} - Sie wollen den Inhalt der Variablen \Variable{frombank}, also die + Sie wollen den Inhalt der Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.frombank}, also die Bankverbindung im Fuß der ersten Seite ausgeben. Der doppelte Backslash soll dabei durch ein Komma ersetzt werden: \begin{lstcode} @@ -2590,15 +2413,16 @@ neue Festlegung zu treffen. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} der Variablen wird von % möglicherweise zu tief platziert. In einem solchen Fall kann die vertikale % Position über die Pseudolänge % \PLength{firstfootvpos}\IndexPLength{firstfootvpos} angepasst werden (siehe -% \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}). +% \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}). \end{Example} Im\textnote{Achtung!} Beispiel wurde ein mehrzeiliger Fuß gesetzt. Bei einer -Kompatibilitätseinstellung ab Version 2.9u (siehe \Option{version} in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.version}) reicht der Platz dafür in der +Kompatibilitätseinstellung ab Version 2.9u (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version} in +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.compatibilityOptions}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.version}) reicht der Platz dafür in der Regel nicht aus. Sie sollten dann \PLength{firstfootvpos} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}) entsprechend +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos}) entsprechend verringern. Lediglich\textnote{Achtung!} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren @@ -2606,37 +2430,37 @@ Versionen von \Class{scrlttr2} existiert auch noch Anweisung \Macro{firstfoot}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{firstfoot}. Diese sollte jedoch nicht mehr verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{firstfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{frombank}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{frombank} \end{Declaration}% +\BeginIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß} Die im vorherigen Beispiel verwendete Variable \Variable{frombank} nimmt derzeit eine Sonderstellung ein. Sie wird intern bisher nicht verwendet. Sie kann jedoch vom Anwender verwendet werden, um die Bankverbindung\Index{Bankverbindung} in das Absenderergänzungsfeld (siehe -Variable \Variable{location}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.location}) +Variable \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.location}) oder wie im Beispiel in den Fuß zu setzen.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{frombank}% -\EndIndex{}{Briefbogenfuss=Briefbogenfuß} +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Briefbogen} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{6} % \section{Absatzauszeichnung} +\LoadCommonFile{parmarkup}% \section{Absatzauszeichnung} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{7} % \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} +\LoadCommonFile{oddorevenpage}% \section{Erkennung von rechten und linken Seiten} \section{Kopf und Fuß bei vordefinierten Seitenstilen} \seclabel{pagestyle} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Seiten>Stil} Eine der allgemeinen Eigenschaften eines Dokuments ist der Seitenstil. Bei {\LaTeX} versteht man unter dem Seitenstil in erster Linie den Inhalt der Kopf- und Fußzeilen. Wie\textnote{Achtung!} bereits in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage} erwähnt, werden Kopf und Fuß des Briefbogens +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage} erwähnt, werden Kopf und Fuß des Briefbogens als Elemente des Briefbogens betrachtet und unterliegen damit nicht den Einstellungen für den Seitenstil. Es geht also hier im Wesentlichen um den Seitenstil der weiteren Briefseiten nach dem Briefbogen. Bei einseitigen @@ -2647,50 +2471,47 @@ auch der Seitenstil aller Rückseiten betroffen. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{letterpagestyle} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{letterpagestyle}% Der\ChangedAt{v3.19}{\Class{scrlttr2}\and \Package{scrletter}} für Briefe voreingestellte Seitenstil wird durch den Inhalt dieser Anweisung bestimmt. In der Voreinstellung von \Class{scrlttr2} ist die Anweisung leer definiert. Das bedeutet, dass der Seitenstil von Briefen dem des restlichen Dokuments entspricht. Dies ist deshalb sinnvoll, weil \Class{scrlttr2} für reine Briefdokumente gedacht ist und es dafür einfacher ist, den Seitenstil wie -gewohnt mit \Macro{pagestyle} global einzustellen. +gewohnt mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} global einzustellen. -Da der \Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil von Briefen vom -\Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil anderer Klassen abweicht, ist für das Paket +Da der \PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil von Briefen vom +\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil anderer Klassen abweicht, ist für das Paket \Package{scrletter} der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{plain.letter}\IndexPagestyle{plain.letter} in der Anweisung +\PageStyle{plain.letter}\IndexPagestyle{plain.letter} in der Anweisung gespeichert. Damit werden alle Briefe mit dem zum Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{letter}\IndexPagestyle{letter} gehörenden -\Pagestyle{plain}-Seitenstil gesetzt unabhängig davon, was für das restliche +\PageStyle{letter}\IndexPagestyle{letter} gehörenden +\PageStyle{plain}-Seitenstil gesetzt unabhängig davon, was für das restliche Dokument als Seitenstil eingestellt ist. Siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pagestyleatscrletter} -%, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.pagestyle.letter} +%, \DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.pagestyle.letter} für weitere Informationen zu den Besonderheiten der Seitenstile von Paket \Package{scrletter}. \begin{Example} Sie wollen auch bei Verwendung von Paket \Package{scrletter}, dass die Briefe in dem Seitenstil gesetzt werden, der für das Dokument selbst mit - \Macro{pagestyle} eingestellt wurde. Dazu schreiben sie die Anweisung + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} eingestellt wurde. Dazu schreiben sie die Anweisung \begin{lstcode} \renewcommand*{\letterpagestyle}{} \end{lstcode} in die Dokumentpräambel. Dabei ist übrigens der Stern bei \Macro{renewcommand*} wichtig!% \end{Example} -Natürlich haben die Anweisung \Macro{pagestyle} und \Macro{thispagestyle} +Natürlich haben die Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.pagestyle} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.thispagestyle} innerhalb eines Briefes Vorrang vor dem innerhalb von \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} über \Macro{letterpagestyle} eingestellten Seitenstil.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{letterpagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{footsepline}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{headsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{footsepline}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Mit diesen Optionen kann eingestellt werden, ob eine Trennlinie\Index{Trennlinie}\Index{Linie} unter dem Kopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} oder über dem Fuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} von Folgeseiten gewünscht wird. Als @@ -2702,58 +2523,58 @@ ein. Ein\important{\OptionValue{footsepline}{true}} Aktivieren der Option \Option{footsepline} schaltet die Linie über dem Fuß ein. Die Deaktivierung der Optionen schaltet die jeweilige Linie aus. -Beim Seitenstil \PValue{empty}\important{\Pagestyle{empty}} (siehe später in +Beim Seitenstil \PValue{empty}\important{\PageStyle{empty}} (siehe später in diesem Abschnitt) haben die Optionen \Option{headsepline} und \Option{footsepline} selbstverständlich keine Auswirkung. Bei diesem Seitenstil soll ja auf Seitenkopf\Index{Seiten>Kopf} und Seitenfuß\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} ausdrücklich verzichtet werden. -Typografisch\important[i]{\Pagestyle{headings}\\ - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{plain}} betrachtet hat eine solche Linie immer die -Auswirkung, dass der Kopf oder Fuß optisch näher an den Text heranrückt. Dies -bedeutet nun nicht, dass Kopf oder Fuß räumlich weiter vom +Typografisch\important[i]{\PageStyle{headings}\\ + \PageStyle{myheadings}\\ + \PageStyle{plain}} betrachtet hat eine solche Linie immer die Auswirkung, +dass der Kopf oder Fuß optisch näher an den Text heranrückt. Dies bedeutet +nun nicht, dass Kopf oder Fuß räumlich weiter vom Textkörper\Index{Text>Bereich} weggerückt werden müssten. Stattdessen sollte sie dann bei der Berechnung des Satzspiegels als zum Textkörper gehörend betrachtet werden. Dies wird bei {\KOMAScript} dadurch erreicht, dass bei Verwendung der Klassenoption \Option{headsepline} automatisch die Paketoption -\Option{headinclude}\important{\Option{headinclude}} mit gleichem Wert an das +\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}% +\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.headinclude}} mit gleichem Wert an das \Package{typearea}-Paket weitergereicht wird. Entsprechendes gilt bei -\Option{footsepline} für -\Option{footinclude}\important{\Option{footinclude}}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline} für +\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}% +\important{\DescRef{typearea.option.footinclude}}. Die Optionen führen selbst keine automatische Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels -aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option \Option{DIV} mit den -Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe \autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}) -in \autoref{cha:typearea}. +aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option +\DescRef{typearea.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder +\PValue{current} (siehe \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die +Anweisung \DescRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}) in \autoref{cha:typearea}. Das Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% \important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}) bietet weitere Einflussmöglichkeiten für Linien im Kopf und Fuß und kann auch mit \Class{scrlttr2} kombiniert werden.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagenumber}\PName{Position} + \OptionVName{pagenumber}{Position} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagenumber~=\PName{Position}}% Mit Hilfe dieser Option kann bestimmt werden, ob und wo eine Seitenzahl auf Folgeseiten gesetzt werden soll. Die Option wirkt sich auf die -Seitenstile\important[i]{\Pagestyle{headings}\\ - \Pagestyle{myheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{plain}} \PValue{headings}, \PValue{myheadings} und \PValue{plain} +Seitenstile\important[i]{\PageStyle{headings}\\ + \PageStyle{myheadings}\\ + \PageStyle{plain}} \PValue{headings}, \PValue{myheadings} und \PValue{plain} aus. Sie beeinflusst außerdem die Voreinstellung der Seitenstile des Pakets \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}}% \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}, soweit sie vor dem Laden des Paketes gesetzt wird (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}). Es gibt Werte, die sich nur auf die horizontale Position auswirken, Werte, die nur die vertikale Position beeinflussen, und Werte, die zugleich die vertikale und die horizontale -Position festlegen. Mögliche Werte sind \autoref{tab:scrlttr2.pagenumber} zu +Position festlegen. Mögliche Werte sind \autoref{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber} zu entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{botcenter}. \begin{table}[t!]% Umbruchkorrektur @@ -2761,7 +2582,7 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{botcenter}. \Class{scrlttr2}}]{Mögliche Werte für Option \Option{pagenumber} zur Positionierung der Paginierung bei den Seitenstilen \PValue{headings}, \PValue{myheadings} und \PValue{plain} von \Class{scrlttr2}} - \label{tab:scrlttr2.pagenumber} + \label{tab:\LabelBase.pagenumber} \begin{desctabular} \entry{\PValue{bot}, \PValue{foot}}{% Seitenzahl im Fuß ohne Änderung der horizontalen Position}% @@ -2791,15 +2612,13 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{botcenter}. \end{desctabular} \end{table} % -\EndIndex{Option}{pagenumber~=\PName{Position}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil}\\ + \Macro{pagestyle}\Parameter{Seitenstil} \Macro{thispagestyle}\Parameter{lokaler Seitenstil} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% \BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% \BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% \BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% @@ -2807,98 +2626,91 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt ist \PValue{botcenter}. Bei Briefen mit \Class{scrlttr2} wird zwischen vier verschiedenen Seitenstilen unterschieden. \begin{description} -\item[{\Pagestyle{empty}}] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile von +\item[{\PageStyle{empty}}] ist der Seitenstil, bei dem Kopf- und Fußzeile von Folgeseiten vollständig leer bleiben. Dieser Seitenstil wird auch automatisch für die erste Briefseite verwendet, da auf dieser Seite Kopf und - Fuß über \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening}) + Fuß über \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} (siehe + \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}) mit anderen Mitteln gesetzt werden. -\item[{\Pagestyle{headings}}] ist der Seitenstil für automatische +\item[{\PageStyle{headings}}] ist der Seitenstil für automatische Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten. Dabei werden als automatisch gesetzte Marken der Absendername aus der Variablen - \Variable{fromname}\IndexVariable{fromname} und der Betreff aus der - Variablen \Variable{subject}\IndexVariable{subject} verwendet (siehe - \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname} und - \autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject}). Wo genau diese Marken und die + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname}\IndexVariable{fromname} und der + Betreff aus der Variablen \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject}\IndexVariable{subject} + verwendet (siehe \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.fromname} und + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.variable.subject}). Wo genau diese Marken und die Seitenangabe ausgegeben werden, hängt von der oben erklärten Option - \Option{pagenumber} und dem Inhalt der Variablen - \Variable{nexthead}\IndexVariable{nexthead} und - \Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} ab. Der Autor kann die Marken - aber auch noch nach \Macro{opening} manuell beeinflussen. Hierzu stehen wie - üblich die Anweisungen \Macro{markboth} und \Macro{markright}, bei - Verwendung von - \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} - auch \Macro{markleft} (siehe + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber} und dem Inhalt der Variablen + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nexthead}\IndexVariable{nexthead} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} ab. Der Autor kann die Marken + aber auch noch nach \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} manuell + beeinflussen. Hierzu stehen wie üblich die Anweisungen + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth} und \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}, + bei Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}% + \IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} auch + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, - \autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}), zur Verfügung. -\item[{\Pagestyle{myheadings}}] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel + \DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}), zur Verfügung. +\item[{\PageStyle{myheadings}}] ist der Seitenstil für manuelle Kolumnentitel auf Folgeseiten. Im Unterschied zu \PValue{headings} müssen die Marken vom Anwender gesetzt werden. Er verwendet dazu die Anweisungen - \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und - \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright}. Bei Verwendung von + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.markright}\IndexCmd{markright}. Bei Verwendung von \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} steht außerdem - \Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} zur Verfügung. -\item[{\Pagestyle{plain}}] ist der voreingestellte Seitenstil, bei dem auf + \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft} zur Verfügung. +\item[{\PageStyle{plain}}] ist der voreingestellte Seitenstil, bei dem auf Folgeseiten keinerlei Kolumnentitel verwendet, sondern nur eine Seitenangabe ausgegeben wird. Wo diese gesetzt wird, hängt von der oben erklärten Option - \Option{pagenumber} ab. + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber} ab. \end{description} Die Form der Seitenstile wird außerdem durch die oben erklärten -Optionen\important[i]{\Option{headsepline}\\\Option{footsepline}} -\Option{headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline} und -\Option{footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline} beeinflusst. Der Seitenstil ab -der aktuellen Seite wird mit \Macro{pagestyle} umgeschaltet. Demgegenüber -verändert \Macro{thispagestyle} nur den Seitenstil der aktuellen -Seite. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Briefklasse verwendet +Optionen\important[i]{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\\ + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headsepline}\IndexOption{headsepline} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footsepline}\IndexOption{footsepline} +beeinflusst. Der Seitenstil ab der aktuellen Seite wird mit \Macro{pagestyle} +umgeschaltet. Demgegenüber verändert \Macro{thispagestyle} nur den Seitenstil +der aktuellen Seite. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Briefklasse verwendet \Macro{thispagestyle}\PParameter{empty} selbst innerhalb von -\Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} für die erste Briefseite. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} für die erste Briefseite. +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}\LabelFontElement{pageheadfoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}\LabelFontElement{pagefoot}% +\BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}\LabelFontElement{pagenumber}% Um die Schriftart von Kopf und Fuß der Seite oder der Seitenangabe zu ändern, verwenden Sie die Benutzerschnittstelle, die in -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.textmarkup} beschrieben ist. Für den Kopf und den Fuß +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.textmarkup} beschrieben ist. Für den Kopf und den Fuß ist dabei das gleiche Element zuständig, das Sie wahlweise mit \FontElement{pageheadfoot}\important{\FontElement{pagehead}} oder \FontElement{pagehead} benennen können. Für den Fuß\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Class{scrlttr2}} ist zusätzlich auch noch das Element \FontElement{pagefoot}\important{\FontElement{pagefoot}} zuständig, das nach \FontElement{pageheadfoot} in mit Variable -\Variable{nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} oder per Paket +\DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.nextfoot}\IndexVariable{nextfoot} oder per Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% \important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} (siehe \autoref{cha:scrlayer-scrpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) definierten +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.fontelement.pagefoot}) definierten Seitenstilen zur Anwendung kommt. Das Element für die Seitenzahl innerhalb des Kopfes oder Fußes heißt \FontElement{pagenumber}\important{\FontElement{pagenumber}}. Die Voreinstellungen sind in \autoref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot}, \autopageref{tab:maincls.defaultFontsHeadFoot} zu finden. Beachten Sie dazu auch das Beispiel aus \autoref{sec:maincls.pagestyle}, -\autopageref{example:maincls.pagestyle}.% +\PageRefxmpl{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}.% % -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pageheadfoot}% -\EndIndex[indexother]{}{Schrift>Art}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{myheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{headings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{plain}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{empty}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{thispagestyle}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagestyle}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke}\\ + \Macro{markboth}\Parameter{linke Marke}\Parameter{rechte Marke} \Macro{markright}\Parameter{rechte Marke} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{markright}% In den meisten Fällen werden die Möglichkeiten, die \Class{scrlttr2} über Optionen und Variablen für die Gestaltung des Seitenkopfes\Index{Kopf} und -fußes\Index{Fuss=Fuß} auf Folgeseiten\Index{Folgeseite} zur Verfügung stellt, @@ -2906,34 +2718,30 @@ vollkommen ausreichen. Dies umso mehr, als man zusätzlich mit \Macro{markboth} und \Macro{markright} die Möglichkeit hat, die Angaben zu ändern, die \Class{scrlttr2} in den Kopf setzt. Die Anweisungen \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} -können insbesondere mit dem Seitenstil -\PValue{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{myheadings}} -verwendet werden. Bei Verwendung des Pakets -\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} -gilt dies natürlich auch für den Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}\important{\Pagestyle{scrheadings}}. -Dort steht außerdem die Anweisung -\Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\Macro{markleft}} zur Verfügung -(siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}). +können insbesondere mit dem Seitenstil \PageStyle{myheadings}% +\IndexPagestyle{myheadings}\important{\PageStyle{myheadings}} verwendet +werden. Bei Verwendung des Pakets \Package{scrlayer-scrpage}% +\IndexPackage{scrlayer-scrpage}\important{\Package{scrlayer-scrpage}} gilt +dies natürlich auch für den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}% +\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}\important{\PageStyle{scrheadings}}. Dort steht +außerdem die Anweisung \DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}% +\IndexCmd{markleft}\important{\DescRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}} zur +Verfügung (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.content}, +\DescPageRef{scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft}). \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nexthead}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{nextfoot}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{nexthead} + \Variable{nextfoot} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\BeginIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% In einigen wenigen Fällen will man jedoch den Kopf oder Fuß der Folgeseiten ähnlich dem Briefbogen freier gestalten. In\textnote{Achtung!} diesen Fällen muss auf die vordefinierten Möglichkeiten, die per oben erklärter Option -\Option{pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} auswählbar sind, verzichtet -werden. Stattdessen gestaltet man sich den Kopf und Fuß der Folgeseiten im -Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}\important{\Pagestyle{headings}, - \Pagestyle{myheadings}} oder -\Pagestyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} frei. Dazu setzt man den +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagenumber}\IndexOption{pagenumber} auswählbar +sind, verzichtet werden. Stattdessen gestaltet man sich den Kopf und Fuß der +Folgeseiten im Seitenstil +\PageStyle{headings}\IndexPagestyle{headings}\important{\PageStyle{headings}, + \PageStyle{myheadings}} oder +\PageStyle{myheadings}\IndexPagestyle{myheadings} frei. Dazu setzt man den gewünschten Aufbau als \PName{Inhalt} der Variablen\ChangedAt{v3.08}{\Class{scrlttr2}} \Variable{nexthead} beziehungsweise \Variable{nextfoot}. Innerhalb des Inhalts von @@ -2941,33 +2749,32 @@ beziehungsweise \Variable{nextfoot}. Innerhalb des Inhalts von der \Macro{parbox}-Anweisung (siehe \cite{latex:usrguide}) mehrere Boxen neben- und untereinander gesetzt werden. Einem versierten Anwender sollte es so möglich sein, eigene Seitenköpfe und "~füße zu gestalten. Natürlich kann -und sollte im Wert mit Hilfe von \Macro{usekomavar} auch auf weitere Variablen -zugegriffen werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} wird von \KOMAScript{} bei beiden -Variablen nicht genutzt. +und sollte im Wert mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar} auch auf +weitere Variablen zugegriffen werden. Die \PName{Bezeichnung} wird von +\KOMAScript{} bei beiden Variablen nicht genutzt. Lediglich\textnote{Achtung!} aus Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \Class{scrlttr2} existieren auch noch die Anweisungen \Macro{nexthead}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nexthead} und -\Macro{nextfoot}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nextfoot}. Diese sollten jedoch nicht mehr -verwendet werden.% +\Macro{nextfoot}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{nextfoot}. Diese sollten jedoch nicht +mehr verwendet werden.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{nextfoot}% -\EndIndex{Variable}{nexthead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markright}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{markboth}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Seiten>Stil} +\EndIndexGroup -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{8}% \section{Vakatseiten} +\LoadCommonFile{interleafpage}% \section{Vakatseiten} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{9}% \section{Fußnoten} +\LoadCommonFile{footnotes}% \section{Fußnoten} -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{12}% \section{Listen} +\LoadCommonFile{lists}% \section{Listen} \section{Mathematik} \seclabel{math}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Mathematik}% \BeginIndex{}{Formeln}% \BeginIndex{}{Gleichungen}% @@ -2978,9 +2785,9 @@ bereit. Stattdessen stützt sich \KOMAScript{} im Bereich der Mathematik voll und ganz auf den \LaTeX-Kern. Da\textnote{Achtung!} jedoch Mathematik in Form von nummerierten Gleichungen und Formeln in Briefen eher ungewöhnlich ist, unterstützt \Class{scrlttr2} dies nicht aktiv. Daher gibt es bei -\Class{scrlttr2} auch nicht die Optionen \Option{leqno} und \Option{fleqn}, -die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math} für \Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und -\Class{scrartcl} dokumentiert sind. +\Class{scrlttr2} auch nicht die Optionen \DescRef{maincls.option.leqno} und +\DescRef{maincls.option.fleqn}, die in \autoref{sec:maincls.math} für +\Class{scrbook}, \Class{scrreprt} und \Class{scrartcl} dokumentiert sind. Auf eine Beschreibung der Mathematikumgebungen des \LaTeX-Kerns, also \Environment{displaymath}\IndexEnv{displaymath}, @@ -2990,9 +2797,7 @@ verzichtet. Wer diese verwenden möchte, sei auf \cite{l2kurz} verwiesen. Für mehr als nur einfachste mathematische Formeln und Gleichungen sei jedoch die Verwendung von \Package{amsmath} empfohlen (siehe \cite{package:amsmath}).% % -\EndIndex{}{Gleichungen}% -\EndIndex{}{Formeln}% -\EndIndex{}{Mathematik} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Gleitumgebungen für Tabellen und Abbildungen} @@ -3009,38 +2814,37 @@ Gleitumgebungen und ohne Titel sind hingegen natürlich auch mit der Briefklasse \Class{scrlttr2} in gewohnter Weise möglich (siehe beispielsweise \cite[Abschnitt~3.9.6 und Abschnitt~5]{l2kurz}). -\LoadCommon[scrlttr]{13}% \section{Randnotizen} +\LoadCommonFile{marginpar}% \section{Randnotizen} \section{Schlussgruß} \seclabel{closing} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß} -Dass der Schlussgruß mit \Macro{closing}\IndexCmd{closing} gesetzt wird, wurde -bereits in \autoref{sec:scrlttr2.document}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing} erklärt. Unter dem Schlussgruß wird -häufig noch eine Signatur, eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift, gesetzt. Die +Dass der Schlussgruß mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing}\IndexCmd{closing} +gesetzt wird, wurde bereits in \autoref{sec:\LabelBase.document}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.closing} erklärt. Unter dem Schlussgruß wird häufig +noch eine Signatur, eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift, gesetzt. Die Unterschrift wiederum findet Platz zwischen dem Schlussgruß und der Signatur. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setkomavar}\PParameter{\Variable{signature}}% - \OParameter{Bezeichnung}\Parameter{Inhalt} + \Variable{signature} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Variable}{signature}% Die Variable \Variable{signature}\Index{Signatur} nimmt eine Art Erläuterung zur Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} auf. Ihr \PName{Inhalt} ist mit -\Macro{usekomavar}\PParameter{fromname} vordefiniert. Eine solche Erläuterung -kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten dann mit doppeltem -Backslash voneinander getrennt werden. Absätze\textnote{Achtung!} innerhalb -der Erläuterung sind jedoch nicht gestattet.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usekomavar}\PParameter{fromname} vordefiniert. Eine +solche Erläuterung kann auch mehrzeilig sein. Die einzelnen Zeilen sollten +dann mit doppeltem Backslash voneinander getrennt +werden. Absätze\textnote{Achtung!} innerhalb der Erläuterung sind jedoch nicht +gestattet.% % -\EndIndex{Variable}{signature}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{raggedsignature} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{raggedsignature}% Grußfloskel\Index{Gruss=Gruß}\Index{Signatur} und Erläuterung der Unterschrift\Index{Unterschrift} werden innerhalb einer Box gesetzt. Die Breite dieser Box wird durch die längste Zeile innerhalb von Grußfloskel und @@ -3050,25 +2854,25 @@ Wo genau diese Box platziert wird, ist durch die Pseudolängen \PLength{sigindent}\IndexPLength{sigindent} und \PLength{sigbeforevskip}\IndexPLength{sigbeforevskip} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.closing}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent}) bestimmt. Durch den -Befehl \Macro{raggedsignature} wird die Ausrichtung innerhalb der Box -bestimmt. In den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist die Anweisung entweder -auf \Macro{centering} (alle außer \Option{KOMAold}) oder auf -\Macro{raggedright} (\Option{KOMAold}) gesetzt. Um innerhalb der Box -beispielsweise eine linksbündige oder rechtsbündige Ausrichtung zu erhalten, -kann der Befehl in gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \Macro{raggedsection} +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent}) bestimmt. Durch den Befehl +\Macro{raggedsignature} wird die Ausrichtung innerhalb der Box bestimmt. In +den vordefinierten \File{lco}-Dateien ist die Anweisung entweder auf +\Macro{centering} (alle außer \Option{KOMAold}) oder auf \Macro{raggedright} +(\Option{KOMAold}) gesetzt. Um innerhalb der Box beispielsweise eine +linksbündige oder rechtsbündige Ausrichtung zu erhalten, kann der Befehl in +gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection} (siehe das entsprechende Beispiel in \autoref{sec:maincls.structure}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection}). +\DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.raggedsection}). \begin{Example} Herr Musterfrau will sich nun wirklich wichtig machen und deshalb in der Signatur nochmals darauf hinweisen, dass er selbst auch mal Vereinsvorsitzender war. Deshalb ändert er die Variable - \Variable{signature}. Außerdem will er, dass die Signatur linksbündig unter - dem Schlussgruß steht und definiert daher auch noch \Macro{raggedsignature} - um:% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.variable.signature}. Außerdem will er, dass die Signatur + linksbündig unter dem Schlussgruß steht und definiert daher auch noch + \Macro{raggedsignature} um:% \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-22}% - Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-22} zu sehen. + Das Ergebnis ist in \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-22} zu sehen. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside}[{Beispiel: Brief mit erweitertem Absender, Logo, @@ -3080,16 +2884,17 @@ kann der Befehl in gleicher Weise umdefiniert werden wie \Macro{raggedsection} Verteiler und Lochermarke}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-22}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-22} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-22} \end{figure} \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{raggedsignature}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Schlussgruss=Schlussgruß} +\EndIndexGroup \section{\emph{Letter-Class-Option}-Dateien} \seclabel{lcoFile}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}% \BeginIndex{}{Letter-Class-Option}% @@ -3101,14 +2906,13 @@ einer eigenen Datei zu speichern. Die Klasse \Class{scrlttr2} bietet hierfür die \File{lco}-Dateien an. Die Endung \File{lco} steht für \emph{\emph{l}etter \emph{c}lass \emph{o}ption}, also Briefklassenoption. -In \File{lco}-Dateien können alle Anweisungen verwendet werden, die -auch an der Stelle im Dokument verwendet werden könnten, an der die -\File{lco}-Datei geladen wird. Außerdem können interne Anweisungen -verwendet werden, die für Paketautoren freigegeben sind. Bei -\Class{scrlttr2} sind dies inbesondere die Anweisungen -\Macro{@newplength}\IndexCmd{@newplength}, -\Macro{@setplength}\IndexCmd{@setplength} und -\Macro{@addtoplength}\IndexCmd{@addtoplength} (siehe +In \File{lco}-Dateien können alle Anweisungen verwendet werden, die auch an +der Stelle im Dokument verwendet werden könnten, an der die \File{lco}-Datei +geladen wird. Außerdem können interne Anweisungen verwendet werden, die für +Paketautoren freigegeben sind. Bei \Class{scrlttr2} sind dies inbesondere die +Anweisungen \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength}\IndexCmd{@newplength}, +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}\IndexCmd{@setplength} und +\DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}\IndexCmd{@addtoplength} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.pseudoLengths}). \KOMAScript{} liegen bereits einige \File{lco}-Dateien bei. Die Dateien @@ -3139,11 +2943,9 @@ finden sich unter anderem unter \cite{homepage} und in \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name}\\ + \Macro{LoadLetterOption}\Parameter{Name} \Macro{LoadLetterOptions}\Parameter{Liste von Namen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% \File{lco}-Dateien können bei \Class{scrlttr2} direkt über \Macro{documentclass} geladen werden. Dazu gibt man den Namen der \File{lco}-Datei ohne die Endung als Option\Index{Optionen} an. Das Laden der @@ -3161,7 +2963,7 @@ dann in der Reihenfolge der Angabe in der Liste geladen. \begin{Example} Peter Musterfrau erstellt auch ein Dokument, in dem mehrere Briefe enthalten sind. Die Mehrzahl der Briefe soll nach DIN erstellt werden. Also - beginnt er (siehe auch den Tipp auf \autopageref{tipp:scrlttr2.DIN}): + beginnt er (siehe auch den Tipp auf \autopageref{tipp:\LabelBase.DIN}): \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{scrlttr2} \end{lstcode} @@ -3179,9 +2981,10 @@ dann in der Reihenfolge der Angabe in der Liste geladen. \LoadLetterOption{DINmtext} \opening{Hallo,} \end{lstcode} - Da der Aufbau der ersten Seite erst mit \Macro{opening}\IndexCmd{opening} - wirklich beginnt, genügt es, wenn die \File{lco}-Datei vor \Macro{opening} - geladen wird. Dies muss also nicht vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} + Da der Aufbau der ersten Seite erst mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening}\IndexCmd{opening} wirklich beginnt, genügt + es, wenn die \File{lco}-Datei vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.opening} geladen + wird. Dies muss also nicht vor \Macro{begin}\PParameter{letter} erfolgen. Die Änderungen durch das Laden der \File{lco}-Datei sind dann auch lokal zu dem entsprechenden Brief. \end{Example} @@ -3198,7 +3001,7 @@ haben. \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{ich.lco}% Damit schrumpft sein Brief aus dem letzten Beispiel erheblich zusammen: \lstinputcode[xleftmargin=1em]{letter-23.tex}% - Das Ergebnis ändert sich jedoch nicht, wie \autoref{fig:scrlttr2.letter-23} + Das Ergebnis ändert sich jedoch nicht, wie \autoref{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23} zeigt. \begin{figure} \setcapindent{0pt}% @@ -3212,7 +3015,7 @@ haben. bei Verwendung einer \File{lco}-Datei}[l] \frame{\includegraphics[width=.4\textwidth]{letter-23}} \end{captionbeside} - \label{fig:scrlttr2.letter-23} + \label{fig:\LabelBase.letter-23} \end{figure} \end{Example} @@ -3233,17 +3036,17 @@ bekommen. Da die Schweizer Norm SN~101\,130 vorsieht, dass das Adressfeld 8\Unit{mm} vom rechten Papierrand gesetzt wird, werden bei Schweizer Briefen auch die Kopfzeile und die Absenderergänzung mit einem entsprechend geringen Abstand zum Papierrand gesetzt. Dies betrifft ebenfalls die Geschäftszeile bei -der Einstellung \OptionValue{refline}{wide} (siehe -\autoref{sec:scrlttr2.firstpage}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2.option.refline}). Sollten\textnote{Tipp!} Sie +der Einstellung \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{refline}{wide} (siehe +\autoref{sec:\LabelBase.firstpage}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.option.refline}). Sollten\textnote{Tipp!} Sie damit ein Problem haben, erstellen Sie sich eine eigene \File{lco}-Datei, die zunächst \Option{SN} lädt und in der \PLength{toaddrhpos} (siehe \autoref{sec:scrlttr2-experts.addressee}, -\autopageref{desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos}) dann auf einen +\DescPageRef{scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos}) dann auf einen kleineren Wert gesetzt wird. Verringern Sie dann außerdem \PLength{toaddrwidth} entsprechend.% -Die\textnote{Tipp!}\phantomsection\label{tipp:scrlttr2.DIN} \File{lco}-Datei +Die\textnote{Tipp!}\phantomsection\label{tipp:\LabelBase.DIN} \File{lco}-Datei \File{DIN}\important{\Option{DIN}} wird übrigens immer als erste \File{lco}-Datei automatisch geladen, damit alle Pseudolängen mehr oder weniger sinnvoll vordefiniert sind. Es ist daher nicht notwendig diese @@ -3356,15 +3159,14 @@ an Pakete zu übergeben, die von der Klasse bereits geladen sind. Normalerweise betrifft dies nur die Pakete \Package{typearea}, \Package{scrlfile}, \Package{scrbase} und \Package{keyval}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOptions}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LoadLetterOption}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{lco-Datei=\File{lco}-Datei}% -\EndIndex{}{Letter-Class-Option}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Adressdateien und Serienbriefe} \seclabel{addressFile}% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Adressdatei}\BeginIndex{}{Serienbriefe}% Als besonders lästig wird bei Briefen immer das Eintippen der Adressen und das @@ -3380,19 +3182,17 @@ eine gewisse Unterstützung.% \fi \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}% - \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{Kommentar}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{adrentry}}% + \Macro{adrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse} + \Parameter{Tel.}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{Kommentar} \Parameter{Kürzel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{adrentry}% Mit der \Class{scrlttr2}-Klasse können Adressdateien\Index[indexmain]{Adressdatei} ausgewertet werden. Dies ist beispielsweise für Serienbriefe sehr nützlich. Eine Adressdatei muss die Endung \File{.adr} haben und besteht aus einer Reihe von \Macro{adrentry}-Einträgen. Ein solcher Eintrag besteht aus acht Elementen und kann beispielsweise wie folgt aussehen: -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \adrentry{Maier} {Herbert} {Wiesenweg 37\\ 09091 Blumental} @@ -3430,32 +3230,29 @@ Großbuchstaben zu verwenden. Adressverzeichnis fest in Ihr \TeX-System ein. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{adrentry} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse}% - \Parameter{Telefon}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{F3}% - \Parameter{F4}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{addrentry}}% - \Parameter{Kürzel} + \Macro{addrentry}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Vorname}\Parameter{Adresse} + \Parameter{Telefon}\Parameter{F1}\Parameter{F2}\Parameter{F3} + \Parameter{F4}\Parameter{Kürzel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addrentry}% Da über die Jahre hinweg immer wieder Klagen aufkamen, dass insgesamt nur zwei freie Felder zu wenig seien, verfügt \Class{scrlttr2} nun alternativ über die Anweisung \Macro{addrentry}. Mit dem zusätzlichen »\texttt{d}« im Namen sind hier auch zwei weitere freie Felder hinzugekommen, dafür ist jedoch der Kommentar entfallen. Ansonsten -kann die Anweisung genau wie \Macro{adrentry} verwendet werden. +kann die Anweisung genau wie \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} verwendet werden. -In einer \File{adr}-Datei können die beiden Anweisungen \Macro{adrentry} und +In einer \File{adr}-Datei können die beiden Anweisungen \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und \Macro{addrentry} nebeneinander verwendet werden. Ich\textnote{Achtung!} weise jedoch darauf hin, dass Zusatzpakete wie das \Package{adrconv}-Paket von Axel Kielhorn eventuell nicht auf die Verwendung von \Macro{addrentry} ausgelegt sind. Hier muss der Anwender gegebenenfalls selbst entsprechende Erweiterungen vornehmen.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addrentry} +\EndIndexGroup Neben dem vereinfachten Zugriff auf Kundendaten können die @@ -3487,7 +3284,7 @@ Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen. \input{mitglieder.adr} \end{document} \end{lstcode} - Sind in Ihrer \File{adr}-Datei auch \Macro{addrentry}-Anweisungen + Sind in Ihrer \File{adr}-Datei auch \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Anweisungen enthalten, müssen Sie dafür eine entsprechende Definition vor dem Einladen der Adressdatei ergänzen: \begin{lstcode} @@ -3496,14 +3293,14 @@ Datenbanksysteme möglich, solche Massenpostsendungen zu erstellen. } \end{lstcode} Bei diesem Beispiel wird kein Gebrauch von dem zusätzlichen freien - Feld gemacht und deshalb \Macro{addrentry} mit Hilfe von \Macro{adrentry} + Feld gemacht und deshalb \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} definiert. \end{Example} Natürlich kann der Brief"|inhalt auch von den Adressatenmerkmalen abhängig gemacht werden. Als Bedingungsfelder können die frei -bestimmbaren Elemente fünf oder sechs eines \Macro{adrentry}-Eintrages oder -die frei bestimmbaren Elemente fünf bis acht eines \Macro{addrentry}-Eintrags +bestimmbaren Elemente fünf oder sechs eines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Eintrages oder +die frei bestimmbaren Elemente fünf bis acht eines \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Eintrags genutzt werden. \begin{Example} Angenommen, Sie verwenden das Element fünf, um das Geschlecht eines @@ -3535,16 +3332,14 @@ genutzt werden. Es ist also möglich, den Brieftext auf bestimmte Empfängermerkmale gezielt abzustimmen und so den Eindruck eines persönlichen Schreibens zu erwecken. Die Anwendungsbreite ist lediglich durch -die maximale Anzahl von zwei freien \Macro{adrentry}-Elementen -beziehungsweise vier freien \Macro{addrentry}-Elementen begrenzt. +die maximale Anzahl von zwei freien \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry}-Elementen +beziehungsweise vier freien \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry}-Elementen begrenzt. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben}\\ + \Macro{adrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben} \Macro{addrchar}\Parameter{Anfangsbuchstaben} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{adrchar}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addrchar}% \Index[indexmain]{Adressverzeichnis}\Index[indexmain]{Telefonliste}% Es ist auch möglich, die Informationen einer \File{.adr}-Datei in Adressverzeichnisse oder Telefonlisten umzuwandeln. Sie benötigen dazu @@ -3624,16 +3419,16 @@ ignoriert diese Anweisung ebenso wie \Macro{addrchar}. erzeugt. Siehe dazu die Definition in \File{adrdir.tex}. \end{Example} Näheres zum \Package{adrconv}-Paket ist der zugehörigen Anleitung zu -entnehmen. Dort finden Sie auch Angaben darüber, ob die aktuelle -Version von \Package{adrconv} bereits mit \Macro{addrentry} und +entnehmen. Dort finden Sie auch Angaben darüber, ob die aktuelle Version von +\Package{adrconv} bereits mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addrentry} und \Macro{addrchar} umgehen kann. Frühere Versionen kannten nur -\Macro{adrentry} und \Macro{adrchar}.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.adrentry} und \Macro{adrchar}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{adrchar}\EndIndex{Cmd}{addrchar}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Adressdatei}\EndIndex{}{Serienbriefe}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Class}{scrlttr2}\EndIndex{}{Briefe} +\EndIndexGroup \endinput @@ -3647,5 +3442,6 @@ Version von \Package{adrconv} bereits mit \Macro{addrentry} und % LocalWords: Paketoption Satzspiegels Briefklasse Seitenkopf Seitenfuß -% LocalWords: Versandart Zentrierung Dokumenttitel Serienbriefen -% LocalWords: Dokumentpräambel +% LocalWords: Versandart Zentrierung Dokumenttitel Serienbriefen Seitenstil +% LocalWords: Dokumentpräambel Grafikpaket Briefbogenfuß Briefbogenfußes + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex index 4bcaddf71b1..cec15276397 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/scrwfile.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrwfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrwfile.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ % ============================================================================ \KOMAProvidesFile{scrwfile.tex} - [$Date: 2015-03-31 11:10:59 +0200 (Tue, 31 Mar 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: scrwfile)] \chapter{Dateien mit \Package{scrwfile} sparen und ersetzen} \labelbase{scrwfile} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrwfile} Eines der Probleme, die auch durch die Einführung von \eTeX{} nicht gelöst wurden, ist die Tatsache, dass \TeX{} nur 18 Dateien gleichzeitig zum Schreiben @@ -80,6 +81,7 @@ jeweiligen Befehl bis zum Ende des Dokuments leer ist. Das Paket \Package{scrwfile} bietet hier eine grundsätzliche Änderung im \LaTeX-Kern, durch die beide Probleme gelöst werden können. + \section{Grundsätzliche Änderungen am \LaTeX-Kern} \seclabel{kernelpatches} @@ -114,12 +116,13 @@ Tatsächlich sind bisher keine solchen Probleme im Zusammenhang mit verschiedenen Anwendern über ein Jahr lang getestet wurde. Wenn Sie jedoch auf ein solches Problem stoßen, sollten Sie sich an den \KOMAScript-Autor wenden. + \section{Das Eindateiensystem} \seclabel{singlefilefeature} Bereits beim Laden des Pakets mit % Umbruchoptimierung: listings -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \usepackage{scrwfile} \end{lstcode} wird \Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc} von \Package{scrwfile} so @@ -154,10 +157,10 @@ Kopieren der \Macro{@writefile}-Anweisungen in die \File{wrt}-Datei können diese auch für andere Zielendungen übernommen werden. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{TOCclone}\OParameter{Verzeichnisüberschrift}\Parameter{Quellendung}\Parameter{Zielendung}\\ + \Macro{TOCclone}\OParameter{Verzeichnisüberschrift} + \Parameter{Quellendung}\Parameter{Zielendung} \Macro{listof\PName{Zielendung}} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCclone}% Durch dieses Klonen von Dateieinträgen werden so ganze Verzeichnisse geklont. Dazu muss man nur die Endung der Hilfsdatei des Verzeichnisses kennen, dessen Einträge kopiert werden sollen. Zusätzlich muss man die Endung @@ -177,8 +180,8 @@ Ausgeben kann man dieses neue Verzeichnis dann beispielsweise über die Anweisung \Macro{listof\PName{Zielendung}}. Die Verzeichniseigenschaften\important{\Package{tocbasic}} \PValue{leveldown}, \PValue{numbered}, \PValue{onecolumn} und \PValue{totoc} (siehe Anweisung -\Macro{setuptoc} in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) werden automatisch in das +\DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) werden automatisch in das Zielverzeichnis übernommen, falls sie für das Quellverzeichnis bereits gesetzt waren. Die Eigenschaft \PValue{nobabel} wird für geklonte Verzeichnisse immer gesetzt, da die entsprechenden \Package{babel}-Einträge in das @@ -205,8 +208,8 @@ Quellverzeichnis ohnehin bereits kopiert werden. \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} Einträge in ein Verzeichnis vorgenommen werden können, funktioniert dies nach Laden von \Package{scrwfile} bereits in der Dokumentpräambel. Durch die hier gezeigte unkonventionelle Art, den - Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} innerhalb der Verzeichnisdatei zu ändern, bleibt - diese Änderung nur für dieses Verzeichnis wirksam. + Zähler \DescRef{maincls.counter.tocdepth} innerhalb der Verzeichnisdatei zu + ändern, bleibt diese Änderung nur für dieses Verzeichnis wirksam. Später im Dokument wird das Verzeichnis mit der Endung \File{stoc} dann durch @@ -228,20 +231,22 @@ Quellverzeichnis ohnehin bereits kopiert werden. übernommen. Also darf der Eintrag nicht aus der Verzeichnisdatei heraus erzeugt werden. Da das Paket \Package{tocbasic}\important{\Package{tocbasic}} zum Einsatz kommt, kann aber - \phantomsection\label{example:scrwfile.AfterStartingTOC} + \phantomsection\xmpllabel{cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} \begin{lstcode} - \AfterStartingTOC[toc]{% + \BeforeStartingTOC[toc]{% \addcontentsline{stoc}{chapter} {\protect\contentsname}} \end{lstcode} verwendet werden. Natürlich\textnote{Achtung!} setzt dies voraus, dass die Datei mit Endung \File{toc} auch unter der Kontrolle von \Package{tocbasic} steht. Dies ist bei allen \KOMAScript-Klassen der Fall. Näheres zur - Anweisung \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} ist in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} auf - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} zu finden. + Anweisung \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} ist in + \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc} auf \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} + zu finden. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCclone} +\EndIndexGroup + \section{Hinweis zum Entwicklungsstand} \seclabel{draft} @@ -255,6 +260,7 @@ Erweiterungen im Paket. Da jedoch noch keine Benutzeranweisungen existieren, mit denen diese Möglichkeiten genutzt werden könnten, wurde hier auf eine Dokumentation derselben verzichtet. + \section{Bekannte Paketunverträglichkeiten} \seclabel{incompatible} @@ -274,7 +280,7 @@ um. Werden \Package{scrwfile} und \Package{titletoc} zusammen verwendet, ist die Funktion beider Paket nicht mehr gewährleistet. Dies ist weder ein Fehler in \Package{titletoc} noch in \Package{scrwfile}.% % -\EndIndex{Package}{scrwfile} +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex @@ -287,3 +293,5 @@ in \Package{titletoc} noch in \Package{scrwfile}.% % LocalWords: Eindateiensystem Schreibdatei Zieldatei Zielendung Quellendung % LocalWords: Verzeichnisüberschrift Dateiendung Zielendungen Verzeichnisdatei % LocalWords: Benutzeranweisungen Dokumentpräambel Kapitelebene +% LocalWords: Paketunverträglichkeiten + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex index b3dd2fd031e..dacf058335a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/tocbasic.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % tocbasic.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % tocbasic.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2016 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2002-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,13 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{tocbasic.tex} - [$Date: 2016-06-14 09:11:22 +0200 (Tue, 14 Jun 2016) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (package tocbasic)] \chapter{Verzeichnisse verwalten mit Hilfe von \Package{tocbasic}} \labelbase{tocbasic} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{tocbasic}% \BeginIndex{}{Verzeichnis}% \BeginIndex{}{Dateierweiterung}% @@ -86,7 +87,7 @@ bekannten Dateierweiterungen\textnote{Dateierweiterung, Verzeichnis}, die für Verzeichnisse stehen, zu verwalten. Einträge in Dateien mit solchen Dateierweiterungen werden typischerweise mit \Macro{addtocontents}\important{\Macro{addtocontents}, - \Macro{addxcontentsline}} oder \Macro{addxcontentsline} vorgenommen. Darüber + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} vorgenommen. Darüber hinaus gibt es Anweisungen, mit denen Aktionen für all diese Dateierweiterungen durchgeführt werden können. Außerdem gibt es Anweisungen, um Einstellungen für die Datei vorzunehmen, die zu einer gegebenen @@ -100,9 +101,9 @@ Tabellenverzeichnis stehen. Für das Inhaltsverzeichnis verwendet \KOMAScript{} als Besitzer den Dateiname der Klasse. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{ifattoclist}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{ifattoclist}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifattoclist}% Mit dieser Anweisung wird überprüft, ob die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits in der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen vorhanden ist oder nicht. Ist die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits über diese Liste bekannt, so wird der @@ -128,13 +129,12 @@ ausgeführt. } \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifattoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addtotoclist}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtotoclist}% Diese Anweisung fügt die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzu. Ist die \PName{Dateierweiterung} bereits bekannt, so wird hingegen ein Fehler gemeldet, um die doppelte Verwendung derselben @@ -213,18 +213,17 @@ sind. Das liegt daran, dass \KOMAScript{} die Dateierweiterungen Tabellenverzeichnis mit dem Besitzer »\PName{float}« anmeldet und die Optionen für diese Besitzer setzt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtotoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{AtAddToTocList}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AtAddToTocList}% Auf diese Weise können die \Parameter{Anweisungen} zu einer internen Liste von Anweisungen hinzugefügt werden, die immer dann auszuführen sind, wenn eine Dateierweiterung mit dem angegebenen \PName{Besitzer} zur Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt wird. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments wird -wie in der Erklärung von \Macro{addtotoclist} beschrieben verfahren. Wird das +wie in der Erklärung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} beschrieben verfahren. Wird das optionale Argument leer gelassen, werden in diesem Fall die Aktionen unabhängig vom Besitzer immer ausgeführt, wenn die Dateierweiterung zu der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt wird. Während der @@ -244,33 +243,31 @@ Dateierweiterung, die gerade hinzugefügt wird. \end{Example} Die\textnote{Achtung!} zweimalige Verwendung von \Macro{expandafter} ist im -Beispiel erforderlich, weil das Argument von \Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel} +Beispiel erforderlich, weil das Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} zwingend bereits expandiert sein muss. Siehe dazu auch die Erklärung zu -\Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel} in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel} in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AtAddToTocList}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{removefromtoclist}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{removefromtoclist}% Man kann eine \PName{Dateierweiterung} auch wieder aus der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen entfernen. Ist das optionale Argument \OParameter{Besitzer} angegeben, so wird die Dateierweiterung nur entfernt, wenn sie für den angegebenen \PName{Besitzer} angemeldet wurde. Wie der Besitzer beim Weglassen des optionalen Argument bestimmt wird, ist der Erklärung zu -\Macro{addtotoclist} zu entnehmen. Wird ein leerer \PName{Besitzer} angegeben, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} zu entnehmen. Wird ein leerer \PName{Besitzer} angegeben, findet kein Besitzertest statt, sondern die \PName{Dateierweiterung} wird unabhängig vom Besitzer entfernt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{removefromtoclist}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{doforeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{doforeachtocfile}% Bisher haben Sie nur Anweisungen kennen gelernt, die für Klassen- und Paketautoren zwar zusätzliche Sicherheit, aber auch eher zusätzlichen Aufwand bedeuten. Mit \Macro{doforeachtocfile} kann man die erste Ernte dafür @@ -298,22 +295,21 @@ Anweisung übrigens, um für jedes Verzeichnis, für das die Eigenschaft \PValue{chapteratlist} gesetzt ist, optional einen vertikalen Abstand oder die Kapitelüberschrift in dieses Verzeichnis einzutragen. Wie Sie diese Eigenschaft setzen können, ist in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} zu finden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{doforeachtocfile} +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} zu finden.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasicautomode} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasicautomode}% Diese Anweisung definiert die Anweisung \Macro{@starttoc}, die der \LaTeX-Kern bereit stellt, so um, dass bei jedem Aufruf von \Macro{@starttoc} die dabei angegebene Dateierweiterung in die Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen eingefügt wird, soweit sie dort noch nicht vorhanden ist. Außerdem wird dann -\Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} an Stelle von \Macro{@starttoc} verwendet. Näheres -zu \Macro{tocbasic@starttoc} und \Macro{@starttoc} ist +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} an Stelle von \Macro{@starttoc} verwendet. Näheres +zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} und \Macro{@starttoc} ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} zu entnehmen. +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc} zu entnehmen. Mit Hilfe von \Macro{tocbasicautomode} wird also sozusagen jedes Verzeichnis, das mit Hilfe von \Macro{@starttoc} erstellt wird, automatisch zumindest @@ -324,7 +320,7 @@ für das \Package{babel}-Paket für alle Verzeichnisse. Es ist jedoch vorzuziehen, wenn der Paketautor selbst \Package{tocbasic} explizit verwendet. Er kann dann auch die weiteren Vorteile nutzen, die ihm das Paket bietet und die in den nachfolgenden Abschnitten beschrieben werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasicautomode} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Erzeugen eines Verzeichnisses} @@ -343,7 +339,6 @@ verbunden ist. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{addtoeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Inhalt} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addtoeachtocfile}% Die Anweisung \Macro{addtoeachtocfile} schreibt \PName{Inhalt} mit Hilfe von \Macro{addtocontents} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern in jede Datei, die für den angegebenen \PName{Besitzer} in der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen zu @@ -371,15 +366,13 @@ Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird. \end{Example} Anweisungen, die nicht bereits beim Schreiben expandiert werden sollen, sind wie bei \Macro{addtocontents} mit \Macro{protect} zu schützen. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addtoeachtocfile}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addxcontentsline}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Ebene}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{addxcontentsline}}% + \Macro{addxcontentsline}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Ebene} \OParameter{Gliederungsnummer}\Parameter{Inhalt} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentsline}% Diese\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ähnelt sehr der Anweisung \Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline} aus dem @@ -399,37 +392,37 @@ definiert ist. In diesem Fall wird sie für den Eintrag verwendet, wobei \PName{Gliederungsnummer} als optionales Argument und \PName{Inhalt} als obligatorisches Argument übergeben wird. Ein Beispiel für eine solche Anweisung, die von den \KOMAScript-Klassen bereitgestellt wird, wäre -\Macro{addparttocentry} (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry}). Ist die entsprechend +\DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry} (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls-experts.experts}, +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry}). Ist die entsprechend Anweisung nicht definiert, wird stattdessen die interne Anweisung -\Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} verwendet. Diese erhält alle vier Argumente -als obligatorische Argumente und verwendet dann seinerseits -\Macro{addcontentsline}, um den gewünschten Eintrag vorzunehmen. Näheres zu -\Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} zu entnehmen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} verwendet. Diese erhält +alle vier Argumente als obligatorische Argumente und verwendet dann +seinerseits \Macro{addcontentsline}, um den gewünschten Eintrag +vorzunehmen. Näheres zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} ist +\autoref{sec:tocbasic.internals}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline} zu entnehmen. Ein Vorteil der Verwendung von \Macro{addxcontentsline} gegenüber \Macro{addcontentsline} ist zum einen, dass die Eigenschaft -\PValue{numberline} (siehe \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) beachtet +\PValue{numberline} (siehe \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) beachtet wird. Zum anderen kann die Form der Einträge über die Definition entsprechender, für die \PName{Ebene} und \PName{Dateierweiterung} spezifischer Anweisungen konfiguriert werden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addxcontentsline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% - \OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Ebene0}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}}% - \OParameter{Gliederungsnummer}% - \Parameter{Inhalt}\\ - \Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% - \OParameter{Besitzer}\Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Inhalt}% + \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer} + \Parameter{Ebene} + \OParameter{Gliederungsnummer}% + \Parameter{Inhalt} + \Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}\OParameter{Besitzer} + \Parameter{Ebene}\Parameter{Inhalt}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% Diese beiden Anweisungen stehen in direkter Beziehung zu dem oben erklärten -\Macro{addxcontentsline}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} beziehungsweise zum im \LaTeX-Kern definierten \Macro{addcontentsline}. Der Unterschied besteht darin, dass diese Anweisungen \PName{Inhalt} nicht nur in eine einzelne Datei, sondern in alle Dateien eines angegebenen @@ -449,30 +442,26 @@ Dateien aus der Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen schreibt. \Macro{protect} vor der Expansion geschützt wurde. \end{Example} Während des Schreibens von \PName{Inhalt} ist auch hier, wie schon bei -\Macro{addtoeachtocfile}, +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtoeachtocfile}, \Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} die Dateierweiterung der Datei, in die aktuell geschrieben wird.% Die Anweisung\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} \Macro{addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} ist wann immer möglich gegenüber \Macro{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile} vorzuziehen, da die Erweiterungen von -\Macro{addxcontentsline} nur damit Anwendung finden. Näheres zu diesen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} nur damit Anwendung finden. Näheres zu diesen Erweiterungen und Vorteilen ist in der vorausgehenden Erklärung von -\Macro{addxcontentsline} zu finden.% +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} zu finden.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{addcontentslinetoeachtocfile}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{listoftoc}\OParameter{Titel}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\\ - \Macro{listoftoc*}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\\ - \Macro{listofeachtoc}\OParameter{Besitzer}\\ + \Macro{listoftoc}\OParameter{Titel}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Macro{listoftoc*}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Macro{listofeachtoc}\OParameter{Besitzer} \Macro{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listofeachtoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name}% Mit diesen Anweisungen werden die Verzeichnisse ausgegeben. Die\important{\Macro{listoftoc*}} Sternvariante \Macro{listoftoc*} benötigt als einziges Argument die \PName{Dateierweiterung} der Datei mit den @@ -520,8 +509,8 @@ passend zu definieren. \end{lstcode} Im zweiten Fall würde natürlich auch ein optional aktivierter Eintrag in das Inhaltsverzeichnis nicht gesetzt. Näheres zur Eigenschaft des Eintrags in - das Inhaltsverzeichnis ist bei der Anweisung \Macro{setuptoc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc} zu finden. + das Inhaltsverzeichnis ist bei der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} zu finden. Wenn Sie zuvor \begin{lstcode} @@ -553,23 +542,19 @@ führen, wenn keine Schreibdateien mehr zur Verfügung stehen. Abhilfe kann in diesem Fall das Laden des in \autoref{cha:scrwfile} beschriebenen Pakets \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile} bieten. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listof\PName{Dateierweiterung}name}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listofeachtoc}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{listoftoc}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterStartingTOC}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeStartingTOC}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterStartingTOC}% Manchmal ist es nützlich, wenn unmittelbar vor dem Einlesen der Datei mit den Verzeichnisdaten \PName{Anweisungen} ausgeführt werden können. Mit Hilfe von \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} können Sie genau solche \PName{Anweisungen} wahlweise für eine einzelne \PName{Dateierweiterung} oder alle Dateien, die -mit Hilfe von \Macro{listoftoc*}, \Macro{listoftoc} oder \Macro{listofeachtoc} +mit Hilfe von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} eingelesen werden, erreichen. Ebenso können Sie \PName{Anweisungen} nach dem Einlesen der Datei ausführen, wenn Sie diese mit \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} definieren. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist @@ -577,34 +562,30 @@ definieren. Während der Ausführung der \PName{Anweisungen} ist Dateierweiterung der Datei, die eingelesen wird bzw. gerade eingelesen wurde. -Ein Beispiel\textnote{Beispiel} zur Verwendung von \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} +Ein Beispiel\textnote{Beispiel} zur Verwendung von \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} ist in \autoref{sec:scrwfile.clonefilefeature} auf -\autopageref{example:scrwfile.AfterStartingTOC} zu finden. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterStartingTOC}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeStartingTOC}% +\PageRefxmpl{scrwfile.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} zu finden. +% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{BeforeTOCHead}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{BeforeTOCHead}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterTOCHead}\OParameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeTOCHead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterTOCHead}% Es können auch \PName{Anweisungen} definiert werden, die unmittelbar vor oder -nach dem Setzen der Überschrift bei Verwendung von \Macro{listoftoc} oder -\Macro{listofeachtoc} ausgeführt werden. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments -und der Bedeutung von +nach dem Setzen der Überschrift bei Verwendung von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} +ausgeführt werden. Bezüglich des optionalen Arguments und der Bedeutung von \Macro{@currext}\IndexCmd{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}} gilt, was -bereits bei \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} und \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} oben -erklärt wurde.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterTOCHead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeTOCHead}% +bereits bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} oben erklärt wurde.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{MakeMarkcase} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% Wann immer \Package{tocbasic} eine Marke für einen Kolumnentitel setzt, erfolgt dies als Argument der Anweisung \Macro{MakeMarkcase}. Diese Anweisung ist dazu gedacht, bei Bedarf die Groß-/Kleinschreibung des Kolumnentitels zu @@ -648,35 +629,32 @@ Experten ist und fast immer Handarbeit bedeutet, wird Laien empfohlen, darauf eher zu verzichten oder ihn nur vorsichtig und nicht an so exponierter Stelle wie im Kolumnentitel zu verwenden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{MakeMarkcase}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{deftocheading}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Definition} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftocheading}% Das Paket \Package{tocbasic} enthält eine Standarddefinition für das Setzen von Überschriften von Verzeichnissen. Diese Standarddefinition ist durch -verschiedene Eigenschaften, die bei der Anweisung \Macro{setuptoc} erläutert +verschiedene Eigenschaften, die bei der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} erläutert werden, konfigurierbar. Sollte diese Möglichkeit einmal nicht ausreichen, so besteht die Möglichkeit, mit \Macro{deftocheading} eine alternative Überschriftenanweisung für ein Verzeichnis mit einer bestimmten \PName{Dateierweiterung} zu definieren. Die Definition kann als einzigen Parameter \PName{\#1} enthalten. Beim Aufruf der Anweisung innerhalb von -\Macro{listoftoc} oder \Macro{listofeachtoc} wird als dieses Argument dann der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} wird als dieses Argument dann der Titel für das Verzeichnis übergeben. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftocheading}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{setuptoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Liste von - Eigenschaften}\\ - \Macro{unsettoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Liste von - Eigenschaften} + \Macro{setuptoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Parameter{Liste von Eigenschaften} + \Macro{unsettoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Parameter{Liste von Eigenschaften} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setuptoc}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{unsettoc}% Mit diesen beiden Anweisungen können \PName{Eigenschaften} für eine \PName{Dateierweiterung} bzw. das Verzeichnis, das dazu gehört, gesetzt werden. Die \PName{Liste von Eigenschaften} ist dabei eine durch Komma @@ -684,15 +662,15 @@ getrennte Aneinanderreihung von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket \Package{tocbasic} wertet folgende Eigenschaften aus: \begin{description} \item[\PValue{leveldown}] bedeutet, dass das Verzeichnis nicht mit der - obersten Gliederungsebene unterhalb von \Macro{part} -- wenn vorhanden - \Macro{chapter}, sonst \Macro{section} -- erstellt wird, sondern mit einer + obersten Gliederungsebene unterhalb von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.part} -- wenn vorhanden + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter}, sonst \DescRef{maincls.cmd.section} -- erstellt wird, sondern mit einer Überschrift der nächst tieferen Gliederungsebene. Diese Eigenschaft wird von der internen Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} - hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit \Macro{deftocheading} + hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} definiert, liegt die Auswertung der Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen, der die Definition vornimmt. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option - \OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{leveldown}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}\important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{leveldown}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{leveldown}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des Besitzers \PValue{float}. \item[\PValue{nobabel}] bedeutet, dass die normalerweise automatisch @@ -729,19 +707,21 @@ getrennte Aneinanderreihung von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket \item[\PValue{numbered}] bedeutet, dass das Verzeichnis nummeriert und damit ebenfalls in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden soll. Diese Eigenschaft wird von der internen Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird - hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit \Macro{deftocheading} - definiert, liegt die Auswertung der Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen, - der die Definition vornimmt. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese - Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option - \OptionValue{listof}{numbered}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{numbered}}% - \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{numbered}} für - alle Dateierweiterungen des Besitzers \Package{float}. + hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} definiert, liegt die Auswertung der + Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen, der die Definition vornimmt. Die + \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numbered}}% + \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{numbered}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des + Besitzers \Package{float}. \item[\PValue{numberline}] \ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}}% bedeutet, dass auch all diejenigen Einträge, die mit Hilfe der Anweisung - \Macro{addxcontentsline} oder der Anweisung - \Macro{addxcontentslinetoceachtocfile} in das Verzeichnis geschrieben werden - und bei denen das optionale Argument für die Nummer fehlt oder leer ist, mit - einer (leeren) \Macro{numberline}-Anweisung versehen werden. Das führt in + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline} oder der Anweisung + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile} in das Verzeichnis + geschrieben werden und bei denen das optionale Argument für die Nummer fehlt + oder leer ist, mit einer (leeren) + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}-Anweisung versehen werden. Das führt in der Regel dazu, dass diese Einträge nicht linksbündig mit der Nummer, sondern mit dem Text der nummerierten Einträge gleicher Ebene gesetzt werden. Bei\ChangedAt{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung des @@ -751,19 +731,20 @@ getrennte Aneinanderreihung von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} ab \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}. - Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der - Option \OptionValue{listof}{numberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{listof}{numberline}}% + Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{numberline}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterungen des Besitzers \PValue{float} und bei Verwendung der Option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\important{\OptionValue{toc}{numberline}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}}% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} für die Dateierweiterung \PValue{toc}. Entsprechend wird die Eigenschaft bei Verwendung von Option - \OptionValue{listof}{nonumberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{listof}{nonumberline}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{nonumberline}}% \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{nonumberline}} oder - \OptionValue{toc}{nonumberline}% - \important{\OptionValue{toc}{nonumberline}}% + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{nonumberline}}% \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{nonumberline}} wieder zurückgesetzt. \item[\PValue{onecolumn}] \leavevmode\ChangedAt{v3.01}{\Package{tocbasic}}% bedeutet, dass für dieses Verzeichnis automatisch der \LaTeX-interne @@ -772,9 +753,10 @@ getrennte Aneinanderreihung von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket nicht mit der oben beschriebenen Eigenschaft \PValue{leveldown}\important{\PValue{leveldown}} um eine Gliederungsebene nach unten verschoben wurde. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen \Class{scrbook} und - \Class{scrreprt} setzen diese Eigenschaft per \Macro{AtAddToTocList} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) für alle Verzeichnisse mit - dem Besitzer \PValue{float} oder mit sich selbst als Besitzer. Damit werden + \Class{scrreprt} setzen diese Eigenschaft per + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AtAddToTocList}) für alle Verzeichnisse mit dem + Besitzer \PValue{float} oder mit sich selbst als Besitzer. Damit werden beispielsweise das Inhaltsverzeichnis, das Abbildungsverzeichnis und das Tabellenverzeichnis bei diesen beiden Klassen automatisch einspaltig gesetzt. Der Mehrspaltenmodus des @@ -783,14 +765,15 @@ getrennte Aneinanderreihung von \PName{Eigenschaften}. Das Paket \item[\PValue{totoc}] bedeutet, dass der Titel des Verzeichnisses in das Inhaltsverzeichnis aufgenommen werden soll. Diese Eigenschaft wird von der internen Überschriftenanweisung ausgewertet. Wird\textnote{Achtung!} mit - \Macro{deftocheading}\important{\Macro{deftocheading}}% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading}}% \IndexCmd{deftocheading} hingegen eine eigene Überschriftenanweisung definiert, liegt die Auswertung der Eigenschaft in der Verantwortung dessen, der die Definition vornimmt. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen setzen diese Eigenschaft bei Verwendung der Option - \OptionValue{listof}{totoc}\important{\OptionValue{listof}{totoc}}% - \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{totoc}} für alle - Dateierweiterungen des Besitzers \Package{float}. + \OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}% + \important{\OptionValueRef{maincls}{listof}{totoc}}% + \IndexOption{listof~=\PValue{totoc}} für alle Dateierweiterungen des + Besitzers \Package{float}. \end{description} Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft: \begin{description} @@ -798,8 +781,9 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft: jedem neuen Kapitel eine optionale Gliederung eingefügt wird. In der Voreinstellung ist diese Untergliederung dann ein vertikaler Abstand. Näheres zu den Möglichkeiten ist Option - \Option{listof}\IndexOption{listof}\important{\Option{listof}} in - \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \autopageref{desc:maincls.option.listof} zu + \DescRef{maincls.option.listof}% + \IndexOption{listof}\important{\DescRef{maincls.option.listof}} in + \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, \DescPageRef{maincls.option.listof} zu entnehmen. \end{description} \begin{Example} @@ -817,7 +801,7 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft: \begin{lstcode} \setuptoc{loa}{chapteratlist} \end{lstcode} - Wollen Sie außerdem, dass bei Klassen, die \Macro{chapter} als oberste + Wollen Sie außerdem, dass bei Klassen, die \DescRef{maincls.cmd.chapter} als oberste Gliederungsebene verwenden, das Verzeichnis automatisch einspaltig gesetzt wird, so verwenden Sie zusätzlich \begin{lstcode} @@ -825,10 +809,10 @@ Die \KOMAScript-Klassen kennen eine weitere Eigenschaft: \setuptoc{loa}{onecolumn}% } \end{lstcode} - Die Verwendung von \Macro{ifundefinedorrelax} + Die Verwendung von \DescRef{scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax} setzt das Paket \Package{scrbase} voraus (siehe \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, - \autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). + \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax}). Sollte\textnote{Tipp!} Ihr Paket mit einer anderen Klasse verwendet werden, so schadet es trotzdem nicht, dass Sie diese Eigenschaften setzen, im @@ -839,28 +823,27 @@ Wie Sie hier sehen, unterstützt ein Paket, das \Package{tocbasic} verwendet, bereits ohne nennenswerten Aufwand diverse Möglichkeiten für die dadurch realisierten Verzeichnisse, die sonst einigen Implementierungsaufwand bedeuteten und deshalb in vielen Paketen leider fehlen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{unsettoc}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setuptoc}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{iftocfeature}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Eigenschaft}\Parameter{Dann-Teil}\\ - \hphantom{\Macro{iftocfeature}}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} + \Macro{iftocfeature}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Eigenschaft} + \Parameter{Dann-Teil}\Parameter{Sonst-Teil} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{iftocfeature}% -Hiermit kann man für jede -\PName{Eigenschaft} feststellen, ob sie für eine \PName{Dateierweiterung} -gesetzt ist. Ist dies der Fall, wird der \PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der -\PName{Sonst-Teil}. Das kann beispielsweise nützlich sein, wenn Sie eigene -Überschriftenanweisungen mit \Macro{deftocheading} definieren, aber die oben -beschriebenen Eigenschaften \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{numbered} oder -\PValue{leveldown} unterstützen wollen. +Hiermit kann man für jede \PName{Eigenschaft} feststellen, ob sie für eine +\PName{Dateierweiterung} gesetzt ist. Ist dies der Fall, wird der +\PName{Dann-Teil} ausgeführt, anderenfalls der \PName{Sonst-Teil}. Das kann +beispielsweise nützlich sein, wenn Sie eigene Überschriftenanweisungen mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.deftocheading} definieren, aber die oben beschriebenen +Eigenschaften \PValue{totoc}, \PValue{numbered} oder \PValue{leveldown} +unterstützen wollen. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{iftocfeature}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Konfiguration von Verzeichniseinträgen} \seclabel{tocstyle} +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} Neben\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} den eigentlichen @@ -873,11 +856,34 @@ nie offiziell gewordene \KOMAScript-Paket \Package{tocstyle} ablösen. Die die von \Package{tocbasic} bereitgestellten Stile für Verzeichniseinträge. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{numberline}\Parameter{Gliederungsnummer}\\ + \Counter{tocdepth} +\end{Declaration} +Verzeichniseinträge sind normalerweise hierarchisch geordnet. Dazu wird jeder +Eintragsebene ein nummerischer Wert zu geordnet. Je höher dieser Wert, desto +tiefer in der Hierarchie liegt die Ebene. Bei den Standardklassen hat die +Ebene für Teile beispielsweise den Wert -1 und die Ebene für Kapitel den Wert +0. Über den \LaTeX-Zähler \Counter{tocdepth} wird bestimmt, bis zu welcher +Ebene Einträge im Verzeichnis ausgegeben werden. + +Bei \Class{book} ist \Counter{tocdepth} beispielsweise mit 2 voreingestellt, +es werden also die Einträge der Ebenen \PValue{part}, \PValue{chapter}, +\PValue{section} und \PValue{subsection} ausgeben. Tiefere Ebenen wie +\PValue{subsubsection}, deren numerischer Wert 3 ist, werden nicht +ausgegeben. Trotzdem sind die Einträge in der Hilfsdatei für das +Inhaltsverzeichnis vorhanden. + +Die von \Package{tocbasic} definierten Eintragsstile beachten abgesehen von +\PValue{gobble} (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\iffree{}{, weiter unten in + diesem Abschnitt}) ebenfalls \Counter{tocdepth}. +% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \Macro{numberline}\Parameter{Gliederungsnummer} \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline}\OParameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{numberline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{usetocbasicnumberline}% Zwar\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} definiert bereits der \LaTeX-Kern eine Anweisung \Macro{numberline}, diese ist allerdings für die Anforderungen von \Package{tocbasic} nicht ausreichend. Deshalb definiert es @@ -899,15 +905,13 @@ ein leeres optionales Argument angegeben wird. Es\textnote{Achtung!} ist zu beachten, dass \Macro{usetocbasicnumberline} den internen Schalter \Macro{@tempswa} global verändern kann!% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{usetocbasicnumberline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{numberline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Stil}% \Parameter{Eintragsebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% Über\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} diese Anweisungen werden die Verzeichniseinträge für eine bestimmte \PName{Eintragsebene} deklariert oder konfiguriert. Dabei ist die \PName{Eintragsebene} der Name der jeweiligen @@ -934,12 +938,13 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: Tabellenverzeichnis bekannt ist. Er kennt nur die Eigenschaften \PValue{level}, \PValue{indent} und \PValue{numwidth}. Die Einträge werden um \PValue{indent} von links eingezogen in der aktuellen Schrift - ausgegeben. \Macro{numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die Breite der Nummer - wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen wird der - Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um \PValue{numwidth} erhöht. Die Seitenzahl wird - mit \Macro{normalfont} ausgegeben. Eintragstext und Seitenzahl werden durch - eine punktierte Linie verbunden. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} - illustriert die Eigenschaften des Stils. + ausgegeben. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die + Breite der Nummer wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei mehrzeiligen + Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um \PValue{numwidth} + erhöht. Die Seitenzahl wird mit \Macro{normalfont} ausgegeben. Eintragstext + und Seitenzahl werden durch eine punktierte Linie + verbunden. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} illustriert die + Eigenschaften des Stils. \begin{figure} \centering \resizebox{.8\linewidth}{!}{% @@ -989,23 +994,24 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: \end{figure} \item[\PValue{gobble}] ist der denkbar einfachste Stil. Einträge in diesem Stil werden unabhängig von allen Einstellungen für - \Counter{tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}% + \IndexCounter{tocdepth}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}} nicht ausgegeben sondern sozusagen verschluckt. Dennoch verfügt er über die Standardeigenschaft \PValue{level}, die jedoch nie ausgewertet wird. \item[\PValue{largetocline}] entspricht dem Stil, der von den Standardklassen für die Ebene \PValue{part} bekannt ist. Er kennt nur die Eigenschaften \PName{level} und \PName{indent}. Letzteres ist gleichsam eine Abweichung von den Standardklassen, die selbst keinen Einzug der \PValue{part}-Einträge - unterstützen. + unterstützen. Vor dem Eintrag wird ein Seitenumbruch erleichtert. Die Einträge werden um \PValue{indent} von links eingezogen in \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries} - ausgegeben. Sollte \Macro{numberline} verwendet werden, so ist die - Nummernbreite fest auf 3\Unit{em} eingestellt. \Macro{numberline} wird nicht - umdefiniert. Die Standardklassen verwenden für \PName{part}-Einträge kein - \Macro{numberline}. Der Wert hat bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen auch keine - Auswirkung auf den Einzug ab der zweiten - Zeile. + ausgegeben. Sollte \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} verwendet werden, so + ist die Nummernbreite fest auf 3\Unit{em} + eingestellt. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die + Standardklassen verwenden für \PName{part}-Einträge kein + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}. Der Wert hat bei mehrzeiligen Einträgen + auch keine Auswirkung auf den Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.largetocline} illustriert die Eigenschaften des Stils. Dabei wird auch auffällig, dass der Stil einige Ungereimtheiten der @@ -1015,8 +1021,8 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: resultieren. Daraus resultiert auch der Umstand, dass im Extremfall der Text der Überschrift der Seitenzahl zu nah kommen kann. Es ist zu beachten, dass die in der Abbildung gezeigte Breite der Gliederungsnummer nur dann - Verwendung findet, wenn auch tatsächlich \Macro{numberline} verwendet - wird. Die Standardklassen setzen hingegen einen festen Abstand von + Verwendung findet, wenn auch tatsächlich \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} + verwendet wird. Die Standardklassen setzen hingegen einen festen Abstand von 1\Unit{em} nach der Nummer. \begin{figure} \centering @@ -1070,7 +1076,7 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: werden abhängig vom Namen der \PName{Eintragsebene} bestimmt und orientieren sich dann an den Ergebnissen der Standardklassen. Es ist daher möglich, nach Laden von \Package{tocbasic} den Stil der Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge der - Standardklassen mit \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle} in \PValue{tocline} zu + Standardklassen mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle} in \PValue{tocline} zu ändern, ohne dass dies unmittelbar zu größeren Veränderungen im Aussehen der Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge führt. So kann man gezielt nur die Eigenschaften ändern, die für erwünschte Änderungen notwendig sind. Dasselbe gilt für @@ -1238,11 +1244,12 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: Vor dem Eintrag wird ein Seitenumbruch erleichtert und ein vertikaler Abstand eingefügt. Die Einträge werden um \PValue{indent} von links - eingezogen in \Macro{bfseries} ausgegeben. \Macro{numberline} wird nicht - umdefiniert. Die Breite der Nummer wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei - mehrzeiligen Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um - \PValue{numwidth} erhöht. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline} illustriert - die Eigenschaften des Stils. + eingezogen in \Macro{bfseries} + ausgegeben. \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} wird nicht umdefiniert. Die + Breite der Nummer wird von \PValue{numwidth} bestimmt. Bei mehrzeiligen + Einträgen wird der Einzug ab der zweiten Zeile um \PValue{numwidth} + erhöht. \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline} illustriert die Eigenschaften + des Stils. \begin{figure} \centering \resizebox{.8\linewidth}{!}{% @@ -1285,13 +1292,13 @@ Derzeit werden von \Package{tocbasic} die folgenden Eintragsstile definiert: Eine Erklärung zu den Eigenschaften der von \Package{tocbasic} definierten Stile findet sich in \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}. Bei\ChangedAt[2016/06]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung der Eigenschaften -als Optionen für \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) sind die Namen der -Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{tocentry}, also beispielsweise -\Option{tocentrylevel} an Stelle von \PValue{level} zu +als Optionen für \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC} (siehe +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}) sind die Namen der Eigenschaften +mit dem Präfix \PValue{tocentry}, also beispielsweise \Option{tocentrylevel} +an Stelle von \PValue{level} zu verwenden. Bei\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verwendung als -Optionen für \Macro{DeclareSectionCommand} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) und verwandten +Optionen für \DescRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand} (siehe +\DescPageRef{maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand}) und verwandten Anweisungen sind die Namen der Eigenschaften mit dem Präfix \PValue{toc} zu versehen, also beispielsweise \Option{toclevel} an Stelle von \PValue{level} zu verwenden. @@ -1307,7 +1314,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. }{% Attribute der Verzeichniseintragsstile (\emph{Fortsetzung})% }% - \entry{\KOption{beforeskip}\PName{Länge}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{beforeskip}{Länge}}{% Vertikaler Abstand, der vor einem Eintrag dieser Ebene im Stil \PValue{tocline} eingefügt wird (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). Der Abstand wird je nach Ebene mit \Macro{vskip} oder \Macro{addvspace} @@ -1321,26 +1328,27 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. plus 1pt} verwendet. Alle anderen Ebenen werden mit \texttt{0pt plus .2pt} initialisiert.% }% - \entry{\KOption{breakafternumber}\PName{Schalter}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{breakafternumber}{Schalter}}{% \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus - \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. - Ist der Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird nach der - mit \Macro{numberline}\IndexCmd{numberline} gesetzten Nummer eine neue - Zeile begonnen, die erneut linksbündig mit der Nummer beginnt. + \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Ist der + Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird nach der mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline}\IndexCmd{numberline} gesetzten Nummer + eine neue Zeile begonnen, die erneut linksbündig mit der Nummer beginnt. In der Voreinstellung ist die Eigenschaft im Stil \PValue{tocline} nicht gesetzt. - Ist\textnote{Achtung!} für ein Verzeichnis mit \Macro{setuptoc} die - Eigenschaft \Option{numberline} gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den - \KOMAScript-Klassen und Verwendung deren Option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} der - Fall ist, führt dies auch dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen - dennoch die Zeile mit der dann leeren Nummer in der Formatierung von - \Option{entrynumberformat} gesetzt wird.% + Ist\textnote{Achtung!} für ein Verzeichnis mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft \Option{numberline} + gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen + und Verwendung deren Option \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch dazu, + dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen dennoch die Zeile mit der dann + leeren Nummer in der Formatierung von \Option{entrynumberformat} gesetzt + wird.% }% - \entry{\KOption{dynnumwidth}\PName{Schalter}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{dynnumwidth}{Schalter}}{% \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Ist der Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, wird die Eigenschaft @@ -1348,7 +1356,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. ermittelte maximale Breite der Eintragsnummern gleicher Ebene zuzüglich des Werts von \PValue{numsep} verwendet.% }% - \entry{\KOption{entryformat}\PName{Befehl}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{entryformat}{Befehl}}{% Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung des gesamten Eintrags verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau ein Argument zu erwarten. Dieses Argument ist nicht zwingend voll @@ -1368,24 +1376,26 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. \Macro{bfseries} verwendet. Bei allen anderen Ebenen wird das Argument unverändert ausgegeben.% }% - \entry{\KOption{entrynumberformat}\PName{Befehl}}{% - Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der mit \Macro{numberline} - gesetzten Eintragsnummer verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene - \PName{Befehl} hat genau ein Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen - erfolgen ausgehend von der Eigenschaft \Option{entryformat}. + \entry{\OptionVName{entrynumberformat}{Befehl}}{% + Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} gesetzten Eintragsnummer verändert + werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau ein + Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen erfolgen ausgehend von der + Eigenschaft \Option{entryformat}. Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit Ausgabe des übergebenen Arguments. Die Eintragsnummer wird also unverändert ausgegeben. - Ist\textnote{Achtung!} für ein Verzeichnis mit \Macro{setuptoc} die - Eigenschaft \Option{numberline} gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den - \KOMAScript-Klassen und Verwendung deren Option - \OptionValue{toc}{numberline}\IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} der - Fall ist, führt dies auch dazu, dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen - \PName{Befehl} dennoch ausgeführt wird.% + Ist\textnote{Achtung!} für ein Verzeichnis mit + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} die Eigenschaft \Option{numberline} + gesetzt (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}), wie dies bei den \KOMAScript-Klassen + und Verwendung deren Option \OptionValueRef{maincls}{toc}{numberline}% + \IndexOption{toc~=\PValue{numberline}} der Fall ist, führt dies auch dazu, + dass bei nicht nummerierten Einträgen \PName{Befehl} dennoch ausgeführt + wird.% }% - \entry{\KOption{indent}\PName{Länge}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{Länge}}{% Horizontaler Abstand des Eintrags vom linken Rand (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} und \autoref{fig:tocbasic.tocline}). @@ -1398,13 +1408,14 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Eintragsebenen \PValue{part} bis \PValue{subparagraph} sowie \PValue{figure} und \PValue{table} eine Initialisierung mit Werten entsprechend der Standardklassen statt. Alle anderen Ebenen erhalten keine - Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der - ersten Verwendung zwingend.% + Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der ersten + Verwendung zwingend.% }% - \entry{\KOption{level}\PName{Integer}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{level}{Integer}}{% Nummerischer Wert der \PName{Eintragsebene}. Tatsächlich angezeigt werden nur Einträge, deren nummerische Ebene nicht größer als Zähler - \Counter{tocdepth}\important{\Counter{tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} + \DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}% + \important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} ist. Diese Eigenschaft ist für alle Stile zwingend und wird bei der @@ -1424,7 +1435,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. \KOMAScript-Klassen \Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}numdepth} definiert ist.% }% - \entry{\KOption{linefill}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{linefill}{Code}}{% Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zwischen dem Ende des Eintragstextes und der Seitenzahl die Art der Füllung verändert werden. Die Eigenschaft \PName{linefill} erhält als Wert direkt den gewünschten \PName{Code}. @@ -1432,15 +1443,15 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Eigenschaft mit \Macro{hfill} initialisiert. Dadurch rückt die Seitenzahl an den rechten Rand. Ist bisher keine \PName{Eintragsebene} \PValue{chapter} definiert, so gilt dies auch für \PValue{section}. Alle - anderen Ebenen werden mit \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}) initialisiert. + anderen Ebenen werden mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}) initialisiert. Wird \PName{Code} angegeben, der nicht automatisch zu einer Füllung des Abstandes führt, sollte übrigens auch die Eigenschaft \PValue{raggedpagenumber} gesetzt werden, damit es nicht zu »\texttt{underfull \Macro{hbox}}«-Meldungen kommt.% }% - \entry{\KOption{numsep}\PName{Länge}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{numsep}{Länge}}{% Der Stil \PValue{tocline} versucht sicherzustellen, dass zwischen der Nummer und dem Text eines Eintrags mindestens ein Abstand von \PName{Länge} eingehalten wird. Bei aktiviertem \PValue{dynnumwidth} kann @@ -1451,7 +1462,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Die Eigenschaft wird mit einem Wert von 0,4\Unit{em} initialisiert.% }% - \entry{\KOption{numwidth}\PName{Länge}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{numwidth}{Länge}}{% Für die Nummer eines Eintrags reservierte Breite (siehe \autoref{fig:tocbasic.dottedtocline} bis \autoref{fig:tocbasic.undottedtocline}). Dieser Wert wird bei den @@ -1471,7 +1482,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Initialisierung. Für sie ist eine explizite Angabe daher bei der ersten Verwendung zwingend.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstarthigherlevel}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstarthigherlevel}{Code}}{% Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert @@ -1482,10 +1493,10 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty} seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat. - Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower}).% + Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower}).% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstartlowerlevel}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstartlowerlevel}{Code}}{% Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert @@ -1496,11 +1507,11 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty} seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat. - Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher}), was normalerweise + Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher}), was normalerweise dazu führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.% }% - \entry{\KOption{onstartsamelevel}\PName{Code}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{onstartsamelevel}{Code}}{% Der Stil \PValue{tocline} kann zu Beginn eines Eintrags eine Aktion in Abhängigkeit davon ausführen, ob der zuletzt gesetzte Eintrag einen höheren, denselben oder einen niedrigeren \PName{level}-Wert @@ -1512,11 +1523,11 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Die Erkennung funktioniert übrigens nur, solange sich \Macro{lastpenalty} seit dem letzten Eintrag nicht geändert hat. - Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame}), was normalerweise + Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame} (siehe + \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame}), was normalerweise dazu führt, dass ein Umbruch vor dem Eintrag begünstigt wird.% }% - \entry{\KOption{pagenumberbox}\PName{Befehl}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberbox}{Befehl}}{% Normalerweise wird die zu einem Eintrag gehörende Seitenzahl rechtsbündig in eine Box der Breite \Macro{@pnumwidth} gesetzt. Beim Stil \PValue{tocline} kann der Befehl, der dazu verwendet wird, über diese @@ -1525,7 +1536,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. Initialisiert wird die Eigenschaft mit der bereits erwähnten Box.% }% - \entry{\KOption{pagenumberformat}\PName{Befehl}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{pagenumberformat}{Befehl}}{% Über diese Eigenschaft kann die Formatierung der Seitenzahl des Eintrags verändert werden. Der dabei als Wert angegebene \PName{Befehl} hat genau ein Argument zu erwarten. Font-Änderungen über \Option{entryformat} @@ -1537,7 +1548,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. \Macro{large}\Macro{bfseries}. Für alle anderen Ebenen erfolgt die Ausgabe in \Macro{normalfont}\Macro{normalcolor}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{raggedentrytext}\PName{Schalter}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{raggedentrytext}{Schalter}}{% \ChangedAt{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. @@ -1547,7 +1558,7 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. In der Voreinstellung ist dieser Schalter nicht gesetzt.% }% - \entry{\KOption{raggedpagenumber}\PName{Schalter}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{raggedpagenumber}{Schalter}}{% \PName{Schalter} ist einer der Werte für einfache Schalter aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch}, \autopageref{tab:truefalseswitch}. Ist der Schalter beim Stil \PValue{tocline} aktiviert, so wird die @@ -1560,51 +1571,50 @@ Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}}. In der Voreinstellung ist dieser Schalter nicht gesetzt und passt damit zur Initialisierung von \PValue{linefill} sowohl mit \Macro{hfill} als - auch mit \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}.% + auch mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill}.% }% \end{desclist}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{Stil}% - \OParameter{Initialisierungscode}% - \Parameter{Befehlscode}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Präfix}% - \Parameter{Postfix}% - \Parameter{Erklärung}\\% - %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Präfix}% - \Parameter{Postfix}% - \Parameter{Erklärung}\\% - %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Präfix}% - \Parameter{Postfix}% - \Parameter{Erklärung}\\% - %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Präfix}% - \Parameter{Postfix}% - \Parameter{Erklärung}\\% - %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}\\ - \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}\Parameter{Option}\OParameter{Säumniswert}% - \Parameter{Präfix}% - \Parameter{Postfix}% - \Parameter{Erklärung}% - %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode}% + \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{Stil} + \OParameter{Initialisierungscode} + \Parameter{Befehlscode} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Code} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Präfix} + \Parameter{Postfix} + \Parameter{Erklärung} + %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Präfix} + \Parameter{Postfix} + \Parameter{Erklärung} + %\OParameter{Initialisierungscode} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Präfix}% + \Parameter{Postfix} + \Parameter{Erklärung} + % \OParameter{Initialisierungscode} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Präfix} + \Parameter{Postfix} + \Parameter{Erklärung} + % \OParameter{Initialisierungscode} + \Macro{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}\Parameter{Option} + \OParameter{Säumniswert} + \Parameter{Präfix} + \Parameter{Postfix} + \Parameter{Erklärung} + % \OParameter{Initialisierungscode} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}% \Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} ist eine der komplexesten Anweisungen in \KOMAScript. Sie richtet sich daher ausdrücklich an \LaTeX-Entwickler und nicht an \LaTeX-Anwender. Mit ihrer @@ -1612,17 +1622,16 @@ Hilfe ist es möglich, einen neuen \PName{Stil} für Verzeichniseinträge zu definieren. Üblicherweise werden Verzeichniseinträge mit \Macro{addcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addcontentsline} oder bei Verwendung von \Package{tocbasic} vorzugsweise mit -\Macro{addxcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addxcontentsline} (siehe -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline}) erzeugt. Dabei schreibt -\LaTeX{} eine zugehörige Anweisung \Macro{contentsline}\IndexCmd{contentsline} -in die jeweilige Hilfsdatei. Bei Einlesen dieser Hilfsdatei führt \LaTeX{} -dann für jedes \Macro{contentsline} eine Anweisung -\Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} aus. - -Wird später einer \PName{Eintragsebene} über \Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} der -\PName{Stil} zugewiesen, so wird zunächst der optionale -\PName{Initialisierungscode} ausgeführt und dann +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}\IndexCmd{addxcontentsline} (siehe +\autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addxcontentsline}) +erzeugt. Dabei schreibt \LaTeX{} eine zugehörige Anweisung +\Macro{contentsline}\IndexCmd{contentsline} in die jeweilige Hilfsdatei. Bei +Einlesen dieser Hilfsdatei führt \LaTeX{} dann für jedes \Macro{contentsline} +eine Anweisung \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} aus. + +Wird später einer \PName{Eintragsebene} über +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} der \PName{Stil} zugewiesen, so +wird zunächst der optionale \PName{Initialisierungscode} ausgeführt und dann \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} als \PName{Befehlscode} definiert. \PName{Befehlscode} ist also letztlich der Code, der bei \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} ausgeführt wird. Dabei ist \texttt{\#1} der @@ -1632,15 +1641,15 @@ für die beiden Argumente von \Macro{l@\PName{Eintragsebene}} sind. Der \PName{Initialisierungscode} dient einerseits dazu, alle Einstellungen zu initialisieren. Entwickler sollten darauf achten, dass wirklich alle Einstellungen hier bereits einen Wert erhalten, damit -\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry} auch ohne Angabe einer \PName{Optionenliste} -fehlerfrei funktioniert. Darüber hinaus hat der \PName{Initialisierungscode} -auch alle Optionen, die der jeweilige Stil versteht, zu definieren. Zwingend -vordefiniert wird lediglich \Option{level}. Der eingestellte Wert für -\Option{level} kann in \PName{Befehlscode} mit -\Macro{@nameuse}\PParameter{\#1tocdepth}% -\important{\Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}tocdepth}} -abgefragt werden, um ihn beispielsweise mit dem Wert des Zählers -\Counter{tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} zu vergleichen. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry} auch ohne Angabe einer +\PName{Optionenliste} fehlerfrei funktioniert. Darüber hinaus hat der +\PName{Initialisierungscode} auch alle Optionen, die der jeweilige Stil +versteht, zu definieren. Zwingend vordefiniert wird lediglich +\Option{level}. Der eingestellte Wert für \Option{level} kann in +\PName{Befehlscode} mit \Macro{@nameuse}\PParameter{\#1tocdepth}% +\important{\Macro{\PName{Eintragsebene}tocdepth}} abgefragt werden, um ihn +beispielsweise mit dem Wert des Zählers +\DescRef{\LabelBase.counter.tocdepth}\IndexCounter{tocdepth} zu vergleichen. Zur Definition neuer Optionen zur Einstellung von Eigenschaften einer Eintragsebene stehen nur innerhalb von \PName{Initialisierungscode} die @@ -1665,33 +1674,33 @@ Fehlermeldungen, Warnungen und Informationen auf dem Terminal und in der \File{log}-Datei ausgegeben. Der einfachste Stil von \Package{tocbasic}, \PValue{gobble}, wurde mit -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareTOCEntryStyle{gobble}{}% \end{lstcode} definiert. Würde man nun mit -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DeclareTOCStyleEntry[level=1]{gobble}{dummy} \end{lstcode} eine Eintragsebene \PValue{dummy} in diesem Stil definieren, so würde das unter anderem -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \def\dummytocdepth{1} \def\l@dummy#1#2{} \end{lstcode} entsprechen. Innerhalb von Stil \PValue{tocline} wird beispielsweise -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \DefineTOCEntryCommandOption{linefill}[\TOCLineLeaderFill]% {scr@tso@}{@linefill}{filling between text and page number}% \end{lstcode} verwendet, um Option \Option{linefill} mit dem \PName{Säumniswert} -\Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill} zu definieren. Ein Aufruf wie -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill} zu definieren. Ein Aufruf wie +\begin{lstcode} \RedeclareTOCStyleEntry[linefill]{tocline}{part} \end{lstcode} würde daher unter anderem die Definition -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \def\scr@tso@part@linefill{\TOCLineLeaderFill} \end{lstcode} vornehmen. @@ -1703,26 +1712,20 @@ Stil \PValue{tocline} viele Hinweise darauf, wie die Anweisungen sinnvoll zu verwenden sind. In vielen Fällen wird es jedoch auch ausreichen, einen der vorhandenen Stile -mit \Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle} zu klonen und dann dessen Initialisierungscode -mit \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} oder \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} -abzuändern. +mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle} zu klonen und dann dessen +Initialisierungscode mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} abzuändern. \Macro{DefineTOCEntryOption} dient eher der Definition der übrigen Anweisungen und sollte in der Regel nicht direkt verwendet werden. Normalerweise besteht dafür auch keine Notwendigkeit. Sie sei hier nur der Vollständigkeit halber erwähnt.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryNumberOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryLengthOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryIfOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryCommandOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DefineTOCEntryOption}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{CloneTOCEntryStyle}\Parameter{Stil}\Parameter{neuer Stil}% \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{CloneTOCEntryStyle}% Mit\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} dieser Anweisung kann ein existierender \PName{Stil} geklont werden. Dabei wird ein \PName{neuer Stil} mit denselben Eigenschaften und Voreinstellungen wie der existierende @@ -1733,26 +1736,25 @@ Anweisung um die Stile \PValue{part}, \PValue{section} und \PValue{chapter} oder \PValue{subsection} als Klon von \PValue{tocline} zu deklarieren und den Stil \PValue{default} neu als Klon von \PValue{section} beziehungsweise \PValue{subsection} zu deklarieren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{CloneTOCEntryStyle}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}\Parameter{Stil}% - \Parameter{Initialisierungscode}\\ + \Parameter{Initialisierungscode} \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}\Parameter{Stil}% \Parameter{Initialisierungscode} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}% Jeder\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil verfügt über einen Initialisierungscode. Dieser wird immer dann aufgerufen, wenn einer Verzeichnisebene der entsprechende \PName{Stil} mit -\Macro{DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCEntryStyle} zugewiesen -wird. Dieser \PName{Initialisierungscode} sollte keine globalen Seiteneffekte -aufweisen, da er auch für lokale Initialisierungen innerhalb anderer -Anweisungen wie \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC} verwendet -wird. Der \PName{Initialisierungscode} dient einerseits dazu, Eigenschaften -für den jeweiligen \PName{Stil} zu definieren. Er setzt aber auch die -Standardeinstellungen für diese Eigenschaften. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle}\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCEntryStyle} +zugewiesen wird. Dieser \PName{Initialisierungscode} sollte keine globalen +Seiteneffekte aufweisen, da er auch für lokale Initialisierungen innerhalb +anderer Anweisungen wie \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareNewTOC}\IndexCmd{DeclareNewTOC} +verwendet wird. Der \PName{Initialisierungscode} dient einerseits dazu, +Eigenschaften für den jeweiligen \PName{Stil} zu definieren. Er setzt aber +auch die Standardeinstellungen für diese Eigenschaften. Mit Hilfe von \Macro{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode} und \Macro{TOCEntryStyleInitCode} kann der für einen \PName{Stil} bereits @@ -1764,7 +1766,7 @@ beispielsweise von den \KOMAScript-Klassen verwendet, um für den von \PValue{tocline} geklonten Stil \PValue{part} Füllung, Schrift und vertikalen Abstand passend zu initialisieren. Die Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \Class{scrreprt} verwenden beispielsweise -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \CloneTOCEntryStyle{tocline}{section} \TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode{section}{% \expandafter\providecommand% @@ -1774,17 +1776,14 @@ Abstand passend zu initialisieren. Die Klassen \Class{scrbook} und \end{lstcode} um den Stil \PValue{section} als abgewandelten Klon von \PValue{tocline} zu definieren.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCEntryStyleInitCode}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}\\ - \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame}\\ + \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} + \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasSame} \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasLower} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasSame}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasLower}% Bei\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Einträgen im Stil \PValue{tocline} wird am Anfang abhängig von \Macro{lastpenalty} eine dieser drei Anweisungen ausgeführt. Dabei fügen \Macro{LastTOCLevelWasHigher} und @@ -1799,15 +1798,12 @@ Anwender sollten diese Anweisungen nicht umdefinieren. Stattdessen können und sollten Änderungen für die jeweiligen Eintragsebenen gezielt über die Eigenschaften \PValue{onstartlowerlevel}, \PValue{onstartsamelevel} und \PValue{onstarthigherlevel} vorgenommen werden.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasLower}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasSame}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{LastTOCLevelWasHigher}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{TOCLineLeaderFill}\OParameter{Füllzeichen} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{TOCLineLeaderFill}% Die\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Anweisung ist dazu gedacht als Wert für die Eigenschaft \Option{linefill} des Verzeichniseintragsstils \PName{tocline} verwendet zu werden. Sie erzeugt dann eine Verbindung zwischen @@ -1819,9 +1815,9 @@ Wie der Name schon vermuten lässt, werden die Füllzeichen mit Hilfe von \Macro{leaders} gesetzt. Als Abstand wird wie bei \Macro{@dottedtocline} aus dem \LaTeX-Kern vor und nach dem Füllzeichen \Macro{mkern}\Macro{@dotsep}\Unit{\texttt{mu}} verwendet.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{TOCLineLeaderFill}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Interne Anweisungen für Klassen- und Paketautoren} @@ -1839,7 +1835,6 @@ werden, so dass Umdefinierung der Anweisungen die Funktion von \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@extend@babel}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@extend@babel}% Das Paket \Package{babel}\IndexPackage{babel} (siehe \cite{package:babel}) bzw. ein \LaTeX-Kern, der um die Sprachverwaltung von \Package{babel} erweitert wurde, schreibt bei jeder Sprachumschaltung am Anfang oder innerhalb @@ -1853,12 +1848,12 @@ Anderenfalls besteht die Gefahr, dass etwa die Bedeutung eines Makros zum Zeitpunkt der tatsächlichen Auswertung bereits geändert wurde. In der Voreinstellung wird diese Anweisung normalerweise für alle -\PName{Dateierweiterungen}, die mit \Macro{addtotoclist} zur Liste der -bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt werden, aufgerufen. Über die -Eigenschaft \PValue{nobabel}\important{\PValue{nobabel}} (siehe -\Macro{setuptoc}, \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) kann dies unterdrückt werden. Für -die Dateinamenerweiterungen \File{toc}, \File{lof} und \File{lot} unterdrückt +\PName{Dateierweiterungen}, die mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.addtotoclist} zur +Liste der bekannten Dateierweiterungen hinzugefügt werden, aufgerufen. Über +die Eigenschaft \PValue{nobabel}\important{\PValue{nobabel}} (siehe +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}, \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) kann dies unterdrückt werden. Für die +Dateinamenerweiterungen \File{toc}, \File{lof} und \File{lot} unterdrückt \Package{tocbasic} dies bereits selbst, damit die Umschaltung nicht mehrfach in die zugehörigen Dateien eingetragen wird. @@ -1870,20 +1865,19 @@ Dateierweiterungen geführt werden, aber trotzdem die Spracherweiterung für aufzurufen. Bitte achten Sie jedoch darauf, dass dies für jede Dateierweiterung nur einmal geschieht! % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@extend@babel}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@starttoc}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@starttoc}% Diese Anweisung ist der eigentlich Ersatz der Anweisung \Macro{@starttoc}\IndexCmd{@starttoc}\important{\Macro{@starttoc}} aus dem -\LaTeX-Kern. Es ist die Anweisung, die sich hinter \Macro{listoftoc*} (siehe -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*}) +\LaTeX-Kern. Es ist die Anweisung, die sich hinter \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} (siehe +\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*}) verbirgt. Klassen- oder Paketautoren, die Vorteile von \Package{tocbasic} nutzen wollen, sollten zumindest diese Anweisung, besser jedoch -\Macro{listoftoc} verwenden. Die Anweisung baut selbst auf \Macro{@starttoc} +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} verwenden. Die Anweisung baut selbst auf \Macro{@starttoc} auf, setzt allerdings zuvor \Length{parskip}\IndexLength{parskip}\important[i]{\Length{parskip}\\ \Length{parindent}\\ @@ -1907,127 +1901,118 @@ diesem Fall das Laden des in \autoref{cha:scrwfile} beschriebenen Pakets \Package{scrwfile}\important{\Package{scrwfile}}\IndexPackage{scrwfile} bieten. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@starttoc}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook} \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@before@hook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@after@hook}% Der Haken \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook} wird unmittelbar vor dem Einlesen der -Verzeichnisdatei, noch vor den mit \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} definierten -Anweisungen ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von +Verzeichnisdatei, noch vor den mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} +definierten Anweisungen ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von \Macro{g@addto@macro}\IndexCmd{g@addto@macro} zu erweitern. -Ebenso wird \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} unmittelbar nach der Verzeichnisdatei, -aber noch vor den mit \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} definierten Anweisungen +Ebenso wird \Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} unmittelbar nach der +Verzeichnisdatei, aber noch vor den mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} definierten Anweisungen ausgeführt. Es ist erlaubt, diesen Haken mit Hilfe von \Macro{g@addto@macro} zu erweitern. -\KOMAScript{} nutzt diese Haken, um Verzeichnisse mit dynamischer -Anpassung an die Breite der Gliederungsnummern zu ermöglichen. Ihre Verwendung -ist Klassen und Paketen vorbehalten. Anwender\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich -auf \Macro{BeforeStartingTOC} und \Macro{AfterStartingTOC} -beschränken. Paketautoren sollten ebenfalls vorzugsweise diese beiden -Anwenderanweisungen verwenden! Ausgaben innerhalb der beiden Haken sind nicht -gestattet! - -Wird keine\textnote{Achtung!} der Anweisungen \Macro{listofeachtoc}, -\Macro{listoftoc} und \Macro{listoftoc*} für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse +\KOMAScript{} nutzt diese Haken, um Verzeichnisse mit dynamischer Anpassung an +die Breite der Gliederungsnummern zu ermöglichen. Ihre Verwendung ist Klassen +und Paketen vorbehalten. Anwender\textnote{Achtung!} sollten sich auf +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.AfterStartingTOC} beschränken. Paketautoren sollten +ebenfalls vorzugsweise diese beiden Anwenderanweisungen verwenden! Ausgaben +innerhalb der beiden Haken sind nicht gestattet! + +Wird keine\textnote{Achtung!} der Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} für die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse verwendet, sollten die beiden Anweisungen für die Haken trotzdem aufgerufen werden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@after@hook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@@before@hook}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@before@hook}\\ + \Macro{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@before@hook} \Macro{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@after@hook} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@before@hook}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@after@hook}% -Diese Anweisungen werden direkt nach \Macro{tocbasic@@before@hook} bzw. vor -\Macro{tocbasic@@after@hook} für das jeweilige Verzeichnis mit der +Diese Anweisungen werden direkt nach \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook} bzw. vor +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook} für das jeweilige Verzeichnis mit der entsprechenden \PName{Dateierweiterung} ausgeführt. Sie\textnote{Achtung!} dürfen keinesfalls von Klassen- und Paketautoren verändert werden. Werden für -die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse die Anweisungen \Macro{listoftoc}, -\Macro{listoftoc*} und \Macro{listofeachtoc} nicht verwendet, sollten die -beiden Anweisungen für die Haken trotzdem aufgerufen werden, soweit sie -definiert sind. Die Anweisungen können auch undefiniert sein. Für einen -entsprechenden Test siehe -\Macro{scr@ifundefinedorrelax}\IndexCmd{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} in -\autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, -\autopageref{desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax}. +die Ausgabe der Verzeichnisse die Anweisungen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}, \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc*} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} nicht verwendet, sollten die beiden +Anweisungen für die Haken trotzdem aufgerufen werden, soweit sie definiert +sind. Die Anweisungen können auch undefiniert sein. Für einen entsprechenden +Test siehe +\DescRef{scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax}\IndexCmd{scr@ifundefinedorrelax} +in \autoref{sec:scrbase.if}, \DescPageRef{scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax}. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@after@hook}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tb@\PName{Dateierweiterung}@before@hook}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@listhead}\Parameter{Titel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead}% -Diese Anweisung wird von \Macro{listoftoc} und \Macro{listofeachtoc} -verwendet, um die Anweisung zum Setzen der Überschrift eines Verzeichnisses -aufzurufen. Das kann entweder die vordefinierte Anweisung des Pakets -\Package{tocbasic} oder eine individuelle Anweisung sein. Wenn Sie Ihre eigene -Anweisung für die Überschrift definieren, können Sie ebenfalls -\Macro{tocbasic@listhead} verwenden. In diesem Fall sollte vor dem Aufruf von -\Macro{tocbasic@listhead} die Anweisung +Diese Anweisung wird von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listofeachtoc} verwendet, um die Anweisung zum Setzen +der Überschrift eines Verzeichnisses aufzurufen. Das kann entweder die +vordefinierte Anweisung des Pakets \Package{tocbasic} oder eine individuelle +Anweisung sein. Wenn Sie Ihre eigene Anweisung für die Überschrift definieren, +können Sie ebenfalls \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} verwenden. In diesem Fall +sollte vor dem Aufruf von \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} die Anweisung \Macro{@currext}\important{\Macro{@currext}}\IndexCmd{@currext} auf die Dateinamenerweiterung, die zu diesem Verzeichnis gehört, gesetzt werden. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{Dateierweiterung}}\Parameter{Titel} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{Dateierweiterung}}% Ist diese individuelle Anweisung für das Setzen einer Verzeichnisüberschrift -definiert, so verwendet \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} diese. Anderenfalls -definiert \Macro{tocbasic@listhead} diese und ruft sie dann auf. +definiert, so verwendet \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead} diese. Anderenfalls +definiert \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.tocbasic@listhead} diese und ruft sie dann auf. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@listhead@\PName{Dateierweiterung}} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% - \Parameter{Dateierweiterung}\Parameter{Ebene}\\ - \hphantom{\XMacro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}}% - \Parameter{Gliederungsnummer}\Parameter{Eintrag}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung} + \Parameter{Ebene} + \Parameter{Gliederungsnummer} + \Parameter{Eintrag} \Macro{nonumberline} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{nonumberline}% Anweisung\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{tocbasic}} \Macro{tocbasic@addxcontentsline} nimmt einen \PName{Eintrag} der angegebenen \PName{Ebene} in das über die \PName{Dateierweiterung} spezifizierte Verzeichnis vor. Ob der Eintrag nummeriert wird oder nicht, hängt davon ab, ob das Argument \PName{Gliederungsnummer} leer ist oder nicht. Im Falle eines leeren Argument wird dem \PName{Eintrag} ein \Macro{nonumberline} ohne -Argument vorangestellt. Anderenfalls wird wie gewohnt \Macro{numberline} mit -\PName{Gliederungsnummer} als Argument verwendet. - -Die Anweisung \Macro{nonumberline} wird innerhalb \Macro{listoftoc} (siehe -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc}) -entsprechend der Eigenschaft \PValue{numberline} (siehe -\autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc}) -umdefiniert. Dadurch wirkt sich das Setzen oder Löschen dieser Eigenschaft -bereits beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf aus.% +Argument vorangestellt. Anderenfalls wird wie gewohnt +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.numberline} mit \PName{Gliederungsnummer} als Argument +verwendet. + +Die Anweisung \Macro{nonumberline} wird innerhalb +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}) entsprechend der Eigenschaft +\PValue{numberline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.toc}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc}) umdefiniert. Dadurch wirkt sich das +Setzen oder Löschen dieser Eigenschaft bereits beim nächsten \LaTeX-Lauf aus.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{nonumberline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@addxcontentsline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{Eintragsebene}\\ + \Macro{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}\Parameter{Eintragsebene} \Macro{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}\Parameter{Eintragsebene} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}% Der\ChangedAt[2016/03]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Verzeichniseintragsstil \PValue{tocline} (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}) setzt am Ende jedes Eintrags \Macro{penalty} so, dass nach einem Eintrag kein Seitenumbruch @@ -2047,8 +2032,7 @@ vertikalen Modus ausgeführt werden. Entwickler, die eigene Stile kompatibel mit Stil \PValue{tocline} erstellen wollen, sei empfohlen, dieses Verhalten zu kopieren. Zu diesem Zweck dürfen sie auf diese eigentlich internen Makros zurückgreifen.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel}% +\EndIndexGroup \section{Ein komplettes Beispiel} @@ -2067,7 +2051,7 @@ verwendet werden müssen. Als\textnote{Umgebung} erstes wird eine Umgebung benötigt, die diese neue Gleitumgebung bereitstellt. Das geht ganz einfach mit: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newenvironment{remarkbox}{% \@float{remarkbox}% }{% @@ -2079,7 +2063,7 @@ Die neue Umgebung heißt also \Environment{remarkbox}. Jede\textnote{Platzierung} Gleitumgebung hat eine Standardplatzierung. Diese setzt sich aus den bekannten Platzierungsoptionen zusammen: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\fps@remarkbox}{tbp} \end{lstcode} Die neue Gleitumgebung soll also in der Voreinstellung nur oben, unten oder @@ -2090,7 +2074,7 @@ Gleittyp. Umgebungen, bei denen das gleiche Bit im Gleittyp gesetzt ist, dürfen sich nicht gegenseitig überholen. Abbildungen und Tabellen haben normalerweise den Typ~1 und 2. Sie dürfen sich also gegenseitig überholen. % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\ftype@remarkbox}{4} \end{lstcode} Die neue Umgebung hat den Typ~4, darf also Tabellen und Abbildungen überholen @@ -2098,7 +2082,7 @@ und von diesen überholt werden. Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Nummer} haben außerdem eine Nummer. % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcounter{remarkbox} \newcommand*{\remarkboxformat}{% Merksatz~\theremarkbox\csname autodot\endcsname} @@ -2109,12 +2093,12 @@ oder sonstigen Gliederungszählern ist. Dabei definiert \LaTeX{} auch gleich \Macro{theremarkbox} mit der Standardausgabe als arabische Zahl. Diese wird dann in der Definition der formatierten Ausgabe verwendet. Die formatierte Ausgabe wird wiederum als Gleitumgebungsnummer für die Verwendung in -\Macro{caption} definiert. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} definiert. Gleitumgebungen\textnote{Dateierweiterung} haben Verzeichnisse und diese haben eine Datei mit dem Namen \Macro{jobname} und einer Dateierweiterung. % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\ext@remarkbox}{lor} \end{lstcode} Als Dateierweiterung verwenden wir also »\File{lor}«. @@ -2124,12 +2108,12 @@ allerdings das Verzeichnis. Damit wir dabei möglichst wenig selbst machen müssen, verwenden wir das Paket \Package{tocbasic}. Dieses wird in Dokumenten mit % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \usepackage{tocbasic} \end{lstcode} geladen. Ein Klassen- oder Paketautor würde hingegen % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \RequirePackage{tocbasic} \end{lstcode} verwenden. @@ -2137,7 +2121,7 @@ verwenden. Nun\textnote{Dateierweiterung} machen wir die neue Dateierweiterung dem Paket \Package{tocbasic} bekannt. % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \addtotoclist[float]{lor} \end{lstcode} Dabei verwenden wir als Besitzer \PValue{float}, damit sich alle @@ -2147,7 +2131,7 @@ von Gleitumgebungen beziehen, auch auf das neue Verzeichnis beziehen. Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichnistitel} definieren wir noch einen Titel für dieses Verzeichnis: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\listoflorname}{Verzeichnis der Merksätze} \end{lstcode} Normalerweise würde man in einem Paket übrigens zunächst einen englischen @@ -2159,14 +2143,14 @@ will. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:scrbase.languageSupport}, ab Jetzt\textnote{Verzeichniseintrag}\index{Verzeichnis>Eintrag} müssen wir nur noch definieren, wie ein einzelner Eintrag in dem Verzeichnis aussehen soll: % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\l@remarkbox}{\l@figure} \end{lstcode} Weil das die einfachste Lösung ist, wurde hier festgelegt, dass Einträge in das Verzeichnis der Merksätze genau wie Einträge in das Abbildungsverzeichnis aussehen sollen. Man hätte auch eine explizite Festlegung wie % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\l@remarkbox}{\@dottedtocline{1}{1em}{1.5em}} \end{lstcode} verwenden können. @@ -2174,7 +2158,7 @@ verwenden können. Außerdem\textnote{Kapiteleintrag} wollen Sie, das Kapiteleinträge sich auf das Verzeichnis auswirken. % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \setuptoc{lor}{chapteratlist} \end{lstcode} Das Setzen dieser Eigenschaft ermöglicht dies bei Verwendung einer @@ -2183,12 +2167,13 @@ unterstützt. Leider gehören die Standardklassen nicht dazu. Das\textnote{Verzeichnis} genügt schon. Der Anwender kann nun bereits wahlweise mit Hilfe der Optionen einer \KOMAScript-Klasse oder -\Macro{setuptoc} verschiedene Formen der Überschrift (ohne +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} verschiedene Formen der Überschrift (ohne Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag, mit Inhaltsverzeichniseintrag, mit Nummerierung) -wählen und das Verzeichnis mit \Macro{listoftoc}\PParameter{lor} ausgeben. Mit -einem schlichten +wählen und das Verzeichnis mit +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.listoftoc}\PParameter{lor} ausgeben. Mit einem +schlichten % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\listofremarkboxes}{\listoftoc{lor}} \end{lstcode} kann man die Anwendung noch etwas vereinfachen. @@ -2206,15 +2191,15 @@ durch \Package{babel} werden in dem Verzeichnis ebenfalls berücksichtigt. Natürlich\textnote{Verzeichniseigenschaften} kann ein Paketautor weiteres hinzufügen. So könnte er explizit Optionen anbieten, um die Verwendung von -\Macro{setuptoc} vor dem Anwender zu verbergen. Andererseits kann er auch auf -diese Anleitung zu \Package{tocbasic} verweisen, wenn es darum geht, die -entsprechenden Möglichkeiten zu erklären. Vorteil ist dann, dass der Anwender -automatisch von etwaigen zukünftigen Erweiterungen von \Package{tocbasic} -profitiert. Soll der Anwender aber nicht mit der Tatsache belastet werden, -dass für die Merksätze die Dateierweiterung \File{lor} verwendet wird, so -genügt +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setuptoc} vor dem Anwender zu verbergen. Andererseits +kann er auch auf diese Anleitung zu \Package{tocbasic} verweisen, wenn es +darum geht, die entsprechenden Möglichkeiten zu erklären. Vorteil ist dann, +dass der Anwender automatisch von etwaigen zukünftigen Erweiterungen von +\Package{tocbasic} profitiert. Soll der Anwender aber nicht mit der Tatsache +belastet werden, dass für die Merksätze die Dateierweiterung \File{lor} +verwendet wird, so genügt % Umbruchkorrektur: listings korrigiert! -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt] +\begin{lstcode} \newcommand*{\setupremarkboxes}{\setuptoc{lor}} \end{lstcode} um eine als Argument an \Macro{setupremarkboxes} übergebene Liste von @@ -2230,21 +2215,22 @@ Verzeichnissen zu definieren. In diesem Beispiel wird gezeigt, dass es sogar noch einfacher gehen kann. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\OParameter{Optionenliste}\Parameter{Dateierweiterung}% + \Macro{DeclareNewTOC}\OParameter{Optionenliste} + \Parameter{Dateierweiterung} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewTOC}% Mit\ChangedAt{v3.06}{\Package{tocbasic}} dieser Anweisung wird in einem einzigen Schritt ein neues Verzeichnis, dessen Überschrift und die Bezeichnung für die Einträge unter Kontrolle von \Package{tocbasic} definiert. Optional können dabei gleichzeitig gleitende oder nicht gleitende Umgebungen definiert -werden, innerhalb derer -\Macro{caption}\important{\Macro{caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} Einträge für +werden, innerhalb derer \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}% +\important{\DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}}\IndexCmd{caption} Einträge für dieses neue Verzeichnis erzeugt. Auch die Erweiterungen -\Macro{captionabove}\important[i]{% - \Macro{captionabove}\\ - \Macro{captionbelow}}, \Macro{captionbelow} und \Environment{captionbeside} -aus den \KOMAScript-Klassen (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, ab -\autopageref{desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove}) können dann verwendet werden. +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\important[i]{% + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}\\ + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow}}, \DescRef{maincls.cmd.captionbelow} und +\DescRef{maincls.env.captionbeside} aus den \KOMAScript-Klassen (siehe +\autoref{sec:maincls.floats}, ab \DescPageRef{maincls.cmd.captionabove}) +können dann verwendet werden. \PName{Dateierweiterung} definiert dabei die Dateiendung der Hilfsdatei, die das Verzeichnis repräsentiert, wie dies in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, ab @@ -2252,11 +2238,12 @@ das Verzeichnis repräsentiert, wie dies in \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}, ab muss angegeben werden und darf nicht leer sein! \PName{Optionenliste} ist eine durch Komma getrennte Liste, wie dies auch von -\Macro{KOMAoptions} (siehe \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}) bekannt ist. Diese +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions} (siehe \autoref{sec:typearea.options}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions}) bekannt ist. Diese Optionen\textnote{Achtung!} können jedoch \emph{nicht} mit -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden! Eine Übersicht über -die möglichen Optionen bietet \autoref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options} ab +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions}\IndexCmd{KOMAoptions} gesetzt werden! Eine +Übersicht über die möglichen Optionen bietet +\autoref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options} ab \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.DeclareNewTOC-options}. Wird\ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}} Option @@ -2276,10 +2263,11 @@ gesetzt werden, indem die entsprechenden in \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes} aufgeführten Namen mit dem Präfix \PValue{tocentry} versehen in der \PName{Optionenliste} angegeben werden. Nachträgliche Änderungen am Stil sind mit -\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% -\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}\important{\Macro{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}} -jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, -\autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\IndexCmd{DeclareTOCStyleEntry}% +\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}} jederzeit +möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, +\DescPageRef{\LabelBase.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry}. % \begin{Example} Das Beispiel aus \autoref{sec:tocbasic.example} kann mit Hilfe der neuen @@ -2305,7 +2293,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, Option \Option{floattype} im Beispiel entfallen. Wird zusätzlich die Option \Option{nonfloat} angegeben, wird außerdem eine nicht gleitende Umgebung \Environment{remarkbox-} definiert, in der ebenfalls - \Macro{caption}\IndexCmd{caption} verwendet werden kann. + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\IndexCmd{caption} verwendet werden kann. Zum besseren Verständnis zeigt \autoref{tab:tocbasic.comparison} eine Gegenüberstellung der Anweisungen und Umgebungen für die neu erstellte @@ -2336,18 +2324,19 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, & spaltenübergreifende Gleitumgebung des jeweiligen Typs \\[1ex] \Counter{remarkbox} & \Counter{figure} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} - & Zähler, der von \Macro{caption} verwendet wird \\[1ex] + & Zähler, der von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} verwendet wird \\[1ex] \Macro{theremarkbox} & \Macro{thefigure} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} & Anweisung zur Ausgabe des jeweiligen Zählers \\[1ex] - \Macro{remarkboxformat} & \Macro{figureformat} + \Macro{remarkboxformat} & \DescRef{maincls.cmd.figureformat} & \Option{type}, \Option{float} & Anweisung zur Formatierung des jeweiligen Zählers in der Ausgabe von - \Macro{caption}\\[1ex] + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption}\\[1ex] \Macro{remarkboxname} & \Macro{figurename} & \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{name} - & Name, der im Label von \Macro{caption} verwendet wird \\[1ex] - \Macro{listofremarkboxes} & \Macro{listoffigures} + & Name, der im Label von \DescRef{maincls.cmd.caption} verwendet + wird\\[1ex] + \Macro{listofremarkboxes} & \DescRef{maincls.cmd.listoffigures} & \Option{types}, \Option{float} & Anweisung zur Ausgabe des jeweiligen Verzeichnisses \\[1ex] \Macro{listremarkboxname} & \Macro{listfigurename} @@ -2355,7 +2344,8 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, & Überschrift des jeweiligen Verzeichnisses \\[1ex] \Macro{fps@remarkbox} & \Macro{fps@figure} & \Option{type}, \Option{float}, \Option{floattype} - & nummerischer Gleitumge\-bungstyp zwecks Reihen\-fol\-gen\-erhalts \\[1ex] + & nummerischer Gleitumge\-bungstyp zwecks + Reihen\-fol\-gen\-erhalts\\[1ex] \File{lor} & \File{lof} & & Dateiendung der Hilfsdatei für das jeweilige Verzeichnis \\ @@ -2404,15 +2394,15 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, }{% Optionen für die Anweisung \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} (\emph{Fortsetzung})% }% - \entry{\KOption{atbegin}\PName{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{atbegin}{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Anfang dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.% }% - \entry{\KOption{atend}\PName{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{atend}{Code}\ChangedAt{v3.09}{\Package{tocbasic}}}{% Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert wird, so wird \PName{Code} jeweils am Ende dieser Umgebung ausgeführt.% }% - \entry{\KOption{counterwithin}\PName{\LaTeX-Zähler}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{counterwithin}{\LaTeX-Zähler}}{% Falls eine neue Gleitumgebung oder eine nicht gleitende Umgebung definiert wird, so wird für diese auch ein neuer Zähler \Counter{\PName{Eintragstyp}} (siehe Option \Option{type}) @@ -2425,7 +2415,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, Gleitumgebungen \Environment{\PName{Eintragstyp}} (siehe Option \Option{type}) und \Environment{\PName{Eintragstyp}*} (vgl. \Environment{figure} und \Environment{figure*}).}% - \entry{\KOption{floatpos}\PName{Gleitverhalten}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{floatpos}{Gleitverhalten}}{% Jede Gleitumgebung hat ein voreingestelltes \PName{Gleitverhalten}, das über das optionale Argument der Gleitumgebung geändert werden kann. Mit dieser Option wird das \PName{Gleitverhalten} für die optional erstellbare @@ -2434,7 +2424,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, identisch. Wird die Option nicht verwendet, so ist das voreingestellte Gleitverhalten \texttt{tbp}, also \emph{top}, \emph{bottom}, \emph{page}.}% - \entry{\KOption{floattype}\PName{Gleittyp}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{floattype}{Gleittyp}}{% Jede Gleitumgebung hat einen nummerischen Typ. Gleitumgebungen, bei denen in diesem \PName{Gleittyp} nur unterschiedliche Bits gesetzt sind, können sich gegenseitig überholen. Die Gleitumgebungen \Environment{figure} und @@ -2445,7 +2435,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, höchst mögliche Ein-Bit-Typ verwendet.}% \entry{\Option{forcenames}}{% Siehe Option \Option{name} und \Option{listname}.}% - \entry{\KOption{hang}\PName{Einzug}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{hang}{Einzug}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Die Breite der @@ -2456,10 +2446,10 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, und damit Option \Option{tocentrynumwidth}. Besitzt ein Stil diese Eigenschaft, so wird sie von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit 1,5\Unit{em} voreingestellt. Diese Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von - \KOption{tocentrynumwidth}\PName{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen + \OptionVName{tocentrynumwidth}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert} überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die \KOMAScript-Klassen beispielsweise den \PName{Wert} \PValue{2.3em}.}% - \entry{\KOption{indent}\PName{Einzug}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{indent}{Einzug}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der Einzug des @@ -2470,10 +2460,10 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, damit Option \Option{tocentryindent}. Besitzt ein Stil diese Eigenschaft, so wird sie von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit 1\Unit{em} voreingestellt. Diese Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von - \KOption{tocentryindent}\PName{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert} + \OptionVName{tocentryindent}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert} überschrieben werden. Für Abbildungen verwenden die \KOMAScript-Klassen beispielsweise den \PName{Wert} \PValue{1.5em}.}% - \entry{\KOption{level}\PName{Gliederungsebene}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{level}{Gliederungsebene}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.21}{\Package{tocbasic}}% Diese Option gilt seit \KOMAScript~3.20 als überholt. Der nummerische Wert @@ -2483,9 +2473,9 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, Stile die Eigenschaft \PValue{level} und damit Option \Option{tocentrylevel}. Die Eigenschaft wird von \Macro{DeclareNewTOC} mit 1 voreingestellt. Diese Voreinstellung kann durch explizite Angabe von - \KOption{tocentrylevel}\PName{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert} + \OptionVName{tocentrylevel}{Wert} leicht mit einem anderen \PName{Wert} überschrieben werden.}% - \entry{\KOption{listname}\PName{Verzeichnistitel}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{listname}{Verzeichnistitel}}{% Jedes Verzeichnis hat eine Überschrift, die durch diese Option bestimmt werden kann. Ist die Option nicht angegeben, so wird als Verzeichnistitel »\texttt{List of \PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}« (siehe Option @@ -2495,7 +2485,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, jederzeit geändert werden kann. Dieses Makro wird jedoch nur definiert, wenn es nicht bereits definiert ist oder zusätzlich Option \Option{forcenames} gesetzt ist.}% - \entry{\KOption{name}\PName{Eintragsname}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{name}{Eintragsname}}{% Sowohl als optionaler Präfix für die Einträge im Verzeichnis als auch für die Beschriftung in einer Gleitumgebung (siehe Option \Option{float}) oder einer nicht gleitenden Umgebung (siehe Option \Option{nonfloat}) wird ein @@ -2513,13 +2503,13 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, Option \Option{type}), die ähnlich wie eine Gleitumgebung verwendet werden kann, jedoch nicht gleitet und auch nicht die Grenzen der aktuell gültigen Umgebung durchbricht.}% - \entry{\KOption{owner}\PName{Besitzer}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{owner}{Besitzer}}{% Jedes neue Verzeichnis hat bei \Package{tocbasic} einen Besitzer (siehe \autoref{sec:tocbasic.basics}). Dieser kann hier angegeben werden. Ist kein Besitzer angegeben, so wird der Besitzer »\PValue{float}« verwendet, den auch die \KOMAScript-Klassen für das Abbildungs- und das Tabellenverzeichnis verwenden.}% - \entry{\KOption{tocentrystyle}\PName{Eintragsstil}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentrystyle}{Eintragsstil}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% \PName{Eintragsstil} gibt den Stil an, den Einträge in das entsprechende Verzeichnis haben sollen. Der Name der Eintragsebene wird dabei über @@ -2530,7 +2520,7 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, \Option{tocentrylevel} angegeben werden. Näheres zu den Stilen ist \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab \autopageref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} zu entnehmen.}% - \entry{\KOption{tocentry\PName{Stiloption}}\PName{Wert}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{tocentry\PName{Stiloption}}{Wert}}{% \ChangedAt[2015/12]{v3.20}{\Package{tocbasic}}% Weitere Optionen in Abhängigkeit vom via \Option{tocentrystyle} gewählten \PName{Eintragsstil}. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle} ab @@ -2540,14 +2530,14 @@ jederzeit möglich. Siehe dazu \autoref{sec:tocbasic.tocstyle}, \autoref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}, ab \autopageref{tab:tocbasic.tocstyle.attributes}.% }% - \entry{\KOption{type}\PName{Eintragstyp}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{type}{Eintragstyp}}{% \PName{Eintragstyp} gibt den Typ der Einträge in das entsprechende Verzeichnis an. Der Typ wird auch als Basisname für verschiedene Makros und gegebenenfalls Umgebungen und Zähler verwendet. Er sollte daher nur aus Buchstaben bestehen. Wird diese Option nicht verwendet, so wird für \PName{Eintragstyp} die \PName{Dateierweiterung} aus dem obligatorischen Argument verwendet.}% - \entry{\KOption{types}\PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}{% + \entry{\OptionVName{types}{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}}{% An verschiedenen Stellen wird auch die Mehrzahlform des Eintragstyps verwendet, beispielsweise um eine Anweisung \Macro{listof\PName{Mehrzahl des Eintragstyps}} zu definieren. Wird diese Option nicht verwendet, @@ -2561,11 +2551,9 @@ zu einer Fehlermeldung, weil \Package{hyperref} nicht mit dem \Macro{MakeUppercase} im Namen des Verzeichnisses zurecht kommt, das benötigt wird, um den ersten Buchstaben des Wert von \Option{types} in Großbuchstaben zu wandeln.% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{DeclareNewTOC}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Verzeichnis}% -\EndIndex{}{Dateierweiterung}% -\EndIndex{Package}{tocbasic}% +\EndIndexGroup \endinput @@ -2587,4 +2575,5 @@ zu wandeln.% % LocalWords: Kapitelüberschrift Gliederungsebene expandierbares % LocalWords: Eintragsnummer Initialisierungscode Aktivierungswerte % LocalWords: Deaktivierungswert Verzeichnistitel Eintragstyp Eintragstyps -% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags +% LocalWords: Verzeichniseintrags Säumniswert Überschriftenanweisung +% LocalWords: Eintragstext diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex index 005ec57f86a..84463e8fd40 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea-experts.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % typearea-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % typearea-experts.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2008-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -46,12 +46,14 @@ % ====================================================================== \KOMAProvidesFile{typearea-experts.tex} - [$Date: 2015-05-21 15:48:01 +0200 (Thu, 21 May 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:27:16 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea for experts)] \chapter{Zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket \Package{typearea.sty}} \labelbase{typearea-experts} +\BeginIndexGroup +\BeginIndex{Package}{typearea} In diesem Kapitel finden Sie zusätzliche Informationen zum Paket \Package{typearea}. \iffree{Einige Teile des Kapitels sind dabei dem \KOMAScript-Buch \cite{book:komascript} vorbehalten. Dies sollte kein @@ -66,6 +68,73 @@ Gründen der Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript{} existieren, sind in serifenloser Schrift gesetzt und sollten nicht mehr verwendet werden. +\section{Experimentelle Möglichkeiten} +\seclabel{experimental} + +In diesem Abschnitt werden experimentelle Möglichkeiten +beschrieben. Experimentell bedeutet in diesem Zusammenhang, dass die Funktion +nicht garantiert werden kann. Dafür kann es zwei Gründe geben. Zum einen +steht die endgültige Funktion oder Implementierung eventuell noch nicht +abschließend fest. Zum anderen hängen die Möglichkeiten teilweise von Interna +anderer Pakete ab und können deshalb in ihrer Funktion nur so lange garantiert +werden, wie diese anderen Pakete nicht geändert werden. + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{usegeometry}{Ein-Aus-Wert} +\end{Declaration} +Normalerweise kümmert sich \Package{typearea} wenig darum, ob es in irgend +einer Konstellation zusammen mit dem Paket +\Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry} (siehe \cite{package:geometry}) +verwendet wird. Das bedeutet insbesondere, dass \Package{geometry} nach wie +vor nichts davon mit bekommt, wenn man mit \Package{typearea} beispielsweise +die Papiergröße ändert -- etwas, das \Package{geometry} selbst gar nicht +bietet. + +Sobald Option \Option{usegeometry} gesetzt wird versucht \Package{typearea} +alle eigenen Optionen auch in Optionen für \Package{geometry} zu übersetzen +und innerhalb des Dokuments wird sogar \Macro{newgeometry} aufgerufen, wenn +neue Parameter aktiviert werden (siehe \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} +im nachfolgenden Abschnitt). Da \Package{geometry} keine Änderung der +Papiergröße oder Papierausrichtung via \Macro{newgeometry} bietet, wird diese +bei Bedarf über interne Anweisungen und Längen von \Package{geometry} +umgesetzt. Getestet ist dies für \Package{geometry}~5.3 bis 5.6. + +Die Option bedeutet übrigens nicht, dass bei Verwendung von \Package{geometry} +nach einer Papiergrößen- oder Papierausrichtungsänderung mit +\Package{typearea} das neue Papier direkt optimal genutzt wird. Da +\Package{geometry} aus Komfortgründen deutlich mehr Optionen für die +Papiereinstellung bietet, als für die Bestimmung von Textbereich, Rändern, +Kopf, Fuß etc. benötigt werden -- man spricht von \emph{Überbestimmung} -- und +gleichzeitig bei neuen Aufrufen von \Macro{newgeometry} fehlende Angaben aus +bereits bekannten ableitet -- man spricht von \emph{Werterhalt} --, +muss man gegebenenfalls durch explizite vollständige Bestimmung neuer Werte +bei einem eigenen Aufruf von \Macro{newgeometry} alle gewünschten +Einstellungen explizit vornehmen. Nichts desto Trotz kann die Berücksichtigung +von \Package{geometry} durch \Package{typearea} zusätzliche Möglichkeiten +eröffnen.% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{areasetadvanced}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe} +\end{Declaration} +Normalerweise berücksichtigt \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} Optionen zur +Bestimmung der Höhe von Kopf und Fuß oder zur Festlegung, ob Randelemente Teil +des Satzspiegels sein sollen, nicht in gleicher Weise wie +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}. Mit Option \Option{areasetadvanced} kann +jedoch eingestellt werden, dass sich \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} +diesbezüglich mehr wie \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea} verhalten +soll. Trotzdem unterscheiden sich Einstellungen, die zu gleich großen +Textbereichen führen zwischen den beiden Befehlen weiterhin, da +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea} immer auf ganze Zeile rundet und dabei +gegebenenfalls den unteren Rand um bis zu eine Zeile kleiner wählt, während +\DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset} den oberen und unteren Rand immer im Verhältnis +1:2 einstellt. Die Textbereiche der unterschiedlichen Befehle können also bei +gleicher Größe vertikal leicht verschoben sein.% +\EndIndexGroup + + \section{Anweisungen für Experten} \seclabel{experts} @@ -77,14 +146,13 @@ gedacht sind, sind sie kürzer gefasst. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{activateareas} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{activateareas}% -Diese Anweisung wird von \Package{typearea} genutzt, um die Einstellungen -für Satzspiegel und Ränder in die internen \LaTeX-Längen zu übertragen, wenn -der Satzspiegel innerhalb des Dokuments, also nach +Diese Anweisung wird von \Package{typearea} genutzt, um die Einstellungen für +Satzspiegel und Ränder in die internen \LaTeX-Längen zu übertragen, wenn der +Satzspiegel innerhalb des Dokuments, also nach \Macro{begin}\PParameter{document} neu berechnet wurde. Wurde die Option -\Option{pagesize} verwendet, so wird diese anschließend mit demselben Wert -neu aufgerufen. Damit kann beispielsweise innerhalb von PDF-Dokumenten die -Seitengröße tatsächlich variieren. +\DescRef{typearea.option.pagesize} verwendet, so wird diese anschließend mit +demselben Wert neu aufgerufen. Damit kann beispielsweise innerhalb von +PDF-Dokumenten die Seitengröße tatsächlich variieren. Experten können diese Anweisung auch verwenden, wenn Sie aus irgendwelchen Gründen Längen wie \Length{textwidth} oder \Length{textheight} innerhalb des @@ -93,20 +161,16 @@ notwendige Seitenumbrüche vor oder nach der Verwendung jedoch selbst verantwortlich! Darüber hinaus sind alle von \Macro{activateareas} durchgeführten Änderungen lokal!% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{activateareas} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{storeareas}\Parameter{Anweisung}\\ - \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas}\Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}\Parameter{Code}\\ - \Macro{AfterRestoreareas}\Parameter{Code}\\ + \Macro{storeareas}\Parameter{Anweisung} + \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*}\Parameter{Code} + \Macro{AfterRestoreareas}\Parameter{Code} \Macro{AfterRestoreareas*}\Parameter{Code} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{storeareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas*}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas*}% Mit Hilfe von \Macro{storeareas} wird eine \PName{Anweisung} definiert, über die alle aktuellen Seitenspiegeleinstellungen wieder hergestellt werden können. So ist es möglich, die aktuellen Einstellungen zu speichern, @@ -131,13 +195,15 @@ Einstellungen wieder zu reaktivieren. \noindent\rule{\textwidth}{\textheight} \end{document} \end{lstcode} - Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} ist dabei die Anweisung \Macro{clearpage} vor dem - Aufruf von \Macro{meinegespeichertenWerte}, damit die Wiederherstellung erst - auf der nächsten Seite erfolgt. Bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten sollte bei - Änderungen am Papierformat stattdessen sogar - \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage}\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} oder -- wenn keine - \KOMAScript-Klasse zum Einsatz kommt -- - \Macro{cleardoublepage}\IndexCmd{cleardoublepage} verwendet werden. + Wichtig\textnote{Achtung!} ist dabei die Anweisung + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.clearpage} vor dem Aufruf von + \Macro{meinegespeichertenWerte}, damit die Wiederherstellung erst auf der + nächsten Seite erfolgt. Bei doppelseitigen Dokumenten sollte bei Änderungen + am Papierformat stattdessen sogar + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage}\IndexCmd{cleardoubleoddpage} oder + -- wenn keine \KOMAScript-Klasse zum Einsatz kommt -- + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage}\IndexCmd{cleardoublepage} verwendet + werden. \end{Example} Im Beispiel wird \Macro{noindent} verwendet, um den normalen Absatzeinzug vor den schwarzen Kästen zu verhindern. Sie würden sonst kein korrektes Bilde des @@ -153,45 +219,43 @@ entsprechende Fehlermeldung ausgegeben. Oftmals\ChangedAt{v3.18}{\Package{typearea}} ist es auch erwünscht, vor der Wiederherstellung der Einstelllungen per \PName{Anweisung} grundsätzlich -bestimmte Aktionen wie beispielsweise ein \Macro{cleardoubleoddpage} -auszuführen. Dies kann man mit Hilfe von \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas} und -\Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*} erreichen. Entsprechend kann man mit -\Macro{AfterRestoreareas} und \Macro{AfterRestoreareas*} \PName{Code} nach der -Wiederherstellung der Einstellungen ausführen lassen. Die Formen mit und ohne -Stern unterscheiden sich insoweit, als die Sternform nur für noch nicht per -\Macro{storeareas} gespeicherte Einstellungen gilt, während sich die Variante -ohne Stern auch auf die zukünftige Verwendung bereits früher gespeicherter -Einstellungen auswirkt.% +bestimmte Aktionen wie beispielsweise ein +\DescRef{maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage} auszuführen. Dies kann man mit Hilfe +von \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas} und \Macro{BeforeRestoreareas*} +erreichen. Entsprechend kann man mit \Macro{AfterRestoreareas} und +\Macro{AfterRestoreareas*} \PName{Code} nach der Wiederherstellung der +Einstellungen ausführen lassen. Die Formen mit und ohne Stern unterscheiden +sich insoweit, als die Sternform nur für noch nicht per \Macro{storeareas} +gespeicherte Einstellungen gilt, während sich die Variante ohne Stern auch auf +die zukünftige Verwendung bereits früher gespeicherter Einstellungen +auswirkt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterRestoreareas}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas*}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{BeforeRestoreareas}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{storeareas} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea*}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ - \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\Parameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea*}\Parameter{Anweisungen} + \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \Macro{AfterSettingArea*}\Parameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{AfterCalculatingTypearea}% Diese Anweisungen dienen der Verwaltung zweier Haken\Index{Haken} (engl. \emph{hooks}\Index{hook=\emph{hook}}). Die ersten beiden, \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} und deren Sternform, ermöglichen es dem Experten jedes Mal, nachdem \Package{typearea} eine neue Aufteilung in Satzspiegel und Ränder berechnet hat, also nach jeder impliziten oder -expliziten Ausführung von \Macro{typearea}, \PName{Anweisungen} ausführen zu -lassen. Entsprechendes leisten +expliziten Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}, \PName{Anweisungen} +ausführen zu lassen. Entsprechendes leisten \Macro{AfterSettingArea}\ChangedAt{v3.11}{\Package{typearea}} und dessen -Stern-Form für die Ausführung von \Macro{areaset}. Die Normalformen arbeiten -dabei global, während die Änderungen durch die Sternformen nur lokal wirksam -sind. Die \PName{Anweisungen} werden jeweils unmittelbar vor -\Macro{activateareas} ausgeführt.\iffree{}{ In \autoref{cha:modernletters} - wird für die \emph{Letter-Class-Option} \File{asymTypB.lco} davon Gebrauch - gemacht, um die Randverteilung zu ändern.}% +Stern-Form für die Ausführung von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.areaset}. Die +Normalformen arbeiten dabei global, während die Änderungen durch die +Sternformen nur lokal wirksam sind. Die \PName{Anweisungen} werden jeweils +unmittelbar vor \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.activateareas} ausgeführt.\iffree{}{ + In \autoref{cha:modernletters} wird für die \emph{Letter-Class-Option} + \File{asymTypB.lco} davon Gebrauch gemacht, um die Randverteilung zu + ändern.}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{AfterCalculatingTypearea} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Lokale Einstellungen durch die Datei \File{typearea.cfg}} @@ -204,6 +268,8 @@ sind. Die \PName{Anweisungen} werden jeweils unmittelbar vor \seclabel{obsolete} \LoadNonFree{typearea-experts}{1} +% +\EndIndexGroup %%% Local Variables: %%% mode: latex diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea.tex index 2c9ffb43248..569de1e16b7 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/ngerman/typearea.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % typearea.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % typearea.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2015 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2017 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ \KOMAProvidesFile{typearea.tex} - [$Date: 2015-09-04 17:26:05 +0200 (Fri, 04 Sep 2015) $ + [$Date: 2017-01-02 13:30:07 +0100 (Mon, 02 Jan 2017) $ KOMA-Script guide (chapter: typearea)] \chapter{Satzspiegelberechnung mit \Package{typearea.sty}} \labelbase{typearea} @@ -267,23 +267,24 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen. Textbereichs einer Seite nicht am oberen Rand des Textbereichs, sondern setzt die Grundlinie der Zeile mit einem definierten Mindestabstand zum oberen Rand des Textbereichs. Des Weiteren verfügt \LaTeX{} über die beiden - Befehle \Macro{raggedbottom}\IndexCmd{raggedbottom} und - \Macro{flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}. Der erste dieser Befehle legt - fest, dass die letzte Zeile einer jeden Seite dort liegen soll, wo sie eben - zu liegen kommt. Das kann dazu führen, dass sich die Position der letzten - Zeile von Seite zu Seite vertikal um nahezu eine Zeile verändern kann -- bei - Zusammentreffen des Seitenendes mit Überschriften, Abbildungen, Tabellen - oder Ähnlichem auch mehr. Im doppelseitigen Druck ist das in der Regel - unerwünscht. Mit dem zweiten Befehl, \Macro{flushbottom}, wird hingegen - festgelegt, dass die letzte Zeile immer am unteren Rand des Textbereichs zu - liegen kommt. Um diesen vertikalen Ausgleich zu erreichen, muss \LaTeX{} - gegebenenfalls dehnbare vertikale Abstände über das erlaubte Maß hinaus - strecken. Ein solcher Abstand ist beispielsweise der Absatzabstand. Dies - gilt in der Regel auch, wenn man gar keinen Absatzabstand verwendet. Um - nicht bereits auf normalen Seiten, auf denen der Absatzabstand das einzige - dehnbare vertikale Maß darstellt, eine Dehnung zu erzwingen, sollte die Höhe - des Textbereichs ein Vielfaches der Textzeilenhöhe zuzüglich des Abstandes - der ersten Zeile vom oberen Rand des Textbereichs sein. + Befehle \DescRef{maincls.cmd.raggedbottom}\IndexCmd{raggedbottom} und + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}\IndexCmd{flushbottom}. Der erste dieser + Befehle legt fest, dass die letzte Zeile einer jeden Seite dort liegen soll, + wo sie eben zu liegen kommt. Das kann dazu führen, dass sich die Position + der letzten Zeile von Seite zu Seite vertikal um nahezu eine Zeile verändern + kann -- bei Zusammentreffen des Seitenendes mit Überschriften, Abbildungen, + Tabellen oder Ähnlichem auch mehr. Im doppelseitigen Druck ist das in der + Regel unerwünscht. Mit dem zweiten Befehl, + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom}, wird hingegen festgelegt, dass die letzte + Zeile immer am unteren Rand des Textbereichs zu liegen kommt. Um diesen + vertikalen Ausgleich zu erreichen, muss \LaTeX{} gegebenenfalls dehnbare + vertikale Abstände über das erlaubte Maß hinaus strecken. Ein solcher + Abstand ist beispielsweise der Absatzabstand. Dies gilt in der Regel auch, + wenn man gar keinen Absatzabstand verwendet. Um nicht bereits auf normalen + Seiten, auf denen der Absatzabstand das einzige dehnbare vertikale Maß + darstellt, eine Dehnung zu erzwingen, sollte die Höhe des Textbereichs ein + Vielfaches der Textzeilenhöhe zuzüglich des Abstandes der ersten Zeile vom + oberen Rand des Textbereichs sein. \iffalse% Umbruchkorrektur Damit sind alle Grundlagen der Satzspiegelberechnung, die bei @@ -395,12 +396,13 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen. realisiert, wobei der untere Rand weniger als eine Textzeile kleiner ausfallen kann, um die im vorherigen Abschnitt erwähnte Nebenbedingung für die Satzspiegelhöhe einzuhalten und damit die dort erwähnte Problematik in - Bezug auf \Macro{flushbottom} zu mindern. Dabei sind für A4-Papier je nach - Schriftgröße unterschiedliche Werte für \Var{DIV} voreingestellt, die - \autoref{tab:typearea.div}, \autopageref{tab:typearea.div} zu entnehmen - sind. Bei Verzicht auf Bindekorrektur, wenn also \Var{BCOR} = 0\Unit{pt} - gilt, ergeben sich in etwa die Satzspiegelmaße aus - \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea}, \autopageref{tab:typearea.typearea}. + Bezug auf \DescRef{maincls.cmd.flushbottom} zu mindern. Dabei sind für + A4-Papier je nach Schriftgröße unterschiedliche Werte für \Var{DIV} + voreingestellt, die \autoref{tab:typearea.div}, + \autopageref{tab:typearea.div} zu entnehmen sind. Bei Verzicht auf + Bindekorrektur, wenn also \Var{BCOR} = 0\Unit{pt} gilt, ergeben sich in etwa + die Satzspiegelmaße aus \autoref{tab:typearea.typearea}, + \autopageref{tab:typearea.typearea}. Neben den voreingestellten Werten kann man \Var{BCOR} und \Var{DIV} direkt beim Laden des Pakets als Option angeben (siehe @@ -409,7 +411,7 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen. dem man einen Satzspiegel explizit berechnen kann und dem man die beiden Werte als Parameter übergibt (\iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!!! siehe ebenfalls - \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \fi\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.typearea}). + \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \fi\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}). Das \Package{typearea}-Paket bietet außerdem die Möglichkeit, den optimalen \Var{DIV}-Wert automatisch zu bestimmen. Dieser ist von der Schrift und dem @@ -417,7 +419,7 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen. eingestellt ist% \iftrue% Umbruchoptimierung!!!! . Siehe hierzu ebenfalls \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \else\ - (\fi\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}\iftrue)\fi.% + (\fi\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}\iftrue)\fi.% \end{Explain}% @@ -455,14 +457,14 @@ Anwender erleichtern, eine gute Wahl zu treffen. % Umbruchkorrekturtext Bei Wahl einer guten Schrift stimmt dieses Ergebnis nicht selten mit der Suche nach dem optimalen \Var{DIV}-Wert überein. Siehe hierzu ebenfalls - \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}. + \autoref{sec:typearea.typearea}, \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}. % \fi \end{Explain} -\LoadCommon{0} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} +\LoadCommonFile{options} % \section{Frühe oder späte Optionenwahl} -\LoadCommon{1} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} +\LoadCommonFile{compatibility} % \section{Kompatibilität zu früheren Versionen von \KOMAScript} \section{Einstellung des Satzspiegels und der \texorpdfstring{Seitenauf"|teilung}{Seitenaufteilung}} \seclabel{typearea} @@ -480,11 +482,10 @@ aus, dass für jede Aufgabe eine dafür passende Klasse zur Verfügung steht. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{BCOR}\PName{Korrektur} + \OptionVName{BCOR}{Korrektur} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{BCOR~=\PName{Wert}}% Mit Hilfe der Option -\KOption{BCOR}\PName{Korrektur}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} geben Sie +\OptionVName{BCOR}{Korrektur}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} geben Sie den absoluten Wert der Bindekorrektur\Index{Bindekorrektur} an, also die Breite des Bereichs, der durch die Bindung von der Papierbreite verloren geht. Dieser Wert wird in der Satzspiegelkonstruktion automatisch @@ -526,31 +527,31 @@ verstandene Maßeinheit angeben. \end{lstcode} so werden bereits beim Laden der Klasse \Class{scrreprt} Standardeinstellungen vorgenommen. Beim Ändern der Einstellung mit Hilfe - einer der - Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} wird dann automatisch - ein neuer Satzspiegel mit neuen Randeinstellungen berechnet. + einer der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} wird dann automatisch ein neuer + Satzspiegel mit neuen Randeinstellungen berechnet. \end{Example} Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen wie im Beispiel als Klassenoption -oder per \Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden -der Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} -bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \Macro{usepackage} -geladen, noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben -werden. Wird\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} -die Option per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des -Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel -und Ränder automatisch neu berechnet.% +oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden +muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei Verwendung einer +\KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen, +noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben +werden. Wird\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} die Option per +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} +nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Ränder +automatisch neu berechnet.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{BCOR~=\PName{Wert}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor} + \OptionVName{DIV}{Faktor} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PName{Wert}}% Mit Hilfe der Option -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} wird +\OptionVName{DIV}{Faktor}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} wird festgelegt, in wie viele Streifen die Seite horizontal und vertikal bei der Satzspiegelkonstruktion eingeteilt wird. Die genaue Konstruktion ist \autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction} zu entnehmen. Wichtig zu wissen ist, @@ -560,7 +561,7 @@ verwendet werden. Bitte beachten Sie jedoch, dass sehr große Werte dazu führen können, dass Randbedingungen der Satzspiegelkonstruktion, je nach Wahl der weiteren Optionen, verletzt werden. So kann die Kopfzeile im Extremfall auch außerhalb der Seite liegen. Bei Verwendung der Option -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor} sind Sie für die Einhaltung der Randbedingungen +\OptionVName{DIV}{Faktor} sind Sie für die Einhaltung der Randbedingungen sowie eine nach typografischen Gesichtspunkten günstige Zeilenlänge selbst verantwortlich. @@ -654,20 +655,20 @@ Schriftgröße abhängigen Nebenbedingungen nicht berücksichtigt. Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass die Option \Option{DIV} bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen wie im Beispiel als Klassenoption -oder per \Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden -der Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} -bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \Macro{usepackage} -geladen, noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben +oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden +muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei Verwendung einer +\KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen, +noch die Option dabei als optionales Argument angegeben werden. Wird\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} die Option per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets -geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Rändern automatisch neu berechnet. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} +nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel und Rändern +automatisch neu berechnet. -\iffree{\begin{Declaration} - \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}\\ +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} \OptionValue{DIV}{classic} -\end{Declaration}}{}% -\iffree{\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{classic}}}{}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{calc}}% +\end{Declaration} Wie\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} bereits in \autoref{sec:typearea.divConstruction} erwähnt, gibt es nur für das Papierformat A4 feste Voreinstellungen für den \Var{DIV}-Wert. Diese sind @@ -679,7 +680,7 @@ sehr rasch zu unangenehm hoher Zeichenzahl je Zeile führen. Siehe hierzu die gewählt, so berechnet \Package{typearea} selbst einen guten \Var{DIV}-Wert. Natürlich können Sie diese Berechnung auch für A4 wählen. Hierzu verwenden Sie \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{calc}} an Stelle von -\KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor}. Selbstverständlich können Sie diese Option auch +\OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{Faktor}. Selbstverständlich können Sie diese Option auch explizit bei allen anderen Papierformaten angeben. Wenn Sie die automatische Berechnung wünschen, ist diese Angabe sogar sinnvoll, da die Möglichkeit besteht, in einer Konfigurationsdatei andere Voreinstellungen zu setzen (siehe @@ -705,17 +706,16 @@ besteht, in einer Konfigurationsdatei andere Voreinstellungen zu setzen (siehe \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\iffree{}{\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{classic}}}% Die in \autoref{sec:typearea.circleConstruction} erwähnte klassische Konstruktion, der mittelalterliche Buchseitenkanon, ist ebenfalls auswählbar. -Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall an Stelle von \KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor} oder +Verwenden Sie in diesem Fall an Stelle von \OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{Faktor} oder \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} einfach \OptionValue{DIV}{classic}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{classic}}. Es wird dann ein \Var{DIV}-Wert ermittelt, der eine möglichst gute Näherung an den mittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon darstellt. \begin{Example} - In dem bei der Option \KOption{DIV}\PName{Faktor} aufgeführten + In dem bei der Option \OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{Faktor} aufgeführten Beispiel mit der Schriftart Bookman gab es ja genau das Problem, dass man einen zur Schriftart besser passenden \Var{DIV}-Wert haben wollte. Man könnte also in Abwandlung des ersten Beispiels auch @@ -728,26 +728,24 @@ mittelalterlichen Buchseitenkanon darstellt. \end{Example} \iffree{Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei -Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen % -\iftrue wie im Beispiel \fi% -als Klassenoption oder per \Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise -\Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder -sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse -explizit per \Macro{usepackage} geladen, noch die Option dabei als optionales -Argument angegeben werden. Wird die Option per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder -\Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so werden Satzspiegel -und Rändern automatisch neu berechnet.}{}% + Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen % + \iftrue wie im Beispiel \fi% + als Klassenoption oder per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} + beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der + Klasse übergeben werden muss. Weder sollte das Paket \Package{typearea} bei + Verwendung einer \KOMAScript-Klasse explizit per + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} geladen, noch die Option dabei als + optionales Argument angegeben werden. Wird die Option per + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets geändert, so + werden Satzspiegel und Rändern automatisch neu berechnet.}{}% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{classic}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{calc}}% - +\EndIndexGroup -\iffree{\begin{Declaration} - \OptionValue{DIV}{current}\\ +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionValue{DIV}{current} \OptionValue{DIV}{last} -\end{Declaration}}{}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{current}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{last}}% +\end{Declaration} Wenn\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} Sie bis hier die Beispiele aufmerksam verfolgt haben, wissen Sie eigentlich bereits, wie man die Berechnung eines \Var{DIV}-Wertes in Abhängigkeit von der gewählten Schrift erreicht, wenn eine @@ -756,17 +754,18 @@ verfolgt haben, wissen Sie eigentlich bereits, wie man die Berechnung eines \begin{Explain} Das Problem dabei ist, dass die \KOMAScript-Klasse das Paket \Package{typearea} bereits selbst lädt. Die Übergabe der Optionen als - optionale Argumente von \Macro{usepackage} ist also nicht möglich. Es würde - auch nichts nützen, die Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} als optionales Argument - von \Macro{documentclass} anzugeben. Diese Option würde direkt beim Laden - des Pakets \Package{typearea} ausgewertet. Damit würden Satzspiegel und - Ränder für die \LaTeX-Standardschrift und nicht für die später geladene - Schrift berechnet. - - Selbstverständlich ist es möglich, mit - \Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=calc} oder - \Macro{KOMAoption}\PParameter{DIV}\PParameter{calc} nach dem Laden des - Schriftpakets Satzspiegel und Ränder neu berechnen zu lassen. Dabei wird + optionale Argumente von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} ist also nicht + möglich. Es würde auch nichts nützen, die Option \OptionValue{DIV}{calc} als + optionales Argument von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} + anzugeben. Diese Option würde direkt beim Laden des Pakets + \Package{typearea} ausgewertet. Damit würden Satzspiegel und Ränder für die + \LaTeX-Standardschrift und nicht für die später geladene Schrift berechnet. + + Selbstverständlich ist es möglich, mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}% + \PParameter{\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}} oder + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}% + \PParameter{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}\PParameter{calc} nach dem Laden + des Schriftpakets Satzspiegel und Ränder neu berechnen zu lassen. Dabei wird dann über den Wert \PValue{calc} direkt ein \Var{DIV}-Wert für eine gute Zeilenlänge eingefordert. @@ -795,7 +794,7 @@ Berechnung verwendet wird. Gehen wir wieder davon aus, dass für die Schriftart Bookman ein Satzspiegel mit guter Zeilenlänge berechnet werden soll. Gleichzeitig wird eine \KOMAScript-Klasse verwendet. Dies ist mit dem symbolischen Wert - \PValue{last} und der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions} sehr einfach möglich: + \PValue{last} und der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} sehr einfach möglich: \begin{lstcode} \documentclass[BCOR=12mm,DIV=calc,twoside] {scrartcl} @@ -805,7 +804,7 @@ Berechnung verwendet wird. \iffree{}{\clearpage}% Umbruchoptimierung Wird später entschieden, dass ein anderer \Var{DIV}-Wert verwendet werden soll, so muss nur die Einstellung im optionalen Argument - von \Macro{documentclass} geändert werden. + von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass} geändert werden. \end{Example} Eine Zusammenfassung aller möglichen symbolischen Werte für die Option @@ -816,9 +815,9 @@ andere Schrift lädt. \begin{table} \caption[{Symbolische Werte für Option \Option{DIV} und das - \PName{DIV}-Argument von \Macro{typearea}}]{Mögliche symbolische Werte + \PName{DIV}-Argument von \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}}]{Mögliche symbolische Werte für die Option \Option{DIV} oder das \PName{DIV}-Argument der Anweisung - \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}} + \DescRef{typearea.cmd.typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}} \label{tab:symbolicDIV} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{areaset}{Satzspiegel neu anordnen.\IndexOption{DIV~=\PValue{areaset}}}% @@ -915,38 +914,37 @@ normalen Zeilenabstand gesetzt werden sollten. \end{document} \end{lstcode} Siehe hierzu auch die Anmerkungen in \autoref{sec:typearea.tips}. Die - Anweisung \Macro{AfterTOCHead}\IndexCmd{AfterTOCHead} wird in + Anweisung \DescRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead}\IndexCmd{AfterTOCHead} wird in \autoref{part:forExperts}, \autoref{cha:tocbasic} auf - \autopageref{desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead} vorgestellt. + \DescPageRef{tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead} vorgestellt. \end{Example} Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen auch zur -Verwendung mit \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des -Pakets vorgesehen sind und dann eine\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} -automatische Neuberechnung von Satzspiegel und Rändern auslösen.% +Verwendung mit \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden des Pakets vorgesehen sind +und dann eine\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} automatische Neuberechnung +von Satzspiegel und Rändern auslösen.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{current}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{last}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PName{Wert}} +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV}\\ + \Macro{typearea}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{DIV} \Macro{recalctypearea} \end{Declaration}% \begin{Explain} -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{typearea}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{recalctypearea}% -Wird die Option \Option{DIV} oder die Option \Option{BCOR} nach dem Laden des -Pakets \Package{typearea} gesetzt, so wird intern die Anweisung -\Macro{typearea} aufgerufen. Dabei wird beim Setzen der Option \Option{DIV} -für \PName{BCOR} intern der symbolische Wert \PValue{current} verwendet, der -aus Gründen der Vollständigkeit auch in \autoref{tab:symbolicBCOR} zu finden -ist. Beim Setzen der Option \Option{BCOR} wird für \PName{DIV} hingegen der -symbolische Wert \PValue{last} verwendet. Wollen Sie, dass Satzspiegel und -Rändern stattdessen mit dem symbolischen Wert \PValue{current} für \PName{DIV} -neu berechnet werden, so können Sie direkt -\Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{current} verwenden. + Wird die Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} oder die Option + \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} nach dem Laden des Pakets + \Package{typearea} gesetzt, so wird intern die Anweisung \Macro{typearea} + aufgerufen. Dabei wird beim Setzen der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} für \PName{BCOR} + intern der symbolische Wert \PValue{current} verwendet, der aus Gründen der + Vollständigkeit auch in \autoref{tab:symbolicBCOR} zu finden ist. Beim + Setzen der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR} wird für \PName{DIV} + hingegen der symbolische Wert \PValue{last} verwendet. Wollen Sie, dass + Satzspiegel und Rändern stattdessen mit dem symbolischen Wert + \PValue{current} für \PName{DIV} neu berechnet werden, so können Sie direkt + \Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{current} verwenden. \end{Explain} \begin{table} @@ -963,10 +961,11 @@ neu berechnet werden, so können Sie direkt Sollen die Werte sowohl von \PName{BCOR} als auch \PName{DIV} geändert werden, so ist die Verwendung von \Macro{typearea} zu empfehlen, da hierbei die Ränder und der Satzspiegel nur einmal neu berechnet werden. Hingegen werden bei -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{\KOption{DIV}\PName{DIV},% - \KOption{BCOR}\PName{BCOR}} Ränder und Satzspiegel zunächst -bei der Änderung für \PName{DIV} und dann zusätzlich bei der Änderung für -\PName{BCOR} neu berechnet. +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}% +\PParameter{\OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV}}{DIV},% + \OptionVName{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}}{BCOR}} Ränder und Satzspiegel +zunächst bei der Änderung für \PName{DIV} und dann zusätzlich bei der Änderung +für \PName{BCOR} neu berechnet. \begin{Explain} Der Befehl \Macro{typearea} ist derzeit so definiert, dass es auch möglich @@ -981,8 +980,8 @@ bei der Änderung für \PName{DIV} und dann zusätzlich bei der Änderung für \end{Explain} Da\important{\Macro{recalctypearea}} -\Macro{KOMAoption}\PParameter{DIV}\PParameter{last} oder -\Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=last} beziehungsweise +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption}\PParameter{DIV}\PParameter{last} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=last} beziehungsweise \Macro{typearea}\POParameter{current}\PParameter{last} für die Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels und der Ränder recht häufig benötigt werden, gibt es dafür die abkürzende Anweisung @@ -1003,22 +1002,13 @@ die abkürzende Anweisung \end{lstcode} verwenden. \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{recalctypearea}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{typearea} - - -\iffree{% - \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{twoside}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \OptionValue{twoside}{semi} - \end{Declaration}% - \BeginIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PValue{semi}}% -}{% - \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{twoside}\PName{Wert} - \end{Declaration}% -}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup + + +\begin{Declaration} + \OptionVName{twoside}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionValue{twoside}{semi} +\end{Declaration}% Wie in \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} erklärt, hängt die Randverteilung davon ab, ob ein Dokument ein- oder zweiseitig gesetzt werden soll. Bei einseitigem Satz sind der linke und rechte Rand gleich @@ -1057,15 +1047,14 @@ Option\important{\OptionValue{twoside}{false}} führt zu einseitigem Satz. \end{captionbeside} \end{table} -\iffree{}{\BeginIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PValue{semi}}}% Außer den Werten aus \autoref{tab:truefalseswitch} kann jedoch auch noch der Wert \PValue{semi}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}}% \important{\OptionValue{twoside}{semi}} angegeben werden. Dieser Wert \PValue{semi} führt zu doppelseitigem Satz mit einseitigen Rändern und einseitigen, also nicht alternierenden Marginalien. Eine\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}} eventuelle -Bindekorrektur (siehe Option \Option{BCOR}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.BCOR}) wird jedoch ab \KOMAScript~Version +Bindekorrektur (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}, +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.BCOR}) wird jedoch ab \KOMAScript~Version 3.12 wie beim doppelseitigen Satz auf Seiten mit ungerader Nummer dem linken Rand und auf Seiten mit gerader Nummer dem rechten Rand zugeschlagen. Wird auf Kompatibilität zu einer Version früheren Version zurückgeschaltet (siehe @@ -1075,28 +1064,26 @@ jedoch auch bei \OptionValue{twoside}{semi} immer Teil des linken Randes. Die Option kann % \iffalse % Umbruchkorrektur -wahlweise -\fi % -als Klassenoption bei \Macro{documentclass}, als -Paketoption bei \Macro{usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von -\Package{typearea} per \Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} gesetzt -werden. Eine Verwendung dieser Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} -führt\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} automatisch zur -Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels mittels \Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). War vor der Option +wahlweise \fi % +als Klassenoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}, als Paketoption +bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von +\Package{typearea} per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} gesetzt werden. Eine Verwendung dieser +Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische + Neuberechnung} automatisch zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels mittels +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}). War vor der Option doppelseitiger Satz aktiv, wird noch vor der Neuberechnung auf die nächste ungerade Seite umbrochen.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PValue{semi}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{twoside~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{twocolumn}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{twocolumn}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{twocolumn~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Für die Berechnung eines guten Satzspiegels mit Hilfe von -\OptionValue{DIV}{calc} ist es erforderlich zu wissen, ob das Dokument ein- +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc} ist es erforderlich zu wissen, ob das Dokument ein- oder zweispaltig gesetzt wird. Da die Betrachtungen zur Zeilenlänge aus \autoref{sec:typearea.basics} dann für jede einzelne Spalte gelten, darf der Satzspiegel in doppelspaltigen Dokumenten bis zu doppelt so breit sein wie in @@ -1112,22 +1099,21 @@ doppelspaltiger Satz verwendet. Ein Deaktivieren der Option führt wieder zum voreingestellten, einspaltigen Satz. -Die Option kann als Klassenoption bei \Macro{documentclass}, als Paketoption -bei \Macro{usepackage} oder auch nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} gesetzt werden. Eine Verwendung -dieser Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} -führt\textnote{automatische Neuberechnung} automatisch zur Neuberechnung des -Satzspiegels mittels \Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +Die Option kann als Klassenoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.documentclass}, +als Paketoption bei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.usepackage} oder auch nach dem +Laden von \Package{typearea} per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} oder +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} gesetzt werden. Eine Verwendung dieser +Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt\textnote{automatische + Neuberechnung} automatisch zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels mittels +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{twocolumn~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}} +\EndIndexGroup -\BeginIndex{Option}{headinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headinclude}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}\\ - \KOption{footinclude}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{headinclude}{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{footinclude}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration}% \begin{Explain}% Bisher wurde zwar erklärt, wie die @@ -1139,8 +1125,9 @@ Satzspiegels mittels \Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe Auf den ersten Blick wirkt diese Frage trivial: Der Rand ist der Teil der Seite, der oben, unten, links und rechts frei bleibt. Doch das ist nur die halbe Wahrheit. Der äußere Rand ist keineswegs immer leer. Teilweise findet - man darin noch gesetzte Randnotizen (siehe den Befehl \Macro{marginpar} - beispielsweise in \cite{l2kurz} bzw. \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}). + man darin noch gesetzte Randnotizen (siehe den Befehl + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.marginpar} beispielsweise in \cite{l2kurz} + bzw. \autoref{sec:maincls.marginNotes}). Beim oberen und unteren Rand stellt sich die Frage, wie Kopf- und Fußzeile\Index{Seiten>Kopf}\Index{Seiten>Fuss=Fuß} zu behandeln sind. @@ -1221,25 +1208,23 @@ obige Erläuterungen. Voreingestellt sind normalerweise Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt dabei nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe -Option \Option{DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{mpinclude}\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert} + \OptionVName{mpinclude}{Ein-Aus-Wert} \end{Declaration} -\BeginIndex{Option}{mpinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% Neben\ChangedAt{v2.8q}{\Class{scrbook}\and \Class{scrreprt}\and \Class{scrartcl}} Dokumenten, bei denen der Kopf und der Fuß der Seite eher zum Textbereich als zum Rand gehört, gibt es auch Dokumente, bei denen dies @@ -1280,8 +1265,7 @@ bleiben. ist die Option \Option{mpinclude} eher etwas für Experten. Natürlich kann man auch festlegen, dass die Randnotizen beispielsweise zu einem Drittel in den Rand hineinragen sollen, und das wie folgt erreichen: -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings macht das manchmal nicht optimal -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +\begin{lstcode} \setlength{\marginparwidth}{1.5\marginparwidth} \end{lstcode} @@ -1291,9 +1275,10 @@ bleiben. \iftrue % Umbruchkorrektur Die Anpassung von \Length{textwidth}\IndexLength{textwidth} und \Length{marginparwidth}\IndexLength{marginparwidth} nach der Berechnung des - Satzspiegels. Siehe dazu \Macro{AfterCalculatingTypearea} in + Satzspiegels. Siehe dazu + \DescRef{typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea} in \autoref{sec:typearea-experts.experts}, - \autopageref{desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea}. + \DescPageRef{typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea}. % \else % @@ -1304,34 +1289,32 @@ bleiben. Breite des Textbereichs verringert hat. Leider lässt sich dieses Vorgehen nicht mit der automatischen Berechnung des \PName{DIV}-Wertes verbinden. Demgegenüber wird \Option{mpinclude} bei - \OptionValue{DIV}{calc}\IndexOption{DIV=calc} (siehe - \autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.calc}) berücksichtigt. + \OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc}\IndexOption{DIV=calc} (siehe + \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.calc}) berücksichtigt. % \fi \end{Explain} Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoption oder per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise oder \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden muss. Eine Änderung dieser Option nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur -Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option \Option{DIV} mit den Werten +Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{mpinclude~=\PName{Ein-Aus-Wert}}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{headlines}\PName{Zeilenanzahl}\\ - \KOption{headheight}\PName{Höhe} + \OptionVName{headlines}{Zeilenanzahl} + \OptionVName{headheight}{Höhe} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headlines~=\PName{Anzahl}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headheight~=\PName{Höhe}}% \BeginIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}% Es ist nun also bekannt, wie man Satzspiegel mit dem \Package{typearea}-Paket berechnet und wie man dabei angibt, ob der Kopf oder Fuß zum Textkörper oder @@ -1383,47 +1366,44 @@ entscheidend ist. \iffree{}{\pagebreak}% Umbruchoptimierung!!! Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe -Option \Option{DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{}{Kopf>Hoehe=Höhe}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headheight~=\PName{Höhe}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headlines~=\PName{Anzahl}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{footlines}\PName{Zeilenanzahl}\\ - \KOption{footheight}\PName{Höhe} + \OptionVName{footlines}{Zeilenanzahl}% + \OptionVName{footheight}{Höhe}% + \Length{footheight}% \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footlines~=\PName{Anzahl}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footheight~=\PName{Höhe}}% \BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}% Wie schon für den Kopf fehlt aber noch die Angabe, wie hoch der Fuß sein soll. Hierzu dienen die Optionen \Option{footlines} und \Option{footheight}\ChangedAt{v3.12}{\Package{typearea}}. Allerdings ist die Höhe des Fußes im Gegensatz zur Höhe des Kopfes keine Länge des \LaTeX-Kerns selbst. Daher definiert \Package{typearea} zur Einführung eine neue Länge -\Length{footheight}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footheight}, falls diese noch nicht -existiert. Ob diese dann auch beispielsweise von Klassen und Paketen für die -Gestaltung von Kopf und Fuß verwendet wird, hängt von den verwendeten Klassen -und Paketen ab. Das \KOMAScript-Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} -berücksichtigt -\Length{footheight} und arbeitet somit aktiv mit \Package{typearea} -zusammen. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen berücksichtigen \Length{footheight} hingegen -nicht, da sie ohne Paketunterstützung nur Seitenstile mit einzeiligen -Seitenfüßen anbieten. +\Length{footheight}\IndexLength[indexmain]{footheight}, +falls diese noch nicht existiert. Ob diese dann auch beispielsweise von +Klassen und Paketen für die Gestaltung von Kopf und Fuß verwendet wird, hängt +von den verwendeten Klassen und Paketen ab. Das \KOMAScript-Paket +\Package{scrlayer-scrpage} berücksichtigt +\Length{footheight} und arbeitet somit aktiv mit +\Package{typearea} zusammen. Die \KOMAScript-Klassen berücksichtigen +\Length{footheight} hingegen nicht, da sie ohne +Paketunterstützung nur Seitenstile mit einzeiligen Seitenfüßen anbieten. Die Option \Option{footlines}\important{\Option{footlines}} setzt man -vergleichbar zu \Option{headlines} auf die Anzahl der Fußzeilen. -Normalerweise arbeitet das \Package{typearea}-Paket mit 1,25 +vergleichbar zu \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines} auf die Anzahl der +Fußzeilen. Normalerweise arbeitet das \Package{typearea}-Paket mit 1,25 Fußzeilen. Dieser Wert stellt einen Kompromiss dar. Zum einen ist er groß genug, um auch für eine über- und unterstrichene Fußzeile (siehe \autoref{sec:maincls.options}) Platz zu bieten, zum anderen ist er klein @@ -1467,26 +1447,23 @@ entscheidend ist. Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Optionen bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoptionen oder per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden müssen. Eine Änderung dieser Optionen nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt nicht\textnote{keine automatische Neuberechnung} zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe -Option \Option{DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\BeginIndex{}{Fuss=Fuß>Hoehe=Höhe}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footheight~=\PName{Höhe}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footlines~=\PName{Anzahl}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{areaset}\OParameter{BCOR}\Parameter{Breite}\Parameter{Höhe} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{areaset}% Bis hier wurde nun eine Menge darüber erzählt, wie man einen guten Satzspiegel\Index{Satzspiegel} für Standardanwendungen erstellt und wie das \Package{typearea}-Paket dem Anwender diese Arbeit erleichtert, ihm aber @@ -1499,14 +1476,15 @@ dabei gegebenenfalls auch eine Bindekorrektur berücksichtigt werden. Das neben der optionalen Bindekorrektur als Parameter die Breite und Höhe des Textbereichs übergibt. Die Ränder und deren Verteilung werden dann automatisch berechnet, wobei gegebenenfalls auch die Einstellungen der Paketoptionen -\Option{headinclude} und \Option{footinclude} berücksichtigt werden. Die -Optionen \Option{headlines}\IndexOption{headlines}\textnote{Achtung!} und -\Option{headheight}\IndexOption{headheight} bleiben in diesem Fall jedoch -unberücksichtigt! +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headinclude} und +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.footinclude} berücksichtigt werden. Die Optionen +\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headlines}\IndexOption{headlines}\textnote{Achtung!} +und \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.headheight}\IndexOption{headheight} bleiben in +diesem Fall jedoch unberücksichtigt! Die Voreinstellung für \PName{BCOR} ist 0\Unit{pt}. Soll hingegen die aktuell, -beispielsweise per Option \Option{BCOR}\IndexOption{BCOR} eingestellte -Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert +beispielsweise per Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.BCOR}\IndexOption{BCOR} +eingestellte Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert \PValue{current} als optionales Argument verwenden. \begin{Example} @@ -1549,27 +1527,26 @@ Bindekorrektur erhalten bleiben, sollte man den symbolischen Wert \areaset[1cm]{15cm}{15cm} \end{lstcode}% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{areaset}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \OptionValue{DIV}{areaset} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{areaset}}% In\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} seltenen Fällen ist es nützlich, wenn man den aktuell eingestellten Satzspiegel neu ausrichten lassen kann. Dies ist mit der Option \OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}\important{\OptionValue{DIV}{areaset}} möglich, -wobei \Macro{KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=areaset} der Anweisung -% Umbruchkorrektur: listings macht das nicht immer ganz optimal -\begin{lstcode}[belowskip=\dp\strutbox] +wobei \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\PParameter{DIV=areaset} der +Anweisung +\begin{lstcode} \areaset[current]{\textwidth}{\textheight} \end{lstcode} -entspricht. Dasselbe Ergebnis erhält man auch, wenn \OptionValue{DIV}{last} -verwendet wird und der Satzspiegel zuletzt per \Macro{areaset} eingestellt -wurde.% +entspricht. Dasselbe Ergebnis erhält man auch, wenn +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{last} verwendet wird und der Satzspiegel +zuletzt per \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset} eingestellt wurde.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{DIV~=\PValue{areaset}}% +\EndIndexGroup \iftrue% Umbruchkorrekturtext: Alternativen Wenn Sie konkrete Vorgaben bezüglich der Ränder zu erfüllen haben, ist @@ -1590,7 +1567,7 @@ einzustellen. Dafür ist das Paket \Package{geometry}\IndexPackage{geometry} \section{Einstellung des Papierformats}% \seclabel{paperTypes}% -\BeginIndex{}{Papier>Format}% +\BeginIndexGroup Das Papierformat ist ein entscheidendes Grundmerkmal eines Dokuments. Wie bereits bei der Vorstellung der unterstützten Satzspiegelkonstruktionen (siehe @@ -1604,10 +1581,9 @@ Seitengrößen. \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{paper}\PName{Format} + \OptionVName{paper}{Format} + \OptionVName{paper}{Ausrichtung} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{Format}}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{Ausrichtung}}% Die Option \Option{paper}\ChangedAt{v3.00}{\Package{typearea}} ist das zentrale Element der Formatauswahl\important[i]{% \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}l@{}} @@ -1637,19 +1613,32 @@ dreht, während bei \PValue{seascape} um +90\Unit{\textdegree} gedreht wird. Hilfreich ist \PValue{seascape} also vor allem dann, wenn ein PostScript-Anzeigeprogramm die Seiten im Querformat auf dem Kopf stellt. Damit der Unterschied eine Rolle spielt, darf auch die nachfolgend -beschriebene Option -\Option{pagesize}\IndexOption{pagesize}\important{\Option{pagesize}} nicht +beschriebene Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagesize}% +\IndexOption{pagesize}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.pagesize}} nicht deaktiviert sein. Zusätzlich kann das \PName{Format} auch in der Form \PName{Breite}\texttt{:}\PName{Höhe}\ChangedAt{v3.01b}{\Package{typearea}}% -\important{\KOption{paper}\PName{Breite}\texttt{:}\PName{Höhe}} angegeben -werden. Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass bis Version~3.01a -\PName{Höhe} und \PName{Breite} vertauscht waren. Dies ist insbesondere dann -zu beachten, wenn mit einer entsprechenden Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe -Option \Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\Option{version}}, +\important{\OptionVName{paper}\PName{Breite}\texttt{:}{Höhe}} +beziehungsweise +\PName{Höhe}\texttt{:}\PName{Breite}\ChangedAt{v3.22}{\Package{typearea}}% +\important{\OptionVName{paper}{Höhe}\texttt{:}\PName{Breite}} angegeben +werden. Welcher Wert die \PName{Höhe} und welcher die \PName{Breite} ist, +richtet sich nach der Ausrichtung des Papiers. Mit +\OptionValue{paper}{landscape} oder \OptionValue{paper}{seascape} ist der +kleinere Wert die \PName{Höhe} und der größere Wert die \PName{Breite}. Mit +\OptionValue{paper}{portrait} ist dagegen der kleinere Wert die \PName{Breite} +und der größere Wert die \PName{Höhe}. + +Es\textnote{Achtung!} wird darauf hingewiesen, dass bis Version~3.01a der +erste Wert immer die \PName{Höhe} und der zweite Wert die \PName{Breite} +war. Dagegen war von Version~3.01b bis Version~3.21a der erste Wert immer die +\PName{Breite} und der zweite Wert immer die \PName{Höhe}. Dies ist +insbesondere dann zu beachten, wenn mit einer entsprechenden +Kompatibilitätseinstellung (siehe Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}% +\IndexOption{version}\important{\DescRef{\LabelBase.option.version}}, \autoref{sec:typearea.compatibilityOptions}, -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.version}) gearbeitet wird. +\DescPageRef{typearea.option.version}) gearbeitet wird. \begin{Example} Angenommen, es soll eine Karteikarte im Format ISO-A8 quer bedruckt @@ -1672,7 +1661,7 @@ Option \Option{version}\IndexOption{version}\important{\Option{version}}, \begin{lstcode} \documentclass{article} \usepackage[headinclude=false,footinclude=false, - paper=5cm:3cm]{typearea} + paper=landscape,paper=5cm:3cm]{typearea} \areaset{4cm}{2.4cm} \pagestyle{empty} \begin{document} @@ -1690,27 +1679,25 @@ in der Voreinstellung das amerikanische Format letter verwendet wird. Bitte beachten Sie unbedingt\textnote{Achtung!}, dass diese Option bei Verwendung einer der \KOMAScript-Klassen als Klassenoption oder per -\Macro{KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der -Klasse übergeben werden muss. Eine Änderung des Papierformats oder der -Papierausrichtung mit Hilfe der Anweisung \Macro{KOMAoptions}\textnote{keine - automatische Neuberechnung} oder \Macro{KOMAoption} nach dem Laden von +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions} beziehungsweise +\DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden der Klasse übergeben werden +muss. Eine Änderung des Papierformats oder der Papierausrichtung mit Hilfe +der Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoptions}\textnote{keine automatische + Neuberechnung} oder \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.KOMAoption} nach dem Laden von \Package{typearea} führt nicht zu einer automatischen Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels. Vielmehr wirkt sich die Änderung erst bei der nächsten Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels aus. Zur Neuberechnung des Satzspiegels siehe -Option \Option{DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder \PValue{current} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die Anweisung -\Macro{recalctypearea} (siehe -\autopageref{desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% +Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} mit den Werten \PValue{last} oder +\PValue{current} (siehe \DescPageRef{typearea.option.DIV.last}) oder die +Anweisung \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.recalctypearea} (siehe +\DescPageRef{typearea.cmd.recalctypearea}).% % -\EndIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{Ausrichtung}}% -\EndIndex{Option}{paper~=\PName{Format}} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \KOption{pagesize}\PName{Ausgabetreiber} + \OptionVName{pagesize}{Ausgabetreiber} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagesize}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{pagesize~=\PName{Ausgabetreiber}}% \begin{Explain}% Die oben genannten Mechanismen zur Auswahl des Papierformats haben nur insofern einen Einfluss auf die Ausgabe, als interne {\LaTeX}-Maße gesetzt @@ -1747,7 +1734,7 @@ entnehmen. Voreingestellt\ChangedAt{v3.17}{\Package{typearea}} ist entspricht \OptionValue{pagesize}{auto}. % \begin{table} - \caption{Ausgabetreiber für Option \KOption{pagesize}\PName{Ausgabetreiber}} + \caption{Ausgabetreiber für Option \OptionVName{pagesize}{Ausgabetreiber}} \begin{desctabular} \pventry{auto}{Falls die pdf\TeX-spezifischen Register \Macro{pdfpagewidth}\IndexLength{pdfpagewidth} und @@ -1809,10 +1796,9 @@ anzugeben, weil frühere Versionen von \Package{typearea} sie noch nicht als Voreinstellung gesetzt haben. In der Regel ist dabei die Methode ohne \PName{Ausgabetreiber} oder mit \PValue{auto} oder \PValue{automedia} günstig.% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagesize}% -\EndIndex{Option}{pagesize~=\PName{Ausgabetreiber}}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{Papier>Format} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Tipps} @@ -1881,15 +1867,16 @@ gerecht. Wenn Sie also mit Vorschriften konfrontiert sind, die offensichtlich erheblich davon abweichen, so empfehle ich, dem Betreuer einen Textauszug vorzulegen und nachzufragen, ob es gestattet ist, die Arbeit trotz der Abweichungen in dieser Form zu liefern. Gegebenenfalls kann durch Veränderung -der Option \Option{DIV} der Satzspiegel moderat angepasst werden. Von der -Verwendung von \Macro{areaset} zu diesem Zweck rate ich jedoch -ab. Schlimmstenfalls verwenden Sie das nicht zu {\KOMAScript} gehörende -\Package{geometry}-Paket (siehe \cite{package:geometry}) oder verändern Sie -die Satzspiegelparameter von {\LaTeX} selbst. Die von \Package{typearea} -ermittelten Werte finden Sie in der \File{log}-Datei Ihres Dokuments. Damit -sollten moderate Anpassungen möglich sein. Achten Sie jedoch unbedingt darauf, -dass die Proportionen des Textbereichs mit denen der Seite unter -Berücksichtigung der Bindekorrektur annähernd übereinstimmen. +der Option \DescRef{\LabelBase.option.DIV} der Satzspiegel moderat angepasst +werden. Von der Verwendung von \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.areaset} zu diesem +Zweck rate ich jedoch ab. Schlimmstenfalls verwenden Sie das nicht zu +{\KOMAScript} gehörende \Package{geometry}-Paket (siehe +\cite{package:geometry}) oder verändern Sie die Satzspiegelparameter von +{\LaTeX} selbst. Die von \Package{typearea} ermittelten Werte finden Sie in +der \File{log}-Datei Ihres Dokuments. Damit sollten moderate Anpassungen +möglich sein. Achten Sie jedoch unbedingt darauf, dass die Proportionen des +Textbereichs mit denen der Seite unter Berücksichtigung der Bindekorrektur +annähernd übereinstimmen. Sollte es unbedingt erforderlich sein, den Text eineinhalbzeilig zu setzen, so definieren Sie keinesfalls \Macro{baselinestretch} um. Dieses Vorgehen wird @@ -1905,11 +1892,11 @@ Literaturverzeichnis und den Index -- wieder auf normalen Satz umschalten. Das Befehle. Das \Package{typearea}-Paket berechnet auch bei der Option -\OptionValue{DIV}{calc} einen sehr großzügigen Textbereich. Viele konservative -Typografen werden feststellen, dass die resultierende Zeilenlänge noch zu groß -ist. Der berechnete \Var{DIV}-Wert ist ebenfalls in der \File{log}-Datei zum -jeweiligen Dokument zu finden. Sie können also leicht nach dem ersten -\LaTeX-Lauf einen kleineren Wert wählen. +\OptionValueRef{\LabelBase}{DIV}{calc} einen sehr großzügigen +Textbereich. Viele konservative Typografen werden feststellen, dass die +resultierende Zeilenlänge noch zu groß ist. Der berechnete \Var{DIV}-Wert ist +ebenfalls in der \File{log}-Datei zum jeweiligen Dokument zu finden. Sie +können also leicht nach dem ersten \LaTeX-Lauf einen kleineren Wert wählen. Nicht selten wird mir die Frage gestellt, warum ich eigentlich kapitelweise auf einer Satzspiegelberechnung herumreite, während es sehr viel einfacher @@ -1921,7 +1908,7 @@ erlaube mir zum Abschluss dieses Kapitels ein passendes Zitat von Hans Peter Willberg und Friedrich Forssmann, zwei der angesehensten Typografen der Gegenwart (siehe \cite{TYPO:ErsteHilfe}): \begin{quote} - \phantomsection\seclabel{tips.cite}% + \phantomsection\label{sec:typearea.tips.cite}% \textit{Das\textnote{Zitat!} Selbermachen ist längst üblich, die Ergebnisse oft fragwürdig, weil Laien-Typografen nicht sehen, was nicht stimmt und nicht wissen können, worauf es ankommt. So gewöhnt man sich an falsche und diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.cls index 5d16433a2c8..51375c5674a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.cls +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.cls @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ % \section{Identification} % % \begin{macrocode} -\ProvidesClass{scrguide}[2016/04/05 v1.11 internal KOMA-Script guide class] +\ProvidesClass{scrguide}[2016/11/26 v1.13 internal KOMA-Script guide class] % \end{macrocode} % % @@ -145,7 +145,8 @@ \RequirePackage{multicol} \RequirePackage{marginnote} \RequirePackage{tabularx} -\RequirePackage{xcolor,tocstyle}% hyperref needs xcolor with tocstyle +\RequirePackage[svgnames]{xcolor} +\RequirePackage{tocstyle}% hyperref needs xcolor with tocstyle \RequirePackage{tikz} \usetikzlibrary{calc} \RequirePackage[\uselanguage]{hyperref} @@ -191,25 +192,35 @@ \geometry{papersize={180mm,210mm},% includehead,includemp,reversemp,marginparwidth=4em,% vmargin={1.5mm,3mm},hmargin=1.75mm}% - \RequirePackage{xcolor}% \RequirePackage{scrlayer-scrpage}% \clearpairofpagestyles - \ohead{\smash{% - \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\headmark\hspace{2mm}}% + \ihead{% + \smash{% + \hspace*{.5em}\rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}\headmark + }% }% - \ihead[{\smash{\colorbox{yellow!50}{% - \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{% - \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}% - \makebox[2em][r]\pagemark}}}}]% - {\smash{\colorbox{yellow!50}{% - \makebox[\dimexpr\linewidth-2\fboxsep\relax][l]{% - \rule[-\dp\strutbox]{0pt}{\headheight}% - \makebox[2em][r]\pagemark}}}}% - \setkomafont{pageheadfoot}{\normalfont\sffamily}% + \ohead*{\smash{\pagemark\hspace{2mm}}}% + \colorlet{headbackground}{DarkBlue}% + \colorlet{headline}{white}% + \setkomafont{pageheadfoot}{\small\sffamily\bfseries\color{headline}}% \setkomafont{pagenumber}{}% + \DeclareNewLayer[head,background, + hoffset=0pt, + width=\paperwidth, + addheight=\dimexpr \topmargin+1in+\dp\strutbox\relax, + addvoffset=2\dp\strutbox, + contents={% + \color{headbackground}\rule{\layerwidth}{\layerheight}}] + {headbackground}% + \AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle{scrheadings}{headbackground}% \renewcommand*{\chaptermark}[1]{% - \markboth\chaptermarkformat\chaptermarkformat}% - \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{\chapapp~\thechapter\autodot}% + \@mkdouble{\ifnumbered{chapter}{\chaptermarkformat}{}##1}% + }% + \renewcommand*{\chaptermarkformat}{% + \makebox[\dimexpr \oddsidemargin+1in-.5em][r]{% + \chapapp~\thechapter:~% + }% + }% \renewcommand*{\chapterformat}{}% \renewcommand*{\chapterpagestyle}{scrheadings}% \setlength{\@tempdimc}{\oddsidemargin}% @@ -246,30 +257,76 @@ % \section{Load common paragraphs} % % \begin{macrocode} -\newcounter{commonpar} -\newcommand*{\LoadCommon}[2][\label@base]{% - \setcounter{commonpar}{#2}% - \@ifundefined{ifCommon#1}{% - \expandafter\csname newif\expandafter\endcsname - \csname ifCommon#1\endcsname - }{}% - \csname Common#1true\endcsname - \input{common-#2.tex}% - \csname Common#1false\endcsname +\newcommand*{\ThisCommonFile}{}% +\newcommand*{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{} +\newcommand*{\IfThisCommonLabelBase}[1]{% + \expandafter\ifstr\expandafter{\ThisCommonLabelBase}{#1}% + \@firstoftwo\@secondoftwo +} +\newcommand*{\IfThisCommonLabelBaseOneOf}[1]{% + \begingroup + \@tempswafalse + \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{% + \expandafter\IfThisCommonLabelBase\expandafter{\reserved@a}% + {\@tempswatrue}{}% + }% + \if@tempswa + \aftergroup\@firstoftwo + \else + \aftergroup\@secondoftwo + \fi + \endgroup +} +\newcommand*{\IfThisCommonLabelBaseNotOneOf}[1]{% + \begingroup + \@tempswafalse + \@for \reserved@a:=#1\do{% + \expandafter\IfThisCommonLabelBase\expandafter{\reserved@a}% + {\@tempswatrue}{}% + }% + \if@tempswa + \aftergroup\@secondoftwo + \else + \aftergroup\@firstoftwo + \fi + \endgroup } -\newcommand*{\IfCommon}[1]{% - \ifstr{\label@base}{#1}{% - \@firstofone +\newcommand*{\ThisCommonFirstLabelBase}{% + \@nameuse{CommonFile@\ThisCommonFile @LabelBase}% +} +\newif\ifthiscommonfirst +\newcommand*{\IfThisCommonFirstRun}{% + \ifthiscommonfirst \expandafter\@firstoftwo + \else \expandafter\@secondoftwo \fi +} +\newcommand*{\LoadCommonFile}[1]{% + \ifstr{\ThisCommonFile}{}{% + \def\ThisCommonFile{#1}% + \let\ThisCommonLabelBase\label@base + \@ifundefined{CommonFile@\ThisCommonFile @LabelBase}{% + \expandafter\let\csname CommonFile@\ThisCommonFile @LabelBase\endcsname + \ThisCommonLabelBase + \thiscommonfirsttrue + }{\thiscommonfirstfalse}% + \input{common-\ThisCommonFile.tex}% + \thiscommonfirstfalse + \let\ThisCommonLabelBase\@empty + \let\ThisCommonFile\@empty }{% - \@gobble + \ClassError{scrguide}{recursive \string\LoadCommon}{% + You can not use \string\LoadCommon\space inside another + common file.% + }% }% } -\newcommand*{\IfNotCommon}[1]{% - \ifstr{\label@base}{#1}{% - \@gobble +\newcommand*{\InternalCommonFileUsageError}{% + \GenericError{% + (common-\ThisCommonFile.tex)\@spaces }{% - \@firstofone - }% + Common File common-\ThisCommonFile.tex Error: Unprepared usage% + }{% + You have to prepare the file for the label base \ThisCommonLabelBase.% + }{}% } % \end{macrocode} % @@ -542,6 +599,47 @@ % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\DeclareSpecialMarkup} +% Command to declare special markup commands, that behave different in- and +% outside |Description| environment. Parameters are: +% \begin{declaration} +% \item[\arg{command}:] The the markup command, that should be defined. +% \item[\arg{outside definition}:] Definition of the markup command +% outside |Description| environment. +% \item[\arg{inside definition}:] Definition of the markup command inside +% |Description| environment. +% \item{\oarg{inside end definition}:] Definition of the \cs{end} command, +% if inside |Description| an markup environment instead of an markup +% command would be used. +% \end{declaration} +% At the end color \meta{command name} will be black and \cs{\meta{command +% name}}, \cs{text\meta{command name}, \cs{Desc\meta{command name}}, and +% optionally \cs{endDesc\meta{command name} will be defined, with +% \cs{\meta{command name}} is \meta{command}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand\DeclareSpecialMarkup[3]{% + \newcommand*#1{}% + \expandafter\colorlet\expandafter{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}{black}% + \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*% + \csname text\expandafter\@gobble\string #1\endcsname[1]{#2}% + \expandafter\DeclareRobustCommand\expandafter*\expandafter#1\expandafter{% + \csname text\expandafter\@gobble\string #1\endcsname}% + \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*% + \csname Desc\expandafter\@gobble\string #1\endcsname[1]{#3}% + \kernel@ifnextchar [% + {\expandafter\@optdef + \csname endDesc\expandafter\@gobble\string #1\endcsname}% + {}%] +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\@optdef} +% Helper to define a macro via optional instead of mandatory argument +\newcommand*{\@optdef}{} +\long\def\@optdef#1[#2]{\def#1{#2}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% % \begin{macro}{\Macro} % \begin{macro}{\Option} % \begin{macro}{\KOption} @@ -551,7 +649,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\Length} % \begin{macro}{\PLength} % \begin{macro}{\FloatStyle} -% \begin{macro}{\Pagestyle} +% \begin{macro}{\PageStyle} % \begin{macro}{\Variable} % \begin{macro}{\FontElement} % \begin{macro}{\PName} @@ -581,31 +679,384 @@ % environment % \end{description} % \begin{macrocode} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Macro}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Option}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\KOption}[1]{\mbox{\Option{#1}\texttt=}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\OptionValue}[2]{\mbox{\texttt{#1=#2}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FloatStyle}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Pagestyle}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Environment}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Counter}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Length}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\PLength}[1]{\mbox{\PValue{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Variable}[1]{\mbox{\PValue{#1}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FontElement}[1]{\PValue{#1}} +\newcommand*{\LabelMacro}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Macro{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.cmd.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.cmd.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\DescRef}{% + \kernel@ifstar {\@DescRef*}{\@DescRef\@empty}% +} +\newcommand*{\@DescRef}[2]{\expandafter\ref#1{\label@desc@prefix#2}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\DescPageRef}{% + \kernel@ifstar {\@DescPageRef*}{\@DescPageRef\space}% +} +\newcommand*{\@DescPageRef}[2]{\expandafter\autopageref#1{\label@desc@prefix#2}} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Macro}{\mbox{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}}{% + \par + \settowidth{\leftskip}{\textMacro{#1}}% indent from left + \hskip-\leftskip + \BeginIndex{Cmd}{#1}% index entry + \LabelMacro{#1}% + \textMacro{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelOption}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Option{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \expandafter\gdef + \csname \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1\endcsname{}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Option}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Option}{#1}% index entry + \LabelOption{#1}% + \textOption{#1}% +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\KOption}{\mbox{\textOption{#1=}}\linebreak[0]}{% + \ClassWarning{scrguide}{You should replace + \string\KOption{#1}\string\PName{...}\MessageBreak + by \string\OptionVName{#1}{...}}% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Option}{#1}% index entry + \begingroup + \@nameuse{phantomsection}% + \label@sanitize + \expandafter\gdef + \csname \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#1\label@suffix\endcsname{}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#1\label@suffix}% + \endgroup + \textOption{#1=}% +} +\newcommand*{\maybelinebreak}{% + \ifvmode\else + \ifnum\lastpenalty<\z@\else + \ifnum\lastpenalty<\@medpenalty + \hskip\z@skip + \fi + \fi + \fi +} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\textKValue}[1]{\maybelinebreak\mbox{\texttt{#1}}} +\newcommand*{\KValue}{} +\let\KValue\textKValue +\newcommand*{\textOptionValue}[2]{% + \textKOption{#1}\textKValue{#2}% +} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\OptionValue}{\textOptionValue}% +\newcommand*{\LabelOptionValue}[3][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabellong{\OptionValue{#2}{#3}}% + \protected@edef\@currentlabelshort{\Option{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{% + \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2\label@suffix + }{% + \expandafter\gdef + \csname \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2\label@suffix\endcsname{}% + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \let\@currentlabel\@currentlabelshort + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + }{}% + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2.#3#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \let\@currentlabel\@currentlabellong + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2.#3#1}% + \endgroup +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\OptionValueRef} +% \cs{OptionValue} by reference. Use it like +% |\OptionValueRef[suffix]{maincls}{version}{3.20}|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\OptionValueRef}{% + \kernel@ifstar {\@RefOptionValue0}{\@RefOptionValue1}% +} +\newcommand*{\@RefOptionValue}[1]{% + \kernel@ifnextchar [%] + {\@@RefOptionValue#1}{\@@RefOptionValue#1[]}% +} +\newcommand*{\@@RefOptionValue}{} +\def\@@RefOptionValue#1[#2]#3#4#5{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix#3.option.#4.#5#2}{% + \ifcase #1 + \expandafter\scr@no@hyperref + \else + \expandafter\hyperref + \fi + [\label@desc@prefix#3.option.#4#2]% + {\OptionValue{\ref*{\label@desc@prefix#3.option.#4#2}}{#5}}% + }{% + \expandafter\ref\ifcase #1 *\fi{\label@desc@prefix#3.option.#4.#5#2}% + }% +} +\newcommand*{\scr@no@hyperref}[2][]{#2} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\DescOptionValue}[2]{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Option}{#1}% + \BeginIndex{Option}{#1~=\KValue{#2}}% + \LabelOptionValue{#1}{#2}% + \textOptionValue{#1}{#2}% +} +\newcommand*{\textOptionVName}[2]{% + \textKOption{#1}\PName{#2}% +} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\OptionVName}{\textOptionVName}% +\newcommand*{\LabelOptionVName}[3][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabellong{\OptionVName{#2}{#3}}% + \protected@edef\@currentlabelshort{\Option{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{% + \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2\label@suffix + }{% + \expandafter\gdef + \csname \label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2\label@suffix\endcsname{}% + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \let\@currentlabel\@currentlabelshort + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2#1}% + }{}% + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2=#3#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \let\@currentlabel\@currentlabellong + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.option.#2=#3#1}% + \endgroup +} +\newcommand*{\DescOptionVName}[2]{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ +% \BeginIndex{Option}{#1}% + \BeginIndex{Option}{#1~=\PName{#2}}% + \LabelOptionVName{#1}{#2}% + \textOptionVName{#1}{#2}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelFloatStyle}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\FloatStyle{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.floatstyle.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.floatstyle.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\FloatStyle}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Floatstyle}{#1}% + \LabelFloatStyle{#1}% + \textFloatStyle{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelPageStyle}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \@nameuse{phantomsection}% + \label@sanitize + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.pagestyle.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\PageStyle}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{#1}% + \LabelPageStyle{#1}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix maincls.cmd.pagestyle}{% + \textMacro{pagestyle}% + }{% + \begingroup + \let\Macro\textMacro + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.pagestyle}% + \endgroup + }\PParameter{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelEnvironment}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Environment{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.env.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.env.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Environment}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \settowidth{\leftskip}{\textMacro{begin}\PParameter{#1}}% siehe Macro + \hskip-\leftskip + \BeginIndex{Env}{#1}% + \LabelEnvironment{#1}% + \textMacro{begin}\PParameter{#1}% + \def\d@EnvironmentName{#1}% Umgebungsnamen merken für das Ende +}[{% + \ifvmode\hskip-\leftskip\else \unskip\,\dots\fi% \begin{…}…\end{…} + \textMacro{end}\expandafter\PParameter\expandafter{\d@EnvironmentName}\par +}]% +\newcommand*{\LabelCounter}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Counter{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.counter.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.counter.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Counter}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Counter}{#1}% + \LabelCounter{#1}% + \textCounter{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelLength}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Length{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.length.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.length.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Length}{\mbox{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Length}{#1}% index entry + \LabelLength{#1}% + \textLength{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelPLength}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\PLength{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.plength.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.plength.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\PLength}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{PLength}{#1}% + \LabelPLength{#1}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{% + r@\label@desc@prefix scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}{% + \textMacro{@setplength}% + }{% + \begingroup + \let\Macro\textMacro + \DescRef{scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength}% + \endgroup + }% + \PParameter{#1}\Parameter{\lengthname}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelVariable}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\Variable{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.variable.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.variable.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\Variable}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{Variable}{#1}% + \LabelVariable{#1}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar}{% + \textMacro{setkomavar}% + }{% + \begingroup + \let\Macro\textMacro + \DescRef{scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar}% + \endgroup + }% + \PParameter{#1}\OParameter{\descriptionname}% + \Parameter{\contentname}% +} +\newcommand*{\LabelFontElement}[2][\label@suffix]{% + \begingroup + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\FontElement{#2}}% + \label@sanitize + \Hy@MakeCurrentHref{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.fontelement.#2#1}% + \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + \label{\label@desc@prefix\label@base.fontelement.#2#1}% + \endgroup +} +\DeclareSpecialMarkup{\FontElement}{\mbox{\texttt{#1}}}{% + \par + \leftskip\z@ + \BeginIndex{FontElement}{#1}% + \LabelFontElement{#1}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix maincls.cmd.setkomafont}{% + \textMacro{setkomafont}% + }{% + \begingroup + \let\Macro\textMacro + \DescRef{maincls.cmd.setkomafont}% + \endgroup + }% + }{% + \begingroup + \let\Macro\textMacro + \DescRef{\LabelBase.cmd.setkomafont}% + \endgroup + }% + \PParameter{#1}\OParameter{\fontsettingname}% +} \DeclareRobustCommand*{\PName}[1]{\texttt{\textit{#1}}} \DeclareRobustCommand*{\PValue}[1]{\texttt{#1}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Parameter}[1]{\texttt{\{}\PName{#1}\texttt{\}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Parameter}[1]{% + \maybelinebreak\texttt{\{}\PName{#1}\texttt{\}}} \DeclareRobustCommand*{\OParameter}[1]{% - \texttt{[%] + \maybelinebreak\texttt{[%] }\PName{#1}\texttt{%[ ]}} \DeclareRobustCommand*{\AParameter}[1]{% - \texttt{(%) + \maybelinebreak\texttt{(%) }\PName{#1}\texttt{%( )}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\PParameter}[1]{\texttt{\{#1\}}} -\DeclareRobustCommand*{\POParameter}[1]{\texttt{[#1]}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\PParameter}[1]{\maybelinebreak\texttt{\{#1\}}} +\DeclareRobustCommand*{\POParameter}[1]{\maybelinebreak\texttt{[#1]}} +\newcommand\label@sanitize{% + \renewcommand*{\"}[1]{##1e}% + \renewcommand*{\IeC}[1]{\expandafter\@gobble\string##1}% + \renewcommand*{\textup}[1]{##1}% + \renewcommand*{\PName}[1]{/##1/}% +} +\newcommand*{\label@desc@prefix}{desc:} +\newcommand*{\label@suffix}{} +\newcommand*{\labelsuffix}[1][]{% Werden Dinge mehrfach dokumentiert benötigen + % sie ein zusätzliches Unterscheidungsmerkmal + % beim gesetzten Label. + \IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{\let\label@suffix\@empty}{\edef\label@suffix{.#1}}% +} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} @@ -703,44 +1154,82 @@ % % \section{Identification} % +% \begin{macro}{\LabelBase} % \begin{macro}{\labelbase} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\labelbase}[1]{% + \ifstr{\label@base@sec}{unknown}{}{% + \labelofbase[sec]{\label@base@sec.next}% + \gdef\label@base@sec{}% + }% \renewcommand*{\label@base}{#1}% \label{cha:#1}% } % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macro}{\label@base} +% \begin{macro}{\label@base.sec} % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\label@base}{unknown} +\newcommand*{\label@base@sec}{} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{\labelofbase} % Sets a label depending on \cs{label@base}. First optional argument is the % label prefix, second is the the label postfix. % \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\labelofbase}[2][lab:]{% +\newcommand*{\labelofbase}[2][lab]{% \label{#1:\label@base.#2}% } % \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\prefix@ref} +% Internal command to set a \cs{ref}, \cs{pageref}, or \cs{autoref} to an +% label with prefix. Use it, e.g., like +% |\label@base@ref{\autoref}{sec}{maincls.cmd.foo}|. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\prefix@ref}[3]{% + #1{#2:#3}% +} +% \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{\seclabel} % Sets a label of type section. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\seclabel}[1]{% + \ifx\label@base@sec\@empty\else + \labelofbase[sec]{\label@base@sec.next}% + \fi + \xdef\label@base@sec{#1}% \labelofbase[sec]{#1}% } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} -% \begin{macro}{\exlabel} +% \begin{macro}{\xmpllabel} +% \begin{macro}{\Refxmpl} +% \begin{macro}{\PageRefxmpl} % Sets a label of type example. % \begin{macrocode} -\newcommand*{\exlabel}[1]{% - \labelofbase[example]{#1}% +\newcommand*{\xmpllabel}[1]{% + \labelofbase[xmpl]{#1}% +} +\newcommand*{\Refxmpl}{% + \kernel@ifstar {\prefix@ref{\autoref*}{xmpl}}% + {\prefix@ref{\autoref}{xmpl}}% +} +\newcommand*{\PageRefxmpl}{% + \kernel@ifstar {\prefix@ref{\autopageref*}{xmpl}}% + {\prefix@ref{\autopageref}{xmpl}}% } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% User command to get the current label base. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\LabelBase}{\@nameuse{label@base}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % % \section{Special Environments} % @@ -749,81 +1238,117 @@ % length, variables etc.\footnote{TODO: Redefining most declaration commands % to also write labels.} % \begin{macrocode} +\colorlet{Declaration}{PaleTurquoise} +\newsavebox\Declaration@Box +\newcommand*{\Declaration@Width}{\linewidth} +\newcommand*{\Declaration@LeftIndent}{-2\fboxsep} +\newcommand*{\Declaration@UseBox}[1]{% + \colorbox{Declaration}{\usebox\Declaration@Box}% +} \newenvironment{Declaration}{% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macro}{\new@element} -% Help macro to define new Declaration elements. -% \begin{macrocode} - \newcommand*{\new@element}[1]{% - \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname X##1\endcsname{}% - \expandafter\let\csname X##1\expandafter\endcsname - \csname ##1\endcsname - \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname new##1\endcsname[1]{% -% \begingroup -% \let\ensuremath\@firstofone -% \let\textit\@firstofone -% \lowercase{\def\@tempa{##1}}% -% \pdfstringdef\@tempb{\label@base.\@tempa.####1}% -% \xdef\@currentHref{\@tempb}% -% \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% -% \label{desc:\label@base.\@tempa.####1}% -% \endgroup - \csname X##1\endcsname{####1}\ignorespaces - }% - \expandafter\let\csname ##1\expandafter\endcsname\csname new##1\endcsname - }% - \newcommand*{\new@xelement}[2]{% - \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname X##1\endcsname{}% - \expandafter\let\csname X##1\expandafter\endcsname - \csname ##1\endcsname - \expandafter\newcommand\expandafter*\csname new##1\endcsname[2]{% -% \begingroup -% \let\ensuremath\@firstofone -% \let\textit\@firstofone -% \lowercase{\def\@tempa{##1}}% -% \pdfstringdef\@tempb{\label@base.\@tempa.####1.####2}% -% \xdef\@currentHref{\@tempb}% -% \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% -% \label{desc:\label@base.\@tempa.####1.####2}% -% \endgroup - \csname X##1\endcsname{####1}{##2{####2}}\ignorespaces - }% - \expandafter\let\csname ##1\expandafter\endcsname\csname new##1\endcsname + % Als erstes wird eine neue Index-Gruppe begonnen. Dagegen darf die + % vorherige Index-Gruppe hier nicht automatisch geschlossen werden, weil + % beispielsweise ein Abschnitt oder ein Kapitel ebenfalls eine Index-Gruppe + % sein könnte (aber nicht muss). + \BeginIndexGroup + % Die Absatzformatierung anpassen. Eigentlich hier noch nicht notwendig, + % schadet aber auch nichts. + \parindent\z@ + \parfillskip\@flushglue + \parskip\z@ + % \Macro, \Environment, etc. so umdefinieren, dass sie passend für die + % Umgebung formatiert werden und auch gleich Label und Index-Einträge + % erzeugt werden. + \scr@Desc@let\Macro + \scr@Desc@let\Option + \scr@Desc@let\KOption + \scr@Desc@let\OptionValue + \scr@Desc@let\OptionVName + \scr@Desc@let\Variable + \scr@Desc@let\Environment + \let\endEnvironment\endDescEnvironment + \scr@Desc@let\Counter + \scr@Desc@let\Length + \scr@Desc@let\PageStyle + \scr@Desc@let\PLength + \scr@Desc@let\FontElement + \scr@Desc@let\FloatStyle + % Todo: Replace the following by the correct definitions: + \let\XMacro\textMacro + \let\XEnvironment\textEnvironment + \let\XOption\textOption + \let\XOptionValue\textOptionValue + \newenvironment{Body}{% Umgebung für den (vertikalen) Inhalt einer Umgebung + \\ + \setlength{\leftskip}{1em}% + \minipage{\dimexpr\linewidth-\leftskip}% + \raggedright + \newcommand*{\BodyDots}{% + \par + \hskip-\leftskip + \raisebox{0pt}[1.1\ht\strutbox][.5\dp\strutbox]{$\vdots$}% + \par + }% + }{% + \par + \endminipage + \\ }% -% \end{macrocode} -% \begin{macrocode} - \new@element{Option}% - \new@element{Macro}% - \new@element{Environment}% - \new@element{Counter}% - \new@element{FloatStyle}% - \new@element{PLength}% - \new@element{Variable}% - \new@xelement{OptionValue}{\PValue}% -% \end{macrocode} -% \end{macro} -% \begin{macrocode} - \ifvmode\else\par\fi\small\addvspace{2\baselineskip}% - \vspace{-\baselineskip}% - \vspace{\z@ plus \baselineskip}% - \noindent - \start@Declaration - \tabular{|l|}\hline\ignorespaces + % Todo: Behandlung für Optionen, Längen, Zähler, Font-Elemente, Seitenstile, + % etc. + % Maybe: Vielleicht wäre es besser, die \X…-Definitionen von hier direkt zur + % Definition der entsprechenden Elemente zu verlagern und sie \D… zu + % nennen. Das wird dann eventuell übersichtlicher als alles hier zu + % machen. Hier gäbe es dann nur noch für jedes Element genau ein + % \let\…\D…. + % Jetzt wird der ganze Inhalt der Umgebung linksbündig in eine Box gepackt + \begin{lrbox}{\Declaration@Box}% + \minipage{\Declaration@Width}% + \raggedright + \parskip\baselineskip + \small + \addtolength{\parskip}{-\baselineskip}% + \catcode`\^^M=9 % ignore line ends }{% - \\\hline\endtabular\nobreak\after@Declaration\nobreak\par\nobreak - \vspace{1.5\baselineskip}\nobreak\vspace{-\baselineskip}\nobreak% - \vspace{0pt minus .5\baselineskip}\nobreak% + \par + \endminipage + \end{lrbox} + \vskip 1\baselineskip \@plus .75\baselineskip \@minus .25\baselineskip + % Hier darf ein Seitenumbruch ohne vertikalen Ausgleich erfolgen, wenn nicht + % mindestens für die Deklaration und zwei Zeilen Platz ist. + \vskip \dimexpr\ht\Declaration@Box+\dp\Declaration@Box+2\baselineskip\relax + \penalty-\@medpenalty + \vskip -\dimexpr\ht\Declaration@Box+\dp\Declaration@Box+2\baselineskip\relax + \begingroup% Dann wird die erzeugte Box farbig hinterlegt leicht im linken + % Rand ausgegeben. + \parfillskip\@flushglue + \parindent\z@ + \leavevmode + \hspace*{\Declaration@LeftIndent}% + \Declaration@UseBox{\Declaration@Box}% + \par\nobreak\vskip\fboxsep + \endgroup\nobreak + % Der nachfolgende Text soll wie bei einer Ãœberschrift behandelt werden. \aftergroup\@afterindentfalse\aftergroup\@afterheading } -\newcommand*{\start@Declaration}{\hspace{-1em}} -\newcommand*{\after@Declaration}{} % \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\scr@Desc@let} +% Redefine the internal command of a robust command. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\scr@Desc@let}[1]{% + \expandafter\def + \csname \expandafter\@gobble\string #1 \expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{% + \csname Desc\expandafter\@gobble\string #1\endcsname}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % \end{environment} % % \begin{environment}{Example} % This environment is used for all examples at the \KOMAScript{} guide. % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{Example}{% + \lstset{belowskip=0pt plus 1pt minus .5pt}% \labeling{{\usekomafont{disposition}\GuideExample:\ }} \item[{\usekomafont{disposition}\GuideExample:\ }]% }{% @@ -995,7 +1520,7 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \providecommand*{\ChangedAt}[3][]{% \ifstr{#1}{}{% - \marginnote{\footnotesize\fbox{\strut#2}}% + \marginnote{\tiny\fbox{\strut#2}}% }{% \def\reserved@a##1/##2\@nil{% \count@\year @@ -1005,9 +1530,9 @@ \advance\count@-##2\relax }\reserved@a#1\@nil \ifnum\count@<13 - \marginnote{\footnotesize Beta-Feature}% + \marginnote{\tiny Beta-Feature}% \else - \marginnote{\footnotesize\fbox{\strut #2}}% + \marginnote{\tiny\fbox{\strut #2}}% \fi }% \begingroup @@ -1152,7 +1677,15 @@ \entry{\Variable{##1}\IndexVariable[indexmain]{##1}}% }% \newcommand*{\feentry}[1]{% - \entry{\FontElement{##1}\IndexFontElement[indexmain]{##1}}% + \entry{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{r@\label@desc@prefix\LabelBase.fontelement.##1}{% + \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% + Reference `\label@desc@prefix\LabelBase.fontelement.##1' undefined}% + \FontElement{##1}% + }{% + \DescRef{\LabelBase.fontelement.##1}% + }% + \IndexFontElement[indexmain]{##1}}% }% \newcommand*{\oentry}[1]{% \entry{\Option{##1}\IndexOption[indexmain]{##1}}% @@ -1302,14 +1835,13 @@ % % Setup listings: % \begin{macrocode} -\lstdefinestyle{basics}{% +\lstset{% basicstyle=\ttfamily,% columns=fullflexible,keepspaces,% aboveskip=.4\baselineskip,% - belowskip=0pt% + belowskip=\dp\strutbox plus 1pt minus .5pt% }% \lstdefinestyle{code}{% - style=basics,% language=[LaTeX]TeX,% moretexcs={% @auxout, @currext, @dottedtocline, @empty, @float, @ifpackagelater, @@ -1328,7 +1860,7 @@ textsuperscript}% }% \lstdefinestyle{output}{% - style=basics,breaklines,prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% + breaklines,prebreak=\mbox{$\hookleftarrow$}% }% \lstdefinestyle{KOMA}{% style=code,% @@ -1419,12 +1951,15 @@ TOCEntryStyleInitCode,TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode,TOCLineLeaderFill, UnPreventPackageFromLoading,unitfactor, unsettoc,usekomafont,useplength,usekomavar,uppertitleback% + }% }% -} \lstset{style=basics} \lstnewenvironment{lstoutput}[1][]{% +\lstnewenvironment{lstoutput}[1][]{% \lstset{style=output,basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,#1}% -}{} \lstnewenvironment{lstcode}[1][]{% +}{}% +\lstnewenvironment{lstcode}[1][]{% \lstset{style=KOMA,basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,#1}% -}{} \newcommand*{\lstinputcode}[1][]{% +}{}% +\newcommand*{\lstinputcode}[1][]{% \lstinputlisting[style=KOMA,basicstyle=\ttfamily\small,#1]% } % \end{macrocode} @@ -1629,6 +2164,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\printmultiindex} +% \changes{v1.11a}{2016/11/02}{index label generation delayed}^^A % Print one part of the multi part index. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\printmultiindex}[3][]{% @@ -1654,7 +2190,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname \ifx\relax#1\relax\let\index@preamble=\relax \else\def\index@preamble{#1}% \fi - \label{idx:#3}% + \def\index@setlabel{\label{idx:#3}}% \@input@{\jobname-#3.ind}% \endgroup } @@ -1671,7 +2207,7 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname \setlength{\parskip}{\z@ \@plus .3\p@}% \setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ \@plus 1fil}% \let\item\@idxitem - \small + \small\csname index@setlabel\endcsname }{% \end{multicols}% } @@ -1844,77 +2380,158 @@ KOMAScript \endcsname \newif\ifnolabel \def\nolabelfalse{\global\let\ifnolabel\iffalse}% \def\nolabeltrue{\global\let\ifnolabel\iftrue}% -\newlength\PreserveSkip \newcommand*{\BeginIndex}[3][indexmain]{% - \ifvmode\PreserveSkip=\lastskip\else\PreserveSkip=\z@\fi \expandafter\ifx\csname Index#2\endcsname\relax \GenericError{(scrguide)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}{% Document scrguide Error: \string\BeginIndex\space with unknown index% }{Check the \string\BeginIndex-command or add a new index type ``#2''.}{% - See scrguide2.tex for more information.}% + See scrguide.cls for more information.}% \else \csname Index#2\endcsname[(%) #1]{#3}% + \push@IndexStack{{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}}% \fi - \ifnolabel\nolabelfalse\else - \ifx\relax#2\relax\else - \begingroup - \def\SplitIndexValue##1~=##2~=##3\@nil{% - ##1\expandafter\ifx\expandafter\relax##2\relax\else.##2\fi - }% - \let\PName\@gobble - \let\PValue\@firstofone - \let\ensuremath\@firstofone - \let\textit\@firstofone - \def~{\string~}% - \lowercase{\def\@tempa{#2}}% - \edef\@tempa{\label@base.\@tempa.\SplitIndexValue#3~=~=\@nil}% - \pdfstringdef\@tempb{\@tempa}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname \@tempb\endcsname\relax - \expandafter\xdef\csname \@tempb\endcsname{\the\inputlineno}% - \xdef\@currentHref{\@tempb}% - \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% - \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% - \label{desc:\@tempa}% - \else - \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% - Label \@tempa\space already defined at \csname - \@tempb\endcsname,\MessageBreak - ignored}% - \fi - \endgroup - \fi - \fi - \ifvmode\ifdim \PreserveSkip=\z@\else - \vskip -\PreserveSkip\vskip\PreserveSkip - \fi\fi - \ignorespaces + % \ifnolabel\nolabelfalse\else + % \ifx\relax#2\relax\else + % \begingroup + % \def\SplitIndexValue##1~=##2~=##3\@nil{% + % ##1\expandafter\ifx\expandafter\relax##2\relax\else.##2\fi + % }% + % \let\PName\@gobble + % \let\PValue\@firstofone + % \let\ensuremath\@firstofone + % \let\textit\@firstofone + % \def~{\string~}% + % \lowercase{\def\@tempa{#2}}% + % \edef\@tempa{\label@base.\@tempa.\SplitIndexValue#3~=~=\@nil}% + % \pdfstringdef\@tempb{\@tempa}% + % \expandafter\ifx\csname \@tempb\endcsname\relax + % \expandafter\xdef\csname \@tempb\endcsname{\the\inputlineno}% + % \xdef\@currentHref{\@tempb}% + % \ClassInfo{scrguide}{Anchor: `\@currentHref'}% + % \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}\hyper@anchorend}% + % \label{desc:\@tempa}% + % \else + % \ClassWarning{scrguide}{% + % Label \@tempa\space already defined at \csname + % \@tempb\endcsname,\MessageBreak + % ignored}% + % \fi + % \endgroup + % \fi + % \fi + \penalty\@M\ignorespaces } -\newcommand*{\EndIndex}[3][indexmain]{% - \@tempdima\lastskip - \ifdim \lastskip>\z@ - \vskip -\lastskip +\newlength\PreserveSkip +\newcount\PreservePenalty +\newcommand*{\CloseIndex}[3][indexmain]{% + \PreservePenalty\lastpenalty + \ifvmode\PreserveSkip\lastskip\else\unskip\PreserveSkip\z@\fi + \ifdim \PreserveSkip>\z@ + \vskip -\PreserveSkip \fi + \penalty\@M \expandafter\ifx\csname Index#2\endcsname\relax \GenericError{(scrguide)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}{% Document scrguide Error: \string\EndIndex\space with unknown index% }{Check the \string\BeginIndex-command or add a new index type ``#2''.}{% - See scrguide2.tex for more information.}% + See scrguide.cls for more information.}% \else \csname Index#2\endcsname[%( )#1]{#3}% \fi - \ifdim\@tempdima >\z@ - \vskip\@tempdima + \ifdim\PreserveSkip >\z@ + \vskip\PreserveSkip \fi + \penalty\PreservePenalty +} +\newcommand*{\EndIndex}[3][indexmain]{% + \begingroup + \@tempswatrue + \def\do##1##2##3{% + \ifstr{#1}{##1}{% + \ifstr{#2}{##2}{% + \ifstr{\detokenize{#3}}{\detokenize{##3}}{}{\@tempswafalse}% + }{\@tempswafalse}% + }{\@tempswafalse}% + \if@tempswa + \else + \ClassError{scrguide}{Index stack error}{% + Should pop \string\do{#1}{#2}{\detokenize{#3}}\MessageBreak + but have \string\do{##1}{##2}{\detokenize{##3}}% + }% + \push@IndexStack{{\do{##1}{##2}{##3}}}% + \fi + }% + \def\StopIndexGroup{% + \ClassError{scrguide}{Index stack error}{% + Should pop \string\do{#1}{#2}{\detokenize{#3}}\MessageBreak + but have \string\StopIndexGroup + }% + \push@IndexStack{\StopIndexGroup}% + }% + \expandafter\pop@IndexStack\@IndexStack\@nil + \endgroup + \CloseIndex[#1]{#2}{#3}% } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} +\let\@IndexStack\@empty +\newcommand*{\push@IndexStack}[1]{% Einen Eintrag auf den Index Stapel werfen. + \xdef\@IndexStack{\unexpanded{#1}\unexpanded\expandafter{\@IndexStack}}% +} +\newcommand*{\BeginIndexGroup}{% Am Anfang einer Gruppe auf den Stack die + % Index-Gruppen-Trennmarke packen. + \push@IndexStack{\StopIndexGroup}% +} +\newcommand*{\EndIndexGroup}{% Den Stapel bis zur nächsten Stop-Marke + % verarbeiten. + \ifx\@IndexStack\@empty + \ClassError{scrguide}{cannot end index group}{% + You've told me to end the current index group,\MessageBreak + but there is no more index group open% + }% + \else + \begingroup + \let\StopIndexGroup\@tempswafalse + \@tempswatrue%( + \def\do##1##2##3{% + \CloseIndex[##1]{##2}{##3}% + }% + \@whilesw \if@tempswa \fi {% + \expandafter\pop@IndexStack\@IndexStack\@nil + }% + \endgroup + \fi +} +\def\pop@IndexStack#1#2\@nil{% Ein Argument von Stapel holen und verarbeiten. + \gdef\@IndexStack{#2}#1% +} +\newcommand*\CleanUpIndexStack{% + \ifx\@IndexStack\@empty\else + \ClassError{scrguide}{Index stack error}{% + The index stack should be empty\MessageBreak + but it still contains: \MessageBreak + \expandafter\detokenize\expandafter{\@IndexStack}% + }% + \begingroup + \let\StopIndexGroup\relax + \def\do##1##2##3{% + \CloseIndex[##1]{##2}{##3}% + }% + \@IndexStack + \global\let\@IndexStack\@empty + \endgroup + \fi +} +\AtEndDocument{\CleanUpIndexStack} +\l@preto@macro\chapter{\CleanUpIndexStack} +\l@preto@macro\part{\CleanUpIndexStack} % % Now we have to define different kinds of index entries. We have entries that % will be added to only one index. We have entries that will be added to one diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html index ba1f7cb7bd9..f16722d50b4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.html @@ -7,927 +7,958 @@ <h1>Index der KOMA-Script-Anleitung</h1> <p>Dies ist ein Index der in KOMA-Script definierten Elemente. Dieser Index bezieht sich auf die <a href="scrguide.pdf">KOMA-Script-Anleitung</a>. Zur besseren Ãœbersicht ist der Index in mehrere Funktionsgruppen unterteilt:</p> <ul> -<li><a href="#option">Optionen</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Anweisungen</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Umgebungen</a></li><li><a href="#length">Längen</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolängen</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variablen</a></li><li><a href="#pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Zähler</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></li></ul> +<li><a href="#option">Optionen</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Anweisungen</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Umgebungen</a></li><li><a href="#length">Längen</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolängen</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variablen</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Zähler</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></li></ul> <h2><a name="option">Optionen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.abstract">71</a></li> -<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.addrfield">191</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">261</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">261</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">261</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">261</a></li> -<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.appendixprefix">95</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">424</a></li> -<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">240</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">240</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">400</a></li> -<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.backaddress">191</a></li> -<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.bibliography">149</a></li> -<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.captions">129</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.chapteratlists">100</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.chapterentrydots">75</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.chapterprefix">95</a></li> -<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.clausemark">272</a></li> -<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.cleardoublepage">87</a></li> -<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.contract">269</a></li> -<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">393</a></li> -<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.draft">397</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.draft">56</a></li> -<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">179</a></li> -<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrextend.option.extendedfeature">265</a></li> -<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">205</a></li> -<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.firsthead">180</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.fleqn">128</a></li> -<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">178</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fontsize">171</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.fontsize">57</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.footnotes">89</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.footsepline">207</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.footsepline">81</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">248</a></li> -<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">400</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromalign">180</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromemail">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromfax">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">190</a></li> -<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromphone">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromrule">181</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromurl">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.headings">97</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.headsepline">207</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.headsepline">81</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">248</a></li> -<li><a name="option.hmode"></a><a href="#option.hmode">hmode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.option.hmode">413</a></li> -<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.index">152</a></li> -<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.option.internalonly">289</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">272</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.juratocindent">269</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">269</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.juratotoc">268</a></li> -<li><a name="option.komastyle"></a><a href="#option.komastyle">komastyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.komastyle">240</a></li> -<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.leqno">128</a></li> -<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.listof">143</a></li> -<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.locfield">196</a></li> -<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">240</a></li> -<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">243</a></li> -<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.numbers">99</a></li> -<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">197</a></li> -<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsinit">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsselect">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">392</a></li> -<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.open">95</a></li> -<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.origlongtable">143</a></li> -<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">208</a></li> -<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.option.pagesize">50</a></li> -<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.option.paper">49</a></li> -<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.parnumber">272</a></li> -<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.parskip">78</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.priority">191</a></li> -<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.option.ref">276</a></li> -<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.refline">198</a></li> -<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.sectionentrydots">75</a></li> -<li><a name="option.standardstyle"></a><a href="#option.standardstyle">standardstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.standardstyle">240</a></li> -<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.subject">202</a></li> -<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">185</a></li> -<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.titlepage">65</a></li> -<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.option.toc">72</a></li> -<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.option.version">33</a></li> -<li><a name="option.visualize"></a><a href="#option.visualize">visualize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.option.visualize">474</a></li> +<li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">280</a></li> +<li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">34</a></li> +<li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">35</a></li> +<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">74</a></li> +<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">200</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">284</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">284</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">284</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">284</a></li> +<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">98</a></li> +<li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">481</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">478</a></li> +<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">445</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">445</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">452</a></li> +<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">200</a></li> +<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">152</a></li> +<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">132</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">102</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">78</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">98</a></li> +<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">317</a></li> +<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">221</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">89</a></li> +<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">273</a></li> +<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">314</a></li> +<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">166</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">264</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">289</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">446</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">58</a></li> +<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">187</a></li> +<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">289</a></li> +<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">213</a></li> +<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">188</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">131</a></li> +<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">184</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">177</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">290</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">60</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">271</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">46</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">43</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">46</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">223</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">301</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">92</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">217</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.option.footsepline">528</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">83</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">270</a></li> +<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">452</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">188</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">196</a></li> +<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">188</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">45</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">43</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">99</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">45</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">217</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">271</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.option.headsepline">528</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">83</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">271</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">270</a></li> +<li><a name="option.hmode"></a><a href="#option.hmode">hmode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.option.hmode">465</a></li> +<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">273</a></li> +<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">155</a></li> +<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">334</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">317</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">313</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">313</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">313</a></li> +<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">131</a></li> +<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">146</a></li> +<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">203</a></li> +<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">445</a></li> +<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">265</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">446</a></li> +<li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">44</a></li> +<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">101</a></li> +<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">205</a></li> +<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">273</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">440</a></li> +<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">97</a></li> +<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">146</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">218</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">51</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">260</a></li> +<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">49</a></li> +<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">318</a></li> +<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">215</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">80</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">272</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">272</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">272</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">272</a></li> +<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">200</a></li> +<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">321</a></li> +<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">206</a></li> +<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">78</a></li> +<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">210</a></li> +<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">67</a></li> +<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">75</a></li> +<li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">42</a></li> +<li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">42</a></li> +<li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">480</a></li> +<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">165</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">288</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">33</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">57</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="macro">Anweisungen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="cmd.@addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@addtoplength">\@addtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@addtoplength">459</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">399</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">399</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">399</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">399</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@newplength">\@newplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength">459</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">452</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@setplength">\@setplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength">459</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">394</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">394</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Address">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">151</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">427</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">387</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">337</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">450</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">332</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">163</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">151</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">163</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">297</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">450</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">450</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">315</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">387</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">337</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">151</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ClassInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">\ClassInfoNoLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">312</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">429</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Clause">270</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">272</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Comment">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">375</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">375</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">415</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">434</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">444</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">361</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">415</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">434</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">444</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">373</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">342</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">290</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">290</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">352</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">385</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">396</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">297</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">300</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">303</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">294</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">299</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">296</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">295</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">297</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">300</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">299</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">302</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FirstName">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeI">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeII">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">397</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">402</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">385</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">95</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">433</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">385</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">429</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">311</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">311</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">32</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">32</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.LastName">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize"></a><a href="#cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">473</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">338</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">397</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">375</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">395</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Name">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.PackageInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">\PackageInfoNoLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">312</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">375</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">415</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">434</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">444</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">375</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">415</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">434</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">444</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">292</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">393</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">321</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">321</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">324</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Sentence">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">324</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.SubClause">270</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">327</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Telephone">259</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">324</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">324</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">394</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.XdivY">312</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.XmodY">312</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchap*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchap">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchapmark">113</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">335</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addpart*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addpart">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">222</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsec*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsec">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsecmark">113</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">430</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">334</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">59</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">160</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">470</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">331</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">335</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">221</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.and">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.appendix">148</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">451</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.author">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.autodot">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">240</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.backmatter">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">452</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">452</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.caption">132</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionabove">132</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionbelow">132</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionformat">140</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionof">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">478</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.cc">169</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapapp">112</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">112</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapter*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapter">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapterformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadsmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadsmidvskip">\chapterheadsmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadsmidvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">447</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">447</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chaptermark">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">88</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">424</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.clearpage">88</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrheadfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrheadfoot">\clearscrheadfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrheadfoot">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrheadings"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrheadings">\clearscrheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrheadings">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrplain"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrplain">\clearscrplain</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrplain">407</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.closing">166</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">387</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.date">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">479</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.dedication">70</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">470</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.deffootnote">92</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">92</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">411</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">339</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftriplepagestyle">\deftriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftriplepagestyle">408</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftripstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftripstyle">\deftripstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftripstyle">409</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictum">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumrule">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.cmd.documentclass">32</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">333</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.edgesize"></a><a href="#cmd.edgesize">\edgesize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.edgesize">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">274</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.encl">169</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.extratitle">66</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.figureformat">140</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnote">90</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnotemark">90</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnotetext">90</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.footref">91</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.frontmatter">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">244</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">372</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">372</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">330</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">159</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">159</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">471</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">159</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">471</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifstr">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">342</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.item">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.l@addto@macro"></a><a href="#cmd.l@addto@macro">\l@addto@macro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.l@addto@macro">312</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumi">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumii">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemi">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemii">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">386</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">244</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">164</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">207</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.listoffigures">147</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listofname"></a><a href="#cmd.listofname">\listofname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listofname">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.listoftables">147</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">70</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.mainmatter">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">420</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.maketitle">66</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">240</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.marginline">147</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.marginpar">147</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">210</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.markboth">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">247</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.markright">210</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.markright">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.minisec">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.multfootsep">90</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">90</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">452</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">452</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">470</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">470</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">411</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newtriplepagestyle">\newtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newtriplepagestyle">408</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.numberline">342</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">238</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">237</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.opening">165</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">244</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">86</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">208</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.pagestyle">82</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraph*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraph">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">274</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parformat">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parshortname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.part*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.part">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.partformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">445</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">411</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providetriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providetriplepagestyle">\providetriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providetriplepagestyle">408</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ps">167</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.publishers">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putC">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putLL">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putLR">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putUL">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putUR">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">109</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">116</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedpart">109</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedsection">109</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.ref">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refClause">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refL">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refN">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refPar">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParL">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParN">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParS">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refS">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentence">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">333</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">470</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">411</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">\renewtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">408</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">244</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">398</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">404</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">233</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">230</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">450</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">401</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.section*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.section">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">449</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">449</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionmark">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.sentencename">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">150</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">142</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapindent">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">142</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">142</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">142</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">115</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootbotline"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootbotline">\setfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setfootbotline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">93</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootsepline"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootsepline">\setfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setfootsepline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setheadsepline"></a><a href="#cmd.setheadsepline">\setheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setheadsepline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setheadtopline"></a><a href="#cmd.setheadtopline">\setheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setheadtopline">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">152</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setkomafont">59</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">158</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">158</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">160</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">433</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">115</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setshowstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.setshowstyle">\setshowstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setshowstyle">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">339</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showISOenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showISOenvelope">\showISOenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showISOenvelope">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showUScheck"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScheck">\showUScheck</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScheck">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showUScommercial"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScommercial">\showUScommercial</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScommercial">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showenvelope">\showenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showenvelope">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showfields"></a><a href="#cmd.showfields">\showfields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showfields">474</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">426</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subject">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraph">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsection*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsection">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">113</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">106</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsection">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">110</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">246</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.subtitle">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">421</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.tableformat">140</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">76</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tb@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@@after@hook">\tb@@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tb@@after@hook">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tb@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@@before@hook">\tb@@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tb@@before@hook">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.textsubscript">58</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">58</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.thanks">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumi">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumii">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumiii">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumiv">120</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">92</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.thepar">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.cmd.thesentence">275</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">164</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">208</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">82</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.title">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.titlehead">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">266</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">84</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">356</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">356</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">358</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">358</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@">\tocbasic@listhead@</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@">357</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">356</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">334</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.unitfactor"></a><a href="#cmd.unitfactor">\unitfactor</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.unitfactor">475</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">339</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">70</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.usekomafont">59</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">158</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">471</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">158</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">471</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#typearea.cmd.usepackage">32</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">160</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">64</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">342</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">481</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">481</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@addtoplength">\@addtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@addtoplength">514</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">451</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">451</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">451</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">451</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@newplength">\@newplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength">514</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">507</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@setplength">\@setplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength">514</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">483</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">483</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">361</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">364</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">483</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">483</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">383</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">384</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">505</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">378</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">169</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">169</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">342</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">505</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">505</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">364</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">361</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">362</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">383</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">384</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">274</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ClassInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">\ClassInfoNoLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ClassInfoNoLine">358</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">484</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">314</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">316</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">399</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">275</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">275</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">274</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">274</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">422</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">422</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">499</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">406</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">499</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">420</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">389</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">335</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">335</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">433</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">342</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">345</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">348</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">336</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">344</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">341</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">340</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">338</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">342</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">345</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">344</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">347</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">440</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">440</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">449</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">454</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">432</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">275</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">274</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">276</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">98</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">432</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">281</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">276</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">484</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">357</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">357</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">164</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">245</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">287</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">311</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">414</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">418</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">468</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">164</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">245</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">287</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">311</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">414</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">418</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">468</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">400</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">400</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">400</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize"></a><a href="#cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">529</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">264</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">384</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">446</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">422</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.PackageInfoNoLine"></a><a href="#cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">\PackageInfoNoLine</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.PackageInfoNoLine">358</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">422</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">499</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">422</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">436</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">499</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">338</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">366</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">505</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">314</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">399</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">399</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">400</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">373</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">282</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">371</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">371</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">359</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">359</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">481</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">115</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">381</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">242</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">281</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">240</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">281</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">115</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">380</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">180</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">291</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">468</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">61</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">163</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">525</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">377</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">381</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">381</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">242</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">281</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">239</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">281</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">151</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">506</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">48</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">481</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">445</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">445</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">96</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">507</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">507</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">135</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">135</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">137</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">135</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">137</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">142</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">137</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsacadian">\captionsacadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsacadian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustralien">\captionsaustralien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustralien">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadian">\captionscanadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionscanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscanadien">\captionscanadien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscanadien">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsczech"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsczech">\captionsczech</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsczech">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrancais">\captionsfrancais</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrancais">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnewzealand">\captionsnewzealand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnewzealand">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnswissgerman">\captionsnswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnswissgerman">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionspolish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionspolish">\captionspolish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionspolish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsslovak">\captionsslovak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsslovak">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswissgerman">\captionsswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswissgerman">534</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">175</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">115</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">115</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">502</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">502</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">459</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">478</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">478</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">222</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">299</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">90</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">459</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">459</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">172</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">434</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateacadian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateacadian">\dateacadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateacadian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateaustralien"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustralien">\dateaustralien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustralien">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datecanadian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadian">\datecanadian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datecanadien"></a><a href="#cmd.datecanadien">\datecanadien</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecanadien">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateczech"></a><a href="#cmd.dateczech">\dateczech</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateczech">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datefrancais"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrancais">\datefrancais</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrancais">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenewzealand"></a><a href="#cmd.datenewzealand">\datenewzealand</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenewzealand">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datenswissgerman">\datenswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenswissgerman">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datepolish"></a><a href="#cmd.datepolish">\datepolish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datepolish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateslovak"></a><a href="#cmd.dateslovak">\dateslovak</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateslovak">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateswissgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswissgerman">\dateswissgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswissgerman">535</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">73</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">525</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">94</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">94</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">458</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">385</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deftriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftriplepagestyle">\deftriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftriplepagestyle">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">164</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">245</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">287</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">414</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">418</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">379</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.edgesize"></a><a href="#cmd.edgesize">\edgesize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.edgesize">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">319</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">175</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">69</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">143</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">59</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">92</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">92</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">92</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">303</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">94</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">96</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">265</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">447</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">376</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">162</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">162</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">527</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">162</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">527</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">352</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">117</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">216</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">388</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">117</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.item">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.item">226</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.l@addto@macro"></a><a href="#cmd.l@addto@macro">\l@addto@macro</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.l@addto@macro">358</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">226</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">226</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">226</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">226</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">433</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">430</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">265</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">447</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">170</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterpagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagemark">\letterpagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.letterpagemark">528</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">217</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">\listof/Dateierweiterung/name</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/Dateierweiterung/name">382</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listof/Zielendung/"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/Zielendung/">\listof/Zielendung/</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.listof/Zielendung/">373</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">382</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">150</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">150</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">382</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">382</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">72</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">96</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">474</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">294</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">68</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">261</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">445</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">150</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">309</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">150</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">230</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">309</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">220</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">449</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">86</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">449</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">220</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">449</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">86</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">109</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">92</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">224</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">302</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">92</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">277</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">507</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">507</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">277</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">525</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">525</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">458</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newtriplepagestyle">\newtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newtriplepagestyle">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">388</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">258</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">171</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">265</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">447</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagemark">528</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">88</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">218</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">84</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">319</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">500</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">458</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providetriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providetriplepagestyle">\providetriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providetriplepagestyle">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">173</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">431</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">59</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">111</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">486</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">119</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">306</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">111</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">111</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">41</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">379</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">525</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">458</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">\renewtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">265</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">447</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">450</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">456</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">251</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">505</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">452</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">452</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">452</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">453</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">504</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">504</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">153</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">144</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">144</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">144</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">117</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setfootnoterule">305</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">96</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">155</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">180</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">291</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">468</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">61</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">161</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">161</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">163</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">117</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setshowstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.setshowstyle">\setshowstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setshowstyle">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">280</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">385</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showISOenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showISOenvelope">\showISOenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showISOenvelope">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showUScheck"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScheck">\showUScheck</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScheck">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showUScommercial"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScommercial">\showUScommercial</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScommercial">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showenvelope">\showenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showenvelope">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showfields"></a><a href="#cmd.showfields">\showfields</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showfields">530</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">115</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">108</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">113</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">268</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">267</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">448</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">475</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">477</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">143</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">78</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@after@hook">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">\tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tb@/Dateierweiterung/@before@hook">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">179</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">291</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">60</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">179</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">291</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">60</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">227</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">225</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">304</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">94</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">170</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">218</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">84</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">279</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">279</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">295</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">70</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">298</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">401</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">401</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">400</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">\tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/Dateierweiterung/">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">401</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">380</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">276</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">276</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">41</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.unitfactor"></a><a href="#cmd.unitfactor">\unitfactor</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.unitfactor">531</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">385</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">297</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">72</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">180</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">247</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">291</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">468</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">61</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">162</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">526</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">162</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">526</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">164</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">245</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">287</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">310</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">32</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">414</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">418</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">467</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">163</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">183</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">249</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">292</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">312</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">469</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">66</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">388</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">537</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">537</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="environment">Umgebungen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.abstract">72</a></li> -<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.addmargin*">126</a></li> -<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.addmargin">126</a></li> -<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.captionbeside">136</a></li> -<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.captionofbeside">139</a></li> -<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.env.contract">269</a></li> -<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.description">121</a></li> -<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.enumerate">120</a></li> -<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.itemize">119</a></li> -<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.labeling">122</a></li> -<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.env.letter">163</a></li> -<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.quotation">125</a></li> -<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.quote">125</a></li> -<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.titlepage">65</a></li> -<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.env.verse">123</a></li> +<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">74</a></li> +<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">129</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">228</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">308</a></li> +<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">129</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">228</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">308</a></li> +<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">139</a></li> +<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">142</a></li> +<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">314</a></li> +<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">124</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">227</a></li> +<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">123</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">227</a></li> +<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">121</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">226</a></li> +<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">125</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">227</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">307</a></li> +<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">169</a></li> +<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">228</a></li> +<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">128</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">228</a></li> +<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">293</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">68</a></li> +<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">126</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">228</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="length">Längen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">227</a></li> -<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">227</a></li> +<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">246</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">444</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">46</a></li> +<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">246</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">444</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="plength">Pseudolängen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">469</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">469</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">469</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">462</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">462</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">462</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">462</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">462</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">466</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">466</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">466</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">466</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">467</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">467</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">466</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">467</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">468</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">468</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">465</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">468</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">468</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">467</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">461</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">464</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">464</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">463</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">464</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">520</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">525</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">524</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">525</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">518</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">518</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">518</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">517</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">517</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">517</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">518</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">518</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">517</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">517</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">521</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">523</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">522</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">522</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">522</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">524</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">524</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">520</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">520</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">523</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">523</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">523</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">516</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">519</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">519</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">520</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">519</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">519</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="variable">Variablen</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">169</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.customer">198</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.date">197</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">169</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">205</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">181</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.frombank">205</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">190</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromname">181</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.invoice">198</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.location">196</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.myref">198</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">210</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">210</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.place">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">199</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.signature">212</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.subject">202</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">202</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.title">201</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.toname">191</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">198</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.yourref">198</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">191</a></li> -</ul> -<h2><a name="pagestyle">Seitenstile</a></h2> -<ul> -<li><a name="pagestyle.@everystyle@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everystyle@">@everystyle@</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.pagestyle.@everystyle@">391</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">208</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">391</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">208</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">208</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">208</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">229</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">175</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">206</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">175</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">213</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">198</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">188</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">214</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">196</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">188</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">204</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">220</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.variable.nextfoot">527</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">220</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.variable.nexthead">527</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">231</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">210</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">210</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">209</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">200</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">207</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">200</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="counter">Zähler</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrlttr2.counter.letter">164</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.counter.par">273</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.counter.secnumdepth">114</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#scrjura.counter.sentence">275</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.counter.tocdepth">76</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">170</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">318</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">116</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">320</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">388</a>, <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">79</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="floatstyle">Stile für das float-Paket</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">139</a></li> -<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">139</a></li> +<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">142</a></li> +<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --> <a href="scrguide.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">142</a></li> </ul> <p> <a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf Binary files differindex 2ebb1e6c6f6..3c632855433 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguide.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html index 0f1166ef220..89c2cc1a957 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.html @@ -7,919 +7,932 @@ <h1>Index of the KOMA-Script Guide</h1> <p>This is an index of the elements defined at KOMA-Script. This index is related to the <a href="scrguien.pdf">KOMA-Script guide</a>. To improve the survey this index has serveral functional sections:</p> <ul> -<li><a href="#option">Options</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Commands</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Environments</a></li><li><a href="#length">Lengths</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolengths</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variables</a></li><li><a href="#pagestyle">Page Styles</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Counter</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></li></ul> +<li><a href="#option">Options</a></li><li><a href="#macro">Commands</a></li><li><a href="#environment">Environments</a></li><li><a href="#length">Lengths</a></li><li><a href="#plength">Pseudolengths</a></li><li><a href="#variable">Variables</a></li><li><a href="#counter">Counter</a></li><li><a href="#floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></li></ul> <h2><a name="option">Options</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.BCOR">30</a></li> -<li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.DIV">31</a></li> -<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.abstract">64</a></li> -<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.addrfield">173</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">238</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">238</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">238</a></li> -<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">238</a></li> -<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.appendixprefix">85</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">381</a></li> -<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">218</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">218</a></li> -<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">359</a></li> -<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.backaddress">173</a></li> -<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.bibliography">132</a></li> -<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.captions">114</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.chapteratlists">88</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.chapterentrydots">67</a></li> -<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.chapterprefix">85</a></li> -<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.clausemark">247</a></li> -<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.cleardoublepage">77</a></li> -<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.contract">245</a></li> -<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">353</a></li> -<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.draft">356</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.draft">50</a></li> -<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">160</a></li> -<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrextend.option.extendedfeature">241</a></li> -<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">184</a></li> -<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.firsthead">161</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.fleqn">114</a></li> -<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">157</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fontsize">152</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.fontsize">51</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.footheight">42</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.footinclude">38</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.footlines">42</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.footnotes">79</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.footsepline">188</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.footsepline">72</a></li> -<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">225</a></li> -<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">359</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromalign">161</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromemail">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromfax">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">170</a></li> -<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromphone">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromrule">161</a></li> -<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.fromurl">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.headheight">41</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.headinclude">38</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.headings">86</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.headlines">41</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.headsepline">188</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.headsepline">72</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">225</a></li> -<li><a name="option.hmode"></a><a href="#option.hmode">hmode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.option.hmode">370</a></li> -<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.index">134</a></li> -<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.option.internalonly">263</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">247</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.juratocindent">244</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">244</a></li> -<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.juratotoc">244</a></li> -<li><a name="option.komastyle"></a><a href="#option.komastyle">komastyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.komastyle">217</a></li> -<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.leqno">113</a></li> -<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.listof">127</a></li> -<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.locfield">176</a></li> -<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">218</a></li> -<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">221</a></li> -<li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.mpinclude">40</a></li> -<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.numbers">88</a></li> -<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">177</a></li> -<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsinit">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpsselect">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">352</a></li> -<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.open">84</a></li> -<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.origlongtable">127</a></li> -<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">188</a></li> -<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.pagesize">45</a></li> -<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.paper">44</a></li> -<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.parnumber">248</a></li> -<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.parskip">69</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">228</a></li> -<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.priority">173</a></li> -<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.option.ref">251</a></li> -<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.refline">178</a></li> -<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.sectionentrydots">67</a></li> -<li><a name="option.standardstyle"></a><a href="#option.standardstyle">standardstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.option.standardstyle">217</a></li> -<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.subject">182</a></li> -<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">166</a></li> -<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.titlepage">58</a></li> -<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.toc">65</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.toc">65</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.toc">65</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.option.toc">65</a></li> -<li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.twocolumn">38</a></li> -<li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.twoside">37</a></li> -<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.option.version">29</a></li> -<li><a name="option.visualize"></a><a href="#option.visualize">visualize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.option.visualize">427</a></li> +<li><a name="option.12h"></a><a href="#option.12h">12h</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.option.12h">258</a></li> +<li><a name="option.BCOR"></a><a href="#option.BCOR">BCOR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.BCOR">31</a></li> +<li><a name="option.DIV"></a><a href="#option.DIV">DIV</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.DIV">32</a></li> +<li><a name="option.abstract"></a><a href="#option.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.abstract">68</a></li> +<li><a name="option.addrfield"></a><a href="#option.addrfield">addrfield</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.addrfield">182</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVempty"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVempty">adrFreeIVempty</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVempty">262</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVshow"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVshow">adrFreeIVshow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVshow">262</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVstop"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVstop">adrFreeIVstop</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVstop">262</a></li> +<li><a name="option.adrFreeIVwarn"></a><a href="#option.adrFreeIVwarn">adrFreeIVwarn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.option.adrFreeIVwarn">262</a></li> +<li><a name="option.appendixprefix"></a><a href="#option.appendixprefix">appendixprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.appendixprefix">91</a></li> +<li><a name="option.areasetadvanced"></a><a href="#option.areasetadvanced">areasetadvanced</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.areasetadvanced">438</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autoclearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#option.autoclearnotecolumns">autoclearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.option.autoclearnotecolumns">435</a></li> +<li><a name="option.automark"></a><a href="#option.automark">automark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.automark">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.automark">405</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autooneside"></a><a href="#option.autooneside">autooneside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.autooneside">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autooneside">405</a></li> +<li><a name="option.autoremoveinterfaces"></a><a href="#option.autoremoveinterfaces">autoremoveinterfaces</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.autoremoveinterfaces">412</a></li> +<li><a name="option.backaddress"></a><a href="#option.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.backaddress">182</a></li> +<li><a name="option.bibliography"></a><a href="#option.bibliography">bibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.bibliography">138</a></li> +<li><a name="option.captions"></a><a href="#option.captions">captions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.captions">120</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapteratlists"></a><a href="#option.chapteratlists">chapteratlists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapteratlists">94</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapterentrydots"></a><a href="#option.chapterentrydots">chapterentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterentrydots">72</a></li> +<li><a name="option.chapterprefix"></a><a href="#option.chapterprefix">chapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.chapterprefix">91</a></li> +<li><a name="option.clausemark"></a><a href="#option.clausemark">clausemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.clausemark">292</a></li> +<li><a name="option.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#option.cleardoublepage">cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.cleardoublepage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.cleardoublepage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.cleardoublepage">82</a></li> +<li><a name="option.clines"></a><a href="#option.clines">clines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.clines">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.contract"></a><a href="#option.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.contract">289</a></li> +<li><a name="option.deactivatepagestylelayers"></a><a href="#option.deactivatepagestylelayers">deactivatepagestylelayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.deactivatepagestylelayers">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.draft"></a><a href="#option.draft">draft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.draft">150</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.draft">243</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.draft">267</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.draft">406</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.draft">54</a></li> +<li><a name="option.enlargefirstpage"></a><a href="#option.enlargefirstpage">enlargefirstpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.enlargefirstpage">170</a></li> +<li><a name="option.extendedfeature"></a><a href="#option.extendedfeature">extendedfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.extendedfeature">267</a></li> +<li><a name="option.firstfoot"></a><a href="#option.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firstfoot">195</a></li> +<li><a name="option.firsthead"></a><a href="#option.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.firsthead">171</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fleqn"></a><a href="#option.fleqn">fleqn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fleqn">119</a></li> +<li><a name="option.foldmarks"></a><a href="#option.foldmarks">foldmarks</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.foldmarks">168</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fontsize"></a><a href="#option.fontsize">fontsize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fontsize">162</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.fontsize">268</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.fontsize">55</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footbotline"></a><a href="#option.footbotline">footbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footbotline">249</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footheight"></a><a href="#option.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footheight">43</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footinclude"></a><a href="#option.footinclude">footinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footinclude">40</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footlines"></a><a href="#option.footlines">footlines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.footlines">43</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footnotes"></a><a href="#option.footnotes">footnotes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footnotes">205</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.footnotes">278</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footnotes">85</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footsepline"></a><a href="#option.footsepline">footsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.footsepline">200</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footsepline">249</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.option.footsepline">482</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.footsepline">77</a></li> +<li><a name="option.footwidth"></a><a href="#option.footwidth">footwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.footwidth">249</a></li> +<li><a name="option.forceoverwrite"></a><a href="#option.forceoverwrite">forceoverwrite</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.forceoverwrite">412</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromalign"></a><a href="#option.fromalign">fromalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromalign">171</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromemail"></a><a href="#option.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromemail">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromfax"></a><a href="#option.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromfax">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromlogo"></a><a href="#option.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromlogo">180</a></li> +<li><a name="option.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#option.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.frommobilephone">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromphone"></a><a href="#option.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromphone">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromrule"></a><a href="#option.fromrule">fromrule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromrule">172</a></li> +<li><a name="option.fromurl"></a><a href="#option.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.fromurl">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headheight"></a><a href="#option.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headheight">42</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headinclude"></a><a href="#option.headinclude">headinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headinclude">40</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headings"></a><a href="#option.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headings">91</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headlines"></a><a href="#option.headlines">headlines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.headlines">42</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headsepline"></a><a href="#option.headsepline">headsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.headsepline">200</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headsepline">249</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.option.headsepline">482</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.headsepline">77</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headtopline"></a><a href="#option.headtopline">headtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headtopline">249</a></li> +<li><a name="option.headwidth"></a><a href="#option.headwidth">headwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.headwidth">249</a></li> +<li><a name="option.ilines"></a><a href="#option.ilines">ilines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.ilines">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.index"></a><a href="#option.index">index</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.index">140</a></li> +<li><a name="option.internalonly"></a><a href="#option.internalonly">internalonly</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.option.internalonly">308</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratitlepagebreak"></a><a href="#option.juratitlepagebreak">juratitlepagebreak</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratitlepagebreak">292</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratocindent"></a><a href="#option.juratocindent">juratocindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocindent">289</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratocnumberwidth"></a><a href="#option.juratocnumberwidth">juratocnumberwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratocnumberwidth">289</a></li> +<li><a name="option.juratotoc"></a><a href="#option.juratotoc">juratotoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.juratotoc">288</a></li> +<li><a name="option.leqno"></a><a href="#option.leqno">leqno</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.leqno">119</a></li> +<li><a name="option.listof"></a><a href="#option.listof">listof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.listof">133</a></li> +<li><a name="option.locfield"></a><a href="#option.locfield">locfield</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.locfield">187</a></li> +<li><a name="option.manualmark"></a><a href="#option.manualmark">manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.manualmark">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.manualmark">405</a></li> +<li><a name="option.markcase"></a><a href="#option.markcase">markcase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.markcase">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.markcase">407</a></li> +<li><a name="option.mpinclude"></a><a href="#option.mpinclude">mpinclude</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.mpinclude">41</a></li> +<li><a name="option.numbers"></a><a href="#option.numbers">numbers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.numbers">93</a></li> +<li><a name="option.numericaldate"></a><a href="#option.numericaldate">numericaldate</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.numericaldate">189</a></li> +<li><a name="option.olines"></a><a href="#option.olines">olines</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.olines">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsbackground"></a><a href="#option.onpsbackground">onpsbackground</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsbackground">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsevenpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsevenpage">onpsevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsevenpage">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsfloatpage">onpsfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsfloatpage">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsforeground"></a><a href="#option.onpsforeground">onpsforeground</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsforeground">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsinit"></a><a href="#option.onpsinit">onpsinit</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsinit">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsnonfloatpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsnonfloatpage">onpsnonfloatpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsnonfloatpage">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsoddpage"></a><a href="#option.onpsoddpage">onpsoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoddpage">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsoneside"></a><a href="#option.onpsoneside">onpsoneside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsoneside">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpsselect"></a><a href="#option.onpsselect">onpsselect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpsselect">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.onpstwoside"></a><a href="#option.onpstwoside">onpstwoside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.option.onpstwoside">401</a></li> +<li><a name="option.open"></a><a href="#option.open">open</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.open">90</a></li> +<li><a name="option.origlongtable"></a><a href="#option.origlongtable">origlongtable</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.origlongtable">133</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagenumber"></a><a href="#option.pagenumber">pagenumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.pagenumber">200</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagesize"></a><a href="#option.pagesize">pagesize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.pagesize">47</a></li> +<li><a name="option.pagestyleset"></a><a href="#option.pagestyleset">pagestyleset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.pagestyleset">239</a></li> +<li><a name="option.paper"></a><a href="#option.paper">paper</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.paper">45</a></li> +<li><a name="option.parnumber"></a><a href="#option.parnumber">parnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.parnumber">293</a></li> +<li><a name="option.parskip"></a><a href="#option.parskip">parskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.parskip">197</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.parskip">74</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainfootbotline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootbotline">plainfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootbotline">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainfootsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainfootsepline">plainfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainfootsepline">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainheadsepline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadsepline">plainheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadsepline">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.plainheadtopline"></a><a href="#option.plainheadtopline">plainheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.option.plainheadtopline">251</a></li> +<li><a name="option.priority"></a><a href="#option.priority">priority</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.priority">182</a></li> +<li><a name="option.ref"></a><a href="#option.ref">ref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.option.ref">297</a></li> +<li><a name="option.refline"></a><a href="#option.refline">refline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.refline">189</a></li> +<li><a name="option.sectionentrydots"></a><a href="#option.sectionentrydots">sectionentrydots</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.sectionentrydots">72</a></li> +<li><a name="option.subject"></a><a href="#option.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.subject">193</a></li> +<li><a name="option.symbolicnames"></a><a href="#option.symbolicnames">symbolicnames</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.symbolicnames">176</a></li> +<li><a name="option.titlepage"></a><a href="#option.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.titlepage">271</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.titlepage">62</a></li> +<li><a name="option.toc"></a><a href="#option.toc">toc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.toc">69</a></li> +<li><a name="option.twocolumn"></a><a href="#option.twocolumn">twocolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twocolumn">39</a></li> +<li><a name="option.twoside"></a><a href="#option.twoside">twoside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.twoside">38</a></li> +<li><a name="option.usegeometry"></a><a href="#option.usegeometry">usegeometry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.option.usegeometry">437</a></li> +<li><a name="option.version"></a><a href="#option.version">version</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.option.version">149</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.option.version">266</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.option.version">30</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.option.version">53</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="macro">Commands</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="cmd.@addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@addtoplength">\@addtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@addtoplength">413</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">358</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">363</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">358</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">363</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">358</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">363</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">358</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">363</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@newplength">\@newplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength">413</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.@setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@setplength">\@setplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength">413</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Address">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">384</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">286</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">287</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">289</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">302</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">145</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">145</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">270</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">286</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">289</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">267</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">286</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">286</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">306</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">134</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">386</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Clause">245</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">247</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Comment">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">253</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">373</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">350</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">399</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">326</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">373</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">350</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">399</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">311</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">264</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">264</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">318</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">347</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">270</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">274</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">267</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">265</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">271</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">269</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">268</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">266</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">270</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">273</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">271</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">274</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnkownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnkownKeyValue">\FamilyUnkownKeyValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnkownKeyValue">274</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FirstName">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeI">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeII">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">356</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">361</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">347</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">350</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">85</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">347</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayersAtPageStyle">355</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">386</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">283</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">283</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">29</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">29</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.LastName">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize"></a><a href="#cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">427</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOption"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOption">\LoadLetterOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption">195</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOptions">\LoadLetterOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions">195</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">307</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">356</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Name">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">373</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">350</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">399</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">338</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">373</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">349</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">350</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">399</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">266</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">353</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">290</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">291</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">294</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.Sentence">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">294</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.SubClause">245</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">320</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">321</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">297</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scraddr.cmd.Telephone">236</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">295</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">295</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">293</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">354</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.XdivY">284</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.XmodY">284</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchap*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchap">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addchapmark">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addpart*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addpart">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">203</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">201</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsec*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsec">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addsecmark">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">387</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">303</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">53</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">389</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">301</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">304</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">203</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">200</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.and">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.appendix">131</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.areaset">43</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.author">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.autodot">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">218</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.backmatter">83</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.caption">117</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionabove">117</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionbelow">117</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionformat">124</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.captionof">119</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.cc">150</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapapp">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapter*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapter">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapterformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">401</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">401</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chaptermark">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">75</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">78</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">380</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">381</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.clearpage">78</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrheadfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrheadfoot">\clearscrheadfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrheadfoot">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrheadings"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrheadings">\clearscrheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrheadings">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.clearscrplain"></a><a href="#cmd.clearscrplain">\clearscrplain</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearscrplain">365</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.closing">147</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">348</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.date">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">431</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.dedication">63</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.deffootnote">82</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">82</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">368</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">364</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">307</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftriplepagestyle">\deftriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftriplepagestyle">366</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.deftripstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftripstyle">\deftripstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftripstyle">368</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictum">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumrule">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.documentclass">28</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">303</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.edgesize"></a><a href="#cmd.edgesize">\edgesize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.edgesize">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.encl">150</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.extratitle">60</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.figureformat">125</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.flushbottom">50</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnote">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnotemark">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.footnotetext">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.footref">81</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.frontmatter">83</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">221</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">279</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">336</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">300</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">279</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">279</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">279</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">278</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">140</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">140</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">425</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">140</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">425</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">279</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifstr">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">71</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">310</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">75</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.item"></a><a href="#cmd.item">\item</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.item">105</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumi">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumii">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemi">105</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemii">105</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">105</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">105</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">347</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">345</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">221</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">145</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">187</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.listoffigures">130</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listofname"></a><a href="#cmd.listofname">\listofname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listofname">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.listoftables">130</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">305</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">63</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.mainmatter">83</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">377</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.maketitle">59</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">218</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.marginline">131</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.marginpar">131</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">190</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.markboth">74</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">224</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.markright">190</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">224</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.markright">74</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.minisec">95</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.multfootsep">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">80</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">406</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">368</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">364</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.newtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newtriplepagestyle">\newtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newtriplepagestyle">366</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.numberline">310</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">216</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">215</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.opening">146</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">221</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">76</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">188</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.pagestyle">72</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraph*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraph">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parformat">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parname">254</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.parshortname">254</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.part*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.part">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.partformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">400</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">75</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">368</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">364</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.providetriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providetriplepagestyle">\providetriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providetriplepagestyle">366</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.ps">148</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.publishers">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putC">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putLL">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putLR">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putUL">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.putUR">346</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">50</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">96</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">388</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">103</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedpart">96</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.raggedsection">96</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">192</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">36</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.ref">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refClause">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refL">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refN">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refPar">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParL">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParN">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refParS">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refS">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentence">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">251</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">302</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">423</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">280</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">368</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyle">\renewpairofpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyle">364</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.renewtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">\renewtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">366</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">221</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">362</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">214</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">212</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">211</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">209</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">277</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">276</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">405</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">359</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">359</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">359</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">359</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.section*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.section">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">403</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">403</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionmark">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.sentencename">254</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">254</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">133</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">126</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">125</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">125</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapindent">125</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">126</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">126</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">126</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootbotline"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootbotline">\setfootbotline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setfootbotline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">83</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setfootsepline"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootsepline">\setfootsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setfootsepline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setheadsepline"></a><a href="#cmd.setheadsepline">\setheadsepline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setheadsepline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setheadtopline"></a><a href="#cmd.setheadtopline">\setheadtopline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setheadtopline">226</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">135</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setkomafont">53</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">139</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">139</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">390</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">101</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setshowstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.setshowstyle">\setshowstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setshowstyle">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showISOenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showISOenvelope">\showISOenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showISOenvelope">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showUScheck"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScheck">\showUScheck</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScheck">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showUScommercial"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScommercial">\showUScommercial</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScommercial">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showenvelope">\showenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showenvelope">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.showfields"></a><a href="#cmd.showfields">\showfields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showfields">427</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">383</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subject">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraph">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsection*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsection">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">99</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">94</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsection">89</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">97</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">223</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.subtitle">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">378</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">380</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.tableformat">125</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">67</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.textsubscript">52</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">52</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.thanks">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumi">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumii">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumiii">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.theenumiv">107</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">82</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.thepar">249</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.cmd.thesentence">250</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">145</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">188</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">72</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.title">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.titlehead">61</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">242</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">75</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">321</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">322</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@">\tocbasic@listhead@</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@">323</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">321</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">303</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.typearea">36</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.unitfactor"></a><a href="#cmd.unitfactor">\unitfactor</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.unitfactor">428</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">308</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">63</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.usekomafont">53</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">140</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">424</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">140</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">424</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#typearea.cmd.usepackage">28</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">141</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">57</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">310</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">432</a></li> -<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">432</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@addtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@addtoplength">\@addtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@addtoplength">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@fontsizefilebase"></a><a href="#cmd.@fontsizefilebase">\@fontsizefilebase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@fontsizefilebase">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkboth"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkboth">\@mkboth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkboth">410</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkboth">416</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkdouble"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkdouble">\@mkdouble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkdouble">410</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkdouble">416</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkleft"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkleft">\@mkleft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkleft">410</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkleft">416</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@mkright"></a><a href="#cmd.@mkright">\@mkright</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.@mkright">410</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.@mkright">416</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@newplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@newplength">\@newplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@newplength">468</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@openbib@code"></a><a href="#cmd.@openbib@code">\@openbib@code</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.@openbib@code">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.@setplength"></a><a href="#cmd.@setplength">\@setplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.@setplength">470</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtBeginOfPageStyle">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">\AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersAtEndOfPageStyle">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">\AddLayersToPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyle">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleAfterLayer">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">\AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddLayersToPageStyleBeforeLayer">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">\AddToLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AddToLayerPageStyleOptions">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Address"></a><a href="#cmd.Address">\Address</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Address">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">\AfterAtEndOfClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfClass">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">\AfterAtEndOfPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterAtEndOfPackage">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">\AfterBibliographyPreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AfterBibliographyPreamble">140</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">\AfterCalculatingTypearea*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea*">439</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">\AfterCalculatingTypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterCalculatingTypearea">439</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass!">\AfterClass!</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass!">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass*">\AfterClass*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass*">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass+">\AfterClass+</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass+">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterClass"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterClass">\AfterClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterClass">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterFile"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterFile">\AfterFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterFile">332</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage!"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage!">\AfterPackage!</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage!">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage*">\AfterPackage*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage*">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage+"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage+">\AfterPackage+</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage+">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterPackage"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterPackage">\AfterPackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterPackage">333</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterReadingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">\AfterReadingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.AfterReadingMainAux">335</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">\AfterRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas*">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterRestoreareas">\AfterRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterRestoreareas">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">\AfterSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.AfterSelectAnyPageStyle">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea*"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea*">\AfterSettingArea*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea*">439</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterSettingArea"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterSettingArea">\AfterSettingArea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.AfterSettingArea">439</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterStartingTOC">\AfterStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterStartingTOC">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AfterTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.AfterTOCHead">\AfterTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AfterTOCHead">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.At@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.At@startsection">\At@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.At@startsection">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtAddToTocList"></a><a href="#cmd.AtAddToTocList">\AtAddToTocList</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.AtAddToTocList">348</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtBeginLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtBeginLetter">\AtBeginLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtBeginLetter">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndBibliography">\AtEndBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.AtEndBibliography">140</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndLetter"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndLetter">\AtEndLetter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.AtEndLetter">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">\AtEndOfFamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.AtEndOfFamilyOptions">315</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Before@sect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@sect">\Before@sect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@sect">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Before@ssect"></a><a href="#cmd.Before@ssect">\Before@ssect</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.Before@ssect">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClass"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClass">\BeforeClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClass">332</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">\BeforeClosingMainAux</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeClosingMainAux">335</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">\BeforeFamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.BeforeFamilyProcessOptions">312</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeFile"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeFile">\BeforeFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforeFile">332</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforePackage">\BeforePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.BeforePackage">332</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">\BeforeRestoreareas*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas*">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeRestoreareas"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">\BeforeRestoreareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.BeforeRestoreareas">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">\BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.BeforeSelectAnyPageStyle">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeStartingTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">\BeforeStartingTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeStartingTOC">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BeforeTOCHead"></a><a href="#cmd.BeforeTOCHead">\BeforeTOCHead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.BeforeTOCHead">353</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.BreakBibliography"></a><a href="#cmd.BreakBibliography">\BreakBibliography</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.BreakBibliography">139</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.CenturyPart"></a><a href="#cmd.CenturyPart">\CenturyPart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.CenturyPart">252</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.ClassName">\ClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ClassName">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Clause"></a><a href="#cmd.Clause">\Clause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clause">290</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Clauseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.Clauseformat">\Clauseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Clauseformat">291</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">\CloneTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.CloneTOCEntryStyle">366</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Comment"></a><a href="#cmd.Comment">\Comment</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Comment">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayName"></a><a href="#cmd.DayName">\DayName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayName">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayNameByNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNameByNumber">\DayNameByNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNameByNumber">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.DayNumber">\DayNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DayNumber">252</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DecadePart"></a><a href="#cmd.DecadePart">\DecadePart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.DecadePart">252</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareLayer">\DeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareLayer">386</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">\DeclareNewJuraEnvironment</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.DeclareNewJuraEnvironment">298</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewLayer">\DeclareNewLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewLayer">386</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">\DeclareNewNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNewNoteColumn">428</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">\DeclareNewPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleAlias">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">\DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareNewPageStyleByLayers">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">\DeclareNewSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommand">446</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">\DeclareNewSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareNewSectionCommands">454</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNewTOC"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNewTOC">\DeclareNewTOC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareNewTOC">373</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">\DeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.DeclareNoteColumn">428</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">\DeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleAlias">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">\DeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclarePageStyleByLayers">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">\DeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommand">446</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">\DeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.DeclareSectionCommands">454</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">\DeclareSectionNumberDepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DeclareSectionNumberDepth">384</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">\DeclareTOCEntryStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCEntryStyle">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry"></a><a href="#cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">\DeclareTOCStyleEntry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DeclareTOCStyleEntry">357</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamily"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamily">\DefineFamily</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamily">309</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyKey">\DefineFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyKey">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineFamilyMember"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineFamilyMember">\DefineFamilyMember</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.DefineFamilyMember">309</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">\DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryBooleanOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">\DefineTOCEntryCommandOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryCommandOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">\DefineTOCEntryIfOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryIfOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">\DefineTOCEntryLengthOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryLengthOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">\DefineTOCEntryNumberOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryNumberOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption"></a><a href="#cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">\DefineTOCEntryOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.DefineTOCEntryOption">365</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyLayer">\DestroyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyLayer">395</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">\DestroyPageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyPageStyleAlias">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">\DestroyRealLayerPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.DestroyRealLayerPageStyle">404</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyBoolKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyBoolKey">\FamilyBoolKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyBoolKey">315</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterKey">\FamilyCounterKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterKey">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">\FamilyCounterMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyCounterMacroKey">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyElseValues"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyElseValues">\FamilyElseValues</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyElseValues">320</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">\FamilyExecuteOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyExecuteOptions">313</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyState"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyState">\FamilyKeyState</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyState">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">\FamilyKeyStateNeedValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateNeedValue">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">\FamilyKeyStateProcessed</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateProcessed">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">\FamilyKeyStateUnknown</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknown">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">\FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyKeyStateUnknownValue">310</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthKey">\FamilyLengthKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthKey">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">\FamilyLengthMacroKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyLengthMacroKey">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyNumericalKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">\FamilyNumericalKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyNumericalKey">316</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOption"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOption">\FamilyOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOption">314</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyOptions">\FamilyOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyOptions">313</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyProcessOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">\FamilyProcessOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyProcessOptions">311</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetBool"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetBool">\FamilySetBool</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetBool">315</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounter"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounter">\FamilySetCounter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounter">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">\FamilySetCounterMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetCounterMacro">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLength"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLength">\FamilySetLength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLength">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">\FamilySetLengthMacro</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetLengthMacro">318</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilySetNumerical"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilySetNumerical">\FamilySetNumerical</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilySetNumerical">316</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyStringKey"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyStringKey">\FamilyStringKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyStringKey">319</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue"></a><a href="#cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">\FamilyUnknownKeyValue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.FamilyUnknownKeyValue">319</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FirstName"></a><a href="#cmd.FirstName">\FirstName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FirstName">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle*">401</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">\ForEachLayerOfPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ForEachLayerOfPageStyle">401</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeI"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeI">\FreeI</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeI">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeII">\FreeII</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeII">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeIII"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIII">\FreeIII</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIII">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.FreeIV"></a><a href="#cmd.FreeIV">\FreeIV</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.FreeIV">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GenericMarkFormat"></a><a href="#cmd.GenericMarkFormat">\GenericMarkFormat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.GenericMarkFormat">413</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GetLayerContents"></a><a href="#cmd.GetLayerContents">\GetLayerContents</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetLayerContents">395</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.GetRealPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.GetRealPageStyle">\GetRealPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.GetRealPageStyle">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISODayName"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayName">\ISODayName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayName">253</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISODayNumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ISODayNumber">\ISODayNumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISODayNumber">252</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ISOToday"></a><a href="#cmd.ISOToday">\ISOToday</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.ISOToday">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">\IfChapterUsesPrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfChapterUsesPrefixLine">91</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfExistskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.IfExistskomafont">\IfExistskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.IfExistskomafont">445</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">\IfLayerAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerAtPageStyle">404</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerExists">\IfLayerExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerExists">395</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">\IfLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayerPageStyleExists">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">\IfLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfLayersAtPageStyle">404</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists"></a><a href="#cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">\IfRealLayerPageStyleExists</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfRealLayerPageStyleExists">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">\IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.IfSomeLayerAtPageStyle">404</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IfUsePrefixLine"></a><a href="#cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">\IfUsePrefixLine</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.IfUsePrefixLine">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.InputAddressFile"></a><a href="#cmd.InputAddressFile">\InputAddressFile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.InputAddressFile">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.IsoToday"></a><a href="#cmd.IsoToday">\IsoToday</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.IsoToday">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAClassName"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAClassName">\KOMAClassName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.KOMAClassName">441</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScript"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScript">\KOMAScript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScript">328</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAScriptVersion"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">\KOMAScriptVersion</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.KOMAScriptVersion">328</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoption"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoption">\KOMAoption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoption">149</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoption">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoption">265</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoption">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoption">30</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoption">379</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoption">383</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoption">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoption">52</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.KOMAoptions"></a><a href="#cmd.KOMAoptions">\KOMAoptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.KOMAoptions">149</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.KOMAoptions">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.KOMAoptions">265</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.KOMAoptions">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.KOMAoptions">30</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.KOMAoptions">379</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.KOMAoptions">383</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.KOMAoptions">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.KOMAoptions">52</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastName"></a><a href="#cmd.LastName">\LastName</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.LastName">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">\LastTOCLevelWasHigher</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasHigher">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">\LastTOCLevelWasLower</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasLower">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame"></a><a href="#cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">\LastTOCLevelWasSame</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.LastTOCLevelWasSame">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LenToUnit"></a><a href="#cmd.LenToUnit">\LenToUnit</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.LenToUnit">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize"></a><a href="#cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">\LetterOptionNeedsPapersize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.LetterOptionNeedsPapersize">483</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOption"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOption">\LoadLetterOption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOption">215</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.LoadLetterOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.LoadLetterOptions">\LoadLetterOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.LoadLetterOptions">215</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.MakeMarkcase"></a><a href="#cmd.MakeMarkcase">\MakeMarkcase</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.MakeMarkcase">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.MakeMarkcase">353</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.MakeMarkcase">406</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayer">\ModifyLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayer">386</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions"></a><a href="#cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">\ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ModifyLayerPageStyleOptions">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Name"></a><a href="#cmd.Name">\Name</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Name">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">\PreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading*">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">\PreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.PreventPackageFromLoading">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideLayer">\ProvideLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvideLayer">386</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">\ProvideNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.ProvideNoteColumn">428</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">\ProvidePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleAlias">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">\ProvidePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.ProvidePageStyleByLayers">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">\ProvideSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommand">446</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ProvideSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">\ProvideSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.ProvideSectionCommands">454</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareLayer"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareLayer">\RedeclareLayer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclareLayer">386</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">\RedeclareNoteColumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.RedeclareNoteColumn">428</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">\RedeclarePageStyleAlias</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleAlias">397</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">\RedeclarePageStyleByLayers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RedeclarePageStyleByLayers">398</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">\RedeclareSectionCommand</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommand">446</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands"></a><a href="#cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">\RedeclareSectionCommands</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.RedeclareSectionCommands">454</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RelaxFamilyKey"></a><a href="#cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">\RelaxFamilyKey</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.RelaxFamilyKey">311</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">\RemoveLayersFromPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.RemoveLayersFromPageStyle">402</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceClass">\ReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceClass">337</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplaceInput">\ReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplaceInput">337</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.ReplacePackage">\ReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ReplacePackage">337</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">\ResetPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.ResetPreventPackageFromLoading">340</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.SecDef"></a><a href="#cmd.SecDef">\SecDef</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.SecDef">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Sentence"></a><a href="#cmd.Sentence">\Sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.Sentence">294</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">\StorePreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.StorePreventPackageFromLoading">340</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.SubClause"></a><a href="#cmd.SubClause">\SubClause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.SubClause">290</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleInitCode">366</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">\TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCEntryStyleStartInitCode">366</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">\TOCLineLeaderFill</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.TOCLineLeaderFill">367</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.TOCclone"></a><a href="#cmd.TOCclone">\TOCclone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrwfile.cmd.TOCclone">343</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.Telephone"></a><a href="#cmd.Telephone">\Telephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.Telephone">260</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading*">341</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading"></a><a href="#cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">\UnPreventPackageFromLoading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnPreventPackageFromLoading">341</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceClass"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceClass">\UnReplaceClass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceClass">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplaceInput"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplaceInput">\UnReplaceInput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplaceInput">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnReplacePackage"></a><a href="#cmd.UnReplacePackage">\UnReplacePackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlfile.cmd.UnReplacePackage">339</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle"></a><a href="#cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">\UnifyLayersAtPageStyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.UnifyLayersAtPageStyle">403</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.XdivY"></a><a href="#cmd.XdivY">\XdivY</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XdivY">329</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.XmodY"></a><a href="#cmd.XmodY">\XmodY</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.XmodY">329</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.activateareas"></a><a href="#cmd.activateareas">\activateareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.activateareas">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchap*"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap*">\addchap*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap*">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchap"></a><a href="#cmd.addchap">\addchap</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchap">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchapmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addchapmark">\addchapmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addchapmark">105</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addchaptertocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addchaptertocentry">\addchaptertocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addchaptertocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addcontentslinetoeachtocfile">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparagraphtocentry">\addparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparagraphtocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addpart*"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart*">\addpart*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart*">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addpart"></a><a href="#cmd.addpart">\addpart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addpart">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addparttocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addparttocentry">\addparttocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addparttocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.addrchar">\addrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrchar">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrchar">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addrentry">\addrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addrentry">221</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.addrentry">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsec*"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec*">\addsec*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec*">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsec"></a><a href="#cmd.addsec">\addsec</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsec">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsecmark"></a><a href="#cmd.addsecmark">\addsecmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addsecmark">105</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsectiontocentry">\addsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsectiontocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">\addsubparagraphtocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubparagraphtocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsectiontocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry"></a><a href="#cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">\addsubsubsectiontocentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addsubsubsectiontocentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtocentrydefault"></a><a href="#cmd.addtocentrydefault">\addtocentrydefault</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtocentrydefault">442</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoeachtocfile">\addtoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtoeachtocfile">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafont">\addtokomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtokomafont">164</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.addtokomafont">228</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.addtokomafont">269</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.addtokomafont">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.addtokomafont">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.addtokomafont">57</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">\addtokomafontgobblelist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontgobblelist">444</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">\addtokomafontrelaxlist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.addtokomafontrelaxlist">444</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtolengthplength"></a><a href="#cmd.addtolengthplength">\addtolengthplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.addtolengthplength">147</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtoreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.addtoreffields">\addtoreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.addtoreffields">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addtotoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.addtotoclist">\addtotoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addtotoclist">347</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentsline">\addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentsline">350</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">\addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.addxcontentslinetoeachtocfile">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.adrchar"></a><a href="#cmd.adrchar">\adrchar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrchar">223</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrchar">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.adrentry"></a><a href="#cmd.adrentry">\adrentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.adrentry">220</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scraddr.cmd.adrentry">259</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.aliaskomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.aliaskomafont">\aliaskomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.aliaskomafont">444</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.and"></a><a href="#cmd.and">\and</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.and">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.and">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.appendix"></a><a href="#cmd.appendix">\appendix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.appendix">137</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.appendixmore"></a><a href="#cmd.appendixmore">\appendixmore</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.appendixmore">461</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.areaset"></a><a href="#cmd.areaset">\areaset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.areaset">438</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.areaset">44</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.author"></a><a href="#cmd.author">\author</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.author">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.author">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.autodot"></a><a href="#cmd.autodot">\autodot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.autodot">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.automark*"></a><a href="#cmd.automark*">\automark*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark*">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark*">405</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.automark"></a><a href="#cmd.automark">\automark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.automark">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.automark">405</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.backmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.backmatter">\backmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.backmatter">89</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bankname"></a><a href="#cmd.bankname">\bankname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.bankname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bib@beginhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@beginhook">\bib@beginhook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@beginhook">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.bib@endhook"></a><a href="#cmd.bib@endhook">\bib@endhook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.bib@endhook">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.caption"></a><a href="#cmd.caption">\caption</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.caption">123</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionabove"></a><a href="#cmd.captionabove">\captionabove</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionabove">123</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionaboveof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionaboveof">\captionaboveof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionaboveof">125</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionbelow"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelow">\captionbelow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelow">123</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionbelowof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionbelowof">\captionbelowof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionbelowof">125</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.captionformat">\captionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionformat">130</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionof"></a><a href="#cmd.captionof">\captionof</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.captionof">125</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUKenglish">\captionsUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUKenglish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsUSenglish">\captionsUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsUSenglish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsamerican">\captionsamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsamerican">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsaustrian">\captionsaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsaustrian">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsbritish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsbritish">\captionsbritish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsbritish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionscroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionscroatian">\captionscroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionscroatian">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsdutch"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsdutch">\captionsdutch</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsdutch">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsenglish">\captionsenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsenglish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsfinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfinnish">\captionsfinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfinnish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsfrench"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsfrench">\captionsfrench</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsfrench">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsgerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsgerman">\captionsgerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsgerman">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsitalian">\captionsitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsitalian">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnaustrian">\captionsnaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnaustrian">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsngerman"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsngerman">\captionsngerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsngerman">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsnorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsnorsk">\captionsnorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsnorsk">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsspanish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsspanish">\captionsspanish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsspanish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.captionsswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.captionsswedish">\captionsswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.captionsswedish">487</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cc"></a><a href="#cmd.cc">\cc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cc">159</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ccname"></a><a href="#cmd.ccname">\ccname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ccname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot*">\cefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cefoot">\cefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cefoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead*">\cehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cehead"></a><a href="#cmd.cehead">\cehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cehead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cfoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot*">\cfoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cfoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cfoot">\cfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cfoot">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.changefontsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.changefontsizes">\changefontsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.changefontsizes">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapapp"></a><a href="#cmd.chapapp">\chapapp</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapapp">104</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapappifchapterprefix"></a><a href="#cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">\chapappifchapterprefix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapappifchapterprefix">104</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapter*"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter*">\chapter*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.chapter">\chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapter">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterformat">\chapterformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadendvskip">\chapterheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadendvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">\chapterheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadmidvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">\chapterheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterheadstartvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlinesformat">\chapterlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlinesformat">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">\chapterlineswithprefixformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.chapterlineswithprefixformat">457</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chaptermark"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermark">\chaptermark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermark">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chaptermarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.chaptermarkformat">\chaptermarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chaptermarkformat">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chaptermarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.chaptermarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapternumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.chapternumdepth">\chapternumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapternumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chapterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.chapterpagestyle">\chapterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.chapterpagestyle">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chead*"></a><a href="#cmd.chead*">\chead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.chead"></a><a href="#cmd.chead">\chead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.chead">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">\cleardoubleemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleemptypage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">\cleardoubleevenemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenemptypage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">\cleardoubleevenpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenpageusingstyle">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">\cleardoubleevenplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenplainpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">\cleardoubleevenstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleevenstandardpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">\cleardoubleoddemptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddemptypage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">\cleardoubleoddpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">\cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddpageusingstyle">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">\cleardoubleoddplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddplainpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">\cleardoubleoddstandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleoddstandardpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepage">\cleardoublepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">\cleardoublepageusingstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublepageusingstyle">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoubleplainpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">\cleardoubleplainpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoubleplainpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cleardoublestandardpage"></a><a href="#cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">\cleardoublestandardpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.cleardoublestandardpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">\clearmainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearmainofpairofpagestyles">418</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumn">\clearnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumn">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.clearnotecolumns">\clearnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.clearnotecolumns">435</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearpage"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpage">\clearpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.clearpage">204</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.clearpage">276</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.clearpage">83</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">\clearpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearpairofpagestyles">418</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">\clearplainofpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.clearplainofpairofpagestyles">418</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.closing"></a><a href="#cmd.closing">\closing</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.closing">156</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot*">\cofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.cofoot">\cofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cofoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead*">\cohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.cohead"></a><a href="#cmd.cohead">\cohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.cohead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.currentpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.currentpagestyle">\currentpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.currentpagestyle">396</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.customername"></a><a href="#cmd.customername">\customername</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.customername">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.date"></a><a href="#cmd.date">\date</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.date">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.date">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateUKenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUKenglish">\dateUKenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUKenglish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateUSenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateUSenglish">\dateUSenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateUSenglish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateamerican"></a><a href="#cmd.dateamerican">\dateamerican</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateamerican">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateaustrian">\dateaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateaustrian">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datebritish"></a><a href="#cmd.datebritish">\datebritish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datebritish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datecroatian"></a><a href="#cmd.datecroatian">\datecroatian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datecroatian">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datedutch"></a><a href="#cmd.datedutch">\datedutch</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datedutch">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateenglish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateenglish">\dateenglish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateenglish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datefinnish"></a><a href="#cmd.datefinnish">\datefinnish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefinnish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datefrench"></a><a href="#cmd.datefrench">\datefrench</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datefrench">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dategerman"></a><a href="#cmd.dategerman">\dategerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dategerman">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateitalian"></a><a href="#cmd.dateitalian">\dateitalian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateitalian">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datename"></a><a href="#cmd.datename">\datename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datename">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenaustrian"></a><a href="#cmd.datenaustrian">\datenaustrian</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenaustrian">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datengerman"></a><a href="#cmd.datengerman">\datengerman</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datengerman">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datenorsk"></a><a href="#cmd.datenorsk">\datenorsk</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datenorsk">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.datespanish"></a><a href="#cmd.datespanish">\datespanish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.datespanish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dateswedish"></a><a href="#cmd.dateswedish">\dateswedish</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.dateswedish">488</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dedication"></a><a href="#cmd.dedication">\dedication</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dedication">274</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dedication">67</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defaultreffields"></a><a href="#cmd.defaultreffields">\defaultreffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.defaultreffields">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname*">\defcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname*">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.defcaptionname">\defcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.defcaptionname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deffootnote"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnote">\deffootnote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnote">207</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnote">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnote">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deffootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.deffootnotemark">\deffootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.deffootnotemark">207</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.deffootnotemark">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.deffootnotemark">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.defpagestyle">\defpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpagestyle">421</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.defpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.defpairofpagestyles">\defpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.defpairofpagestyles">417</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deftocheading"></a><a href="#cmd.deftocheading">\deftocheading</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.deftocheading">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.deftriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.deftriplepagestyle">\deftriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.deftriplepagestyle">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictum"></a><a href="#cmd.dictum">\dictum</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictum">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictum">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumauthorformat"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumauthorformat">\dictumauthorformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumauthorformat">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumauthorformat">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumrule"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumrule">\dictumrule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumrule">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumrule">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.dictumwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.dictumwidth">\dictumwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.dictumwidth">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.dictumwidth">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.documentclass"></a><a href="#cmd.documentclass">\documentclass</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.documentclass">148</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.documentclass">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.documentclass">265</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.documentclass">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.documentclass">29</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.documentclass">379</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.documentclass">383</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.documentclass">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.documentclass">52</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.doforeachtocfile"></a><a href="#cmd.doforeachtocfile">\doforeachtocfile</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.doforeachtocfile">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.edgesize"></a><a href="#cmd.edgesize">\edgesize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.edgesize">484</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ellipsispar"></a><a href="#cmd.ellipsispar">\ellipsispar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ellipsispar">293</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.emailname"></a><a href="#cmd.emailname">\emailname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.emailname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.encl"></a><a href="#cmd.encl">\encl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.encl">159</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.enclname"></a><a href="#cmd.enclname">\enclname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.enclname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.extratitle"></a><a href="#cmd.extratitle">\extratitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.extratitle">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.extratitle">64</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.faxname"></a><a href="#cmd.faxname">\faxname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.faxname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.figureformat"></a><a href="#cmd.figureformat">\figureformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.figureformat">130</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.flushbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.flushbottom">\flushbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.flushbottom">54</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnote"></a><a href="#cmd.footnote">\footnote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnote">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnote">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnote">85</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotemark">\footnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotemark">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotemark">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotemark">85</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footnotetext"></a><a href="#cmd.footnotetext">\footnotetext</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footnotetext">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footnotetext">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footnotetext">85</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.footref"></a><a href="#cmd.footref">\footref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.footref">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.footref">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.footref">86</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.frontmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.frontmatter">\frontmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.frontmatter">89</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headfromname"></a><a href="#cmd.headfromname">\headfromname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headfromname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headmark"></a><a href="#cmd.headmark">\headmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.headmark">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.headmark">407</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.headtoname"></a><a href="#cmd.headtoname">\headtoname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.headtoname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@atdocument"></a><a href="#cmd.if@atdocument">\if@atdocument</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.if@atdocument">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@chapter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@chapter">\if@chapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@chapter">384</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.if@mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.if@mainmatter">\if@mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.if@mainmatter">384</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.ifVTeX">\ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifVTeX">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifattoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.ifattoclist">\ifattoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.ifattoclist">346</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdimen">\ifdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdimen">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifdvioutput">\ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifdvioutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifiscount"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscount">\ifiscount</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscount">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifiscounter"></a><a href="#cmd.ifiscounter">\ifiscounter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifiscounter">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimen"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimen">\ifisdimen</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimen">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimension"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimension">\ifisdimension</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimension">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisdimexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisdimexpr">\ifisdimexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisdimexpr">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisglue"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglue">\ifisglue</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglue">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisglueexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisglueexpr">\ifisglueexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisglueexpr">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisinteger"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisinteger">\ifisinteger</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisinteger">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisnumexpr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisnumexpr">\ifisnumexpr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisnumexpr">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifisskip"></a><a href="#cmd.ifisskip">\ifisskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifisskip">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavar">\ifkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavar">146</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty*">\ifkomavarempty*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">147</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty*">481</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifkomavarempty"></a><a href="#cmd.ifkomavarempty">\ifkomavarempty</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifkomavarempty">147</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.ifkomavarempty">481</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnotundefined"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnotundefined">\ifnotundefined</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnotundefined">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumber">\ifnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifnumber">324</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifnumbered">\ifnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifnumbered">107</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot*">\ifoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ifoot">\ifoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ifoot">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdfoutput">\ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdfoutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpdftex">\ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpdftex">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.ifpsoutput">\ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifpsoutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifstr"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstr">\ifstr</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstr">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifstrstart"></a><a href="#cmd.ifstrstart">\ifstrstart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifstrstart">323</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifthispageodd"></a><a href="#cmd.ifthispageodd">\ifthispageodd</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ifthispageodd">198</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.ifthispageodd">274</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifthispageodd">76</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.iftocfeature"></a><a href="#cmd.iftocfeature">\iftocfeature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.iftocfeature">356</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">\ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.ifundefinedorrelax">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ifunnumbered"></a><a href="#cmd.ifunnumbered">\ifunnumbered</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.ifunnumbered">107</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ihead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead*">\ihead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ihead"></a><a href="#cmd.ihead">\ihead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ihead">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.indexpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.indexpagestyle">\indexpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.indexpagestyle">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.invoicename"></a><a href="#cmd.invoicename">\invoicename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.invoicename">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumi">\labelenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumi">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumi">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumii">\labelenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumii">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumii">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiii">\labelenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiii">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiii">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelenumiv">\labelenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelenumiv">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelenumiv">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemi"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemi">\labelitemi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemi">111</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemi">208</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemii">\labelitemii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemii">111</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemii">208</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiii"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiii">\labelitemiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiii">111</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiii">208</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.labelitemiv"></a><a href="#cmd.labelitemiv">\labelitemiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.labelitemiv">111</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.labelitemiv">208</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layercontentsmeasure"></a><a href="#cmd.layercontentsmeasure">\layercontentsmeasure</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layercontentsmeasure">396</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerhalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layerhalign">\layerhalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerhalign">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerheight"></a><a href="#cmd.layerheight">\layerheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerheight">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layervalign"></a><a href="#cmd.layervalign">\layervalign</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layervalign">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.layerwidth">\layerwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerwidth">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layerxoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layerxoffset">\layerxoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layerxoffset">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.layeryoffset"></a><a href="#cmd.layeryoffset">\layeryoffset</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.layeryoffset">393</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot*">\lefoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lefoot">\lefoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lefoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftbotmark">\leftbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftbotmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftbotmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftfirstmark">\leftfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftfirstmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.leftfirstmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.leftmark"></a><a href="#cmd.leftmark">\leftmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.leftmark">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.leftmark">407</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lefttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.lefttopmark">\lefttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.lefttopmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.lefttopmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead*">\lehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lehead"></a><a href="#cmd.lehead">\lehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lehead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterlastpage"></a><a href="#cmd.letterlastpage">\letterlastpage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterlastpage">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterpagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagemark">\letterpagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.letterpagemark">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.letterpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.letterpagestyle">\letterpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.letterpagestyle">199</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listof/extension/name"></a><a href="#cmd.listof/extension/name">\listof/extension/name</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listof/extension/name">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listofeachtoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listofeachtoc">\listofeachtoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listofeachtoc">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoffigures"></a><a href="#cmd.listoffigures">\listoffigures</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoffigures">136</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftables"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftables">\listoftables</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.listoftables">136</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc*"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc*">\listoftoc*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc*">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.listoftoc"></a><a href="#cmd.listoftoc">\listoftoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.listoftoc">351</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot*">\lofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.lofoot">\lofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lofoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead*">\lohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lohead"></a><a href="#cmd.lohead">\lohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.lohead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.lowertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.lowertitleback">\lowertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.lowertitleback">274</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.lowertitleback">67</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.mainmatter"></a><a href="#cmd.mainmatter">\mainmatter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.mainmatter">89</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.makenote"></a><a href="#cmd.makenote">\makenote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.makenote">432</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.maketitle"></a><a href="#cmd.maketitle">\maketitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.maketitle">271</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.maketitle">63</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.manualmark"></a><a href="#cmd.manualmark">\manualmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.manualmark">241</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.manualmark">405</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.marginline"></a><a href="#cmd.marginline">\marginline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginline">136</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginline">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginline">285</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.marginpar"></a><a href="#cmd.marginpar">\marginpar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.marginpar">136</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.marginpar">212</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.marginpar">285</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markboth"></a><a href="#cmd.markboth">\markboth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markboth">202</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markboth">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markboth">408</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markboth">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markleft"></a><a href="#cmd.markleft">\markleft</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markleft">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markleft">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.markright"></a><a href="#cmd.markright">\markright</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.markright">202</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.markright">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.markright">408</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.markright">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.minisec"></a><a href="#cmd.minisec">\minisec</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.minisec">100</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.mobilephonename"></a><a href="#cmd.mobilephonename">\mobilephonename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.mobilephonename">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.multfootsep"></a><a href="#cmd.multfootsep">\multfootsep</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multfootsep">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multfootsep">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multfootsep">85</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator"></a><a href="#cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">\multiplefootnoteseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">206</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">279</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.multiplefootnoteseparator">85</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.myrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.myrefname">\myrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.myrefname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.nameday"></a><a href="#cmd.nameday">\nameday</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.nameday">255</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newbibstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newbibstyle">\newbibstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newbibstyle">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newblock"></a><a href="#cmd.newblock">\newblock</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newblock">462</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname*">\newcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname*">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.newcaptionname">\newcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.newcaptionname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newdaylanguage"></a><a href="#cmd.newdaylanguage">\newdaylanguage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.newdaylanguage">255</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomafont">\newkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.newkomafont">444</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar*">\newkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar*">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.newkomavar">\newkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.newkomavar">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newpagestyle">\newpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpagestyle">421</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.newpairofpagestyles">\newpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newpairofpagestyles">417</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.newtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.newtriplepagestyle">\newtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.newtriplepagestyle">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.nonumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.nonumberline">\nonumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.nonumberline">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.numberline"></a><a href="#cmd.numberline">\numberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.numberline">357</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot*">\ofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.ofoot">\ofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ofoot">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead*">\ohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead*">239</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ohead"></a><a href="#cmd.ohead">\ohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.ohead">238</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.opening"></a><a href="#cmd.opening">\opening</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.opening">155</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.othersectionlevelsformat"></a><a href="#cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">\othersectionlevelsformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.othersectionlevelsformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagemark"></a><a href="#cmd.pagemark">\pagemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.pagemark">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.pagemark">407</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagemark">482</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagename"></a><a href="#cmd.pagename">\pagename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.pagename">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagenumbering"></a><a href="#cmd.pagenumbering">\pagenumbering</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagenumbering">81</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.pagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.pagestyle">\pagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.pagestyle">200</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.pagestyle">77</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph*">\paragraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraph"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraph">\paragraph</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraph">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphformat">\paragraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmark">\paragraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphmarkformat">\paragraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.paragraphmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.paragraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.paragraphnumdepth">\paragraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.paragraphnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parellipsis"></a><a href="#cmd.parellipsis">\parellipsis</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parellipsis">293</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parformat"></a><a href="#cmd.parformat">\parformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformat">293</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parformatseparation"></a><a href="#cmd.parformatseparation">\parformatseparation</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parformatseparation">293</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parname"></a><a href="#cmd.parname">\parname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parname">299</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.parshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.parshortname">\parshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.parshortname">299</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.part*"></a><a href="#cmd.part*">\part*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.part"></a><a href="#cmd.part">\part</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.part">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partformat">\partformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheademptypage"></a><a href="#cmd.partheademptypage">\partheademptypage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheademptypage">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadendvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadendvskip">\partheadendvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadendvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadmidvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadmidvskip">\partheadmidvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadmidvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partheadstartvskip"></a><a href="#cmd.partheadstartvskip">\partheadstartvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.partheadstartvskip">455</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partmark"></a><a href="#cmd.partmark">\partmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.partmarkformat">\partmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.partmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.partmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.partnumdepth">\partnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.partpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.partpagestyle">\partpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.partpagestyle">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.phonename"></a><a href="#cmd.phonename">\phonename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.phonename">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname*">\providecaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname*">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providecaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.providecaptionname">\providecaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.providecaptionname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providepagestyle">\providepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepagestyle">421</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providepairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.providepairofpagestyles">\providepairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providepairofpagestyles">417</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.providetriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.providetriplepagestyle">\providetriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.providetriplepagestyle">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ps"></a><a href="#cmd.ps">\ps</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.ps">157</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.publishers"></a><a href="#cmd.publishers">\publishers</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.publishers">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.publishers">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putC"></a><a href="#cmd.putC">\putC</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putC">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putLL"></a><a href="#cmd.putLL">\putLL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLL">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putLR"></a><a href="#cmd.putLR">\putLR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putLR">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putUL"></a><a href="#cmd.putUL">\putUL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUL">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.putUR"></a><a href="#cmd.putUR">\putUR</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.putUR">394</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedbottom"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedbottom">\raggedbottom</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedbottom">54</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapter"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapter">\raggedchapter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedchapter">102</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedchapterentry"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedchapterentry">\raggedchapterentry</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.raggedchapterentry">443</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictum"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictum">\raggeddictum</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictum">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictum">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumauthor"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumauthor">\raggeddictumauthor</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumauthor">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggeddictumtext"></a><a href="#cmd.raggeddictumtext">\raggeddictumtext</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggeddictumtext">109</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.raggeddictumtext">283</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedpart"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedpart">\raggedpart</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedpart">102</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedsection"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsection">\raggedsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.raggedsection">102</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.raggedsignature"></a><a href="#cmd.raggedsignature">\raggedsignature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.raggedsignature">212</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.recalctypearea"></a><a href="#cmd.recalctypearea">\recalctypearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.recalctypearea">37</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.ref"></a><a href="#cmd.ref">\ref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.ref">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refClause"></a><a href="#cmd.refClause">\refClause</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClause">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refClauseN"></a><a href="#cmd.refClauseN">\refClauseN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refClauseN">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refL"></a><a href="#cmd.refL">\refL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refL">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refN"></a><a href="#cmd.refN">\refN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refN">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refPar"></a><a href="#cmd.refPar">\refPar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refPar">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParL"></a><a href="#cmd.refParL">\refParL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParL">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParN"></a><a href="#cmd.refParN">\refParN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParN">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refParS"></a><a href="#cmd.refParS">\refParS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refParS">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refS"></a><a href="#cmd.refS">\refS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refS">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentence"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentence">\refSentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentence">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceL"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceL">\refSentenceL</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceL">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceN"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceN">\refSentenceN</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceN">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refSentenceS"></a><a href="#cmd.refSentenceS">\refSentenceS</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.refSentenceS">295</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot*">\refoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.refoot"></a><a href="#cmd.refoot">\refoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.refoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rehead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead*">\rehead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rehead"></a><a href="#cmd.rehead">\rehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rehead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.removefromtoclist"></a><a href="#cmd.removefromtoclist">\removefromtoclist</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.removefromtoclist">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.removereffields"></a><a href="#cmd.removereffields">\removereffields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.removereffields">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname*"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname*">\renewcaptionname*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname*">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewcaptionname"></a><a href="#cmd.renewcaptionname">\renewcaptionname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.renewcaptionname">325</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewpagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpagestyle">\renewpagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpagestyle">421</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewpairofpagestyles"></a><a href="#cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">\renewpairofpagestyles</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewpairofpagestyles">417</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.renewtriplepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">\renewtriplepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.renewtriplepagestyle">419</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightbotmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightbotmark">\rightbotmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightbotmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightbotmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightfirstmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightfirstmark">\rightfirstmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightfirstmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.rightfirstmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rightmark"></a><a href="#cmd.rightmark">\rightmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rightmark">244</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.rightmark">407</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.righttopmark"></a><a href="#cmd.righttopmark">\righttopmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.righttopmark">409</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage-experts.cmd.righttopmark">415</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rofoot*"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot*">\rofoot*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot*">237</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rofoot"></a><a href="#cmd.rofoot">\rofoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rofoot">234</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rohead*"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead*">\rohead*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead*">233</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.rohead"></a><a href="#cmd.rohead">\rohead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.rohead">231</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifVTeX"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifVTeX">\scr@ifVTeX</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifVTeX">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifdvioutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">\scr@ifdvioutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifdvioutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">\scr@ifpdfoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdfoutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpdftex"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpdftex">\scr@ifpdftex</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpdftex">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifpsoutput"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">\scr@ifpsoutput</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifpsoutput">322</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">\scr@ifundefinedorrelax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrbase.cmd.scr@ifundefinedorrelax">321</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scr@startsection"></a><a href="#cmd.scr@startsection">\scr@startsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.scr@startsection">460</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">\scrlayerAddCsToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddCsToInterface">412</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">\scrlayerAddToInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerAddToInterface">412</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerInitInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">\scrlayerInitInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerInitInterface">411</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface"></a><a href="#cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">\scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.scrlayerOnAutoRemoveInterface">412</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.section*"></a><a href="#cmd.section*">\section*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.section"></a><a href="#cmd.section">\section</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.section">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">\sectioncatchphraseformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectioncatchphraseformat">459</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionformat">\sectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionlinesformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionlinesformat">\sectionlinesformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.sectionlinesformat">459</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmark">\sectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmark">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionmarkformat">\sectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionmarkformat">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.sectionmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.sectionmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.sectionnumdepth">\sectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.sectionnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sentencename"></a><a href="#cmd.sentencename">\sentencename</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentencename">299</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.sentenceshortname"></a><a href="#cmd.sentenceshortname">\sentenceshortname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.sentenceshortname">299</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setbibpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setbibpreamble">\setbibpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setbibpreamble">138</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapdynwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapdynwidth">\setcapdynwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapdynwidth">132</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcaphanging"></a><a href="#cmd.setcaphanging">\setcaphanging</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcaphanging">131</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent*">\setcapindent*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent*">131</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapindent"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapindent">\setcapindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapindent">131</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin*"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin*">\setcapmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin*">132</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapmargin"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapmargin">\setcapmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapmargin">132</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setcapwidth"></a><a href="#cmd.setcapwidth">\setcapwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setcapwidth">132</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setchapterpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setchapterpreamble">\setchapterpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setchapterpreamble">107</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setfootnoterule"></a><a href="#cmd.setfootnoterule">\setfootnoterule</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setfootnoterule">207</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setfootnoterule">282</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setfootnoterule">88</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setindexpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setindexpreamble">\setindexpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setindexpreamble">141</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomafont">\setkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomafont">164</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.setkomafont">228</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.setkomafont">269</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.setkomafont">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.setkomafont">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setkomafont">57</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar*">\setkomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar*">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setkomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.setkomavar">\setkomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setkomavar">145</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setlengthtoplength"></a><a href="#cmd.setlengthtoplength">\setlengthtoplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.setlengthtoplength">147</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setparsizes"></a><a href="#cmd.setparsizes">\setparsizes</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls-experts.cmd.setparsizes">445</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setpartpreamble"></a><a href="#cmd.setpartpreamble">\setpartpreamble</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.setpartpreamble">107</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setshowstyle"></a><a href="#cmd.setshowstyle">\setshowstyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.setshowstyle">484</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.settime"></a><a href="#cmd.settime">\settime</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.settime">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.setuptoc"></a><a href="#cmd.setuptoc">\setuptoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.setuptoc">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showISOenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showISOenvelope">\showISOenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showISOenvelope">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showUScheck"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScheck">\showUScheck</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScheck">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showUScommercial"></a><a href="#cmd.showUScommercial">\showUScommercial</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showUScommercial">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showenvelope"></a><a href="#cmd.showenvelope">\showenvelope</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showenvelope">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.showfields"></a><a href="#cmd.showfields">\showfields</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.showfields">484</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.storeareas"></a><a href="#cmd.storeareas">\storeareas</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea-experts.cmd.storeareas">438</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subject"></a><a href="#cmd.subject">\subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subject">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subject">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subjectname"></a><a href="#cmd.subjectname">\subjectname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.subjectname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph*"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph*">\subparagraph*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraph"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraph">\subparagraph</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraph">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphformat">\subparagraphformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmark">\subparagraphmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">\subparagraphmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subparagraphmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subparagraphnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">\subparagraphnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subparagraphnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection*">\subsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsection">\subsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsection">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionformat">\subsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmark">\subsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmark">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionmarkformat">\subsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">105</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsectionmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsectionnumdepth">\subsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsectionnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection*"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection*">\subsubsection*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection*">99</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsection"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsection">\subsubsection</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsection">95</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionformat">\subsubsectionformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionformat">103</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmark"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmark">\subsubsectionmark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmark">247</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmark">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">\subsubsectionmarkformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">246</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.subsubsectionmarkformat">408</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth"></a><a href="#cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">\subsubsectionnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subsubsectionnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.subtitle"></a><a href="#cmd.subtitle">\subtitle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.subtitle">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.subtitle">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumn"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">\syncwithnotecolumn</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumn">433</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.syncwithnotecolumns"></a><a href="#cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">\syncwithnotecolumns</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.syncwithnotecolumns">434</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tableformat"></a><a href="#cmd.tableformat">\tableformat</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableformat">130</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tableofcontents"></a><a href="#cmd.tableofcontents">\tableofcontents</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.tableofcontents">72</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.textsubscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsubscript">\textsubscript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsubscript">164</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsubscript">268</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsubscript">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.textsuperscript"></a><a href="#cmd.textsuperscript">\textsuperscript</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.textsuperscript">164</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.textsuperscript">268</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.textsuperscript">56</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thanks"></a><a href="#cmd.thanks">\thanks</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thanks">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thanks">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumi"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumi">\theenumi</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumi">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumi">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumii">\theenumii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumii">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumii">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumiii"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiii">\theenumiii</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiii">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiii">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.theenumiv"></a><a href="#cmd.theenumiv">\theenumiv</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.theenumiv">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.theenumiv">209</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thefootnotemark"></a><a href="#cmd.thefootnotemark">\thefootnotemark</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thefootnotemark">207</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.thefootnotemark">280</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thefootnotemark">87</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thepar"></a><a href="#cmd.thepar">\thepar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thepar">293</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thesentence"></a><a href="#cmd.thesentence">\thesentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.thesentence">294</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thisletter"></a><a href="#cmd.thisletter">\thisletter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thisletter">154</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thispagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.thispagestyle">\thispagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.thispagestyle">200</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.thispagestyle">77</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thistime*"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime*">\thistime*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime*">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.thistime"></a><a href="#cmd.thistime">\thistime</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrtime.cmd.thistime">257</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.title"></a><a href="#cmd.title">\title</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.title">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.title">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.titlehead"></a><a href="#cmd.titlehead">\titlehead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlehead">272</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlehead">65</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.titlepagestyle"></a><a href="#cmd.titlepagestyle">\titlepagestyle</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.titlepagestyle">275</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.titlepagestyle">79</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@after@hook">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">\tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@/extension/@before@hook">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">\tocbasic@@after@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@after@hook">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">\tocbasic@@before@hook</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@@before@hook">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">\tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@DependOnPenaltyAndTOCLevel">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">\tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@SetPenaltyByTOCLevel">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">\tocbasic@addxcontentsline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@addxcontentsline">370</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">\tocbasic@extend@babel</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@extend@babel">368</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead">\tocbasic@listhead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">\tocbasic@listhead@/extension/</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@listhead@/extension/">369</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasic@starttoc"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">\tocbasic@starttoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasic@starttoc">368</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.tocbasicautomode"></a><a href="#cmd.tocbasicautomode">\tocbasicautomode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.tocbasicautomode">349</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.todaysname"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysname">\todaysname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysname">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.todaysnumber"></a><a href="#cmd.todaysnumber">\todaysnumber</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrdate.cmd.todaysnumber">254</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.typearea"></a><a href="#cmd.typearea">\typearea</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.typearea">37</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.unitfactor"></a><a href="#cmd.unitfactor">\unitfactor</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.unitfactor">485</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.unsettoc"></a><a href="#cmd.unsettoc">\unsettoc</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.unsettoc">354</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.uppertitleback"></a><a href="#cmd.uppertitleback">\uppertitleback</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.uppertitleback">274</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.uppertitleback">67</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useencodingofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useencodingofkomafont">\useencodingofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useencodingofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usefamilyofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">\usefamilyofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefamilyofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usefontofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usefontofkomafont">\usefontofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usefontofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usefontofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usefontofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usefontofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usefontofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usefontofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomafont">\usekomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomafont">164</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usekomafont">228</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usekomafont">269</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usekomafont">287</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usekomafont">426</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usekomafont">57</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar*"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar*">\usekomavar*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar*">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar*">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usekomavar"></a><a href="#cmd.usekomavar">\usekomavar</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usekomavar">146</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.usekomavar">480</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usepackage"></a><a href="#cmd.usepackage">\usepackage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usepackage">148</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usepackage">226</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usepackage">265</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usepackage">286</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.cmd.usepackage">29</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrhack.cmd.usepackage">379</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.cmd.usepackage">383</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usepackage">425</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usepackage">52</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useplength"></a><a href="#cmd.useplength">\useplength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useplength">147</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useseriesofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useseriesofkomafont">\useseriesofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useseriesofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.useshapeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.useshapeofkomafont">\useshapeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.useshapeofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usesizeofkomafont"></a><a href="#cmd.usesizeofkomafont">\usesizeofkomafont</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">167</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">230</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">270</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">288</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-notecolumn.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">427</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.cmd.usesizeofkomafont">62</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.usetocbasicnumberline"></a><a href="#cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">\usetocbasicnumberline</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.cmd.usetocbasicnumberline">357</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.wwwname"></a><a href="#cmd.wwwname">\wwwname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.wwwname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.yourmailname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourmailname">\yourmailname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourmailname">489</a></li> +<li><a name="cmd.yourrefname"></a><a href="#cmd.yourrefname">\yourrefname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.cmd.yourrefname">489</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="environment">Environments</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.abstract">64</a></li> -<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.addmargin*">112</a></li> -<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.addmargin">112</a></li> -<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.captionbeside">121</a></li> -<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.captionofbeside">124</a></li> -<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.env.contract">245</a></li> -<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.description">108</a></li> -<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.enumerate">107</a></li> -<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.itemize">105</a></li> -<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.labeling">108</a></li> -<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.env.letter">144</a></li> -<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.quotation">111</a></li> -<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.quote">111</a></li> -<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.titlepage">59</a></li> -<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.env.verse">109</a></li> +<li><a name="env.abstract"></a><a href="#env.abstract">abstract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.abstract">69</a></li> +<li><a name="env.addmargin*"></a><a href="#env.addmargin*">addmargin*</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin*">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin*">210</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin*">284</a></li> +<li><a name="env.addmargin"></a><a href="#env.addmargin">addmargin</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.addmargin">118</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.addmargin">210</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.addmargin">284</a></li> +<li><a name="env.captionbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionbeside">captionbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionbeside">126</a></li> +<li><a name="env.captionofbeside"></a><a href="#env.captionofbeside">captionofbeside</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.captionofbeside">129</a></li> +<li><a name="env.contract"></a><a href="#env.contract">contract</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.env.contract">289</a></li> +<li><a name="env.description"></a><a href="#env.description">description</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.description">113</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.description">209</a></li> +<li><a name="env.enumerate"></a><a href="#env.enumerate">enumerate</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.enumerate">112</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.enumerate">209</a></li> +<li><a name="env.itemize"></a><a href="#env.itemize">itemize</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.itemize">111</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.itemize">208</a></li> +<li><a name="env.labeling"></a><a href="#env.labeling">labeling</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.labeling">114</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.labeling">209</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.labeling">284</a></li> +<li><a name="env.letter"></a><a href="#env.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.letter">153</a></li> +<li><a name="env.quotation"></a><a href="#env.quotation">quotation</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quotation">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quotation">210</a></li> +<li><a name="env.quote"></a><a href="#env.quote">quote</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.quote">116</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.quote">210</a></li> +<li><a name="env.titlepage"></a><a href="#env.titlepage">titlepage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrextend.env.titlepage">271</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.titlepage">63</a></li> +<li><a name="env.verse"></a><a href="#env.verse">verse</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.env.verse">115</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.env.verse">210</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="length">Lengths</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">206</a></li> -<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">206</a></li> +<li><a name="length.footheight"></a><a href="#length.footheight">footheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.footheight">227</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.footheight">405</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:typearea.length.footheight">43</a></li> +<li><a name="length.headheight"></a><a href="#length.headheight">headheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer-scrpage.length.headheight">227</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlayer.length.headheight">405</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="plength">Pseudolengths</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">420</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">415</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">423</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">423</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">423</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">417</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">417</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">417</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">417</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">417</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">420</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">420</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">420</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">420</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">415</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">421</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">421</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">421</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">421</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">422</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">422</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">422</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">422</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">421</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">416</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">415</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">418</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">418</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">419</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">418</a></li> -<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">418</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPdatamatrixvskip"></a><a href="#plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">PPdatamatrixvskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPdatamatrixvskip">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPheadheight"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadheight">PPheadheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadheight">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.PPheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.PPheadwidth">PPheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.PPheadwidth">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.backaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.backaddrheight">backaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.backaddrheight">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarklength">bfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarklength">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.bfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.bfoldmarkvpos">bfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.bfoldmarkvpos">470</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfoothpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfoothpos">firstfoothpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfoothpos">479</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfootvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootvpos">firstfootvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootvpos">479</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstfootwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstfootwidth">firstfootwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstfootwidth">479</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadhpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadhpos">firstheadhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadhpos">472</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadvpos"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadvpos">firstheadvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadvpos">472</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.firstheadwidth"></a><a href="#plength.firstheadwidth">firstheadwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.firstheadwidth">473</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkhpos">foldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkhpos">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkthickness"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkthickness">foldmarkthickness</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkthickness">472</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.foldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.foldmarkvpos">foldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.foldmarkvpos">472</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.fromrulethickness"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulethickness">fromrulethickness</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulethickness">473</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.fromrulewidth"></a><a href="#plength.fromrulewidth">fromrulewidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.fromrulewidth">473</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarkhpos"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarkhpos">lfoldmarkhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarkhpos">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.lfoldmarklength">lfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lfoldmarklength">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locheight"></a><a href="#plength.locheight">locheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locheight">476</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.lochpos"></a><a href="#plength.lochpos">lochpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.lochpos">476</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locvpos"></a><a href="#plength.locvpos">locvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locvpos">476</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.locwidth"></a><a href="#plength.locwidth">locwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.locwidth">476</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarklength">mfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarklength">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.mfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.mfoldmarkvpos">mfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.mfoldmarkvpos">470</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.pfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.pfoldmarklength">pfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.pfoldmarklength">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.refaftervskip">refaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refaftervskip">477</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refhpos"></a><a href="#plength.refhpos">refhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refhpos">477</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refvpos"></a><a href="#plength.refvpos">refvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refvpos">476</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.refwidth"></a><a href="#plength.refwidth">refwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.refwidth">477</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.sigbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.sigbeforevskip">sigbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigbeforevskip">478</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.sigindent"></a><a href="#plength.sigindent">sigindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.sigindent">478</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.specialmailindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailindent">specialmailindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailindent">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.specialmailrightindent"></a><a href="#plength.specialmailrightindent">specialmailrightindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.specialmailrightindent">475</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectaftervskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectaftervskip">subjectaftervskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectaftervskip">478</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectbeforevskip"></a><a href="#plength.subjectbeforevskip">subjectbeforevskip</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectbeforevskip">478</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.subjectvpos"></a><a href="#plength.subjectvpos">subjectvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.subjectvpos">477</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarklength"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarklength">tfoldmarklength</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarklength">471</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.tfoldmarkvpos"></a><a href="#plength.tfoldmarkvpos">tfoldmarkvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.tfoldmarkvpos">470</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrheight"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrheight">toaddrheight</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrheight">474</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrhpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrhpos">toaddrhpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrhpos">473</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrindent"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrindent">toaddrindent</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrindent">474</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrvpos"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrvpos">toaddrvpos</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrvpos">473</a></li> +<li><a name="plength.toaddrwidth"></a><a href="#plength.toaddrwidth">toaddrwidth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.plength.toaddrwidth">474</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="variable">Variables</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">150</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.customer">179</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.date">178</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">150</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">184</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">171</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">161</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.frombank">185</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">170</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromname">161</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.invoice">179</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.location">176</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.myref">179</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">190</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">190</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.place">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">180</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.signature">192</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.subject">182</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">182</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.title">181</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.toname">173</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">166</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">179</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.yourref">179</a></li> -<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">173</a></li> -</ul> -<h2><a name="pagestyle">Page Styles</a></h2> -<ul> -<li><a name="pagestyle.@everysel@"></a><a href="#pagestyle.@everysel@">@everysel@</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.pagestyle.@everysel@">352</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.empty"></a><a href="#pagestyle.empty">empty</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.empty">188</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer.pagestyle.empty">352</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.headings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.headings">headings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.headings">188</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.myheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.myheadings">myheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.myheadings">188</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.plain"></a><a href="#pagestyle.plain">plain</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.pagestyle.plain">188</a></li> -<li><a name="pagestyle.scrheadings"></a><a href="#pagestyle.scrheadings">scrheadings</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlayer-scrpage.pagestyle.scrheadings">208</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.PPcode"></a><a href="#variable.PPcode">PPcode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPcode">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.PPdatamatrix"></a><a href="#variable.PPdatamatrix">PPdatamatrix</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.PPdatamatrix">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.addresseeimage"></a><a href="#variable.addresseeimage">addresseeimage</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.addresseeimage">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.backaddress"></a><a href="#variable.backaddress">backaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddress">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.backaddressseparator"></a><a href="#variable.backaddressseparator">backaddressseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.backaddressseparator">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.ccseparator"></a><a href="#variable.ccseparator">ccseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.ccseparator">159</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.customer"></a><a href="#variable.customer">customer</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.customer">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.date"></a><a href="#variable.date">date</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.date">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.emailseparator"></a><a href="#variable.emailseparator">emailseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.emailseparator">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.enclseparator"></a><a href="#variable.enclseparator">enclseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.enclseparator">159</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.faxseparator"></a><a href="#variable.faxseparator">faxseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.faxseparator">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.firstfoot"></a><a href="#variable.firstfoot">firstfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firstfoot">196</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.firsthead"></a><a href="#variable.firsthead">firsthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.firsthead">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromaddress"></a><a href="#variable.fromaddress">fromaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromaddress">172</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.frombank"></a><a href="#variable.frombank">frombank</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frombank">196</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromemail"></a><a href="#variable.fromemail">fromemail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromemail">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromfax"></a><a href="#variable.fromfax">fromfax</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromfax">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromlogo"></a><a href="#variable.fromlogo">fromlogo</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromlogo">180</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.frommobilephone"></a><a href="#variable.frommobilephone">frommobilephone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.frommobilephone">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromname"></a><a href="#variable.fromname">fromname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromname">172</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromphone"></a><a href="#variable.fromphone">fromphone</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromphone">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromurl"></a><a href="#variable.fromurl">fromurl</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromurl">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.fromzipcode"></a><a href="#variable.fromzipcode">fromzipcode</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.fromzipcode">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.invoice"></a><a href="#variable.invoice">invoice</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.invoice">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.location"></a><a href="#variable.location">location</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.location">187</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.mobilephoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.mobilephoneseparator">mobilephoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.mobilephoneseparator">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.myref"></a><a href="#variable.myref">myref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.myref">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.nextfoot"></a><a href="#variable.nextfoot">nextfoot</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nextfoot">203</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.variable.nextfoot">481</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.nexthead"></a><a href="#variable.nexthead">nexthead</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.nexthead">203</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2-experts.variable.nexthead">481</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.phoneseparator"></a><a href="#variable.phoneseparator">phoneseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.phoneseparator">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.place"></a><a href="#variable.place">place</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.place">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.placeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.placeseparator">placeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.placeseparator">190</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.signature"></a><a href="#variable.signature">signature</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.signature">212</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.specialmail"></a><a href="#variable.specialmail">specialmail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.specialmail">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.subject"></a><a href="#variable.subject">subject</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subject">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.subjectseparator"></a><a href="#variable.subjectseparator">subjectseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.subjectseparator">193</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.title"></a><a href="#variable.title">title</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.title">192</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.toaddress"></a><a href="#variable.toaddress">toaddress</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toaddress">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.toname"></a><a href="#variable.toname">toname</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.toname">182</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.urlseparator"></a><a href="#variable.urlseparator">urlseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.urlseparator">176</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.yourmail"></a><a href="#variable.yourmail">yourmail</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourmail">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.yourref"></a><a href="#variable.yourref">yourref</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.yourref">189</a></li> +<li><a name="variable.zipcodeseparator"></a><a href="#variable.zipcodeseparator">zipcodeseparator</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.variable.zipcodeseparator">182</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="counter">Counter</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrlttr2.counter.letter">145</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.counter.par">249</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.counter.secnumdepth">100</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#scrjura.counter.sentence">250</a></li> -<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.counter.tocdepth">68</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.letter"></a><a href="#counter.letter">letter</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrlttr2.counter.letter">154</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.par"></a><a href="#counter.par">par</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.par">293</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.secnumdepth"></a><a href="#counter.secnumdepth">secnumdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.secnumdepth">106</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.sentence"></a><a href="#counter.sentence">sentence</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:scrjura.counter.sentence">294</a></li> +<li><a name="counter.tocdepth"></a><a href="#counter.tocdepth">tocdepth</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:tocbasic.counter.tocdepth">357</a>, <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.counter.tocdepth">72</a></li> </ul> <h2><a name="floatstyle">Styles for the float Package</a></h2> <ul> -<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">124</a></li> -<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">124</a></li> +<li><a name="floatstyle.komaabove"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komaabove">komaabove</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komaabove">129</a></li> +<li><a name="floatstyle.komabelow"></a><a href="#floatstyle.komabelow">komabelow</a> --> <a href="scrguien.pdf#desc:maincls.floatstyle.komabelow">129</a></li> </ul> <p> <a href="http://validator.w3.org/check?uri=referer"><img diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf Binary files differindex b9b4d0c912f..92a64470a8e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrguien.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.tex index f6f57e0c497..7af7c1a32bd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/doc/scrpage2.tex @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % ====================================================================== % scrpage2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 % % This file is part of the LaTeX2e KOMA-Script bundle. % @@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt. % ---------------------------------------------------------------------- % scrpage2.tex -% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2014 +% Copyright (c) Markus Kohm, 2001-2016 % % Dieses Werk darf nach den Bedingungen der LaTeX Project Public Lizenz, % Version 1.3c, verteilt und/oder veraendert werden. @@ -84,7 +84,9 @@ \labelbase{scrpage-en} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrpage2}% +\BeginIndex{}{page>style} From \KOMAScript{} 3.12 the completely newly implemented package \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} replaces the old \Package{scrpage2}. The new package is a consequently developed extension of the design of @@ -114,19 +116,19 @@ information about \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} see the \KOMAScript{} manual. \begin{Explain}% Introduction to headings To understand the following description, an overview of {\LaTeX}'s fairly involved header and footer mechanism is needed. The {\LaTeX} kernel defines - the page styles \Pagestyle{empty}, which produces a completely empty header - and footer, and \Pagestyle{plain}, which produces usually only a page number + the page styles \PageStyle{empty}, which produces a completely empty header + and footer, and \PageStyle{plain}, which produces usually only a page number in the footer and an empty header. Apart from these, many document classes - provide the style \Pagestyle{headings}, which allows more complex style + provide the style \PageStyle{headings}, which allows more complex style settings and running headings\Index{headings>running}\Index{headings>automatic}. The - \Pagestyle{headings} style often has a related variant, - \Pagestyle{myheadings}, which is similar except for switching off the + \PageStyle{headings} style often has a related variant, + \PageStyle{myheadings}, which is similar except for switching off the running headings\Index{headings>manual} and reverting them to manual control by the user. A more detailed description is given in the page style section of the \KOMAScript{} manual where it is also noted that some {\LaTeX} commands automatically switch to another page style\,---\,usually page style - \Pagestyle{plain}\,---\,for the current page. + \PageStyle{plain}\,---\,for the current page. \end{Explain} @@ -147,83 +149,62 @@ configurable page styles. % \headmark \pagemark \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{scrplain} + \PageStyle{scrheadings}% + \PageStyle{scrplain} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrplain}% -\Index{page>style}% -% Package \Package{scrpage2} delivers its own page style, named -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}, which can be activated with the +\PageStyle{scrheadings}, which can be activated with the \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings}. When this page style is in use, an -appropriate \Pagestyle{scrplain} page style is used for the plain page style. +appropriate \PageStyle{scrplain} page style is used for the plain page style. In this case \emph{appropriate} means that this new plain page style is also configureable by the commands introduced in \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.format}, which, for example, configure the header and footer width and complies within the basic layout. Neither the activation -of \Pagestyle{scrheadings} nor the attendant change to the appropriate plain -page style, \Pagestyle{scrplain}, influences the mode of manual or automatic +of \PageStyle{scrheadings} nor the attendant change to the appropriate plain +page style, \PageStyle{scrplain}, influences the mode of manual or automatic headings\Index{headings>automatic}\Index{headings>manual} (see -\autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.mark}). The \Pagestyle{scrplain} page style can +\autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.mark}). The \PageStyle{scrplain} page style can also be activated directly with \Macro{pagestyle}. + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-left-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-left-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-even}% \Macro{cehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-center-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-center-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-even}% \Macro{rehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-right-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-right-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-even}% \Macro{lefoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-left-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-left-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-even}% \Macro{cefoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-center-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-center-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-even}% \Macro{refoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-right-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-even}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-right-even}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-even}% \Macro{lohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-left-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-left-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-odd}% \Macro{cohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-center-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-center-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-odd}% \Macro{rohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-right-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-right-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-odd}% \Macro{lofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-left-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-left-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-left-odd}% \Macro{cofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-center-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-center-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-center-odd}% \Macro{rofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-right-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-odd}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-right-odd}\Parameter{scrheadings-right-odd}% \Macro{ihead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-inside}\Parameter{scrheadings-inside}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-inside}\Parameter{scrheadings-inside}% \Macro{chead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-centered}\Parameter{scrheadings-centered}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-centered}\Parameter{scrheadings-centered}% \Macro{ohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-outside}\Parameter{scrheadings-outside}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-outside}\Parameter{scrheadings-outside}% \Macro{ifoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-inside}\Parameter{scrheadings-inside}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-inside}\Parameter{scrheadings-inside}% \Macro{cfoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-centered}\Parameter{scrheadings-centered}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-centered}\Parameter{scrheadings-centered}% \Macro{ofoot}% \OParameter{scrplain-outside}\Parameter{scrheadings-outside} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% The page style of \Package{scrpage2} are defined to have flexible configurable header and footer. To achieve this, the page styles include three boxes in both the header and the footer. The contents of these boxes may be modified @@ -231,17 +212,17 @@ easily. The commands modifying the content of these boxes can be seen in \autoref{fig:scrpage-en.leheadetall}. Commands in the middle column modify the box contents on both odd and even pages. All of the commands have an optional and a mandatory argument. The option Argument influences the content of -corresponding box of the plain page style, \Pagestyle{scrplain}. The mandatory +corresponding box of the plain page style, \PageStyle{scrplain}. The mandatory argument influences the content of the corresponding box of the page style -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}. +\PageStyle{scrheadings}. \begin{figure} % \centering \setcapindent{0pt}% \begin{captionbeside} [Commands for modification of \Package{scrpage2} page styles elements]% - {Commands for modification of page styles \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and - \Pagestyle{scrplain} and their relationship to header and footer + {Commands for modification of page styles \PageStyle{scrheadings} and + \PageStyle{scrplain} and their relationship to header and footer elements} [l] \setlength{\unitlength}{.95mm}\begin{picture}(100,65)(0,8)\small @@ -266,51 +247,51 @@ argument influences the content of the corresponding box of the page style % commands and arrow % for twoside % - \put(50,65){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ihead}}} + \put(50,65){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.ihead}}} \put(44,65){\vector(-1,0){4}}\put(56,65){\vector(1,0){4}} - \put(50,58){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{chead}}} + \put(50,58){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.chead}}} \put(44,58){\line(-1,0){24}}\put(56,58){\line(1,0){24}} \put(20,58){\vector(0,1){4}}\put(80,58){\vector(0,1){4}} - \put(50,51){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ohead}}} + \put(50,51){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.ohead}}} \put(44,51){\line(-1,0){40}}\put(56,51){\line(1,0){40}} \put(4,51){\vector(0,1){11}}\put(96,51){\vector(0,1){11}} % - \put(50,15){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ifoot}}} + \put(50,15){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.ifoot}}} \put(56,15){\vector(1,0){4}}\put(44,15){\vector(-1,0){4}} - \put(50,22){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{cfoot}}} + \put(50,22){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.cfoot}}} \put(44,22){\line(-1,0){24}}\put(56,22){\line(1,0){24}} \put(20,22){\vector(0,-1){4}}\put(80,22){\vector(0,-1){4}} - \put(50,29){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ofoot}}} + \put(50,29){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.ofoot}}} \put(44,29){\line(-1,0){40}}\put(56,29){\line(1,0){40}} \put(4,29){\vector(0,-1){11}}\put(96,29){\vector(0,-1){11}} % commands for oneside - \put(5,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{lehead}}} - \put(20,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{cehead}}} - \put(35,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{rehead}}} + \put(5,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.lehead}}} + \put(20,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.cehead}}} + \put(35,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.rehead}}} % - \put(65,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{lohead}}} - \put(80,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{cohead}}} - \put(95,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{rohead}}} + \put(65,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.lohead}}} + \put(80,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.cohead}}} + \put(95,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.rohead}}} % - \put(5,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{lefoot}}} - \put(20,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{cefoot}}} - \put(35,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{refoot}}} + \put(5,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.lefoot}}} + \put(20,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.cefoot}}} + \put(35,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.refoot}}} % - \put(65,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{lofoot}}} - \put(80,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{cofoot}}} - \put(95,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{rofoot}}} + \put(65,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.lofoot}}} + \put(80,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.cofoot}}} + \put(95,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.rofoot}}} \end{picture} \end{captionbeside} % \caption[Commands for modification of \Package{scrpage2} page styles % elements]% -% {Commands for modification of page styles \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and -% \Pagestyle{scrplain} and their relationship to header and footer +% {Commands for modification of page styles \PageStyle{scrheadings} and +% \PageStyle{scrplain} and their relationship to header and footer % elements} \label{fig:scrpage-en.leheadetall} \end{figure} \begin{Example} - If one wants the page number within \Pagestyle{scrheadings} be placed in the + If one wants the page number within \PageStyle{scrheadings} be placed in the middle of the footer, then following can be used: \begin{lstcode} \cfoot{\pagemark} @@ -347,42 +328,38 @@ more advanced settings. \end{Example} As mentioned above, there is a new plain page style which corresponds to -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}. Since it should also be possible to customize this +\PageStyle{scrheadings}. Since it should also be possible to customize this style, the commands support an optional argument with which the contents of the appropriate fields of this plain page style can be modified. \begin{Example} - The position of the page number for the page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} + The position of the page number for the page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} can be declared as follows: \begin{lstcode} \cfoot[\pagemark]{} \ohead[]{\pagemark} \end{lstcode} When the command \Macro{chapter}, after it has started a new page, now - switches to the page style \Pagestyle{plain}, then the page number is + switches to the page style \PageStyle{plain}, then the page number is centered in the footer. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrplain}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearscrheadings}\\ - \Macro{clearscrplain}\\ + \Macro{clearscrheadings}% + \Macro{clearscrplain}% \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% -If one wants to redefine both the page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and +If one wants to redefine both the page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} and the corresponding plain page style, frequently one must empty some already occupied page elements. Since one rarely fills all items with new content, in most cases several instructions with empty parameters are necessary. With the help of these three instructions the quick and thorough deletion is possible. While \Macro{clearscrheadings} only deletes all fields of the page style -\Pagestyle{scrheadings}, and \Macro{clearscrplain} deletes all fields of +\PageStyle{scrheadings}, and \Macro{clearscrplain} deletes all fields of the corresponding plain page style, \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} sets all fields of both page styles to empty. \begin{Example} @@ -409,26 +386,18 @@ sets all fields of both page styles to empty. dropped.% \end{Example}% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% +\EndIndexGroup + In the previous examples two commands were used which have not been introduced yet. The description of these commands follows. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{leftmark}\\ + \Macro{leftmark}% \Macro{rightmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% These two instructions make it possible to access the running headings, which are normally meant for the left or for the right page. These two instruction are not made available by \Package{scrpage2}, but directly by the {\LaTeX} @@ -436,88 +405,82 @@ kernel. When in this section running headings of the left page or the right page are mentioned, this refers to the contents of \Macro{leftmark} or \Macro{rightmark}, respectively. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{headmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% This command gives access to the content of running headings. In contrast to \Macro{leftmark} and \Macro{rightmark}, one need not regard the proper assignment to left or right page.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headmark} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{pagemark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% This command returns the formatted page number. The formatting can be -controlled by \Macro{pnumfont}, introduced in -\autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.format}, \autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.cmd.pnumfont}, +controlled by \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.pnumfont}, introduced in +\autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.format}, \DescPageRef{scrpage-en.cmd.pnumfont}, which \Macro{pagemark} heeds automatically.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{useheadings} + \PageStyle{useheadings} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings} The package \Package{scrpage2} is meant primarily for use of the supplied styles or for defining one's own styles. However, it may be necessary to shift back also to a style provided by the document class. It might appear that this should be done with \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{headings}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}, but this has the -disadvantage that commands \Macro{automark} and \Macro{manualmark}, to be +disadvantage that commands \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark} and \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.manualmark}, to be discussed shortly, do not function as expected. For this reason one should shift back to the original styles using \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{useheadings}\IndexCmd{pagestyle}, which chooses the correct page styles automatically for both manual and automatic running headings.% % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Manual and Running Headings} \label{sec:scrpage-en.basics.mark} % \automark \manualmark -% +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{headings>running}% \BeginIndex{}{headings>automatic}% \BeginIndex{}{headings>manual}% -Usually there is a \emph{my}-version of the \Pagestyle{headings} +Usually there is a \emph{my}-version of the \PageStyle{headings} page style. If such a page style is active, then the running headings are no longer updated no longer automatically and become manual headings. With \Package{scrpage2} a different path is taken. Whether the headings are running or manual is determined by the instructions -\Macro{automark} and \Macro{manualmark}, respectively. The default +\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark} and \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.manualmark}, respectively. The default can be set already while loading of the package, with the options -\Option{automark} and \Option{manualmark} (see +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.automark} and \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.manualmark} (see \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.option.automark}). +\DescPageRef{scrpage-en.option.automark}). \begin{Declaration} \Macro{manualmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% As the name suggests, \Macro{manualmark} switches off the updating of the running headings and makes them manual. It is left to the user to update and provide contents for the headings. For that purpose the instructions \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} and \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} are available.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{manualmark} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{automark}\OParameter{right page}\Parameter{left page} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{automark}% The macro \Macro{automark} activates the automatic updating, that is, running headings. For the two parameters the designations of the document sectioning level whose title is to appear in appropriate place are to be used. Valid @@ -530,15 +493,15 @@ classes from version~2.9s up are known to support this value. The optional argument \PName{right page} is understandably meant only for double-sided documents. In the single-sided case one should normally not use it. With the help of the option -\Option{autooneside}\IndexOption{autooneside}\important{\Option{autooneside}} +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.autooneside}\IndexOption{autooneside}\important{\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.autooneside}} one can also set that the optional argument in single-sided mode is ignored automatically (see \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.option.autooneside}). +\DescPageRef{scrpage-en.option.autooneside}). % \begin{Example} Assuming that the document uses a \emph{book} class, whose topmost section level is \emph{chapter}, then after a preceding - \Macro{manualmark} + \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.manualmark} \begin{lstcode} \automark[section]{chapter} \end{lstcode} @@ -555,17 +518,15 @@ automatically (see \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.options}, For the upper section level, the data of the headings is set by the command \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth}, while that for the lower section level by \Macro{markright}\IndexCmd{markright} or - \Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd{markleft}. These commands are called indirectly - by the sectioning commands. The macro \Macro{markleft} is provided by the - package \Package{scrpage2} and is defined similarly to \Macro{markright} in - the {\LaTeX} kernel. Although \Macro{markleft} is not defined as an - internal command, the direct use is not recommended. + \Macro{markleft}\IndexCmd[indexmain]{markleft}. These commands are called + indirectly by the sectioning commands. The macro \Macro{markleft} is + provided by the package \Package{scrpage2} and is defined similarly to + \Macro{markright} in the {\LaTeX} kernel. Although \Macro{markleft} is not + defined as an internal command, the direct use is not recommended. \end{Explain} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{automark}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{}{headings>manual}% -\EndIndex{}{headings>automatic}% -\EndIndex{}{headings>running}% +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Formatting of Header and Footer} @@ -579,13 +540,10 @@ formative ambitions. Therefore we devote this section exclusively to this topic. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{headfont}\\ - \Macro{footfont}\\ + \Macro{headfont}% + \Macro{footfont}% \Macro{pnumfont} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headfont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footfont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pnumfont}% The command \Macro{headfont} contains the commands which determine the font of header and footer lines. Command \Macro{footfont} contains the difference of the footer to that. The difference for the style of the page number is defined @@ -600,9 +558,6 @@ by the command \Macro{pnumfont}. \renewcommand{\pnumfont}{\normalfont\rmfamily\slshape} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headfont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footfont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pnumfont}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% @@ -621,17 +576,13 @@ attributes in the manner described in the \KOMAScript{} manual. \setkomafont{pagenumber}{\normalfont\rmfamily\slshape} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{setheadwidth}\OParameter{shift}\Parameter{width}\\ +\Macro{setheadwidth}\OParameter{shift}\Parameter{width}% \Macro{setfootwidth}\OParameter{shift}\Parameter{width} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootwidth}% Normally the widths of header and footer lines correspond to the width of the text body. The commands \Macro{setheadwidth}\Index{header>width}\Index{head>width} and @@ -714,27 +665,26 @@ As can be seen, the header is now shifted inward, while the header width has not changed. The shift is calculated in a way that the configuration of the typearea become visible also here.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadwidth}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootwidth} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{length}\Parameter{thickness}% - \OParameter{commands}\\ + \OParameter{commands}% \Macro{setheadsepline}\OParameter{length}\Parameter{thickness}% - \OParameter{commands}\\ + \OParameter{commands}% \Macro{setfootsepline}\OParameter{length}\Parameter{thickness}% - \OParameter{commands}\\ + \OParameter{commands}% \Macro{setfootbotline}\OParameter{length}\Parameter{thickness}% \OParameter{commands} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootseptline}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootbotline}% Corresponding to the size configuration parameters of header and footer there are commands to modify the rules above and below the header and footer. But first of all the rules should be activated. See options -\Option{headtopline}, \Option{headsepline}, -\Option{footsepline}, and \Option{footbotline} in +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headtopline}, \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headsepline}, +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.footsepline}, and \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.footbotline} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.option.headsepline} for this. +\DescPageRef{scrpage-en.option.headsepline} for this. \begin{labeling}[\,--]{\Macro{setfootsepline}} \item[\Macro{setheadtopline}] configures the line above the header @@ -745,7 +695,7 @@ header and footer. But first of all the rules should be activated. See options The mandatory argument \PName{thickness} determines how strongly the line is drawn. The optional argument \PName{length} accepts the same -symbolic values as \PName{width} for \Macro{setheadwidth}, as well as +symbolic values as \PName{width} for \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.setheadwidth}, as well as also a normal length expression. As long as the optional argument \PName{length} is not assigned a value, the appropriate line length adapts automatically the width of the header or the footer. @@ -753,6 +703,7 @@ adapts automatically the width of the header or the footer. Use \PValue{auto} in the length argument to restore this automation for the length of a line. +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% @@ -774,22 +725,21 @@ elements \FontElement{headtopline}\important[i]{\FontElement{headtopline}\\ \FontElement{footbotline}. These can then be extended via \Macro{addtokomafont}\IndexCmd{addtokomafont}. See the \KOMAScript{} manual for details on the \Macro{setkomafont} and \Macro{addtokomafont} commands. -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footbottomline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footbotline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{footsepline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{headsepline}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{headtopline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}% - \Parameter{\upshape\PValue{current}}\\ - \XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}% - \Parameter{}\\ - \XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}% - \Parameter{}\OParameter{} + \labelsuffix[auto+current] + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}% + \PParameter{current}% + \labelsuffix[auto] + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}% + \Parameter{}% + \labelsuffix[auto+] + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}% + \Parameter{}\OParameter{} \end{Declaration}% -The arguments shown here for the command \Macro{setheadtopline} are of +The arguments shown here for the command \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.setheadtopline} are of course valid for the other three configuration commands too. If the mandatory parameter has the value \PValue{current} or has been @@ -809,8 +759,8 @@ valid commands. \setheadtopline{2pt} \setheadsepline{.4pt} \end{lstcode} - Additionally\textnote{Attention!} the options \Option{headtopline} and - \Option{headsepline} have to be used preferably globally in the optional + Additionally\textnote{Attention!} the options \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headtopline} and + \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headsepline} have to be used preferably globally in the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass}. In this case the result may be the following. % @@ -867,8 +817,8 @@ be achieved with a global package option, which will be described together with other package options in the next \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.options}.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootseptline}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootbotline} +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Package Options} @@ -887,44 +837,37 @@ i.\,e. be part of the optional argument of \Macro{documentclass}, or package option, i.\,e. be part of the optional argument of \Macro{usepackage}. \begin{Declaration} -\Option{headinclude}\\ -\Option{headexclude}\\ -\Option{footinclude}\\ -\Option{footexclude} + \Option{headinclude}% + \Option{headexclude}% + \Option{footinclude}% + \Option{footexclude} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headinclude}\BeginIndex{Option}{footinclude}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headexclude}\BeginIndex{Option}{footexclude}% Since\textnote{Attention!} \KOMAScript~3\ChangedAt{v2.3}{\Package{scrpage2}} this options should not be passed to \Package{scrpage2} any longer using \Macro{PassOptionsToPackage} or the optional argument of \Macro{usepackage}. Only for compatibility reason \Package{scrpage2} still declares them and pass them as \Option{headinclude}, -\OptionValue{headinclude}{false}, \Option{footinclude} und -\OptionValue{footinclude}{false} to package \Package{typearea} weitergereicht. -\EndIndex{Option}{headinclude}\EndIndex{Option}{footinclude}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headexclude}\EndIndex{Option}{footexclude} +\OptionValue{headinclude}{false}, \Option{footinclude}, and +\OptionValue{footinclude}{false} to package \Package{typearea}. +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Option{headtopline}\\ - \Option{plainheadtopline}\\ - \Option{headsepline}\\ - \Option{plainheadsepline}\\ - \Option{footsepline}\\ - \Option{plainfootsepline}\\ - \Option{footbotline}\\ + \Option{headtopline}% + \Option{plainheadtopline}% + \Option{headsepline}% + \Option{plainheadsepline}% + \Option{footsepline}% + \Option{plainfootsepline}% + \Option{footbotline}% \Option{plainfootbotline} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footbotline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline}% Basic adjustment of the lines under and over header and footer can be made with these options. These adjustments are then considered the default for all page styles defined with \Package{scrpage2}. If one of these options is used, then a line thickness 0.4\,pt is set. Since there is a corresponding plain page style to the -page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings}, the corresponding line in the plain +page style \PageStyle{scrheadings}, the corresponding line in the plain style can also be configured with the \Option{plain\dots} options. These \Option{plain} options do however work only if the corresponding options without \Option{plain} are activated. Thus, @@ -942,23 +885,18 @@ page header is part of the text block automatically. The\textnote{Attention!} conditions for the options of the preceding paragraph apply also to this automation. That means that the package \Package{typearea} must be loaded after \Package{scrpage2}, or that on use of a {\KOMAScript} -class, the options \Option{headinclude} and \Option{footinclude} must be set +class, the options \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headinclude} and \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.footinclude} must be set explicitly with \Macro{documentclass} in order to transfer header or footer line in the text area.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headtopline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline} -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline} -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline} -\EndIndex{Option}{footbotline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline} +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} -\Option{ilines}\\ -\Option{clines}\\ +\Option{ilines}% +\Option{clines}% \Option{olines} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{ilines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{olines}% \Index{rule>alignment}\Index{line>alignment}% With the definition of the line lengths the case can arise where the lengths are set correctly, but the justification is not as desired @@ -972,7 +910,7 @@ default justification, and \Option{olines} aligns at the outside edge. \begin{Example} The next example illustrates the influence of the option \Option{ilines}. Please compare to the example for - \Macro{setfootsepline} on \autopageref{page:scrpage-en.autoLineLength}. + \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.setfootsepline} on \autopageref{page:scrpage-en.autoLineLength}. \begin{lstcode} \usepackage[ilines]{scrpage2} \setfootbotline{2pt} @@ -991,17 +929,13 @@ default justification, and \Option{olines} aligns at the outside edge. In contrast to the default configuration, the separation line between text and footer is now left-aligned, not centered.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Option}{ilines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{clines}% -\EndIndex{Option}{olines}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{automark}\\ -\Option{manualmark} + \Option{automark}% + \Option{manualmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{manualmark}% \BeginIndex{}{headings>automatic}% \BeginIndex{}{headings>manual}% These options set at the beginning of the document whether to use running @@ -1017,10 +951,10 @@ preserved. \documentclass{scrreprt} \usepackage{scrpage2} \end{lstcode} - Since the default page style of \Class{scrreprt} is \Pagestyle{plain}, - this page style is also now still active. Futhermore, \Pagestyle{plain} + Since the default page style of \Class{scrreprt} is \PageStyle{plain}, + this page style is also now still active. Futhermore, \PageStyle{plain} means manual headings. If one now activates the page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} with + \PageStyle{scrheadings} with \begin{lstcode} \pagestyle{scrheadings} \end{lstcode} @@ -1031,9 +965,9 @@ preserved. \documentclass{scrbook} \usepackage{scrpage2} \end{lstcode} - the page style \Pagestyle{headings} is active and the running headings are + the page style \PageStyle{headings} is active and the running headings are updated automatically. Switching to the page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} keeps this setting active. The marking commands + \PageStyle{scrheadings} keeps this setting active. The marking commands of \Class{scrbook} continue to be used. However, the use of @@ -1041,57 +975,51 @@ preserved. \usepackage[automark]{scrpage2} \end{lstcode} activates running headings independently of the used document class. - The option does not of course affect the used page style \Pagestyle{plain} + The option does not of course affect the used page style \PageStyle{plain} of the class \Class{scrreprt}. The headings are not visible until the page style is changed to - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}, \Pagestyle{useheadings} + \PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings}, \PageStyle{useheadings} or another user-defined page style with headings.% \end{Example}% -\EndIndex{Option}{automark}\EndIndex{Option}{manualmark}% +\EndIndexGroup + \begin{Declaration} \Option{autooneside} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autooneside}% +\BeginIndex{}{headings>manual}% +\BeginIndex{}{headings>automatic}% This option ensures that the optional parameter of -\Macro{automark}\IndexCmd{automark} will be ignored automatically in +\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark}\IndexCmd{automark} will be ignored automatically in one-sided mode. See also the explanation of the command -\Macro{automark} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.mark}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.cmd.automark}.% +\DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.mark}, +\DescPageRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark}.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{autooneside}% -% -\EndIndex{}{headings>manual}% -\EndIndex{}{headings>automatic}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Option{komastyle}\\ + \Option{komastyle}% \Option{standardstyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{standardstyle}% These options determine the look of the predefined page styles -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} and \Pagestyle{scrplain}. The option +\PageStyle{scrheadings} and \PageStyle{scrplain}. The option \Option{komastyle} configures a look like that of the {\KOMAScript} classes. This is the default for {\KOMAScript} classes and can in this way also be set for other classes. The option \Option{standardstyle} configures a page style as it is expected by the standard classes. Furthermore, the option -\Option{markuppercase} will be activated automatically, but only if -option \Option{markusedcase} is not given.% -\EndIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{standardstyle} +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.markuppercase} will be activated automatically, but only if +option \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.markusedcase} is not given.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{markuppercase}\\ -\Option{markusedcase} + \Option{markuppercase}% + \Option{markusedcase} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{markuppercase}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{markusedcase}% -In order to achieve the functionality of \Macro{automark}, the package +In order to achieve the functionality of \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.automark}, the package \Package{scrpage2} modifies internal commands which are used by the document structuring commands to set the running headings. Since some classes, in contrast to the {\KOMAScript} classes, write the headings @@ -1104,22 +1032,21 @@ uppercase letters, then the option \Option{markusedcase} should be given. These\textnote{Attention!} options are not suitable to force a representation; thus, unexpected effects may occur if the given option does not match the actual behaviour of the document class.% -\EndIndex{Option}{markuppercase}\EndIndex{Option}{markusedcase} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Option{nouppercase} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{nouppercase}% -In the previous paragraph dealing with \Option{markuppercase} and -\Option{markusedcase}, it has been already stated that some document classes +In the previous paragraph dealing with \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.markuppercase} and +\DescRef{scrpage-en.option.markusedcase}, it has been already stated that some document classes set the running headings\Index{heading} in uppercase letters using the commands \Macro{MakeUppercase}\IndexCmd{MakeUppercase}\important{\Macro{MakeUppercase}} or \Macro{uppercase}\IndexCmd{uppercase}\important{\Macro{uppercase}}. Setting the option \Option{nouppercase} allows disabling both these commands in the headers and footers. However, this is valid only for page styles -defined by \Package{scrpage2}, including \Pagestyle{scrheadings} and its +defined by \Package{scrpage2}, including \PageStyle{scrheadings} and its corresponding plain page style. The applied method is very brutal and can cause that desired changes @@ -1135,8 +1062,8 @@ not occur. Since these cases do not occur frequently, the option \usepackage[nouppercase]{scrpage2} \pagestyle{scrheadings} \end{lstcode} - The selection of the page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} is necessary, - since otherwise the page style \Pagestyle{headings} is active, which + The selection of the page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} is necessary, + since otherwise the page style \PageStyle{headings} is active, which does not respect the settings made by option \Option{nouppercase}. \end{Example} @@ -1145,15 +1072,13 @@ headings in uppercase letters. Also in these cases the option \Option{nouppercase} should be able to switch back to the normal mixed case headings.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{nouppercase} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Defining Own Page Styles}\label{sec:scrpage-en.UI} -% -% + \subsection{The Interface for Beginners}\label{sec:scrpage-en.UI.user} % \deftripstyle -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle}\Index{page>style} Now one would not like to remain bound to only the provided page styles, but may wish to define one's own page styles. Sometimes there @@ -1161,10 +1086,10 @@ will be a special need, since a specific \emph{Corporate Identity} may require the declaration of its own page styles. The easiest way to deal with this is: \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{deftripstyle}\Parameter{name}% -\OParameter{LO}\OParameter{LI}% -\Parameter{HI}\Parameter{HC}\Parameter{HO}% -\Parameter{FI}\Parameter{FC}\Parameter{FO} + \Macro{deftripstyle}\Parameter{name}% + \OParameter{LO}\OParameter{LI}% + \Parameter{HI}\Parameter{HC}\Parameter{HO}% + \Parameter{FI}\Parameter{FC}\Parameter{FO} \end{Declaration}% The individual parameters have the following meanings: \begin{labeling}[\,--]{\PName{Name}} @@ -1266,13 +1191,12 @@ below header and footer can take place. \typeout{^^J--- Don't ignore underfull and overfull \string\hbox:^^J} \end{figure} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{The Interface for Experts}\label{sec:scrpage-en.UI.expert} % \defpagestyle \newpagestyle \providepagestyle \renewpagestyle -\Index{page>style} -Simple page styles, as they can be defined with \Macro{deftripstyle}, +Simple page styles, as they can be defined with \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.deftripstyle}, are fairly rare according to experience. Either a professor requires that the thesis looks like his or her own\,---\,and who seriously wants to argue against such a wish?\,---\,or a company would like that half the @@ -1280,13 +1204,11 @@ financial accounting emerges in the page footer. No problem, the solution is: % \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}\\ -\Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}\\ -\Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}\\ -\Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition} + \Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}% + \Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}% + \Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition}% + \Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{name}\Parameter{header definition}\Parameter{footer definition} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% These four commands give full access to the capabilities of \Package{scrpage2} to define page styles. Their structure is indentical, they differ only in the manner of working. @@ -1332,7 +1254,7 @@ structure. The individual parameters have the following meanings: If the optional line-parameters are omitted, then the line behaviour remains configurable by the commands introduced in \autoref{sec:scrpage-en.basics.format}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-en.cmd.setheadtopline}. +\DescPageRef{scrpage-en.cmd.setheadtopline}. The three elements \PName{EP}, \PName{OP} and \PName{OS} are boxes with the width of page header or footer, as appropriate. The corresponding definitions @@ -1363,10 +1285,10 @@ example. \begin{Example} This examples uses the document class \Class{scrbook}, which means that the default page layout is two-sided. The package - \Package{scrpage2} is loaded with options \Option{automark} and - \Option{headsepline}. The first switches on the automatic update of + \Package{scrpage2} is loaded with options \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.automark} and + \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headsepline}. The first switches on the automatic update of running headings, the second determines that a separation line - between header and text body is drawn in the \Pagestyle{scrheadings} + between header and text body is drawn in the \PageStyle{scrheadings} page style. \begin{lstcode} @@ -1409,13 +1331,13 @@ example. \end{lstcode} Right at the beginning of the document the page style - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} is activated. The command \Macro{chapter} starts + \PageStyle{scrheadings} is activated. The command \Macro{chapter} starts a new chapter and automatically sets the page rstyle for this page to - \Pagestyle{plain}. Even though not a prime example, the command - \Macro{chead} shows how running headings can be created even on a + \PageStyle{plain}. Even though not a prime example, the command + \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.chead} shows how running headings can be created even on a plain page. However, in principle running headings on chapter start-pages are to be avoided, since otherwise the special - character of the \Pagestyle{plain} page style is lost. It is more + character of the \PageStyle{plain} page style is lost. It is more important to indicate that a new chapter starts here than that a section of this page has a special title. @@ -1437,7 +1359,7 @@ example. Every System has an extensive state quantity]{10,9} \end{XmpTopPage} - After starting a new page the page style \Pagestyle{scrheadings} is + After starting a new page the page style \PageStyle{scrheadings} is active and thus the separation line below the header is visible. \begin{lstcode} There is a state quatity of a system, called entropy, whose temporal @@ -1453,11 +1375,11 @@ example. \end{XmpTopPage} After switching to the next page, the automatic update of the running - headings is disabled using \Macro{manualmark}, and the page style + headings is disabled using \DescRef{scrpage-en.cmd.manualmark}, and the page style \PValue{withoutLines} becomes active. Since no line parameters are given in the definition of this page style, the default configuration is used, which draws a separation line between header and text body - because \Package{scrpage2} was called with \Option{headsepline}. + because \Package{scrpage2} was called with \DescRef{scrpage-en.option.headsepline}. \begin{lstcode} \manualmark \pagestyle{withoutLines} @@ -1496,8 +1418,7 @@ example. \[ B = U + T (S_1 - S_u) - p (V_1 - V_u)\] ]{20,20} \end{XmpTopPage} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Managing Page Styles}\label{sec:scrpage-en.UI.cfgFile} @@ -1511,7 +1432,8 @@ time-consuming copy operations each time a new project is started, initialisation. This file can contain a set of user-defined page styles which many projects can share. \EndIndex{File}{scrpage.cfg} -\EndIndex{Package}{scrpage2} +\EndIndexGroup + % ============================================================================ @@ -1539,7 +1461,9 @@ styles which many projects can share. \chapter{Kopf- und Fußzeilen mit \Package{scrpage2}} \labelbase{scrpage-de} % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{Package}{scrpage2}% +\BeginIndex{}{Seitenstil} Mit \KOMAScript~3.12 wurde das komplett neu implementierte Paket \Package{scrlayer-scrpage} vorgestellt, das eine konsequente Weiterführung des Designs von \Package{scrpage2} mit anderen Mitteln darstellt. Siehe dazu das @@ -1571,17 +1495,17 @@ Entwicklungsresourcen im Bereich Kopf- und Fußzeilen werden zukünftig in \begin{Explain} Um die nachfolgende Beschreibung zu verstehen, muss noch einiges zu \LaTeX{} gesagt werden. Im \LaTeX-Kern sind die Standardseitenstile - \Pagestyle{empty}, welcher eine völlig undekorierte Seite erzeugt, und - \Pagestyle{plain}, welcher meist nur die Seitenzahl enthält, definiert. In - vielen Klassen ist der Stil \Pagestyle{headings} zu finden, welcher eine + \PageStyle{empty}, welcher eine völlig undekorierte Seite erzeugt, und + \PageStyle{plain}, welcher meist nur die Seitenzahl enthält, definiert. In + vielen Klassen ist der Stil \PageStyle{headings} zu finden, welcher eine komplexe Seitendekoration mit automatischen Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} erzeugt. Die Variante - \Pagestyle{myheadings} gleicht \Pagestyle{headings}. Die Kolumnentitel + \PageStyle{myheadings} gleicht \PageStyle{headings}. Die Kolumnentitel müssen dabei aber manuell\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gesetzt werden. Ausführlicher wird das im Abschnitt über Seitenstile der \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben. Dort wird auch erläutert, dass auf einigen Seiten der Seitenstil automatisch -- in der Regel zu - \Pagestyle{plain} -- wechselt. + \PageStyle{plain} -- wechselt. \end{Explain} Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} unterscheidet nicht mehr zwischen Seitenstilen @@ -1600,83 +1524,62 @@ vordefinierte, konfigurierbare Seitenstile. % \headmark \pagemark \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\\ - \Pagestyle{scrplain} + \PageStyle{scrheadings}% + \PageStyle{scrplain} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{scrplain}% -\Index{Seiten>Stil}% Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} liefert für Seiten mit Kolumnentitel einen -eigenen Seitenstil namens \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. Dieser Seitenstil kann +eigenen Seitenstil namens \PageStyle{scrheadings}. Dieser Seitenstil kann mittels \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{scrheadings} aktiviert werden. Wird dieser Seitenstil benutzt, dann wird gleichzeitig der plain-Stil durch den -dazu passenden Stil \Pagestyle{scrplain} ersetzt. Passend bedeutet, dass auch +dazu passenden Stil \PageStyle{scrplain} ersetzt. Passend bedeutet, dass auch der plain-Stil auf in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format} vorgestellte Befehle, die beispielsweise die Kopfbreite ändern, reagiert und im Grundlayout -übereinstimmt. Die Aktivierung des Seitenstils \Pagestyle{scrheadings} oder -des zugehörigen plain-Stils, \Pagestyle{scrplain}, hat keine Auswirkung +übereinstimmt. Die Aktivierung des Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} oder +des zugehörigen plain-Stils, \PageStyle{scrplain}, hat keine Auswirkung darauf, ob mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}\Index{Kolumnentitel>manuell} gearbeitet wird (siehe \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}). Der Seitenstil -\Pagestyle{scrplain} kann auch direkt per \Macro{pagestyle} aktiviert werden. +\PageStyle{scrplain} kann auch direkt per \Macro{pagestyle} aktiviert werden. \begin{Declaration} \Macro{lehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-links-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-links-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-gerade}% \Macro{cehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-gerade}% \Macro{rehead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-gerade}% \Macro{lefoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-links-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-links-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-gerade}% \Macro{cefoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-gerade}% \Macro{refoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-gerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-gerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-gerade}% \Macro{lohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-links-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-links-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-ungerade}% \Macro{cohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-ungerade}% \Macro{rohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-ungerade}% \Macro{lofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-links-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-links-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-links-ungerade}% \Macro{cofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-mittig-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-mittig-ungerade}% \Macro{rofoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-ungerade}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-rechts-ungerade}\Parameter{scrheadings-rechts-ungerade}% \Macro{ihead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-innen}\Parameter{scrheadings-innen}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-innen}\Parameter{scrheadings-innen}% \Macro{chead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}% \Macro{ohead}% - \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen}% \Macro{ifoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-innen}\Parameter{scrheadings-innen}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-innen}\Parameter{scrheadings-innen}% \Macro{cfoot}% - \OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}\\ + \OParameter{scrplain-zentriert}\Parameter{scrheadings-zentriert}% \Macro{ofoot}% \OParameter{scrplain-außen}\Parameter{scrheadings-außen} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ihead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{chead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rfoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% Die Seitenstile von \Package{scrpage2} sind so definiert, dass ihr Kopf und Fuß flexibel angepasst werden kann. Hierzu sind sowohl im Kopf als auch im Fuß drei Felder vorhanden, deren Inhalt modifiziert werden kann. Die Befehle @@ -1685,8 +1588,8 @@ in der Mitte dargestellten Befehle modifizieren sowohl die Felder der linken als auch der rechten Seite. Alle Befehle haben sowohl ein optionales als auch ein obligatorisches Argument. Das optionale Argument bestimmt jeweils das durch den Befehl festgelegte Feld im plain-Seitenstil, -\Pagestyle{scrplain}. Das obligatorische Argument definiert das entsprechende -Feld im Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. +\PageStyle{scrplain}. Das obligatorische Argument definiert das entsprechende +Feld im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings}. \begin{figure} % \centering @@ -1695,7 +1598,7 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. [Befehle zur Manipulation der \Package{scrpage2}-Seitenstile]% {\hspace{0pt plus 1ex}% Zuord\-nung der Befehle zur Manipulation der beiden Seiten\-stile - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{scrplain} zu den Feldern im + \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{scrplain} zu den Feldern im Kopf und Fuß der Seiten} [l] \setlength{\unitlength}{.95mm}\begin{picture}(100,65)(0,8)\small @@ -1720,50 +1623,50 @@ Feld im Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings}. % die Befehle und Pfeile % für beidseitig % - \put(50,65){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ihead}}} + \put(50,65){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ihead}}} \put(44,65){\vector(-1,0){4}}\put(56,65){\vector(1,0){4}} - \put(50,58){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{chead}}} + \put(50,58){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.chead}}} \put(44,58){\line(-1,0){24}}\put(56,58){\line(1,0){24}} \put(20,58){\vector(0,1){4}}\put(80,58){\vector(0,1){4}} - \put(50,51){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ohead}}} + \put(50,51){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ohead}}} \put(44,51){\line(-1,0){40}}\put(56,51){\line(1,0){40}} \put(4,51){\vector(0,1){11}}\put(96,51){\vector(0,1){11}} % - \put(50,15){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ifoot}}} + \put(50,15){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ifoot}}} \put(56,15){\vector(1,0){4}}\put(44,15){\vector(-1,0){4}} - \put(50,22){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{cfoot}}} + \put(50,22){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cfoot}}} \put(44,22){\line(-1,0){24}}\put(56,22){\line(1,0){24}} \put(20,22){\vector(0,-1){4}}\put(80,22){\vector(0,-1){4}} - \put(50,29){\makebox(0,0){\Macro{ofoot}}} + \put(50,29){\makebox(0,0){\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.ofoot}}} \put(44,29){\line(-1,0){40}}\put(56,29){\line(1,0){40}} \put(4,29){\vector(0,-1){11}}\put(96,29){\vector(0,-1){11}} % Befehle für einseitig - \put(5,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{lehead}}} - \put(20,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{cehead}}} - \put(35,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{rehead}}} + \put(5,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.lehead}}} + \put(20,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cehead}}} + \put(35,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.rehead}}} % - \put(65,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{lohead}}} - \put(80,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{cohead}}} - \put(95,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\Macro{rohead}}} + \put(65,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.lohead}}} + \put(80,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cohead}}} + \put(95,69){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.rohead}}} % - \put(5,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{lefoot}}} - \put(20,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{cefoot}}} - \put(35,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{refoot}}} + \put(5,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.lefoot}}} + \put(20,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cefoot}}} + \put(35,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.refoot}}} % - \put(65,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{lofoot}}} - \put(80,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{cofoot}}} - \put(95,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\Macro{rofoot}}} + \put(65,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.lofoot}}} + \put(80,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.cofoot}}} + \put(95,11){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.rofoot}}} \end{picture} \end{captionbeside} % \caption[Befehle zur Manipulation der \Package{scrpage2}-Seitenstile]% % {Zuordnung der Befehle zur Manipulation der Seitenstile -% \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{scrplain} zu den manipulierten +% \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{scrplain} zu den manipulierten % Seitenelementen} \label{fig:scrpage-de.leheadetall} \end{figure} \begin{Example} - Angenommen, man möchte bei \Pagestyle{scrheadings} zentriert im Seitenfuß + Angenommen, man möchte bei \PageStyle{scrheadings} zentriert im Seitenfuß die Seitenzahl dargestellt haben, dann benutzt man einfach: \begin{lstcode} \cfoot{\pagemark} @@ -1797,39 +1700,35 @@ anspruchsvollere Vorhaben genutzt werden. besprochen wird. \end{Example} -Wie oben dargestellt, gibt es einen zu \Pagestyle{scrheadings} +Wie oben dargestellt, gibt es einen zu \PageStyle{scrheadings} korrespondierenden plain-Seitenstil. Da es auch möglich sein soll, diesen Stil anzupassen, unterstüt"-zen die Befehle ein optionales Argument. Damit kann der Inhalt des entsprechenden Feldes im plain-Seitenstil modifiziert werden. \begin{Example} - Um für die Nutzung von \Pagestyle{scrheadings} die Position der Seitenzahlen + Um für die Nutzung von \PageStyle{scrheadings} die Position der Seitenzahlen festzulegen, kann man folgendes benutzen: \begin{lstcode} \cfoot[\pagemark]{} \ohead[]{\pagemark} \end{lstcode} - Wird anschließend der Stil \Pagestyle{plain} genutzt, beispielsweise weil + Wird anschließend der Stil \PageStyle{plain} genutzt, beispielsweise weil \Macro{chapter} eine neue Seite beginnt und darauf umschaltet, dann steht die Seitenzahl zentriert im Seitenfuß. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{scrplain}% +\EndIndexGroup % Die folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefuegt von % mjk 2001-08-18 \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{clearscrheadings}\\ - \Macro{clearscrplain}\\ + \Macro{clearscrheadings}% + \Macro{clearscrplain}% \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% -Will man sowohl den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} als auch den dazu +Will man sowohl den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} als auch den dazu gehörenden plain-Seitenstil von Grund auf neu definieren, muss man häufig zusätzlich einige der bereits belegten Seitenelemente löschen. Da man selten alle Elemente mit neuem Inhalt füllt, sind @@ -1837,7 +1736,7 @@ dazu in den meisten Fällen mehrere Befehle mit leeren Parametern notwendig. Mit Hilfe dieser drei Befehle ist das Löschen schnell und gründlich möglich. Während \Macro{clearscrheadings} lediglich alle -Felder des Seitenstils \Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Macro{clearscrplain} +Felder des Seitenstils \PageStyle{scrheadings} und \Macro{clearscrplain} alle Felder des zugehörigen plain-Seitenstils löscht, werden von \Macro{clearscrheadfoot} alle Felder beider Seitenstile auf leere Inhalte gesetzt. @@ -1865,16 +1764,10 @@ Inhalte gesetzt. konkreten Vorbelegung ausginge. \end{Example} % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadings}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrplain}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{clearscrheadfoot}% +\EndIndexGroup % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lehead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cehead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rehead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ihead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{chead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{ohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lohead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cohead}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rohead}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lefoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cefoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{refoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{ifoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cfoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rfoot}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{lofoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{cofoot}\EndIndex{Cmd}{rofoot}% +\EndIndexGroup + % Satz leicht geaendert: mjk 2001-08-18 In den vorausgehenden Beispielen wurden schon zwei Befehle benutzt, die noch @@ -1883,11 +1776,9 @@ gar nicht besprochen wurden. Das soll jetzt nachgeholt werden. % Die folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefuegt von % mjk 2001-08-17 \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{leftmark}\\ + \Macro{leftmark}% \Macro{rightmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% Diese beiden Befehle erlauben es, auf die Kolumnentitel zuzugreifen, die normalerweise für die linke bzw. die rechte Seite gedacht sind. Diese beiden Befehle werden nicht von \Package{scrpage2}, sondern direkt vom \LaTeX-Kern @@ -1895,74 +1786,70 @@ zur Verfügung gestellt. Wenn in diesem Kapitel vom Kolumnentitel der linken Seite oder vom Kolumnentitel der rechten Seite die Rede ist, dann ist damit eigentlich der Inhalt von \Macro{leftmark} und \Macro{rightmark} gemeint. % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{leftmark}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{rightmark}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{headmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headmark}% Dieser Befehl ermöglicht es, auf die Inhalte der Kolumnentitel zuzugreifen. Im Gegensatz zu den originalen \LaTeX{}-Befehlen \Macro{leftmark} und \Macro{rightmark} braucht man nicht auf die richtige Zuordnung zur linken oder rechten Seite zu achten.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headmark} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{pagemark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pagemark}% Dieser Befehl ermöglicht den Zugriff auf die Seitenzahl. Im -\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format}, \autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.cmd.pnumfont} -wird der Befehl \Macro{pnumfont} zur Formatierung der Seitenzahl vorgestellt, +\autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format}, \DescPageRef{scrpage-de.cmd.pnumfont} +wird der Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.pnumfont} zur Formatierung der Seitenzahl vorgestellt, den \Macro{pagemark} automatisch berücksichtigt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pagemark} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} - \Pagestyle{useheadings} + \PageStyle{useheadings} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings}% Das Paket \Package{scrpage2} ist in erster Linie dafür gedacht, dass die bereitgestellten Stile benutzt oder eigene Stile definiert werden. Jedoch kann es notwendig sein, auch auf einen von der Dokumentklasse zur Verfügung gestellten Stil zurückzuschalten. Es wäre nahe liegend, dieses mit \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{headings} vorzunehmen. Das hätte aber den -Nachteil, dass die nachfolgend besprochenen Befehle \Macro{automark} und -\Macro{manualmark} nicht wie erwartet funktionierten. Daher sollte mit +Nachteil, dass die nachfolgend besprochenen Befehle \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} und +\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark} nicht wie erwartet funktionierten. Daher sollte mit \Macro{pagestyle}\PParameter{useheadings}\IndexCmd{pagestyle} auf die originalen Stile umgeschaltet werden. Eine solche Umschaltung hat dann keine Auswirkung darauf, ob mit manuellen oder automatischen Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet wird.% % -\EndIndex{Pagestyle}{useheadings} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Manuelle und automatische Kolumnentitel} \label{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark} % \automark \manualmark % +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}% \BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}% -Gewöhnlich\textnote{Achtung!} gibt es zu einem \Pagestyle{headings}-Stil eine +Gewöhnlich\textnote{Achtung!} gibt es zu einem \PageStyle{headings}-Stil eine \emph{my}-Variante. Ist ein solcher Stil aktiv, dann werden die Kolumnentitel nicht mehr automatisch aktualisiert. Bei \Package{scrpage2} wird ein anderer Weg beschritten. Ob die Kolumnentitel lebend sind oder nicht, bestimmen die -Befehle \Macro{automark} und \Macro{manualmark}. Die Voreinstellung kann auch -bereits beim Laden des Paketes über die Optionen \Option{automark} und -\Option{manualmark} beeinflusst werden (siehe +Befehle \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark}. Die Voreinstellung kann auch +bereits beim Laden des Paketes über die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.automark} und +\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.manualmark} beeinflusst werden (siehe \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.option.automark}). +\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.automark}). \begin{Declaration} \Macro{manualmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{manualmark}% Wie der Name bereits verdeutlicht, schaltet \Macro{manualmark} die Aktualisierung der Kolumnentitel aus. Es bleibt somit dem Nutzer überlassen, für eine Aktualisierung bzw. für den Inhalt der Kolumnentitel zu sorgen. Dazu @@ -1971,14 +1858,13 @@ stehen die Befehle \Macro{markboth}\IndexCmd{markboth} und Anweisungen sind im Abschnitt über Seitenstile in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung erklärt.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{manualmark} +\EndIndexGroup % Ergaenzt mjk 2001-07-17 \begin{Declaration} \Macro{automark}\OParameter{rechte Seite}\Parameter{linke Seite} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{automark}% Die Anweisung \Macro{automark} aktiviert die automatische Aktualisierung des Kolumnentitels. Für die beiden Parameter sind die Bezeichnungen der Gliederungsebenen\Index{Gliederungsebenen} einzusetzen, deren Titel an @@ -1991,15 +1877,15 @@ nur von den \KOMAScript-Klassen ab Version~2.9s bekannt, dass dieser Wert unterstützt wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{rechte Seite} ist ver\-ständlicherweise nur für zweiseitigen Satz gedacht. Im einseitigen Satz sollten Sie normalerweise darauf verzichten. Mit Hilfe der Option -\Option{autooneside}\IndexOption{autooneside}\important{\Option{autooneside}} +\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}\IndexOption{autooneside}\important{\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}} können Sie auch einstellen, dass das optionale Argument im einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Satz automatisch ignoriert wird (siehe \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.option.autooneside}). +\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.autooneside}). \begin{Example} Wird beispielsweise mit einer \emph{book}-Klasse gearbeitet, deren höch\-ste Gliederungsebene \emph{chapter} ist, dann stellt nach einem vorhergehenden - \Macro{manualmark} der Befehl + \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.manualmark} der Befehl \begin{lstcode} \automark[section]{chapter} \end{lstcode} @@ -2021,9 +1907,8 @@ einseitigen\Index{einseitig} Satz automatisch ignoriert wird (siehe definiert. Obwohl sie nicht als internes Makro definiert ist, wird von einem direkten Gebrauch abgeraten. \end{Explain} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{automark} -\EndIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}% -\EndIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Formatierung der Kopf- und Fußzeilen} @@ -2037,13 +1922,10 @@ befriedigen. Deshalb soll es sich in diesem Abschnitt ausschließlich darum drehen. \begin{Declaration} - \Macro{headfont}\\ - \Macro{footfont}\\ + \Macro{headfont}% + \Macro{footfont}% \Macro{pnumfont} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{headfont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{footfont}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{pnumfont}% Die Schriftformatierung für den Seitenkopf und -fuß übernimmt der Befehl \Macro{headfont}, \Macro{footfont} die Abweichung davon für den Fuß und \Macro{pnumfont} wiederum die Abweichung davon für die Seitenzahl. @@ -2060,11 +1942,8 @@ Die Schriftformatierung für den Seitenkopf und -fuß übernimmt der Befehl \normalfont\rmfamily\slshape} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{pnumfont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{footfont}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{headfont}% - +\BeginIndexGroup \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% \BeginIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% @@ -2085,17 +1964,14 @@ wie sie in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung beschrieben wird. \normalfont\rmfamily\slshape} \end{lstcode} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagenumber}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagefoot}% -\EndIndex{FontElement}{pagehead}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{setheadwidth}\OParameter{Verschiebung}\Parameter{Breite}\\ +\Macro{setheadwidth}\OParameter{Verschiebung}\Parameter{Breite}% \Macro{setfootwidth}\OParameter{Verschiebung}\Parameter{Breite} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadwidth}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootwidth}% Normalerweise entsprechen die Breiten von Kopf- und Fußzeile der Breite des Textbereichs.\Index{Kopf>Breite}\Index{Fuss=Fuß>Breite} Die beiden Befehle \Macro{setheadwidth} und \Macro{setfootwidth} ermöglichen dem Anwender, auf @@ -2178,28 +2054,26 @@ der der aktuellen Seitengestalt entspricht. Wie zu sehen, ist der Kopf jetzt nach innen verschoben, wobei die Kopfbreite sich nicht geändert hat. Die Verschiebung ist so berechnet, dass die Seitenproportionen auch hier sichtbar werden. -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadwidth}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootwidth} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} \Macro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}% - \OParameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \OParameter{Anweisungen}% \Macro{setheadsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}% - \OParameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \OParameter{Anweisungen}% \Macro{setfootsepline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}% - \OParameter{Anweisungen}\\ + \OParameter{Anweisungen}% \Macro{setfootbotline}\OParameter{Länge}\Parameter{Dicke}% \OParameter{Anweisungen} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootsepline}\BeginIndex{Cmd}{setfootbotline}% Entsprechend den Größenparametern für die Kopf- und Fußzeile gibt es auch Befehle, die die Dimensionen der Linien im Kopf und Fuß modifizieren können. Dazu sollten diese Linien aber zunächst erst einmal eingeschaltet -werden. Siehe hierzu die Optionen \Option{headtopline}, \Option{headsepline}, -\Option{footsepline}, \Option{footbotline} in +werden. Siehe hierzu die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headtopline}, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline}, +\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footsepline}, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footbotline} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.option.headsepline}. +\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline}. \begin{labeling}[\ --]{\Macro{setfootsepline}} \item[\Macro{setheadtopline}] modifiziert die Parameter für die Linie @@ -2214,7 +2088,7 @@ unter dem Seitenfuß Das obligatorische Argument \PName{Dicke} bestimmt, wie stark die Linie gezeichnet wird. Das optionale Argument \PName{Länge} akzeptiert die gleichen -symbolischen Werte wie \PName{Breite} bei \Macro{setheadwidth}, also auch einen +symbolischen Werte wie \PName{Breite} bei \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setheadwidth}, also auch einen normalen Längenausdruck. Solange im Dokument dem optionalen Argument \PName{Länge} kein Wert zugewiesen wurde, passt sich die entsprechende Linienlänge automatisch der Breite des Kopfes bzw. des Fußes an. @@ -2243,12 +2117,17 @@ gesetzt und mit \Macro{addtokomafont}\IndexCmd{addtokomafont} erweitert werden. Die beiden Anweisungen \Macro{setkomafont} und \Macro{addtokomafont} sind in der \KOMAScript-Anleitung näher beschrieben. + \begin{Declaration} -\XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}\Parameter{\upshape\PValue{current}}\\ -\XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}\Parameter{}\\ -\XMacro{setheadtopline}\OParameter{\upshape\PValue{auto}}\Parameter{}\OParameter{} + \labelsuffix[auto+current]% + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto} + \PParameter{current}% + \labelsuffix[auto] + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}\Parameter{}% + \labelsuffix[auto+] + \Macro{setheadtopline}\POParameter{auto}\Parameter{}\OParameter{} \end{Declaration}% -Die hier am Befehl \Macro{setheadtopline} illustrierten Argumente +Die hier am Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setheadtopline} illustrierten Argumente sind natürlich auch für die anderen drei Längenbefehle gültig. Enthält das obligatorische Argument den Wert \PValue{current} oder wird @@ -2270,7 +2149,7 @@ Anweisungen wieder gelöscht. \setheadsepline{.4pt} \end{lstcode} Zusätzlich\textnote{Achtung!} sind unbedingt die Optionen -\Option{headtopline} und \Option{headsepline} vorzugsweise global im +\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headtopline} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline} vorzugsweise global im optionalen Argument von \Macro{documentclass} zu setzen. Das Ergebnis könnte dann wie folgt aussehen. % @@ -2304,7 +2183,7 @@ dann wie folgt aussehen. verwendet werden. Die automatische Anpassung an die Kopf- und Fußbreiten illustriert folgendes - Beispiel, für das die Optionen \Option{footbotline} und \Option{footsepline} + Beispiel, für das die Optionen \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footbotline} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footsepline} gesetzt sein sollten: \begin{lstcode} \setfootbotline{2pt} @@ -2329,8 +2208,8 @@ linksbündig zum Text ist. Diese Einstellung kann nur global in Form einer Paketoption erfolgen und wird im folgenden \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.options} mit anderen Optionen beschrieben.% % -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadtopline}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setheadsepline}% -\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootsepline}\EndIndex{Cmd}{setfootbotline}% +\EndIndexGroup +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Optionen beim Laden des Paketes} @@ -2349,13 +2228,11 @@ im optionalen Argument von \Macro{usepackage}, angegeben werden. % markuppercase markusecase % automark manualmark \begin{Declaration} -\Option{headinclude}\\ -\Option{headexclude}\\ -\Option{footinclude}\\ -\Option{footexclude} + \Option{headinclude}% + \Option{headexclude}% + \Option{footinclude}% + \Option{footexclude} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headinclude}\BeginIndex{Option}{footinclude}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headexclude}\BeginIndex{Option}{footexclude}% Diese\textnote{Achtung!} Optionen sollten bei Verwendung von \KOMAScript~3\ChangedAt{v2.3}{\Package{scrpage2}} nicht mehr beispielsweise per optionalem Argument von \Macro{usepackage} oder per @@ -2365,29 +2242,24 @@ werden. Lediglich aus Gründen der Kompatibilität sind sie noch in \OptionValue{headinclude}{false}, \Option{footinclude} und \OptionValue{footinclude}{false} an das Paket \Package{typearea} weitergereicht. -\EndIndex{Option}{headinclude}\EndIndex{Option}{footinclude}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headexclude}\EndIndex{Option}{footexclude} +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{headtopline}\\ -\Option{plainheadtopline}\\ -\Option{headsepline}\\ -\Option{plainheadsepline}\\ -\Option{footsepline}\\ -\Option{plainfootsepline}\\ -\Option{footbotline}\\ -\Option{plainfootbotline} + \Option{headtopline}% + \Option{plainheadtopline}% + \Option{headsepline}% + \Option{plainheadsepline}% + \Option{footsepline}% + \Option{plainfootsepline}% + \Option{footbotline}% + \Option{plainfootbotline} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headtopline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{headsepline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footsepline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{footbotline}\BeginIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline}% Eine Grundeinstellung für die Linien unter und über den Kopf- und Fußzeilen kann mit diesen Optionen vorgenommen werden. Diese Einstellungen gelten dann als Standard für alle mit \Package{scrpage2} definierten Seitenstile. Wird eine von diesen Optionen verwendet, dann wird eine Linienstärke von 0,4\,pt -eingesetzt. Da es zum Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} einen entsprechenden +eingesetzt. Da es zum Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} einen entsprechenden plain-Stil gibt, kann mit den \Option{plain\dots}-Optionen auch die entsprechende Linie des plain-Stils konfiguriert werden. Diese \Option{plain}-Optionen wirken aber nur, wenn auch die korrespondierende @@ -2404,24 +2276,18 @@ Die\textnote{Achtung!} Bedingungen für die Optionen des vorhergehenden Abschnitts gelten auch für diesen Automatismus. Das bedeutet, dass das Paket \Package{typearea} nach \Package{scrpage2} geladen werden muss, beziehungsweise, dass bei Verwendung einer \KOMAScript{}-Klasse die Optionen -\Option{headinclude} und \Option{footinclude} explizit bei +\DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headinclude} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.footinclude} explizit bei \Macro{documentclass} gesetzt werden müssen, um Kopf- bzw. Fußzeile in den Textblock zu übernehmen.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{headtopline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadtopline}% -\EndIndex{Option}{headsepline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainheadsepline}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footsepline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootsepline}% -\EndIndex{Option}{footbotline}\EndIndex{Option}{plainfootbotline}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{ilines}\\ -\Option{clines}\\ -\Option{olines} + \Option{ilines}% + \Option{clines}% + \Option{olines} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{ilines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{clines}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{olines}% \Index{Linienausrichtung}% Bei der Festlegung der Linienlängen kann es vorkommen, dass die Linie zwar die gewünschte Länge, aber nicht die erwünschte Ausrichtung hat, da sie im Kopf- @@ -2433,7 +2299,7 @@ verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am äußeren Rand aus. \begin{Example} - Hier gilt es, das Beispiel zu \Macro{setfootsepline} auf + Hier gilt es, das Beispiel zu \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setfootsepline} auf \autopageref{page:scrpage-de.autoLineLength} mit dem folgenden zu vergleichen, um die Wirkung der Option \Option{ilines} zu sehen. \begin{lstcode} @@ -2459,16 +2325,14 @@ verhält sich wie die Standardeinstellung und \Option{olines} richtet am Die Trennlinie zwischen Text und Fuß wird bündig innen im Fußteil gesetzt und nicht wie bei der Standardeinstellung zentriert. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Option}{ilines}\EndIndex{Option}{clines}\EndIndex{Option}{olines} +\EndIndexGroup % \phantomsection für hyperref-\pageref-Link jum-2001/11/24 \begin{Declaration} -\Option{automark}\\ -\Option{manualmark} + \Option{automark}% + \Option{manualmark} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{automark}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{manualmark}% \BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}% \BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}% Diese Optionen bestimmen gleich zu Beginn des Dokuments, ob eine automatische @@ -2487,14 +2351,14 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war. \documentclass{scrreprt} \usepackage{scrpage2} \end{lstcode} - Da bei \Class{scrreprt} der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{plain} voreingestellt + Da bei \Class{scrreprt} der Seitenstil \PageStyle{plain} voreingestellt ist, ist dies auch jetzt noch der Fall. Außerdem entspricht die - Voreinstellung \Pagestyle{plain} manuellen Kolumnentiteln. Wenn Sie + Voreinstellung \PageStyle{plain} manuellen Kolumnentiteln. Wenn Sie also anschließend mit \begin{lstcode} \pagestyle{scrheadings} \end{lstcode} - auf den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} umschalten, sind noch immer + auf den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} umschalten, sind noch immer manuelle Kolumnentitel eingestellt. Verwenden Sie stattdessen die Dokumentklasse \Class{scrbook}, so @@ -2503,9 +2367,9 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war. \documentclass{scrbook} \usepackage{scrpage2} \end{lstcode} - der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{headings} mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln + der Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings} mit automatischen Kolumnentiteln aktiviert. Bei anschließender Umschaltung auf den Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{scrheadings} bleiben automatische Kolumnentitel + \PageStyle{scrheadings} bleiben automatische Kolumnentitel eingeschaltet. Dabei werden dann weiterhin die Markierungsmakros von \Class{scrbook} verwendet. @@ -2517,13 +2381,13 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war. Kolumnentitel umgeschaltet, wobei die Markierungsmakros von \Package{scrpage2} genutzt werden. Natürlich wirkt sich dies auf den Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{plain} von \Class{scrreprt} nicht aus. Die Kolumnentitel + \PageStyle{plain} von \Class{scrreprt} nicht aus. Die Kolumnentitel werden erst sichtbar, wenn auf den Seitenstil - \Pagestyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} oder - \Pagestyle{useheadings} oder einen selbst definierten Seitenstil mit + \PageStyle{scrheadings}\IndexPagestyle{scrheadings} oder + \PageStyle{useheadings} oder einen selbst definierten Seitenstil mit Kolumnentiteln umgeschaltet wird. \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Option}{automark}\EndIndex{Option}{manualmark}% +\EndIndexGroup % Folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefügt von @@ -2531,27 +2395,23 @@ erhalten, die beim Laden des Paketes gültig war. \begin{Declaration} \Option{autooneside} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{autooneside}% +\BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}% +\BeginIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}% Mit dieser Option wird das optionale Argument von -\Macro{automark}\IndexCmd{automark}\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} im +\DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark}\IndexCmd{automark}\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} im einseitigen Satz automatisch ignoriert. Siehe hierzu auch die Erläuterung -zum Befehl \Macro{automark} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.cmd.automark}.% -% -\EndIndex{Option}{autooneside}% +zum Befehl \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.mark}, +\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark}.% % -\EndIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>automatisch}% -\EndIndex{}{Kolumnentitel>manuell}% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{komastyle}\\ -\Option{standardstyle} + \Option{komastyle}% + \Option{standardstyle} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{standardstyle}% Diese Optionen bestimmen, wie die beiden vordefinierten Seitenstile -\Pagestyle{scrheadings} und \Pagestyle{scrplain} gestaltet sind. +\PageStyle{scrheadings} und \PageStyle{scrplain} gestaltet sind. Bei \Option{komastyle} wird eine Definition vorgenommen, wie sie den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen entspricht. Bei den \KOMAScript{}-Klassen ist dies die Voreinstellung und @@ -2559,19 +2419,16 @@ kann somit auch für andere Klassen gesetzt werden. Die Option \Option{standardstyle} definiert die beiden Seitenstile wie es von den Standardklassen erwartet wird. -Außerdem wird hier automatisch \Option{markuppercase} aktiviert, -es sei denn, \Option{markusedcase} wird ebenfalls als Option übergeben.% -\EndIndex{Option}{komastyle}% -\EndIndex{Option}{standardstyle} +Außerdem wird hier automatisch \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} aktiviert, +es sei denn, \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase} wird ebenfalls als Option übergeben.% +\EndIndexGroup \begin{Declaration} -\Option{markuppercase}\\ -\Option{markusedcase} + \Option{markuppercase}% + \Option{markusedcase} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{markuppercase}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{markusedcase}% -Für die Funktionalität von \Macro{automark} modifiziert +Für die Funktionalität von \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.automark} modifiziert \Package{scrpage2} interne Befehle, die die Gliederungsbefehle benutzen, um die lebenden Kolumnentitel zu setzen. Da einige Klassen, im Gegensatz @@ -2586,15 +2443,15 @@ verwendet. Die\textnote{Achtung!} Optionen sind nicht geeignet, eine entsprechende Darstellung zu erzwingen. Es kann somit zu unerwünschten Effekten kommen, wenn die Angabe nicht dem Verhalten der Dokumentklasse entspricht.% -\EndIndex{Option}{markuppercase}\EndIndex{Option}{markusedcase} +\EndIndexGroup + % Die folgende Deklaration und Erklaerung wurde eingefuegt von % mjk 2001-08-18 \begin{Declaration} \Option{nouppercase} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Option}{nouppercase}% -Wie in obiger Erklärung zu \Option{markuppercase} und \Option{markusedcase} +Wie in obiger Erklärung zu \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markuppercase} und \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.markusedcase} bereits ausgeführt wurde, gibt es Klassen und auch Pakete, die beim Setzen der lebenden Kolumnentitel\Index{Kolumnentitel>automatisch} mit Hilfe einer der Anweisungen \Macro{uppercase}\IndexCmd{uppercase}\important{\Macro{uppercase}} @@ -2603,7 +2460,7 @@ oder den gesamten Eintrag in Großbuchstaben wandeln. Mit der Option \Option{nouppercase} können diese beiden Anweisungen im Kopf und im Fuß außer Kraft gesetzt werden. Das gilt aber nur für Seitenstile, die mit Hilfe von -\Package{scrpage2} definiert werden. Dazu zählen auch \Pagestyle{scrheadings} +\Package{scrpage2} definiert werden. Dazu zählen auch \PageStyle{scrheadings} und der zugehörige plain-Seitenstil. Die verwendete Methode ist äußerst brutal und kann dazu führen, dass @@ -2621,8 +2478,8 @@ meist eine brauchbare Lösung dar. \usepackage[nouppercase]{scrpage2} \pagestyle{scrheadings} \end{lstcode} - Die Umschaltung auf den Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} ist - notwendig, weil sonst der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{headings} verwendet + Die Umschaltung auf den Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} ist + notwendig, weil sonst der Seitenstil \PageStyle{headings} verwendet wird, der von der Option \Option{nouppercase} nicht behandelt wird. \end{Example} @@ -2631,7 +2488,7 @@ lebende Kolumnentitel in Großbuchstaben. Auch in diesen Fällen hilft \Option{nouppercase} meist, um zu gemischter Schreibweise zurückzuschalten.% % -\EndIndex{Option}{nouppercase} +\EndIndexGroup \section{Seitenstile selbst gestalten}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI} @@ -2640,19 +2497,17 @@ zurückzuschalten.% \subsection{Die Anwenderschnittstelle}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.user} % \deftripstyle -\Index{Seiten>Stil}% Nun möchte man ja nicht immer an die vorgegebenen Seitenstile gebunden sein, sondern auch seiner Kreativität freien Lauf lassen. Manchmal ist man auch dazu gezwungen, weil eine bestimmte \emph{Corporate Identity} einer Firma es verlangt. Der einfachste Weg damit umzugehen ist \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{deftripstyle}\Parameter{Name}% -\OParameter{LA}\OParameter{LI}% -\Parameter{KI}\Parameter{KM}\Parameter{KA}% -\Parameter{FI}\Parameter{FM}\Parameter{FA} + \Macro{deftripstyle}\Parameter{Name}% + \OParameter{LA}\OParameter{LI}% + \Parameter{KI}\Parameter{KM}\Parameter{KA}% + \Parameter{FI}\Parameter{FM}\Parameter{FA} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle}% Die einzelnen Felder haben folgende Bedeutung: \begin{labeling}[~--]{\PName{Name}} \item[\PName{Name}] die Bezeichnung des Seitenstils, die dann bei der @@ -2750,28 +2605,23 @@ Seitenstil keine Änderung der Kopf- und Fußlinien erfolgen kann. \typeout{^^J--- Don't ignore underfull and overfull \string\hbox:^^J}% \end{figure} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{deftripstyle} +\EndIndexGroup \subsection{Die Expertenschnittstelle}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.expert} % \defpagestyle \newpagestyle \providepagestyle \renewpagestyle -\Index{Seiten>Stil}% -Einfache Seitenstile, wie sie mit \Macro{deftripstyle} deklariert +Einfache Seitenstile, wie sie mit \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.deftripstyle} deklariert werden können, sind erfahrungsgemäß selten. Entweder verlangt ein Professor, dass die Diplomarbeit so aussieht wie seine eigene -- und wer will ihm da \emph{ernsthaft} widersprechen -- oder eine Firma möchte, dass die halbe Finanzbuchhaltung im Seitenfuß auf"|taucht. Alles kein Problem, denn es gibt noch: \begin{Declaration} -\Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ -\Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ -\Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}\\ -\Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition} + \Macro{defpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}% + \Macro{newpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}% + \Macro{renewpagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition}% + \Macro{providepagestyle}\Parameter{Name}\Parameter{Kopfdefinition}\Parameter{Fußdefinition} \end{Declaration}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}% -\BeginIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle}% Dies sind die Befehle, die die volle Kontrolle über die Gestaltung eines Seitenstils ermöglichen. Der Aufbau ist bei allen vier Definitionen gleich, sie unterscheiden sich nur hinsichtlich @@ -2817,7 +2667,7 @@ einzelnen Parameter haben folgende Bedeutung: Werden die optionalen Linienargumente nicht gesetzt, dann bleibt das Verhalten weiterhin durch die in \autoref{sec:scrpage-de.basics.format}, -\autopageref{desc:scrpage-de.cmd.setheadtopline} vorgestellten Linienbefehle +\DescPageRef{scrpage-de.cmd.setheadtopline} vorgestellten Linienbefehle konfigurierbar. Die drei Felder \PName{GS}, \PName{US} und \PName{ES} entsprechen Boxen, die @@ -2849,7 +2699,7 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel. Angenommen es wird die Dokumentklasse \Class{scrbook} genutzt. Damit liegt ein zweiseitiges Layout vor. Für das Paket \Package{scrpage2} wird festgelegt, dass mit automatisch aktualisierten Kolumnentiteln gearbeitet - wird und dass im Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} eine Trennlinie zwischen + wird und dass im Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} eine Trennlinie zwischen Kopf und Text gezogen wird. \begin{lstcode} @@ -2889,10 +2739,10 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel. } \end{lstcode} - Gleich zu Beginn wird der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Mit + Gleich zu Beginn wird der Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} aktiviert. Mit \Macro{chapter} wird ein neues Kapitel begonnen. Weiterhin wird automatisch - durch \Macro{chapter} der Seitenstil für diese Seite auf \Pagestyle{plain} - gesetzt. Das folgende \Macro{chead} zeigt, wie durch Modifikation des + durch \Macro{chapter} der Seitenstil für diese Seite auf \PageStyle{plain} + gesetzt. Das folgende \DescRef{scrpage-de.cmd.chead} zeigt, wie durch Modifikation des plain-Stils ein Kolumnentitel erzeugt werden kann. Grundsätzlich sollte jedoch davon Abstand genommen werden, da sonst der Markierungscharakter der plain-Seite verloren geht. Es ist wichtiger anzuzeigen, dass hier ein neues @@ -2918,7 +2768,7 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel. \linebreak]{10,9} \end{XmpTopPage} - Nach dem Seitenwechsel ist der Seitenstil \Pagestyle{scrheadings} + Nach dem Seitenwechsel ist der Seitenstil \PageStyle{scrheadings} aktiv, und somit auch die Trennlinie aus den Paketoptionen sichtbar. \begin{lstcode} Es existiert eine Zustandsgröße, genannt die @@ -2940,7 +2790,7 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel. und der Seitenstil \PValue{ohneLinien} aktiviert. Da keine Linienargumente bei der Definition dieses Stils genutzt wurden, wird die Standard-Linien\-konfiguration verwendet. Diese zeichnet hier eine Linie - zwischen Kopf und Text, da \Option{headsepline} als Argument für + zwischen Kopf und Text, da \DescRef{scrpage-de.option.headsepline} als Argument für \Package{scrpage2} angegeben wurde.% \begin{lstcode} \manualmark @@ -2980,8 +2830,8 @@ anderen Befehlen von \Package{scrpage2} nun als abschließendes Beispiel. \vspace{-.5ex}\[ B = U + T (S_1 - S_u) - p (V_1 - V_u)\] ]{20,21} \end{XmpTopPage} \end{Example} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{defpagestyle}\EndIndex{Cmd}{newpagestyle} -\EndIndex{Cmd}{renewpagestyle}\EndIndex{Cmd}{providepagestyle} +\EndIndexGroup + \subsection{Seitenstile verwalten}\label{sec:scrpage-de.UI.cfgFile} % scrpage.cfg @@ -2995,7 +2845,8 @@ am Ende seiner Initialisierungsphase die Datei \File{scrpage.cfg} ein. In dieser Datei können dann Seitenstile definiert sein, die viele Projekte gemeinsam nutzen können. \EndIndex{File}{scrpage.cfg} -\EndIndex{Package}{scrpage2} +% +\EndIndexGroup \end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-basics.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-basics.dtx index 986fa5a9d9a..7a198f3654c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-basics.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-basics.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{3571} +% \CheckSum{3578} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-basics.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-basics.dtx 2467 2016-05-27 18:35:47Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-basics.dtx 2490 2016-07-29 06:29:45Z kohm $ %<package&option>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01] %<*driver> \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\def\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-05-27 20:35:47 +0200 (Fri, 27 May 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-07-29 08:29:45 +0200 (Fri, 29 Jul 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\def\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1638 $ \xdef\fileinfo{\filedate\space\filerevision\space} @@ -4065,8 +4065,9 @@ % \begin{macro}{\KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption} % \changes{v3.01a}{2008/11/20}{neu (intern)}^^A % \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/04}{Test für \texttt{version!=first}}^^A -% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{vertauschte Logic für \texttt{version!=first}^^A -% korrigiert}^^A +% \changes{v3.12a}{2014/01/22}{vertauschte Logic für +% \texttt{version!=first} korrigiert}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{diverse \cs{detokenize} eingefügt}^^A % Die eigentliche Arbeit wird von diesem Makro erledigt. Die Argumente sind % 1. Meldungsbefehl, 2. obsolete Option, 3. Setzen des Schlüssels. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -4075,10 +4076,10 @@ \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{KV@KOMA.\@currname.\@currext @version}{% \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\endgroup \noexpand#1{% - You've used obsolete option `#2'.\noexpand\MessageBreak + You've used obsolete option `\detokenize{#2}'.\noexpand\MessageBreak Usage of this option is deprecated.\noexpand\MessageBreak - You should simply replace `#2'\noexpand\MessageBreak - by `#3'% + You should simply replace `\detokenize{#2}'\noexpand\MessageBreak + by `\detokenize{#3}'% }% \noexpand\KOMAExecuteOptions{#3}% \noexpand\def\noexpand\CurrentOption{\CurrentOption}% @@ -4086,14 +4087,14 @@ }{% \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand\endgroup \noexpand#1{% - You've used obsolete option `#2'.\noexpand\MessageBreak + You've used obsolete option `\detokenize{#2}'.\noexpand\MessageBreak Usage of this option indicates an old document\noexpand\MessageBreak and changes compatibility level using\noexpand\MessageBreak - `#3,version=first,\noexpand\MessageBreak + `\detokenize{#3},version=first,\noexpand\MessageBreak enabledeprecatedfontcommands' that may result\noexpand\MessageBreak in further warnings.\noexpand\MessageBreak If you don't want this, you should simply\noexpand\MessageBreak - replace option `#2' by `#3'% + replace option `\detokenize{#2}' by `\detokenize{#3}'% }% \noexpand\KOMAExecuteOptions{% #3,version=first}% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx index 7c3d434c761..c6ddb496f7d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-compatibility.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{211} +% \CheckSum{212} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-compatibility.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-compatibility.dtx 2461 2016-05-19 07:17:15Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-compatibility.dtx 2491 2016-07-29 08:03:57Z kohm $ %<*driver> % \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\def\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-05-19 09:17:15 +0200 (Thu, 19 May 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-07-29 10:03:57 +0200 (Fri, 29 Jul 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\def\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1638 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -399,6 +399,8 @@ % \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/06}{Neues Macro} % \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.21} % \changes{v3.21}{2016/05/19}{Neues Macro} +% \begin{macro}{\scr@v@3.22} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Neues Macro} % \begin{macro}{\scr@v@last} % \changes{v2.9u}{2005/03/05}{Neues Macro}^^A % Nun die unterschiedlichen möglichen Werte (|\scr@v@last| ist jeweils die @@ -466,7 +468,8 @@ \@namedef{scr@v@3.19a}{15} \@namedef{scr@v@3.20}{15} \@namedef{scr@v@3.21}{15} -\@namedef{scr@v@last}{15} +\@namedef{scr@v@3.22}{16} +\@namedef{scr@v@last}{16} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} @@ -517,6 +520,7 @@ % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-floats.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-floats.dtx index 621c4e2f431..569f3e92578 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-floats.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-floats.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{1479} +% \CheckSum{1515} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-floats.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-floats.dtx 2468 2016-05-31 11:27:28Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-floats.dtx 2498 2016-09-01 19:44:10Z kohm $ %<*driver> % \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-05-31 13:27:28 +0200 (Tue, 31 May 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-09-01 21:44:10 +0200 (Thu, 01 Sep 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1962 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -1272,14 +1272,41 @@ % \end{macrocode} % Danach wird der Test vorgenommen, ob der Text einzeilig oder % mehrzeilig zu setzen ist und entsprechend gehandelt: +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/01}{Umdefinierung von \cs{stepcounter} und +% \cs{refstepcounter} auf lokale Erhöhung des Zählers geändert, um Probleme +% mit \textsf{isodate} zu umgehen}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \begingroup \ifonelinecaptions - \let\stepcounter\@gobble - \let\refstepcounter\@gobble + \def\stepcounter##1{\advance\value{##1}\@ne}% + \let\refstepcounter\stepcounter \let\label\@gobble \let\@footnotetext=\@gobble \let\hypertarget\@gobbletwo +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/01}{Sonderbehandlung für \string\\ u.\,ä. im Text} +% Falls im Text ein \texttt{\string\\} oder \cs{newline} enthalten ist, +% wird ein Infotext ausgegeben und dafür gesorgt, dass mehrzeilig gearbeitet +% wird. +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\@xnewline{% + \unexpanded{\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{% + Workaround for not recommended usage of \string\\ or\MessageBreak + \string\newline in caption text + }% + \hspace*{\linewidth}\hspace{1sp}% + }% + \unexpanded\expandafter{\@xnewline}% + }% + \edef\@xcentercr{% + \unexpanded{\ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{% + Workaround for not recommended usage of \string\\ or\MessageBreak + \string\newline in caption text + }% + \hspace*{\linewidth}\hspace{1sp}% + }% + \unexpanded\expandafter{\@xcentercr}% + }% \settowidth{\@tempdima}{\scr@@makesinglelinecaption{#1}{#2}{#3}}% \ifdim\@tempdima>\linewidth \aftergroup\scr@makemultilinecaption diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-fonts.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-fonts.dtx index 9593eb7a133..5b88a0b29bd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-fonts.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-fonts.dtx @@ -55,12 +55,12 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-fonts.dtx 2428 2016-04-12 10:31:07Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-fonts.dtx 2501 2016-09-28 05:55:32Z kohm $ %<*driver> \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-04-12 12:31:07 +0200 (Tue, 12 Apr 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-09-28 07:55:32 +0200 (Wed, 28 Sep 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1827 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -1625,6 +1625,7 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macro}{\scr@ErrorWarningInfo} % \changes{v3.20}{2015/10/14}{neu (intern)}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/28}{message fixed}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareRobustCommand*{\scr@ErrorWarningInfo}[2]{% % \end{macrocode} @@ -1635,15 +1636,15 @@ \ClassError{\KOMAClassName}{undefined old font command `\string#1'}{% You should note that since 1994 LaTeX2e provides a new font selection scheme\MessageBreak - called NFSS2 with several new, combinable font commands. New + called NFSS2 with several new, combinable font commands. KOMA-Script\MessageBreak - classes have defined the old font commands like `\string#1' + classes had defined the old font commands like `\string#1' only for compatibility\MessageBreak with old LaTeX 2.09 document styles of Script 2.0. Nevertheless, these\MessageBreak - commands are deprecated and undocumented at least since - 2003. Since 2013\MessageBreak - KOMA-Script classes warn abouts soon removement of these deprecated + commands are deprecated and undocumented at least since 2003. Since + 2013\MessageBreak + KOMA-Script classes warned about soon removement of these deprecated commands.\MessageBreak Now, after two decades of LaTeX2e and NFSS2, these commands will not work any\MessageBreak @@ -1682,11 +1683,11 @@ You should note, that since 1994 LaTeX2e provides a\MessageBreak new font selection scheme called NFSS2 with several\MessageBreak new, combinable font commands. New KOMA-Script classes\MessageBreak - have defined the old font commands like `\string#1' only for\MessageBreak + defined the old font commands like `\string#1' only for\MessageBreak compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 document styles of\MessageBreak Script 2.0. These commands are deprecated and\MessageBreak undocumented at least since 2003. Since 2013,\MessageBreak - KOMA-Script classes warn about soon removement of\MessageBreak + KOMA-Script classes warned about soon removement of\MessageBreak these deprecated commands. Now, after two decades of\MessageBreak LaTeX2e, NFSS2, and KOMA-Script these commands will\MessageBreak not work any longer. If loading a package results in\MessageBreak diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx index 3a964c7c1ec..1639537a270 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-footnotes.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{432} +% \CheckSum{469} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-footnotes.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-footnotes.dtx 2180 2015-08-24 09:28:16Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-footnotes.dtx 2571 2017-01-03 13:04:47Z kohm $ %<*driver> % \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2015-08-24 11:28:16 +0200 (Mon, 24 Aug 2015) $ + \filedate$Date: 2017-01-03 14:04:47 +0100 (Tue, 03 Jan 2017) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1962 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -353,6 +353,7 @@ % \changes{v2.9l}{2003/01/28}{\cs{edef}\cs{@tempa} ersetzt} % \changes{v2.9q}{2004/01/31}{\cs{ftn@font} erlaubt aus Gr"unden der % Kompatibilität mit dem \textsl{footnote} Paket kein Argument mehr} +% \changes{v3.22}{2017/01/03}{Neuimplementierung}^^A % Dieses Makro zur Definition der Gestalt von Fußnoten erlaubt einen % optionalen und erwartet drei weitere Parameter. Der erste, optionale % gibt den Einzug der ersten Zeile des Fußnotentextes vom linken Rand @@ -366,28 +367,47 @@ % der Fußnote. Diese wird zusätzlich in eine \cs{hbox} gesetzt. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand\deffootnote[4][]{% - \long\def\@makefntext##1{% - \setlength{\@tempdimc}{#3}% - \def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty - \@setpar{\@@par - \@tempdima = \hsize - \addtolength{\@tempdima}{-#2}% - \parshape \@ne #2 \@tempdima}% - \else - \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{#2}% - \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{-#1}% - \@setpar{\@@par - \@tempdima = \hsize - \addtolength{\@tempdima}{-#1}% - \@tempdimb = \hsize - \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-#2}% - \parshape \tw@ #1 \@tempdima #2 \@tempdimb + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax + \long\def\@makefntext##1{% + \leftskip #2 + \l@addto@macro\@trivlist{% + \ifnum\@listdepth=\@ne\advance\leftmargin #2\relax\fi }% - \fi - \par - \parindent\@tempdimc\noindent - \ftn@font\hbox to \z@{\hss\@@makefnmark}##1% - }% + \parindent #3\noindent + \IfArgIsEmpty{#1}{}{% + \hskip \dimexpr #1-#2\relax + }% + \ftn@font\hbox to \z@{\hss\@@makefnmark}##1% + }% + \else +%<class> \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{% +%<package> \PackageInfo{scrextend}{% + Using old \string\@makefntext\space due to compatibility + level\MessageBreak + less than 3.22}% + \long\def\@makefntext##1{% + \setlength{\@tempdimc}{#3}% + \def\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty + \@setpar{\@@par + \@tempdima = \hsize + \addtolength{\@tempdima}{-#2}% + \parshape \@ne #2 \@tempdima}% + \else + \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{#2}% + \addtolength{\@tempdimc}{-#1}% + \@setpar{\@@par + \@tempdima = \hsize + \addtolength{\@tempdima}{-#1}% + \@tempdimb = \hsize + \addtolength{\@tempdimb}{-#2}% + \parshape \tw@ #1 \@tempdima #2 \@tempdimb + }% + \fi + \par + \parindent\@tempdimc\noindent + \ftn@font\hbox to \z@{\hss\@@makefnmark}##1% + }% + \fi % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macro}{\@@makefnmark} % \changes{v2.4l}{1997/02/06}{neu}^^A @@ -584,7 +604,7 @@ % Fußnotengestaltgebung}^^A % \begin{macro}{\@makefnmark} % \changes{v3.10}{2011/09/27}{\textsf{scrextend} redefines \cs{@makefnmark} -% to use \cs{thefootnotemark}} +% to use \cs{thefootnotemark}}^^A % \begin{macrocode} %<*class> \deffootnote[1em]{1.5em}{1em}{\textsuperscript{\thefootnotemark}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx index e00a47c4f30..8de7350c77a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{298} +% \CheckSum{316} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx 2318 2016-01-29 11:40:15Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-listsandtabulars.dtx 2503 2016-10-21 08:54:46Z kohm $ %<*driver> % \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-01-29 12:40:15 +0100 (Fri, 29 Jan 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-10-21 10:54:46 +0200 (Fri, 21 Oct 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1872 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -386,6 +386,8 @@ % \changes{v2.8q}{2001/11/29}{neue Umgebung}^^A % \changes{v2.95a}{2006-07-20}{\cs{@listdepth} korrigiert}^^A % \changes{v3.17}{2015/03/23}{robuster gegen Umbrüche am Anfang}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/02}{Umbruchtest nur für doppelseitige +% Dokumente}^^A % Diese beiden Umgebungen ähneln \texttt{quote} und % \texttt{quotation}. Dabei werden Absatzeinzug und Absatzabstand % nicht verändert. Die einzige Veränderung besteht in den Rändern. Wie @@ -409,7 +411,10 @@ % Der Rest wird von diesem Makro erledigt. % \begin{macro}{\scr@addmargin@startpage} % \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{neu (intern, lokal)}^^A -% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{Test auf Seitenumbruch in \texttt{addmargin*}} +% \changes{v3.12}{2013/10/26}{Test auf Seitenumbruch in +% \texttt{addmargin*}}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/10/21}{\cs{topsep} und \cs{partopsep} werden +% erhalten}^^A % \begin{macrocode} %</class> \newenvironment{addmargin}{% @@ -420,23 +425,25 @@ } \newenvironment{addmargin*}{% \@tempswafalse - \if@twoside\is@thispageodd[]\ifthispagewasodd\else\@tempswatrue\fi\fi - \edef\scr@addmargin@startpage{\csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname}% + \if@twoside\is@thispageodd[]\ifthispagewasodd\else\@tempswatrue\fi + \edef\scr@addmargin@startpage{\csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname}\fi \@addmargin }{% - \unskip\nobreak\ifthispageodd{}{}% - \expandafter\ifx\csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname\scr@addmargin@startpage\else -%<class> \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{% -%<package> \PackageWarning{scrextend}{% - page break inside `addmargin*' environment.\MessageBreak - A `addmargin*' environment starting on page - \scr@addmargin@startpage\MessageBreak - ends on page \csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname.\MessageBreak - This will result in potential wrong margins on\MessageBreak - every other page.\MessageBreak - So maybe you should change the `addmargin*'\MessageBreak - environment, that ends% - }% + \if@twoside + \unskip\nobreak\ifthispageodd{}{}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname\scr@addmargin@startpage\else +%<class> \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{% +%<package> \PackageWarning{scrextend}{% + page break inside `addmargin*' environment.\MessageBreak + A `addmargin*' environment starting on page + \scr@addmargin@startpage\MessageBreak + ends on page \csname tpo@\scr@tpo\endcsname.\MessageBreak + This will result in potential wrong margins on\MessageBreak + every other page.\MessageBreak + So maybe you should change the `addmargin*'\MessageBreak + environment, that ends% + }% + \fi \fi \advance\@listdepth\@ne \endlist @@ -455,13 +462,19 @@ \setlength{\listparindent}{\parindent}% \setlength{\itemsep}{\parskip}% \setlength{\itemindent}{\z@}% + \setlength{\@tempskipa}{\topsep}% \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}% \setlength{\parsep}{\parskip}% + \setlength{\@tempskipb}{\partopsep}% \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}% \let\makelabel\@gobble \setlength{\labelwidth}{\z@}% \advance\@listdepth\m@ne }% + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}% + \setlength{\topsep}{\@tempskipa}% + \setlength{\partopsep}{\@tempskipb}% + \fi \item\is@thispageodd@setlabel\nobreak\ignorespaces } %<*class> diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx index 6389635884f..dd0016a7776 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-notepaper.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{3390} +% \CheckSum{3392} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-notepaper.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-notepaper.dtx 2462 2016-05-19 07:18:47Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-notepaper.dtx 2564 2016-12-21 10:43:41Z kohm $ %<*driver> % \fi \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-05-19 09:18:47 +0200 (Thu, 19 May 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-12-21 11:43:41 +0100 (Wed, 21 Dec 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1767 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -1182,7 +1182,7 @@ {\centering\usekomafont{fromaddress}{% \ifkomavarempty{fromname}{}{% {\usekomafont{fromname}% - {\ignorespaces\usekomavar{fromname}}}\\[-8pt] + {\ignorespaces\usekomavar{fromname}}\\[-8pt]} {\usekomafont{fromrule}{\rule{\useplength{firstheadwidth}}{.4pt}}}\\ }% \ifkomavarempty{fromaddress}{}{% @@ -2357,7 +2357,12 @@ % \changes{v3.03}{2009/03/04}{Neue Anschriftmodi \texttt{PP}, % \texttt{backgroundimage}, \texttt{addresseeimage}} % \changes{v3.03b}{2009/06/30}{Schreibfehler bei »addressee« korrigiert}^^A -% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/07/29}{Absatzparameter werden passend eingestellt}^^A +% \changes{v3.06a}{2010/07/29}{Absatzparameter werden passend +% eingestellt}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{zweimal fehlende Klammern bei \texttt{toname} +% ergänzt}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{zweimal fehlende Klammern und \cs{endgraf} bei +% \texttt{toaddress} ergänzt}^^A % Dasselbe gilt auch für das Adressfeld für Fensterumschläge. Die % Rücksendeadresse und die Briefart werden dabei mit eigenen % Formatieranweisungen gesetzt. @@ -2434,8 +2439,8 @@ \addtolengthplength[-2]{\@tempdima}{toaddrindent}% \vbox{\hsize\@tempdima\raggedright \usekomafont{addressee}{% - \usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}% - \usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}}}}% + {\usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}}% + {\usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}\endgraf}}}}% \vfil\null\vskip-\baselineskip}% {address field}{toaddrheight}% {\begin{letter} or you\MessageBreak @@ -2596,8 +2601,8 @@ }% \raggedright \usekomafont{addressee}{% - \usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}% - \usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}}}}% + {\usekomafont{toname}{\usekomavar{toname}\\}}% + {\usekomafont{toaddress}{\usekomavar{toaddress}\endgraf}}}}% \fi \vss\null}% {address field}{toaddrheight}% @@ -3667,11 +3672,13 @@ % Darüber hinaus gibt es noch einen Verteiler. Dieser wird sauber formatiert. % \changes{v2.6}{2001/01/03}{\cs{def} durch \cs{newcommand*} ersetzt} % \changes{v2.8n}{2001/09/08}{Komplett "uberarbeitet}^^A -% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst} +% \changes{v2.9o}{2003/04/22}{\cs{parfillskip} angepasst}^^A % \changes{v2.9q}{2004/04/26}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{1em plus 1fil} -% geändert} +% geändert}^^A % \changes{v2.9r}{2004/05/25}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus -% 1fil} geändert} +% 1fil} geändert}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/15}{fehlender Stern bei \cs{ifkomavaremptry} +% ergänzt}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\cc}[1]{\par% \ifdim\parskip=\z@% @@ -3679,7 +3686,7 @@ \fi\noindent% \begingroup \parbox[t]{\textwidth}{% - \ifkomavarempty{ccseparator}{}{% + \ifkomavarempty*{ccseparator}{}{% \@hangfrom{% \strut\usekomavar*{ccseparator}\usekomavar{ccseparator}}% }% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx index 1f8077a88d1..7e11e57335e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-sections.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{3710} +% \CheckSum{3788} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-sections.dtx @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-sections.dtx 2477 2016-06-12 09:52:43Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-sections.dtx 2565 2016-12-21 17:25:47Z kohm $ % The runs of run-time file generation: %<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify) % - everything that is needed before selfidentification of resulting files @@ -78,9 +78,9 @@ \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-06-12 11:52:43 +0200 (Sun, 12 Jun 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-12-21 18:25:47 +0100 (Wed, 21 Dec 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{#2}} - \filerevision$Revision: 2477 $ + \filerevision$Revision: 2565 $ \edef\reserved@a{% \noexpand\endgroup \noexpand\ProvidesFile{scrkernel-sections.dtx}% @@ -825,16 +825,16 @@ \scr@istest#7=\@nil \fi \if@scr@tempswa - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#8},#7}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#8},reference={#8},#7}% \else \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7},reference={#7}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#7}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#8},head={#7},reference={#8}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#8}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#8},reference={#7}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#7},head={#7},reference={#7}}% \fi \fi \let\IfUsePrefixLine\@secondoftwo @@ -857,10 +857,14 @@ #6{\nobreak\interlinepenalty \@M \sectionlinesformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}\@@par}% \endgroup -%<trace> \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{head=`\scr@ds@head'}% - \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\scr@ds@head}% -%<trace> \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{tocentry=`\scr@ds@tocentry'}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else +%<*trace> + \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{% + head=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}'\MessageBreak + tocentry=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'\MessageBreak + reference=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'}% +%</trace> + \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}% + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{% \expandafter\global\expandafter\def \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname##1##2{% @@ -868,10 +872,10 @@ }% }{}% \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth - \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}% \else \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname the#1\endcsname}{% - \scr@ds@tocentry}% + \@currenttocentry}% \fi \fi \else @@ -883,11 +887,15 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \def\@svsechd{% #6{\nobreak\sectioncatchphraseformat{#1}{\glueexpr #3\relax}\@svsec{#8}}% -%<trace> \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{head=`\scr@ds@head'}% - \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname - \expandafter{\scr@ds@head}% -%<trace> \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{tocentry=`\scr@ds@tocentry'}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else +%<*trace> + \ClassInfo{\KOMAClassName}{% + head=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}'\MessageBreak + tocentry=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'\MessageBreak + reference=`\detokenize\expandafter{\@currenttocentry}'}% +%</trace> + \expandafter\csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname + \expandafter{\@currentheadentry}% + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{% \expandafter\global\expandafter\def \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname####1####2{% @@ -895,10 +903,10 @@ }% }{}% \ifnum \numexpr #2\relax>\c@secnumdepth - \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{}{\@currenttocentry}% \else \csname add#1tocentry\endcsname{\csname the#1\endcsname}{% - \scr@ds@tocentry}% + \@currenttocentry}% \fi \fi }% @@ -909,8 +917,16 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@tocentry} % \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A +% \begin{macro}{\@currenttocentry} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@tocentry} (semi-intern) +% umbenannt}^^A % \begin{macro}{\scr@ds@head} % \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A +% \begin{macro}{\@currentheadentry} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{\cs{scr@ds@head} (semi-intern) +% umbenannt}^^A +% \begin{macro}{\@currentlabelname} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/12}{neu (semi-intern)} % \begin{macro}{\if@scr@tempswa} % \changes{v3.10}{2011/08/30}{neu (intern)}^^A % \begin{macro}{\scr@istest} @@ -920,10 +936,30 @@ % \begin{macrocode} \DefineFamily{KOMAarg} \DefineFamilyMember[.section]{KOMAarg} -\DefineFamilyKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{tocentry}{\def\scr@ds@tocentry{#1}} -\DefineFamilyKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{head}{\def\scr@ds@head{#1}} -\newcommand*\scr@ds@tocentry{} -\newcommand*\scr@ds@head{} +\providecommand*\@currenttocentry{} +\providecommand*\@currentheadentry{} +\providecommand*\@currentlabelname{} +\FamilyStringKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{tocentry}{\@currenttocentry} +\FamilyStringKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{head}{\@currentheadentry} +\DefineFamilyKey[.section]{KOMAarg}{reference}{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{NR@gettitle}{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{GetTitleString}{% + \def\@currentlabelname{#1}% + }{% + \GetTitleString{#1}% + \let\@currentlabelname\GetTitleStringResult + }% + }{% + \NR@gettitle{#1}% + }% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{TR@gettitle}{}{% + \expandafter\TR@gettitle\expandafter{\@currentlabelname}% + }% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{ztitlerefsetup}{}{% + \ztitlerefsetup{title=\@currentlabelname}% + }% + \FamilyKeyStateProcessed +} \newcommand*{\scr@istest}{} \def\scr@istest#1=#2\@nil{% \ifx\relax#2\relax\@scr@tempswafalse\else\@scr@tempswatrue\fi @@ -932,7 +968,10 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro}^^A \scr@istest % \end{macro}^^A \if@scr@tempswa +% \end{macro}^^A \@currentlabelname +% \end{macro}^^A \@currentheadentry % \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@head +% \end{macro}^^A \@currenttocentry % \end{macro}^^A \scr@ds@tocentry % \begin{macro}{\sectionlinesformat} % \changes{v3.19}{2015/07/17}{neue Anweisung}^^A @@ -2572,6 +2611,7 @@ % \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{\cs{newcommand*} durch \cs{gdef} ersetzt}^^A % \changes{v2.95}{2006/07/04}{Ausführung von \cs{appendixmore}^^A % vereinfacht}^^A +% \changes{v3.20}{2016/12/05}{neue eindeutige Warnung} % \begin{macro}{\appendixmore} % \cs{appendixmore} kann als \emph{hook} verwendet werden. Derzeit wird dieser % allerdings noch recht stiefmütterlich behandelt und lediglich von Option @@ -2579,7 +2619,26 @@ % \begin{macrocode} %<*class> %<*body> -\newcommand*\appendix{\par% +\newcommand*\appendix{% + \ifstr{\@currenvir}{appendix}{% + \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName}{% + You are using + `\string\begin{appendix}...\string\end{appendix}'.\MessageBreak + You should note, that `\string\appendix' is a mostly + globally\MessageBreak + working command not an enviroment with only local\MessageBreak + effects. Therefore `\string\end{appendix}' will neither\MessageBreak + switch back to normal section numbering nor finish\MessageBreak + every other effect of `\string\begin{appendix}'.\MessageBreak + Nevertheless, some effects may end with\MessageBreak + `\string\end{appendix}' and the document may become\MessageBreak + inconsistent.\MessageBreak + Because of this, you should remove `\string\end{appendix}'\MessageBreak + and replace `\string\begin{appendix}' by command\MessageBreak + `\string\appendix'% + }% + }{}% + \par% %<*article> \setcounter{section}{0}% \setcounter{subsection}{0}% @@ -2798,16 +2857,16 @@ \scr@istest#2=\@nil \fi \if@scr@tempswa - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},#2}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}% \else \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2},reference={#3}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3},reference={#2}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}% \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} @@ -2824,12 +2883,12 @@ \@maybeautodot\thepart% \expandafter\@maybeautodot\csname the#1\endcsname \typeout{#1 \csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{% \addtocentrydefault{#1}% }{% \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}% - }{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + }{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\@currenttocentry}% \fi }{% % \end{macrocode} @@ -2846,7 +2905,7 @@ \endgroup \fi \typeout{#1 without number}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else % \end{macrocode} % An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte % Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden. @@ -2858,7 +2917,7 @@ \addtocentrydefault{#1}% }{% \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}% - }{}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + }{}{\@currenttocentry}% \fi }% % \end{macrocode} @@ -2897,7 +2956,7 @@ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1mark\endcsname\@gobble \@mkboth{}{}% \else - \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\scr@ds@head}% + \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}% \fi \par \endgroup @@ -3544,16 +3603,16 @@ \scr@istest#2=\@nil \fi \if@scr@tempswa - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},#2}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#3},reference={#3},#2}% \else \ifcase \scr@osectarg\relax - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#3},head={#2},reference={#3}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#3},reference={#2}}% \or - \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2}}% + \setkeys{KOMAarg.section}{tocentry={#2},head={#2},reference={#2}}% \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} @@ -3575,12 +3634,12 @@ \refstepcounter{#1}% \expandafter\@maybeautodot\csname the#1\endcsname \typeout{#1 \csname the#1\endcsname.}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{add#1tocentry}{% \addtocentrydefault{#1}% }{% \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}% - }{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + }{\csname the#1\endcsname}{\@currenttocentry}% \fi % \end{macrocode} % Für alle nicht nummerieten Überschriften dieser Ebene trotzdem die @@ -3595,7 +3654,7 @@ \endgroup \fi \typeout{#1 without number}% - \ifx\scr@ds@tocentry\@empty\else + \ifx\@currenttocentry\@empty\else % \end{macrocode} % An dieser Stelle muss ggf. der \textsf{hyperref}-Hook für nicht nummerierte % Inhaltsverzeichniseinträge ausgeführt werden. @@ -3605,13 +3664,13 @@ \addtocentrydefault{#1}% }{% \@nameuse{add#1tocentry}% - }{}{\scr@ds@tocentry}% + }{}{\@currenttocentry}% \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} % Jetzt kommt der Kolumnentitel an die Reihe. % \begin{macrocode} - \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\scr@ds@head}% + \csname #1mark\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\@currentheadentry}% % \end{macrocode} % Und die Abstände in die andere Verzeichnisse. % \changes{v2.8g}{2001/07/18}{per \cs{float@addtolists} wird nun @@ -3786,9 +3845,13 @@ \newcommand*{\scr@@makechapterhead}[2]{% % \end{macrocode} % Der Absolutwert des Abstandes davor wird eingefügt. +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} wird bei positivem +% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax - \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi + \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\else + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\@afterindenttrue\fi + \fi \chapterheadstartvskip % \end{macrocode} % Dann die eigentliche Überschrift innerhalb einer Gruppe. @@ -3877,10 +3940,14 @@ % angepasst}^^A % \changes{v3.20}{2015/12/23}{\cs{parfillskip} auf \texttt{\cs{z@} plus % 1fil} gesetzt}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/21}{\cs{@afterindentrue} wird bei positivem +% \texttt{beforeskip} gesetzt}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand*{\scr@@makeschapterhead}[2]{% \@tempskipa=\glueexpr \csname scr@#1@beforeskip\endcsname\relax\relax - \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\fi + \ifdim\@tempskipa<\z@\@tempskipa-\@tempskipa\else + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@v@is@ge{3.22}\@afterindenttrue\fi + \fi \chapterheadstartvskip {% \setlength{\parindent}{\z@}\setlength{\parfillskip}{\z@ plus 1fil}% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx index 270a801e8c8..0f858dfcf71 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{1338} +% \CheckSum{1340} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx 2475 2016-06-09 07:51:01Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-tocstyle.dtx 2559 2016-12-02 08:03:11Z kohm $ % The runs of run-time file generation: %<preidentify>%%% (run: preidentify) % - everything that is needed before selfidentification of resulting files @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-06-09 09:51:01 +0200 (Thu, 09 Jun 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-12-02 09:03:11 +0100 (Fri, 02 Dec 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 2254 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -1743,9 +1743,16 @@ % \end{macrocode} % Die Zuweisung an die aktuelle Länge der Nummer muss global erfolgen, weil % wir hier in einer Gruppe sind. +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \global\scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth \dimexpr\wd\scr@dte@tocline@numbox+\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numsep}\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/02}{fehlendes zweites \cs{relax} ergänzt}^^A +% Achtung: Hier braucht es ein zweites \cs{relax}, weil das erste von +% \cs{dimexpr} aufgezehrt wird. +% \begin{macrocode} + \relax \ifdim \scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth >\@nameuse{scr@dte@#1@maxnumwidth}\relax \global\@nameuse{scr@dte@#1@maxnumwidth}\scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth @@ -1753,7 +1760,7 @@ \@nameuse{Ifscr@tso@#1@dynnumwidth}{}{% \ifdim \scr@dte@tocline@numberwidth >\dimexpr \@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numwidth}% - +\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numsep}\relax + +\@nameuse{scr@tso@#1@numsep}\relax\relax %<class> \ClassWarning{\KOMAClassName %<package> \PackageWarning{tocbasic% }{% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-typearea.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-typearea.dtx index bfcd834e9fc..0de547f88f1 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-typearea.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-typearea.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{2654} +% \CheckSum{2748} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrkernel-typearea.dtx @@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-typearea.dtx 2464 2016-05-27 17:14:11Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-typearea.dtx 2494 2016-08-04 07:23:47Z kohm $ %<package&identify>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01] %<*driver> \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-05-27 19:14:11 +0200 (Fri, 27 May 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-08-04 09:23:47 +0200 (Thu, 04 Aug 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1872 $ \edef\reserved@a{% @@ -244,9 +244,15 @@ % Der zweite Parameter sollte dann die Größe enthalten. Ist dies % nicht der Fall, wird ein Fehler gemeldet (Fehlerzeile ist dann % \cs{ProcessOptions}). +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}^^A % \begin{macrocode} %<class> \PassOptionsToPackage{BCOR#2}{typearea}% -%<package> \ifdimen{#2}{\setlength{\ta@bcor}{#2}}{\scr@pti@nerr@r}% +%<*package> + \ifdimen{#2}{% + \KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{typearea}}{BCOR#2}{BCOR=#2}% + }{\scr@pti@nerr@r}% +%</package> % \end{macrocode} % In allen anderen Fällen ist es nicht diese Option, dann wird ein % Fehler ausgegeben. Stattdessen könnte hier auch auf weitere Optionen @@ -263,6 +269,7 @@ % \begin{macro}{\@@DIV} % \changes{v2.5}{1997/06/17}{Einzelzeichenscanner durch % Mustererkennung ersetzt}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{missing deprecated option warning added}^^A % Die grundsätzliche Funktion ist die gleiche wie bei \cs{@BCOR}, % \cs{@@BCOR}. % \begin{macrocode} @@ -272,7 +279,12 @@ \edef\@tempa{#1}\ifx\@tempa\@empty \edef\@tempa{#3}\def\@tempb{DIV}\ifx\@tempa\@tempb %<class> \PassOptionsToPackage{DIV#2}{typearea}% -%<package> \ifnumber{#2}{\ta@div=#2\relax}{\scr@pti@nerr@r}% +%<*package> + \ifnumber{#2}{% + \KOMA@UseDeprecatedOption{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{typearea}}{DIV#2}{DIV=#2}% + }{\scr@pti@nerr@r}% +%</package> \else\scr@pti@nerr@r\fi % \end{macrocode} % Der Unterschied liegt darin, dass bei einem Fehlschlag der @@ -406,7 +418,7 @@ \advance\@tempcnta by\m@ne } % \end{macrocode} -% Zum Schluß muss nun die genannte Multiplitkation erfolgen. Da +% Zum Schluß muss nun die genannte Multiplikation erfolgen. Da % "`mm"' kein ganzzahliges Vielfaches von "`sp"' ist, beinhaltet diese % Multiplikation eigentlich einen Fehler und eine Abweichung von der % Norm. Da jedoch "`sp"' die Rechengenauigkeit von {\TeX} darstellt, @@ -417,16 +429,41 @@ \multiply\paperheight by186468 % \end{macrocode} % Jetzt noch die gewünschte Ausrichtung beachten. -% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/10/23}{gewünschte Papierausrichtung wird beachtet}^^A +% \changes{v2.97e}{2007/10/23}{gewünschte Papierausrichtung wird +% beachtet}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Papierausrichtung entsprechend dem +% tatsächlichen Format}^^A % \begin{macrocode} - \if@landscape - \setlength{\@tempdima}{\paperwidth}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}% + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax + \scr@setpaperorientation + \else + \if@landscape\scr@switchpapersizes\fi \fi } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\scr@setpaperorientation} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)} +% Stellt die Papierausrichtung entsprechend \cs{if@landscape} ein. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*\scr@setpaperorientation{% + \ifdim\paperheight>\paperwidth + \if@landscape\scr@switchpapersizes\fi + \else + \if@landscape\else\scr@switchpapersizes\fi + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\scr@switchpapersizes} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{neu (intern)} +% Vertauscht zwei Längen. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*\scr@switchpapersizes{% + \@tempdima\paperwidth\paperwidth\paperheight\paperheight\@tempdima +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}^^A \scr@switchlength +% \end{macro}^^A \scr@setpaperorientation % \begin{macro}{\iso@paper} % \changes{v2.95}{2002/12/03}{neu (intern)}^^A % Ein ganz ähnlicher interner Befehl erhält den gesamten Namen des @@ -1251,6 +1288,23 @@ \expandafter\let\csname if@tempswa\expandafter\endcsname \csname if@dvips\endcsname }{}% + }{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/04}{\textsf{preview}-Notlösung}^^A +% Wenn Paket \textsf{preview} mit Option \texttt{tightpage} geladen wurde, was +% an dem Vorhandensein von \cs{pr@nextbb} erkannt werden kann, und das Paket +% überhaupt aktiv ist, dann verzichten wir hier auf das DVI-special, weil es +% dann bei Verwendung von Xe\LaTeX{} ggf. stört. +% \begin{macrocode} + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pr@nextbb}{}{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname ifPreview\expandafter\endcsname + \csname iftrue\endcsname + \PackageInfo{typearea}{% + package `preview' with option `tightpage' detected.\MessageBreak + initial page size special deactivated% + }% + \@tempswafalse + \fi }% \if@tempswa \endgroup @@ -1417,7 +1471,9 @@ % \changes{v3.01b}{2008/12/09}{Höhe und Breite vertauscht}^^A % \changes{v3.02c}{2009/02/12}{neuer Wert \texttt{seascape}} % \changes{v3.12}{2013/03/05}{Verwendung der Status-Signalisierung mit -% \cs{FamilyKeyState}} +% \cs{FamilyKeyState}}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/07/29}{Papierausrichtung entsprechend dem +% tatsächlichen Format}^^A % Im Normalfall wird die Papiergröße jedoch über diese Option % gesetzt. Dabei sind neben den Standard- und den ISO-Reihen A, B, C % und D auch Wertepaare der Form @@ -1427,32 +1483,44 @@ \KOMA@key{paper}{% \ifstr{#1}{seascape}{% \@seascapetrue - \if@landscape\else - \setlength{\@tempdima}{\paperwidth}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}% + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax \@landscapetrue + \scr@setpaperorientation + \else + \if@landscape\else\scr@switchpapersizes\@landscapetrue\fi \fi \FamilyKeyStateProcessed + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{landscape}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{portrait}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{seascape}% + \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{seascape}% }{% \ifstr{#1}{landscape}{% \@seascapefalse - \if@landscape\else - \setlength{\@tempdima}{\paperwidth}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}% + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax \@landscapetrue + \scr@setpaperorientation + \else + \if@landscape\else\scr@switchpapersizes\@landscapetrue\fi \fi \FamilyKeyStateProcessed + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{landscape}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{portrait}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{seascape}% + \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{landscape}% }{% \ifstr{#1}{portrait}{% - \if@landscape - \setlength{\@tempdima}{\paperwidth}% - \setlength{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}% - \setlength{\paperheight}{\@tempdima}% + \expandafter\ifnum\scr@ta@v@is@ge{3.22}\relax \@landscapefalse + \scr@setpaperorientation + \else + \if@landscape\scr@switchpapersizes\@landscapefalse\fi \fi \FamilyKeyStateProcessed + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{landscape}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{portrait}% + \KOMA@kav@remove{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{seascape}% + \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{portrait}% }{% \ifstr{#1}{letter}{% \if@landscape @@ -1465,6 +1533,10 @@ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{letter}% + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \if@seascape seascape\else + \if@landscape landscape\else portrait\fi\fi + }% }{% \ifstr{#1}{legal}{% \if@landscape @@ -1477,6 +1549,10 @@ \FamilyKeyStateProcessed \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{legal}% + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \if@seascape seascape\else + \if@landscape landscape\else portrait\fi\fi + }% }{% \ifstr{#1}{executive}{% \if@landscape @@ -1485,19 +1561,29 @@ \else \setlength\paperheight{10.5in}% \setlength\paperwidth {7.25in}% - \fi - \FamilyKeyStateProcessed - \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% - \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{executive}% + \fi + \FamilyKeyStateProcessed + \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% + \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{executive}% + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \if@seascape seascape\else + \if@landscape landscape\else portrait\fi\fi + }% }{% \iso@paper{#1}% \if@tempswa \FamilyKeyStateProcessed \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{#1}% + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \if@seascape seascape\else + \if@landscape landscape\else portrait\fi\fi + }% \else \expandafter\maybe@pair#1::\@nil \if@tempswa + \FamilyKeyStateProcessed + \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% \expandafter\ifnum \scr@ta@v@is@lt{3.01b}\relax \PackageWarningNoLine{typearea}{% You may have to exchange height and width!\MessageBreak @@ -1506,20 +1592,28 @@ instead of `paper=width:height'.\MessageBreak I've switched back to that old interpretation\MessageBreak because of the given compatiblity settings}% - \setlength\paperheight{\@tempa}% \setlength\paperwidth{\@tempb}% + \setlength\paperheight{\@tempa}% \else \setlength\paperwidth{\@tempa}% \setlength\paperheight{\@tempb}% \fi - \FamilyKeyStateProcessed - \KOMA@kav@removekey{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}% - \if@landscape - \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{\@tempa:\@tempb}% + \expandafter\ifnum \scr@ta@v@is@lt{3.22}\relax + \if@landscape + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{\@tempa:\@tempb}% + \else + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{\@tempb:\@tempa}% + \fi \else - \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{\@tempb:\@tempa}% + \scr@setpaperorientation + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \the\paperwidth:\the\paperheight}% \fi - \else + \KOMA@kav@xadd{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{% + \if@seascape seascape\else + \if@landscape landscape\else portrait\fi\fi + }% + \else \KOMA@unknown@keyval{paper}{#1}{% `letter', `legal', `executive', `a'<nr>, `b'<nr>, `c'<nr>, `d'<nr>,\MessageBreak @@ -1530,17 +1624,6 @@ }% }% }% - \ifx\FamilyKeyState\FamilyKeyStateProcessed - \if@landscape - \if@seascape - \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{seascape}% - \else - \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{landscape}% - \fi - \else - \KOMA@kav@add{.typearea.\scr@pkgextension}{paper}{portrait}% - \fi - \fi }% }% }% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-version.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-version.dtx index 785a096b19f..d0733822e21 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-version.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrkernel-version.dtx @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-version.dtx 2461 2016-05-19 07:17:15Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: scrkernel-version.dtx 2491 2016-07-29 08:03:57Z kohm $ % \fi % % \iffalse @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ \fi %</ignorethis> \fi - \@CheckKOMAScriptVersion{2016/06/14 v3.21 KOMA-Script}% + \@CheckKOMAScriptVersion{2017/01/03 v3.22 KOMA-Script}% \endgroup % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx index fb2ab3e0836..2f6d155274b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx @@ -57,17 +57,17 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse^^A meta-comment -%<identify>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2398 2016-03-25 10:22:23Z kohm $ (identify) -%<init>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2398 2016-03-25 10:22:23Z kohm $ (init) -%<options>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2398 2016-03-25 10:22:23Z kohm $ (options) -%<body>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2398 2016-03-25 10:22:23Z kohm $ (body) +%<identify>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2483 2016-06-28 07:36:58Z kohm $ (identify) +%<init>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2483 2016-06-28 07:36:58Z kohm $ (init) +%<options>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2483 2016-06-28 07:36:58Z kohm $ (options) +%<body>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx 2483 2016-06-28 07:36:58Z kohm $ (body) %<*dtx> \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-03-25 11:22:23 +0100 (Fri, 25 Mar 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-06-28 09:36:58 +0200 (Tue, 28 Jun 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{v0.1.#2}} - \filerevision$Revision: 2398 $ + \filerevision$Revision: 2483 $ \endgroup \ProvidesFile{scrlayer-notecolumn.dtx}[\filedate\space\filerevision\space %</dtx> @@ -225,6 +225,7 @@ % Here we test the used pdf\TeX{} primitives. % \changes{v0.1}{2015/10/07}{ready for renaming \cs{pdfsavepos} and % \cs{pdflastypos} in luaTeX}^^A +% \changes{v0.1.2483}{2016/06/28}{grouping fixed}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \@tempswatrue \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdfsavepos}{% @@ -235,16 +236,16 @@ }% }{% \let\scr@savepos\pdfsavepos - \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdflastypos}{% - \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{lastypos}{% - \expandafter\@tempswafalse - }{% - \let\scr@lastypos\lastypos - }% +} +\scr@ifundefinedorrelax{pdflastypos}{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{lastypos}{% + \expandafter\@tempswafalse }{% - \let\scr@lastypos\pdflastypos + \let\scr@lastypos\lastypos }% -} +}{% + \let\scr@lastypos\pdflastypos +}% \if@tempswa\else \PackageError{scrlayer-notecolumn}{missing pdfTeX/luaTeX features}{% This package needs \string\pdfsavepos\space or \string\savepos\space diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer.dtx index d91b561ac72..a86027ff43d 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/scrlayer.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{3896} +% \CheckSum{3902} % \iffalse^^A meta-comment % ====================================================================== % scrlayer.dtx @@ -57,18 +57,18 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse^^A meta-comment -%<identify>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2429 2016-04-12 12:10:19Z kohm $ (identify) -%<init>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2429 2016-04-12 12:10:19Z kohm $ (init) -%<options>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2429 2016-04-12 12:10:19Z kohm $ (options) -%<body>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2429 2016-04-12 12:10:19Z kohm $ (body) -%<final>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2429 2016-04-12 12:10:19Z kohm $ (final) +%<identify>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2562 2016-12-07 09:15:31Z kohm $ (identify) +%<init>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2562 2016-12-07 09:15:31Z kohm $ (init) +%<options>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2562 2016-12-07 09:15:31Z kohm $ (options) +%<body>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2562 2016-12-07 09:15:31Z kohm $ (body) +%<final>%%% From File: $Id: scrlayer.dtx 2562 2016-12-07 09:15:31Z kohm $ (final) %<*dtx> \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-04-12 14:10:19 +0200 (Tue, 12 Apr 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-12-07 10:15:31 +0100 (Wed, 07 Dec 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} - \filerevision$Revision: 2429 $ + \filerevision$Revision: 2562 $ \endgroup \ProvidesFile{scrlayer.dtx}[\filedate\space\filerevision\space %</dtx> @@ -676,18 +676,33 @@ % same they do at \Package{scrpage2}. The difference is, that single-side or % two-side doesn't matter here (but it does inside of the definitions of the % marks itself). +% % ToDo: Maybe \Option{manualmark} should become deprecated and % \Option{automark} should have simple values or a new option, that also % handles \Option{autooneside}? +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/12/07}{prepared for classes without \cs{section} or +% \cs{subsection}}^^A % \begin{macrocode} %<*options> \KOMA@key{automark}[]{% \scrlayer@testunexpectedarg{automark}{#1}% \scrlayer@AtEndOfPackage{% \if@chapter - \automark[section]{chapter}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{section}{% + \automark{chapter}% + }{% + \automark[section]{chapter}% + }% \else - \automark[subsection]{section}% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{section}{% + \automark{}% + }{% + \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{subsection}{% + \automark{section}% + }{% + \automark[subsection]{section}% + } + }% \fi }% \FamilyKeyStateProcessed @@ -1323,13 +1338,13 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \item[\Option{everypage}:] remove all odd-, even-, float-, and % nonfloat-restrictions. -% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everypage}} +% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{everypage}}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{foreground and background condition +% removed}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{everypage}[\relax]{% \FamilyKeyStateProcessed \scrlayer@testunexpectedarg{everypage}{#1}% - \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @backgroundtrue\endcsname - \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @foregroundtrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @oddtrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @eventrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @nonfloatpagetrue\endcsname @@ -1367,14 +1382,19 @@ } % \end{macrocode} % \item[\Option{unrestricted}:] remove all restrictions -% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{unrestricted}} +% \changes{v3.18}{2015/05/14}{new layer feature \texttt{unrestricted}}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{missing background and foreground +% condition}^^A +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/24}{nonfloatpage condition fixed}^^A % \begin{macrocode} \DefineFamilyKey[.definelayer]{KOMAarg}{unrestricted}[\relax]{% \FamilyKeyStateProcessed \scrlayer@testunexpectedarg{unrestricted}{#1}% \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @oddtrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @eventrue\endcsname - \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @nonfloatpagefalse\endcsname + \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @backgroundtrue\endcsname + \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @foregroundtrue\endcsname + \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @nonfloatpagetrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @floatpagetrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @twosidetrue\endcsname \csname @scr@l@\scr@current@layer @onesidetrue\endcsname diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.dtx index 572059fd698..e3d6d3a6fbd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/koma-script/tocbasic.dtx @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -% \CheckSum{1512} +% \CheckSum{1535} % \iffalse meta-comment % ====================================================================== % tocbasic.dtx @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ % Right brace \} Tilde \~} % % \iffalse -%%% From File: $Id: tocbasic.dtx 2477 2016-06-12 09:52:43Z kohm $ +%%% From File: $Id: tocbasic.dtx 2499 2016-09-06 07:00:45Z kohm $ %<identify>%%% (run: identify) %<prepare>%%% (run: prepare) %<option>%%% (run: option) @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ \ifx\ProvidesFile\undefined\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2]{}\fi \begingroup \def\filedate$#1: #2-#3-#4 #5${\gdef\filedate{#2/#3/#4}} - \filedate$Date: 2016-06-12 11:52:43 +0200 (Sun, 12 Jun 2016) $ + \filedate$Date: 2016-09-06 09:00:45 +0200 (Tue, 06 Sep 2016) $ \def\filerevision$#1: #2 ${\gdef\filerevision{r#2}} \filerevision$Revision: 1962 $ \endgroup @@ -325,6 +325,21 @@ % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\owneroftoc} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/08/09}{new} +% Returns the owner of a TOC or uses the owner of a TOC as argument of the +% optional argument, if it exists. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand*{\owneroftoc}[2][\@firstofone]{% + \begingroup + \let\reserved@a\endgroup + \def\do##1##2{\ifstr{#2}{##1}{\def\reserved@a{\endgroup#1{##2}}}{}}% + \tb@listoftocs + \reserved@a +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% % \begin{macro}{\AtAddToTocList} % \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by % \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A @@ -395,6 +410,10 @@ % \begin{macro}{\removefromtoclist} % \changes{v3.20}{2016/04/12}{\cs{@ifnextchar} replaced by % \cs{kernel@ifnextchar}}^^A +% \begin{macro}{\@removefromtoclist} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}^^A +% \begin{macro}{\@@removefromtoclist} +% \changes{v3.22}{2016/09/06}{missing \cs{global} added}^^A % This command will remove an extension from the list of toc-files. If the % first, optional argument is given, the extension will only be removed, if % it was added by the given owner. NOTE: An empty first argument is not the @@ -411,9 +430,10 @@ \edef\reserved@a{##1}% \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \begingroup - \edef\reserved@a{##2}% + \edef\@currext{##2}% \edef\reserved@b{#1}% - \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\else + \ifx\@currext\reserved@b + \else \g@addto@macro\tb@listoftocs{\do{##1}{##2}}% \fi \endgroup @@ -421,7 +441,7 @@ \g@addto@macro\tb@listoftocs{\do{##1}{##2}}% \fi }% - \edef\reserved@b{#2}\let\tb@listoftocs\@empty + \edef\reserved@b{#2}\global\let\tb@listoftocs\@empty \tb@oldlist \endgroup } @@ -430,16 +450,19 @@ \let\tb@oldlist\tb@listoftocs \def\do##1##2{% \edef\reserved@a{##1}% - \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\else + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b + \else \g@addto@macro\tb@listoftocs{\do{##1}{##2}}% \fi }% - \edef\reserved@b{#1}\let\tb@listoftocs\@empty + \edef\reserved@b{#1}\global\let\tb@listoftocs\@empty \tb@oldlist \endgroup } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\doforeachtocfile} % \changes{v3.09}{2011/03/01}{\cs{@currext} defined using \cs{edef} instead @@ -1519,6 +1542,11 @@ \expandafter\let\csname ext@\tb@nt@type\endcsname\tb@nt@ext \addtotoclist[\tb@nt@owner]{\csname ext@\tb@nt@type\endcsname}% % \end{macrocode} +% And we save the type of the extension at \cs{tb@nt@type@\meta{extension}} +% for later usage. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\let\csname tb@nt@type@\tb@nt@ext\endcsname\tb@nt@type +% \end{macrocode} % Then we need the TOC itself with a name: % \begin{macrocode} \scr@ifundefinedorrelax{tb@nt@types}{% |